To our customers,
Old Company Name in Catalogs and Other Documents
On April 1st, 2010, NEC Electronics Corporation merged with Renesas Technology
Corporation, and Renesas Electronics Corporation took over all the business of both
companies. Therefore, although the old company name remains in this document, it is a valid
Renesas Electronics document. We appreciate your understanding.
Renesas Electronics website: http://www.renesas.com
April 1st, 2010
Renesas Electronics Corporation
Issued by: Renesas Electronics Corporation (http://www.renesas.com)
Send any inquiries to http://www.renesas.com/inquiry.
Notice
1. All information included in this document is current as of the date this document is issued. Such information, however, is
subject to change without any prior notice. Before purchasing or using any Renesas Electronics products listed herein, please
confirm the latest product information with a Renesas Electronics sales office. Also, please pay regular and careful attention to
additional and different information to be disclose d by Renesa s Electronics such as that disclosed through our website.
2. Renesas Electronics does not assum e any liability for inf ringement of patents, co pyrights, or other int ellectual property rights
of third parties by or arising from the use of Renesas Elec tronics products or technical information described in this document.
No license, express, implied or otherwise, is granted hereby under any patents, copyrights or other intellectual property rights
of Renesas Electronics or others.
3. You should not alter, m odify, copy, or otherw ise misappropriate an y Renesas Electronics product, whether in whole or in part.
4. Descriptions of circuits, software and other related information in this document are provided only to illustrate the operation of
semiconductor products and application examples. You are fully responsible for the incorporation of these circuits, software,
and information in the design of your equipment. Renesas Electronics assumes no responsi bility for any losse s incurred by
you or third parties arising from the use of these circuits, software, or information.
5. When exporting the products or technol ogy described in this document, you should comply with the applicable export control
laws and regulations and follow the procedures required by such law s and regulations. You should not use Renesas
Electronics products or the technology described in this docum ent for any purpose rela ting to military applications or use by
the military, including but not limited to the developm ent of weapons of ma ss destruction. Renesas Electronics products and
technology may not be used for or incor porated into any products or system s whose manufac ture, use, or sale is prohibited
under any applicable domestic or foreign laws or regulations.
6. Renesas Electronics has used reasonable care in prepa ring the information included in this document, but Renesas Electronics
does not warrant that such information is error free. Renesas Electronics assumes no liability whatsoever for any damages
incurred by you resulting from errors in or omissions from the information included herein.
7. Renesas Electronics products are classified according to the following three quality grades: “Standard”, “High Quality”, and
“Specific”. The recom mended applicatio ns for each Renesas Electronics prod uct depends on the produc t’s quality grade, as
indicated below. You must check the quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product before using it in a particular
application. You may not use any Renesas Elec tronics product for any application cate gorized as “Spec ific” without the prior
written consent of Renesas Electronics. Further, you may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any applic ation for
which it is not intended without the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics. Renesas Electronics shall not be in any way
liable for any damages or losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of any Renesas Electronics product for an
application categorized as “Specific” or for which the product is not intende d where you have failed to obtain the prior written
consent of Renesas Electronics. The quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product is “Standard” unless otherwise
expressly specified in a Renesas Electronics data sheets or data books, etc.
“Standard”: Computers; office equipment; communications equipment; test and measurement equipment; audio and visual
equipment; home electronic appli ances; mac hine tools; personal electronic equipm ent; and industrial robots.
“High Quality”: Transportation equipment (automobiles, trains, ships, etc.); traffic control systems; anti-disaster systems; anti-
crime systems; safety equipment; and medical equipment not specifically designed for life support.
“Specific”: Aircraft; aerospace equipment; submersible repeaters; nuclear reactor control systems; medical equipment or
systems for life support (e.g. artificial life support devices or systems), surgical implantations, or healthcare
intervention (e.g. excision, etc.), and any other applications or purposes that pose a direct threat to human life.
8. You should use the Renesas Electronics products described in this document within the range specified by Renesas Electronics,
especially with respect to the m aximum rating , opera ting supply voltag e range, movement power voltage ra nge, heat radiation
characteristics, installation and other product characteristic s. Re nesas Electronics shall have no liabil ity for malfunctions or
damages arising out of the use of Re nesas Electronics products beyond such specified ranges.
9. Although Renesas Electronics endeavors to improve the quality and reliabili ty of its products, semiconductor products have
specific characteristics such as the occurrence of failure at a certain rate and malfunctions under certain use conditions. Further,
Renesas Electronics products are not subject to radiation res istance design. Pleas e be sure to implement saf ety measures to
guard them against the possibility of physical injury, and injury or damage caused by fire in the event of the failure of a
Renesas Electronics product, such as safety design for hardware and software including but not limited to redundancy, fire
control and malfunction prevention, appropriate treatment for aging degradation or any other appropriate measures. Because
the evaluation of microcomputer software alone is very difficult, please evaluate the safety of the final products or system
manufactured by you.
10. Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office for details as to environmental matters such as the environmental
compatibility of each Renesas Electronics product. Please use Renesas Electronics products in compliance with all applicable
laws and regulations that regulate the inclusion or use of controlled substa nces, including without lim itation, the EU R oHS
Directive. Renesas Electronics assum es no liability for damage s or losses occurring as a result of your noncom pliance with
applicable laws and regulatio ns.
11. This document may not be reproduced or duplicated, in any form, in whole or in part, without prior written consent of Renesas
Electronics.
12. Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office if you have any questions re garding the information conta ined in this
document or Renesas Electronics products, or if you have any other inquiries.
(Note 1) “Renesas Electronics” as used in this document means Renesas Electronics Corporation and also includes its majority-
owned subsidiaries.
(Note 2) “Re nesas Electronics produc t(s)” means any product develope d or manufactured by or for Re nesas Electronics.
H8S/2199R Group,
H8S/2199R F-ZTAT™
Hardware Manual
16
User’s Manual
Rev.2.00 2007.01
Renesas 16-Bit Single-Chip
Microcomputer
H8S Family/H8S/2100 Series
H8S/2199R HD6432199R
HD64F2199R
H8S/2198R HD6432198R
H8S/2197R HD6432197R
H8S/2197S HD6432197S
H8S/2196R HD6432196R
H8S/2196S HD6432196S
The revision list can be viewed directly by clicking the title page.
The revision list summarizes the locations of revisions and
additions. Details should always be checked by referring to the
relevant text.
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page ii of xliv
REJ09B0329-0200
1. This document is provided for reference purposes only so that Renesas customers may select the appropriate
Renesas products for their use. Renesas neither makes warranties or representations with respect to the
accuracy or completeness of the information contained in this document nor grants any license to any
intellectual property rights or any other rights of Renesas or any third party with respect to the information in
this document.
2. Renesas shall have no liability for damages or infringement of any intellectual property or other rights arising
out of the use of any information in this document, including, but not limited to, product data, diagrams, charts,
programs, algorithms, and application circuit examples.
3. You should not use the products or the technology described in this document for the purpose of military
applications such as the development of weapons of mass destruction or for the purpose of any other military
use. When exporting the products or technology described herein, you should follow the applicable export
control laws and regulations, and procedures required by such laws and regulations.
4. All information included in this document such as product data, diagrams, charts, programs, algorithms, and
application circuit examples, is current as of the date this document is issued. Such information, however, is
subject to change without any prior notice. Before purchasing or using any Renesas products listed in this
document, please confirm the latest product information with a Renesas sales office. Also, please pay regular
and careful attention to additional and different information to be disclosed by Renesas such as that disclosed
through our website. (http://www.renesas.com )
5. Renesas has used reasonable care in compiling the information included in this document, but Renesas
assumes no liability whatsoever for any damages incurred as a result of errors or omissions in the information
included in this document.
6. When using or otherwise relying on the information in this document, you should evaluate the information in
light of the total system before deciding about the applicability of such information to the intended application.
Renesas makes no representations, warranties or guaranties regarding the suitability of its products for any
particular application and specifically disclaims any liability arising out of the application and use of the
information in this document or Renesas products.
7. With the exception of products specified by Renesas as suitable for automobile applications, Renesas
products are not designed, manufactured or tested for applications or otherwise in systems the failure or
malfunction of which may cause a direct threat to human life or create a risk of human injury or which require
especially high quality and reliability such as safety systems, or equipment or systems for transportation and
traffic, healthcare, combustion control, aerospace and aeronautics, nuclear power, or undersea communication
transmission. If you are considering the use of our products for such purposes, please contact a Renesas
sales office beforehand. Renesas shall have no liability for damages arising out of the uses set forth above.
8. Notwithstanding the preceding paragraph, you should not use Renesas products for the purposes listed below:
(1) artificial life support devices or systems
(2) surgical implantations
(3) healthcare intervention (e.g., excision, administration of medication, etc.)
(4) any other purposes that pose a direct threat to human life
Renesas shall have no liability for damages arising out of the uses set forth in the above and purchasers who
elect to use Renesas products in any of the foregoing applications shall indemnify and hold harmless Renesas
Technology Corp., its affiliated companies and their officers, directors, and employees against any and all
damages arising out of such applications.
9. You should use the products described herein within the range specified by Renesas, especially with respect
to the maximum rating, operating supply voltage range, movement power voltage range, heat radiation
characteristics, installation and other product characteristics. Renesas shall have no liability for malfunctions or
damages arising out of the use of Renesas products beyond such specified ranges.
10. Although Renesas endeavors to improve the quality and reliability of its products, IC products have specific
characteristics such as the occurrence of failure at a certain rate and malfunctions under certain use
conditions. Please be sure to implement safety measures to guard against the possibility of physical injury, and
injury or damage caused by fire in the event of the failure of a Renesas product, such as safety design for
hardware and software including but not limited to redundancy, fire control and malfunction prevention,
appropriate treatment for aging degradation or any other applicable measures. Among others, since the
evaluation of microcomputer software alone is very difficult, please evaluate the safety of the final products or
system manufactured by you.
11. In case Renesas products listed in this document are detached from the products to which the Renesas
products are attached or affixed, the risk of accident such as swallowing by infants and small children is very
high. You should implement safety measures so that Renesas products may not be easily detached from your
products. Renesas shall have no liability for damages arising out of such detachment.
12. This document may not be reproduced or duplicated, in any form, in whole or in part, without prior written
approval from Renesas.
13. Please contact a Renesas sales office if you have any questions regarding the information contained in this
document, Renesas semiconductor products, or if you have any other inquiries.
Notes regarding these materials
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page iii of xliv
REJ09B0329-0200
General Precautions in the Handling of MPU/MCU Products
The following usage notes are applicable to all MPU/MCU products from Renesas. For detailed
usage notes on the products covered by this manual, refer to the relevant sections of the manual. If
the descriptions under General Precautions in the Handling of MPU/MCU Products and in the
body of the manual differ from each other, the description in the body of the manual takes
precedence.
1. Handling of Unused Pins
Handle unused pins in accord with the directions given under Handling of Unused Pins in the
manual.
⎯ The input pins of CMOS products are generally in the high-impedance state. In operation
with an unused pin in the open-circuit state, extra electromagnetic noise is induced in the
vicinity of LSI, an associated shoot-through current flows internally, and malfunctions may
occur due to the false recognition of the pin state as an input signal. Unused pins should
be handled as described under Handling of Unused Pins in the manual.
2. Processing at Power-on
The state of the product is undefined at the moment when power is supplied.
⎯ The states of internal circuits in the LSI are indeterminate and the states of register
settings and pins are undefined at the moment when power is supplied.
In a finished product where the reset signal is applied to the external reset pin, the states
of pins are not guaranteed from the moment when power is supplied until the reset
process is completed.
In a similar way, the states of pins in a product that is reset by an on-chip power-on reset
function are not guaranteed from the moment when power is supplied until the power
reaches the level at which resetting has been specified.
3. Prohibition of Access to Reserved Addresses
Access to reserved addresses is prohibited.
⎯ The reserved addresses are provided for the possible future expansion of functions. Do
not access these addresses; the correct operation of LSI is not guaranteed if they are
accessed.
4. Clock Signals
After applying a reset, only release the reset line after the operating clock signal has become
stable. When switching the clock signal during program execution, wait until the target clock
signal has stabilized.
⎯ When the clock signal is generated with an external resonator (or from an external
oscillator) during a reset, ensure that the reset line is only released after full stabilization of
the clock signal. Moreover, when switching to a clock signal produced with an external
resonator (or by an external oscillator) while program execution is in progress, wait until
the target clock signal is stable.
5. Differences between Products
Before changing from one product to another, i.e. to one with a different type number, confirm
that the change will not lead to problems.
⎯ The characteristics of MPU/MCU in the same group but having different type numbers
may differ because of the differences in internal memory capacity and layout pattern.
When changing to products of different type numbers, implement a system-evaluation test
for each of the products.
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page iv of xliv
REJ09B0329-0200
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page v of xliv
REJ09B0329-0200
Preface
This LSI is a single-chip microcomputer made up of the H8S/2000 CPU with an internal 32-bit
architecture as its core, and the peripheral functions required to configure a system.
This LSI is equipped with ROM, RAM, digital servo circuits, a sync separator, an OSD, a data
slicer, seven types of timers, three types of PWMs, two types of serial communication interfaces
(SCIs), an I2C bus interface (IIC), a D/A converter, an A/D converter, and I/O ports as on-chip
supporting modules. This LSI is suitable for use as an embedded processor for high-level control
systems. Its on-chip ROM is flash memory (F-ZTATTM*) that provides flexibility as it can be
reprogrammed in no time to cope with all situations from the early stages of mass production to
full-scale mass production. This is particularly applicable to application devices with
specifications that will most probably change.
Note: * F-ZTAT is a trademark of Renesas Technology Corp.
Target Users: This manual was written for users who will be using the H8S/2199R Group and
H8S/2199R F-ZTATTM in the design of application systems. Members of this
audience are expected to understand the fundamentals of electrical circuits, logical
circuits, and microcomputers.
Objective: This manual was written to explain the hardware functions and electrical
characteristics of the H8S/2199R Group and H8S/2199R F-ZTATTM to the above
audience. Refer to the H8S/2600 Series, H8S/2000 Series Software Manual for
a detailed description of the instruction set.
Notes on reading this manual:
• In order to understand the overall functions of the chip
Read the manual according to the contents. This manual can be roughly categorized into parts
on the CPU, system control functions, peripheral functions and electrical characteristics.
• In order to understand the details of the CPU’s functions
Read the H8S/2600 Series, H8S/2000 Series Software Manual.
• In order to understand the details of a register when its name is known
The addresses, bits, and initial values of the registers are summarized in appendix B, Internal
I/O Registers.
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page vi of xliv
REJ09B0329-0200
Examples: Register name: The following notation is used for cases when the same or a
similar function, e.g. 16-bit timer pulse unit or serial
communication, is implemented on more than one channel:
XXX_N (XXX is the register name and N is the channel
number)
Bit order: The MSB is on the left and the LSB is on the right.
Number notation: Binary is B'xxxx, hexadecimal is H'xxxx, decimal is xxxx
Signal notation: An overbar is added to a low-active signal: xxxx
Related Manuals: The latest versions of all related manuals are available from our web site.
Please ensure you have the latest versions of all documents you require.
http://www.renesas.com/
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page vii of xliv
REJ09B0329-0200
H8S/2199R Gruop and H8S/2199R F-ZTATTM manuals:
Document Title Document No.
H8S/2199R Gruop, H8S/2199R F-ZTATTM Hardware Manual This manual
H8S/2600 Series, H8S/2000 Series Software Manual REJ09B0139
User’s manuals for development tools:
Document Title Document No.
H8S, H8S/300 Series C/C++ Compiler, Assembler, Optimizing Linkage
Editor User’s Manual
REJ10B0058
H8S, H8S/300 Series Simulator/Debugger User’s Manual ADE-702-037
High-performance Embedded Workshop User’s Manual ADE-702-201
Application Notes:
Document Title Document No.
H8S Series Technical Q&A Application Note REJ05B0397
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page viii of xliv
REJ09B0329-0200
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page ix of xliv
REJ09B0329-0200
Main Revisions in This Edition
Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details)
All ⎯ • Notification of change in company name amended
(Before) Hitachi, Ltd. → (After) Renesas Technology Corp.
• Product naming convention amended
(Before) H8S/2199R Series → (After) H8S/2199R Group
⎯ Package code amended
(Before) FP-112 → (After) PRQP0112JA-A
2.1.3 Difference from
H8S/300 CPU
21 Expanded address space
Note * added
Normal mode* supports the same 64-kbytee address space ...
Note: * Normal mode is not available in this LSI.
2.2 CPU Operating
Modes
22 Note * added
H8S/2000 CPU has two operating modes: Normal* and
advanced. Normal mode* supports a maximum 64-Mbyte
address space.
Note: * Normal mode is not available in this LSI.
2.3 Address Space 27 Note * added
... 64-kbyte address space in normal mode*, and maximum ...
Note: * Normal mode is not available in this LSI.
2.6.1 Overview
Table 2.1 Instruction
Classification
36 Table 2.1 amended
Bit manipulation (Before) RSET → (After) BSET
2.6.3 Table of
Instructions Classified
by Function
Table 2.4 Arithmetic
Instruction
41 Size description amended
ADDS, SUBS (Before) B → (After) L
DAA, DAS (Before) B/W → (After) B
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page x of xliv
REJ09B0329-0200
Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details)
2.6.3 Table of
Instructions Classified
by Function
Table 2.10 Block Data
Transfer Instructions
48 Table 2.10 amended
Instruction Size*Function
EEPMOV.B — if
if
R4L ≠ 0 then
Repeat @ER5+ → @ER6+
R4L −1 → R4L
Until R4L = 0
else next;
EEPMOV.W — R4 ≠ 0 then
Repeat @ER5+ → ER6+
R4 −1 → R4
Until R4 = 0
else next;
Transfers a data block according to parameters set in general
registers R4L or R4, ER5, and ER6
R4L or R4: size of block (bytes)
2.7.1 Addressing Mode
Table 2.11 Addressing
Modes
51 Table 2.11 amended
Symbol of Absolute address amended
(Before) @aa:8/#@aa:16/@aa:24//@aa:32 → (After)
@aa:8/@aa:16/@aa:24//@aa:32
Table 2.12 Absolute
Address Access Ranges
53 Table 2.12 amended
Absolute Address Normal Mode Advanced Mode
8 bits
(@aa:8)
H'FF00 to H'FFFF H'FFFF00 to H'FFFFFF
16 bits
(@aa:16)
H'000000 to H'007FFF, H'FF8000 to
H'FFFFFF
Data address
H'0000 to H'FFFF
2.8.1 Overview
Figure 2.16 State
Transitions
59 Figure 2.16 amended
RES = High
SLEEP instruction with LSON = 0, SSBY = 1, TMA3 = 0
7.3.3 Erase Block
Register 1 (EBR1)
141 Bit figure amended
7
EB7
0
R/W
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
7.3.4 Erase Block
Register 2 (EBR2)
142 Bit figure amended
7
EB15
0
R/W
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
10.3.2 Register
Configuration
193 Port Mode Register 1 (PMR1)
Description amended
When the pin functions of P16/IC and P15/IRQ5 to P10/IRQ0
are switched by PMR1, ...
10.4.3 Pin Functions 200 P27/SYSCI bit table amended
(Before) PCR → (After) PCR27
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xi of xliv
REJ09B0329-0200
Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details)
10.5.3 Pin Functions 209 Description amended
P34/PWM2: P34/PWM2 is switched as shown below ...
10.6.1 Overview 211 Description amended
... It is switched by port mode register 4 (PMR4), timer output ...
10.8 Overview 226 Description amended
Port 7 consists of pins that are used both as standard I/O ports
(P77 to P70), HSW timing generation circuit ... outputs (PPG7
to PPG0), and realtime output port (RPB to RP8). ...
10.8.3 Pin Functions 231 Description amended
P73/PPG3 to P70/PPG0: P73/PPG3 to P70/PPG0 are switched
as shown below ...
10.9.2 Register
Configuration
235 Description amended
... When reset, PMR8 is initialized to H'00. ...
10.9.3 Pin Functions 241 Description amended
P84/H.Amp SW/G: ... according to the PMR84 bit in PMR8,
PMRC4 bit in PMRC, and PCR84 bit in PCR8.
13.2.5 Timer Counter K
(TCK)
267 Description amended
... The inputting clock can be selected by the EXN and PS22
bits of the TMJ, and the PS21 and PS20 bits of the TMJ. ...
15.2.1 Timer R Mode
Register 1 (TMRM1)
294 Description amended
Bit 0⎯Capture Signals of the TMRU-1 (CPS): In combination
with the LAT bit (Bit 7) of the TMRM2, this bit works ...
16.6 Exemplary Uses
of Timer X1
338 Description amended
2. Each time a comparing match occurs, the OLVLA bit and the
OLVLB bit are reserved by use of the software.
17.2.1 Watchdog Timer
Counter (WTCNT)
347 Description amended
WTCNT is an 8-bit readable/writable* up-counter. ...
18.2.2 8-bit PWM
Control Register
(PW8CR)
360 Description amended
... PW8CR is initialized to H'F0 by a reset.
18.2.3 Port Mode
Register 3 (PMR3)
361 Description amended
Bits 5 to 2⎯P35/PWM3 to P32/PWM0 Pin Switching (PMR35
to PMR32): These bits set whether the P3n/PWMm pin is used
as I/O pin or it is used as 8-bit PWM output PWMm pin.
20.2.2 PWM Data
Registers U and L
(PWDRU, PWDRL)
376 Description amended
PWM data registers U and L ...in one PWM waveform cycle. ...
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xii of xliv
REJ09B0329-0200
Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details)
22.2.4 Transmit Data
Register 1 (TDR1)
394 Description amended
... When the SCI detects that TSR1 is empty, ...
22.2.7 Serial Status
Register 1 (SSR1)
402 Bit 7 description amended
[Setting condition] 1. When the TE bit in SCR1 is 0
403 Bit 6 description amended
[Setting condition] When serial reception ... is transferred from
RSR1 to RDR1
405 Bit 1 description amended
Bit 1
MPB
0 [Clearing condition] (Initial value)
When data with a 0 multiprocessor bit is received
*
Description
22.2.8 Bit Rate
Register 1 (BRR1)
406 Description amended
BRR1 is an 8-bit register ... by bits CKS1 and CKS0 in SMR1.
...
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xiii of xliv
REJ09B0329-0200
Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details)
22.2.8 Bit Rate
Register 1 (BRR1)
Table 22.3 BRR1
Settings for Various Bit
Rates (Asynchronous
Mode)
407, 408 Table 22.3 amended
Operating Frequecy φ
(MHz)
2 2.4576 3
Bit Rate
(bits/s)
1200 0 51 0.16 0 54 −0.71 0 63 0.00 0 77 0.16
2400 0 25 0.16 0 26 1.12 0 31 0.00 0 38
0.16
4800 0 12 0.16 0 13 −2.54 0 15 0.00 0 19 −2.40
9600 — — —6 0 −2.54 0 7 0.00 0 9 −2.40
19200 — — — — — —0 3 0.00 0 4 −2.40
110 2 64 0.69 2 70 0.03 2 86 0.31 2 88 0.25
4800 0 23 0.00 0 25 0.16 0 31 0.00 0 32 −1.38
9600 0 11 0.00 0 12 0.16 0 15 0.00 0 15
1.70
19200 0 5 0.00 — — — 0 7 0.00 0 7 1.70
31250 — — — 0 3 0.00 0 4 −1.73 0 4 0.00
38400 0 2 0.00 — — — 0 3 0.00 0 3 1.70
Nn Error (%) Nn Error (%) Nn Error (%) Nn Error (%)
2.097152
Operating Frequecy φ
(MHz)
3.6864 4.9152 5
Bit Rate
(bits/s) Nn Error (%) Nn Error (%) Nn Error (%) Nn Error (%)
4
Operating Frequecy φ
(MHz)
6 7.3728 8
Bit Rate
(bits/s) Nn Error (%) Nn Error (%) Nn Error (%) Nn Error (%)
6.144
Operating Frequecy φ
(MHz)
9.8304
Bit Rate
(bits/s) Nn Error (%) Nn Error (%)
10
9600 0 19 −2.40 0 19 0.00 0 23 0.00 0 25 0.16
19200 0 9 −2.40 0 9 0.00 0 11 0.00 0 12 0.16
31250 0 5 0.00 0 5 2.34 — — — 0 7 0.00
38400 0 4 −2.40 0 4 0.00 0 5 0.00 — — —
9600 0 31 0.00 0 32 −1.38
19200 0 15 0.00 0 15 1.70
31250 0 9 −1.73 0 9
0.00
38400 0 7 0.00 0 7
1.70
22.2.9 Serial Interface
Mode Register 1
(SCMR1)
413 Bit 3 description amended
TDR1 contents are transmitted ...
22.3.2 Operation in
Asynchronous Mode
Figure 22.7 Sample
Serial Reception Data
Flowchart (1)
424 Figure 22.7 amended
[2] [3] Receive error handling and break detection: ... and FER
flags in SSR1 to identify the error. After performing the
appropriate error handling, ensure that the ORER, PER, and
FER flags are all cleared to 0. ...
[4] SCI status check and receive data read: Read SSR1 and
check that RDRF = 1, then ...
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xiv of xliv
REJ09B0329-0200
Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details)
22.3.3 Multiprocessor
Communication
Function
Figure 22.11 Sample
Multiprocessor Serial
Transmission Flowchart
429 Figure 22.11 amended
[2] SCI status check and transmit data write: Read SSR1 and
check that the TDRE flag is set to 1, then ...
Figure 22.13 Sample
Multiprocessor Serial
Reception Flowchart (1)
432 Figure 22.13 amended
[3] SCI status check, ID reception and comparison: Read
SSR1 and check that the RDRF flag is set to 1, then ...
22.3.4 Operation in
Synchronous Mode
Figure 22.17 Sample
SCI Initialization
Flowchart
437 Figure 22.17 amended
Set data transfer format in SMR1 and SCMR1
Figure 22.22 Sample
Flowchart of
Simultaneous Serial
Transmit and Receive
Operations
443 Figure 22.22 amended
RDRF = 1
23.2.5 I2C Bus Control
Register (ICCR)
464 Bit 7 description amended
Bit 7
ICE
1
2
C bus interface module enabled for transfer operations (pins SCL and SDA are
driving the bus)
ICMR and ICDR can be accessed
I
Description
23.3.2 Master Transmit
Operation
482 Description amended
[11] ... When there is data to be transmitted, go to the step [9]
to continue next transmission. ...
23.3.4 Slave Receive
Operation
485 Description amended
5. ... At this time, RDRF flag is cleared to 0.
23.4 Usage Note 499 Description amended
6. ... The I2C bus interface SCL and SDA output timing is
prescribed by tcyc, as shown in table 23.5. ...
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xv of xliv
REJ09B0329-0200
Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details)
23.4 Usage Note 504 to
511
10. Notes on WAIT Function
11. Notes on ICDR Reads and ICCR Access in Slave Transmit
Mode
12. Notes on TRS Bit Setting in Slave Mode
13. Notes on Arbitration Lost in Master Mode
14. Notes on Interrupt Occurrence after ACKB Reception
15. Notes on TRS Bit Setting and ICDR Register Access
Description added
26.2.1 Overview 556 Description amended
This LSI is equipped with ... and twenty-nine pins multiplexed
with general-purpose ports. ...
26.4.5 Register
Description
601 FIFO Output Pattern Register 2 (FPDRB)
Description amended
Bit 13⎯S-TRIGB Bit (STRIGB): ... When the STRIGB is
selected by the ISEL, ...
26.4.6 Operation
Figure 26.23 Example
of Timing Waveform of
HSW (for 12 DFG
Pulses)
608 Figure 26.23 amended
Example of setting: DFCRA = H'02, DFCRB = H'08, ...
26.7.4 Register
Description
632 Drum Pulse Preset Data Registers (DPPR1, DPPR2)
Description amended
... The preset data can be calculated from the following
equation by using H'8000 as the reference value.
26.13.5 Register
Description
698 Bit 0 description amended
• ASM Mark Direct Mode: ... The duty I/O flag is 1 when the
duty cycle of the PB-CTL signal is below 65% (when an
ASM mark is not detected).
26.13.6 Operation
Figure 26.50 Example
of CTLM Switchover
Timing (When phase
Control Is Performed by
REF30P and DVCFG2
in REC Mode)
701 Note 1 amended
Note: 1. Ta is the interval calculated from RCDR3.
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xvi of xliv
REJ09B0329-0200
Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details)
26.13.6 Operation
Figure 26.51 Example
of CTLM Switchover
Timing (When phase
Control Is Performed by
CREF and DVCFG2 in
REC Mode)
702 Note 1 amended
Note: 1. Ta is the interval calculated from RCDR3.
26.15.5 Register
Description
736 Horizontal Sync Signal Threshold Register (HTR)
Description amended
... Thus, if φs = 5 MHz, NTSC system is used, ...
(HVTH - 2) × 0.4 μs ≤ 2.35 μs < (HVTH - 1) × 0.4 μs
∴HVTH ≥ H'7
26.15.6 Noise
Detection
741 Description amended
Example of Setting: ... Accordingly, ...
(Value of HPWR3 - 0) + 1) × 0.4 (μs) = 4.7 (μs)
∴HPWR3 - 0 = H'B ...
27.1.2 Block Diagram
Figure 27.1 Sync
Separator Block
Diagram
753 Figure 27.1 amended
AFCosc
AFCpc
AFCLPF
AFC oscillator
27.2.1 Sync Separation
Input Mode Register
(SEPIMR)
755 Description amended
Bits order than bit 5 CCMPSL are cleared to 0 ...
27.2.2 Sync Separation
Control Register
(SEPCR)
762 Bit 2 description amended
... Forcibly operates the half Hsync killer (HHK)* function when
...
Note * added
Note: * HHK: Half Hsync Killer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xvii of xliv
REJ09B0329-0200
Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details)
27.2.4 Horizontal Sync
Signal Threshold
Register (HVTHR)
Figure 27.3 HVTH
Value and SEPH
Generation Timing when
Equalization Pulses Are
Detected
765 Figure 27.3 title amended
766 Description amended
In general, ... , set the HVTH value so that 2.35-μs equalizing
pulses can be detected.
Figure 27.8 Timing of
Hsync-Vsync Phase-
Difference Error Due to
Noise Occurrence after
Equalizing Pulse Is Lost
at Hsync Pulse Position
768 "HC" deleted from figure 27.8
Figure 27.9 Timing of
Forcible HHK Operation
in V Blanking Period
when Equalizating Pulse
Is Not Detected
769 "HC" deleted from figure 27.9
27.2.5 Vertical Sync
Signal Threshold
Register (VVTHR)
Figure 27.10 VVTH
Value and SEPV
Generation Timing
770 Figure 27.10 title amended
Figure 27.11 VVTH
Value and SEPV
Generation Timing when
Digital LPF Is Enabled
771 Figure 27.11 title amended
27.2.6 Field Detection
Window Register
(FWIDR)
772 (1) Bit 0 of SEPCR Register
Bit 0 table amended
(Before) LD → (After) FLD
27.3.5 Noise Detection 789 Description amended
... The noise detection window signal is se to 1 ... at the HHK
clearing timing specified by bits HM6 to HM0 of the HCMMR. ...
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xviii of xliv
REJ09B0329-0200
Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details)
28.2.1 Slice Even-
(Odd-) Fields Mode
Register (SEVFD,
SODFD)
1004 Bits 4 to 0 notes amended
Notes: 1. 576 when bit 0 (FRQSEL) of SEPIMR in the sync
separator is 0, and 448 when FRQSEL is 1.
2. fh: Horizontal sync signal frequency
28.2.5 Module Stop
Control Register
(MSTPCR)
811 Bit figure amended
7
1
R/W
MSTP
15 MSTP
14 MSTP
13 MSTP
12 MSTP
11 MSTP
10 MSTP
9MSTP
8MSTP
7MSTP
6MSTP
5MSTP
4MSTP
3MSTP
2MSTP
1MSTP
0
6
1
R/W
54
1
R/W
MSTPCRH MSTPCRL
1
R/W
3
1
R/W
2
1
R/W
1
1
R/W
0
1
R/W
7
1
R/W
6
1
R/W
5
1
R/W
4
1
R/W
3
1
R/W
2
1
R/W
1
1
R/W
0
1
R/W
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
28.4 32-Bit Slice
Operation
Figure 28.13 Sampling
Clock when Bit DSL32B
Is 1
819 Note * amended
Note: * 576 when ... is set to 0. 448 when bit FRQSEL (bit 0) in
SEPIMR (synchronization separator) is set to 1.
29.2.3 On-Screen
Display Configuration
Figure 29.4
Correspondence
between Display Data
RAM and On-Screen
Display
829 Note amended
Note: D800 to DAFE indicate the lower 16 bits of addresses in
the on-screen display RAM.
29.3.6 Character Data
ROM (OSDROM)
Figure 29.7 OSD ROM
Map
834 Figure 29.7 amended
Bit data for character code H'000 (blank character display)*1
045FFF*2
Notes: 1. Character code H'000 is reserved for blank character
display and ...
040000 :H'F0 040001 :H'00 040002 :H'F0 040003 :H'00 ...
040022 :H'F0 040023 :H'00 040024 :H'FF
04003F :H'FF
2. These addresses represent the H8S/2199R Group
addresses.
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xix of xliv
REJ09B0329-0200
Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details)
29.3.7 Display Data
RAM (OSDRAM)
839 Bits 11 to 9 bit table amended
OSDRAM Character Color
Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 C.Video Output
CR CG CB NTSC PAL R,G,B Outputs
0 Black Black Black0
1 ±ππ Blue
07π/4
3π/2
±7π/4
±3π/2
Green
0
1
1Cyan
29.4.5 Row Registers
(CLINEn, N = rows 1 to
12)
842 Bit figure amended
Bit 4 (Before) CLUn2 → (After) CLUn0
846 Bit 0⎯Cursor Brightness/Halftone Levels Specification Bit
(KLUn, n = 1 to 12)
• Cursor Brightness in Text Display Mode
• Halftone Levels in Superimposed Mode
Bit table amended
(Before) KLU → (After) KLUn
29.6.5 OSDV Interrupt 858 Bit figure amended
R/W description in bit 10 (Before) R/W → (After) ⎯
31.4.8 Flash Memory
Characteristics
Table 31.32 Flash
Memory Characteristics
950 Table 31.32 amended
Item Symbol Min Typ Max Unit Notes
Programming time*1*2*4 t
P
—
10 200 ms/128
bytes
Erase time*1*3*5t
t
E
—
100 1200 ms/block
Reprogramming count N
WEC
100
*
8
10000
*
9
— Times
Data retention time*
10
DRP
10 — — Years
951 Notes 6 to 8 added
Notes: 6. Minimum number of times for which all
characteristics are guaranteed after rewriting (Guarantee range
is 1 to minimum value).
7. Reference value for 25C° (as a guide line, rewriting should
normally function up to this value).
8. Data retention characteristics when rewriting is performed
within the specification range, including the minimum value.
B.2 Function List 1022 H'D029: CFIC: Digital Filter
Figure amended
Capstan phase system Z
-1
initialization bit
0 Phase system Z
-1
does not reflect CZ
p
value. (Initial value)
1 Phase system Z
-1
reflects CZ
p
value.
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xx of xliv
REJ09B0329-0200
Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details)
B.2 Function List 1071 H'D106: TCRX: Timer X1
Figure amended
ICRD is not used as buffer register for ICRB
(Initial value)
ICRD is used as buffer register for ICRB
0
1
Buffer enable B
1103 H'D200 to H'D20B: CLINE1 to CLINE12: OSD
Figure amended
Bit 4 (Before) CLUn2 → (After) CLUn0
(Cursor Colors in Text Display Mode)
Cursor color specification bits
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Character Brightness Level
KRn KGn KBn Cursor Color (C.Video Output) Cursor Color (R, G, B Output)
NTSC PAL
0 0 0 Black Black Black (Initial value)
1
π
±
π
Blue
1 0 7
π
/4 ±7
π
/4
1 3
π
/2 ±3
π
/2
1 0 0
π
/2 ±
π
/2
1 3
π
/4 ±3
π
/4
1 0 Same phase ±0
Green
Cyan
Red
Magenta
Yellow
White
1 White White
1112 H'D222: SODFD: Data Slicer
Figure amended
0123457
DLYO4 DLYO3 DLYO2 DLYO1 DLYO0SLVLO2
6
SLVLO1 SLVLO0
:
Bit
Bit 4 (Before) DLYO3 → (After) DLYO4
1115 H'D240: SEPIMR: Sync Separator
Figure amended
Bit 5 (Before) CCMPSL → (After) CCMPSL*
1128 H'FFCD: PMR0: I/O Port
Figure amended
(Before) P07/AN7 to P00/IRQ0 rin function select bits→ (After)
P07/AN7 to P00/AN0 pin switching
1137 H'FFE3: PUR3: I/O Port
Figure amended
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
0
7
0
R/W R/WR/WR/W
6
PUR34 PUR33 PUR32 PUR31 PUR30PUR37 PUR36 PUR35
P3n pin has no pull-up MOS transistor (Initial value)
P3n pin has pull-up MOS transistor
0
1
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
Note: n = 7 to 0
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xxi of xliv
REJ09B0329-0200
Item Page Revision (See Manual for Details)
B.2 Function List 1138 H'FFE5: Real Time Output Trigger Select Register 1 RTPSR1:
I/O Port
Figure amended
01234567
RTPSR14 RTPSR13 RTPSR12 RTPSR11 RTPSR10RTPSR17 RTPSR16 RTPSR15
Bit :
Subheading amended
H'FFE6: Real Time Output Trigger Select Register 2 RTPSR2:
I/O Port
1141 H'FFEB: LPWRCR: System Control
Note * deleted from DTON description
(Before) • ... to subactive mode*, or transition is made directly
to sleep mode or standby mode → (After) • ... to subactive
mode, or transition is made directly to sleep mode or standby
mode
1142 H'FFEE: STCR: System Control
Note * added to I2C control description
Used combined with CKS2 to CKS0 in ICMR0*
E.1 Power Supply Rise
and Fall Order
Figure E.1 Power
Supply Rise and Fall
Order
1163 Figure E.1 amended
VCC, AVCC
SVCC, OVCC
Vin
Appendix G Package
Dimensions
Figure G.1 Package
Dimensions
(PRQP0112JA-A)
1173 Figure G.1 replaced
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xxii of xliv
REJ09B0329-0200
All trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xxiii of xliv
REJ09B0329-0200
Contents
Section 1 Overview............................................................................................................. 1
1.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 1
1.2 Internal Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 7
1.3 Pin Arrangement and Functions........................................................................................ 9
1.3.1 Pin Arrangement.................................................................................................. 9
1.3.2 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 11
Section 2 CPU ...................................................................................................................... 19
2.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 19
2.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 19
2.1.2 Differences between H8S/2600 CPU and H8S/2000 CPU .................................. 20
2.1.3 Differences from H8/300 CPU............................................................................. 21
2.1.4 Differences from H8/300H CPU.......................................................................... 21
2.2 CPU Operating Modes...................................................................................................... 22
2.2.1 Normal Mode (Not available for this LSI)........................................................... 22
2.2.2 Advanced Mode................................................................................................... 24
2.3 Address Space................................................................................................................... 27
2.4 Register Configuration...................................................................................................... 28
2.4.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 28
2.4.2 General Registers................................................................................................. 29
2.4.3 Control Registers ................................................................................................. 30
2.4.4 Initial Register Values.......................................................................................... 32
2.5 Data Formats..................................................................................................................... 33
2.5.1 General Register Data Formats ............................................................................ 33
2.5.2 Memory Data Formats ......................................................................................... 35
2.6 Instruction Set ................................................................................................................... 36
2.6.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 36
2.6.2 Instructions and Addressing Modes..................................................................... 38
2.6.3 Table of Instructions Classified by Function ....................................................... 39
2.6.4 Basic Instruction Formats .................................................................................... 49
2.6.5 Notes on Use of Bit-Manipulation Instructions ................................................... 50
2.7 Addressing Modes and Effective Address Calculation..................................................... 51
2.7.1 Addressing Mode................................................................................................. 51
2.7.2 Effective Address Calculation.............................................................................. 54
2.8 Processing States............................................................................................................... 58
2.8.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 58
2.8.2 Reset State............................................................................................................ 59
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xxiv of xliv
REJ09B0329-0200
2.8.3 Exception-Handling State .................................................................................... 60
2.8.4 Program Execution State...................................................................................... 61
2.8.5 Power-Down State ............................................................................................... 62
2.9 Basic Timing..................................................................................................................... 63
2.9.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 63
2.9.2 On-Chip Memory (ROM, RAM)......................................................................... 63
2.9.3 On-Chip Supporting Module Access Timing ...................................................... 63
2.10 Usage Note........................................................................................................................ 64
2.10.1 TAS Instruction.................................................................................................... 64
2.10.2 STM/LDM Instruction......................................................................................... 64
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes .................................................................................. 65
3.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 65
3.1.1 Operating Mode Selection ................................................................................... 65
3.1.2 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 65
3.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 66
3.2.1 Mode Control Register (MDCR) ......................................................................... 66
3.2.2 System Control Register (SYSCR) ...................................................................... 66
3.3 Operating Mode (Mode 1) ................................................................................................ 67
3.4 Address Map in Each Operating Mode............................................................................. 68
Section 4 Power-Down State............................................................................................ 71
4.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 71
4.1.1 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 76
4.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 76
4.2.1 Standby Control Register (SBYCR) .................................................................... 76
4.2.2 Low-Power Control Register (LPWRCR) ........................................................... 78
4.2.3 Timer Register A (TMA)..................................................................................... 80
4.2.4 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) .......................................................... 81
4.3 Medium-Speed Mode........................................................................................................ 82
4.4 Sleep Mode ....................................................................................................................... 83
4.4.1 Sleep Mode .......................................................................................................... 83
4.4.2 Clearing Sleep Mode............................................................................................ 83
4.5 Module Stop Mode ........................................................................................................... 84
4.5.1 Module Stop Mode .............................................................................................. 84
4.6 Standby Mode ................................................................................................................... 85
4.6.1 Standby Mode ...................................................................................................... 85
4.6.2 Clearing Standby Mode ....................................................................................... 85
4.6.3 Setting Oscillation Settling Time after Clearing Standby Mode.......................... 85
4.7 Watch Mode...................................................................................................................... 87
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xxv of xliv
REJ09B0329-0200
4.7.1 Watch Mode......................................................................................................... 87
4.7.2 Clearing Watch Mode .......................................................................................... 87
4.8 Subsleep Mode.................................................................................................................. 88
4.8.1 Subsleep Mode..................................................................................................... 88
4.8.2 Clearing Subsleep Mode ...................................................................................... 88
4.9 Subactive Mode................................................................................................................. 89
4.9.1 Subactive Mode ................................................................................................... 89
4.9.2 Clearing Subactive Mode..................................................................................... 89
4.10 Direct Transition ............................................................................................................... 90
4.10.1 Overview of Direct Transition ............................................................................. 90
Section 5 Exception Handling ......................................................................................... 91
5.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 91
5.1.1 Exception Handling Types and Priority............................................................... 91
5.1.2 Exception Handling Operation............................................................................. 92
5.1.3 Exception Sources and Vector Table ................................................................... 92
5.2 Reset.................................................................................................................................. 94
5.2.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 94
5.2.2 Reset Sequence .................................................................................................... 94
5.2.3 Interrupts after Reset............................................................................................ 95
5.3 Interrupts........................................................................................................................... 96
5.4 Trap Instruction................................................................................................................. 97
5.5 Stack Status after Exception Handling.............................................................................. 98
5.6 Notes on Use of the Stack................................................................................................. 99
Section 6 Interrupt Controller .......................................................................................... 101
6.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 101
6.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 101
6.1.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 102
6.1.3 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 103
6.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 103
6.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 104
6.2.1 System Control Register (SYSCR) ...................................................................... 104
6.2.2 Interrupt Control Registers A to D (ICRA to ICRD) ........................................... 105
6.2.3 IRQ Enable Register (IENR) ............................................................................... 106
6.2.4 IRQ Edge Select Registers (IEGR)...................................................................... 107
6.2.5 IRQ Status Register (IRQR) ................................................................................ 108
6.2.6 Port Mode Register 1 (PMR1) ............................................................................. 109
6.3 Interrupt Sources............................................................................................................... 110
6.3.1 External Interrupts ............................................................................................... 110
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xxvi of xliv
REJ09B0329-0200
6.3.2 Internal Interrupts ................................................................................................ 112
6.3.3 Interrupt Exception Vector Table ........................................................................ 113
6.4 Interrupt Operation............................................................................................................ 116
6.4.1 Interrupt Control Modes and Interrupt Operation................................................ 116
6.4.2 Interrupt Control Mode 0..................................................................................... 118
6.4.3 Interrupt Control Mode 1..................................................................................... 120
6.4.4 Interrupt Exception Handling Sequence .............................................................. 123
6.4.5 Interrupt Response Times .................................................................................... 124
6.5 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 125
6.5.1 Contention between Interrupt Generation and Disabling..................................... 125
6.5.2 Instructions That Disable Interrupts..................................................................... 126
6.5.3 Interrupts during Execution of EEPMOV Instruction.......................................... 126
Section 7 ROM..................................................................................................................... 127
7.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 127
7.1.1 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 127
7.2 Overview of Flash Memory .............................................................................................. 128
7.2.1 Features................................................................................................................ 128
7.2.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 129
7.2.3 Flash Memory Operating Modes ......................................................................... 130
7.2.4 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 134
7.2.5 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 134
7.3 Flash Memory Register Descriptions................................................................................ 135
7.3.1 Flash Memory Control Register 1 (FLMCR1)..................................................... 135
7.3.2 Flash Memory Control Register 2 (FLMCR2)..................................................... 138
7.3.3 Erase Block Register 1 (EBR1) ........................................................................... 141
7.3.4 Erase Block Register 2 (EBR2) ........................................................................... 142
7.3.5 Serial/Timer Control Register (STCR) ................................................................ 143
7.4 On-Board Programming Modes........................................................................................ 144
7.4.1 Boot Mode ........................................................................................................... 145
7.4.2 User Program Mode............................................................................................. 150
7.5 Programming/Erasing Flash Memory............................................................................... 151
7.5.1 Program Mode (n = 1 when the Target Address Range Is H'00000 to H'3FFFF
and n = 2 when the Target Address Range Is H'40000 to H'47FFF)................... 151
7.5.2 Program-Verify Mode (n = 1 when the Target Address Range Is H'00000 to
H'3FFFF and n = 2 when the Target Address Range Is H'40000 to H'47FFF) .... 152
7.5.3 Erase Mode (n = 1 when the Target Address Range Is H'00000 to H'3FFFF
and n = 2 when the Target Address Range Is H'40000 to H'47FFF).................... 154
7.5.4 Erase-Verify Mode (n = 1 when the Target Address Range Is H'00000 to
H'3FFFF and n = 2 when the Target Address Range Is H'40000 to H'47FFF) .... 156
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xxvii of xliv
REJ09B0329-0200
7.6 Flash Memory Protection.................................................................................................. 157
7.6.1 Hardware Protection ............................................................................................ 157
7.6.2 Software Protection.............................................................................................. 158
7.6.3 Error Protection.................................................................................................... 158
7.7 Interrupt Handling when Programming/Erasing Flash Memory....................................... 159
7.8 Flash Memory Programmer Mode.................................................................................... 160
7.8.1 Programmer Mode Setting................................................................................... 160
7.8.2 Socket Adapters and Memory Map...................................................................... 160
7.8.3 Programmer Mode Operation .............................................................................. 161
7.8.4 Memory Read Mode ............................................................................................ 162
7.8.5 Auto-Program Mode............................................................................................ 165
7.8.6 Auto-Erase Mode................................................................................................. 167
7.8.7 Status Read Mode ................................................................................................ 168
7.8.8 Status Polling ....................................................................................................... 170
7.8.9 Programmer Mode Transition Time..................................................................... 170
7.8.10 Notes on Memory Programming.......................................................................... 171
7.9 Note on Switching from F–ZTAT Version to Mask-ROM Version ................................. 172
Section 8 RAM..................................................................................................................... 173
8.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 173
8.1.1 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 173
Section 9 Clock Pulse Generator..................................................................................... 175
9.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 175
9.1.1 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 175
9.1.2 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 175
9.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 176
9.2.1 Standby Control Register (SBYCR) .................................................................... 176
9.2.2 Low-Power Control Register (LPWRCR) ........................................................... 176
9.3 Oscillator........................................................................................................................... 177
9.3.1 Connecting a Crystal Resonator........................................................................... 177
9.3.2 External Clock Input............................................................................................ 179
9.4 Duty Adjustment Circuit................................................................................................... 182
9.5 Medium-Speed Clock Divider .......................................................................................... 182
9.6 Bus Master Clock Selection Circuit.................................................................................. 182
9.7 Subclock Oscillator Circuit............................................................................................... 182
9.7.1 Connecting 32.768 kHz Crystal Resonator .......................................................... 182
9.7.2 When Subclock Is Not Needed ............................................................................ 183
9.8 Subclock Waveform Shaping Circuit................................................................................ 183
9.9 Notes on the Resonator ..................................................................................................... 184
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xxviii of xliv
REJ09B0329-0200
Section 10 I/O Port.............................................................................................................. 185
10.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 185
10.1.1 Port Functions...................................................................................................... 185
10.1.2 Port Input ............................................................................................................. 185
10.1.3 MOS Pull-Up Transistors .................................................................................... 188
10.2 Port 0................................................................................................................................. 189
10.2.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 189
10.2.2 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 189
10.2.3 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 191
10.2.4 Pin States ............................................................................................................. 191
10.3 Port 1................................................................................................................................. 192
10.3.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 192
10.3.2 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 192
10.3.3 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 196
10.3.4 Pin States ............................................................................................................. 197
10.4 Port 2................................................................................................................................. 198
10.4.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 198
10.4.2 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 198
10.4.3 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 200
10.4.4 Pin States ............................................................................................................. 203
10.5 Port 3................................................................................................................................. 204
10.5.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 204
10.5.2 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 204
10.5.3 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 208
10.5.4 Pin States ............................................................................................................. 210
10.6 Port 4................................................................................................................................. 211
10.6.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 211
10.6.2 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 211
10.6.3 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 214
10.6.4 Pin States ............................................................................................................. 216
10.7 Port 6................................................................................................................................. 217
10.7.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 217
10.7.2 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 218
10.7.3 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 222
10.7.4 Operation ............................................................................................................. 224
10.7.5 Pin States ............................................................................................................. 225
10.8 Port 7................................................................................................................................. 226
10.8.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 226
10.8.2 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 227
10.8.3 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 231
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xxix of xliv
REJ09B0329-0200
10.8.4 Operation ............................................................................................................. 232
10.8.5 Pin States.............................................................................................................. 233
10.9 Port 8................................................................................................................................. 234
10.9.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 234
10.9.2 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 235
10.9.3 Pin Functions ....................................................................................................... 240
10.9.4 Pin States.............................................................................................................. 242
Section 11 Timer A............................................................................................................. 243
11.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 243
11.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 243
11.1.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 244
11.1.3 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 244
11.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 245
11.2.1 Timer Mode Register A (TMA)........................................................................... 245
11.2.2 Timer Counter A (TCA) ...................................................................................... 247
11.2.3 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) .......................................................... 247
11.3 Operation........................................................................................................................... 248
11.3.1 Operation as the Interval Timer ........................................................................... 248
11.3.2 Operation as Clock Timer.................................................................................... 248
11.3.3 Initializing the Counts.......................................................................................... 248
Section 12 Timer B ............................................................................................................. 249
12.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 249
12.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 249
12.1.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 249
12.1.3 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 250
12.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 250
12.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 251
12.2.1 Timer Mode Register B (TMB) ........................................................................... 251
12.2.2 Timer Counter B (TCB)....................................................................................... 253
12.2.3 Timer Load Register B (TLB) ............................................................................. 253
12.2.4 Port Mode Register A (PMRA) ........................................................................... 254
12.2.5 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) .......................................................... 255
12.3 Operation........................................................................................................................... 256
12.3.1 Operation as the Interval Timer ........................................................................... 256
12.3.2 Operation as the Auto Reload Timer ................................................................... 256
12.3.3 Event Counter ...................................................................................................... 256
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xxx of xliv
REJ09B0329-0200
Section 13 Timer J............................................................................................................... 257
13.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 257
13.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 257
13.1.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 257
13.1.3 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 259
13.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 259
13.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 260
13.2.1 Timer Mode Register J (TMJ) ............................................................................. 260
13.2.2 Timer J Control Register (TMJC)........................................................................ 263
13.2.3 Timer J Status Register (TMJS)........................................................................... 266
13.2.4 Timer Counter J (TCJ)......................................................................................... 267
13.2.5 Timer Counter K (TCK) ...................................................................................... 267
13.2.6 Timer Load Register J (TLJ)................................................................................ 268
13.2.7 Timer Load Register K (TLK)............................................................................. 268
13.2.8 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR).......................................................... 269
13.3 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 270
13.3.1 8-bit Reload Timer (TMJ-1) ................................................................................ 270
13.3.2 8-bit Reload Timer (TMJ-2) ................................................................................ 270
13.3.3 Remote Controlled Data Transmission ................................................................ 271
13.3.4 TMJ-2 Expansion Function.................................................................................. 275
Section 14 Timer L ............................................................................................................. 277
14.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 277
14.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 277
14.1.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 278
14.1.3 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 279
14.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 280
14.2.1 Timer L Mode Register (LMR) ........................................................................... 280
14.2.2 Linear Time Counter (LTC)................................................................................. 282
14.2.3 Reload/Compare Match Register (RCR) ............................................................. 282
14.2.4 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR).......................................................... 283
14.3 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 284
14.3.1 Compare Match Clear Operation ......................................................................... 284
14.3.2 Auto-Reload Operation........................................................................................ 285
14.3.3 Interval Timer Operation ..................................................................................... 286
14.3.4 Interrupt Request.................................................................................................. 286
14.4 Typical Usage ................................................................................................................... 287
14.5 Reload Timer Interrupt Request Signal............................................................................. 287
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xxxi of xliv
REJ09B0329-0200
Section 15 Timer R ............................................................................................................. 289
15.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 289
15.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 289
15.1.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 289
15.1.3 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 291
15.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 291
15.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 292
15.2.1 Timer R Mode Register 1 (TMRM1)................................................................... 292
15.2.2 Timer R Mode Register 2 (TMRM2)................................................................... 294
15.2.3 Timer R Control/Status Register (TMRCS)......................................................... 297
15.2.4 Timer R Capture Register 1 (TMRCP1) .............................................................. 299
15.2.5 Timer R Capture Register 2 (TMRCP2) .............................................................. 299
15.2.6 Timer R Load Register 1 (TMRL1)..................................................................... 300
15.2.7 Timer R Load Register 2 (TMRL2)..................................................................... 300
15.2.8 Timer R Load Register 3 (TMRL3)..................................................................... 301
15.2.9 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) .......................................................... 301
15.3 Operation........................................................................................................................... 302
15.3.1 Reload Timer Counter Equipped with Capturing Function TMRU-1.................. 302
15.3.2 Reload Timer Counter Equipped with Capturing Function TMRU-2.................. 302
15.3.3 Reload Counter Timer TMRU-3.......................................................................... 303
15.3.4 Mode Identification.............................................................................................. 304
15.3.5 Reeling Controls .................................................................................................. 304
15.3.6 Acceleration and Braking Processes of the Capstan Motor ................................. 304
15.3.7 Slow Tracking Mono-Multi Function .................................................................. 305
15.4 Interrupt Cause.................................................................................................................. 307
15.5 Settings for Respective Functions..................................................................................... 308
15.5.1 Mode Identification.............................................................................................. 308
15.5.2 Reeling Controls .................................................................................................. 309
15.5.3 Slow Tracking Mono-Multi Function .................................................................. 310
15.5.4 Acceleration and Braking Processes of the Capstan Motor ................................. 311
Section 16 Timer X1........................................................................................................... 313
16.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 313
16.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 313
16.1.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 314
16.1.3 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 315
16.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 316
16.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 317
16.2.1 Free Running Counter (FRC)............................................................................... 317
16.2.2 Output Comparing Registers A and B (OCRA and OCRB) ................................ 317
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xxxii of xliv
REJ09B0329-0200
16.2.3 Input Capture Registers A through D (ICRA through ICRD).............................. 318
16.2.4 Timer Interrupt Enabling Register (TIER)........................................................... 319
16.2.5 Timer Control/Status Register X (TCSRX) ......................................................... 322
16.2.6 Timer Control Register X (TCRX) ...................................................................... 326
16.2.7 Timer Output Comparing Control Register (TOCR) ........................................... 328
16.2.8 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR).......................................................... 330
16.3 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 331
16.3.1 Operation of Timer X1......................................................................................... 331
16.3.2 Counting Timing of the FRC ............................................................................... 332
16.3.3 Output Comparing Signal Outputting Timing ..................................................... 333
16.3.4 FRC Clearing Timing .......................................................................................... 333
16.3.5 Input Capture Signal Inputting Timing................................................................ 334
16.3.6 Input Capture Flag (ICFA through ICFD) Setting Up Timing ............................ 335
16.3.7 Output Comparing Flag (OCFA and OCFB) Setting Up Timing ........................ 336
16.3.8 Overflow Flag (CVF) Setting Up Timing............................................................ 336
16.4 Operation Mode of Timer X1 ........................................................................................... 337
16.5 Interrupt Causes ................................................................................................................ 337
16.6 Exemplary Uses of Timer X1 ........................................................................................... 338
16.7 Precautions when Using Timer X1 ................................................................................... 339
16.7.1 Competition between Writing and Clearing with the FRC .................................. 339
16.7.2 Competition between Writing and Counting Up with the FRC ........................... 340
16.7.3 Competition between Writing and Comparing Match with the OCR .................. 341
16.7.4 Changing Over the Internal Clocks and Counter Operations............................... 342
Section 17 Watchdog Timer (WDT).............................................................................. 345
17.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 345
17.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 345
17.1.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 346
17.1.3 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 347
17.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 347
17.2.1 Watchdog Timer Counter (WTCNT)................................................................... 347
17.2.2 Watchdog Timer Control/Status Register (WTCSR)........................................... 348
17.2.3 System Control Register (SYSCR)...................................................................... 350
17.2.4 Notes on Register Access..................................................................................... 351
17.3 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 352
17.3.1 Watchdog Timer Operation ................................................................................. 352
17.3.2 Interval Timer Operation ..................................................................................... 353
17.3.3 Timing of Setting of Overflow Flag (OVF)......................................................... 354
17.4 Interrupts........................................................................................................................... 354
17.5 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 355
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xxxiii of xliv
REJ09B0329-0200
17.5.1 Contention between Watchdog Timer Counter (WTCNT) Write and Increment 355
17.5.2 Changing Value of CKS2 to CKS0...................................................................... 355
17.5.3 Switching between Watchdog Timer Mode and Interval Timer Mode................ 356
Section 18 8-Bit PWM....................................................................................................... 357
18.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 357
18.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 357
18.1.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 357
18.1.3 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 358
18.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 358
18.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 359
18.2.1 8-bit PWM Data Registers 0, 1, 2 and 3 (PWR0, PWR1, PWR2, PWR3)........... 359
18.2.2 8-bit PWM Control Register (PW8CR) ............................................................... 360
18.2.3 Port Mode Register 3 (PMR3) ............................................................................. 360
18.2.4 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) .......................................................... 361
18.3 8-Bit PWM Operation....................................................................................................... 362
Section 19 12-Bit PWM..................................................................................................... 363
19.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 363
19.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 363
19.1.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 364
19.1.3 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 365
19.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 365
19.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 366
19.2.1 12-Bit PWM Control Registers (CPWCR, DPWCR) .......................................... 366
19.2.2 12-Bit PWM Data Registers (DPWDR, CPWDR) .............................................. 368
19.2.3 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) .......................................................... 369
19.3 Operation........................................................................................................................... 370
19.3.1 Output Waveform ................................................................................................ 370
Section 20 14-Bit PWM..................................................................................................... 373
20.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 373
20.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 373
20.1.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 374
20.1.3 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 374
20.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 375
20.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 375
20.2.1 PWM Control Register (PWCR).......................................................................... 375
20.2.2 PWM Data Registers U and L (PWDRU, PWDRL)............................................ 376
20.2.3 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) .......................................................... 377
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xxxiv of xliv
REJ09B0329-0200
20.3 14-Bit PWM Operation..................................................................................................... 378
Section 21 Prescalar Unit .................................................................................................. 379
21.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 379
21.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 379
21.1.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 380
21.1.3 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 381
21.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 381
21.2 Registers............................................................................................................................ 382
21.2.1 Input Capture Register 1 (ICR1).......................................................................... 382
21.2.2 Prescalar Unit Control/Status Register (PCSR) ................................................... 382
21.2.3 Port Mode Register 1 (PMR1) ............................................................................. 384
21.3 Noise Cancel Circuit ......................................................................................................... 385
21.4 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 385
21.4.1 Prescalar S (PSS) ................................................................................................. 385
21.4.2 Prescalar W (PSW) .............................................................................................. 386
21.4.3 Stable Oscillation Wait Time Count .................................................................... 386
21.4.4 8-bit PWM ........................................................................................................... 387
21.4.5 8-bit Input Capture Using IC Pin ......................................................................... 387
21.4.6 Frequency Division Clock Output ....................................................................... 387
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1) .............................................. 389
22.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 389
22.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 389
22.1.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 391
22.1.3 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 392
22.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 392
22.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 393
22.2.1 Receive Shift Register 1 (RSR1) ......................................................................... 393
22.2.2 Receive Data Register 1 (RDR1)......................................................................... 393
22.2.3 Transmit Shift Register 1 (TSR1) ........................................................................ 394
22.2.4 Transmit Data Register 1 (TDR1)........................................................................ 394
22.2.5 Serial Mode Register 1 (SMR1)........................................................................... 395
22.2.6 Serial Control Register 1 (SCR1)......................................................................... 398
22.2.7 Serial Status Register 1 (SSR1) ........................................................................... 402
22.2.8 Bit Rate Register 1 (BRR1) ................................................................................. 406
22.2.9 Serial Interface Mode Register 1 (SCMR1)......................................................... 413
22.2.10 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR).......................................................... 414
22.3 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 415
22.3.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 415
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xxxv of xliv
REJ09B0329-0200
22.3.2 Operation in Asynchronous Mode ....................................................................... 417
22.3.3 Multiprocessor Communication Function............................................................ 427
22.3.4 Operation in Synchronous Mode ......................................................................... 435
22.4 SCI Interrupts.................................................................................................................... 444
22.5 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 445
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)................................................................................. 451
23.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 451
23.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 451
23.1.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 452
23.1.3 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 453
23.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 454
23.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 455
23.2.1 I2C Bus Data Register (ICDR) ............................................................................. 455
23.2.2 Slave Address Register (SAR)............................................................................. 457
23.2.3 Second Slave Address Register (SARX) ............................................................. 459
23.2.4 I2C Bus Mode Register (ICMR)........................................................................... 460
23.2.5 I2C Bus Control Register (ICCR)......................................................................... 464
23.2.6 I2C Bus Status Register (ICSR)............................................................................ 471
23.2.7 Serial/Timer Control Register (STCR) ................................................................ 475
23.2.8 DDC Switch Register (DDCSWR) ...................................................................... 476
23.2.9 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR) .......................................................... 478
23.3 Operation........................................................................................................................... 479
23.3.1 I2C Bus Data Format ............................................................................................ 479
23.3.2 Master Transmit Operation .................................................................................. 481
23.3.3 Master Receive Operation.................................................................................... 483
23.3.4 Slave Receive Operation...................................................................................... 485
23.3.5 Slave Transmit Operation .................................................................................... 488
23.3.6 IRIC Setting Timing and SCL Control ................................................................ 489
23.3.7 Automatic Switching from Formatless Transfer to I2C Bus Format Transfer...... 491
23.3.8 Noise Canceler..................................................................................................... 492
23.3.9 Sample Flowcharts............................................................................................... 492
23.3.10 Initializing Internal Status.................................................................................... 496
23.4 Usage Notes ...................................................................................................................... 498
Section 24 A/D Converter................................................................................................. 513
24.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 513
24.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 513
24.1.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 514
24.1.3 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 515
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xxxvi of xliv
REJ09B0329-0200
24.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 516
24.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 517
24.2.1 Software-Triggered A/D Result Register (ADR)................................................. 517
24.2.2 Hardware-Triggered A/D Result Register (AHR) ............................................... 517
24.2.3 A/D Control Register (ADCR) ............................................................................ 518
24.2.4 A/D Control/Status Register (ADCSR) ............................................................... 521
24.2.5 Trigger Select Register (ADTSR)........................................................................ 524
24.2.6 Port Mode Register 0 (PMR0) ............................................................................. 524
24.2.7 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR).......................................................... 525
24.3 Interface to Bus Master..................................................................................................... 526
24.4 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 527
24.4.1 Software-Triggered A/D Conversion................................................................... 527
24.4.2 Hardware- or External-Triggered A/D Conversion ............................................. 528
24.5 Interrupt Sources............................................................................................................... 529
Section 25 Address Trap Controller (ATC)................................................................. 531
25.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 531
25.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 531
25.1.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 531
25.1.3 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 532
25.2 Register Descriptions ........................................................................................................ 532
25.2.1 Address Trap Control Register (ATCR) .............................................................. 532
25.2.2 Trap Address Register 2 to 0 (TAR2 to TAR0) ................................................... 533
25.3 Precautions in Usage......................................................................................................... 534
25.3.1 Basic Operations.................................................................................................. 534
25.3.2 Enabling............................................................................................................... 536
25.3.3 Bcc Instruction..................................................................................................... 536
25.3.4 BSR Instruction.................................................................................................... 540
25.3.5 JSR Instruction..................................................................................................... 541
25.3.6 JMP Instruction.................................................................................................... 543
25.3.7 RTS Instruction.................................................................................................... 544
25.3.8 SLEEP Instruction ............................................................................................... 545
25.3.9 Competing Interrupt............................................................................................. 549
Section 26 Servo Circuits.................................................................................................. 553
26.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 553
26.1.1 Functions.............................................................................................................. 553
26.1.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 554
26.2 Servo Port ......................................................................................................................... 556
26.2.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 556
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xxxvii of xliv
REJ09B0329-0200
26.2.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 556
26.2.3 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 558
26.2.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 560
26.2.5 Register Description............................................................................................. 560
26.2.6 DFG/DPG Input Signals ...................................................................................... 564
26.3 Reference Signal Generators............................................................................................. 565
26.3.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 565
26.3.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 565
26.3.3 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 567
26.3.4 Register Description............................................................................................. 568
26.3.5 Operation ............................................................................................................. 573
26.4 HSW (Head-switch) Timing Generator ............................................................................ 588
26.4.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 588
26.4.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 588
26.4.3 HSW Timing Generator Configuration................................................................ 590
26.4.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 591
26.4.5 Register Description............................................................................................. 591
26.4.6 Operation ............................................................................................................. 606
26.4.7 Interrupts.............................................................................................................. 612
26.4.8 Cautions ............................................................................................................... 613
26.5 High-Speed Switching Circuit for Four-Head Special Playback ...................................... 614
26.5.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 614
26.5.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 615
26.5.3 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 615
26.5.4 Register Description............................................................................................. 616
26.6 Drum Speed Error Detector .............................................................................................. 618
26.6.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 618
26.6.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 618
26.6.3 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 620
26.6.4 Register Description............................................................................................. 621
26.6.5 Operation ............................................................................................................. 626
26.6.6 fH Correction in Trick Play Mode......................................................................... 628
26.7 Drum Phase Error Detector............................................................................................... 629
26.7.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 629
26.7.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 630
26.7.3 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 631
26.7.4 Register Description............................................................................................. 632
26.7.5 Operation ............................................................................................................. 635
26.7.6 Phase Comparison................................................................................................ 637
26.8 Capstan Speed Error Detector........................................................................................... 637
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xxxviii of xliv
REJ09B0329-0200
26.8.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 637
26.8.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 638
26.8.3 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 639
26.8.4 Register Description............................................................................................. 640
26.8.5 Operation ............................................................................................................. 645
26.9 Capstan Phase Error Detector ........................................................................................... 647
26.9.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 647
26.9.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 647
26.9.3 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 649
26.9.4 Register Description............................................................................................. 650
26.9.5 Operation ............................................................................................................. 653
26.10 X-Value and Tracking Adjustment Circuit ....................................................................... 655
26.10.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 655
26.10.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 655
26.10.3 Register Description............................................................................................. 657
26.11 Digital Filters .................................................................................................................... 660
26.11.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 660
26.11.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 661
26.11.3 Arithmetic Buffer................................................................................................. 663
26.11.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 664
26.11.5 Register Description............................................................................................. 665
26.11.6 Filter Characteristics ............................................................................................ 673
26.11.7 Operations in Case of Transient Response........................................................... 675
26.11.8 Initialization of Z-1................................................................................................ 675
26.12 Additional V Signal Generator ......................................................................................... 677
26.12.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 677
26.12.2 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 678
26.12.3 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 678
26.12.4 Register Description............................................................................................. 678
26.12.5 Additional V Pulse Signal.................................................................................... 680
26.13 CTL Circuit....................................................................................................................... 683
26.13.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 683
26.13.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 684
26.13.3 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 685
26.13.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 685
26.13.5 Register Description............................................................................................. 686
26.13.6 Operation ............................................................................................................. 700
26.13.7 CTL Input Section ............................................................................................... 703
26.13.8 Duty Discriminator .............................................................................................. 706
26.13.9 CTL Output Section............................................................................................. 712
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xxxix of xliv
REJ09B0329-0200
26.13.10 Trapezoid Waveform Circuit.............................................................................. 715
26.13.11 Note on CTL Interrupt........................................................................................ 716
26.14 Frequency Dividers........................................................................................................... 716
26.14.1 Overview ............................................................................................................ 716
26.14.2 CTL Frequency Divider ..................................................................................... 716
26.14.3 CFG Frequency Divider ..................................................................................... 721
26.14.4 DFG Noise Removal Circuit .............................................................................. 730
26.15 Sync Signal Detector......................................................................................................... 732
26.15.1 Overview ............................................................................................................ 732
26.15.2 Block Diagram ................................................................................................... 733
26.15.3 Pin Configuration ............................................................................................... 734
26.15.4 Register Configuration ....................................................................................... 734
26.15.5 Register Description ........................................................................................... 734
26.15.6 Noise Detection .................................................................................................. 741
26.15.7 Activation of the Sync Signal Detector .............................................................. 744
26.16 Servo Interrupt .................................................................................................................. 744
26.16.1 Overview ............................................................................................................ 744
26.16.2 Register Configuration ....................................................................................... 744
26.16.3 Register Description ........................................................................................... 745
Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer ................................................ 751
27.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 751
27.1.1 Features .............................................................................................................. 752
27.1.2 Block Diagram ................................................................................................... 752
27.1.3 Pin Configuration ............................................................................................... 754
27.1.4 Register Configuration ....................................................................................... 754
27.2 Register Description.......................................................................................................... 755
27.2.1 Sync Separation Input Mode Register (SEPIMR) .............................................. 755
27.2.2 Sync Separation Control Register (SEPCR)....................................................... 760
27.2.3 Sync Separation AFC Control Register (SEPACR) ........................................... 763
27.2.4 Horizontal Sync Signal Threshold Register (HVTHR) ...................................... 765
27.2.5 Vertical Sync Signal Threshold Register (VVTHR) .......................................... 769
27.2.6 Field Detection Window Register (FWIDR)...................................................... 772
27.2.7 H Complement and Mask Timing Register (HCMMR) ..................................... 774
27.2.8 Noise Detection Counter (NDETC) ................................................................... 776
27.2.9 Noise Detection Level Register (NDETR)......................................................... 777
27.2.10 Data Slicer Detection Window Register (DDETWR) ........................................ 778
27.2.11 Internal Sync Frequency Register (INFRQR) .................................................... 780
27.3 Operation........................................................................................................................... 781
27.3.1 Selecting Source Signals for Sync Separation.................................................... 781
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xl of xliv
REJ09B0329-0200
27.3.2 Vsync Separation ................................................................................................. 787
27.3.3 Hsync Separation ................................................................................................. 788
27.3.4 Field Detection..................................................................................................... 789
27.3.5 Noise Detection.................................................................................................... 789
27.3.6 Automatic Frequency Controller (AFC) .............................................................. 790
27.3.7 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR).......................................................... 795
Section 28 Data Slicer........................................................................................................ 797
28.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 797
28.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 797
28.1.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 798
28.1.3 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 799
28.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 800
28.1.5 Data Slicer Use Conditions.................................................................................. 800
28.2 Register Description.......................................................................................................... 801
28.2.1 Slice Even- (Odd-) Field Mode Register (SEVFD, SODFD) .............................. 801
28.2.2 Slice Line Setting Registers 1 to 4 (SLINE1 to SLINE4).................................... 805
28.2.3 Slice Detection Registers 1 to 4 (SDTCT1 to SDTCT4) ..................................... 807
28.2.4 Slice Data Registers 1 to 4 (SDATA1 to SDATA4)............................................ 810
28.2.5 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR).......................................................... 811
28.2.6 Monitor Output Setting Register (DOUT) ........................................................... 812
28.3 Operation .......................................................................................................................... 813
28.3.1 Slice Line Specification ....................................................................................... 813
28.3.2 Slice Sequence ..................................................................................................... 816
28.4 32-Bit Slice Operation ...................................................................................................... 817
Section 29 On-Screen Display (OSD)........................................................................... 821
29.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 821
29.1.1 Features................................................................................................................ 821
29.1.2 Block Diagram..................................................................................................... 823
29.1.3 Pin Configuration................................................................................................. 824
29.1.4 Register Configuration......................................................................................... 825
29.1.5 TV Formats and Display Modes.......................................................................... 826
29.2 Description of Display Functions...................................................................................... 826
29.2.1 Superimposed Mode and Text Display Mode...................................................... 826
29.2.2 Character Configuration....................................................................................... 827
29.2.3 On-Screen Display Configuration........................................................................ 828
29.3 Settings in Character Units ............................................................................................... 829
29.3.1 Character Configuration....................................................................................... 829
29.3.2 Character Colors .................................................................................................. 829
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xli of xliv
REJ09B0329-0200
29.3.3 Halftones/Cursors ................................................................................................ 830
29.3.4 Blinking ............................................................................................................... 831
29.3.5 Button Display ..................................................................................................... 832
29.3.6 Character Data ROM (OSDROM)....................................................................... 833
29.3.7 Display Data RAM (OSDRAM).......................................................................... 835
29.4 Settings in Row Units ....................................................................................................... 840
29.4.1 Button Patterns..................................................................................................... 840
29.4.2 Display Enlargement............................................................................................ 840
29.4.3 Character Brightness............................................................................................ 840
29.4.4 Cursor Color, Brightness, Halftone Levels.......................................................... 840
29.4.5 Row Registers (CLINEn, n = rows 1 to 12)......................................................... 842
29.5 Settings in Screen Units .................................................................................................... 847
29.5.1 Display Positions ................................................................................................. 847
29.5.2 Turning the OSD Display On and Off ................................................................. 848
29.5.3 Display Method.................................................................................................... 848
29.5.4 Blinking Period .................................................................................................... 848
29.5.5 Borders................................................................................................................. 849
29.5.6 Background Color and Brightness ....................................................................... 849
29.5.7 Character, Cursor, and Background Chroma Saturation...................................... 849
29.5.8 Display Position Registers (HPOS and VPOS).................................................... 850
29.5.9 Screen Control Register (DCNTL) ...................................................................... 851
29.6 Other Settings.................................................................................................................... 857
29.6.1 TV Format............................................................................................................ 857
29.6.2 Display Data RAM Control ................................................................................. 857
29.6.3 Timing of OSD Display Updates Using Register Rewriting................................ 857
29.6.4 4fsc/2fsc............................................................................................................... 858
29.6.5 OSDV Interrupts .................................................................................................. 858
29.6.6 OSD Format Register (DFORM)......................................................................... 858
29.7 Digital Output ................................................................................................................... 862
29.7.1 R, G, and B Outputs............................................................................................. 862
29.7.2 YCO and YBO Outputs ....................................................................................... 865
29.7.3 Digital Output Specification Register (DOUT) ................................................... 866
29.7.4 Module Stop Control Register (MTSTPCR)........................................................ 868
29.8 Notes on OSD Font Creation ............................................................................................ 870
29.8.1 Note 1 on Font Creation (Font Width)................................................................. 870
29.8.2 Note 2 on Font Creation (Borders)....................................................................... 870
29.8.3 Note 3 on Font Creation (Blinking) ..................................................................... 872
29.8.4 Note 4 on Font Creation (Buttons)....................................................................... 873
29.9 OSD Oscillator, AFC, and Dot Clock............................................................................... 874
29.9.1 Sync Signals......................................................................................................... 874
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xlii of xliv
REJ09B0329-0200
29.9.2 AFC Circuit.......................................................................................................... 874
29.9.3 Dot Clock............................................................................................................. 874
29.9.4 4/2fsc.................................................................................................................... 875
29.10 OSD Operation in CPU Operation Modes........................................................................ 877
29.11 Character Data ROM (OSDROM) Access by CPU.......................................................... 878
29.11.1 Serial Timer Control Register (STCR) ................................................................ 878
Section 30 Power Supply Circuit.................................................................................... 879
30.1 Overview........................................................................................................................... 879
30.2 Power Supply Connection (Internal Power Supply Step-Down Circuit On-Chip) ........... 879
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics ............................................................................. 881
31.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings ............................................................................................. 881
31.2 Electrical Characteristics of HD6432199R, HD6432198R, HD6432197R, and
HD6432196R.................................................................................................................... 882
31.2.1 DC Characteristics of HD6432199R, HD6432198R, HD6432197R, and
HD6432196R....................................................................................................... 882
31.2.2 Allowable Output Currents of HD6432199R, HD6432198R, HD6432197R,
and HD6432196R ................................................................................................ 889
31.2.3 AC Characteristics of HD6432199R, HD6432198R, HD6432197R, and
HD6432196R....................................................................................................... 890
31.2.4 Serial Interface Timing of HD6432199R, HD6432198R, HD6432197R, and
HD6432196R....................................................................................................... 893
31.2.5 A/D Converter Characteristics of HD6432199R, HD6432198R, HD6432197R,
and HD6432196R ................................................................................................ 897
31.2.6 Servo Section Electrical Characteristics of HD6432199R, HD6432198R,
HD6432197R, and HD6432196R........................................................................ 898
31.2.7 OSD Electrical Characteristics of HD6432199R, HD6432198R, HD6432197R,
and HD6432196R ................................................................................................ 901
31.3 Electrical Characteristics of HD6432197S and HD6432196S.......................................... 905
31.3.1 DC Characteristics of HD6432197S and HD6432196S ⎯ Preliminary ⎯......... 905
31.3.2 Allowable Output Currents of HD6432197S and HD6432196S ......................... 911
31.3.3 AC Characteristics of HD6432197S and HD6432196S....................................... 912
31.3.4 Serial Interface Timing of HD6432197S and HD6432196S................................ 915
31.3.5 A/D Converter Characteristics of HD6432197S and HD6432196S .................... 919
31.3.6 Servo Section Electrical Characteristics of HD6432197S and HD6432196S...... 920
31.3.7 OSD Electrical Characteristics of HD6432197S and HD6432196S.................... 923
31.4 Electrical Characteristics of HD64F2199R....................................................................... 927
31.4.1 DC Characteristics of HD64F2199R ................................................................... 927
31.4.2 Allowable Output Currents of HD64F2199R ...................................................... 934
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xliii of xliv
REJ09B0329-0200
31.4.3 AC Characteristics of HD64F2199R ................................................................... 935
31.4.4 Serial Interface Timing of HD64F2199R............................................................. 938
31.4.5 A/D Converter Characteristics of HD64F2199R ................................................. 942
31.4.6 Servo Section Electrical Characteristics of HD64F2199R................................... 943
31.4.7 OSD Electrical Characteristics of HD64F2199R................................................. 946
31.4.8 Flash Memory Characteristics ............................................................................. 950
Appendix A Instruction Set .............................................................................................. 953
A.1 Instructions........................................................................................................................ 953
A.2 Instruction Codes .............................................................................................................. 964
A.3 Operation Code Map......................................................................................................... 974
A.4 Number of Execution States.............................................................................................. 978
A.5 Bus Status during Instruction Execution........................................................................... 988
A.6 Change of Condition Codes ............................................................................................ 1002
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers ............................................................................... 1007
B.1 Addresses ........................................................................................................................ 1007
B.2 Function List ................................................................................................................... 1017
Appendix C Pin Circuit Diagrams................................................................................ 1148
C.1 Pin Circuit Diagrams....................................................................................................... 1148
Appendix D Port States in Each Processing State.................................................... 1162
D.1 Pin Circuit Diagrams....................................................................................................... 1162
Appendix E Usage Notes................................................................................................. 1163
E.1 Power Supply Rise and Fall Order.................................................................................. 1163
E.2 Sample External Circuits................................................................................................. 1166
E.3 Handling of Pins When OSD Is Not Used ...................................................................... 1171
Appendix F Product Lineup ........................................................................................... 1172
Appendix G Package Dimensions ................................................................................ 1173
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page xliv of xliv
REJ09B0329-0200
Section 1 Overview
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Section 1 Overview
1.1 Overview
The H8S/2199R Group comprises microcomputers (MCUs) built around the H8S/2000 CPU,
adopting Renesas Technology proprietary architecture, and equipped with on-chip supporting
modules.
The H8S/2000 has an internal 32-bit architecture, is provided with sixteen 16-bit general registers
and a concise, optimized instruction set designed for high-speed operation, and can address a 16-
Mbyte linear address space.
The H8S/2199R Group is equipped with a digital servo circuit, sync separator, OSD, data slicer,
ROM, RAM, seven types of timers, three types of PWM, two types of serial communication
interface, an I2C bus interface, A/D converter, and I/O port as on-chip supporting modules.
The on-chip ROM is either flash memory (F-ZTAT™*) or mask ROM, with a capacity of 256,
128, 112, 96, or 80 kbytes. ROM is connected to the CPU via a 16-bit data bus, enabling both byte
and word data to be accessed in one state. Instruction fetching has been speeded up, and
processing speed increased.
Using the H8S/2199R Group can implement a system suitable for VTR control. This manual
describes the H8S/2199R Group hardware. For details on instructions, see the H8S/2600 and
H8S/2000 Series Software Manual.
Note: * F-ZTAT is a trademark of Renesas Technology Corp.
Section 1 Overview
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 2 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Table 1.1 Features of the H8S/2199R Group
Item Specifications
CPU • General-register architecture
⎯ Sixteen 16-bit general registers (also usable as sixteen 8-bit registers
or eight 32-bit registers)
• High-speed operation suitable for real-time control
⎯ Maximum operating frequency: 10 MHz/4 V to 5.5 V
⎯ High-speed arithmetic operations
8/16/32-bit register-register add/subtract: 100 ns (10-MHz operation)
16 × 16-bit register-register multiply: 2000 ns (10-MHz operation)
32 ÷ 16-bit register-register divide: 2000 ns (10-MHz operation)
• Instruction set suitable for high-speed operation
⎯ Sixty-five basic instructions
⎯ 8/16/32-bit transfer/arithmetic and logic instructions
⎯ Unsigned/signed multiply and divide instructions
⎯ Powerful bit-manipulation instructions
• CPU operating modes
⎯ Advanced mode: 16-Mbyte address space
Timer • Seven types of timer are incorporated
⎯ Timer A
• 8-bit interval timer
• Clock source can be selected among 8 types of internal clock of
which frequencies are divided from the system clock (φ) and
subclock (φSUB)
• Functions as clock time base by subclock input
⎯ Timer B
• Functions as 8-bit interval timer or reload timer
• Clock source can be selected among 7 types of internal clock or
external event input
⎯ Timer J
• Functions as two 8-bit down counters or one 16-bit down counter
(reload timer/event counter timer/timer output, etc., 5 types of
operation modes)
• Remote controlled transmit function
• Take up/Supply Reel Pulse Frequency division
Section 1 Overview
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 3 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Item Specifications
Timer ⎯ Timer L
• 8-bit up/down counter
• Clock source can be selected among 2 types of internal clock, CFG
frequency division signal, and PB and REC-CTL (control pulse)
• Compare-match clearing function/auto reload function
⎯ Timer R
• Three reload timers
• Mode discrimination
• Reel control
• Capstan motor acceleration/deceleration detection function
• Slow tracking mono-multi
⎯ Timer X1 (except for the H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S)
• 16-bit free-running counter
• Clock source can be selected among 3 types of internal clock and
DVCFG
• Two output compare outputs
• Four input capture inputs
⎯ Watchdog timer
• Functions as watchdog timer or 8-bit interval timer
• Generates reset signal or NMI at overflow
Prescaler unit ⎯ Divides system clock frequency and generates frequency division clock
for supporting module functions
⎯ Divides subclock frequency and generates input clock for Timer A
(clock time base)
⎯ Generates 8-bit PWM frequency and duty period
⎯ 8-bit input capture at external signal edge
⎯ Frequency division clock output enabled
PWM • Three types of PWM are incorporated
⎯ 14-bit PWM: Pulse resolution type × 1 channel (except for the
H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S)
⎯ 8-bit PWM: Duty control type × 4 channels (H8S/2197S and
H8S/2196S : 2 channel)
⎯ 12-bit PWM: Pulse pitch control type × 2 channels
Section 1 Overview
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 4 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Item Specifications
Serial
communication
interface (SCI)
⎯ Asynchronous mode or synchronous mode selectable
⎯ Desired bit rate selectable with built-in baud rate generator
⎯ Multiprocessor communication function
I2C bus interface
(2 channels)
(H8S/2197S and
H8S/2196S :
1 channel)
⎯ Conforms to Phillips I2C bus interface standard
⎯ Start and stop conditions generated automatically
⎯ Selection of acknowledge output levels when receiving, and automatic
loading of acknowledge bit when transmitting
⎯ Selection of acknowledgement mode or serial mode (without
acknowledge bit)
A/D converter ⎯ Resolution: 10 bits
⎯ Input: 12 channels
⎯ High-speed conversion: 13.4 μs minimum conversion time (10-MHz
operation)
⎯ Sample-and-hold function
⎯ A/D conversion can be activated by software or external trigger
Address trap
controller
⎯ Interrupt occurs when the preset address is found during bus cycle
⎯ To-be-trapped addresses can be individually set at three different
locations
I/O port ⎯ 56 input/output pins
⎯ 8 input-only pins
⎯ Can be switched for each supporting module
Servo circuit • Digital servo circuits on-chip
⎯ Input and output circuits
⎯ Error detection circuit
⎯ Phase and gain compensation
Sync signal
(servo)
• On-chip sync signal detection circuit
⎯ Can separately detect horizontal and vertical sync signals
⎯ Noise detection function
Sync separator for
OSD and data
slicer
• Sync separator including AFC
⎯ Horizontal and vertical sync signals separated from the composite
video signal
⎯ Noise detection
⎯ Selection of sync separation methods
Section 1 Overview
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 5 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Item Specifications
OSD (On Screen
Display)
⎯ Screen of 32 characters × 12 lines
⎯ 384 types of characters (H8S/2199R F-ZTAT: 512 types of characters
H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S: 256 types of characters)
⎯ Character configuration: 12 dots × 18 lines
⎯ Character colors: Eight hues
⎯ Background colors: Eight hues
⎯ Cursor colors: Eight hues
⎯ Halftone display
⎯ Button display
Data slicer ⎯ Slice lines: Four lines (H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S: two lines)
⎯ Slice levels: Seven levels
⎯ Sampling clock generated by AFC
⎯ Slice interrupt
⎯ Error detection
⎯ Flash memory or mask ROM (Refer to the product line-up)
⎯ High-speed static RAM
Product Name ROM RAM
H8S/2199R 128 k (256 k*) bytes 4 k (8 k*) bytes
H8S/2198R 112 k bytes 4 k bytes
H8S/2197R 96 k bytes
H8S/2196R 80 k bytes
4 k bytes
H8S/2197S 96 k bytes
H8S/2196S 80 k bytes
3 k bytes
Memory
Power-down state ⎯ Medium-speed mode
⎯ Sleep mode
⎯ Module stop mode
⎯ Standby mode
⎯ Subclock operation
Subactive mode, watch mode, subsleep mode
Interrupt controller ⎯ Six external interrupt pins (IRQ5 to IRQ0)
⎯ 44 internal interrupt sources (H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S : 35 internal
interrupt sources)
⎯ Three priority levels settable
Section 1 Overview
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 6 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Item Specifications
Clock pulse
generator
• Two types of clock pulse generator on-chip
⎯ System clock pulse generator: 8 to 10 MHz
⎯ Subclock pulse generator: 32.768 kHz
Packages ⎯ 112-pin plastic QFP (PRQP0112JA-A)
Part No.
Group
Mask ROM
Versions
F-ZTAT
Versions
ROM/RAM
(bytes)
Packages
H8S/2199R HD6432199R HD64F2199R 128 k/4 k
(256 k*/
8 k*)
PRQP0112JA-A
HD6432198R ⎯ 112 k/4 k PRQP0112JA-A
HD6432197R ⎯ 96 k/4 k PRQP0112JA-A
HD6432196R ⎯ 80 k/4 k PRQP0112JA-A
HD6432197S ⎯ 96 k/3 k PRQP0112JA-A
HD6432196S ⎯ 80 k/3 k PRQP0112JA-A
Product lineup
Note: * F-ZTAT version
Section 1 Overview
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 7 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
1.2 Internal Block Diagram
Figure 1.1 shows an internal block diagram of the H8S/2199R Group.
P23/SDA1
P25/SDA0
P22/SCK1
P26/SCL0
P21/SO1
P27/SYNCI
P20/SI1
P24/SCL1
V
SS
VCL
V
SS
V
CC
V
SS
V
CC
MD0
RES
OSC2
OSC1
X2
X1
Hsync(Csync) Sync signal
detection
OV
CC
OV
SS
SV
SS
SV
CC
CAPPWM
CTL(+)
CTLSMT(i)
CTLBias
CVin2
Csync/Hsync
VLPF/Vsync
CTL(–)
AUDIO FF
VIDEO FF
Vpulse
CTL FB
CTL REF
CTLAmp(o)
DFG
CFG
DRMPWM
DPG
P13/IRQ3
P15/IRQ5
P12/IRQ2
Interrupt
controller
R A M
R O M
Internal data bus
External data bus
External address bus
External data bus
External address bus
Internal address bus
Servo pins (CTL input/output
amplifier, three-level output, etc.)
CVin1
CVout
OSD
(Analog input/output)
Sync
separation
Sub-carrier
oscillator
AFC
H8S/2000 CPU
Bus
controller
Address trap
controller
P16/IC
P11/IRQ1
P17/TMOW
P10/IRQ0
P14/IRQ4
P03/AN3
P05/AN5
P02/AN2
P06/AN6
P01/AN1
P07/AN7
P00/AN0
P04/AN4
ANA
AN9
AN8
ANB
AV
CC
AV
SS
P83/C.Rotary/R
P85/COMP/B
P82/EXCTL
P86/EXTTRG
P81/EXCAP/YBO
P87/DPG
P80/YCO
P84/H.Amp SW/G
P33/PWM1
P35/PWM3
P32/PWM0
P36/BUZZ
P31/SV2
P37/TMO
P30/SV1
P34/PWM2
P43/FTIC
P45/FTOA
P42/FTIB
P46/FTOB
P41/FTIA
P47/RPTRG
P40/PWM14
P44/FTID
P73/PPG3
P75/PPG5/RP9
P72/PPG2
P76/PPG6/RPA
P71/PPG1
P77/PPG7/RPB
P70/PPG0
P74/PPG4/RP8
4fscout/2fscout
AFC pc
AFC osc
AFC LPF
4fscin/2fscin
P63/RP3
P65/RP5
P62/RP2
P66/RP6/ADTRG
P61/RP1
P67/RP7/TMBI
P60/RP0
P64/RP4
14-bit PWM
12-bit PWM
8-bit PWM Prescaler unit
Watchdog
timer
Timer L
Timer A
SCI1
Timer B
Timer J
I
2
C bus
interface
Timer R
A/D converter Timer X1
Port 7 Port 6 Port 4 Port 3
Port 2Port 1Port 0Port 8 Analog
port
Subclock pulse
generator
Subclock pulse
pulse generator
Servo circuit Data slicer
OSD
Figure 1.1 Internal Block Diagram of H8S/2199R Group (except for the H8S/2197S and
H8S/2196S)
Section 1 Overview
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 8 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Figure 1.2 shows an internal block diagram of the H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S.
P23/SDA1
P25
P22/SCK1
P26
P21/SO1
P27
P20/SI1
P24/SCL1
V
SS
VCL
V
SS
V
CC
V
SS
V
CC
MD0
RES
OSC2
OSC1
X2
X1
Hsync(Csync) Sync signal
detection
OV
CC
OV
SS
SV
SS
SV
CC
CAPPWM
CTL(+)
CTLSMT(i)
CTLBias
CVin2
Csync/Hsync
VLPF/Vsync
CTL(–)
AUDIO FF
VIDEO FF
Vpulse
CTL FB
CTL REF
CTLAmp(o)
DFG
CFG
DRMPWM
DPG
P13/IRQ3
P15/IRQ5
P12/IRQ2
Interrupt
controller
R A M
R O M
Internal data bus
External data bus
External address bus
External data bus
External address bus
Internal address bus
Servo pins (CTL input/output
amplifier, three-level output, etc.)
CVin1
CVout
OSD
(Analog input/output)
Sync
separation
Sub-carrier
oscillator
AFC
H8S/2000 CPU
Bus
controller
Address trap
controller
P16/IC
P11/IRQ1
P17/TMOW
P10/IRQ0
P14/IRQ4
P03/AN3
P05/AN5
P02/AN2
P06/AN6
P01/AN1
P07/AN7
P00/AN0
P04/AN4
ANA
AN9
AN8
ANB
AV
CC
AV
SS
P83/C.Rotary/R
P85/COMP/B
P82/EXCTL
P86/EXTTRG
P81/EXCAP/YBO
P87/DPG
P80/YCO
P84/H.Amp SW/G
P33/PWM1
P35
P32/PWM0
P36/BUZZ
P31/SV2
P37/TMO
P30/SV1
P34
P43
P45
P42
P46
P41
P47/RPTRG
P40
P44
P73/PPG3
P75/PPG5/RP9
P72/PPG2
P76/PPG6/RPA
P71/PPG1
P77/PPG7/RPB
P70/PPG0
P74/PPG4/RP8
4fscout/2fscout
AFC pc
AFC osc
AFC LPF
4fscin/2fscin
P63/RP3
P65/RP5
P62/RP2
P66/RP6/ADTRG
P61/RP1
P67/RP7/TMBI
P60/RP0
P64/RP4
12-bit PWM
8-bit PWM Prescaler unit
Watchdog
timer
Timer L
Timer A
SCI1
Timer B
Timer J
I
2
C bus
interface
Timer R
A/D converter
Port 7 Port 6 Port 4 Port 3
Port 2Port 1Port 0Port 8 Analog
port
Subclock pulse
generator
Subclock pulse
pulse generator
Servo circuit
Data slicer
OSD
Figure 1.2 Internal Block Diagram of the H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S
Section 1 Overview
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 9 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
1.3 Pin Arrangement and Functions
1.3.1 Pin Arrangement
Figure 1.3 shows the pin arrangement of the H8S/2199R Group.
P33/PWM1
P34/PWM2
MD0
VCL
OSC2
V
SS
OSC1
RES
X1
X2
FWE
P40/PWM14
P41/FTIA
P42/FTIB
P43/FTIC
P44/FTID
P45/FTOA
P46/FTOB
P47/RPTRG
P21/SO1
P20/SI1
P22/SCK1
P23/SDA1
P24/SCL1
P25/SDA0
P26/SCL0
P27/SYNCI
V
SS
P32/PWM0
P31/SV2
P30/SV1
P70/PPG0
P71/PPG1
P72/PPG2
P73/PPG3
P74/PPG4/RP8
P75/PPG5/RP9
P76/PPG6/RPA
P77/PPG7/RPB
P80/YCO
P81/EXCAP/YBO
P82/EXCTL
P83/C.Rotary/R
P84/H.Amp SW/G
P85/COMP/B
P86/EXTTRG
P87/DPG
DFG
VIDEO FF
AUDIO FF
DRM PWM
CAP PWM
Vpulse
V
SS
Csync
V
CC
V
CC
P35/PWM3
P36/BUZZ
P37/TMO
P60/RP0
P61/RP1
P62/RP2
P63/RP3
P64/RP4
P65/RP5
P66/RP6/ADTR
G
P67/RP7/TMBI
P17/TMOW
P16/IC
P15/IRQ5
P14/IRQ4
P13/IRQ3
P12/IRQ2
P11/IRQ1
P10/IRQ0
AV
CC
P00/AN0
P01/AN1
P02/AN2
P03/AN3
P04/AN4
P05/AN5
P06/AN6
1SV
SS
PRQP0112JA-A
(Top view)
84
2CTLREF 83
3CTL(+) 82
4CTL(–) 81
5CTLBias 80
6CTLFB 79
7CTLAmp(o) 78
8CTLSMT(i) 77
9CFG 76
10SV
CC
75
11AFCpc 74
12AFCosc 73
13AFCLPF 72
14Csync/Hsync 71
15VLPF/Vsync 70
16CVin2 69
17CVin1 68
18OV
CC
67
19CVout 66
20OV
SS
65
214fscout/2fscout 64
224fscin/2fscin 63
23
AV
SS
62
24
ANB 61
25ANA 60
26AN9 59
27AN8 58
28P07/AN7 57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
Figure 1.3 Pin Arrangement of H8S/2199R Group (except for the H8S/2197S and
H8S/2196S)
Section 1 Overview
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 10 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Figure 1.4 shows the pin arrangement of the H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S.
P33/PWM1
P34
MD0
VCL
OSC2
V
SS
OSC1
RES
X1
X2
NC
P40
P41
P42
P43
P44
P45
P46
P47/RPTRG
P21/SO1
P20/SI1
P22/SCK1
P23/SDA1
P24/SCL1
P25
P26
P27
V
SS
P32/PWM0
P31/SV2
P30/SV1
P70/PPG0
P71/PPG1
P72/PPG2
P73/PPG3
P74/PPG4/RP8
P75/PPG5/RP9
P76/PPG6/RPA
P77/PPG7/RPB
P80/YCO
P81/EXCAP/YBO
P82/EXCTL
P83/C.Rotary/R
P84/H.Amp SW/G
P85/COMP/B
P86/EXTTRG
P87/DPG
DFG
VIDEO FF
AUDIO FF
DRM PWM
CAP PWM
Vpulse
V
SS
Csync
V
CC
V
CC
P35
P36/BUZZ
P37/TMO
P60/RP0
P61/RP1
P62/RP2
P63/RP3
P64/RP4
P65/RP5
P66/RP6/ADTR
G
P67/RP7/TMBI
P17/TMOW
P16/IC
P15/IRQ5
P14/IRQ4
P13/IRQ3
P12/IRQ2
P11/IRQ1
P10/IRQ0
AV
CC
P00/AN0
P01/AN1
P02/AN2
P03/AN3
P04/AN4
P05/AN5
P06/AN6
1SV
SS
PRQP0112JA-A
(Top view)
84
2CTLREF 83
3CTL(+) 82
4CTL(–) 81
5CTLBias 80
6CTLFB 79
7CTLAmp(o) 78
8CTLSMT(i) 77
9CFG 76
10SV
CC
75
11AFCpc 74
12AFCosc 73
13AFCLPF 72
14Csync/Hsync 71
15VLPF/Vsync 70
16CVin2 69
17CVin1 68
18OV
CC
67
19CVout 66
20OV
SS
65
214fscout/2fscout 64
224fscin/2fscin 63
23
AV
SS
62
24
ANB 61
25ANA 60
26AN9 59
27AN8 58
28P07/AN7 57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
Figure 1.4 Pin Arrangement of H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S
Section 1 Overview
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 11 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
1.3.2 Pin Functions
Table 1.2 summarizes the functions of the H8S/2199R Group pins.
Table 1.2 Pin Functions
Type Symbol Pin No. I/O Name and Function
VCC 56, 112 Input Power supply:
All Vcc pins should be connected to the system
power supply (+5 V)
VSS 57, 79,
110
Input Ground:
All Vss pins should be connected to the system
power supply (0 V)
SVCC 10 Input Servo power supply:
SVcc pin should be connected to the servo
analog power supply (+5 V)
SVSS 1 Input Servo ground:
SVss pin should be connected to the servo
analog power supply (0 V)
AVCC 36 Input Analog power supply:
Power supply pin for A/D converter. It should be
connected to the system power supply (+5 V)
when the A/D converter is not used
AVSS 23 Input Analog ground:
Ground pin for A/D converter. It should be
connected to the system power supply (0 V)
OVCC 18 Input OSD power supply:
OVCC should be connected to the OSD analog
power supply (+5 V)
OVSS 20 Input OSD ground:
OVSS should be connected to the OSD analog
power supply (0 V)
Power
supply
VCL 81 Input Smoothing capacitor connection:
Connect 0.1-µF power-smoothing capacitance
between VCL and VSS
Clock OSC1 78 Input
OSC2 80 Output
Connected to a crystal oscillator. It can also input
an external clock. See section 9, Clock Pulse
Generator, for typical connection diagrams for a
crystal oscillator and external clock input
X1 76 Input
X2 75 Output
Connected to a 32.768 kHz crystal oscillator. See
section 9, Clock Pulse Generator, for typical
connection diagrams
Section 1 Overview
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 12 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Type Symbol Pin No. I/O Name and Function
Operating
mode
control
MD0 82 Input Mode pin:
This pin sets the operating mode. This pin
should not be changed while the MCU is in
operation
RES 77 Input Reset input:
When this pin is driven low, the chip is reset
System
control
FWE 74 Input Flash memory enable:
Enables/disables flash memory programming.
This pin is available only with MCU with flash
memory on-chip.
IRQ0 37 Input External interrupt request 0:
External interrupt input pin for which rising edge
sense, falling edge sense or both edges sense
are selectable
Interrupts
IRQ1
IRQ2
IRQ3
IRQ4
IRQ5
38
39
40
41
42
Input External interrupt requests 1 to 5:
External interrupt input pins for which rising or
falling edge sense are selectable
IC 43 Input Input capture input:
Input capture input pin for prescaler unit
Prescaler
unit
TMOW 44 Output Frequency division clock output:
Output pin for clock of which frequency is
divided by prescaler
Timers TMBI 45 Input Timer B event input:
Input pin for events to be input to Timer B
counter
IRQ1
IRQ2
38
39
Input Timer J event input:
Input pin for events to be input to Timer J RDT-
1or RDT-2 counter
TMO 53 Output Timer J timer output:
Output pin for toggle at underflow of RDT-1 of
Timer J, or remote controlled transmit data
BUZZ 54 Output Timer J buzzer output:
Output pin for toggle which is selectable among
fixed frequency, 1 Hz frequency divided from
subclock (32 kHz), and frequency division CTL
signal
Section 1 Overview
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 13 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Type Symbol Pin No. I/O Name and Function
IRQ3 40 Input Timer R input capture:
Input pin for input capture of Timer R TMRU-1 or
TMRU-2
FTOA*
FTOB*
68
67
Output Timer X1 output compare A and B output:
Output pin for output compare A and B of Timer
X1
Timers
FTIA*
FTIB*
FTIC*
FTID*
72
71
70
69
Input Timer X1 input capture A, B, C and D input:
Input pin for input capture A, B, C and D of
Timer X1
PWM0
PWM1
PWM2*
PWM3*
85
84
83
55
Output 8-bit PWM square waveform output:
Output pin for waveform generated by 8-bit
PWM 0, 1, 2 and 3
PWM
PWM14* 73 Output 14-bit PWM square waveform output:
Output pin for waveform generated by 14-bit
PWM
SCK1 63 Input
/output
SCI clock input/output:
Clock input pins for SCI 1
SI1 65 Input SCI receive data input:
Receive data input pins for SCI 1
Serial
commu-
nication
interface
(SCI) SO1 64 Output SCI transmit data output:
Transmit data output pins for SCI 1
I2C bus
interface
SCL0*
SCL1
59
61
Input
/output
I2C bus interface clock input/output:
Clock input/output pin for I2C bus interface
SDA0*
SDA1
60
62
Input
/output
I2C bus interface data input/output:
Data input/output pin for I2C bus interface
SYNCI* 58 Input I2C bus interface clock input:
I2C formatless serial clock input
Section 1 Overview
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 14 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Type Symbol Pin No. I/O Name and Function
AN7 to AN0 28 to 35 Input Analog input channels 7 to 0:
Analog data input pins. A/D conversion is started
by a software triggering
AN8
AN9
ANA
ANB
27
26
25
24
Input Analog input channels 8, 9, A and B:
Analog data input pins. A/D conversion is started
by an external trigger, a hardware trigger, or
software
A/D
converter
ADTRG 46 Input A/D conversion external trigger input:
A/D conversion for analog data input pins 8, 9,
A, and B is started by an external trigger
Servo
circuits
AUDIO FF 106 Output Audio FF:
Output pin for audio head switching signal
VIDEO FF 105 Output Video FF:
Output pin for video head switching signal
CAPPWM 108 Output Capstan mix:
12-bit PWM output pin giving result of capstan
speed error and phase error after filtering
DRMPWM 107 Output Drum mix:
12-bit PWM output pin giving result of drum
speed error and phase error after filtering
Vpulse 109 Output Additional V pulse:
Three-level output pin for additional V signal
synchronized to the VIDEO FF signal
C.Rotary 99 Output Color rotary signal:
Output pin for color signal processing control
signal in four-head special-effects playback
H.AmpSW 100 Output Head-amp switch:
Output pin for preamplifier output select signal in
four-head special-effects playback.
COMP 101 Input Compare input:
Input pin for signal giving the result of
preamplifier output comparison in four-head
special-effects playback.
CTL (+)
CTL (-)
3
4
Input
/output
CTL head (+) and (-) pins:
I/O pins for CTL signals
CTL Bias 5 Input CTL primary amp bias supply:
Bias supply pin for CTL primary amp
Section 1 Overview
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 15 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Type Symbol Pin No. I/O Name and Function
CTL Amp
(o)
7 Output CTL amp output:
Output pin for CTL amp
CTL SMT (i) 8 Input CTL Schmitt amp input:
Input pin for CTL Schmitt amp
CTLFB 6 Input CLT feedback input:
Input pin for CTL amp high-range characteristics
control
CTLREF 2 Output CTL amp reference voltage output:
Output pin for 1/2 Vcc (SV)
CFG 9 Input Capstan FG input:
Schmitt comparator input pin for CFG signal
DFG 104 Input Drum FG input:
Schmitt input pin for DFG signal
DPG 103 Input Drum PG input:
Schmitt input pin for DPG signal
EXCTL 98 Input External CTL input:
Input pin for external CTL signal
Csync 111 Input Mixed sync signal input:
Input pin for mixed sync signal
EXCAP 97 Input Capstan external sync signal input:
Signal input pin for external synchronization of
capstan phase control
EXTTRG 102 Input External trigger signal input:
Signal input pin for synchronization with
reference signal generator
SV1 87 Output Servo monitor output pin 1:
Output pin for servo module internal signal
SV2 86 Output Servo monitor output pin 2:
Output pin for servo module internal signal
Servo
circuits
PPG7 to
PPG0
95 to 88 Output PPG:
Output pin for HSW timing generator. To be
used when head switching is required as well as
AUDIO FF and VIDEO FF
Section 1 Overview
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 16 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Type Symbol Pin No. I/O Name and Function
Csync/
Hsync
14 Input/
output
Sync signal input/output:
Composite sync signal input/output or horizontal
sync signal input
VLPF/
Vsync
15 Input Sync signal input:
Pin for connecting external LPF for vertical sync
signal or input pin for vertical sync signal
AFC pc 11 Input/
output
AFC oscillation:
Pin for connecting external circuit for AFC
oscillation
AFC osc 12 Input/
output
AFC oscillation:
Pin for connecting external circuit for AFC
oscillation
AFC LPF 13 Input/
output
Pin for connecting external LPF for AFC
4 fsc in/
2 fsc in
22 Input fsc oscillation:
Input pin for subcarrier oscillator. 4fsc or 2fsc can
be selected
fsc: Subcarrier frequency
4 fsc out/
2 fsc out
21 Output fsc oscillation:
Output pin for subcarrier oscillator. 4fsc or 2fsc
can be selected
fsc: Subcarrier frequency
Sync
separator
CVin2 16 Input Composite video input:
Composite video signal input. Input 2-Vp-p
composite video signal, and the sync tip of the
signal is clamped to about 2.0 V
OSD CVin1 17 Input Composite video input:
Composite video signal input for OSD. Input 2-
Vp-p composite video signal, and the sync tip of
the signal is clamped to about 1.4 V
CVout 19 Output Composite video output:
Composite video signal output for OSD. 2-Vp-p
composite video signal is output
R 99 Output OSD digital output:
Color signal R output
G 100 Output OSD digital output:
Color signal G output
B 101 Output OSD digital output:
Color signal B output
Section 1 Overview
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 17 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Type Symbol Pin No. I/O Name and Function
OSD YCO 96 Output OSD digital output:
Character data output
YBO 97 Output OSD digital output:
Character display position output
Data slicer CVin2 16 Input Composite video input:
Composite video signal input. Input 2-Vp-p
composite video signal, and the sync tip of the
signal is clamped to about 2.0 V.
I/O port P07 to P00 28 to 35 Input Port 0:
8-bit input pins
P17 to P10 44 to 37 Input
/output
Port 1:
8-bit I/O pins
P27 to P20 58 to 65 Input
/output
Port 2:
8-bit I/O pins
P37 to P30 53 to 55
83 to 87
Input
/output
Port 3:
8-bit I/O pins
P47 to P40 66 to 73 Input
/output
Port 4:
8-bit I/O pins
P67 to P60 45 to 52 Input
/output
Port 6:
8-bit I/O pins
P77 to P70 95 to 88 Input
/output
Port 7:
8-bit I/O pins
P87 to P80 103 to 96 Input
/output
Port 8:
8-bit I/O pins
RP7 to RP0 45 to 52 Output Realtime output port:
8-bit realtime output pins
RPB to RP8 95 to 92 Output Realtime output port:
4-bit realtime output pins
RPTRG 66 Input Realtime output port trigger input:
Input pin for realtime output port trigger
Note: * Not available in the H8S/2197S or H8S/2196S.
Section 1 Overview
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 18 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Section 2 CPU
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 19 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Section 2 CPU
2.1 Overview
The H8S/2000 CPU is a high-speed central processing unit with an internal 32-bit architecture that
is upward-compatible with the H8/300 and H8/300H CPUs. The H8S/2000 CPU has sixteen 16-bit
general registers, can address a 16-Mbyte (architecturally 4-Gbyte) linear address space, and is
ideal for realtime control.
2.1.1 Features
The H8S/2000 CPU has the following features.
• Upward-compatible with H8/300 and H8/300H CPUs
Can execute H8/300 and H8/300H object programs
• General-register architecture
Sixteen 16-bit general registers (also usable as sixteen 8-bit registers or eight 32-bit registers)
• Sixty-five basic instructions
8/16/32-bit arithmetic and logic instructions
Multiply and divide instructions
Powerful bit-manipulation instructions
• Eight addressing modes
Register direct [Rn]
Register indirect [@ERn]
Register indirect with displacement [@(d:16,ERn) or @(d:32,ERn)]
Register indirect with post-increment or pre-decrement [@ERn+ or @-ERn]
Absolute address [@aa:8, @aa:16, @aa:24, or @aa:32]
Immediate [#xx:8, #xx:16, or #xx:32]
Program-counter relative [@(d:8,PC) or @(d:16,PC)]
Memory indirect [@@aa:8]
• 16-Mbyte address space
Program: 16 Mbytes
Data: 16 Mbytes (4 Gbytes architecturally)
Section 2 CPU
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 20 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
• High-speed operation
All frequently-used instructions execute in one or two states
Maximum clock rate: 10 MHz
8/16/32-bit register-register add/subtract: 100 ns
8 × 8-bit register-register multiply: 1200 ns
16 ÷ 8-bit register-register divide: 1200 ns
16 × 16-bit register-register multiply: 2000 ns
32 ÷ 16-bit register-register divide: 2000 ns
• Two CPU operating modes
Normal mode*/Advanced mode
Note: * Normal mode is not available for this LSI.
• Power-down state
Transition to power-down state by SLEEP instruction
CPU clock speed selection
2.1.2 Differences between H8S/2600 CPU and H8S/2000 CPU
The differences between the H8S/2600 CPU and the H8S/2000 CPU are shown below.
• Register configuration
The MAC register is supported only by the H8S/2600 CPU.
• Basic instructions
The four instructions MAC, CLRMAC, LDMAC, and STMAC are supported only by the
H8S/2600 CPU.
• Number of execution states
The number of execution states of the MULXU and MULXS instructions differ as follows.
Number of Execution States
Instruction Mnemonic H8S/2600 H8S/2000
MULXU.B Rs, Rd 3 12 MULXU
MULXU.W Rs, Erd 4 20
MULXS MULXS.B Rs, Rd 4 13
MULXS.W Rs, Erd 5 21
There are also differences in the address space, EXR register functions, power-down state, etc.,
depending on the product.
Section 2 CPU
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 21 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
2.1.3 Differences from H8/300 CPU
In comparison to the H8/300 CPU, the H8S/2000 CPU has the following enhancements.
• More general registers and control registers
Eight 16-bit extended registers, and one 8-bit control register, have been added.
• Expanded address space
Normal mode* supports the same 64-kbyte address space as the H8/300 CPU.
Advanced mode supports a maximum 16-Mbyte address space.
• Enhanced addressing mode
The addressing modes have been enhanced to make effective use of the 16-Mbyte address
space.
• Enhanced instructions
Addressing modes of bit-manipulation instructions have been enhanced.
Signed multiply and divide instructions have been added.
Two-bit shift instructions have been added.
Instructions for saving and restoring multiple registers have been added.
A test and set instruction has been added.
• Higher speed
Basic instructions execute twice as fast.
Note: * Normal mode is not available for this LSI.
2.1.4 Differences from H8/300H CPU
In comparison to the H8/300H CPU, the H8S/2000 CPU has the following enhancements.
• Additional control register
One 8-bit control register has been added.
• Enhanced instructions
Addressing modes of bit-manipulation instructions have been enhanced.
Two-bit shift instructions have been added.
Instructions for saving and restoring multiple registers have been added.
A test and set instruction has been added.
• Higher speed
Basic instructions execute twice as fast.
Section 2 CPU
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 22 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
2.2 CPU Operating Modes
The H8S/2000 CPU has two operating modes: normal* and advanced. Normal mode* supports a
maximum 64-kbyte address space. Advanced mode supports a maximum 16-Mbyte total address
space (architecturally the maximum total address space is 4 Gbytes, with a maximum of 16
Mbytes for the program area and a maximum of 4 Gbytes for the data area).
The mode is selected by the mode pins of the microcontroller.
Note: * Normal mode is not available for this LSI.
CPU operating mode
Normal mode*
Advanced mode
Maximum 64 kbytes for program
and data areas combined
Maximum 16 Mbytes for program
and data areas combined
Note: * Normal mode is not available for this LSI.
Figure 2.1 CPU Operating Modes
2.2.1 Normal Mode (Not available for this LSI)
The exception vector table and stack have the same structure as in the H8/300 CPU.
(1) Address Space
A maximum address space of 64 kbytes can be accessed.
(2) Extended Registers (En)
The extended registers (E0 to E7) can be used as 16-bit registers, or as the upper 16-bit segments
of 32-bit registers. When En is used as a 16-bit register it can contain any value, even when the
corresponding general register (Rn) is used as an address register. If the general register is
referenced in the register indirect addressing mode with pre-decrement (@-Rn) or post-increment
(@Rn+) and a carry or borrow occurs, however, the value in the corresponding extended register
(En) will be affected.
Section 2 CPU
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 23 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
(3) Instruction Set
All instructions and addressing modes can be used. Only the lower 16 bits of effective addresses
(EA) are valid.
(4) Exception Vector Table and Memory Indirect Branch Addresses
In normal mode the top area starting at H'0000 is allocated to the exception vector table. One
branch address is stored per 16 bits. The configuration of the exception vector table in normal
mode is shown in figure 2.2. For details of the exception vector table, see section 5, Exception
Handling.
H'0000
H'0001
H'0002
H'0003
H'0004
H'0005
H'0006
H'0007
H'0008
H'0009
H'000A
H'000B
Reset exception vector
Exception vector 1
Exception vector 2
Exception vector table
(Reserved for system use)
Figure 2.2 Exception Vector Table (Normal Mode)
The memory indirect addressing mode (@@aa:8) employed in the JMP and JSR instructions uses
an 8-bit absolute address included in the instruction code to specify a memory operand that
contains a branch address. In normal mode the operand is a 16-bit word operand, providing a 16-
bit branch address. Branch addresses can be stored in the top area from H'0000 to H'00FF. Note
that this area is also used for the exception vector table.
Section 2 CPU
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 24 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
(5) Stack Structure
When the program counter (PC) is pushed onto the stack in a subroutine call, and the PC and
condition-code register (CCR) are pushed onto the stack in exception handling, they are stored as
shown in figure 2.3. The extended control register (EXR) is not pushed onto the stack. For details,
see section 5, Exception Handling.
(a) Subroutine Branch (b) Exception Handling
PC
(16 bits)
CCR
CCR*
PC
(16 bits)
SP SP
Note: * Ignored when returning.
Figure 2.3 Stack Structure in Normal Mode
2.2.2 Advanced Mode
(1) Address Space
Linear access is provided to a 16-Mbyte maximum address space (architecturally a maximum 16-
Mbyte program area and a maximum 4-Gbyte data area, with a maximum of 4 Gbytes for program
and data areas combined).
(2) Extended Registers (En)
The extended registers (E0 to E7) can be used as 16-bit registers, or as the upper 16-bit segments
of 32-bit registers or address registers.
(3) Instruction Set
All instructions and addressing modes can be used.
Section 2 CPU
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 25 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
(4) Exception Vector Table and Memory Indirect Branch Addresses
In advanced mode the top area starting at H'00000000 is allocated to the exception vector table in
units of 32 bits. In each 32 bits, the upper 8 bits are ignored and a branch address is stored in the
lower 24 bits (figure 2.4). For details of the exception vector table, see section 5, Exception
Handling.
H'00000000
H'00000003
H'00000004
H'0000000B
H'0000000C
Exception vector table
Reserved
Reset exception vector
(Reserved for system use)
Reserved
Exception vector 1
Reserved
H'00000010
H'00000008
H'00000007
Figure 2.4 Exception Vector Table (Advanced Mode)
The memory indirect addressing mode (@@aa:8) employed in the JMP and JSR instructions uses
an 8-bit absolute address included in the instruction code to specify a memory operand that
contains a branch address. In advanced mode the operand is a 32-bit longword operand, providing
a 32-bit branch address. The upper 8 bits of these 32 bits are a reserved area that is regarded as
Section 2 CPU
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 26 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'00. Branch addresses can be stored in the area from H'00000000 to H'000000FF. Note that the
first part of this range is also the exception vector table.
(5) Stack Structure
In advanced mode, when the program counter (PC) is pushed onto the stack in a subroutine call,
and the PC and condition-code register (CCR) are pushed onto the stack in exception handling,
they are stored as shown in figure 2.5. The extended control register (EXR) is not pushed onto the
stack. For details, see section 5, Exception Handling.
(a) Subroutine Branch (b) Exception Handling
PC
(24 bits)
CCR
PC
(24 bits)
SP SP
Reserved
Figure 2.5 Stack Structure in Advanced Mode
Section 2 CPU
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 27 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
2.3 Address Space
Figure 2.6 shows a memory map of the H8S/2000 CPU. The H8S/2000 CPU provides linear
access to a maximum 64-kbyte address space in normal mode*, and a maximum 16-Mbyte
(architecturally 4-Gbyte) address space in advanced mode.
Note: * Normal mode is not available for this LSI.
(b) Advanced mode
H'0000
H'FFFF
H'00000000
H'FFFFFFFF
H'00FFFFFF
(a) Normal mode*
Data area
Program area
Cannot be used
with this LSI
Note: * Normal mode is not available for this LSI.
Figure 2.6 Memory Map
Section 2 CPU
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 28 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
2.4 Register Configuration
2.4.1 Overview
The CPU has the internal registers shown in figure 2.7. There are two types of registers: general
registers and control registers.
T – – – – I2 I1 I0
EXR
76543210
PC
23 0
15 0 7 0 7 0
E0
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
R0H
R1H
R2H
R3H
R4H
R5H
R6H
R7H
R0L
R1L
R2L
R3L
R4L
R5L
R6L
R7L
General Registers (Rn) and Extended Registers (En)
Control Registers (CR)
Legend:
SP
PC
EXR
T
I2 to I0
CCR
I
UI
ER0
ER1
ER2
ER3
ER4
ER5
ER6
ER7 (SP)
IUIHUNZVC
CCR
76543210
: Half-carry flag
: User bit
: Negative flag
: Zero flag
: Overflow flag
: Carry flag
H
U
N
Z
V
C
: Stack pointer
: Program counter
: Extended control register
: Trace bit
: Interrupt mask bits
: Condition-code register
: Interrupt mask bit
: User bit or interrupt mask bit
Note: * Does not affect operation in this LSI.
*
Figure 2.7 CPU Registers
Section 2 CPU
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 29 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
2.4.2 General Registers
The CPU has eight 32-bit general registers. These general registers are all functionally alike and
can be used as both address registers and data registers. When a general register is used as a data
register, it can be accessed as a 32-bit, 16-bit, or 8-bit register. When the general registers are used
as 32-bit registers or address registers, they are designated by the letters ER (ER0 to ER7). The ER
registers divide into 16-bit general registers designated by the letters E (E0 to E7) and R (R0 to
R7). These registers are functionally equivalent, providing a maximum of sixteen 16-bit registers.
The E registers (E0 to E7) are also referred to as extended registers. The R registers divide into 8-
bit general registers designated by the letters RH (R0H to R7H) and RL (R0L to R7L). These
registers are functionally equivalent, providing a maximum of sixteen 8-bit registers. Figure 2.8
illustrates the usage of the general registers. The usage of each register can be selected
independently.
• Address registers
• 32-bit registers • 16-bit registers • 8-bit registers
ER registers
(ER0 to ER7)
E registers (extended registers)
(E0 to E7)
R registers
(R0 to R7)
RH registers
(R0H to R7H)
RL registers
(R0L to R7L)
Figure 2.8 Usage of General Registers
General register ER7 has the function of stack pointer (SP) in addition to its general-register
function, and is used implicitly in exception handling and subroutine calls. Figure 2.9 shows the
stack.
Section 2 CPU
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 30 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
SP (ER7)
Free area
Stack area
Figure 2.9 Stack
2.4.3 Control Registers
The control registers are the 24-bit program counter (PC), 8-bit extended control register (EXR),
and 8-bit condition-code register (CCR).
(1) Program Counter (PC)
This 24-bit counter indicates the address of the next instruction the CPU will execute. The length
of all CPU instructions is 2 bytes (one word), so the least significant PC bit is ignored. (When an
instruction is fetched, the least significant PC bit is regarded as 0.)
(2) Extended Control Register (EXR)
An 8-bit register. In this LSI, this register does not affect operation.
Bit 7: Trace Bit (T): This bit is reserved. In this LSI, this bit does not affect operation.
Bits 6 to 3: Reserved: These bits are reserved. They are always read as 1.
Bits 2 to 0: Interrupt Mask Bits (I2 to I0): These bits are reserved. In this LSI, these bits do not
affect operation.
(3) Condition: Code Register (CCR)
This 8-bit register contains internal CPU status information, including an interrupt mask bit (I) and
half-carry (H), negative (N), zero (Z), overflow (V), and carry (C) flags.
Section 2 CPU
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 31 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 7: Interrupt Mask Bit (I): Masks interrupts other than NMI when set to 1. (NMI is accepted
regardless of the I bit setting.) The I bit is set to 1 by hardware at the start of an exception-
handling sequence. For details, see section 6, Interrupt Controller.
Bit 6: User Bit or Interrupt Mask Bit (UI): Can be written and read by software using the LDC,
STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC instructions. This bit can also be used as an interrupt mask bit. For
details, see section 6, Interrupt Controller.
Bit 5: Half-Carry Flag (H): When the ADD.B, ADDX.B, SUB.B, SUBX.B, CMP.B, or NEG.B
instruction is executed, this flag is set to 1 if there is a carry or borrow at bit 3, and cleared to 0
otherwise. When the ADD.W, SUB.W, CMP.W, or NEG.W instruction is executed, the H flag is
set to 1 if there is a carry or borrow at bit 11, and cleared to 0 otherwise. When the ADD.L,
SUB.L, CMP.L, or NEG.L instruction is executed, the H flag is set to 1 if there is a carry or
borrow at bit 27, and cleared to 0 otherwise.
Bit 4: User Bit (U): Can be written and read by software using the LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and
XORC instructions.
Bit 3: Negative Flag (N): Stores the value of the most significant bit (sign bit) of data.
Bit 2: Zero Flag (Z): Set to 1 to indicate zero data, and cleared to 0 to indicate non-zero data.
Bit 1: Overflow Flag (V): Set to 1 when an arithmetic overflow occurs, and cleared to 0
otherwise.
Bit 0: Carry Flag (C): Set to 1 when a carry occurs, and cleared to 0 otherwise. Used by:
a. Add instructions, to indicate a carry
b. Subtract instructions, to indicate a borrow
c. Shift and rotate instructions, to store the carry
The carry flag is also used as a bit accumulator by bit-manipulation instructions.
Some instructions leave some or all of the flag bits unchanged. For the action of each instruction
on the flag bits, see appendix A.1, Instructions.
Operations can be performed on the CCR bits by the LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC
instructions. The N, Z, V, and C flags are used as branching conditions for conditional branch
(Bcc) instructions.
Section 2 CPU
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 32 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
2.4.4 Initial Register Values
Reset exception handling loads the CPU's program counter (PC) from the vector table, clears the
trace bit in EXR to 0, and sets the interrupt mask bits in CCR and EXR to 1. The other CCR bits
and the general registers are not initialized. In particular, the stack pointer (ER7) is not initialized.
The stack pointer should therefore be initialized by an MOV.L instruction executed immediately
after a reset.
Section 2 CPU
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 33 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
2.5 Data Formats
The CPU can process 1-bit, 4-bit (BCD), 8-bit (byte), 16-bit (word), and 32-bit (longword) data.
Bit-manipulation instructions operate on 1-bit data by accessing bit n (n = 0, 1, 2, ..., 7) of byte
operand data. The DAA and DAS decimal-adjust instructions treat byte data as two digits of 4-bit
BCD data.
2.5.1 General Register Data Formats
Figure 2.10 shows the data formats in general registers.
70
70
MSB LSB
MSB LSB
7043
Upper digit Lower digit
Don't care
Don't care
Don't care
7043
Upper digit Lower digit
70
Don't care
65432710
70
Don't care 65432710
Don't care
Data FormatData type
1-bit data
1-bit data
4-bit BCD data
4-bit BCD data
Byte data
Byte data
General Register
RnH
RnL
RnH
RnL
RnH
RnL
Figure 2.10 General Register Data Formats (1)
Section 2 CPU
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 34 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
15 0
MSB LSB
15 0
MSB LSB
31 16
MSB
15 0
LSB
En Rn
Data Type
Word data
Word data
Longword data
General Register
Rn
En
ERn
Data format
ERn
En
Rn
RnH
RnL
MSB
LSB
: General register ER
: General register E
: General register R
: General register RH
: General register RL
: Most significant bit
: Least significant bit
Legend:
Figure 2.11 General Register Data Formats (2)
Section 2 CPU
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 35 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
2.5.2 Memory Data Formats
Figure 2.12 shows the data formats in memory.
The CPU can access word data and longword data in memory, but word or longword data must
begin at an even address. If an attempt is made to access word or longword data at an odd address,
no address error occurs but the least significant bit of the address is regarded as 0, so the access
starts at the preceding address. This also applies to instruction fetches.
70
76 543210
MSB LSB
MSB
MSB
LSB
LSB
Address
Address L
Address L
Address 2M
Address 2N
Address 2N +1
Address 2N +2
Address 2N +3
1-bit data
Byte data
Word data
Longword data
Data Type Data Format
Address 2M +1
Figure 2.12 Memory Data Formats
When ER7 (SP) is used as an address register to access the stack, the operand size should be word
size or longword size.
Section 2 CPU
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 36 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
2.6 Instruction Set
2.6.1 Overview
The H8S/2000 CPU has 65 types of instructions. The instructions are classified by function in
table 2.1.
Table 2.1 Instruction Classification
Function Instructions Size Types
MOV BWL
POP*1, PUSH*1 WL
LDM*5, STM*5 L
Data transfer
MOVFPE*3, MOVTPE*3 B
5
ADD, SUB, CMP, NEG BWL
ADDX, SUBX, DAA, DAS B
INC, DEC BWL
ADDS, SUBS L
MULXU, DIVXU, MULXS, DIVXS BW
EXTU, EXTS WL
Arithmetic
TAS*4 B
19
Logic operations AND, OR, XOR, NOT BWL 4
Shift SHAL, SHAR, SHLL, SHLR, ROTL, ROTR, ROTXL,
ROTXR
BWL 8
Bit manipulation BSET, BCLR, BNOT, BTST, BLD, BILD, BST,
BIST, BAND, BIAND, BOR, BIOR, BXOR, BIXOR
B 14
Branch Bcc*2, JMP, BSR, JSR, RTS ⎯ 5
System control TRAPA, RTE, SLEEP, LDC, STC, ANDC, ORC,
XORC, NOP
⎯ 9
Block data transfer EEPMOV ⎯ 1
Total: 65 types
Legend:
B: Byte
W: Word
L: Longword
Section 2 CPU
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 37 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Notes: 1. POP.W Rn and PUSH.W Rn are identical to MOV.W @SP+, Rn and MOV.W Rn, @-
SP.
POP.L ERn and PUSH.L ERn are identical to MOV.L @SP+, ERn and MOV.L ERn, @-
SP.
2. Bcc is the general name for conditional branch instructions.
3. Cannot be used in the H8S/2199 Group.
4. Only register ER0, ER1, ER4, or ER5 should be used when using the TAS instruction.
5. Only registers ER0 to ER6 should be used when using the STM/LDM instruction.
Section 2 CPU
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 38 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
2.6.2 Instructions and Addressing Modes
Table 2.2 indicates the combinations of instructions and addressing modes that the H8S/2000 CPU
can use.
Table 2.2 Combinations of Instructions and Addressing Modes
Addressing Modes
Function
Arithmetic operationsSystem control
Branch
Logic
operation
Instruction
MOV
POP, PUSH
LDM*
3
, STM*
3
ADD, CMP
SUB
ADDX, SUBX
ADDS, SUBS
INC, DEC
DAA, DAS
NEG
EXTU, EXTS
TAS*
2
MOVFPE,
MOVTPE*
1
MULXU,
DIVXU
MULXS,
DIVXS
AND, OR,
XOR
ANDC,
ORC, XORC
NOT
Bcc, BSR
JMP, JSR
RTS
TRAPA
RTE
SLEEP
LDC
STC
NOP
Shift
Bit manipulation
Block data transfer
Data transfer
BWL
#xx
—
—
BWL
WL
B
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
BWL
B
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
B
—
—
—
—
—
BWL
Rn
—
—
BWL
BWL
B
L
BWL
B
BWL
WL
—
—
BW
BW
BWL
—
BWL
—
—
—
—
—
—
B
B
—
BWL
B
—
BWL
@ERn
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
B
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
W
W
—
—
B
—
BWL
@(d:16, ERn)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
W
W
—
—
—
—
BWL
@(d:32, ERn)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
W
W
—
—
—
—
BWL
@-ERn/@ERn+
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
W
W
—
—
—
—
B
@aa:8
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
B
—
BWL
@aa:16
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
B
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
W
W
—
—
B
—
—
@aa:24
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
BWL
@aa:32
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
W
W
—
—
B
—
—
@(d:8, PC)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
@(d:16, PC)
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
@@aa:8
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
WL
L
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
BW
Legend:
B: Byte
W: Word
L: Longword
Notes: 1. Cannot be used in this LSI.
2. Only register ER0, ER1, ER4, or ER5 should be used when using the TAS instruction.
3. Only registers ER0 to ER6 should be used when using the STM/LDM instruction.
Section 2 CPU
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 39 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
2.6.3 Table of Instructions Classified by Function
Tables 2.3 to 2.10 summarize the functions of the instructions. The notation used in table 2.3 is
defined below.
Operation Notation
Rd General register (destination)*
Rs General register (source)*
Rn General register*
ERn General register (32-bit register)
(EAd) Destination operand
(EAs) Source operand
EXR Extended control register
CCR Condition-code register
N N (negative) flag in CCR
Z Z (zero) flag in CCR
V V (overflow) flag in CCR
C C (carry) flag in CCR
PC Program counter
SP Stack pointer
#IMM Immediate data
Disp Displacement
+ Addition
− Subtraction
× Multiplication
÷ Division
∧ Logical AND
∨ Logical OR
⊕ Logical exclusive OR
→ Move
∼ NOT (logical complement)
:8/:16/:24/:32 8-, 16-, 24-, or 32-bit length
Note: * General registers include 8-bit registers (R0H to R7H, R0L to R7L), 16-bit registers (R0
to R7, E0 to E7), and 32-bit registers (ER0 to ER7).
Section 2 CPU
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 40 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Table 2.3 Data Transfer Instructions
Instruction Size*1 Function
MOV B/W/L (EAs) → Rd, Rs → (EAd)
Moves data between two general registers or between a general
register and memory, or moves immediate data to a general
register
MOVFPE B Cannot be used in this LSI
MOVTPE B Cannot be used in this LSI
POP W/L @SP+ → Rn
Pops a general register from the stack
POP.W Rn is identical to MOV.W @SP+, Rn
POP.L ERn is identical to MOV.L @SP+, ERn
PUSH W/L Rn → @-SP
Pushes a general register onto the stack
PUSH.W Rn is identical to MOV.W Rn, @-SP
PUSH.L ERn is identical to MOV.L ERn, @-SP
LDM*2 L @SP+ → Rn (register list)
Pops two or more general registers from the stack
STM*2 L Rn (register list) → @-SP
Pushes two or more general registers onto the stack
Notes: 1. Size refers to the operand size.
B: Byte
W: Word
L: Longword
2. Only registers ER0 to ER6 should be used when using the STM/LDM instruction.
Section 2 CPU
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 41 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Table 2.4 Arithmetic Instructions
Instruction Size*1 Function
ADD
SUB
B/W/L Rd ± Rs → Rd, Rd ± #IMM → Rd
Performs addition or subtraction on data in two general registers,
or on immediate data and data in a general register. (Immediate
byte data cannot be subtracted from byte data in a general
register. Use the SUBX or ADD instruction)
ADDX
SUBX
B Rd ± Rs ± C → Rd, Rd ± #IMM ± C → Rd
Performs addition or subtraction with carry on byte data in two
general registers, or on immediate data and data in a general
register
INC
DEC
B/W/L Rd ± 1 → Rd, Rd ± 2 → Rd
Increments or decrements a general register by 1 or 2. (Byte
operands can be incremented or decremented by 1 only)
ADDS
SUBS
L Rd ± 1 → Rd, Rd ± 2 → Rd, Rd ± 4 → Rd
Adds or subtracts the value 1, 2, or 4 to or from data in a 32-bit
register
DAA
DAS
B Rd decimal adjust → Rd
Decimal-adjusts an addition or subtraction result in a general
register by referring to the CCR to produce 4-bit BCD data
MULXU B/W Rd × Rs → Rd
Performs unsigned multiplication on data in two general registers:
either 8 bits × 8 bits → 16 bits or 16 bits × 16 bits → 32 bits
MULXS B/W Rd × Rs → Rd
Performs signed multiplication on data in two general registers:
either 8 bits × 8 bits → 16 bits or 16 bits × 16 bits → 32 bits
DIVXU B/W Rd ÷ Rs → Rd
Performs unsigned division on data in two general registers:
either 16 bits ÷ 8 bits × 8-bit quotient and 8-bit remainder or 32
bits ÷ 16 bits × 16-bit quotient and 16-bit remainder
Section 2 CPU
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 42 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Instruction Size*1 Function
DIVXS B/W Rd ÷ Rs → Rd
Performs signed division on data in two general registers: either
16 bits ÷ 8 bits → 8-bit quotient and 8-bit remainder or 32 bits ÷
16 bits → 16-bit quotient and 16-bit remainder
CMP B/W/L Rd - Rs, Rd - #IMM
Compares data in a general register with data in another general
register or with immediate data, and sets CCR bits according to
the result
NEG B/W/L 0 - Rd → Rd
Takes the two's complement (arithmetic complement) of data in
a general register
EXTS W/L Rd (sign extension) → Rd
Extends the lower 8 bits of a 16-bit register to word size, or the
lower 16 bits of a 32-bit register to longword size, by extending
the sign bit
EXTU W/L Rd (zero extension) → Rd
Extends the lower 8 bits of a 16-bit register to word size, or the
lower 16 bits of a 32-bit register to longword size, by padding
with zeros on the left
TAS B @ERd - 0, 1 → (<bit 7> of @ERd)*2
Tests memory contents, and sets the most significant bit (bit 7)
to 1
Notes: 1. Size refers to the operand size.
B: Byte
W: Word
L: Longword
2. Only register ER0, ER1, ER4, or ER5 should be used when using the TAS instruction.
Section 2 CPU
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 43 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Table 2.5 Logic Instructions
Instruction Size* Function
AND B/W/L Rd ∧ Rs → Rd, Rd ∧ #IMM → Rd
Performs a logical AND operation on a general register and
another general register or immediate data
OR B/W/L Rd ∨ Rs → Rd, Rd ∨ #IMM → Rd
Performs a logical OR operation on a general register and
another general register or immediate data
XOR B/W/L Rd ⊕ Rs → Rd, Rd ⊕ #IMM → Rd
Performs a logical exclusive OR operation on a general register
and another general register or immediate data
NOT B/W/L ~ Rd → Rd
Takes the one's complement (logical complement) of general
register contents
Note: * Size refers to the operand size.
B: Byte
W: Word
L: Longword
Table 2.6 Shift Instructions
Instruction Size* Function
SHAL
SHAR
B/W/L Rd (shift) → Rd
Performs an arithmetic shift on general register contents
A 1-bit or 2-bit shift is possible
SHLL
SHLR
B/W/L Rd (shift) → Rd
Performs a logical shift on general register contents
A 1-bit or 2-bit shift is possible
ROTL
ROTR
B/W/L Rd (rotate) → Rd
Rotates general register contents
1-bit or 2-bit rotation is possible
ROTXL
ROTXR
B/W/L Rd (rotate) → Rd
Rotates general register contents through the carry flag
1-bit or 2-bit rotation is possible
Note: * Size refers to the operand size.
B: Byte
W: Word
L: Longword
Section 2 CPU
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 44 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Table 2.7 Bit Manipulation Instructions
Instruction Size* Function
BSET B 1 → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Sets a specified bit in a general register or memory operand to
1. The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data or the
lower three bits of a general register
BCLR B 0 → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Clears a specified bit in a general register or memory operand to
0. The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data or the
lower three bits of a general register
BNOT B ~ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Inverts a specified bit in a general register or memory operand.
The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data or the lower
three bits of a general register
BTST B ~ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → Z
Tests a specified bit in a general register or memory operand
and sets or clears the Z flag accordingly. The bit number is
specified by 3-bit immediate data or the lower three bits of a
general register
BAND B C ∧ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C
ANDs the carry flag with a specified bit in a general register or
memory operand and stores the result in the carry flag
BIAND B C ∧ [~(<bit-No.> of <EAd>)] → C
ANDs the carry flag with the inverse of a specified bit in a
general register or memory operand and stores the result in the
carry flag
The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data
BOR B C ∨ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C
ORs the carry flag with a specified bit in a general register or
memory operand and stores the result in the carry flag
BIOR B C∨ [~(<bit-No.> of <EAd>)] → C
ORs the carry flag with the inverse of a specified bit in a general
register or memory operand and stores the result in the carry
flag
The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data
Section 2 CPU
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 45 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Instruction Size* Function
BOXR B C ⊕ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C
Exclusive-ORs the carry flag with a specified bit in a general
register or memory operand and stores the result in the carry
flag
BIXOR B C ⊕ [~ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)] → C
Exclusive-ORs the carry flag with the inverse of a specified bit in
a general register or memory operand and stores the result in
the carry flag
The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data
BLD B (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C
Transfers a specified bit in a general register or memory
operand to the carry flag
BILD B ~ (<bit-No.> of <EAd>) → C
Transfers the inverse of a specified bit in a general register or
memory operand to the carry flag
The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data
BST B C → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Transfers the carry flag value to a specified bit in a general
register or memory operand
BIST B ~ C → (<bit-No.> of <EAd>)
Transfers the inverse of the carry flag value to a specified bit in a
general register or memory operand
The bit number is specified by 3-bit immediate data
Note: * Size refers to the operand size.
B: Byte
Section 2 CPU
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 46 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Table 2.8 Branch Instructions
Instruction Size* Function
Branches to a specified address if a specified condition is true
The branching conditions are listed below
Mnemonic Description Condition
BRA (BT) Always (True) Always
BRN (BF) Never (False) Never
BHI HIgh CVZ = 0
BLS Low of Same CVZ = 1
BCC (BHS) Carry Clear
(High or Same)
C = 0
BCS (BLO) Carry Set (LOw) C = 1
BNE Not Equal Z = 0
BEQ EQual Z = 1
BVC oVerflow Clear V = 0
BVS oVerflow Set V = 1
BPL PLus N = 0
BMI MInus N = 1
BGE Greater or Equal NV = 0
BLT Less Than N ⊕ V = 1
BGT Greater Than Z∨ (N ⊕ V) = 0
BLE Less or Equal Z∨ (N ⊕ V) = 1
Bcc ⎯
JMP ⎯ Branches unconditionally to a specified address
BSR ⎯ Branches to a subroutine at a specified address
JSR ⎯ Branches to a subroutine at a specified address
RTS ⎯ Returns from a subroutine
Section 2 CPU
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 47 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Table 2.9 System Control Instructions
Instruction Size* Function
TRAPA ⎯ Starts trap-instruction exception handling
RTE ⎯ Returns from an exception-handling routine
SLEEP ⎯ Causes a transition to a power-down state
LDC B/W (EAs) → CCR, (EAs) → EXR
Moves contents of a general register or memory or immediate
data to CCR or EXR. Although CCR and EXR are 8-bit registers,
word-size transfers are performed between them and memory.
The upper 8 bits are valid
STC B/W CCR → (EAd), EXR → (EAd)
Transfers CCR or EXR contents to a general register or
memory. Although CCR and EXR are 8-bit registers, word-size
transfers are performed between them and memory. The upper
8 bits are valid
ANDC B CCR ∧ #IMM → CCR, EXR ∧ #IMM → EXR
Logically ANDs the CCR or EXR contents with immediate data
ORC B CCR∨ #IMM → CCR, EXR∨ #IMM → EXR
Logically ORs the CCR or EXR contents with immediate data
XORC B CCR ⊕ #IMM → CCR, EXR ⊕ #IMM → EXR
Logically exclusive-ORs the CCR or EXR contents with
immediate data
NOP ⎯ PC + 2 → PC
Only increments the program counter
Note: * Size refers to the operand size.
B: Byte
W: Word
Section 2 CPU
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 48 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Table 2.10 Block Data Transfer Instructions
Instruction Size* Function
EEPMOV.B ⎯ if R4L ≠ 0 then
Repeat @ER5+ → @ER6+
R4L −1 → R4L
Until R4L = 0
else next;
EEPMOV.W ⎯ if R4 ≠ 0 then
Repeat @ER5+ → ER6+
R4 −1 → R4
Until R4 = 0
else next;
Transfers a data block according to parameters set in general
registers R4L or R4, ER5, and ER6
R4L or R4: size of block (bytes)
Section 2 CPU
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 49 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
2.6.4 Basic Instruction Formats
The CPU instructions consist of 2-byte (1-word) units. An instruction consists of an operation
field (op field), a register field (r field), an effective address extension (EA field), and a condition
field (cc).
Figure 2.13 shows examples of instruction formats.
op
op rn rm
NOP, RTS, etc.
ADD.B Rn, Rm, etc.
MOV.B@(d:16, Rn), Rm, etc.
(1) Operation field only
(2) Operation field and register fields
(3) Operation field, register fields, and effective address extension
rn rm
op
EA (disp)
(4) Operation field, effective address extension, and condition field
op cc EA (disp) BRA d:16, etc.
Figure 2.13 Instruction Formats (Examples)
(1) Operation Field
Indicates the function of the instruction, the addressing mode, and the operation to be carried out
on the operand. The operation field always includes the first four bits of the instruction. Some
instructions have two operation fields.
(2) Register Field
Specifies a general register. Address registers are specified by 3 bits, data registers by 3 bits or 4
bits. Some instructions have two register fields. Some have no register field.
(3) Effective Address Extension
Eight, 16, or 32 bits specifying immediate data, an absolute address, or a displacement.
Section 2 CPU
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 50 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
(4) Condition Field
Specifies the branching condition of Bcc instructions.
2.6.5 Notes on Use of Bit-Manipulation Instructions
The BSET, BCLR, BNOT, BST, and BIST instructions read a byte of data, carry out bit
manipulation, then write back the byte of data. Caution is therefore required when using these
instructions on a register containing write-only bits, or a port.
The BCLR instruction can be used to clear internal I/O register flags to 0. In this case, the relevant
flag need not be read beforehand if it is clear that it has been set to 1 in an interrupt handling
routine, etc.
Section 2 CPU
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 51 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
2.7 Addressing Modes and Effective Address Calculation
2.7.1 Addressing Mode
The CPU supports the eight addressing modes listed in table 2.11. Each instruction uses a subset
of these addressing modes. Arithmetic and logic instructions can use the register direct and
immediate modes. Data transfer instructions can use all addressing modes except program-counter
relative and memory indirect. Bit-manipulation instructions use register direct, register indirect, or
absolute addressing mode to specify an operand, and register direct (BSET, BCLR, BNOT, and
BTST instructions) or immediate (3-bit) addressing mode to specify a bit number in the operand.
Table 2.11 Addressing Modes
No. Addressing Mode Symbol
1 Register direct Rn
2 Register indirect @ERn
3 Register indirect with displacement @(d:16,ERn)/@(d:32,ERn)
4 Register indirect with post-increment
Register indirect with pre-decrement
@ERn+
@-ERn
5 Absolute address @aa:8/@aa:16/@aa:24/@aa:32
6 Immediate #xx:8/#xx:16/#xx:32
7 Program-counter relative @(d:8,PC)/@(d:16,PC)
8 Memory indirect @@aa:8
(1) Register Direct–Rn
The register field of the instruction code specifies an 8-, 16-, or 32-bit general register containing
the operand. R0H to R7H and R0L to R7L can be specified as 8-bit registers. R0 to R7 and E0 to
E7 can be specified as 16-bit registers. ER0 to ER7 can be specified as
32-bit registers.
(2) Register Indirect–@ERn
The register field of the instruction code specifies an address register (ERn) which contains the
address of the operand in memory. If the address is a program instruction address, the lower 24
bits are valid and the upper 8 bits are all assumed to be 0 (H'00).
Section 2 CPU
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 52 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
(3) Register Indirect with Displacement–@(d:16, ERn) or @(d:32, ERn)
A 16-bit or 32-bit displacement contained in the instruction is added to an address register (ERn)
specified by the register field of the instruction, and the sum gives the address of a memory
operand. A 16-bit displacement is sign-extended when added.
(4) Register Indirect with Post-Increment or Pre-Decrement–@ERn+ or @-ERn
a. Register indirect with post-increment–@ERn+
The register field of the instruction code specifies an address register (ERn) which contains the
address of a memory operand. After the operand is accessed, 1, 2, or 4 is added to the address
register contents and the sum is stored in the address register. The value added is 1 for byte
access, 2 for word access, or 4 for longword access. For word or longword access, the register
value should be even.
b. Register indirect with pre-decrement–@-ERn
The value 1, 2, or 4 is subtracted from an address register (ERn) specified by the register field
in the instruction code, and the result becomes the address of a memory operand. The result is
also stored in the address register. The value subtracted is 1 for byte access, 2 for word access,
or 4 for longword access. For word or longword access, the register value should be even.
(5) Absolute Address–@aa:8, @aa:16, @aa:24, or @aa:32
The instruction code contains the absolute address of a memory operand. The absolute address
may be 8 bits long (@aa:8), 16 bits long (@aa:16), 24 bits long (@aa:24), or 32 bits long
(@aa:32).
To access data, the absolute address should be 8 bits (@aa:8), 16 bits (@aa:16), or 32 bits
(@aa:32) long. For an 8-bit absolute address, the upper 24 bits are all assumed to be 1 (H'FFFF).
For a 16-bit absolute address the upper 16 bits are a sign extension. A 32-bit absolute address can
access the entire address space.
A 24-bit absolute address (@aa:24) indicates the address of a program instruction. The upper 8
bits are all assumed to be 0 (H'00).
Table 2.12 indicates the accessible absolute address ranges.
Section 2 CPU
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 53 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Table 2.12 Absolute Address Access Ranges
Absolute Address Normal Mode Advanced Mode
8 bits
(@aa:8)
H'FF00 to H'FFFF H'FFFF00 to H'FFFFFF
16 bits
(@aa:16)
H'000000 to H'007FFF, H'FF8000 to
H'FFFFFF
Data address
32 bits
(@aa:32)
Program instruction
address
24 bits
(@aa:24)
H'0000 to H'FFFF
H'000000 to H'FFFFFF
(6) Immediate–#xx:8, #xx:16, or #xx:32
The instruction contains 8-bit (#xx:8), 16-bit (#xx:16), or 32-bit (#xx:32) immediate data as an
operand.
The ADDS, SUBS, INC, and DEC instructions contain immediate data implicitly. Some bit
manipulation instructions contain 3-bit immediate data in the instruction code, specifying a bit
number. The TRAPA instruction contains 2-bit immediate data in its instruction code, specifying a
vector address.
(7) Program-Counter Relative–@(d:8, PC) or @(d:16, PC)
This mode is used in the Bcc and BSR instructions. An 8-bit or 16-bit displacement contained in
the instruction is sign-extended and added to the 24-bit PC contents to generate a branch address.
Only the lower 24 bits of this branch address are valid; the upper 8 bits are all assumed to be 0
(H'00). The PC value to which the displacement is added is the address of the first byte of the next
instruction, so the possible branching range is -126 to +128 bytes (-63 to +64 words) or -32766 to
+32768 bytes (-16383 to +16384 words) from the branch instruction. The resulting value should
be an even number.
(8) Memory Indirect–@@aa:8
This mode can be used by the JMP and JSR instructions. The instruction code contains an 8-bit
absolute address specifying a memory operand. This memory operand contains a branch address.
The upper bits of the absolute address are all assumed to be 0, so the address range is 0 to 255
(H'0000 to H'00FF in normal mode, H'000000 to H'0000FF in advanced mode). In normal mode
the memory operand is a word operand and the branch address is 16 bits long. In advanced mode
the memory operand is a longword operand, the first byte of which is assumed to be all 0 (H'00).
Section 2 CPU
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 54 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Note that the first part of the address range is also the exception vector area. For further details,
see section 5, Exception Handling.
(a) Normal Mode*
Note: * Not available for this LSI
(b) Advanced Mode
Branch address
Specified by
@aa:8
Specified by
@aa:8 Reserved
Branch address
Figure 2.14 Branch Address Specification in Memory Indirect Mode
If an odd address is specified in word or longword memory access, or as a branch address, the
least significant bit is regarded as 0, causing data to be accessed or an instruction code to be
fetched at the address preceding the specified address. (For further information, see section 2.5.2,
Memory Data Formats.)
2.7.2 Effective Address Calculation
Table 2.13 indicates how effective addresses are calculated in each addressing mode.
In normal mode* the upper 8 bits of the effective address are ignored in order to generate a 16-bit
address.
Note: * Not available for this LSI.
Section 2 CPU
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 55 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Table 2.13 Effective Address Calculation
No.
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Format
Effective Address
Calculation
Effective Address (EA)
1 Register direct (Rn)
op rm rn
Operand is general register
contents
2 Register indirect (@ERn)
General register contents
31 0 31 0
rop
24 23
Don’t
care
3 Register indirect with displacement
@(d:16, ERn) or @(d:32, ERn)
General register contents
Sign extension disp
31 0
31 0
31 0
op r disp Don’t
care
24 23
4 Register indirect with post-increment or pre-decrement
• Register indirect with post-increment @ERn+
General register contents
1, 2, or
4
31 0 31 0
r
op
Don’t
care
24 23
• Register indirect with pre-decrement @–ERn
General register contents
1, 2, or
4
Byte
Word
Longword
1
2
4
Operand
Size
Value
Added
31 0
31 0
op rDon’t
care
24 23
Section 2 CPU
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 56 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
No.
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Format
Effective Address
Calculation
Effective Address (EA)
5 Absolute address
@aa:8
@aa:16
@aa:32
31 08 7
@aa:24
31 016 15
31 0
31 0
op abs
op abs
abs
op
op
abs
H'FFFF
24 23
Don’t
care
Don’t
care
Don’t
care
Don’t
care
24 23
24 23
24 23
Sign
exten-
sion
6 Immediate #xx:8/#xx:16/#xx:32
op IMM
Operand is immediate data
7 Program-counter relative
@(d:8, PC)/@(d:16, PC)
0
0
23
23
disp 31 0
24 23
op disp
PC contents
Don’t
care
Sign
exten-
sion
Section 2 CPU
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 57 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
No.
Addressing Mode and
Instruction Format
Effective Address
Calculation
Effective Address (EA)
8 Memory indirect @@aa:8
• Normal mode*
0
0
31 8 7
0
15
H'000000 31 0
16 15
op abs
abs
Memory
contents
H'00
24 23
Don’t
care
• Advanced mode
31
0
31 8 7
0
abs
H'000000
31 0
24 23
op abs
Memory contents Don’t
care
Note: * Not available for this LSI.
Section 2 CPU
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 58 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
2.8 Processing States
2.8.1 Overview
The CPU has four main processing states: the reset state, exception-handling state, program
execution state, and power-down state. Figure 2.15 shows a diagram of the processing states.
Figure 2.16 indicates the state transitions.
Reset state
The CPU and all on-chip supporting modules have been initialized and are stopped.
Exception-handling
state
A transient state in which the CPU changes the normal processing flow in response
to a reset, interrupt or trap instruction.
Program execution
state
The CPU executes program instructions in sequence.
Power-down state
CPU operation is stopped
to conserve power.*
Sleep mode
Standby mode
Processing
states
Note: *
The power-down state also includes a medium-speed mode, modue stop mode, sub-active mode,
sub-sleep mode and watch mode.
Figure 2.15 Processing States
Section 2 CPU
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 59 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Reset state
Exception-handling state
Sleep mode
Standby mode
Power-down state
Program execution state
Interrupt request
External interrupt request
RES = High
Request for exception handling
SLEEP instruction
with LSON=0,
SSBY=1,
TMA3=0
SLEEP instruction
with LSON=0,
SSBY=0
Notes:
End of exception handling
*1
*2
1.
2.
From any state, a transition to the reset state occurs whenever RES goes low. A transition can
also be made to the reset state when the watchdog timer overflows.
The power-down state also includes a watch mode, subactive mode, subsleep mode, etc. For
details, see section 4, Power-Down State.
Figure 2.16 State Transitions
2.8.2 Reset State
When the RES input goes low all current processing stops and the CPU enters the reset state. All
interrupts are disabled in the reset state. Reset exception handling starts when the RES signal
changes from low to high.
The reset state can also be entered by a watchdog timer overflow. For details, see section 17,
Watchdog Timer (WDT).
Section 2 CPU
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 60 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
2.8.3 Exception-Handling State
The exception-handling state is a transient state that occurs when the CPU alters the normal
processing flow due to a reset, interrupt, or trap instruction. The CPU fetches a start address
(vector) from the exception vector table and branches to that address.
(1) Types of Exception Handling and Their Priority
Exception handling is performed for resets, interrupts, and trap instructions. Table 2.14 indicates
the types of exception handling and their priority. Trap instruction exception handling is always
accepted in the program execution state.
Exception handling and the stack structure depend on the interrupt control mode set in SYSCR.
Table 2.14 Exception Handling Types and Priority
Priority Type of Exception Detection Timing Start of Exception Handling
Reset Synchronized with clock Exception handling starts immediately
after a low-to-high transition at the
RES pin, or when the watchdog timer
overflows
Interrupt End of instruction
execution or end of
exception-handling
sequence*1
When an interrupt is requested,
exception handling starts at the end of
the current instruction or current
exception-handling sequence
High
Low Trap instruction When TRAPA instruction
is executed
Exception handling starts when a trap
(TRAPA) instruction is executed*2
Notes: 1. Interrupts are not detected at the end of the ANDC, ORC, XORC, and LDC instructions,
or immediately after reset exception handling.
2. Trap instruction exception handling is always accepted in the program execution state.
(2) Reset Exception Handling
After the RES pin has gone low and the reset state has been entered, when RES goes high again,
reset exception handling starts. When reset exception handling starts the CPU fetches a start
address (vector) from the exception vector table and starts program execution from that address.
All interrupts, including NMI, are disabled during reset exception handling and after it ends.
Section 2 CPU
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 61 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
(3) Interrupt Exception Handling and Trap Instruction Exception Handling
When interrupt or trap-instruction exception handling begins, the CPU references the stack pointer
(ER7) and pushes the program counter and other control registers onto the stack. Next, the CPU
alters the settings of the interrupt mask bits in the control registers. Then the CPU fetches a start
address (vector) from the exception vector table and program execution starts from that start
address.
Figure 2.17 shows the stack after exception handling ends.
PC
(16 bits)
SP CCR
CCR*1
PC
(24 bits)
SP CCR
Normal Mode*2 Advanced Mode
Notes: 1. Ignored when returning.
2. Normal mode is not available for this LSI.
Figure 2.17 Stack Structure after Exception Handling (Examples)
2.8.4 Program Execution State
In this state the CPU executes program instructions in sequence.
Section 2 CPU
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 62 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
2.8.5 Power-Down State
The power-down state includes both modes in which the CPU stops operating and modes in which
the CPU does not stop. There are five modes in which the CPU stops operating: sleep mode,
standby mode, subsleep mode, and watch mode. There are also three other power-down modes:
medium-speed mode, module stop mode, and subactive mode. In medium-speed mode, the CPU
operates on a medium-speed clock. Module stop mode permits halting of the operation of
individual modules, other than the CPU. Subactive mode, subsleep mode, and watch mode are
power-down modes that use subclock input. For details, see section 4, Power-Down State.
(1) Sleep Mode
A transition to sleep mode is made if the SLEEP instruction is executed while the software
standby bit (SSBY) in the standby control register (SBYCR) and the LSON bit in the low-power
control register (LPWRCR) are both cleared to 0. In sleep mode, CPU operations stop
immediately after execution of the SLEEP instruction. The contents of CPU registers are retained.
(2) Standby Mode
A transition to standby mode is made if the SLEEP instruction is executed while the SSBY bit in
SBYCR is set to 1 and the LSON bit in LPWRCR and the TMA3 bit in the TMA (timer A) are
both cleared to 0. In standby mode, the CPU and clock halt and all MCU operations stop. As long
as a specified voltage is supplied, the contents of CPU registers and on-chip RAM are retained.
Section 2 CPU
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 63 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
2.9 Basic Timing
2.9.1 Overview
The CPU is driven by a system clock, denoted by the symbol φ. The period from one rising edge
of φ to the next is referred to as a “state.” The memory cycle or bus cycle consists of one or two
states. Different methods are used to access on-chip memory and on-chip supporting modules.
2.9.2 On-Chip Memory (ROM, RAM)
On-chip memory is accessed in one state. The data bus is 16 bits wide, permitting both byte and
word transfer instruction. Figure 2.18 shows the on-chip memory access cycle.
Internal address bus
Internal read signal
Internal data bus
Internal write signal
Internal data bus
φ
Bus cycle
T1
Address
Read data
Write data
Read access
Write access
Figure 2.18 On-Chip Memory Access Cycle
2.9.3 On-Chip Supporting Module Access Timing
The on-chip supporting modules are accessed in two states. The data bus is either 8 bits or 16 bits
wide, depending on the particular internal I/O register being accessed. Figure 2.19 shows the
access timing for the on-chip supporting modules.
Section 2 CPU
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 64 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Internal address bus
Internal read signal
Internal data bus
Internal write signal
Internal data bus
φ
Bus cycle
T1
Address
Read access
Write access
Read data
Write data
T2
Figure 2.19 On-Chip Supporting Module Access Cycle
2.10 Usage Note
2.10.1 TAS Instruction
Only register ER0, ER1, ER4, or ER5 should be used when using the TAS instruction. The TAS
instruction is not generated by the Renesas Technology H8S and H8/300 series C/C++ compilers.
If the TAS instruction is used as a user-defined intrinsic function, ensure that only register ER0,
ER1, ER4, or ER5 is used.
2.10.2 STM/LDM Instruction
ER7 is not used as the register that can be saved (STM)/restored (LDM) when using STM/LDM
instruction, because ER7 is the stack pointer. Two, three, or four registers can be saved/restored by
one STM/LDM instruction. The following ranges can be specified in the register list.
Two registers : ER0⎯ER1, ER2⎯ER3, or ER4⎯ER5
Three registers : ER0⎯ER2 or ER4⎯ER6
Four registers : ER0⎯ER3
The STM/LDM instruction including ER7 is not generated by the Renesas Technology H8S and
H8/300 series C/C++ compilers.
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 65 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
3.1 Overview
3.1.1 Operating Mode Selection
This LSI has one operating mode (mode 1). This mode is selected depending on settings of the
mode pin (MD0). Table 3.1 lists the MCU operating modes.
Table 3.1 MCU Operating Mode Selection
MCU Operating Mode MD0 CPU Operating Mode Description
0 0 ⎯ ⎯
1 1 Advanced Single-chip mode
The CPU's architecture allows for 4 Gbytes of address space, but this LSI actually accesses a
maximum of 16 Mbytes. Mode 1 operation starts in single-chip mode after reset release. This LSI
can only be used in mode 1. This means that the mode pins must be set at mode 1. Do not changes
the inputs at the mode pins during operation.
3.1.2 Register Configuration
This LSI has a mode control register (MDCR) that indicates the inputs at the mode pin (MD0) and
a system control register (SYSCR) and that controls the operation of this LSI. Table 3.2
summarizes these registers.
Table 3.2 MCU Registers
Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value Address*
Mode control register MDCR R Undetermined H'FFE9
System control register SYSCR R/W H'09 H'FFE8
Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address.
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 66 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
3.2 Register Descriptions
3.2.1 Mode Control Register (MDCR)
0
—*
1
0
2
0
3
0
4
0
5
—————
0
6
—
0
7
—
——————
—R
MDS0
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W
:
Note: *
Determined by MD0 pin
MDCR is an 8-bit read-only register monitors the current operating mode of this LSI.
Bits 7 to 1⎯Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 0.
Bit 0⎯Mode Select 0 (MDS0): This bit indicates the value which reflects the input levels at
mode pin (MD0) (the current operating mode). Bit MDS0 corresponds to MD0 pin. They are read-
only bits-they cannot be written to. The mode pin (MD0) input levels are latched into these bits
when MDCR is read.
3.2.2 System Control Register (SYSCR)
0
—
1
1
0
—
2
0
—
3
1
4
0
R/W
5
0
6
—
0
7
—
——— RR
INTM1 INTM0 XRST — —
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Bits 7 and 6⎯Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 0.
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 67 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bits 5 and 4⎯Interrupt control modes 1 and 0 (INTM1, INTM0)
These bits are for selecting the interrupt control mode of the interrupt controller. For details of the
interrupt control modes, see section 6.4.1, Interrupt Control Modes and Interrupt Operation.
Bit 5 Bit 4
INTM1 INTM0
Interrupt Control
Mode Description
0 0 Interrupt is controlled by bit I (Initial value) 0
1 1 Interrupt is controlled by bits I and UI, and ICR
1 0 ⎯ Cannot be used in this LSI
1 ⎯ Cannot be used in this LSI
Bit 3⎯External Reset (XRST): Indicates the reset source. When the watchdog timer is used, a
reset can be generated by watchdog timer overflow as well as by external reset input. XRST is a
read-only bit. It is set to 1 by an external reset and cleared to 0 by watchdog timer overflow.
Bit 3
XRST Description
0 A reset is generated by watchdog timer overflow
1 A reset is generated by an external reset (Initial value)
Bits 2 and 1⎯Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 0.
Bit 0⎯Reserved: This bit is always read as 1.
3.3 Operating Mode (Mode 1)
The CPU can access a 16 Mbyte address space in advanced mode.
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 68 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
3.4 Address Map in Each Operating Mode
H8S/2196R H8S/2197R
Memory indirect
branch address
Absolute address, 16 bits
4 kbytes
Vector area
On-chip ROM
(80 kbytes)
Internal I/O register
Internal I/O register
On-chip RAM
Vector area
On-chip ROM
(96 kbytes)
Internal I/O register
Internal I/O register
OSD ROM
(24 kbytes)
On-chip RAM
(4 kbytes)
H'000000 H'000000
H'017FFF
H'FFD000
H'040000
H'045FFF
H'FFD2FF
H'FFD800
H'FFDAFF
H'FFEFB0
H'FFFFAF
H'FFFFB0
H'FFFFFF
H'0000FF
H'007FFF
H'013FFF
H'FF8000
H'FFD000
H'FFD2FF
H'FFEFB0
H'FFFF00
H'FFFFAF
H'FFFFB0
H'FFFFFF
OSD RAM (768 bytes)
OSD ROM
(24 kbytes)
H'040000
H'045FFF
H'FFD800
H'FFDAFF
OSD RAM (768 bytes)
Absolute address,
8 bits
Absolute address, 16 bits
Figure 3.1 Address Map (1)
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 69 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H8S/2198R H8S/2199R
Vector area
On-chip ROM
(112 kbytes)
Internal I/O register
Internal I/O register
On-chip RAM
(4 kbytes)
Vector area
On-chip ROM
(128 kbytes)
Internal I/O register
Internal I/O register
On-chip RAM
(4 kbytes)
H'000000 H'000000
H'01FFFF
H'FFD000
H'FFD2FF
H'FFEFB0
H'FFFFAF
H'FFFFB0
H'FFFFFF
H'01BFFF
H'FFD000
H'FFD2FF
H'FFEFB0
H'FFFFAF
H'FFFFB0
H'FFFFFF
OSD ROM
(24 kbytes)
H'040000
H'045FFF
H'FFD800
H'FFDAFF
OSD RAM (768 bytes)
OSD ROM
(24 kbytes)
H'040000
H'045FFF
H'FFD800
H'FFDAFF
OSD RAM (768 bytes)
H8S/2199R (F-ZTAT version)
Vector area
Flash memory
(256 kbytes)
Internal I/O register
Internal I/O register
On-chip RAM
(8 kbytes)
H'000000
H'FFD000
H'FFD2FF
H'FFDFB0
H'FFFFAF
H'FFFFB0
H'FFFFFF
Flash memory (OSD)
(32 kbytes)
H'03FFFF
H'047FFF
H'FFD800
H'FFDAFF
OSD RAM (768 bytes)
Figure 3.2 Address Map (2)
Section 3 MCU Operating Modes
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 70 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H8S/2196S H8S/2197S
Vector area Vector area
On-chip ROM
(80 kbytes)
On-chip ROM
(96 kbytes)
Internal I/O register
Internal I/O register Internal I/O register
Internal I/O register
On-chip RAM
(3 kbytes)
On-chip RAM
(3 kbytes)
H'000000 H'000000
H'017FFF
H'FFD800
H'FFF3B0
H'FFFFAF
H'FFFFB0
H'FFFFFF
H'013FFF
H'FFD800
H'FFF3B0
H'FFFFAF
H'FFFFB0
H'FFFFFF
OSD ROM
(16 kbytes)
H'040000
H'043FFF
H'040000
H'043FFF
OSD ROM
(16 kbytes)
OSD RAM
(768 bytes)
OSD RAM
(768 bytes)
H'FFDAFF H'FFDAFF
H'FFD000
H'FFD2FF
H'FFD000
H'FFD2FF
Figure 3.3 Address Map (3)
Section 4 Power-Down State
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 71 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Section 4 Power-Down State
4.1 Overview
In addition to the normal program execution state, this LSI has a power-down state in which
operation of the CPU and oscillator is halted and power dissipation is reduced. Low-power
operation can be achieved by individually controlling the CPU, on-chip supporting modules, and
so on. This LSI operating modes are as follows:
1. High-speed mode
2. Medium-speed mode
3. Sub-active mode
4. Sleep mode
5. Sub-sleep mode
6. Watch mode
7. Module stop mode
8. Standby mode
Of these, 2 to 8 are power-down modes. Certain combinations of these modes can be set. After a
reset, the MCU is in high-speed mode.
Table 4.1 shows the internal chip states in each mode, and table 4.2 shows the conditions for
transition to the various modes. Figure 4.1 shows a mode transition diagram.
Section 4 Power-Down State
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 72 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Table 4.1 H8S/2199R Group Internal States in Each Mode
Function High-Speed
Medium-
Speed Sleep
Module
Stop Watch Sub-active Sub-sleep Standby
System clock Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Halted Halted Halted Halted
Subclock pulse
generator
Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning
Instruction
s
Halted Halted Halted Halted CPU
operation
Registers
Functioning Medium-
speed
Retained
Functioning
Retained
Subclock
operation
Retained Retained
IRQ0
IRQ1
Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning
IRQ2
IRQ3
IRQ4
External
interrupts
IRQ5
Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning
Halted Halted Functioning Halted
I/O Functioning Functioning Retained Functioning Halted Functioning Retained Halted
Timer A Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning
/halted
(retained)
Subclock
operation
Subclock
operation
Subclock
operation
Halted
(retained)
Timer B
Timer J
Timer L
Functioning
/halted
(retained)
Halted
(retained)
Halted
(retained)
Halted
(retained)
Halted
(retained)
Timer R
On-chip
supporting
module
operation
Timer X1*2
Functioning Functioning Functioning
Functioning
/halted
(reset)
Halted
(reset)
Halted
(reset)
Halted
(reset)
Halted
(reset)
Watchdog
timer
Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning Halted
(retained)
Halted
(retained)
Halted
(retained)
Halted
(retained)
8-bit PWM Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning
/halted
(retained)
Halted
(retained)
Halted
(retained)
Halted
(retained)
Halted
(retained)
12-bit
PWM
Functioning Functioning Halted
(reset)
Functioning
/halted
(reset)
Halted
(reset)
Halted
(reset)
Halted
(reset)
Halted
(reset)
14-bit
PWM*2
Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning
/halted
(retained)
Halted
(retained)
Halted
(retained)
Halted
(retained)
Halted
(retained)
PSU Functioning Functioning Functioning Functioning/
halted
Subclock
operation
Subclock
operation
Subclock
operation
Halted
SCI1 Functioning/
halted*1
Halted*1 Halted*1 Halted*1 Halted*1
IIC Functioning/
halted
(retained)
Halted
(retained)
Halted
(retained)
Halted
(retained)
Halted
(retained)
A/D
Functioning Functioning Functioning
Functioning
/halted
(reset)
Halted
(reset)
Halted
(reset)
Halted
(reset)
Halted
(reset)
Servo
circuit
Functioning Functioning Halted
(reset)
Functioning
/halted
(reset)
Halted
(reset)
Halted
(reset)
Halted
(reset)
Halted
(reset)
Sync
separator
Functioning Functioning Halted
(retained)
Functioning
/halted
(retained)
Halted
(retained)
Halted
(retained)
Halted
(retained)
Halted
(retained)
Section 4 Power-Down State
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 73 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Function High-Speed
Medium-
Speed Sleep
Module
Stop Watch Sub-active Sub-sleep Standby
Data slicer Halted
(reset)
On-chip
supporting
module
operation OSD
Functioning Functioning Halted
(reset)
Functioning
/halted
(reset)
Halted
(reset)
Halted
(reset)
Halted
(reset)
Notes: "Halted (retained)" means that internal register values are retained. The internal state is
"operation suspended."
"Halted (reset)" means that internal register values and internal states are initialized.
In module stop mode, only modules for which a stop setting has been made are halted
(reset or retained).
In the power-down mode, the analog section of the servo circuits are not turned off,
therefore Vcc (Servo) current does not go low. When power-down is needed, externally
shut down the analog system power.
1. The SCI1 status differs from the internal register. For details, refer to section 22, Serial
Communication Interface 1 (SCII).
2. Not available in the H8S/2197S or H8S/2196S.
Section 4 Power-Down State
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 74 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Program-halted state
Conditions for mode transition (1) Conditions for mode transition (2)
Interruption factor
Sleep
(high-speed)
mode
Sleep
(medium-speed)
mode
Subsleep
mode
Program execution state
Reset state
Flag
SLEEP
instruction
Interrupt
LSON SSBY TMA3 DTON
a010*
b*110
c0111
d1111
e00**
f101*
gSCK1 to 0 = 0
h
SCK1 to 0 ≠ 0 (either 1 bit = 0)
Power-down mode
Active
(high-speed)
mode
Active
(medium-speed)
mode
Subactive
mode
Program-halted state
Watch
mode
Standby
mode
IRQ0
to
1
IRQ0
to
1, Timer A interruption
All interruption (excluding servo system)
IRQ0
to
5, Timer A interruption
1
2
3
4
Interrupt
Interrupt
SLEEP
instruction
SLEEP
instruction
e
Note: When a transition is made between
modes by means of an interrupt,
transition cannot be made on interrupt
source generation alone. Ensure that
interrupt handling is performed after
accepting the interrupt request
SLEEP
instruction a
1
Interrupt
1
2
SLEEP
instruction
SLEEP
instruction
SLEEP
instruction
SLEEP
instruction
a
b
ghd
SLEEP
instruction
c
e
3
Interrupt 2
Interrupt 3
Interrupt 2Interrupt 4
c
SLEEP
instruction
d
b
b
SLEEP
instruction SLEEP
instruction 1
Legend:
*
Don't care
Figure 4.1 Mode Transitions
Section 4 Power-Down State
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 75 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Table 4.2 Power-Down Mode Transition Conditions
Control Bit States at Time of
Transition
State before
Transition SSBY TMA3 LSON DTON
State after Transition
by SLEEP Instruction
State after Return
by Interrupt
0 * 0 * Sleep High-speed/
medium-speed*1
0 * 1 * ⎯ ⎯
1 0 0 * Standby High-speed/
medium-speed*1
1 0 1 * ⎯ ⎯
1 1 0 0 Watch High-speed/
medium-speed*1
1 1 1 0 Watch Subactive
1 1 0 1 ⎯ ⎯
High-speed/
medium-speed
1 1 1 1 Subactive ⎯
Subactive 0 0 * * ⎯ ⎯
0 1 0 * ⎯ ⎯
0 1 1 * Subsleep Subactive
1 0 * * ⎯ ⎯
1 1 0 0 Watch High-speed/
medium-speed*2
1 1 1 0 Watch Subactive
1 1 0 1 High-speed/
medium-speed*2
⎯
1 1 1 1 ⎯ ⎯
Legend: * Don't care
Notes: ⎯: Do not set.
1. Returns to the state before transition.
2. Mode varies depending on the state of SCK1 to SCK0.
Section 4 Power-Down State
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 76 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
4.1.1 Register Configuration
The power-down state is controlled by the SBYCR, LPWRCR, TMA (Timer A), and MSTPCR
registers. Table 4.3 summarizes these registers.
Table 4.3 Power-Down State Registers
Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value Address*
Standby control register SBYCR R/W H'00 H'FFEA
Low-power control register LPWRCR R/W H'00 H'FFEB
MSTPCRH R/W H'FF H'FFEC Module stop control register
MSTPCRL R/W H'FF H'FFED
Timer mode register A TMA R/W H'30 H'FFBA
Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address.
4.2 Register Descriptions
4.2.1 Standby Control Register (SBYCR)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
3
——
——
0
4
0
R/W
5
0
6
0
7
R/WR/W
STS1
R/W
STS2
0
R/W
SSBY STS0 SCK1 SCK0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
SBYCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs power-down mode control. SBYCR is
initialized to H'00 by a reset.
Section 4 Power-Down State
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 77 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 7⎯Software Standby (SSBY): Determines the operating mode, in combination with other
control bits, when a power-down mode transition is made by executing a SLEEP instruction. The
SSBY setting is not changed by a mode transition due to an interrupt, etc.
Bit 7
SSBY Description
0 Transition to sleep mode after execution of SLEEP instruction in high-speed mode
or medium-speed mode
Transition to subsleep mode after execution of SLEEP instruction in subactive
mode (Initial value)
1 Transition to standby mode, subactive mode, or watch mode after execution of
SLEEP instruction in high-speed mode or medium-speed mode
Transition to watch mode or high-speed mode after execution of SLEEP instruction
in subactive mode
Bits 6 to 4⎯Standby Timer Select 2 to 0 (STS2 to STS0): These bits select the time the MCU
waits for the clock to stabilize when standby mode, watch mode, or subactive mode is cleared and
a transition is made to high-speed mode or medium-speed mode by means of a specific interrupt or
instruction. With crystal oscillation, see table 4.5 and make a selection according to the operating
frequency so that the standby time is at least 10 ms (the oscillation settling time).
Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4
STS2 STS1 STS0 Description
0 0 0 Standby time = 8192 states
0 0 1 Standby time = 16384 states
0 1 0 Standby time = 32768 states
0 1 1 Standby time = 65536 states
1 0 0 Standby time = 131072 states
1 0 1 Standby time = 262144 states
1 1 * Reserved
Legend: * Don't care
Bits 3 and 2⎯Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 0.
Section 4 Power-Down State
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 78 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bits 1 and 0⎯System Clock Select 1 and 0 (SCK1, SCK0): These bits select the CPU clock for
the bus master in high-speed mode and medium-speed mode.
Bit 1 Bit 0
SCK1 SCK0 Description
0 0 Bus master is in high-speed mode (Initial value)
0 1 Medium-speed clock is φ/16
1 0 Medium-speed clock is φ/32
1 1 Medium-speed clock is φ/64
4.2.2 Low-Power Control Register (LPWRCR)
0
0
1
0
R/W R/W
2
0
3
0
4
———
———
0
5
0
6
0
7
R/W
NESEL
R/W
LSON
0
R/W
DTON SA1 SA0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
LPWRCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs power-down mode control.
LPWRCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset.
Bit 7⎯Direct-Transfer on Flag (DTON): Specifies whether a direct transition is made between
high-speed mode, medium-speed mode, and subactive mode when making a power-down
transition by executing a SLEEP instruction. The operating mode to which the transition is made
after SLEEP instruction execution is determined by a combination of other control bits.
Bit 7
DTON Description
0 • When a SLEEP instruction is executed in high-speed mode or medium-speed
mode, a transition is made to sleep mode, standby mode, or watch mode
• When a SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive mode, a transition is made
to subsleep mode or watch mode (Initial value)
1 • When a SLEEP instruction is executed in high-speed mode or medium-speed
mode, transition is made directly to subactive mode, or a transition is made to
sleep mode or standby mode
• When a SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive mode, a transition is made
directly to high-speed mode, or a transition is made to subsleep mode
Section 4 Power-Down State
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 79 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 6⎯Low-Speed on Flag (LSON): Determines the operating mode in combination with other
control bits when making a power-down transition by executing a SLEEP instruction. Also
controls whether a transition is made to high-speed mode or to subactive mode when watch mode
is cleared.
Bit 6
LSON Description
0 • When a SLEEP instruction is executed in high-speed mode or medium-speed
mode, transition is made to sleep mode, standby mode, or watch mode
• When a SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive mode, a transition is made
to watch mode, or directly to high-speed mode
• After watch mode is cleared, a transition is made to high-speed mode
(Initial value)
1 • When a SLEEP instruction is executed in high-speed mode a transition is made
to watch mode, subactive mode, sleep mode or standby mode
• When a SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive mode, a transition is made
to subsleep mode or watch mode
• After watch mode is cleared, a transition is made to subactive mode
Bit 5⎯Noise Elimination Sampling Frequency Select (NESEL): Selects the frequency at which
the subclock (φw) generated by the subclock pulse generator is sampled with the clock (φ)
generated by the system clock oscillator. When φ = 5 MHz or higher, clear this bit to 0.
Bit 5
NESEL Description
0 Sampling at φ divided by 16
1 Sampling at φ divided by 4
Bits 4 to 2⎯Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 0.
Section 4 Power-Down State
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 80 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bits 1 and 0⎯Subactive Mode Clock Select 1 and 0 (SA1, SA0): These bits select the CPU
operating clock in the subactive mode. These bits cannot be modified in the subactive mode.
Bit 1 Bit 0
SA1 SA0 Description
0 0 Operating clock of CPU is φw/8 (Initial value)
0 1 Operating clock of CPU is φw/4
1 * Operating clock of CPU is φw/2
Legend: * Don’t care
4.2.3 Timer Register A (TMA)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
3
0
4
1
5
——
1
6
0
7
R/WR/WR/WR/W
TMA3
R/W
TMA2
R/W
TMAIE
0
R/(W)*
TMAOV TMA1 TMA0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Note: *
Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag.
The timer register A (TMA) controls timer A interrupts and selects input clock.
Only bit 3 is explained here. For details of other bits, see section 11.2.1, Timer Mode Register A
(TMA). TMA is a readable/writable register which is initialized to H'30 by a reset.
Section 4 Power-Down State
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 81 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 3⎯Clock Source, Prescaler Select (TMA3): Selects timer A clock source between PSS and
PSW. It also controls transition operation to the power-down mode. The operation mode to which
the MCU is transited after SLEEP instruction execution is determined by the combination with
other control bits.
For details, see the description of clock select 2 to 0 in section 11.2.1, Timer Mode Register A
(TMA).
Bit 3
TMA3 Description
0 • Timer A counts φ-based prescaler (PSS) divided clock pulses
• When a SLEEP instruction is executed in high-speed mode or medium-speed
mode, a transition is made to sleep mode or software standby mode
(Initial value)
1 • Timer A counts φw-based prescaler (PSW) divided clock pulses
• When a SLEEP instruction is executed in high-speed mode or medium-speed
mode, a transition is made to sleep mode, watch mode, or subactive mode
• When a SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive mode, a transition is made
to subsleep mode, watch mode, or high-speed mode
4.2.4 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR)
7
1
MSTP15
R/W
MSTPCRH
6
1
MSTP14
R/W
5
1
MSTP13
R/W
4
1
MSTP12
R/W
3
1
MSTP11
R/W
2
1
MSTP10
R/W
1
1
MSTP9
R/W
0
1
MSTP8
R/W
7
1
MSTP7
R/W
6
1
MSTP6
R/W
5
1
MSTP5
R/W
4
1
MSTP4
R/W
3
1
MSTP3
R/W
2
1
MSTP2
R/W
1
1
MSTP1
R/W
0
1
MSTP0
R/W
MSTPCRL
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
MSTPCR comprises two 8-bit readable/writable registers that perform module stop mode control.
MSTPCR is initialized to H'FFFF by a reset.
MSTPCRH and MSTPCRL Bits 7 to 0⎯Module Stop (MSTP 15 to MSTP 0): These bits
specify module stop mode. See table 4.4 for the method of selecting on-chip supporting modules.
MSTPCRH, MSTPCRL
Bits 7 to 0
MSTP 15 to MSTP 0 Description
0 Module stop mode is cleared
1 Module stop mode is set (Initial value)
Section 4 Power-Down State
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 82 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
4.3 Medium-Speed Mode
When the SCK1 and SCK0 bits in SBYCR are set to 1 in high-speed mode, the operating mode
changes to medium-speed mode at the end of the bus cycle. In medium-speed mode, the CPU
operates on the operating clock (φ16, φ32 or φ64) specified by the SCK1 and SCK0 bits. The on-
chip supporting modules other than the CPU always operate on the high-speed clock (φ).
In medium-speed mode, a bus access is executed in the specified number of states with respect to
the bus master operating clock. For example, if φ/16 is selected as the operating clock, on-chip
memory is accessed in 16 states, and internal I/O registers in 32 states.
Medium-speed mode is cleared by clearing the both bits SCK1 and SCK0 to 0. A transition is
made to high-speed mode and medium-speed mode is cleared at the end of the current bus cycle.
If a SLEEP instruction is executed when the SSBY bit in SBYCR and the LSON bit in LPWRCR
are cleared to 0, a transition is made to sleep mode. When sleep mode is cleared by an interrupt,
medium-speed mode is restored.
If a SLEEP instruction is executed when the SSBY bit in SBYCR is set to 1, and the LSON bit in
LPWRCR and the TMA3 bit in TMA (Timer A) are both cleared to 0, a transition is made to
software standby mode. When standby mode is cleared by an external interrupt, medium-speed
mode is restored.
When the RES pin is driven low, a transition is made to the reset state, and medium-speed mode is
cleared. The same applies in the case of a reset caused by overflow of the watchdog timer.
Figure 4.2 shows the timing for transition to and clearance of medium-speed mode.
Medium-speed mode
Internal φ,
supporting module clock
CPU clock
Internal address bus
Internal write signal
SBYCR SBYCR
Figure 4.2 Medium-Speed Mode Transition and Clearance Timing
Section 4 Power-Down State
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 83 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
4.4 Sleep Mode
4.4.1 Sleep Mode
If a SLEEP instruction is executed when the SSBY bit in SBYCR and the LSON bit in LPWRCR
are both cleared to 0, the CPU will enter sleep mode. In sleep mode, CPU operation stops but the
contents of the CPU's internal registers are retained. Other supporting modules (excluding some
functions) do not stop.
4.4.2 Clearing Sleep Mode
Sleep mode is cleared by any interrupt, or with the RES pin.
Clearing with an Interrupt: When an interrupt request signal is input, sleep mode is cleared and
interrupt exception handling is started. Sleep mode will not be cleared if interrupts are disabled, or
if interrupts other than NMI have been masked by the CPU.
Clearing with the RES Pin: When the RES pin is driven low, the reset state is entered. When the
RES pin is driven high after the prescribed reset input period, the CPU begins reset exception
handling.
Section 4 Power-Down State
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 84 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
4.5 Module Stop Mode
4.5.1 Module Stop Mode
Module stop mode can be set for individual on-chip supporting modules. When the corresponding
MSTP bit in MSTPCR is set to 1, module operation stops at the end of the bus cycle and a
transition is made to module stop mode. The CPU continues operating independently.
Table 4.4 shows MSTP bits and the on-chip supporting modules.
When the corresponding MSTP bit is cleared to 0, module stop mode is cleared and the module
starts operating again at the end of the bus cycle. In module stop mode, the internal states of
modules excluding some modules are retained.
After reset release, all modules are in module stop mode.
When an on-chip supporting module is in module stop mode, read/write access to its registers is
disabled.
Table 4.4 MSTP Bits and Corresponding On-Chip Supporting Modules
Register Bit Module
MSTP15 Timer A
MSTP14 Timer B
MSTP13 Timer J
MSTP12 Timer L
MSTP11 Timer R
MSTP10 Timer X1*
MSTP9 Sync separator
MSTPCRH
MSTP8 Serial communication interface 1 (SCI1)
MSTPCRL MSTP7 I2C bus interface (IIC0)*
MSTP6 I2C bus interface (IIC1)
MSTP5 14-bit PWM*
MSTP4 8-bit PWM
MSTP3 Data slicer
MSTP2 A/D converter
MSTP1 Servo circuit, 12-bit PWM
MSTP0 OSD
Note: * This bit has no function in the H8S/2197S or H8S/2196S.
Section 4 Power-Down State
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 85 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
4.6 Standby Mode
4.6.1 Standby Mode
If a SLEEP instruction is executed when the SSBY bit in SBYCR is set to 1, the LSON bit in
LPWRCR is cleared to 0, and the TMA3 bit in TMA (Timer A) is cleared to 0, standby mode will
be entered. In this mode, the CPU, on-chip supporting modules, and oscillator (except for
subclock oscillator) all stop. However, the contents of the CPU's internal registers and data in the
on-chip RAM, as well as on-chip peripheral circuits (with some exceptions), are maintained in the
current state. (Timer X1 and SCI1 are partially reset.) The I/O port, at this time, is caused to the
high impedance state.
In this mode the oscillator stops, and therefore power dissipation is significantly reduced.
4.6.2 Clearing Standby Mode
Standby mode is cleared by an external interrupt (pin IRQ0 to IRQ1), or by means of the RES pin.
Clearing with an Interrupt: When an IRQ0 to IRQ1 interrupt request signal is input, clock
oscillation starts, and after the elapse of the time set in bits STS2 to STS0 in SBYCR, stable
clocks are supplied to the entire chip, standby mode is cleared, and interrupt exception handling is
started.
Standby mode cannot be cleared with an IRQ0 to IRQ1 interrupt if the corresponding enable bit
has been cleared to 0 or has been masked by the CPU.
Clearing with the RES Pin: When the RES pin is driven low, clock oscillation is started. At the
same time as clock oscillation starts, clocks are supplied to the entire chip. Note that the RES pin
must be held low until clock oscillation stabilizes. When the RES pin goes high, the CPU begins
reset exception handling.
4.6.3 Setting Oscillation Settling Time after Clearing Standby Mode
Bits STS2 to STS0 in SBYCR should be set as described below.
Using a Crystal Oscillator: Set bits STS2 to STS0 so that the standby time is at least 10 ms (the
oscillation settling time).
Table 4.5 shows the standby times for different operating frequencies and settings of bits STS2 to
STS0.
Section 4 Power-Down State
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 86 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Table 4.5 Oscillation Settling Time Settings
STS2 STS1 STS0 Standby Time 10 MHz 8 MHz Unit
0 8192 states 0.8 1.0
0
1 16384 states 1.6 2.0
0 32768 states 3.3 4.1
0
1
1 65536 states 6.6 8.2
1 0 131072 states 13.1*1 16.4*1
0
1 262144 states 26.2 32.8
ms
1 * Reserved ⎯ ⎯
Legend: * Don't care
Note: 1. Recommended time setting
Using an External Clock: Any value can be set.
Section 4 Power-Down State
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 87 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
4.7 Watch Mode
4.7.1 Watch Mode
If a SLEEP instruction is executed in high-speed mode, medium-speed mode or subactive mode
when the SSBY in SBYCR is set to 1, the DTON bit in LPWRCR is cleared to 0, and the TMA3
bit in TMA (Timer A) is set to 1, the CPU will make a transition to watch mode.
In this mode, the CPU and all on-chip supporting modules except timer A stop. As long as the
prescribed voltage is supplied, the contents of CPU registers, some on-chip supporting module
registers, and on-chip RAM, are retained, and I/O ports are placed in the high-impedance state.
4.7.2 Clearing Watch Mode
Watch mode is cleared by an interrupt (Timer A interrupt, or pin IRQ0 to IRQ1), or by means of
the RES pin.
Clearing with an Interrupt: When an interrupt request signal is input, watch mode is cleared and
a transition is made to high-speed mode or medium-speed mode if the LSON bit in LPWRCR is
cleared to 0, or to subactive mode if the LSON bit is set to 1. When making a transition to
medium-speed mode, after the elapse of the time set in bits STS2 to STS0 in SBYCR, stable
clocks are supplied to the entire chip, and interrupt exception handling is started.
Watch mode cannot be cleared with an IRQ0 to IRQ1 interrupt if the corresponding enable bit has
been cleared to 0, or with an on-chip supporting module interrupt if acceptance of the relevant
interrupt has been disabled by the interrupt enable register or masked by the CPU.
See section 4.6.3, Setting Oscillation Settling Time after Clearing Standby Mode, for the
oscillation settling time setting when making a transition from watch mode to high-speed mode or
medium-speed mode.
Clearing with the RES Pin: See Clearing with the RES Pin in section 4.6.2, Clearing Standby
Mode.
Section 4 Power-Down State
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 88 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
4.8 Subsleep Mode
4.8.1 Subsleep Mode
If a SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive mode when the SSBY in SBYCR is cleared to 0,
the LSON bit in LPWRCR is set to 1, and the TMA3 bit in TMA (Timer A) is set to 1, the CPU
will make a transition to subsleep mode.
In this mode, the CPU and all on-chip supporting modules other than Timer A stop. As long as the
prescribed voltage is supplied, the contents of CPU registers, some on-chip supporting module
registers, and on-chip RAM, are retained, and I/O ports are placed in the high-impedance state.
4.8.2 Clearing Subsleep Mode
Subsleep mode is cleared by an interrupt (Timer A interrupt, or pin IRQ0 to IRQ5), or by means of
the RES pin.
Clearing with an Interrupt: When an interrupt request signal is input, subsleep mode is cleared
and interrupt exception handling is started. Subsleep mode cannot be cleared with an IRQ0 to
IRQ5 interrupt if the corresponding enable bit has been cleared to 0, or with an on-chip supporting
module interrupt if acceptance of the relevant interrupt has been disabled by the interrupt enable
register or masked by the CPU.
Clearing with the RES Pin: See (2) Clearing with the RES Pin in section 4.6.2, Clearing Standby
Mode.
Section 4 Power-Down State
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 89 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
4.9 Subactive Mode
4.9.1 Subactive Mode
If a SLEEP instruction is executed in high-speed mode when the SSBY bit in SBYCR, the DTON
bit in LPWRCR, and the TMA3 bit in TMA (timer A) are all set to 1, the CPU will make a
transition to subactive mode. When an interrupt is generated in watch mode, if the LSON bit in
LPWRCR is set to 1, a transition is made to subactive mode. When an interrupt is generated in
subsleep mode, a transition is made to subactive mode. In subactive mode, the CPU performs
sequential program execution at low speed on the subclock. In this mode, all on-chip supporting
modules other than timer A stop.
4.9.2 Clearing Subactive Mode
Subsleep mode is cleared by a SLEEP instruction, or by means of the RES pin.
Clearing with a SLEEP Instruction: When a SLEEP instruction is executed while the SSBY bit
in SBYCR is set to 1, the DTON bit in LPWRCR is cleared to 0, and the TMA3 bit in TMA (timer
A) is set to 1, subactive mode is cleared and a transition is made to watch mode. When a SLEEP
instruction is executed while the SSBY bit in SBYCR is cleared to 0, the LSON bit in LPWRCR is
set to 1, and the TMA3 bit in TMA (timer A) is set to 1, a transition is made to subsleep mode.
When a SLEEP instruction is executed while the SSBY bit in SBYCR is set to 1, the DTON bit is
set to 1 and the LSON bit is cleared to 0 in LPWRCR, and the TMA3 bit in TMA (timer A) is set
to 1, a transition is made directly to high-speed or medium-speed mode.
For details of direct transition, see section 4.10, Direct Transition.
Clearing with the RES Pin: See Clearing with the RES Pin in section 4.6.2, Clearing Standby
Mode.
Section 4 Power-Down State
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 90 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
4.10 Direct Transition
4.10.1 Overview of Direct Transition
There are three operating modes in which the CPU executes programs: high-speed mode, medium-
speed mode, and subactive mode. A transition between high-speed mode and subactive mode
without halting the program* is called a direct transition. A direct transition can be carried out by
setting the DTON bit in LPWRCR to 1 and executing a SLEEP instruction. After the transition,
direct transition interrupt exception handling is started.
Direct Transition from High-Speed Mode to Subactive Mode: If a SLEEP instruction is
executed in high-speed mode while the SSBY bit in SBYCR, the LSON bit and DTON bit in
LPWRCR, and the TMA3 bit in TMA (Timer A) are all set to 1, a transition is made to subactive
mode.
Direct Transition from Subactive Mode to High-Speed Mode/Medium-Speed Mode: If a
SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive mode while the SSBY bit in SBYCR is set to 1, the
LSON bit is cleared to 0 and the DTON bit is set to 1 in LPWRCR, and the TMA3 bit in TMA
(timer A) is set to 1, after the elapse of the time set in bits STS2 to STS0 in SBYCR, a transition is
made to directly to high-speed mode or medium-speed mode.
Note: * At the time of transition from subactive mode to high- or medium-speed mode, an
oscillation stabilization wait time is generated.
Section 5 Exception Handling
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 91 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Section 5 Exception Handling
5.1 Overview
5.1.1 Exception Handling Types and Priority
As table 5.1 indicates, exception handling may be caused by a reset, trap instruction, or interrupt.
Exception handling is prioritized as shown in table 5.1. If two or more exceptions occur
simultaneously, they are accepted and processed in order of priority. Trap instruction exceptions
are accepted at all times in the program execution state.
Exception handling sources, the stack structure, and the operation of the CPU vary depending on
the interrupt control mode set by the INTM0 and INTM1 bits in SYSCR.
Table 5.1 Exception Types and Priority
Priority Exception Type Start of Exception Handling
Reset Starts immediately after a low-to-high transition at the RES pin, or
when the watchdog timer overflows
Trace*1 Starts when execution of the current instruction or exception
handling ends, if the trace (T) bit is set to 1
Interrupt Starts when execution of the current instruction or exception
handling ends, if an interrupt request has been issued*2
Direct transition Started by a direct transition resulting from execution of a SLEEP
instruction
High
Low
Trap instruction
(TRAPA)*3
Started by execution of a trap instruction (TRAPA)
Notes: 1. Traces are enabled only in interrupt control modes 2 and 3. (They cannot be used in
this LSI.) Trace exception handling is not executed after execution of an RTE
instruction.
2. Interrupt detection is not performed on completion of ANDC, ORC, XORC, or LDC
instruction execution, or on completion of reset exception handling.
3. Trap instruction exception handling requests are accepted at all times in the program
execution state.
Section 5 Exception Handling
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 92 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
5.1.2 Exception Handling Operation
Exceptions originate from various sources. Trap instructions and interrupts are handled as follows:
1. The program counter (PC) and condition-code register (CCR) are pushed onto the stack.
2. The interrupt mask bits are updated. The T bit is cleared to 0.
3. A vector address corresponding to the exception source is generated, and program execution
starts from that address.
For a reset exception, steps 2 and 3 above are carried out.
5.1.3 Exception Sources and Vector Table
The exception sources are classified as shown in figure 5.1. Different vector addresses are
assigned to different exception sources.
Table 5.2 lists the exception sources and their vector addresses.
Exception sources
• Reset
• Interrupts
• Trap instruction
Note: * In this LSI, the watchdog timer generates NMIs.
• Trace (cannot be used in this LSI)
• Direct transition
External interrupts NMI*, IRQ5 to IRQ0
Internal interrupts Interrupt sources in on-chip supporting modules
…
…
Figure 5.1 Exception Sources
Section 5 Exception Handling
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 93 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Table 5.2 Exception Vector Table
Exception Source Vector Number Vector Address*1
Reset 0 H'0000 to H'0003
1 H'0004 to H'0007
2 H'0008 to H'000B
3 H'000C to H'000F
4 H'0010 to H'0013
Reserved for system use
5 H'0014 to H'0017
Direct transition 6 H'0018 to H001B
External interrupt NMI*2 7 H'001C to H'001F
8 H'0020 to H'0023
9 H'0024 to H'0027
10 H'0028 to H'002B
Trap instruction (4 sources)
11 H'002C to H'002F
12 H'0030 to H'0033
13 H'0034 to H'0037
14 H'0038 to H'003B
Reserved for system use
15 H'003C to H'003F
#0 16 H'0040 to H'0043
#1 17 H'0044 to H'0047
Address trap
#2 18 H'0048 to H'004B
Internal interrupt (IC) 19 H'004C to H'004F
Internal interrupt (HSW1) 20 H'0050 to H'0053
IRQ0 21 H'0054 to H'0057
IRQ1 22 H'0058 to H'005B
IRQ2 23 H'005C to H'005F
IRQ3 24 H'0060 to H'0063
IRQ4 25 H'0064 to H'0067
External interrupt
IRQ5 26 H'0068 to H'006B
Internal interrupt*2 27
|
31
H'006C to H'006F
|
H'007C to H'007F
Reserved 32
|
33
H'0080 to H'0083
|
H'0084 to H'0087
Internal interrupt*3 34
|
67
H'0088 to H'008B
|
H'010C to H'010F
Section 5 Exception Handling
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 94 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address.
2. In this LSI, the watch dog timer generates NMIs.
3. For details on internal interrupt vectors, see section 6.3.3, Interrupt Exception Vector
Table.
5.2 Reset
5.2.1 Overview
A reset has the highest exception priority. When the RES pin goes low, all processing halts and the
LSI enters the reset state. A reset initializes the internal state of the CPU and the registers of on-
chip supporting modules. Immediately after a reset, interrupt control mode 0 is set. Reset
exception handling begins when the RES pin changes from low to high.
The LSIs can also be reset by overflow of the watchdog timer. For details, see section 17,
Watchdog Timer (WDT).
5.2.2 Reset Sequence
The LSI enters the reset state when the RES pin goes low. To ensure that the chip is reset, hold the
RES pin low during the oscillation stabilizing time of the clock oscillator when powering on. To
reset the chip during operation, hold the RES pin low for at least 20 states. For pin states in a reset,
see appendix D, Port States in the Different Processing States.
When the RES pin goes high after being held low for the necessary time, the chip starts reset
exception handling as follows:
1. The internal state of the CPU and the registers of the on-chip supporting modules are
initialized, and the I bit is set to 1 in CCR.
2. The reset exception vector address is read and transferred to the PC, and program execution
starts from the address indicated by the PC.
Figure 5.2 shows examples of the reset sequence.
Section 5 Exception Handling
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 95 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
φ
RES
Internal address bus
Internal read signal
Internal write signal
Internal data bus
Vector
fetch
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
: Reset exception vector address ((1) = H'0000 or H'000000)
: Start address (contents of reset exception vector address)
: Start address ((3) = (2))
: First program instruction
(1) (3)
High level
Internal
processing
Fetch of first program
instruction
(2) (4)
Figure 5.2 Reset Sequence (Mode 1)
5.2.3 Interrupts after Reset
If an interrupt is accepted after a reset but before the stack pointer (SP) is initialized, the PC and
CCR will not be saved correctly, leading to a program crash. To prevent this, all interrupt requests,
including NMI, are disabled immediately after a reset. Since the first instruction of a program is
always executed immediately after the reset state ends, make sure that this instruction initializes
the stack pointer (example: MOV.L #xx:32, SP).
Section 5 Exception Handling
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 96 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
5.3 Interrupts
Interrupt exception handling can be requested by six external sources (IRQ5 to IRQ0) and internal
sources in the on-chip supporting modules. Figure 5.3 shows the interrupt sources and the number
of interrupts of each type.
The on-chip supporting modules that can request interrupts include the watchdog timer (WDT),
prescaler unit (PSU), Timers A, B, J, L, R and X1 (TMR), serial communication interface (SCI),
A/D converter (ADC), I2C bus interface (IIC), servo circuits, sync detection, data slicer, OSD,
address trap, etc. Each interrupt source has a separate vector address. NMI is the highest-priority
interrupt. Interrupts are controlled by the interrupt controller. The interrupt controller has two
interrupt control modes and can assign interrupts other than NMI to either three priority/mask
levels to enable multiplexed interrupt control. For details on interrupts, see section 6, Interrupt
Controller.
WDT*
2
(1)
PSU (1)
TMR (15)*
3
SCI (4)
ADC (1)
IIC (3)*
4
Servo circuits (9)
Synchronized detection (1)
Address trap (3)
Interrupts
Internal
interrupts
External
interrupts
Notes: Numbers in parentheses are the numbers of interrupt sources.
In this LSI, the watchdog timer generates NMIs.
When the watchdog timer is used as an interval timer, it generates an interrupt
request at each counter overflow.
The number of interrupt sources is eight in the H8S/2197S or H8S/2196S.
The number of interrupt sources is one in the H8S/2197S or H8S/2196S.
1.
2.
3.
4.
NMI*
1
(1)
IRQ5 to IRQ0 (6)
Figure 5.3 Interrupt Sources and Number of Interrupts
Section 5 Exception Handling
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 97 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
5.4 Trap Instruction
Trap instruction exception handling starts when a TRAPA instruction is executed. Trap instruction
exception handling can be executed at all times in the program execution state.
The TRAPA instruction fetches a start address from a vector table entry corresponding to a vector
number from 0 to 3, as specified in the instruction code.
Table 5.3 shows the status of CCR and EXR after execution of trap instruction exception handling.
Table 5.3 Status of CCR and EXR after Trap Instruction Exception Handling
CCR EXR*
Interrupt Control
Mode I UI I2 to I0 T
0 1 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
1 1 1 ⎯ ⎯
Legend:
1: Set to 1
0: Cleared to 0
⎯: Retains value prior to execution.
*: Does not affect operation in this LSI.
Section 5 Exception Handling
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 98 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
5.5 Stack Status after Exception Handling
Figures 5.4 and 5.5 show the stack after completion of trap instruction exception handling and
interrupt exception handling.
CCR
CCR*
PC
(16 bits)
SP→
Note: * Ignored on return.
Interrupt control modes 0 and 1
Figure 5.4 Stack Status after Exception Handling (Normal Mode)*
Note: * Normal mode is not available for this LSI.
CCR
PC
(24 bits)
SP→
Interrupt control modes 0 and 1
Figure 5.5 Stack Status after Exception Handling (Advanced Mode)
Section 5 Exception Handling
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 99 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
5.6 Notes on Use of the Stack
When accessing word data or longword data, this chip assumes that the lowest address bit is 0.
The stack should always be accessed by word transfer instruction or longword transfer instruction,
and the value of the stack pointer (SP: ER7) should always be kept even.
Use the following instructions to save registers:
PUSH.W Rn (or MOV.W Rn, @-SP)
PUSH.L ERn (or MOV.L ERn, @-SP)
Use the following instructions to restore registers:
POP.WRn (or MOV.W @SP+, Rn)
POP.LERn (or MOV.L @SP+, ERn)
Setting SP to an odd value may lead to a malfunction. Figure 5.6 shows an example of what
happens when the SP value is odd.
SP
Legend: : Condition-code register
: Program counter
: General register R1L
: Stack pointer
H'FFFEFA
H'FFFEFB
H'FFFEFC
H'FFFEFD
H'FFFEFF
R1L
PC
SP
CCR
PC
SP
CCR
PC
R1L
SP
Note: This diagram illustrates an example in which the interrupt control mode is 0, is advanced mode.
TRAPA instruction executed MOV.B R1L, @-ER7
SP set to H'FFFEFF Data saved above SP Contents of CCR lost
Figure 5.6 Operation when SP Value Is Odd
Section 5 Exception Handling
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 100 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Section 6 Interrupt Controller
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 101 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Section 6 Interrupt Controller
6.1 Overview
6.1.1 Features
This LSI controls interrupts by means of an interrupt controller. The interrupt controller has the
following features:
• Two Interrupt Control Modes
⎯ Either of two interrupt control modes can be set by means of the INTM1 and INTM0 bits
in the system control register (SYSCR).
• Priorities Settable with ICR
⎯ An interrupt control register (ICR) is provided for setting interrupt priorities. Three priority
levels can be set for each module for all interrupts except NMI.
• Independent Vector Addresses
⎯ All interrupt sources are assigned independent vector addresses, making it unnecessary for
the source to be identified in the interrupt handling routine.
• Six External Interrupt Pins
⎯ NMI is the highest-priority interrupt, and is accepted at all times.
⎯ Falling edge, rising edge, or both edge detection can be selected for interrupt IRQ0.
⎯ Falling edge or rising edge can be individually selected for interrupts IRQ5 to IRQ1.
Note: * In this LSI, the watch dog timer generates NMIs.
Section 6 Interrupt Controller
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 102 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
6.1.2 Block Diagram
Figure 6.1 shows a block diagram of the interrupt controller.
IRQ input
Internal
interrupt
requests
Legend:
IEGR
IENR
IRQR
ICR
SYSCR
: IRQ edge select register
: IRQ enable register
: IRQ status register
: Interrupt control register
: System control register
Interrupt
request
Vector
number
I, UI
IRQ input
unit IRQR
IEGR IENR
ICR
CPU
Interrupt controller
SYSCR
INTM1, INTM0
CCR
Priority
determina-
tion
Figure 6.1 Block Diagram of Interrupt Controller
Section 6 Interrupt Controller
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 103 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
6.1.3 Pin Configuration
Table 6.1 summarizes the pins of the interrupt controller.
Table 6.1 Interrupt Controller Pins
Name Symbol I/O Function
External interrupt
request 0
IRQ0 Input Maskable external interrupts; rising, falling, or both
edges can be selected
External interrupt
requests 1 to 5
IRQ1 to
IRQ5
Input Maskable external interrupts: rising, or falling edges
can be selected
6.1.4 Register Configuration
Table 6.2 summarizes the registers of the interrupt controller.
Table 6.2 Interrupt Controller Registers
Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value Address*1
System control register SYSCR R/W H'00 H'FFE8
IRQ edge select register IEGR R/W H'00 H'FFF0
IRQ enable register IENR R/W H'00 H'FFF1
IRQ status register IRQR R/ (W)*2 H'00 H'FFF2
Interrupt control register A ICRA R/W H'00 H'FFF3
Interrupt control register B ICRB R/W H'00 H'FFF4
Interrupt control register C ICRC R/W H'00 H'FFF5
Interrupt control register D ICRD R/W H'00 H'FFF6
Port mode register 1 PMR1 R/W H'00 H'FFCE
Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address.
2. Only 0 can be written, for flag clearing.
Section 6 Interrupt Controller
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 104 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
6.2 Register Descriptions
6.2.1 System Control Register (SYSCR)
0
0
1
0
—
2
0
—
3
1
R
4
0
R/W
5
0
R
0
7
——XRSTINTM0INTM1
0
6
——
——
—
—
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
SYSCR is an 8-bit readable register that selects the interrupt control mode. Only bits 5, 4, 2 and 1
are described here; for details on the other bits, see section 3.2.2, System Control Register
(SYSCR). SYSCR is initialized to H'08 by a reset.
Bits 5 and 4⎯Interrupt Control Mode (INTM1, INTM0): These bits select one of two
interrupt control modes for the interrupt controller. The INTM1 bit must not be set to 1.
Bit 5 Bit 4
INTM1 INTM0
Interrupt Control
Mode Description
0 0 Interrupts are controlled by I bit (Initial value) 0
1 1 Interrupts are controlled by I and UI bits and ICR
1 0 ⎯ Cannot be used in this LSI
1 ⎯ Cannot be used in this LSI
Section 6 Interrupt Controller
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 105 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
6.2.2 Interrupt Control Registers A to D (ICRA to ICRD)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
0
7
ICR4 ICR3 ICR2 ICR1 ICR0
0
R/W
ICR7
R/WR/WR/W
ICR6 ICR5
6
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The ICR registers are four 8-bit readable/writable registers that set the interrupt control level for
interrupts other than NMI.
The correspondence between ICR settings and interrupt sources is shown in table 6.3.
The ICR registers are initialized to H'00 by a reset.
Bits 7 to 0⎯Interrupt Control Level (ICR7 to ICR0): Set the control level for the
corresponding interrupt source.
Bit n
ICRn Description
0 Corresponding interrupt source is control level 0 (non-priority) (Initial value)
1 Corresponding interrupt source is control level 1 (priority)
Note: n = 7 to 0
Table 6.3 Correspondence between Interrupt Sources and ICR Settings
ICRA7 ICRA6 ICRA5 ICRA4 ICRA3 ICRA2 ICRA1 ICRA0 ICRA
Reserved Input
capture
HSW1 IRQ0 IRQ1 IRQ2
IRQ3
IRQ4
IRQ5
Sync
separator,
OSD
ICRB7 ICRB6 ICRB5 ICRB4 ICRB3 ICRB2 ICRB1 ICRB0 ICRB
Data slicer Sync
separator
Servo
(drum,
capstan
latch)
Timer A Timer B Timer J Timer R Timer L
ICRC7 ICRC6 ICRC5 ICRC4 ICRC3 ICRC2 ICRC1 ICRC0 ICRC
Timer X1* Synchro-
nized
detection
Watchdog
timer
Servo IIC1 SCI1
(UART)
IIC0* A/D
ICRD ICRD7 ICRD6 ICRD5 ICRD4 ICRD3 ICRD2 ICRD1 ICRD0
HSW2 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
Note: * This bit has no function in the H8S/2197S or H8S/2196S.
Section 6 Interrupt Controller
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 106 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
6.2.3 IRQ Enable Register (IENR)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
00
7
R/WR/WR/W
IRQ5E IRQ4E IRQ3E IRQ2E IRQ1E IRQ0E
0
6
——
——
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
IENR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls enabling and disabling of interrupt
requests IRQ5 to IRQ0.
IENR is initialized to H'00 by a reset.
Bits 7 and 6⎯Reserved: These bits are always read as 0. Do not write 1 to them.
Bits 5 to 0⎯IRQ5 to IRQ0 Enable (IRQ5E to IRQ0E): These bits select whether IRQ5 to
IRQ0 are enabled or disabled.
Bit n
IRQnE Description
0 IRQn interrupt disabled (Initial value)
1 IRQn interrupt enabled
Note: n = 5 to 0
Section 6 Interrupt Controller
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 107 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
6.2.4 IRQ Edge Select Registers (IEGR)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
00
7
—
—R/WR/WR/W
IRQ4EG
R/W
IRQ5EG IRQ3EG IRQ2EG IRQ1EG IRQ0EG1 IRQ0EG0
0
6
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
IEGR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects detected edge of the input at pins IRQ5 to
IRQ0. IEGR register is initialized to H'00 by a reset.
Bit 7⎯Reserved: This bit is always read as 0. Do not write 1 to it.
Bits 6 to 2⎯IRQ5 to IRQ1 Pins Detected Edge Select (IRQ5EG to IRQ1EG): These bits select
detected edge for interrupts IRQ5 to IRQ1.
Bits 6 to 2
IRQnEG Description
0 Interrupt request generated at falling edge of IRQn pin input (Initial value)
1 Interrupt request generated at rising edge of IRQn pin input
Note: n = 5 to 1
Bits 1 and 0⎯IRQ0 Pin Detected Edge Select (IRQ0EG1, IRQ0EG0): These bits select
detected edge for interrupt IRQ0.
Bit 1 Bit 0
IRQ0EG1 IRQ0EG0 Description
0 0 Interrupt request generated at falling edge of IRQ0 pin input
(Initial value)
0 1 Interrupt request generated at rising edge of IRQ0 pin input
1 * Interrupt request generated at both falling and rising edges of IRQ0 pin
input
Legend: * Don't care
Section 6 Interrupt Controller
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 108 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
6.2.5 IRQ Status Register (IRQR)
0
0
1
0
R/(W)*
2
0
R/(W)*
3
0
4
0
R/(W)*
5
00
7
R/(W)*R/(W)*R/(W)*
IRQ5F IRQ4F IRQ3F IRQ2F IRQ1F IRQ0F
0
6
——
——
Note: * Only 0 can be written, to clear the flag.
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
IRQR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that indicates the status of IRQ5 to IRQ0 interrupt
requests.
IRQR is initialized to H'00 by a reset.
Bits 7 and 6⎯Reserved: These bits are always read as 0. Do not write 1 to them.
Bits 5 to 0⎯IRQ5 to IRQ0 Flags: These bits indicate the status of IRQ5 to IRQ0 interrupt
requests.
Bit n
IRQnF Description
0 [Clearing conditions] (Initial value)
(1) Cleared by reading IRQnF set to 1, then writing 0 in IRQnF
(2) When IRQn interrupt exception handling is executed
1 [Setting conditions]
(1) When a falling edge occurs in IRQn input while falling edge detection is set
(IRQnEG = 0)
(2) When a rising edge occurs in IRQn input while rising edge detection is set
(IRQnEG = 0)
(3) When a falling or rising edge occurs in IRQ0 input while both-edge detection is
set (IRQ0EG1 = 1)
Note: n = 5 to 0
Section 6 Interrupt Controller
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 109 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
6.2.6 Port Mode Register 1 (PMR1)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
0
7
0
R/W
PMR17 PMR16 PMR15 PMR14 PMR13 PMR12 PMR11 PMR10
R/WR/WR/W
6
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Port Mode Register 1 (PMR1) controls pin function switching-over of port 1. Switching is
specified for each bit.
PMR1 is an 8-bit readable/writable register and is initialized to H'00 by a reset.
Only bits 5 to 0 are explained here. For details, see section 10.3.2, Register Configuration.
Bits 5 to 0⎯P15/IRQ5 to P10/IRQ0 pin switching (PMR15 to PMR10): These bits are for
setting the P1n/IRQn pin as the input pin for P1n or as the IRQn pin for external interrupt request
input.
Bit n
PMR1n Description
0 P1n/IRQn pin functions as the P1n input/output pin (Initial value)
1 P1n/IRQn pin functions as the IRQn input/output pin
Note: n = 5 to 0
Notes on switching the pin function by PMR1 are as follows:
• When the port is set as the IC input pin or IRQ5 to IRQ0 input pin, the pin level must be high
or low regardless of active mode or power-down mode. Do not set the pin level at medium.
• Switching the pin function of P16/IC or P15/IRQ5 to P10/IRQ0 may be mistakenly identified
as edge detection and detection signal may be generated. To prevent this, operate as follows:
⎯ Set the interrupt enable/disable flag to disable before switching the pin function.
⎯ Clear the applicable interrupt request flag to 0 after switching the pin function and
executing another instruction.
Section 6 Interrupt Controller
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 110 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Program example
:
MOV.B R0L,@IENR ⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ Interrupt disabled
MOV.B R1L,@PMR1 ⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ Pin function change
NOP ⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ Optional instruction
BCLR m @IRQR ⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ Applicable interrupt clear
MOV.B R1L,@IENR ⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ Interrupt enabled
:
6.3 Interrupt Sources
Interrupt sources comprise external interrupts (IRQ5 to IRQ0) and internal interrupts.
6.3.1 External Interrupts
There are six external interrupt sources; IRQ5 to IRQ0. Of these, IRQ1 to IRQ0 can be used to
restore this chip from standby mode.
• IRQ5 to IRQ0 Interrupts: Interrupts IRQ5 to IRQ0 are requested by an input signal at pins
IRQ5 to IRQ0. Interrupts IRQ5 to IRQ0 have the following features:
(a) Using IEGR, it is possible to select whether an interrupt is requested by a falling edge,
rising edge, or both edges, at pin IRQ0.
(b) Using IEGR, it is possible to select whether an interrupt is requested by a falling edge or
rising edge at pins IRQ5 to IRQ1.
(c) Enabling or disabling of interrupt requests IRQ5 to IRQ0 can be selected with IENR.
(d) The interrupt control level can be set with ICR.
(e) The status of interrupt requests IRQ5 to IRQ0 is indicated in IRQR. IRQR flags can be
cleared to 0 by software.
Section 6 Interrupt Controller
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 111 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Figure 6.2 shows a block diagram of interrupts IRQ5 to IRQ0.
Clear signal
R
S
Q
Edge detection
circuit
IRQnEG IRQnF
IRQnE
Note: n = 5 to 0
IRQn interrupt
request
IRQn input
Figure 6.2 Block Diagram of Interrupts IRQ5 to IRQ0
Figure 6.3 shows the timing of IRQnF setting.
Internal φ
IRQnF
IRQn
input pin
Figure 6.3 Timing of IRQnF Setting
The vector numbers for IRQ5 to IRQ0 interrupt exception handling are 21 to 26.
Upon detection of IRQ5 to IRQ0 interrupts, the applicable pin is set in the port register 1 (PMR1)
as IRQn pin.
Section 6 Interrupt Controller
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 112 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
6.3.2 Internal Interrupts
There are 38 sources for internal interrupts from on-chip supporting modules.
• For each on-chip supporting module there are flags that indicate the interrupt request status,
and enable bits that select enabling or disabling of these interrupts. If any one of these is set to
1, an interrupt request is issued to the interrupt controller.
• The interrupt control level can be set by means of ICR.
• The NMI is the highest priority interrupt and is always accepted regardless of the control mode
and CPU interrupt mask bit. In this LSI, NMIs are used as interrupts generated by the
watchdog timer.
Section 6 Interrupt Controller
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 113 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
6.3.3 Interrupt Exception Vector Table
Table 6.4 shows interrupt exception handling sources, vector addresses, and interrupt priorities.
For default priorities, the lower the vector number, the higher the priority.
Priorities among modules can be set by means of ICR. The situation when two or more modules
are set to the same priority, and priorities within a module, are fixed as shown in table 6.4.
Table 6.4 Interrupt Sources, Vector Addresses, and Interrupt Priorities
Priority Interrupt Source
Origin of
Interrupt Source
Vector
No. Vector Address ICR Remarks
Reset External pin 0 H'0000 to H'0003 ⎯
⎯ 1 H'0004 to H'0007 ⎯
⎯ 2 H'0008 to H'000B ⎯
⎯ 3 H'000C to H'000F ⎯
⎯ 4 H'0010 to H'0013 ⎯
Reserved
⎯ 5 H'0014 to H'0017 ⎯
Direct transition Instruction 6 H'0018 to H'001B ⎯
NMI Watchdog timer 7 H'001C to H'001F ⎯
TRAPA#0 8 H'0020 to H'0023 ⎯
TRAPA#1 9 H'0024 to H'0027 ⎯
TRAPA#2 10 H'0028 to H'002B ⎯
Trap instruction
TRAPA#3
Instruction
11 H'002C to H'002F ⎯
12 H'0030 to H'0033
13 H'0034 to H'0037
14 H'0038 to H'003B
High
Low
Reserved ⎯
15 H'003C to H'003F
⎯
Section 6 Interrupt Controller
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 114 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Priority Interrupt Source
Origin of
Interrupt Source
Vector
No. Vector Address ICR Remarks
#0 16 H'0040 to H'0043
#1 17 H'0044 to H'0047
Address trap
#2
ATC
18 H'0048 to H'004B
⎯
IC PSU 19 H'004C to H'004F ICRA6
HSW1 Servo circuit 20 H'0050 to H'0053 ICRA5
IRQ0 21 H'0054 to H'0057 ICRA4
IRQ1 22 H'0058 to H'005B ICRA3
IRQ2 23 H'005C to H'005F
IRQ3 24 H'0060 to H'0063
ICRA2
IRQ4 25 H'0064 to H'0067
IRQ5
External pin
26 H'0068 to H'006B
ICRA1
External V interrupt Sync separator 27 H'006C to H'006F ICRA0
OSD V interrupt OSD 28 H'0070 to H'0073
Data slicer odd field interrupt Data slicer 29 H'0074 to H'0077 ICRB7
Data slicer even field interrupt 30 H'0078 to H'007B
Noise interrupt Sync separator 31 H'007C to H'007F ICRB6
Reserved ⎯ 32 H'0080 to H'0083 ⎯
33 H'0084 to H'0087
Drum latch 1 (speed) Servo circuit 34 H'0088 to H'008B ICRB5
Capstan latch 1 (speed) 35 H'008C to H'008F
TMAI Timer A 36 H'0090 to H'0093 ICRB4
TMBI Timer B 37 H'0094 to H'0097 ICRB3
High
TMJ1I Timer J 38 H'0098 to H'009B ICRB2
TMJ2I 39 H'009C to H'009F
TMR1I Timer R 40 H'00A0 to H'00A3 ICRB1
TMR2I 41 H'00A4 to H'00A7
TMR3I 42 H'00A8 to H'00AB
Low TMLI Timer L 43 H'00AC to H'00AF ICRB0
Section 6 Interrupt Controller
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 115 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Priority Interrupt Source
Origin of
Interrupt Source
Vector
No. Vector Address ICR Remarks
ICXA* Timer X1* 44 H'00B0 to H'00B3
ICXB* 45 H'00B4 to H'00B7
ICXC* 46 H'00B8 to H'00BB
ICXD* 47 H'00BC to H'00BF
OCX1* 48 H'00C0 to H'00C3
OCX2* 49 H'00C4 to H'00C7
OVFX* 50 H'00C8 to H'00CB
ICRC7
VD interrupts Sync signal
detection
51 H'00CC to H'00CF ICRC6
Reserved ⎯ 52 H'00D0 to H'00D3
8-bit interval timer Watchdog timer 53 H'00D4 to H'00D7 ICRC5
CTL 54 H'00D8 to H'00DB
Drum latch 2 (speed) 55 H'00DC to H'00DF
Capstan latch 2 (speed) 56 H'00E0 to H'00E3
Drum latch 3 (phase) 57 H'00E4 to H'00D7
Capstan latch 3 (phase)
Servo circuit
58 H'00E8 to H'00EB
ICRC4
IIC1 IIC1 59 H'00EC to H'00EF ICRC3
ERI 60 H'00F0 to H'00F3
RXI 61 H'00F4 to H'00F7
TXI 62 H'00F8 to H'00FB
SCI1
TEI
SCI1
(UART)
63 H'00FC to H'00FF
ICRC2
64 H'0100 to H'0103 IIC0*
DDCSW*
IIC0*
65 H'0104 to H'0107
ICRC1
A/D conversion end A/D 66 H'0108 to H'010B ICRC0
High
Low HSW2 Servo circuit 67 H'010C to H'010F ICRD7
Note: * Not available in the H8S/2197S or H8S/2196S.
Section 6 Interrupt Controller
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 116 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
6.4 Interrupt Operation
6.4.1 Interrupt Control Modes and Interrupt Operation
Interrupt operations in this LSI differ depending on the interrupt control mode.
The NMI interrupt* and address trap interrupts are accepted at all times except in the reset state. In
the case of IRQ interrupts and on-chip supporting module interrupts, an enable bit is provided for
each interrupt. Clearing an enable bit to 0 disables the corresponding interrupt request.
Interrupt sources in which the enable bits are set to 1 are controlled by the interrupt controller.
Table 6.5 shows the interrupt control modes.
The interrupt controller performs interrupt control according to the interrupt control mode set by
the INTM1 and INTM0 bits in SYSCR, the priorities set in ICR, and the masking state indicated
by the I and UI bits in the CPU’s CCR.
Note: * In this LSI, the NMI interrupt is generated by the watchdog timer.
Table 6.5 Interrupt Control Modes
SYSCR Interrupt
Control
Mode INTM1 INTM0
Priority
Setting
Register
Interrupt
Mask Bits Description
0 0 0 ICR I Interrupt mask control is
performed by the I bit
Priority can be set with ICR
1 1 ICR I, UI 3-level interrupt mask control is
performed by the I and UI bits
Priority can be set with ICR
Section 6 Interrupt Controller
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 117 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Figure 6.4 shows a block diagram of the priority decision circuit.
Interrupt control modes 0 and 1
I
Interrupt source
UI
Vector number
Interrupt acceptance
control and 3-level
mask control
Default priority
determination
I C R
Figure 6.4 Block Diagram of Interrupt Priority Determination Operation
• Interrupt Acceptance Control and 3-Level Control: In interrupt control modes 0 and 1,
interrupt acceptance control and 3-level mask control is performed by means of the I and UI
bits in CCR, and ICR (control level). Table 6.6 shows the interrupts selected in each interrupt
control mode.
Table 6.6 Interrupts Selected in Each Interrupt Control Mode
Interrupt Mask Bit
Interrupt Control
Mode I UI Selected Interrupts
0 * All interrupts (control level 1 has priority) 0
1 * NMI*1 and address trap interrupts
1 0 * All interrupts (control level 1 has priority)
1 0 NMI*1, address trap and control level 1 interrupts
1 NMI*1 and address trap interrupts
Legend: * Don't care
Note: 1. In this LSI, the NMI interrupt is generated by the watchdog timer.
• Default Priority Determination: If the same value is set for ICR, acceptance of multiple
interrupts is enabled, and so only the interrupt source with the highest priority according to the
preset default priorities is selected and has a vector number generated.
Interrupt sources with a lower priority than the accepted interrupt source are held pending.
Table 6.7 shows operations and control signal functions in each interrupt control mode.
Section 6 Interrupt Controller
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 118 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Table 6.7 Operations and Control Signal Functions in Each Interrupt Control Mode
Setting
Interrupt Acceptance Control,
3-Level Control
Interrupt
Control Mode INTM1 INTM0 I UI ICR
Default Priority
Determination
0 0 0 { IM ⎯ PR {
1 1 { IM IM PR {
Legend:
{: Interrupt operation control performed
IM: Used as interrupt mask bit
PR: Sets priority
⎯: Not used
6.4.2 Interrupt Control Mode 0
Enabling and disabling of IRQ interrupts and on-chip supporting module interrupts can be set by
the I bit in the CPU’s CCR, and ICR. Interrupts are enabled when the I bit is cleared to 0, and
disabled when set to 1. Control level 1 interrupt sources have higher priority.
Figure 6.5 shows a flowchart of the interrupt acceptance operation in this case.
• If an interrupt source occurs when the corresponding interrupt enable bit is set to 1, an
interrupt request is sent to the interrupt controller.
• When interrupt requests are sent to the interrupt controller, a control level 1 interrupt,
according to the control level set in ICR, has priority for selection, and other interrupt requests
are held pending. If a number of interrupt requests with the same control level setting are
generated at the same time, the interrupt request with the highest priority according to the
priority system shown in table 6.4 is selected.
• The I bit is then referenced. If the I bit is cleared to 0, the interrupt request is accepted. If the I
bit is set to 1, only an NMI*1 or an address trap interrupt is accepted, and other interrupt
requests are held pending.
• When an interrupt request is accepted, interrupt exception handling starts after execution of the
current instruction has been completed.
• The PC and CCR are saved to the stack area by interrupt exception handling. The PC saved on
the stack shows the address of the first instruction to be executed after returning from the
interrupt handling routine.
• Next, the I bit in CCR is set to 1. This disables all interrupts except NMI* and address trap.
• A vector address is generated for the accepted interrupt, and execution of the interrupt
handling routine starts at the address indicated by the contents of that vector address.
Section 6 Interrupt Controller
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 119 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Note: * In this LSI, the NMI interrupt is generated by the watchdog timer.
Program execution state
Interrupt
generated?
NMI
Address trap
interrupt?
Control level 1
interrupt?
I C
I = 0
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
Save PC and CCR
I ← 1
Read vector address
Branch to interrupt handling routine
I C No
No
H S W 1H S W 1
H S W 2H S W 2
Hold pending
Figure 6.5 Flowchart of Procedure Up to Interrupt Acceptance in
Interrupt Control Mode 0
Section 6 Interrupt Controller
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 120 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
6.4.3 Interrupt Control Mode 1
Three-level masking is implemented for IRQ interrupts and on-chip supporting module interrupts
by means of the I and UI bits in the CPU’s CCR and ICR.
• Control level 0 interrupt requests are enabled when the I bit is cleared to 0, and disabled when
set to 1.
• Control level 1 interrupt requests are enabled when the I bit or UI bit is cleared to 0, and
disabled when both the I bit and the UI bit are set to 1.
For example, if the interrupt enable bit for an interrupt request is set to 1, and H'04, H'00, H'00 and
H'00 are set in ICRA, ICRB, ICRC and ICRD respectively, (i.e. IRQ2 interrupt is set to control
level 1 and other interrupts to control level 0), the situation is as follows:
• When I = 0, all interrupts are enabled
(Priority order: NMI > IRQ2 > IC > HSW1 > ...)
• When I = 1 and UI = 0, only NMI, address trap and IRQ2 interrupts are enabled
• When I = 1 and UI = 1, only NMI and address trap interrupts are enabled
Figure 6.6 shows the state transitions in these cases.
Only NMI, address trap and
IRQ2 interrupts enabled
All interrupts enabled
Exception handling
execution or UI ← 1
Exception handling
execution or
I ← 1, UI ← 1
I ← 0
I ← 1, UI ← 0
UI ← 0I ← 0
Only NMI and address trap
interrupts enabled
Figure 6.6 Example of State Transitions in Interrupt Control Mode 1
Figure 6.7 shows an operation flowchart of interrupt reception.
Section 6 Interrupt Controller
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 121 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
(1) If an interrupt source occurs when the corresponding interrupt enable bit is set to 1, an
interrupt request is sent to the interrupt controller.
(2) When interrupt requests are sent to the interrupt controller, a control level 1 interrupt,
according to the control level set in ICR, has priority for selection, and other interrupt requests
are held pending. If a number of interrupt requests with the same control level setting are
generated at the same time, the interrupt request with the highest priority according to the
priority system shown in table 6.4 is selected.
(3) The I bit is then referenced. If the I bit is cleared to 0, the UI bit has no effect.
An interrupt request set to interrupt control level 0 is accepted when the I bit is cleared to 0. If
the I bit is set to 1, only NMI* and address trap interrupts are accepted, and other interrupt
requests are held pending.
An interrupt request set to interrupt control level 1 has priority over an interrupt request set to
interrupt control level 0, and is accepted if the I bit is cleared to 0, or if the I bit is set to 1 and
the UI bit is cleared to 0.
When both the I bit and the UI bit are set to 1, only NMI* and address trap interrupts are
accepted, and other interrupt requests are held pending.
(4) When an interrupt request is accepted, interrupt exception handling starts after execution of the
current instruction has been completed.
(5) The PC and CCR are saved to the stack area by interrupt exception handling. The PC saved on
the stack shows the address of the first instruction to be executed after returning from the
interrupt handling routine.
(6) Next, the I and UI bits in CCR are set to 1. This masks all interrupts except NMI* and address
trap.
(7) A vector address is generated for the accepted interrupt, and execution of the interrupt
handling routine starts at the address indicated by the contents of that vector address.
Note: * In this LSI, the NMI interrupt is generated by the watchdog timer.
Section 6 Interrupt Controller
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 122 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Program execution state
NMI
I C
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
I C No
No
H S W 1H S W 1
H S W 2
H S W 2
Yes
No
Yes
No
Interrupt
generated?
Address trap
interrupt?
Control level 1
interrupt?
I = 0 I = 0
UI = 0
Save PC and CCR
I ← 1, UI ← 1
Read vector address
Branch to interrupt handling routine
Hold pending
Figure 6.7 Flowchart of Procedure Up to Interrupt Acceptance in
Interrupt Control Mode 1
Section 6 Interrupt Controller
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 123 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
6.4.4 Interrupt Exception Handling Sequence
Figure 6.8 shows the interrupt exception handling sequence. The example shown is for the case
where interrupt control 0 is set in advanced mode, and the program area and stack area are in on-
chip memory.
φ
(1)
(1) Instruction prefetch address (Not executed.
This is the contents of the saved PC, the
return address.)
Saved PC and saved CCR
Vector address
Interrupt handling routine start address (vector address contents)
Interrupt handling routine start address ((13) = (10)(12))
First instruction of interrupt handling routine
(2)(4)
(6)(8)
(10)(12)
(13)
(9)(11)
(14)
(3) (5) (7) (9) (11) (13)
Internal
address bus
Interrupt
request signal
Internal read
signal
Internal
write signal
Internal
data bus (2) (4) (6) (8) (10) (12) (14)
Stack Vector fetch
Interrupt level
determination
Wait for end of
instruction
Interrupt
acceptance
Internal
operation
Internal
operation
Instruction
prefetch Interrupt handling routine
instruction prefetch
Instruction code (Not executed.)
(3) Instruction prefetch address (Not executed.)
(5) SP-2
(7) SP-4
Figure 6.8 Interrupt Exception Handling
Section 6 Interrupt Controller
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 124 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
6.4.5 Interrupt Response Times
Table 6.8 shows interrupt response times-the interval between generation of an interrupt request
and execution of the first instruction in the interrupt handling routine. The symbols used in table
6.8 are explained in table 6.9.
Table 6.8 Interrupt Response Times
No. Number of States Advanced Mode
1 Interrupt priority determination*1 3
2 Number of wait states until executing instruction ends*2 1 to 19 + 2⋅SI
3 PC, CCR stack save 2 ⋅ Sk
4 Vector fetch 2 ⋅ SI
5 Instruction fetch*3 2 ⋅ SI
6 Internal processing*4 2
Total (using on-chip memory) 12 to 32
Notes: 1. Two states in case of internal interrupt.
2. Refers to MULXS and DIVXS instruction.
3. Prefetch after interrupt acceptance and interrupt handling routine prefetch.
4. Internal processing after interrupt acceptance and internal processing after vector fetch.
Table 6.9 Number of States in Interrupt Handling Routine Execution
Object of Access
Symbol Internal Memory
Instruction fetch SI 1
Stack operation SK 1
Section 6 Interrupt Controller
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 125 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
6.5 Usage Notes
6.5.1 Contention between Interrupt Generation and Disabling
When an interrupt enable bit is cleared to 0 to disable interrupts, the disabling becomes effective
after execution of the instruction.
In other words, when an interrupt enable bit is cleared to 0 by an instruction such as BCLR or
MOV, if an interrupt is generated during execution of the instruction, the interrupt concerned will
still be enabled on completion of the instruction, and so interrupt exception handling for that
interrupt will be executed on completion of the instruction. However, if there is an interrupt
request of higher priority than that interrupt, interrupt exception handling will be executed for the
higher-priority interrupt, and the lower-priority interrupt will be ignored.
The same also applies when an interrupt source flag is cleared to 0.
Figure 6.9 shows an example in which the OCIAE bit in timer X1 TIER is cleared to 0.
φ
TIER address
Internal
address bus
Internal
write signal
OCIAE
OCFA
OCIA
interrupt signal
TIER write cycle
by CPU
OCIA interrupt
exception handling
Figure 6.9 Contention between Interrupt Generation and Disabling
Section 6 Interrupt Controller
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 126 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
The above contention will not occur if an enable bit or interrupt source flag is cleared to 0 while
the interrupt is masked.
6.5.2 Instructions That Disable Interrupts
Instructions that disable interrupts are LDC, ANDC, ORC, and XORC. After any of these
instructions is executed, all interrupts including NMI are disabled and the next instruction is
always executed. When the I bit or UI bit is set by one of these instructions, the new value
becomes valid two states after execution of the instruction ends.
6.5.3 Interrupts during Execution of EEPMOV Instruction
Interrupt operation differs between the EEPMOV.B instruction and the EEPMOV.W instruction.
With the EEPMOV.B instruction, an interrupt request (including NMI) issued during the transfer
is not accepted until the move is completed.
With the EEPMOV.W instruction, if an interrupt request is issued during the transfer, interrupt
exception handling starts at a break in the transfer cycle. The PC value saved on the stack in this
case is the address of the next instruction.
Therefore, if an interrupt is generated during execution of an EEPMOV.W instruction, the
following coding should be used.
L1: EEPMOV.W
MOV.W R4,R4
BNE L1
Section 7 ROM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 127 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Section 7 ROM
7.1 Overview
The H8S/2199R has 128 kbytes or 256 kbytes of on-chip ROM (flash memory or mask ROM), the
H8S/2198R has 112 kbytes, the H8S/2197R and H8S/2197S have 96 kbytes, and the H8S/2196R
and H8S/2196S have 80 kbytes*. The ROM is connected to the CPU by a 16-bit data bus. The
CPU accesses both byte and word data in one state, enabling faster instruction fetches and higher
processing speed.
The flash memory versions of the H8S/2199R can be erased and programmed on-board as well as
with a general-purpose PROM programmer.
Note: * For details on product line-up, refer to section 1, Overview.
7.1.1 Block Diagram
Figure 7.1 shows a block diagram of the ROM.
Internal data bus (upper 8 bits)
Internal data bus (lower 8 bits)
H'000000
H'000002
H'01FFFE
H'000001
H'000003
H'01FFFF
Figure 7.1 ROM Block Diagram (H8S/2199R)
Section 7 ROM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 128 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
7.2 Overview of Flash Memory
7.2.1 Features
The features of the flash memory are summarized below.
• Four flash memory operating modes
⎯ Program mode
⎯ Erase mode
⎯ Program-verify mode
⎯ Erase-verify mode
• Programming/erase methods
The flash memory is programmed 128 bytes at a time. Erasing is performed by block erase (in
single-block units). When erasing all blocks, the individual blocks must be erased sequentially.
Block erasing can be performed as required on 4-kbyte, 32-kbyte, and 64-kbyte blocks. (In
OSD ROM, block erasing can be performed on 1-kbyte, 2-kbyte, and 28-kbyte blocks).
• Programming/erase times
The flash memory programming time is 10 ms (typ.) for simultaneous 128-byte programming,
equivalent to 78 μs (typ.) per byte, and the erase time is 100 ms (typ.) per block.
• Reprogramming capability
The flash memory can be reprogrammed up to 100 times.
• On-board programming modes
There are two modes in which flash memory can be programmed/erased/verified on-board:
⎯ Boot mode
⎯ User program mode
• Automatic bit rate adjustment
If data transfer on boot mode, automatic adjustment is possible at host transfer bit rates and
LSI's bit rates.
• Protect modes
There are three protect modes, hardware, software, and error protect, which allow protected
status to be designated for flash memory program/erase/verify operations.
• Programmer mode
Flash memory can be programmed/erased in programmer mode, using a PROM programmer,
as well as in on-board programming mode.
Section 7 ROM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 129 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
7.2.2 Block Diagram
Figure 7.2 shows a block diagram of the flash memory.
Module bus
Bus interface/controller
Flash memory
(256 kbytes)
Operat-
ing
mode
FLMCR1
STCR
FLMCR1
FLMCR2
EBR1
EBR2
: Serial/timer control register
: Flash memory control register 1
: Flash memory control register 2
: Erase block register 1
: Erase block register 2
Legend:
Internal address bus
Internal data bus (16 bits)
STCR
FWE pin
Mode pin
FLMCR2
EBR1
Flash memory
(OSD ROM)
(32 kbytes)
EBR2
Figure 7.2 Block Diagram of Flash Memory (H8S/2199R Only)
Section 7 ROM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 130 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
7.2.3 Flash Memory Operating Modes
Mode Transitions
When each mode pin and the FWE pin are set in the reset state and a reset-start is executed, the
MCU enters one of the operating modes shown in figure 7.3. In user mode, flash memory can be
read but not programmed or erased.
Flash memory can be programmed and erased in boot mode, user program mode, and programmer
mode.
Boot mode
On-board program mode
User
program
mode
User mode
Reset state
Programmer
mode
FWE = 1, MD0 = 0,
P12 = P13 = P14 = 1
MD0 = 0,
P12 = P13 = 1, P14 = 0
RES = 0
RES = 0
FWE = 1
SWE = 1
FWE = 0
or
SWE = 0
RES = 0
MD1 = 1, FWE = 0
RES = 0
Only make a transition between user mode
and user program mode when the CPU is not
accessing the flash memory.
Note:
Figure 7.3 Flash Memory Mode Transitions
Section 7 ROM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 131 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
On-Board Programming Modes
• Boot mode
<Flash memory>
<This LSI>
<RAM>
<Host>
Programming control
program
SCI
Application
program
(old version)
New application
program
Programming control
program
Programming control
program
<This LSI>
<RAM>
<Host>
SCI
Boot program area
<This LSI>
<RAM>
<Host>
SCI
Flash memory erase
<This LSI>
Program execution state
<RAM>
<Host>
SCI
New application
program
1. Initial state 2. Writing control program transfer
3. Flash memory initialization 4. Writing new application program
Boot program
<Flash memory>
Application
program
(old version)
Boot program
<Flash memory>
Boot program
<Flash memory>
Boot program
Boot program area Programming control
program
The flash memory is in the erased state when the
device is shipped. The description here applies to
the case where the old program version or data is
being rewritten. The user should prepare the
programming control program and new application
program beforehand in the host.
When boot mode is entered, the boot program in
this LSI chip (originally incorporated in the chip) is
started, and SCI communication check is carried
out, and the boot program required for flash memory
erasing is automatically transferred to the RAM boot
program area.
The erase program in the boot program area (in
RAM) is executed, and the flash memory is
initialized (to H'FF). In boot mode, entire flash
memory erasure is performed, without regard to
blocks.
The programming control program transferred from
the host to RAM by SCI communication is executed,
and the new application program in the host is
written into the flash memory.
New application
program
New application
program
Figure 7.4 Boot Mode
Section 7 ROM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 132 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
• User program mode
<Flash memory>
<This LSI>
<RAM>
<Host>
Programming/erase control program
SCI
Boot program
New application
program
<This LSI>
<RAM>
<Host>
SCI
<Flash memory>
<This LSI>
<RAM>
<Host>
SCI
Flash memory erase
Boot program
New application
program
<This LSI>
Program execution state
<RAM>
<Host>
SCI
Programming/erase
control program
1. Initial state 2. Programming/erase control program transfer
3. Flash memory initialization 4. Writing new application program
FWE assessment program
Transfer program
Application
program
(old version)
FWE assessment program
Transfer program
Programming/erase control program Programming/erase control program
<Flash memory>
New application
program
Boot program
FWE assessment program
Transfer program
(1) The FWE assessment program that confirms that
the FWE pin has been driven high, and (2) the
program that will transfer the programming/erase
control program from the flash memory to on-chip RAM
should be written into the flash memory by the user
beforehand. (3) The programming/erase control
program should be prepared in the host or in the flash
memory.
When the FWE pin is driven high, user software
confirms this fact, executes the transfer program in the
flash memory, and transfers the programming/erase
control program to RAM.
The programming/erase control program in RAM is
executed, and the flash memory is initialized (to H'FF).
Erasing can be performed in block units, but not in byte
units.
Next, the new application program in the host is written
into the erased flash memory blocks. Do not write to
unerased blocks.
New application
program
<Flash memory>
Boot program
FWE assessment program
Transfer program
Application
program
(old version)
Figure 7.5 User Program Mode (Example)
Section 7 ROM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 133 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Differences between Boot Mode and User Program Mode
Boot Mode User Program Mode
Entire memory erase Yes Yes
Block erase No Yes
Programming control program* Program/program-verify Erase/erase-verify
Program/program-verify
Note: * To be provided by the user, in accordance with the recommended algorithm.
Block Configuration
The main ROM area is divided into three 64-kbyte blocks, one 32-kbyte block, and eight 4-kbyte
blocks. The OSD ROM area is divided into two 1-kbyte blocks, one 2-kbyte block, and one 28-
kbyte block.
Address H'00000
Address H'3FFFF
256 kbytes
64 kbytes
64 kbytes
64 kbytes
32 kbytes
Address H'40000
Address H'47FFF
32 kbytes
OSD ROM area
Main ROM area
28 kbytes
2 kbytes
1 kbyte
1 kbyte
4 kbytes × 8
Figure 7.6 Flash Memory Block Configuration
Section 7 ROM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 134 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
7.2.4 Pin Configuration
The flash memory is controlled by means of the pins shown in table 7.1.
Table 7.1 Flash Memory Pins
Pin Name Abbreviation I/O Function
Reset RES Input Reset
Flash write enable FWE Input Flash program/erase protection by hardware
Mode 0 MD0 Input Sets this LSI operating mode
Port 12 P12 Input Sets this LSI operating mode when MD0 = 0
Port 13 P13 Input Sets this LSI operating mode when MD0 = 0
Port 14 P14 Input Sets this LSI operating mode when MD0 = 0
Transmit data SO1 Output Serial transmit data output
Receive data SI1 Input Serial receive data input
7.2.5 Register Configuration
Table 7.2 shows the registers used to control the flash memory when enabled. In order for these
registers to be accessed, the FLSHE bit must be set to 1 in STCR.
Table 7.2 Flash Memory Registers
Register Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value Address*1
Flash memory control register 1 FLMCR1*5 R/W*2 H'00*3 H'FFF8
Flash memory control register 2 FLMCR2*5 R/W*2 H'00*4 H'FFF9
Erase block register 1 EBR1*5 R/W*2 H'00*4 H'FFFA
Erase block register 2 EBR2*5 R/W*2 H'00*4 H'FFFB
Serial/timer control register STCR R/W H'00 H'FFEE
Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address.
2. When the FWE bit in FLMCR1 is not set at 1, writes are disabled.
3. When a high level is input to the FWE pin, the initial value is H'80.
4. When a low level is input to the FWE pin, or if a high level is input and the SWE bit in
FLMCR1 is not set, these registers are initialized to H'00.
5. FLMCR1, FLMCR2, EBR1, and EBR2 are 8-bit registers. Only byte accesses are valid
for these registers, the access requiring 2 states.
Section 7 ROM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 135 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
7.3 Flash Memory Register Descriptions
7.3.1 Flash Memory Control Register 1 (FLMCR1)
7
FWE
—*
R
6
SWE1
0
R/W
5
ESU1
0
R/W
4
PSU1
0
R/W
3
EV1
0
R/W
0
P1
0
R/W
2
PV1
0
R/W
1
E1
0
R/W
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
Note: * Determined by the state of the FWE pin.
FLMCR1 is an 8-bit register used for flash memory operating mode control. With addresses
H'00000 to H'3FFFF, program-verify mode or erase-verify mode is entered by setting SWE to 1
when FWE = 1, then setting the PV1 bit and EV1 bit. Program mode is entered by setting SWE1
when FWE = 1, then setting the SWE1 bit and PSU1, and finally setting the P1 bit. With addresses
H'00000 to H'3FFFF, erase mode is entered by setting SWE1 when FWE = 1, then setting the
ESU1 bit, and finally setting the E1 bit. FLMCR1 is initialized by a reset, in standby mode or
watch mode, when a low level is input to the FWE pin, and when a high level is input to the FWE
pin while the SWE1 bit in FLMCR1 is not set to 1. Its initial value is H'80 when a high level is
input to the FWE pin, and H'00 when a low level is input. When on-chip flash memory is disabled,
a read will return H'00, and writes are invalid. Writes to the SWE1 bit in FLMCR1 are enabled
only when FWE = 1; writes to the ESU1, PSU1, EV1 and PV1 bits only when FWE = 1 and
SWE1 = 1; writes to the E1 bit only when FWE = 1, SWE1 = 1, and ESU1 = 1; and writes to the
P1 bit only when FWE = 1, SWE1 = 1, and PSU1 = 1.
Bit 7⎯Flash Write Enable (FWE): Sets hardware protection against flash memory
programming/erasing.
Bit 7
FWE Description
0 When a low level is input to the FWE pin (hardware-protected state)
1 When a high level is input to the FWE pin
Section 7 ROM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 136 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 6⎯Software Write Enable (SWE): Enables or disables flash memory programming. SWE
should be set before setting bits 5 to 0, bits 7 to 0 in EBR1, and bits 3 to 0 in EBR2.
Bit 6
SWE1 Description
0 Writes are disabled (Initial value)
1 Writes are enabled
[Setting condition]
Setting is available when FWE = 1 is selected
Bit 5⎯Erase Set-Up 1 (ESU1): Prepares for erase mode. ESU1 should be set to 1 before setting
the E1 bit in FLMCR1 to 1. Do not set the SWE1, PSU1, EV1, PV1, E1, or P1 bit at the same
time.
Bit 5
ESU1 Description
0 Erase set-up cleared (Initial value)
1 Transition to erase set-up mode
[Setting condition]
Setting is available when FWE = 1 and SWE1 = 1 are selected
Bit 4⎯Program Set-Up 1 (PSU1): Prepares for program mode. PSU1 should be set to 1 before
setting the P1 bit in FLMCR1 to 1. Do not set the SWE1, ESU1, EV1, PV1, E1 or P1 bit at the
same time.
Bit 4
PSU1 Description
0 Program set-up cleared (Initial value)
1 Transition to program set-up mode
[Setting condition]
Setting is available when FWE = 1 and SWE1 = 1 are selected
Section 7 ROM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 137 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 3⎯Erase-Verify (EV1): Selects erase-verify mode transition or clearing. Do not set the
SWE1, ESU1, PSU1, PV1, E1, or P1 bit at the same time.
Bit 3
EV1 Description
0 Erase-verify mode cleared (Initial value)
1 Transition to erase-verify mode
[Setting condition]
Setting is available when FWE = 1 and SWE1 = 1 are selected
Bit 2⎯Program-Verify (PV1): Selects program-verify mode transition or clearing. Do not set the
SWE1, ESU1, PSU1, EV1, E1, or P1 bit at the same time.
Bit 2
PV1 Description
0 Program-verify mode cleared (Initial value)
1 Transition to program-verify mode
[Setting condition]
Setting is available when FWE = 1 and SWE1 = 1 are selected
Bit 1⎯Erase (E1): Selects erase mode transition or clearing. Do not set the SWE1, ESU1, PSU1,
EV1, PV1, or P1 bit at the same time.
Bit 1
E1 Description
0 Erase mode cleared (Initial value)
1 Transition to erase mode
[Setting condition]
Setting is available when FWE = 1, SWE1 = 1, and ESU1 = 1 are selected
Section 7 ROM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 138 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 0⎯Program (P1): Selects program mode transition or clearing (target address range :
H'00000 to H'3FFFF). Do not set the SWE1, PSU1, ESU1, EV1, PV1, or E1 bit at the same time.
Bit 0
P1 Description
0 Program mode cleared (Initial value)
1 Transition to program mode
[Setting condition]
Setting is available when FWE = 1, SWE1 = 1, and PSU1 = 1 are selected
7.3.2 Flash Memory Control Register 2 (FLMCR2)
7
FLER
0
R
6
SWE2
0
R/W
5
ESU2
0
R/W
4
PSU2
0
R/W
3
EV2
0
R/W
0
P2
0
R/W
2
PV2
0
R/W
1
E2
0
R/W
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
FLMCR2 is an 8-bit register used for flash memory operating control mode.
With addresses H'40000 to H'47FFF, program-verify mode and erase-verify mode is entered by
setting SWE2 when FWE (FLMCR1) = 1, then setting the EV2 bit and the PV2 bit. Program mode
is entered by setting SWE2 when FWE (FLMCR1) = 1, then setting the SWE2 bit and PSU2 bit,
and finally setting the P2 bit.
With addresses H'40000 to H'47FFF, erase mode is entered by setting SWE2 when FWE
(FLMCR1) = 1, then setting the ESU2 bit , and finally setting the E2 bit. FLMCR2 is initialized to
H'00 by a reset, in standby mode or watch mode, when a low level is input to the FWE pin, and
when a high level is input to the FWE pin while the SWE2 bit in FLMCR2 is set to 1. FLER can
be initialized only by a reset.
Writes to the SWE2 bit in the FLMCR2 are enabled only when FWE (FLMCR1) = 1; writes to the
ESU2, PSV2, EV2, and PV2 bits only when FWE (FLMCR1) = 1 and SWE2 = 1; writes to the E2
bit only when FWE (FLMCR1) = 1, SW2 = 1, and ESU2 = 1; writes to the P2 bit only when FWE
(FLMCR1) = 1, SWE2 = 1, and PSU2 = 1.
Section 7 ROM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 139 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 7⎯Flash Memory Error (FLER): Indicates that an error has occurred during an operation on
flash memory (programming or erasing). When FLER is set to 1, flash memory goes to the error-
protection state.
Bit 7
FLER Description
0 Flash memory is operating normally
Flash memory program/erase protection (error protection) is disabled
[Clearing condition]
Reset (Initial value)
1 An error has occurred during flash memory programming/erasing
Flash memory program/erase protection (error protection) is enabled
[Setting condition]
See section 7.6.3, Error Protection
Bit 6⎯Software Write Enable 2 (SWE2): Enables or disables flash memory programming
(target address range: H'40000 to H'47FFF). SW2 should be set when setting bits 5 to 0 and bits 7
to 4 in EBR2.
Bit 6
SWE2 Description
0 Writes are disabled (Initial value)
1 Writes are enabled
[Setting condition]
Setting is available when FWE = 1 is selected
Bit 5⎯Erase Set-up 2 (ESU2): Prepares for erase mode. (Target address range: H'40000 to
H'47FFF). Do not set the PSU2, EV2, PV2, W2, P2 bits at the same time.
Bit 5
ESU2 Description
0 Erase set-up cleared (Initial value)
1 Transition to erase set-up mode
[Setting condition]
Setting is enabled when FWE = 1 and SWE2 = 1 are selected
Section 7 ROM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 140 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 4⎯Program Set-up 2 (PSU2): Prepares for program mode (Target address rang: H'40000 to
H'47FFF). Do not set the ESU2, EV2, PV2, E2, P2 bits at the same time.
Bit 4
PSU2 Description
0 Program set-up cleared (Initial value)
1 Transition to program set-up mode
[Setting condition]
Setting is enabled when FWE = 1 and SWE2 = 1 are selected
Bit 3⎯Erase-Verify 2 (EV2): Selects erase-verify mode transition or clearing (target address
range : H'40000 to H'47FFF). Do not set the ESU2, PSU2, PV2, E2, P2 bits at the same time.
Bit 3
EV2 Description
0 Erase-verify mode cleared (Initial value)
1 Transition to erase-verify mode
[Setting condition]
Setting is available when FWE = 1 and SWE2 = 1 are selected
Bit 2⎯Program-Verify 2 (PV2): Selects program-verify mode transition or clearing (target
address range: H'40000 to H'47FFF). Do not set the ESU2, PSU2, EV2, E2, and P2 bits at the
same time.
Bit 2
PV2 Description
0 Program-verify mode cleared
1 Transition to program-verify mode
[Setting condition]
Setting is available when FWE = 1 and SWE2 = 1 are selected
Section 7 ROM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 141 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 1⎯Erase 2 (E2): Selects erase mode transition or clearing (target address range: H'40000 to
H'47FFF, do not set the ESU2, PSU2, EV2, PV2, and P2 bits at the same time.
Bit 1
E2 Description
0 Erase mode cleared
1 Transition to erase mode
[Setting condition]
Setting is available when FWE = 1, SWE2 = 1, and ESU2 = 1 are selected
Bit 0⎯Program 2 (P2): Selects program mode transition or clearing (target address range:
H'40000 to H'47FFF). Do not set the ESU2, PSU2, EV2, PV2, and E2 bits at the same time.
Bit 0
P2 Description
0 Program mode cleared
1 Transition to program mode
[Setting condition]
Setting is available when FWE = 1, SWE2 = 1, and PSU2 = 1 are selected
7.3.3 Erase Block Register 1 (EBR1)
7
EB7
0
R/W
6
EB6
0
R/W
5
EB5
0
R/W
4
EB4
0
R/W
3
EB3
0
R/W
0
EB0
0
R/W
2
EB2
0
R/W
1
EB1
0
R/W
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
EBR1 is an 8-bit register that specify the flash memory erase area block by block.
EBR1 is initialized to H'00 by a reset, in standby mode or watch mode, when a low level is input
to the FWE pin, and when a high level is input to the FWE pin and the SWE1 bit in FLMCR1 is
not set. When a bit in EBR1 is set to 1, the corresponding block can be erased. Other blocks are
erase-protected. Set only one bit in EBR1 and EBR2. More than one bit cannot be set. If set, all
bits are cleared to 0.
Table 7.3 shows the flash memory block configuration.
Section 7 ROM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 142 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
7.3.4 Erase Block Register 2 (EBR2)
7
EB15
0
R/W
6
EB14
0
R/W
5
EB13
0
R/W
4
EB12
0
R/W
3
EB11
0
R/W
0
EB8
0
R/W
2
EB10
0
R/W
1
EB9
0
R/W
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
EBR2 is an 8-bit register that specify the flash memory erase area block by block; EBR2 is
initialized to H'00 by a reset, in standby mode or watch mode, and when a low level is input to the
FWE pin. Bits 3 to 0 are initialized to 0 when a high level is input to the FWE pin and the SWE1
in FLMCR1 is not set. Bits7 to 4 are initialized to 0 when the SWE2 in FLMCR2 is not set. When
a bit in EBR2 is set to 1, the corresponding block can be erased. Other blocks are erase-protected.
Set only one bit in EBR1 and EBR2. More than one bit cannot be set. If set, all bits are cleared to
0.
The flash memory block configuration is shown in table 7.3.
Table 7.3 Flash Memory Erase Blocks
Block (Size) Address
EB0 (4 kbytes) H'000000 to H'000FFF
EB1 (4 kbytes) H'001000 to H'001FFF
EB2 (4 kbytes) H'002000 to H'002FFF
EB3 (4 kbytes) H'003000 to H'003FFF
EB4 (4 kbytes) H'004000 to H'004FFF
EB5 (4 kbytes) H'005000 to H'005FFF
EB6 (4 kbytes) H'006000 to H'006FFF
EB7 (4 kbytes) H'007000 to H'007FFF
EB8 (32 kbytes) H'008000 to H'00FFFF
EB9 (64 kbytes) H'010000 to H'01FFFF
EB10 (64 kbytes) H'020000 to H'02FFFF
EB11 (64 kbytes) H'030000 to H'03FFFF
EB12 (1 kbyte) H'040000 to H'0403FF
EB13 (1 kbyte) H'040400 to H'0407FF
EB14 (2 kbytes) H'040800 to H'040FFF
EB15 (28 kbytes) H'041000 to H'047FFF
Section 7 ROM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 143 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
7.3.5 Serial/Timer Control Register (STCR)
7
—
0
—
6
IICX1
0
R/W
5
IICX0
0
R/W
4
—
0
—
3
FLSHE
0
R/W
0
—
0
—
2
OSROME
0
R/W
1
—
0
—
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
STCR is an 8-bit read/write register that controls the I2C bus interface operating mode, on-chip
flash memory (in F-ZTAT versions), and OSD ROM. For details on IIC bus interface, refer to
section 23, I2C Bus Interface (IIC). If a module controlled by STCR is not used, do not write 1 to
the corresponding bit. STCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset.
Bits 6 and 5⎯I2C Control (IICX1, IICX0): These bits control the operation of the I2C bus
interface. For details, see section 23, I2C Bus Interface (IIC).
Bit 3⎯Flash Memory Control Register Enable (FLSHE): Setting the FLSHE bit to 1 enables
read/write access to the flash memory control registers. If FLSHE is cleared to 0, the flash
memory control registers are deselected. In this case, the flash memory control register contents
are retained.
Bit 3
FLSHE Description
0 Flash memory control registers deselected (Initial value)
1 Flash memory control registers selected
Bit 2⎯OSD ROM Enable (OSROME): Controls the OSD character data ROM (OSDROM)
access. When this bit is set to 1, the OSDROM can be accessed by the CPU, and when this bit is
cleared to 0, the OSDROM cannot be accessed by the CPU but accessed by the OSD module.
Before writing to or erasing the OSDROM in the F-ZTAT version, be sure to set this bit to 1.
Note: During OSD display, the OSDROM cannot be accessed by the CPU. Before accessing the
OSDROM by the CPU, be sure to clear the OSDON bit in the screen control register to 0
then set the OSROME bit to 1. If the OSROME bit is set to 1 during OSD display, the
character data ROM cannot be accessed correctly by CPU.
Bit 2
OSROME Description
0 OSD ROM is accessed by the OSD (Initial value)
1 OSD ROM is accessed by the CPU
Section 7 ROM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 144 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bits 7, 4, 1 and 0⎯Reserved: Always read as 0. Do not write 1 to these bits.
7.4 On-Board Programming Modes
When pins are set to on-board programming mode, program/erase/verify operations can be
performed on the on-chip flash memory. There are two on-board programming modes: boot mode
and user program mode. The pin settings for transition to each of these modes are shown in table
7.4. For a diagram of the transitions to the various flash memory modes, see figure 7.3.
Table 7.4 Setting On-Board Programming Modes
Mode Pin
Mode Name FWE MD0 P12 P13 P14
Boot mode 1 0 1*2 1
*2 1
*2
User program mode 1*1 1 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
Notes: 1. In user program mode, the FWE pin should not be constantly set to 1. Set FWE to 1 to
make a transition to user program mode before performing a program/erase/verify
operation.
2. Can be used as I/O ports after boot mode is initiated.
Section 7 ROM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 145 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
7.4.1 Boot Mode
When boot mode is used, the flash memory programming control program must be prepared in the
host beforehand. The channel 1 SCI to be used is set to asynchronous mode.
When a reset-start is executed after the LSI’s pins have been set to boot mode, the boot program
built into the LSI is started and the programming control program prepared in the host is serially
transmitted to the LSI via the SCI. In the LSI, the programming control program received via the
SCI is written into the programming control program area in on-chip RAM. After the transfer is
completed, control branches to the start address of the programming control program area and the
programming control program execution state is entered (flash memory programming is
performed).
The transferred programming control program must therefore include coding that follows the
programming algorithm given later.
Figure 7.7 shows the system configuration in boot mode. Figure 7.8 shows the boot program mode
execution procedure.
SI1
SO1
SCI1
This LSI
Flash memory
Write data reception
Verify data
transmission
Host
On-chip RAM
Figure 7.7 System Configuration in Boot Mode
Section 7 ROM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 146 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Note: If a memory cell does not operate normally and cannot be erased, one H'FF byte is
transmitted as an erase error, and the erase operation and subsequent operations
are halted.
Start
Set pins to boot mode
and execute reset-start
Host transfers data (H'00)
continuously at prescribed bit rate
The LSI measures low period
of H'00 data transmitted by host
The LSI calculates bit rate and
sets value in bit rate register
After bit rate adjustment, the LSI
transmits one H'00 data byte to
host to indicate end of adjustment
Host confirms normal reception
of bit rate adjustment end
indication (H'00), and transmits
one H'55 data byte
After receiving H'55,
LSI transmits one H'AA
data byte to host
Host transmits number
of programming control program
bytes (N), upper byte followed
by lower byte
The LSI transmits received
number of bytes to host as verify
data (echo-back)
n = 1
Host transmits programming control
program sequentially in byte units
The LSI transmits received
programming control program to
host as verify data (echo-back)
Transfer received programming
control program to on-chip RAM
n = N? No
Yes
End of transmission
Check flash memory data, and
if data has already been written,
erase all blocks
After confirming that all flash
memory data has been erased,
The LSI transmits one H'AA
data byte to host
Execute programming control
program transferred to on-chip RAM
n + 1 → n
Figure 7.8 Boot Mode Execution Procedure
Section 7 ROM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 147 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Automatic SCI Bit Rate Adjustment
Start
bit
Stop
bit
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
Low period (9 bits) measured (H'00 data) High period
(1 or more bits)
Figure 7.9 Automatic SCI Bit Rate Adjustment
When boot mode is initiated, the LSI measures the low period of the asynchronous SCI
communication data (H'00) transmitted continuously from the host. The SCI transmit/receive
format should be set as follows: 8-bit data, 1 stop bit, no parity. The LSI calculates the bit rate of
the transmission from the host from the measured low period, and transmits one H'00 byte to the
host to indicate the end of bit rate adjustment. The host should confirm that this adjustment end
indication (H'00) has been received normally, and transmit one H'55 byte to the LSI. If reception
cannot be performed normally, initiate boot mode again (reset), and repeat the above operations.
Depending on the host's transmission bit rate and the LSI system clock frequency, there will be a
discrepancy between the bit rates of the host and the LSI. To ensure correct SCI operation, the
host's transfer bit rate should be set to (4800, 9600, 19200) bps.
Table 7.5 shows typical host transfer bit rates and system clock frequencies for which automatic
adjustment of the LSI’s bit rate is possible. The boot program should be executed within this
system clock range.
Table 7.5 System Clock Frequencies for which Automatic Adjustment of This LSI Bit
Rate Is Possible
Host Bit Rate (bps) System Clock Frequency
4800 8 MHz to 10 MHz
9600 8 MHz to 10 MHz
19200 8 MHz to 10 MHz
Section 7 ROM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 148 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
On-Chip RAM Area Divisions in Boot Mode: In boot mode, the 2048-byte area from
H'FFDFB0 to H'FFE7AF is reserved for use by the boot program, as shown in figure 7.10. The
area to which the programming control program is transferred is H'FFE7B0 to H'FFFFAF (6144
bytes). The boot program area can be used when the programming control program transferred
into RAM enters the execution state. A stack area should be set up as required.
H'FFDFB0
H'FFE7AF
Programming
control program
area
(6144 bytes)
H'FFFFAF
Boot program
area*
(2048 bytes)
Note: * The boot program area cannot be used until a transition is made to the execution
state for the programming control program transferred to RAM. Note that the boot
program reamins stored in this area after a branch is made to the programming
control program.
Figure 7.10 RAM Areas in Boot Mode
Section 7 ROM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 149 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Notes on Use of Boot Mode:
1. When the LSI comes out of reset in boot mode, it measures the low period of the input at the
SCI's SI1 pin. The reset should end with SI1 pin high. After the reset ends, it takes about 100
states for the LSI to get ready to measure the low period of the SI1 pin input.
2. In boot mode, if any data has been programmed into the flash memory (if all data is not 1), all
flash memory blocks are erased. Boot mode is for use when user program mode is unavailable,
such as the first time on-board programming is performed, or if the program activated in user
program mode is accidentally erased.
3. Interrupts cannot be used while the flash memory is being programmed or erased.
4. The SI1 and SO1 pins should be pulled up on the board.
5. Before branching to the programming control program (H'FFE7B0 in RAM area), the LSI
terminates transmit and receive operations by the on-chip SCI (channel 1) (by clearing the RE
and TE bits in SCR to 0), but the adjusted bit rate value remains set in BRR. The transmit data
output pin, SO1, goes to the high-level output state (P21PCR = 1, P21PDR = 1).
The contents of the CPU's internal general registers are undefined at this time, so these
registers must be initialized immediately after branching to the programming control program.
In particular, since the stack pointer (SP) is used implicitly in subroutine calls, etc., a stack area
must be specified for use by the programming control program.
The initial values of other on-chip registers are not changed.
6. Boot mode can be entered by making the pin settings shown in table 7.4 and executing a reset-
start.
When the LSI detects the boot mode setting at reset release*, it retains that state internally.
Boot mode can be cleared by driving the reset pin low, waiting at least 20 states, then setting
the FWE pin and mode pins, and executing reset release*. Boot mode can also be cleared by a
WDT overflow reset.
If the mode pin input levels are changed in boot mode, the boot mode state will be maintained
in the microcomputer, and boot mode continued, unless a reset occurs. However, the FWE pin
must not be driven low while the boot program is running or flash memory is being
programmed or erased.
Note: * Mode pin and FWE pin input must satisfy the mode programming setup time (tMDS = 4
states) with respect to the reset release timing.
Section 7 ROM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 150 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
7.4.2 User Program Mode
When set to user program mode, the LSI can program and erase its flash memory by executing a
user program/erase control program. Therefore, on-board reprogramming of the on-chip flash
memory can be carried out by providing on-board means of FWE control and supply of
programming data, and storing a program/erase control program in part of the program area as
necessary.
In this mode, the LSI starts up in mode 1 and applies a high level to the FWE pin. The flash
memory itself cannot be read while the SWE1 bit is set to 1 to perform programming or erasing,
so the control program that performs programming and erasing should be run in on-chip RAM or
external memory.
Figure 7.11 shows the procedure for executing the program/erase control program when
transferred to on-chip RAM.
Clear FWE
FWE = high
Branch to flash memory
application program
Branch to program/erase control
program in RAM area
Execute program/erase control
program (flash memory rewriting)
Transfer program/erase
control program to RAM
MD0 = 1
Reset start
Write the FWE assessment program and
transfer program (and the program/erase
control program if necessary) beforehand
Note: Do not apply a constant high level to the FWE pin. Apply a high level to the FWE pin only
when the flash memory is programmed or erased. Also, while a high level is applied to the
FWE pin, the watchdog timer should be activated to prevent overprogramming or
overerasing due to program runaway, etc.
Figure 7.11 User Program Mode Execution Procedure
Section 7 ROM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 151 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
7.5 Programming/Erasing Flash Memory
In the on-board programming modes, flash memory programming and erasing is performed by
software, using the CPU. There are four flash memory operating modes: program mode, erase
mode, program-verify mode, and erase-verify mode. With addresses H'00000 to H'3FFFF,
transitions to these modes can be made by setting the PSU1, ESU1, P1, E1, PV1 and EV1 bits in
FLMCR1. With addresses H'40000 to H'47FFF, transitions to these modes can be made by setting
the PSU2, ESU2, P2, E2, PV2, and EV2 bits in the FLMCR2.
The flash memory cannot be read while being programmed or erased. Therefore, the program that
controls flash memory programming/erasing (the programming control program) should be
located and executed in on-chip RAM or external memory.
Notes: 1. Operation is not guaranteed if setting/resetting of the SWE1, ESU1, PSU1, EV1, PV1,
E1, and P1 bits in FLMCR1, and the SWE2, ESU2, PSU2, EV2, PV2, E2, and P2 in
FLMCR2, is executed by a program in flash memory.
2. When programming or erasing, set FWE to 1 (programming/erasing will not be
executed if FWE = 0).
3. Perform programming in the erased state. Do not perform additional programming on
previously programmed addresses.
4. Do not write to addresses H'00000 to H'3FFFF and H'40000 to H'47FFF at the same
time. Otherwise operation cannot be guaranteed.
5. Do not operate the OSD when writing or erasing addresses H'40000 to H'47FFF. Do
not set the OSROME in STCR to 1 before manipulating the flash control register.
7.5.1 Program Mode (n = 1 when the Target Address Range Is H'00000 to H'3FFFF and
n = 2 when the Target Address Range Is H'40000 to H'47FFF)
Follow the procedure shown in the program/program-verify flowchart in figure 7.12 to write data
or programs to flash memory. Performing program operations according to this flowchart will
enable data or programs to be written to flash memory without subjecting the device to voltage
stress or sacrificing program data reliability. Programming should be carried out 128 bytes at a
time.
Following the elapse of 1.0 μs or more after the SWEn bit is set to 1 in flash memory control
register n (FLMCRn), 128-byte program data is stored in the program data area and reprogram
data area, and the 128-byte data in the reprogram data area written consecutively to the write
addresses. The lower 8 bits of the start address written to must be H'00, or H'80. One hundred and
twenty-eight consecutive byte data transfers are performed. The program address and program
data are latched in the flash memory. A 128-byte data transfer must be performed even if writing
fewer than 128 bytes; in this case, H'FF data must be written to the extra addresses.
Next, the watchdog timer is set to prevent overprogramming in the event of program runaway, etc.
Section 7 ROM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 152 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Set 6.6 ms as the WDT overflow period. After this, preparation for program mode (program setup)
is carried out by setting the PSUn bit in FLMCRn, and after the elapse of 50 μs or more, the
operating mode is switched to program mode by setting the Pn bit in FLMCRn. The time during
which the Pn bit is set is the flash memory programming time. Make a program setting for one
programming operation using the table in the programming flowchart.
7.5.2 Program-Verify Mode (n = 1 when the Target Address Range Is H'00000 to
H'3FFFF and n = 2 when the Target Address Range Is H'40000 to H'47FFF)
In program-verify mode, the data written in program mode is read to check whether it has been
correctly written in the flash memory.
After the elapse of a given programming time, the programming mode is exited (the Pn bit in
FLMCRn is cleared, then the PSUn bit is cleared at least 5 μs later). The watchdog timer is cleared
after the elapse of 5 μs or more, and the operating mode is switched to program-verify mode by
setting the PVn bit in FLMCRn. Before reading in program-verify mode, a dummy write of H'FF
data should be made to the addresses to be read. The dummy write should be executed after the
elapse of 4 μs or more. When the flash memory is read in this state (verify data is read in 16-bit
units), the data at the latched address is read. Wait at least 2 μs after the dummy write before
performing this read operation. Next, the originally written data is compared with the verify data,
and reprogram data is computed (see figure 7.12) and transferred to the reprogram data area. After
128 bytes of data have been verified, exit program-verify mode, wait for at least 2 μs, then clear
the SWEn bit in FLMCRn. If reprogramming is necessary, set program mode again, and repeat the
program/program-verify sequence as before. However, ensure that the program/program-verify
sequence is not repeated more than 1,000 times on the same bits.
Section 7 ROM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 153 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Programming pulse apply subroutine
Write pulse application subroutine
Start
Start of programming
Set SWE1 (2) bit in FLMCR(2)
Set PV1(2) bit in FLMCR1(2)
Clear PV1(2) bit in FLMCR1(2)
Clear SWE1(2) bit in FLMCR1(2)
Write pulse additional program pulse 10 µs
Call subroutine
Store 128-byte program data in program
data area and reprogram data area
Write 128-byte program data in RAM reprogram
data area consecutevely to flash memory
Write 128-byte program data in RAM additional
data area consecutively to flash memory
tsswe: Wait 1 µs
tspv: Wait 4 µs
tspvr: Wait 2 µs
tcpv: Wait 2 µs
tcswe: Wait 100 µs
End of programming
Programming pulse 30 µs or 200 µs
H'FF dummy write to verify address
Read verify data
Calculate additional program data
Calculate reprogram data
Complete 128-byte
data verification?
Transfer additional program data to additional program data area
Transfer reprogram data to reprogram data area
Program data = verify data?
Refer to note *6
for the pulse width
*1
*2
*5
*4
*3
*4
*1
NG
NG
NG
NG
NG
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
6 ≥ n?
n ← n + 1
6 ≥ n ?
m = 0?
Clear SWE1 (2) bit in FLMCR1(2)
tcwe: Wait 100 µs
Programming Failure
NG
OK
n ≥ 1000?
m = 1
*4
Call subroutine
n = 1
m = 0
Enable WDT
Set PSU1 (2) bit in FLMCR1 (2)
Set P1 (2) bit in FLMCR1 (2)
Clear P1(2) bit in FLMCR1 (2)
Clear PSU1(2) bit in FLMCR1 (2)
tspsu: Wait 50 µs
tcp: Wait 5 µs
tcpsu: Wait 5 µs
Disable WDT
End of subroutine
Note: 6. Programming pulse width
Number of times
of programming
Programming
time (z) µs
The programming pulse must be 10 µs in
additional programming
Perform programming after erasing data. Do not perform additional programming to addresses that have already been written to.
Notes: 1. Data transfer is performed by byte transfer. The lower eight bits of the start address must be H'00 or H'80. A 128-byte data transfer must be performed even if writing
fewer than 128 bytes: in this case, H'FF must be written to the extra addresses.
2. Verify data is read in 16-bit (word) units.
3. Even in case of the bit which is already-programmed in the 128-byte programming loop, perform additional programming if the bit fails at the next verify.
4. An area for storing program data (128 bytes), reprogram data (128 bytes), and additional program (128bytes) must be provided in RAM. The contents of the reprogram
and additional program areas are rewritten as programming processes.
5. A 30 µs or 200 µs programming pulse must be applied.
For details on programming pulse, refer to Note 6.
To perform additional data programming, apply a programming pulse of 10 µs. Reprogram data X' is the reprogram data after program pulse is applied.
Program data storage are
(128 bytes)
Reprogram data storage
area (128 bytes)
Additional program data
storage area (128 bytes)
Reprogram Data Calculation Table Additiona l program data calculation table
Increment address
tsp10 or tsp30 or tsp200:
Wait 10 µs or 30 µs or 200 µs
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
998
999
1000
30
30
30
30
30
30
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
RAM
Source Data (D)
0
0
1
1
Reprogram data (X)
1
0
1
1
Additional program data (Y)
0
1
1
1
Reprogram data (X')
0
0
1
1
CommentsVerify data (V)
0
1
0
1
Verify data (V)
0
1
0
1
Programming completed
Programming incomplete; reprogram
Still in erased state; no action
Comments
Additional programming performed
Additional programming not performed
Additional programming not performed
Figure 7.12 Program/Program-Verify Flowchart
Section 7 ROM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 154 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
7.5.3 Erase Mode (n = 1 when the Target Address Range Is H'00000 to H'3FFFF and n =
2 when the Target Address Range Is H'40000 to H'47FFF)
Flash memory erasing should be performed block by block following the procedure shown in the
erase/erase-verify flowchart (single-block erase) shown in figure 7.13.
To perform data or program erasure, make a 1 bit setting for the flash memory area to be erased in
erase block register 1 or 2 (EBR1 or EBR2) at least 1 μs after setting the SWEn bit to 1 in flash
memory control register n (FLMCRn). Next, the watchdog timer is set to prevent overerasing in
the event of program runaway, etc.
Set more than 19.8 ms as the WDT overflow period. After this, preparation for erase mode (erase
setup) is carried out by setting the ESUn bit in FLMCRn, and after a elapse of 100 μs or more, the
operating mode is switched to erase mode by setting the En bit in FLMCRn. The time during
which the En bit is set is the flash memory erase time. Ensure that erase time does not exceed 10
ms.
Note: With flash memory erasing, preprogramming (setting all data in the memory to be erased
to 0) is not necessary before starting the erase procedure.
Section 7 ROM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 155 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
End of erasing
START
Set SWE1 (2) bit in FLMCR1 (2)
Set ESU1 (2) bit in FLMCR1 (2)
Set E1 (2) bit in FLMCR1 (2)
tsswe: Wait 1 µs
tsesu: Wait 100 µs
n = 1
Set EBR1 (2)
Enable WDT
*
3
tse: Wait 10 ms
tce: Wait 10 µs
tcesu: Wait 10 µs
tsev: Wait 20 µs
Set block start address to
verify address
tsevr: Wait 2 µs
tcev: Wait 4 µs
*
2
*
4
*
5
Clear E1 (2) bit in FLMCR1 (2)
Clear ESU1 (2) bit in FLMCR1 (2)
Set EV1 (2) bit in FLMCR1 (2)
H'FF dummy write to verify address
Read verify data
Clear EV1 (2) bit in FLMCR1 (2)
tcev: Wait 4 µs
Clear EV1 (2) bit in FLMCR1 (2)
Clear SWE1 (2) bit in FLMCR1 (2)
Disable WDT
*
1
Verify data = all 1?
tcswe: Wait 100 µs tcswe: Wait 100 µs
End of erasing of
all erase blocks?
Erase failure
Clear SWE1 (2) bit in FLMCR1 (2)
n ≥ (N)?
NO
NO
NO NO
YES
YES
YES
YES
Notes: 1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Increment
address
n ← n + 1
Last address
of block?
Preprogramming (setting erase block data to all 0) is not necessary.
Verify data is read in 16-bit (word) units.
Set only one bit in EBR. More than two bit cannot be set.
Erasing is performed in block units. To erase a number of blocks, the individual blocks must be erased sequentially.
For the value of N, see table 31.32, Flash Memory Characteristics.
Figure 7.13 Erase/Erase-Verify Flowchart
Section 7 ROM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 156 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
7.5.4 Erase-Verify Mode (n = 1 when the Target Address Range Is H'00000 to H'3FFFF
and n = 2 when the Target Address Range Is H'40000 to H'47FFF)
In erase-verify mode, data is read after memory has been erased to check whether it has been
correctly erased.
After the elapse of the erase time, erase mode is exited (the En bit in FLMCRn is cleared, then the
ESUn bit is cleared at least 10 μs later), the watchdog timer is cleared after the elapse of 10 μs or
more, and the operating mode is switched to erase-verify mode by setting the EVn bit in
FLMCRn. Before reading in erase-verify mode, a dummy write of H'FF data should be made to
the addresses to be read. The dummy write should be executed after the elapse of 6.0 μs or more.
When the flash memory is read in this state (verify data is read in 16-bit units), the data at the
latched address is read. Wait at least 2 μs after the dummy write before performing this read
operation. If the read data has been erased (all 1), a dummy write is performed to the next address,
and erase-verify is performed. If the read data has not been erased, set erase mode again, and
repeat the erase/erase-verify sequence in the same way. However, ensure that the erase/erase-
verify sequence is not repeated more than 100 times. When verification is completed, exit erase-
verify mode, and wait for at least 4 μs. If erasure has been completed on all the erase blocks, clear
the SWEn bit in FLMCRn. If there are any unerased blocks, make a 1 bit setting for the flash
memory area to be erased, and repeat the erase/erase-verify sequence in the same way.
Section 7 ROM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 157 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
7.6 Flash Memory Protection
There are three kinds of flash memory program/erase protection: hardware protection, software
protection, and error protection.
7.6.1 Hardware Protection
Hardware protection refers to a state in which programming/erasing of flash memory is forcibly
disabled or aborted. Hardware protection is reset by settings in flash memory control registers 1
and 2 (FLMCR1, FLMCR2) and erase block registers 1 and 2 (EBR1, EBR2). (See table 7.6.)
In error protected state, the FLMCR1, FLMCR2, EBR1, and EBR2 settings are maintained.
Table 7.6 Hardware Protection
Functions
Item Description Program Erase
FWE pin
protection
• When a low level is input to the FWE pin, FLMCR1,
FLMCR2 (excluding the FLER bit), EBR1, and EBR2
are initialized, and the program/erase-protected state
is entered
Yes Yes
Reset/standby
protection
• In a reset (including a WDT overflow reset) and in
standby mode or watch mode, FLMCR1, FLMCR2,
EBR1, and EBR2 are initialized, and the
program/erase-protected state is entered
• In a reset via the RES pin, the reset state is not
entered unless the RES pin is held low until
oscillation stabilizes after powering on. In the case of
a reset during operation, hold the RES pin low for
the RES pulse width specified in the AC
characteristics
Yes Yes
Section 7 ROM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 158 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
7.6.2 Software Protection
Software protection can be implemented by setting the SWE1 bit in FLMCR1 and SWE2 bit in
FLMCR2 and erase block registers 1 and 2 (EBR1, EBR2). When software protection is in effect,
setting the P1 or E1 bit in flash memory control register 1 (FLMCR1) or P2 or E2 bit in flash
memory control register 2 (FLMCR2) does not cause a transition to program mode or erase mode.
(See table 7.7.)
Table 7.7 Software Protection
Functions
Item Description Program Erase
SWE bit
protection
• Clearing the SWE bit to 0 in FLMCR1 sets the
program/erase-protected state for all blocks
(Execute in on-chip RAM or external memory)
Yes Yes
Block
specification
protection
• Erase protection can be set for individual blocks by
settings in erase block registers 1 and 2 (EBR1,
EBR2)
• Setting EBR1 and EBR2 to H'00 places all blocks in
the erase-protected state
⎯ Yes
7.6.3 Error Protection
In error protection, an error is detected when MCU runaway occurs during flash memory
programming/erasing, or operation is not performed in accordance with the program/erase
algorithm, and the program/erase operation is aborted. Aborting the program/erase operation
prevents damage to the flash memory due to overprogramming or overerasing. If the MCU
malfunctions during flash memory programming/erasing, the FLER bit is set to 1 in FLMCR2 and
the error protection state is entered. The FLMCR1, FLMCR2, EBR1, and EBR2 settings are
retained, but program mode or erase mode is aborted at the point at which the error occurred.
Program mode or erase mode cannot be re-entered by re-setting the P or E bit. However, PV1,
PV2, EV1 and EV2 bit setting is enabled, and a transition can be made to verify mode. FLER bit
setting conditions are as follows:
• When flash memory is read during programming/erasing (including a vector read or instruction
fetch)
• Immediately after exception handling (excluding a reset) during programming/erasing
• When a SLEEP instruction (including standby) is executed during programming/erasing
Section 7 ROM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 159 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Error protection is released only by a reset and in hardware standby mode.
Figure 7.14 shows the flash memory state transition diagram.
: Memory read possible
: Verify-read possible
: Programming possible
: Erasing possible
RD
VF
PR
ER
Legend:
: Memory read impossible
: Verify-read impossible
: Programming impossible
: Erasing impossible
RD
VF
PR
ER
RD VF PR ER FLER = 0
Error occurrence
Error occurrence
(Sleep instruction)
RES = 0
RES = 0
RES = 0
RD VF PR ER FLER = 0
Program mode
Erase mode
Reset
(hardware protection)
RD VF PR ER FLER = 1 RD VF PR ER FLER = 1
Error protection mode
Error protection
mode (power-down mode)
Power-down mode
FLMCR1, FLMCR2 (except FLER bit), EBR1, EBR2
initialization state
FLMCR1, FLMCR2,
EBR1, EBR2 initialization
state
Power-down mode release
Figure 7.14 Flash Memory State Transitions
7.7 Interrupt Handling when Programming/Erasing Flash Memory
All interrupts are disabled when flash memory is being programmed or erased (when the P1 or E1
bit is set in FLMCR1, or the P2 or E2 bit is set in FLMR2), and while the boot program is
executing in boot mode*1, to give priority to the program or erase operation. There are three
reasons for this:
• Interrupt during programming or erasing might cause a violation of the programming or
erasing algorithm, with the result that normal operation could not be assured.
• In the interrupt exception handling sequence during programming or erasing, the vector would
not be read correctly*2, possibly resulting in MCU runaway.
• If interrupt occurred during boot program execution, it would not be possible to execute the
normal boot mode sequence.
Section 7 ROM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 160 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
For these reasons, in on-board programming mode alone there are conditions for disabling
interrupt, as an exception to the general rule. However, this provision does not guarantee normal
erasing and programming or MCU operation. All requests must therefore be disabled inside and
outside the MCU during FWE application. Interrupt is also disabled in the error-protection state
while the P1 or E1 bit remains set in FLMCR1, or the P2 or E2 bit remains set in FLMCR2.
Notes: 1. Interrupt requests must be disabled inside and outside the MCU until data write by the
write control program is complete.
2. The vector may not be read correctly in this case for the following two reasons:
• If flash memory is read while being programmed or erased (while the P or E bit is
set in FLMCR1 or FLMCR2), correct read data will not be obtained (undetermined
values will be returned).
• If the interrupt entry in the interrupt vector table has not been programmed yet,
interrupt exception handling will not be executed correctly.
7.8 Flash Memory Programmer Mode
7.8.1 Programmer Mode Setting
Programs and data can be written and erased in programmer mode as well as in the on-board
programming modes. In programmer mode, flash memory read mode, auto-program mode, auto-
erase mode, and status read mode are supported with these device types. In auto-program mode,
auto-erase mode, and status read mode, a status polling procedure is used, and in status read mode,
detailed internal signals are output after execution of an auto-program or auto-erase operation.
7.8.2 Socket Adapters and Memory Map
In programmer mode, a socket adapter is mounted on the PROM programmer. The socket adapter
product codes are listed in table 7.8.
Figure 7.15 shows the memory map in programmer mode.
Table 7.8 Socket Adapter Product Codes
Part No. Package Socket Adapter Product Code
HD64F2199R 112-pin QFP ME2199ESHF1H
(Minato Electronics)
Section 7 ROM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 161 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H8S/2199R
H'000000
MCU mode Programmer mode
H'047FFF
H'00000
H'47FFF
On-chip ROM area
Figure 7.15 Memory Map in Programmer Mode
7.8.3 Programmer Mode Operation
Table 7.9 shows how the different operating modes are set when using programmer mode, and
table 7.10 lists the commands used in programmer mode. Details of each mode are given below.
• Memory Read Mode: Memory read mode supports byte reads.
• Auto-Program Mode: Auto-program mode supports programming of 128 bytes at a time.
Status polling is used to confirm the end of auto-programming.
• Auto-Erase Mode: Auto-erase mode supports automatic erasing of the entire flash memory.
Status polling is used to confirm the end of auto-erasing.
• Status Read Mode: Status polling is used for auto-programming and auto-erasing, and normal
termination can be confirmed by reading the IO6 signal. In status read mode, error information
is output if an error occurs.
Table 7.9 Settings for Each Operating Mode in Programmer Mode
Pin Names
Mode FWE CE OE WE IO0 to IO7 A0 to A18
Read H or L L L H Data output Ain
Output disable H or L L H H Hi-Z X
Command write H or L*3 L H L Data input Ain*2
Chip disable*1 H or L H X X Hi-Z X
Notes: 1. Chip disable is not a standby state; internally, it is an operation state.
2. Ain indicates that there is also address input in auto-program mode.
3. For command writes when making a transition to auto-program or auto-erase mode,
input a high level to the FWE pin.
Section 7 ROM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 162 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Table 7.10 Programmer Mode Commands
1st Cycle 2nd Cycle
Command Name
Number of
Cycles Mode Address Data Mode Address Data
Memory read mode 1 + n write X H'00 read RA Dout
Auto-program mode 129 write X H'40 write WA Din
Auto-erase mode 2 write X H'20 write X H'20
Status read mode 2 write X H'71 write X H'71
Notes: 1. In auto-program mode. 129 cycles are required for command writing by a simultaneous
128-byte write.
2. In memory read mode, the number of cycles depends on the number of address write
cycles (n).
7.8.4 Memory Read Mode
• After the end of an auto-program, auto-erase, or status read operation, the command wait state
is entered. To read memory contents, a transition must be made to memory read mode by
means of a command write before the read is executed.
• Command writes can be performed in memory read mode, just as in the command wait state.
• Once memory read mode has been entered, consecutive reads can be performed.
• After power-on, memory read mode is entered.
Table 7.11 AC Characteristics in Memory Read Mode (1) − Preliminary −
Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V ±10%, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 25°C ±5°C
Item Symbol Min Max Unit
Command write cycle tnxtc 20 ⎯ μs
CE hold time tceh 0 ⎯ ns
CE setup time tces 0 ⎯ ns
Data hold time tdh 50 ⎯ ns
Data setup time tds 50 ⎯ ns
Write pulse width twep 70 ⎯ ns
WE rise time tr ⎯ 30 ns
WE fall time tf ⎯ 30 ns
Section 7 ROM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 163 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
CE
A18 to A0
IO7 to IO0 H'00
OE
WE
Command write
t
wep
t
ceh
t
dh
t
ds
t
f
t
r
t
nxtc
Note: Data is latched on the rising edge of WE.
t
ces
Memory read mode
ADDRESS STABLE
DATA
Figure 7.16 Memory Read Mode Timing Waveforms after Command Write
Table 7.12 AC Characteristics when Entering Another Mode from Memory Read Mode
− Preliminary −
Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V ±10%, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 25°C ±5°C
Item Symbol Min Max Unit
Command write cycle tnxtc 20 ⎯ μs
CE hold time tceh 0 ⎯ ns
CE setup time tces 0 ⎯ ns
Data hold time tdh 50 ⎯ ns
Data setup time tds 50 ⎯ ns
Write pulse width twep 70 ⎯ ns
WE rise time tr ⎯ 30 ns
WE fall time tf ⎯ 30 ns
Section 7 ROM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 164 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
CE
A18 to A0
IO7 to IO0 H'XX
OE
WE
Other mode command write
t
wep
t
ceh
t
dh
t
ds
t
nxtc
Note: Do not enable WE and OE at the same time.
t
ces
ADDRESS STABLE
DATA
t
f
t
r
Figure 7.17 Timing Waveforms when Entering Another Mode from Memory Read Mode
Table 7.13 AC Characteristics in Memory Read Mode (2) − Preliminary −
Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V ±10%, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 25°C ±5°C
Item Symbol Min Max Unit
Access time tacc ⎯ 20 μs
CE output delay time tce ⎯ 150 ns
OE output delay time toe ⎯ 150 ns
Output disable delay time tdf ⎯ 100 ns
Data output hold time toh 5 ⎯ ns
CE
A18 to A0
IO7 to IO0
VIL
VIL
VIH
OE
WE
t
acc
t
oh
t
oh
t
acc
ADDRESS STABLE ADDRESS STABLE
DATA
DATA
Figure 7.18 Timing Waveforms for CE/OE Enable State Read
Section 7 ROM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 165 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
CE
A18 to A0
IO7 to IO0
VIH
OE
WE
t
ce
t
acc
t
oe
t
oh
t
oh
t
df
t
ce
t
acc
t
oe
ADDRESS STABLE ADDRESS STABLE
DATA DATA
t
df
Figure 7.19 Timing Waveforms for CE/OE Clocked Read
7.8.5 Auto-Program Mode
AC Characteristics
Table 7.14 AC Characteristics in Auto-Program − Preliminary −
Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V ±10%, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 25°C ±5°C
Item Symbol Min Max Unit
Command write cycle tnxtc 20 ⎯ μs
CE hold time tceh 0 ⎯ ns
CE setup time tces 0 ⎯ ns
Data hold time tdh 50 ⎯ ns
Data setup time tds 50 ⎯ ns
Write pulse width twep 70 ⎯ ns
Status polling start time twsts 1 ⎯ ms
Status polling access time tspa ⎯ 150 ns
Address setup time tas 0 ⎯ ns
Address hold time tah 60 ⎯ ns
Memory write time twrite 1 3000 ms
WE rise time tr ⎯ 30 ns
WE fall time tf ⎯ 30 ns
Write setup time tpns 100 ⎯ ns
Write end setup time tpnh 100 ⎯ ns
Section 7 ROM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 166 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
CE
FWE
A18 to A0
IO7
OE
WE
t
nxtc
t
wsts
t
spa
t
nxtc
t
ces
t
ds
t
dh
t
wep
t
as
t
pnh
t
pns
t
ah
t
ceh
ADDRESS STABLE
Data transfer
1 byte to 128 bytes
IO6
Programming wait
DATA
IO5 to IO0 H'40 DATA
H'00
t
f
t
r
t
write
(1 to 3,000 ms)
Programming operation
end identification signal
Programming normal end
identification signal
Figure 7.20 Auto-Program Mode Timing Waveforms
Notes on Use of Auto-Program Mode
• In auto-program mode, 128 bytes are programmed simultaneously. This should be carried out
by executing 128 consecutive byte transfers.
• A 128-byte data transfer is necessary even when programming fewer than 128 bytes. In this
case, H'FF data must be written to the extra addresses.
• The lower 8 bits of the transfer address must be H'00 or H'80. If a value other than an effective
address is input, processing will switch to a memory write operation but a write error will be
flagged.
• Memory address transfer is performed in the second cycle (figure 7.20). Do not perform
transfer after the second cycle.
• Do not perform a command write during a programming operation.
• Perform one auto-programming operation for a 128-byte block for each address.
Characteristics are not guaranteed for two or more programming operations.
• Confirm normal end of auto-programming by checking IO6. Alternatively, status read mode
can also be used for this purpose (IO7 status polling uses the auto-program operation end
identification pin).
• The status polling IO6 and IO7 pin information is retained until the next command write. Until
the next command write is performed, reading is possible by enabling CE and OE.
Section 7 ROM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 167 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
7.8.6 Auto-Erase Mode
AC Characteristics
Table 7.15 AC Characteristics in Auto-Erase Mode − Preliminary −
Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V ±10%, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 25°C ±5°C
Item Symbol Min Max Unit
Command write cycle tnxtc 20 ⎯ μs
CE hold time tceh 0 ⎯ ns
CE setup time tces 0 ⎯ ns
Data hold time tdh 50 ⎯ ns
Data setup time tds 50 ⎯ ns
Write pulse width twep 70 ⎯ ns
Status polling start time tests 1 ⎯ ms
Status polling access time tspa ⎯ 150 ns
Memory erase time terase 100 40000 ms
WE rise time tr ⎯ 30 ns
WE fall time tf ⎯ 30 ns
Erase setup time tens 100 ⎯ ns
Erase end setup time tenh 100 ⎯ ns
CE
FWE
A18 to A0
IO5 to IO0
IO6
IO7
OE
WE t
erase
(100 to 40000ms)
t
ests
t
spa
t
nxtc
t
nxtc
t
ces
t
ceh
t
dh
CL
in
DL
in
t
ds
t
wep
t
ens
H'00
H'20 H'20
t
enh
Erase end
identification signal
Erase normal end
identification signal
t
f
t
r
Figure 7.21 Auto-Erase Mode Timing Waveforms
Section 7 ROM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 168 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Notes on Use of Erase-Program Mode
• Auto-erase mode supports only entire memory erasing.
• Do not perform a command write during auto-erasing.
• Confirm normal end of auto-erasing by checking IO6. Alternatively, status read mode can also
be used for this purpose (IO7 status polling uses the auto-erase operation end identification
pin).
• The status polling IO6 and IO7 pin information is retained until the next command write. Until
the next command write is performed, reading is possible by enabling CE and OE.
7.8.7 Status Read Mode
Status read mode is used to identify what type of abnormal end has occurred. Use this mode when
an abnormal end occurs in auto-program mode or auto-erase mode.
The return code is retained until a command write for other than status read mode is performed.
Table 7.16 AC Characteristics in Status Read Mode − Preliminary −
Conditions: VCC = 5.0 V ±10%, VSS = 0 V, Ta = 25°C ±5°C
Item Symbol Min Max Unit
Command write cycle tnxtc 20 ⎯ μs
CE hold time tceh 0 ⎯ ns
CE setup time tces 0 ⎯ ns
Data hold time tdh 50 ⎯ ns
Data setup time tds 50 ⎯ ns
Write pulse width twep 70 ⎯ ns
OE output delay time toe ⎯ 150 ns
Disable delay time tdf ⎯ 100 ns
CE output delay time tce ⎯ 150 ns
WE rise time tr ⎯ 30 ns
WE fall time tf ⎯ 30 ns
Section 7 ROM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 169 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
CE
A18 to A0
IO7 to IO0
OE
WE t
ces
t
nxtc
t
nxtc
t
df
Note: IO2 and IO3 are undefined.
t
ces
t
dh
t
ceh
t
ds
t
wep
t
wep
DATA
t
dh
t
ceh
t
ds
t
oe
t
ce
t
nxtc
H'71 H'71
t
f
t
r
t
f
t
r
Figure 7.22 Status Read Mode Timing Waveforms
Table 7.17 Status Read Mode Return Commands
Pin Name IO7 IO6 IO5 IO4 IO3 IO2 IO1 IO0
Attribute Normal end
identification
Command
error
Programming
error
Erase error ⎯ ⎯ Programming
or erase count
exceeded
Effective
address error
Initial value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Indications Normal
end: 0
Abnormal
end: 1
Command
error: 1
Otherwise: 0
Programming
error: 1
Otherwise: 0
Erase error: 1
Otherwise: 0
⎯ ⎯ Count
exceeded: 1
Otherwise: 0
Effective
address
error: 1
Otherwise: 0
Note: IO2 and IO3 are undefined.
Section 7 ROM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 170 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
7.8.8 Status Polling
The IO7 status polling flag indicates the operating status in auto-program or auto-erase mode.
The IO6 status polling flag indicates a normal or abnormal end in auto-program or auto-erase
mode.
Table 7.18 Status Polling Output Truth Table
Pin Names
Internal Operation
in Progress Abnormal End ⎯ Normal End
IO7 0 1 0 1
IO6 0 0 1 1
IO0 to IO5 0 0 0 0
7.8.9 Programmer Mode Transition Time
Commands cannot be accepted during the oscillation stabilization period or the programmer mode
setup period. After the programmer mode setup time, a transition is made to memory read mode.
Table 7.19 Command Wait State Transition Time Specifications
Item Symbol Min Max Unit
Standby release
(oscillation stabilization time)
tosc1 10 ⎯ ms
Programmer mode setup time tbmv 10 ⎯ ms
VCC hold time tdwn 0 ⎯ ms
V
CC
RES
FWE
Memory read
mode
Command wait
state
Command
wait state
Normal/abnormal
end identifica-
tion
Auto-program mode
Auto-erase mode
t
osc1
t
bmv
t
dwn
Note: Except in auto-program mode and auto-erase mode, drive the FWE input pin low.
Don't care
Don't care
Figure 7.23 Oscillation Stabilization Time,
Boot Program Transfer Time, and Power Supply Fall Sequence
Section 7 ROM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 171 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
7.8.10 Notes on Memory Programming
• When programming addresses which have previously been programmed, carry out auto-
erasing before auto-programming.
• When performing programming using programmer mode on a chip that has been
programmed/erased in an on-board programming mode, auto-erasing is recommended before
carrying out auto-programming.
Notes: 1. The flash memory is initially in the erased state when the device is shipped by Renesas.
For other chips for which the erasure history is unknown, it is recommended that auto-
erasing be executed to check and supplement the initialization (erase) level.
2. Auto-programming should be performed once only on the same address block.
Section 7 ROM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 172 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
7.9 Note on Switching from F–ZTAT Version to Mask-ROM Version
The mask ROM version does not have the internal registers for flash memory control that are
provided in the F-ZTAT version. Table 7.20 lists the registers that are present in the F-ZTAT
version but not in the mask ROM version. If a register listed in table 7.20 is read in the mask
ROM version, an undefined value will be returned. Therefore, if application software developed
on the F-ZTAT version is switched to a mask ROM version product, it must be modified to ensure
that the registers in table 7.20 have no effect.
Table 7.20 Registers Present in F-ZTAT Version but Absent in Mask ROM Version
Register Abbreviation Address
Flash memory control register 1 FLMCR1 H'FFF8
Flash memory control register 2 FLMCR2 H'FFF9
Erase block register 1 EBR1 H'FFFA
Erase block register 2 EBR2 H'FFFB
Section 8 RAM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 173 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Section 8 RAM
8.1 Overview
The H8S/2199R, H8S/2198R, H8S/2197R, and H8S/2196R have 4 kbytes, H8S/2197S, and
H8S/2196S have 3 kbytes, and H8S/2199R F-ZTAT version has 8 kbytes of on-chip high-speed
static RAM. The on-chip RAM is connected to the CPU by a 16-bit data bus, enabling both byte
data and word data to be accessed in one state. This makes it possible to perform fast word data
transfer.
8.1.1 Block Diagram
Figure 8.1 shows a block diagram of the on-chip RAM.
Internal data bus (upper 8 bits)
Internal data bus (lower 8 bits)
H'FFEFB0
H'FFEFB2
H'FFEFB4
H'FFFFAE
H'FFEFB1
H'FFEFB3
H'FFEFB5
H'FFFFAF
Figure 8.1 Block Diagram of RAM (H8S/2199R)
Section 8 RAM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 174 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Section 9 Clock Pulse Generator
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 175 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Section 9 Clock Pulse Generator
9.1 Overview
This LSI has a built-in clock pulse generator (CPG) that generates the system clock (φ), the bus
master clock, and internal clocks.
The clock pulse generator consists of a system clock oscillator, a duty adjustment circuit, clock
selection circuit, medium-speed clock divider, subclock oscillator, and subclock division circuit.
9.1.1 Block Diagram
Figure 9.1 shows a block diagram of the clock pulse generator.
System
clock
oscillator
Duty
adjustment
circuit
Clock
selection
circuit
Medium-
speed clock
divider
Subclock
oscillator
Subclock
division
circuit
OSC1
OSC2
X1
X2
φ/16, φ/32, φ/64
φw/2, φw/4, φw/8
φ SUB
φ or φ SUB
Timer A
count clock
Internal clock
To supporting modules
Bus master cloc
k
To CPU
φSUB (φw/2, φw/4, φw/8)
Figure 9.1 Block Diagram of Clock Pulse Generator
9.1.2 Register Configuration
The clock pulse generator is controlled by SBYCR and LPWRCR. Table 9.1 shows the register
configuration.
Table 9.1 CPG Registers
Name Abbreviation R/W Initial Value Address*
Standby control register SBYCR R/W H'00 H'FFEA
Low-power control register LPWRCR R/W H'00 H'FFEB
Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address.
Section 9 Clock Pulse Generator
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 176 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
9.2 Register Descriptions
9.2.1 Standby Control Register (SBYCR)
7
SSBY
0
R/W
6
STS2
0
R/W
5
STS1
0
R/W
4
STS0
0
R/W
3
—
0
—
0
SCK0
0
R/W
2
—
0
—
1
SCK1
0
R/W
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
SBYCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs power-down mode control. Only bits 0
and 1 are described here. For a description of the other bits, see section 4.2.1, Standby Control
Register (SBYCR). SBYCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset.
Bits 1 and 0⎯System Clock Select 1 and 0 (SCK1, SCK0): These bits select the bus master
clock for high-speed mode and medium-speed mode.
Bit 1 Bit 0
SCK1 SCK0 Description
0 Bus master is in high-speed mode (Initial value) 0
1 Medium-speed clock is φ/16
1 0 Medium-speed clock is φ/32
1 Medium-speed clock is φ/64
9.2.2 Low-Power Control Register (LPWRCR)
7
DTON
0
R/W
6
LSON
0
R/W
5
NESEL
0
R/W
4
—
0
—
3
—
0
—
0
SA0
0
R/W
2
—
0
—
1
SA1
0
R/W
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
LPWRCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs power-down mode control.
Only bit 1 and 0 is described here. For a description of the other bits, see section 4.2.2, Low-
Power Control Register (LPWRCR). LPWRCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset.
Section 9 Clock Pulse Generator
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 177 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bits 1 and 0⎯Subactive Mode Clock Select (SA1, SA0): Select CPU clock for subactive mode.
In subactive mode, writes are disabled.
Bit 1 Bit 0
SA1 SA0 Description
0 CPU operating clock is φw/8 (Initial value) 0
1 CPU operating clock is φw/4
1 * CPU operating clock is φw/2
Legend: * Don't care
9.3 Oscillator
Clock pulses can be supplied by connecting a crystal resonator, or by input of an external clock.
9.3.1 Connecting a Crystal Resonator
Circuit Configuration: A crystal resonator can be connected as shown in the example in figure
9.2. An AT-cut parallel-resonance crystal should be used.
OSC1
OSC2
C
L2
C
L1
C
L1 =
C
L2
= 10 to 22pF
Figure 9.2 Connection of Crystal Resonator (Example)
Crystal Resonator: Figure 9.3 shows the equivalent circuit of the crystal resonator. Use a crystal
resonator that has the characteristics shown in table 9.2 and the same frequency as the system
clock (φ).
OSC1
C
L
AT-cut parallel-resonance type
OSC2
C
0
LR
s
Figure 9.3 Crystal Resonator Equivalent Circuit
Section 9 Clock Pulse Generator
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 178 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Table 9.2 Crystal Resonator Parameters
Frequency (MHz) 8 10
RSmax (Ω) 80 60
COmax (pF) 7 7
Note on Board Design: When a crystal resonator is connected, the following points should be
noted.
Other signal lines should be routed away from the oscillator circuit to prevent induction from
interfering with correct oscillation. See figure 9.4.
When designing the board, place the crystal resonator and its load capacitors as close as possible
to the OSC1 and OSC2 pins.
C
L2
Signal A Signal B
C
L1
This LSI
OSC1
OSC2
Avoid
Figure 9.4 Example of Incorrect Board Design
Section 9 Clock Pulse Generator
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 179 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
9.3.2 External Clock Input
Circuit Configuration: An external clock signal can be input as shown in the examples in figure
9.5. If the OSC2 pin is left open, make sure that stray capacitance is no more than 10 pF.
In example (b), make sure that the external clock is held high in standby mode, subactive mode,
subsleep mode, and watch mode.
OSC1
OSC2
External clock input
Open
(a) OSC2 pin left open
OSC1
OSC2
External clock input
(b) Inverted-phase clock input at OSC2 pin
Figure 9.5 External Clock Input (Examples)
Section 9 Clock Pulse Generator
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 180 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
External Clock: The external clock signal should have the same frequency as the system clock
(φ).
Table 9.3 and figure 9.6 show the input conditions for the external clock.
Table 9.3 External Clock Input Conditions
VCC = 4.0 to 5.5 V
Item Symbol Min Max Unit Test Conditions
External clock input low
pulse width
tEXL 40 ⎯ ns Figure 9.6
External clock input high
pulse width
tEXH 40 ⎯ ns
External clock rise time tEXr ⎯ 10 ns
External clock fall time tEXf ⎯ 10 ns
t
EXH
t
EXL
t
EXr
t
EXf
OSC1
Figure 9.6 External Clock Input Timing
Table 9.4 shows the external clock output settling delay time, and figure 9.7 shows the external
clock output settling delay timing. The oscillator and duty adjustment circuit have a function for
adjusting the waveform of the external clock input at the OSC1 pin. When the prescribed clock
signal is input at the OSC1 pin, internal clock signal output is fixed after the elapse of the external
clock output settling delay time (tDEXT). As the clock signal output is not fixed during the tDEXT
period, the reset signal should be driven low to maintain the reset state.
Section 9 Clock Pulse Generator
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 181 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Table 9.4 External Clock Output Settling Delay Time
Conditions: VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V, AVCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V, VSS = AVSS = 0 V
Item Symbol Min Max Unit Notes
External clock output settling
delay time
tDEXT* 500 ⎯ μs Figure 9.7
Note: * t
DEXT includes 20 tCYC of RES pulse width (tRESW).
t
DEXT
*
RES
(Internal)
OSC1
V
CC
4.0 V
φ
Note: * t
DEXT
includes 20 t
cyc
of RES pulse width (t
RESW
).
Figure 9.7 External Clock Output Settling Delay Timing
Section 9 Clock Pulse Generator
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 182 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
9.4 Duty Adjustment Circuit
When the oscillator frequency is 5 MHz or higher, the duty adjustment circuit adjusts the duty
cycle of the clock signal from the oscillator to generate the system clock (φ).
9.5 Medium-Speed Clock Divider
The medium-speed divider divides the system clock to generate φ/16, φ/32, and φ/64 clocks.
9.6 Bus Master Clock Selection Circuit
The bus master clock selection circuit selects the system clock (φ) or one of the medium-speed
clocks (φ/16, φ/32 or φ/64) to be supplied to the bus master (CPU), according to the settings of bits
SCK2 to SCK0 in SBYCR.
9.7 Subclock Oscillator Circuit
9.7.1 Connecting 32.768 kHz Crystal Resonator
When using a subclock, connect a 32.768 kHz crystal resonator to X1 and X2 pins as shown in
figure 9.8.
For precautions on connecting, see Note on Board Design, in section 9.3.1 Connecting a Crystal
Resonator.
X1
X2
C
2
C
1
C
1
= C
2
= 15 pF (Typ)
Figure 9.8 Connecting a 32.768 kHz Crystal Resonator (Example)
Section 9 Clock Pulse Generator
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 183 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Figure 9.9 shows a crystal resonator equivalent circuit.
X1
C
S
C
0
= 1.5 pF (Typ)
R
S
= 14 kΩ (Typ)
f
W
= 32.768 kHz
Type: MX38T (Nihon Denpa Kogyo Co., Ltd.)
Note: Values shown are the reference values.
X2
C
0
L
s
R
s
Figure 9.9 32.768 kHz Crystal Resonator Equivalent Circuit
9.7.2 When Subclock Is Not Needed
Connect X1 pin to VCL, and X2 pin should remain open as shown in figure 9.10.
X1
X2
VCL
Open
Figure 9.10 Terminal When Subclock Is Not Needed
9.8 Subclock Waveform Shaping Circuit
To eliminate noise in the subclock input from the X1 pin, this circuit samples the clock using a
clock obtained by dividing the φ clock. The sampling frequency is set with the NESEL bit in
LPWRCR. For details, see section 4.2.2, Low-Power Control Register (LPWRCR). The clock is
not sampled in subactive mode, subsleep mode, or watch mode.
Section 9 Clock Pulse Generator
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 184 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
9.9 Notes on the Resonator
Resonator characteristics are closely related to the user board design. Perform appropriate
assessment of resonator connection, mask version and F-ZTAT, by referring to the connection
example given in this section. The resonator circuit rate differs depending on the free capacity of
the resonator and the execution circuit, so consult with the resonator manufacturer before
determination. Make sure the voltage applied to the resonator pin does not exceed the maximum
rated voltage.
Section 10 I/O Port
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 185 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Section 10 I/O Port
10.1 Overview
10.1.1 Port Functions
This LSI has seven 8-bit I/O ports (including one CMOS high-current port), and one 8-bit input
port. Table 10.1 shows the functions of each port. Each I/O part a port control register (PCR) that
controls an input and output and a port data register (PDR) for storing output data. The input and
output can be controlled in a unit of bit. The pin whose peripheral function is used both as an
alternative function can set the pin function in a unit of bit by a port mode register (PMR).
10.1.2 Port Input
• Reading a Port
⎯ When a general port of PCR = 0 (input) is read, the pin level is read.
⎯ When a general port of PCR = 1 (output) is read, the value of the corresponding PDR bit is
read.
⎯ When the pins (excluding AN7 to AN0 and RPB7 to RP0 pins) set to the peripheral
function are read, the results are as given in items (1) and (2) according to the PCR value.
• Processing Input Pins
The general input port or general I/O port is gated by read signals. Unused pins can be left
open if they are not read. However, if an open pin is read, a feedthrough current may apply
during the read period according to an intermediate level. The read period is about one-state.
Relevant ports: P0, P1, P2, P3, P4, P5, P6, P7, and P8
When an alternative pin is set to an alternative function other than the general I/O, always set
the pin level to a high or low level. If the pin is left open, a feedthrough current applies
according to an intermediate level, which adversely affects reliability, causes malfunctions,
and in the worst case may damage the pin.
Because the PMR is not initialized in low power consumption mode, pay attention to the pin
input level after the mode has been shifted to the low power consumption mode.
Relevant pins: IC, IRQ0 to IRQ5, SCK1, SI1, SDA1, SCL1, SDA0*, SCL0*, SYNCI*,
FTIA*, FTIB*, FTIC*, FTID*, RPTRG, TMBI, ADTRG, EXCTL, COMP, DPG, EXCAP,
and EXTTRG
Note: * Not available in the H8S/2197S or H8S/2196S.
Section 10 I/O Port
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 186 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Table 10.1 Port Functions
Port Description Pins Alternative Functions
Function
Switching
Register
Port 0 P07 to P00 input-
only ports
P07/AN7 to
P00/AN0
Analog data input channels 7 to 0 PMR0
P17/TMOW Prescalar unit frequency division
clock output
P16/IC Prescalar unit input capture input
Port 1 P17 to P10 I/O ports
(Built-in MOS pull-
up transistors)
P15/IRQ5 to
P10/IRQ0
External interrupt request input
PMR1
P27/SYNCI Formatless serial clock input*
P26/SCL0 I2C bus interface clock I/O*
P25/SDA0 I2C bus interface data I/O*
STCR
ICCR
P24/SCL1 I2C bus interface clock I/O
P23/SDA1 I2C bus interface data I/O
P22/SCK1 SCI1 clock I/O
P21/SO1 SCI1 transmit data output
Port 2 P27 to P20 I/O ports
(Built-in MOS pull-
up transistors)
P20/SI1 SCI1 receive data input
SMR
SCR
P37/TMO Timer J timer output
P36/BUZZ Timer J buzzer output
P35/PWM3
P34/PWM2
P33/PWM1
P32/PWM0
8-bit PWM3 output*
8-bit PWM2 output*
8-bit PWM1 output
8-bit PWM0 output
P31/SV2 Servo monitor output
Port 3 P37 to P30 I/O ports
(Built-in MOS pull-
up transistors)
P30/SV1
PMR3
Port 4 P47 to P40 I/O ports P47/RPTRG Realtime output port trigger input PMR4
P46/FTOB Timer X output compare B output*
P45/FTOA Timer X output compare A output*
TOCR
P44/FTID Timer X input capture D input*
P43/FTIC Timer X input capture C input*
P42/FTIB Timer X input capture B input*
P41/FTIA Timer X input capture A input*
⎯
P40/PWM14 14-bit PWM output* PMR4
Section 10 I/O Port
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 187 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Port Description Pins Alternative Functions
Function
Switching
Register
Realtime output port
P67/RP7/
TMBI Timer B event output
Realtime output port P66/RP6/
ADTRG A/D conversion start external trigger
input
Port 6 P63 to P60 I/O ports
P65/RP5 to
P60/RP0
Realtime output port
PMR6
PMRA
PPG output P77/PPG7/
RPB to P74/
PPG4/RP8 Realtime output port
Port 7 P77 to P70 I/O ports
P73/PPG3 to
P70/PPG0
PPG output
PMR7
PMRB
P87/DPG DPG signal input
P86/EXTTRG External trigger signal input
Pre-amplifier output result signal
input
P85/COMP/B
Color signal output (B)
Pre-amplifier output select signal
input
P84/H.Amp
SW/G
Color signal output (G)
Control signal output for processing
color signals
P83/C.Rotary/R
Color signal output (R)
P82/EXCTL External CTL signal input
External capstan signal input P81/EXCAP/
YBO OSD character position output
Port 8 P87 to P80 I/O ports
P80/YCO OSD character data output
PMR8
PMRC
Notes: This LSI does not have port 5.
* These alternative functions are not available in the H8S/2197S or H8S/2196S.
Section 10 I/O Port
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 188 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
10.1.3 MOS Pull-Up Transistors
The MOS pull-up transistors in ports 1 to 3 can be switched on or off by the MOS pull-up select
registers 1 to 3 (PUR1 to PUR3) in units of bits. Settings in PUR1 to PUR3 are valid when the pin
function is set to an input by PCR1 to PCR3. If the pin function is set to an output, the MOS pull-
up transistor is turned off. Figure 10.1 shows the circuit configuration of a pin with a MOS pull-up
transistor.
V
CC
PUR
STBY
STBY
Legend:
PCR
PDR
PUR
PCR
PDR
: Low power consumption mode signal
(The pull-up MOS transistor is turned off by the STBY signal in low power
consumption mode except for sleep mode)
: MOS pull-up select register
: Port control register
: Port data register
Input data
V
CC
V
SS
Figure 10.1 Circuit Configuration of Pin with MOS Pull-Up Transistor
Section 10 I/O Port
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 189 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
10.2 Port 0
10.2.1 Overview
Port 0 is an 8-bit input-only port. Table 10.2 shows the port 0 configuration.
Port 0 consists of pins that are used both as standard input ports (P07 to P00) and analog input
channels (AN7 to AN0). It is switched by port mode register 0 (PMR0).
Table 10.2 Port 0 Configuration
Port Function Alternative Function
Port 0 P07 (standard input port) AN7 (analog input channel)
P06 (standard input port) AN6 (analog input channel)
P05 (standard input port) AN5 (analog input channel)
P04 (standard input port) AN4 (analog input channel)
P03 (standard input port) AN3 (analog input channel)
P02 (standard input port) AN2 (analog input channel)
P01 (standard input port) AN1 (analog input channel)
P00 (standard input port) AN0 (analog input channel)
10.2.2 Register Configuration
Table 10.3 shows the port 0 register configuration.
Table 10.3 Port 0 Register Configuration
Name Abbrev. R/W Size Initial Value Address*
Port mode register 0 PMR0 R/W Byte H'00 H'FFCD
Port data register 0 PDR0 R Byte ⎯ H'FFC0
Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address.
Section 10 I/O Port
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 190 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Port Mode Register 0 (PMR0)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
0
7
0
R/W R/WR/WR/W
6
PMR04 PMR03 PMR02 PMR01 PMR00PMR07 PMR06 PMR05
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Port mode register 0 (PMR0) controls switching of each pin function of port 0. The switching is
specified in a unit of bit.
PMR0 is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, PMR0 is initialized to H'00.
Bits 7 to 0⎯P07/AN7 to P00/AN0 Pin Switching (PMR07 to PMR00): PMR07 to PMR00 set
whether the P0n/ANn pin is used as a P0n input pin or an ANn pin for the analog input channel of
an A/D converter.
Bit n
PMR0n Description
0 The P0n/ANn pin functions as a P0n input pin (Initial value)
1 The P0n/ANn pin functions as an ANn input pin
Note: n = 7 to 0
Port Data Register 0 (PDR0)
01
R
2
R
34
RR
57
PDR04 PDR03 PDR02 PDR01 PDR00
R
PDR07
RRR
PDR06 PDR05
6
————————
Initial value :
R/W :
Bit :
Port data register 0 (PDR0) reads the port states. When the corresponding bit of PMR0 is 0
(general input port), the pin state is read if PDR0 is read. When the corresponding bit of PMR0 is
1 (analog input channel), 1 is read if PDR0 is read.
PDR0 is an 8-bit read-only register. When PDR0 is reset, its values become undefined.
Section 10 I/O Port
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 191 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
10.2.3 Pin Functions
This section describes the pin functions of port 0 and their selection methods.
P07/AN7 to P00/AN0: P07/AN7 to P00/AN0 are switched according to the PMR0n bit of PMR0
as shown below.
PMR0n Pin Function
0 P0n input pin
1 ANn input pin
Note: n = 7 to 0
10.2.4 Pin States
Table 10.4 shows the pin 0 states in each operation mode.
Table 10.4 Port 0 Pin States
Pins Reset Active Sleep Standby Watch Subactive Subsleep
P07/AN7 to
P00/AN0
High-
impedance
High-
impedance
High-
impedance
High-
impedance
High-
impedance
High-
impedance
High-
impedance
Section 10 I/O Port
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 192 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
10.3 Port 1
10.3.1 Overview
Port 1 is an 8-bit I/O port. Table 10.5 shows the port 1 configuration.
Port 1 consists of pins that are used both as standard I/O ports (P17 to P10) and frequency division
clock output (TMOW), input capture input (IC), or external interrupt request inputs (IRQ5 to
IRQ0). It is switched by port mode register 1 (PMR1) and port control register 1 (PCR1).
Port 1 can select the functions of MOS pull-up transistors.
Table 10.5 Port 1 Configuration
Port Function Alternative Function
Port 1 P17 (standard I/O port) TMOW (frequency division clock output)
P16 (standard I/O port) IC (input capture input)
P15 (standard I/O port) IRQ5 (external interrupt request input)
P14 (standard I/O port) IRQ4 (external interrupt request input)
P13 (standard I/O port) IRQ3 (external interrupt request input)
P12 (standard I/O port) IRQ2 (external interrupt request input)
P11 (standard I/O port) IRQ1 (external interrupt request input)
P10 (standard I/O port) IRQ0 (external interrupt request input)
10.3.2 Register Configuration
Table 10.6 shows the port 1 register configuration.
Table 10.6 Port 1 Register Configuration
Name Abbrev. R/W Size Initial Value Address*
Port mode register 1 PMR1 R/W Byte H'00 H'FFCE
Port control register 1 PCR1 W Byte H'00 H'FFD1
Port data register 1 PDR1 R/W Byte H'00 H'FFC1
MOS pull-up select register
1
PUR1 R/W Byte H'00 H'FFE1
Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address.
Section 10 I/O Port
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 193 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Port Mode Register 1 (PMR1)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
0
7
0
R/W R/WR/WR/W
6
PMR14 PMR13 PMR12 PMR11 PMR10PMR17 PMR16 PMR15
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Port mode register 1 (PMR1) controls switching of each pin function of port 1. The switching is
specified in a unit of bit.
PMR1 is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, PMR1 is initialized to H'00.
Note the following items when the pin functions are switched by PMR1.
• If port 1 is set to an IC input pin and IRQ5 to IRQ0 by PMR1, the pin level needs be set to the
high or low level regardless of the active mode and low power consumption mode. The pin
level must not be set to an intermediate level.
• When the pin functions of P16/IC and P15/IRQ5 to P10/IRQ0 are switched by PMR1, they are
incorrectly recognized as edge detection according to the state of a pin signal and a detection
signal may be generated. To prevent this, perform the operation in the following procedure.
⎯ Before switching the pin functions, inhibit an interrupt enable flag from being interrupted.
⎯ After having switched the pin functions, clear the relevant interrupt request flag to 0 by a
single instruction.
Program Example:
:
MOV.B R0L,@IENR ⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ Interrupt disabled
MOV.B R1L,@PMR1 ⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ Pin function change
NOP ⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ Optional instruction
BCLR m @IRQR ⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ Applicable interrupt clear
MOV.B R1L,@IENR ⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ Interrupt enabled
:
Bit 7⎯P17/TMOW Pin Switching (PMR17): PMR17 sets whether the P17/TMOW pin is used
as a P17 I/O pin or a TMOW pin for the frequency division clock output.
Bit 7
PMR17 Description
0 The P17/TMOW pin functions as a P17 I/O pin (Initial value)
1 The P17/TMOW pin functions as a TMOW output pin
Section 10 I/O Port
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 194 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 6⎯P16/IC Pin Switching (PMR16): PMR16 sets whether the P16/IC pin as a P16 I/O pin or
an IC pin for the input capture input of the prescalar unit. The IC pin has a built-in noise cancel
circuit. See section 21, Prescalar Unit.
Bit 6
PMR16 Description
0 The P16/IC pin functions as a P16 I/O pin (Initial value)
1 The P16/IC pin functions as an IC input pin
Bits 5 to 0⎯P15/IRQ5 to P10/IRQ0 Pin Switching (PMR15 to PMR10): PMR15 to PMR10 set
whether the P1n/IRQn pin is used as a P1n I/O pin or an IRQn pin for the external interrupt
request input.
Bit n
PMR1n Description
0 The P1n/IRQn pin functions as a P1n I/O pin (Initial value)
1 The P1n/IRQn pin functions as an IRQn input pin
Note: n = 5 to 0
Port Control Register 1 (PCR1)
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
5
0
7
0
W WWW
6
PCR14 PCR13 PCR12 PCR11 PCR10PCR17 PCR16 PCR15
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Port control register 1 (PCR1) controls the I/Os of pins P17 to P10 of port 1 in a unit of bit.
When PCR1 is set to 1, the corresponding P17 to P10 pins become output pins, and when it is set
to 0, they become input pins. When the relevant pin is set to a general I/O by PMR1, settings of
PCR1 and PDR1 become valid.
PCR1 is an 8-bit write-only register. When PCR1 is read, 1 is read. When reset, PCR1 is
initialized to H'00.
Section 10 I/O Port
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 195 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bits 7 to 0⎯P17 to P10 Pin Switching (PCR17 toPCR10)
Bit n
PCR1n Description
0 The P1n pin functions as an input pin (Initial value)
1 The P1n pin functions as an output pin
Note: n = 7 to 0
Port Data Register 1 (PDR1)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
0
7
0
R/W R/WR/WR/W
6
PDR14 PDR13 PDR12 PDR11 PDR10PDR17 PDR16 PDR15
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Port data register 1 (PDR1) stores the data for the pins P17 to P10 of port 1. When PCR1 is 1
(output), the PDR1 values are directly read if port 1 is read. Accordingly, the pin states are not
affected. When PCR1 is 0 (input), the pin states are read if port 1 is read.
PDR1 is an 8-bit read/ write enable register. When reset, PDR1 is initialized to H'00.
MOS Pull-Up Select Register 1 (PUR1)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
0
7
0
R/W R/WR/WR/W
6
PUR14 PUR13 PUR12 PUR11 PUR10PUR17 PUR16 PUR15
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
MOS pull-up selector register 1 (PUR1) controls the on and off of the MOS pull-up transistor of
port 1. Only the pin whose corresponding bit of PCR1 was set to 0 (input) becomes valid. When
the corresponding bit of PCR1 is set to 1 (output), the corresponding bit of PUR1 becomes invalid
and the MOS pull-up transistor is turned off.
PUR1 is an 8-bit read/ write enable register. When reset, PUR1 is initialized to H'00.
Bits 7 to 0⎯P17 to P10 MOS Pull-Up Control (PCR17 to PCR10)
Bit n
PUR1n Description
0 The P1n pin has no MOS pull-up transistor (Initial value)
1 The P1n pin has a MOS pull-up pin
Note: n = 7 to 0
Section 10 I/O Port
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 196 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
10.3.3 Pin Functions
This section describes the port 1 pin functions and their selection methods.
P17/TMOW: P17/TMOW is switched as shown below according to the PMR17 bit in PMR1 and
the PCR17 bit in PCR1.
PMR17 PCR17 Pin Function
0 P17 input pin
0
1 P17 output pin
1 * TMOW output pin
Legend: * Don’t care
P16/IC: P16/IC is switched as shown below according to the PMR16 bit in PMR1, the NC on/off
bit in prescalar unit control/status register (PCSR), and the PCR16 bit in PCR1.
PMR16 PCR16 NC on/off Pin Function
0 P16 input pin
0
1
*
P16 output pin
1 * 0 IC input pin Noise cancel invalid
1 Noise cancel valid
Legend: * Don’t care
P15/IRQ5 to P10/IRQ0: P15/IRQ15 to P10/IRQ0 are switched as shown below according to the
PMR1n bit in PMR1 and the PCR1n bit in PCR1.
PMR1n PCR1n Pin Function
0 P1n input pin
0
1 P1n output pin
1 * IRQn input pin
Legend: * Don’t care.
Notes: 1. n = 5 to 0
2. The IRQ5 to IRQ0 input pins can select the leading or falling edge as an edge sense
(the IRQ0 pin can select both edges). See section 6.2.4, IRQ Edge Select Register
(IEGR).
3. IRQ1 or IRQ2 can be used as a timer J event input and IRQ3 can be used as a timer R
input capture input. For details, see section 13, Timer J or section 15, Timer R.
Section 10 I/O Port
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 197 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
10.3.4 Pin States
Table 10.7 shows the port 1 pin states in each operation mode.
Table 10.7 Port 1 Pin States
Pins Reset Active Sleep Standby Watch Subactive Subsleep
P17/TMOW
P16/IC
P15/IRQ5 to
P10/IRQ0
High-
impedance
Operation Holding High-
impedance
High-
impedance
Operation Holding
Note: If the IC input pin and IRQ5 to IRQ0 input pins are set, the pin level need be set to the high
or low level regardless of the active mode and low power consumption mode. Note that the
pin level must not reach an intermediate level.
Section 10 I/O Port
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 198 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
10.4 Port 2
10.4.1 Overview
Port 2 is an 8-bit I/O port. Table 10.8 shows the port 2 configuration.
Port 2 consists of pins that are used both as standard I/O ports (P27 to P20) and SCI clock I/O
(SCK1), receive data input (SI1), send data output (SO1), I2C bus interface clock I/O (SCL0,
SCL1), or data I/O (SDA0, SDA1). It is switched by serial mode register (SMR), serial control
register (SCR), and port control register 2 (PCR2).
Port 2 can select the MOS pull-up function.
Table 10.8 Port 2 Configuration
Port Function Alternative Function
Port 2 P27 (standard I/O port) SYNCI (Formatless serial clock input)
P26 (standard I/O port) SCL0 (I2C bus interface clock I/O)
P25 (standard I/O port) SDA0 (I2C bus interface data I/O)
P24 (standard I/O port) SCL1 (I2C bus interface clock I/O)
P23 (standard I/O port) SDA1 (I2C bus interface data I/O)
P22 (standard I/O port) SCK1 (SCI1 clock I/O)
P21 (standard I/O port) SO1 (SCI1 transmit data output)
P20 (standard I/O port) SI1 (SCI1 receive data input)
Note: The H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S do not have SYNCI, SCL0, and SDA0 pin functions.
10.4.2 Register Configuration
Table 10.9 shows the port 2 register configuration.
Table 10.9 Port 2 Register Configuration
Name Abbrev. R/W Size Initial Value Address*
Port control register 2 PCR2 W Byte H'00 H'FFD2
Port data register 2 PDR2 R/W Byte H'00 H'FFC2
MOS pull-up select
register 2
PUR2 R/W Byte H'00 H'FFE2
Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address.
Section 10 I/O Port
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 199 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Port Control Register 2 (PCR2)
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
5
0
7
0
W WWW
6
PCR24 PCR23 PCR22 PCR21 PCR20PCR27 PCR26 PCR25
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Port control register 2 (PCR2) controls the I/Os of pins P27 to P20 of port 2 in a unit of bit.
When PCR2 is set to 1, the corresponding P27 to P20 pins become output pins, and when it is set
to 0, they become input pins. When the relevant pin is set to a general I/O, settings of PCR2 and
PDR2 are valid.
PCR2 is an 8-bit write-only register. When PCR2 is read, 1 is read. When reset, PCR2 is
initialized to H'00.
Bits 7 to 0⎯P27 to P20 Pin Switching (PCR27 to PCR20)
Bit n
PCR2n Description
0 The P2n pin functions as an input pin (Initial value)
1 The P2n pin functions as an output pin
Note: n = 7 to 0
Port Data Register 2 (PDR2)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
0
7
0
R/W R/WR/WR/W
6
PDR24 PDR23 PDR22 PDR21 PDR20PDR27 PDR26 PDR25
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Port data register 2 (PDR2) stores the data for the pins P27 to P20 of port 2. When PCR2 is 1
(output), the PDR2 values are directly read if port 2 is read. Accordingly, the pin states are not
affected. When PCR2 is 0 (input), the pin states are read if port 2 is read.
PDR2 is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, PDR2 is initialized to H'00.
Section 10 I/O Port
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 200 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
MOS Pull-Up Select Register 2 (PUR2)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
0
7
0
R/W R/WR/WR/W
6
PUR24 PUR23 PUR22 PUR21 PUR20PUR27 PUR26 PUR25
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
MOS pull-up selector register 2 (PUR2) controls the ON and OFF of the MOS pull-up transistor
of port 2. Only the pin whose corresponding bit of PCR2 was set to 0 (input) becomes valid. If the
corresponding bit of PCR2 is set to 1 (output), the corresponding bit of PUR2 becomes invalid and
the MOS pull-up transistor is turned off.
PUR2 is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, PUR2 is initialized to H'00.
Bits 7 to 0⎯P27 to P20 Pull-Up MOS Control (PUR27 to PUR20)
Bit n
PUR2n Description
0 The P2n pin has no MOS pull-up transistor (Initial value)
1 The P2n pin has a MOS pull-up transistor
Note: n = 7 to 0
10.4.3 Pin Functions
This section describes the port 2 pin functions and their selection methods.
P27/SYNCI: P27/SYNCI is switched as shown below according to the PCR27 bit in PCR2.
PCR27 Pin Function
0 P27 input pin
1 P27 output pin
Notes: Because the SYNCI always functions, the alternative pin need always be set to the high or
low level regardless of active mode or low power consumption mode.
The H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S do not have SYNCI pin function.
Section 10 I/O Port
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 201 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
P26/SCL0: P26/SCL0 is switched as shown below according to the PCR26 bit in PCR2 and the
ICE bit in the I2C Bus control register 0 (ICCR0).
ICE PCR26 Pin Function
0 P26 input pin
0
1 P26 output pin
1 * SCL0 I/O pin
Legend: * Don’t care
Notes: The H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S do not have SCL0 pin function.
P25/SDA0: P25/SDA0 is switched as shown below according to the PCR25 bit in PCR2 and the
ICE bit in the I2C Bus control register 0 (ICCR0).
ICE PCR25 Pin Function
0 P25 input pin
0
1 P25 output pin
1 * SDA0 I/O pin
Legend: * Don’t care
Notes: The H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S do not have SDA0 pin function.
P24/SCL1: P24/SCL1 is switched as shown below according to the PCR24 bit in PCR2 and the
ICE bit in the I2C Bus control register 1 (ICCR1).
ICE PCR24 Pin Function
0 P24 input pin
0
1 P24 output pin
1 * SCL1 I/O pin
Legend: * Don’t care
P23/SDA1: P23/SDA1 is switched as shown below according to the PCR23 bit in PCR2 and the
ICE bit in the I2C Bus control register 1 (ICCR1).
ICE PCR23 Pin Function
0 P23 input pin
0
1 P23 output pin
1 * SDA1 I/O pin
Legend: * Don’t care
Section 10 I/O Port
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 202 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
P22/SCK1: P22/SCK1 is switched as shown below according to the PCR22 bit in PCR2, the C/A
bit in SMR, and the CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR.
CKE1 C/A CKE0 PCR22 Pin Function
0 P22 input pin
0
1 P22 output pin
0
1 * SCK1 output pin
0
1 *
1 * SCK1 input pin
Legend: * Don’t care
P21/SO1: P21/SO1 is switched as shown below according to the PCR21 bit in PCR2 and the TE
bit in SCR.
TE PCR21 Pin Function
0 P21 input pin
0
1 P21 output pin
1 * SO1 output pin
Legend: * Don’t care
P20/SI1: P20/SI1 is switched as shown below according to the PCR20 bit in PCR2 and the RE bit
in SCR.
RE PCR20 Pin Function
0 P20 input pin
0
1 P20 output pin
1 * SI1 input pin
Legend: * Don’t care
Section 10 I/O Port
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 203 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
10.4.4 Pin States
Table 10.10 shows the port 2 pin states in each operation mode.
Table 10.10 Port 2 Pin States
Pins Reset Active Sleep Standby Watch Subactive Subsleep
P27/SYNCI
P26/SCL0
P25/SDA0
P24/SCL1
P23/SDA1
P22/SCK1
P21/SO1
P20/SI1
High-
impedance
Operation Holding High-
impedance
High-
impedance
Operation Holding
Note: Because the SYNCI, SCL0, SDA0, SCL1, and SDA1 always function, the alternative pin
need always be set to the high or low level regardless of active mode or low power
consumption mode.
If the SCK1, and SI1 input pins are set, the pin level needs be set to the high or low level
regardless of the active mode and low power consumption mode. Note that the pin level
must not reach an intermediate level.
Section 10 I/O Port
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 204 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
10.5 Port 3
10.5.1 Overview
Port 3 is an 8-bit I/O port. Table 10.11 shows the port 3 configuration.
Port 3 consists of pins that are used both as standard I/O ports (P37 to P30) and timer J timer
output (TMO), buzzer output (BUZZ), 8-bit PWM outputs (PWM3 to PWM0), SCI2 strobe output
(STRB), or chip select input (CS). It is switched by port mode register 3 (PMR3) and port control
register 3 (PCR3).
Port 3 can select the MOS pull-up function.
Table 10.11 Port 3 Configuration
Port Function Alternative Function
Port 3 P37 (standard I/O port) TMO (timer J timer output)
P36 (standard I/O port) BUZZ (timer J buzzer output)
P35 (standard I/O port) PWM3 (8-bit PWM output)
P34 (standard I/O port) PWM2 (8-bit PWM output)
P33 (standard I/O port) PWM1 (8-bit PWM output)
P32 (standard I/O port) PWM0 (8-bit PWM output)
P31 (standard I/O port) SV2 (servo monitor output)
P30 (standard I/O port) SV1 (servo monitor output)
Note: The H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S do not have PWM3 and PWM2 pin functions.
10.5.2 Register Configuration
Table 10.12 shows the port 3 register configuration.
Table 10.12 Port 3 Register Configuration
Name Abbrev. R/W Size Initial Value Address*
Port mode register 3 PMR3 R/W Byte H'00 H'FFD0
Port control register 3 PCR3 W Byte H'00 H'FFD3
Port data register 3 PDR3 R/W Byte H'00 H'FFC3
MOS pull-up select
register 3
PUR3 R/W Byte H'00 H'FFE3
Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address.
Section 10 I/O Port
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 205 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Port Mode Register 3 (PMR3)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
0
7
0
R/W R/WR/WR/W
6
PMR34 PMR33 PMR32 PMR31 PMR30PMR37 PMR36 PMR35
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Port mode register 3 (PMR3) controls switching of each pin function of port 3. The switching is
specified in a unit of bit.
PMR3 is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, PMR3 is initialized to H'00.
Bit 7⎯P37/TMO Pin Switching (PMR37): PMR37 sets whether the P37/TMO pin is used as a
P37 I/O pin or a TMO pin for the timer J output timer.
Bit 7
PMR37 Description
0 The P37/TMO pin functions as a P37 I/O pin (Initial value)
1 The P37/TMO pin functions as a TMO output pin
Notes: If the TMO pin is used for remote control sending, a careless timer output pulse may be
output when the remote control mode is set after the output has been switched to the TMO
output. Perform the switching and setting in the following order.
1. Set the remote control mode.
2. Set the TMJ-1 and 2 counter data of the timer J.
3. Switch the P37/TMO pin to the TMO output pin.
4. Set the ST bit to 1.
Bit 6⎯P36/BUZZ Pin Switching (PMR36): PMR36 sets whether the P36/BUZZ pin as a P36
I/O pin or an BUZZ pin for the timer J buzzer output. For the selection of the BUZZ output, see
13.2.2, Timer J Control Register (TMJC).
Bit 6
PMR36 Description
0 The P36/BUZZ pin functions as a P36 I/O pin (Initial value)
1 The P36/BUZZ pin functions as a BUZZ output pin
Section 10 I/O Port
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 206 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bits 5 to 2⎯P35/PWM3 to P32/PWM0 Pin Switching (PMR35 to PMR32): PMR35 to PMR32
set whether the P3n/PWMm pin is used as a P3n I/O pin or a PWMm pin for the 8-bit PWM
output.
Bit n
PMR3n Description
0 The P3n/PWMm pin functions as a P3n I/O pin (Initial value)
1 The P3n/PWMm pin functions as a PWMm output pin
Notes: 1. n = 5 to 2, m = 3 to 0
2. The H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S do not have PWM3 and PWM2 pin functions.
Bit 1⎯P31/SV2 Pin Switching (PMR31): PMR31 sets whether the P31/SV2 pin is used as a P31
I/O pin or an SV2 pin for the servo monitor output.
Bit 1
PMR31 Description
0 The P31/SV2 pin functions as a P31 I/O pin (Initial value)
1 The P31/SV2 pin functions as an SV2 output pin
Bit 0⎯P30/SV1 Pin Switching (PMR30): PMR30 sets whether the P30/SV1 pin is used as a P30
I/O pin or an SV1 pin for servo monitor output.
Bit 0
PMR30 Description
0 The P30/SV1 pin functions as a P30 I/O pin (Initial value)
1 The P30/SV1 pin functions as an SV1 output pin
Section 10 I/O Port
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 207 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Port Control Register 3 (PCR3)
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
5
0
7
0
W WWW
6
PCR34 PCR33 PCR32 PCR31 PCR30PCR37 PCR36 PCR35
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Port control register 3 (PCR3) controls the I/Os of pins P37 to P30 of port 3 in a unit of bit.
When PCR3 is set to 1, the corresponding P37 to P30 pins become output pins, and when it is set
to 0, they become input pins. When the relevant pin is set to a general I/O by PMR3, settings of
PCR3 and PDR3 become valid.
PCR3 is an 8-bit write-only register. When PCR3 is read, 1 is read. When reset, PCR3 is
initialized to H'00.
Bits 7 to 0⎯Pin 37 to P30 Pin Switching (PCR37 to PCR30)
Bit n
PCR3n Description
0 The P3n pin functions as an input pin (Initial value)
1 The P3n pin functions as an output pin
Note: n = 7 to 0
Port Data Register 3 (PDR3)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
0
7
0
R/W R/WR/WR/W
6
PDR34 PDR33 PDR32 PDR31 PDR30PDR37 PDR36 PDR35
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Port data register 3 (PDR3) stores the data for the pins P37 to P30 of port 3. When PCR3 is 1
(output), the PDR3 values are directly read if port 3 is read. Accordingly, the pin states are not
affected. When PCR3 is 0 (input), the pin states are read if port 3 is read.
PDR3 is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, PDR3 is initialized to H'00.
Section 10 I/O Port
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 208 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
MOS Pull-Up Select Register 3 (PUR3)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
0
7
0
R/W R/WR/WR/W
6
PUR34 PUR33 PUR32 PUR31 PUR30PUR37 PUR36 PUR35
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
MOS pull-up selector register 3 (PUR3) controls the ON and OFF of the MOS pull-up transistor
of port 3. Only the pin whose corresponding bit of PCR3 was set to 0 (input) becomes valid. If the
corresponding bit of PCR3 is set to 1 (output), the corresponding bit of PUR3 becomes invalid and
the MOS pull-up transistor is turned off.
PUR3 is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, PUR3 is initialized to H'00.
Bits 7 to 0⎯P37 to P30 MOS Pull-Up Control (PUR37 to PUR30)
Bit n
PCR3n Description
0 The P3n pin has no MOS pull-up transistor (Initial value)
1 The P3n pin has a MOS pull-up transistor
Note: n = 7 to 0
10.5.3 Pin Functions
This section describes the port 3 pin functions and their selection methods.
P37/TMO: P37/TMO is switched as shown below according to the PMR37 bit in PMR3 and the
PCR37 bit in PCR3.
PMR37 PCR37 Pin Function
0 P37 input pin
0
1 P37 output pin
1 * TMO output pin
Legend: * Don’t care
Section 10 I/O Port
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 209 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
P36/BUZZ: P36/BUZZ is switched as shown below according to the PMR36 bit in PMR3 and the
PCR36 bit in PCR3.
PMR36 PCR36 Pin Function
0 P36 input pin
0
1 P36 output pin
1 * BUZZ output pin
Legend: * Don’t care
P35/PWM3: P35/PWM3 is switched as shown below according to the PMR3n bit in PMR3 and
the PCR3n bit in PCR3.
PMR35 PCR35 Pin Function
0 P35 input pin
0
1 P35 output pin
1 * PWM3 output pin
Legend: * Don’t care
Note: The H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S do not have PWM3 pin function.
P34/PWM2: P34/PWM2 is switched as shown below according to the PMR34 bit in PCR3 and
the PCR34 bit in PCR3.
PMR34 PCR34 Pin Function
0 P34 input pin
0
1 P34 output pin
1 * PWM2 output pin
Legend: * Don’t care
Note: The H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S do not have PWM2 pin function.
P33/PWM1: P33/PWM1 is switched as shown below according to the PMR33 bit in PMR3 and
the PCR33 bit in PCR3.
PMR33 PCR33 Pin Function
0 P33 input pin
0
1 P33 output pin
1 * PWM1 input pin
Legend: * Don’t care
Section 10 I/O Port
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 210 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
P32/PWM0: P32/PWM0 is switched as shown below according to the PMR32 bit in PMR3 and
the PCR32 bit in PCR.
PMR32 PCR32 Pin Function
0 P32 input pin
0
1 P32 output pin
1 * PWM0 output pin
P31/SV2: P31/SV2 is switched as shown below according to the PMR31 bit in PMR3 and the
PCR31 bit in PCR3.
PMR31 PCR3 Pin Function
0 P31 input pin
0
1 P31 output pin
1 * SV2 output pin
P30/SV1: P30/SV1 is switched as shown below according to the PMR30 bit in PMR3 and the
PCR30 bit in PCR3.
PMR30 PCR30 Pin Function
0 P30 input pin
0
1 P30 output pin
1 * SV1 output pin
Legend: * Don’t care
10.5.4 Pin States
Table 10.13 shows the port 3 pin states in each operation mode.
Table 10.13 Port 3 Pin States
Pins Reset Active Sleep Standby Watch Subactive Subsleep
P37/TMO
P36/BUZZ
P35/PWM3
to
P32/PWM0
P31/SV2
P30/SV1
High-
impedance
Operation Holding High-
impedance
High-
impedance
Operation Holding
Section 10 I/O Port
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 211 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
10.6 Port 4
10.6.1 Overview
Port 4 is an 8-bit I/O port. Table 10.14 shows the port 4 configuration.
Port 4 consists of pins that are used both as standard I/O ports (P47 to P40) and output compare
output (FTOA, FTOB), input capture input (FTIA, FTIB, FTIC, FTID) or 14-bit PWM output
(PWM14). It is switched by port mode register 4 (PMR4), timer output compare control register
(TOCR), and port control register 4 (PCR4).
Table 10.14 Port 4 Configuration
Port Function Alternative Function
Port 4 P47 (standard I/O port) RPTRG (realtime output port trigger input)
P46 (standard I/O port) FTOB (timer X1 output compare output)
P45 (standard I/O port) FTOA (timer X1 output compare output)
P44 (standard I/O port) FTID (timer X1 input capture input)
P43 (standard I/O port) FTIC (timer X1 input capture input)
P42 (standard I/O port) FTIB (timer X1 input capture input)
P41 (standard I/O port) FTIA (timer X1 input capture input)
P40 (standard I/O port) PWM14 (14-bit PWM output)
Note: The H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S do not have PWM14, FTIA, FTIB, FTIC, FTID, FTOA, and
FTOB pin functions.
10.6.2 Register Configuration
Table 10.15 shows the port 4 register configuration.
Table 10.15 Port 4 Register Configuration
Name Abbrev. R/W Size Initial Value Address*
Port mode register 4 PMR4 R/W Byte H'7E H'FFDB
Port control register 4 PCR4 W Byte H'00 H'FFD4
Port data register 4 PDR4 R/W Byte H'00 H'FFC4
Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address.
Section 10 I/O Port
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 212 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Port Mode Register 4 (PMR4)
0
0
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
11
5
1
7
0
R/W
6
—————PMR47 —
—————R/W —
PMR40
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Port mode register 4 (PMR4) controls switching of the P47/RPTRG pin and the P40/PWM14 pin
function. The switchings of the P46/FTOB and P45/FTOA functions are controlled by TOCR. See
section 16, Timer X1. The FTIA, FTIB, FTIC, and FTID inputs always function.
PMR4 is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, PMR4 is initialized to H'7E.
Because the RPTRG input always function, the alternative pin need always be set to the high or
low level regardless of the active mode and low power consumption mode. Note that the pin level
must not reach an intermediate level.
Because the FTIA, FTIB, FTIC, and FTID inputs always function, each input uses the input edge
to the alternative general I/O pins P44, P43, P42, and P41 as input signals.
Bit 7⎯P47/RPTRG Pin Switching (PMR47): PMR47 sets whether the P47/RPTRG pin is used
as a P40 I/O pin or a RPTRG pin for the realtime output port trigger input.
Bit 7
PMR47 Description
0 The P47/RPTRG pin functions as a P47 I/O pin (Initial value)
1 The P47/RPTRG pin functions as a RPTRG I/O pin
Bits 6 to 1⎯Reserved Bits: Reserved bits. When the bits are read, 1 is always read. The write
operation is invalid.
Bit 0⎯P40/PWM14 Pin Switching (PMR40): PMR40 sets whether the P40/PWM14 pin is used
as a P40 I/O pin or a PWM14 pin for the 14-bit PWM square wave output.
Bit 0
PMR40 Description
0 The P40/PWM14 pin functions as a P40 I/O pin (Initial value)
1 The P40/PWM14 pin functions as a PWM14 output pin
Note: The H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S do not have PWM14 pin function.
Section 10 I/O Port
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 213 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Port Control Register 4 (PCR4)
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
5
0
7
0
W WWW
6
PCR44 PCR43 PCR42 PCR41 PCR40PCR47 PCR46 PCR45
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Port control register 4 (PCR4) controls the I/Os of pins P47 to P40 of port 4 in a unit of bit.
When PCR4 is set to 1, the corresponding P47 to P40 pins become output pins, and when it is set
to 0, they become input pins. When the relevant pin is set to a general I/O by PMR4, settings of
PCR4 and PDR4 become valid.
PCR4 is an 8-bit write-only register. When PCR4 is read, 1 is read. When reset, PCR4 is
initialized to H'00.
Bits 7 to 0⎯P47 to P40 Pin Switching (PCR47 to PCR40)
Bit n
PCR4n Description
0 The P4n pin functions as an input pin (Initial value)
1 The P4n pin functions as an output pin
Note: n = 7 to 0
Port Data Register 4 (PDR4)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
0
7
0
R/W R/WR/WR/W
6
PDR44 PDR43 PDR42 PDR41 PDR40PDR47 PDR46 PDR45
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Port data register 4 (PDR4) stores the data for the pins P47 to P40 of port 4. When PCR4 is 1
(output), the PDR4 values are directly read if port 4 is read. Accordingly, the pin states are not
affected. When PCR4 is 0 (input), the pin states are read if port 4 is read.
PDR4 is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, PDR4 is initialized to H'00.
Section 10 I/O Port
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 214 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
10.6.3 Pin Functions
This section describes the port 4 pin functions and their selection methods.
P47/RPTRG: P47/RPTRG is switched as shown below according to the PMR47 bit in PMR4 and
the PMR47 bit in PMR4 and the PCR47 bit in PCR4.
PMR47 PCR47 Pin Function
0 0 P47 input pin
1 P47 output pin
1 * RPTRG input pin
Legend: * Don’t care
P46/FTOB: P46/FTOB is switched as shown below according to the PCR46 bit in PCR4 and the
OEB bit in TOCR.
OEB PCR46 Pin Function
0 P46 input pin
0
1 P46 output pin
1 * FTOB output pin
Legend: * Don’t care
Note: The H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S do not have FTOB pin function.
P45/FTOA: P45/FTOA is switched as shown below according to the PCR45 bit in PCR4 and the
OEA bit in TOCR.
OEA PCR45 Pin Function
0 P45 input pin
0
1 P45 output pin
1 * FTOA output pin
Legend: * Don’t care
Note: The H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S do not have FTOA pin function.
Section 10 I/O Port
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 215 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
P44/FTID: P44/FTID is switched as shown below according to the PCR44 bit in PCR4.
PCR44 Pin Function
0 P44 input pin FTID input pin
1 P44 output pin
Note: The H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S do not have FTID pin function.
P43/FTIC: P43/FTIC is switched as shown below according to the PCR43 bit in PCR4.
PCR43 Pin Function
0 P43 input pin FTIC input pin
1 P43 output pin
Note: The H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S do not have FTIC pin function.
P42/FTIB: P42/FTIB is switched as shown below according to the PCR42 bit in PCR4.
PCR42 Pin Function
0 P42 input pin FTIB input pin
1 P42 output pin
Note: The H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S do not have FTIB pin function.
P41/FTIA: P41/FTIA is switched as shown below according to the PCR41 bit in PCR4.
PCR41 Pin Function
0 P41 input pin FTIA input pin
1 P41 output pin
Note: The H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S do not have FTIA pin function.
P40/PWM14: P40/PWM14 is switched as shown below according to the PMR40 bit in PMR4 and
the PCR40 bit in PCR4.
PMR40 PCR40 Pin Function
0 P40 input pin
0
1 P40 output pin
1 * PWM14 input pin
Legend: * Don’t care
Note: The H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S do not have PWM14 pin function.
Section 10 I/O Port
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 216 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
10.6.4 Pin States
Table 10.16 shows the port 4 pin states in each operation mode.
Table 10.16 Port 4 Pin States
Pins Reset Active Sleep Standby Watch Subactive Subsleep
P47/RPTRG
P46/FTOB
P45/FTOA
P44/FTID
P43/FTIC
P42/FTIB
P41/FTIA
P40/PWM14
High-
impedance
Operation Holding High-
impedance
High-
impedance
Operation Holding
Note: If the RPTRG input pin is set, the pin level must be set to the high or low level regardless of
the active mode or low power consumption mode. Note that the pin level must not reach an
intermediate level.
Because the FTIA, FTIB, FTIC, and FTID inputs always function, the alternative pin need be
set to the high or low level regardless of the active mode and low power consumption
mode.
Section 10 I/O Port
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 217 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
10.7 Port 6
10.7.1 Overview
Port 6 is an 8-bit I/O port. Table 10.17 shows the port 6 configuration. Port 6 is a large current I/O
port.
The sink current is 20 mA maximum (VOL = 1.7 V) and four pins can be turned on at the same
time. Port 6 consists of pins that are used as large current I/O ports (P67 to 60) and realtime output
ports (RP7 to RP0). It is switched by port mode register 6 (PMR6), port mode register A (PMRA),
and port control register 6 (PCR6).
The realtime output function can instantaneously switch the output data by an external or internal
trigger port.
Table 10.17 Port 6 Configuration
Port Function Alternative Function
Port 6 P67 (large current I/O port) RP7/TMBI (timer B event input)
P66 (large current I/O port) RP6/ADTRG (A/D conversion start external
trigger input)
P65 (large current I/O port) RP5 (realtime output port pin)
P64 (large current I/O port) RP4 (realtime output port pin)
P63 (large current I/O port) RP3 (realtime output port pin)
P62 (large current I/O port) RP2 (realtime output port pin)
P61 (large current I/O port) RP1 (realtime output port pin)
P60 (large current I/O port) RP0 (realtime output port pin)
Section 10 I/O Port
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 218 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
10.7.2 Register Configuration
Table 10.18 shows the port 6 register configuration.
Table 10.18 Port 6 Register Configuration
Name Abbrev. R/W Size Initial Value Address*
Port mode register 6 PMR6 R/W Byte H'00 H'FFDD
Port mode register A PMRA R/W Byte H'3F H'FFD9
Port control register 6 PCR6 W Byte H'00 H'FFD6
Port data register 6 PDR6 R/W Byte H'00 H'FFC6
Realtime output trigger
select register 1
RTPSR1 R/W Byte H'00 H'FFE5
Realtime output trigger
edge select register
RTPEGR*2 R/W Byte H'FC H'FFE4
Port control register slave 6 PCRS6 ⎯ Byte H'00 ⎯
Port data register slave 6 PDRS6 ⎯ Byte H'00 ⎯
Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address.
2. RTPEGR is also used by port 7.
Port Mode Register 6 (PMR6)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
56
0
7
PMR64 PMR63 PMR62 PMR61 PMR60
0
R/W
PMR67
R/WR/WR/W
PMR66 PMR65
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Port mode register 6 (PMR6) controls switching of each pin function of port 6. The switching is
specified in units of bits.
PMR6 is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, PMR6 is initialized to H'00.
Bits 7 to 0⎯P67/RP7 to P60/RP0 Pin Switching (PMR67 to PMR60): PMR67 to PMR60 set
whether the P6n/RPn pin is used as a P6n I/O pin or an RPn pin for the realtime output port.
Bit n
PMR6n Description
0 The P6n/RPn pin functions as a P6n I/O pin (Initial value)
1 The P6n/RPn pin functions as an RPn output pin
Note: n = 7 to 0
Section 10 I/O Port
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 219 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Port Mode Register A (PMRA)
0
1
1
1
—
2
1
—
3
1
4
1
—
1
—
5
0
7
0
R/W ——R/W
6
—————PMRA7 PMRA6 —
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Port mode register A (PMRA) switches the pin functions in port 6. Switching is specified in a unit
of bit. PMRA is an 8-bit read/write register.
When reset, PMRA is initialized to H'3F.
Bit 7⎯P67/RP7/TMBI Pin Switching (PMRA7): PMRA7 can be used as a P6n I/O pin or a
TMBI pin for timer B event input.
Bit 7
PMRA7 Description
0 P67/RP7/TMBI pin functions as a P67/RP7 I/O pin (Initial value)
1 P67/RP7/TMBI pin functions as a TMBI pin
Bit 6⎯Timer B Event Input Edge Switching (PMRA6): PMRA6 selects the TMBI edge sense.
Bit 6
PMRA6 Description
0 Timer B event input detects falling edge
1 Timer B event input detects rising edge
Section 10 I/O Port
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 220 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Port Control Register 6 (PCR6)
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
56
0
7
PCR64 PCR63 PCR62 PCR61 PCR60
0
W
PCR67
WWW
PCR66 PCR65
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Port control register 6 (PCR6) selects the general I/O of port 6 and controls the realtime output in
a unit of bit together with PMR6.
When PMR6 = 0, the corresponding P67 to P60 pins become general output pins if PCR6 is set to
1, and they become general input pins if it is set to 0.
When PMR6 = 1, PCR6 controls the corresponding RP7 to RP0 realtime output pins. For details,
see section 10.7.4, Operation.
PCR6 is an 8-bit write-only register. When PCR6 is read, 1 is read. When reset, PCR6 is
initialized to H'00.
PMR6 PCR6
Bit n Bit n
PMR6n PCR6n Description
0 The P6n/RPn pin functions as a P6n general I/O input pin
(Initial value)
0
1 The P6n/RPn pin functions as a P6n general output pin
1 * The P6n/RPn pin functions as an RPn realtime output pin
Legend: * Don’t care
Note: n = 7 to 0
Port Data Register 6 (PDR6)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
56
0
7
PDR64 PDR63 PDR62 PDR61 PDR60
0
R/W
PDR67
R/WR/WR/W
PDR66 PDR65
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Port data register 6 (PDR6) stores the data for the pins P67 to P60 of port 6.
For PMR6 = 0, when PCR6 is 1 (output), the PDR6 values are directly read if port 6 is read.
Accordingly, the pin states are not affected. When PCR6 is 0 (input), the pin states are read if port
6 is read.
For PMR6 = 1, port 6 becomes a realtime output pin. For details, see section 10.7.4, Operation.
PDR6 is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, PDR6 is initialized to H'00.
Section 10 I/O Port
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 221 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Realtime Output Trigger Select Register (RTPSR1)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
56
0
7
RTPSR14 RTPSR13 RTPSR12 RTPSR11 RTPSR10
0
R/W
RTPSR17
R/WR/WR/W
RTPSR16 RTPSR15
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The realtime output trigger select register (RTPSR1) sets whether the external trigger (RPTRG pin
input) or the internal trigger (HSW) is used as an trigger input for the realtime output in a unit of
bit. For the internal trigger HSW, see section 26.4, HSW (Head-switch) Timing Generator.
RTPSR1 is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, RTPSR1 is initialized to H'00.
Bits 7 to 0⎯RP7 to RP0 Trigger Switching
Bit n
RTPSR1n Description
0 Selects the external trigger (RPTRG pin input) as a trigger input (Initial value)
1 Selects the internal trigger (HSW) a trigger input
Note: n = 7 to 0
Real Time Output Trigger Edge Select Register (RTPEGR)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
1
3
1
4
11
56
1
7
——————
——————
RTPEGR1 RTPEGR0
1
R/W
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The realtime output trigger edge select register (RTPEGR) specifies the edge sense of the external
or internal trigger input for the realtime output.
RTPEGR is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, RTPEGR is initialized to H'FC.
Bits 7 to 2⎯Reserved Bits: Reserved bits. When the bits are read, 1 is always read. The write
operation is invalid.
Section 10 I/O Port
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 222 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bits 1 and 0⎯Realtime Output Trigger Edge Select (RTPEGR1, RTPEGR0): RTPEGR1 and
RTPEGR0 select the edge sense of the external or internal trigger input for the realtime output.
Bit 1 Bit 0
RTPEGR1 RTPEGR0
Description
0 Inhibits a trigger input (Initial value) 0
1 Selects the rising edge of a trigger input
1 0 Selects the falling edge of a trigger input
1 Selects both the leading and falling edges of a trigger input
10.7.3 Pin Functions
This section describes the port 6 pin functions and their selection methods.
P67/RP7/TMBI: P67/RP7/TMBI is switched as shown below according to the PMRA7 bit in
PMRA, PMR67 bit in PMR6, and PCR67 bit in PCR6.
PMRA7 PMR67 PCR67 Pin Function Output Value
Value When PDR6n
Was Read
0 P67 input pin ⎯ P67 pin
0
1 P67 output pin PDR67 PDR67
0 Hi-Z*1*2
0
1
1
RP7 output pin
PDRS67*2
PDR67
1 * 0 TMBI input pin ⎯ P67 pin
1 PDR67
Notes: 1. Hi-Z: High impedance
2. When PMR67 = 1 (realtime output pin), indicates the state after the PCR67 setup value
has been transferred to PCRS67 by a trigger input.
Section 10 I/O Port
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 223 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
P66/RP6/ADTRG: P66/RP6/ADTRG is switched as shown below according to the PMR66 bit in
PMR6 and PCR66 bit in PCR6. The ADTRG pin function switching is controlled by the ADTSR.
For details, refer to section 24, A/D converter.
PMR66 PCR66 Pin Function Output Value Value When PDR66 Was Read
0 P66 input pin ⎯ P66 pin
0
1 P66 output pin PDR66 PDR66
1 0 RP6 output pin Hi-Z*1*2 PDR66
1 PDRS66*2
Notes: 1. Hi-Z: High impedance
2. When PMR66 = 1 (realtime output pin), indicates the state after the PCR66 setup value
has been transferred to PCRS66 by a trigger input.
P65/RP5 to P60/RPD: P65/RP5 to P60/RPD are switched below according to the PMRAn bit in
PMRA, PMR6n bit in PMR6, and PCR6n bit in PCR6.
PMR6n PCR6n Pin Function Output Value Value When PDR6n Was Read
0 P6n input pin ⎯ P6n pin
0
1 P6n output pin PDR6n PDR6n
1 0 RPn output pin Hi-Z*1*2 PDR6n
1 RPn output pin PDRS6n*2
Notes: n = 5 to 0
1. Hi-Z: High impedance
2. When PMR6n = 1 (realtime output pin), indicates the state after the PCR6n setup value
has been transferred to PCRS6n by a trigger input.
Section 10 I/O Port
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 224 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
10.7.4 Operation
Port 6 can be used as a realtime output port or general I/O output port by PMR6. Port 6 functions
as a realtime output port when PMR6 = 1 and as a general I/O port when PMR6 = 0. The operation
per port 6 function is shown below. (See figure 10.2.)
P6/RP
RTPEGR write
Legend:
PMR6
PCR6
PDR6
PCRS6
PDRS6
RTPSR1
RTPEGR
HSW
RPTRG
: Port mode register 6
: Port control register 6
: Port data register 6
: Port control register slave 6
: Port data register slave 6
: Realtime output trigger select register
: Realtime output trigger edge select register
: Internal trigger signal
: External trigger pin
RTPSR write
RMR6 write
RDR6 write
RCR6 write
RDR6 read
RTPEGR
Selection
circuit
Selection
circuit
Internal data bus
External trigger
RPTRG
Internal trigger
HSW
CK
RTPSR1
CK
PMR6
CK
PDR6
CK
PCR6
CK
RDRS6
CK
PCRS6
CK
Figure 10.2 Port 6 Function Block Diagram
Section 10 I/O Port
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 225 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
• Operation of the Realtime Output Port (PMR6 = 1)
When PMR6 is 1, it operates as a realtime output port. When a trigger is input, the PDR6 data
is transferred to PDRS6 and the PCR6 is transferred data to PCRS6, respectively. In this case,
when PCRS6 is 1, the PDRS6 data of the corresponding bit is output to the RP pin. When
PCRS6 is 0, the RP pin of the corresponding bit is output to the high-impedance state. In other
words, the pin output state (high or low) or high-impedance state can instantaneously be
switched by a trigger input.
Adversely, when PDR6 is read, the PDR6 values are read regardless of the PCR6 and PCRS6
values.
• Operation of the general I/O port (PMR6 = 0)
When PMR6 is 0, it operates as a general I/O port. When data is written to PDR6, the same
data is also written to PDRS6. Accordingly, because both PDR6 and PDRS6 and both PCR6
and PCRS6 can be handled as one register, respectively, they can be used in the same way as a
normal general I/O port. In other words, if PCR6 is 1, the PDR6 data of the corresponding bit
is output to the P6 pin. If PCR6 is 0, the P6 pin of the corresponding bit becomes an input.
Adversely, assuming that PDR6 is read, the PDR6 values are read when PCR6 is 1 and the pin
values are read when PCR6 is 0.
10.7.5 Pin States
Table 10.19 shows the port 6 pin states in each operation mode.
Table 10.19 Port 6 Pin States
Pins Reset Active Sleep Standby Watch Subactive Subsleep
P67/RP7/TMBI
P66/RP6/ADTRG
P65/RP5
to
P60/RP0
High-
impedance
Operation Holding High-
impedance
High-
impedance
Operation Holding
Note: If the TMBI and ADTRG input pins are set, the pin level must be set to the high or low level
regardless of the active mode or low power consumption mode. Note that pin level must not
reach an intermediate level.
Section 10 I/O Port
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 226 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
10.8 Port 7
10.8.1 Overview
Port 7 is an 8-bit I/O port. Table 10.20 shows the port 7 configuration.
Port 7 consists of pins that are used both as standard I/O ports (P77 to P70), HSW timing
generation circuit (programmable pattern generator: PPG) outputs (PPG7 to PPG0), and realtime
output port (RPB to RP8). It is switched by port mode register 7 (PMR7) and port control register
7 (PCR7).
For the programmable generator (PPG), see section 26.4, HSW (Head-switch) Timing Generator.
Table 10.20 Port 7 Configuration
Port Function Alternative Function
Port 7 PPG7 (HSW timing output)
P77 (standard I/O port)
RPB (realtime output port)
PPG6 (HSW timing output)
P76 (standard I/O port)
RPA (realtime output port)
PPG5 (HSW timing output)
P75 (standard I/O port)
RP9 (realtime output port)
PPG4 (HSW timing output)
P74 (standard I/O port)
RP8 (realtime output port)
P73 (standard I/O port) PPG3 (HSW timing output)
P72 (standard I/O port) PPG2 (HSW timing output)
P71 (standard I/O port) PPG1 (HSW timing output)
P70 (standard I/O port) PPG0 (HSW timing output)
Section 10 I/O Port
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 227 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
10.8.2 Register Configuration
Table 10.21 shows the port 7 register configuration.
Table 10.21 Port 7 Register Configuration
Name Abbrev. R/W Size Initial Value Address*
Port mode register 7 PMR7 R/W Byte H'00 H'FFDE
Port mode register B PMRB R/W Byte H'0F H'FFDA
Port control register 7 PCR7 W Byte H'00 H'FFD7
Port data register 7 PDR7 R/W Byte H'00 H'FFC7
Realtime output trigger
select register 2
RTPSR2 R/W Byte H'0F H'FFE6
Realtime output trigger
edge select register
RTPEGR R/W Byte H'FC H'FFE4
Port control register slave 7 PCRS7 ⎯ Byte H'00 ⎯
Port data register slave 7 PDRS7 ⎯ Byte H'00 ⎯
Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address.
Port Mode Register 7 (PMR7)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
56
0
7
PMR74 PMR73 PMR72 PMR71 PMR70
0
R/W
PMR77
R/WR/WR/W
PMR76 PMR75
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Port mode register 7 (PMR7) controls switching of each pin function of port 7. The switching is
specified in a unit of bit.
PMR7 is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, PMR7 is initialized to H'00.
Bits 7 to 0⎯P77/PPG7 to P70/PPG0 Pin Switching (PMR77 to PMR70): PMR77 to PMR70
set whether the P7n/PPGn pin is used as a P7n I/O pin or a PPGn pin for the HSW timing
generation circuit output.
Bit n
PMR7n Description
0 The P7n/PPGn pin functions as a P7n I/O pin (Initial value)
1 The P7n/PPGn pin functions as a PPGn output pin
Note: n = 7 to 0
Section 10 I/O Port
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 228 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Port Mode Register B (PMRB)
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
———PMRB4
———R/W
00
R/W
5
0
7
0
R/W —R/W
6
—PMRB7 PMRB6 PMRB5
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Port mode register B (PMRB) controls switching of each pin function of port 7. The switching is
specified in a unit of bit.
PMRB is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, PMRB is initialized to H'0F.
Bits 7 to 4⎯P77/RPB to P74/RP8 Pin Switching (PMRB7 to PMRB4): P77/RPB to P74/RP8
set whether the P7n/RPm pin is used as a P7n I/O pin or a RPm pin for the realtime output port. (n
= 7 to 4 and m = B, A, 9, or 8)
Bit n
PMRBn Description
0 P7n/RPm pin functions as a P7n I/O pin (Initial value)
1 P7n/RPm pin functions as a RPm I/O pin
Note: n = 7 to 4 and m = B, A, 9, and 8
Bits 3 to 0⎯Reserved Bits: Reserved bits. When the bits are read, 1 is always read. The write
operation is invalid.
Port Control Register 7 (PCR7)
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
56
0
7
PCR74 PCR73 PCR72 PCR71 PCR70
0
W
PCR77
WWW
PCR76 PCR75
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Port control register 7, together with PMRB, enable the general-purpose input/output of port 7 and
controls realtime output in bit units.
For details, refer to section 10.8.4. Operation.
PCR7 is an 8-bit write-only register. When the PCR7 is read, 1 is always read. When reset, PCR7
is initialized to H'00.
Section 10 I/O Port
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 229 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bits 7 to 0⎯P77 to P70 Pin I/O Switching (PCR77 to PCR70)
PMRB PCR7
Bitn Bitn
PMRBn PCR7n Description
0 P7n/RPm pin functions as a P7n general input pin (Initial Value) 0
1 P7n/RPm pin functions as a P7n general output pin
1 * P7n/RPm pin functions as a RPm realtime output pin
Legend: * Don’t care
Note: n = 7 to 4 and m = B, A, 9, and 8
Port Data Register 7 (PDR7)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
56
0
7
PDR74 PDR73 PDR72 PDR71 PDR70
0
R/W
PDR77
R/WR/WR/W
PDR76 PDR75
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Port data register 7 (PDR7) stores the data for the pins P77 to P70 of port 7.
If PCR7 is 1 (output) when PMRB = 0, the PDR7 values are directly read when port 7 is read.
Accordingly, the pin states are not affected. When PCR7 is 0 (input), the pin states are read if port
7 is read. When PMRB = 1, port 7 pin functions as a realtime output pin. For details, refer to
section 10.8.4, Operation.
PDR7 is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, PDR7 is initialized to H'00.
Realtime Output Trigger Select Register 2 (RTPSR2)
0
1
1
1
—
2
1
—
3
1
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
56
0
7
RTPSR24 — — — —
0
R/W
RTPSR27
——R/W
RTPSR26 RTPSR25
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Realtime output trigger select register (RTPSR2) selects whether to use an external trigger
(RPTRG pin input) or internal trigger (HSW) for the realtime output trigger input by specifying a
unit of bit. For details on internal trigger HSW, refer to section 26.4, HSW (Head-switch) Timing
Generator.
RTPSR2 is an 8-bit read/write enable register.
When reset, RTPSR2 is initialized to H'0F.
Section 10 I/O Port
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 230 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bits 7 to 4⎯RPB to RP8 Pin Trigger Switching (RTPSR27 to RTPSR24)
Bit7
RTPSR2n Description
0 Selects external trigger (RPTRG pin input) for trigger input (Initial value)
1 Selects internal trigger (HSW) for trigger input
Note: n = 7 to 4
Realtime Output Trigger Edge Selection Register (RTPEGR)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
1
3
1
4
11
56
1
7
——————
——————
RTPEGR1 RTPEGR0
1
R/W
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The realtime output trigger edge selection register (RTPEGR) specifies the sensed edge(s) of
external or internal trigger input for realtime output.
RTPEGR is an 8-bit readable/writable register. In a reset, RTPEGR is initialized to H'FC.
Bits 7 to 2⎯Reserved: These bits are always read as 1 and cannot be modified.
Bits 1 and 0⎯Realtime Output Trigger Edge Select (RTPEGR1, RTPEGR0): These bits
select the sensed edge(s) of external or internal trigger input for realtime output.
Bit 1 Bit 0
RTPEGR1 RTPEGR0 Description
0 Disables trigger input (Initial value) 0
1 Selects trigger input rising edge
1 0 Selects trigger input falling edge
1 Selects trigger input rising and falling edges
Section 10 I/O Port
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 231 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
10.8.3 Pin Functions
This section describes the port 7 pin functions and their selection methods.
P77/PPG7/RPB to P74/PPG4/RP8: P77/PPG7/RPB to P74/PPG4/RP8 are switched as shown
below according to the PMRBn bit in PMRB and the PCR7n bit in PCR7.
PMRBn
PMR7n
PCR7n
Pin Function
Output Value
Value Returned when
PDR7n is Read
0 P7n input pin ⎯ P7n pin 0 0
1 P7n output pin PDR7n PDR7n
0 P7n pin 0 1
1
PPGn output pin PPGn
PDR7n
1 * 0 RPm output pin Hi-Z*1 PDR7n
1 PDRS7n*1
Legend:
Hi-Z: High impedance
* Don’t care
Notes: n = 7 to 4, m = B, A, 9, 8
1. When PMRBn = 1 (realtime output pin), the state indicated is that after the PCR7n set
value has been transferred to PCRS7n by trigger input.
P73/PPG3 to P70/PPG0: P73/PPG3 to P70/PPG0 are switched as shown below according to the
PMR7n bit in PMR7 and the PCR7n bit in PCR7.
PMR7n
PCR7n
Pin Function
Output Value
Value Returned when PDR7n
Is Read
0 P7n input pin ⎯ P7n pin
0
1 P7n output pin PDR7n PDR7n
1 0 PPGn output pin PPGn P7n pin
1 PDR7n
Note: n = 3 to 0
Section 10 I/O Port
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 232 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
10.8.4 Operation
Port 7 can be used by the PMRB as a realtime output port or an I/O port.
Port 7 functions as a realtime output port when PMRB = 1 and functions as an I/O port when
PMRB = 0. Figure 10.3 show the block diagram of port 7.
P7/RP
RTPEGR write
RTPSR2 write
PMRA write
PDR7 write
PCR7 write
PDR7 read
RTPEGR
Select
Select
External trigger
RPTRG
Internal
trigger HSW
CK
RTPSR2
CK
PMRB: Port mode register B
PCR7: Port control register 7
PDR7: Port data register 7
PCRS7: Port control register slave 7
PDRS7: Port data register slave 7
Legend:
RTPSR2: Realtime output trigger select register
RTPEGR: Realtime output trigger edge select register
HSW: Internal trigger signal
RPTRG: External trigger pin
Internal data bus
PMRB
CK
PDR7
CK
PCR7
CK
PDRS7
CK
PCRS7
CK
Figure 10.3 Block Diagram of Port 7
Section 10 I/O Port
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 233 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Port 7 functions as follows:
1. Realtime output port function (PMRB = 1)
Port function as a realtime output port when PMRB is 1. After a trigger input, the PDR7 data is
transferred to PDRS7 and PCR7 data is transferred to PCRS7. In this case, when PCRS7 is 1,
the PDRS7 data of the corresponding bit is output from the RP pin. When PCRS7 is 0, the RP
pin of the corresponding bit enters high-impedance state. In other words, the realtime output
port function can instantaneously switch the pin output state (High or Low) or high-impedance
by a trigger input.
2. I/O port function (PMRB = 0)
Port 7 functions as an I/O port when PMRB is 0. After data is written to PDR7, the same data
is written to PDRS7. After data is written to PCR7, the same data is written to PCRS7. Since
PDR7 and PDRS7, and PCR7 and PCRS7 can be used as one register, the registers can be used
as the I/O ports. In other words, if PCR7 is 1, the PDR7 data of the corresponding bit is output
from the P7 pin. If PCR is 0, the P7 pin of the corresponding bit is an input pin. If PD7 is read,
the PDR7 value is read when PCR7 is 1 and the pin value is read when PCR7 is 0.
10.8.5 Pin States
Table 10.22 shows the port 7 pin states in each operation mode.
Table 10.22 Port 6 Pin States
Pins Reset Active Sleep Standby Watch Subactive Subsleep
P77/PPG7/RPB
to
P74/PPG4/RP8
P73/PPG3
to
P70/PPG0
High-
impedance
Operation Holding High-
impedance
High-
impedance
Operation Holding
Section 10 I/O Port
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 234 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
10.9 Port 8
10.9.1 Overview
Port 8 is an 8-bit I/O port. Table 10.23 shows the port 8 configuration.
Port 8 consists of pins that are used both as standard-current I/O ports (P87 to P80) and an external
CTL signal input (EXCTL), a pre-amplifier output result signal input (COMP), color signal
outputs (R, G, and B), a pre-amplifier output selection signal output (H.Amp SW), a control signal
output for processing color signal (C.Rotary), a DPG signal input (DPG), a capstan external sync
signal input (EXCAP), an OSD character display position output (YB0), an OSD character data
output (YC0), and an external reference signal input (EXTTRG). It is switched by port mode
register 8 (PMR8), port mode register C (PMRC), and port control register 8 (PCR8).
Table 10.23 Port 8 Configuration
Port Function Alternative Function
Port 8 P87 (standard I/O port) DPG signal input
P86 (standard I/O port) External reference signal input
Pre-amplifier output result signal input
P85 (standard I/O port)
Color signal output
Pre-amplifier output selection signal output
P84 (standard I/O port)
Color signal output
Control signal output for processing color signal
P83 (standard I/O port)
Color signal output
P82 (standard I/O port) External CTL signal input
Capstan external sync signal input
P81 (standard I/O port)
OSD character display position output
P80 (standard I/O port) OSD character data output
Section 10 I/O Port
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 235 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
10.9.2 Register Configuration
Table 10.24 shows the port 8 register configuration.
Table 10.24 Port 8 Register Configuration
Name Abbrev. R/W Size Initial Value Address*
Port mode register 8 PMR8 R/W Byte H'00 H'FFDF
Port mode register C PMRC R/W Byte H'C5 H'FFE0
Port control register 8 PCR8 W Byte H'00 H'FFD8
Port data register 8 PDR8 R/W Byte H'00 H'FFC8
Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address.
Port Mode Register 8 (PMR8)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
00
56
0
7
PMR84PMR85PMR86PMR87
R/WR/WR/WR/W
PMR83 PMR82 PMR81 PMR80
0
R/WR/W
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Port mode register 8 (PMR8) controls switching of each pin function of port 8. The switching is
specified in a unit of bit.
PMR8 is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, PMR8 is initialized to H'00.
If the EXCTL, COMP, DPG and EXTTRG input pins are set, the pin level need always be set to
the high or low level regardless of the active mode and low power consumption mode. Note that
the pin level must not reach an intermediate level.
Bit 7⎯P87/DPG Pin Switching (PMR87): PMR87 sets whether the P87/DPG pin is used as a
P87 I/O pin or a DPG signal input pin.
Bit 7
PMR87 Description
0 P87/DPG pin functions as a P87 I/O pin
(Drum control signals are input as an overlapped signal) (Initial value)
1 P87/DPG pin functions as a DPG input pin
(Drum control signals are input as separate signals)
Section 10 I/O Port
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 236 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 6⎯P86/EXTTRG Pin Switching (PMR86): PMR86 sets whether the P86/EXTTRG pin is
used as a P86 I/O pin or an external trigger signal input pin.
Bit 6
PMR86 Description
0 P86/EXTTRG pin functions as a P86 I/O pin (Initial value)
1 P86/EXTTRG pin functions as a EXTTRG input pin
Bit 5⎯P85/COMP Pin Switching (PMR85): PMR85 sets whether the P85/COMP pin is used as
a P85 I/O pin or a COMP input pin of the preamplifier output result signal.
Bit 5
PMR85 Description
0 P85/COMP pin functions as a P85 I/O pin (Initial value)
1 P85/COMP pin functions as a COMP input pin
Bit 4⎯P84/H.Amp SW Pin Switching (PMR84): PMR84 sets whether the P84/H.Amp SW pin
is used as a P84 I/O pin or H.Amp SW pin of the preamplifier output select signal output.
Bit 4
PMR84 Description
0 P84/H.Amp SW pin functions as a P84 I/O pin (Initial value)
1 P84/H.Amp SW pin functions as a H.Amp SW output pin
Bit 3⎯P83/C. Rotary Pin Switching (PMR83): PMR83 sets whether the P83/C. Rotary pin is
used as a P83 I/O pin or a C.Rotary pin of a control signal output for processing color signal.
Bit 3
PMR83 Description
0 P83/C.Rotary pin functions as a P83 I/O pin (Initial value)
1 P83/C.Rotary pin functions as a C.Rotary output pin
Section 10 I/O Port
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 237 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 2⎯P82/EXCTL Pin Switching (PMR82): PMR82 sets whether the P82/EXCTL pin
functions as a P82 I/O pin or a EXCTL input pin of external CTL signal input.
Bit 2
PMR82 Description
0 P82/EXCTL pin functions as a P82 I/O pin (Initial value)
1 P82/EXCTL pin functions as a EXCTL input pin
Bit 1⎯P81/EXCAP Pin Switching (PMR81): PMR81 sets whether the P81/EXCAP pin
functions as a P81 I/O pin or a EXCAP pin of capstan external synchronous signal input.
Bit 1
PMR81 Description
0 P81/EXCAP pin functions as a P81 I/O pin (Initial value)
1 P81/EXCAP pin functions as a EXCAP input pin
Bit 0⎯P80/YCO Pin Switching (PMR80): PMR80 sets whether the P80/YCO pin functions as a
P80 I/O pin or a YCO pin of OSD character data output.
Bit 0
PMR80 Description
0 P80/YCO pin functions as a P80 I/O pin (Initial value)
1 P80/YCO pin functions as a YCO output pin
Port Mode Register C (PMRC)
0
1
1
0
R/W
2
1
—
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
56
1
7
PMRC4 PMRC3 — PMRC1 —
1
—
—
—R/W—
— PMRC5
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Port mode register C (PMRC) controls switching of each pin function of port 8. The switching is
specified in a unit of a bit.
PMRC is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, PMRC is initialized to H'C5.
Bits 7, 6, 2, and 0⎯Reserved Bits: Reserved bits. When the bits are read, 1 is always read. The
write operation is invalid.
Section 10 I/O Port
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 238 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 5⎯P85/B Pin Switching (PMRC5): PMRC5 sets whether to use the P85/B pin as a P85 I/O
pin or a B pin of the OSD color signal output.
Bit 5
PMRC5 Description
0 P85/B pin functions as a P85 pin (Initial value)
1 P85/B pin functions as a B output pin
Bit 4⎯P84/G Pin Switching (PMRC4): PMRC4 sets whether to use the P84/G pin as a P84 I/O
pin or a G pin of the OSD color signal output.
Bit 4
PMRC4 Description
0 P84/G pin functions as a P84 I/O pin (Initial value)
1 P84/G pin functions as a G output pin
Bit 3⎯P83/R Pin Switching (PMRC3): PMRC3 sets whether to use the P83/R pin as a P83 I/O
pin or a R pin of the OSD color signal output.
Bit 3
PMRC3 Description
0 P83/R pin functions as a P83 I/O pin (Initial value)
1 P83/R pin functions as a R output pin
Bit 1⎯P81/YBO Pin Switching (PMRC1): PMRC1 sets whether to use the P81/YBO pin as a
P81 I/O pin or a YBO pin of the OSD character display position output.
Bit7
PMR1 Description
0 P81/YBO pin functions as a P81 I/O pin (Initial value)
1 P81/YBO pin functions as a YBO output pin
Section 10 I/O Port
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 239 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Port Control Register 8 (PCR8)
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
56
0
7
PCR84 PCR83 PCR82 PCR81 PCR80
0
W
PCR87
WWW
PCR86 PCR85
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Port control register 8 (PCR8) controls I/O of pins P87 to P80 of port 8. The I/O is specified in a
unit of bit.
When PCR8 is set to 1, the corresponding P87 to P80 pins become output pins, and when it is set
to 0, they become input pins.
When the pins are set as general I/O pins, the settings of PCR8 and PDR8 become valid.
PCR8 is an 8-bit write-only register. When PCR8 is read, 1 is read. When reset PCR8 is initialized
to H'00.
Bits 7 to 0⎯P87 to P80 Pin I/O Switching
Bit n
PCR8n Description
0 P8n pin functions as an input pin (Initial value)
1 P8n pin functions as an output pin
Note: n = 7 to 0
Port Data Register 8 (PDR8)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
56
0
7
PDR84 PDR83 PDR82 PDR81 PDR80
0
R/W
PDR87
R/WR/WR/W
PDR86 PDR85
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Port data register 8 (PDR8) stores the data of pins P87 to P80 port 8. When PCR is 1 (output), the
pin states are read is port 8 is read. Accordingly, the pin states are not affected. When PCR8 is 0
(input), the pin states are read it port 8 is read.
PDR8 is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, PDR8 is initialized to H'00.
Section 10 I/O Port
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 240 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
10.9.3 Pin Functions
This section describes the port 8 pin functions and their selection methods.
P87/DPG: P87/DPG is switched as shown below according to the PMR87 bit in PMR8 and
PCR87 bit in PCR8.
PMR87 PCR87 Pin Function
0 P87 input pin
0
1 P87 output pin
1 * DPG input pin
Legend: * Don’t care
P86/EXTTRG: P86/EXTTRG is switched as shown below according to the PMR86 bit in PMR8
and PCR86 bit in PCR8.
PMR86 PCR86 Pin Function
0 P86 input pin
0
1 P86 output pin
1 * EXTTRG input pin
Legend: * Don’t care
P85/COMP/B: P85/COMP/B is switched as shown below according to the PMR85 bit in PMR8,
PMRC5 bit in PMRC, and PCR85 bit in PCR8.
PMRC5 PMR85 PCR85 Pin Function
0 P85 input pin
0 0
1 P85 output pin
* 1 * COMP input pin
1 0 * B output pin
Legend: * Don’t care
Section 10 I/O Port
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 241 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
P84/H.Amp SW/G: P84/H.Amp SW/G is switched as shown below according to the PMR84 bit
in PMR8, PMRC4 bit in PMRC, and PCR84 bit in PCR8.
PMRC4 PMR84 PCR84 Pin Function
0 P84 input pin
0 0
1 P84 output pin
* 1 * H.Amp SW output pin
1 0 * G output pin
Legend: * Don’t care
P83/C.Rotary/R: P83/C.Rotary/R is switched as shown below according to the PMR83bit in
PMR8, PMRC3 bit in PMRC, and PCR83 bit in PCR8.
PMRC3 PMR83 PCR83 Pin Function
0 P83 input pin
0 0
1 P83 output pin
* 1 * C.Rotary output pin
1 0 * R output pin
Legend: * Don’t care
P82/EXCTL: P82/EXCTL is switched as shown below according to the PMR82 bit in PMR8 and
PCR82 bit in PCR8.
PMR82 PCR82 Pin Function
0 P82 input pin
0
1 P82 output pin
1 * EXCTL input pin
Legend: * Don’t care
Section 10 I/O Port
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 242 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
P81/EXCAP/YBO: P81/EXCAP/YBO is switched as shown below according to the PMR81 bit
in PMR8, PMRC1 bit in PMRC, and PCR81 bit in PCR8.
PMRC1 PMR81 PCR81 Pin Function
0 P81 input pin
0 0
1 P81 output pin
* 1 * EXCAP output pin
1 0 * YBO output pin
Legend: * Don’t care
P80/YCO: P80/YCO is switched as shown below according to the PMR80 bit in PMR8 and
PCR80 bit in PCR
PMR80 PCR80 Pin Function
0 P80 input pin
0
1 P80 output pin
1 * YCO output pin
Legend: * Don’t care
10.9.4 Pin States
Table 10.25 shows the port 8 pin states in each operation mode.
Table 10.25 Port 8 Pin States
Pins Reset Active Sleep Standby Watch Subactive Subsleep
P87/DPG
P86/EXTTRG
P85/COMP/B
P84/H.Amp SW/G
P83/C.Rotary/R
P82/EXCTL
P81/EXCAP/YB0
P80/YCO
High-
impedance
Operation Holding High-
impedance
High-
impedance
Operation Holding
Notes: 1. If the EXCTL, COMP, DPG, and EXTTRG input pins are set, the pin level need always
be set to the high or low level regardless of the active mode and low power
consumption mode. Note that the pin level must not reach an intermediate level.
2. As the DPG always functions, a high or low pin level must be input to the multiplexed
pins regardless of whether active mode or power-down mode is in effect.
Section 11 Timer A
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 243 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Section 11 Timer A
11.1 Overview
Timer A is an 8-bit interval timer. It can be used as a clock timer when connected to a 32.768-kHz
crystal oscillator.
11.1.1 Features
Features of timer A are as follows:
• Choices of eight different types of internal clocks (φ/16384, φ/8192, φ/4096, φ/1024, φ/512,
φ/256, φ/64 and φ/16) are available for your selection.
• Four different overflowing cycles (1 s, 0.5 s, 0.25 s, and 0.03125 s) are selectable as a clock
timer. (When using a 32.768-kHz crystal oscillator.)
• Requests for interrupt will be output when the counter overflows.
Section 11 Timer A
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 244 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
11.1.2 Block Diagram
Figure 11.1 shows a block diagram of timer A.
Legend:
TMA
32-kHz
Crystal oscillator
Overflowing of
the interval
timer
System
clock
φw
φw/128
φ/16384, φ/8192,
φ/4096, φ/1024,
φ/512, φ/256,
φ/64, φ/16
φ
TCA
: Timer mode register A
: Timer counter A
Note: * Selectable only when the prescaler W output (φw/128) is working as the input clock to the TCA.
Prescaler S
(PSS) Interrupting
circuit
Prescaler unit
Prescaler W
(PSW)
TCA
1/4
TMA
Interrupt
requests
Internal data bus
÷8*
÷64*
÷128*
÷256*
Figure 11.1 Block Diagram of Timer A
11.1.3 Register Configuration
Table 11.1 shows the register configuration of timer A.
Table 11.1 Register Configuration
Name Abbrev. R/W Size Initial Value Address*
Timer mode register A TMA R/W Byte H'30 H'FFBA
Timer counter A TCA R Byte H'00 H'FFBB
Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address.
Section 11 Timer A
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 245 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
11.2 Register Descriptions
11.2.1 Timer Mode Register A (TMA)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
1
5
——
——
1
6
0
7
R/WR/WR/W
TMAIE
0
R/(W)*
TMAOV TMA3 TMA2 TMA1 TMA0
Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The timer mode register A (TMA) works to control the interrupts of timer A and to select the input
clock.
TMA is an 8-bit read/write register. When reset, the TMA will be initialized to H'30.
Bit 7⎯Timer A Overflow Flag (TMAOV): This is a status flag indicating the fact that the TCA
is overflowing (H'FF → H'00).
Bit 7
TMAOV Description
0 [Clearing condition] (Initial value)
When 0 is written to the TMAOV flag after reading the TMAOV flag under the status
where TMAOV = 1
1 [Setting condition]
When the TCA overflows
Bit 6⎯Enabling Interrupt of the Timer A (TMAIE): This bit works to permit/prohibit
occurrence of interrupt of the Timer A (TMAI) when the TCA overflows and when the TMAOV
of the TMA is set to 1.
Bit 6
TMAIE Description
0 Prohibits occurrence of interrupt of the Timer A (TMAI) (Initial value)
1 Permits occurrence of interrupt of the Timer A (TMAI)
Bits 5 and 4⎯Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
Section 11 Timer A
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 246 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 3⎯Selection of the Clock Source and Prescaler (TMA3): This bit works to select the PSS
or PSW as the clock source for the Timer A.
Bit 3
TMA3 Description
0 Selects the PSS as the clock source for the Timer A (Initial value)
1 Selects the PSW as the clock source for the Timer A
Bits 2 to 0⎯Clock Selection (TMA2 to TMA0): These bits work to select the clock to input to
the TCA. In combination with the TMA3 bit, the choices are as follows:
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
TMA3 TMA2 TMA1 TMA0
Prescaler Division Ratio (Interval Timer)
or Overflow Cycle (Time Base)
Operation
Mode
0 PSS, φ/16384 (Initial value) 0
1 PSS, φ/8192
0 PSS, φ/4096
0
1
1 PSS, φ/1024
0 PSS, φ/512 0
1 PSS, φ/256
0 PSS, φ/64
0
1
1
1 PSS, φ/16
Interval
timer mode
0 1 s 0
1 0.5 s
0 0.25 s
0
1
1 0.03125 s
0 0
1
0
1
1
1
1
Works to clear the PSW and TCA to H'00
Clock time
base mode
Note: φ = f osc
Section 11 Timer A
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 247 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
11.2.2 Timer Counter A (TCA)
0
0
1
0
R
2
0
R
3
0
4567
RR
TCA3
0
R
TCA4
0
R
TCA5
0
R
TCA6
0
R
TCA7 TCA2 TCA1 TCA0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The timer counter A (TCA) is an 8-bit up-counter that counts up on inputs from the internal clock.
The inputting clock can be selected by TMA3 to TMA0 bits of the TMA
When the TCA overflows, the TMAOV bit of the TMA is set to 1.
The TCA can be cleared by setting the TMA3 and TMA2 bits of the TMA to 11.
The TCA is always readable. When reset, the TCA will be initialized into H'00.
11.2.3 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR)
7
1
MSTP15
R/W
MSTPCRH
6
1
MSTP14
R/W
5
1
MSTP13
R/W
4
1
MSTP12
R/W
3
1
MSTP11
R/W
2
1
MSTP10
R/W
1
1
MSTP9
R/W
0
1
MSTP8
R/W
7
1
MSTP7
R/W
6
1
MSTP6
R/W
5
1
MSTP5
R/W
4
1
MSTP4
R/W
3
1
MSTP3
R/W
2
1
MSTP2
R/W
1
1
MSTP1
R/W
0
1
MSTP0
R/W
MSTPCRL
Initial value :
R/W :
Bit :
The MSTPCR are 8-bit read/write twin registers which work to control the module stop mode.
When the MSTP15 bit is set to 1, the Timer A stops its operation at the ending point of the bus
cycle to shift to the module stop mode. For more information, see section 4.5, Module Stop Mode.
When reset, the MSTPCR will be initialized into H'FFFF.
Bit 7⎯Module Stop (MSTP15): This bit works to designate the module stop mode for the Timer
A.
MSTPCRH
Bit 7
MSTP15 Description
0 Cancels the module stop mode of the Timer A
1 Sets the module stop mode of the Timer A (Initial value)
Section 11 Timer A
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 248 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
11.3 Operation
Timer A is an 8-bit interval timer. It can be used as a clock timer when connected to a 32.768-kHz
crystal oscillator.
11.3.1 Operation as the Interval Timer
When the TMA3 bit of the TMA is cleared to 0, timer A works as an 8-bit interval timer.
After reset, the TCA is cleared to H'00 and as the TMA3 bit is cleared to 0, the Timer A continues
counting up as the interval counter without interrupts right after resetting.
As the operation clock for timer A, selection can be made from eight different types of internal
clocks being output from the PSS by the TMA2 to TMA0 bits of the TMA.
When the clock signal is input after the reading of the TCA reaches H'FF, timer A overflows and
the TMAOV bit of the TMA will be set to 1. An interrupt occurs when the TMAIE bit of the TMA
is 1.
When overflowing occurs, the reading of the TCA returns to H'00 before resuming counting up.
Consequently, it works as the interval timer to produce overflow outputs periodically at every 256
input clocks.
11.3.2 Operation as Clock Timer
When the TMA3 bit of the TMA is set to 1, timer A works as a time base for the clock.
As the overflow cycles for timer A, selection can be made from four different types by counting
the clock being output from the PSW by the TMA1 bit and TMA0 bit of the TMA.
11.3.3 Initializing the Counts
When the TMA3 and TMA2 bits are set to 11, the PSW and TCA will be cleared to H'00 to come
to a stop.
At this state, writing 10 to the TMA3 bit and TMA2 bit makes timer A start counting from H'00 in
the time base mode for clocks.
After clearing the PSW and TCA using the TMA3 and TMA2 bits, writing 00 or 01 to the TMA3
bit and TMA2 bit to make timer A start counting from H'00 in the interval timer mode. However,
the period to the first count is not constant, since the PSS is not cleared.
Section 12 Timer B
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 249 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Section 12 Timer B
12.1 Overview
Timer B is an 8-bit up-counter. Timer B is equipped with two different types of functions namely,
the interval function and the auto reloading function.
12.1.1 Features
• Seven different types of internal clocks (φ/16384, φ/4096, φ/1024, φ/512, φ/128, φ/32, and φ/8)
or an of external clock can be selected.
• When the counter overflows, a interrupt request will be issued.
12.1.2 Block Diagram
Figure 12.1 shows a block diagram of timer B.
Legend:
TMB
φ/16384
φ/4096
φ/1024
φ/512
φ/128
φ/32
φ/8
TMBI
TCB
: Timer mode register B
: Timer counter B
TLB
TMBI
: Timer re-loading register B
: Event input terminal of the Timer B
Re-loading
Clock sources
Overflowing
Timer B
Interrupt requests
Internal data bus
TCB
TMB
TLB
Interrupting
circuit
Figure 12.1 Block Diagram of Timer B
Section 12 Timer B
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 250 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
12.1.3 Pin Configuration
Table 12.1 shows the pin configuration of timer B.
Table 12.1 Pin Configuration
Name Abbrev. I/O Function
Event inputs to timer B TMBI Input Event input pin for inputs to the TCB
12.1.4 Register Configuration
Table 12.2 shows the register configuration of timer B.
The TCB and TLB are being allocated to the same address. Reading or writing determines the
accessing register.
Table 12.2 Register Configuration
Name Abbrev. R/W Size Initial Value Address*
Timer mode register B TMB R/W Byte H'18 H'D110
Timer counter B TCB R Byte H'00 H'D111
Timer load register B TLB W Byte H'00 H'D111
Port mode register A PMRA R/W Byte H'3F H'FFD9
Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address.
Section 12 Timer B
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 251 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
12.2 Register Descriptions
12.2.1 Timer Mode Register B (TMB)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
1
4
——
——
1
5
0
6
0
7
R/WR/W
TMBIE
R/(W)*
TMBIF
0
R/W
TMB17 TMB12 TMB11 TMB10
Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The TMB is an 8-bit read/write register which works to control the interrupts, to select the auto
reloading function and to select the input clock.
When reset, the TMB is initialized to H'18.
Bit 7⎯Selecting the Auto Reloading Function (TMB17): This bit works to select the auto
reloading function of the Timer B.
Bit 7
TMB17 Description
0 Selects the interval function (Initial value)
1 Selects the auto reloading function
Bit 6⎯Interrupt Requesting Flag for the Timer B (TMBIF): This is an interrupt requesting
flag for the Timer B. It indicates the fact that the TCB is overflowing.
Bit 6
TMBIF Description
0 [Clearing condition] (Initial value)
When 0 is written after reading 1
1 [Setting condition]
When the TCB overflows
Section 12 Timer B
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 252 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 5⎯Enabling Interrupt of the Timer B (TMBIE): This bit works to permit/prohibit
occurrence of interrupt of timer B when the TCB overflows and when the TMBIF is set to 1.
Bit 5
TMBIE Description
0 Prohibits interrupt of timer B (Initial value)
1 Permits interrupt of timer B
Bits 4 and 3⎯Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
Bits 2 to 0⎯Clock Selection (TMB12 to TMB10): These bits work to select the clock to input to
the TCB. Selection of the rising edge or the falling edge is workable with the external event
inputs.
Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
TMB12 TMB11 TMB10 Descriptions
0 0 0 Internal clock: Counts at φ/16384 (Initial value)
0 0 1 Internal clock: Counts at φ/4096
0 1 0 Internal clock: Counts at φ/1024
0 1 1 Internal clock: Counts at φ/512
1 0 0 Internal clock: Counts at φ/128
1 0 1 Internal clock: Counts at φ/32
1 1 0 Internal clock: Counts at φ/8
1 1 1 Counts at the rising edge and the falling edge of external
event inputs (TMBI)*
Note: * The edge selection for the external event inputs is made by setting the PMRA6 of the
port mode register A (PMRA). See section 12.2.4, Port Mode Register A (PMRA).
Section 12 Timer B
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 253 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
12.2.2 Timer Counter B (TCB)
0
0
1
0
R
2
0
R
345
0
6
0
7
RR
TCB15
0
R
TCB14
0
R
TCB13
R
TCB16
0
R
TCB17 TCB12 TCB11 TCB10
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The TCB is an 8-bit readable register which works to count up by the internal clock inputs and
external event inputs. The input clock can be selected by the TMB12 to TMB10 of the TMB.
When the TCB overflows (H'FF → H'00 or H'FF → TLB setting), a interrupt request of the Timer
B will be issued.
When reset, the TCB is initialized to H'00.
12.2.3 Timer Load Register B (TLB)
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
345
0
6
0
7
WW
TLB15
0
W
TLB14
0
W
TLB13
W
TLB16
0
W
TLB17 TLB12 TLB11 TLB10
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The TLB is an 8-bit write only register which works to set the reloading value of the TCB.
When the reloading value is set to the TLB, the value will be simultaneously loaded to the TCB
and the TCB starts counting up from the set value. Also, during an auto reloading operation, when
the TCB overflows, the value of the TLB will be loaded to the TCB. Consequently, the
overflowing cycle can be set within the range of 1 to 256 input clocks.
When reset, the TLB is initialized to H'00.
Section 12 Timer B
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 254 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
12.2.4 Port Mode Register A (PMRA)
01
1
—
2
1
—
34
1
567
——PMRA6PMRA7
—
—
——R/WR/W
—
1
—
——
1100
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The port mode register A (PMRA) works to changeover the pin functions of the port 6 and to
designate the edge sense of the event inputs of timer B (TMBI).
The PMRA is an 8-bit read/write register. When reset, the PMRA will be initialized to H'3F.
See section 10.7, Port 6 for other information than bit 6.
Bit 6⎯Selecting the Edges of the Event Inputs to the Timer B (PMRA6): This bit works to
select the input edge sense of the TMBI pins.
Bit 6
PMRA6 Description
0 Detects the falling edge of the event inputs to the Timer B (Initial value)
1 Detects the rising edge of the event inputs to the Timer B
Section 12 Timer B
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 255 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
12.2.5 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR)
7
1
MSTP15
R/W
MSTPCRH
6
1
MSTP14
R/W
5
1
MSTP13
R/W
4
1
MSTP12
R/W
3
1
MSTP11
R/W
2
1
MSTP10
R/W
1
1
MSTP9
R/W
0
1
MSTP8
R/W
7
1
MSTP7
R/W
6
1
MSTP6
R/W
5
1
MSTP5
R/W
4
1
MSTP4
R/W
3
1
MSTP3
R/W
2
1
MSTP2
R/W
1
1
MSTP1
R/W
0
1
MSTP0
R/W
MSTPCRL
Initial value :
R/W :
Bit :
The MSTPCR are 8-bit read/write twin registers which work to control the module stop mode.
When the MSTP14 bit is set to 1, the Timer B stops its operation at the ending point of the bus
cycle to shift to the module stop mode. For more information, see section 4.5, Module stop mode.
When reset, the MSTPCR is initialized to H'FFFF.
Bit 6⎯Module Stop (MSTP14): This bit works to designate the module stop mode for the Timer
B.
MSTPCRH
Bit 6
MSTP14 Description
0 Cancels the module stop mode of the Timer B
1 Sets the module stop mode of the Timer B (Initial value)
Section 12 Timer B
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 256 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
12.3 Operation
12.3.1 Operation as the Interval Timer
When the TMB17 bit of the TMB is set to 0, timer B works as an 8-bit interval timer.
When reset, since the TCB is cleared to H'00 and as the TMB17 bit is cleared to 0, timer B
continues counting up as the interval timer without interrupts right after resetting.
As the clock source for timer B, selection can be made from seven different types of internal
clocks being output from the prescaler unit by the TMB12 to TMB10 bits of the TMB or an
external clock through the TMBI input pin can be chosen instead.
When the clock signal is input after the reading of the TCB reaches H'FF, timer B overflows and
the TMBIF bit of the TMB will be set to 1. At this time, when the TMBIE bit of the TMB is 1,
interrupt occurs.
When overflowing occurs, the reading of the TCB returns to H'00 before resuming counting up.
When a value is set to the TLB while the interval timer is in operation, the value which has been
set to the TLB will be loaded to the TCB simultaneously.
12.3.2 Operation as the Auto Reload Timer
When the TMB17 of the TMB is set to 1, the Timer B works as an 8-bit auto reload timer.
When a reload value is set in the TLB, the value is loaded onto the TCB at the same time, and the
TCB starts counting up from the value.
When the clock signal is input after the reading of the TCB reaches H'FF, timer B overflows and
the TLB value is loaded onto the TCB, then the TCB continues counting up from the loaded value.
Accordingly, overflow interval can be set within the range of 1 to 256 clocks depending on the
TLB value.
Clock source and interrupts in the auto reload operation are the same as those in the interval
operation. When the TLB value is re-set while the auto reload timer is in operation, the value
which has been set to the TLB will be loaded onto the TCB simultaneously.
12.3.3 Event Counter
Timer B works as an event counter using the TMBI pin as the event input pin. When the TMB12
to TMB10 are set to 111, the external event will be selected as the clock source and the TCB
counts up at the leading edge or the trailing edge of the TMBI pin inputs.
Section 13 Timer J
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 257 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Section 13 Timer J
13.1 Overview
Timer J consists of twin counters. It carries different operation modes such as reloading and event
counting.
13.1.1 Features
Timer J consists of an 8-bit reloading timer and an 8-bit/16-bit selectable reloading timer. It has
various functions as listed below. The two timers can be used separately, or they can be connected
together to operate as a single timer.
• Reloading timers
• Event counters
• Remote-controlled transmissions
• Takeup/Supply reel pulse division
13.1.2 Block Diagram
Figure 13.1 is a block diagram of timer J. Timer J consists of two reload timers namely, TMJ-1
and TMJ-2.
Section 13 Timer J
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 258 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Legend:
TCJ
Note: * At the Low level under the timer mode.
TLJ
: Timer counter J
: Timer load register J
TCK
TLK
: Timer counter K
: Timer load register K
TMO
REMOout
: TMJ-1 timer output
: TMJ-2 toggle output
(Remote controller
transmission data)
BUZZ
Reloading register
(Burst/space
width register
PS22, 21,20
EXN
: Buzzer output
TGL : TMJ-2 toggle flag
PS22, 21,20
ST
: TMJ-2 input clock selection
: Starting the remote controlled operation
PS11,10 : TMJ-1 input clock selection
8/16
T/R
EXN
: 8-bit/16-bit operation changeover
: Timer output/Remote controller output changeover
: Expansion function switching
Internal data bus
Edge
detection
Toggle
T/R
Down-counter
(8/16-bit)
BUZZ
Output
Control
Monitor
Output
Control
Toggle
Reloading
register
8/16
ST
PS11,10
Down-
counter (8-bit)
Under
flow
Under-
flow
TCJ
TMJ-1 TMJ-2
TCK
PB/REC-CTL
DVCTL
TCA7
φ/4096
φ/8192
TGL
REMOout
TMO
TMO
BUZZ
Clock sources
IRQ2
φ/64
φ/128
φ/1024
φ/2048
φ/16384
Clock sources
IRQ1
φ/4
φ/256
φ/512
*
Synchronization
TLJ
Reloading
Reloading
TLK
TMJ-1
Interrupting circuit
Interrupt request
by the TMJ1I
Interrupt request
by the TMJ2I
TMJ-2
Interrupting circuit
Figure 13.1 Block Diagram of Timer J
Section 13 Timer J
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 259 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
13.1.3 Pin Configuration
Table 13.1 shows the pin configuration of timer J.
Table 13.1 Pin Configuration
Name Abbrev. I/O Function
Event input pin IRQ1 Input Event inputs to the TMJ-1
Event input pin IRQ2 Input Event inputs to the TMJ-2
13.1.4 Register Configuration
Table 13.2 shows the register configuration of timer J.
The TCJ and TLJ or the TCK and TLK are being allocated to the same address respectively.
Reading or writing determines the accessing register.
Table 13.2 Register Configuration
Name Abbrev. R/W Size Initial Value Address*2
Timer mode register J TMJ R/W Byte H'00 H'D13A
Timer J control register TMJC R/W Byte H'09 H'D13B
Timer J status register TMJS R/(W)*1 Byte H'3F H'D13C
Timer counter J TCJ R Byte H'FF H'D139
Timer counter K TCK R Byte H'FF H'D138
Timer load register J TLJ W Byte H'FF H'D139
Timer load register K TLK W Byte H'FF H'D138
Notes: 1. Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
2. Lower 16 bits of the address.
Section 13 Timer J
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 260 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
13.2 Register Descriptions
13.2.1 Timer Mode Register J (TMJ)
0
0
1
0
R
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
0
6
0
7
R/WR/WR/W
ST
R/W
PS10
0
R/W
PS11 8/16 PS21 PS20 TGL T/R
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The timer mode register J (TMJ) works to select the inputting clock for the TMJ-1 and TMJ-2 and
to set the operation mode.
The TMJ is an 8-bit register and bit 1 is for read only. All the remaining bits are applicable to
read/write.
When reset, the TMJ is initialized to H'00.
Under all other modes than the remote controlling mode, writing into the TMJ works to initialize
the counters (TCJ and TCK) to H'FF.
Bits 7 and 6⎯Selecting the Inputting Clock to the TMJ-1 (PS11, PS10): These bits work to
select the clock to input to the TMJ-1. When the external clock is selected, the counted edge
(rising or falling) can also be selected.
Bit 7 Bit 6
PS11 PS10 Description
0 Counting by the PSS, φ/512 (Initial value) 0
1 Counting by the PSS, φ/256
1 0 Counting by the PSS, φ/4
1
Counting at the rising edge or the falling edge of the external clock
inputs (IRQ1)*
Note: * The edge selection for the external clock inputs is made by setting the IRQ edge select
register (IEGR). See section 6.2.4, IRQ Edge Select Register (IEGR) for more
information.
When using an external clock under the remote controlling mode, set the opposite edge
with the IRQ1 and the IRQ2 when using an external clock under the remote controlling
mode. (When IRQ1 falling, select IRQ2 rising and when IRQ1 rising, select IRQ2 falling)
Section 13 Timer J
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 261 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 5⎯Starting the Remote Controlled Operation (ST): This bit works to start the remote
controlled operations.
When this bit is set to 1, clock signal is supplied to the TMJ-1 to start signal transmissions.
When this bit is cleared to 0, clock supply stops to discontinue the operation. The ST bit will be
valid under the remote controlling mode, namely, when bit 0 (T/R bit) is 1 and bit 4 (8/16 bit) is 0.
Under other modes than the remote controlling mode, it will be fixed to 0. When a shift to the low
power consumption mode is made during remote controlled operation, the ST bit will be cleared to
0. When resuming operation after returning to the active mode, write 1.
Bit 5
ST Description
0 Works to stop clock signal supply to the TMJ-1 under the remote controlling mode
(Initial value)
1 Works to supply clock signal to the TMJ-1 under the remote controlling mode
Bit 4⎯Switching Over Between 8-bit/16-bit Operations (8/16): This bit works to choose if
using timer J as two units of 8-bit timer/counter or if using it as a single unit of 16-bit
timer/counter. Even under 16-bit operations, TMJ1I interrupt requests from the TMJ-1 will be
valid.
Bit 4
8/16 Description
0 Makes the TMJ-1 and TMJ-2 operate separately (Initial value)
1 Makes the TMJ-1 and TMJ-2 operate altogether as 16-bit timer/counter
Bits 3 and 2⎯Selecting the Inputting Clock for the TMJ-2 (PS21, PS20): These bits, together
with the PS22 bit in the timer J control register (TMJC), work to select the clock for the TMJ-2.
When the external clock is selected, the counted edge (rising or falling) can also be selected. For
details, refer to section 13.2.2, Timer J Control Register (TMJC).
Bit 1⎯TMJ-2 Toggle Flag (TGL): This flag indicates the toggled status of the underflowing
with the TMJ-2. Reading only is workable.
It will be cleared to 0 under the low power consumption mode.
Bit 1
TGL Description
0 The toggle output of the TMJ-2 is 0 (Initial value)
1 The toggle output of the TMJ-2 is 1
Section 13 Timer J
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 262 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 0⎯Switching Over Between Timer Output/Remote Controlling Output (T/R): This bit
works to select if using the timer outputs from the TMJ-1 as the output signal through the TMO
pin or if using the toggle outputs (remote controlled transmission data) from the TMJ-2 as the
output signal through the TMO pin.
Bit 0
T/R Description
0 Timer outputs from the TMJ-1 (Initial value)
1 Toggle outputs from the TMJ-2 (remote controlled transmission data)
Selecting the Operation Mode
The operating mode of timer J is determined by bit 3 (EXN) of the timer J control register (TMJC)
and bits 4 (8/16) and 0 (T/R) of the timer mode register J (TMJ).
TMJC TMJ
Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 0
EXN 8/16 T/R Description
0 0 0 8-bit timer + 16-bit timer
1 Remote-controlling mode (TMJ-2 works as a 16-bit timer)
1 * 24-bit timer
1 0 0 Two 8-bit timers (Initial value)
1 Remote-controlling mode (TMJ-2 works as an 8-bit timer)
1 * 16-bit timer
Legend: * Don’t care
Writing to the TMJ in timer mode initializes the counters (TCJ and TCK) (H'FF). Consequently,
write to the reloading registers (TLJ an TLK) after finishing settings with the TMJ.
Under the remote controlling mode, although the TLJ and the TLK will not be initialized even
when writing is made into the TMJ, follow the sequence listed below when starting a remote
controlling operation:
1. Make setting to the remote controlling mode with the TMJ.
2. Write the data into the TLJ and TLK.
3. Start the remote controlled operation by use of the TMJ. (ST bit = 1).
Even under 16-bit operations, TMJ1I interrupt requests from the TMJ-1 will be valid.
Section 13 Timer J
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 263 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
13.2.2 Timer J Control Register (TMJC)
01
0
2
0
R/W
3
PS22EXN
R/W
R/W
4
0
R/W
5
0
6
0
7
R/WR/W
MON1
R/W
BUZZ0
0
R/W
BUZZ1 MON0 TMJ2IE TMJ1IE
11
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The timer J control register (TMJC) works to select the buzzer output frequency and to control
permission/prohibition of interrupts.
The TMJC is an 8-bit read/write register.
When reset, the TMJC is initialized to H'09.
Bits 7 and 6⎯Selecting the Buzzer Output (BUZZ1, BUZZ0): These bits work to select if
using the buzzer outputs as the output signal through the BUZZ pin or if using the monitor signals
as the output signal through the BUZZ pin.
When setting is made to the monitor signals, choose the monitor signal using the MON1 bit and
MON0 bit.
Bit 7 Bit 6
BUZZ1 BUZZ0 Description
Frequency when
φ = 10 MHz
0 φ/4096 (Initial value) 2.44 kHz 0
1 φ/8192 1.22 kHz
1 0 Works to output monitor signals
1 Works to output BUZZ signals from timer J
Section 13 Timer J
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 264 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bits 5 and 4⎯Selecting the Monitor Signals (MON1, MON0): These bits work to select the
type of signals being output through the BUZZ pin for monitoring purpose. These settings are
valid only when the BUZZ1 and BUZZ0 bits are being set to 10.
When PB-CTL or REC-CTL is chosen, signal duties will be output as they are.
In case of DVCTL signals, signals from the CTL dividing circuit will be toggled before being
output. Signal waveforms divided by the CTL dividing circuit into n-divisions will further be
divided into halves. (Namely, 2n divisions, 50% duty waveform).
In case of TCA7, Bit 7 of the counter of the Timer A will be output. (50% duty)
When prescaler W is being used with the Timer A, 1 Hz outputs are available.
Bit 5 Bit 4
MON1 MON0 Description
0 PB or REC-CTL (Initial value) 0
1 DVCTL
1 * Outputs TCA7
Legend: * Don’t care
Bit 3⎯Expansion Function Control Bit (EXN): This bit enables or disables the expansion
function of TMJ-2. When the expansion function is enabled, TMJ-2 works as a 16-bit counter, and
further input clock sources and types can be selected.
Bit 3
EXN Description
0 Enables the TMJ-2 expansion function
1 Disables the TMJ-2 expansion function (Initial value
Bit 2⎯Enabling Interrupt of the TMJ2I (TMJ2IE): This bit works to permit/prohibit
occurrence of TMJ2I interrupt of the TMJS in 1-set of the TMJ2I.
Bit 2
TMJ2IE Description
0 Prohibits occurrence of TMJ2I interrupt (Initial value)
1 Permits occurrence of TMJ2I interrupt
Section 13 Timer J
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 265 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 1⎯Enabling Interrupt of the TMJ1I (TMJ1IE): This bit works to permit/prohibit
occurrence of TMJ1I interrupt of the TMJS in 1-set of the TMJ1I.
Bit 1
TMJ1IE Description
0 Prohibits occurrence of TMJ1I interrupt (Initial value)
1 Permits occurrence of TMJ1I interrupt
Bit 0⎯TMJ-2 Input Clock Selection (PS22): This bit, together with the PS21 and PS20 bits of
the timer mode register J (TMJ), selects the TMJ-2 input clock source.
TMJC TMJ
Bit 3 Bit 0 Bit 3 Bit 2
EXN PS22 PS21 PS20 Description
0 1 0 0 PSS; count at φ/128
1 PSS; count at φ/64
1 0 Count at TMJ-1 underflow
1 External clock (IRQ2); count at rising or falling edge*1
0 * * Reserved
1 1 0 0 PSS; count at φ/16384 (Initial value)
1 PSS; count at φ/2048
1 0 Count at TMJ-1 underflow
1 External clock (IRQ2); count at rising or falling edge*1
0 0 0 PSS; count at φ/1024
1 PSS; count at φ/1024
1 0 Count at TMJ-1 underflow
1 External clock (IRQ2); count at rising or falling edge*1
Legend: * Don’t care
Note: 1. The external clock edge can be selected by the IRQ edge select register (IEGR). For
details, refer to section 6.2.4, IRQ Edge Select Registers (IEGR).
Section 13 Timer J
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 266 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
13.2.3 Timer J Status Register (TMJS)
012345
——————
——————
6
0
7
R/(W)*
TMJ1I
0
R/(W)*
TMJ2I
111111
Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The timer J status register (TMJS) works to indicate issuance of the interrupt request of timer J.
The TMJS is an 8-bit read/write register. When reset, the TMJS is initialized to H'3F.
Bit 7⎯TMJ2I Interrupt Requesting Flag (TMJ2I): This is the TMJ2I interrupt requesting flag.
This flag is set out when the TMJ-2 underflows.
Bit 7
TMJ2I Description
0 [Clearing condition] (Initial value)
When 0 is written after reading 1
1 [Setting condition]
When the TMJ-2 underflows
Bit 6⎯TMJ1I Interrupt Requesting Flag (TMJ1I): This is the TMJ1I interrupt requesting flag.
This flag is set out when the TMJ-1 underflows.
TMJ1I interrupt requests will also be made under a 16-bit operation.
Bit 6
TMJ1I Description
0 [Clearing condition] (Initial value)
When 0 is written after reading 1
1 [Setting condition]
When the TMJ-1 underflows
Bits 5 to 0⎯Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
Section 13 Timer J
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 267 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
13.2.4 Timer Counter J (TCJ)
0
1
1
1
R
2
1
R
3
1
4
1
R
5
1
6
1
7
RRR
TDR15
R
TDR16
1
R
TDR17 TDR14 TDR13 TDR12 TDR11 TDR10
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The timer counter J (TCJ) is an 8-bit readable down-counter which works to count down by the
internal clock inputs or external clock inputs. The inputting clock can be selected by the PS11 and
PS10 bits of the TMJ. TCJ values can be readout always. Nonetheless, when the EXN bit in TMJC
and the 8/16 bit in TMJ are both set to 1, (means when setting is made to 16-bit operation),
reading is possible under the word command only.
At this time, the TCK of the TMJ-2 can be read by the upper 8 bits and the TCJ can be read by the
lower 8 bits. When the EXN bit in TMJC is 0, TCJ can be read only in byte units.
When the TCJ underflows (H'00 → Reloading value), regardless of the operation mode setting of
the 8/16 bit, the TMJ1I bit of the TMJS will be set to 1 bit. The TCJ and TLJ are being allocated
to the same address.
When reset, the TCJ is initialized to H'FF.
13.2.5 Timer Counter K (TCK)
0
1
1
1
R
2
1
R
3
1
4
1
R
5
1
6
1
7
RRR
TDR25
R
TDR26
1
R
TDR27 TDR24 TDR23 TDR22 TDR21 TDR20
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The timer counter K (TCK) is an 8-bit or a 16-bit readable down-counter which works to count
down by the internal clock inputs or external clock inputs. The inputting clock can be selected by
the EXN and PS22 bits of the TMJC, and the PS21 and PS20 bits of the TMJ. TCK values can be
readout always. Nonetheless, when the EXN bit in TMJC and the 8/16 bit in TMJ are both set to 1,
(means when setting is made to 16-bit operation), reading is possible under the word command
only.
At this time, the TCK can be read by the upper 8 bits and the TCJ of the TMJ-1 can be read by the
lower 8 bits. When the EXN bit in TMJC is 0, TCK works as a 16-bit counter and can be read only
in word units.
When the TCK underflows (H'00 → Reloading value), the TMJ2I bit of the TMJS will be set to 1.
The TCK and TLK are being allocated to the same address.
When reset, the TCK is initialized to H'FF.
Section 13 Timer J
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 268 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
13.2.6 Timer Load Register J (TLJ)
0
1
1
1
W
2
1
W
3
1
4
1
W
5
1
6
1
7
WWW
TLR15
W
TLR16
1
W
TLR17 TLR14 TLR13 TLR12 TLR11 TLR10
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The timer load register J (TLJ) is an 8-bit write only register which works to set the reloading
value of the TCJ.
When the reloading value is set to the TLJ, the value will be simultaneously loaded to the TCJ and
the TCJ starts counting down from the set value. Also, during an auto reloading operation, when
the TCJ underflows, the value of the TLJ will be loaded to the TCJ. Consequently, the
underflowing cycle can be set within the range of 1 to 256 input clocks. Nonetheless, when the
EXN bit in TMJC and the 8/16 bit in TMJ are both set to 1, (means when setting is made to 16-bit
operation), writing is possible under the word command only.
At this time, the upper 8 bits can be written into the TLK of the TMJ-2 and the lower 8 bits can be
written into the TLJ. When the EXN bit in TMJC is 0, TLJ can be written to only in byte units; an
8-bit reload value is written to TLJ.
The TLJ and TCJ are being allocated to the same address.
When reset, the TLJ is initialized to H'FF.
13.2.7 Timer Load Register K (TLK)
0
1
1
1
W
2
1
W
3
1
4
1
W
5
1
6
1
7
WWW
TLR25
W
TLR26
1
W
TLR27 TLR24 TLR23 TLR22 TLR21 TLR20
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The timer load register K (TLK) is an 8-bit or a 16-bit write only register which works to set the
reloading value of the TCK.
When the reloading value is set to the TLK, the value will be simultaneously loaded to the TCK
and the TCK starts counting down from the set value. Also, during an auto reloading operation,
when the TCK underflows, the value of the TLK will be loaded to the TCK. Consequently, the
underflowing cycle can be set within the range of 1 to 256 input clocks. Nonetheless, when the
EXN bit in TMJC and the 8/16 bit in TMJ are both set to 1, (means when setting is made to 16-bit
operation), writing is possible under the word command only. At this time, the upper 8 bits can be
written into the TLK and the lower 8 bits can be written into the TLJ of the TMJ-1. When the
EXN bit in TMJC is 0, TLK can be written to only in word units; a 16-bit reload value is written
to TLK. The TLK and TCK are being allocated to the same address.
When reset, the TLK is initialized to H'FF.
Section 13 Timer J
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 269 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
13.2.8 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR)
7
1
MSTP15
R/W
MSTPCRH
6
1
MSTP14
R/W
5
1
MSTP13
R/W
4
1
MSTP12
R/W
3
1
MSTP11
R/W
2
1
MSTP10
R/W
1
1
MSTP9
R/W
0
1
MSTP8
R/W
7
1
MSTP7
R/W
6
1
MSTP6
R/W
5
1
MSTP5
R/W
4
1
MSTP4
R/W
3
1
MSTP3
R/W
2
1
MSTP2
R/W
1
1
MSTP1
R/W
0
1
MSTP0
R/W
MSTPCRL
Initial value :
R/W :
Bit :
The MSTPCR are 8-bit read/write twin registers which work to control the module stop mode.
When the MSTP13 bit is set to 1, timer J stops its operation at the ending point of the bus cycle to
shift to the module stop mode. For more information, see section 4.5, Module Stop Mode.
When reset, the MSTPCR is initialized to H'FFFF.
Bit 5⎯Module Stop (MSTP13): This bit works to designate the module stop mode for the Timer
J.
MSTPCRH
Bit 5
MSTP13 Description
0 Cancels the module stop mode of timer J
1 Sets the module stop mode of timer J (Initial value)
Section 13 Timer J
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 270 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
13.3 Operation
13.3.1 8-bit Reload Timer (TMJ-1)
The TMJ-1 is an 8-bit reload timer. As the clock source, dividing clock or edge signals through the
IRQ1 pin are being used. By selecting the edge signals through the IRQ1 pin, it can also be used
as an event counter. While it is working as an event counter, its reloading function is workable
simultaneously. When data are written into the reloading register, these data will be written into
the counters (event counter, timer counter) simultaneously. Also, when the event counter
underflows, the event counter value is reset to the reload register value, and a TMJ1I interrupt
request occurs. Every time the counter underflows, the output level toggles. This output can be
used as a buzzer or the carrier frequency at remote-controlled transmission by selecting an
appropriate divided clock.
The TMJ-1 and TMJ-2, in combination, can be used as a 16-bit or a 24-bit reload timer.
Nonetheless, when they are being used, in combination, as a 16-bit timer, word command only is
valid and the TCK works as the down counter for the upper 8 bits and the TCJ works as the down
counter for the lower 8 bits, means a reloading register of total 16 bits.
When data are written into a 16-bit reloading register, the same data will be written into the 16-bit
down counter.
Also, when the 16-bit down counter underflow signals, the data of the 16-bit reloading register
will be reloaded into the down counter. When the EXN bit of TMJC is set to 0, the expansion
function of TMJ-2 is enabled, that is, TMJ-2 works as a 16-bit reloading timer, and it can be
connected to TMJ-1 to be a 24-bit reloading timer. In this case, TCK works as the upper 16-bit
part and TCJ works as the lower 8-bit part of a 24-bit down counter, and TLK works as the upper
16-bit part and TLJ works as the lower 8-bit part of a 24-bit reloading register.
Even when they are making a 16-bit or a 24-bit operation, the TMJ1I interrupt requests of the
TMJ-1 and BUZZER outputs are effective. In case these functions are not necessary, make them
invalid by programming.
The TMJ-1 and TMJ-2, in combination, can be used for remote controlled data transmission.
Regarding the remote controlled data transmission, see section 13.3.3, Remote Controlled Data
Transmission.
13.3.2 8-bit Reload Timer (TMJ-2)
The TMJ-2 is an 8-bit or a 16-bit down-counting reload timer. As the clock source, dividing clock,
edge signals through the IRQ2 pin or the underflow signals from the TMJ-1 are being used. By
selecting the edge signals through the IRQ2 pin, it can also be used as an event counter. While it is
working as an event counter, its reloading function is workable simultaneously.
When data are written into the reloading register, these data will be written into the counter
simultaneously. Also, when the counter underflows, reloading will be made to the data counter of
Section 13 Timer J
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 271 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
the reloading register.
When the counter underflows, TMJ2I interrupt requests will be issued.
The TMJ-2 and TMJ-1, in combination, can be used as a 16-bit or a 24-bit reload timer. For more
information on the 16-bit or 24-bit reload timer, see section 13.3.1, 8-bit Reload Timer (TMJ-1).
The TMJ-2 and TMJ-1, in combination, can be operated by remote controlled data transmission.
Regarding the remote controlled data transmission, see section 13.3.3, Remote Controlled Data
Transmission.
13.3.3 Remote Controlled Data Transmission
The Timer J is capable of making remote controlled data transmission. The carrier frequencies for
the remote controlled data transmission can be generated by the TMJ-1 and the burst width
duration and the space width duration can be setup by the TMJ-2.
The data having been written into the reloading register TMJ-1 and into the burst/space duration
register (TLK) of the TMJ-2 will be loaded to the counter at the same time as the remote
controlled data transmission starts. (Remote controlled data transmission starting bit (ST) ← 1)
While remote controlled data transmission is being made, the contents of the burst/space duration
register will be loaded to the counter only while reloading is being made by underflow signals.
Even when a writing is made to the burst/space duration register while remote controlled data
transmission is being made, reloading operation will not be made until an underflow signal is
issued. The TMJ-2 issues TMJ2I interrupt requests by the underflow signals. The TMJ-1 performs
normal reloading operation (including the TMJ1I interrupt requests).
Figure 13.2 shows the output waveform for the remote controlled data transmission function.
When a shift to the low power consumption mode is effected while remote controlled data
transmission is being made, the ST bit will be cleared to 0. When resuming the remote controlled
data transmission after returning to the active mode, write 1.
Section 13 Timer J
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 272 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Burst width Space width Burst width
TMJ-2 toggle output
= 1
TMJ-2 toggle output
= 0
TMJ-2 toggle
output = 1
Setting the
space width
Setting the
burst width
Setting the
space width
ST bit ← 1 Underflow Underflow Underflow
TMJ-1 can generate
the carrier frequencies
Remote controlled data
transmission outputs
Setting the remote
controlled mode
Setting the burst width
Figure 13.2 Remote Controlled Data Transmission Output Waveform
Section 13 Timer J
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 273 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
TMJ-1
UDF
TMO
(BUZZ)
TMJ-2
UDF
REMOout
TMO
Remote controlled data
transmission output
Figure 13.3 Timer Output Timing
Section 13 Timer J
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 274 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
When the Timer J is set to the remote controlled operation mode, since the start bit (ST) is being
set or cleared in synchronization with the inputting clock to the TMJ-2, a delay upto a cycle of the
inputting clock at the maximum occurs, namely, after the ST bit has been set to 1 until the remote
controlled data transmission starts. Consequently, when the TLK is updated during the period after
setting the ST bit to 1 until the next cycle of the inputting clock comes, the initial burst width will
be changed as shown in figure 13.4.
Therefore, when making remote controlled data transmission, determine 1/0 of the TGL bit at the
time of the first burst width control operation without fail. (Or, set the space width to the TLK
after waiting for a cycle of the inputting clock.)
After that, operations can be continued by interrupts.
Similarly, pay attention to the control works when ending remote controlled data transmission.
Example:
1) Set the burst width with the TLK.
2) ST bit ← 1.
3) Execute the procedure 4) if the TGL flag = 1.
4) Set the space width with the TLK under the status where the TGL flag = 1.
5) Make TMJ-2 interrupt.
6) Set the burst width with the TLK.
:
n) After making TMJ-2 interrupt, make setting of the ST ← 0 under the status where the TGL
flag = 0.
The period during which the
space width settig can be
made. (S)
Delay
Interrupt
Interrupt
TLK setting
(Burst width)
(B)
Burst width
according to (B)
Space width
according to (S)
Stopping the remote controlled
data transmission
TGL flag
Inputting clock
to the TMJ-2
ST ← 0
Delay
ST ← 1
Remote controlled data
transmission starts here.
If an updating is made with the
TLK during this period, the burst
width will be changed.
Figure 13.4 Controls of the Remote Controlled Data Transmission
Section 13 Timer J
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 275 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
13.3.4 TMJ-2 Expansion Function
The TMJ-2 expansion function is enabled by setting the EXN bit in the timer J control register
(TMJC) to 0. This function makes TMJ-2, which usually works as an 8-bit counter, work as a 16-
bit counter. When this function is selected, timer counter K (TCK) and timer load register K
(TLK) must be accessed as follows:
TCK Read: To read TCK, use the word-length MOV instruction. In this case, the upper 8 bits of
TCK are read out to the lower byte of the on-chip data bus, and the lower 8 bits are read out to the
upper byte of the on-chip data bus. That is, when MOV.W @TCK, Rn is executed, the lower 8
bits of TCK are stored in RnH and the upper 8 bits are stored in RnL.
TLK Write: To write to TLK, use the word-length MOV instruction. In this case, the upper 8 bits
are written to the lower byte of TLK, and the lower 8 bits are written to the upper byte of TLK.
That is, when MOV.W Rn, @TLK is executed, the RnH data is written to the lower byte of TLK,
and the RnL data is written to the upper byte of TLK.
Section 13 Timer J
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 276 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Section 14 Timer L
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 277 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Section 14 Timer L
14.1 Overview
Timer L is an 8-bit up/down counter using the control pulses or the CFG division signals as the
clock source.
14.1.1 Features
Features of timer L are as follows:
• Two types of internal clocks (φ/128 and φ/64), DVCFG2 (CFG division signal 2), PB and
REC-CTL (control pulses) are available for your selection.
⎯ When the PB-CTL is not available, such as when reproducing un-recorded tapes, tape
count can be made by the DVCFG2.
⎯ Selection of the rising edge or the falling edge is workable with the CTL pulse counting.
• Interrupts occur when the counter overflows or underflows and at occurrences of compare
match clear.
• Capable to switch over between the up-counting and down-counting functions with the
counter.
Section 14 Timer L
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 278 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
14.1.2 Block Diagram
Figure 14.1 shows a block diagram of timer L.
Legend:
Internal data bus
DVCFG2 : Division signal 2 of the CFG
PB and REC-CTL : Control pluses necessary when making
reproduction and storage
LMR : Timer L mode register
LTC : Linear time counter
RCR : Reload/compare match register
OVF : Overflow
UDF : Underflow
LMR
LTC
RCR
Comparator
Write
OVF/UDF
Reloading
Match clear
Interrupt request
Interrupting
circuit
DVCFG2
PB and
REC-CTL
Internal clock
φ/128
φ/64
Read
Figure 14.1 Block Diagram of Timer L
Section 14 Timer L
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 279 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
14.1.3 Register Configuration
Table 14.1 shows the register configuration of timer L. The linear time counter (LTC) and the
reload compare patch register (RCR) are being allocated to the same address.
Reading or writing determines the accessing register.
Table 14.1 Register Configuration
Name Abbrev. R/W Size Initial Value Address*
Timer L mode register LMR R/W Byte H'30 H'D112
Linear time counter LTC R Byte H'00 H'D113
Reload/compare match
register
RCR W Byte H'00 H'D113
Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address.
Section 14 Timer L
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 280 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
14.2 Register Descriptions
14.2.1 Timer L Mode Register (LMR)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
1
5
——
——
1
6
0
7
R/WR/WR/W
LMIE
0
R /(W)*
LMIF LMR3 LMR2 LMR1 LMR0
Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The timer L mode register A (LMR) is an 8-bit read/write register which works to control the
interrupts, to select between up-counting and down-counting and to select the clock source. When
reset, the LMR is initialized to H'30.
Bit 7⎯Timer L Interrupt Requesting Flag (LMIF): This is the Timer L interrupt requesting
flag. It indicates occurrence of overflow or underflow of the LTC or occurrence of compare match
clear.
Bit 7
LMIF Description
0 [Clearing condition] (Initial value)
When 0 is written after reading 1
1 [Setting condition]
When the LTC overflows, underflows or when compare match clear has occurred
Bit 6⎯Enabling Interrupt of the Timer L (LMIE): When the LTC overflows, underflows or
when compare match clear has occurred, then LMIF is set to 1, this bit works to permit/prohibit
the occurrence of an interrupt of timer L.
Bit 6
LMIE Description
0 Prohibits occurrence of interrupt of Timer L (Initial value)
1 Permits occurrence of interrupt of Timer L
Bits 5 and 4⎯Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
Bit 3⎯Up-Count/Down-Count Control (LMR3): This bit is for selection if timer L is to be
controlled to the up-counting function or down-counting function.
Section 14 Timer L
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 281 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
1. When Controlled to the Up-Counting Function
⎯ When any other values than H'00 are input to the RCR, the LTC will be cleared to H'00
before starting counting up. When the LTC value and the RCR value match, the LTC will
be cleared to H'00. Also, interrupt requests will be issued by the match signal. (Compare
match clear function)
⎯ When H'00 is set to the RCR, the counter makes 8-bit interval timer operation to issue a
interrupt request when overflowing occurs. (Interval timer function)
2. When Controlled to the Down-Counting Function
⎯ When a value is set to the RCR, the set value is reloaded to the LTC and counting down
starts from that value. When the LTC underflows, the value of the RCR will be reloaded to
the LTC. Also, when the LTC underflows, a interrupt request will be issued. (Auto reload
timer function)
Bit 3
LMR3 Description
0 Controlling to the up-counting function (Initial value)
1 Controlling to the down-counting function
Bits 2 to 0⎯Clock Selection (LMR2 to LMR0): The bits LMR2 to LMR0 work to select the
clock to input to timer L. Selection of the leading edge or the trailing edge is workable for
counting by the PB and the REC-CTL.
Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
LMR2 LMR1 LMR0 Description
0 Counts at the rising edge of the PB and REC-CTL
(Initial value)
0
1 Counts at the falling edge of the PB and REC-CTL
0
1 * Counts the DVCFG2
1 0 * Counts at φ/128 of the internal clock
1 * Counts at φ/64 of the internal clock
Legend: * Don't care.
Section 14 Timer L
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 282 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
14.2.2 Linear Time Counter (LTC)
0
0
1
0
R
2
0
3
0
456
0
7
RRRR
LTC6
0
R
LTC5
0
R
LTC4
0
R
LTC7 LTC3 LTC2 LTC1 LTC0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The linear time counter (LTC) is a readable 8-bit up/down-counter. The inputting clock can be
selected by the LMR2 to LMR0 bits of the LMR.
When reset, the LTC is initialized to H'00.
14.2.3 Reload/Compare Match Register (RCR)
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
3
0
456
0
7
WWWW
RCR6
0
W
RCR5
0
W
RCR4
0
W
RCR7 RCR3 RCR2 RCR1 RCR0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The reload/compare match register (RCR) is an 8-bit write only register.
When timer L is being controlled to the up-counting function, when a compare match value is set
to the RCR, the LTC will be cleared at the same time and the LTC will then start counting up from
the initial value (H'00).
While, when the Timer L is being controlled to the down-counting function, when a reloading
value is set to the RCR, the same value will be loaded to the LTC at the same time and the LTC
will then start counting up from said value. Also, when the LTC underflows, the value of the RCR
will be reloaded to the LTC.
When reset, the RCR is initialized to H'00.
Section 14 Timer L
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 283 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
14.2.4 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR)
7
1
MSTP15
R/W
MSTPCRH
6
1
MSTP14
R/W
5
1
MSTP13
R/W
4
1
MSTP12
R/W
3
1
MSTP11
R/W
2
1
MSTP10
R/W
1
1
MSTP9
R/W
0
1
MSTP8
R/W
7
1
MSTP7
R/W
6
1
MSTP6
R/W
5
1
MSTP5
R/W
4
1
MSTP4
R/W
3
1
MSTP3
R/W
2
1
MSTP2
R/W
1
1
MSTP1
R/W
0
1
MSTP0
R/W
MSTPCRL
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The MSTPCR are 8-bit read/write twin registers which work to control the module stop mode.
When the MSTP12 bit is set to 1, timer L stops its operation at the ending point of the bus cycle to
shift to the module stop mode. For more information, see section 4.5, Module Stop Mode.
When reset, the MSTPCR is initialized to H'FFFF.
Bit 4⎯Module Stop (MSTP12): This bit works to designate the module stop mode for timer L.
MSTPCRH
Bit 4
MSTP12 Description
0 Cancels the module stop mode of timer L
1 Sets the module stop mode of timer L (Initial value)
Section 14 Timer L
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 284 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
14.3 Operation
Timer L is an 8-bit up/down counter.
The inputting clock for Timer L can be selected by the LMR2 to LMR0 bits of the LMR from the
choices of the internal clock (φ/128 and φ/64), DVCDG2, PB and REC-CTL.
Timer L is provided with three different types of operation modes, namely, the compare match
clear mode when controlled to the up-counting function, the auto reloading mode when controlled
to the down-counting function and the interval timer mode.
Respective operation modes and operation methods will be explained below.
14.3.1 Compare Match Clear Operation
When the LMR3 bit of the LMR is cleared to 0, timer L will be controlled to the up-counting
function.
When any other values than H'00 are written into the RCR, the LTC will be cleared to H'00
simultaneously before starting counting up.
Figure 14.2 shows RCR writing and LTC clearing timing. When the LTC value and the RCR
value match (compare match), the LTC readings will be cleared to H'00 to resume counting from
H'00.
Figure 14.3 indicated on the next page shows the compare match clear timing.
RCR
LTC
φ
Write signal
1 state
N
H' 00
Figure 14.2 RCR Writing and LTC Clearing Timing Chart
Section 14 Timer L
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 285 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
LTC
RCR
N H' 00N-1
N
Interrupt
request
Count-up
signal
Compare match
clear signal
φ
PB-CTL
Figure 14.3 Compare Match Clearing Timing Chart
(In case the rising edge of the PB-CTL is selected)
14.3.2 Auto-Reload Operation
When 1 is written in bit LMR3 of LMR, LTC enters down-counting control mode.
When a reload value is written in RCR, LTC is reloaded with the same value and starts counting
down from that value. Figure 14.4 shows the timing of the writing and reloading of RCR.
At underflow, LTC is reloaded with the RCR value. Figure 14.5 shows the reload timing.
1 state
Write
signal
RCR
LTC
φ
N
N
Figure 14.4 Timing of Writing and Reloading of RCR
Section 14 Timer L
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 286 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
PB-CTL
RCR
LTC
N
H'00
H'01 N
φ
Count-down
signal
Interrupt
request
Reload
underflow
Figure 14.5 Reload Timing (Rising Edge of PB-CTL Selected)
14.3.3 Interval Timer Operation
When bit LMR3 is cleared to 0 in LMR, the timer L enters up-counting control mode.
If H'00 is written in RCR, compare-match operations are not carried out. The counter functions as
an interval timer (up-counter).
14.3.4 Interrupt Request
The timer L generates an interrupt request when any of the following occurs:
• Compare-match clear under up-counting control
• Underflow under down-counting control
• Overflow or underflow when the reload/compare-match register (RCR) value is H'00
Section 14 Timer L
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 287 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
14.4 Typical Usage
Figure 14.6 shows a typical usage of the timer L.
H'FF
Value written
in RCR
H'00
***
LTC = RCR
Compare match clear
Underflow
(reload)
Underflow
(reload)
Value other than H'00
written in RCR under
up-counting control
Down-counting control
(1 written in bit LMR3)
(Rewind, reverse, etc.)
(Record, playback,
fast-forward, etc.)
Note: * A downward-pointing arrow indicates an interrupt request.
Figure 14.6 Typical Usage of Linear Time Counter
14.5 Reload Timer Interrupt Request Signal
The timer counters with reload registers generate an underflow or overflow in the last cycle before
being decremented or incremented. The underflow or overflow generates a reload signal and an
interrupt request signal.
If the value in the reload register is rewritten at the same time as the underflow or overflow (at the
reload timing), an interrupt request is generated and the counter is reloaded at the same time.
When rewriting the reload value in order to avoid an interrupt, leave an ample timing margin
around the write to the reload register.
Section 14 Timer L
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 288 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Figure 14.7 shows a sample timing diagram of contention between an underflow and the rewriting
of the reload register.
1 Bus
cycle
φ
Write
Reload
register
Counter
UDF
H'01 H'00 H'nn H'nn-1
IRR
H'zz H'nn
Reload: disabled by write
Legend:
Write:
Reload:
UDF:
IRR:
Reload register rewrite signal
Reload signal
Counter underflow
Interrupt request signal
Figure 14.7 Contention between Reload Timer Underflow and
Rewriting of Reload Register
Section 15 Timer R
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 289 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Section 15 Timer R
15.1 Overview
Timer R consists of triple 8-bit down-counters. It carries VCR mode identification function and
slow tracking function in addition to the reloading function and event counter function.
15.1.1 Features
The Timer R consists of triple 8-bit reloading timers. By combining the functions of three units of
reloading timers/counters and by combining three units of timers, it can be used for the following
applications:
• Applications making use of the functions of three units of reloading timers.
• For identification of the VCR mode.
• For reel controls.
• For acceleration and braking of the capstan motor when being applied to intermittent
movements.
• Slow tracking mono-multi applications.
15.1.2 Block Diagram
Timer R consists of three units of reload timer counters, namely, two units of reload timer
counters equipped with capturing function (TMRU-1 and TMRU-2) and a unit of reload timer
counter (TMRU-3).
Figure 15.1 is a block diagram of timer R.
Section 15 Timer R
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 290 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Notes:
Internal bus
Internal bus
Clock sources
DVCTL
CFG↑
Clock
selection
(2 bits)
Reloading register
(8 bits)
Down-counter
(8 bits)
Capture register
(8 bits)
TMRI2
Interrupt request
TMRI1
Interrupt
request
TMRI3
Interrupt
request
TMRU-1
TMRCP1
*2
Under
flow
TMRU-3 Underflow
*1
TMRL3
PS31,30
External signals
IRQ3
φ /1024
φ /2048
φ /4096
Clock source
φ /64
φ /128
φ /256
Clock sources
φ /4
φ /256
φ /512
Down-counter
(8 bits)
Latch
clock
selection
Clock
selection
(2 bits)
Resetting
Available/
Not
available
CP/
SLM
SLW
CAPF
Capture register
(8 bits)
Down-counter
(8 bits)
Reloading register
(8 bits)
Acceleration/
braking
Reloading
Available/
not
available
Reloading
clock
selection
Reloading register
(8 bits)
RLD/
CAP
Clock
selection
(2 bits)
CPS
LAT PS21,20
CLR2
Res
Res
TMRCP2
Under
flowTMRU-2 CFG mask F/F
R
SQ
R
S
Q
Acceleration
braking
AC/BR
TMRL2
RLD
RLCK
TMRL1PS11,10
Interrupting circuit
1. When the DVCTL is being used as the clock source, reloading will be made when the counter underflows and when
the dividing clock is being used as the clock source, reloading will be made by the DVCTL.
2. When the LAT bit = 0, the capture signal against the TMRU-1 will not be output.
Figure 15.1 Block Diagram of Timer R
Section 15 Timer R
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 291 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
15.1.3 Pin Configuration
Table 15.1 shows the pin configuration of timer R.
Table 15.1 Pin Configuration
Name Abbrev. I/O Function
Input capture inputting pin IRQ3 Input Input capture inputting for the Timer R
15.1.4 Register Configuration
Table 15.2 shows the register configuration of timer R.
Table 15.2 Register Configuration
Name Abbrev. R/W Size Initial Value Address
Timer R mode register 1 TMRM1 R/W Byte H'00 H'D118
Timer R mode register 2 TMRM2 R/W Byte H'00 H'D119
Timer R control/status
register
TMRCS R/W Byte H'03 H'D11F
Timer R capture register 1 TMRCP1 R Byte H'FF H'D11A
Timer R capture register 2 TMRCP2 R Byte H'FF H'D11B
Timer R load register 1 TMRL1 W Byte H'FF H'D11C
Timer R load register 2 TMRL2 W Byte H'FF H'D11D
Timer R load register 3 TMRL3 W Byte H'FF H'D11E
Note: Memories of respective registers will be preserved even under the low power consumption
mode. Nonetheless, the CAPF flag and SLW flag of the TMRM2 will be cleared to 0.
Section 15 Timer R
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 292 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
15.2 Register Descriptions
15.2.1 Timer R Mode Register 1 (TMRM1)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
0
6
0
7
R/WR/WR/W
RLD
R/W
AC/BR
0
R/W
CLR2 RLCK PS21 PS20 RLD/CAP CPS
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The timer R mode register 1 (TMRM1) works to control the acceleration and braking processes
and to select the inputting clock for the TMRU-2. This is an 8-bit read/write register.
When reset, the TMRM1 is initialized to H'00.
Bit 7⎯Selecting Clearing/Not Clearing of TMRU-2 (CLR2): This bit is used for selecting if
the TMRU-2 counter reading is to be cleared or not as it is captured.
Bit 7
CLR2 Description
0 TMRU-2 counter reading is not to be cleared as soon as it is captured. (Initial value)
1 TMRU-2 counter reading is to be cleared as soon as it is captured
Bit 6⎯Acceleration/Braking Processing (AC/BR): This bit works to control occurrences of
interrupt requests to detect completion of acceleration or braking while the capstan motor is
making intermittent revolutions.
For more information, see section 15.3.6, Acceleration and Braking Processes of the Capstan
Motor.
Bit 6
AC/BR Description
0 Braking (Initial value)
1 Acceleration
Section 15 Timer R
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 293 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 5⎯Using/Not Using the TMRU-2 for Reloading (RLD): This bit is used for selecting if the
TMRU-2 reload function is to be turned on or not.
Bit 5
RLD Description
0 Not using the TMRU-2 as the reload timer (Initial value)
1 Using the TMRU-2 as the reload timer
Bit 4⎯Reloading Timing for the TMRU-2 (RLCK): This bit works to select if the TMRU-2 is
reloading by the CFG or by underflowing of the TMRU-2 counter. This choice is valid only when
the bit 5 (RLD) is being set to 1.
Bit 4
RLCK Description
0 Reloading at the rising edge of the CFG (Initial value)
1 Reloading by underflowing of the TMRU-2
Bits 3 and 2⎯Clock Source for the TMRU-2 (PS21, PS20): These bits work to select the
inputting clock to the TMRU-2.
Bit 3 Bit 2
PS21 PS20 Description
0 Counting by underflowing of the TMRU-1 (Initial value) 0
1 Counting by the PSS, φ/256
1 0 Counting by the PSS, φ/128
1 Counting by the PSS, φ/64
Bit 1⎯Operation Mode of the TMRU-1 (RLD/CAP): This bit works to select if the operation
mode of the TMRU-1 is reload timer mode or capture timer mode.
Under the capture timer mode, reloading operation will not be made. Also, the counter reading
will be cleared as soon as capture has been made.
Bit 1
RLD/CAP Description
0 The TMRU-1 works as the reloading timer (Initial value)
1 The TMRU-1 works as the capture timer
Section 15 Timer R
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 294 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 0⎯Capture Signals of the TMRU-1 (CPS): In combination with the LAT bit (Bit 7) of the
TMRM2, this bit works to select the capture signals of the TMRU-1. This bit becomes valid when
the LAT bit is being set to 1. It will also become valid when the RLD/CAP bit (Bit 1) is being set
to 1. Nonetheless, it will be invalid when the RLD/CAP bit (Bit 1) is being set to 0.
Bit 0
CPS Description
0 Capture signals at the rising edge of the CFG (Initial value)
1 Capture signals at the edge of the IRQ3
15.2.2 Timer R Mode Register 2 (TMRM2)
0
0
1
0
R/(W)*
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
0
6
0
7
R/(W)*R/WR/W
PS10
R/W
PS11
0
R/W
LAT PS31 PS30 CP/SLM CAPF SLW
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The timer R mode register 2 (TMRM2) is an 8-bit read/write register which works to identify the
operation mode and to control the slow tracking processing.
When reset, the TMRM2 is initialized to H'00.
Note: * The CAPF bit and the SLW bit, respectively, works to latch the interrupt causes and
writing 0 only is valid. Consequently, when these bits are being set to 1, respective
interrupt requests will not be issued. Therefore, it is necessary to check these bits
during the course of the interrupt processing routine to have them cleared.
Also, priority is given to the set and, when an interrupt cause occur while the a clearing
command (BCLR, MOV, etc.) is being executed, the CAPF bit and the SLW bit will
not be cleared respectively and it thus becomes necessary to pay attention to the
clearing timing.
Section 15 Timer R
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 295 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 7⎯Capture Signals of the TMRU-2 (LAT): In combination with the CPS bit (Bit 0) of the
TMRM1, this bit works to select the capture signals of the TMRU-2.
TMRM2 TMRM1
Bit 7 Bit 0
LAT CPS
Description
0 * Captures when the TMRU-3 underflows (Initial value)
1 0 Captures at the rising edge of the CFG
1 Captures at the edge of the IRQ3
Legend: * Don't care.
Bits 6 and 5⎯Clock Source for the TMRU-1 (PS11, PS10): These bits work to select the
inputting clock to the TMRU-1.
Bit 6 Bit 5
PS11 PS10 Description
0 Counting at the rising edge of the CFG (Initial value) 0
1 Counting by the PSS, φ/4
1 0 Counting by the PSS, φ/256
1 Counting by the PSS, φ/512
Bits 4 and 3⎯Clock Source for the TMRU-3 (PS31, PS30): These bits work to select the
inputting clock to the TMRU-3.
Bit 4 Bit 3
PS31 PS30 Description
0 Counting at the rising edge of the DVCTL from the dividing circuit.
(Initial value)
0
1 Counting by the PSS, φ/4096
1 0 Counting by the PSS, φ/2048
1 Counting by the PSS, φ/1024
Section 15 Timer R
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 296 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 2⎯Interrupt Causes (CP/SLM): This bit works to select the interrupt causes for the TMRI3.
Bit 2
CP/SLM Description
0 Makes interrupt requests upon the capture signals of the TMRU-2 valid (Initial value)
1 Makes interrupt requests upon ending of the slow tracking mono-multi valid
Bit 1⎯Capture Signal Flag (CAPF): This is a flag being set out by the capture signal of the
TMRU-2. Although both reading/writing are possible, 0 only is valid for writing.
Also, priority is being given to the set and, when the capture signal and writing 0 occur
simultaneously, this flag bit remains being set to 1 and the interrupt request will not be issued and
it is necessary to be attentive about this fact.
When the CP/SLM bit (bit 2) is being set to 1, this CAPF bit should always be set to 0.
The CAPF flag is cleared to 0 under the low power consumption mode.
Bit 1
CAPF Description
0 [Clearing condition] (Initial value)
When 0 is written after reading 1
1 [Setting condition]
At occurrences of the TMRU-2 capture signals while the CP/SLM bit is set to 0
Bit 0⎯Slow Tracking Mono-multi Flag (SLW): This is a flag being set out when the slow
tracking mono-multi processing ends. Although both reading/writing are possible, 0 only is valid
for writing.
Also, priority is being given to the set and, when ending of the slow tracking mono-multi
processing and writing 0 occur simultaneously, this flag bit remains being set to 1 and the interrupt
request will not be issued and it is necessary to be attentive about this fact.
When the CP/SLM bit (bit 2) is being set to 0, this SLW bit should always be set to 0.
The SLW flag is cleared to 0 under the low power consumption mode.
Bit 0
SLW Description
0 [Clearing condition] (Initial value)
When 0 is written after reading 1
1 [Setting condition]
When the slow tracking mono-multi processing ends while the CP/SLM bit is set to 1
Section 15 Timer R
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 297 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
15.2.3 Timer R Control/Status Register (TMRCS)
0
1
1
——
——
1
2
0
R/(W)*
3
0
4
0
R/(W)*
5
0
6
0
7
R/(W)*R/W
TMRI1E
R/W
TMRI2E
0
R/W
TMRI3E TMRI3 TMRI2 TMRI1
Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The timer R control/status register (TMRCS) works to control the interrupts of timer R.
The TMRCS is an 8-bit read/write register. When reset, the TMRCS is initialized to H'03.
Bit 7⎯Enabling the TMRI3 Interrupt (TMRI3E): This bit works to permit/prohibit occurrence
of the TMRI3 interrupt when an interrupt cause being selected by the CP/SLM bit of the TMRM2
has occurred, such as occurrences of the TMRU-2 capture signals or when the slow tracking
mono-multi processing ends, and the TMRI3 has been set to 1.
Bit 7
TMRI3E Description
0 Prohibits occurrences of TMRI3 interrupts (Initial value)
1 Permits occurrences of TMRI3 interrupts
Bit 6⎯Enabling the TMRI2 Interrupt (TMRI2E): This bit works to permit/prohibit occurrence
of the TMRI2 interrupt when the TMRI2 has been set to 1 by issuance of the underflow signal of
the TMRU-2 or by ending of the slow tracking mono-multi processing.
Bit 6
TMRI2E Description
0 Prohibits occurrences of TMRI2 interrupts (Initial value)
1 Permits occurrences of TMRI2 interrupts
Bit 5⎯Enabling the TMRI1 Interrupt (TMRI1E): This bit works to permit/prohibit occurrence
of the TMRI1 interrupt when the TMRI1 has been set to 1 by issuance of the underflow signal of
the TMRU-1.
Bit 5
TMRI1E Description
0 Prohibits occurrences of TMRI1 interrupts (Initial value)
1 Permits occurrences of TMRI1 interrupts
Section 15 Timer R
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 298 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 4⎯TMRI3 Interrupt Requesting Flag (TMRI3): This is the TMRI3 interrupt requesting
flag.
It indicates occurrence of an interrupt cause being selected by the CP/SLM bit of the TMRM2,
such as occurrences of the TMRU-2 capture signals or ending of the slow tracking mono-multi
processing.
Bit 4
TMRI3 Description
0 [Clearing condition] (Initial value)
When 0 is written after reading 1
1 [Setting condition]
At occurrence of the interrupt cause being selected by the CP/SLM bit of the TMRM2
Bit 3⎯TMRI2 Interrupt Requesting Flag (TMRI2): This is the TMRI2 interrupt requesting
flag.
It indicates occurrences of the TMRU-2 underflow signals or ending of the acceleration/braking
processing of the capstan motor.
Bit 3
TMRI2 Description
0 [Clearing condition] (Initial value)
When 0 is written after reading 1
1 [Setting condition]
At occurrences of the TMRU-2 underflow signals or ending of the acceleration
/braking processing of the capstan motor
Bit 2⎯TMRI1 Interrupt Requesting Flag (TMRI1): This is the TMRI1 interrupt requesting
flag.
It indicates occurrences of the TMRU-1 underflow signals.
Bit 2
TMRI1 Description
0 [Clearing condition] (Initial value)
When 0 is written after reading 1.
1 [Setting condition]
When the TMRU-1 underflows.
Section 15 Timer R
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 299 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bits 1 and 0⎯Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
15.2.4 Timer R Capture Register 1 (TMRCP1)
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
1
R
TMRC17
R
TMRC16
R
TMRC15
R
TMRC14
R
TMRC13
R
TMRC12
R
TMRC11
R
TMRC10
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The timer R capture register 1 (TMRCP1) works to store the captured data of the TMRU-1.
During the course of the capturing operation, the TMRU-1 counter readings are captured by the
TMRCP1 at the CFG edge or the IRQ3 edge. The capturing operation of the TMRU-1 is
performed using 16 bits, in combination with the capturing operation of the TMRU-2.
The TMRCP1 is an 8-bit read only register. When reset, the TMRCS is initialized to H'FF.
Notes: 1. When the TMRCP1 is readout while the capture signal is being received, the reading
data become unstable. Pay attention to the timing for reading out.
2. When a shift to the low power consumption mode is made while the capturing
operating is in progress, the counter reading becomes unstable. After returning to the
active mode, always write H'FF into the TMRL1 to initialize the counter.
15.2.5 Timer R Capture Register 2 (TMRCP2)
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
1
R
TMRC27
R
TMRC26
R
TMRC25
R
TMRC24
R
TMRC23
R
TMRC22
R
TMRC21
R
TMRC20
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The timer R capture register 2 (TMRCP2) works to store the capture data of the TMRU-2. At each
CFG edge, IRQ3 edge, or at occurrence of underflow of the TMRU-3, the TMRU-2 counter
readings are captured by the TMRCP2.
The TMRCP2 is an 8-bit read only register. When reset, the TMRCS will be initialized into H'FF.
Notes: 1. When the TMRCP2 is readout while the capture signal is being received, the reading
data become unstable. Pay attention to the timing for reading out.
2. When a shift to the low power consumption mode is made, the counter reading
becomes unstable. After returning to the active mode, always write H'FF into the
TMRL2 to initialize the counter.
Section 15 Timer R
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 300 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
15.2.6 Timer R Load Register 1 (TMRL1)
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
1
W
TMR17
W
TMR16
W
TMR15
W
TMR14
W
TMR13
W
TMR12
W
TMR11
W
TMR10
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The timer R load register 1 (TMRL1) is an 8-bit write-only register which works to set the load
value of the TMRU-1.
When a load value is set to the TMRL1, the same value will be set to the TMRU-1 counter
simultaneously and the counter starts counting down from the set value. Also, when the counter
underflows during the course of the reload timer operation, the TMRL1 value will be set to the
counter.
When reset, the TMRL1 is initialized to H'FF.
15.2.7 Timer R Load Register 2 (TMRL2)
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
1
W
TMR27
W
TMR26
W
TMR25
W
TMR24
W
TMR23
W
TMR22
W
TMR21
W
TMR20
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The timer R load register 2 (TMRL2) is an 8-bit write only register which works to set the load
value of the TMRU-2.
When a load value is set to the TMRL2, the same value will be set to the TMRU-2 counter
simultaneously and the counter starts counting down from the set value. Also, when the counter
underflows or a CFG edge is detected during the course of the reload timer operation, the TMRL2
value will be set to the counter.
When reset, the TMRL2 is initialized to H'FF.
Section 15 Timer R
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 301 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
15.2.8 Timer R Load Register 3 (TMRL3)
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
1
W
TMR37
W
TMR36
W
TMR35
W
TMR34
W
TMR33
W
TMR32
W
TMR31
W
TMR30
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The timer R load register 3 (TMRL3) is an 8-bit write only register which works to set the load
value of the TMRU-3.
When a load value is set to the TMRL3, the same value will be set to the TMRU-3 counter
simultaneously and the counter starts counting down from the set value. Also, when the counter
underflows or a DVCTL edge is detected, the TMRL2 value will be set to the counter. (Reloading
will be made by the underflowing signals when the DVCTL signal is selected as the clock source,
and reloading will be made by the DVCTL signals when the dividing clock is selected as the clock
source.)
When reset, the TMRL3 is initialized to H'FF.
15.2.9 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR)
7
1
MSTP15
R/W
MSTPCRH
6
1
MSTP14
R/W
5
1
MSTP13
R/W
4
1
MSTP12
R/W
3
1
MSTP11
R/W
2
1
MSTP10
R/W
1
1
MSTP9
R/W
0
1
MSTP8
R/W
7
1
MSTP7
R/W
6
1
MSTP6
R/W
5
1
MSTP5
R/W
4
1
MSTP4
R/W
3
1
MSTP3
R/W
2
1
MSTP2
R/W
1
1
MSTP1
R/W
0
1
MSTP0
R/W
MSTPCRL
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The MSTPCR are 8-bit read/write twin registers which work to control the module stop mode.
When the MSTP11 bit is set to 1, timer R stops its operation at the ending point of the bus cycle to
shift to the module stop mode. For more information, see section 4.5, Module Stop Mode.
When reset, the MSTPCR is initialized to H'FFFF.
Bit 3⎯Module Stop (MSTP11): This bit works to designate the module stop mode for the Timer
R.
MSTPCRH
Bit 3
MSTP11 Description
0 Cancels the module stop mode of timer R
1 Sets the module stop mode of timer R (Initial value)
Section 15 Timer R
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 302 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
15.3 Operation
15.3.1 Reload Timer Counter Equipped with Capturing Function TMRU-1
TMRU-1 is a reload timer counter equipped with capturing function. It consists of an 8-bit down-
counter, a reloading register and a capture register.
The clock source can be selected from among the leading edge of the CFG signals and three types
of dividing clocks. It is also selectable whether using it as a reload counter or as a capture counter.
Even when the capturing function is selected, the counter readings can be updated by writing the
values into the reloading register.
When the counter underflows, the TMRI1 interrupt request will be issued.
The initial values of the TMRU-1 counter, reloading register and capturing register are all H'FF.
• Operation of the Reload Timer
When a value is written into to the reloading register, the same value will be written into the
counter simultaneously. Also, when the counter underflows, the reloading register value will
be reloaded to the counter. The TMRU-1 is a dividing circuit for the CFG. In combination with
the TMRU-2 and TMRU-3, it can also be used for the mode identification purpose.
• Capturing Operation
Capturing operation is carried out in combination with the TMRU-2 using the combined 16
bits. It can be so programmed that the counter may be cleared by the capture signal. The CFG
edges or IRQ3 edges are used as the capture signals. It is possible to issue the TMRI3 interrupt
request by the capture signal.
In addition to the capturing function being worked out in combination with the TMRU-2, the
TMRU-1 can be used as a 16-bit CFG counter. Selecting the IRQ3 as the capture signal, the
CFG within the duration of the reel pulse being input into the IRQ3 pin can be counted by the
TMRU-1.
15.3.2 Reload Timer Counter Equipped with Capturing Function TMRU-2
TMRU-2 is a reload timer counter equipped with capturing function. It consists of an 8-bit down-
counter, a reloading register and a capture register.
The clock source can be selected from among the undedrflowing signal of the TMRU-1 and three
types of dividing clocks. Also, although the reloading function is workable during its capturing
operation, equipping or not of the reloading function is selectable. Even when without-reloading-
function is chosen, the counter reading can be updated by writing the values to the reloading
register.
When the counter underflows, the TMRI2 interrupt request will be issued.
The initial values of the TMRU-2 counter, reloading register and capturing register are all H'FF.
Section 15 Timer R
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 303 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
• Operation of the Reload Timer
When a value is written into to the reloading register, the same value will be written into the
counter, simultaneously. Also, when the counter underflows or when a CFG edge is detected,
the reloading register value will be reloaded to the counter.
The TMRU-2 can make acceleration and braking work for the capstan motor using the reload
timer operation.
• Capturing Operation
Using the capture signals, the counter reading can be latched into the capturing register. As the
capture signal, you can choose from among edges of the CFG, edges of the IRQ3 or the
underflow signals of the TMRU-3. It is possible to issue the TMRI3 interrupt request by the
capture signal.
The capturing function (stopping the reloading function) of the TMRU-2, in combination with
the TMRU-1 and TMRU-3, can also be used for the mode identification purpose.
15.3.3 Reload Counter Timer TMRU-3
The reload counter timer TMRU-3 consists of an 8-bit down-counter and a reloading register. Its
clock source can be selected from between the undedrflowing signal of the counter and the edges
of the DVCTL signals. (When the DVCTL signal is selected as the clock source, reloading will be
effected by the underflowing signals and when the dividing clock is selected as the clock source,
reloading will be effected by the DVCTL signals.) The reloading signal works to reload the
reloading register value into the counter. Also, when a value is written into to the reloading
register, the same value will be written into the counter, simultaneously.
The initial values of the counter and the reloading register are H'FF.
The underflowing signals can be used as the capturing signal for the TMRU-2.
The TMRU-3 can also be used as a dividing circuit for the DVCTL. Also, in combination with the
TMRU-1 and TMRU-2 (capturing function), the TMRU-3 can be used for the mode identification
purpose. Since the divided signals of the DVCTL are being used as the clock source, CTL signals
(DVCTL) conforming to the double speed can be input when making searches. These DVCTL
signals can also be used for phase controls of the capstan motor.
Also, by selecting the dividing clock as the clock source, it is possible to make a delay with the
edges of the DVCTL to provide the slow tracking mono-multi function.
Section 15 Timer R
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 304 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
15.3.4 Mode Identification
When making mode identification (2/4/6 identification) of the SP/LP/EP modes of reproducing
tapes, the TMRU-1 (CFG dividing circuit), TMRU-2 (capturing function/without reloading
function) and TMRU-3 (DVCTL dividing circuit) of timer R should be used.
Timer R will become to the aforementioned status after a reset.
Under the aforementioned status, the divided CFG should be written into the reloading register of
the TMRU-1 and divided DVCTL should be written into the reloading register of the TMRU-3.
When the TMRU-3 underflows, the counter value of the TMRU-2 is captured. Such capturing
register value represents the number of the CFG within the DVCTL cycle.
As aforementioned, the Timer R can work to count the number of the CFG corresponding to n
times of DVCTL's or to identify the mode being searched.
For register settings, see section 15.5.1, Mode Identification.
15.3.5 Reeling Controls
CFG counts can be captured by making 16-bit capturing operation combining the TMRU-1 and
TMRU-2. Choosing the IRQ3 as the capture signal and counting the CFG within the duration of
the reel pulse being input through the IRQ3 pin affect reeling controls. For register settings, see
section 15.5.2, Reeling Controls.
15.3.6 Acceleration and Braking Processes of the Capstan Motor
When making intermittent movements such as those for slow reproductions or for still
reproductions, it is necessary to conduct quick accelerations and abrupt stoppings of the capstan
motor. The acceleration and braking processes functions to check if the revolution of a capstan
motor has reached the prescribed rate when accelerated or braked. For this purpose, the TMRU-2
(reloading function) should be used.
When making accelerations:
• Set the AC/BR bit of the TMRM1 to acceleration (set to 1). Also, use the rising edge of the
CFG as the reloading signal.
• Set the prescribed time on the CFG frequency to determine if the acceleration has been
finished, into the reloading register.
• The TMRU-2 will work to down-count the reloading data.
• In case the acceleration has not been finished (in case the CFG signal is not input even when
the prescribed time has elapsed = underflowing of down-counting has occurred), such
underflowing works to set to CFG mask F/F (masking movement) and the reload timer will be
cleared by the CFG.
Section 15 Timer R
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 305 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
• When the acceleration has been finished (when the CFG signal is input before the prescribed
time has elapsed = reloading movement has been made before the down counter underflows),
an interrupt request will be issued because of the CFG.
When making breaking:
• Set the AC/BR bit of the TMRM1 to braking (clear to 0). Also, use the rising edge of the CFG
as the reloading signal.
• Set the prescribed time on the CFG frequency to determine if the braking has been finished,
into the reloading register.
• The TMRU-2 will work to down-count the reloading data.
• If the braking has not finished (when the CFG signal is input before the prescribed time has
elapsed and reloading movement has been made before the down counter underflows), the
reload timer movement will continue.
• When the acceleration has finished (when the CFG signal is not input even when the
prescribed time has elapsed and underflowing of down-counting has occurred), interrupt
request will be issued because of the underflowing signal.
The acceleration and braking processes should be employed when making special reproductions,
in combination with the slow tracking mono-multi function outlined in section 15.3.7, Slow
Tracking Mono-Multi Function.
For register settings, see section 15.5.4, Acceleration and Braking Processes of the Capstan Motor.
15.3.7 Slow Tracking Mono-Multi Function
When performing slow reproductions or still reproductions, the braking timing for the capstan
motor is determined by use of the edge of the DVCTL signal. The slow tracking mono-multi
function works to measure the time from the rising edge of the DVCTL signal down to the desired
point to issue the interrupt request. In actual programming, this interrupt should be used to activate
the brake of the capstan motor. The TMRU-3 should be used to perform time measurements for
the slow tracking mono-multi function. Also, the braking process can be made using the TMRU-2.
Figure 15.2 shows the time series movements when a slow reproduction is being performed.
For register settings, see section 15.5.3, Slow Tracking Mono-Multi Function.
Section 15 Timer R
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 306 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
HSW
FG acceleration detection
Compensation for vertical vibrations
(Supplementary V-pulse)
DVCTL↑Interrupt
Reloading
Reverse
rotation
Frame feeds
Compensation for
horizontal vibrations
Compensation for
horizontal vibrations
Braking
process
Acceleration
process
Slow tracking
delay
C.Rotary
H.AmpSW
Accelerating the
capstan motor
Braking the
drum motor
Slow tracking
mono-multi
Braking the
capstan motor
Servo
Hi-Z
Legend:
Hi-Z : High impedance state
In case of 4-head SP mode.
In case of 2-head application, H.AmpSW and
C.Rotary should be "Low".
FG stopping detection
Forward
rotation
Figure 15.2 Time Series Movements when a Slow Reproduction
Is Being Performed
Section 15 Timer R
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 307 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
15.4 Interrupt Cause
In timer R, bits TMRI1 to TMRI3 of the timer R control/status register cause interrupts. The
following are descriptions of the interrupts.
1. Interrupts caused by the underflowing of the TMRU-1 (TMRI1)
These interrupts will constitute the timing for reloading with the TMRU-1.
2. Interrupts caused by the underflowing of the TMRU-2 or by an end of the acceleration or
braking process (TMRI2)
When interrupts occur at the reload timing of the TMRU-2, clear the AC/BR
(acceleration/braking) bit of the timer R mode register 1 (TMRM1) to 0.
3. Interrupts caused by the capture signals of the TMRU-2 and by ending the slow tracking
mono-multi process (TMRI3)
Since these two interrupt causes are constituting the OR, it becomes necessary to determine
which interrupt cause is occurring using the software.
Respective interrupt causes are being set to the CAPF flag or the SLW flag of the timer R
mode register 2 (TMRM2), have the software determine which.
Since the CAPF flag and the SLW flag will not be cleared automatically, program the software
to clear them. (Writing 0 only is valid for these flags.) Unless these flags are cleared, detection
of the next cause becomes unworkable. Also, if the CP/SLM bit is changed leaving these flags
uncleared as they are, these flags will get cleared.
Section 15 Timer R
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 308 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
15.5 Settings for Respective Functions
15.5.1 Mode Identification
When making mode identification (2/4/6 identification) of the SP/LP/EP modes of reproducing
tapes, the TMRU-1 (CFG dividing circuit), TMRU-2 (capturing function/without reloading
function) and TMRU-3 (DVCTL dividing circuit) of the timer R should be used.
Timer R will be initialized to this mode identification status after a reset.
Under this status, the divided CFG should be written into the reloading register of the TMRU-1
and divided DVCTL should be written into the reloading register of the TMRU-3. When the
TMRU-3 underflows, the counter value of the TMRU-2 is captured. Such capturing register value
represents the number of the CFG within the DVCTL cycle.
Thus, timer R can work to count the number of the CFG corresponding to n times of DVCTL's or
to identify the mode being searched.
Settings
• Setting the timer R mode register 1 (TMRM1)
⎯ CLR2 bit (bit 7) = 1: Works to clear after making the TMRU-2 capture.
⎯ RLD bit (bit 5) = 0: Sets the TMRU-2 without reloading function.
⎯ PS21 and PS20 (bits 3 and 2) = (0 and 0): The underflowing signals of the TMRU-1 are to
be used as the clock source for the TMRU-2.
⎯ RLD/CAP bit (bit 1) = 0: The TMRU-1 has been set to make the reload timer operation.
• Setting the timer R mode register 2 (TMRM2)
⎯ LAT bit (bit 7) = 0: The underflowing signals of the TMRU-3 are to be used as the capture
signal for the TMRU-2.
⎯ PS11 and PS10 (bits 6 and 5) = (0 and 0): The leading edge of the CFG signal is to be used
as the clock source for the TMRU-1.
⎯ PS31 and PS30 (bits 4 and 3) = (0 and 0): The leading edge of the DVCTL signal is to be
used as the clock source for the TMRU-3.
⎯ CP/SLM bit (bit 2) = 0: The capture signal is to work to issue the TMRI3 interrupt request.
• Setting the timer R load register 1 (TMRL1)
⎯ Set the dividing value for the CFG. The set value should become (n −1) when divided by n.
• Setting the timer R load register 3 (TMRL3)
⎯ Set the dividing value for the DVCTL. The set value should become (n −1) when divided
by n.
Section 15 Timer R
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 309 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
15.5.2 Reeling Controls
CFG counts can be captured by making 16-bit capturing operation combining the TMRU-1 and
TMRU-2. By choosing the IRQ3 as the capture signal, and by counting the CFG within the
duration of the reel pulse being input through the IRQ3 pin, reeling controls, etc. can be effected.
Settings
• Setting P13/IRQ3 pin as the IRQ3 pin
⎯ Set the PMR13 bit (bit 3) of the port mode register 1 (PMR1) to 1. See section 6.2.6, Port
Mode Register (PMR1).
• Setting the timer R mode register 1 (TMRM1)
⎯ CLR2 bit (bit 7) = 1: Works to clear after making the TMRU-2 capture.
⎯ PS21 and PS20 (bits 3 and 2) = (0 and 0): The underflowing signals of the TMRU-1 are to
be used as the clock source for the TMRU-2.
⎯ RLD/CAP bit (bit 1) = 1: The TMRU-1 has been set to make the capturing operation.
⎯ CPS bit (bit 0) = 1: The edge of the IRQ3 signal is to be used as the capture signal for the
TMRU-1 and TMRU-2.
• Setting the timer R mode register 2 (TMRM2)
⎯ LAT bit (bit 7) = 1: The edge of the IRQ3 signal is to be used as the capture signal for the
TMRU-1 and TMRU-2.
⎯ PS11 and PS10 (bits 6 and 5) = (0 and 0): The rising edge of the CFG signal is to be used
as the clock source for the TMRU-1.
⎯ CP/SLM bit (bit 2) = 0: The capture signal is to work to issue the TMRI3 interrupt request.
Section 15 Timer R
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 310 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
15.5.3 Slow Tracking Mono-Multi Function
When performing slow reproductions or still reproductions, the braking timing for the capstan
motor is determined by use of the edge of the DVCTL signal. The slow tracking mono-multi
function works to measure the time from the leading edge of the DVCTL signal down to the
desired point to issue the interrupt request. In actual programming, this interrupt should be used to
activate the brake of the capstan motor. The TMRU-3 should be used to perform time
measurements for the slow tracking mono-multi function. Also, the braking process can be made
using the TMRU-2.
Settings
• Setting the timer R mode register 2 (TMRM2)
⎯ PS31 and PS30 (bits 4 and 3) = Other than (0, 0): The dividing clock is to be used as the
clock source for the TMRU-3.
⎯ CP/SLM bit (bit 2) = 1: The slow tracking delay signal is to work to issue the TMRI3
interrupt request.
• Setting the timer R load register 3 (TMRL3)
⎯ Set the slow tracking delay value. When the delay count is n, the set value should be
(n – 1).
⎯ Regarding the delaying duration, see figure 15.2.
Section 15 Timer R
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 311 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
15.5.4 Acceleration and Braking Processes of the Capstan Motor
When making intermittent movements such as those for slow reproductions or for still
reproductions, it is necessary to conduct quick accelerations and abrupt stoppings of the capstan
motor. The acceleration and braking processes will function to check if the revolution of a capstan
motor has reached the prescribed rate when accelerated or braked. For this purpose, the TMRU-2
(reloading function) should be used.
The acceleration and braking processes should be employed when making special reproductions,
in combination with the slow tracking mono-multi function.
Settings for the acceleration process
• Setting the timer R mode register 1 (TMRM1)
⎯ AC/BR bit (bit 6) = 1: Acceleration process
⎯ RLD bit (bit 5) = 1: The TMRU-2 is to be used as the reload timer.
⎯ RLCK bit (bit 4) = 0: The TMRU-2 is to reload at the rising edge of the CFG.
⎯ PS21 and PS20 (bits 3 and 2) = Other than (0, 0): The dividing clock is to be used as the
clock source for the TMRU-2.
• Setting the timer R load register 2 (TMRL2)
⎯ Set the count reading for the duration until the acceleration process finishes. When the
count is n, the set value should be (n − 1).
⎯ Regarding the duration until the acceleration process finishes, see figure 15.2.
Settings for the braking process
• Setting the timer R mode register 1 (TMRM1)
⎯ AC/BR bit (bit 6) = 0: Braking process
⎯ RLD bit (bit 5) = 1: The TMRU-2 is to be used as the reload timer.
⎯ RLCK bit (bit 4) = 0: The TMRU-2 is to reload at the rising edge of the CFG.
⎯ PS21 and PS20 (bits 3 and 2) = Other than (0, 0): The dividing clock is to be used as the
clock source for the TMRU-2.
• Setting the timer R load register 2 (TMRL2)
⎯ Set the count reading for the duration until the braking process finishes. When the count is
n, the set value should be (n – 1).
⎯ Regarding the duration until the braking process finishes, see figure 15.2.
Section 15 Timer R
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 312 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Section 16 Timer X1
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 313 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Section 16 Timer X1
Note: The Timer X1 is not (incorporated in) provided for the H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S.
16.1 Overview
Timer X1 is capable of outputting two different types of independent waveforms using a 16-bit
free running counter (FRC) as the basic means and it is also applicable to measurements of the
durations of input pulses and the cycles external clocks.
16.1.1 Features
Timer X1 has the following features:
• Four different types of counter inputting clocks.
Three different types of internal clocks (φ/4, φ/16 and φ/64) and the DVCFG.
• Two independent output comparing functions
Capable of outputting two different types of independent waveforms.
• Four independent input capturing functions
The rising edge or falling edge can be selected for use. The buffer operation can also be
designated.
• Counter clearing designation is workable.
The counter readings can be cleared by compare match A.
• Seven types of interrupt causes
Comparing match × 2 causes, input capture × 4 causes and overflow × 1 cause are available for
use and they can make respective interrupt requests independently.
Section 16 Timer X1
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 314 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
16.1.2 Block Diagram
Figure 16.1 shows a block diagram of the Timer X1.
Internal data bus
Legend:
TIER
ICRA
ICRB
ICRC
ICRD
TCRX
OCRB
Comparison circuit
FRC
Comparison circuit
OCRA
TOCR
TCSRX
TIER
Input
capture
control
Output comparing output
Interrupt
request × 7
FTOA
FTOB
FTIA*
(HSW)
FTIB*
(VD)
FTIC*
(DVCTL)
FTID*
(NHSW)
(DVCFG)
φ/4
φ/16
φ/64
TCSRX
FRC
OCRA
OCRB
TCRX
TOCR
ICRA
ICRB
ICRC
ICRD
: Timer interrupt enabling register
: Timer control/status register X
: Free running counter
: Output comparing register A
: Output comparing register B
: Timer control register X
: Output comparing control register
: Input capture register A
: Input capture register B
: Input capture register C
: Input capture register D
Note: * stands for the external terminal.
( ) stands for the internal signal.
Figure 16.1 Block Diagram of Timer X1
Section 16 Timer X1
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 315 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
16.1.3 Pin Configuration
Table 16.1 shows the pin configuration of timer X1.
Table 16.1 Pin Configuration
Name Abbrev. I/O Function
Output comparing A output-pin FTOA Output Output pin for the output comparing A
Output comparing B output-pin FTOB Output Output pin for the output comparing B
Input capture A input-pin FTIA Input Input-pin for the input capture A
Input capture B input-pin FTIB Input Input-pin for the input capture B
Input capture C input-pin FTIC Input Input-pin for the input capture C
Input capture D input-pin FTID Input Input-pin for the input capture D
Section 16 Timer X1
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 316 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
16.1.4 Register Configuration
Table 16.2 shows the register configuration of timer X1.
Table 16.2 Register Configuration
Name Abbrev. R/W Initial Value Address*3
Timer interrupt enabling register TIER R/W H'00 H'D100
Timer control/status register X TCSRX R/ (W)*1 H'00 H'D101
Free running counter H FRCH R/W H'00 H'D102
Free running counter L FRCL R/W H'00 H'D103
Output comparing register AH OCRAH R/W H'FF H'D104*2
Output comparing register AL OCRAL R/W H'FF H'D105*2
Output comparing register BH OCRBH R/W H'FF H'D104*2
Output comparing register BL OCRBL R/W H'FF H'D105*2
Timer control register X TCRX R/W H'00 H'D106
Timer output comparing control register TOCR R/W H'00 H'D107
Input capture register AH ICRAH R H'00 H'D108
Input capture register AL ICRAL R H'00 H'D109
Input capture register BH ICRBH R H'00 H'D10A
Input capture register BL ICRBL R H'00 H'D10B
Input capture register CH ICRCH R H'00 H'D10C
Input capture register CL ICRCL R H'00 H'D10D
Input capture register DH ICRDH R H'00 H'D10E
Input capture register DL ICRDL R H'00 H'D10F
Notes: 1. Only 0 can be written to clear the flag for Bits 7 to 1. Bit 0 is readable/writable.
2. The addresses of the OCRA and OCRB are the same. Changeover between them are
to be made by use of the TOCR bit and OCRS bit.
3. Lower 16 bits of the address.
Section 16 Timer X1
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 317 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
16.2 Register Descriptions
16.2.1 Free Running Counter (FRC)
Free running counter H (FRCH)
Free running counter L (FRCL)
0
3
0
R/W
5
0
R/W
7
0
9
0
R/W
11
0
13
0
15
R/WR/WR/W
0
R/W R/W
1
0
2
0
R/W
4
0
R/W
6
0
8
0
R/W
10
0
12
0
14
FRC
FRCH FRCL
R/WR/WR/WR/W
0
R/W
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The FRC is a 16-bit read/write up-counter which counts up by the inputting internal clock/external
clock. The inputting clock is to be selected from the CKS1 and CKS0 of the TCRX.
By the setting of the CCLRA bit of the TCSRX, the FRC can be cleared by comparing match A.
When the FRC overflows (H'FFFF → H'0000), the OVF of the TCSRX will be set to 1.
At this time, when the OVIE of the TIER is being set to 1, an interrupt request will be issued to the
CPU.
Reading/writing can be made from and to the FRC through the CPU at 8-bit or 16-bit.
The FRC is initialized to H'0000 when reset or under the standby mode, watch mode, subsleep
mode, module stop mode or subactive mode.
16.2.2 Output Comparing Registers A and B (OCRA and OCRB)
Output comparing register AH and BH (OCRAH and OCRBH)
Output comparing register AL and BL (OCRAL and OCRBL)
1
3
1
R/W
5
1
R/W
7
1
9
1
R/W
11
1
13
1
15
R/WR/WR/W
1
R/W R/W
1
1
2
1
R/W
4
1
R/W
6
1
8
1
R/W
10
1
12
1
14
OCRA, OCRB
OCRAH, OCRBH OCRAL, OCRBL
R/WR/WR/WR/W
1
R/W
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The OCR consists of twin 16-bit read/write registers (OCRA and OCRB). The contents of the
OCR are always being compared with the FRC and, when the value of these two match, the OCFA
and OCRB of the TCSRX will be set to 1. At this time, if the OCIAE and OCIB of the TIER are
Section 16 Timer X1
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 318 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
being set to 1, an interrupt request will be issued to the CPU.
When performing compare matching, if the OEA and OEB of the TOCR are set to 1, the level
value set to the OLVLA and OLVLB of the TOCR will be output through the FTOA and FTOB
pins. After resetting, 0 will be output through the FTOA and FTOB pins until the first compare
matching occurs.
Reading/writing can be made from and to the OCR through the CPU at 8-bit or 16-bit.
The OCR is cleared to H'FFFF when reset or under the standby mode, watch mode, subsleep
mode, module stop mode or subactive mode.
16.2.3 Input Capture Registers A through D (ICRA through ICRD)
Input capture register AH to DH (ICRAH to ICRDH)
Input capture register AL to DL (ICRAL to ICRDL)
0
3
0
R
5
0
R
7
0
9
0
R
11
0
13
0
15
RRR
0
RR
1
0
2
0
R
4
0
R
6
0
8
0
R
10
0
12
0
14
ICRA, ICRB, ICRC, ICRD
ICRAH, ICRBH, ICRCH, ICRDH ICRAL, ICRBL, ICRCL, ICRDL
RRRR
0
R
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The ICR consists of four 16-bit read-only registers (ICRA through ICRD).
When the falling edge of the input capture input signal is detected, the value is transferred to the
ICRA through ICRD. The ICFA through ICFD of the TCSRX are set to 1 simultaneously. If the
IDIAE through IDIDE of the TCRX are all set to 1, an interrupt request will be issued to the CPU.
The edge of the input signal can be selected by setting the IEDGA through IEDGD of the TCRX.
The ICRC and ICRD can also be used as the buffer register, of the ICRA and ICRB, respectively
by setting the BUFEA and BUFEB of the TCRX to perform buffer operations. Figure 16.2 shows
the connections necessary when using the ICRC as the buffer register of the ICRA. (BUFEA = 1)
When the ICRC is used as the buffer of the ICRA, by setting IEDGA ≠ IEDGC, both of the rising
and falling edges can be designated for use. In case of IEDGA = IEDGC, either one of the rising
edge or the falling edge only is usable. Regarding selection of the input signal edge, see table 16.3.
Note: Transference from the FRC to the ICR will be performed regardless of the value of the
ICF.
Section 16 Timer X1
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 319 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Edge detection and
capture signal
generating circuit.
BUFEAIEDGA
FTIA
IEDGC
ICRC ICRA FRC
Figure 16.2 Buffer Operation (Example)
Table 16.3 Input Signal Edge Selection when Making Buffer Operation
IEDGA IEDGC Selection of the Input Signal Edge
0 Captures at the falling edge of the input capture input A (Initial value)
0
1
1 0
Captures at both rising and falling edges of the input capture input A
1 Captures at the rising edge of the input capture input A
Reading can be made from the ICR through the CPU at 8-bit or 16-bit.
For stable input capturing operation, maintain the pulse duration of the input capture input signals
at 1.5 system clock (φ) or more in case of single edge capturing and at 2.5 system clock (φ) or
more in case of both edge capturing.
The ICR is initialized to H'0000 when reset or under the standby mode, watch mode, subsleep
mode, module stop mode or subactive mode.
16.2.4 Timer Interrupt Enabling Register (TIER)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
0
6
0
7
R/WR/WR/W
ICICE
R/W
ICIBE
0
R/W
ICIAE ICIDE OCIAE OCIBE OVIE ICSA
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The TIER is an 8-bit read/write register that controls permission/prohibition of interrupt requests.
The TIER is initialized to H'00 when reset or under the standby mode, watch mode, subsleep
mode, module stop mode or subactive mode.
Section 16 Timer X1
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 320 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 7⎯Enabling the Input Capture Interrupt A (ICIAE): This bit works to permit/prohibit
interrupt requests (ICIA) by the ICFA when the ICFA of the TCSRX is being set to 1.
Bit 7
ICIAE Description
0 Prohibits interrupt requests (ICIA) by the ICFA (Initial value)
1 Permits interrupt requests (ICIA) by the ICFA
Bit 6⎯Enabling the Input Capture Interrupt B (ICIBE): This bit works to permit/prohibit
interrupt requests (ICIB) by the ICFB when the ICFB of the TCSRX is being set to 1.
Bit 6
ICIBE Description
0 Prohibits interrupt requests (ICIB) by the ICFB (Initial value)
1 Permits interrupt requests (ICIB) by the ICFB
Bit 5⎯Enabling the Input Capture Interrupt C (ICICE): This bit works to permit/prohibit
interrupt requests (ICIC) by the ICFC when the ICFC of the TCSRX is being set to 1.
Bit 5
ICICE Description
0 Prohibits interrupt requests (ICIC) by the ICFC (Initial value)
1 Permits interrupt requests (ICIC) by the ICFC
Bit 4⎯Enabling the Input Capture Interrupt D (ICIDE): This bit works to permit/prohibit
interrupt requests (ICID) by the ICFD when the ICFD of the TCSRX is being set to 1.
Bit 4
ICIDE Description
0 Prohibits interrupt requests (ICID) by the ICFD (Initial value)
1 Permits interrupt requests (ICID) by the ICFD
Section 16 Timer X1
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 321 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 3⎯Enabling the Output Comparing Interrupt A (OCIAE): This bit works to
permit/prohibit interrupt requests (OCIA) by the OCFA when the OCFA of the TCSRX is being
set to 1.
Bit 3
OCIAE Description
0 Prohibits interrupt requests (OCIA) by the OCFA (Initial value)
1 Permits interrupt requests (OCIA) by the OCFA
Bit 2⎯Enabling the Output Comparing Interrupt B (OCIBE): This bit works to
permit/prohibit interrupt requests (OCIB) by the OCFB when the OCFB of the TCSRX is being
set to 1.
Bit 2
OCIBE Description
0 Prohibits interrupt requests (OCIB) by the OCFB (Initial value)
1 Permits interrupt requests (OCIB) by the OCFB
Bit 1⎯Enabling the Timer Overflow Interrupt (OVIE): This bit works to permit/prohibit
interrupt requests (FOVI) by the OVF when the OVF of the TCSRX is being set to 1.
Bit 1
OVIE Description
0 Prohibits interrupt requests (FOVI) by the OVF (Initial value)
1 Permits interrupt requests (FOVI) by the OVF
Bit 0⎯Selecting the Input Capture A Signals (ICSA): This bit works to select the input capture
A signals.
Bit 0
ICSA Description
0 Selects the FTIA pin for inputting of the input capture A signals (Initial value)
1 Selects the HSW for inputting of the input capture A signals
Section 16 Timer X1
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 322 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
16.2.5 Timer Control/Status Register X (TCSRX)
0
0
1
0
2
0
3
0
4
0
5
0
6
0
7
R/WR/(W)*
ICFB
0
R/(W)*
ICFA
R/(W)*
ICFD
R/(W)*
ICFC
R/(W)*
OCFB
R/(W)*
OCFA CCLRA
R/(W)*
OVF
Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag for Bits 7 to 1.
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The TCSRX is an 8-bit register which works to select counter clearing timing and to control
respective interrupt requesting signals. The TCSRX is initialized to H'00 when reset or under the
standby mode, watch mode, subsleep mode, module stop mode or subactive mode.
Meanwhile, as for the timing, see section 16.3, Operation.
The FTIA through FTID pins are for fixed inputs inside the LSI under the low power consumption
mode excluding the sleep mode. Consequently, when such shifts as active mode → low power
consumption mode → active mode are made, wrong edges may be detected depending on the pin
status or on the type of the detecting edge.
To avoid such error, clear the interrupt requesting flag once immediately after shifting to the active
mode from the low power consumption mode.
Bit 7⎯Input Capture Flag A (ICFA): This is a status flag indicating the fact that the value of
the FRC has been transferred to the ICRA by the input capture signals.
When the BUFEA of the TCRX is being set to 1, the ICFA indicates the status that the FRC value
has been transferred to the ICRA by the input capture signals and that the ICRA value before
being updated has been transferred to the ICRC.
This flag should be cleared by use of of the software. Such setting should only be made by use of
the hardware. It is not possible to make this setting using a software.
Bit 7
ICFA Description
0 [Clearing condition] (Initial value)
When 0 is written into the ICFA after reading the ICFA under the setting of ICFA = 1
1 [Setting condition]
When the value of the FRC has been transferred to the ICRA by the input capture
signals
Section 16 Timer X1
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 323 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 6⎯Input Capture Flag B (ICFB): This status flag indicates the fact that the value of the
FRC has been transferred to the ICRB by the input capture signals.
When the BUFEB of the TCRX is being set to 1, the ICFB indicates the status that the FRC value
has been transferred to the ICRB by the input capture signals and that the ICRB value before being
updated has been transferred to the ICRC.
This flag should be cleared by use of the software. Such setting should only be made by use of the
hardware. It is not possible to make this setting using a software.
Bit 6
ICFB Description
0 [Clearing condition] (Initial value)
When 0 is written into the ICFB after reading the ICFB under the setting of ICFB = 1
1 [Setting condition]
When the value of the FRC has been transferred to the ICRB by the input capture
signals
Bit 5⎯Input Capture Flag C (ICFC): This status flag indicates the fact that the value of the
FRC has been transferred to the ICRC by the input capture signals.
When an input capture signal occurs while the BUFEA of the TCRX is being set to 1, although the
ICFC will be set out, data transference to the ICRC will not be performed.
Therefore, in buffer operation, the ICFC can be used as an external interrupt by setting the ICICE
bit to 1.
This flag should be cleared by use of the software. Such setting should only be made by use of the
hardware. It is not possible to make this setting using a software.
Bit 5
ICFC Description
0 [Clearing condition] (Initial value)
When 0 is written into the ICFC after reading the ICFC under the setting of ICFC = 1
1 [Setting condition]
When the input capture signal has occurred
Section 16 Timer X1
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 324 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 4⎯Input Capture Flag D (ICFD): This status flag indicates the fact that the value of the
FRC has been transferred to the ICRD by the input capture signals.
When an input capture signal occurs while the BUFEB of the TCRX is being set to 1, although the
ICFD will be set out, data transference to the ICRD will not be performed.
Therefore, in buffer operation, the ICFD can be used as an external interrupt by setting the ICIDE
bit to 1.
This flag should be cleared by use of the software. Such setting should only be made by use of the
hardware. It is not possible to make this setting using a software.
Bit 4
ICFD Description
0 [Clearing condition] (Initial value)
When 0 is written into the ICFD after reading the ICFD under the setting of ICFD = 1
1 [Setting condition]
When the input capture signal has occurred
Bit 3⎯Output Comparing Flag A (OCFA): This status flag indicates the fact that the FRC and
the OCRA have come to a comparing match.
This flag should be cleared by use of the software. Such setting should only be made by use of the
hardware. It is not possible to make this setting using a software.
Bit 3
OCFA Description
0 [Clearing condition] (Initial value)
When 0 is written into the OCFA after reading the OCFA under the setting of OCFA =
1
1 [Setting condition]
When the FRC and the OCRA have come to the comparing match
Section 16 Timer X1
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 325 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 2⎯Output Comparing Flag B (OCFB): This status flag indicates the fact that the FRC and
the OCRB have come to a comparing match.
This flag should be cleared by use of the software. Such setting should only be made by use of the
hardware. It is not possible to make this setting using a software.
Bit 2
OCFB Description
0 [Clearing condition] (Initial value)
When 0 is written into the OCFB after reading the OCFB under the setting of OCFB =
1
1 [Setting condition]
When the FRC and the OCRB have come to the comparing match
Bit 1⎯Timer Over Flow (OVF): This is a status flag indicating the fact that the FRC
overflowed. (H'FFFF → H'0000).
This flag should be cleared by use of the software. Such setting should only be made by use of the
hardware. It is not possible to make this setting using a software.
Bit 1
OVF Description
0 [Clearing condition] (Initial value)
When 0 is written into the OVF after reading the OVF under the setting of OVF = 1
1 [Setting condition]
When the FRC value has become H'FFFF → H'0000
Bit 0⎯Counter Clearing (CCLRA): This bit works to select if or not to clear the FRC by
occurrence of comparing match A (matching signal of the FRC and OCRA).
Bit 0
CCLRA Description
0 Prohibits clearing of the FRC by occurrence of comparing match A (Initial value)
1 Permits clearing of the FRC by occurrence of comparing match A
Section 16 Timer X1
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 326 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
16.2.6 Timer Control Register X (TCRX)
0
0
1
0
2
0
3
0
4
0
5
0
6
0
7
R/WR/W
IEDGB
0
R/W
IEDGA
R/W
IEDGD
R/W
IEDGC
R/W
BUFEB
R/W
BUFEA CKS0
R/W
CKS1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The TCRX is an 8-bit read/write register that selects the input capture signal edge, designates the
buffer operation, and selects the inputting clock for the FRC.
The TCRX is initialized to H'00 when reset or under the standby mode, watch mode, subsleep
mode, module stop mode or subactive mode.
Bit 7⎯Input Capture Signal Edge Selection A (IEDGA): This bit works to select the rising
edge or falling edge of the input capture signal A (FTIA).
Bit 7
IEDGA Description
0 Captures the falling edge of the input capture signal A (Initial value)
1 Captures the rising edge of the input capture signal A
Bit 6⎯Input Capture Signal Edge Selection B (IEDGB): This bit works to select the rising
edge or falling edge of the input capture signal B (FTIB).
Bit 6
IEDGB Description
0 Captures the falling edge of the input capture signal B (Initial value)
1 Captures the rising edge of the input capture signal B
Bit 5⎯Input Capture Signal Edge Selection C (IEDGC): This bit works to select the rising
edge or falling edge of the input capture signal C (FTIC). However, when the DVCTL has been
selected as the signal for the input capture signal edge selection C, this bit will not influence the
operation.
Bit 5
IEDGC Description
0 Captures the falling edge of the input capture signal C (Initial value)
1 Captures the rising edge of the input capture signal C
Section 16 Timer X1
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 327 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 4⎯Input Capture Signal Edge Selection D (IEDGD): This bit works to select the rising
edge or falling edge of the input capture signal D (FTID).
Bit 4
IEDGD Description
0 Captures the falling edge of the input capture signal D (Initial value)
1 Captures the rising edge of the input capture signal D
Bit 3⎯Buffer Enabling A (BUFEA): This bit works to select whether or not to use the ICRC as
the buffer register for the ICRA.
Bit 3
BUFEA Description
0 Not using the ICRC as the buffer register for the ICRA (Initial value)
1 Using the ICRC as the buffer register for the ICRA
Bit 2⎯Buffer Enabling B (BUFEB): This bit works to select whether or not to use the ICRD as
the buffer register for the ICRB.
Bit 2
BUFEB Description
0 Not using the ICRD as the buffer register for the ICRB (Initial value)
1 Using the ICRD as the buffer register for the ICRB
Bits 1 and 0⎯Clock Select (CKS1, CKS0): These bits work to select the inputting clock to the
FRC from among three types of internal clocks and the DVCFG.
The DVCFG is the edge detecting pulse selected by the CFG dividing timer.
Bit 1 Bit 0
CKS1 CKS0 Description
0 0 Internal clock: Counts at φ/4 (Initial value)
0 1 Internal clock: Counts at φ/16
1 0 Internal clock: Counts at φ/64
1 1 DVCFG: The edge detecting pulse selected by the CFG dividing timer
Section 16 Timer X1
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 328 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
16.2.7 Timer Output Comparing Control Register (TOCR)
0
0
1
0
2
0
3
0
4
0
5
0
6
0
7
R/W R/W
ICSC
0
R/W
ICSB
R/W
OCRS
R/W
ICSD
R/W
OEB
R/W
OEA OLVLB
R/W
OLVLA
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The TOCR is an 8-bit read/write register that select input capture signals and output comparing
output level, permits output comparing outputs, and controls switching over of the access of the
OCRA and OCRB. See section 16.2.4, Timer Interrupt Enabling Register (TIER) regarding the
input capture inputs A.
The TOCR is initialized to H'00 when reset or under the standby mode, watch mode, subsleep
mode, module stop mode or subactive mode.
Bit 7⎯Selecting the Input Capture B Signals (ICSB): This bit works to select the input capture
B signals.
Bit 7
ICSB Description
0 Selects the FTIB pin for inputting of the input capture B signals (Initial value)
1 Selects the VD as the input capture B signals
Bit 6⎯Selecting the Input Capture C Signals (ICSC): This bit works to select the input capture
C signals. The DVCTL is the edge detecting pulse selected by the CTL dividing timer.
Bit 6
ICSC Description
0 Selects the FTIC pin for inputting of the input capture C signals (Initial value)
1 Selects the DVCTL as the input capture C signals
Bit 5⎯Selecting the Input Capture D Signals (ICSD): This bit works to select the input capture
D signals.
Bit 5
ICSD Description
0 Selects the FTID pin for inputting of the input capture D signals (Initial value)
1 Selects the NHSW as the input capture D signals
Section 16 Timer X1
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 329 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 4⎯Selecting the Output Comparing Register (OCRS): The addresses of the OCRA and
OCRB are the same. The OCRS works to control which register to choose when reading/writing
this address. The choice will not influence the operation of the OCRA and OCRB.
Bit 4
OCRS Description
0 Selects the OCRA register (Initial value)
1 Selects the OCRB register
Bit 3⎯Enabling the Output A (OEA): This bit works to control the output comparing A signals.
Bit 3
OEA Description
0 Prohibits the output comparing A signal outputs (Initial value)
1 Permits the output comparing A signal outputs
Bit 2⎯Enabling the Output B (OEB): This bit works to control the output comparing B signals.
Bit 2
OEB Description
0 Prohibits the output comparing B signal outputs (Initial value)
1 Permits the output comparing B signal outputs
Bit 1⎯Output Level A (OLVLA): This bit works to select the output level to output through the
FTOA pin by use of the comparing match A (matching signal between the FRC and OCRA).
Bit 1
OLVLA Description
0 Low level (Initial value)
1 High level
Section 16 Timer X1
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 330 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 0⎯Output Level B (OLVLB): This bit works to select the output level to output through the
FTOB pin by use of the comparing match B (matching signal between the FRC and OCRB).
Bit 0
OLVLB Description
0 Low level (Initial value)
1 High level
16.2.8 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR)
7
0
MSTP15
R/W
MSTPCRH
6
0
MSTP14
R/W
5
1
MSTP13
R/W
4
1
MSTP12
R/W
3
1
MSTP11
R/W
2
1
MSTP10
R/W
1
1
MSTP9
R/W
0
1
MSTP8
R/W
7
1
MSTP7
R/W
6
1
MSTP6
R/W
5
1
MSTP5
R/W
4
1
MSTP4
R/W
3
1
MSTP3
R/W
2
1
MSTP2
R/W
1
1
MSTP1
R/W
0
1
MSTP0
R/W
MSTPCRL
Initial value :
R/W :
Bit :
The MSTPCR consists of twin 8-bit read/write registers that control the module stop mode.
When the MSTP10 bit is set to 1, the Timer X1 stops its operation at the ending point of the bus
cycle to shift to the module stop mode. For more information, see section 4.5, Module Stop Mode.
When reset, the MSTPCR is initialized to H'FFFF.
Bit 2⎯Module Stop (MSTP10): This bit works to designate the module stop mode for timer X1.
MSTPCRH
Bit 2
MSTP10 Description
0 Cancels the module stop mode of the Timer X1
1 Sets the module stop mode of the Timer X1 (Initial value)
Section 16 Timer X1
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 331 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
16.3 Operation
16.3.1 Operation of Timer X1
• Output Comparing Operation
Right after resetting, the FRC is initialized to H'0000 to start counting up. The inputting clock
can be selected from among three different types of internal clocks or the external clock by
setting the CKS1 and CKS0 of the TCRX.
The contents of the FRC are always being compared with the OCRA and OCRB and, when the
value of these two match, the level set by the the OLVLA and OLVLB of the TOCR is output
through the FTOA pin and FTOB pin.
After resetting, 0 will be output through the FTOA and FTOB pins until the first compare
matching occurs.
Also, when the CCLRA of the TCSRX is being set to 1, the FRC will be cleared to H'0000
when the comparing match A occurs.
• Input Capturing Operation
Right after resetting, the FRC is initialized to H'0000 to start counting up. The inputting clock
can be selected from among three different types of internal clocks or the external clock by
setting the CKS1 and CKS0 of the TCRX.
The inputs are transferred to the IEDGA through IEDGD of the TCRX through the FTIA
through FTID pins and, at the same time, the ICFA through ICFD of the TCSRX are set to 1.
At this time, if the ICIAE through ICIED of the TIER are being set to 1, due interrupt request
will be issued to the CPU.
When the BUFEA and BUFEB of the TCRX are set to 1, the ICRC and ICRD work as the
buffer register, respectively, of the ICRA and ICRB. When the edge selected by setting the
IEDGA through IEDGD of the TCRX is input through the FTIA and FTIB pins, the value at
the time of the FRC is transferred to the ICRA and ICRB and, at the same time, the values of
the ICRA and ICRB before updating are transferred to the ICRC and ICRD. At this time, when
the ICFA and ICFB are being set to 1 and if the ICIAE and ICIBE of the TIER are being set to
1, due interrupt request will be issued to the CPU.
Section 16 Timer X1
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 332 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
16.3.2 Counting Timing of the FRC
The FRC is counted up by the inputting clock. By setting the CKS1 and CKS0 of the TCRX, the
inputting clock can be selected from among three different types of clocks (φ/4, φ/16 and φ/64)
and the DVCFG.
• Internal Clock Operation
By setting the CKS1 and CKS0 bits of the TCRX, three types of internal clocks (φ/4, φ/16 and
φ/64), generated by dividing the system clock (φ) can be selected. Figure 16.3 shows the
timing chart.
FRC
Internal clock
φ
FRC input
clock
NN − 1 N + 1
Figure 16.3 Count Timing for Internal Clock Operation
• DVCFG Clock Operation
By setting the CKS1 and CKS0 bits of the TCRX to 1, DVCFG clock input can be selected.
The DVCFG clock makes counting by use of the edge detecting pulse being selected by the
CFG dividing timer.
Figure 16.4 shows the timing chart.
FRC
CFG
FRC input
clock
φ
N N + 1
DVCFG
Figure 16.4 Count Timing for CFG Clock Operation
Section 16 Timer X1
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 333 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
16.3.3 Output Comparing Signal Outputting Timing
When a comparing match occurs, the output level having been set by the OLVL of the TOCR is
output through the output comparing signal outputting pins (FTOA and FTOB).
Figure 16.5 shows the timing chart for the output comparing signal outputting A.
FRC
OLVLA
FTOA
Output comparing
signal outputting
A pin
N
N
↓ Clearing*
N
N
N + 1N + 1
Comparing match
signal
φ
OCRA
Note: * Execution of the command is to be designated by the software.
Figure 16.5 Output Comparing Signal Outputting A Timing
16.3.4 FRC Clearing Timing
The FRC can be cleared when the comparing match A occurs. Figure 16.6 shows the timing chart.
FRC
Comparing match
A signal
φ
NH' 0000
Figure 16.6 Clearing Timing by Occurrence of the Comparing Match A
Section 16 Timer X1
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 334 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
16.3.5 Input Capture Signal Inputting Timing
• Input Capture Signal Inputting Timing
As for the input capture signal inputting, rising or falling edge is selected by settings of the
IEDGA through IEDGD bits of the TCRX.
Figure 16.7 shows the timing chart when the rising edge is selected (IEDGA through IEDGD =
1).
Input capture signal
inputting pin
φ
Input capture signal
Figure 16.7 Input Capture Signal Inputting Timing (under Normal State)
• Input Capture Signal Inputting Timing when Making Buffer Operation
Buffer operation can be made using the ICRC or ICRD as the buffer of the ICRA or ICRB.
Figure 16.8 shows the input capture signal inputting timing chart in case both of the rising and
falling edges are designated (IEDGA = 1 and IEDGC = 0, or IEDGA = 0 and IEDGC = 1),
using the ICRC as the buffer register for the ICRA (BUFEA = 1).
Input capture
signal
FTIA
FRC
ICRA
ICRC
n n + 1 N
Mn
mM
n
M
N
n
φ
Figure 16.8 Input Capture Signal Inputting Timing Chart under the Buffer Mode
(under Normal State)
Section 16 Timer X1
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 335 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Even when the ICRC or ICRD is used as the buffer register, the input capture flag will be set up
corresponding to the designated edge change of respective input capture signals.
For example, when using the ICRC as the buffer register for the ICRA, when an edge change
having been designated by the IEDGC bit is detected with the input capture signals C and if the
ICIEC bit is duly set, an interrupt request will be issued.
However, in this case, the FRC value will not be transferred to the ICRC.
16.3.6 Input Capture Flag (ICFA through ICFD) Setting Up Timing
The input capture signal works to set the ICFA through ICFD to 1 and, simultaneously, the FRC
value is transferred to the corresponding ICRA through ICRD. Figure 16.9 shows the timing chart.
Input capture
signal
ICFA to ICFD
ICRA to ICRD
FRC
N
N
φ
Figure 16.9 ICFA through ICFD Setting Up Timing
Section 16 Timer X1
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 336 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
16.3.7 Output Comparing Flag (OCFA and OCFB) Setting Up Timing
The OCFA and OCFB are being set to 1 by the comparing match signal being output when the
values of the OCRA, OCRB and FRC match. The comparing match signal is generated at the last
state of the value match (the timing of the FRC's updating the matching count reading).
After the values of the OCRA, OCRB and FRC match, up until the count up clock signal is
generated, the comparing match signal will not be issued. Figure 16.10 shows the OCFA and
OCFB setting timing chart.
Comparing match
signal
OCFA, OCFB
OCRA, OCRB
FRC N
N
N + 1
φ
Figure 16.10 OCF Setting Up Timing
16.3.8 Overflow Flag (CVF) Setting Up Timing
The OVF is set to when the FRC overflows (H'FFFF → H'0000). Figure 16.11 shows the timing
chart.
Overflowing
signal
FRC H'FFFF H'0000
OVF
φ
Figure 16.11 OVF Setting Up Timing
Section 16 Timer X1
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 337 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
16.4 Operation Mode of Timer X1
Table 16.4 indicated below shows the operation mode of Timer X1.
Table 16.4 Operation Mode of Timer X1
Operation Mode Reset Active Sleep Watch Subactive Standby Subsleep
Module
Stop
FRC Reset Functions Functions Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset
OCRA, OCRB Reset Functions Functions Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset
ICRA to ICRD Reset Functions Functions Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset
TIER Reset Functions Functions Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset
TCRX Reset Functions Functions Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset
TOCR Reset Functions Functions Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset
TCSRX Reset Functions Functions Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset
16.5 Interrupt Causes
Total seven interrupt causes exist with Timer X1, namely, ICIA through ICID, OCIA, OCIB and
FOVI. Table 16.5 lists the contents of interrupt causes. Interrupt requests can be permitted or
prohibited by setting interrupt enabling bits of the TIER. Also, independent vector addresses are
allocated to respective interrupt causes.
Table 16.5 Interrupt Causes of Timer X1
Abbreviations of the Interrupt Causes Priority Degree Contents
ICIA Interrupt request by the ICFA
ICIB Interrupt request by the ICFB
ICIC Interrupt request by the ICFC
ICID Interrupt request by the ICFD
OCIA Interrupt request by the OCFA
OCIB Interrupt request by the OCFB
FOVI Interrupt request by the OVF
High
Low
Section 16 Timer X1
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 338 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
16.6 Exemplary Uses of Timer X1
Figure 16.12 shows an example of outputting at optional phase difference of the pulses of the 50%
duty. For this setting, follow the procedures listed below.
1. Set the CCLRA bit of the TCSRX to 1.
2. Each time a comparing match occurs, the OLVLA bit and the OLVLB bit are reversed by use
of the software.
H'FFFF
OCRA
OCRB
H'0000
FTOA
FTOB
Clearing the
counter
FRC
Figure 16.12 Pulse Outputting Example
Section 16 Timer X1
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 339 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
16.7 Precautions when Using Timer X1
Pay great attention to the fact that the following competitions and operations occur during
operation of timer X1.
16.7.1 Competition between Writing and Clearing with the FRC
When a counter clearing signal is issued under the T2 state where the FRC is under the writing
cycle, writing into the FRC will not be effected and the priority will be given to clearing of the
FRC.
Figure 16.13 shows the timing chart.
Address FRC address
Internal writing
signal
Counter clearing
signal
FRC N H'0000
T1 T2
Writing cycle with the FRC
φ
Figure 16.13 Competition between Writing and Clearing with the FRC
Section 16 Timer X1
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 340 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
16.7.2 Competition between Writing and Counting Up with the FRC
When a counting up cause occurs under the T2 state where the FRC is under the writing cycle, the
counting up will not be effected and the priority will be given to count writing.
Figure 16.14 shows the timing chart.
Address
φ
FRC address
Internal writing
signal
Inputting clock
to the FRC
Writing data
FRC N M
T1 T2
Writing cycle with the FRC
Figure 16.14 Competition between Writing and Counting Up with the FRC
Section 16 Timer X1
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 341 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
16.7.3 Competition between Writing and Comparing Match with the OCR
When a comparing match occurs under the T2 state where the OCRA and OCRB are under the
writing cycle, the priority will be given to writing of the OCR and the comparing match signal will
be prohibited.
Figure 16.15 shows the timing chart.
φ
Address OCR address
Internal writing
signal
Comparing match
signal
FRC
Writing data
Will be prohibited
OCR N M
N N + 1
T1 T2
Writing cycle with the OCR
Figure 16.15 Competition between Writing and Comparing Match with the OCR
Section 16 Timer X1
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 342 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
16.7.4 Changing Over the Internal Clocks and Counter Operations
Depending on the timing of changing over the internal clocks, the FRC may count up. Table 16.6
shows the relations between the timing of changing over the internal clocks (Re-writing of the
CKS1 and CKS0) and the FRC operations.
When using an internal clock, the counting clock is being generated detecting the falling edge of
the internal clock dividing the system clock (φ). For this reason, like Item No. 3 of table 16.6,
count clock signals are issued deeming the timing before the changeover as the falling edge to
have the FRC to count up.
Also, when changing over between an internal clock and the external clock, the FRC may count
up.
Table 16.6 Changing Over the Internal Clocks and the FRC Operation
No.
Rewriting Timing for
the CKS1 and CKS0 FRC Operation
1 Low → low level
changeover
Clock before
the changeover
Clock after
the changeover
Count
clock
FRC
Rewriting of the CKS1 and CKS0
N N + 1
2 Low → High level
changeover
Clock before
the changeover
Clock after
the changeover
Count
clock
FRC
Rewriting of the CKS1 and CKS0
N N + 1 N + 2
Section 16 Timer X1
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 343 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
No.
Rewriting Timing for
the CKS1 and CKS0 FRC Operation
3 High → low level
changeover
Clock before
the changeover
Clock after
the changeover
Count
clock
FRC
Rewriting of the CKS1 and CKS0
N
*
N + 1 N + 2
4 High → high level
changeover
Clock before
the changeover
Clock after
the changeover
Count
clock
FRC
Rewriting of the CKS1 and CKS0
N N + 1 N + 2
Note: * The count clock signals are issued determining the changeover timing as the falling
edge to have the FRC to count up.
Section 16 Timer X1
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 344 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Section 17 Watchdog Timer (WDT)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 345 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Section 17 Watchdog Timer (WDT)
17.1 Overview
This LSI has an on-chip watchdog timer with one channel (WDT) for monitoring system
operation. The WDT outputs an overflow signal if a system crash prevents the CPU from writing
to the timer counter, allowing it to overflow. At the same time, the WDT can also generate an
internal reset signal or internal NMI interrupt signal.
When this watchdog function is not needed, the WDT can be used as an interval timer. In interval
timer mode, an interval timer interrupt is generated each time the counter overflows.
17.1.1 Features
WDT features are listed below.
• Switchable between watchdog timer mode and interval timer mode
⎯ WOVI interrupt generation in interval timer mode
• Internal reset or internal interrupt generated when the timer counter overflows
⎯ Choice of internal reset or NMI interrupt generation in watchdog timer mode
• Choice of 8 counter input clocks
⎯ Maximum WDT interval: system clock period × 131072 × 256
Section 17 Watchdog Timer (WDT)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 346 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
17.1.2 Block Diagram
Figure 17.1 shows block diagram of WDT.
Overflow
Interrupt
control
·
Reset
control
WOVI
(Interrupt request signal)
Internal reset signal*
WTCNT WTCSR
φ/2
φ/64
φ/128
φ/512
φ/2048
φ/8192
φ/32768
φ/131072
Clock Clock
select
Internal clock
source
Bus
interface
Module bus
WTCSR
WTCNT
Note: * The internal reset signal can be generated by means of a register setting.
: Timer control/status register
: Timer counter
Internal bus
WDT
Legend:
Internal NMI
interrupt request signal
Figure 17.1 Block Diagram of WDT
Section 17 Watchdog Timer (WDT)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 347 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
17.1.3 Register Configuration
The WDT has two registers, as described in table 17.1. These registers control clock selection,
WDT mode switching, the reset signal, etc.
Table 17.1 WDT Registers
Address*1
Name Abbrev. R/W Initial Value Write*2 Read
Watchdog timer
control/status register
WTCSR R/ (W)*3 H'00 H'FFBC H'FFBC
Watchdog timer counter WTCNT R/W H'00 H'FFBC H'FFBD
System control register SYSCR R/W H'09 H'FFE8 H'FFE8
Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address.
2. For details of write operations, see section 17.2.4, Notes on Register Access.
3. Only 0 can be written in bit 7, to clear the flag.
17.2 Register Descriptions
17.2.1 Watchdog Timer Counter (WTCNT)
7
0
R/W
6
0
R/W
5
0
R/W
4
0
R/W
3
0
R/W
0
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
1
0
R/W
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
WTCNT is an 8-bit readable/writable* up-counter.
When the TME bit is set to 1 in WTCSR, WTCNT starts counting pulses generated from the
internal clock source selected by bits CKS2 to CKS0 in WTCSR. When the count overflows
(changes from H'FF to H'00), the OVF flag in WTCSR is set to 1.
WTCNT is initialized to H'00 by a reset, or when the TME bit is cleared to 0.
Note: * WTCNT is write-protected by a password to prevent accidental overwriting. For details
see section 17.2.4, Notes on Register Access.
Section 17 Watchdog Timer (WDT)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 348 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
17.2.2 Watchdog Timer Control/Status Register (WTCSR)
7
OVF
0
R/(W)*
6
WT/IT
0
R/W
5
TME
0
R/W
4
—
0
—
3
RST/NMI
0
R/W
0
CKS0
0
R/W
2
CKS2
0
R/W
1
CKS1
0
R/W
Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
WTCSR is an 8-bit readable/writable* register. Its functions include selecting the clock source to
be input to WTCNT, and the timer mode.
WTCSR is initialized to H'00 by a reset.
Note: * WTCSR is write-protected by a password to prevent accidental overwriting. For details
see section 17.2.4, Notes on Register Access.
Bit 7⎯Overflow Flag (OVF): A status flag that indicates that WTCNT has overflowed from
H'FF to H'00.
Bit 7
OVF Description
0 [Clearing conditions] (Initial value)
1. Write 0 in the TME bit
2. Read WTCSR when OVF = 1*, then write 0 in OVF
1 [Setting condition]
When WTCNT overflows (changes from H'FF to H'00)
When internal reset request generation is selected in watchdog timer mode, OVF is
cleared automatically by the internal reset
Note: * When OVF is polled and the interval timer interrupt is disabled, OVF=1 must be read at
least twice.
Section 17 Watchdog Timer (WDT)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 349 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 6⎯Timer Mode Select (WT/IT): Selects whether the WDT is used as a watchdog timer or
interval timer. If used as an interval timer, the WDT generates an interval timer interrupt request
(WOVI) when WTCNT overflows. If used as a watchdog timer, the WDT generates a reset or
NMI interrupt when WTCNT overflows.
Bit 6
WT/IT Description
0 Interval timer mode: Sends the CPU an interval timer interrupt request (WOVI) when
WTCNT overflows (Initial value)
1 Watchdog timer mode: Sends the CPU a reset or NMI interrupt request when
WTCNT overflows
Bit 5⎯Timer Enable (TME): Selects whether WTCNT runs or is halted.
Bit 5
TME Description
0 WTCNT is initialized to H'00 and halted (Initial value)
1 WTCNT counts
Bit 4⎯Reserved: This bit should not be set to 1.
Bit 3⎯Reset or NMI (RST/NMI): Specifies whether an internal reset or NMI interrupt is
requested on WTCNT overflow in watchdog timer mode.
Bit 3
RST/NMI Description
0 An NMI interrupt request is generated (Initial value)
1 An internal reset request is generated
Section 17 Watchdog Timer (WDT)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 350 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bits 2 to 0⎯Clock Select 2 to 0 (CKS2 to CKS0): These bits select an internal clock source,
obtained by dividing the system clock (φ) for input to WTCNT.
WDT Input Clock Selection
Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Description
CSK2 CSK1 CSK0 Clock Overflow Period* (when φ = 10 MHz)
0 φ/2 (Initial value) 51.2 μs 0
1 φ/64 1.6 ms
0 φ/128 3.3 ms
0
1
1 φ/512 13.1 ms
1 0 φ/2048 52.4 ms
0
1 φ/8192 209.7 ms
1 0 φ/32768 838.9 ms
1 φ/131072 3.36 s
Note: * The overflow period is the time from when WTCNT starts counting up from H'00 until
overflow occurs.
17.2.3 System Control Register (SYSCR)
7
—
0
—
6
—
0
—
5
INTM1
0
R
4
INTM0
0
R/W
3
XRST
1
R
0
—
1
—
2
—
0
—
1
—
0
—
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Only bit 3 is described here. For details on functions not related to the watchdog timer, see
sections 3.2.2 and 6.2.1, System Control Register (SYSCR), and the descriptions of the relevant
modules.
Bit 3⎯External Reset (XRST): Indicates the reset source. When the watchdog timer is used, a
reset can be generated by watchdog timer overflow in addition to external reset input. XRST is a
read-only bit. It is set to 1 by an external reset, and cleared to 0 by watchdog timer overflow.
Bit 3
XRST Description
0 Reset is generated by watchdog timer overflow
1 Reset is generated by external reset input (Initial value)
Section 17 Watchdog Timer (WDT)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 351 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
17.2.4 Notes on Register Access
The watchdog timer's WTCNT and WTCSR registers differ from other registers in being more
difficult to write to. The procedures for writing to and reading these registers are given below.
• Writing to WTCNT and WTCSR
These registers must be written to by a word transfer instruction. They cannot be written to
with byte transfer instructions.
Figure 17.2 shows the format of data written to WTCNT and WTCSR. WTCNT and WTCSR
both have the same write address. For a write to WTCNT, the upper byte of the written word
must contain H'5A and the lower byte must contain the write data. For a write to WTCSR, the
upper byte of the written word must contain H'A5 and the lower byte must contain the write
data. This transfers the write data from the lower byte to WTCNT or WTCSR.
<WTCNT write>
<WTCSR write>
Address : H'FFBC
Address : H'FFBC
H'5A Write data
15 8 7 0
0
H'A5 Write data
15 8 7 0
0
Figure 17.2 Format of Data Written to WTCNT and WTCSR
• Reading WTCNT and WTCSR
These registers are read in the same way as other registers. The read addresses are H'FFBC for
WTCSR, and H'FFBD for WTCNT.
Section 17 Watchdog Timer (WDT)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 352 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
17.3 Operation
17.3.1 Watchdog Timer Operation
To use the WDT as a watchdog timer, set the WT/IT and TME bits in WTCSR to 1. Software
must prevent WTCNT overflows by rewriting the WTCNT value (normally by writing H'00)
before overflow occurs. This ensures that WTCNT does not overflow while the system is
operating normally. If WTCNT overflows without being rewritten because of a system crash or
other error, the chip is reset, or an NMI interrupt is generated, for 518 system clock periods (518
φ). This is illustrated in figure 17.3.
An internal reset request from the watchdog timer and reset input from the RES pin are handled
via the same vector. The reset source can be identified from the value of the XRST bit in SYSCR.
If a reset caused by an input signal from the RES pin and a reset caused by WDT overflow occur
simultaneously, the RES pin reset has priority, and the XRST bit in SYSCR is set to 1.
WTCNT value
H'00 Time
H'FF
WT/IT = 1
TME = 1
H'00 written
to WTCNT
WT/IT = 1
TME = 1
H'00 written
to WTCNT
518 system clock period
Internal reset
signal
WT/IT
TME
Legend:
Overflow
Internal reset
generated
OVF = 1*
: Timer mode select bit
: Timer enable bit
Note: * Cleared to 0 by an internal reset when OVF is set to 1. XRST is cleared to 0.
Figure 17.3 Operation in Watchdog Timer Mode (when Reset)
Section 17 Watchdog Timer (WDT)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 353 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
17.3.2 Interval Timer Operation
To use the WDT as an interval timer, clear the WT/IT bit in WTCSR to 0 and set the TME bit to
1. An interval timer interrupt (WOVI) is generated each time WTCNT overflows, provided that
the WDT is operating as an interval timer, as shown in figure 17.4. This function can be used to
generate interrupt requests at regular intervals.
WTCNT value
H'00 Time
H'FF
WT/IT = 0
TME = 1
WOVI
Overflow Overflow Overflow Overflow
WOVI : Interval timer interrupt request generation
WOVI WOVI WOVI
Figure 17.4 Operation in Interval Timer Mode
Section 17 Watchdog Timer (WDT)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 354 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
17.3.3 Timing of Setting of Overflow Flag (OVF)
The OVF bit in WTCSR is set to 1 if WTCNT overflows during interval timer operation. At the
same time, an interval timer interrupt (WOVI) is requested. This timing is shown in figure 17.5.
If NMI request generation is selected in watchdog timer mode, when WTCNT overflows the OVF
bit in WTCSR is set to 1 and at the same time an NMI interrupt is requested.
CK
WTCNT H'FF H'00
Overflow signal
(internal signal)
OVF
Figure 17.5 Timing of OVF Setting
17.4 Interrupts
During interval timer mode operation, an overflow generates an interval timer interrupt (WOVI).
The interval timer interrupt is requested whenever the OVF flag is set to 1 in WTCSR. OVF must
be cleared to 0 in the interrupt handling routine. When NMI interrupt request generation is
selected in watchdog timer mode, an overflow generates an NMI interrupt request.
Section 17 Watchdog Timer (WDT)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 355 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
17.5 Usage Notes
17.5.1 Contention between Watchdog Timer Counter (WTCNT) Write and Increment
If a timer counter clock pulse is generated during the T2 state of a WTCNT write cycle, the write
takes priority and the timer counter is not incremented. Figure 17.6 shows this operation.
Internal address
Internal φ
Internal write
signal
WTCNT input
clock
WTCNT NM
T
1
T
2
WTCNT write cycle
Counter write data
Figure 17.6 Contention between WTCNT Write and Increment
17.5.2 Changing Value of CKS2 to CKS0
If bits CKS2 to CKS0 in WTCSR are written to while the WDT is operating, errors could occur in
the incrementation. Software must stop the watchdog timer (by clearing the TME bit to 0) before
changing the value of bits CKS2 to CKS0.
Section 17 Watchdog Timer (WDT)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 356 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
17.5.3 Switching between Watchdog Timer Mode and Interval Timer Mode
If the mode is switched from watchdog timer to interval timer, or vice versa, while the WDT is
operating, correct operation cannot be guaranteed. Software must stop the watchdog timer (by
clearing the TME bit to 0) before switching the mode.
Section 18 8-Bit PWM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 357 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Section 18 8-Bit PWM
18.1 Overview
The 8-bit PWM incorporates 4 channels of the duty control method (H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S:
2 channels). Its outputs can be used to control a reel motor or loading motor.
18.1.1 Features
• Conversion period: 256-state
• Duty control method
18.1.2 Block Diagram
Figure 18.1 shows a block diagram of the 8-bit PWM (1 channel).
PWMn
2
0
2
7
OVF
Match signal
Legend:
PWRn
φ
PW8CR
: 8-bit PWM data register n
: 8-bit PWM control register
PWMn
OVF
Note: n = 3 to 0 (H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S: n = 1 and 0)
: 8-bit PWM square-wave output pin n
: Overflow signal from FRC lower 8-bit
PWRn
Free-running counter (FRC)
Comparator
PW8CR
Polarity
specification
Internal data bus
R
S
Q
Figure 18.1 Block Diagram of 8-Bit PWM (1 channel)
Section 18 8-Bit PWM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 358 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
18.1.3 Pin Configuration
Table 18.1 shows the 8-bit PWM pin configuration.
Table 18.1 Pin Configuration
Name Abbrev. I/O Function
8-bit PWM square-wave output pin 0 PWM0 Output 8-bit PWM square-wave output 0
8-bit PWM square-wave output pin 1 PWM1 Output 8-bit PWM square-wave output 1
8-bit PWM square-wave output pin 2 PWM2 Output 8-bit PWM square-wave output 2
8-bit PWM square-wave output pin 3 PWM3 Output 8-bit PWM square-wave output 3
18.1.4 Register Configuration
Table 18.2 shows the 8-bit PWM register configuration.
Table 18.2 8-Bit PWM Registers
Name Abbrev. R/W Size Initial Value Address*
8-bit PWM data register 0 PWR0 W Byte H'00 H'D126
8-bit PWM data register 1 PWR1 W Byte H'00 H'D127
8-bit PWM data register 2 PWR2 W Byte H'00 H'D128
8-bit PWM data register 3 PWR3 W Byte H'00 H'D129
8-bit PWM control register PW8CR R/W Byte H'F0 H'D12A
Port mode register 3 PMR3 R/W Byte H'00 H'FFD0
Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address.
Section 18 8-Bit PWM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 359 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
18.2 Register Descriptions
18.2.1 8-bit PWM Data Registers 0, 1, 2 and 3 (PWR0, PWR1, PWR2, PWR3)
PWR0
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
56
0
7
PW04 PW03 PW02 PW01 PW00
0
W
PW07
WWW
PW06 PW05
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
PWR1
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
56
0
7
PW14 PW13 PW12 PW11 PW10
0
W
PW17
WWW
PW16 PW15
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
PWR2
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
56
0
7
PW24 PW23 PW22 PW21 PW20
0
W
PW27
WWW
PW26 PW25
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
PWR3
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
56
0
7
PW34 PW33 PW32 PW31 PW30
0
W
PW37
WWW
PW36 PW35
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
8-bit PWM data registers 0, 1, 2 and 3 (PWR0, PWR1, PWR2, PWR3) control the duty cycle at 8-
bit PWM pins. The data written in PWR0, PWR1, PWR2 and PWR3 correspond to the high-level
width of one PWM output waveform cycle (256 states).
When data is set in PWR0, PWR1, PWR2 and PWR3, the contents of the data are latched in the
PWM waveform generators, updating the PWM waveform generation data.
PWR0, PWR1, PWR2 and PWR3 are 8-bit write-only registers. When read, all bits are always
read as 1.
PWR0, PWR1, PWR2 and PWR3 are initialized to H'00 by a reset.
Note: The H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S do not have PWR2 and PWR3.
Section 18 8-Bit PWM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 360 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
18.2.2 8-bit PWM Control Register (PW8CR)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4567
————
————
PWC3 PWC2 PWC1 PWC0
R/WR/W
1111
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The 8-bit PWM control register (PW8CR) is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls PWM
functions. PW8CR is initialized to H'F0 by a reset.
Bits 7 to 4⎯Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
Bits 3 to 0⎯Output Polarity Select (PWC3 to PWC0): These bits select the output polarity of
PWMn pin between positive or negative (reverse).
Bit n
PWCn Description
0 PWMn pin output has positive polarity (Initial value)
1 PWMn pin output has negative polarity
Note: n = 3 to 0 (H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S: n = 1 and 0).
18.2.3 Port Mode Register 3 (PMR3)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
56
0
7
PMR34 PMR33 PMR32 PMR31 PMR30
0
R/W
PMR37
R/W R/WR/W
PMR36 PMR35
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The port mode register 3 (PMR3) controls function switching of each pin in the port 3. Switching
is specified for each bit.
The PMR3 is a 8-bit readable/writable register and is initialized to H'00 by a reset.
For bits other than 5 to 2, see section 10.5, Port 3.
Section 18 8-Bit PWM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 361 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bits 5 to 2⎯P35/PWM3 to P32/PWM0 Pin Switching (PMR35 to PMR32): These bits set
whether the P3n/PWMm pin is used as I/O pin or it is used as 8-bit PWM output PWMm pin.
Bit n
PMR3n Description
0 P3n/PMWm pin functions as P3n I/O pin (Initial value)
1 P3n/PMWm pin functions as PWMm output pin
Note: n = 5 to 2, m = 3 to 0. The H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S do not have PWM2 and PWM3 pin
functions.
18.2.4 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR)
7
1
MSTP15
R/W
MSTPCRH
6
1
MSTP14
R/W
5
1
MSTP13
R/W
4
1
MSTP12
R/W
3
1
MSTP11
R/W
2
1
MSTP10
R/W
1
1
MSTP9
R/W
0
1
MSTP8
R/W
7
1
MSTP7
R/W
6
1
MSTP6
R/W
5
1
MSTP5
R/W
4
1
MSTP4
R/W
3
1
MSTP3
R/W
2
1
MSTP2
R/W
1
1
MSTP1
R/W
0
1
MSTP0
R/W
MSTPCRL
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The MSTPCR consists of two 8-bit readable/writable registers that control module stop mode.
When MSTP4 bit is set to 1, the 8-bit PWM stops its operation upon completion of the bus cycle
and transits to the module stop mode. For details, see section 4.5, Module Stop Mode.
The MSTPCR is initialized to H'FFFF by a reset.
Bit 4⎯Module Stop (MSTP4): This bit sets the module stop mode of the 8-bit PWM.
MSTPCRL
Bit 4
MSTP4 Description
0 8-bit PWM module stop mode is released
1 8-bit PWM module stop mode is set (Initial value)
Section 18 8-Bit PWM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 362 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
18.3 8-Bit PWM Operation
The 8-bit PWM outputs PWM pulses having a cycle length of 256 states and a pulse width
determined by the data registers (PWR).
The output PWM pulse can be converted to a DC voltage through integration in a low-pass filter.
Figure 18.2 shows the output waveform example of 8-bit PWM. The pulse width (Twidth) can be
obtained by the following expression:
Twidth = (1/φ) × (PWR setting value)
T width
Pulse width
T width
Pulse cycle
(256 states)
T width
Pulse width
T width
Pulse cycle
(256 states)
H'00
PWRn setting
value
H'FFFRC lower
8-bit value
PWRn pin
output
(Positive
polarity)
(n = 3 to 0)
(Negative
polarity)
Figure 18.2 8-bit PWM Output Waveform (Example)
Section 19 12-Bit PWM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 363 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Section 19 12-Bit PWM
19.1 Overview
The 12-bit PWM incorporates 2 channels of the pulse pitch control method and functions as the
drum and capstan motor controller.
19.1.1 Features
Two on-chip 12-bit PWM signal generators are provided to control motors. These PWMs use the
pulse-pitch control method (periodically overriding part of the output). This reduces low-
frequency components in the pulse output, enabling a quick response without increasing the clock
frequency. The pitch of the PWM signal is modified in response to error data (representing lead or
lag in relation to a preset speed and phase).
Section 19 12-Bit PWM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 364 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
19.1.2 Block Diagram
Figure 19.1 shows a block diagram of the 12-bit PWM (1 channel). The PWM signal is generated
by combining quantizing pulses from a 12-bit pulse generator with quantizing pulses derived from
the contents of a data register. Low-frequency components are reduced because the two quantizing
pulses have different frequencies. The error data is represented by an unsigned 12-bit binary
number.
Internal data bus
Legend:
Note: * Refer to section 26, Servo Circuits.
CAPPWM
or
DRMPWM
CAPPWM
φ/2
φ/4
φ/8
φ/16
φ/32
φ/64
φ/128
DRMPWM
: Capstan mix pin
: Drum mix pin
PWM control register
Digital filter
circuit
Error data
PTON
PWM data register
Output control circuit
Pulse generator
Counter
DFUCR*
CP/DP
Figure 19.1 Block Diagram of 12-Bit PWM (1 channel)
Section 19 12-Bit PWM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 365 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
19.1.3 Pin Configuration
Table 19.1 shows the 12-bit PWM pin configuration.
Table 19.1 Pin Configuration
Name Abbrev. I/O Function
Capstan mix CAPPWM Output 12-bit PWM square-wave output
Drum mix DRMPWM
19.1.4 Register Configuration
Table 19.2 shows the 12-bit PWM register configuration.
Table 19.2 12-Bit PWM Registers
Name Abbrev. R/W Size Initial Value Address*
CPWCR W Byte H'42 H'D07B
12-bit PWM control register
DPWCR W Byte H'42 H'D07A
12-bit PWM data register CPWDR R/W Word H'F000 H'D07C
DPWDR R/W Word H'F000 H'D078
Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address.
Section 19 12-Bit PWM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 366 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
19.2 Register Descriptions
19.2.1 12-Bit PWM Control Registers (CPWCR, DPWCR)
CPWCR
0
0
1
1
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
56
1
7
CH/L CSF/DF CCK2 CCK1 CCK0
0
W
CPOL
WWW
CDC CHiZ
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
DPWCR
0
0
1
1
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
56
1
7
DH/L DSF/DF DCK2 DCK1 DCK0
0
W
DPOL
WWW
DDC DHiZ
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
CPWCR is the PWM output control register for the capstan motor. DPWCR is the PWM output
control register for the drum motor. Both are 8-bit writable registers.
CPWCR and DPWCR are initialized to H'42 by a reset, or when in a power-down state except for
active medium-speed mode.
Bit 7⎯Polarity Invert (POL): This bit can invert the polarity of the modulated PWM signal for
noise suppression and other purposes. This bit is invalid when fixed output is selected (when bit
DC is set to 1).
Bit 7
POL Description
0 Output with positive polarity (Initial value)
1 Output with inverted polarity
Bit 6⎯Output Select (DC): Selects either PWM modulated output, or fixed output controlled by
the pin output bits (bits 5 and 4).
Section 19 12-Bit PWM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 367 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bits 5 and 4⎯PWM Pin Output (Hi-Z, H/L): When bit DC is set to 1, the 12-bit PWM output
pins (CAPPWM, DRMPWM) output a value determined by the Hi-Z and H/L bits. The output is
not affected by bit POL.
In power-down modes, the 12-bit PWM circuit and pin statuses are retained. Before making a
transition to a power-down mode, first set bits 6 (DC), 5 (Hi-Z), and 4 (H/L) of the 12-bit PWM
control registers (CPWCR and DPWCR) to select a fixed output level. Choose one of the
following settings:
Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4
DC Hi-Z H/L Output state
0 Low output (Initial value) 0
1 High output
1
1 * High-impedance
0 * * Modulation signal output
Legend: * Don't care
Bit 3⎯Output Data Select (SF/DF): Selects whether the data to be converted to PWM output is
taken from the data register or from the digital filter circuit.
Bit 3
SF/DF Description
0 Modulation by error data from the digital filter circuit (Initial value)
1 Modulation by error data written in the data register
Note: When PWMs output data from the digital filter circuit, the data consisting of the speed and
phase filtering results are modulated by PWMs and output from the CAPPWM and
DRMPWM pins. However, it is possible to output only drum phase filter results from
CAPPWM pin and only capstan phase filter result from DRMPWM pin, by DFUCR settings
of the digital filter circuit. See section 26.11, Digital Filters.
Section 19 12-Bit PWM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 368 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bits 2 to 0⎯Carrier Frequency Select (CK2 to CK0): Selects the carrier frequency of the PWM
modulated signal. Do not set them to 111.
Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
CK2 CK1 CK0 Description
0 φ2 0
1 φ4
0 φ8 (Initial value)
0
1
1 φ16
0 φ32 0
1 φ64
0 φ128
1
1
1 (Do not set)
19.2.2 12-Bit PWM Data Registers (DPWDR, CPWDR)
CPWDR
1
0
R/W
CPWDR1
0
0
R/W
CPWDR0
3
0
R/W
CPWDR3
2
0
R/W
CPWDR2
5
0
R/W
CPWDR5
4
0
R/W
CPWDR4
7
0
R/W
CPWDR7
6
0
R/W
CPWDR6
9
0
R/W
CPWDR9
8
0
R/W
CPWDR8
11
0
R/W
CPWDR11
10
0
R/W
CPWDR10
12
1
13
1
14
1
15
————
————
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
DPWDR
1
0
R/W
DPWDR1
0
0
R/W
DPWDR0
3
0
R/W
DPWDR3
2
0
R/W
DPWDR2
5
0
R/W
DPWDR5
4
0
R/W
DPWDR4
7
0
R/W
DPWDR7
6
0
R/W
DPWDR6
9
0
R/W
DPWDR9
8
0
R/W
DPWDR8
11
0
R/W
DPWDR11
10
0
R/W
DPWDR10
12
1
13
1
14
1
15
1
————
———
—
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The 12-bit PWM data registers (DPWDR and CPWDR) are 12-bit readable/writable registers in
which the data to be converted to PWM output is written.
The data in these registers is converted to PWM output only when bit SF/DF of the corresponding
control register is set to 1. When the SF/DF bit is 0, the error data from the digital filter circuit is
written in the data register, and then modulated by PWM. At this time, the error data from the
digital filter circuit can be monitored by reading the data register.
These registers can be accessed by word only, and cannot be accessed by byte. Byte access gives
unassured results.
Section 19 12-Bit PWM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 369 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Both registers are initialized to H'F000 by a reset or in a power-down state except for active
medium speed mode.
19.2.3 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR)
7
1
MSTP15
R/W
MSTPCRH
6
1
MSTP14
R/W
5
1
MSTP13
R/W
4
1
MSTP12
R/W
3
1
MSTP11
R/W
2
1
MSTP10
R/W
1
1
MSTP9
R/W
0
1
MSTP8
R/W
7
1
MSTP7
R/W
6
1
MSTP6
R/W
5
1
MSTP5
R/W
4
1
MSTP4
R/W
3
1
MSTP3
R/W
2
1
MSTP2
R/W
1
1
MSTP1
R/W
0
1
MSTP0
R/W
MSTPCRL
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The MSTPCR consists of two 8-bit readable/writable registers that control module stop mode.
When MSTP1 bit is set to 1, the 12-bit PWM stops its operation upon completion of the bus cycle
and transits to the module stop mode. For details, see section 4.5, Module Stop Mode.
The MSTPCR is initialized to H'FFFF by a reset.
Bit 1⎯Module Stop (MSTP1): This bit sets the module stop mode of the 12-bit PWM.
MSTPCRL
Bit 1
MSTP1 Description
0 12-bit PWM and servo circuit module stop mode is released
1 12-bit PWM and servo circuit module stop mode is set (Initial value)
Section 19 12-Bit PWM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 370 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
19.3 Operation
19.3.1 Output Waveform
The PWM signal generator combines the error data with the output from an internal pulse
generator to produce a pulse-width modulated signal.
When Vcc/2 is set as the reference value, the following conditions apply:
1. When the motor is running at the correct speed and phase, the PWM signal is output with a
50% duty cycle.
2. When the motor is running behind the correct speed or phase, it is corrected by periodically
holding part of the PWM signal low. The part held low depends on the size of the error.
3. When the motor is running ahead of the correct speed or phase, it is corrected by periodically
holding part of the PWM signal high. The part held high depends on the size of the error.
When the motor is running at the correct speed and phase, the error data is a 12-bit value
representing 1/2 (1000 0000 0000), and the PWM output has the same frequency as the selected
division clock.
After the error data has been converted into a PWM signal, the PWM signal can be smoothed into
a DC voltage by an external low-pass filter (LPF). The smoothe error data can be used to control
the motor.
Figure 19.2 shows sample waveform outputs.
The 12-bit PWM pin outputs a low-level signal upon reset, in power-down mode or at module-
stop.
Section 19 12-Bit PWM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 371 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
1
Counter
Pulse Generator
PWM data register
C10
C11
C12
C13
Corresponds to Pwr3 = 1
Corresponds to Pwr2 = 1
Corresponds to Pwr1 = 1
Corresponds to Pwr0 = 1
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
Pwr3 2 1 0 "L"
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Figure 19.2 Sample Waveform Output by 12-Bit PWM (4 Bits)
Section 19 12-Bit PWM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 372 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Section 20 14-Bit PWM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 373 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Section 20 14-Bit PWM
Note: The 14-Bit PWM is not (incorporated in) provided for the H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S.
20.1 Overview
The 14-bit PWM is a pulse division type PWM that can be used for electronic tuner control, etc.
20.1.1 Features
Features of the 14-bit PWM are given below:
• Choice of two conversion periods
A conversion period of 32768/φ with a minimum modulation width of 2/φ, or a conversion
period of 16384/φ with a minimum modulation width of 1/φ, can be selected.
• Pulse division method for less ripple
Section 20 14-Bit PWM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 374 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
20.1.2 Block Diagram
Figure 20.1 shows a block diagram of the 14-bit PWM.
Legend:
PWCR
φ/4
φ/2
PWDRL
: PWM control register
: PWM data register L
PWDRU
PWM14
: PWM data register U
: PWM14 output pin
Internal data bus
PWCR
PWDRL
PWDRU
PWM waveform
generator PWM14
Figure 20.1 Block Diagram of 14-Bit PWM
20.1.3 Pin Configuration
Table 20.1 shows the 14-bit PWM pin configuration.
Table 20.1 Pin Configuration
Name Abbrev. I/O Function
PWM 14-bit square-wave output pin PWM14* Output 14-bit PWM square-wave output
Note: * This pin also functions as P40 general I/O pin. When using this pin, set the pin function
by the port mode register 4 (PMR4). For details, see section 10.6, Port 4.
Section 20 14-Bit PWM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 375 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
20.1.4 Register Configuration
Table 20.2 shows the 14-bit PWM register configuration.
Table 20.2 14-Bit PWM Registers
Name Abbrev. R/W Size Initial Value Address*
PWM control register PWCR R/W Byte H'FE H'D122
PWM data register U PWDRU W Byte H'C0 H'D121
PWM data register L PWDRL W Byte H'00 H'D120
Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address.
20.2 Register Descriptions
20.2.1 PWM Control Register (PWCR)
0
0
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
———————
——————— R/W
PWCR0
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The PWM control register (PWCR) is an 8-bit read/write register that controls the 14-bit PWM
functions. PWCR is initialized to H'FE by a reset.
Bits 7 to 1⎯Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
Bit 0⎯Clock Select (PWCR0): Selects the clock supplied to the 14-bit PWM.
Bit 0
PWCR0 Description
0 The input clock is φ/2 (tφ = 2/φ) (Initial value)
The conversion period is 16384/φ, with a minimum modulation width of 1/φ
1 The input clock is φ/4 (tφ = 4/φ)
The conversion period is 32768/φ, with a minimum modulation width of 2/φ
Note: t/φ: Period of PWM clock input
Section 20 14-Bit PWM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 376 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
20.2.2 PWM Data Registers U and L (PWDRU, PWDRL)
PWDRU
0
0
1
0
2
0
3
0
4
0
5
0
6
1
7
——
—— W
PWDRU0
W
PWDRU1
W
PWDRU2
W
PWDRU3
W
PWDRU4
W
PWDRU5
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
PWDRL
0
0
1
0
2
0
3
0
4
0
5
0
67
W
PWDRL0
W
PWDRL1
W
PWDRL2
W
PWDRL3
W
PWDRL4
W
PWDRL5
0
W
PWDRL6
W
PWDRL7
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
PWM data registers U and L (PWDRU and PWDRL) indicate high level width in one PWM
waveform cycle.
PWDRU and PWDRL form a 14-bit write-only register, with the upper 6 bits assigned to PWDRU
and the lower 8 bits to PWDRL. The value written in PWDRU and PWDRL gives the total high-
level width of one PWM waveform cycle. Both PWDRU and PWDRL are accessible by byte
access only. Word access gives unassured results.
When 14-bit data is written in PWDRU and PWDRL, the contents are latched in the PWM
waveform generator and the PWM waveform generation data is updated. When writing the 14-bit
data, follow these steps:
1. Write the lower 8 bits to PWDRL.
2. Write the upper 6 bits to PWDRU.
Write the data first to PWDRL and then to PWDRU.
PWDRU and PWDRL are write-only registers. When read, all bits always read 1.
PWDRU and PWDRL are initialized to H'C000 by a reset.
Section 20 14-Bit PWM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 377 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
20.2.3 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR)
7
1
MSTP15
R/W
MSTPCRH
6
1
MSTP14
R/W
5
1
MSTP13
R/W
4
1
MSTP12
R/W
3
1
MSTP11
R/W
2
1
MSTP10
R/W
1
1
MSTP9
R/W
0
1
MSTP8
R/W
7
1
MSTP7
R/W
6
1
MSTP6
R/W
5
1
MSTP5
R/W
4
1
MSTP4
R/W
3
1
MSTP3
R/W
2
1
MSTP2
R/W
1
1
MSTP1
R/W
0
1
MSTP0
R/W
MSTPCRL
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The module stop control register (MSTPCR) consists of two 8-bit readable/writable registers that
control the module stop mode functions.
When the MSTP5 bit is set to 1, the 14-bit PWM operation stops at the end of the bus cycle and a
transition is made to module stop mode. For details, see section 4.5, Module Stop Mode.
MSTPCR is initialized to H'FFFF by a reset.
Bit 5⎯Module Stop (MSTP5): Specifies the module stop mode of the 14-bit PWM.
MSTPCRL
Bit 5
MSTP5 Description
0 14-bit PWM module stop mode is released
1 14-bit PWM module stop mode is set (Initial value)
Section 20 14-Bit PWM
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 378 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
20.3 14-Bit PWM Operation
When using the 14-bit PWM, set the registers in this sequence:
1. Set bit PWM40 to 1 in port mode register 4 (PMR4) so that pin P40/PWM14 is designated for
PWM output.
2. Set bit PWCR0 in the PWM control register (PWCR) to select a conversion period of either
32768/φ (PWCR0 = 1) or 16384/φ (PWCR0 = 0).
3. Set the output waveform data in PWM data registers U and L (PWDRU, PWDRL). Be sure to
write byte data first to PWDRL and then to PWDRU. When the data is written in PWDRU, the
contents of these registers are latched in the PWM waveform generator, and the PWM
waveform generation data is updated in synchronization with internal signals.
One conversion period consists of 64 pulses, as shown in figure 20.2. The total high-level width
during this period (TH) corresponds to the data in PWDRU and PWDRL. This relation can be
expressed as follows:
T
H = (data value in PWDRU and PWDRL + 64) × tφ/2
where to is the period of PWM clock input: 2/φ (bit PWCR0 = 0) or 4/φ (bit PWCR0 = 1).
If the data value in PWDRU and PWDRL is from H'3FC0 to H'3FFF, the PWM output stays high.
When the data value is H'C000, TH is calculated as follows:
T
H = 64 × tφ/2 = 32 ⋅ tφ
t H64t H63t H3t H2t H1
T H = t H1 + t H2 + t H3 + ... + t H64
t f1 = t f2 = t f3 = ... = t f64
t f1 t f2 t f63 t f64
1 conversion period
Figure 20.2 Waveform Output by 14-Bit PWM
Section 21 Prescalar Unit
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 379 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Section 21 Prescalar Unit
21.1 Overview
The prescalar unit (PSU) has a 18-bit free running counter (FRC) that uses φ as a clock source and
a 5-bit counter that uses φW as a clock source.
21.1.1 Features
• Prescalar S (PSS)
Generates frequency division clocks that are input to peripheral functions.
• Prescalar W (PSW)
When a timer A is used as a clock time base, the PSW frequency-divides subclocks and
generates input clocks.
• Stable oscillation wait time count
During the return from the low power consumption mode excluding the sleep mode, the FRC
counts the stable oscillation wait time.
• 8-bit PWM
The lower 8 bits of the FRC is used as 8-bit PWM cycle and duty cycle generation counters.
(Conversion cycle: 256 states)
• 8-bit input capture by IC pins
Catches the 8 bits of 215 to 28 of the FRC according to the edge of the IC pin for remote control
receiving.
• Frequency division clock output
Can output the frequency division clock for the system clock or the frequency division clock
for the subclock from the frequency division clock output pin (TMOW).
Section 21 Prescalar Unit
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 380 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
21.1.2 Block Diagram
Figure 21.1 shows a block diagram of the prescalar unit.
φ
PWM3
ICR1
PCSR
18-bit free running counter (FRC)
φw/128
Prescalar W
φ/131072 to φ/2
Prescalar S
Internal data bus
MSB LSB
φw/4
φw/8
φw/16
φw/32
φ/32
φ/16
φ/8 φ/4
Interrupt
request
5-bit counter
IC pin
Stable oscillation
wait time count output
212
215 28
217 2720
TMOW
pin
MSB LSB
8 bits
6 bits 8 bits
PWM2
PWM1
PWM0
Legend:
ICR1
PCSR
: Input capture register 1
: Prescalar unit control/status register
IC
TMOW
: Input capture input pin
: Frequency division clock output pin
Figure 21.1 Block Diagram of Prescalar Unit
Section 21 Prescalar Unit
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 381 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
21.1.3 Pin Configuration
Table 21.1 shows the pin configuration of the prescalar unit.
Table 21.1 Pin Configuration
Name Abbrev. I/O Function
Input capture input IC Input Prescalar unit input capture input pin
Frequency division clock
output
TMOW Output Prescalar unit frequency division clock
output pin
21.1.4 Register Configuration
Table 21.2 shows the register configuration of the prescalar unit.
Table 21.2 Register Configuration
Name Abbrev. R/W Size Initial Value Address*
Input capture register 1 ICR1 R Byte H'00 H'D12C
Prescalar unit control/status
register
PCSR R/W Byte H'08 H'D12D
Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address.
Section 21 Prescalar Unit
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 382 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
21.2 Registers
21.2.1 Input Capture Register 1 (ICR1)
0
0
1
0
R
2
0
R
3
0
4
0
R
0
R
56
0
7
ICR14 ICR13 ICR12 ICR11 ICR10
0
R
ICR17
RRR
ICR16 ICR15
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Input capture register 1 (ICR1) captures 8-bit data of 215 to 28 of the FRC according to the edge of
the IC pin.
ICR1 is an 8-bit read-only register. The write operation becomes invalid. The ICR1 values are
undefined until the first capture is generated after the mode has been set to the standby mode,
watch mode, subactive mode, and subsleeve mode. When reset, ICR1 is initialized to H'00.
21.2.2 Prescalar Unit Control/Status Register (PCSR)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
—
—
1
4
0
R/W
5
0
6
0
7
R/WR/W
ICEG
R/W
ICIE
0
R/(W)*
ICIF NCon/off DCS2 DCS1 DCS0
Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The prescalar unit control/status register (PCSR) controls the input capture function and selects the
frequency division clock that is output from the TMOW pin.
PCSR is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, PCSR is initialized to H'08.
Bit 7⎯Input Capture Interrupt Flag (ICIF): Input capture interrupt request flag. This indicates
that the input capture was performed according to the edge of the IC pin.
Bit 7
ICIF Description
0 [Clear condition] (Initial value)
When 0 is written after 1 has been read
1 [Set condition]
When the input capture was performed according to the edge of the IC pin
Section 21 Prescalar Unit
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 383 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 6⎯Input Capture Interrupt Enable (ICIE): When ICIF was set to 1 by the input capture
according to the edge of the IC pin, ICIE enables and disables the generation of an input capture
interrupt.
Bit 6
ICIE Description
0 Disables the generation of an input capture interrupt (Initial value)
1 Enables the generation of an input capture interrupt
Bit 5⎯IC Pin Edge Select (ICEG): ICEG selects the input edge sense of the IC pin.
Bit 5
ICEG Description
0 Detects the falling edge of the IC pin input (Initial value)
1 Detects the rising edge of the IC pin input
Bit 4⎯Noise Cancel ON/OFF (NCon/off): NCon/off selects enable/disable of the noise cancel
function of the IC pin. For the noise cancel function, see section 21.3, Noise Cancel Circuit.
Bit 4
NCon/off Description
0 Disables the noise cancel function of the IC pin (Initial value)
1 Enables the noise cancel function of the IC pin
Bit 3⎯Reserved: This bit cannot be modified and is always read as 1.
Section 21 Prescalar Unit
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 384 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bits 2 to 0⎯Frequency Division Clock Output Select (DCS2 to DCS0): DCS2 to DCS0 select
eight types of frequency division clocks that are output from the TMOW pin.
Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
DCS2 DCS1 DCS0 Description
0 Outputs PSS, φ/32 (Initial value) 0
1 Outputs PSS, φ/16
0 Outputs PSS, φ/8
0
1
1 Outputs PSS, φ/4
1 0 Outputs PSW, φW/32
0
1 Outputs PSW, φW/16
1 0 Outputs PSW, φW/8
1 Outputs PSW, φW/4
21.2.3 Port Mode Register 1 (PMR1)
7
PMR17
0
R/W
6
PMR16
0
R/W
5
PMR15
0
R/W
4
PMR14
0
R/W
3
PMR13
0
R/W
0
PMR10
0
R/W
2
PMR12
0
R/W
1
PMR11
0
R/W
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The port mode register 1 (PMR1) controls switching of each pin function of port 1. The switching
is specified in a unit of bit.
PMR1 is an 8-bit read/write enable register. When reset, PMR1 is initialized to H'00. For details,
refer to Port Mode Register 1 in section 10.3.2 Register Configuration.
Bit 7⎯P17/TMOW Pin Switching (PMR17): PMR17 sets whether the P17/TMOW pin is used
as a P17 I/O pin or a TMOW pin for division clock output.
Bit 7
PMR17 Description
0 The P17/TMOW pin functions as a P17 I/O pin (Initial value)
1 The P17/TMOW pin functions as a TMOW output function
Section 21 Prescalar Unit
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 385 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 6⎯P16/IC Pin Switching (PMR16): PMR16 sets whether the P16/IC pin is used as a P16 I/O
pin or an IC pin for the input capture input of the prescalar unit.
Bit 6
PMR16 Description
0 The P16/IC pin functions as a P16 I/O pin (Initial value)
1 The P16/IC pin functions as an IC input function
21.3 Noise Cancel Circuit
The IC pin has a built-in a noise cancel circuit. The circuit can be used for noise protection such as
remote control receiving. The noise cancel circuit samples the input values of the IC pin twice at
an interval of 256 states. If the input values are different, they are assumed to be noise.
The IC pin can specify enable/disable of the noise cancel function according to the bit 4
(NCon/off) of the prescalar unit control/status register (PCSR).
21.4 Operation
21.4.1 Prescalar S (PSS)
The PSS is a 17-bit counter that uses the system clock (φ=fosc) as an input clock and generates the
frequency division clocks (φ/131072 to φ/2) of the peripheral function. The low-order 17 bits of
the 18-bit free running counter (FRC) correspond to the PSS. The FRC is incremented by one
clock. The PSS output is shared by the timer and serial communication interface (SCI), and the
frequency division ratio can independently be set by each built-in peripheral function.
When reset, the FRC is initialized to H'00000, and starts increment after reset has been released.
Because the system clock oscillator is stopped in standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode, and
subsleep mode, the PSS operation is also stopped. In this case, the FCR is also initialized to
H'00000.
The FRC cannot be read and written from the CPU.
Section 21 Prescalar Unit
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 386 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
21.4.2 Prescalar W (PSW)
PSW is a counter that uses the subclock as an input clock. The PSW also generates the input clock
of the timer A. In this case, the timer A functions as a clock time base.
When reset, the PSW is initialized to H'00, and starts increment after reset has been released. Even
if the mode has been shifted to the standby mode*, watch mode*, subactive mode*, and subsleep
mode*, the PSW continues the operation as long as the clocks are supplied by the X1 and X2 pins.
The PSW can also be initialized to H'00 by setting the TMA3 and TMA2 bits of the timer mode
register A (TMA) to 11.
Note: * When the timer A is in module stop mode, the operation is stopped.
Figure 21.2 shows the supply of the clocks to the peripheral function by the PSS and PSW.
φ/131072 to φ/2
φTimer
SCI
OSC1
fosc
OSC2
φw/128
φw/4
φw
Timer A
Prescalar S
X1
(fx)
X2 CPU
ROM
RAM
TMOW pin
Peripheral register
I/O port
Intermediate
speed clock
frequency divider
Prescalar W
System clock
selection
Subclock
frequency
dividers
(1/2, 1/4, and 1/8)
Subclock
oscillator
System
clock
oscillator
System
clock
duty
correction
circuit
Figure 21.2 Clock Supply
21.4.3 Stable Oscillation Wait Time Count
For the count of the stable oscillation stable wait time during the return from the low power
consumption mode excluding the sleep mode, see section 4, Power-Down State.
Section 21 Prescalar Unit
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 387 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
21.4.4 8-bit PWM
This 8-bit PWM controls the duty control PWM signal in the conversion cycle 256 states. It counts
the cycle and the duty cycle at 27 to 20 of the FRC. It can be used for controlling reel motors and
loading motors. For details, see section 18, 8-Bit PWM.
21.4.5 8-bit Input Capture Using IC Pin
This function catches the 8-bit data of 215 to 28 of the FRC according to the edge of the IC pin. It
can be used for remote control receiving.
For the edge of the IC pin, the rising and falling edges can be selected.
The IC pin has a built-in noise cancel circuit. See section 21.3, Noise Cancel Circuit.
An interrupt request is generated due to the input capture using the IC pin.
Note: Rewriting the ICEG bit, NCon/off bit, or PMR16 bit is incorrectly recognized as edge
detection according to the combinations between the state and detection edge of the IC pin
and the ICIF bit may be set after up to 384φ seconds.
21.4.6 Frequency Division Clock Output
The frequency division clock can be output from the TMOW pin. For the frequency division
clock, eight types of clocks can be selected according to the DCS2 to DCS0 bits in PCSR.
The clock in which the system clock was frequency-divided is output in active mode and sleep
mode and the clock in which the subclock was frequency-divided is output in active mode*, sleep
mode*, and subactive mode.
Note: * When timer A is in module stop mode, no clock is output.
Section 21 Prescalar Unit
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 388 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 389 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
22.1 Overview
The serial communication interface (SCI) can handle both asynchronous and clocked synchronous
serial communication. A function is also provided for serial communication between processors
(multiprocessor communication function).
22.1.1 Features
SCI1 features are listed below.
• Choice of asynchronous or synchronous serial communication mode
⎯ Asynchronous mode
• Serial data communication is executed using an asynchronous system in which
synchronization is achieved character by character
Serial data communication can be carried out with standard asynchronous
communication chips such as a Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART)
or Asynchronous Communication Interface Adapter (ACIA)
• A multiprocessor communication function is provided that enables serial data
communication with a number of processors
• Choice of 12 serial data transfer formats
Data length: 7 or 8 bits
Stop bit length: 1 or 2 bits
Parity: Even, odd, or none
Multiprocessor bit: 1 or 0
• Receive error detection: Parity, overrun, and framing errors
• Break detection: Break can be detected by reading the SI1 pin level directly in case of a
framing error
⎯ Clock synchronous mode
• Serial data communication is synchronized with a clock
Serial data communication can be carried out with other chips that have a synchronous
communication function
• One serial data transfer format
Data length: 8 bits
• Receive error detection: Overrun errors detected
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 390 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
• Full-duplex communication capability
⎯ The transmitter and receiver are mutually independent, enabling transmission and reception
to be executed simultaneously
⎯ Double-buffering is used in both the transmitter and the receiver, enabling continuous
transmission and continuous reception of serial data
• Built-in baud rate generator allows any bit rate to be selected
• Choice of serial clock source: internal clock from baud rate generator or external clock from
SCK1 pin
• Four interrupt sources
⎯ Four interrupt sources (transmit-data-empty, transmit-end, receive-data-full, and receive
error) that can issue requests independently
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 391 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
22.1.2 Block Diagram
Figure 22.1 shows a block diagram of the SCI.
SI1
SO1
SCK1
Clock
External clock
φ
φ/4
φ/16
φ/64
TEI
TXI
RXI
ERI
RSR1
RDR1
TSR1
TDR1
SMR1
SCR1
SSR1
SCMR1
BRR1
: Receive shift register 1
: Receive data register 1
: Transmit shift register 1
: Transmit data register 1
: Serial mode register 1
: Serial control register 1
: Serial status register 1
: Serial interface mode register 1
: Bit rate register 1
SCMR1
SSR1
SCR1
SMR1
Transmission/
reception
control
Baud rate
generator
BRR1
Module data bus
Bus interface
Internal data bus
RDR1
TSR1RSR1
Parity generation
Parity check
Legend:
TDR1
Figure 22.1 Block Diagram of SCI
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 392 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
22.1.3 Pin Configuration
Table 22.1 shows the serial pins used by the SCI.
Table 22.1 SCI Pins
Channel Pin Name Symbol I/O Function
1 Serial clock pin 1 SCK1 I/O SCI1 clock input/output
Receive data pin 1 SI1 Input SCI1 receive data input
Transmit data pin 1 SO1 Output SCI1 transmit data output
22.1.4 Register Configuration
The SCI1 has the internal registers shown in table 22.2. These registers are used to specify
asynchronous mode or synchronous mode, the data format, and the bit rate, and to control the
transmitter/receiver.
Table 22.2 SCI Registers
Channel Name Abbrev. R/W Initial Value Address*1
Serial mode register 1 SMR1 R/W H'00 H'D148
Bit rate register 1 BRR1 R/W H'FF H'D149
Serial control register 1 SCR1 R/W H'00 H'D14A
Transmit data register 1 TDR1 R/W H'FF H'D14B
Serial status register 1 SSR1 R/(W)*2 H'84 H'D14C
Receive data register 1 RDR1 R H'00 H'D14D
1
Serial interface mode register 1 SCMR1 R/W H'F2 H'D14E
Common Module stop control register MSTPCRH R/W H'FF H'FFEC
MSTPCRL R/W H'FF H'FFED
Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address.
2. Only 0 can be written, to clear flags.
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 393 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
22.2 Register Descriptions
22.2.1 Receive Shift Register 1 (RSR1)
7
—
6
—
5
—
4
—
3
—
0
—
2
—
1
—
Bit :
R/W :
RSR1 is a register used to receive serial data.
The SCI sets serial data input from the SI1 pin in RSR1 in the order received, starting with the
LSB (bit 0), and converts it to parallel data. When one byte of data has been received, it is
transferred to RDR automatically.
RSR1 cannot be directly read or written to by the CPU.
22.2.2 Receive Data Register 1 (RDR1)
7
0
R
6
0
R
5
0
R
4
0
R
3
0
R
0
0
R
2
0
R
1
0
R
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
RDR1 is a register that stores received serial data.
When the SCI has received one byte of serial data, it transfers the received serial data from RSR1
to RDR1 where it is stored, and completes the receive operation. After this, RSR1 is receive-
enabled.
Since RSR1 and RDR1 function as a double buffer in this way, continuous receive operations can
be performed.
RDR1 is a read-only register, and cannot be written to by the CPU.
RDR1 is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode,
subsleep mode, and module stop mode.
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 394 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
22.2.3 Transmit Shift Register 1 (TSR1)
7
—
6
—
5
—
4
—
3
—
0
—
2
—
1
—
Bit :
R/W :
TSR1 is a register used to transmit serial data.
To perform serial data transmission, the SCI first transfers transmit data from TDR1 to TSR1, then
sends the data to the SO1 pin starting with the LSB (bit 0).
When transmission of one byte is completed, the next transmit data is transferred from TDR1 to
TSR1, and transmission started, automatically. However, data transfer from TDR1 to TSR1 is not
performed if the TDRE bit in SSR1 is set to 1.
TSR1 cannot be directly read or written to by the CPU.
22.2.4 Transmit Data Register 1 (TDR1)
7
1
R/W
6
1
R/W
5
1
R/W
4
1
R/W
3
1
R/W
0
1
R/W
2
1
R/W
1
1
R/W
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
TDR1 is an 8-bit register that stores data for serial transmission.
When the SCI detects that TSR1 is empty, it transfers the transmit data written in TDR1 to TSR1
and starts serial transmission. Continuous serial transmission can be carried out by writing the next
transmit data to TDR1 during serial transmission of the data in TSR1.
TDR1 can be read or written to by the CPU at all times.
TDR1 is initialized to H'FF by a reset, and in standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode,
subsleep mode, and module stop mode.
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 395 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
22.2.5 Serial Mode Register 1 (SMR1)
7
C/A
0
R/W
6
CHR
0
R/W
5
PE
0
R/W
4
O/E
0
R/W
3
STOP
0
R/W
0
CKS0
0
R/W
2
MP
0
R/W
1
CKS1
0
R/W
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
SMR1 is an 8-bit register used to set the SCI's serial transfer format and select the baud rate
generator clock source.
SMR1 can be read or written to by the CPU at all times.
SMR1 is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode,
subsleep mode, and module stop mode.
Bit 7⎯Communication Mode (C/A): Selects asynchronous mode or clock synchronous mode as
the SCI operating mode.
Bit 7
C/A Description
0 Asynchronous mode (Initial value)
1 Clock synchronous mode
Bit 6⎯Character Length (CHR): Selects 7 or 8 bits as the data length in asynchronous mode. In
synchronous mode, a fixed data length of 8 bits is used regardless of the CHR setting.
Bit 6
CHR Description
0 8-bit data (Initial value)
1 7-bit data*
Note: * When 7-bit data is selected, the MSB (bit 7) of TDR1 is not transmitted, and LSB-
first/MSB-first selection is not available.
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 396 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 5⎯Parity Enable (PE): In asynchronous mode, selects whether or not parity bit addition is
performed in transmission, and parity bit checking in reception. In synchronous mode, or when a
multiprocessor format is used, parity bit addition and checking is not performed, regardless of the
PE bit setting.
Bit 5
PE Description
0 Parity bit addition and checking disabled (Initial value)
1 Parity bit addition and checking enabled*
Note: * When the PE bit is set to 1, the parity (even or odd) specified by the O/E bit is added to
transmit data before transmission. In reception, the parity bit is checked for the parity
(even or odd) specified by the O/E bit.
Bit 4⎯Parity Mode (O/E): Selects either even or odd parity for use in parity addition and
checking.
The O/E bit setting is only valid when the PE bit is set to 1, enabling parity bit addition and
checking, in asynchronous mode. The O/E bit setting is invalid in synchronous mode, when parity
bit addition and checking is disabled in asynchronous mode, and when a multiprocessor format is
used.
Bit 4
O/E Description
0 Even parity*1 (Initial value)
1 Odd parity*2
Notes: 1. When even parity is set, parity bit addition is performed in transmission so that the total
number of 1 bits in the transmit character plus the parity bit is even. In reception, a
check is performed to see if the total number of 1 bits in the receive character plus the
parity bit is even.
2. When odd parity is set, parity bit addition is performed in transmission so that the total
number of 1 bits in the transmit character plus the parity bit is odd. In reception, a check
is performed to see if the total number of 1 bits in the receive character plus the parity
bit is odd.
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 397 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 3⎯Stop Bit Length (STOP): Selects 1 or 2 bits as the stop bit length in asynchronous mode.
The STOP bit setting is only valid in asynchronous mode. If synchronous mode is set the STOP
bit setting is invalid since stop bits are not added.
Bit 3
STOP Description
0 1 stop bit*1 (Initial value)
1 2 stop bits*2
Notes: 1. In transmission, a single 1 bit (stop bit) is added to the end of a transmit character
before it is sent.
2. In transmission, two 1 bits (stop bits) are added to the end of a transmit character
before it is sent.
In reception, only the first stop bit is checked, regardless of the STOP bit setting. If the second
stop bit is 1, it is treated as a stop bit; if it is 0, it is treated as the start bit of the next transmit
character.
Bit 2⎯Multiprocessor Mode (MP): Selects multiprocessor format. When multiprocessor format
is selected, the PE bit and O/E bit parity settings are invalid. The MP bit setting is only valid in
asynchronous mode; it is invalid in synchronous mode.
For details of the multiprocessor communication function, see section 22.3.3, Multiprocessor
Communication Function.
Bit 2
MP Description
0 Multiprocessor function disabled (Initial value)
1 Multiprocessor format selected
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 398 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bits 1 and 0⎯Clock Select 1 and 0 (CKS1, CKS0): These bits select the clock source for the
baud rate generator. The clock source can be selected from φ, φ/4, φ/16, and φ/64, according to the
setting of bits CKS1 and CKS0.
For the relation between the clock source, the bit rate register setting, and the baud rate, see
section 22.2.8, Bit Rate Register 1 (BRR1).
Bit 1 Bit 0
CKS1 CKS0 Description
0 φ clock (Initial value) 0
1 φ/4 clock
1 0 φ/16 clock
1 φ/64 clock
22.2.6 Serial Control Register 1 (SCR1)
7
TIE
0
R/W
6
RIE
0
R/W
5
TE
0
R/W
4
RE
0
R/W
3
MPIE
0
R/W
0
CKE0
0
R/W
2
TEIE
0
R/W
1
CKE1
0
R/W
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
SCR1 is a register that performs enabling or disabling of SCI transfer operations, serial clock
output in asynchronous mode, and interrupt requests, and selection of the serial clock source.
SCR1 can be read or written to by the CPU at all times.
SCR1 is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode,
subsleep mode, and module stop mode.
Bit 7⎯Transmit Interrupt Enable (TIE): Enables or disables transmit-data-empty interrupt
(TXI) request generation when serial transmit data is transferred from TDR1 to TSR1 and the
TDRE flag in SSR1 is set to 1.
Bit 7
TIE Description
0 Transmit-data-empty interrupt (TXI) request disabled* (Initial value)
1 Transmit-data-empty interrupt (TXI) request enabled
Note: * TXI interrupt request cancellation can be performed by reading 1 from the TDRE flag,
then clearing it to 0, or clearing the TIE bit to 0.
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 399 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 6⎯Receive Interrupt Enable (RIE): Enables or disables receive-data-full interrupt (RXI)
request and receive-error interrupt (ERI) request generation when serial receive data is transferred
from RSR1 to RDR1 and the RDRF flag in SSR1 is set to 1.
Bit 6
RIE Description
0 Receive-data-full interrupt (RXI) request and receive-error interrupt (ERI) request
disabled* (Initial value)
1 Receive-data-full interrupt (RXI) request and receive-error interrupt (ERI) request
enabled
Note: * RXI and ERI interrupt request cancellation can be performed by reading 1 from the
RDRF, FER, PER, or ORER flag, then clearing the flag to 0, or clearing the RIE bit to 0.
Bit 5⎯Transmit Enable (TE): Enables or disables the start of serial transmission by the SCI.
Bit 5
TE Description
0 Transmission disabled*1 (Initial value)
1 Transmission enabled*2
Notes: 1. The TDRE flag in SSR1 is fixed at 1.
2. In this state, serial transmission is started when transmit data is written to TDR1 and the
TDRE flag in SSR1 is cleared to 0.
SMR1 setting must be performed to decide the transmission format before setting the
TE bit to 1.
Bit 4⎯Receive Enable (RE): Enables or disables the start of serial reception by the SCI.
Bit 4
RE Description
0 Reception disabled*1 (Initial value)
1 Reception enabled*2
Notes: 1. Clearing the RE bit to 0 does not affect the RDRF, FER, PER, and ORER flags, which
retain their states.
2. Serial reception is started in this state when a start bit is detected in asynchronous
mode or serial clock input is detected in synchronous mode.
SMR1 setting must be performed to decide the reception format before setting the RE
bit to 1.
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 400 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 3⎯Multiprocessor Interrupt Enable (MPIE): Enables or disables multiprocessor interrupts.
The MPIE bit setting is only valid in asynchronous mode when receiving with the MP bit in
SMR1 set to 1.
The MPIE bit setting is invalid in clock synchronous mode or when the MP bit is cleared to 0.
Bit 3
MPIE Description
0 Multiprocessor interrupts disabled (normal reception performed) (Initial value)
[Clearing conditions]
1. When the MPIE bit is cleared to 0
2. When data with MPB = 1 is received
1 Multiprocessor interrupts enabled*
Receive interrupt (RXI) requests, receive-error interrupt (ERI) requests, and setting
of the RDRF, FER, and ORER flags in SSR1 are disabled until data with the
multiprocessor bit set to 1 is received.
Note: * When receive data including MPB = 0 is received, receive data transfer from RSR1 to
RDR1, receive error detection, and setting of the RDRF, FER, and ORER flags in
SSR1, is not performed. When receive data with MPB = 1 is received, the MPB bit in
SSR1 is set to 1, the MPIE bit is cleared to 0 automatically, and generation of RXI and
ERI interrupts (when the TIE and RIE bits in SCR are set to 1) and FER and ORER flag
setting is enabled.
Bit 2⎯Transmit End Interrupt Enable (TEIE): Enables or disables transmit-end interrupt
(TEI) request generation if there is no valid transmit data in TDR when the MSB is transmitted.
Bit 2
TEIE Description
0 Transmit-end interrupt (TEI) request disabled* (Initial value)
1 Transmit-end interrupt (TEI) request enabled*
Note: * TEI cancellation can be performed by reading 1 from the TDRE flag in SSR1, then
clearing it to 0 and clearing the TEND flag to 0, or clearing the TEIE bit to 0.
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 401 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bits 1 and 0⎯Clock Enable 1 and 0 (CKE1, CKE0): These bits are used to select the SCI clock
source and enable or disable clock output from the SCK pin. The combination of the CKE1 and
CKE0 bits determines whether the SCK pin functions as an I/O port, the serial clock output pin, or
the serial clock input pin.
The setting of the CKE0 bit, however, is only valid for internal clock operation (CKE1 = 0) in
asynchronous mode. The CKE0 bit setting is invalid in synchronous mode, and in the case of
external clock operation (CKE1 = 1). Note that the SCI's operating mode must be decided using
SMR1 before setting the CKE1 and CKE0 bits.
For details of clock source selection, see table 22.9.
Bit 1 Bit 0
CKE1 CKE0 Description
Asynchronous mode Internal clock/SCK1 pin functions as I/O
port*1
0
Clock synchronous mode Internal clock/SCK1 pin functions as serial
clock output*1
Asynchronous mode Internal clock/SCK1 pin functions as clock
output*2
0
1
Clock synchronous mode Internal clock/SCK1 pin functions as serial
clock output
1 Asynchronous mode External clock/SCK1 pin functions as clock
input*3
0
Clock synchronous mode External clock/SCK1 pin functions as serial
clock input
Asynchronous mode External clock/SCK1 pin functions as clock
input*3
Clock synchronous mode External clock/SCK1 pin functions as serial
clock input
Notes: 1. Initial value.
2. Outputs a clock of the same frequency as the bit rate.
3. Inputs a clock with a frequency 16 times the bit rate.
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 402 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
22.2.7 Serial Status Register 1 (SSR1)
7
TDRE
1
R/(W)*
6
RDRF
0
R/(W)*
5
ORER
0
R/(W)*
4
FER
0
R/(W)*
3
PER
0
R/(W)*
0
MPBT
0
R/W
2
TEND
1
R
1
MPB
0
R
Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
SSR1 is an 8-bit register containing status flags that indicate the operating status of the SCI, and
multiprocessor bits.
SSR1 can be read or written to by the CPU at all times. However, 1 cannot be written to flags
TDRE, RDRF, ORER, PER, and FER. Also note that in order to clear these flags they must be
read as 1 beforehand. The TEND flag and MPB flag are read-only flags and cannot be modified.
SSR1 is initialized to H'84 by a reset, and in standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode, subsleep
mode, and module stop mode.
Bit 7⎯Transmit Data Register Empty (TDRE): Indicates that data has been transferred from
TDR1 to TSR1 and the next serial data can be written to TDR1.
Bit 7
TDRE Description
0 [Clearing condition]
When 0 is written in TDRE after reading TDRE = 1
1 [Setting conditions] (Initial value)
1. When the TE bit in SCR1 is 0
2. When data is transferred from TDR1 to TSR1 and data can be written to TDR1
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 403 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 6⎯Receive Data Register Full (RDRF): Indicates that the received data is stored in RDR1.
Bit 6
RDRF Description
0 [Clearing condition] (Initial value)
When 0 is written in RDRF after reading RDRF = 1
1 [Setting condition]
When serial reception ends normally and receive data is transferred from RSR1 to
RDR1
Note: RDR1 and the RDRF flag are not affected and retain their previous values when an error is
detected during reception or when the RE bit in SCR1 is cleared to 0.
If reception of the next data is completed while the RDRF flag is still set to 1, an overrun
error will occur and the receive data will be lost.
Bit 5⎯Overrun Error (ORER): Indicates that an overrun error occurred during reception,
causing abnormal termination.
Bit 5
ORER Description
0 [Clearing condition] (Initial value)*1
When 0 is written in ORER after reading ORER = 1*1
1 [Setting condition]
When the next serial reception is completed while RDRF = 1*2
Notes: 1. The ORER flag is not affected and retains its previous state when the RE bit in SCR1 is
cleared to 0.
2. The receive data prior to the overrun error is retained in RDR1, and the data received
subsequently is lost. Also, subsequent serial reception cannot be continued while the
ORER flag is set to 1. In synchronous mode, serial transmission cannot be continued,
either.
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 404 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 4⎯Framing Error (FER): Indicates that a framing error occurred during reception in
asynchronous mode, causing abnormal termination.
Bit 4
FER Description
0 [Clearing condition] (Initial value)
When 0 is written in FER after reading FER = 1*1
1 [Setting condition]
When the SCI checks the stop bit at the end of the receive data when reception
ends, and the stop bit is 0*2
Notes: 1. The FER flag is not affected and retains its previous state when the RE bit in SCR1 is
cleared to 0.
2. In 2-stop-bit mode, only the first stop bit is checked for a value of 1; the second stop bit
is not checked. If a framing error occurs, the receive data is transferred to RDR1 but the
RDRF flag is not set. Also, subsequent serial reception cannot be continued while the
FER flag is set to 1. In synchronous mode, serial transmission cannot be continued,
either.
Bit 3⎯Parity Error (PER): Indicates that a parity error occurred during reception using parity
addition in asynchronous mode, causing abnormal termination.
Bit 4
PER Description
0 [Clearing condition] (Initial value)
When 0 is written in PER after reading PER = 1*1
1 [Setting condition]
When, in reception, the number of 1 bits in the receive data plus the parity bit does
not match the parity setting (even or odd) specified by the O/E bit in SMR1*2
Notes: 1. The PER flag is not affected and retains its previous state when the RE bit in SCR1 is
cleared to 0.
2. If a parity error occurs, the receive data is transferred to RDR1 but the RDRF flag is not
set. Also, subsequent serial reception cannot be continued while the PER flag is set to
1. In synchronous mode, serial transmission cannot be continued, either.
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 405 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 2⎯Transmit End (TEND): Indicates that there is no valid data in TDR when the last bit of
the transmit character is sent, and transmission has been ended.
The TEND flag is read-only and cannot be modified.
Bit 2
TEND Description
0 [Clearing condition]
When 0 is written in TDRE after reading TDRE = 1
1 [Setting conditions] (Initial value)
1. When the TE bit in SCR1 is 0
2. When TDRE = 1 at transmission of the last bit of a 1-byte serial transmit
character
Bit 1⎯Multiprocessor Bit (MPB): When reception is performed using a multiprocessor format
in asynchronous mode, MPB stores the multiprocessor bit in the receive data.
MPB is a read-only bit, and cannot be modified.
Bit 1
MPB Description
0 [Clearing condition] (Initial value)
When data with a 0 multiprocessor bit is received*
1 [Setting condition]
When data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is received
Note: * Retains its previous state when the RE bit in SCR1 is cleared to 0 with multiprocessor
format.
Bit 0⎯Multiprocessor Bit Transfer (MPBT): When transmission is performed using a
multiprocessor format in asynchronous mode, MPBT stores the multiprocessor bit to be added to
the transmit data.
The MPBT bit setting is invalid when a multiprocessor format is not used, when not transmitting,
and in synchronous mode.
Bit 0
MPBT Description
0 Data with a 0 multiprocessor bit is transmitted (Initial value)
1 Data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is transmitted
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 406 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
22.2.8 Bit Rate Register 1 (BRR1)
7
1
R/W
6
1
R/W
5
1
R/W
4
1
R/W
3
1
R/W
0
1
R/W
2
1
R/W
1
1
R/W
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
BRR1 is an 8-bit register that sets the serial transfer bit rate in accordance with the baud rate
generator operating clock selected by bits CKS1 and CKS0 in SMR1.
BRR1 can be read or written to by the CPU at all times.
BRR1 is initialized to H'FF by a reset, and in standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode,
subsleep mode, and module stop mode.
Table 22.3 shows sample BRR1 settings in asynchronous mode, and table 22.4 shows sample
BRR1 settings in synchronous mode.
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 407 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Table 22.3 BRR1 Settings for Various Bit Rates (Asynchronous Mode)
Operating Frequency φ (MHz)
2 2.097152 2.4576 3
Bit Rate
(bits/s) n N Error (%) n N Error (%) n N Error (%) n N Error (%)
110 1 141 0.03 1 148 −0.04 1 174 −0.26 1 212 0.03
150 1 103 0.16 1 108 0.21 1 127 0.00 1 155 0.16
300 0 207 0.16 0 217 0.21 0 255 0.00 1 77 0.16
600 0 103 0.16 0 108 0.21 0 127 0.00 0 155 0.16
1200 0 51 0.16 0 54 −0.71 0 63 0.00 0 77 0.16
2400 0 25 0.16 0 26 1.12 0 31 0.00 0 38 0.16
4800 0 12 0.16 0 13 −2.54 0 15 0.00 0 19 −2.40
9600 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 0 6 −2.54 0 7 0.00 0 9 −2.40
19200 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 0 3 0.00 0 4 −2.40
31250 0 1 0.00 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 0 ⎯ ⎯ 0 2 0.00
38400 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 0 1 0.00 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
Operating Frequency φ (MHz)
3.6864 4 4.9152 5
Bit Rate
(bits/s) n N Error (%) n N Error (%) n N Error (%) n N Error (%)
110 2 64 0.69 2 70 0.03 2 86 0.31 2 88 −0.25
150 1 191 0.00 1 207 0.16 1 255 0.00 2 64 0.16
300 1 95 0.00 1 103 0.16 1 127 0.00 1 129 0.16
600 0 191 0.00 0 207 0.16 0 255 0.00 1 64 0.16
1200 0 95 0.00 0 103 0.16 0 127 0.00 0 129 0.16
2400 0 47 0.00 0 51 0.16 0 63 0.00 0 64 0.16
4800 0 23 0.00 0 25 0.16 0 31 0.00 0 32 −1.38
9600 0 11 0.00 0 12 0.16 0 15 0.00 0 15 1.70
19200 0 5 0.00 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 0 7 0.00 0 7 1.70
31250 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 0 3 0.00 0 4 −1.73 0 4 0.00
38400 0 2 0.00 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 0 3 0.00 0 3 1.70
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 408 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Operating Frequency φ (MHz)
6 6.144 7.3728 8
Bit Rate
(bits/s) n N Error (%) n N Error (%) n N Error (%) n N Error (%)
110 2 106 −0.44 2 108 0.08 2 130 −0.07 2 141 0.03
150 2 77 0.16 2 79 0.00 2 95 0.00 2 103 0.16
300 1 155 0.16 1 159 0.00 1 191 0.00 1 207 0.16
600 1 77 0.16 1 79 0.00 1 95 0.00 1 103 0.16
1200 0 155 0.16 0 159 0.00 0 191 0.00 0 207 0.16
2400 0 77 0.16 0 79 0.00 0 95 0.00 0 103 0.16
4800 0 38 0.16 0 39 0.00 0 47 0.00 0 51 0.16
9600 0 19 −2.40 0 19 0.00 0 23 0.00 0 25 0.16
19200 0 9 −2.40 0 9 0.00 0 11 0.00 0 12 0.16
31250 0 5 0.00 0 5 2.34 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 0 7 0.00
38400 0 4 −2.40 0 4 0.00 0 5 0.00 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
Operating Frequency φ (MHz)
9.8304 10
Bit Rate
(bits/s) n N Error (%) n N Error (%)
110 2 174 −0.26 2 177 −0.25
150 2 127 0.00 2 129 0.16
300 1 255 0.00 2 64 0.16
600 1 127 0.00 1 129 0.16
1200 0 255 0.00 1 64 0.16
2400 0 127 0.00 0 129 0.16
4800 0 63 0.00 0 64 0.16
9600 0 31 0.00 0 32 −1.38
19200 0 15 0.00 0 15 1.70
31250 0 9 −1.73 0 9 0.00
38400 0 7 0.00 0 7 1.70
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 409 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Table 22.4 BRR1 Settings for Various Bit Rates (Synchronous Mode)
Operating Frequency φ (MHz)
2 4 8 10
Bit Rate
(bits/s) n N n N n N n N
110 3 70 ⎯ ⎯
250 2 124 2 249 3 124 ⎯ ⎯
500 1 249 2 124 2 249 ⎯ ⎯
1 k 1 124 1 249 2 124 ⎯ ⎯
2.5 k 0 199 1 99 1 199 1 249
5 k 0 99 0 199 1 99 1 124
10 k 0 49 0 99 0 199 0 249
25 k 0 19 0 39 0 79 0 99
50 k 0 9 0 19 0 39 0 49
100 k 0 4 0 9 0 19 0 24
250 k 0 1 0 3 0 7 0 9
500 k 0 0* 0 1 0 3 0 4
1 M 0 0* 0 1
2.5 M 0 0*
5 M
Legend:
Blank: Cannot be set.
⎯: Can be set, but there will be a degree of error.
*: Continuous transfer is not possible.
Note: As far as possible, the setting should be made so that the error is no more than 1%.
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 410 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
The BRR1 setting is found from the following equations.
• Asynchronous mode:
N = φ× 10
6
− 1
64 × 2
2n −1
× B
• Synchronous mode:
N = φ× 10
6
− 1
8× 2
2n −1
× B
Where
B: Bit rate (bits/s)
N: BRR1 setting for baud rate generator (0 ≤ N ≤ 255)
φ: Operating frequency (MHz)
n: Baud rate generator input clock (n = 0 to 3)
(See the table below for the relation between n and the clock.)
SMR1 Setting
n Clock CKS1 CKS0
0 φ 0 0
1 φ/4 0 1
2 φ/16 1 0
3 φ/64 1 1
The bit rate error in asynchronous mode is found from the following equation:
Error (%) =
{
φ × 10
6
− 1
}
× 10
(N + 1) × B × 64 × 2
2n −1
Table 22.5 shows the maximum bit rate for each frequency in asynchronous mode. Tables 22.6
and 22.7 show the maximum bit rates with external clock input.
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 411 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Table 22.5 Maximum Bit Rate for Each Frequency (Asynchronous Mode)
φ (MHz) Maximum Bit Rate (bits/s) n N
2 62500 0 0
2.097152 65536 0 0
2.4576 76800 0 0
3 93750 0 0
3.6864 115200 0 0
4 125000 0 0
4.9152 153600 0 0
5 156250 0 0
6 187500 0 0
6.144 192000 0 0
7.3728 230400 0 0
8 250000 0 0
9.8304 307200 0 0
10 312500 0 0
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 412 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Table 22.6 Maximum Bit Rate with External Clock Input (Asynchronous Mode)
φ (MHz) External Input Clock (MHz) Maximum Bit Rate (bits/s)
2 0.5000 31250
2.097152 0.5243 32768
2.4576 0.6144 38400
3 0.7500 46875
3.6864 0.9216 57600
4 1.0000 62500
4.9152 1.2288 76800
5 1.2500 78125
6 1.5000 93750
6.144 1.5360 96000
7.3728 1.8432 115200
8 2.0000 125000
9.8304 2.4576 153600
10 2.5000 156250
Table 22.7 Maximum Bit Rate with External Clock Input (Synchronous Mode)
φ (MHz) External Input Clock (MHz) Maximum Bit Rate (bits/s)
2 0.3333 333333.3
4 0.6667 666666.7
6 1.0000 1000000.0
8 1.3333 1333333.3
10 1.6667 1666666.7
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 413 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
22.2.9 Serial Interface Mode Register 1 (SCMR1)
7
—
1
—
6
—
1
—
5
—
1
—
4
—
1
—
3
SDIR
0
R/W
0
SMIF
0
R/W
2
SINV
0
R/W
1
—
1
—
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
SCMR1 is an 8-bit readable/writable register used to select SCI functions.
SCMR1 is initialized to H'F2 by a reset, and in standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode,
subsleep mode, and module stop mode.
Bits 7 to 4⎯Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
Bit 3⎯Data Transfer Direction (SDIR): Selects the serial/parallel conversion format.
Bit 3
SDIR Description
0 TDR1 contents are transmitted LSB-first (Initial value)
Receive data is stored in RDR1 LSB-first
1 TDR1 contents are transmitted MSB-first
Receive data is stored in RDR1 MSB-first
Bit 2⎯Data Invert (SINV): Specifies inversion of the data logic level. The SINV bit does not
affect the logic level of the parity bit(s): parity bit inversion requires inversion of the O/E bit in
SMR1.
Bit 2
SINV Description
0 TDR1 contents are transmitted without modification (Initial value)
Receive data is stored in RDR1 without modification
1 TDR1 contents are inverted before being transmitted
Receive data is stored in RDR1 in inverted form
Bit 1⎯Reserved: This bit cannot be modified and is always read as 1.
Bit 0⎯Reserved: 1 should not be written in this bit.
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 414 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
22.2.10 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR)
7
1
R/W
6
1
R/W
5
1
R/W
4
1
R/W
3
1
R/W
2
1
R/W
1
1
R/W
0
1
R/W
7
1
R/W
6
1
R/W
5
1
R/W
4
1
R/W
3
1
R/W
2
1
R/W
1
1
R/W
0
1
R/W
MSTPCRH MSTPCRL
MSTP15 MSTP14 MSTP13 MSTP12 MSTP11 MSTP10 MSTP9 MSTP8 MSTP7 MSTP6 MSTP5 MSTP4 MSTP3 MSTP2 MSTP1 MSTP0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
MSTPCR, comprising two 8-bit readable/writable registers, performs module stop mode control.
When bit MSTP8 is set to 1, SCI1 operation stops at the end of the bus cycle and a transition is
made to module stop mode. For details, see section 4.5, Module Stop Mode.
MSTPCR is initialized to H'FFFF by a reset.
Bit 0⎯Module Stop (MSTP8): Specifies the SCI1 module stop mode.
MSTPCRH
Bit 0
MSTP8 Description
0 SCI1 module stop mode is cleared
1 SCI1 module stop mode is set (Initial value)
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 415 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
22.3 Operation
22.3.1 Overview
The SCI can carry out serial communication in two modes: asynchronous mode in which
synchronization is achieved character by character, and synchronous mode in which
synchronization is achieved with clock pulses.
Selection of asynchronous or synchronous mode and the transmission format is made using SMR1
as shown in table 22.8. The SCI clock is determined by a combination of the C/A bit in SMR1 and
the CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR1, as shown in table 22.9.
• Asynchronous Mode
⎯ Data length: Choice of 7 or 8 bits
⎯ Choice of parity addition, multiprocessor bit addition, and addition of 1 or 2 stop bits (the
combination of these parameters determines the transfer format and character length)
⎯ Detection of framing, parity, and overrun errors, and breaks, during reception
⎯ Choice of internal or external clock as SCI clock source
• When internal clock is selected:
The SCI operates on the baud rate generator clock and a clock with the same frequency
as the bit rate can be output
• When external clock is selected:
A clock with a frequency of 16 times the bit rate must be input (the built-in baud rate
generator is not used)
• Clock Synchronous Mode
⎯ Transfer format: Fixed 8-bit data
⎯ Detection of overrun errors during reception
⎯ Choice of internal or external clock as SCI clock source
• When internal clock is selected:
The SCI operates on the baud rate generator clock and a serial clock is output off-chip
• When external clock is selected:
The built-in baud rate generator is not used, and the SCI operates on the input serial
clock
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 416 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Table 22.8 SMR1 Settings and Serial Transfer Format Selection
SMR1 Settings SCI Transfer Format
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 2 Bit 5 Bit 3
C/A CHR MP PE STOP
Mode
Data
Length
Multiproc-
essor Bit
Parity
Bit
Stop Bit
Length
0 1 bit 0
1
No
2 bits
0 1 bit
0
1
1
8-bit
data
Yes
2 bits
0 1 bit 0
1
No
2 bits
0 1 bit
1
0
1
1
Asynchro-
nous mode
7-bit
data
No
Yes
2 bits
⎯ 0 1 bit 0
⎯ 1
8-bit
data 2 bits
⎯ 0 1 bit
0
1
1
⎯ 1
Asynchro-
nous mode
(multi-
processor
format)
7-bit
data
Yes
2 bits
1 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Clock
synchronous
mode
8-bit
data
No
No
Table 22.9 SMR1 and SCR1 Settings and SCI Clock Source Selection
SMR1 SCR1 Setting
Bit 7 Bit 1 Bit 0 SCI Transfer Clock
C/A CKE1 CKE0 Mode Clock Source SCK Pin Function
0 SCI does not use SCK pin 0
1
Internal
Outputs clock with same frequency
as bit rate
0
0
1
1
Asynchronous
mode
External Inputs clock with frequency of 16
times the bit rate
0 0
1
Internal Outputs serial clock
0
1
1
1
Clock
synchronous
mode
External Inputs serial clock
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 417 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
22.3.2 Operation in Asynchronous Mode
In asynchronous mode, characters are sent or received, each preceded by a start bit indicating the
start of communication and followed by one or two stop bits indicating the end of communication.
Serial communication is thus carried out with synchronization established on a character-by-
character basis.
Inside the SCI, the transmitter and receiver are independent units, enabling full-duplex
communication. Both the transmitter and the receiver also have a double-buffered structure, so
that data can be read or written during transmission or reception, enabling continuous data
transfer.
Figure 22.2 shows the general format for asynchronous serial communication.
In asynchronous serial communication, the transmission line is usually held in the mark state (high
level). The SCI monitors the transmission line, and when it goes to the space state (low level),
recognizes a start bit and starts serial communication.
One serial communication character consists of a start bit (low level), followed by data (in LSB-
first order), a parity bit (high or low level), and finally one or two stop bits (high level).
In asynchronous mode, the SCI performs synchronization at the falling edge of the start bit in
reception. The SCI samples the data on the 8th pulse of a clock with a frequency of 16 times the
length of one bit, so that the transfer data is latched at the center of each bit.
LSB
Start
bit
MSB
Idle state
(mark state)
Stop
bit(s)
0
Transmit/receive data
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 0/1 1 1
11
Serial
data
Parity
bit
1 bit 1 or 2 bits7 or 8 bits 1 bit,
or none
One unit of transfer data (character or frame)
Figure 22.2 Data Format in Asynchronous Communication
(Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, Two Stop Bits)
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 418 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
• Data Transfer Format
Table 22.10 shows the data transfer formats that can be used in asynchronous mode. Any of 12
transfer formats can be selected by settings in SMR1.
Table 22.10 Serial Transfer Formats (Asynchronous Mode)
PE
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
—
—
—
—
S 8-bit data
STOP
S 7-bit data
STOP
S 8-bit data
STOP STOP
S 8-bit data P
STOP
S 7-bit data
STOP
P
S 8-bit data
MPB STOP
S 8-bit data
MPB STOP STOP
S 7-bit data
STOPMPB
S 7-bit data
STOPMPB STOP
S 7-bit data
STOPSTOP
CHR
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
MP
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
STOP
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
SMR1 Settings
123456789101112
Serial Transfer Format and Frame Length
STOP
S 8-bit data P
STOP
S 7-bit data
STOP
P
STOP
Legend:
S: Start bit
STOP: Stop bit
P: Parity bit
MPB: Multiproccesor bit
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 419 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
• Clock
Either an internal clock generated by the built-in baud rate generator or an external clock input
at the SCK pin can be selected as the SCI's serial clock, according to the setting of the C/A bit
in SMR1 and the CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR1. For details of SCI clock source selection, see
table 22.9.
When an external clock is input at the SCK pin, the clock frequency should be 16 times the bit
rate used.
When the SCI is operated on an internal clock, the clock can be output from the SCK pin. The
frequency of the clock output in this case is equal to the bit rate, and the phase is such that the
rising edge of the clock is at the center of each transmit data bit, as shown in figure 22.3.
0
1 frame
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 0/1 1 1
Figure 22.3 Relation between Output Clock and Transfer Data Phase
(Asynchronous Mode)
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 420 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
• Data Transfer Operations
⎯ SCI Initialization (Asynchronous Mode)
Before transmitting and receiving data, first clear the TE and RE bits in SCR1 to 0, then
initialize the SCI as described below.
When the operating mode, transfer format, etc., is changed, the TE and RE bits must be
cleared to 0 before making the change using the following procedure. When the TE bit is
cleared to 0, the TDRE flag is set to 1 and TSR1 is initialized. Note that clearing the RE bit
to 0 does not change the contents of the RDRF, PER, FER, and ORER flags, or the
contents of RDR1.
When an external clock is used the clock should not be stopped during operation, including
initialization, since operation is uncertain.
Figure 22.4 shows a sample SCI initialization flowchart.
Wait
<Initialization completed>
Start initialization
Set data transfer format
in SMR1 and SCMR1
[1]
Set CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR1
(TE, RE bits 0)
No
Yes
Set value in BRR1
Clear TE and RE bits in SCR1 to 0
[2]
[3]
Set TE and RE bits in SCR1 to 1,
and set RIE, TIE, TEIE,
and MPIE bits
[4]
1-bit interval elapsed?
Set the clock selection in SCR1.
Be sure to clear bits RIE, TIE, TEIE, and
MPIE, and bits TE and RE, to 0.
When the clock is selected in
asynchronous mode, it is output
immediately after SCR1 settings are made.
Set the data transfer format in SMR1 and
SCMR1.
Write a value corresponding to the bit rate
to BRR1. This is not necessary if an
external clock is used.
Wait at least one bit interval, then set the
TE bit or RE bit in SCR1 to 1. Also set the
RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE bits.
Setting the TE and RE bits enables the
SO1 and SI1 pins to be used.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Figure 22.4 Sample SCI Initialization Flowchart
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 421 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
⎯ Serial Data Transmission (Asynchronous Mode)
Figure 22.5 shows a sample flowchart for serial transmission.
The following procedure should be used for serial data transmission.
No
< End >
[1]
Yes
Initialization
Start transmission
Read TDRE flag in SSR1 [1]
Write transmit data to TDR1 and
clear TDRE flag in SSR to 0
No
Yes
No
Yes
Read TEND flag in SSR1
[3]
No
Yes
[4]
Clear PDR to 0
and set PCR to 1
Clear TE bit in SCR1 to 0
TDRE = 1
All data transmitted?
TEND = 1
Break output?
SCI initialization:
The SO1 pin is automatically designated as
the transmit data output pin.
SCI status check and transmit data write:
Read SSR and check that the TDRE flag is
set to 1, then write transmit data to TDR1
and clear the TDRE flag to 0.
Serial transmission continuation procedure:
To continue serial transmission, read 1
from the TDRE flag to confirm that writing is
possible, then write data to TDR1, and then
clear the TDRE flag to 0.
Break output at the end of serial
transmission:
To output a break in serial transmission, set
PCR for the port corresponding to the SO1
pin to 1, clear PDR to 0, then clear the TE
bit in SCR1 to 0.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Figure 22.5 Sample Serial Transmission Flowchart
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 422 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
In serial transmission, the SCI operates as described below.
1. The SCI monitors the TDRE flag in SSR1, and if it is 0, recognizes that data has been written
to TDR1, and transfers the data from TDR1 to TSR1.
2. After transferring data from TDR1 to TSR1, the SCI sets the TDRE flag to 1 and starts
transmission.
If the TIE bit is set to 1 at this time, a transmit data empty interrupt (TXI) is generated.
The serial transmit data is sent from the SO1 pin in the following order.
a. Start bit:
One 0-bit is output.
b. Transmit data:
8-bit or 7-bit data is output in LSB-first order.
c. Parity bit or multiprocessor bit:
One parity bit (even or odd parity), or one multiprocessor bit is output.
A format in which neither a parity bit nor a multiprocessor bit is output can also be
selected.
d. Stop bit(s):
One or two 1-bits (stop bits) are output.
e. Mark state:
1 is output continuously until the start bit that starts the next transmission is sent.
3. The SCI checks the TDRE flag at the timing for sending the stop bit.
If the TDRE flag is cleared to 0, the data is transferred from TDR1 to TSR1, the stop bit is
sent, and then serial transmission of the next frame is started.
If the TDRE flag is set to 1, the TEND flag in SSR1 is set to 1, the stop bit is sent, and then the
mark state is entered in which 1 is output continuously. If the TEIE bit in SCR1 is set to 1 at
this time, a TEI interrupt request is generated.
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 423 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Figure 22.6 shows an example of the operation for transmission in asynchronous mode.
TDRE
TEND
0
1 frame
D0 D1 D7 0/1 1 0 D0 D1 D7 0/1 1
1 1
Data
Start
bit
Parity
bit
Stop
bit
Start
bit
Data
Parity
bit
Stop
bit
TXI interrupt
request
generated
Data written to TDR1 and
TDRE flag cleared to 0
in TXI interrupt handling
routine
TEI interrupt request
generated
Idle state
(mark state)
TXI interrupt request
generated
Figure 22.6 Example of Operation in Transmission in Asynchronous Mode
(Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit)
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 424 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
⎯ Serial Data Reception (Asynchronous Mode)
Figures 22.7 and 22.8 show sample flowcharts for serial reception.
The following procedure should be used for serial data reception.
Yes
< End >
[1]
No
Initialization
Start reception
[2]
No
Yes
Read RDRF flag in SSR1 [4]
[5]
Clear RE bit in SCR1 to 0
Read ORER, PER,
FER flags in SSR1
Error handling
(Continued on next page)
[3]
Read receive data in RDR1, and clear
RDRF flag in SSR1 to 0
No
Yes
PER ∨ FER ∨ ORER = 1
RDRF = 1
All data received?
SCI initialization:
The SI1 pin is automatically designated as
the receive data input pin.
Receive error handling and break
detection:
If a receive error occurs, read the ORER,
PER, and FER flags in SSR1 to identify the
error. After performing the appropriate
error handling, ensure that the ORER,
PER, and FER flags are all cleared to 0.
Reception cannot be resumed if any of
these flags are set to 1. In the case of a
framing error, a break can be detected by
reading the value of the input port
corresponding to the SI1 pin.
SCI status check and receive data read:
Read SSR1 and check that RDRF = 1, then
read the receive data in RDR1 and clear
the RDRF flag to 0. Transition of the RDRF
flag from 0 to 1 can also be identified by an
RXI interrupt.
Serial reception continuation procedure:
To continue serial reception, before the
stop bit for the current frame is received,
read the RDRF flag, read RDR1, and clear
the RDRF flag to 0.
[1]
[2][3]
[4]
[5]
Figure 22.7 Sample Serial Reception Data Flowchart (1)
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 425 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
< End >
[3]
Error handling
Parity error handling
Yes
No
Clear ORER, PER, and FER
flags in SSR1 to 0
No
Yes
No
Yes
Framing error handling
No
Yes
Overrun error handling
ORER = 1
FER = 1
Break?
PER = 1
Clear RE bit in SCR1 to 0
Figure 22.8 Sample Serial Reception Data Flowchart (2)
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 426 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
In serial reception, the SCI operates as described below.
1. The SCI monitors the transmission line, and if a 0 stop bit is detected, performs internal
synchronization and starts reception.
2. The received data is stored in RSR1 in LSB-to-MSB order.
3. The parity bit and stop bit are received.
After receiving these bits, the SCI carries out the following checks.
a. Parity check:
The SCI checks whether the number of 1 bits in the receive data agrees with the parity
(even or odd) set in the O/E bit in SMR1.
b. Stop bit check:
The SCI checks whether the stop bit is 1.
If there are two stop bits, only the first is checked.
c. Status check:
The SCI checks whether the RDRF flag is 0, indicating that the receive data can be
transferred from RSR1 to RDR1.
If all the above checks are passed, the RDRF flag is set to 1, and the receive data is stored
in RDR1.
If a receive error* is detected in the error check, the operation is as shown in table 22.11.
4. If the RIE bit in SCR1 is set to 1 when the RDRF flag changes to 1, a receive-data-full
interrupt (RXI) request is generated.
Also, if the RIE bit in SCR1 is set to 1 when the ORER, PER, or FER flag changes to 1, a
receive-error interrupt (ERI) request is generated.
Note: * Subsequent receive operations cannot be performed when a receive error has occurred.
Also note that the RDRF flag is not set to 1 in reception, and so the error flags must be
cleared to 0.
Table 22.11 Receive Errors and Conditions for Occurrence
Receive Error Abbrev. Occurrence Condition Data Transfer
Overrun error ORER When the next data reception is
completed while the RDRF flag
in SSR1 is set to 1
Receive data is not transferred
from RSR1 to RDR1
Framing error FER When the stop bit is 0 Receive data is transferred
from RSR1 to RDR1
Parity error PER When the received data differs
from the parity (even or odd) set
in SMR1
Receive data is transferred
from RSR1 to RDR1
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 427 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Figure 22.9 shows an example of the operation for reception in asynchronous mode.
RDRF
FER
0
1 frame
D0 D1 D7 0/1 1 0 D0 D1 D7 0/1
0
1 1
Data
Start
bit
Parity
bit
Stop
bit
Start
bit
Data Parity
bit
Stop
bit
ERI interrupt request
generated by framing
error
Idle state
(mark state)
RDR1 data read
and RDRF flag
cleared to 0 in
RXI interrupt
handling routine
RXI interrupt
request
generation
Figure 22.9 Example of SCI Operation in Reception
(Example with 8-Bit Data, Parity, One Stop Bit)
22.3.3 Multiprocessor Communication Function
The multiprocessor communication function performs serial communication using a
multiprocessor format, in which a multiprocessor bit is added to the transfer data, in asynchronous
mode. Use of this function enables data transfer to be performed among a number of processors
sharing transmission lines.
When multiprocessor communication is carried out, each receiving station is addressed by a
unique ID code.
The serial communication cycle consists of two component cycles: an ID transmission cycle
which specifies the receiving station, and a data transmission cycle. The multiprocessor bit is used
to differentiate between the ID transmission cycle and the data transmission cycle.
The transmitting station first sends the ID of the receiving station with which it wants to perform
serial communication as data with a 1 multiprocessor bit added. It then sends transmit data as data
with a 0 multiprocessor bit added.
The receiving station skips the data until data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is sent.
When data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is received, the receiving station compares that data with its
own ID. The station whose ID matches then receives the data sent next. Stations whose ID does
not match continue to skip the data until data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is again received. In this
way, data communication is carried out among a number of processors.
Figure 22.10 shows an example of inter-processor communication using a multiprocessor format.
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 428 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
1. Data Transfer Format
There are four data transfer formats.
When a multiprocessor format is specified, the parity bit specification is invalid.
For details, see table 22.10.
2. Clock
See the section on asynchronous mode.
Transmitting
station
Receiving
station A
(ID = 01)
Receiving
station B
(ID = 02)
Receiving
station C
(ID = 03)
Receiving
station D
(ID = 04)
Serial communication line
Serial
data
ID transmission cycle:
receiving station
specification
Data transmission cycle:
data transmission to
receiving station
specified by ID
(MPB = 1) (MPB = 0)
H'01 H'AA
Legend:
MPB : Multiprocessor bit
Figure 22.10 Example of Inter-Processor Communication Using Multiprocessor Format
(Transmission of Data H'AA to Receiving Station A)
3. Data Transfer Operations
a. Multiprocessor Serial Data Transmission
Figure 22.11 shows a sample flowchart for multiprocessor serial data transmission.
The following procedure should be used for multiprocessor serial data transmission.
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 429 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
No
< End >
[1]
Yes
Initialization
Start transmission
Read TDRE flag in SSR1 [2]
Write transmit data to TDR1
and set MPBT bit in SSR1
No
Yes
No
Yes
Read TEND flag in SSR1
[3]
No
Yes
[4]
Clear PDR to 0 and set PCR to 1
Clear TE bit in SCR1 to 0
TDRE = 1
Transmission end?
TEND = 1
Break output?
Clear TDRE flag to 0
SCI initialization:
The SO1 pin is automatically designated as
the transmit data output pin.
SCI status check and transmit data write:
Read SSR1 and check that the TDRE flag
is set to 1, then write transmit data to
TDR1. Set the MPBT bit in SSR1 to 0 or 1.
Finally, clear the TDRE flag to 0.
Serial transmission continuation procedure:
To continue serial transmission, be sure to
read 1 from the TDRE flag to confirm that
writing is possible, then write data to TDR1,
and then clear the TDRE flag to 0.
Break output at the end of serial
transmission:
To output a break in serial transmission, set
the port PCR to 1, clear PDR to 0, then
clear the TE bit in SCR1 to 0.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Figure 22.11 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Transmission Flowchart
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 430 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
In serial transmission, the SCI operates as described below.
1. The SCI monitors the TDRE flag in SSR1, and if it is 0, recognizes that data has been written
to TDR1, and transfers the data from TDR1 to TSR1.
2. After transferring data from TDR1 to TSR1, the SCI sets the TDRE flag to 1 and starts
transmission.
If the TIE bit is set to 1 at this time, a transmit-data-empty interrupt (TXI) is generated.
The serial transmit data is sent from the SO2 pin in the following order.
a. Start bit:
One 0-bit is output.
b. Transmit data:
8-bit or 7-bit data is output in LSB-first order.
c. Multiprocessor bit
One multiprocessor bit (MPBT value) is output.
d. Stop bit(s):
One or two 1-bits (stop bits) are output.
e. Mark state:
1 is output continuously until the start bit that starts the next transmission is sent.
3. The SCI checks the TDRE flag at the timing for sending the stop bit.
If the TDRE flag is cleared to 0, data is transferred from TDR1 to TSR1, the stop bit is sent,
and then serial transmission of the next frame is started.
If the TDRE flag is set to 1, the TEND flag in SSR1 is set to 1, the stop bit is sent, and then the
mark state is entered in which 1 is output continuously. If the TEIE bit in SCR1 is set to 1 at
this time, a transmit-end interrupt (TEI) request is generated.
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 431 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Figure 22.12 shows an example of SCI operation for transmission using a multiprocessor format.
TDRE
TEND
0
1 frame
D0 D1 D7 0/1 1 0 D0 D1 D7 0/1 1
1
Data Data
TXI interrupt
request
general
Data written to TDR1 and
TDRE flag cleared to 0
in TXI interrupt handling
routine
TEI interrupt
request
generated
Idle state
(mark state)
TXI interrupt request
generated
Start
bit
Multi-
processor
bit
Stop
bit
Start
bit
Stop
bit 1
Multi-
processor
bit
Figure 22.12 Example of SCI Operation in Transmission
(Example with 8-Bit Data, Multiprocessor Bit, One Stop Bit)
b. Multiprocessor Serial Data Reception
Figures 22.13 and 22.14 show sample flowcharts for multiprocessor serial reception.
The following procedure should be used for multiprocessor serial data reception.
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 432 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Yes
< End >
[1]
No
Initialization
Start reception
No
Yes
[4]
Clear RE bit in SCR1 to 0
Error handling
(Continued on
next page)
[5]
No
Yes
FER ∨ ORER = 1
RDRF = 1
All data received?
Set MPIE bit in SCR1 to 1 [2]
Read ORER and FER flags in SSR1
Read RDRF flag in SSR1 [3]
Read receive data in RDR1
No
Yes
This station's ID?
Read ORER and FER flags in SSR1
Yes
No
Read RDRF flag in SSR1
No
Yes
FER ∨ ORER = 1
Read receive data in RDR1
RDRF = 1
SCI initialization:
The SI1 pin is automatically designated as
the receive data input pin.
ID reception cycle:
Set the MPIE bit in SCR1 to 1.
SCI status check, ID reception and
comparison:
Read SSR1 and check that the RDRF flag
is set to 1, then read the receive data in
RDR1 and compare it with this station's ID.
If the data is not this station's ID, set the
MPIE bit to 1 again, and clear the RDRF
flag to 0.
If the data is this station's ID, clear the
RDRF flag to 0.
SCI status check and data reception:
Read SSR1 and check that the RDRF flag
is set to 1, then read the data in RDR1.
Receive error handling and break
detectioon:
If a receive error occurs, read the ORER
and FER flags in SSR1 to identify the error.
After performing the appropriate error
handling, ensure that the ORER and FER
flags are both cleared to 0.
Reception cannot be resumed if either of
these flags is set to 1.
In the case of a framing error, a break can
be detected by reading the SI1 in value.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
Figure 22.13 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Reception Flowchart (1)
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 433 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
< End >
Error handling
Yes
No
Clear ORER, PER, and FER
flags in SSR1 to 0
No
Yes
No
Yes
Framing error handling
Overrun error handling
ORER = 1
FER = 1
Break?
Clear RE bit in SCR1 to 0
[5]
Figure 22.14 Sample Multiprocessor Serial Reception Flowchart (2)
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 434 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Figure 22.15 shows an example of SCI operation for multiprocessor format reception.
MPIE
RDR1
value
0D0 D1 D7 1 1 0 D0 D1 D7 0 1
11
Data (ID1)
Start
bit MPB
Stop
bit
Start
bit
Data (Data 1)
MPB
Stop
bit
RXI interrupt
request (multi-
processor
interrupt)
generated
Idle state
(mark state)
RDRF
RDR1 data read
and RDRF flag
cleared to 0 in
RXI interrupt
handling routine
If not this station's
ID, MPIE bit is set
to 1 again
RXI interrupt request
is not generated, and
RDR1 retains its state
ID1
(a) Data does not match station's ID
MPIE
RDR1
value
0D0 D1 D7 1 1 0 D0 D1 D7 0 1
11
Data (ID2)
Start
bit MPB
Stop
bit
Start
bit
Data (Data 2)
MPB
Stop
bit
RXI interrupt
request (multi-
processor
interrupt)
generated
Idle state
(mark state)
RDRF
RDR1 data read and
RDRF flag cleared
to 0 in RXI interrupt
handling routine
Matches this station's
ID, so reception continues,
and data is received in RXI
interrupt handling routine
MPIE bit set
to 1 again
ID2
(b) Data matches station's ID
Data2ID1
MPIE = 0
MPIE = 0
Figure 22.15 Example of SCI Operation in Reception
(Example with 8-Bit Data, Multiprocessor Bit, One Stop Bit)
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 435 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
22.3.4 Operation in Synchronous Mode
In synchronous mode, data is transmitted or received in synchronization with clock pulses, making
it suitable for high-speed serial communication.
Inside the SCI, the transmitter and receiver are independent units, enabling full-duplex
communication by use of a common clock. Both the transmitter and the receiver also have a
double-buffered structure, so that data can be read or written during transmission or reception,
enabling continuous data transfer.
Figure 22.16 shows the general format for synchronous serial communication.
Don't
care
Don't
care
One unit of transfer data (character or frame)
Bit 0
Serial
data
Synchronous
clock
Bit 1 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5
LSB MSB
Bit 2 Bit 6 Bit 7
*
*
Note: * High except in continuous transfer
Figure 22.16 Data Format in Synchronous Communication
In synchronous serial communication, data on the transmission line is output from one falling edge
of the serial clock to the next. Data is guaranteed valid at the rising edge of the serial clock.
In synchronous serial communication, one character consists of data output starting with the LSB
and ending with the MSB. After the MSB is output, the transmission line holds the MSB state.
In synchronous mode, the SCI receives data in synchronization with the rising edge of the serial
clock.
• Data Transfer Format
A fixed 8-bit data format is used.
No parity or multiprocessor bits are added.
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 436 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
• Clock
Either an internal clock generated by the built-in baud rate generator or an external serial clock
input at the SCK pin can be selected, according to the setting of the C/A bit in SMR1 and the
CKE1 and CKE0 bits in SCR1. For details on SCI clock source selection, see table 22.9.
When the SCI is operated on an internal clock, the serial clock is output from the SCK pin.
Eight serial clock pulses are output in the transfer of one character, and when no transfer is
performed the clock is fixed high. When only receive operations are performed, however, the
serial clock is output until an overrun error occurs or the RE bit is cleared to 0. To perform
receive operations in units of one character, select an external clock as the clock source.
• Data Transfer Operations
⎯ SCI Initialization (Synchronous Mode)
Before transmitting and receiving data, first clear the TE and RE bits in SCR1 to 0, then
initialize the SCI as described below.
When the operating mode, transfer format, etc., is changed, the TE and RE bits must be
cleared to 0 before making the change using the following procedure. When the TE bit is
cleared to 0, the TDRE flag is set to 1 and TSR1 is initialized. Note that clearing the RE bit
to 0 does not change the settings of the RDRF, PER, FER, and ORER flags, or the contents
of RDR1.
Figure 22.17 shows a sample SCI initialization flowchart.
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 437 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Wait
<Transfer start>
Note: For simultaneous data transmit and receive operations, the TE and RE bits must be cleared
to 0 or set to 1 simultaneously.
Start initialization
Set data transfer format
in SMR1 and SCMR1
No
Yes
Set value in BRR1
Clear TE and RE bits in SCR1 to 0
[2]
[3]
Set TE and RE bits in SCR1 to 1,
and set RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE
bits
[4]
1-bit interval elapsed?
Set CKE1 and CKE0 bits in
SCR1 (TE, RE bits 0) [1]
Set the clock selection in SCR1. Be sure to
clear bits RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE, TE
and RE, to 0.
Set the data transfer format in SMR1 and
SCMR1.
Write a value corresponding to the bit rate
to BRR1. This is not necessary if an
external clock is used.
Wait at least one bit interval, then set the
TE bit or RE bit in SCR1 to 1.
Also set the RIE, TIE, TEIE, and MPIE bits.
Setting the TE and RE bits enables the
SO1 and SI1 pins to be used.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
Figure 22.17 Sample SCI Initialization Flowchart
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 438 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
⎯ Serial Data Transmission (Synchronous Mode)
Figure 22.18 shows a sample flowchart for serial transmission.
The following procedure should be used for serial data transmission.
No
< End >
[1]
Yes
Initialization
Start transmission
Read TDRE flag in SSR1 [2]
Write transmit data to TDR1 and
clear TDRE flag in SSR1 to 0
No
Yes
No
Yes
Read TEND flag in SSR1
[3]
Clear TE bit in
SCR1 to 0
TDRE = 1
All data transmitted?
TEND = 1
SCI initialization:
The SO1 pin is automatically designated as
the transmit data output pin.
SCI status check and transmit data write:
Read SSR1 and check that the TDRE flag
is set to 1, then write transmit data to TDR1
and clear the TDRE flag to 0.
Serial transmission continuation procedure:
To continue serial transmission, be sure to
read 1 from the TDRE flag to confirm that
writing is possible, then write data to TDR1,
and then clear the TDRE flag to 0.
[1]
[2]
[3]
Figure 22.18 Sample Serial Transmission Flowchart
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 439 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
In serial transmission, the SCI operates as described below.
1. The SCI monitors the TDRE flag in SSR1, and if it is 0, recognizes that data has been written
to TDR1, and transfers the data from TDR1 to TSR1.
2. After transferring data from TDR1 to TSR1, the SCI sets the TDRE flag to 1 and starts
transmission. If the TIE bit is set to 1 at this time, a transmit-data-empty interrupt (TXI) is
generated.
When clock output mode has been set, the SCI outputs 8 serial clock pulses. When use of an
external clock has been specified, data is output synchronized with the input clock.
The serial transmit data is sent from the SO1 pin starting with the LSB (bit 0) and ending with
the MSB (bit 7).
3. The SCI checks the TDRE flag at the timing for sending the MSB (bit 7).
If the TDRE flag is cleared to 0, data is transferred from TDR1 to TSR1, and serial
transmission of the next frame is started.
If the TDRE flag is set to 1, the TEND flag in SSR1 is set to 1, the MSB (bit 7) is sent, and the
SO1 pin maintains its state.
If the TEIE bit in SCR1 is set to 1 at this time, a transmit-end interrupt (TEI) request is
generated.
4. After completion of serial transmission, the SCK pin is held in a constant state.
Figure 22.19 shows an example of SCI operation in transmission.
Transfer
direction
Bit 0
Serial
data
Synchronous
clock
1 frame
TDRE
TEND
Data written to TDR1
and TDRE flag cleared
to 0 in TXI interrupt
handling routine
TXI interrupt
request
generated
Bit 1 Bit 7 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 6 Bit 7
TXI interrupt
request
generated
TEI interrupt
request
generated
Figure 22.19 Example of SCI Operation in Transmission
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 440 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
⎯ Serial Data Reception (Synchronous Mode)
Figure 22.20 shows a sample flowchart for serial reception.
The following procedure should be used for serial data reception.
When changing the operating mode from asynchronous to synchronous, be sure to check
that the ORER, PER, and FER flags are all cleared to 0.
The RDRF flag will not be set if the FER or PER flag is set to 1, and neither transmit nor
receive operations will be possible.
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 441 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Yes
< End >
[1]
No
Initialization
Start reception
[2]
No
Yes
Read RDRF flag in SSR1 [4]
[5]
Clear RE bit in SCR1 to 0
Error handling
(Continued below)
[3]
Read receive data in RDR1,
and clear RDRF flag in SSR1 to 0
No
Yes
ORER = 1
RDRF = 1
All data received?
Read ORER flag in SSR1
< End >
Error handling
Clear ORER flag in
SSR1 to 0
Overrun error handling
[3]
SCI initialization:
The SI1 pin is automatically designated as
the receive data input pin.
Receive error handling:
IF a receive error occurs, read the ORER
flag in SSR1, and after performing the
appropriate error handling, clear the ORER
flag to 0. Transfer cannot be resumed if
the ORER flag is set to 1.
SCI status check and receive data read:
Read SSR1 and check that the RDRF flag
is set to 1, then read the receive data in
RDR1 and clear the RDRF flag to 0.
Transition of the RDRF flag from 0 to 1 can
also be identified by and RXI interrupt.
Serial reception continuation procedure:
To continue serial reception, before the
MSB (bit 7) of the current frame is received,
finish reading the RDRF flag, reading
RDR1, and clearing the RDRF flag to 0.
[1]
[2][3]
[4]
[5]
Figure 22.20 Sample Serial Reception Flowchart
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 442 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
In serial reception, the SCI operates as described below.
1. The SCI performs internal initialization in synchronization with serial clock input or output.
2. The received data is stored in RSR1 in LSB-to-MSB order.
After reception, the SCI checks whether the RDRF flag is 0 and the receive data can be
transferred from RSR1 to RDR1.
If this check is passed, the RDRF flag is set to 1, and the receive data is stored in RDR1. If a
receive error is detected in the error check, the operation is as shown in table 22.11.
Neither transmit nor receive operations can be performed subsequently when a receive error
has been found in the error check.
3. If the RIE bit in SCR1 is set to 1 when the RDRF flag changes to 1, a receive-data-full
interrupt (RXI) request is generated.
Also, if the RIE bit in SCR1 is set to 1 when the ORER flag changes to 1, a receive-error
interrupt (ERI) request is generated.
Figure 22.21 shows an example of SCI operation in reception.
Bit 7
Serial
data
Synchronous
clock
1 frame
RDRF
ORER
ERI interrupt request
generated by
overrun error
RXI interrupt
request
generated
RDR1 data read and
RDRF flag cleared to 0
in RXI interrupt
handling routine
RXI interrupt
request
generated
Bit 0 Bit 7 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 6 Bit 7
Figure 22.21 Example of SCI Operation in Reception
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 443 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
⎯ Simultaneous Serial Data Transmission and Reception (Synchronous Mode)
Figure 22.22 shows a sample flowchart for simultaneous serial transmit and receive
operations.
The following procedure should be used for simultaneous serial data transmit and receive
operations.
Yes
< End >
[1]
No
Initialization
Start transfer
[5]
Error handling
[3]
Read receive data in RDR1, and
clear RDRF flag in SSR1 to 0
No
Yes
ORER = 1
All data received?
[2]
Read TDRE flag in SSR1
No
Yes
TDRE = 1
Write transmit data to TDR1 and
clear TDRE flag in SSR1 to 0
No
Yes
RDRF = 1
Read ORER flag in SSR1
[4]
Read RDRF flag in SSR1
Clear TE and RE
bits in SCR1 to 0
Note: When switching from transmit or receive operation
to simultaneous transmit and receive operations, first
clear the TE bit and RE bit to 0, then set both these
bits to 1 simultaneously.
SCI initialization:
The SO1 pin is designated as the transmit
data output pin, and the SI1 pin is
designated as the receive data input pin,
enabling simultaneous transmit and receive
operations.
SCI status check and transmit data write:
Read SSR1 and check that the TDRE flag
is set to 1, then write transmit data to TDR1
and clear the TDRE flag to 0.
Transition of the TDRE flag from 0 to 1 can
also be identified by a TXI interrupt.
Receive error handling:
If a receive error occurs, read the ORER
flag in SSR1, and after performing the
appropriate error handling, clear the ORER
flag to 0. Transmission/reception cannot
be resumed if the ORER flag is set to 1.
SCI status check and receive data read:
Read SSR1 and check that the RDRF flag
is set to 1, then read the receive data in
RDR1 and clear the RDRF flag to 0.
Transition of the RDRF flag from 0 to 1 can
also be identified by an RXI interrupt.
Serial transmission/reception continuation
procedure:
To continue serial transmission/reception,
before the MSB (bit 7) of the current frame
is received, finish reading the RDRF flag,
reading RDR1, and clearing the RDRF flag
to 0. Also before the MSB (bit 7) of the
current frame is transmitted, read 1 from
the TDRE flag to confirm that writing is
possible, then write data to TDR1 and clear
the TDRE flag to 0.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
Figure 22.22 Sample Flowchart of Simultaneous Serial Transmit and Receive Operations
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 444 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
22.4 SCI Interrupts
The SCI has four interrupt sources: the transmit-end interrupt (TEI) request, receive-error interrupt
(ERI) request, receive-data-full interrupt (RXI) request, and transmit-data-empty interrupt (TXI)
request. Table 22.12 shows the interrupt sources and their relative priorities. Individual interrupt
sources can be enabled or disabled with the TIE, RIE, and TEIE bits in SCR1. Each kind of
interrupt request is sent to the interrupt controller independently.
When the TDRE flag in SSR1 is set to 1, a TXI interrupt request is generated. When the TEND
flag in SSR1 is set to 1, a TEI interrupt request is generated.
When the RDRF flag in SSR1 is set to 1, an RXI interrupt request is generated. When the ORER,
PER, or FER flag in SSR1 is set to 1, an ERI interrupt request is generated.
Table 22.12 SCI Interrupt Sources
Channel Interrupt Source Description Priority
ERI Interrupt by receive error (ORER, FER, or PER)
RXI Interrupt by receive data register full (RDRF)
TXI Interrupt by transmit data register empty (TDRE)
1
TEI Interrupt by transmit end (TEND)
High
Low
The TEI interrupt is requested when the TEND flag is set to 1 while the TEIE bit is set to 1. The
TEND flag is cleared at the same time as the TDRE flag. Consequently, if a TEI interrupt and a
TXI interrupt are requested simultaneously, the TXI interrupt will have priority for acceptance,
and the TDRE flag and TEND flag may be cleared. Note that the TEI interrupt will not be
accepted in this case.
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 445 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
22.5 Usage Notes
The following points should be noted when using the SCI.
• Relation between Writes to TDR1 and the TDRE Flag
The TDRE flag in SSR1 is a status flag that indicates that transmit data has been transferred
from TDR1 to TSR1. When the SCI transfers data from TDR1 to TSR1, the TDRE flag is set
to 1.
Data can be written to TDR1 regardless of the state of the TDRE flag. However, if new data is
written to TDR1 when the TDRE flag is cleared to 0, the data stored in TDR1 will be lost since
it has not yet been transferred to TSR1. It is therefore essential to check that the TDRE flag is
set to 1 before writing transmit data to TDR1.
• Operation when Multiple Receive Errors Occur Simultaneously
If a number of receive errors occur at the same time, the state of the status flags in SSR1 is as
shown in table 22.13. If there is an overrun error, data is not transferred from RSR1 to RDR1,
and the receive data is lost.
Table 22.13 State of SSR1 Status Flags and Transfer of Receive Data
SSR1 Status Flags Receive Data Transfer
RDRF ORER FER PER RSR1 to RDR1 Receive Error Status
1 1 0 0 X Overrun error
0 0 1 0 Framing error
0 0 0 1 Parity error
1 1 1 0 X Overrun error + framing error
1 1 0 1 X Overrun error + parity error
0 0 1 1 Framing error + parity error
1 1 1 1 X Overrun error + framing error
+ parity error
Notes: : Receive data is transferred from RSR1 to RDR1.
X: Receive data is not transferred from RSR1 to RDR1.
• Break Detection and Processing
When framing error (FER) detection is performed, a break can be detected by reading the SI1
pin value directly. In a break, the input from the SI1 pin becomes all 0s, and so the FER flag is
set, and the parity error flag (PER) may also be set.
Note that, since the SCI continues the receive operation after receiving a break, even if the
FER flag is cleared to 0, it will be set to 1 again.
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 446 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
• Sending a Break
The SO1 pin has a dual function as an I/O port whose direction (input or output) is determined
by PDR and PCR. This can be used to send a break.
Between serial transmission initialization and setting of the TE bit to 1, the mark state is
replaced by the value of PDR (the pin does not function as the SO1 pin until the TE bit is set to
1). Consequently, PCR and PDR for the port corresponding to the SO1 pin are first set to 1.
To send a break during serial transmission, first clear PDR to 0, then clear the TE bit to 0.
When the TE bit is cleared to 0, the transmitter is initialized regardless of the current
transmission state, the SO1 pin becomes an I/O port, and 0 is output from the SO1 pin.
• Receive Error Flags and Transmit Operations (Clocked Synchronous Mode Only)
Transmission cannot be started when a receive error flag (ORER, PER, or FER) is set to 1,
even if the TDRE flag is cleared to 0. Be sure to clear the receive error flags to 0 before
starting transmission.
Note also that receive error flags cannot be cleared to 0 even if the RE bit is cleared to 0.
• Receive Data Sampling Timing and Reception Margin in Asynchronous Mode
In asynchronous mode, the SCI operates on a basic clock with a frequency of 16 times the
transfer rate.
In reception, the SCI samples the falling edge of the start bit using the basic clock, and
performs internal synchronization. Receive data is latched internally at the rising edge of the
8th pulse of the basic clock. This is illustrated in figure 22.23.
Internal basic
clock
16 clocks
8 clocks
Receive data
Synchronization
sampling timing
Start bit D0 D1
Data sampling
timing
15 0 7 15 00 7
Figure 22.23 Receive Data Sampling Timing in Asynchronous Mode
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 447 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Thus the reception margin in asynchronous mode is given by formula (1) below.
M = | (0.5 – 1
2N ) – (L – 0.5) F – | D – 0.5 |
N (1 + F) | × 100%
... Formula (1)
Where M : Reception margin (%)
N : Ratio of bit rate to clock (N = 16)
D : Clock duty (D = 0 to 1.0)
L : Frame length (L = 9 to 12)
F : Absolute value of clock rate deviation
Assuming values of F = 0 and D = 0.5 in formula (1), a reception margin of 46.875% is given by
formula (2) below.
When D = 0.5 and F = 0,
M = (0.5 – 1
2 × 16 ) × 100%
= 46.875% ... Formula (2)
However, this is only the computed value, and a margin of 20% to 30% should be allowed in
system design.
• Operation in Case of Mode Transition
⎯ Transmission
Operation should be stopped (by clearing TE, TIE, and TEIE to 0) before making a module
stop mode, standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode, or subsleep mode transition.
TSR1, TDR1, and SSR1 are reset. The output pin states in module stop mode, standby
mode, watch mode, subactive mode, or subsleep mode depend on the port settings, and
becomes high-level output after the relevant mode is cleared. If a transition is made during
transmission, the data being transmitted will be undefined. When transmitting without
changing the transmit mode after the relevant mode is cleared, transmission can be started
by setting TE to 1 again, and performing the following sequence: SSR1 read → TDR1
write → TDRE clearance. To transmit with a different transmit mode after clearing the
relevant mode, the procedure must be started again from initialization. Figure 22.24 shows
a sample flowchart for mode transition during transmission. Port pin states are shown in
figures 22.25 and 22.26.
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 448 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
⎯ Reception
Receive operation should be stopped (by clearing RE to 0) before making a module stop
mode, standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode, or subsleep mode transition. RSR1,
RDR1, and SSR1 are reset. If a transition is made without stopping operation, the data
being received will be invalid. To continue receiving without changing the reception mode
after the relevant mode is cleared, set RE to 1 before starting reception. To receive with a
different receive mode, the procedure must be started again from initialization.
Figure 22.27 shows a sample flowchart for mode transition during reception.
Read TEND flag in SSR1
TE = 0
Transition to standby
mode, etc.
Exit from standby
mode, etc.
Change
operating mode? No
All data
transmitted?
TEND = 1
Yes
Yes
Yes
<Transmission>
No
No
[1]
[3]
[2]
TE = 1Initialization
<Start of transmission>
[1] Data being transmitted is interrupted.
After exiting software standby mode,
etc., normal CPU transmission is
possible by setting TE to 1, reading
SSR1, writing TDR1, and clearing
TDRE to 0.
[2] If TIE and TEIE are set to 1, clear
them to 0 in the same way.
[3] Includes module stop mode, watch
mode, subactive mode, and subsleep
mode.
Figure 22.24 Sample Flowchart for Mode Transition during Transmission
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 449 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
SCK1 output pin
TE bit
SO1 output pin Port input/output High outputPort input/output High output Start Stop
Start of transmission
End of
transmission
Port input/output
SCI TxD output Port SCI TxD
output
Port
Transition
to standby
Exit from
standby
Figure 22.25 Asynchronous Transmission Using Internal Clock
Port input/output
Last TxD bit held
High output*Port input/output Marking output
Port input/output
SCI TxD output PortPort
Note: * Initialized by software standby.
SCK1 output pin
TE bit
SO1 output pin
SCI TxD
output
Start of transmission
End of
transmission
Transition
to standby
Exit from
standby
Figure 22.26 Synchronous Transmission Using Internal Clock
Section 22 Serial Communication Interface 1 (SCI1)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 450 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
RE = 0
Transition to standby
mode, etc.
Read receive data in RDR1
Read RDRF flag in SSR1
Exit from standby
mode, etc.
Change
operating mode? No
RDRF = 1
Yes
Yes
<Reception>
No [1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
RE = 1Initialization
<Start of reception>
Receive data being received
becomes invalid.
Includes module stop mode,
watch mode, subactive mode,
and subsleep mode.
Figure 22.27 Sample Flowchart for Mode Transition during Reception
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 451 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
23.1 Overview
This LSI incorporates a 2-channel I2C bus interface (H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S: 1 channel).
The I2C bus interface conforms to and provides a subset of the Philips I2C bus (inter-IC bus)
interface functions. The register configuration that controls the I2C bus differs partly from the
Philips configuration, however.
Each I2C bus interface channel uses only one data line (SDA) and one clock line (SCL) to transfer
data, saving board and connector space.
23.1.1 Features
• Selection of addressing format or non-addressing format
⎯ I2C bus format: addressing format with acknowledge bit, for master/slave operation
⎯ Serial format: non-addressing format without acknowledge bit, for master operation only
• Conforms to Philips I2C bus interface (I2C bus format)
• Two ways of setting slave address (I2C bus format)
• Start and stop conditions generated automatically in master mode (I2C bus format)
• Selection of acknowledge output levels when receiving (I2C bus format)
• Automatic loading of acknowledge bit when transmitting (I2C bus format)
• Wait function in master mode (I2C bus format)
⎯ A wait can be inserted by driving the SCL pin low after data transfer, excluding
acknowledgement. The wait can be cleared by clearing the interrupt flag.
• Wait function in slave mode (I2C bus format)
⎯ A wait request can be generated by driving the SCL pin low after data transfer, excluding
acknowledgement. The wait request is cleared when the next transfer becomes possible.
• Three interrupt sources
⎯ Data transfer end (including transmission mode transition with I2C bus format and address
reception after loss of master arbitration)
⎯ Address match: when any slave address matches or the general call address is received in
slave receive mode (I2C bus format)
⎯ Stop condition detection
• Selection of 16 internal clocks (in master mode)
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 452 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
• Direct bus drive (with SCL and SDA pins)
⎯ Four pins P26/SCL0, P25/SDA0, P24/SCL1 and P23/SDA1 (normally CMOS pins)
function as NMOS-only outputs when the bus drive function is selected.
23.1.2 Block Diagram
Figure 23.1 shows a block diagram of the I2C bus interface.
Figure 23.2 shows an example of I/O pin connections to external circuits. I/O pins are driven only
by NMOS and apparently function as NMOS open-drain outputs. However, applicable voltages to
input pins depend on the power (Vcc) voltage of this LSI.
φ
SCL
PS
Noise
canceller
Bus state
decision
circuit
Output data
control
circuit
ICCR
Clock
control
ICMR
ICSR
ICDRS
Address
comparator
Arbitration
decision
circuit
SAR, SARX
SDA
Noise
canceler
Interrupt
generator Interrupt
request
Internal data bus
Legend:
ICCR
ICMR
ICSR
ICDR
SAR
SARX
PS
: I
2
C control register
: I
2
C mode register
: I
2
C status register
: I
2
C data register
: Slave address register
: Slave address register X
: Prescaler
ICDRR
ICDRT
Figure 23.1 Block Diagram of I2C Bus Interface
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 453 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
V
CC
SCL
in
SCL
out
SCL
SDA
in
SDA
out
(Master)
This LSI
SDA
SCL
SDA
SCL
in
SCL
out
SCL
SDA
in
SDA
out
(Slave 1)
SDA
SCL
in
SCL
out
SCL
SDA
in
SDA
out
(Slave 2)
SDA
Figure 23.2 I2C Bus Interface Connections (Example: This Chip as Master)
23.1.3 Pin Configuration
Table 23.1 summarizes the input/output pins used by the I2C bus interface.
Table 23.1 I2C Bus Interface Pins
Channel Name Abbrev.*I/O Function
Serial clock pin SCL0 Input/output IIC0 serial clock input/output
Serial data pin SDA0 Input/output IIC0 serial data input/output
0
Formatless serial clock pin SYNCI Input IIC0 formatless serial clock input
1 Serial clock pin SCL1 Input/output IIC1 serial clock input/output
Serial data pin SDA1 Input/output IIC1 serial data input/output
Notes: * In this section, channel numbers in the abbreviated register names are omitted; SCL0
and SCL1 are collectively referred to as SCL, and SDA0 and SDA1 as SDA.
Channel 0 is not provided (incorporated in) for the H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S.
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 454 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
23.1.4 Register Configuration
Table 23.2 summarizes the registers of the I2C bus interface.
Table 23.2 Register Configuration
Channel Name Abbrev. R/W Initial Value Address*1
0*3 I
2C bus control register ICCR0 R/W H'01 H'D0E8
I
2C bus status register ICSR0 R/W H'00 H'D0E9
I
2C bus data register ICDR0 R/W ⎯ H'D0EE*2
I
2C bus mode register ICMR0 R/W H'00 H'D0EF*2
Slave address register SAR0 R/W H'00 H'D0EF*2
Second slave address register SARX0 R/W H'01 H'D0EE*2
1 I2C bus control register ICCR1 R/W H'01 H'D158
I
2C bus status register ICSR1 R/W H'00 H'D159
I
2C bus data register ICDR1 R/W ⎯ H'D15E*2
I
2C bus mode register ICMR1 R/W H'00 H'D15F*2
Slave address register SAR1 R/W H'00 H'D15F*2
Second slave address register SARX1 R/W H'01 H'D15E*2
0 and 1 DDC switch register DDCSWR R/W H'0F H'D0E5
Module stop control register MSTPCRH
MSTPCRL
R/W H'FF
H'FF
H'FFEC
H'FFED
Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address.
2. The registers that can be read from or written to depend on the ICE bit in the I2C bus
control register. The slave address registers can be accessed when ICE = 0, and the
I2C bus mode registers can be accessed when ICE = 1.
3. Channel 0 is not provided (incorporated in) for the H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S.
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 455 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
23.2 Register Descriptions
23.2.1 I2C Bus Data Register (ICDR)
7
ICDR7
—
R/W
6
ICDR6
—
R/W
5
ICDR5
—
R/W
4
ICDR4
—
R/W
3
ICDR3
—
R/W
0
ICDR0
—
R/W
2
ICDR2
—
R/W
1
ICDR1
—
R/W
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
ICDRR
7
ICDRR7
—
R
6
ICDRR6
—
R
5
ICDRR5
—
R
4
ICDRR4
—
R
3
ICDRR3
—
R
0
ICDRR0
—
R
2
ICDRR2
—
R
1
ICDRR1
—
R
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
ICDRS
7
ICDRS7
—
—
6
ICDRS6
—
—
5
ICDRS5
—
—
4
ICDRS4
—
—
3
ICDRS3
—
—
0
ICDRS0
—
—
2
ICDRS2
—
—
1
ICDRS1
—
—
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
ICDRT
7
ICDRT7
—
W
6
ICDRT6
—
W
5
ICDRT5
—
W
4
ICDRT4
—
W
3
ICDRT3
—
W
0
ICDRT0
—
W
2
ICDRT2
—
W
1
ICDRT1
—
W
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
TDRE, RDRF (Internal flag)
—
RDRF
0
—
—
TDRE
0
—
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
ICDR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that is used as a transmit data register when
transmitting and a receive data register when receiving. ICDR is divided internally into a shift
register (ICDRS), receive buffer (ICDRR), and transmit buffer (ICDRT). ICDRS cannot be read or
written by the CPU, ICDRR is read-only, and ICDRT is write-only. Data transfers among the
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 456 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
three registers are performed automatically in coordination with changes in the bus state, and
affect the status of internal flags such as TDRE and RDRF.
After transmission/reception of one frame of data using ICDRS, if the I2C bus is in transmit mode
and the next data is in ICDRT (the TDRE flag is 0), data is transferred automatically from ICDRT
to ICDRS. After transmission/reception of one frame of data using ICDRS, if the I2C bus is in
receive mode and no previous data remains in ICDRR (the RDRF flag is 0), data is transferred
automatically from ICDRS to ICDRR.
If the number of bits in a frame, excluding the acknowledge bit, is less than 8, transmit data and
receive data are stored differently. Transmit data should be written justified toward the MSB side
when MLS = 0, and toward the LSB side when MLS = 1. Receive data bits read from the LSB
side should be treated as valid when MLS = 0, and bits read from the MSB side when MLS = 1.
ICDR is assigned to the same address as SARX, and can be written and read only when the ICE
bit is set to 1 in ICCR.
The value of ICDR is undefined after a reset.
The TDRE and RDRF flags are set and cleared under the conditions shown below. Setting the
TDRE and RDRF flags affects the status of the interrupt flags.
TDRE Description
0 The next transmit data is in ICDR (ICDRT), or transmission cannot be started
[Clearing conditions] (Initial value)
1. When transmit data is written in ICDR (ICDRT) in transmit mode (TRS = 1)
2. When a stop condition is detected in the bus line state after a stop condition is
issued with the I2C bus format or serial format selected
3. When a stop condition is detected with the I2C bus format selected
4. In receive mode (TRS = 0)
(A 0 write to TRS during transfer is valid after reception of a frame containing an
acknowledge bit)
1 The next transmit data can be written in ICDR (ICDRT)
[Setting conditions]
1. In transmit mode (TRS = 1), when a start condition is detected in the bus line
state after a start condition is issued in master mode with the I2C bus format or
serial format selected
2. In transmit mode (TRS = 1) when formatless transfer is selected
3. When data is transferred from ICDRT to ICDRS
(Data transfer from ICDRT to ICDRS when TRS = 1 and TDRE = 0, and ICDRS is
empty)
4. When a switch is made from receive mode (TRS = 0) to transmit mode (TRS = 1)
after detection of a start condition
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 457 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
RDRF Description
0 The data in ICDR (ICDRR) is invalid (Initial value)
[Clearing condition]
When ICDR (ICDRR) receive data is read in receive mode
1 The ICDR (ICDRR) receive data can be read
[Setting condition]
When data is transferred from ICDRS to ICDRR
(Data transfer from ICDRS to ICDRR in case of normal termination with TRS = 0 and
RDRF = 0)
23.2.2 Slave Address Register (SAR)
7
SVA6
0
R/W
6
SVA5
0
R/W
5
SVA4
0
R/W
4
SVA3
0
R/W
3
SVA2
0
R/W
0
FS
0
R/W
2
SVA1
0
R/W
1
SVA0
0
R/W
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
SAR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores the slave address and selects the
communication format. When the chip is in slave mode (and the addressing format is selected), if
the upper 7 bits of SAR match the upper 7 bits of the first frame received after a start condition,
the chip operates as the slave device specified by the master device. SAR is assigned to the same
address as ICMR, and can be written and read only when the ICE bit is cleared to 0 in ICCR.
SAR is initialized to H'00 by a reset.
Bits 7 to 1⎯Slave Address (SVA6 to SVA0): Set a unique address in bits SVA6 to SVA0,
differing from the addresses of other slave devices connected to the I2C bus.
Bit 0⎯Format Select (FS): Used together with the FSX bit in SARX and the SW bit in
DDCSWR to select the communication format.
• I2C bus format: addressing format with acknowledge bit
• Synchronous serial format: non-addressing format without acknowledge bit, for master mode
only
• Formatless transfer (only for channel 0): non-addressing with or without an acknowledge bit
and without detection of start or stop condition, for slave mode only.
The FS bit also specifies whether or not SAR slave address recognition is performed in slave
mode.
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 458 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
DDCSWR
Bit 6
SAR
Bit 0
SARX
Bit 0
SW FS FSX
Operating Mode
0 I2C bus format
• SAR and SARX slave addresses recognized
0
1 I2C bus format (Initial value)
• SAR slave address recognized
• SARX slave address ignored
0 I2C bus format
• SAR slave address ignored
• SARX slave address recognized
0
1
1 Synchronous serial format
• SAR and SARX slave addresses ignored
0 0
1
Formatless transfer (start and stop conditions are not
detected)
• With acknowledge bit
0
1
1
1
Formatless transfer* (start and stop conditions are not
detected)
• Without acknowledge bit
Note: * Do not use this setting when automatically switching the mode from formatless transfer
to I2C bus format by setting DDCSWR.
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 459 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
23.2.3 Second Slave Address Register (SARX)
7
SVAX6
0
R/W
6
SVAX5
0
R/W
5
SVAX4
0
R/W
4
SVAX3
0
R/W
3
SVAX2
0
R/W
0
FSX
1
R/W
2
SVAX1
0
R/W
1
SVAX0
0
R/W
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
SARX is an 8-bit readable/writable register that stores the second slave address and selects the
communication format. When the chip is in slave mode (and the addressing format is selected), if
the upper 7 bits of SARX match the upper 7 bits of the first frame received after a start condition,
the chip operates as the slave device specified by the master device. SARX is assigned to the same
address as ICDR, and can be written and read only when the ICE bit is cleared to 0 in ICCR.
SARX is initialized to H'01 by a reset and in hardware standby mode.
Bits 7 to 1⎯Second Slave Address (SVAX6 to SVAX0): Set a unique address in bits SVAX6 to
SVAX0, differing from the addresses of other slave devices connected to the I2C bus.
Bit 0⎯Format Select X (FSX): Used together with the FX bit in SAR and the SW bit in
DDCSWR to select the communication format.
• I2C bus format: addressing format with acknowledge bit
• Synchronous serial format: non-addressing format without acknowledge bit, for master mode
only
• Formatless transfer: non-addressing with or without an acknowledge bit and without detection
of start or stop condition, for slave mode only.
The FSX bit also specifies whether or not SARX slave address recognition is performed in slave
mode. For details, see the description of the FS bit in section 23.2.2, Slave Address Register
(SAR).
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 460 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
23.2.4 I2C Bus Mode Register (ICMR)
7
MLS
0
R/W
6
WAIT
0
R/W
5
CKS2
0
R/W
4
CKS1
0
R/W
3
CKS0
0
R/W
0
BC0
0
R/W
2
BC2
0
R/W
1
BC1
0
R/W
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
ICMR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that selects whether the MSB or LSB is transferred
first, performs master mode wait control, and selects the master mode transfer clock frequency and
the transfer bit count. ICMR is assigned to the same address as SAR. ICMR can be written and
read only when the ICE bit is set to 1 in ICCR.
ICMR is initialized to H'00 by a reset.
Bit 7⎯MSB-First/LSB-First Select (MLS): Selects whether data is transferred MSB-first or
LSB-first.
If the number of bits in a frame, excluding the acknowledge bit, is less than 8, transmit data and
receive data are stored differently. Transmit data should be written justified toward the MSB side
when MLS = 0, and toward the LSB side when MLS = 1. Receive data bits read from the LSB
side should be treated as valid when MLS = 0, and bits read from the MSB side when MLS = 1.
Do not set this bit to 1 when the I2C bus format is used.
Bit 7
MLS Description
0 MSB-first (Initial value)
1 LSB-first
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 461 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 6⎯Wait Insertion Bit (WAIT): Selects whether to insert a wait between the transfer of data
and the acknowledge bit, in master mode with the I2C bus format. When WAIT is set to 1, after the
fall of the clock for the final data bit, the IRIC flag is set to 1 in ICCR, and a wait state begins
(with SCL at the low level). When the IRIC flag is cleared to 0 in ICCR, the wait ends and the
acknowledge bit is transferred. If WAIT is cleared to 0, data and acknowledge bits are transferred
consecutively with no wait inserted.
The IRIC flag in ICCR is set to 1 on completion of the acknowledge bit transfer, regardless of the
WAIT setting.
The setting of this bit is invalid in slave mode.
Bit 6
WAIT Description
0 Data and acknowledge bits transferred consecutively (Initial value)
1 Wait inserted between data and acknowledge bits
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 462 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bits 5 to 3⎯Transfer Clock Select (CKS2 to CKS0): These bits, together with the IICX1 bit
(for channel 1) or IICX0 bit (for channel 0) in STCR, select the serial clock frequency in master
mode. They should be set according to the required transfer rate.
STCR
Bits 5, 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Transfer Rate
IICX CKS2 CKS1 CKS0 Clock φ = 8 MHz φ = 10 MHz
0 φ/28 286 kHz 357 kHz 0
1 φ/40 200 kHz 250 kHz
0 φ/48 167 kHz 208 kHz
0
1
1 φ/64 125 kHz 156 kHz
0 φ/80 100 kHz 125 kHz 0
1 φ/100 80.0 kHz 100 kHz
0 φ/112 71.4 kHz 89.3 kHz
0
1
1
1 φ/128 62.5 kHz 78.1 kHz
0 φ/56 143 kHz 179 kHz 0
1 φ/80 100 kHz 125 kHz
0 φ/96 83.3 kHz 104 kHz
0
1
1 φ/128 62.5 kHz 78.1 kHz
0 φ/160 50.0 kHz 62.5 kHz 0
1 φ/200 40.0 kHz 50.0 kHz
0 φ/224 35.7 kHz 44.6 kHz
1
1
1
1 φ/256 31.3 kHz 39.1 kHz
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 463 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bits 2 to 0⎯Bit Counter (BC2 to BC0): Bits BC2 to BC0 specify the number of bits to be
transferred next. With the I2C bus format (when the FS bit in SAR or the FSX bit in SARX is 0),
the data is transferred with one addition acknowledge bit. Bit BC2 to BC0 settings should be made
during an interval between transfer frames. If bits BC2 to BC0 are set to a value other than 000,
the setting should be made while the SCL line is low.
The bit counter is initialized to 000 by a reset and when a start condition is detected. The value
returns to 000 at the end of a data transfer, including the acknowledge bit.
Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Bits/Frame
BC2 BC1 BC0 Synchronous Serial Format I2C Bus Format
0 8 9 (Initial value) 0
1 1 2
0 2 3
0
1
1 3 4
1 0 4 5
0
1 5 6
1 0 6 7
1 7 8
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 464 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
23.2.5 I2C Bus Control Register (ICCR)
7
ICE
0
R/W
6
IEIC
0
R/W
5
MST
0
R/W
4
TRS
0
R/W
3
ACKE
0
R/W
0
SCP
1
W
2
BBSY
0
R/W
1
IRIC
0
R/(W)*
Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
ICCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that enables or disables the I2C bus interface, enables or
disables interrupts, selects master or slave mode and transmission or reception, enables or disables
acknowledgement, confirms the I2C bus interface bus status, issues start/stop conditions, and
performs interrupt flag confirmation.
ICCR is initialized to H'01 by a reset.
Bit 7⎯I2C Bus Interface Enable (ICE): Selects whether or not the I2C bus interface is to be
used. When ICE is set to 1, port pins function as SCL and SDA input/output pins and transfer
operations are enabled. When ICE is cleared to 0, the IIC stops and its internal status is initialized.
The SAR and SARX registers can be accessed when ICE is 0. The ICMR and ICDR registers can
be accessed when ICE is 1.
Bit 7
ICE Description
0 I2C bus interface module disabled, with SCL and SDA signal pins set to port function
The internal status of the IIC is initialized
SAR and SARX can be accessed (Initial value)
1 I2C bus interface module enabled for transfer operations (pins SCL and SDA are
driving the bus)
ICMR and ICDR can be accessed
Bit 6⎯I2C Bus Interface Interrupt Enable (IEIC): Enables or disables interrupts from the I2C
bus interface to the CPU.
Bit 6
IEIC Description
0 Interrupts disabled (Initial value)
1 Interrupts enabled
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 465 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bits 5 and 4⎯Master/Slave Select (MST) and Transmit/Receive Select (TRS): MST selects
whether the I2C bus interface operates in master mode or slave mode.
TRS selects whether the I2C bus interface operates in transmit mode or receive mode.
In master mode with the I2C bus format, when arbitration is lost, MST and TRS are both reset by
hardware, causing a transition to slave receive mode. In slave receive mode with the addressing
format (FS = 0 or FSX = 0), hardware automatically selects transmit or receive mode according to
the R/W bit in the first frame after a start condition.
Modification of the TRS bit during transfer is deferred until transfer of the frame containing the
acknowledge bit is completed, and the changeover is made after completion of the transfer.
MST and TRS select the operating mode as follows.
Bit 5 Bit 4
MST TRS Description
0 Slave receive mode (Initial value) 0
1 Slave transmit mode
1 0 Master receive mode
1 Master transmit mode
Bit 5
MST Description
0 Slave mode (Initial value)
[Clearing conditions]
1. When 0 is written by software
2. When bus arbitration is lost after transmission is started in I2C bus format master
mode
1 Master mode
[Setting conditions]
1. When 1 is written by software (in cases other than clearing condition 2)
2. When 1 is written in MST after reading MST = 0 (in case of clearing condition 2)
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 466 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 4
TRS Description
0 Receive mode (Initial value)
[Clearing conditions]
1. When 0 is written by software (in cases other than setting condition 3)
2. When 0 is written in TRS after reading TRS = 1 (in case of setting condition 3)
3. When bus arbitration is lost after transmission is started in I2C bus format master
mode
4. When the SW bit in DDCSWR changes from 1 to 0
1 Transmit mode
[Setting conditions]
1. When 1 is written by software (in cases other than clearing conditions 3)
2. When 1 is written in TRS after reading TRS = 0 (in case of clearing conditions 3)
3. When a 1 is received as the R/W bit of the first frame in I2C bus format slave
mode
Bit 3⎯Acknowledge Bit Judgement Selection (ACKE): Specifies whether the value of the
acknowledge bit returned from the receiving device when using the I2C bus format is to be ignored
and continuous transfer is performed, or transfer is to be aborted and error handling, etc.,
performed if the acknowledge bit is 1. When the ACKE bit is 0, the value of the received
acknowledge bit is not indicated by the ACKB bit, which is always 0.
When the ACKE bit is 0, the TDRE, IRIC, and IRTR flags are set on completion of data
transmission, regardless of the value of the acknowledge bit. When the ACKE bit is 1, the TDRE,
IRIC, and IRTR flags are set on completion of data transmission when the acknowledge bit is 0,
and the IRIC flag alone is set on completion of data transmission when the acknowledge bit is 1.
Depending on the receiving device, the acknowledge bit may be significant, in indicating
completion of processing of the received data, for instance, or may be fixed at 1 and have no
significance.
Bit 3
ACKE Description
0 The value of the acknowledge bit is ignored, and continuous transfer is performed
(Initial value)
1 If the acknowledge bit is 1, continuous transfer is interrupted
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 467 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 2⎯Bus Busy (BBSY): The BBSY flag can be read to check whether the I2C bus (SCL, SDA)
is busy or free. In master mode, this bit is also used to issue start and stop conditions.
A high-to-low transition of SDA while SCL is high is recognized as a start condition, setting
BBSY to 1. A low-to-high transition of SDA while SCL is high is recognized as a stop condition,
clearing BBSY to 0.
To issue a start condition, use a MOV instruction to write 1 in BBSY and 0 in SCP. A retransmit
start condition is issued in the same way. To issue a stop condition, use a MOV instruction to
write 0 in BBSY and 0 in SCP.
It is not possible to write to BBSY in slave mode; the I2C bus interface must be set to master
transmit mode before issuing a start condition. MST and TRS should both be set to 1 before
writing 1 in BBSY and 0 in SCP.
Bit 2
BBSY Description
0 Bus is free (Initial value)
[Clearing condition]
When a stop condition is detected
1 Bus is busy
[Setting condition]
When a start condition is detected
Bit 1⎯I2C Bus Interface Interrupt Request Flag (IRIC): Indicates that the I2C bus interface has
issued an interrupt request to the CPU. IRIC is set to 1 at the end of a data transfer, when a slave
address or general call address is detected in slave receive mode, when bus arbitration is lost in
master transmit mode, and when a stop condition is detected. IRIC is set at different times
depending on the FS bit in SAR and the WAIT bit in ICMR. See section 23.3.6, IRIC Setting
Timing and SCL Control. The conditions under which IRIC is set also differ depending on the
setting of the ACKE bit in ICCR.
IRIC is cleared by reading IRIC after it has been set to 1, then writing 0 in IRIC.
When the DTC is used, IRIC is cleared automatically and transfer can be performed continuously
without CPU intervention.
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 468 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 1
IRIC Description
0 Waiting for transfer, or transfer in progress (Initial value)
[Clearing condition]
When 0 is written in IRIC after reading IRIC = 1
(1) Interrupt requested
[Setting conditions]
• I2C bus format master mode
1. When a start condition is detected in the bus line state after a start condition
is issued
(when the TDRE flag is set to 1 because of first frame transmission)
2. When a wait is inserted between the data and acknowledge bit when WAIT =
1
3. At the end of data transfer
(at the rise of the 9th transmit/receive clock pulse, or at the fall of the 8th
transmit/receive clock pulse when using wait insertion)
4. When a slave address is received after bus arbitration is lost
(when the AL flag is set to 1)
5. When 1 is received as the acknowledge bit when the ACKE bit is 1
(when the ACKB bit is set to 1)
• I2C bus format slave mode
1. When the slave address (SVA, SVAX) matches
(when the AAS and AASX flags are set to 1)
and at the end of data transfer up to the subsequent retransmission start
condition or stop condition detection
(when the TDRE or RDRF flag is set to 1)
2. When the general call address is detected
(when FS = 0 and the ADZ flag is set to 1)
and at the end of data transfer up to the subsequent retransmission start
condition or stop condition detection
(when the TDRE or RDRF flag is set to 1)
3. When 1 is received as the acknowledge bit when the ACKE bit is 1
(when the ACKB bit is set to 1)
4. When a stop condition is detected
(when the STOP or ESTP flag is set to 1)
• Synchronous serial format
1. At the end of data transfer
(when the TDRE or RDRF flag is set to 1)
2. When a start condition is detected with serial format selected
• When a condition, other than the above, that sets the TDRE or RDRF flag to 1 is
detected
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 469 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
When, with the I2C bus format selected, IRIC is set to 1 and an interrupt is generated, other flags
must be checked in order to identify the source that set IRIC to 1. Although each source has a
corresponding flag, caution is needed at the end of a transfer.
When the TDRE or RDRF internal flag is set, the readable IRTR flag may or may not be set. The
IRTR flag (the DTC start request flag) is not set at the end of a data transfer up to detection of a
retransmission start condition or stop condition after a slave address (SVA) or general call address
match in I2C bus format slave mode.
Even when the IRIC flag and IRTR flag are set, the TDRE or RDRF internal flag may not be set.
The IRIC and IRTR flags are not cleared at the end of the specified number of transfers in
continuous transfer using the DTC. The TDRE or RDRF flag is cleared, however, since the
specified number of ICDR reads or writes have been completed.
Table 23.3 shows the relationship between the flags and the transfer states.
Note: * This LSI does not incorporate DTC.
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 470 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Table 23.3 Flags and Transfer States
MST TRS BBSY ESTP STOP IRTR AASX AL AAS ADZ ACKB State
1/0 1/0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Idle state (flag
clearing required)
1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Start condition
issuance
1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 Start condition
established
1 1/0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0/1 Master mode wait
1 1/0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0/1 Master mode
transmit/receive end
0 0 1 0 0 0 1/0 1 1/0 1/0 0 Arbitration lost
0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 SAR match by first
frame in slave mode
0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 General call address
match
0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 SARX match
0 1/0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0/1 Slave mode
transmit/receive end
(except after SARX
match)
0
0
1/0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Slave mode
transmit/receive end
(after SARX match)
0 1/0 0 1/0 1/0 0 0 0 0 0 0/1 Stop condition
detected
Bit 0⎯Start Condition/Stop Condition Prohibit (SCP): Controls the issuing of start and stop
conditions in master mode. To issue a start condition, write 1 in BBSY and 0 in SCP. A retransmit
start condition is issued in the same way. To issue a stop condition, write 0 in BBSY and 0 in SCP.
This bit is always read as 1. If 1 is written, the data is not stored.
Bit 0
SCP Description
0 Writing 0 issues a start or stop condition, in combination with the BBSY flag
1 Reading always returns a value of 1 (Initial value)
Writing is ignored
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 471 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
23.2.6 I2C Bus Status Register (ICSR)
7
ESTP
0
R/(W)*
6
STOP
0
R/(W)*
5
IRTR
0
R/(W)*
4
AASX
0
R/(W)*
3
AL
0
R/(W)*
0
ACKB
0
R/W
2
AAS
0
R/(W)*
1
ADZ
0
R/(W)*
Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
ICSR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that performs flag confirmation and acknowledge
confirmation and control.
ICSR is initialized to H'00 by a reset.
Bit 7⎯Error Stop Condition Detection Flag (ESTP): Indicates that a stop condition has been
detected during frame transfer in I2C bus format slave mode.
Bit 7
ESTP Description
0 No error stop condition (Initial value)
[Clearing conditions]
1. When 0 is written in ESTP after reading ESTP = 1
2. When the IRIC flag is cleared to 0
1 • In I2C bus format slave mode: Error stop condition detected
[Setting condition]
When a stop condition is detected during frame transfer
• In other modes: No meaning
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 472 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 6⎯Normal Stop Condition Detection Flag (STOP): Indicates that a stop condition has been
detected after completion of frame transfer in I2C bus format slave mode.
Bit 6
STOP Description
0 No normal stop condition (Initial value)
[Clearing conditions]
1. When 0 is written in STOP after reading STOP = 1
2. When the IRIC flag is cleared to 0
1 • In I2C bus format slave mode: Error stop condition detected
[Setting condition]
When a stop condition is detected after completion of frame transfer
• In other modes:No meaning
Bit 5⎯I2C Bus Interface Continuous Transmission/Reception Interrupt Request Flag
(IRTR): Indicates that the I2C bus interface has issued an interrupt request to the CPU, and the
source is completion of reception/transmission of one frame in continuous transmission/reception
for which DTC activation is possible. When the IRTR flag is set to 1, the IRIC flag is also set to 1
at the same time.
IRTR flag setting is performed when the TDRE or RDRF flag is set to 1. IRTR is cleared by
reading IRTR after it has been set to 1, then writing 0 in IRTR. IRTR is also cleared automatically
when the IRIC flag is cleared to 0.
Note: * This LSI does not incorporate DTC.
Bit 5
IRTR Description
0 Waiting for transfer, or transfer in progress (Initial value)
[Clearing conditions]
1. When 0 is written in IRTR after reading IRTR = 1
2. When the IRIC flag is cleared to 0
1 Continuous transfer state
[Setting conditions]
• In I2C bus interface slave mode: When the TDRE or RDRF flag is set to 1 when
AASX = 1
• In other modes: When the TDRE or RDRF flag is set to 1
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 473 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 4⎯Second Slave Address Recognition Flag (AASX): In I2C bus format slave receive mode,
this flag is set to 1 if the first frame following a start condition matches bits SVAX6 to SVAX0 in
SARX.
AASX is cleared by reading AASX after it has been set to 1, then writing 0 in AASX. AASX is
also cleared automatically when a start condition is detected.
Bit 4
AASX Description
0 Second slave address not recognized (Initial value)
[Clearing conditions]
1. When 0 is written in AASX after reading AASX = 1
2. When a start condition is detected
3. In master mode
1 Second slave address recognized
[Setting condition]
When the second slave address is detected in slave receive mode while FSX=0
Bit 3⎯Arbitration Lost (AL): This flag indicates that arbitration was lost in master mode. The
I2C bus interface monitors the bus. When two or more master devices attempt to seize the bus at
nearly the same time, if the I2C bus interface detects data differing from the data it sent, it sets AL
to 1 to indicate that the bus has been taken by another master.
AL is cleared by reading AL after it has been set to 1, then writing 0 in AL. In addition, AL is
reset automatically by write access to ICDR in transmit mode, or read access to ICDR in receive
mode.
Bit 3
AL Description
0 Bus arbitration won (Initial value)
[Clearing conditions]
1. When ICDR data is written (transmit mode) or read (receive mode)
2. When 0 is written in AL after reading AL = 1
1 Arbitration lost
[Setting conditions]
1. If the internal SDA and SDA pin disagree at the rise of SCL in master transmit
mode
2. If the internal SCL line is high at the fall of SCL in master transmit mode
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 474 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 2⎯Slave Address Recognition Flag (AAS): In I2C bus format slave receive mode, this flag is
set to 1 if the first frame following a start condition matches bits SVA6 to SVA0 in SAR, or if the
general call address (H'00) is detected.
AAS is cleared by reading AAS after it has been set to 1, then writing 0 in AAS. In addition, AAS
is reset automatically by write access to ICDR in transmit mode, or read access to ICDR in receive
mode.
Bit 2
AAS Description
0 Slave address or general call address not recognized (Initial value)
[Clearing conditions]
1. When ICDR data is written (transmit mode) or read (receive mode)
2. When 0 is written in AAS after reading AAS = 1
3. In master mode
1 Slave address or general call address recognized
[Setting condition]
When the slave address or general call address is detected when FS = 0 in slave
receive mode
Bit 1⎯General Call Address Recognition Flag (ADZ): In I2C bus format slave receive mode,
this flag is set to 1 if the first frame following a start condition is the general call address (H'00).
ADZ is cleared by reading ADZ after it has been set to 1, then writing 0 in ADZ. In addition, ADZ
is reset automatically by write access to ICDR in transmit mode, or read access to ICDR in receive
mode.
Bit 1
ADZ Description
0 General call address not recognized (Initial value)
[Clearing conditions]
1. When ICDR data is written (transmit mode) or read (receive mode)
2. When 0 is written in ADZ after reading ADZ = 1
3. In master mode
1 General call address recognized
[Setting condition]
If the general call address is detected when FSX = 0 or FS = 0 is selected in the
slave receive mode.
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 475 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 0⎯Acknowledge Bit (ACKB): Stores acknowledge data. In transmit mode, after the
receiving device receives data, it returns acknowledge data, and this data is loaded into ACKB. In
receive mode, after data has been received, the acknowledge data set in this bit is sent to the
transmitting device.
When this bit is read, in transmission (when TRS = 1), the value loaded from the bus line
(returned by the receiving device) is read. In reception (when TRS = 0), the value set by internal
software is read.
Bit 0
ACKB Description
0 Receive mode: 0 is output at acknowledge output timing (Initial value)
Transmit mode: Indicates that the receiving device has acknowledged the data (signal
is 0)
1 Receive mode: 1 is output at acknowledge output timing
Transmit mode: Indicates that the receiving device has not acknowledged the data
(signal is 1)
23.2.7 Serial/Timer Control Register (STCR)
7
—
0
—
6
IICX1
0
R/W
5
IICX0
0
R/W
4
—
0
—
3
FLSHE
0
R/W
0
—
0
—
2
OSROME
0
R/W
1
—
0
—
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
STCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that controls the IIC operating mode.
STCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset.
Bit 7⎯Reserved: This bit cannot be modified and is always read as 0.
Bits 6 and 5⎯I2C Transfer Select 1, 0 (IICX1, IICX0): These bits, together with bits CKS2 to
CKS0 in ICMR of IIC, select the transfer rate in master mode. For details, see section 23.2.4, I2C
Bus Mode Register (ICMR).
Bit 3⎯Flash Memory Control Resister Enable (FLSHE): This bit selects the control resister of
the flash memory. For details, refer to section 7.3.5, Serial/Timer Control Resister (STCR).
Bit 2⎯OSD ROM Enable (OSROME): This bit controls the OSD ROM. For details, refer to
section 7, ROM.
Bits 4, 1, and 0⎯Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 0.
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 476 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
23.2.8 DDC Switch Register (DDCSWR)
7
SWE*
3
0
R/W
6
SW*
3
0
R/W
5
IE*
3
0
R/W
4
IF*
3
0
R/(W)*
1
3
CLR3
1
W*
2
0
CLR0
1
W*
2
2
CLR2
1
W*
2
1
CLR1
1
W*
2
Notes: 1.
2.
3.
Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
Always read as 1.
These bits are not provided (incorporated in) for the H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S.
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
DDCSWR is an 8-bit read/write register that controls automatic format switching for IIC channel
0 and IIC internal latch clearing. DDCSWR is initialized to H'0F by a reset or in hardware standby
mode.
Bit 7⎯DDC Mode Switch Enable (SWE): Enables or disables automatic switching from
formatless transfer to I2C bus format transfer for IIC channel 0.
Bit 7
SWE Description
0 Disables automatic switching from formatless transfer to I2C bus format transfer for
IIC channel 0. (Initial value)
1 Enables automatic switching from formatless transfer to I2C bus format transfer for
IIC channel 0.
Bit 6⎯DDC Mode Switch (SW): Selects formatless transfer or I2C bus format transfer for IIC
channel 0.
Bit 6
SW Description
0 I2C bus format is selected for IIC channel 0. (Initial value)
[Clearing conditions]
1. When 0 is written by software
2. When an SCL falling edge is detected when SWE = 1
1 Formatless transfer is selected for IIC channel 0.
[Setting condition]
When 1 is written after SW = 0 is read
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 477 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 5⎯DDC Mode Switch Interrupt Enable Bit (IE): Enables or disables an interrupt request to
the CPU when the format for IIC channel 0 is automatically switched.
Bit 5
IE Description
0 Disables an interrupt at automatic format switching (Initial value)
1 Enables an interrupt at automatic format switching
Bit 4⎯DDC Mode Switch Interrupt Flag (IF): Indicates the interrupt request to the CPU when
the format for IIC channel 0 is automatically switched.
Bit 4
IF Description
0 Interrupt has not been requested (Initial value)
[Clearing condition]
When 0 is written after IF = 1 is read
1 Interrupt has been requested
[Setting condition]
When an SCL falling edge is detected when SWE = 1
Bits 3 to 0⎯IIC Clear 3 to 0 (CLR3 to CLR0): Control the IIC0 and IIC1 initialization. These
are write-only bits and are always read as 1.
Writing to these bits generates a clearing signal for the internal latch circuit which initializes the
IIC status.
The data written to these bits are not held. When initializing the IIC, be sure to use the MOV
instruction to write to all the CLR3 to CLR0 bits at the same time; do not use bit manipulation
instructions such as BCLR.
When reinitializing the module status, the CLR3 to CLR0 bits must be rewritten.
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 478 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
CLR3 CLR2 CLR1 CLR0 Description
0 ⎯ ⎯ The setting is invalid
0 The setting is invalid 0
1 IIC0 internal latch cleared
0 IIC1 internal latch cleared
0
1
1
1 IIC0 and IIC1 internal latches cleared
1 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ This setting is invalid
23.2.9 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR)
7
1
MSTP15
R/W
MSTPCRH
6
1
MSTP14
R/W
5
1
MSTP13
R/W
4
1
MSTP12
R/W
3
1
MSTP11
R/W
2
1
MSTP10
R/W
1
1
MSTP9
R/W
0
1
MSTP8
R/W
7
1
MSTP7
R/W
6
1
MSTP6
R/W
5
1
MSTP5
R/W
4
1
MSTP4
R/W
3
1
MSTP3
R/W
2
1
MSTP2
R/W
1
1
MSTP1
R/W
0
1
MSTP0
R/W
MSTPCRL
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
MSTPCR comprises two 8-bit readable/writable registers, and is used to perform module stop
mode control.
When the corresponding bit in MSTPCR is set to 1, operation of the corresponding IIC channel is
halted at the end of the bus cycle, and a transition is made to module stop mode. For details, see
section 4.5, Module Stop Mode.
MSTPCR is initialized to H'FFFF by a reset. It is not initialized in standby mode.
MSTPCRL Bit 7⎯Module Stop (MSTP7): Specifies the module stop mode for IIC channel 0.
MSTPCRL
Bit 7
MSTP7 Description
0 Module stop mode for IIC channel 0 is cleared
1 Module stop mode for IIC channel 0 is set (Initial value)
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 479 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
MSTPCRL Bit 6⎯Module Stop (MSTP6): Specifies the module stop mode for IIC channel 1.
MSTPCRL
Bit 6
MSTP6 Description
0 Module stop mode for IIC channel 1 is cleared
1 Module stop mode for IIC channel 1 is set (Initial value)
23.3 Operation
23.3.1 I2C Bus Data Format
The I2C bus interface has serial and I2C bus formats.
The I2C bus formats are addressing formats with an acknowledge bit. These are shown in figures
23.3(1) and (2). The first frame following a start condition always consists of 8 bits. Formatless
transfer can be selected only for IIC channel 0. The formatless transfer data is shown in figure
23.3 (3).
The serial format is a non-addressing format with no acknowledge bit. This is shown in figure
23.4.
Figure 23.5 shows the I2C bus timing.
The symbols used in figures 23.3 to 23.5 are explained in table 23.4.
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 480 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
SASLA
7n
R/W DATA A
1
1m
111
A/A
1
P
1Transfer bit count
(n = 1 to 8)
Transfer frame count
(m = 1 or above)
S SLA
7n1 7
R/W A DATA
11
1m1
1
A/A
1
S
1
SLA R/W
1
1m2
A
1
DATA
n2
A/A
1
P
1
Upper: Transfer bit count (n1 and n2 = 1 to 8)
Lower: Transfer frame count (m1 and m2 = 1 or above)
(1) FS = 0 or FSX = 0
A
n
DATADATA A
1m
181
A/A
1Transfer bit count
(n = 1 to 8)
Transfer frame count
(m = 1 or above)
(3) Formatless (IIC channel 0 only, FS = 0 or FSX = 0)
(2) Start condition transmission, FS = 0 or FSX = 0
Figure 23.3 I2C Bus Data Formats (I2C Bus Formats)
S DATA
8n
DATA
1
1m
P
1Transfer bit count
(n = 1 to 8)
Transfer frame count
(m = 1 or above)
FS = 1 and FSX = 1
Figure 23.4 I2C Bus Data Format (Serial Format)
SDA
SCL
S SLA R/WA
981-7 981-7 981-7
DATA A DATA A/AP
Figure 23.5 I2C Bus Timing
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 481 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Table 23.4 I2C Bus Data Format Symbols
Symbol Description
S Start condition. The master device drives SDA from high to low while SCL is hig
SLA Slave address, by which the master device selects a slave device
R/W Indicates the direction of data transfer: from the slave device to the master device
when R/W is 1, or from the master device to the slave device when R/W is 0
A Acknowledge. The receiving device (the slave in master transmit mode, or the
master in master receive mode) drives SDA low to acknowledge a transfer
DATA Transferred data. The bit length is set by bits BC2 to BC0 in ICMR. The MSB-first
or LSB-first format is selected by bit MLS in ICMR
P Stop condition. The master device drives SDA from low to high while SCL is high
23.3.2 Master Transmit Operation
In I2C bus format master transmit mode, the master device outputs the transmit clock and transmit
data, and the slave device returns an acknowledge signal. The transmission procedure and
operations synchronize with the ICDR writing are described below.
[1] Set bit ICE in ICCR to 1. Set bits MLS, WAIT, and CKS2 to CKS0 in ICMR, and bit IICX in
STCR, according to the operating mode.
[2] Read the BBSY flag in ICCR to confirm that the bus is free.
[3] Set bits MST and TRS to 1 in ICCR to select master transmit mode.
[4] Write 1 to BBSY and 0 to SCP. This changes SDA from high to low when SCL is high, and
generates the start condition.
[5] Then IRIC and IRTR flags are set to 1. If the IEIC bit in ICCR has been set to 1, an interrupt
request is sent to the CPU.
[6] Write the data (slave address + R/W) to ICDR. After the start condition instruction has been
issued and the start condition has been generated, write data to ICDR. If this procedure is not
followed, data may not be output correctly. With the I2C bus format (when the FS bit in SAR
or the FSX bit in SARX is 0), the first frame data following the start condition indicates the 7-
bit slave address and transmit/receive direction. As indicating the end of the transfer, and so
the IRIC flag is cleared to 0. After writing ICDR, clear IRIC immediately not to execute other
interrupt handling routine. If one frame of data has been transmitted before the IRIC clearing,
it can not be determine the end of transmission. The master device sequentially sends the
transmission clock and the data written to ICDR using the timing shown in figure 23.6. The
selected slave device (i.e. the slave device with the matching slave address) drives SDA low at
the 9th transmit clock pulse and returns an acknowledge signal.
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 482 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
[7] When one frame of data has been transmitted, the IRIC flag is set to 1 at the rise of the 9th
transmit clock pulse. After one frame has been transmitted SCL is automatically fixed low in
synchronization with the internal clock until the next transmit data is written.
[8] Read the ACKB bit in ICSR to confirm that ACKB is cleared to 0. When the slave device has
not acknowledged (ACKB bit is 1), operate the step [12] to end transmission, and retry the
transmit operation.
[9] Write the transmit data to ICDR. As indicating the end of the transfer, and so the IRIC flag is
cleared to 0. After writing ICDR, clear IRIC immediately not to execute other interrupt
handling routine. The master device sequentially sends the transmission clock and the data
written to ICDR. Transmission of the next frame is performed in synchronization with the
internal clock.
[10] When one frame of data has been transmitted, the IRIC flag is set to 1 at the rise of the 9th
transmit clock pulse. After one frame has been transmitted SCL is automatically fixed low in
synchronization with the internal clock until the next transmit data is written.
[11] Read the ACKB bit in ICSR and confirm ACKB is cleared to 0. When there is data to be
transmitted, go to the step [9] to continue next transmission. When the slave device has not
acknowledged (ACKB bit is set to 1), operate the step [12] to end transmission.
[12] Clear the IRIC flag to 0. And write 0 to BBSY and SCP in ICCR. This changes SDA from
low to high when SCL is high, and generates the stop condition.
SDA
(master output)
SDA
(slave output)
21
R/W
43658712
9
A
bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 bit 7 bit 6
IRIC
IRTR
ICDR
SCL
(master output)
Start condition
Geberation
Slave address Data 1
[9] ICDR write [9] IRIC clear
[6] ICDR write [6] IRIC clear
address + R/W
[7]
[5]
Note: Data write
timing in ICDR
ICDR Writing
prohibited
[4] Write BBSY = 1
and SCP = 0
(start condition
issuance)
ICDR Writing
enable
Data 1
User processing
These processes are executed continuously. These processes are executed continuously.
Figure 23.6 Example of Master Transmit Mode Operation Timing (MLS = WAIT = 0)
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 483 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
23.3.3 Master Receive Operation
In master receive mode, the master device outputs the receive clock, receives data, and returns an
acknowledge signal. The slave device transmits data. I2C bus interface module consists of the data
buffers of ICDRR and ICDRS, so data can be received continuously in master receive mode. For
this construction, when stop condition issuing timing delayed, it may occurs the internal
contention between stop condition issuance and SCL clock output for next data receiving, and then
the extra SCL clock would be outputted automatically or the SDA line would be held to low. And
for I2C bus interface system, the acknowledge bit must be set to 1 at the last data receiving, so the
change timing of ACKB bit in ICSR should be controlled by software. To take measures against
these problems, the wait function should be used in master receive mode. The reception procedure
and operations with the wait function in master receive mode are described below.
[1] Clear the TRS bit in ICCR to 0 to switch from transmit mode to receive mode, and set the
WAIT bit in ICMR to 1. Also clear the ACKB bit in ICSR to 0 (acknowledge data setting).
[2] When ICDR is read (dummy data read), reception is started, and the receive clock is output,
and data received, in synchronization with the internal clock. In order to detect wait operation,
set the IRIC flag in ICCR must be cleared to 0. After reading ICDR, clear IRIC immediately
not to execute other interrupt handling routine. If one frame of data has been received before
the IRIC clearing, it can not be determine the end of reception.
[3] The IRIC flag is set to 1 at the fall of the 8th receive clock pulse. If the IEIC bit in ICCR has
been set to 1, an interrupt request is sent to the CPU. SCL is automatically fixed low in
synchronization with the internal clock until the IRIC flag clearing. If the first frame is the last
receive data, execute step [10] to halt reception.
[4] Clear the IRIC flag to release from the Wait State. The master device outputs the 9th clock and
drives SDA at the 9th receive clock pulse to return an acknowledge signal.
[5] When one frame of data has been received, the IRIC flag in ICCR and the IRTR flag in ICSR
are set to 1 at the rise of the 9th receive clock pulse. The master device outputs SCL clock to
receive next data.
[6] Read ICDR.
[7] Clear the IRIC flag to detect next wait operation. From clearing of the IRIC flag to negation of
a wait as described in step [4] (and [9]) to clearing of the IRIC flag as described in steps [5],
[6], and [7], must be performed within the time taken to transfer one byte.
[8] The IRIC flags set to 1 at the fall of the 8th receive clock pulse. SCL is automatically fixed low
in synchronization with the internal clock until the IRIC flag clearing. If this frame is the last
receive data, execute step [10] to halt reception.
[9] Clear the IRIC flag in ICCR to cancel wait operation. The master device outputs the 9th clock
and drives SDA at the 9th receive clock pulse to return an acknowledge signal. Data can be
received continuously by repeating step [5] to [9].
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 484 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
[10] Set the ACKB bit in ICSR to 1 so as to return “No acknowledge” data. Also set the TRS bit
to 1 to switch from receive mode to transmit mode.
[11] Clear IRIC flag to 0 to release from the Wait State.
[12] When one frame of data has been received, the IRIC flag is set to 1 at the rise of the 9th
receive clock pulse.
[13] Clear the WAIT bit to 0 to switch from wait mode to no wait mode. Read ICDR and the IRIC
flag to 0. Clearing of the IRIC flag should be after the WAIT = 0.
[14] Clear the BBSY bit and SCP bit to 0. This changes SDA from low to high when SCL is high,
and generates the stop condition.
9
A Bit7
Master receive modeMaster transmit mode
SCL
(master output)
SDA
(slave output)
SDA
(master output)
IRIC
IRTR
ICDR
User processing [1] TRS cleared to 0
WAIT set to 1
ACKB cleared to 0
[2] ICDR read
(dummy read)
[2] IRIC clearance [4] IRC clearance [6] ICDR read
(Data 1)
[7] IRIC clearance
Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
12 34 56 78
[3] [5]
A
912 345
Data 1 Data 2
Data 1
These processes are executed continuously. These processes are executed continuously.
Figure 23.7 Example of Master Receive Mode Operation Timing
(MLS = ACKB = 0, WAIT = 1)
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 485 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
8
Bit0
Data 2
SCL
(master output)
SDA
(slave output)
SDA
(master output)
IRIC
IRTR
ICDR
User processing [9] IRIC clearance [6] ICDR read
(Data 2)
[7] IRIC clearance [9] IRIC Clearance [6] ICDR read
(Data 3)
[7] IRIC clearance
Bit7
[8] [5]
A
Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit7 Bit6Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
91 23 45 67
[8] [5]
A
8912
Data 3 Data 4
Data 3Data 2Data 1
These processes are executed continuously. These processes are executed continuously.
Figure 23.8 Example of Master Receive Mode Operation Timing
(MLS = ACKB = 0, WAIT = 1) Continued
23.3.4 Slave Receive Operation
In slave receive mode, the master device outputs the transmit clock and transmit data, and the
slave device returns an acknowledge signal. The receive procedure and operations in slave receive
mode are described below.
1. Set bit ICE in ICCR to 1. Set bits MLS in ICMR and bits MST and TRS in ICCR according to
the operating mode.
2. A start condition output by the master device sets the BBSY flag to 1 in ICCR.
3. After the slave device detects the start condition, if the first frame matches its slave address, it
functions as the slave device designated as the master device. If the 8th bit data (R/W) is 0,
TRS bit in ICCR remains 0 and executes slave receive operation.
4. At the ninth clock pulse of the receive frame, the slave device drives SDA low to acknowledge
the transfer. At the same time, the IRIC flag is set to 1 in ICCR. If IEIC is 1 in ICCR, a CPU
interrupt is requested. If the RDRF internal flag is 0, it is set to 1 and continuous reception is
performed. If the RDRF internal flag is 1, the slave device holds SCL low from the fall of the
receive clock until it has read the data in ICDR.
5. Read ICDR and clear IRIC to 0 in ICCR. At this time, the RDRF flag is cleared to 0.
Steps 4 and 5 can be repeated to receive data continuously. When a stop condition is detected (a
low-to-high transition of SDA while SCL is high), the BBSY flag is cleared to 0 in ICCR.
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 486 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
SDA
(Master output)
SDA
(Slave output)
21 214365879
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 6Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
IRIC
ICDRS
ICDRR
RDRF
SCL
(Master output)
Start condition
issurance
SCL
(Slave output)
Interrupt request
generated
Address + R/W
Address + R/W
[5] Read ICDR [5] Clear IRIC
User processing
Slave address Data 1
[4]
A
R/W
Figure 23.9 Example of Timing in Slave Receive Mode (MLS = ACKB = 0)
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 487 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
SDA
(Master output)
SDA
(Slave output)
214365879879
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Bit 1 Bit 0
IRIC
ICDRS
ICDRR
RDRF
SCL
(Master output)
SCL
(Slave output)
Interrupt
request
generated
Interrupt
request
generated
Data 2
Data 2
Data 1
Data 1
[5] Read ICDR [5] Clear IRIC
User processing
Data 2
Data 1 [4] [4]
A
A
Figure 23.10 Example of Timing in Slave Receive Mode (MLS = ACKB = 0)
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 488 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
23.3.5 Slave Transmit Operation
In slave transmit mode, the slave device outputs the transmit data, and the master device outputs
the transmit clock and returns an acknowledge signal. The transmit procedure and operations in
slave transmit mode are described below.
1. Set bit ICE in ICCR to 1. Set bits MLS in ICMR and bits MST and TRS in ICCR according to
the operating mode.
2. After the slave device detects a start condition, if the first frame matches its slave address, at
the ninth clock pulse the slave device drives SDA low to acknowledge the transfer. At the
same time, the IRIC flag is set to 1 in ICCR, and if the IEIC bit in ICCR is set to 1 at this time,
an interrupt request is sent to the CPU. If the eighth data bit (R/W) is 1, the TRS bit is set to 1
in ICCR, automatically causing a transition to slave transmit mode. The slave device holds
SCL low from the fall of the transmit clock until data is written in ICDR.
3. Clear the IRIC flag to 0, then write data in ICDR. The written data is transferred to ICDRS,
and the TDRE internal flag and the IRIC and IRTR flags are set to 1 again. Clear IRIC to 0,
then write the next data in ICDR. The slave device outputs the written data serially in step with
the clock output by the master device, with the timing shown in figure 23.11.
4. When one frame of data has been transmitted, at the rise of the ninth transmit clock pulse IRIC
is set to 1 in ICCR. If the TDRE internal flag is 1, the slave device holds SCL low from the fall
of the transmit clock until data is written in ICDR. The master device drives SDA low at the
ninth clock pulse to acknowledge the data. The acknowledge signal is stored in the ACKB bit
in ICSR, and can be used to check whether the transfer was carried out normally. If TDRE
internal flag is set to 0, the data written in ICDR is transferred to ICDRS, then transmission
starts and TDRE internal flag and IRIC and IRTR flags are all set to 1 again.
5. To continue transmitting, clear IRIC to 0, then write the next transmit data in ICDR. At this
time, the TDRE internal flag is cleared to 0.
Steps 4 and 5 can be repeated to transmit continuously. To end the transmission, write H'FF in
ICDR so that the SDA may be freed on the slave side. When a stop condition is detected (a low-to-
high transition of SDA while SCL is high), the BBSY flag will be cleared to 0 in ICCR.
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 489 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
SDA
(Slave output)
SDA
(Master output)
SCL
(Slave output)
21 21436587998
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 7 Bit 6Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
IRIC
ICDRS
ICDRT
TDRE
SCL
(Master output)
Interrupt
request
generated
Interrupt
request
generated
Interrupt
request
generated
Slave receive mode Slave transmit mode
Data 1 Data 2
[3] Clear IRIC [5] Clear IRIC[3] Write ICDR [3] Write ICDR [5] Write ICDR
User
processing
Data 1
Data 1 Data 2
Data 2
A
R/W
A
[3]
[2]
Figure 23.11 Example of Timing in Slave Transmit Mode (MLS = 0)
23.3.6 IRIC Setting Timing and SCL Control
The interrupt request flag (IRIC) is set at different times depending on the WAIT bit in ICMR, the
FS bit in SAR, and the FSX bit in SARX. If the TDRE or RDRF internal flag is set to 1, SCL is
automatically held low after one frame has been transferred; this timing is synchronized with the
internal clock. Figure 23.12 shows the IRIC set timing and SCL control.
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 490 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
SCL
SDA
IRIC
User
processing Clear
IRIC
Write to ICDR (transmit) or
read ICDR (receive)
1A8
7
198
7
SCL
SDA
IRIC
User
processing Clear IRIC Write to ICDR (transmit) or
read ICDR (receive)
1A
8
19
8
Clear IRIC
SCL
SDA
IRIC
User
processing Clear IRIC Write to ICDR (transmit) or
read ICDR (receive)
18
7
187
(a) When WAIT = 0, and FS = 0 or FSX = 0 (I
2
C bus format, no wait)
(b) When WAIT = 1, and FS = 0 or FSX = 0 (I
2
C bus format, wait inserted)
(c) When FS = 1 and FSX = 1 (synchronous serial format)
Figure 23.12 IRIC Setting Timing and SCL Control
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 491 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
23.3.7 Automatic Switching from Formatless Transfer to I2C Bus Format Transfer
Setting the SW bit in DDCSWR to 1 selects the IIC0 formatless transfer operation. When an SCL
falling edge is detected, the operating mode automatically switches from formatless transfer to I2C
bus format transfer (slave mode). For automatic switching to be possible, the following four
conditions must be observed:
1. The same data pin (SDA) is used in common for formatless transfer and I2C bus format
transfer.
2. Separate clock pins are used for formatless transfer and I2C bus format transfer (SYNC1 for
formatless, and SCL for I2C bus format)
3. The SCL pin is kept high during formatless transfer.
4. Register bits other than the TRS bit in ICCR are set to appropriate values so that I2C bus
format transfer can be performed.
The operating mode is automatically switched from formatless transfer to I2C bus format transfer
when an SCL falling edge is detected and the SW bit in DDCSWR is automatically cleared to 0.
To switch the mode from I2C bus format transfer to formatless transfer, set the SW bit to 1 by
software.
During formatless transfer, do not modify the bits that control the I2C bus interface operating
mode, such as the MSL or TRS bit. When switching from the I2C bus format transfer to formatless
transfer, specify the formatless transfer direction (transmit or receive) by setting or clearing the
TRS bit, then set the SW bit to 1. After the automatic switching from formatless transfer to I2C bus
format transfer (slave mode), the TRS bit is automatically cleared to 0 to enter the slave address
receive wait state.
If an SCL falling edge is detected during formatless transfer, the I2C does not wait for the stop
condition but switches the operating mode immediately.
Note: The IIC0 is not provided (incorporated in) for the H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S.
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 492 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
23.3.8 Noise Canceler
The logic levels at the SCL and SDA pins are routed through noise cancelers before being latched
internally. Figure 23.13 shows a block diagram of the noise canceler circuit.
The noise canceler consists of two cascaded latches and a match detector. The SCL (or SDA)
input signal is sampled on the system clock, but is not passed forward to the next circuit unless the
outputs of both latches agree. If they do not agree, the previous value is held.
SCL or SDA
input signal Internal SCL
or SDA signal
Sampling clock
Sampling
clock
System clock
period
C
Latch
Q
D
C
Latch
QD Match
detector
Figure 23.13 Block Diagram of Noise Canceler
23.3.9 Sample Flowcharts
Figures 23.14 to 23.17 show sample flowcharts for using the I2C bus interface in each mode.
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 493 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Start
Initialize
Read BBSY in ICCR
No BBSY = 0?
Yes
Set MST = 1 and
TRS = 1 in ICCR
Write BBSY = 1
and SCP = 0 in ICCR
Clear IRIC in ICCR
Read IRIC in ICCR
No
Yes
IRIC = 1?
Write transmit data in ICDR
Read ACKB in ICSR
ACKB = 0? No
Yes
No
Yes
Transmit mode?
Write transmit data in ICDR
Read IRIC in ICCR
IRIC = 1?
No
Yes
Clear IRIC in ICCR
Read ACKB in ICSR
End of transmission
or ACKB = 1?
No
Yes
Write BBSY = 0
and SCP = 0 in ICCR
End
Master receive mode
Read IRIC in ICCR
No
IRIC = 1?
Clear IRIC in ICCR
[1] Initialize
[2] Test the status of the SCL and SDA lines.
[3] Select master transmit mode.
[4] Start condition issuance
[5] Wait for a start condition generation
[6] Set transmit data for the first byte (slave
address + R/W).
(After writing ICDR, clear IRIC
immediately)
[7] Wait for 1 byte to be transmitted.
[8] Test the acknowledge bit, transferred from
slave device.
[10] Wait for 1 byte to be transmitted.
[11] Test for end of transfer
[12] Stop condition issuance
[9] Set transmit data for the second and
subsequent bytes.
(After writing ICDR, clear IRIC
immediately)
Figure 23.14 Flowchart for Master Transmit Mode (Example)
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 494 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Master receive mode
Read ICDR
Clear IRIC in ICCR
IRIC = 1?
Clear IRIC in ICCR
Read IRIC in ICCR
IRIC = 1?
Last receive ?
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Read ICDR
Read IRIC in ICCR
Read IRIC in ICCR
IRIC = 1?
Last receive ?
Clear IRIC in ICCR
Read IRIC in ICCR
Clear IRIC in ICCR
Set ACKB = 1 in ICSR
Set TRS = 1 in ICCR
Clear IRIC in ICCR
Set WAIT = 0 in ICMR
Read ICDR
Write BBSY = 0
and SCP = 0 in ICCR
End
No
IRIC = 1?
No
Set TRS = 0 in ICCR
Set WAIT = 1 in ICMR
Set ACKB = 0 in ICSR
Read IRIC in ICCR
[1] Select receive mode
[2] Start receiving. The first read is a dummy
read. After reading ICDR, please clear
IRIC immediately.
[3] Wait for 1 byte to be received.
(8th clock falling edge)
[4] Clear IRIC to trigger the 9th clock.
(to end the wait insertion)
[5] Wait for 1 byte to be received.
(9th clock risig edge)
[6] Read the received data.
[7] Clear IRIC
[8] Wait for the next data to be received.
(8th clock falling edge)
[9] Clear IRIC to trigger the 9th clock.
(to end the wait insertion)
[10] Set ACKB = 1 so as to return No
acknowledge, or set TRS = 1 so as not
to issue Extra clock.
[12] Wait for 1 byte to be received.
[14] Stop condition issuance.
[13] Set WAIT = 0.
Read ICDR.
Clear IRIC.
(Note: After setting WAIT = 0, IRIC
should be cleared to 0)
[11] Clear IRIC to trigger the 9th clock.
(to end the wait insertion)
Figure 23.15 Flowchart for Master Receive Mode (Example)
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 495 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Start
End
Initialize
Read IRIC flag in ICCR
Read AAS and ADZ flags in ICSR
Read TRS bit in ICCR
Read IRIC flag in ICCR
Clear IRIC flag in ICCR
Clear IRIC flag in ICCR
Clear IRIC flag in ICCR
Read ICDR
Read ICDR
Read ICDR
Set ACKB = 0 in ICSR
General call address processing
*Description omitted
Set MST = 0 and
TRS = 0 in ICCR
IRIC = 1?
No
Yes
Read IRIC flag in ICCR
Set ACKB = 0 in ICSR
IRIC = 1?
No
Yes
TRS = 0?
IRIC = 1?
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
AAS = 1 and
ADZ = 0?
[2]
[1]
[3]
[8]
[5]
[6]
[4]
[7]
Slave transmit mode
Last receive?
No
No
Yes
Select slave receive mode.
Wait for 1 byte to be received (slave
address)
Start receiving. The first read is a dummy
read.
Wait for the transfer to end.
Set acknowledge data for the last receive.
Start the last receive.
Wait for the transfer to end.
Read the last receive data.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
Figure 23.16 Flowchart for Slave Transmit Mode (Example)
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 496 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
End
Write transmit data in ICDR
Clear IRIC flag in ICCR
Clear IRIC flag in ICCR
Read ACKB bit in ICSR
Set TRS = 0 in ICCR
Read ICDR
Read IRIC flag in ICCR
IRIC = 1?
Yes
Yes
No
No
[1]
[4]
[5]
[2]
[3]
Slave transmit mode
End of transmission
(ACKB = 1)?
Clear IRIC in ICCR
Set transmit data for the second and
subsequent bytes.
Wait for 1 byte to be transmitted.
Test for end of transfer.
Select slave receive mode.
Dummy read (to release the SCL line).
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
Figure 23.17 Flowchart for Slave Receive Mode (Example)
23.3.10 Initializing Internal Status
The I2C can forcibly initialize the I2C internal status when a dead lock occurs during
communication. Initialization is enabled by (1) setting the CLR3 to CLR0 bits in DDCSWR, or (2)
clearing the ICE bit. For details on CLR3 to CLR0 settings, refer to section 23.2.8, DDC Switch
Register (DDCSWR).
(1) Initialized Status
This function initializes the following:
⎯ TDRE and RDRF internal flags
⎯ Transmit/receive sequencer and internal clock counter
⎯ Internal latches (wait, clock, or data output) which holds the levels output from the SCL
and SDA pins
This function does not initialize the following:
⎯ Register contents (ICDR, SAR, SARX, ICMR, ICCR, ICSR, DDCSWR, and STCR)
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 497 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
⎯ Internal latches which holds the register read information to set or clear the flags in ICMR,
ICCR, ICSR, and DDCSWR
⎯ Bit counter (BC2 to BC0) value in ICMR
⎯ Sources of interrupts generated (interrupts that has been transferred to the interrupt
controller)
(2) Notes on Initialization
⎯ Interrupt flags and interrupt sources are not cleared; clear them by software if necessary.
⎯ Other register flags cannot be assumed to be cleared, either; clear them by software if
necessary.
⎯ When initialization is specified by the DDCSWR settings, the data written to the CLR3 to
CLR0 bits are not held. When initializing the I2C, be sure to use the MOV instruction to
write to all the CLR3 to CLR0 bits at the same time; do not use bit manipulation
instructions such as BCLR. When reinitializing the module status, all the CLR3 to CLR0
bits must be rewritten to at the same time.
⎯ If a flag is cleared during transfer, the I2C module stops transfer immediately, and releases
the control of the SCL and SDA pins. Before starting again, set the registers to appropriate
values to make a correct communication if necessary.
This module initializing function does not modify the BBSY bit value, but in some cases,
depending on the SCL and SDA pin status and the release timing, the signal waveforms at the
SCL and SDA pins may indicate the stop condition, and accordingly the BBSY bit may be
cleared. Other bits or flags may be affected in the same way by module initialization.
To avoid these problems, take the following procedure to initialize the I2C:
1. Initialize the I2C by setting the CLR3 to CLR0 bits or the ICE bit.
2. Execute a stop condition issuing instruction to clear the BBSY bit to 0 (writing 0 to BBSY and
SCP), and wait for two cycles of the transfer clock.
3. Initialize the I2C again by setting the CLR3 to CLR0 bits or the ICE bit.
4. Set the registers in I2C to appropriate values.
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 498 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
23.4 Usage Notes
1. In master mode, if an instruction to generate a start condition is immediately followed by an
instruction to generate a stop condition, neither condition will be output correctly. To output
consecutive start and stop conditions, after issuing the instruction that generates the start
condition, read the relevant ports, check that SCL and SDA are both low, then issue the
instruction that generates the stop condition. Note that the SCL may briefly remain at a high
level immediately after BBSY is cleared to 0.
2. Either of the following two conditions will start the next transfer. Pay attention to these
conditions when reading or writing to ICDR.
a. Write access to ICDR when ICE = 1 and TRS = 1 (including automatic transfer from
ICDRT to ICDRS)
b. Read access to ICDR when ICE = 1 and TRS = 0 (including automatic transfer from
ICDRS to ICDRR)
3. Table 23.5 shows the timing of SCL and SDA output in synchronization with the internal
clock. Timings on the bus are determined by the rise and fall times of signals affected by the
bus load capacitance, series resistance, and parallel resistance.
Table 23.5 I2C Bus Timing (SCL and SDA Output)
Item Symbol Output Timing Unit Notes
SCL output cycle time tSCLO 28 tcyc to 256 tcyc ns
SCL output high pulse width tSCLHO 0.5 tSCLO ns
SCL output low pulse width tSCLLO 0.5 tSCLO ns
SDA output bus free time tBUFO 0.5 tSCLO –1 tcyc ns
Start condition output hold time tSTAHO 0.5 tSCLO –1 tcyc ns
Retransmission start condition
output setup time
tSTASO 1 tSCLO ns
Stop condition output setup time tSTOSO 0.5 tSCLO +2 tcyc ns
Data output setup time (master) 1 tSCLLO –3 tcyc ns
Data output setup time (slave)
tSDASO
1 tSCLL –(6 tcyc or 12 tcyc*) ns
Data output hold time tSDAHO 3 tcyc ns
Figure 31.8
(reference)
Note: * 6 tcyc when IICX is 0, 12 tcyc when 1.
4. SCL and SDA input is sampled in synchronization with the internal clock. The AC timing
therefore depends on the system clock cycle tcyc, as shown in table 31.6. Note that the I2C bus
interface AC timing specifications will not be met with a system clock frequency of less than 5
MHz.
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 499 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
5. The I2C bus interface specification for the SCL rise time tsr is under 1000 ns (300 ns for high-
speed mode). In master mode, the I2C bus interface monitors the SCL line and synchronizes
one bit at a time during communication. If tsr (the time for SCL to go from low to VIH) exceeds
the time determined by the input clock of the I2C bus interface, the high period of SCL is
extended. The SCL rise time is determined by the pull-up resistance and load capacitance of
the SCL line. To insure proper operation at the set transfer rate, adjust the pull-up resistance
and load capacitance so that the SCL rise time does not exceed the values given in table 23.6.
Table 23.6 Permissible SCL Rise Time (tsr) Values
Time Indication [ns]
IICX tcyc Indication
I2C Bus
Specification
(Max.) φ = 8 MHz φ = 10 MHz
Normal mode 1000 937 750 0 7.5 tcyc
High-speed mode 300 ← ←
1 17.5 tcyc Normal mode 1000 ← ←
High-speed mode 300 ← ←
6. The I2C bus interface specifications for the SCL and SDA rise and fall times are under 1000 ns
and 300 ns. The I2C bus interface SCL and SDA output timing is prescribed by tcyc, as shown in
table 23.5. However, because of the rise and fall times, the I2C bus interface specifications may
not be satisfied at the maximum transfer rate. Table 23.7 shows output timing calculations for
different operating frequencies, including the worst-case influence of rise and fall times.
tBUFO fails to meet the I2C bus interface specifications at any frequency. The solution is either (a)
to provide coding to secure the necessary interval (approximately 1 μs) between issuance of a
stop condition and issuance of a start condition, or (b) to select devices whose input timing
permits this output timing for use as slave devices connected to the I2C bus.
tSCLLO in high-speed mode and tSTASO in standard mode fail to satisfy the I2C bus interface
specifications for worst-case calculations of tSr/tSf. Possible solutions that should be investigated
include (a) adjusting the rise and fall times by means of a pull-up resistor and capacitive load,
(b) reducing the transfer rate to meet the specifications, or (c) selecting devices whose input
timing permits this output timing for use as slave devices connected to the I2C bus.
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 500 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
7. Precautions on reading ICDR at the end of master receive mode
When terminating the master receive mode, set TRS bit to 1, and select "write" for ICCR
BBSY = 0 and SCP = 0. This forces to move SDA from low to high level when SCL is at high
level, thereby generating the stop condition.
Now you can read received data from ICDR. If, however, any data is remaining on the buffer,
received data on ICDRS is not transferred to ICDR, thus you won't be able to read the second
byte data.
When it is required to read the second byte data, issue the stop condition from the master
receive state (TRS bit is 0).
Before reading data from ICDR register, make sure that BBSY bit on ICCR register is 0, stop
condition is generated and bus is made free.
If you try to read received data after the stop condition issue instruction (setting ICCR's BBSY
= 0 and SCP = 0 to write) has been executed but before the actual stop condition is generated,
clock may not be appropriately signaled when the next master sending mode is turned on.
Thus, reasonable care is needed for determining when to read the received data.
After the master receive is complete, if you want to re-write IIC control bit (such as clearing MST
bit) for switching the sending/receiving mode or modifying settings, it must be done during period
(a) indicated in figure 23.18 (after making sure ICCR register BBSY bit is cleared to 0).
SDA
SCL
Internal clock
BBSY bit
Bit 0 A
(a)
89
Stop condition Start
condition
Start condition
is issued
Generation of the stop
condition is checked
(BBSY = 0 is set to read)
The stop condition
issue instruction
(BBSY = 0 and SCP = 0
set to write) is executed
Master receive mode
ICDR read
inhibit period
Figure 23.18 Precautions on Reading the Master Receive Data
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 501 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
8. Notes on Start Condition Issuance for Retransmission
Figure 23.19 shows the timing of start condition issuance for retransmission, and the timing for
subsequently writing data to ICDR, together with the corresponding flowchart. After start
condition issuance is done and determined the start condition, write the transmit data to ICDR.
IRIC = 1 ?
SCL = Low ?
IRIC = 1 ?
Write transmit data to ICDR
Write BBSY = 1,
SCP = 0 (ICSR)
Clear IRIC in ICSR
Read SCL pin
Start condition
issuance? Other processing
No [1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
[1] Wait for end of 1-byte transfer
[2] Determine wheter SCL is low
[3] Issue restart condition instruction for transmission
[4] Determine whether start condition is generated or not
[5] Set transmit data (slave address + R/W)
Note: Program so that processing instruction [3] to [5] is
executed continuously.
[5] ICDR write (next transmit data)
[4] IRIC determination
[2] Determination of SCL=Low
[1] IRIC determination
SCL
SDA ACK bit 7
9
IRIC
Start condition
(retransmission)
[3] Issue restart condition instruction
for retransmission
Figure 23.19 Flowchart and Timing of Start Condition Instruction Issuance for
Retransmission
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 502 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
9. Notes on I2C Bus Interface Stop Condition Instruction Issuance
If the rise time of the 9th SCL acknowledge exceeds the specification because the bus load
capacitance is large, or if there is a slave device of the type that drives SCL low to effect a
wait, issue the stop condition instruction after reading SCL and determining it to be low, as
shown below.
Stop condition
SCL
IRIC
[1] Determination of SCL = low
9th clock
VIH
High period secured
[2] Stop condition instruction issuance
SDA
As waveform rise is late,
SCL is detected as low
Figure 23.20 Timing of Stop Condition Issuance
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 503 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Table 23.7 I2C Bus Timing (with Maximum Influence of tSr/tSf)
Time Indication (at Maximum Transfer Rate) [ns]
Item tcyc Indication
tSr/tSf
Influence
(Max.)
I2C Bus
Specification
(Min.) φ = 8 MHz φ = 10 MHz
Normal mode −1000 4000 ← ← tSCLHO 0.5 tSCLO
(–tSr) High-speed
mode
−300 600 ← ←
Normal mode −250 4700 ← ← tSCLLO 0.5 tSCLO
(–tSf) High-speed
mode
−250 1300 ← ←
Normal mode −1000 4700 3875*1 3900*1 tBUFO 0.5 tSCLO –1 tcyc
(–tSr) High-speed
mode
−300 1300 825*1 850*1
Normal mode −250 4000 4625 4650 tSTAHO 0.5 tSCLO –1 tcyc
(–tSf) High-speed
mode
−250 600 875 900
Normal mode −1000 4700 9000 9000 tSTASO 1 tSCLO
(–tSr) High-speed
mode
−300 600 2200 2200
Normal mode −1000 4000 4250 4200 tSTOSO 0.5 tSCLO +2 tcyc
(–tSr) High-speed
mode
−300 600 1200 1150
Normal mode −1000 250 3325 3400 tSDASO
(master)
1 tSCLLO*3 –3 tcyc
(-tSr) High-speed
mode
−300 100 625 700
Normal mode −1000 250 2200 2500 tSDASO
(slave)
1 tSCLL*3–12 tcyc*2
(–tSr) High-speed
mode
−300 100 −500*1 −200*1
Normal mode 0 0 375 300 tSDAHO 3 tcyc
High-speed
mode
0 0 ↑ ↑
Notes: 1. Does not meet the I2C bus interface specification. Remedial action such as the following
is necessary: (a) secure a start/stop condition issuance interval; (b) adjust the rise and
fall times by means of a pull-up resistor and capacitive load; (c) reduce the transfer rate;
(d) select slave devices whose input timing permits this output timing.
The values in the above table will vary depending on the settings of the IICX bit and bits
CKS0 to CKS2. Depending on the frequency it may not be possible to achieve the
maximum transfer rate; therefore, whether or not the I2C bus interface specifications are
met must be determined in accordance with the actual setting conditions.
2. Value when the IICX bit is set to 1. When the IICX bit is cleared to 0, the value is (tSCLL –
6 tcyc).
3. Calculated using the I2C bus specification values (standard mode: 4700 ns min.; high-
speed mode: 1300 ns min.).
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 504 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
10. Notes on WAIT Function
⎯ Conditions to cause this phenomenon
When both of the following conditions are satisfied, the clock pulse of the 9th clock could
be outputted continuously in master mode using the WAIT function due to the failure of
the WAIT insertion after the 8th clock fall.
(1) Setting the WAIT bit of the ICMR register to 1 and operating WAIT, in master mode
(2) If the IRIC bit of interrupt flag is cleared from 1 to 0 between the fall of the 7th clock
and the fall of the 8th clock.
⎯ Error phenomenon
Normally, WAIT State will be cancelled by clearing the IRIC flag bit from 1 to 0 after the
fall of the 8th clock in WAIT State. In this case, if the IRIC flag bit is cleared between the
7th clock fall and the 8th clock fall, the IRIC flag clear- data will be retained internally.
Therefore, the WAIT State will be cancelled right after WAIT insertion on 8th clock fall.
⎯ Restrictions
Please clear the IRIC flag before the rise of the 7th clock (the counter value of BC2
through BC0 should be 2 or greater), after the IRIC flag is set to 1 on the rise of the 9th
clock.
If the IRIC flag-clear is delayed due to the interrupt or other processes and the value of BC
counter is turned to 1 or 0, please confirm the SCL pins are in L’ state after the counter
value of BC2 through BC0 is turned to 0, and clear the IRIC flag. (See figure 23.21.)
SCL
BC2–BC0
Transmit/receive data A
ASD
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3
0
IRIC flag clear unavailable
IRIC flag clear available IRIC flag clear available
9
A
IRIC
(operation
example)
SCL =
‘L’ confirm
IRIC clear When BC2-0 ≥ 2
IRIC clear
Transmit/receive
data
Figure 23.21 IRIC Flag Clear Timing on WAIT Operation
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 505 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
11. Notes on ICDR Reads and ICCR Access in Slave Transmit Mode
In a transmit operation in the slave mode of the I2C bus interface, do not read the ICDR register
or read or write to the ICCR register during the period indicated by the shaded portion in figure
23.22.
Normally, when interrupt processing is triggered in synchronization with the rising edge of the
9th clock cycle, the period in question has already elapsed when the transition to interrupt
processing takes place, so there is no problem with reading the ICDR register or reading or
writing to the ICCR register.
To ensure that the interrupt processing is performed properly, one of the following two
conditions should be applied.
(1) Make sure that reading received data from the ICDR register, or reading or writing to the
ICCR register, is completed before the next slave address receive operation starts.
(2) Monitor the BC2 to BC0 counter in the ICMR register and, when the value of BC2 to BC0
is 000 (8th or 9th clock cycle), allow a waiting time of at least 2 transfer clock cycles in
order to involve the problem period in question before reading from the ICDR register, or
reading or writing to the ICCR register.
SDA R/W
Waveforms if
problem occurs
Bit 7
ICDR write
Data transmission
Period when ICDR reads and ICCR
reads and writes are prohibited
(6 system clock cycles)
Detection of 9th clock
cycle rising edge
A
89
SCL
TRS Address received
Figure 23.22 ICDR Read and ICCR Access Timing in Slave Transmit Mode
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 506 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
12. Notes on TRS Bit Setting in Slave Mode
From the detection of the rising edge of the 9th clock cycle or of a stop condition to when the
rising edge of the next SCL pin signal is detected (the period indicated as (a) in figure 23.23)
in the slave mode of the I2C bus interface, the value set in the TRS bit in the ICCR register is
effective immediately.
However, at other times (indicated as (b) in figure 23.23) the value set in the TRS bit is put on
hold until the next rising edge of the 9th clock cycle or stop condition is detected, rather than
taking effect immediately.
This results in the actual internal value of the TRS bit remaining 1 (transmit mode) and no
acknowledge bit being sent at the 9th clock cycle address receive completion in the case of an
address receive operation following a restart condition input with no stop condition
intervening.
When receiving an address in the slave mode, clear the TRS bit to 0 during the period
indicated as (a) in figure 23.23.
To cancel the holding of the SCL bit low by the wait function in the slave mode, clear the TRS
bit to 0 and then perform a dummy read of the ICDR register.
(a)
Restart condition
ICDR dummy read Detection of 9th clock
cycle rising edge
TRS bit set
Detection of 9th clock
cycle rising edge
89
(b)
Data transmission
SDA
SCL
TRS
123456789
A
Address reception
TRS bit setting hold time
Figure 23.23 TRS Bit Setting Timing in Slave Mode
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 507 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
13. Notes on Arbitration Lost in Master Mode
The I2C bus interface recognizes the data in transmit/receive frame as an address when
arbitration is lost in master mode and a transition to slave receive mode is automatically
carried out.
When arbitration is lost not in the first frame but in the second frame or subsequent frame,
transmit/receive data that is not an address is compared with the value set in the SAR or SARX
register as an address. If the receive data matches with the address in the SAR or SARX
register, the I2C bus interface erroneously recognizes that the address call has occurred. (See
figure 23.24.)
In multi-master mode, a bus conflict could happen. When The I2C bus interface is operated in
master mode, check the state of the AL bit in the ICSR register every time after one frame of
data has been transmitted or received.
When arbitration is lost during transmitting the second frame or subsequent frame, take
avoidance measures.
SSLA
R/W
SSLA
R/WADATA2
SSLA
R/WASLA R/W
A
DATA3
A
DATA4
DATA1
I
2
C bus interface
(Master transmit mode)
Transmit data match
Transmit timing match
• Receive address is ignored • Automatically transferred to slave
receive mode
• Receive data is recognized as
an address
• When the receive data matches to
the address set in the SAR or SARX
register, the I
2
C bus interface operates
as a slave device
• Arbitration is lost
• The AL flag in ICSR is set to 1
Transmit data does not match
Other device
(Master transmit mode)
I
2
C bus interface
(Slave receive mode)
Data contention
A
A
A
Figure 23.24 Diagram of Erroneous Operation when Arbitration is Lost
Though it is prohibited in the normal I2C protocol, the same problem may occur when the MST
bit is erroneously set to 1 and a transition to master mode is occurred during data transmission
or reception in slave mode. In multi-master mode, pay attention to the setting of the MST bit
when a bus conflict may occur. In this case, the MST bit in the ICCR register should be set to 1
according to the order below.
(a) Make sure that the BBSY flag in the ICCR register is 0 and the bus is free before setting
the MST bit.
(b) Set the MST bit to 1.
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 508 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
(c) To confirm that the bus was not entered to the busy state while the MST bit is being set,
check that the BBSY flag in the ICCR register is 0 immediately after the MST bit has been
set.
14. Notes on Interrupt Occurrence after ACKB Reception
⎯ Conditions to cause this failure
The IRIC flag is set to 1 when both of the following conditions are satisfied.
• 1 is received as the acknowledge bit for transmit data and the ACKB bit in ICSR is set
to 1
• Rising edge of the 9th transmit/receive clock is input to the SCL pin
When the above two conditions are satisfied in slave receive mode, an unnecessary
interrupt occurs.
Figure 23.25 shows the note on interrupt occurrence in slave mode after receiving 1 as the
acknowledge bit (ACKB = 1).
(1) For the last transmit data in master transmit mode or slave transmit mode, 1 is received
as the acknowledge bit.
If the ACKE bit in ICCR is set to 1 at this time, the ACKB bit in ICSR is set to 1.
(2) After switching to slave receive mode, the start condition is input, and address
reception is performed next.
(3) Even if the received address does not match the address set in SAR or SARX, the IRIC
flag is set to 1 at the rise of the 9th transmit/receive clock, thus causing an interrupt to
occur.
Note that if the slave address matches, an interrupt is to be generated at the rise of the 9th
transmit/receive clock as normal operation, so this is not erroneous operation.
⎯ Restriction
In a transmit operation of the I2C bus interface module, carry out the following
countermeasures.
(1) After 1 is received as the acknowledge bit for transmit data, clear the ACKE bit in
ICCR to 0 to clear the ACKB bit to 0.
(2) To enable acknowledge bit reception afterwards, set the ACKE bit to 1 again.
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 509 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
SDA
SCL
A
ACKB bit
(1) Acknowledge bit is received
and the ACKB bit is set to 1.
89 123456789
IRIC flag
Start
condition
12
N
Stop
condition
Stop condition
detection
Data
(2) Address that does not match is received.
Master transmit mode or
slave transmit mode
Countermeasure:
Clear the ACKE bit to 0 to clear
the ACKB bit.
Slave reception mode
Address
(3) Unnecessary interrupt occurs
(received address is invalid).
Figure 23.25 Note on Interrupt Occurrence in Slave Mode after ACKB = 1 Reception
15. Notes on TRS Bit Setting and ICDR Register Access
⎯ Conditions to cause this failure
Low-fixation of the SCL pins is cancelled incorrectly when the following conditions are
satisfied.
(1) Master mode
Figure 23.26 shows the notes on ICDR reading (TRS = 1) in master mode.
(1) When previously received 2-bytes data remains in ICDR unread (ICDRS are full).
(2) Reads ICDR register after switching to transmit mode (TRS = 1). (RDRF = 0 state)
(3) Sets to receive mode (TRS = 0), after transmitting Rev.1 frame of issued start
condition by master mode.
(2) Slave mode
Figure 23.27 shows the notes on ICDR writing (TRS = 0) in slave mode.
(1) Writes ICDR register in receive mode (TRS = 0), after entering the start condition
by slave mode (TDRE = 0 state).
Address match with Rev.1 frame, receive 1 by R/W bit, and switches to transmit
mode (TRS = 1).
When these conditions are satisfied, the low fixation of the SCL pins is cancelled
without ICDR register access after Rev.1 frame is transferred.
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 510 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
⎯ Restriction
Please carry out the following countermeasures when transmitting/receiving via the IIC bus
interface module.
(1) Please read the ICDR registers in receive mode, and write them in transmit mode.
(2) In receiving operation with master mode, please issue the start condition after clearing
the internal flag of the IIC bus interface module, using CLR3 to CLR0 bit of the
DDCSWR register on bus-free state (BBSY = 0).
SDA
SCL
A
TRS bit
Detection of 9th clock rise
(TRS = 1)
Address
8
RDRF bit
Start condition
12
A
3
Stop condition
ICDR read TRS = 0 setting
Data
ICDRS data
full
Along with ICDRS: ICDRR transfer
Cancel condition of SCL =
Low fixation is set.
(3) TRS = 0
(2) RDRF = 0
(1) ICDRS data full
912345678 9
Figure 16.26 Notes on ICDR Reading with TRS = 1 Setting in Master Mode
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 511 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
SDA
SCL
A
TRS bit
TRS = 0 setting
Address
89 89
TDRE bit
Start condition
12
A
3
Stop condition
ICDR write
Data
(2) TRS = 1
(1) TDRE = 0
4
Automatic TRS = 1 setting by
receiving R/W = 1
Along with ICDRS: ICDRR transfer
Cancel condition of SCL =
Low fixation
1234567
Figure 16.27 Notes on ICDR Writing with TRS = 0 Setting in Slave Mode
Section 23 I2C Bus Interface (IIC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 512 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Section 24 A/D Converter
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 513 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Section 24 A/D Converter
24.1 Overview
This LSI incorporates a 10-bit successive-approximations A/D converter that allows up to 12
analog input channels to be selected.
24.1.1 Features
A/D converter has the following features.
• 10-bit resolution
• 12 input channels
• Sample and hold function
• Choice of software, hardware (internal signal) triggering or external triggering for A/D
conversion start.
• A/D conversion end interrupt request generation
Section 24 A/D Converter
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 514 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
24.1.2 Block Diagram
Figure 24.1 shows a block diagram of the A/D converter.
φ/2
φ/4
ADTRG
Interrupt request
AN0 Vref
AV
CC
AV
SS
Reference Voltage
Sample-and-
hold circuit
Chopper type
comparator
AN1
AN2
AN3
AN4
AN5
AN6
AN7
AN8
AN9
ANA
ANB
DFG
ADTRG
(HSW timing generator)
Internal data bus
Legend:
ADR
AHR
: Software trigger A/D result register
: Hardware trigger A/D result register
ADTRG, DFG
ADTRG
: Hardware trigger
: A/D external trigger input
ADCR
ADCSR
: A/D control register
: A/D control/status register
ADTSR: A/D trigger selection register
-
+
10-bit
D/A
Hardware
control
circuit
Control circuit
Analog multiplexer
Successive
approximation register
A
D
R
A
H
R
A
D
C
S
R
A
D
C
R
A
D
T
S
R
Figure 24.1 Block Diagram of A/D Converter
Section 24 A/D Converter
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 515 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
24.1.3 Pin Configuration
Table 24.1 summarizes the input pins used by the A/D converter.
Table 24.1 A/D Converter Pins
Name Abbrev. I/O Function
Analog power supply pin AVCC Input Analog block power supply and A/D
conversion reference voltage
Analog ground pin AVSS Input Analog block ground and A/D conversion
reference voltage
Analog input pin 0 AN0 Input Analog input channel 0
Analog input pin 1 AN1 Input Analog input channel 1
Analog input pin 2 AN2 Input Analog input channel 2
Analog input pin 3 AN3 Input Analog input channel 3
Analog input pin 4 AN4 Input Analog input channel 4
Analog input pin 5 AN5 Input Analog input channel 5
Analog input pin 6 AN6 Input Analog input channel 6
Analog input pin 7 AN7 Input Analog input channel 7
Analog input pin 8 AN8 Input Analog input channel 8
Analog input pin 9 AN9 Input Analog input channel 9
Analog input pin A ANA Input Analog input channel A
Analog input pin B ANB Input Analog input channel B
A/D external trigger input pin ADTRG Input External trigger input for starting A/D
conversion
Section 24 A/D Converter
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 516 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
24.1.4 Register Configuration
Table 24.2 summarizes the registers of the A/D converter.
Table 24.2 A/D Converter Registers
Name Abbrev. R/W Size Initial Value Address*2
Software trigger A/D result register H ADRH R Byte H'00 H'D130
Software trigger A/D result register L ADRL R Byte H'00 H'D131
Hardware trigger A/D result register H AHRH R Byte H'00 H'D132
Hardware trigger A/D result register L AHRL R Byte H'00 H'D133
A/D control register ADCR R/W Byte H'40 H'D134
A/D control/status register ADCSR R (W)*1 Byte H'01 H'D135
A/D trigger selection register ADTSR R/W Byte H'FC H'D136
Port mode register 0 PMR0 R/W Byte H'00 H'FFCD
Notes: 1. Only 0 can be written in bits 7 and 6, to clear the flag. Bits 3 to 1 are read-only.
2. Lower 16 bits of the address.
Section 24 A/D Converter
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 517 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
24.2 Register Descriptions
24.2.1 Software-Triggered A/D Result Register (ADR)
ADRH ADRL
103254
——————
——————
7
0
R
6
0
R
9
0
R
8
0
R
11
0
R
10
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
ADR9 ADR8 ADR7 ADR6 ADR5 ADR4 ADR3 ADR2 ADR1 ADR0
0
R
12131415
00000
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The software-triggered A/D result register (ADR) is a register that stores the result of an A/D
conversion started by software.
The A/D-converted data is 10-bit data. Upon completion of software-triggered A/D conversion,
the 10-bit result data is transferred to ADR and the data is retained until the next software-
triggered A/D conversion completion. The upper 8 bits of the data are stored in the upper bytes
(bits 15 to 8) of ADR, and the lower 2 bits are stored in the lower bytes (bits 7 and 6). Bits 5 to 0
are always read as 0.
ADR can be read by the CPU at any time, but the ADR value during A/D conversion is not fixed.
The upper bytes can always be read directly, but the data in the lower bytes is transferred via a
temporary register (TEMP). For details, see section 24.3, Interface to Bus Master.
ADR is a 16-bit read-only register which is initialized to H'0000 at a reset, and in module stop
mode, standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode and subsleep mode.
24.2.2 Hardware-Triggered A/D Result Register (AHR)
AHRH AHRL
103254
——————
——————
7
0
R
6
0
R
9
0
R
8
0
R
11
0
R
10
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
AHR9 AHR8 AHR7 AHR6 AHR5 AHR4 AHR3 AHR2 AHR1 AHR0
0
R
12131415
00000
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The hardware-triggered A/D result register (AHR) is a register that stores the result of an A/D
conversion started by hardware (internal signal: ADTRG and DFG) or by external trigger input
(ADTRG).
The A/D-converted data is 10-bit data. Upon completion of hardware- or external-triggered A/D
conversion, the 10-bit result data is transferred to AHR and the data is retained until the next
hardware- or external- triggered A/D conversion completion. The upper 8 bits of the data are
stored in the upper bytes (bits 15 to 8) of AHR, and the lower 2 bits are stored in the lower bytes
(bits 7 and 6). Bits 5 to 0 are always read as 0.
Section 24 A/D Converter
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 518 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
AHR can be read by the CPU at any time, but the AHR value during A/D conversion is not fixed.
The upper bytes can always be read directly, but the data in the lower bytes is transferred via a
temporary register (TEMP). For details, see section 24.3, Interface to Bus Master.
AHR is a 16-bit read-only register which is initialized to H'0000 at a reset, and in module stop
mode, standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode and subsleep mode.
24.2.3 A/D Control Register (ADCR)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
0
6
—
—
1
7
R/WR/WR/W
HCH1
0
R/W
CK HCH0 SCH3 SCH2 SCH1 SCH0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
ADCR is a register that sets A/D conversion speed and selects analog input channel. When
executing ADCR setting, make sure that the SST and HST flags in ADCSR is set to 0.
ADCR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that is initialized to H'40 by a reset, and in module
stop mode, standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode and subsleep mode.
Bit 7⎯Clock Select (CK): Sets A/D conversion speed.
Bit 7
CK Description
0 Conversion frequency is 266 states (Initial value)
1 Conversion frequency is 134 states
Note: A/D conversion starts when 1 is written in SST, or when HST is set to 1. The conversion
period is the time from when this start flag is set until the flag is cleared at the end of
conversion. Actual sample-and-hold takes place (repeatedly) during the conversion
frequency shown in figure 24.2.
Section 24 A/D Converter
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 519 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Conversion frequency
Note: IRQ sampling;
Conversion period (134 or 266 states)
Interrupt request flag
IRQ sampling
(CPU)
States
Instruction execution MOV.B
WRITE
Start flag
When conversion ends, the start flag is cleared and the interrupt request flag is
set. The CPU recognizes the interrupt in the last execution state of an instruction,
and executes interrupt exception handling after completing the instruction.
Figure 24.2 Internal Operation of A/D Converter
Bit 6⎯Reserved: This bit cannot be modified and is always read as 1.
Bits 5 and 4⎯Hardware Channel Select (HCH1, HCH0): These bits select the analog input
channel that is converted by hardware triggering or triggering by an external input. Only channels
AN8 to ANB are available for hardware- or external-triggered conversion.
Bit 5 Bit 4
HCH1 HCH0 Analog Input Channel
0 AN8 (Initial value) 0
1 AN9
1 0 ANA
1 ANB
Section 24 A/D Converter
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 520 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bits 3 to 0⎯Software Channel Select (SCH3 to SCH0): These bits select the analog input
channel that is converted by software triggering.
When channels AN0 to AN7 are used, appropriate pin settings must be made in port mode register
0 (PMR0). For pin settings, see section 24.2.6, Port Mode Register 0 (PMR0).
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
SCH3 SCH2 SCH1 SCH0 Analog Input Channel
0 AN0 (Initial value) 0
1 AN1
0 AN2
0
1
1 AN3
0 AN4 0
1 AN5
0 AN6
0
1
1
1 AN7
0 AN8 0
1 AN9
0 ANA
0
1
1 ANB
1
1 * * No channel selected for software-triggered
conversion
Legend: * Don't care.
Note: If conversion is started by software when SCH3 to SCH0 are set to 11**, the conversion
result is undetermined. Hardware- or external-triggered conversion, however, will be
performed on the channel selected by HCH1 and HCH0.
Section 24 A/D Converter
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 521 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
24.2.4 A/D Control/Status Register (ADCSR)
0
—
—
0
1
0
R
2
0
R
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
0
67
R/(W)*RR/W
ADIE
0
R/(W)*
SEND SST HST BUSY SCNLHEND
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Note: * Only 0 can be written to bits 7 and 6, to clear the flag.
The A/D status register (ADCSR) is an 8-bit register that can be used to start or stop A/D
conversion, or check the status of the A/D converter.
A/D conversion starts when 1 is written in SST flag. A/D conversion can also start by setting HST
flag to 1 by hardware- or external-triggering.
For ADTRG start by HSW timing generator in hardware triggering, see section 26.4, HSW (Head-
switch) Timing Generator.
When conversion ends, the converted data is stored in the software-triggered A/D result register
(ADR) or hardware-triggered A/D result register (AHR), and the SST or HST bit is cleared to 0. If
software-triggering and hardware- or external-triggering are generated at the same time, priority is
given to hardware- or external-triggering.
ADCSR is an 8-bit register which is initialized to H'01 by a reset, and in module stop mode,
standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode and subsleep mode.
Bit 7⎯Software A/D End Flag (SEND): Indicates the end of A/D conversion.
Bit 7
SEND Description
0 [Clearing condition] (Initial value)
0 is written after reading 1
1 [Setting condition]
Software-triggered A/D conversion has ended
Section 24 A/D Converter
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 522 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 6⎯Hardware A/D End Flag (HEND): Indicates that hardware- or external-triggered A/D
conversion has ended.
Bit 6
HEND Description
0 [Clearing condition] (Initial value)
0 is written after reading 1
1 [Setting condition]
Hardware- or external-triggered A/D conversion has ended
Bit 5⎯A/D Interrupt Enable (ADIE): Selects enable or disable of interrupt (ADI) generation
upon A/D conversion end.
Bit 5
ADIE Description
0 Interrupt (ADI) upon A/D conversion end is disabled (Initial value)
1 Interrupt (ADI) upon A/D conversion end is enabled
Bit 4⎯Software A/D Start Flag (SST): Indicates or controls the start and end of software-
triggered A/D conversion. This bit remains 1 during software-triggered A/D conversion.
When 0 is written in this bit, software-triggered A/D conversion operation can forcibly be aborted.
Bit 4
SST Description
Read: Indicates that software-triggered A/D conversion has ended or been stopped
(Initial value)
0
Write: Software-triggered A/D conversion is aborted
1 Read: Indicates that software-triggered A/D conversion is in progress
Write: Starts software-triggered A/D conversion
Section 24 A/D Converter
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 523 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 3⎯Hardware A/D Status Flag (HST): Indicates the status of hardware- or external-triggered
A/D conversion. When 0 is written in this bit, A/D conversion is aborted regardless of whether it
was hardware-triggered or external-triggered.
Bit 3
HST Description
Read: Hardware- or external-triggered A/D conversion is not in progress
(Initial value)
0
Write: Hardware- or external-triggered A/D conversion is aborted
1 Hardware- or external-triggered A/D conversion is in progress
Bit 2⎯Busy Flag (BUSY): During hardware- or external-triggered A/D conversion, if software
attempts to start A/D conversion by writing to the SST bit, the SST bit is not modified and instead
the BUSY flag is set to 1.
This flag is cleared when the hardware-triggered A/D result register (AHR) is read.
Bit 2
BUSY Description
0 No contention for A/D conversion (Initial value)
1 Indicates an attempt to execute software-triggered A/D conversion while hardware-
or external-triggered A/D conversion was in progress
Bit 1⎯Software-Triggered Conversion Cancel Flag (SCNL): Indicates that software-triggered
A/D conversion was canceled by the start of hardware-triggered A/D conversion.
This flag is cleared when A/D conversion is started by software.
Bit 1
SCNL Description
0 No contention for A/D conversion (Initial value)
1 Indicates that software-triggered A/D conversion was canceled by the start of
hardware-triggered A/D conversion
Bit 0⎯Reserved: This bit cannot be modified and is always read as 1.
Section 24 A/D Converter
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 524 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
24.2.5 Trigger Select Register (ADTSR)
0123
0
4
R/W
567
——————
——————
TRGS1
0
R/W
TRGS0
111111
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The trigger select register (ADTSR) selects hardware- or external-triggered A/D conversion start
factor.
ADTSR is an 8-bit readable/writable register that is initialized to H'FC by a reset, and in module
stop mode, standby mode, watch mode, subactive mode and subsleep mode.
Bits 7 to 2⎯Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
Bits 1 and 0⎯Trigger Select (TRGS1, TRGS0): These bits select hardware- or external-
triggered A/D conversion start factor. Set these bits when A/D conversion is not in progress.
Bit 1 Bit 0
TRGS1 TRGS0 Description
0 Hardware- or external-triggered A/D conversion is disabled
(Initial value)
0
1 Hardware-triggered (ADTRG) A/D conversion is selected
1 0 Hardware-triggered (DFG) A/D conversion is selected
1 External-triggered (ADTRG) A/D conversion is selected
24.2.6 Port Mode Register 0 (PMR0)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
56
0
7
PMR04 PMR03 PMR02 PMR01 PMR00
0
R/W
PMR07
R/WR/WR/W
PMR06 PMR05
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Port mode register 0 (PMR0) controls switching of each pin function of port 0. Switching is
specified for each bit.
PMR0 is an 8-bit readable/writable register and is initialized to H'00 by a reset.
Section 24 A/D Converter
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 525 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bits 7 to 0⎯P07/AN7 to P00/AN0 Pin Switching (PMR07 to PMR00): These bits set the
P0n/ANn pin as the input pin for P0n or as the ANn pin for A/D conversion analog input channel.
Bit n
PMR0n Description
0 P0n/ANn functions as a general-purpose input port (Initial value)
1 P0n/ANn functions as an analog input channel
Note: n = 7 to 0
24.2.7 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR)
7
1
MSTP15
R/W
MSTPCRH
6
1
MSTP14
R/W
5
1
MSTP13
R/W
4
1
MSTP12
R/W
3
1
MSTP11
R/W
2
1
MSTP10
R/W
1
1
MSTP9
R/W
0
1
MSTP8
R/W
7
1
MSTP7
R/W
6
1
MSTP6
R/W
5
1
MSTP5
R/W
4
1
MSTP4
R/W
3
1
MSTP3
R/W
2
1
MSTP2
R/W
1
1
MSTP1
R/W
0
1
MSTP0
R/W
MSTPCRL
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
MSTPCR consists of 8-bit readable/writable registers and performs module stop mode control.
When the MSTP2 bit in MSTPCR is set to 1, A/D converter operation stops at the end of the bus
cycle and a transition is made to module stop mode. For details, see section 4.5, Module Stop
Mode.
MSTPCR is initialized to H'FFFF by a reset
Bit 2⎯Module Stop (MSTP2): Specifies the A/D converter module stop mode.
MSTPCRL
Bit 2
MSTP2 Description
0 A/D converter module stop mode is cleared
1 A/D converter module stop mode is set (Initial value)
Section 24 A/D Converter
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 526 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
24.3 Interface to Bus Master
ADR and AHR are 16-bit registers, but the data bus to the bus master is only 8 bits wide.
Therefore, in accesses by the bus master, the upper byte is accessed directly, but the lower byte is
accessed via a temporary register (TEMP).
A data reading from ADR and AHR is performed as follows. When the upper byte is read, the
upper byte value is transferred to the CPU and the lower byte value is transferred to TEMP. Next,
when the lower byte is read, the TEMP contents are transferred to the CPU.
When reading ADR and AHR, always read the upper byte before the lower byte. It is possible to
read only the upper byte, but if only the lower byte is read, incorrect data may be obtained.
Figure 24.3 shows the data flow for ADR access. The data flow for AHR access is the same.
Bus master
(H'AA)
ADRH
(H'AA)
ADRL
(H'40)
Lower byte read
Bus master
(H'40)
ADRH
(H'AA)
ADRL
(H'40)
TEMP
(H'40)
TEMP
(H'40)
Module data bus
Module data bus
Bus
interface
Bus
interface
Upper byte read
Figure 24.3 ADR Access Operation (Reading H'AA40)
Section 24 A/D Converter
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 527 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
24.4 Operation
The A/D converter operates by successive approximations with 10-bit resolution.
24.4.1 Software-Triggered A/D Conversion
A/D conversion starts when software sets the software A/D start flag (SST bit) to 1. The SST bit
remains set to 1 during A/D conversion, and is automatically cleared to 0 when conversion ends.
Conversion can be software-triggered on any of the 12 channels provided by analog input pins
AN0 to ANB. Bits SCH3 to SCH0 in ADCR select the analog input pin used for software-
triggered A/D conversion. Pins AN8 to ANB are also available for hardware- or external-triggered
conversion.
When conversion ends, SEND flag in ADCSR bit is set to 1. If ADIE bit in ADCSR is also set to
1, an A/D conversion end interrupt occurs.
If the conversion time or input channel selection in ADCR needs to be changed during A/D
conversion, to avoid malfunctions, first clear the SST bit to 0 to halt A/D conversion.
If software writes 1 in the SST bit to start software-triggered conversion while hardware- or
external-triggered conversion is in progress, the hardware- or external-triggered conversion has
priority and the software-triggered conversion is not executed. At this time, BUSY flag in ADCSR
is set to 1. The BUSY flag is cleared to 0 when the hardware-triggered A/D result register (AHR)
is read. If conversion is triggered by hardware while software-triggered conversion is in progress,
the software-triggered conversion is immediately canceled and the SST flag is cleared to 0, and
SCNL flag in ADCSR is set to 1. The SCNL flag is cleared when software writes 1 in the SST bit
to start conversion after the hardware-triggered conversion ends.
Section 24 A/D Converter
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 528 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
24.4.2 Hardware- or External-Triggered A/D Conversion
The system contains the hardware trigger function that allows to turn on A/D conversion at a
specified timing by use of the hardware trigger (internal signals: ADTRG and DFG) and the
incoming external trigger (ADTRG). This function can be used to measure an analog signal that
varies in synchronization with an external signal at a fixed timing.
To execute hardware- or external-triggered A/D conversion, select appropriate start factor in
TRGS1 and TRGS0 bits in ADTSR. When the selected triggering occurs, HST flag in ADCSR is
set to 1 and A/D conversion starts. The HST flag remains 1 during A/D conversion, and is
automatically cleared to 0 when conversion ends. For ADTRG start by HSW timing generator in
hardware triggering, see section 26.4, HSW (Head-switch) Timing Generator. Setting of the
analog input pins on four channels from AN8 to ANB can be modified with the hardware trigger
or the incoming external trigger. Setting is done from HCH1 and HCH0 bits on ADCR. Pins AN8
to ANB are also available for software-triggered conversion.
When conversion ends, HEND flag in ADCSR is set to 1. If ADIE bit in ADCSR is also set to 1,
an A/D conversion end interrupt occurs.
If the conversion time or input channel selection in ADCR needs to be changed during A/D
conversion, to avoid malfunctions, first clear the HST flag to 0 to halt A/D conversion.
If software writes 1 in the SST bit to start software-triggered conversion while hardware- or
external-triggered conversion is in progress, the hardware- or external-triggered conversion has
priority and the software-triggered conversion is not executed. At this time, BUSY flag in ADCSR
is set to 1. The BUSY flag is cleared to 0 when the hardware-triggered A/D result register (AHR)
is read.
If conversion is triggered by hardware while software-triggered conversion is in progress, the
software-triggered conversion is immediately canceled and the SST flag is cleared to 0, and SCNL
flag in ADCSR is set to 1 (the SCNL flag is cleared when software writes 1 in the SST bit to start
conversion after the hardware-triggered conversion ends). The analog input channel changes
automatically from the channel that was undergoing software-triggered conversion (selected by
bits SCH3 to SCH0 in ADCR) to the channel selected by bits HCH1 and HCH0 in ADCR for
hardware- or external-triggered conversion. After the hardware- or external-triggered conversion
ends, the channel reverts to the channel selected by the software-triggered conversion channel
select bits in ADCR.
Hardware- or external-triggered conversion has priority over software-triggered conversion, so the
A/D interrupt-handling routine should check the SCNL and BUSY flags when it processes the
converted data.
Section 24 A/D Converter
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 529 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
24.5 Interrupt Sources
When A/D conversion ends, SEND or HEND flag in ADCSR is set to 1. The A/D conversion end
interrupt (ADI) can be enabled or disabled by ADIE bit in ADCSR.
Figure 24.4 shows the block diagram of A/D conversion end interrupt.
A/D conversion end
interrupt (ADI)
To interrupt controller
A/D control/status register (ADCSR)
SEND HEND ADIE
Figure 24.4 Block Diagram of A/D Conversion End Interrupt
Section 24 A/D Converter
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 530 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Section 25 Address Trap Controller (ATC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 531 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Section 25 Address Trap Controller (ATC)
25.1 Overview
The address trap controller (ATC) is capable of generating interrupt by setting an address to trap,
when the address set appears during bus cycle.
25.1.1 Features
Address to trap can be set independently at three points.
25.1.2 Block Diagram
Figure 25.1 shows a block diagram of the address trap controller.
ATCR
Legend:
TAR0 to 2
Interrupt request
Modules bus
Internal bus
ATCR TAR0 TAR1 TAR2
Trap condition comparator
Bus
interface
: Address trap control register
: Trap address register 0 to 2
Figure 25.1 Block Diagram of ATC
Section 25 Address Trap Controller (ATC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 532 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
25.1.3 Register Configuration
Table 25.1 Register List
Name Abbrev. R/W Initial Value Address*
Address trap control register ATCR R/W H'F8 H'FFB9
Trap address register 0 TAR0 R/W H'F00000 H'FFB0 to H'FFB2
Trap address register 1 TAR1 R/W H'F00000 H'FFB3 to H'FFB5
Trap address register 2 TAR2 R/W H'F00000 H'FFB6 to H'FFB8
Note: * Lower 16 bits of the address.
25.2 Register Descriptions
25.2.1 Address Trap Control Register (ATCR)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
—————
————— R/W
TRC2 TRC1 TRC0
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Bits 7 to 3⎯Reserved: These bits cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
Bit 2⎯Trap Control 2 (TRC2): Sets ON/OFF operation of the address trap function 2.
Bit 2
TRC2 Description
0 Address trap function 2 disabled (Initial value)
1 Address trap function 2 enabled
Bit 1⎯Trap Control 1 (TRC1): Sets ON/OFF operation of the address trap function 1.
Bit 1
TRC1 Description
0 Address trap function 1 disabled (Initial value)
1 Address trap function 1 enabled
Section 25 Address Trap Controller (ATC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 533 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 0⎯Trap Control 0 (TRC0): Sets ON/OFF operation of the address trap function 0.
Bit 0
TRC0 Description
0 Address trap function 0 disabled (Initial value)
1 Address trap function 0 enabled
25.2.2 Trap Address Register 2 to 0 (TAR2 to TAR0)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
34567
R/W
A18 A17 A16
00
R/W
0
R/W R/W
A23 A22 A21
00
R/W R/W
A20 A19
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
34567
R/W
A10 A9 A8
00
R/W
0
R/W R/W
A15 A14 A13
00
R/W R/W
A12 A11
0
—
—
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
34567
A2 A1
00
R/W
0
R/W R/W
A7 A6 A5
00
R/W R/W
A4 A3
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The TAR is composed of three 8-bit readable/writable registers (TARnA, B, and C) (n = 2 to 0)
The TAR sets the address to trap. The function of the TAR2 to TAR0 is the same.
The TAR is initialized to H'00 by a reset.
TARA bits 7 to 0: Addresses 23 to 16 (A23 to A16)
TARB bits 7 to 0: Addresses 15 to 8 (A15 to A8)
TARC bits 7 to 0: Addresses 7 to 1 (A7 to A1)
If the value installed in this register and internal address buses A23 to A1 match as a result of
comparison, an interruption occurs.
For the address to trap, set to the address where the first byte of an instruction exists. In the case of
other addresses, it may not be considered that the condition has been satisfied.
Bit 0 of this register is fixed at 0. The address to trap becomes an even address.
The range where comparison is made is H'000000 to H'FFFFFE.
Section 25 Address Trap Controller (ATC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 534 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
25.3 Precautions in Usage
Address trap interrupt arises 2 states after prefetching the trap address. Trap interrupt may occur
after the trap instruction has been executed, depending on a combination of instructions
immediately preceding the setting up of the address trap.
If the instruction to trap immediately follows the branch instruction or the conditional branch
instruction, operation may differ, depending on whether the condition was satisfied or not, or the
address to be stacked may be located at the branch. Figures 25.2 to 25.22 show specific operations.
For information as to where the next instruction prefetch occurs during the execution cycle of the
instruction, see appendix A.5, Bus Status during Instruction Execution of this manual or section
2.7 Bus State during Execution of Instruction of the H8S/2600 and H8S/2000 Series Software
Manual. (R: W NEXT is the next instruction prefetch.)
25.3.1 Basic Operations
After terminating the execution of the instruction being executed in the second state from the trap
address prefetch, the address trap interrupt exception handling is started.
1. Figure 25.2 shows the operation when the instruction immediately preceding the trap address is
that of 3 states or more of the execution cycle and the next instruction prefetch occurs in the
state before the last 2 states. The address to be stacked is 0260.
φ
Address bus
Interrupt
request
signal
MOV
execution
MOV
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
Internal
opera-
tion
Data
read Start of exception
handling
Immediately
preceding
Instruction
Address
025E MOV.B @ER3+,R2L
0260 NOP
(ER3 = H'0000)
0262 NOP
0264 NOP
025E 0260 0000 0262
→
* Trap setting address
The underlines address is the
one to be actually stacked.
Note: In the figure above, the NOP instruction is used as the typical example of instruction with
execution cycle of 1 state. Other instructions with the execution cycle of 1 state also apply
(Ex. MOV.B, Rs, Rd).
*
Figure 25.2 Basic Operations (1)
Section 25 Address Trap Controller (ATC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 535 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
2. Figure 25.3 shows the operation when the instruction immediately preceding the trap address is
that of 2 states or more of the execution cycle and the next instruction prefetch occurs in the
second state from the last. The address to be stacked is 0268.
φ
Address bus
Interrupt
request
signal
MOV
execution
NOP
execution
Start of exception
handling Immediately
preceding
instruction
Address
0266 MOV.B
R2L, @0000
0268 NOP
026A NOP
026C NOP
*
0266 026A0268 0000 026C
Data
read
→
MOV
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
Notes: The underlined address is the one to be actually stacked.
* Trap setting address
Figure 25.3 Basic Operations (2)
3. Figure 25.4 shows the operation when the instruction immediately preceding the trap address is
that of 1 state or 2 states or more and the prefetch occurs in the last state. The address to be
stacked is 025C.
φ
Address bus
Interrupt
request
signal
NOP
execu-
tion
NOP
execu-
tion
NOP
execu-
tion
Start of
exception
handling
Immediately
preceding
instruction
Address
0256 NOP
0258 NOP
025A NOP
025C NOP
025E NOP
*
0256 025C0258 025A 025E
→
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
Notes: The underlined address is the one to be actually stacked.
* Trap setting address
Figure 25.4 Basic Operations (3)
Section 25 Address Trap Controller (ATC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 536 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
25.3.2 Enabling
The address trap function becomes valid after executing one instruction following the setting of
the enable bit of the address trap control register (ATCR) to 1.
029C BSET #0, @TRCR
*029E MOV.W R0, R1
02A0 MOV.B R1L, R3H
02A2 NOP
02A4 CMP.W R0, R1
02A6 NOP
After executing the MOV instruction,
the address trap interrupt does not
arise, and the next instruction is
executed.
Note: * Trap setting address
Figure 25.5 Enabling
25.3.3 Bcc Instruction
1. When the condition is satisfied by Bcc instruction (8-bit displacement)
If the trap address is the next instruction to the Bcc instruction and the condition is satisfied by
the Bcc instruction and then branched, transition is made to the address trap interrupt after
executing the instruction at the branch. The address to be stacked is 02A8.
φ
Address bus
Interrupt
request
signal
BEQ
execu-
tion
CMP
execu-
tion
029C 02A8029E 02A6 02AA
029C BEQ NEXT:8
029E NOP
02A0 NOP
02A2 NOP
02A4 NOP
02A6 CMP.W R0, R1
02A8 NOP
(NEXT = H'02A6)
*
Start of
exception
handling
BEQ
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
CMP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
Notes: The underlined address is the one to be actually stacked.
* Trap setting address
Figure 25.6 When the Condition Satisfied by Bcc Instruction (8-Bit Displacement)
Section 25 Address Trap Controller (ATC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 537 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
2. When the condition is not satisfied by Bcc instruction (8-bit displacement)
If the trap address is the next instruction to the Bcc instruction and the condition is not satisfied
by the Bcc instruction and thus it fails to branch, transition is made to the address trap interrupt
after executing the trap address instruction and prefetching the next instruction. The address to
be stacked is 02A2.
φ
Address bus
Interrupt
request
signal
029E 02A202A0 02A8 02A4
029E BEQ NEXT:8
02A0 NOP
02A2 NOP
02A4 NOP
02A6 NOP
02A8 CMP.W R0, R1
02AA NOP
(NEXT = H'02A8)
*
BEQ
execu-
tion
NOP
execu-
tion
Start of
exception
handling
BEQ
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
CMP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NEXT:
Notes: The underlined address is the one to be actually stacked.
* Trap setting address
Figure 25.7 When the Condition Not Satisfied by Bcc Instruction (8-Bit Displacement)
Section 25 Address Trap Controller (ATC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 538 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
3. When condition is not satisfied by Bcc instruction (16-bit displacement)
If the trap address is the next instruction to the Bcc instruction and the condition is not satisfied
by the Bcc instruction and thus it fails to branch, transition is made to the address trap interrupt
after executing the trap address instruction (if the trap address instruction is that of 2 states or
more. If the instruction is that of 1 state, after executing two instructions). The address to be
stacked is 02C0.
φ
Address bus
Interrupt
request
signal
Start of
exception handling
02B8 02C002BC 02BE 02C202BA
02B8 BEQ NEXT:16
02BC NOP
02BE NOP
02C0 NOP
02C2 NOP
02C4 NOP
(NEXT = H'02C4)
*
BEQ
execution NOP
execu-
tion
NOP
execu-
tion
Data
fetch
Internal
opera-
tion
BEQ
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NEXT:
Notes: The underlined address is the one to be actually stacked.
* Trap setting address
Figure 25.8 When the Condition Not Satisfied by Bcc Instruction (16-Bit Displacement)
Section 25 Address Trap Controller (ATC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 539 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
4. When the condition is not satisfied by Bcc instruction (Trap address at branch)
When the trap address is at the branch of the Bcc instruction and the condition is not satisfied
by the Bcc instruction and thus it fails to branch, transition is made into the address trap
interrupt after executing the next instruction (if the next instruction is that of 2 states or more.
If the next instruction is that of 1 state, after executing two instructions). The address to be
stacked is 0262.
φ
Address bus
Interrupt
request
signal
Start of
exception
handling
025C 02620266025E 0260 0264
025C BEQ NEXT:8
025E NOP
0260 NOP
0262 NOP
0264 NOP
0266 CMP.W R0, R1
0268 NOP
(NEXT = H'0266)
BEQ
execution NOP
execu-
tion
NOP
execu-
tion
*
BEQ
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
CMP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NEXT:
Notes: The underlined address is the one to be actually stacked.
* Trap setting address
Figure 25.9 When the Condition Not Satisfied by Bcc Instruction
(Trap Address at Branch)
Section 25 Address Trap Controller (ATC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 540 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
25.3.4 BSR Instruction
1. BSR Instruction (8-bit displacement)
When the trap address is the next instruction to the BSR instruction and the addressing mode is
an 8-bit displacement, transition is made to the address trap interrupt after prefetching the
instruction at the branch. The address to be stacked is 02C2.
φ
Address bus
Interrupt
request
signal
BSR execution
Stack
saving
0294 SP−402C20296 SP−2 02C4
0294 BSR @ER0
0296 NOP
0298 NOP
02C2 MOV.W R4, @OUT
02C4 NOP
: :
(@ER0 = H'02C2)
*
Start of
exception handling
BSR
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
MOV
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
Notes: The underlined address is the one to be actually stacked.
* Trap setting address
Figure 25.10 BSR Instruction (8-Bit Displacement)
Section 25 Address Trap Controller (ATC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 541 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
25.3.5 JSR Instruction
1. JSR Instruction (Register indirect)
When the trap address is the next instruction to the JSR instruction and the addressing mode is
a register indirect, transition is made to the address trap interrupt after prefetching the
instruction at the branch. The address to be stacked is 02C8.
φ
Address bus
Interrupt
request
signal
JSRexecution
Stack
saving
Start of
exception
handling
029A SP−402C8029C SP−2 02CA
029A JSR @ER0
029C NOP
029E NOP
02C8 MOV.W R4, @OUT
02CE NOP
: :
(@ER0 = H'02C8)
*
JSR
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
MOV
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
Notes: The underlined address is the one to be actually stacked.
* Trap setting address
Figure 25.11 JSR Instruction (Register Indirect)
Section 25 Address Trap Controller (ATC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 542 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
2. JSR Instruction (Memory indirect)
When the trap address is the next instruction to the JSR instruction and the addressing mode is
memory indirect, transition is made to the address trap interrupt after prefetching the
instruction at the branch. The address to be stacked is 02EA.
φ
Address bus
Interrupt
request
signal
JSR execution
Stack
saving
Start of
exception
handling
0294 SP−2SP−4 02EA006C0296 006E 02EC
0294 JSR @@H'6C:8
0296 NOP
0298 NOP
02EA NOP
02EC NOP
: :
006C H'02EA
: :
*
Data
fetch
JSR
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
Notes: The underlined address is the one to be actually stacked.
* Trap setting address
Figure 25.12 JSR Instruction (Memory Indirect)
Section 25 Address Trap Controller (ATC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 543 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
25.3.6 JMP Instruction
1. JMP Instruction (Register indirect)
When the trap address is the next instruction to the JMP instruction and the addressing mode is
a register indirect, transition is made to the address trap interrupt after prefetching the
instruction at the branch. The address to be stacked is 02AA.
φ
Address bus
Interrupt
request
signal
JMP
execution
MOV.L
execution
Data
fetch
Start of
exception
handling
029A 02A8 02AA02A4029C 02A6 02AC
029A JMP @ER0
029C NOP
029E NOP
02A0 NOP
02A2 NOP
02A4 MOV.L #DATA, ER1
02AA NOP
(@ER0 = H'02A4)
*
JMP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
MOV
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
Notes: The underlined address is the one to be actually stacked.
* Trap setting address
Figure 25.13 JMP Instruction (Register Indirect)
2. JMP Instruction (Memory indirect)
When the trap address is the next instruction to the JMP instruction and the addressing mode is
memory indirect, transition is made to the address trap interrupt after prefetching the
instruction at the branch. The address to be stacked is 02E4.
Section 25 Address Trap Controller (ATC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 544 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
φ
Address bus
Interrupt
request
signal
JMP execution
Start of
exception
handling
0294 006C 02E4006C0296 006E 02E6
0294 JMP @@H'6C:8
0296 NOP
0298 NOP
02E4 NOP
02E6 NOP
: :
006C H'02E4
: :
*
Data
fetch
Internal
opera-
tion
JMP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
Notes: The underlined address is the one to be actually stacked.
* Trap setting address
Figure 25.14 JMP Instruction (Memory Indirect)
25.3.7 RTS Instruction
When the trap address is the next instruction to the RTS instruction, transition is made to the
address trap interrupt after reading the CCR and PC from the stack and prefetching the instruction
at the return location. The address to be stacked is 0298.
φ
Address bus
Break interrupt
request signal
RTS execution
Start of
exception
handling
02AC SP 0298SP02AE SP+2 029A
Stack
saving
0296 BSR SUB
0298 NOP
029A NOP
02AC RTS
(@ER0 = H'02C8)
02AE NOP
*
: :
Internal
opera-
tion
RTS
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
Notes: The underlined address is the one to be actually stacked.
* Trap setting address
Figure 25.15 RTS Instruction
Section 25 Address Trap Controller (ATC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 545 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
25.3.8 SLEEP Instruction
1. SLEEP Instruction 1
When the trap address is the SLEEP instruction and the instruction execution cycle
immediately preceding the SLEEP instruction is that of 2 states or more and prefetch does not
occur in the last state, the SLEEP instruction is not executed and transition is made to the
address trap interrupt without going into SLEEP mode. The address to be stacked is 0274.
φ
Address bus
Interrupt
request
signal
Start of
exception
handling
0272 FFF90274 SP−4SP−20276
0272 MOV.B R2L, @FFF8
0274 SLEEP
0276 NOP
0278 NOP
: :
*
Data
write
MOV
execution
SLEEP
cancel
MOV
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
SLEEP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
Notes: The underlined address is the one to be actually stacked.
* Trap setting address
Figure 25.16 SLEEP Instruction (1)
Section 25 Address Trap Controller (ATC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 546 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
2. SLEEP Instruction 2
When the trap address is the SLEEP instruction and the instruction execution cycle
immediately preceding the SLEEP instruction is that of 1 state 2 states or more and prefetch
occurs in the last state, this puts in the SLEEP mode after execution of the SLEEP instruction,
and the SLEEP mode is cancelled by the address trap interrupt and transition is made to the
exception handling. The address to be stacked is 0264.
φ
Address bus
Interrupt
request
signal
Start of
exception
handling
0260 0262 SP−2SP−40264
0260 NOP
0262 SLEEP
0264 NOP
0266 NOP
: :
*
NOP
execution
SLEEP
execution
SLEEP
mode
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
SLEEP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
Notes: The underlined address is the one to be actually stacked.
* Trap setting address
Figure 25.17 SLEEP Instruction (2)
Section 25 Address Trap Controller (ATC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 547 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
3. SLEEP Instruction 3
When the trap address is the next instruction to the SLEEP instruction, this puts in the SLEEP
mode after execution of the SLEEP instruction, and the SLEEP mode is cancelled by the
address trap interrupt and transition is made to the exception handling. The address to be
stacked is 0282.
φ
Address bus
Interrupt
request
signal
Start of
exception
handling
0280 SP−2 SP−40282
027E NOP
0280 SLEEP
0282 NOP
0284 NOP
: :
*
SLEEP
execution
SLEEP mode
SLEEP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
Notes: The underlined address is the one to be actually stacked.
* Trap setting address
Figure 25.18 SLEEP Instruction (3)
Section 25 Address Trap Controller (ATC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 548 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
4. SLEEP Instruction 4 (Standby or Watch Mode Setting)
When the trap address is the SLEEP instruction and the instruction immediately preceding the
SLEEP instruction is that of 1 state or 2 states or more and prefetch occurs in the last state, this
puts in the standby (watch) mode after execution of the SLEEP instruction. After that, if the
standby (watch) mode is cancelled by the NMI interrupt, transition is made to NMI interrupt
following the CCR and PC (at the address of 0266) stack saving and vector reading. However,
if the address trap interrupt arises before starting execution of the NMI interrupt processing,
transition is made to the address trap exception handling. The address to be stacked is the
starting address of the NMI interrupt processing.
φ
Address bus
Interrupt
request
signal
Address trap
interruption
0262 0264 0266 SP−2SPCASP−2
0262 NOP
0264 SLEEP
0266 NOP
*
SLEEP
execution
NMI
interrupt
Standby
mode
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
SLEEP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
Note: * Trap setting address
Figure 25.19 SLEEP Instruction (4) (Standby or Watch Mode Setting)
Section 25 Address Trap Controller (ATC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 549 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
5. SLEEP Instruction 5 (Standby or Watch Mode Setting)
When the trap address is the next instruction to the SLEEP instruction, this puts in the standby
(watch) mode after execution of the SLEEP instruction. After that, if the standby (watch) mode
is cancelled by the NMI interruption, transition is made to the NMI interrupt following the
CCR and PC (at the address of 0266) stack saving and vector reading. However, if the address
trap interrupt arises before starting execution of the NMI interrupt processing, transition is
made to the address trap exception handling. The address to be stacked is the starting address
of the NMI interrupt processing.
φ
Address bus
Interrupt
request
signal
Address trap
interrupt
0280 0282 0284 SP−2SPCASP−2
0280 NOP
0282 SLEEP
0284 NOP
*
SLEEP
execution
NMI
interruption
Standby
mode
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
SLEEP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
Note: * Trap setting address
Figure 25.20 SLEEP Instruction (5) (Standby or Watch Mode Setting)
25.3.9 Competing Interrupt
1. General Interrupt (Interrupt other than NMI)
When the ATC interrupt request is made at the timing in (1) (A) against the general interrupt
request, the interruption appears to take place in the ATC at the timing earlier than usual,
because higher priority is assigned to the ATC interrupt processing (Simultaneous interrupt
with the general interrupt has no effect on processing). The address to be stacked is 029E.
For comparison, the case where the trap address is set at 02A0 if no general interrupt request
was made is shown in (2). The address to be stacked is 02A4.
Section 25 Address Trap Controller (ATC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 550 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
φ
Address bus
General Interrupt
request signal
Interrupt
request signal
MOV execution
Data
write
Data
write
Start of general
interrupt processing
Range of start of ATC
interrupt processing
(1)
029C NOP
0296 MOV.B R2L, @Port
029A NOP
029E NOP
02A0 NOP
02A2 NOP
02A4 NOP
0296 Port 029E SP−2SP−4
Vector Vector
0298
NOP
execu-
tion
NOP
execu-
tion
MOV execution
NOP
execu-
tion
NOP
execu-
tion
NOP
execu-
tion
NOP
execu-
tion
NOP
execu-
tion
029A 029C 02A0
φ
Address bus
Interrupt
request
signal
Data
read
Data
read
Start of ATC interrupt
processing
Set one of these to the
trap address
(2)
029C NOP
0296 MOV.B R2L, @Port
029A NOP
029E NOP
02A0 NOP Trap address
02A2 NOP
02A4 NOP
0296 Port 029E0298 02A0 02A2 02A4 SP
−
2029A 029C 02A6
(A)
MOV
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
MOV
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
Address
to be
stacked
Figure 25.21 Competing Interrupt (General Interrupt)
Section 25 Address Trap Controller (ATC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 551 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
2. In case of NMI
When the NMI interruption request is made at the timing in (1) (A) against the ATC interrupt
request, the interrupt appears to take place in NMI at the timing earlier than usual, because
higher priority is assigned to the NMI interrupt processing. The ATC interrupt processing
starts after fetching the instruction at the starting address of the NMI interrupt processing. The
address to be stacked is 02E0 for the NMI and 340 for the ATC.
When the ATC interrupt request is made at the timing in (2) (B) against the NMI interrupt
request, the ATC interrupt processing starts after fetching the instruction at the starting address
of the NMI interrupt processing. The address to be stacked is 02E6 for the NMI and 0340 for
the ATC.
Section 25 Address Trap Controller (ATC)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 552 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
φ
Address bus
NMI interrupt
request signal
ATC interrupt
request signal
Start of ATC inter-
rupt processing
(1)
02E0 NOP
02DC NOP
02DE NOP
02E2 NOP
02E4 NOP
02E6 NOP
02E8 NOP
02DC SP
−
4 0340 SP
−
6 SP
−
8
VectorVector VectorVector
02DE
NMI vector
read
02E0 0342SP
−
202E2
(2) Set one of these to
the trap address
(1) Set to the trap address
NMI interrupt
processing Start of ATC interrupt processing
φ
Address bus
NMI interrupt
request signal
ATC interrupt
request signal
Start of ATC
Interrupt processing
(2)
02DC 02E2 02E4 SP
−
4SP
−
2 0340
Vector Vector Vector
02DE 02E0 034202E6 02E8
(B)
(A)
NMI interrupt
processing
: :
0340 The starting address of NMI
interrupt
: :
NOP
execu-
tion
NOP
execu-
tion
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
NOP
instruc-
tion
pre-fetch
Figure 25.22 Competing Interrupt (In Case of NMI)
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 553 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Section 26 Servo Circuits
26.1 Overview
26.1.1 Functions
Servo circuits for a video cassette recorder are included on-chip.
The functions of the servo circuits can be divided into four groups, as listed in table 26.1.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 554 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Table 26.1 Servo Circuit Functions
Group Function Description
CTL I/O amplifier Gain variable input amplifier
Output amplifier with rewrite mode
CFGDuty compensation input Duty accuracy: 50 ±2%
(Zero cross type comparator)
DFG, DPG separation/overlap
input
Overlap input available: Three-level input
method, DFG noise mask function
Reference signal generators V compensation, field detection, external signal
sync, V sync in REC mode, REF30 signal output
to outside
HSW timing generator Head-switching signals, FIFO 20 stages
Compatible with DFG counter soft-reset
Four-head high-speed switching
circuit for special playback
Chroma-rotary/head-amplifier switching output
12-bit PWM Improved speed of carrier frequency
Frequency division circuit With CFG mask, no CFG for phase or CTL mask
(1) Input and
output circuits
Sync detection circuit Noise count, field discrimination, Hsync
compensation, Hsync detection noise mask
Drum speed error detector Lock detector function, pause at the counter
overflow, R/W error latch register, limiter function
Drum phase error detector Latch signal selectable, R/W error latch register
Capstan speed error detector Lock detector function, pause at the counter
overflow, R/W error latch register, limiter function
Capstan phase error detector R/W error latch register
(2) Error
detectors
X-value adjustment and tracking
adjustment circuit
(Separate setting available)
(3) Phase and
gain
compensation
Digital filter computation circuit Computations performed automatically by
hardware
Output gain variable: ×2 to ×64 (exponents of 2)
(Partial write in Z-1 (high-order 8 bits) available)
Additional V signal circuit Valid in special playback (4) Other
circuits CTL circuit Duty discrimination circuit, CTL head R/W
control, compatible with wide aspect
26.1.2 Block Diagram
Figure 26.1 shows a block diagram of the servo circuits.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 555 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
4-head
special
playback
controller
- +
SV1(P30)
EXCAP(P81)
( )
SV2(P31)
( )
EXCTL(P82)
)
+
+
+
+
+
- +
+ -
-
CTL
Head
CTL Amp
CTL
Head
CFG
CAP
PWM
DRM
PWM
DFG
DPG(P87)
VideoFF
AudioFF
Vpulse
H.Amp SW(P84)
C.Rotary(P83)
COMP(P85)
Csync
EXTTRG(P86)
OSCH
REC:ON
ADTRIG
(HSW)
Ep
PWM
Es
Es
Ep
REC
REC
PB.ASM
CTLFB
PB.CTL
PB.
ASM
(NTSC)
DVCTL
Gain control
by register
setting
REF30,REF30X,CREF,
CTLMONI,DVCFG,
DFG,DPG,DFG,etc
Internal signal
monitor
controller
(PAL)REF30X
REC-CTL
DutyI/O
(Duty deter-
minator) (Assemble
recording)
DVCFG
DVCFG2
Gain up.
XE:ON
VD
RP0 to B/
(P60 to 67,
P74 to 77)
Sync
separator
REC-CTL
generator
VISS
circuit
Noise
Det.
A/D
converter
Timer X1
Timer L
Timer R
AN pins
PWM
X-value
adjustment
Gain up.
RP0 to B/
(P60 to 67,
P74 to 77)
PPG0 to 7/
(P70 to 77)
PPG0 to 7/
(P70 to 77)
REF30P(PB:30Hz,REC:1/2VD)
CREF
Res
System
clock
Additional
V pulse
generator
Head-switch
timing
generator
Drum system
reference
signal
Capstan
system
reference
signal
Phase
error
detector
Phase
error
detector
Digital
filter
Digital
filter
Digital
filter
Digital
filter
Frequency
divider
Frequency
divider
Speed
error
detector
Speed
error
detector
Figure 26.1 Block Diagram of Servo Circuits
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 556 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
26.2 Servo Port
26.2.1 Overview
This LSI is equipped with seventeen pins dedicated to the servo circuit and twenty-nine pins
multiplexed with general-purpose ports. It also has an input amplifier to amplify CTL signals, a
CTL output amplifier, a CTL Schmitt comparator, and a CFG zero cross type comparator. The
CTL input amplifier allows gain adjustment by software. DFG and DPG signals, which control the
drum, can be input as separate signals or an overlapped signal.
SV1 and SV2 pins allow internal signals of the servo circuit to be output for monitoring. The
signals to be output can be selected out of eight kinds of signals. See the description of Servo
Monitor Control Register (SVMCR) in section 26.2.5, Register Description.
26.2.2 Block Diagram
1. DFG and DPG Input Circuit
The DFG and DPG input pins have on-chip Schmit circuits. Figure 26.2 shows the input circuit
of DFG and DPG.
DPG SW
DFG
DPG
DFG
DPG
DPG SW
RES+LPM
Figure 26.2 Input Circuit of DFG and DPG
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 557 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
2. CFG Input Circuit
The CFG input pin has an amplifier and a zero cross type comparator. Figure 26.3 shows the
input circuit of CFG.
+
-
+
-
+
-
CFGCOMP
CFGCOMP
P250
REF
M250 S
R
F/F
O
stp
VREF
VREF
CFG
BIAS
CFG RES+ModuleSTOP
Figure 26.3 CFG Input Circuit
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 558 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
3. CTL Input Circuit
The CTL input pin has an amplifier. Figure 26.4 shows the input circuit of CTL.
-
+
+
-
CTLFB
CTLSMT(i)CTLFBCTLREF CTLBias
CTLGR0CTLGR3 to 1
AMPSHORT
(REC-CTL)
PB-CTL(+)
Note: Be sure to connect a capacitor between CTLAmp (o) and CTLSMT (i)
Note
PB-CTL(-)
AMPON
(PB-CTL)
- +
CTLAmp(o)CTL(+)CTL(-)
Figure 26.4 CTL Input Circuit
26.2.3 Pin Configuration
Table 26.2 shows the pin configuration of the servo circuit. P30, P31, P6n, P7n, and P81 to P87
are general-purpose ports. As for P3, P6, P7, and P8, see section 10, I/O Port.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 559 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Table 26.2 Pin Configuration
Name Abbrev. I/O Function
Servo Vcc pin SVCC Input Power source pin for servo circuit
Servo Vss pin SVSS Input Power source pin for servo circuit
Audio head switching pin Audio FF Output Audio head switching signal output
Video head switching pin Video FF Output Video head switching signal output
Capstan mix pin CAPPWM Output 12-bit PWM square wave output
Drum mix pin DRMPWM Output 12-bit PWM square wave output
Additional V pulse pin Vpulse Output Additional V signal output
Color rotary signal output pin P83/C.Rotary I/O, Output General-purpose port/control signal output
port for processing color signals
Head amplifier switching pin P84/H.Amp SW I/O, Output General-purpose port/pre-amplifier output
selection signal input
Compare signal input pin P85/COMP I/O, Input General-purpose port/pre-amplifier output
result signal input
CTL (+) I/O pin CTL (+) I/O CTL signal input/output
CTL (-) I/O pin CTL (-) I/O CTL signal input/output
CTL Bias input pin CTLBias Input CTL primary amplifier bias supply
CTL Amp (O) output pin CTLAMP (O) Output CTL amplifier output
CTL SMT (I) input pin CTLSMT (I) Input CTL Schmitt amplifier input
CTL FB input pin CTLFB Input CTL amplifier high-range characteristics
control
CTL REF output pin CTLREF Output CTL amplifier reference voltage output
Capstan FG amplifier input pin CFG Input CFG signal amplifier input
Drum FG input pin DFG Input DFG signal input
Drum PG input pin P87/DPG I/O, Input General-purpose port/DPG signal input
External CTL signal input pin P82/EXCTL I/O, Input General-purpose port/external CTL signal
input/
Composite sync signal input pin Csync Input Composite sync signal input
External reference signal input pin P86/EXTTRG I/O, input General-purpose port/external reference
signal input
External capstan signal input pin P81/EXCAP I/O, input General-purpose port/external capstan
signal input
Servo monitor signal output pin 1 P30/SV1 I/O, output General-purpose port/servo monitor signal
output
Servo monitor signal output pin 2 P31/SV2 I/O, output General-purpose port/servo monitor signal
output
PPG output pin P7n/PPGn I/O, output General-purpose port/PPG output
RTP output pin P6n/RPn,
P7n/RPn
I/O, output General-purpose port/RTP output
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 560 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
26.2.4 Register Configuration
Table 26.3 shows the register configuration of the servo port section.
Table 26.3 Register Configuration
Name Abbrev. R/W Size Initial Value Address
Servo port mode register SPMR R/W Byte H'5F H'D0A0
Servo monitor control register SVMCR R/W Byte H'C0 H'D0A3
CTL gain control register CTLGR R/W Byte H'C0 H'D0A4
26.2.5 Register Description
Servo Port Mode Register (SPMR)
0
1
1
1
⎯
2
1
⎯
3
1
4
1
⎯
0
R/W
56
⎯
⎯
7
⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯
0
R/W
CTLSTOP
⎯⎯
CFGCOMP
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
SPMR is an 8-bit read/write register that switches the CFG input system.
It is initialized to H'5F by a reset or in stand-by mode.
Bit 7⎯CTLSTOP Bit (CTLSTOP): Controls whether the CTL circuit is operated or stopped.
Bit 7
CTLSTOP Description
0 CTL circuit operates (Initial value)
1 CTL circuit stops operation
Bit 6⎯Reserved: Cannot be modified and is always read as 1.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 561 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 5⎯CFG Input System Switching Bit (CFGCOMP) : Selects whether the CFG input signal
system is set to the zero cross type comparator system or digital signal input system.
Bit 5
CFGCOMP Description
0 CFG signal input system is set to the zero cross type comparator system.
(Initial value)
1 CFG signal input system is set to the digital signal input system.
Bits 4 to 0⎯Reserved: Cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
Servo Monitor Control Register (SVMCR)
0
0
1
0
2
0
3
0
4
0
567
——
——
SVMCR4 SVMCR3 SVMCR2 SVMCR1 SVMCR0
11
R/WR/WR/W
0
SVMCR5
R/W R/WR/W
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
SVMCR is an 8-bit read/write register that selects the monitor signal output from the SV1 and
SV2 pins when the P30/SV1 pin is used as the SV1 monitor output pin or when the P31/SV2 pin is
used as the SV2 monitor output pin. It is initialized to H'C0 by a reset or in stand-by mode.
Bits 7 and 6⎯Reserved: Cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
Bits 5 to 3⎯SV2 Pin Servo Monitor Output Control(SVMCR5 to SVMCR3): select the servo
monitor signal output from the SV2 pin.
Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3
SVMCR5 SVMCR4 SVMCR3 Description
0 Outputs REF30 signal to SV2 output pin. (Initial value) 0
1 Outputs CAPREF30 signal to SV2 output pin.
0 Outputs CREF signal to SV2 output pin.
0
1
1 Outputs CTLMONI signal to SV2 output pin.
0 Outputs DVCFG signal to SV2 output pin. 0
1 Outputs CFG signal to SV2 output pin.
0 Outputs DFG signal to SV2 output pin.
1
1
1 Outputs DPG signal to SV2 output pin.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 562 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bits 2 to 0⎯SV1 Pin Servo Monitor Output Control (SVMCR2 to SVMCR0): Select the
servo monitor signal output from the SV1 pin.
Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
SVMCR2 SVMCR1 SVMCR0 Description
0 Outputs REF30 signal to SV1 output pin. (Initial value) 0
1 Outputs CAPREF30 signal to SV1 output pin.
0 Outputs CREF signal to SV1 output pin.
0
1
1 Outputs CTLMONI signal to SV1 output pin.
0 Outputs DVCFG signal to SV1 output pin. 0
1 Outputs CFG signal to SV1 output pin.
0 Outputs DFG signal to SV1 output pin.
1
1
1 Outputs DPG signal to SV1 output pin.
CTL Gain Control Register (CTLGR)
0
0
1
0
2
0
3
0
4
0
567
——
——
CTLFB CTLGR3 CTLGR2 CTLGR1 CTLGR0
11
R/WR/WR/W
0
CTLE/A
R/W R/WR/W
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
CTLGR is an 8-bit read/write register that turns on or off the CTLFB switch in the CTL amplifier
circuit and specifying the CTL amplifier gain. It is initialized to H'C0 by a reset or in stand-by
mode.
Bits 7 and 6⎯Reserved: Cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
Bit 5⎯CTL Selection Bit (CTLE/A): Controls whether the amplifier output or EXCTL is used
as the CTLP signal supplied to the CTL circuit.
Bit 5
CTLE/A Description
0 AMP output (Initial value)
1 EXCTL
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 563 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 4⎯SW Bit of the Feedback Section of CTL Amplifier (CTLFB): Turns on or off the switch
of the feedback section to adjust the gain. See figure 26.4.
Bit 4
CTLFB Description
0 Turns off CTLFB SW (Initial value)
1 Turns on CTLFB SW
Bits 3 to 0⎯CTL Amplifier Gain Setting Bits (CTLGR3 to CTLGR0): Set the output gain of
the CTL amplifier.
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
CTLGR3 CTLGR2 CTLGR1 CTLGR0 CTL Output Gain
0 34.0 dB (Initial value) 0
1 36.5 dB
0 39.0 dB
0
1
1 41.5 dB
0 44.0 dB 0
1 46.5 dB
0 49.0 dB
0
1
1
1 51.5 dB
0 54.0 dB 0
1 56.5 dB
0 59.0 dB
0
1
1 61.5 dB
0 64.0 dB 0
1 66.5 dB*
0 69.0 dB*
1
1
1
1 71.5 dB*
Note: * With a setting of 65.0 dB or more, the CTLAMP is in a very sensitive status. When
configuring the set board, take a countermeasure against noise around the control head
signal input port. Also, consider well the setting of the filter between the CTLAMP and
the CTLSMT.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 564 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
26.2.6 DFG/DPG Input Signals
DFG and DPG signals can be input either as separate signals or as an overlapped signal. When the
latter is selected (PMR87 = 1), take care to control the input levels of DFG and DPG. Figure 26.5
shows DFG/DPG input signals.
DPG
DPG Schmitt level
3.45/3.55
V
IL
/V
IH
DFG Schmitt level
1.85/1.95
V
IL
/V
IH
DFG
(1) DPG/DFG separate input (PMR87 = 0)
DPG Schmitt level
DFG/DPG
(2) DPG/DFG overlapped input (PMR87 = 1)
DFG Schmitt level
Figure 26.5 DFG/DPG Input Signals
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 565 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
26.3 Reference Signal Generators
26.3.1 Overview
The reference signal generators consist of a REF30 signal generator and a CREF signal generator
and create the reference signals (REF30 and CREF signals) used in phase comparison, etc. The
REF30 signal is used to control the phase of the drum and capstan. The CREF signal is used if
REF30 signal cannot be used as the reference signal to control the phase of the capstan in REC
mode. Each signal generator consists of a 16-bit counter which uses the servo clock φ s/2 (or φ s/4)
as its clock source, a reference period register, and a comparator.
The value set in the reference period register should be 1/2 of the desired reference signal period.
26.3.2 Block Diagram
Figure 26.6 shows the block diagram of REF30 signal generator. Figure 26.7 shows that of CREF
signal generator.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 566 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
φs = fosc/2
φs/2
φs/4
Dummy read
External
frequency
signal
(EXTTRG)
Field
detection
signal
W W R/W W W
WW
PB→REC
PB
↑,↓
ASM
REC/PB
V noise detection signal
REF30
REF30P
Video FF
VD
Match
Mask
Clear
WR/W W
Internal bus
R/W
Internal bus
Toggle
RCS
REF30 counter register (16 bits)
OD/EV
VSTFDS VEG
Edge
detec-
tion
↑ Edge
detec-
tion
VNA CVSREX TBC
Reference period buffer 1 (16 bits)
Reference period register 1 (16 bits)
Comparator (16 bits)
Counter (16 bits)
Figure 26.6 REF30 Signal Generator
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 567 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
φ
s/2
φ
s/4
WW
CREF
DVCFG2
PB(ASM)
↓
REC
Match
Clear
Counter clear
Toggle
Edge
detection
CRD
W
RCS
Reference period register 2 (16 bits)
Reference period buffer 2 (16 bits)
Comparator (16 bits)
Counter (16 bits)
Internal bus
S
R
Q
Dummy read
φ
s = fosc/2
↑
Figure 26.7 Block Diagram of CREF Signal Generator
26.3.3 Register Configuration
Table 26.4 shows the register configuration of the reference signal generators.
Table 26.4 Register Configuration
Name Abbrev. R/W Size Initial Value Address
Reference period mode
register
RFM W Byte H'00 H'D096
Reference period register 1 RFD W Word H'FFFF H'D090
Reference period register 2 CRF W Word H'FFFF H'D092
REF30 counter register RFC R/W Word H'0000 H'D094
Reference period mode
register 2
RFM2 R/W Byte H'FE H'D097
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 568 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
26.3.4 Register Description
Reference Period Mode Register (RFM)
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
56
0
7
REX CRD OD/EV VST VEG
0
W
RCS
WWW
VNA CVS
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
RFM is an 8-bit write-only register which determines the operational state of the reference signal
generators. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out.
It is initialized to H'00 by a reset and in stand-by and module stop modes.
RFM is accessible in byte units only. If accessed by a word, correct operation is not guaranteed.
Bit 7⎯Clock Source Selection Bit (RCS): Selects the clock source supplied to the counter.
(φs = fosc/2)
Bit 7
RCS Description
0 φs/2 (Initial value)
1 φs/4
Bit 6⎯Mode Selection Bit (VNA): Selects the mode for controlling transition to free-run
operation when the REF30 signal is generated synchronously with the VD signal in REC mode:
automatic mode which controls the transition by the V noise detection signal detected by the sync
signal detection circuit, or manual mode which controls the transition by software.
Bit 6
VNA Description
0 Manual mode (Initial value)
1 Automatic mode
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 569 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 5⎯Manual Selection Bit (CVS): Selects whether the REF30 signal is generated
synchronously with VD or it is operated in free-run state in the manual mode (VNA = 0). (This
selection is ignored in PB mode except in TBC mode.)
Bit 5
CVS Description
0 Synchronous with VD (Initial value)
1 Free-run operation
Bit 4⎯External Signals Sync Selection Bit (REX): Selects whether the REF30 signal is
generated synchronously with VD, in free-run state or synchronously with the external signal.
(Valid in both PB and REC modes.)
Bit 4
REX Description
0 VD signal or free-run (Initial value)
1 Synchronous with external signal
Bit 3⎯DVCFG2 Sync Selection Bit (CRD): Selects whether the reset timing in the CREF signal
generation is immediately after switching the mode or it is synchronous with the DVCFG2 signal
immediately after the mode switching.
Bit 3
CRD Description
0 On switching the mode (Initial value)
1 Synchronous with DVCFG2 signal
Bit 2⎯ODD/EVEN Edge Switching Selection Bit (OD/EV): Selects whether the REF30P signal
is generated by the rising edge (even) or falling edge (odd) of the field signal in REC mode.
Bit 2
OD/EV Description
0 Generated at the rising edge of the field signal (Initial value)
1 Generated at the falling edge of the field signal
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 570 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 1⎯Video FF Counter Set (VST): Selects whether the REF30 counter register value is set on
or off by the Video FF signal when the drum phase is in FIX on in the PB mode.
Bit 1
VST Description
0 Counter set off by Video FF signal (Initial value)
1 Counter set on by Video FF signal
Bit 0⎯Video FF Edge Selection Bit (VEG): Selects the edge at which REF30 counter is set
(VST = 1) by the Video FF signal.
Bit 0
VEG Description
0 Set at the rising edge of Video FF signal (Initial value)
1 Set at the falling edge of Video FF signal
Reference Period Register 1 (RFD)
15
1
REF15
W
14
1
REF14
W
13
1
REF13
W
12
1
REF12
W
11
1
REF11
W
10
1
REF10
W
9
1
REF9
W
8
1
REF8
W
7
1
REF7
W
6
1
REF6
W
5
1
REF5
W
4
1
REF4
W
3
1
REF3
W
2
1
REF2
W
1
1
REF1
W
0
1
REF0
W
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The reference period register 1 (RFD) is a buffer register which generates the reference signal
(REF30) for playback, VD compensation for recording, and the reference signals for free-running.
It is an 16-bit write-only register accessible in word units only. If a read is attempted, an
undetermined value is read out.
The value set in RFD should be 1/2 of the desired reference signal period. Care is required when
VD is unstable, such as when the field is weak (synchronization with VD cannot be acquired if a
value less than 1/2 is set in REC). When data is written in RFD, it is stored in the buffer once, and
then fetched into RFD by a match signal of the comparator. (The data which generates the
reference signal is updated by the match signal.) A forcible write, such as initial setting, etc.,
should be done by a dummy read of RFD.
If a byte-write in RFD is attempted, correct operation is not guaranteed. RFD is initialized to
H'FFFF by a reset, and in stand-by and module stop modes.
Use bit 7 (ASM) and bit 6 (REC/PB) in the CTL mode register (CTLM) in the CTL circuit to
switch between record and playback modes. Use bit 4 (CR/RF bit) in the capstan phase error
detection control register (CPGCR) to switch between REF30 and CREF for capstan phase
control.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 571 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Reference Period Register 2 (CRF)
15
1
CRF15
W
14
1
CRF14
W
13
1
CRF13
W
12
1
CRF12
W
11
1
CRF11
W
10
1
CRF10
W
9
1
CRF9
W
8
1
CRF8
W
7
1
CRF7
W
6
1
CRF6
W
5
1
CRF5
W
4
1
CRF4
W
3
1
CRF3
W
2
1
CRF2
W
1
1
CRF1
W
0
1
CRF0
W
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The reference period register 2 (CRF) is an 16-bit write-only buffer register which generates the
reference signals to control the capstan phase (CREF). CRF is accessible in word units only. If a
read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. The value set in CRF should be 1/2 of the
desired reference signal period.
When data is written in CRF, it is stored in the buffer once, and then fetched into CRF by a match
signal of the comparator. (The data which generates the reference signal is updated by the match
signal.) A forcible write, such as initial setting, etc., should be done by a dummy read of CRF.
If a byte-write in CRF is attempted, correct operation is not guaranteed. CRF is initialized to
H'FFFF by a reset and in stand-by and module stop modes.
Use bit 4 (CR/RF bit) in the capstan phase error detection control register (CPGCR) to switch
between REF30 and CREF for capstan phase control. See section 26.9, Capstan Phase Error
Detector.
REF30 Counter Register (RFC)
15
0
RFC15
14
0
RFC14
13
0
RFC13
12
0
RFC12
11
0
RFC11
10
0
RFC10
9
0
RFC9
8
0
RFC8
7
0
RFC7
6
0
RFC6
5
0
RFC5
4
0
RFC4
3
0
RFC3
2
0
RFC2
1
0
RFC1
0
0
RFC0
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The REF30 counter register (RFC) is a register which determines the initial value of the free-run
counter when it generates REF30 signals in playback. When data is written in RFC, its value is
written in the counter by a match signal of the comparator. If the bit 1 (VST) of RFM is set to 1,
the counter is set by the Video FF signal when the drum phase is in FIX ON. The counter setting
by the Video FF signal should be done by setting bit 1 (VST) and bit 0 (VEG) of the RFM. Do not
set the RFC to a value greater than 1/2 of the reference period register 1 (RFD) value.
RFC is a read/write register. If a read is attempted, the value of the counter is read out. If a byte-
access is attempted, correct operation is not guaranteed. RFC is initialized to H'0000 by a reset and
in stand-by and module stop modes.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 572 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Reference Period Mode Register 2 (RFM2)
0
0
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
567
⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯TBC
⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯R/W
FDS
111
R/W
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
REM2 is an 8-bit read/write register which determines the operational state of the reference signal
generators.
It is initialized to H'FE by a reset and in stand-by and module stop modes. RFM2 is a byte access-
only register; if accessed by a word, correct operation is not guaranteed.
Bit 7⎯TBC Selection Bit (TBC): Selects whether the reference signal in PB mode is generated
by the VD signal or by the free-run counter.
Bit 7
TBC Description
0 Generated by the VD signal
1 Generated by the free-run counter (Initial value)
Bits 6 to 1⎯Reserved: Cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
Bit 0⎯Field Selection Bit (FDS): Determines whether selection between ODD or EVEN is made
for the field signal when PB mode was switched over to REC mode, or these signals are
synchronized with VD signals within a phase error of 90° immediately after the switching over.
Bit 0
FDS Description
0 Generated by the VD signal of ODD or EVEN selected (Initial value)
1 Generated by the VD signal within mode transition phase error of 90°
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 573 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
26.3.5 Operation
• Operation of REF30 Signal Generator
The REF30 signal generator generates the reference signals required to control the phase of the
drum and capstan.
To generate the REF30 signal, set the 1/2 the reference period to the reference period register 1
(RFD) corresponding to the 50 percent duty cycle. In playback mode, the REF30 signal is
generated by free-running the REF30 signal generator. The generator has the external signal
synchronization function, and if the bit 4 (REX) of the reference period mode register (RFM)
is set to 1, it generates the REF30 signal from the external signal (EXTTGR).
In record mode, the reference signal is generated from the VD signal generated in the sync
detector. Any VD drop-out caused by weak field intensity, etc., is compensated by a value set
in RFD. To cope with the VD noises, the generator automatically masks the VD for a period
about 75% of the RFD setting after REF30 signal was changed due to VD. In record mode, the
generation of the reference signal either by VD or free-run operation can be controlled
automatically using the V noise detection signal detected in the sync signal detection circuit or
manually by software. Select which is used by setting bit 6 (VNA) or 5 (CVS) of RFM.
The phase of the toggle output of the REF30 signal is cleared to L level when the mode shifts
from PB to REC (ASM). Also the frame servo function can be set, allowing for control of the
phase of REF30 signals with the field signal detected in the sync signal detection circuit. Use
bit 2 (OD/EV) of RFM for such control.
See the description of CTL mode register (CTLM) in section 26.13.5, Register Description, as
for switching over between PB, ASM and REC.
• Operation of the Mask Circuit
The REF30 signal generator has a toggle mask circuit and a counter mask (counter set signal
mask) circuit built-in. Each mask circuit masks irregular VD signals which may occur when
the VD signal is unstable because of weak field intensity, etc., in record mode.
The toggle mask and counter mask circuits mask the VD automatically for about 75% of
double the period set in the reference period register 1 (RFD) after VD signal was detected (see
figure 26.9). If a VD signal dropped out and V was compensated, the toggle mask circuit
begins masking, but the counter mask circuit does not begin masking for about 25% of the
period. If VD signal was detected during such a period, the circuit does masking for about 75%
of the period after the VD detection. If not detected, it does masking for about 75% of the
period after V was compensated (see figures 26.10 and 26.11).
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 574 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
• Timing of the REF30 Signal Generation
Figures 26.8 to 26.12 show the timing of the generation of REF30 and REF30P signals.
Counter set Counter set Counter set
Value set in reference
period register 1 (RFD)
Counter
Value set in REF30
counter register (RFC)
REF30
REF30P
Figure 26.8 REF30 Signals in Playback Mode
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 575 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Sampling
Sampling
Sampling
Value set in reference
period register 1 (RFD)
Selected VD
(OD/EV = 0)
Counter mask
(clear signal mask)
Counter
Value set in REF30
counter register (RFC)
REF30
VD
Toggle mask
Field signal
REF30P
HSW
Drum phase counter
T
About 75%
Masking
period
Masking
period
Figure 26.9 Generation of Reference Signal in Record Mode (Normal Operation)
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 576 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Sampling
Cleared Cleared Cleared
Drop-out of V
Value set in reference
period register 1 (RFD)
Selected VD
(OD/EV = 0)
Counter mask
(clear signal mask)
Counter
Value set in REF30
counter register (RFC)
REF30
VD
Toggle mask
Field signal
REF30P
HSW
Drum phase counter
Sampling
TSampling
About 75% About 75% About 75%
About 75%
About
25%
Masking
period
Masking
period
Figure 26.10 Generation of the Reference Signal when in REC (V Dropped Out)
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 577 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Sampling
Cleared Cleared Cleared
Dislocation of V
Value set in reference
period register 1 (RFD)
Selected VD
(OD/EV = 0)
Counter mask
(clear signal mask)
Counter
Value set in REF30
counter register (RFC)
REF30
VD
Toggle mask
Field signal
REF30P
HSW
Drum phase counter
Sampling
TSampling
About 75%
About 75% About 75%
About 75%
Masking
period
Masking
period
Figure 26.11 Generation of the Reference Signal when in REC (V Dislocated)
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 578 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Cleared Cleared
Reset
Value set in reference
period register 1 (RFD)
Counter
Value set in REF30
counter register (RFC)
External sync
signal
REF30
REF30P
Figure 26.12 Generation of REF30 Signal by the External Sync Signal
• CREF Signal Generator
The CREF signal generator generates the CREF signal which is the reference signal to control
the phase of capstan.
To generate the CREF signal, set the 1/2 the reference period to the reference period register 2
(CRF). If the set value matches the counter value, a toggle waveform is generated
corresponding to the 50 percent duty cycle, and a one-shot pulse is output at each rising edge
of the waveform. The counter of CREF signal generator is initialized to H'0000 and the phase
of the toggle is cleared to L level when the mode shifts from PB (ASM) to REC. The timing of
clearing is selectable between immediately after the transition from PB (ASM) to REC and the
timing of DVCFG2 after the transition. Use bit 3 (CRD) of the reference period mode register
(RFM) for this selection.
In the capstan phase error detection circuit, either REF30 signal or CREF signal can be
selected for the reference signal. Use either of them according to the use of the system.
Use the CREF signal to control the phase of the capstan at a period which is different from the
period used to control the phase of the drum. For the switching between REF30 and CREF in
the capstan phase control, see the description of capstan phase error detection control register
(CPGCR) in section 26.9.4, Register Description.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 579 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
• Timing Chart of the CREF Signal Generation
Figures 26.13 to 26.15 show the generation of CREF signal.
Cleared Cleared Cleared
Value set in reference
period register 2 (CRF)
Counter
Toggle signal
CREF
Figure 26.13 Generation of CREF Signal
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 580 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Cleared Cleared Cleared
Value set in reference
period register 2 (CRF)
Counter
Period set in CRF
REC
PB(ASM)
Toggle signal
REC/PB
CREF
Figure 26.14 CREF Signal when PB Is Switched to REC (when CRD Bit = 0)
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 581 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Cleared Cleared Cleared
Value set in reference
period register 2 (CRF)
Counter
Period set in CRF
Toggle signal
REC/PB
CREF
DVCFG2
REC
PB(ASM)
Figure 26.15 CREF Signal when PB Is Switched to REC (when CRD Bit = 1)
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 582 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Figures 26.16 and 26.17 show REF30 (REF30P) when PB is switched to REC.
Cleared
Cleared
Cleared
Cleared Cleared
Value set in reference
period register 1 (RFD)
Selected VD*
(OD/EV = 0)
Note: * In the field discrimination mode
Counter mask
(Clear signal mask)
Counter
Value set in REF30
counter register (RFC)
REF30
VD (except in PB)
REC(ASM)PB
Toggle mask
Field signal
REC/PB
REF30P
About 75%
Masking
period
Masking
period
Figure 26.16 Generation of the Reference Signal when PB Is Switched to REC (1)
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 583 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Value set in reference
period register 1 (RFD)
Selected VD
(OD/EV = 0)
Counter mask
(Clear signal mask)
Counter
Value set in REF30
counter register (RFC)
REF30
VD (except in PB)
REC(ASM)PB
Toggle mask
Field signal
REC/PB
REF30P
About
50%
Cleared
Cleared
Cleared Cleared
Masking
period
Masking
period
Figure 26.17 Generation of the Reference Signal when PB Is Switched to REC (2)
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 584 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Figures 26.18 to 26.21 show REF30 (REF30P) when PB is switched to REC (where FDS bit = 1).
Cleared Cleared Cleared
Value set in reference
period register 1 (RFD)
FDS bit = 1
Counter mask
(Clear signal mask)
Counter
Value set in REF30
counter register (RFC)
REF30
VD (except in PB)
REC(ASM)PB
Toggle mask
REC/PB
REF30P
Masking
period
Masking
period
Figure 26.18 Generation of the Reference Signal when PB Is Switched to REC
where RFD Bit Is 1 (1)
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 585 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Value set in reference
period register 1 (RFD)
FDS bit = 1
Counter mask
(Clear signal mask)
Counter
Value set in REF30
counter register (RFC)
REF30
VD (except in PB)
REC(ASM)PB
Toggle mask
REC/PB
REF30P
Masking
period
Masking
period
25% 25% 25%
Figure 26.19 Generation of the Reference Signal when PB Is Switched to REC
where RFD Bit Is 1 (when VD Signal Is Not Detected) (2)
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 586 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Cleared Cleared
Value set in reference
period register 1 (RFD)
FDS bit = 1
Counter mask
(Clear signal mask)
Counter
Value set in REF30
counter register (RFC)
REF30
VD (except in PB)
REC(ASM)PB
Toggle mask
REC/PB
REF30P
Masking
period
Masking
period
25% max.
Figure 26.20 Generation of the Reference Signal when PB Is Switched to REC
where RFD Bit Is 1 (3)
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 587 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Cleared Cleared
Value set in reference
period register 1 (RFD)
FDS bit = 1
Counter mask
(Clear signal mask)
Counter
Value set in REF30
counter register (RFC)
REF30
VD (except in PB)
REC(ASM)PB
Toggle mask
REC/PB
REF30P
Masking
period
Masking
period
25% max.
Figure 26.21 Generation of the Reference Signal when PB Is Switched to REC
where RFD Bit Is 1 (4)
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 588 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
26.4 HSW (Head-switch) Timing Generator
26.4.1 Overview
The HSW timing generator consists of a 5-bit DFG counter, a 16-bit timer counter, a matching
circuit, and two 31-bit 10-stage FIFOs.
The 5-bit counter counts the DFG pulses following a DPG pulse. Each of them determines the
timing to reset the 16-bit timer counter for each field. The 16-bit timer counter is a timer clocked
by a φ s/4 clock source, and can be used as a programmable pattern generator (PPG) as well as a
free-running counter (FRC). If used as a free-running counter, it is cleared by overflow of the
prescaler unit. Accordingly, two FRCs operate synchronously. The matching circuit compares the
timing data in the most significant 16 bits of FIFO with the 16-bit timer counter, and controls the
output of the pattern data set in the least significant 15 bits of FIFO.
26.4.2 Block Diagram
Figure 26.22 shows a block diagram of the HSW timing generator.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 589 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
RW
W
R/WR/W
WR/WR/W
STRIG
IRRHSW2
ISEL2
AudioFF
VideoFF
HSW
NHSW
Mlevel
Vpulse
ADTRG
IRRHSW1
RVD PB
WR/W R/W
Cleared
Cleared
CLK
WR
↑, ↓
NCDFG
FRCOVF
DPG ↑
CKSL
VFF/NFF
Internal bus
W
FPDRA FPDRB
FTPRA FTPRB
W
ISEL1
OFG
FIFO output pattern
register 1
FIFO output pattern
register 2
SOFGLOP
R/WR/WRRW W
CLRA,BOVWA,BEMPA,BFLA,B
R/W R/W
HSM2HSM1
HSLP
EDG
HSW loop stage
number setting
register
Internal bus
FGR20FF
FRTCCLR
Edge
detector
Control
circuit
FIFO 1
(31 bits × 10 stages)
15 bits
P77 to 70
(PPG output)
FIFO timing pattern
register 1
FIFO timing pattern
register 2
16 bits
FIFO2
(31 bits × 10 stages)
15 bits16 bits
FIFO output selector & output buffer
15 bits16 bits
DFCRBDFCRA
DFCRA HSM2 HSM2
Capture
HSM2DFCRA DFCRA
DFG reference
register 1
Comparator
(5 bits) Comparator
(5 bits)
DFG reference
register 2
DFCTR
5-bit counter
Compare circuit (16 bits)
FTCTR (16 bits)
16-bit timer counter
φ s/4φ s/8
Figure 26.22 Block Diagram of the HSW Timing Generator
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 590 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
26.4.3 HSW Timing Generator Configuration
The HSW timing generator is composed of the elements shown in table 26.5.
Table 26.5 Configuration of the HSW Timing Generator
Element Function
HSW mode register 1 (HSM1) Confirmation/determination of this circuits' operating
status
HSW mode register 2 (HSM2) Confirmation/determination of this circuits' operating
status
HSW loop stage number setting register
(HSLP)
Setting of number of loop stages in loop mode
FIFO output pattern register 1 (FPDRA) Output pattern register of FIFO1
FIFO output pattern register 2 (FPDRB) Output pattern register of FIFO2
FIFO timing pattern register 1 (FTPRA) Output timing register of FIFO1
FIFO timing pattern register 2 (FTPRB) Output timing register of FIFO2
DFG reference register 1 (DFCRA) Setting of reference DFG edge for FIFO1
DFG reference register 2 (DFCRB) Setting of reference DFG edge for FIFO2
FIFO timer capture register (FTCTR) Capture register of timer counter
DFG reference count register (DFCTR) DFG edge count
FIFO control circuit FIFO status control
DFG count compare circuit (×2) Detection of match between DFCR and DFG counters
16-bit timer counter 16-bit free-run timer counter
31-bit x 20 stage FIFO First In First Out data buffer
31-bit FIFO data buffer Data storing buffer for the first stage of FIFO
16-bit compare circuit Detection of match between timer counter and FIFO
data buffer
FPDRA and FPDRB are intermediate buffers; an FTPRA and FTPRB write results in
simultaneous writing of all 31 bits to the FIFO. The FIFO has two 31-bit x 10-stage data buffers;
its operating status is controlled by HSM1 and HSM2. Data is stored in the 31-bit data buffer. The
values of FTPRA/FTPRB and the timer counter are compared, and if they match, the 15-bit
pattern data is output to each function. AudioFF, VideoFF, and PPG (P70 to P77) are outputs from
the corresponding pins, ADTRG is the A/D converter hardware start signal, Vpulse and Mlevel
signals are the signals for generating the additional V pulses, and HSW and NHSW signals are the
same as VideoFF signals used for the phase control of the drum. The 16-bit timer counter is
initialized by the overflow of the prescaler unit in the free-run mode (FRT bit of HSM2 = 1), or by
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 591 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
a signal indicating a match between DFCRA/DFCRB and the 5-bit DFG counter in DFG reference
mode.
26.4.4 Register Configuration
Table 26.6 shows the register configuration of the HSW timing generator.
Table 26.6 Register Configuration
Name Abbrev. R/W Size Initial Value Address
HSW mode register 1 HSM1 R/W Byte H'30 H'D060
HSW mode register 2 HSM2 R/W Byte H'00 H'D061
HSW loop stage number setting
register
HSLP R/W Byte Undetermined H'D062
FIFO output pattern register 1 FPDRA W Word Undetermined H'D064
FIFO timing pattern register 1* FTPRA W Word Undetermined H'D066
FIFO output pattern register 2 FPDRB W Word Undetermined H'D068
FIFO timing pattern register 2 FTPRB W Word H'FFFF H'D06A
DFG reference register 1* DFCRA W Byte Undetermined H'D06C
DFG reference register 2 DFCRB W Byte Undetermined H'D06D
FIFO timer capture register* FTCTR R Word H'0000 H'D066
DFG reference count register* DFCTR R Byte H'E0 H'D06C
Note: * FTPRA and FTCTR, as well as DFCRA and DFCTR, are allocated to the same
addresses.
26.4.5 Register Description
HSW Mode Register 1 (HSM1)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/(W)*
3
0
4
1
R
1
R
56
0
7
EMPA OVWB OVWA CLRB CLRA
0
R
FLB
R/WR/(W)*R
FLA EMPB
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Note: * Only 0 can be written
HSM1 is an 8-bit register which confirms and determines the operational state of the HSW timing
generator.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 592 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bits 7 to 4 are read-only bits, and write is disabled. All the other bits accept both read and write. It
is initialized to H'30 by a reset or in stand-by mode.
Bit 7⎯FIFO2 Full Flag (FLB): When the FLB bit is 1, it indicates that the FIFO2 is full of the
timing pattern data and the output pattern data. If a write is attempted in this state, the write
operation becomes invalid, an interrupt is generated, the OVWB flag (bit 3) is set to 1, and the
write data is lost. Wait until space becomes available in the FIFO2, then write again.
Bit 7
FLB Description
0 FIFO2 is not full, and can accept data input. (Initial value)
1 FIFO2 is full of data.
Bit 6⎯FIFO1 Full Flag (FLA): When the FLA bit is 1, it indicates that the FIFO1 is full of the
timing pattern data and the output pattern data. If a write is attempted in this state, the write
operation becomes invalid, an interrupt is generated, the OVWA flag (bit 2) is set to 1, and the
write data is lost. Wait until space becomes available in the FIFO1, then write again.
Bit 6
FLA Description
0 FIFO1 is not full, and can accept data input. (Initial value)
1 FIFO1 is full of data.
Bit 5⎯FIFO2 Empty Flag (EMPB): Indicates that FIFO2 has no data, or that all the data has
been output in single mode.
Bit 5
EMPB Description
0 FIFO2 contains data.
1 FIFO2 contains no data. (Initial value)
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 593 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 4⎯FIFO1 Empty Flag (EMPA): Indicates that FIFO1 has no data, or that all the data has
been output in single mode.
Bit 4
EMPA Description
0 FIFO1 contains data.
1 FIFO1 contains no data. (Initial value)
Bit 3⎯FIFO2 Overwrite Flag (OVWB): If a write is attempted when the FIFO2 is full of the
timing pattern data and the output pattern data (FLB bit = 1), the write operation becomes invalid,
an interrupt is generated, the OVWB flag is set to 1, and the write data is lost. Wait until space
becomes available in the FIFO2, then write again.
Write 0 to clear the OVWB flag, because it is not cleared automatically.
Bit 3
OVWB Description
0 Normal operation. (Initial value)
1 Indicates that a write in FIFO2 was attempted when FIFO2 was full of data. Clear this
flag by writing 0 to this bit.
Bit 2⎯FIFO1 Overwrite Flag (OVWA): If a write is attempted when the FIFO1 is full of the
timing pattern data and the output pattern data (FLA bit = 1), the write operation becomes invalid,
an interrupt is generated, the OVWA flag is set to 1, and the write data is lost. Wait until space
becomes available in the FIFO1, then write again.
Write 0 to clear the OVWA flag, because it is not cleared automatically.
Bit 2
OVWA Description
0 Normal operation. (Initial value)
1 Indicates that a write in FIFO1 was attempted when FIFO1 was full. Clear this flag by
writing 0 to this bit.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 594 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 1⎯FIFO2 Pointer Clear (CLRB): Clears the FIFO2 write position pointer. After 1 is
written, the bit immediately reverts to 0. Writing 0 in this bit has no effect.
Bit 1
CLRB Description
0 Normal operation. (Initial value)
1 Clears the FIFO2 pointer.
Bit 0⎯FIFO1 Pointer Clear (CLRA): Clears the FIFO1 write position pointer. After 1 is
written, the bit immediately reverts to 0. Writing 0 in this bit has no effect.
Bit 0
CLRA Description
0 Normal operation (Initial value)
1 Clears the FIFO1 pointer
HSW Mode Register 2 (HSM2)
0
0
1
0
R
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
56
0
7
EDG ISEL1 SOFG OFG VFF/NFF
0
R/W
FRT
WR/WR
FGR2OFF LOP
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
HSM2 is an 8-bit register which confirms and determines the operational state of the HSW timing
generator.
Bit 1 is a read-only bit, and write is disabled. Bit 0 is a write-only bit, and if a read is attempted, an
undetermined value is read out. All the other bits accept both read and write. It is initialized to
H'00 by a reset or in stand-by mode.
Bit 7⎯Free-run Bit (FRT): Selects whether the matching timing is determined by the DPG
counter and timer, or by the FRC.
Bit 7
FRT Description
0 5-bit DFG counter + 16-bit timer counter (Initial value)
1 16-bit FRC
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 595 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 6⎯FRG2 Clear Stop Bit (FGR2OFF): Disables clearing of the counter by the DFG register
2. The FIFO group, including both FIFO1 and FIFO2, is available.
Bit 6
FGR2OFF Description
0 Enables clearing of the16-bit timer counter by DFG register 2 (Initial value)
1 Disables clearing of the16-bit timer counter by DFG register 2
Bit 5⎯Mode Selection Bit (LOP): Selects the output mode of FIFO. If the loop mode is selected,
LOB3 to LOB0 bits and LOA3 to LOA0 bits become valid. If the LOP bit is modified, the pointer
which counts the writing position of FIFO is cleared. In this case, the last output data is kept.
Bit 5
LOP Description
0 Single mode (Initial value)
1 Loop mode
Bit 4⎯DFG Edge Selection Bit (EDG): Selects the edge by which to count DFG pulses.
Bit 4
EDG Description
0 Counts by the rising edge of DFG (Initial value)
1 Counts by the falling edge of DFG
Bit 3⎯Interrupt Selection Bit (ISEL1): Selects the interrupt source. (IRRHSW1)
Bit 3
ISEL1 Description
0 Generates an interrupt request by the rising edge of the STRIG signal of FIFO
(Initial value)
1 Generates an interrupt request by the matching signal of FIFO
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 596 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 2⎯FIFO Output Group Selection Bit (SOFG): Selects whether 20 stages of FIFO1 +
FIFO2 or only 10 stages of FIFO1 are used.
If 20-stage output mode is used in single mode, data must be written to FIFO1 and FIFO2.
Monitor the output FIFO group flag (OFG) and control data writing by software. All the data of
FIFO1 is output, then all the data of FIFO2 is output. These steps are repeated. If 10-stage output
mode is used, the data of FIFO2 is not reflected.
Modifying the SOFG bit from 0 to 1, then again to 0 initializes the control signal of the FIFO
output stage to the FIFO1 side.
Bit 2
SOFG Description
0 20-stage output of FIFO1 + FIFO2 (Initial value)
1 10-stage output of FIFO1 only
Bit 1⎯Output FIFO Group Flag (OFG): Indicates the FIFO group which is outputting.
Bit 1
OFG Description
0 Pattern is being output by FIFO1 (Initial value)
1 Pattern is being output by FIFO2
Bit 0⎯Output Switching Bit between VideoFF and NarrowFF (VFF/NFF): Switches the
signal output from the VideoFF pin.
Bit 0
VFF/NFF Description
0 VideoFF output (Initial value)
1 NarrowFF output
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 597 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
HSW Loop Stage Number Setting Register (HSLP)
0
*
1
*
R/W
2
*
R/W
3
*
4
*
R/W
5
*
6
*
7
R/W R/WR/W
LOB1
R/W
LOB2
*
R/W
LOB3 LOB0 LOA3 LOA2 LOA1 LOA0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
HSLP is an 8-bit read/write register that sets the number of the loop stages when the HSW timing
generator is in loop mode. It is valid when bit 5 (LOP) of HSM2 is 1. Bits 7 to 4 set the number of
FIFO2 stages. Bits 3 to 0 set the number of FIFO1 stages.
It is not initialized by a reset or in stand-by or module stop mode; accordingly be sure to set the
number of the stages when the loop mode is used.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 598 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bits 7 to 4⎯FIFO2 Stage Number Setting Bits (LOB3 to LOB0): Set the number of FIFO2
stages in loop mode. They are valid only when the loop mode is set (LOP bit of HSM2 is 1).
HSM2 HSLP
Bit 5 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4
LOP LOB3 LOB2 LOB1 LOB0 Description
0 * * * * Single mode (Initial value)
0 Only 0th stage of FIFO2 is output 0
1 0th and 1st stages of FIFO2 are output
0 0th to 2nd stages of FIFO2 are output
0
1
1 0th to 3rd stages of FIFO2 are output
0 0th to 4th stages of FIFO2 are output 0
1 0th to 5th stages of FIFO2 are output
0 0th to 6th stages of FIFO2 are output
0
1
1
1 0th to 7th stages of FIFO2 are output
0 0th to 8th stages of FIFO2 are output
1
1 0 0
1 0th to 9th stages of FIFO2 are output
0 1
1
0 0
1
0
1
1
1
Setting prohibited
Legend: * Don't care.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 599 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bits 3 to 0⎯FIFO1 Stage Number Setting Bits (LOA3 to LOA0): Set the number of FIFO1
stages in loop mode. They are valid only when the loop mode is set (LOP bit of HSM2 is 1).
HSM2 HSLP
Bit 5 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
LOP LOA3 LOA2 LOA1 LOA0 Description
0 * * * * Single mode (Initial value)
0 Only 0th stage of FIFO1 is output 0
1 0th and 1st stages of FIFO1 are output
0 0th to 2nd stages of FIFO1 are output
0
1
1 0th to 3rd stages of FIFO1 are output
0 0th to 4th stages of FIFO1 are output 0
1 0th to 5th stages of FIFO1 are output
0 0th to 6th stages of FIFO1 are output
0
1
1
1 0th to 7th stages of FIFO1 are output
0 0th to 8th stages of FIFO1 are output
1
1 0 0
1 0th to 9th stages of FIFO1 are output
0 1
1
0 0
1
0
1
1
1
Setting prohibited
Legend: * Don’t care.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 600 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
FIFO Output Pattern Register 1 (FPDRA)
8
*
9
*
W
10
*
W
11
*
12
*
W
*
W
1314
*
15
—
—
NarrowFFA
VFFA AFFA VpulseA MlevelA
1
WWW
ADTRGA STRIGA
0
*
1
*
W
2
*
W
3
*
4
*
W
*
W
56
*
7
PPGA4 PPGA3 PPGA2 PPGA1 PPGA0
*
W
PPGA7
WWW
PPGA6 PPGA5
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Note : * Undefined
FPDRA is a buffer register for the FIFO1 output pattern register. The output pattern data written in
FPDRA is written at the same time to the position of the FIFO1 pointed by the buffer pointer. Be
sure to write the output pattern data in FPDRA before writing it in FTPRA.
FPDRA is an 16-bit write-only register. Only a word access is valid. If a byte access is attempted,
correct operation is not guaranteed. No read is valid. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value
is read out. It is not initialized by a reset, or in stand-by or module stop mode; accordingly be sure
to write data before use.
Bit 15⎯Reserved: Cannot be read or modified.
Bit 14⎯A/D Trigger A Bit (ADTRGA): Indicates a hardware trigger signal for the A/D
converter.
Bit 13⎯S-TRIGA Bit (STRIGA): Indicates a signal that generates an interrupt. When the
STRIGB is selected by the ISEL, modifying this bit from 0 to 1 generates an interrupt.
Bit 12⎯NarrowFFA Bit (NarrowFFA): Controls the narrow video head.
Bit 11⎯VideoFFA Bit (VFFA): Controls the video head.
Bit 10⎯AudioFFA Bit (AFFA): Controls the audio head.
Bit 9⎯VpulseA Bit (VpulseA): Used for generating an additional V signal. For details, refer to
section 26.12, Additional V Signal Generator.
Bit 8⎯MlevelA Bit (MlevelA): Used for generating an additional V signal. For details, refer to
section 26.12, Additional V Signal Generator.
Bits 7 to 0⎯PPG Output Signal A Bits (PPGA7 to PPGA0): Used for outputting a timing
control signal from port 7 (PPG).
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 601 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
FIFO Output Pattern Register 2 (FPDRB)
8
*
9
*
W
10
*
W
11
*
12
*
W
*
W
1314
*
15
—
—
NarrowFFB
VFFB AFFB VpulseB MlevelB
1
WWW
ADTRGB STRIGB
0
*
1
*
W
2
*
W
3
*
4
*
W
*
W
56
*
7
PPGB4 PPGB3 PPGB2 PPGB1 PPGB0
*
W
PPGB7
WWW
PPGB6 PPGB5
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Note : * Undefined
FPDRB is a buffer register for the FIFO2 output pattern register. The output pattern data written in
FPDRB is written at the same time to the position of the FIFO2 pointed by the buffer pointer. Be
sure to write the output pattern data in FPDRB before writing it in FTPRB.
FPDRB is an 16-bit write-only register. Only a word access is valid. If a byte access is attempted,
correct operation is not guaranteed. No read is valid. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value
is read out. It is not initialized by a reset, or in stand-by or module stop mode; accordingly be sure
to write data before use.
Bit 15⎯Reserved: Cannot be read or modified.
Bit 14⎯A/D Trigger B Bit (ADTRGB): Indicates a hardware trigger signal for the A/D
converter.
Bit 13⎯S-TRIGB Bit (STRIGB): Indicates a signal that generates an interrupt. When the
STRIGB is selected by the ISEL, modifying this bit from 0 to 1 generates an interrupt.
Bit 12⎯NarrowFFB Bit (NarrowFFB): Controls the narrow video head.
Bit 11⎯VideoFFB Bit (VFFB): Controls the video head.
Bit 10⎯AudioFFB Bit (AFFB): Controls the audio head.
Bit 9⎯VpulseB Bit (VpulseB): Used for generating an additional V signal. For details, refer to
section 26.12, Additional V Signal Generator.
Bit 8⎯MlevelB Bit (MlevelB): Used for generating an additional V signal. For details, refer to
section 26.12, Additional V Signal Generator.
Bits 7 to 0⎯PPG Output Signal B Bits (PPGB7 to PPGB0): Used for outputting a timing
control signal from port 7 (PPG).
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 602 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
FIFO Timing Pattern Register 1 (FTPRA)
0
*
1
*
W
2
*
W
3
*
4
*
W
*
W
56
*
7
FTPRA4 FTPRA3 FTPRA2 FTPRA1 FTPRA0
*
W
FTPRA7
WWW
FTPRA6 FTPRA5
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
8
*
9
*
W
10
*
W
11
*
12
*
W
*
W
1314
*
15
FTPRA12 FTPRA11 FTPRA10 FTPRA9 FTPRA8
*
W
FTPRA15
WWW
FTPRA14 FTPRA13
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Note : * Undefined
FTPRA is a register to write the timing pattern data of FIFO1. The timing data written in FPDRA
is written at the same time to the position of the FIFO1 pointed by the buffer pointer together with
the buffer data of FPDRA.
FTPRA is an 16-bit write-only register. Only a word access is valid. If a byte access is attempted,
correct operation is not guaranteed. It is not initialized by a reset or in stand-by or module stop
mode; accordingly be sure to write data before use.
Note: The same address is assigned to the FTPRA and the FIFO timer capture register (FTCTR).
Accordingly, the value of FTCTR is read out if a read is attempted.
FIFO Timing Pattern Register 2 (FTPRB)
8
*
9
*
W
10
*
W
11
*
12
*
W
*
W
1314
*
15
FTPRB12 FTPRB11 FTPRB10 FTPRB9 FTPRB8
*
W
FTPRB15
WWW
FTPRB14 FTPRB13
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
0
*
1
*
W
2
*
W
3
*
4
*
W
*
W
56
*
7
FTPRB4 FTPRB3 FTPRB2 FTPRB1 FTPRB0
*
W
FTPRB7
WWW
FTPRB6 FTPRB5
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Note : * Undefined
FTPRB is a register to write the timing pattern data of FIFO2. The timing data written in FPDRB
is written at the same time to the position of the FIFO2 pointed by the buffer pointer together with
the buffer data of FPDRB.
FTPRB is an 16-bit write-only register. Only a word access is valid. If a byte access is attempted,
correct operation is not guaranteed. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. It is
not initialized by a reset or in stand-by or module stop mode; accordingly be sure to write data
before use.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 603 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
DFG Reference Register 1 (DFCRA)
0
*
1
*
W
2
*
W
3
*
4
*
W
0
W
56
0
7
DFCRA4 DFCRA3 DFCRA2 DFCRA1 DFCRA0
0
W
ISEL2
WWW
CCLR CKSL
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Note : * Undefined
DFCRA is a register which determines the operation of the HSW timing generator as well as the
starting point of the timing of FIFO1.
DFCRA is an 8-bit write-only register. It is not initialized by a reset or in stand-by or module stop
mode; accordingly be sure to write data before use.
Note: The same address is assigned to the DFCRA and the DFG reference counter register
(DFCTR). Accordingly, the value of DFCTR is read out in the low-order five bits if a read
is attempted.
Bit 7⎯Interrupt Selection Bit (ISEL2): Selects the interrupt source. (IRRHSW2)
Bit 7
ISEL2 Description
0 Generates an interrupt request by the clear signal of the 16-bit timer counter
(Initial value)
1 Generates an interrupt request by the VD signal in PB mode
Bit 6⎯DFG Counter Clear Bit (CCLR): Forcibly clears the 5-bit DFG counter by software.
After 1 is written, the bit immediately reverts to 0. Writing 0 in this bit has no effect.
Bit 6
CCLR Description
0 Normal operation (Initial value)
1 Clears the 5-bit DFG counter
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 604 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 5⎯16-bit Timer Counter Clock Source Selection Bit (CKSL): Selects the clock source of
the 16-bit timer counter.
Bit 5
CKSL Description
0 φs/4 (Initial value)
1 φs/8
Bits 4 to 0⎯FIFO1 Output Timing Setting Bits (DFCRA4 to DFCRA0): Determines the
starting point of the timing of FIFO1. The initial value is undetermined. Be sure to set a value after
a reset or stand-by. It is valid only if bit 7 (FRT bit) of HSM2 is 0.
DFG Reference Register 2 (DFCRB)
0
*
1
*
W
2
*
W
3
*
4
*
W
56
1
7
⎯⎯⎯
⎯⎯⎯
DFCRB4 DFCRB3 DFCRB2 DFCRB1 DFCRB0
WW
11
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Note : * Undefined
DFCRB is a register which determines the starting point of the timing of FIFO2.
DFCRB is an 8-bit write-only register. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out.
Bits 7 to 5 are reserved; they cannot be modified and are always read as 1. It is not initialized by a
reset or in stand-by or module stop mode; accordingly be sure to write data before use.
Bits 4 to 0⎯FIFO2 Output Timing Setting Bits (DFCRB4 to DFCRB0): Sets the starting point
of the timing of FIFO2. The value after reset or after stand-by mode is entered is undetermined; be
sure to write data before use.
It is valid only if bit 7 (FRT bit) of HSM2 is 0.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 605 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
FIFO Timer Capture Register (FTCTR)
8
0
9
0
R
10
0
R
11
0
12
0
R
0
R
1314
0
15
FTCTR12 FTCTR11 FTCTR10 FTCTR9 FTCTR8
0
R
FTCTR15
RRR
FTCTR14 FTCTR13
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
0
0
1
0
R
2
0
R
3
0
4
0
R
0
R
56
0
7
FTCTR4 FTCTR3 FTCTR2 FTCTR1 FTCTR0
0
R
FTCTR7
RRR
FTCTR6 FTCTR5
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
FTCRT is a register to display the count of the 16-bit timer counter.
FTCRT is an 16-bit read-only register. It captures the counter value when the VD signal is
detected in PB mode. Only a word access is accepted. If a byte access is attempted, correct
operation is not guaranteed. It is initialized to H'0000 by a reset or in stand-by mode.
Note: The same address is assigned to the FTCTR and the FIFO timing pattern register 1
(FTPRA). Accordingly, if a write is attempted, the value is written in FTPRA.
DFG Reference Count Register (DFCTR)
0
0
1
0
R
2
0
R
3
0
4
0
R
56
1
7
⎯⎯⎯
⎯⎯⎯
DFCTR4 DFCTR3 DFCTR2 DFCTR1 DFCTR0
RR
11
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
DFCTR is a register to count DFG pulses.
DFCTR is an 8-bit read-only register. Bits 7 to 5 are reserved; they cannot be modified and are
always read as 1. It is initialized to H'E0 by a reset or in stand-by mode.
Note: The same address is assigned to the DFCTR and the DFG reference register 1 (DFCRA).
Accordingly, if a write is attempted, the value is written in DFCRA.
Bits 4 to 0—DFG Pulse Count Bits (DFCTR4 to DFCTR0): These bits count DFG pulses.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 606 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
26.4.6 Operation
5-Bit DFG Counter: The 5-bit DFG counter increments the count at the DFG edges selected by
the EDG bit of HSW Mode Register 2. The DFG counter is cleared by a DPG rising edge, or by
writing to the CCLR bit of the DFG reference register 1.
16-Bit Timer Counter: The 16-bit timer counter can operate in DFG reference mode or in free-
running mode.
• DFG Reference Mode
The timer counter operates by referencing the DFG signal. When the 5-bit DFG counter value
matches the value specified in the DFG reference register 1 or 2, the 16-bit timer counter is
initialized; this is the start point of the FIFO output timing.
In DFG reference mode, the start point specifying method can be selected by the FGR2OFF bit
of the HSW mode register 2: one way is to specify both FIFO1 and FIFO2 by only one register
(DFG reference register 1), and the other is to specify FIFO1 and FIFO2 by DFG reference
registers 1 and 2, respectively. When only the DFG reference register 1 is used, the continuous
values must be set to FIFO1 and FIFO2 as the timing patters.
• Free-Running Mode
The timer counter operates in association with the prescaler unit. When the 18-bit free-running
counter in the prescaler unit overflows, the 16-bit timer counter in the HSW timing generator is
initialized; this is the start point of the FIFO output timing.
Compare Circuit: The compare circuit compares the 16-bit timer counter value with the FIFO
timing pattern, and when they match, the compare circuit generates a trigger signal for outputting
the next-stage FIFO data.
FIFO: The FIFO generates a head switch signal for VCR and patterns for servo control. Data is
set to FIFO by using the FIFO timing pattern registers 1 and 2, and FIFO output pattern registers 1
and 2.
The FIFO operates in single mode and loop mode. In these two modes, the number of output
stages can be selected by the FIFO output group selection bit: 20-stage output using both FIFO1
and FIFO2 or 10-stage output using only FIFO1.
• Single Mode
The output pattern data is output when the timing pattern matches the counter value. The data,
once output, is lost, and the internal pointer is decrementd by 1. After the last data is output,
the FIFO stops operation until data is written again. When 20-stage output is used, writing in
FIFO1 and FIFO2 must be controlled by software.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 607 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
• Loop Mode
The data output cycle is repeated from stage 0 to the final stage selected in the HSW loop
number setting register. As in single mode, the output pattern data is output when the timing
pattern matches the counter value. In loop mode, the FIFO data is retained.
Data in each FIFO group can be modified in loop mode. The FIFO group currently outputting
data can be checked by the OFG bit of the HSW mode register 2; after checking the outputting
FIFO group, clear the FIFO group which is not outputting data, then write new data to it.
Writing new data must be completed before the FIFO group starts operation. The FIFO cannot
be modified partially because the write pointer is outside the loop stages.
Figures 26.23 and 26.24 show examples of the timing waveform and operation of the HSW timing
generator.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 608 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
DPG
01
tA1
tA2 tB1
tA3 tA1
234567891011 012
V.FF
A.FF
Clear A
Clear B
Example of setting: DFCRA = H'02, DFCRB = H'08, HSLP = H'21, DFG falling edge
DFG
Figure 26.23 Example of Timing Waveform of HSW (for 12 DFG Pulses)
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 609 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Output pattern data
φ
s/4
W
W
FTPRB
FIFO2
tB0 PB9
tB5 PB4
tB4 PB3
tB3 PB2
tB2 PB1
tB1 PB0
W
W
FPDRA
Output select buffer Output data buffer
Comparator
FTPRA
FIFO1
tA0 PA9
tA5 PA4
tA4 PA3
tA3 PA2
tA2 PA1
tA1 PA0
Internal bus
FPDRB
Timer counter
Figure 26.24 Example of Operation of the HSW Timing Generator
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 610 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
• Example of operation in single mode (20 stages of FIFO used)
1. Set to single mode (LOP = 0)
2. Write the output pattern data (PA0) to FPDRA.
3. Write the output timing (tA1) to FTPRA. tA1 is written in FIFO1 together with PA0. This
initializes the output pattern data to PA0.
4. Repeat the steps in the same way, until PA1, PA2, etc., are set.
5. Write the output pattern data (PB0) to FPDRB.
6. Write the output timing (tB1) to FTPRB. tB1 is written in FIFO2 together with PB0. This
initializes the output pattern data to PB0.
7. Repeat these steps in the same way, until PB1, PB2, etc., are set.
By step 3, the pattern data of PA0 is output.
If tA1 matches with the timer counter, the pattern data of PA1 is output.
If tA2 matches with the timer counter, the pattern data of PA2 is output.
.
.
.
After this sequence is repeated and all the pattern data set in FIFO1 is output, the pattern data of
FIFO2 is output. After the pattern data is output, the pointer is decremented by 1. Care is required,
however, because matching of tA0 is not detected until data is written in FIFO2. Matching of tB0
also is not detected until data is written in FIFO1 again.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 611 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
• Example of the operation in loop mode mode
1. Set the number of loop stages in HSLP register (e.g. HSLP = H'44)
2. Write the output pattern data (PA0) to FPDRA.
3. Write the output timing (tA1) to FTPRA. tA1 is written in FIFO1 together with PA0. This
initializes the output pattern data to PA0.
4. Repeat the steps in the same way, until PA1, PA2, etc., are set.
5. Write the output pattern data (PB0) to FPDRB.
6. Write the output timing (tB1) to FTPRB. tB1 is written in FIFO2 together with PB0. This
initializes the output pattern data to PB0.
7. Repeat the steps in the same way, until PB1, PB2, etc., are set.
By step 3, the pattern data PA0 is output.
If tA1 matches the timer counter, the pattern data PA1 is output.
If tA2 matches the timer counter, the pattern data PA2 is output.
.
.
.
If tA4 matches the timer counter, the pattern data PA4 is output.
If tA5 matches the timer counter, the pattern data PB0 is output.
If tB1 matches the timer counter, the pattern data PB1 is output.
.
.
.
If tB4 matches the timer counter, the pattern data PB4 is output.
If tB5 matches the timer counter, the pattern data PA0 is output.
.
.
.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 612 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
26.4.7 Interrupts
The HSW timing generator generates interrupts under the following conditions.
1. IRRHSW1 occurs when pattern data is written (OVWA, OVWB = 1) while FIFO is full
(FULL).
2. IRRHSW1 occurs when matching is detected while the STRIG bit of FIFO is 1.
3. IRRHSW1 occurs when the values of the 16-bit timer counter and 16-bit timing pattern
register match.
4. IRRHSW2 occurs when the 16-bit timer counter is cleared.
5. IRRHSW2 occurs when a VD signal (capture signal of the timer capture register) is received in
PB mode.
Condition 2 or 3, as well as 4 or 5, are selected by ISEL1 and ISEL2.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 613 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
26.4.8 Cautions
• When both the 5-bit DFG counter and 16-bit timer counter are operating, the latter is not
cleared if input of DPG and DFG signals is stopped. This leads to free-running of the 16-bit
timer counter, and periodical detection of matching by the 16-bit timer counter. In such a case,
the period of the output from the HSW timing generator is independent from DPG or DFG.
• Specify the mode setting bit (LOP) of the HSW mode register 2 (HSM2) immediately before
writing the FIFO data.
• Input the rising edge of DPG and DFG count edge at different timings. If they are input at the
same timing, counting up DFG and clearing the 5-bit DFG counter occur simultaneously. In
this case, the latter will take precedence. This leads to the DFG counter lag by 1. Figure 26.25
shows the input timing of DPG and DFG.
• If stop of the drum system is required when FIFO output is being used in the 20-stage output
mode, modify the SOFG bit of HSM2 register from 0 to 1, then again to 0 by software, and be
sure to initialize the FIFO output stage to the FIFO1 side. Also clear and rewrite the data of
FIFO1 and FIFO2.
DPG
I ±Tp · FG | > φ
(1 state)
Tp · FG
DFG
Note: When the 5-bit DFG counter increments count at the rising edge of DFG
Figure 26.25 Input Timing of DPG and DFG
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 614 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
26.5 High-Speed Switching Circuit for Four-Head Special Playback
26.5.1 Overview
This high-speed switching circuit generates a color rotary signal (C.Rotary) and head-amplifier
switching signal (H.Amp SW) for use in four-head special playback.
A pre-amplifier output comparison result signal is input from the COMP pin. The signal output to
the C.Rotary pin is a chroma signal processing control signal. The signal output at the H.Amp SW
pin is a pre-amplifier output select signal. To reduce the width of noise bars, the C.Rotary and
H.Amp SW signals are synchronized to the horizontal sync signal (OSCH). OSCH is made by
adding supplemented H, which has been separated from Csync signal in the sync signal detector
circuit. For more details of OSCH, see section 26.15, Sync Signal Detector.
If the VCR system does not require this circuit, C.Rotary, H.Amp SW, and COMP pins can be
used as the I/O port.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 615 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
26.5.2 Block Diagram
Figure 26.26 shows the block diagram of this circuit.
WW
Synchronization
control
CHCR
W
CHCR
RTP0
H.Amp SW
C.Rotary
OSCH
(Synchronization)
COMP
NarrowFF
VideoFF
W
CHCR
Internal bus
Internal bus
HAHCRH
W
CHCR
SIG3 to 0
HSWPOLV/N
Decoding circuit
Figure 26.26 High-Speed Switching Circuit for Four-Head Special Playback
26.5.3 Pin Configuration
Table 26.7 summarizes the pin configuration of the high-speed switching circuit for four-head
special playback. If this circuit is not used, the pins can be used as I/O port. See section 26.2,
Servo Port.
Table 26.7 Pin Configuration
Namea Abbrev. I/O Function
Compare input pin COMP Input Input of pre-amplifier output result signal
Color rotary signal output pin C.Rotary Output Output of chroma processing control signal
Head amplifier switch pin H.Amp SW Output Output of pre-amplifier output select signal
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 616 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
26.5.4 Register Description
Register Configuration
Table 26.8 shows the register configuration of the high-speed switching circuit for four-head
special playback.
Table 26.8 Register Configuration
Name Abbrev. R/W Size Initial Value Address
Special playback control register CHCR W Byte H'00 H'D06E
Special Playback Control Register (CHCR)
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
56
0
7
HAH SIG3 SIG2 SIG1 SIG0
0
W
V/N
WWW
HSWPOL CRH
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
CHCR is an 8-bit write-only register. It cannot be read. It is initialized to H'00 by a reset, or in
standby or module stop mode.
Bits 7⎯HSW Signal Select Bit (V/N): Selects the HSW signal to be used at special playback.
Bit 7
V/N Description
0 Video FF signal output (Initial value)
1 Narrow FF signal output
Bit 6⎯COMP Polarity Select Bit (HSWPOL): Selects the polarity of the COMP signal.
Bit 6
HSWPOL Description
0 Positive (Initial value)
1 Negative
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 617 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 5⎯C.Rotary Synchronization Control Bit (CRH): Synchronizes C.Rotary signal with the
OSCH signal.
Bit 5
CRH Description
0 Synchronous (Initial value)
1 Asynchronous
Bit 4⎯H.AmpSW Synchronization Control Bit (HAH): Synchronizes H.AmpSW signal with
the OSCH signal.
Bit 4
HAH Description
0 Synchronous (Initial value)
1 Asynchronous
Bits 3 to 0⎯Signal Control (SIG3 to SIG0): These bits, combined with the state of the COMP
input pin, control the outputs at the C.Rotary and H.AmpSW pins.
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Output pins
SIG3 SIG2 SIG1 SIG0 C.Rotary H.Amp SW
0 * * L L (Initial value)
0 HSW L 0
1 HSW H
0 L HSW
0
1
1
1 H HSW
0 HSW EX-OR COMP COMP 0
1 HSW EX-NOR
COMP
COMP
0 HSW E-OR RTP0 RTP0
1
1
1
*
HSW EX-NOR RTP0 RTP0
Legend: * Don’t care.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 618 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
26.6 Drum Speed Error Detector
26.6.1 Overview
Drum speed error control holds the drum at a constant revolution speed, by measuring the period
of the DFG signal. A digital counter detects the speed error against a preset value. The speed error
data is processed and added to phase error data in a digital filter. This filter controls a pulse-width
modulated (PWM) output, which controls the revolution speed and phase of the drum.
The DFG input signal is reshaped into a square wave by a reshaping circuit, and sent to the speed
error detector as the DFG signal.
The speed error detector uses the system clock to measure the period of the DFG signal, and
detects the error against a preset data value. The preset data is the value that results from
measuring the DFG signal period with the clock signal when the drum motor is running at the
correct speed.
The error detector operates by latching a counter value when it detects an edge of the DFG signal.
The latched count provides 16 bits of speed error data for the digital filter to operate on. The
digital filter processes and adds the speed error data to phase error data from the drum phase
control system, then sends the result to the PWM as drum error data.
26.6.2 Block Diagram
Figure 26.27 shows a block diagram of the drum speed error detector.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 619 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
WW R
UDF
OVF
Lock 2 up
Clear
Latch
Preset
DFVCR
DFRLOR
DFVCRDFPRDFVCR
DFVCRDFVCRDFUCRFGCR
DFER
DFRVCR
Error data
(16 bits)
To DFU
ADDFGN
NCDFG
DFRUDR
Internal bus
W R/W
Internal bus
R/W WR/WR/W
R/W R/W (R)/W
Lock 1 up
S
R
F/F
Q
S
R
F/F
DFRCS1,0
DF-R/UNR
Lock counter
(2 bits)
Q
S
R
F/F
Q
Lock range
detector
Lock range data 1 (16 bits)
DPCNT
Error data
limiter
control circuit
DFEFON
DFESS
DRF
Edge
detector
↑, ↓
Error data (16 bits)
Counter (16 bits)
DFOVF
IRRDRM2
IRRDRM1
To DROCKON
DFU
Preset data
(16 bits)
Lock range data 2
(16 bits)
DFCS1,0
φs
φs/2
φs/4
φs/8
Figure 26.27 Block Diagram of the Drum Speed Error Detector
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 620 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
26.6.3 Register Configuration
Table 26.9 shows the register configuration of the drum speed error detector.
Table 26.9 Register Configuration
Name Abbrev. R/W Size Initial Value Address
Specified DFG speed
preset data register
DFPR W Word H'0000 H'D030
DFG speed error data
register
DFER R/W Word H'0000 H'D032
DFG lock upper data
register
DFRUDR W Word H'7FFF H'D034
DFG lock lower data
register
DFRLDR W Word H'8000 H'D036
Drum speed error
detection control register
DFVCR R/W Byte H'00 H'D038
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 621 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
26.6.4 Register Description
Specified DFG Speed Preset Data Register (DFPR)
8
0
9
0
W
10
0
W
11
0
12
0
W
0
W
1314
0
15
DFPR12 DFPR11 DFPR10 DFPR9 DFPR8
0
W
DFPR15
WWW
DFPR14 DFPR13
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
56
0
7
DFPR4 DFPR3 DFPR2 DFPR1 DFPR0
0
W
DFPR7
WWW
DFPR6 DFPR5
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The DFG speed preset data is set in DFPR. When data is written, the 16-bit preset data is sent to
the preset circuit. The preset data can be calculated from the following equation by using H'8000*
as the reference value.
φ s/n
Specified DFG speed preset data = H'8000 −( − 2)
DFG frequency
φ s: Servo clock frequency (fosc/2) in Hz
DFG frequency: In Hz
Constant 2 is the presetting interval (see figure 26.28).
φ s/n Clock source of the selected counter
DFPR is a 16-bit write-only register. Only a word access is valid. If a byte access is attempted,
correct operation is not guaranteed. DFPR cannot be read. If a read is attempted, an undetermined
value is read. DFPR is initialized to H'0000 by a reset, and in standby mode and module stop
mode.
Note: * The preset data value is calculated so that the counter will reach H'8000 when the error
is zero. When the counter value is latched as error data in the DFG speed error data
register (DFER), however, it is converted to a value referenced to H'0000.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 622 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
DFG Speed Error Data Register (DFER)
8
0
9
0
R*/W
10
0
R*/W
11
0
12
0
R*/W
0
R*/W
1314
0
15
DFER12 DFER11 DFER10 DFER9 DFER8
0
R*/W
DFER15
R*/WR*/WR*/W
DFER14 DFER13
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Note: * Note that only detected error data can be read.
0
0
1
0
R*/W
2
0
R*/W
3
0
4
0
R*/W
0
R*/W
56
0
7
DFER4 DFER3 DFER2 DFER1 DFER0
0
R*/W
DFER7
R*/WR*/WR*/W
DFER6 DFER5
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
DFER is a 16-bit read/write register that stores 16-bit DFG speed error data. When the drum motor
speed is correct, the data latched in DFER is H'0000. Negative data will be latched if the speed is
faster than the specified speed, and positive data if the speed is slower than the specified speed.
The DFER value is sent to the digital filter either automatically or by software.
Only a word access is valid. If a byte access is attempted, correct operation is not guaranteed.
DFER is initialized to H'0000 by a reset, and in standby mode and module stop mode.
Refer to the note Specified DFG Speed Preset Data Register (DFPR) in section 26.6.4, Register
Description.
DFG Lock Upper Data Register (DFRUDR)
8
1
9
1
W
10
1
W
11
1
12
1
W
1
W
1314
1
15
DFRUDR
12
DFRUDR
11
DFRUDR
10
DFRUDR
9
DFRUDR
8
0
W
DFRUDR
15
WWW
DFRUDR
14
DFRUDR
13
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
0
1
1
1
W
2
1
W
3
1
4
1
W
1
W
56
1
7
DFRUDR
4
DFRUDR
3
DFRUDR
2
DFRUDR
1
DFRUDR
0
1
W
DFRUDR
7
WWW
DFRUDR
6
DFRUDR
5
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
DFRUDR is a 16-bit write-only register used to set the lock range on the UPPER side when drum
speed lock is detected, and to set the limit value on the UPPER side when limiter function is in
use. Set a signed data to DFRUDR (bit 15 is a sign-setting bit).
When lock is being detected, if the drum speed is detected within the lock range, the lock counter
which has been set by DFRCS 1 and 0 bits of DFVCR register decrements the count. If the set
value of DFRCS 1 and 0 matches the number of times of occurrence of locking, the computation
of the digital filter in the drum phase system can be controlled automatically. Also, if the DFG
speed error data exceeds the DFRUDR value within the limiter function is in use, the DFRUDR
value can be used as the data for computation by the digital filter.
Only a word access is valid. If a byte access is attempted, correct operation is not guaranteed. No
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 623 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
read is valid. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. It is initialized to H'7FFF
by a reset, or in stand-by or module-stop mode.
DFG Lock LOWER Data Register (DFRLDR)
8
0
9
0
W
10
0
W
11
0
12
0
W
0
W
1314
0
15
DFRLDR
12
DFRLDR
11
DFRLDR
10
DFRLDR
9
DFRLDR
8
1
W
DFRLDR
15
WWW
DFRLDR
14
DFRLDR
13
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
56
0
7
DFRLDR
4
DFRLDR
3
DFRLDR
2
DFRLDR
1
DFRLDR
0
0
W
DFRLDR
7
WWW
DFRLDR
6
DFRLDR
5
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
DFRLDR is a 16-bit write-only register used to set the lock range on the LOWER side when drum
speed lock is detected, and to set the limit value on LOWER side when limiter function is in use.
Set a signed data to DFRLDR (bit 15 is a sign-setting bit).
When lock is being detected, if the drum speed is detected within the lock range, the lock counter
which has been set by DFRCS 1 and 0 bits of DFVCR register decrements the count. If the set
value of DFRCS 1 and 0 matches the number of times of occurrence of locking, the computation
of the digital filter in the drum phase system can be controlled automatically. Also, if the DFG
speed error data is under the DFRLDR value when the limiter function is in use, the DFRLDR
value can be used as the data for computation by the digital filter.
Only a word access is valid. If a byte access is attempted, correct operation is not guaranteed. No
read is valid. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. It is initialized to H'8000 by
a reset, or in stand-by or module-stop mode.
Drum Speed Error Detection Control Register (DFVCR)
0
0
1
0
(R)*
2
/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/(W)*
1
56
0
7
DFRFON
DF-R/UNR
DPCNT DFRCS1 DFRCS0
0
R/W
DFCS1
(R)*
2
/WRR/W
DFCS0 DFOVF
Notes:
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
1. Only 0 can be written.
2. If read-accessed, the counter value is read out.
DFVCR is an 8-bit read/write register that controls the operation of drum speed error detection.
Bit 3 accepts only read, and bit 5 accepts only read and 0 write. It is initialized to H'00 by a reset,
or in stand-by or module-stop mode.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 624 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bits 7 and 6⎯Clock Source Selection Bits (DFCS1, DFCS0): DFCS1 and DFCS0 select the
clock to be supplied to the counter. (φs = fosc/2)
Bit 7 Bit 6
DFCS1 DFCS0 Description
0 φs (Initial value) 0
1 φs/2
1 0 φs/4
1 φs/8
Bit 5⎯Counter Overflow Flag (DFOVF): DFOVF flag indicates the overflow of the 16-bit
timer counter. It is cleared by writing 0. Write 0 after reading 1. Setting has the highest priority in
this flag. If a flag set and 0 write occurs simultaneously, the latter is invalid.
Bit 5
DFOVF Description
0 Normal state. (Initial value)
1 Indicates that overflow has occurred in the counter.
Bit 4⎯Error Data Limit Function Selection Bit (DFRFON): Enables the error data limit
function. (Limit values are the values set in the lock range data registers (DFRUDR and
DFRLDR)).
Bit 4
DFRFON Description
0 Disables limit function. (Initial value)
1 Enables limit function.
Bit 3⎯Drum Lock Flag (DF-R/UNR): Sets a flag if an underflow occurred in the drum lock
counter.
Bit 3
DF-R/UNR Description
0 Indicates that the drum speed system is not locked. (Initial value)
1 Indicates that the drum speed system is locked.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 625 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 2⎯Drum Phase System Filter Computation Automatic Start Bit (DPCNT): Enables the
filter computation of the phase system if an underflow occurred in the drum lock counter.
Bit 2
DPCNT Description
0 Disables the filter computation by detection of the drum lock. (Initial value)
1 Enables the filter computation of the phase system when drum lock is detected.
Bits 1 and 0⎯Drum Lock Counter Setting Bits (DFRCS1, DFRCS0): Set the number of times
to detect drum locks (which means the number of times DFG is detected in the range set by the
lock range data register). The drum lock flag is set when the specified number of drum locks is
detected. If the NCDFG signal is detected outside the lock range after data is written in DFRCS1
and DFRCS0, the data will be stored in the lock counter.
Note: If DFRCS1 or DFRCS0 is read-accessed, the counter value is read out. If bit 3 (drum lock
flag) is 1 and the drum lock counter's value is 3, it indicates that the drum speed system is
locked. The drum lock counter stops until lock is released after underflow.
Bit 1 Bit 0
DFRCS1 DFRCS0 Description
0 Underflow occurs after lock was detected once. (Initial value) 0
1 Underflow occurs after lock was detected twice.
1 0 Underflow occurs after lock was detected three times.
1 Underflow occurs after lock was detected four times.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 626 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
26.6.5 Operation
The drum speed error detector detects the speed error based on the reference value set in the DFG
specified speed preset register (DFPR). The reference value set in DFPR is preset in the counter by
NCDFG signal, and the counter decrements the count by the selected clock. The timing of the
counter presetting and the error data latching can be selected between the rising or falling edge of
NCDFG signal. See section 26.14.4, DFG Noise Removal Circuit. The error data detected is sent
to the digital filter circuit. The error data is signed binaries. The data takes a positive number (+) if
the speed is slower than the specified speed, a negative number (-) if the speed is faster, or 0 if it
had no error (revolving at the specified speed). Figure 26.28 shows an example of operation to
detect the drum speed.
• Setting the error data limit
A limit can be set to the error data sent to the digital filter circuit using the DFG lock data
register (DFRUDR, DFRLDR). Set the upper limit of the error data in DFRUDR and the lower
limit in DFRLDR, and write 1 in DFRFON bit. If the error data is outside the limit range, the
DFRLDR value is sent to the digital filter circuit if a negative number is latched, or the
DFRUDR value if a positive number is latched, as a limit value. Be sure to turn off the limit
setting (DFRFON = 0) when you set the limit value. If the limit was set with the limit setting
on (DFRFON = 1), result of computation is not assured.
• Lock detection
If an error data is detected within the lock range set in the lock data register, the drum lock flag
(DF-R/UNR) is set by the number of the times of locking set by DFRCS1 and DFRCS0 bits,
and an interrupt is requested (IRRDRM2) at the same time. The number of the occurrence of
locking (once to 4 times) before the flag is set can be specified. Use DFRCS1 and DFRCS0
bits for this purpose. The on/off status of the phase system digital filter computation can be
controlled automatically by the status of lock detection when bit 5 (DPHA bit) of the drum
system digital filter control register (DFIC) is 0 (phased system digital filter computation off)
and DPCNT bit is 1.
• Drum system speed error detection counter
The drum system speed error detection counter stops the counter and sets the overflow flag
(DFOVF) when an overflow occurs. At the same time, it generates an interrupt request
(IRRDRM1). To clear DFOVF, write 0 after reading 1. If setting the flag and writing 0 take
place simultaneously, the latter is invalid.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 627 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
• Interrupt request
IRRDRM1 is generated by the NCDFG signal latch and the overflow of the error detection
counter. IRRDRM2 is generated by detection of lock (after the detection of the specified
number of times of locking).
–value+value
Specified speed value
Latch data 0
(no error)
Preset value
Preset period
(2 counts)
Counter
NCDFG signal
Error data latch
signal (DFG ↑)
Preset data
load signal
Figure 26.28 Example of the Drum Speed Error Detection
(When the Rising Edge of DFG Is Selected)
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 628 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
26.6.6 fH Correction in Trick Play Mode
In trick play mode, the tape speed relative to the video head changes. This change alters the
horizontal sync signal (fH), causing skew. To correct the skew, the drum motor speed must be
shifted to a different speed in each trick play mode, so as to obtain the normal horizontal sync
frequency. To shift the drum motor speed, software should modify the value written in the
specified DFG speed preset data register in the speed error detector.
This fH correction can be expressed in terms of the basic frequency fF of the drum as follows.
N
0
f
F
= × f
F0
N
0
+ α
H
(1 − n)
Legend:
n: Speed multiplier (FWD = positive, REV = negative)
αH: H alignment (1.5H in standard mode, 0.75H in 2x mode, and 0.5H in 3x mode for VHS
and β systems; 1H for an 8-mm VCR)
N0: Standard H numbers within field
fF0: Field frequency
NTSC: N0 = 262.5, fF0 = 59.94
PAL: N0 = 312.5, fF0 = 50.00
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 629 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
26.7 Drum Phase Error Detector
26.7.1 Overview
The drum phase control system must start after the drum motor has reached the specified
revolution speed by the speed control system. Drum phase control works as follows in record and
playback mode.
• Record Mode: Phase is controlled so that the vertical blanking intervals of the video signal to
be recorded will line up along the bottom edge of the tape.
• Playback Mode: Phase is controlled so as to trace the recorded tracks accurately.
A counter detects the phase error against a preset value. The phase error data is processed and
added to speed error data in a digital filter. This filter controls a pulse-width modulated (PWM)
output, which controls the revolution phase and speed of the drum.
The DPG signal from the drum motor is reshaped into a square wave by a reshaping circuit,
and sent to the phase error detector.
The phase error detector compares the phase of the DPG pulse (tach pulse), which contains
video head phase information, with a reference signal. In the actual circuit, the comparison is
carried out by comparing the head-switching (HSW) signal, which is delayed by a counter that
is reset by DPG, with a reference signal value. The reference signal is the REF30 signal, which
differs between record and playback as follows:
• Record: Vsync signal extracted from the video signal to be recorded (frame rate signal,
actually 1/2 Vsync).
• Playback: 30 Hz or 25 Hz signal divided from the system clock.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 630 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
26.7.2 Block Diagram
Figure 26.29 shows a block diagram of the drum phase error detector.
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
R/W
REF30P
HSW
(Video FF)
NHSW
(Narrow FF)
DPGCR
DPGCR DPGCR DFUCR
DPGCRDPPR1 DPPR2
R/(W)
S
R
F/F
Q
WW
Internal bus
Internal bus
OVF
LSBMSB
DPER1 DPER2
LSBMSB
DPOVF
DFEPS
HSWES
N/V
Latch
Preset
Error data (20 bits)
To DFU
Edge
detector
Sequence
controller
↑, ↓
Error data
(16 bits)
Error data
(4 bits)
Preset data
(16 bits)
Preset data
(4 bits)
Counter (20 bits)
IRRDRM3
DPCS1,0
φs
φs/2
φs/4
φs/8
φs = fosc/2
Figure 26.29 Block Diagram of Drum Phase Error Detector
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 631 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
26.7.3 Register Configuration
Table 26.10 shows the register configuration of the drum phase error detector.
Table 26.10 Register Configuration
Name Abbrev. R/W Size Initial Value Address
Specified drum phase preset data
register 1
DPPR1 W Byte H'F0 H'D03C
Specified drum phase preset data
register 2
DPPR2 W Word H'0000 H'D03A
Drum phase error data register 1 DPER1 R/W Byte H'F0 H'D03D
Drum phase error data register 2 DPER2 R/W Word H'0000 H'D03E
Drum phase error detection control
register
DPGCR R/W Byte H'07 H'D039
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 632 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
26.7.4 Register Description
Drum Phase Preset Data Registers (DPPR1, DPPR2)
DPPR1
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
DPPR16DPPR17DPPR18DPPR19
0
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
— — — —
— — — — WW
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
DPPR2
8
0
9
0
W
10
0
W
11
DPPR8DPPR9DPPR10DPPR11
0
12
0
13
0
14
0
15
DPPR12DPPR13DPPR14DPPR15
WWWW WW
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
DPPR0DPPR1DPPR2DPPR3
0
4
0
5
0
6
0
7
DPPR4DPPR5DPPR6DPPR7
WWWW WW
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The 20-bit preset data that defines the specified drum phase is set in DPPR1 and DPPR2. The 20
bits are weighted as follows: bit 3 of DPPR1 is the MSB, and bit 0 of DPPR2 is the LSB. When
data is written to DPPR2, the 20-bit preset data, including DPPR1, is loaded into the preset circuit.
Write to DPPR1 first, and DPPR2 next. The preset data can be calculated from the following
equation by using H'80000* as the reference value.
Target phase difference = (reference signal frequency/2) − 6.5H
Drum phase preset data = H'80000 - (φs/n × target phase difference)
φs: Servo clock frequency in Hz (fosc/2)
φs/n: Clock source of selected counter
Only a word access is valid. If a byte access is attempted, correct operation is not guaranteed. No
read is valid. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. DPPR1 and DPPR2 are
initialized to H'F0 and H'0000 by a reset, and in standby mode.
Note: * The preset data value is calculated so that the counter will reach H'80000 when the
error value is zero. When the counter value is latched as error data in the drum phase
error data registers (DPER1 and DPER2), however, it is converted to a value
referenced to H'00000.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 633 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Drum Phase Error Data Registers (DPER1, DPER2)
DPER1
0
0
1
0
R*/W
2
0
R*/W
3
DPER16DPER17DPER18DPER19
0
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
— — — —
— — — — R*/WR*/W
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
DPER2
8
0
9
0
R*/W
10
0
R*/W
11
DPER8DPER9DPER10DPER11
0
12
0
13
0
14
0
15
DPER12DPER13DPER14DPER15
R*/WR*/WR*/WR*/W R*/WR*/W
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Note: * Note that only detected error data can be read.
0
0
1
0
R*/W
2
0
R*/W
3
DPER0DPER1DPER2DPER3
0
4
0
5
0
6
0
7
DPER4DPER5DPER6DPER7
R*/WR*/WR*/WR*/W R*/WR*/W
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
DPER1 and DPER2 constitute a 20-bit drum phase error data register. The 20 bits are weighted as
follows: bit 3 of DPER1 is the MSB, and bit 0 of DPER2 is the LSB. When the rotational phase is
correct, the data H'00000 is latched. Negative data will be latched if the drum leads the correct
phase, and positive data if it lags. Values in DPER1 and DPER 2 are transferred to the digital filter
circuit.
DPER1 and DPER are 20-bit read/write registers. When writing data to DPER 1 and DPER2,
write to DPER1 first, and then write to DPER2. Only a word access is valid. If a byte access is
attempted, correct operation is not guaranteed. DPER1 and DPER2 are initialized to H'F0 and
H'0000 by a reset, and in standby mode.
See the note on the drum phase preset data registers (DPPR1 and DPPR2).
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 634 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Drum Phase Error Detection Control Register (DPGCR)
0
1
12
———
———
1
3
0
4
0
R/W R/W
5
0
6
0
7
R/(W)*
DPOVF
R/W
DPCS0
0
R/W
DPCS1 N/V HSWES
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Note: * Only 0 can be written.
DPGCR is an 8-bit read/write register that controls the operation of drum phase error detection.
Bits 2-0 are reserved, bit 5 accepts only read and 0 write.
It is initialized to H'07 by a reset or in stand-by mode.
Bits 7 and 6⎯Clock Source Selection Bit (DPCS1, DPCS0): These bits select the clock
supplied to the counter. (φs = fosc/2)
Bit 7 Bit 6
DPCS1 DPCS0 Description
0 φs (Initial value) 0
1 φs/2
1 0 φs/4
1 φs/8
Bit 5⎯Counter Overflow Flag (DPOVF): DPOVF flag indicates the overflow of the 20-bit
counter. It is cleared by writing 0. Write 0 after reading 1. Setting has the highest priority in this
flag. If a flag set and 0 write occurs simultaneously, the latter is invalid.
Bit 5
DPOVF Description
0 Normal state (Initial value)
1 Indicates that a overflow has occurred in the counter
Bit 4⎯Error Data Latch Signal Selection Bit (N/V): Selects the latch signal of error data.
Bit 4
N/V Description
0 HSW (VideoFF) signal (Initial value)
1 NHSW (NarrowFF) signal
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 635 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 3⎯Edge Selection Bit (HSWES): Selects the edge of the error data latch signal (HSW or
NHSW).
Bit 3
HSWES Description
0 Latches at the rising edge (Initial value)
1 Latches at the falling edge
Bits 2 to 0⎯Reserved: Cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
26.7.5 Operation
The drum phase error detector detects the phase error based on the reference value set in the drum
specified phase preset data registers 1 and 2 (DPPR1 and DPPR2). The reference values set in
DPPR1 and DPPR2 are preset in the counter by REF30P signal, and counted up by the clock
selected. The latch of the error data can be selected between the rising or falling edge of HSW
(NHSW). The error data detected in the error data automatic transmission mode (DFEPS bit of
DFUCR = 0) is sent to the digital filter circuits automatically. In soft transmission mode (DFEPS
bit of DFUCR = 1), the data written in DPER1 and DPER2 is sent to the digital filter circuit. The
error data is signed binary. It takes a positive number (+) if the phase is behind the specified
phase, a negative number (-) if in advance of the specified phase, or 0 if it had no phase error
(revolving at the specified phase). Figures 26.30 and 26.31 show examples of operation to detect a
drum phase error.
Drum Phase Error Detection Counter: The drum phase error detection counter stops counting
when an overflow or latch occurs. At the same time, it generates an interrupt request (IRRDRM3),
and sets the overflow flag (DPOVF) if an overflow occurred. To clear DPOVF, write 0 after
reading 1. If setting the flag and writing 0 take place simultaneously, the latter is invalid.
Interrupt Request: IRRDRM3 is generated by the HSW (NHSW) signal latch and the overflow
of the error detection counter.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 636 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Latch Latch
Preset value
Counter
HSW (NHSW)*
REF30P
Preset value
Preset Preset
Note: * Edge selectable
Figure 26.30 Drum Phase Control in Playback Mode (HSW Rising Edge Selected)
Latch Latch
Preset value
Counter
HSW (NHSW)*
VD
REF30P
Preset value
Preset
Note: * Edge selectable
Preset
Reset Reset
Figure 26.31 Drum Phase Control in Record Mode (HSW Rising Edge Selected)
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 637 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
26.7.6 Phase Comparison
The phase comparison circuit measures the difference of time between the reference signal and the
comparing signal with a digital counter. REF30 signal is used for the reference signal, and HSW
signal (VideoFF) or NHSW signal (NarrowFF) from the HSW timing generator is used for the
comparing signal. In record mode, however, the phase of REF30 signal is the same as that of the
vertical sync signal (Vsync) because the reference signal generator (REF30 generator) is reset by
the vertical sync signal (Vsync) in the video signals.
The error detection counter latches data at the rising or falling edge of HSW signal. The digital
filter circuit performs computation using this data as 20-bit phase error data. After processing and
adding the phase error data and the speed error data from the drum speed control system, the
digital filter circuit sends the data as the error data of the drum system to the PWM modulation
circuit.
26.8 Capstan Speed Error Detector
26.8.1 Overview
Capstan speed control holds the capstan motor at a constant revolution speed, by measuring the
period of the CFG signal. A digital counter detects the speed error against a preset value. The
speed error data is added to phase error data in a digital filter. This filter controls a pulse-width
modulated (PWM) output, which controls the revolution speed and phase of the capstan motor.
The CFG input signal is downloaded by the comparator circuit, then reshaped into a square wave
by a reshaping circuit, divided by the CFG divider, and sent to the speed error detector as the
DVCFG signal.
The speed error detector uses the system clock to measure the period of the DVCFG signal, and
detects the error against a preset data value. The preset data is the value that results from
measuring the DVCFG signal period with the clock signal when the capstan motor is running at
the correct speed.
The error detector operates by latching a counter value when it detects an edge of the DVCFG
signal. The latched count provides 16 bits of speed error data for the digital filter to operate on.
The digital filter adds the speed error data to phase error data from the capstan phase control
system, then sends the result to the PWM as capstan error data.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 638 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
26.8.2 Block Diagram
Figure 26.32 shows a block diagram of the capstan speed error detector.
WW R
UDF
OVF
Lock 2 up
Clear
Latch
Preset
CFVCR
CFRLDR
CFVCRCFPRCFVCR
CFVCRCFVCRCFUCR
CFER
CFRVCR
Error data
(16 bits)
To DFU
DVCFG
CFRUDR
Internal bus
R/W
Internal bus
R/W WR/WR/W
R/W R/W (R)/W
Lock 1 up
S
R
F/F
Q
S
R
F/F
CFRCS1,0
CF-R/UNR
Lock counter
(2 bits)
Q
S
R
F/F
Q
Lock range
detector
Lock range data (16 bits)
Lock range data (16 bits)
CPCNT
Error data
limiter
control
circuit
CFRFON
CFESS
Error data
(16 bits)
Counter (16 bits)
CFOVF
IRRCAP2
IRRCAP1
CROCKON
To DFU
Preset data (16 bits)
CFCS1,0
φs
φs/2
φs/4
φs/8
Figure 26.32 Block Diagram of Capstan Speed Error Detector
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 639 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
26.8.3 Register Configuration
Table 26.11 shows the register configuration of the capstan speed error detector.
Table 26.11 Register Configuration
Name Abbrev. R/W Size Initial Value Address
Specified CFG speed preset data
register
CFPR W Word H'0000 H'D050
CFG speed error data register CFER R/W Word H'0000 H'D052
CFG lock upper data register CFRUDR W Word H'7FFF H'D054
CFG lock lower data register CFRLDR W Word H'8000 H'D056
Capstan speed error detection control
register
CFVCR R/W Byte H'00 H'D058
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 640 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
26.8.4 Register Description
Specified CFG Speed Preset Data Register (CFPR)
8
0
9
0
W
10
0
W
11
0
12
0
W
0
W
1314
0
15
CFPR
12
CFPR
11
CFPR
10
CFPR
9
CFPR
8
0
W
CFPR
15
WWW
CFPR
14
CFPR
13
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
56
0
7
CFPR
4
CFPR
3
CFPR2 CFPR
1
CFPR
0
0
W
CFPR
7
WWW
CFPR
6
CFPR
5
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The 16-bit preset data that defines the specified CFG speed is set in CFPR. When data is written,
the 16-bit preset data is sent to the preset circuit. The preset data can be calculated from the
following equation by using H'8000* as the reference value.
φs/n
CFG speed preset data = H'8000 − ( − 2)
DVCFG frequenc
φs: Servo clock frequency in Hz (fOSC/2)
DVCFG frequency: In Hz
The constant 2 is the preset interval (see figure 26.33).
φs/n: Clock source of the selected counter
CFPR is a 16-bit write-only register. Only a word acces is valid. If a byte access is attempted,
correct operation is not guaranteed. CFPR is initialized to H'0000 by a reset.
Note: * The preset data value is calculated so that the counter will reach H'8000 when the error
is zero. When the counter value is latched as error data in the CFG speed error data
register (CFER), however, it is converted to a value referenced to H'0000.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 641 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
CFG Speed Error Data Register (CFER)
8
0
9
0
R*/W
10
0
R*/W
11
0
12
0
R*/W
0
R*/W
1314
0
15
CFER12 CFER11 CFER10 CFER9 CFER8
0
R*/W
CFER15
R*/WR*/WR*/W
CFER14 CFER13
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Note:
*
Note that only detected error data can be read.
0
0
1
0
R*/W
2
0
R*/W
3
0
4
0
R*/W
0
R*/W
56
0
7
CFER4 CFER3 CFER2 CFER1 CFER0
0
R*/W
CFER7
R*/WR*/WR*/W
CFER6 CFER5
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
CFER is a 16-bit read/write register that stores 16-bit CFG speed error data. When the speed of the
capstan motor is correct, the data latched in CFER is H'0000. Negative data will be latched if the
speed is faster than the specified speed, and positive data if the speed is slower than the specified
speed. The CFER value is sent to the digital filter either automatically or by software.
Only a word access is valid. If a byte access is attempted, correct operation is not guaranteed.
CFER is initialized to H'0000 by a reset, and in module stop mode and standby mode.
See the note on the specified CFG speed preset data register (CFPR) in section 26.8.4, Register
Description.
CFG Lock UPPER Data Register (CFRUDR)
8
1
9
1
W
10
1
W
11
1
12
1
W
1
W
1314
1
15
CFRUDR
12
CFRUDR
11
CFRUDR
10
CFRUDR
9
CFRUDR
8
0
W
CFRUDR
15
WWW
CFRUDR
14
CFRUDR
13
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
0
1
1
1
W
2
1
W
3
1
4
1
W
1
W
56
1
7
CFRUDR
4
CFRUDR
3
CFRUDR
2
CFRUDR
1
CFRUDR
0
1
W
CFRUDR
7
WWW
CFRUDR
6
CFRUDR
5
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
CFRUDR is a 16-bit write-only register used to set the lock range on the UPPER side when
capstan speed lock is detected, and to set the limit value on the UPPER side when limiter function
is in use.
When lock is being detected, if the capstan speed is detected within the lock range, the lock
counter which has been set by CFRCS1 and CFRCS0 bits of CFVCR register decrements the
count. If the set value of CFRCS1 and CFRCS0 matches the number of times of occurrence of
locking, the computation of the digital filter in the capstan phase system can be controlled
automatically. Also, if the CFG speed error data exceeds the CFRUDR value when the limiter
function is in use, the DFRUDR value can be used as the data for computation by the digital filter.
Only a word access is valid. If a byte access is attempted, correct operation is not guaranteed. A
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 642 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
read is invalid. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. It is initialized to H'7FFF
by a reset, or in stand-by or module-stop mode.
CFG Lock LOWER Data Register (CFRLDR)
8
0
9
0
W
10
0
W
11
0
12
0
W
0
W
1314
0
15
CFRLDR
12
CFRLDR
11
CFRLDR
10
CFRLDR
9
CFRLDR
8
1
W
CFRLDR
15
WWW
CFRLDR
14
CFRLDR
13
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
56
0
7
CFRLDR
4
CFRLDR
3
CFRLDR
2
CFRLDR
1
CFRLDR
0
0
W
CFRLDR
7
WWW
CFRLDR
6
CFRLDR
5
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
CFRLDR is a 16-bit write-only register used to set the lock range on the LOWER side when
capstan speed lock is detected, and to set the limit value on LOWER side when limiter function is
in use.
When lock is being detected, if the drum speed is detected within the lock range, the lock counter
that has been set by CFRCS 1 and 0 bits of CFVCR register decrements the count. If the set value
of CFRCS 1 and 0 matches the number of times of occurrence of locking, the computation of the
digital filter in the drum phase system can be controlled automatically. Also, if the CFG speed
error data is under the CFRLDR value when the limiter function is in use, the CFRLDR value can
be used as the data for computation by the digital filter.
Only a word access is valid. If a byte access is attempted, correct operation is not guaranteed. No
read is valid. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. It is initialized to H'8000 by
a reset, or in stand-by or module-stop mode.
Capstan Speed Error Detection Control Register (CFVCR)
0
0
1
0
(R)
*
2
/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/(W)
*
1
56
0
7
CFRFON CF-R/UNR CPCNT CFRCS1 CFRCS0
0
R/W
CFCS1
(R)
*
2
/WRR/W
CFCS0 CFOVF
Notes:
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
1. Only 0 can be written.
2. If read-accessed, the counter value is read out.
CFVCR is an 8-bit read/write register that controls the operation of capstan speed error detection.
Bit 3 accepts only read, and bit 5 accepts only read and 0 write. It is initialized to H'00 by a reset,
or in stand-by or module-stop mode.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 643 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bits 7 and 6⎯Clock Source Selection Bits (CFCS1, CFCS0): CFCS1 and CFCS0 select the
clock to be supplied to the counter. (φs = fosc/2)
Bit 7 Bit 6
CFCS1 CFCS0 Description
0 φs (Initial value) 0
1 φs/2
1 0 φs/4
1 φs/8
Bit 5⎯Counter Overflow Flag (CFOVF): CFOVF flag indicates overflow of the 16-bit counter.
It is cleared by writing 0. Write 0 after reading 1. Setting has the highest priority in this flag. If a
flag set and 0 write occurs simultaneously, the latter is invalid.
Bit 5
CFOVF Description
0 Normal state. (Initial value)
1 Indicates that a overflow has occurred in the counter.
Bit 4⎯Error Data Limit Function Selection Bit (CFRFON): Enables the error data limit
function. (Limit values are the values set in the lock range data register (CFRUDR, CFRLDR)).
Bit 4
CFRFON Description
0 Disables limit function. (Initial value)
1 Enables limit function.
Bit 3⎯Capstan Lock Flag (CF-R/UNR): Sets a flag if an underflow occurred in the capstan lock
counter.
Bit 3
CF-R/UNR Description
0 Indicates that the capstan speed system is not locked. (Initial value)
1 Indicates that the capstan speed system is locked.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 644 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 2⎯Capstan Phase System Filter Computation Automatic Start Bit (CPCNT): Enables the
filter computation of the phase system if an underflow occurred in the capstan lock counter.
Bit 2
CPCNT Description
0 Disables the filter computation by detection of the capstan lock.
(Initial value)
1 Enables the filter computation of the phase system when capstan lock is detected.
Bits 1 and 0⎯Capstan Lock Counter Setting Bits (CFRCS1, CFRCS0): Sets the number of
times to detect capstan locks (DVCFG has been detected in the rage set by the lock range data
register). The capstan lock flag is set when the specified number of capstan lock is detected. If the
DVCFG signal is detected outside the lock range after data is written in CFRCS1 and CFRCS0,
the data will be stored in the lock counter.
Note: If CFRCS1 or CFRCS0 is read-accessed, the counter value is read out. If bit 3 (capstan
lock flag) is 1 and the capstan lock counter's value is 3, it indicates that the capstan speed
system is locked. The capstan lock counter stops until lock is released after underflow.
Bit 1 Bit 0
CFRCS1 CFRCS0 Description
0 Underflow occurs after lock was detected once
(Initial value)
0
1 Underflow occurs after lock was detected twice
1 0 Underflow occurs after lock was detected three times
1 Underflow occurs after lock was detected four times
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 645 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
26.8.5 Operation
The capstan speed error detector detects the speed error based on the reference value set in the
CFG specified speed preset register (CFPR). The reference value set in CFPR is preset in the
counter by the DVCFG signal, and the counter decrements the count by the selected clock. The
timing of the counter presetting and the error data latching can be selected between the rising or
falling edge of DVCFG signal. See DVCFG Control Register (CDVC) in section 26.14.3, CFG
Frequency Divider. The error data detected is sent to digital filter circuit. The error data is signed
binaries. The data takes a positive number (+) if the speed is slower than the specified speed, a
negative number (-) if the speed is faster, or 0 if it had no error (revolving at the specified speed).
Figure 26.33 shows an example of operation to detect the capstan speed.
Setting the Error Data Limit: A limit can be set to the error data sent to the digital filter circuit
using the CFG lock data register (CFRUDR, CFRLDR). Set the upper limit of the error data in
CFRUDR and the lower limit in CFRLDR, and write 1 in CFRFON bit. If the error data is outside
the limit range, the CFRLDR value is sent to the digital filter circuit if a negative number is
latched, or the CFRUDR value if a positive number is latched, as a limit value. Be sure to turn off
the limit setting (CFRFON = 0) when you set the limit value. If the limit was set with the limit
setting on (CFRFON = 1), result of computation is not assured.
Lock Detection: If an error data is detected within the lock range set in the lock data register, the
capstan lock flag (CF-R/UNR) is set by the number of the times of locking set by CFRCS1 and
CFRCS0 bits, and an interrupt is requested (IRRCAP2) at the same time. The number of the
occurrence of locking (once to 4 times) before the flag is set can be specified. Use CFRCS1 and
CFRCS0 bits for this purpose. The on/off state of the phase system digital filter computation can
be controlled automatically by the status of lock detection when bit 5 (CPHA bit) of the capstan
system digital filter control register (CFIC) is 0 (phased system digital filter computation off) and
DPCNT bit is 1.
Capstan System Speed Error Detection Counter: The capstan system speed error detection
counter stops the counter and sets the overflow flag (CFOVF) when an overflow occurs. At the
same time, it generates an interrupt request (IRRCAP1). To clear CFOVF, write 0 after reading 1.
If setting the flag and writing 0 take place simultaneously, the latter is invalid.
Interrupt Request: IRRCAP1 is generated by the DVCFG signal latch and the overflow of the
error detection counter. IRRCAP2 is generated by detection of lock (after the detection of the
specified number of times of locking).
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 646 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
–value +value
Specified speed value
Latch data 0
(no error)
Preset value
Preset period
(2 counts)
Counter
Error data
latch signal
(DVCFG)
Preset data
load signal
Figure 26.33 Example of the Capstan Speed Error Detection
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 647 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
26.9 Capstan Phase Error Detector
26.9.1 Overview
The capstan phase control system must start operation after the capstan motor has reached the
specified speed by the speed control system. The capstan phase control system operates as follows
in record/playback mode:
• Record mode: Controls the tape running so that it may run at a specified speed together with
the speed control system.
• Playback mode: Controls the tape running so that the recorded track may be traced correctly.
Any error deviated from the reference phase is detected by the digital counter. This phase error
data and the speed error data is processed and added by the digital filter circuit to control the
PWM output. The phase and speed of the capstan, in turn, is control this PWM output.
The control signal of the capstan phase control in the record mode differ from that in playback
mode. In record mode, the control is performed by the DVCFG2 signal which is generated by
dividing the frequencies of the reference signal (REF30P or CREF) and the CFG signal. In
playback mode, it is performed by divided rising signal (DVCTL) of the reference signal
(CAPREF30) and the playback control pulse (PB-CTL).
The reference signal in record and playback modes are as follows:
• Record mode: 1/2 Vsync signal extracted from the video signal to be recorded.
• Playback mode: Signal generated by dividing the PB-CTL signal (DVCTL) at its rising edge.
26.9.2 Block Diagram
Figure 26.34 shows the block diagram of the capstan phase error detector.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 648 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
R/W
CREF
REF30P
CAPREF30
RECREF
DVCFG2
DVCTL
CPGCR
R/W
CR/RF
CPGCR DFUCR
CPGCRCPPR1 CPPR2
R/(W)
S
R
F/F
Q
WW
Internal bus
Internal bus
OVF
LSBMSB
CPER1 CPER2
LSBMSB
CPOVF
CFEPS
SELCFG2
R/W
CTLM
R/P ASM
Latch
Preset
Error data (20 bits)
To DFU
Sequence
controller
Error data
(16 bits)
Error data
(4 bits)
Preset data
(16 bits)
Preset
PB: X value + TRK value = CAPREF30
REC: REF30P or CREF
Latch
PB : DVCTL
REC : DVCFG2
Preset data
(4 bits)
Counter (20 bits)
IRRCAP3
CPCS1,0
φs
φs/2
φs/4
φs/8
φs = fosc/2
Figure 26.34 Block Diagram of Capstan Phase Error Detector
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 649 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
26.9.3 Register Configuration
Table 26.12 shows the register configuration of the capstan phase error detector.
Table 26.12 Register Configuration
Name Abbrev. R/W Size Initial Value Address
Specified Capstan phase preset data
register 1
CPPR1 W Byte H'F0 H'D05C
Specified Capstan phase preset data
register 2
CPPR2 W Word H'0000 H'D05A
Capstan phase error data register 1 CPER1 R/W Byte H'F0 H'D05D
Capstan phase error data register 2 CPER2 R/W Word H'0000 H'D05E
Capstan phase error detection control
register
CPGCR R/W Byte H'07 H'D059
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 650 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
26.9.4 Register Description
Specified Capstan Phase Preset Data Registers (CPPR1, CPPR2)
CPPR1
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
—CPPR19 CPPR18 CPPR17 CPPR16———
———— WW
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
CPPR2
8
0
9
0
W
10
0
W
11
CPPR8CPPR9CPPR10CPPR11
0
12
0
13
0
14
0
15
CPPR12CPPR13CPPR14CPPR15
WWWW WW
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
CPPR0CPPR1CPPR2CPPR3
0
4
0
5
0
6
0
7
CPPR4CPPR5CPPR6CPPR7
WWWW WW
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The 20-bit preset data that defines the specified capstan phase is set in CPPR1 and CPPR2. The 20
bits are weighted as follows: bit 3 of CPPR1 is the MSB. Bit 0 of CPPR2 is the LSB. When
CPPR2 is written to, the 20-bit preset data, including CPPR1, is loaded into the preset circuit.
Write to CPPR1 first, and CPPR2 next. The preset data can be calculated from the following
equation by using H'80000* as the reference value.
Target phase difference = Reference signal frequency/2
Capstan phase preset data = H'80000 − (φs/n × target phase difference)
φs: Servo clock frequency in Hz (fosc/2)
φs/n: Clock source of selected counter
Only a word access is valid. If a byte access is attempted, correct operation is not guaranteed. No
read is valid. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. CPPR1 and CPPR2 are
initialized to H'F0 and H'0000 by a reset, and in standby mode.
Note: * The preset data value is calculated so that the counter will reach H'80000 when the
error is zero. When the counter value is latched as error data in the capstan phase error
data registers (CPER1 and CPER2), however, it is converted to a value referenced to
H'00000.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 651 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Capstan Phase Error Data Registers (CPER1, CPER2)
0
0
1
0
R*/W
2
0
R*/W
3
0
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
————
———— R*/WR*/W
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
CPER19 CPER18 CPER17 CPER16
8
0
9
0
R*/W
10
0
R*/W
11
CPER8CPER9CPER10CPER11
0
12
0
13
0
14
0
15
CPER12CPER13CPER14CPER15
R*/WR*/WR*/WR*/W R*/WR*/W
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Note: * Note that only detected error data can be read.
0
0
1
0
R*/W
2
0
R*/W
3
CPER0CPER1CPER2CPER3
0
4
0
5
0
6
0
7
CPER4CPER5CPER6CPER7
R*/WR*/WR*/WR*/W R*/WR*/W
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
CPER1 and CPER2 constitute a 20-bit capstan phase error data register. The 20 bits are weighted
as follows: bit 3 of CPER1 is the MSB. Bit 0 of CPER2 is the LSB. When the rotational phase is
correct, the data H'00000 is latched. Negative data will be latched if the phase leads the correct
phase, and positive data if it lags. Values in CPER1 and CPER 2 are transferred to the digital filter
circuit.
CPER1 and CPER are 20-bit read/write registers. When writing data to CPER 1 and CPER2, write
to CPER1 first, and then write to CPER2. Only a word access is valid. If a byte access is
attempted, correct operation is not guaranteed. CPER1 and CPER2 are initialized to H'F0 and
H'0000 by a reset, and in standby mode.
See the note on the capstan phase preset data registers (CPPR1 and CPPR2) in section 26.9.4,
Register Description.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 652 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Capstan Phase Error Detection Control Register (CPGCR)
0
1
12
———
———
1
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
0
6
0
7
R/WR/(W)*
CPOVF
R/W
CPCS0
0
R/W
CPCS1 CR/RF SELCFG2
1
Note: * Only 0 can be written
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
CPGCR is an 8-bit read/write register that controls the operation of capstan phase error detection.
Bits 2-0 are reserved, and bit 5 accepts only read and 0 write.
It is initialized to H'07 by a reset or in stand-by mode.
Bits 7 and 6⎯Clock Source Selection Bit (CPCS1, CPCS0): These bits select the clock
supplied to the counter. (φs = fosc/2)
Bit 7 Bit 6
CPCS1 CPCS0 Description
0 φs (Initial value) 0
1 φs/2
1 0 φs/4
1 φs/8
Bit 5⎯Counter Overflow Flag (CPOVF): CPOVF flag indicates the overflow of the 20-bit
counter. It is cleared by writing 0. Write 0 after reading 1. Setting has the highest priority in this
flag. If a flag set and 0 write occurs simultaneously, the latter is invalid.
Bit 5
CPOVF Description
0 Normal state (Initial value)
1 Indicates that a overflow has occurred in the counter
Bit 4⎯Preset Signal Selection Bit (CR/RF): Selects the preset signal.
Bit 4
CR/RF Description
0 Presets REF30P (Initial value)
1 Presets CREF signal
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 653 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 3⎯Latch Signal Selection Bit (SELCFG2): Selects the counter preset signal and the error
data latch signal data in PB (ASM) mode.
Bit 3
SELCFG2 Description
0 Presets CAPREF30 signal; latches DVCTL signal (Initial value)
1 Presets REF30P (CREF) signal; latches DVCFG2 signal
Bits 2 to 0⎯Reserved: Cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
26.9.5 Operation
The capstan phase error detector detects the phase error based on the reference value set in the
capstan specified phase preset data registers 1 and 2 (CPPR1 and CPPR2). The reference values
set in CPPR1 and CPPR2 are preset in the counter by REF30P (CREF) signal or CAPREF signal,
and counted up by the clock selected. The latching of the error data is performed by DVCTL or
DVCFG2.
The error data detected in the error data automatic transmission mode (CFEPS bit of DFUCR = 0)
is sent to the digital filter circuit automatically. In soft transmission mode (CFEPS bit of DFUCR
= 1), the data written in CPER1 and CPPR2 is sent to the digital filter circuit. The error data is
signed binary. It takes a positive number (+) if the phase is behind the specified phase, a negative
number (-) if in advance of the specified phase, or 0 if it had no phase error (revolving at the
specified phase). Figures 26.35 and 26.36 show examples of operation to detect a capstan phase
error.
Capstan Phase Error Detection Counter: The capstan phase error detection counter stops
counting when an overflow or latch occurs. At the same time, it generates an interrupt request
(IRRCAP3), and sets the overflow flag (CPOVF) if overflow occurred. To clear CPOVF, write 0
after reading 1. If setting the flag and writing 0 take place simultaneously, the latter is invalid.
Interrupt Request: IRRCAP3 is generated by the DVCTL or DVCFG2 signal latch and the
overflow of the error detection counter.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 654 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Latch Latch
Preset value
Counter
PB-CTL
CAPREF30
DVCTL
or
DVCFG2
Preset Preset
Figure 26.35 Capstan Phase Control in Playback Mode
Latch Latch
Preset value
Counter
DVCFG2
REF30P
or
CREF
Preset Preset
Figure 26.36 Capstan Phase Control in Record Mode
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 655 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
26.10 X-Value and Tracking Adjustment Circuit
26.10.1 Overview
To maintain compatibility with other VCRs, an on-chip adjustment circuit adjusts the phase of the
reference signal (internal reference signal (REF30) or external reference signal (EXCAP)) during
playback. Because of manufacturing tolerances, the physical distance between the video head and
control head (the X-value: 79.244 mm) may vary from set to set, so when a tape that was recorded
on a different set is played back, the phase of the reference signal may need to be adjusted. The
adjustment can be made by a register setting. The same setting can adjust the rotational phase of
the capstan motor to maintain positional alignment (tracking alignment) of the video head with the
recorded tracks in autotracking, or when tracks that were recorded with an EP head are traced by a
wider head. These tracking adjustments can be made by the acquisition of the envelope signal by
the A/D converter.
26.10.2 Block Diagram
The adjustment circuit consists of a 10-bit counter clocked by the system clock (φs or φs/2), and
two down-counters with load registers. Individual setting of X-value adjustment can be made by
X-value data register (XDR) and tracking adjustment by TRK data register (TRDR). The reference
signal clears the 10-bit counter and sets the load register value in the down-counter with two load
registers. After the adjusted reference signal is generated, clock supply stops and the circuit halts
until the next reference signal is input. REF30 signal can be divided as necessary.
Figure 26.37 shows a block diagram.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 656 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
R
*
/W
Note: * When DVREF1 and DVREF0 are read, values in the down counter (2 bits) are readout.
φs = fosc/2
φs
φs /2
EXCAP
REF30P
XTCR
W W
XCS
XTCR
W
AT/MU
ASM REC/PB
XTCR
W
TRK/X
S
R
Q
S
R
Q
Internal bus
Internal bus
DVREF1, 0
CAPRF
EXC/REF
WW
XTCRXTCR
Down counter
Edge
selection
,
(2 bits)
Counter
(10 bits)
CAPREF30
REF30X
W
X-value data
register
XDR
(12 bits)
TRK value data
register
TRDR
(12 bits)
Down counter
(12 bits)
(12 bits)
Down counter
Figure 26.37 Block Diagram of X-Value Adjustment Circuit
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 657 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
26.10.3 Register Description
Register Configuration
Table 26.13 shows the register configuration of X-value correction and tracking correction
circuits.
Table 26.13 Register Configuration
Name Abbrev. R/W Size Initial Value Address
X-value and TRK-value
control register
XTCR R/W Byte H'80 H'D074
X-value data register XDR W Word H'F000 H'D070
TRK-value data register TRDR W Word H'F000 H'D072
X-Value and TRK-Value Control Register (XTCR)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
5
0
6
0
7
—
—R/WWW
AT/MU
W
CAPRF TRK/X EXC/REF XCS DVREF1 DVREF0
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
XTCR is an 8-bit register to determine the X-value and TRK-value correction circuits. Bits 6 to 2
are write-only bits. No read is valid. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. Bits
1 and 0 are read/write bits. Only a byte access is valid for XTCR. If a word access is attempted,
correct operation is not guaranteed.
It is initialized to H'80 by a reset, or in stand-by or module stop mode.
Bit 7⎯Reserved: Cannot be modified and is always read as 1.
Bit 6⎯External Sync Signal Edge Selection Bit (CAPRF): Selects the EXCAP edge when a
selection is made to generate external sync signals.
Bit 6
CAPRF Description
0 Signal generated at the rising edge of EXCAP. (Initial value)
1 Signal generated at both edges of EXCAP.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 658 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 5⎯Capstan Phase Correction Auto/Manual Selection Bit (AT/MU): Selects whether the
generation of the correction reference signal (CAPREF30) for capstan phase control is controlled
automatically or manually depending on the status of the ASM and REC/PB bits of CTL mode
register.
Bit 5
AT/MU Description
0 Manual mode (Initial value)
1 Auto mode
Bit 4⎯Capstan Phase Correction Register Selection Bit (TRK/X): Determines the method to
generate the CAPREF30 signal when AT/MU bit is 0.
Bit 4
TRK/X Description
0 Generates CAPREF30 only by the set value of XDR. (Initial value)
1 Generates CAPREF30 by the set value of XDR and TRDR.
Bit 3⎯Reference Signal Selection Bit (EXC/REF): Selects the reference signal to generate the
correction reference signal (CAPREF30).
Bit 3
EXC/REF Description
0 Generates the signal based on REF30P. (Initial value)
1 Generates the signal based on the external reference signal.
Bit 2⎯Clock Source Selection Bit (XCS): Selects the clock source to be supplied to the 10-bit
counter.
Bit 2
XCS Description
0 φs (Initial value)
1 φs/2
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 659 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bits 1 and 0⎯REF30P Division Ratio Selection Bit (DVREF1, DVREF0): Select the division
value of REF30P. If they are read-accessed, the counter value is read out. (The selected division
value is set by the UDF of the counter.)
Bit 1 Bit 0
DVREF1 DVREF0 Description
0 Division in 1 (Initial value) 0
1 Division in 2
1 0 Division in 3
1 Division in 4
X-Value Data Register (XDR)
1
13
1
14
1
15 1032547
0
W
6
0
W
9
0
W
8
0
W
11
0
W
10
0
W
1
WWWWWW
12
————
————
XD1 XD0XD3 XD2XD5 XD4XD7 XD6XD9 XD8
XD11 XD10
000000
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The X-value data register (XDR) is an 16-bit write-only register. No read is valid. If a read is
attempted, an undetermined value is read out. Only a word access is valid. If a byte access is
attempted, correct operation is not guaranteed.
Set an X-value correction data to XDR, except a value which is beyond the cycle of the CTL
pulse. If AT/MU = 0, TRK/X = 0 is set, CAPREF30 can be generated only by setting the XDR.
Set an X-value and TRK correction value in PB mode, and X- value in REC mode.
It is initialized to H'F000 by a reset, or in stand-by or module stop mode.
TRK-Value Data Register (TRDR)
1
13
1
14
1
15 1032547
0
W
6
0
W
9
0
W
8
0
W
11
0
W
10
0
W
1
WWWWWW
12
————
————
TRD1 TRD0TRD3 TRD2TRD5 TRD4TRD7 TRD6TRD9 TRD8
TRD11 TRD10
000000
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The TRK-value data register (TRDR) is an 16-bit write-only register. No read is valid. If a read is
attempted, an undetermined value is read out. Only a word access is valid. If a byte access is
attempted, correct operation is not guaranteed.
Set an TRK-value correction data to TRDR, except a value which is beyond the cycle of the CTL
pulse. It is initialized to H'F000 by a reset, or in stand-by or module stop mode.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 660 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
26.11 Digital Filters
26.11.1 Overview
The digital filters required in servo control make extensive use of multiply-accumulate operations
on signed integers (error data) and coefficients. A filter computation circuit (digital filter
computation circuit) is provided in on-chip hardware to reduce the load on software, and to
improve processing efficiency. Figure 26.38 shows a block diagram of the filter circuit
configuration.
The filter circuit includes a high-speed 24-bit × 16-bit multiplier-accumulator, an arithmetic
buffer, and an I/O processor. The digital filter computations are carried out by the high-speed
multiplier-accumulator. The arithmetic buffer stores coefficients and gain constants needed in the
filter computations, which are referenced by the high-speed multiplier-accumulator.
The I/O processor is activated by a frequency generator signal, and determines what operation is
carried out. When activated, it reads the speed error and phase error from the speed and phase
error detectors and sends them to the accumulator.
When the filter computation is completed, the I/O processor reads the result from the accumulator
and sends it to a 12-bit PWM. At this time, the accumulation result gain can be controlled.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 661 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
26.11.2 Block Diagram
Data bus
Accumulator
End
Start
Error latch signal
Error data
(from the error detector)
Motor control data
(to PWM circuit)
Buffer/
register
select &
R/W
Address bus
Error check Accumulation
controller
LA (16 bits),
lower accumulator
UA (32 bits),
upper accumulator
MD (32 bits),
multiplied data
Data
shifter
Accumulation
sequence circuit
Buffer circuit
A, B, G, etc.
Write-only
Read-only
Accumu-
lator
Calculation
buffer
Coefficient
register
Constant
register
Sign
controller
Figure 26.38 Block Diagram of Digital Filter Circuit
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 662 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
16
24 8
Z -1
-+
*
1
Usn-1 GKs
+
+
Ofs
+
-
+
+
24 8
Ws
24 8
VBs
14 4
24 8
XAs
24 8
XSn
24 8
VSn
24 8
DFUout
12
24 8
αEs
Error detector
• Add 0s to 8 bits after the decimal point
• Add the same 8-bit value as MSB
Right-bit shift of the decimal point
along with Go PWM
Note: Go = ×64, ×32 are optional.
Go = ×64, ×32, ×16, ×8,×4, ×2
24 8
Usn
16
DZs11 to 0
CZs11 to 0
DBs15 to 0
CBs15 to 0
16
DGKs15 to 0
CGKs15 to 0
DOfs15 to 0
COfs15 to 0
DFIC
CFIC
DFER15 to 0
CFER15 to 0
DAs15 to 0
CAs15 to 0
BsAs
GS KS Go
16
Es PWM
Digital filter
control
register
Speed
system
24 8
Z -1
-+
*
1
Upn-1 GKp
+
+
OfP
+
-
24 8
Tp
24 8
VBp
24 8
XAp
24 8
VPn
24 8
Y
Phase direct test output
Notes: 1. See figure 26.42, Z
-1
initialization circuit.
2. Gain control is disabled during phase output.
12
24 8
αEp
Error detector
• Add 0s to 8 bits after the decimal point
• Add the same 8-bit value as MSB
PWM
24 8
Upn
DZp11 to 0
CZp11 to 0
DBp15 to 0
CBp15 to 0
16
16
DGKp15 to 0
CGKp15 to 0
DOfp15 to 0
COfp15 to 0
DPER19 to 0
CPER19 to 0
DAp15 to 0
CAp15 to 0
BPAP
GP KP
20
16 16
Ep PWM
PION
*
2
• DFUCR
• OPTION
CP/DP
Phase
system
Overflows during accumulation are ignored, and
values below the decimal point are always omitted.
Figure 26.39 Digital Filter Representation
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 663 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
26.11.3 Arithmetic Buffer
This buffer stores computational data used in the digital filters. See table 26.14. Write access is
limited to the gain and coefficient data (Z-1). The other data is used by hardware. None of the data
can be read.
Table 26.14 Arithmetic Buffer Register Configuration
Buffer Data Length
Arithmetic
Data
Gain or
Coefficient
Processing
Data
16 bits
16 bits
16 bits
Phase
system
Ep
Upn
Upn-1 (Zp-1)
Vpn
Tp
Y
Ap
Bp
GKp
Ofp
Ap × Epn
Bp × Vpn
Speed
system
Es
Xsn
Usn
Usn-1 (Zs-1)
Vsn
Ws
As
Bs
GKs
Ofs
As × Xsn
Bs × Vsn
Error
output
PWM
Legend: Valid bits ↑
Non-existent bits Decimal point
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 664 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
26.11.4 Register Configuration
Table 26.15 shows the register configuration of the digital circuit.
Table 26.15 Register Configuration
Name Abbrev. R/W Size Initial Value Address
Capstan phase gain constant CGKp W Word Undetermined H'D010
Capstan speed gain constant CGKs W Word Undetermined H'D012
Capstan phase coefficient A CAp W Word Undetermined H'D014
Capstan phase coefficient B CBp W Word Undetermined H'D016
Capstan speed coefficient A CAs W Word Undetermined H'D018
Capstan speed coefficient B CBs W Word Undetermined H'D01A
Capstan phase offset COfp W Word Undetermined H'D01C
Capstan speed offset COfs W Word Undetermined H'D01E
Drum phase gain constant DGKp W Word Undetermined H'D000
Drum speed gain constant DGKs W Word Undetermined H'D002
Drum phase coefficient A DAp W Word Undetermined H'D004
Drum phase coefficient B DBp W Word Undetermined H'D006
Drum speed coefficient A DAs W Word Undetermined H'D008
Drum speed coefficient B DBs W Word Undetermined H'D00A
Drum phase offset DOfp W Word Undetermined H'D00C
Drum speed offset DOfs W Word Undetermined H'D00E
Drum system speed delay
initialization register
DZs W Word H'F000 H'D020
Drum system phase delay
initialization register
DZp W Word H'F000 H'D022
Capstan system speed delay
initialization register
CZs W Word H'F000 H'D024
Capstan system phase delay
initialization register
CZp W Word H'F000 H'D026
Drum system digital filter
control register
DFIC R/W Byte H'80 H'D028
Capstan system digital filter
control register
CFIC R/W Byte H'80 H'D029
Digital filter control register DFUCR R/W Byte H'C0 H'D02A
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 665 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
26.11.5 Register Description
Gain Constants (CGKp, CGKs, DGKp, DGKs)
*
W
13
*
W
14
*
W
15 1032547
*
W
6
*
W
9
*
W
8
*
W
11
*
W
10
*
W
*
WWWWWWW
12
*****
*
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Note: * Initial value is uncertain.
These registers are 16-bit write-only buffers that set accumulation gain of the digital filter. Only a
word access is valid. Accumulation gain can be set to gain 1 value as maximum value. If a byte
access is attempted, correct operation is not guaranteed. If a read is attempted, an undetermined
value is read out.
These registers are not initialized by a reset or in standby mode. Be sure to write data in them
before processing starts.
In the digital filter, output gain and accumulation gain can be adjusted separately. Take output
gain into account when setting accumulation gain.
Coefficients (CAp, CBp, CAs, CBs, DAp, DBp, DAs, DBs)
*
W
13
*
W
14
*
W
15 1032547
*
W
6
*
W
9
*
W
8
*
W
11
*
W
10
*
W
*
WWWWWWW
12
*****
*
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Note: * Initial value is uncertain.
These registers are 16-bit write-only buffers that determine the cutoff frequency f1 and f2. Only a
word access is valid. If a byte access is attempted, correct operation is not guaranteed. If a read is
attempted, an undetermined value is read out.
These registers are not initialized by a reset or in standby mode. Be sure to write data in them
before processing starts.
In the digital filter, output gain and accumulation gain can be adjusted separately. Take output
gain into account when setting accumulation gain.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 666 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Offset (COfp, Cofs, DOfp, DOfs)
*
W
13
*
W
14
*
W
15 1032547
*
W
6
*
W
9
*
W
8
*
W
11
*
W
10
*
W
*
WWWWWWW
12
*****
*
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Note: * Initial value is uncertain.
These registers are 16-bit write-only buffers that set offset level of digital filter output. Only a
word access is valid. If a byte access is attempted, correct operation is not guaranteed. If a read is
attempted, an undetermined value is read out.
These registers are not initialized by a reset or in standby mode. Be sure to write data in them
before processing starts.
In this digital filter, output gain adjustment (×1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64) after offset adding is enabled.
Take output gain into account when setting accumulation gain.
Delay Initialization Register (CZp, CZs, DZp, DZs)
1
—
13
1
—
14
1
—
15 1032547
0
W
6
0
W
9
0
W
8
0
W
11
0
W
10
0
W
1
—WWWWWW
12
00000
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The delay initialization register is a 16-bit write-only register. Only a word access is valid. If a
byte access is attempted, correct operation is not guaranteed. If a read is attempted, an
undetermined value is read out.
It is initialized to H'F000 by a reset, or in stand-by or module stop mode. The MSB of 12-bit data
(bit 11) is a sign bit.
Loading to Z-1 is performed automatically by bits 4 and 3 of CFIC and DFIC (CZPON, CZSON,
DZPON, DZSON). Writing in register is always available, but loading in Z-1 is not possible when
the digital filter is performing computation in relation to such register. In such a case, loading to
Z-1 will be done the next time computation begins.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 667 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Drum System Digital Filter Control Register (DFIC)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
0
6
0
7
—
—R/WR/WR/(W)
DPHA
R/(W)*
DROV DZPON DZSON DSG2 DSG1 DSG0
1
Note: * Only 0 can be written
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
DFIC is an 8-bit read/write register that controls the status of the drum digital filter and operating
mode. Only a byte access is valid. If a word access is attempted, correct operation is not
guaranteed. DFIC is initialized to H'80 by a reset, and in standby mode and module stop mode.
Bit 7⎯Reserved: Cannot be modified and is always read as 1.
Bit 6⎯Drum System Range Over Flag (DROV): This flag is set to 1 when the result of a filter
computation exceeds 12 bits in width. To clear this flag, write 0 after reading 1.
Bit 6
DROV Description
0 Indicates that the filter computation result did not exceed 12 bits (Initial value)
1 Indicates that the filter computation result exceeded 12 bits
Bit 5⎯Drum Phase System Filter Computation Start Bit (DPHA): Starts or stops filter
processing for drum phase system.
Bit 5
DPHA Description
0 Phase system filter computations are disabled
Phase computation result (Y) is not added to Es (see figure 26.39) (Initial value)
1 Phase system filter computations are enabled
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 668 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 4⎯Drum Phase System Z-1 Initialization Bit (DZPON): Reflects the DZp value on Z-1 of the
phase system when computation processing of the drum phase system begins. If 1 is written, it is
reflected on the computation, and then cleared to 0. Set this bit after writing data to DZp.
Bit 4
DZPON Description
0 DZp value is not reflected on Z-1 of the phase system (Initial value)
1 DZp value is reflected on Z-1 of the phase system
Bit 3⎯Drum Speed System Z-1 Initialization Bit (DZSON): Reflects the DZs value on Z-1 of the
speed system when computation processing of the drum speed system begins. If 1 is written, it is
reflected on the computation, and then cleared to 0. Set this bit after writing data to DZs.
Bit 3
DZSON Description
0 DZs value is not reflected on Z-1 of the speed system (Initial value)
1 DZs value is reflected on Z-1 of the speed system
Bits 2 to 0⎯Drum System Output Gain Control Bits (DSG2 to DSG0): Control the gain output
to DRMPWM.
Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
DSG2 DSG1 DSG0 Description
0 ×1 (Initial value) 0
1 ×2
0 ×4
0
1
1 ×8
1 0 ×16
0
1 (×32)*
1 0 (×64)*
1 Invalid (Do not use this setting)
Note: * Setting optional.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 669 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Capstan System Digital Filter Control Register (CFIC)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
0
6
0
7
—
—R/WR/WR/(W)
DPHA
R/(W)*
DROV DZPON DZSON DSG2 DSG1 DSG0
1
Note: * Only 0 can be written
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
CFIC is an 8-bit read/write register that controls the status of the capstan digital filter and
operating mode. Only a byte access is valid. If a word access is attempted, correct operation is not
guaranteed. CFIC is initialized to H'80 by a reset, and in standby mode and module stop mode.
Bit 7⎯Reserved: Cannot be modified and is always read as 1.
Bit 6⎯Capstan System Range Over Flag (CROV): This flag is set to 1 when the result of a
filter computation exceeds 12 bits in width. To clear this flag, write 0 after reading 1.
Bit 6
DROV Description
0 Indicates that the filter computation result did not exceed 12 bits. (Initial value)
1 Indicates that the filter computation result exceeded 12 bits.
Bit 5⎯Capstan Phase System Filter Start (CPHA): Starts or stops filter processing for capstan
phase system.
Bit 5
CPHA Description
0 Phase filter computations are disabled.
Phase computation result (Y) is not added to Es (see figure 26.39). (Initial value)
1 Phase filter computations are enabled.
Bit 4⎯Capstan Phase System Z-1 Initialization Bit (CZPON): Reflects the CZp value on Z-1 of
the capstan phase system when computation processing of the phase system begins. If 1 is written,
it is reflected on the computation, and then cleared to 0. Set this bit after writing data to CZp.
Bit 4
CZPON Description
0 CZp value is not reflected on Z-1 of the phase system (Initial value)
1 CZp value is reflected on Z-1 of the phase system
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 670 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 3⎯Capstan Speed System Z-1 Initialization Bit (CZSON): Reflects the CZs value on Z-1 of
the capstan speed system when computation processing of the speed system begins. If 1 is written,
it is reflected on the computation, and then cleared to 0. Set this bit after writing data to CZs.
Bit 3
CZSON Description
0 CZs value is not reflected on Z-1 of the speed system (Initial value)
1 CZs value is reflected on Z-1 of the speed system
Bits 2 to 0⎯Capstan System Gain Control Bits (CSG2 to CSG0): Control the gain output to
CAPPWM.
Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 0
CSG2 CSG1 CSG0 Description
0 ×1 (Initial value) 0
1 ×2
0 ×4
0
1
1 ×8
1 0 ×16
0
1 (×32)*
1 0 (×64)*
1 Invalid (Do not use this setting)
Note: * Setting optional
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 671 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Digital Filter Control Register (DFUCR)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
0
67
——
—— R/WR/WR/W
PTON CP/DP CFEPS DFEPS CFESS DFESS
11
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
DFUCR is an 8-bit read/write register which controls the operation of the digital filter. Only a byte
access is valid. If a word access is attempted, correct operation is not guaranteed. It is initialized to
H'00 by a reset, or in stand-by or module stop mode.
Bits 7 and 6⎯Reserved: Cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
Bit 5⎯Phase System Computation Result PWM Output Bit (PTON): Outputs the computation
results of only the phase system to PWM. (The computation results of the drum phase system is
output to CAPPWM pin, and that of the capstan phase system is output to DRMPWM pin.)
Bit 5
PTON Description
0 Outputs the results of ordinary computation of the filter to PWM pin (Initial value)
1 Outputs the computation results of only the phase system to PWM pin
Bit 4⎯PWM Output Selection Bit (CP/DP): Selects whether the phase system computation
results when PTON was set to 1 is output to the drum or capstan. The PWM of the selected side
outputs ordinary filter computation results (speed system of MIX).
Bit 4
CP/DP Description
0 Outputs the drum phase system computation results (DRMPWM) (Initial value)
1 Outputs the capstan phase system computation results (CAPPWM)
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 672 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 3⎯Capstan Phase System Error Data Transfer Bit (CFEPS): Transfers the capstan phase
system error data to the digital filter when the data write is enforced.
Bit 3
CFEPS Description
0 Error data is transferred by DVCFG2 signal latching. (Initial value)
1 Error data is transferred when the data is written.
Bit 2⎯Drum Phase System Error Data Transfer Bit (DFEPS): Transfers the drum phase
system error data to the digital filter when the data write is enforced.
Bit 2
DFEPS Description
0 Error data is transferred by HSW (NHSW) signal latching. (Initial value)
1 Error data is transferred when the data is written.
Bit 1⎯Capstan Speed System Error Data Transfer Bit (CFESS): Transfers the capstan phase
system error data to the digital filter when the data write is enforced.
Bit 1
CFESS Description
0 Error data is transferred by DVCFG signal latching. (Initial value)
1 Error data is transferred when the data is written.
Bit 0⎯Drum Speed System Error Data Transfer Bit (DFESS): Transfers the drum speed
system error data to the digital filter when the data write is enforced.
Bit 0
DFESS Description
0 Error data is transferred by NCDFG signal latching. (Initial value)
1 Error data is transferred when the data is written.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 673 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
26.11.6 Filter Characteristics
• Lag-Lead Filter
A filter required for a servo loop is built in the hardware. This filter uses IIR (infinite impulse
response) type digital filter (another type of the digital filter is FIR, i.e. finite impulse response
type). This digital filter circuit implements a lag-lead filter, as shown in figure 26.40.
R1
R2
C
+
INPUT OUTPUT
Figure 26.40 Lag-Lead Filter
The transfer function is expressed by the following equation:
S
1 + 2f
2
Transfer function G (S) = S
1 + 2πf1
f1 = 1/2π C (R1 + R2)
f2 = 1 / 2π CR2
π
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 674 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
• Frequency Characteristics
The computation circuit repeats computation of the function, which is obtained by s-z
conversion according to bi-linear approximation of the transfer function on the s-plane. Figure
26.41 shows the frequency characteristics of the lag-lead filter.
f1
0
f2
Frequency (Hz)
20log(f1/f2)
gain(dB)phase(deg)
Figure 26.41 Frequency Characteristics of the Lag-Lead Filter
The pulse transfer function G (Z) is obtained by the bi-linear approximation of the transfer G
(S).
In the transfer G (S),
S = ·
2
Ts
1 – Z–1
1 + Z–1
Where, assumed that Z-1 = e-jωTs,
G (Z) = G ·· 2
Ts
1 + AZ–1
1 + BZ–1
G (Z) =
Ts + 1
πf2
Ts + 1
πf1
A =
Ts – 1
πf2
Ts + 1
πf2
B =
Ts – 1
πf1
Ts + 1
πf1
Ts: Sampling cycle (sec)
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 675 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
26.11.7 Operations in Case of Transient Response
In case of transient response when the motor is activated, the digital filter computation circuit
must prevent computation due to a large error. The convergence of the computations becomes
slow and servo retraction deteriorates if a large error is input to the filter circuit when it is
performing repeated computations. To prevent them from occurring, operate the filter (set
constants A and B) after pulling in the speed and phase within a certain range of error, initialize
the Z-1 (set initial values in CZp, CZs, DZp, DZs)(see section 26.11.8, Initialization of Z-1), or use
the error data limit function (see section 26.6, Drum Speed Error Detector, and section 26.8,
Capstan Speed Error Detector).
26.11.8 Initialization of Z-1
Z-1 can be initialized by its delay initialization register (CZp, CZs, DZp, DZs). Loading to Z-1 is
performed automatically by bits 4 and 3 of CFIC and DFIC (CZPON, CZSON, DZPON,
DZSON). Writing in register is always available, but loading in Z-1 is not possible when the digital
filter is performing computation in relation to such register. In such a case, loading to Z-1 will be
done when the next time computation begins. Figure 26.42 shows the initialization circuit of Z-1.
The delay initialization register sets 12-bit data. The MSB (bit 11) is a sign bit. Z-1 has 24 bits for
integrals and 8 bits for decimals. Accordingly, the same value as the sign bit should be set in the
13 bits on the MSB side of Z-1, and 0 in the entire decimal section.
Example: Value set for the delay initialization register Value set for Z-1
MSB
0
MSB
Set here the value in the
sign bit
Fixed
1 0000000000 1111111111111 00000000000 00000000
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 676 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
W W
Internal bus
Z -1initiali-
zation bit
DZSON
DZPON
CZSON
CZSON
W
16 16
12
24 8
W
Delay initialization
register
Z -1
USn
-+
Res
Note: MSB of 12-bit data to be written in the delay initialization register is a sign bit.
Usn-1
+
+
Xn Vn
DBs15 to 0
DBp15 to 0
CBs15 to 0
CBp15 to 0
DZs11 to 0
DZp11 to 0
CZs11 to 0
CZp11 to 0
DAs15 to 0
DAp15 to 0
CAs15 to 0
CAp15 to 0
AB
Figure 26.42 Z-1 Initialization Circuit
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 677 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
26.12 Additional V Signal Generator
26.12.1 Overview
The additional V signal generator outputs an additional vertical sync signal to take the place of
Vsync in special playback. It is activated at both edges of the HSW signal output by the head-
switch timing generator. The head-switch timing generator also outputs a V pulse signal
containing the additional vertical sync pulse itself, and an M level signal that defines the width of
the additional vertical sync signal including the equalizing pulses.
The additional V signal is output at a three-level output pin (V pulse).
Figure 26.43 shows the additional V signal control circuit.
Csync
Additional V pulse
OSCH
Vpulse signal
Mlevel signal
Sync signal detector
HSW timing
generator
Additional V
pulse generator
Figure 26.43 Additional V Pulse Control Circuit
HSW Timing Generator: This circuit generates signals that are synchronized with head
switching. It should be programmed to generate the Mlevel and Vpulse signals at edges of the
HSW signal (VideoFF). For details, see section 26.4, HSW (Head-switch) Timing Generator.
Sync Signal Detector: This circuit detects pulses of the width specified by VTR or HTR from the
signal input at the Csync pin and generates an internal horizontal sync signal (OSCH). The sync
signal detector has an interpolation function, so OSCH has a regular period even if there are
horizontal sync dropouts in the signal received at the pin. For details, see section 26.15, Sync
Signal Detector.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 678 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
26.12.2 Pin Configuration
Table 26.16 summarizes the pin configuration of the additional V signal.
Table 26.16 Pin Configuration
Name Abbrev. I/O Function
Additional V pulse pin Vpulse Output Output of additional V signal synchronized to
video FF
26.12.3 Register Configuration
Table 26.17 summarizes the register that controls the additional V signal.
Table 26.17 Register Configuration
Name Abbrev. R/W Size Initial Value Address
Additional V control register ADDVR R/W Byte H'E0 H'D06F
26.12.4 Register Description
Additional V Control Register (ADDVR)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
1
67
———
——— R/WR/W
HMSK Hi-Z CUT VPON POL
11
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
ADDVR is an 8-bit read/write register. It is initialized to H'E0 by a reset, and in standby mode.
Bits 7 to 5⎯Reserved: Cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
Bit 4⎯OSCH Mask (HMSK): Masks the OSCH signal in the additional V signal.
Bit 4
HMSK Description
0 OSCH is added in (Initial value)
1 OSCH is not added in
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 679 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 3⎯High Impedance (Hi-Z): Set to 1 when the intermediate level is generated by an external
circuit.
Bit 3
Hi-Z Description
0 Vpulse is a three-level output pin (Initial value)
1 Vpulse is a three-state output pin (high, low, or high-impedance)
Bits 2 to 0⎯Additional V Output Control (CUT, VPON, POL): These bits control the output
at the additional V pin.
Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
CUT VPON POL Description
0 * Low level (Initial value)
0 Negative polarity (see figure 26.46)
0
1
1 Positive polarity (see figure 26.45)
1 * 0 Intermediate level (high impedance if Hi-Z bit = 1)
1 High level
Legend: * Don’t care.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 680 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
26.12.5 Additional V Pulse Signal
Figure 26.44 shows the additional V pulse signal. The M level and V pulse signals are generated
by the head-switch timing generator. The OSCH signal is combined with these to produce
equalizing pulses. The polarity can be selected by the POL bit in the additional V control register
(ADDVR). V pulse pin outputs a low level by a reset, and in standby mode and module stop
mode.
R/WR/W
•ADDVR •ADDVR
R/W
Internal bus
R/W R/W
CUTVPON HMSK POL Hi-Z STBY
VCC VCC
VSS VSS
Rs
Rs
V pulse pin
OSCH
V pulse
M level
Note:
STBY : Power-down mode signal
V pulse, M level : Signal from the HSW timing generator
Rs : Voltage division resistance (20 kΩ: reference value)
Figure 26.44 Additional V Pulse Pin
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 681 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Additional V Pulses When Sync Signal is Not Detected: With additional V pulses, the pulse
signal (OSCH) detected by the sync signal detector is superimposed on the V pulse and Mlevel
signals generated by the head-switch timing generator. If there is a lot of noise in the input sync
signal (Csync), or a pulse is missing, OSCH will be a complementary pulse, and therefore an H
pulse of the period set in HRTR and HPWR will be superimposed. In this case, there may be slight
timing drift compared with the normal sync signal, depending on the HRTR and HPWR setting,
with resultant discontinuity.
If no sync signal is input, the additional V pulse is generated as a complementary pulse. Set the
sync signal detector registers and activate the sync signal detector by manipulating the SYCT bit
in the sync signal control register (SYNCR). See section 26.15.7, Activation of the Sync Signal
Detector.
Figures 26.45 and 26.46 show the additional V pulse timing charts.
HSW signal edge
OSCH
Notes: VPON = 1
CUT = 0
POL = 1
Additional
V pulse
Vpulse
signal
Mlevel
signal
Figure 26.45 Additional V Pulse when Positive Polarity Is Specified
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 682 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
HSW signal edge
OSCH
Notes: VPON = 1
CUT = 0
POL = 0
Additional
V pulse
V pulse
signal
M level
signal
Figure 26.46 Additional V Pulse when Negative Polarity Is Specified
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 683 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
26.13 CTL Circuit
26.13.1 Overview
The CTL circuit includes a Schmitt amplifier that amplifies and reshapes the CTL input, then
outputs it as the PB-CTL signal to the servo, linear time counter, and other circuits.
The PB-CTL signal is also sent to a duty discriminator in the CTL circuit that detects and records
VISS, ASM, and VASS marks. A REC-CTL amplifier is included in the record circuits. Detection
and recording whether the CTL pulse pattern is long or short can also be enabled to correspond to
the wide-aspect.
The following operating modes can be selected by settings in the CTL mode register:
• Duty discrimination
VISS detect, ASM detect, VASS detect, L/S bit pattern detect
• CTL record
VISS record, ASM record, VASS record, L/S bit pattern record
• Rewrite
Trapezoid waveform generator
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 684 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
26.13.2 Block Diagram
Figure 26.47 shows a block diagram of the CTL circuit.
+ -
PB-CTL
FW/RV
CTL(-)CTL(+)
Schmitt
amplifier
CTL mode
CTL
detector
Duty dis-
criminator
Bit pattern
register
VISS detect
VISS
control circuit
VISS write
Duty I/O flag
Write control
circuit
REC-
CTL amplifier
Internal bus
REF30X
IRRCTL
Figure 26.47 Block Diagram of CTL Circuit
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 685 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
26.13.3 Pin Configuration
Table 26.18 summarizes the pin configuration of the CTL circuit.
Table 26.18 Pin Configuration
Name Abbrev. I/O Function
CTL (+) I/O pin CTL (+) I/O CTL signal input/output
CTL (–) I/O pin CTL (–) I/O CTL signal input/output
CTL bias input pin CTL Bias Input CTL primary amplifier bias supply
CTL Amp (O) output pin CTLAmp (O) Output CTL amplifier output
CTL SMT (i) input pin CTLSMT (i) Input CTL Schmitt amplifier input
CTL FB input pin CTL FB Input CTL amplifier high-range characteristics
control
CTL REF output pin CTL REF Output CTL amplifier reference voltage output
26.13.4 Register Configuration
Table 26.19 shows the register configuration of the CTL circuit.
Table 26.19 Register Configuration
Name Abbrev. R/W Size Initial Value Address
CTL control register CTCR R/W Byte H'30 H'D080
CTL mode register CTLM R/W Byte H'00 H'D081
REC-CTL duty data register 1 RCDR1 W Word H'F000 H'D082
REC-CTL duty data register 2 RCDR2 W Word H'F000 H'D084
REC-CTL duty data register 3 RCDR3 W Word H'F000 H'D086
REC-CTL duty data register 4 RCDR4 W Word H'F000 H'D088
REC-CTL duty data register 5 RCDR5 W Word H'F000 H'D08A
Duty I/O register DI/O R/W Byte H'F1 H'D08C
Bit pattern register BTPR R/W Byte H'FF H'D08D
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 686 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
26.13.5 Register Description
CTL Control Register (CTCR)
0
0
1
0
R
2
0
W
3
0
4
1
W
5
1
6
0
7
WW W
FSLB
W
FSLC
0
W
NT/PL FSLA CCS LCTL UNCTL SLWM
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
CTCR is an 8-bit read/write register that controls PB-CTL rewrite and sets the slow mode. When
CTL pulse cannot be detected with the input amplifier gain set at the CTL gain control register
(CTLGR) in PB-CTL circuit, bit 1 (UNCTL) of CTCR is set to 1. It is automatically cleared to 0
when CTL pulse is detected.
Bit 1 is read-only, and the rest are write-only. If a read is attempted to a write-only bit, an
undetermined value is read out.
CTCR is initialized to H'30 by a reset, and in standby and module stop mode.
Bit 7⎯NTSC/PAL Select (NT/PL): Selects the period of the rewrite circuit.
Bit 7
NT/PL Description
0 NTSC mode (frame rate: 30 Hz) (Initial value)
1 PAL mode (frame rate: 25 Hz)
Bits 6 to 4⎯Frequency Select (FSLA, FSLB, FSLC); These bits select the operating frequency
of the CTL write circuit. They should be set according to fOSC.
Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 3
FSLC FSLB FSLA Description
0 Reserved (do not use this setting) 0
1 Reserved (do not use this setting)
0 fosc = 8 MHz
0
1
1 fosc = 10 MHz (Initial value)
1 * * Reserved (do not use this setting)
Legend: * Don’t care.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 687 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bits 3⎯Clock Source Select Bit (CCS): Selects clock source of CTL.
Bit 3
CCS Description
0 φs (Initial value)
1 φs/2
Bit 2⎯Long CTL Bit (LCTL): Sets the long CTL detection mode.
Bit 2
LCTL Description
0 Clock source (CCS) operates at the setting value (Initial value)
1 Clock source (CCS) operates for further 8-division after operating at the setting value
Bit 1⎯CTL Undetected Bit (UNCTL): Indicates the CTL pulse detection status at the CTL
input amplifier sensitivity set at the CTL gain control register.
Bit 1
UNCTL Description
0 Detected (Initial value)
1 Undetected
Bit 0⎯Mode Select Bit (SLWM): Selects CTL mode.
Bit 0
SLWM Description
0 Normal mode (Initial value)
1 Slow mode
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 688 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
CTL Mode Register (CTLM)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
0
6
0
7
R/WR/WR/W
FW/RV
R/W
REC/PB
0
R/W
ASM MD4 MD3 MD2 MD1 MD0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
CTLM is an 8-bit read/write register that controls the operating state of the CTL circuit. If 1 is
written in bits MD3 and MD2, they will be cleared to 0 one cycle (φ) later.
CTLM is initialized to H'00 by a reset, and in standby mode and module stop mode. When CTL is
being stopped, only bits 7, 6 and 5 operate.
Note: Do not set any value other than the setting value for each mode (see table 26.20, CTL
Mode Functions).
Bits 7 and 6⎯Record/Playback Mode Bits (ASM, REC/PB): These bits switch between record
and playback. Combined with bits 4 to 0 (MD4 to MD0), they support the VISS, VASS, and ASM
mark functions.
Bit 7 Bit 6
ASM REC/PB Description
0 Playback mode (Initial value) 0
1 Record mode
1 0 Assemble mode
1 Invalid (do not set)
Bit 5⎯Direction (FW/RV): Selects the direction in playback. Clear this bit to 0 during record.
Figure 26.48 shows the PB-CTL signal.
Bit 5
FW/RV Description
0 Forward (Initial value)
1 Reverse
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 689 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
CTL input
PB-CTL
FWD
REV
Figure 26.48 Internal PB-CTL Signal in Forward and Reverse
Bits 4 to 0⎯CTL Mode Select (MD4 to MD0): These bits select the detect, record, and rewrite
modes for VISS, VASS, and ASM marks. If 1 is written in bits MD3 and MD2, they will be
cleared to 0 one cycle (φ) later.
The 5 bits from MD4 to MD0 are used in combination with bits 7 and 6 (ASM and REC/PB).
Table 26.20 describes the modes.
Table 26.20 CTL Mode Functions
Bit
ASM R/P F/R MD4 MD3 MD2 MD1 MD0 Mode Description
0 0 0/1 0 0 0 0 0 VASS
detect
(duty
detect)
PB-CTL duty discrimination
(Initial value)
• Duty I/O flag is set to 1 if duty ≥
44% is detected
• Duty I/O flag is cleared to 0 if duty
< 44% is detected
• Interrupt request is generated
when one CTL pulse has been
detected
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 VASS
record
• If 0 is written in the duty I/O flag,
REC-CTL is generated and
recorded with the duty cycle set by
register RCDR2 or RCDR3
• If 1 is written in the duty I/O flag,
REC-CTL is generated and
recorded with the duty cycle set by
register RCDR4 or RCDR5
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 VASS
rewrite
Same as above (VASS record);
trapezoid waveform circuit operation
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 690 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit
ASM R/P F/R MD4 MD3 MD2 MD1 MD0 Mode Description
0 0 0/1 0 1 0 0 1 VISS
detect
(index
detect)
• The duty I/O flag is set to 1 at the
point of write access to register
CTLM
• The 1 pulses recognized by the
duty discrimination circuit are
counted in the VISS control circuit
• The duty I/O flag is cleared to 0,
indicating VISS detection, when
the value set at VCTR register is
repeatedly detected
• An interrupt request is generated
when VISS is detected
0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 VISS
record
(index
record)
• 64 pulse data with 0 pulse data at
both edge are written (index
record)
• The index bit string is written
through the duty I/O flag
• An interrupt request is generated
at the end of VISS recording
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 VISS
rewrite
Same as above (VISS record;
trapezoid waveform circuit operation)
0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 VISS
initialize
VISS write is forcibly aborted
1 0 0/1 0 0 0 0 0 ASM
mark
detect
ASM mark detection
• The duty I/O flag is cleared to 0
when PB-CTL duty ≥ 66% is
detected
• An interrupt request is generated
when an ASM mark is detected
0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 ASM
mark
record
• An ASM mark is recorded by
writing 0 in the duty I/O flag
• An interrupts is requested for
every one CTL pulse
• REC-CTL is generated and
recorded with the duty cycle set by
register RCDR3
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 691 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
REC-CTL Duty Data Register 1 (RCDR1)
131415 103254769811 10
CMT11
W
12
1111
————
————
0
CMT10
W
0
CMT13
W
0
CMT12
W
0
CMT15
W
0
CMT14
W
0
CMT17
W
0
CMT16
W
0
CMT19
W
0
CMT18
W
0
CMT1B
W
0
CMT1A
W
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
RCDR1 is a 12-bit write-only register that sets the REC-CTL rising timing. This setting is valid
only for recording and rewriting, and is not used in detection.
Only a word access is valid. If a byte access is attempted, correct operation is not guaranteed. If a
read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. Bits 15 to 12 are reserved and are not
affected by write access.
RCDR1 is initialized to H'F000 by a reset, and in standby mode, module stop mode and CTL stop
mode.
The value to set in RCDR1 can be calculated from the transition timing T1 and the servo clock
frequency φs by the equation given below. See figure 26.60. Any transition timing can be set. The
timing should be selected with attention to playback tracking compensation and the latch timing
for phase control.
RCDR1 = T1 × φs/64
φs is the servo clock frequency (= fOSC/2) in Hz, and T1 is the set timing (s).
Note: 0 cannot be set to RCDR1. Set a value 1 or above.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 692 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
REC-CTL Duty Data Register 2 (RCDR2)
1111
131415 103254769811 10
CMT21
W
12
————
————
0
CMT20
W
0
CMT23
W
0
CMT22
W
0
CMT25
W
0
CMT24
W
0
CMT27
W
0
CMT26
W
0
CMT29
W
0
CMT28
W
0
CMT2B
W
0
CMT2A
W
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
RCDR2 is a 12-bit write-only register that sets 1 pulse (short) falling timing of REC-CTL at
recording and rewriting, and detects long/short pulses at detecting.
Only a word access is valid. If a byte access is attempted, correct operation is not guaranteed. If a
read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. Bits 15 to 12 are reserved and are not
affected by write access.
RCDR2 is initialized to H'F000 by a reset, and in standby mode, module stop mode, and CTL stop
mode.
At recording, the value to set in RCDR2 can be calculated from the transition timing T2 and the
servo clock frequency φs by the equation given below, and the set value should be 25% of the duty
obtained by the equation. See figure 26.60.
RCDR2 = T2 × φ s/64
φs is the servo clock frequency (= fOSC/2) in Hz, and T2 is the set timing (s).
At bit pattern detection, set the 1 pulse long/short threshold value at FWD. See figure 26.56.
RCDR2 = T2' × φ s/64
φs is the servo clock frequency (= fOSC/2) in Hz, and T2' is the 1 pulse long/short threshold value at
FWD (s).
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 693 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
REC-CTL Duty Data Register 3 (RCDR3)
1111
131415 103254769811 10
CMT31
W
12
————
————
0
CMT30
W
0
CMT33
W
0
CMT32
W
0
CMT35
W
0
CMT34
W
0
CMT37
W
0
CMT36
W
0
CMT39
W
0
CMT38
W
0
CMT3B
W
0
CMT3A
W
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
RCDR3 is a 12-bit write-only register that sets 1 pulse (long) and assemble mark falling timing of
REC-CTL at recording and rewriting, and detects long/short pulses at detecting.
Only a word access is valid. If a byte access is attempted, correct operation is not guaranteed. If a
read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. Bits 15 to 12 are reserved and are not
affected by write access.
RCDR3 is initialized to H'F000 by a reset, and in standby mode, module stop mode, and CTL stop
mode.
At recording, the value to set in RCDR3 can be calculated from the transition timing T3 and the
servo clock frequency φs by the equation given below. The set value should be 30 percent of the
duty when the RCDR3 is used for REC-CTL 1 pulse, and 67 to 70 percent when used for assemble
mark. The set value must not exceed the frequency of REF30X. See figure 26.60.
RCDR3 = T3 × φs/64
φs is the servo clock frequency (= fOSC/2) in Hz, and T3 is the set timing (s).
At bit pattern detection, set the 0 pulse long/short threshold value at FWD. See figure 26.56.
RCDR3 = T3' × φs/64
φs is the servo clock frequency (= fOSC/2) in Hz, and T3' is the 0 pulse long/short threshold value at
FWD (s).
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 694 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
REC-CTL Duty Data Register 4 (RCDR4)
1111
131415 103254769811 10
CMT41
W
12
————
————
0
CMT40
W
0
CMT43
W
0
CMT42
W
0
CMT45
W
0
CMT44
W
0
CMT47
W
0
CMT46
W
0
CMT49
W
0
CMT48
W
0
CMT4B
W
0
CMT4A
W
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
RCDR4 is a 12-bit write-only register that sets the timing of falling edge of the 0 pulse (short) of
REC-CTL in record or rewrite mode. In detection mode, it is used to detect the long/short pulse.
Only a word access is valid. If a byte access is attempted, correct operation is not guaranteed. If a
read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. Bits 15 to 12 are reserved, and no write in
them is valid.
It is initialized to H'F000 by a reset, stand-by or module stop.
In record mode, set a value with the 57.5 percent duty cycle obtained from the set time T4
corresponding to the frequency φs according to the following equation. See figure 26.60.
RCDR4 = T4 × φ s/64
φ is the servo clock frequency (= fOSC/2) in Hz, and T4 is the set timing (s).
At bit pattern detection, set the 0 pulse long/short threshold value at REV. See figure 26.56.
RCDR4 = H'FFF − (T4' × φ s/80)
φs is the servo clock frequency (= fOSC/2) in Hz, and T4' is the 0 pulse long/short threshold value at
REV (s).
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 695 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
REC-CTL Duty Data Register 5 (RCDR5)
1111
131415 103254769811 10
CMT51
W
12
————
————
0
CMT50
W
0
CMT53
W
0
CMT52
W
0
CMT55
W
0
CMT54
W
0
CMT57
W
0
CMT56
W
0
CMT59
W
0
CMT58
W
0
CMT5B
W
0
CMT5A
W
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
RCDR5 is a 12-bit write-only register that sets the timing of falling edge of the 0 pulse (short) of
REC-CTL in record or rewrite mode. In detection mode, it is used to detect the long/short pulse.
Only a word access is valid. If a byte access is attempted, correct operation is not guaranteed. If a
read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. Bits 15 to 12 are reserved, and no write in
them is valid.
It is initialized to H'F000 by a reset, stand-by or module stop.
In record mode, set a value with the 62.5 percent duty cycle obtained from the set time T5
corresponding to the frequency φs according to the following equation. See figure 26.60.
RCDR5 = T5 × φ s/64
φ is the servo clock frequency (= fOSC/2) in Hz, and T5 is the set timing (s).
At bit pattern detection, set the 1 pulse long/short threshold value at REV. See figure 26.56.
RCDR5 = H'FFF − (T5' × φ s/80)
φs is the servo clock frequency (= fOSC/2) in Hz, and T5' is the 1 pulse long/short threshold value at
REV (s).
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 696 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Duty I/O Register (DI/O)
0
1
1
0
R/(W)*
2
0
W
3
0
4
—
—
5
1
67
R/WWW
VCTR0
1
W
VCTR1
1
W
VCTR2 BPON BPS BPF DI/O
1
Note: * Only 0 can be written
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
DI/O is an 8-bit register that confirms and determines the operating status of the CTL circuit.
It is initialized to H'F1 by a reset, and in standby mode, module stop mode, and CTL stop mode.
Bits 7 to 5⎯VISS Interrupt Setting Bit (VCTR2 to VCTR0): Combination of VCTR2, VCTR1
and VCTR0 sets number of 1 pulse detection in VISS detection mode. Detecting the set number of
pulse detection is considered as VISS detection, and an interrupt request is generated.
Note: When changing the detection pulse number during VISS detection, initialize VISS first,
then resume the VISS detection setting.
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5
VCTR2 VCTR1 VCTR0 Number of 1-Pulse for Detection
0 2 0
1 4 (SYNC mark)
0 6
0
1
1 8 (mark A, short)
1 0 12 (mark A, long)
0
1 16
1 0 24 (mark B)
1 32
Bit 4⎯Reserved: Cannot be modified and is always read as 1.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 697 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 3⎯Bit Pattern Detection ON/OFF Bit (BPON): Determines ON or OFF of bit pattern
detection.
Note: When writing 1 to BPON bit, be sure to set appropriate data to RCDR 2 to 5 beforehand.
Bit 3
BPON Description
0 Bit pattern detection off (Initial value)
1 Bit pattern detection on
Bit 2⎯Bit Pattern Detection Start Bit (BPS): Starts 8-bit bit pattern detection. When 1 is
written to this bit, it returns to 0 after one cycle. Writing 0 to this bit does not affect operation.
Bit 2
BPS Description
0 Normal status (Initial value)
1 Starts 8-bit bit pattern detection
Bit 1⎯Bit Pattern Detection Flag (BPF): Sets flag every time 8-bit PB-CTL is detected in PB or
ASM mode. To clear flag, write 0 after reading 1.
Bit 1
BPF Description
0 Bit pattern (8-bit) is not detected (Initial value)
1 Bit pattern (8-bit) is detected
Bit 0⎯Duty I/O Register (DI/O): This flag has different functions for record and playback.
In VISS detect mode, VASS detect mode, and ASM mark detect mode, this flag indicates the
detection result.
In VISS record or rewrite mode, this flag controls the write control circuit so as to write an index
code, operating according to a control signal from the VISS control circuit.
In VASS record or rewrite mode and ASM mark record mode, this flag is used for write control,
one CTL pulse at a time.
This bit can always be written to, but this does not affect the write control circuit in modes other
than VISS record, rewrite, and ASM record.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 698 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
• VISS Detect Mode and VASS Detect Mode: The duty I/O flag indicates the result of duty
discrimination. The duty I/O flag is 1 when the duty cycle of the PB-CTL signal is above 44%
(a 0 pulse in the CTL signal). The duty I/O flag is 0 when the duty cycle of the PB-CTL signal
is below 43% (a 1 pulse in the CTL signal).
• ASM Mark Detect Mode: The duty I/O flag indicates the result of duty discrimination. The
duty I/O flag is 0 when the duty cycle of the PB-CTL signal is above 66% (when an ASM
mark is detected).
The duty I/O flag is 1 when the duty cycle of the PB-CTL signal is below 65% (when an ASM
mark is not detected).
• VISS Record Mode and VISS Rewrite Mode: The duty I/O flag operates according to a control
signal from the VISS control circuit, and controls the write control circuit so as to write an
index code. The write timing is set in the REC-CTL duty data registers (RCDR1 to RCDR5).
For VISS recording, registers RCDR1 to RCDR5 are set with reference to REF30X. For VISS
rewrite, RCDR2 to RCDR5 are set with reference to the low-to-high transition of the
previously recorded CTL signal, and the write is carried out through the trapezoid waveform
generator.
Set the duty timing for a 1 pulse (short) in RCDR2, for a 1 pulse (long) in RCDR3, for a 0
pulse (short) in RCDR4, and for a 0 pulse (long) in RCDR5.
While an index code is being written, the value of the bit being written can be read by reading
the duty I/O flag. If the CTL signal currently being written is a 0 pulse, the duty I/O flag will
read 1. If the CTL signal currently being written is a 1 pulse, the duty I/O flag will read 0.
• VASS Record Mode and VASS Rewrite Mode: The duty I/O flag is used for write control, one
CTL pulse at a time. The write timing is set in the REC-CTL duty data registers (RCDR1 to
RCDR5). For VASS recording, registers RCDR1 to RCDR5 are set with reference to REF30X.
For VASS rewrite, RCDR2 to RCDR5 are set with reference to the low-to-high transition of
the previously recorded CTL signal, and the write is carried out through the trapezoid
waveform generator.
Set the duty timing for a 1 pulse (short) in RCDR2, for a 1 pulse (long) in RCDR3, for a 0
pulse (short) in RCDR4, and for 0 pulse (long) in RCDR5.
If 0 is written in the duty I/O flag, a CTL pulse will be written with a duty cycle set in RCDR2
and RCDR3, referenced to the immediately following REF30X. If 1 is written in the duty I/O
flag, a CTL pulse will be written with a duty cycle set in RCDR4 and RCDR5, referenced to
the immediately following REF30X.
• ASM Record Mode: The duty I/O flag is used for write control, one CTL pulse at a time. The
write timing is set in the REC-CTL duty data registers (RCDR1 and RCDR3). If 0 is written in
the duty I/O flag, a CTL pulse will be written with a duty cycle of 67% to 70% as set in
RCDR3, referenced to the immediately following REF30X.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 699 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit Pattern Register (BTPR)
0
1
1
1
R/W*
2
1
R/W*
3
1
45
1
67
R/W*R/W*R/W*
LSP5
1
R/W*
LSP4
1
R/W*
LSP6
1
R/W*
LSP7 LSP3 LSP2 LSP1 LSP0
Note: * Write is prohibited when bit pattern detection is selected.
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
BTPR is an 8-bit shift register which detects and records the bit pattern of the CTL pulses. If a
CTL pulse is detected in PB or ASM mode, the register is shifted leftward at the rising edge of
PB-CTL, and reflects the determined result of long/short on the bit 0 (long pulse = 1, short pulse =
0).
If BPON bit is set to 1 in PB mode, the register starts detection of bit pattern immediately after the
CTL pulse. To exit the bit pattern detection, set the BPON bit at 0.
If 1 was written in the BPS bit when the bit pattern is being detected, the BPF bit is set at 1 when
an 8-bit bit pattern was detected. If continuous detection of 8-bits is required, write 0 in the BPF
bit, and then write 1 in BPS bit.
At the time of VISS detection, the bit pattern detection is disabled. Set the BPON bit to 0 at the
time of VISS detection.
In REC mode, the register record the long/shorts in the bit pattern set in BTPR. The pulse in
record mode is determined always by bit 7 (LSP7) of BTPR. BTPR records one pulse, shifts
leftward, and stores the data of bit 7 to bit 0.
BTPR is initialized to H'FF by a reset, in stand-by, module stop, or CTL stop mode.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 700 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
26.13.6 Operation
CTL Circuit Operation: As shown in figure 26.49, the CTL discrimination/record circuit is
composed of a 16-bit up/down counter and 12-bit registers (×5).
In playback (PB) mode, the 16-bit up/down counter counts on a φs/4 clock when the PB-CTL
pulse is high, and on a φs/5 clock when low. In record or slow mode, this counter increments the
count on a φs/4 clock. In ASM mode, this counter increments the count on a φs/8 clock when the
pulse is high, and on a φs/4 clock when low.
This counter always counts up in record and slow modes.
In playback or slow mode, it is cleared on the rise of PB-CTL signal. In record mode, it is cleared
on the rise of REF30X signal.
φs/4
(φs/8)
φs/5
(φs/4)
REC-CTL↓(L0)
RCDR5
REC-CTL↓(S0)
RCDR4
REC-CTL↓(L1and ASM)
RCDR3
REC-CTL↓(S1)
RCDR2
REC-CTL↑
Match
detection
Match
detection
Match
detection
Match
detection
Match
detection
RCDR1
12-bit register
Legend:
UDF: Underflows when PB-CTL
duty is 43% or less
DOWN
UDF
Upper 12 bits
UP
UP/DOWN counter (16 bits) Duty
detection
Counter clear signal
REF30X ↑ (REC)
PB-CTL ↑ (PB, ASM)
Up/Down control signal
REC: UP
PB, ASM:
UP when PB-CTL is high
Down when PB-CTL is low
Figure 26.49 CTL Discrimination/Record Circuit
CTL Mode Register (CTLM) Switchover Timing: CTLM is enabled immediately after data is
written to the register. Care must be taken with changes in the operating state.
Capstan phase control is performed by the VD sync REF30X (X-value + tracking value) and PB-
CTL in ASM mode, and by the REF30P or CREF and CFG division signal (DVCFG2) in REC
mode. If CAPREF30 signal to be used for capstan phase control is always generated by XDR, the
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 701 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
value of XDR must be overwritten when switching between PB and REC modes. Figures 26.50
and 26.51 show examples of switch timing of CTLM and XDR.
VD
DVCFG2
REF30X
16bit
UP/DOWN
counter
HSW
CTL
Tx
Latch Preset
The X-value is updated by REF30P. Modification of XDR must be performed before REF30P
in the cycle in which the X-value is changed.
X-value
X-value
after
change
RCDR3RCDR1 RCDR2
REF30P
Ta
PB-CTL
Tb
1 pulse
UDF
0 pulse 0 pulse
CDIVR2
Register write
1 pulse
X-value (XDR) is
rewritten in this
cycle
RCDR1
Capstan phase control
ASM mode, PB mode : REF30X-PB-CTL
REC mode : REF30P-DVCFG2
φ/4
φ/5 φ/4
REC-CTL
Notes: 1. Ta is the interval calculated from RCDR3.
2. Tb is the interval in which switchover is performed from ASM mode to REC mode.
3. Tx is the cycle in which the REF30X period is shortened due to the change of XDR.
Figure 26.50 Example of CTLM Switchover Timing
(When Phase Control Is Performed by REF30P and DVCFG2 in REC Mode)
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 702 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
VD
CREF
REF30X
16bit
UP/DOWN
counter
HSW
CTL
Tx
Latch Preset
The X-value is updated by REF30P. Modification of XDR must be performed before REF30P
in the cycle in which the X-value is changed.
X value
X-value after
change
RCDR3RCDR1 RCDR2
REF30P
Ta
PB-CTL
Tb
1 pulse0 pulse 0 pulse
ASM-REC
switchover
Notes: 1. Ta is the interval calculated from RCDR3.
2. Tb is the interval in which switchover is performed from ASM mode to REC mode.
3. Tx is the cycle in which the REF30X period is shortened due to the change of XDR.
4. With CREF and DVCFG2 phase alignment, the frequency need not be 25 Hz or 30 Hz.
1 pulse
X-value (XDR) is
rewritten in this
cycle
DVCFG2
RCDR1
Capstan phase control
ASM mode, PB mode: REF30X-PB-CTL
Capstan phase control
REC mode : CREF30P-DVCFG2
φ/4
φ/5 φ/4
REC-CTL
CDIVR2
Register write
UDF
Figure 26.51 Example of CTLM Switchover Timing
(When Phase Control Is Performed by CREF and DVCFG2 in REC Mode)
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 703 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
26.13.7 CTL Input Section
The CTL input section consists of an input amplifier of which gain can be controlled by the
register setting and a Schmitt amplifier. Figure 26.52 shows a block diagram of the CTL input
section.
Trivial CTL pulse signal is received from the CTL head, amplified by the input amplifier,
reshaped into a square wave by the Schmitt amplifier, and sent to the servo circuits, and the Timer
L as the PB-CTL signal. Control the CTL input amplifier gain by bits 3 to 0 in CTL gain control
register (CTLGR) of the servo port.
–
+
+
–
CTLFB
CTLSMT(i)CTLFBCTLREF CTLBias
CTLGR0CTLGR3 to 1
AMPSHORT
(REC-CTL)
PB-CTL(+)
Note : Be sure to set a capacitor between CTLAmp (o) and CTLSMT (i).
Note
PB-CTL(-)
AMPON
(PB-CTL)
– +
CTLAmp(o)CTL(+)CTL(-)
Figure 26.52 Block Diagram of CTL Input Amplifier
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 704 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
CTL Detector: If the CTL detector fails to detect a CTL pulse, it sets the CTL control register
(CTCR) bit 1 to 1 indicating that the pulse has not been detected. If a CTL pulse is detected after
that, the bit is automatically cleared to 0. Duration used for determining detection or non-detection
of the pulse depends on magnitude of phase shift of the last detected pulse from the reference
phase (phase difference between REF30 and CTL signal). Typically, detection or non-detection is
determined within 3 to 4 cycles of the reference period.
If settings of the CTL gain control register are maintained in a table format, you can refer to it
when the CTL detector failed to detect CTL pulses. From the table, you can control amplifier gain
of the CTL according to state of UNCTL bit, thereby selecting an optimum CTL amplifier gain
depending on state of the pulse recorded.
Figure 26.53 illustrates concept of gain control for detecting the CTL input pulse.
*
V+TH (fixed)
*
V-TH (fixed)
Note: * CTL input sensitivity is variable depending on CTL
gain control register (CTLGR) setting.
Figure 26.53 CTL Input Pulse Gain Control
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 705 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
PB-CTL Waveform Shaper in Slow Mode Operation: If bit 0 in CTL control register (CTCR)
is set to slow mode, slow reset function is activated. In slow mode, if falling edge is not detected
within the specified time from rising edge detection, PB-CTL is forcibly shut down (slow reset).
The time TFS (s) until the signal falls is the following interval after the rising edge of the internal
CTL signal is detected:
TFS = 16384 × 4/φ s (φs = fOSC/2)
When fOSC = 10 MHz, TFS = 13.1 ms.
Figure 26.54 shows the PB-CTL waveform in slow mode.
CTL waveform
Internal CTL signal
1 frame 1 frame 1 frame
Slow tracking delaySlow tracking delaySlow tracking delay
Accelera-
tion Accelera-
tion Accelera-
tion
Decelera-
tion Decelera-
tion
Slow reset
Stop Stop
CTLP↑CTLP↑CTLP↑
Figure 26.54 PB-CTL Waveform in Slow Mode Operation
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 706 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
26.13.8 Duty Discriminator
The duty discriminator circuit measures the period of the control signal recorded on the tape (PB-
CTL signal) and discriminates its duty cycle. In VISS or VASS detection, the duty I/O flag is set
or cleared according to the result of duty discrimination. The duty I/O flag is set to 1 when the
duty cycle of the PB-CTL signal is above 44%, and is cleared to 0 when the duty cycle is below
43%.
In ASM detection, an ASM mark is recognized (and the duty I/O flag is cleared to 0) when the
duty cycle is above 66%. When the duty cycle is below 65%, no ASM mark is recognized and the
duty I/O flag is set to 1.
The detection direction can be switched between forward and reverse by bit 5 (FW/RV) in the
CTL mode register.
Long or short pulse can be detected by comparing REC-CTL duty data register (RCDR2 to
RCDR5) and UP/DOWN counter. Long or short pulse is discriminated at PB-CTL signal falling.
Discrimination result is stored in bit 0 of bit pattern register (BTPR). At the same time, BTPR is
shifted to the left. LSP0 indicates 0 when short pulse is detected, and 1 when long pulse is
detected.
Set the threshold value of long/short pulse in RCDR2 to RCDR5. See the description on the
detection of the long/short pulse.
Figure 26.55 shows the duty cycle of the PB-CTL signal.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 707 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Input signal
Short 1 pulse
25 ±0.5%
PB-CTL
Input signal
Long 1 pulse
30 ±0.5%
PB-CTL
Input signal
Short 0 pulse
57.5 ±0.5%
62.5 ±0.5%
PB-CTL
Input signal
Long 0 pulse
PB-CTL
Input signal
ASM mark
67 to 70%
PB-CTL
Figure 26.55 PB-CTL Signal Duty Cycle
Figure 26.56 shows the duty discrimination circuit. A 44% duty cycle is discriminated by counting
with the 16-bit up/down counter, using a φs/4 clock for the up-count and a φs/5 clock for the
down-count. An up-count is performed when the PB-CTL signal is high, and a down-count when
low. Long or short pulse is discriminated by comparing with RCDR2 to RCDR5.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 708 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Counter
PB-CTL
1 pulse
PB-CTL↑
PB-CTL
φ s/4
φ s/5
Counter
PB-CTL
0 pulse
φ s/4
φ s/5
Counter
FWD
PB-CTL
Short pulse
(0 pulse)
φ s/4
φ s/5
RCDR3
RCDR2
0 pulse L/S threshold value
1 pulse L/S threshold value
Counter
REV
PB-CTL
Long pulse
(1 pulse)
φ s/5
φ s/4
RCDR4
RCDR5
0 pulse L/S threshold value
1 pulse L/S threshold value
UP/DOWN
Comparison of upper
12-bit
UP/DOWN counter (16 bits)
* RCDR2or4 (12-bit)
* FWD : Discriminated by RCDR2 and RCDR3
REV : Discriminated by RCDR4 and RCDR5
* RCDR3or5 (12-bit)
0/1
discrimination
UDF
Clear
R
SQ
φ s/4
φ s/5
L/S
discrimination
Figure 26.56 Duty Discriminator
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 709 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
VISS (Index) Detect Mode: VISS detection is carried out by the VISS control circuit, which
counts 1 pulses in the PB-CTL signal. If the pulse count detects any value set in the VISS interrupt
setting bits (bits 5, 6, or 7 in the duty I/O register), an interrupt request is generated and the duty
I/O flag is cleared to 0.
At VISS record or rewrite, INDEX code is automatically written. INDEX code is composed of 0
continuous 62-bit data with 0 pulse data at both edge.
Examples of bit strings and the duty I/O flag at VISS detection/record is illustrated in figure 26.57.
0Tape direction
Duty I/O flag
(a) VISS detection (INDEX: Thirty-two 1 pulse setting)
1111
61 ±3 bits
Thirty-two 1 pulses
detected
IRRCTL
63 ±3 bits
Start
11110
0Tape direction
Duty I/O flag
(b) VISS record
1111
62 bits
IRRCTL
64 bits
Start
11110
1 2 3 62 63 64
Figure 26.57 Examples of VISS Bit Strings and Duty I/O Flag
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 710 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Duty Detection Mode (VASS): VASS detection is carried out by the duty discriminator. Software
can detect index sequences by reading the duty I/O flag at each CTL pulse.
At each CTL pulse, the duty discriminator sends the result of duty discrimination to the duty I/O
flag, and simultaneously generates an interrupt request. The duty I/O flag is cleared to 0 if the
CTL pulse is a 1 (duty cycle below 43%), and is set to 1 if the CTL pulse is a 0 (duty cycle above
44%).
The duty I/O flag is modified at each CTL pulse. It should be read by the interrupt-handling
routine within the period of the PB-CTL signal. VASS detection format is illustrated in figure
26.58.
1
Tape direction Written three times
1111111111
M
S
B
L
S
B
L
S
B
M
S
B
M
S
B
L
S
B
L
S
B
M
S
B
ThousandsHeader (11 bits) Hundreds
Data (16 bits: 4 digits of 4-bit BCD)
Tens Ones
Figure 26.58 VASS (Index) Format
Assemble (ASM) Mark Detect Mode: ASM mark detection is carried out by the duty
discriminator. If the duty discriminator detects that the duty cycle of the PB-CTL signal is 66% or
higher, it generates an interrupt request, and simultaneously clears the duty I/O flag to 0.
The duty I/O flag is updated at every CTL pulse. It should be read by the interrupt-handling
routine within the period of the PB-CTL signal.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 711 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Detection of the Long/Short Pulse: The long/short pulse is detected in PB mode by the L/S
determination based on the comparison of the REC-CTL duty register (RCDR2 to RCDR5) with
the up/down counter and the results of the duty I/O flag. The results of the determination is stored
in bit 0 (LSP0) of the bit pattern register (BTPR) at the rising edge of PB-CTL, shifting at the
same time BTPR leftward.
RCDR2-5 set the L/S thresholds for each of FWD/REV. Set to RCDR2 a threshold of 1 pulse L/S
for FWD, to RCDR3 a threshold of 0 pulse L/S for FWD, to RCDR4 a threshold of 0 pulse L/S for
REV, and to RCDR5 a threshold of 1 pulse L/S for REV. Figure 26.59 shows the detection of
long/short pulse.
Also, the bit pattern of 8-bit can be detected by BTPR. Check that an 8-bit detection has been done
by bit 1 (BPF bit) of the duty I/O register, and then read BTPR.
Bit patter register (8 bits)
Up/Down counter (16 bits)
RCDR2 (12 bits)
High-order 12-bit data
RCDR3 (12 bits)
Internal bus
LSB
FW/RV DI/O
Shift left-wardBTPR
R
R
SQ
RCDR4 (12 bits)
RCDR5 (12 bits) R
SQ
φs/4
Note: L/S is determined at the rising edge of PB-CTL. After the determination, bit pattern
register is shifted leftward, and the results of the determination is stored in the LSB.
Figure 26.59 Detection of Long/Short Pulse
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 712 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
26.13.9 CTL Output Section
An on-chip control head amplifier is provided for writing the REC-CTL signal generated by the
write control circuit onto the tape.
The write control circuit controls the duty cycle of the REC-CTL signal in the writing of VISS and
VASS sequences and ASM marks and the rewriting of VISS and VASS sequences. The duty cycle
of the REC-CTL signal is set in REC-CTL duty data registers 1 to 5 (RCDR1 to RCDR5). Times
calculated in terms of φs (= fOSC/2) should be converted to appropriate data to be set in these
registers. In VISS or VASS mode, set RCDR2 for a duty cycle of 25% ±0.5%, RCDR3 for a duty
cycle of 30% ±0.5%, RCDR4 for a duty cycle of 57.5 ±0.5%, and RCDR5 for a duty cycle of 62.5
±0.5%. When 1 is written in the duty I/O flag, the REC-CTL signal will be written on the tape
with a 25% ±0.5% duty cycle when 0 is written in bit 7 (LSP7) in the bit pattern register (BTPR)
and with a 30 ±0.5% duty cycle when 1 is written. Table 26.21 shows the relationship between the
REC-CTL duty register and CTL outputs.
In ASM mark write mode, set RCDR3 for a duty cycle of 67% to 70%. An ASM mark will be
written when 0 is written in the duty I/O flag.
An interrupt request is generated at the rise of the reference signal after one CTL pulse has been
written. The reference signal is derived from the output signal (REF30X) of the X-value
adjustment circuit, and has a period of one frame.
Figure 26.60 shows the timings that generate the REC-CTL signal.
Table 26.21 REC-CTL Duty Register and CTL Outputs
MODE D/IO LSP7 Pulse RCDR Duty
0 S1 RCDR2 25 ±0.5%
0
1 L1 RCDR3 30 ±0.5%
0 S0 RCDR4 57.5 ±0.5%
VISS, VASS modes
1
1 L0 RCDR5 62.5 ±0.5%
ASM mode 0 * ⎯ RCDR3 67 to 70%
Legend: * Don’t care.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 713 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
W
Internal bus
RCDR2or4
(12 bits)
W
RCDR1
(12 bits)
UP/DOWN counter (12 bits)
Counter
REF30X
REC-CTL
Counter
reset
Match detection
Match detection
End of writing of one CTL
pulse (except VISS) IRRCTL
RCDR2 (VISS/VASS S1 pulse)
RCDR3 (VISS/VASS L1 pulse, or ASM)
RCDR4 (VISS/VASS S0 pulse)
RCDR5 (VISS/VASS L0 pulse)
RCDR1
Clear
Upper 12 bits
REC-CTL 0 pulse fall
timing
REC-CTL rise timing REC-CTL1 pulse,
ASM fall timing
RESET
REF30X↑W
RCDR3or5
(12 bits)
φs/4
Compare Compare Compare
Figure 26.60 REC-CTL Signal Generation Timing
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 714 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
The 16-bit counter in the REC-CTL circuit continues counting on a clock derived by dividing the
system clock φs (= fOSC/2) by 4. The counter is cleared on the rise of REF30X in record mode, and
on the rise of PB-CTL in rewrite mode. REC-CTL match detection is carried out by comparing the
counter value with each RCDR value.
RCDR1 to RCDR5 can be written to by software at all times. If RCDR is changed before the
respective match detection is performed, match detection is performed using the new value. The
value changed after match detection becomes valid on the rise of REF30X following the change.
Figure 26.61 shows examples of RCDR change timing.
REF30X
REC-CTL
RCDR1 RCDR2 RCDR1
1 pulse (Short) 0 pulse (Short) Rewritten 0 pulse
(Short)
RCDR1 RCDR1
Counter
RCDR4
RCDR2
RCDR1
RCDR4 RCDR4
RCDR4
Interval in which
RCDR4 can be
written to
Figure 26.61 Example of RCDR Change Timing (Example Showing RCDR4)
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 715 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
26.13.10 Trapezoid Waveform Circuit
In rewriting, the trapezoid waveform circuit leaves the rising edge of the already-recorded PB-
CTL signal intact, but changes the duty cycle.
In rewriting, the CTL pulse is written with reference to the rise of PB-CTL. The CTL duty cycle
for a rewrite is set in the REC-CTL duty data registers (RCDR2 to RCDR5). Time values T2 to T5
are referenced to the rise of PB-CTL.
Figure 26.62 shows the rewrite waveform.
W
Internal bus
RCDR3or5
(12 bits)
W
Not used when
rewriting
RCDR2or4
(12 bits)
Up/Down counter (16 bits)
Clear
Upper 12 bits
REC-CTL 0 pulse
fall timing
REC-CTL 1 pulse
fall timing
RESET
PB-CTL↑
W
T2 to T5
Eliminated
pulse
High-impedance
interval
End of writing of one
CTL pulse (except
VISS) IRRCTL
RCDR1
(12 bits)
φs/4
Compare Compare
RCDR2 (BISS/VASS S1 pulse)
RCDR3 (VISS/VASS L1 pulse)
RCDR4 (VISS/VASS S0 pulse)
RCDR5 (VISS/VASS L0 pulse)
PB-CTL
REC-CTL when
rewriting
New pulse
Figure 26.62 Relationship between REC-CTL and RCDR2 to RCDR5 when Rewriting
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 716 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
26.13.11 Note on CTL Interrupt
After a reset, the CTL circuit is in the VISS discrimination input mode.
Depending on the CTL pin states, a false PB-CTL input pulse may be recognized and an interrupt
request generated. If the interrupt request will be enabled, first clear the CTL interrupt request
flag.
26.14 Frequency Dividers
26.14.1 Overview
On-chip frequency dividers are provided for the pulse signal picked up from the control track
during playback (the PB-CTL signal), and the pulse signal received from the capstan motor (CFG
signal). The CTL frequency divider generates a CTL divided control signal (DVCTL) from the
PB-CTL signal, for use in capstan phase control during high-speed search, for example. The CFG
frequency divider generates two divided CFG signals (DVCFG for speed control and DVCFG2 for
phase control) from the CFG signal. The DFG noise canceller is a circuit which considers signal
less than 2φ as noise and mask it.
26.14.2 CTL Frequency Divider
Block Diagram: Figure 26.63 shows a block diagram of the CTL frequency divider.
EXCTL
PB-CTL↑
↑, ↓DVCTL
UDF
R/W W
(8 bits)
R/W
Internal bus
CEX CTL division register
Down counter (8 bits)
CEG
Edge
detector
CTVC CTLR
CTVC
Figure 26.63 CTL Frequency Divider
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 717 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Register Description
Register configuration
Table 26.22 shows the register configuration of the CTL frequency dividers.
Table 26.22 Register Configuration
Name Abbrev. R/W Size Initial Value Address
DVCTL control register CTVC R/W Byte Undefined H'D098
CTL frequency division register CTLR W Byte H'00 H'D099
DVCTL Control Register (CTVC)
0
*
1
*
R
2
*
R
345
⎯⎯⎯
⎯⎯⎯
67
R
CFG HSW
0
W
0
W
CEX CEG CTL
111
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Note: * Undefined
CTVC consists of the external input signal selection bits and the flags which show the CFG,
HSW, and CTL levels.
Note: It has an undetermined value by a reset or in stand-by mode.
Bit 7⎯DVCTL Signal Generation Selection Bit (CEX): Selects which of the PB-CTL signal or
the external input signal is used to generate the DVCTL signal.
Bit 7
CEX Description
0 Generates DVCTL signal with PB-CTL signal (Initial value)
1 Generates DVCTL signal with external input signal
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 718 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 6⎯External Sync Signal Edge Selection Bit (CEG): Selects the edge of the external signal
at which the frequency division is made when the external signal was selected to generate DVCTL
signal.
Bit 6
CEG Description
0 Rising edge (Initial value)
1 Falling edge
Bits 5 to 3⎯Reserved: Cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
Bit 2⎯CFG Flag (CFG): Shows the CFG level.
Bit 2
CFG Description
0 CFG is at low level (Initial value)
1 CFG is at high level
Bit 1⎯HSW Flag (HSW): Shows the level of the HSW signal selected by the VFF/NFF bit of the
HSW mode register 2 (HSM2).
Bit 1
HSW Description
0 HSW is at low level (Initial value)
1 HSW is at high level
Bit 0⎯CTL Flag (CTL): Shows the CTL level.
Bit 0
CTL Description
0 REC or PB-CTL is at low level (Initial value)
1 REC or PB-CTL is at high level
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 719 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
CTL Frequency Division Register (CTLR)
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
56
0
7
CTL4 CTL3 CTL2 CTL1 CTL0
0
W
CTL7
WWW
CTL6 CTL5
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
CTLR is an 8-bit write-only register to set the frequency dividing value (N-1 if divided by N) for
PB-CTL. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out.
PB-CTL is divided by N at its rising edge. If the register value is 0, no division operation is
performed, and the DVCTL signal with the same cycle with PB-CTL is output. It is initialized by
a reset or in stand-by mode.
Operation: During playback, control pulses recorded on the tape are picked up by the control
head and input to the CTL pin. The control pulse signal is amplified by a Schmitt amplifier,
reshaped, then input to the CTL frequency divider as the PB-CTL signal.
This circuit is employed when the control pulse (PB-CTL signal) is used for phase control of the
capstan motor. The divided signal is sent as the DVCTL signal to the capstan phase system in the
servo circuits and timer R.
The CTL frequency divider is an 8-bit reload timer consisting of a reload register and a down-
counter. Frequency division is obtained by setting frequency-division data in bits 7 to 0 in the CTL
frequency division register (CTLR), which is the reload register. When a frequency division value
is written in this reload register, it is also written into the down-counter. The down-counter is
decremented on rising edges of the PB-CTL signal.
Figure 26.64 shows examples of the PB-CTL and DVCTL waveforms.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 720 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
CTL input signal
Legend:
CTLR: CTL frequency division register
PB-CTL or external
sync signal
CTLR=00
CTLR=01
CTLR=02
Figure 26.64 CTL Frequency Division Waveforms
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 721 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
26.14.3 CFG Frequency Divider
Block Diagram: Figure 26.65 shows a block diagram of the 7-bit CFG frequency divider and its
mask timer.
WR/WW
W
WWWR
W
Internal bus
CMN
CRF
UDF
UDF
UDF
CFG DVCFG
DVCFG2
↑, ↑↓
MCGin
Internal bus
CPS1,
CPS0
CTMR(6 bits)
CDIVR2(7 bits)
DVTRG
PB(ASM)→REC
φs = fosc/2
φs/1024
φs/512
φs/256
φs/128
Down counter (6 bits)
CDIVR(7 bits)
CMK
S
R
Edge
select
•CDVC
•CDVC •CDVC
•CDVC
•CDVC
Down counter (7 bits)
Down counter (7 bits)
Figure 26.65 CFG Frequency Divider
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 722 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Register Description:
Register configuration
Table 26.23 shows the register configuration of the CFG frequency division circuit.
Table 26.23 Register Configuration
Name Abbrev. R/W Size Initial Value Address
DVCFG control register CDVC R/W Byte H'60 H'D09A
CFG frequency division
register 1
CDIVR1 W Byte H'80 H'D09B
CFG frequency division
register 2
CDIVR2 W Byte H'80 H'D09C
DVCFG mask period
register
CTMR W Byte H'FF H'D09D
DVCFG Control Register (CDVC)
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
34
0
W
5
1
6
—
—
1
7
WR
CMK CMN
W
DVTRG
0
R/W*
MCGin CRF CPS1 CPS0
0
Note: * Only 0 can be written.
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
CDVC is an 8-bit register to control the capstan frequency division circuit.
It is initialized to H'60 by a reset, or in stand-by or module stop mode.
Bit 7⎯Mask CFG Flag (MCGin): MCGin is a flag to indicate occurrence of a frequency
division signal during the mask timer's mask period. To clear it by software, write 0 after reading
1. Also, setting has the highest priority in this flag. If a condition setting the flag and 0 write occur
simultaneously, the latter is invalid.
Bit 7
MCGin Description
0 CFG is in normal operation (Initial value)
1 Shows that DVCFG was detected during masking (runaway detected)
Bit 6⎯Reserved: Cannot be modified and is always read as 1.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 723 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 5⎯CFG Mask Status Bit (CMK): Indicates the status of the mask. It is initialized to 1 by a
reset, or in stand-by or module stop mode.
Bit 5
CMK Description
0 Indicates that the capstan mask timer has released masking
1 Indicates that the capstan mask timer is currently masking (Initial value)
Bit 4⎯CFG Mask Selection Bit (CMN): Selects the turning on/off of the mask function.
Bit 4
CMN Description
0 Capstan mask timer function on. (Initial value)
1 Capstan mask timer function off.
Bit 3⎯PB (ASM) → REC Transition Timing Sync ON/OFF Selection Bit (DVTRG): Selects
the On/Off of the timing sync of the transition from PB (ASM) to REC when the DVCFG2 signal
is generated.
Bit 3
DVTRG Description
0 PB (ASM) → REC transition timing sync on. (Initial value)
1 PB (ASM) → REC transition timing sync off.
Bit 2⎯CFG Frequency Division Edge Selection Bit (CRF): Selects the edge of the CFG signal
to be divided.
Bit 2
CRF Description
0 Performs frequency division at the rising edge of CFG. (Initial value)
1 Performs frequency division at both edges of CFG.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 724 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bits 1 and 0⎯CFG Mask Timer Clock Selection Bits (CPS1, CPS0): Select the clock source
for the CFG mask timer. (φs = fosc/2)
Bit 1 Bit 0
CPS1 CPS0 Description
0 φs/1024 (Initial value) 0
1 φs/512
1 0 φs/256
1 φs/128
CFG Frequency Division Register 1 (CDIVR1)
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
34
0
W
5
0
67
—
—WW
CDV15 CDV14
0
W
CDV16
0
W
CDV13 CDV12 CDV11 CDV10
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
CDIVR1 is an 8-bit write-only register to set the division value. If a read is attempted, an
undetermined value is read out. Bit 7 is reserved.
The frequency division value is written in the reload register and the down counter at the same
time.
CFG's frequency is divided by N at its rising edge or both edges If the register value is 0, no
division operation is performed, and the DVCFG signal with the same input cycle with CFG
signal is output. The DVCFG signal is sent to the capstan speed error detector. It is initialized to
H'80 by a reset or in stand-by mode together with the capstan frequency division register and the
down counter.
CFG Frequency Division Register 2 (CDIVR2)
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
34
0
W
5
0
67
—
—WW
CDV25 CDV24
0
W
CDV26
0
W
CDV23 CDV22 CDV21 CDV20
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
CDIVR2 is an 8-bit write-only register to set the division value. If a read is attempted, an
undetermined value is read out. Bit 7 is reserved.
The frequency division value is written in the reload register and the down counter at the same
time.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 725 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
CFG's frequency is divided by N at its rising edge or both edges If the register value was 0, no
division operation is performed, and the DVCFG signal with the same input cycle with CFG is
output. The DVCFG2 signal is sent to the capstan speed error detector and the Timer L.
The DVCFG2 circuit has no mask timer function.
The frequency division counter starts its division operation at the point data was written in
CDIVR2. If synchronization is required for phase matching, for example, do it by writing in
CDIVR2. If the DVTRG bit of the CDVC register is 0, the register synchronizes with the
switching timing from PB (ASM) to REC.
It is initialized to H'80 by a reset or in stand-by mode together with the capstan frequency division
register and the down counter.
DVCFG Mask Period Register (CTMR)
0
1
1
1
W
2
1
W
34
1
W
5
1
67
——
—— WW
CPM5 CPM4
1
W
CPM3 CPM2 CPM1 CPM0
11
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
CTMR is an 8-bit write-only register. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out.
CTMR is a reload register for the mask timer (down counter). Set in it the mask period of CFG.
The mask period is determined by the clock specified by the bits 1 and 0 of CDVC and the set
value (N - 1). If data is written in CTMR, it is written also in the mask timer at the same time.
It is initialized to H'FF by a reset, or in stand-by or module stop mode.
Mask period = N × clock cycle
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 726 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Operation:
• Frequency divider
The CFG pulses output from the capstan motor are sent to internal circuitry as the CFG signal
via the zero-cross type comparator. The CFG signal, shaped into a rectangular waveform by a
reshaping circuit, is divided by the CFG frequency dividers, and used in servo control. The
rising edge or both edges of the CFG signal can be selected for the frequency divider.
The CFG frequency divider consists of a 7-bit frequency divider with a mask timer for capstan
speed control (DVCFG signal generator) and a 7-bit frequency divider for capstan phase
control (DVCFG2 signal generator).
The DVCFG signal generator consists of a 7-bit reload register (CFG frequency division
register1: CDIVR1), a 7-bit down-counter, and a 6-bit mask timer (with settable mask
interval). Frequency division is performed by setting the frequency-division value in 7-bit
CDIVR1. When the frequency-division value is written in CDIVR1, it is also written in the
down-counter. After frequency-division of a CFG signal for which the edge has been selected,
the signal is sent via the mask timer to the capstan speed error detector as the DVCFG signal.
The DVCFG2 signal generator consists of a 7-bit reload register (CFG frequency division
register 2: CDIVR2) and a 7-bit down-counter. The 7-bit frequency divider does not have a
mask timer. Frequency division is performed by setting the frequency-division value in
CDIVR2. When the frequency-division value is written in CDVIR2, it is also written in the
down-counter. After frequency division of a CFG signal for which the edge has been selected,
the signal is sent to the capstan speed error detector and timer L as the DVCFG2 signal.
Frequency division starts when the frequency-division value is written.
When DVTRG bit in CDVC register is set to 0, reloading is executed with the switch over
timing from PB (ASM) mode to REC mode. To switch from REF30 to CREF, change the
settings of bit 4 (CR/RF bit) in the capstan phase error detection control register (CPGCR). If
synchronization is necessary for phase control, this can be provided by writing the frequency-
division value in CDIVR2.
The down-counters are decremented on rising edges of the CFG signal when the CRF bit is 0
in the DVCFG control register (CDVC), and on both edges when the CRF bit is 1.
Figure 26.66 shows examples of CFG frequency division waveforms.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 727 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
CFG
CRF bit = 1
CDIVR = 00
CRF bit = 0
CDIVR = 00
CRF bit = 0
CDIVR = 01
CRF bit = 0
CDIVR = 02
Figure 26.66 CFG Frequency Division Waveforms
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 728 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
• Mask timer
The capstan mask timer is a 6-bit reload timer that uses a prescaled clock as a clock source.
The mask timer is used for masking DVCFG signal intended for controlling the capstan speed.
The capstan mask timer prevents edge detection to be carried out for an unnecessarily long
duration by masking the edge detection for a certain period. The above trouble can result from
abnormal revolution (runout) of the capstan motor because its revolution has to cover a wide
range speeds from the low/still up to the high speed search.
The capstan mask timer is started by a pulse edge in the divided CFG signal (DVCFG). While
the timer is running, a mask signal disables the output of further DVCFG pulses. The mask
signal is shown in figure 26.67.
The mask timer status can be monitored by reading the CMK flag in the DVCFG control
register (CDVC).
Mask
DVCFG
Mask timer
underflow
Figure 26.67 Mask Signal
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 729 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Figures 26.68 and 26.69 show examples of CFG mask timer operations.
CFG (racing)
Edge detect
Cleared by wiring 0
after reading 1
Capstan motor
mask timer Mask interval Mask interval
DVCFG
MCGin flag
Figure 26.68 CFG Mask Timer Operation (When Capstan Motor Is Racing)
CFG
Edge detect
Capstan motor
mask timer Mask interval Mask interval
Figure 26.69 CFG Mask Timer Operation (When Capstan Motor Is Operating Normally)
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 730 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
26.14.4 DFG Noise Removal Circuit
Block Diagram: Figure 26.70 shows the block diagram of the DFG noise removal circuit.
Rising edge
detection
Delay circuit
DFG SQ
R
NCDFG
delay = 2φ
Falling edge
detection
Figure 26.70 DFG Noise Removal Circuit
Register Description: Table 26.24 shows the register configuration of the DFG mask circuit.
Table 26.24 Register Configuration
Name Abbrev. R/W Size Initial Value Address
FG control register FGCR W Byte H'FE H'D09E
FG Control Register (FGCR)
0
0
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
———————
——————— W
DRF
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
FGCR selects the edge of the DFG noise removal signal (NCDFG) to be sent to the drum speed
error detector. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out.
It is initialized to H'FE by a reset, or in stand-by or module stop mode.
The edge selection circuit is located in the drum speed error detector, and outputs the register
output to the drum speed error detector.
Bits 7 to 1⎯Reserved: Cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 731 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 0⎯DFG Edge Selection Bit (DRF): Selects the edge of the NCDFG signal used in the drum
speed error detector.
Bit 0
DRF Description
0 Selects the rising edge of NCDFG signal (Initial value)
1 Selects the falling edge of NCDFG signal
Operation
The DFG noise removal circuit generates a signal (NCDFG signal) as a result of removing noise
(signal fluctuation smaller than 2 φ) from the DFG signal. The resulted NCDFG signal is behind
the time when the DFG signal was detected by 2 φ. Figure 26.71 shows the NCDFG signal.
DFG
NCDFG
Noise
2φ2φ2φ
φ = fosc
Figure 26.71 NCDFG Signal
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 732 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
26.15 Sync Signal Detector
26.15.1 Overview
This block performs detection of the horizontal sync signal (Hsync) and vertical sync signal
(Vsync) from the composite sync signal (Csync), noise counting, and field detection.
It detects the horizontal and vertical sync signals by setting threshold in the register and based on
the servo clock (φs = fosc/2). Noise masking is possible during the detection of the horizontal sync
signals, and if any Hsync pulse is missing, it can be supplemented. Also, if total volume of the
noise detected in one frame of Csync amounted over a specified volume, the detector generates a
noise detection interrupt.
Note: This circuit detects a pulse with a specific width set by the threshold register. It does not
classify or restore the sync signal to a formal one.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 733 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
26.15.2 Block Diagram
Figure 26.72 shows the block diagram of the sync signal detector.
W
H threshold
register
W
V threshold
register
(6 bits) (4 bits)
•
HTR
•
VTR
WW
H complement
start time
register
Complementary
H pulse width
register
(8 bits) (4 bits)
•
HPWR
•
HRTR
WW
(6 bits) (8 bits)
•
NDR
R/W R/W
R/(W) R
NOIS
H counter (8 bits)
Noise detector
Complement control &
nozzle mask control circuit
Up/Down
counter (6 bits)
SEPH
Selection of
polarity Noise detection
window
Noise detection interrupt
VD interrupt
Csync
Sync signal detector
H reload counter (8 bits)
Field detector
Noise counter (10 bits)
Toggle
circuit
Clear
FLD SYCT
VD(SEPV)
FIELD
NOISE
IRRSNC
OSCH
NIS/VD
•
SYNCR
•
NWR
Internal bus
φs = fosc/2
φs/2
Noise detection
window
register
Noise
detection
register
Figure 26.72 Block Diagram of the Sync Signal Detector
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 734 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
26.15.3 Pin Configuration
Table 26.25 shows the pin configuration of the sync signal detector.
Table 26.25 Pin Configuration
Name Abbrev. I/O Function
Composite sync signal input pin Csync Input Composite sync signal input
26.15.4 Register Configuration
Table 26.26 shows the register configuration of the sync signal detector.
Table 26.26 Register Configuration
Name Abbrev. R/W Size Initial Value Address
Vertical sync signal threshold register VTR W Byte H'C0 H'D0B0
Horizontal sync signal threshold register HTR W Byte H'F0 H'D0B1
H complement start time setting register HRTR W Byte H'00 H'D0B2
Complement H pulse width setting
register
HPWR W Byte H'F0 H'D0B3
Noise detection window setting register NWR W Byte H'C0 H'D0B4
Noise detector NDR W Byte H'00 H'D0B5
Sync signal control register SYNCR R/W Byte H'F8 H'D0B6
26.15.5 Register Description
Vertical Sync Signal Threshold Register (VTR)
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
5
0
6
1
7
——
—— WWW
VTR5 VTR4 VTR3 VTR2 VTR1 VTR0
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/ W :
VTR is an 8-bit write-only register that sets the threshold for the vertical sync signal when the
signal is detected from the composite sync signal. The threshold is set by bits 5 to 0 (VTR5 to
VTR0). Bits 7 and 6 are reserved. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. It is
initialized to H'C0 by a reset, or in stand-by or module stop mode.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 735 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Horizontal Sync Signal Threshold Register (HTR)
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
456
1
7
————
———— WW
HTR3 HTR2 HTR1 HTR0
111
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
HTR is an 8-bit write-only register that sets the threshold for the horizontal sync signal when the
signal is detected from the composite sync signal. The threshold is set by bits 3 to 0 (HTR3 to
HTR0). Bits 7 and 4 are reserved. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. It is
initialized to H'F0 by a reset, or in stand-by or module stop mode.
Figure 26.73 shows the threshold values and separated sync signals.
Legend:
TH
Hpulse
T H
SEPV
Hpulse
: Period of the horizontal sync signal (NTSC: 63.6, PAL: 64 [μs])
: Pulse width of the horizontal sync signal (NTSC, PAL: 4.7 [μs])
VVTH
HVTH
: Value set as the threshold of the vertical sync signal
: Value set as the threshold of the horizontal sync signal
SEPV
SEPH
: Detected vertical sync signal
: Detected horizontal sync signal (before complement)
T H
SEPH
Csync
H'00
Counter value
1/2 Hpulse
VD interrupt
Hpulse
VVTH
HVTH
Figure 26.73 Threshold Values and Separated Sync Signals
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 736 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Example
The values set to detect the vertical and horizontal sync signals (SEPV, SEPH) from Csync are
required to meet the following conditions. Assumed that the set values in VTHR register were
VVTH and HVTH,
(VVTH - 1) × 2/φs > Hpulse
(HVTH - 2) × 2/φs ≤ Hpulse/2 < (HVTH - 1) × 2/φs
Where, Hpulse is pulse width (μs) of the horizontal sync signal, and φs is servo clock (fosc/2).
Thus, if φs = 5 MHz, NTSC system is used,
(VVTH - 1) × 0.4 μs > 4.7 μs
∴VVTH ≥ H'D
(HVTH - 2) × 0.4 μs ≤ 2.35 μs < (HVTH - 1) × 0.4 μs
∴HVTH ≥ H'7
Note: This circuit detects the pulse with the width set in VTHR. If a noise pulse with the width
greater than the set value is input, the circuit regards it as a sync signal.
H Complement Start Time Setting Register (HRTR)
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
56
0
7
HRTR4 HRTR3 HRTR2 HRTR1 HRTR0
0
W
HRTR7
WWW
HRTR6 HRTR5
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
HRTR is an 8-bit write-only register that sets the timing to generate a complementary pulse if a
pulse of the horizontal sync signal is missing.
If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. It is initialized to H'00 by a reset, or in
stand-by or module stop mode.
((Value of HRTR7 - 0) + 1) × 2/φs = TH
where, TH is the period of the horizontal sync signal (μs), and φs is the servo clock (fosc/2).
Whether the horizontal sync signal exists or not is determined one clock before the complementary
pulse is generated. Accordingly, set to HRTR7 to HRTR0 a value obtained from the equation
shown above plus one.
Also, HRTR7-HRTR0 sets the noise mask period. If the horizontal sync signal has the normal
pulses, it is masked in the mask period.
The start and the end of the mask period are computed frm the rising edge of OSCH and SEPH,
respectively. See figure 26.75.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 737 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Complementary H Pulse Width Setting Register (HPWR)
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
456
1
7
————
———— WW
HPWR3 HPWR2 HPWR1 HPWR0
111
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
HRWR is an 8-bit write-only register that sets the pulse width of the complementary pulse which
is generated if a pulse of the horizontal sync signal is missing. Bits 7 to 4 are reserved.
If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. It is initialized to H'F0 by a reset or in
stand-by mode.
((Value of HPWR3 - 0) + 1) × 2/φs = Hpulse
Where, Hpulse is the pulse width of the horizontal sync signal (μs), and φs is the servo clock
(fosc/2).
Noise Detection Window Setting Register (NWR)
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
5
0
6
1
7
——
—— WWW
NWR5 NWR4 NWR3 NWR2 NWR1 NWR0
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
NWR is an 8-bit write-only register that sets the period (window) when the drop-out of the
horizontal sync signal pulse is detected and the noise is counted. Set the timing of the noise
detection window in bits 5 to 0. Bits 7 and 6 are reserved.
If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. It is initialized to H'C0 by a reset, or in
stand-by or module stop mode.
Set the value of the noise detection window timing according to the following equation.
((Value of NWR5-0) + 1) × 2/φs = 1/4 × TH
Where, TH is the pulse width of the horizontal sync signal (μs), and φs is the servo clock (fosc/2).
It is recommended that this timing value is set at about 1/4 of the cycle of the horizontal sync
signal.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 738 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Noise Detection Register (NDR)
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
56
0
7
NDR4 NDR3 NDR2 NDR1 NDR0
0
W
NDR7
WWW
NDR6 NDR5
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
NDR is an 8-bit write-only register that sets the noise detection level when the noise of the
horizontal sync signal is detected (when NWR is set). Set the noise detection level in bits 7 to 0.
No read is valid. If a read is attempted, an undetermined value is read out. It is initialized to H'00
by a reset, or in stand-by or module stop mode.
The noise detector takes counts of the drop-outs of the horizontal sync signal pulses and the noise
within the pulses, and if they amount to a count greater than four times of the value set in NDR7-
NDR0, the detector sets the NOIS flag in the sync signal control register (SYNCR). Set the noise
detection level at 1/4 of the noise counts in one frame.
The noise counter is cleared whenever Vsync is detected twice.
See section 26.15.6, Noise Detection for the details of the noise detection window and the noise
detection level.
Sync Signal Control Register (SYNCR)
0
0
1
0
R
2
0
R/(W)*
3
1
456
1
7
————
———— R/WR/W
NIS/VD NOIS FLD SYCT
111
Note: * Only 0 can be written
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
SYNCR is an 8-bit register that controls the noise detection, field detection, polarity of the sync
signal input, etc.
It is initialized to H'F8 by a reset, or in stand-by mode. Bits 7 to 4 are reserved. No write is valid.
Bit 1 is read-only.
Bits 7 to 4⎯Reserved: Cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 739 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 3⎯Interrupt Selection Bit (NIS/VD): Selects whether an interrupt request is generated by
noise level detection or VD signal detection.
Bit 3
NIS/VD Description
0 Interrupt at the noise level
1 Interrupt at VD (Initial value)
Bit 2⎯Noise Detection Flag (NOIS): NOIS is a status flag indicating that the noise counts
reached at more than four times of the value set in NDR. The flag is cleared only by writing 0 after
reading 1. Care is required because it is not cleared automatically.
Bit 2
NOIS Description
0 Noise count is smaller than four times of the value set in NDR (Initial value)
1 Noise count is the same or greater than four times of the value set in NDR
Bit 1⎯Field Detection Flag (FLD): Indicates whether the field currently being scanned is even
or odd. See figure 26.74.
Bit 1
FLD Description
0 Odd field (Initial value)
1 Even field
Bit 0⎯Sync Signal Polarity Selection Bit (SYCT): Selects the polarity of the sync signal
(Csync) to be input.
Bit 0
SYCT Description Polarity
0 (Initial value)
Positive
1 Negative
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 740 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Field detection
flag (FLD)
SEPV
Noise detection
window
Composite sync
signal
Even field
(a) Even field
Field detection
flag (FLD)
SEPV
Noise detection
window
Composite sync
signal
Odd field
(b) Odd field
Figure 26.74 Field Detection
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 741 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
26.15.6 Noise Detection
If a pulse of the horizontal sync signal is missing, a complementary pulse is set at the timing set in
HPWR and with the set pulse width.
Set the noise detection window with HWR of about 1/4 of the horizontal sync signal, and the pulse
with equal high and low periods will be obtained.
Example of Setting: Assumed that a complementary pulse is set when fosc = 10MHz under the
conditions φs = 5 MHz, NTSC:TH = 63.6 (μs) and Hpulse = 4.7 (μs), the set values of the
complementary pulse timing (HRTR7-0), complementary pulse width (HPWR3-0), and noise
detection window timing (NWR5-0) are expressed by the following equations.
(Value of HRTR7 – 0) × 2/φs = TH
((Value of HPWR3 – 0) + 1) × 2/φs = Hpulse
((Value of NWR5 – 0) + 1) × 2/φs = 1/4 × TH
Where, TH is the cycle of the horizontal sync signal (μs), Hpulse is the pulse width of the
horizontal sync signal (μs) and φs is the servo clock (Hz) (fosc/2).
Accordingly,
(Value of HRTR7 – 0) × 0.4 (μs) = 63.6 (μs)
∴HRTR7 – 0 = H'9F
((Value of HPWR3 – 0) + 1) × 0.4 (μs) = 4.7 (μs)
∴HPWR3 – 0 = H'B
((Value of NWR5 – 0) + 1) × 0.4 (μs) = 16 (μs)
∴NWR5 – 0 = H'27
Also, the noise mask period is computed as follows.
((Value of HRTR7 – 0) + 1) − 24) × 2/φs = 54 (μs)
Where, 24 is a constant required for a structural reason.
Figure 26.75 shows the set period for HRTR, HPWR, and NWR.
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 742 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Legend:
SEPH
Noise detection
window
Noise mask for
OSCH
OSCH
Noise mask for
H counter
H reload
counter
H counter
SEPH
c
OSCH
: Horizontal sync signal after detection
: Horizontal sync signal after complement
a
b
: Value set for the noise detection window (NWR5 to NWR0)
: Value set for the pulse width of the horizontal sync signal (NPWR3 to NPWR0)
c
a, b, c
: Value set for complement timing (HRTR7 to HRTR0)
: Complements of 1 of a,b,c, respectively
H
'
E8
TH
: Complement of 2 of multiplier 24 in the equation for the noise mask period
(The noise mask period ends 24 counts before the overflow of H reload counter.)
: Cycle of the horizontal sync signal
(NTSC:63.6 [ms], PAL:64[ms])
TM : Timing at which the noise mask period ends.
A horizontal sync
pulse is missing
The pulse in the mask
period is ignored
TH
a
b
H'00
OVF
H'E8
c
a
Mask
period
Period determined
by NWR5 to NWR0
Mask
period
TM
Mask
period
Mask
period
Mask
period
Mask
period
Mask
period
Mask
period
TH
Don
'
t mask
immediately
after
complement.
period deter-
mined
by a and a
Period determined
by HRTR7 to HRTR0
period determined
by c and H
'
E8
Period determined
by HPWR3 to HPER0
period
determined
by b
Do mask also im-
mediately after
complement.
Figure 26.75 Set Period for HRTR, HPWR, and NWR
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 743 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Noise Detection Operation: The noise detector considers an irregular pulse of the composite sync
signal (Csync) and a chip of a horizontal sync signal pulse within a frame as noise. The noise
counter takes counts of the irregular pulses during the high period of the noise detection window
and the chips and drop-outs of the horizontal sync signal pulses during the low period. The noise
detector counts more than one irregular pulses as one. The noise counter is cleared at every frame
(Vsync is detected twice).
The equalizing pulse contained in 9H of the vertical sync signal is counted also as an irregular
pulse.
The noise detection flag (NOIS) in the sync signal control register (SYNCR) is set to 1 if the count
of the irregular pulses + the count of the pulse chips and drop-outs of the horizontal sync signal >
4 × (value of NDR7 to 0).
See the description on the sync signal control register (SYNCR) is section 26.15.5, Register
Description, for the NOIS bit.
Figure 26.76 shows the operation of the noise detection.
Csync
Noise detection
window
Noise detection
flag (NOIS)
Noise counter
Noise detection
level
Noise detection
flag is set.
Legend: NOIS : Bit 3 of the sync signal control register (SYNCR)
Noise
Figure 26.76 Operation of the Noise Detection
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 744 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
26.15.7 Activation of the Sync Signal Detector
After release of reset or transition from the power down mode to the active mode, the sync signal
detector starts operation by a sync signal input after release of module stop. The pulse of the
polarity specified by the SYCT bit of the sync signal control register (SYNCR) is input to the
detector. The detector starts operation even if this pulse is a noise pulse with a width smaller than
the regular width. The minimum pulse width which can activate the detector is not constant
depending on the internal operation of the input circuit. Accordingly, if the assured activation of
the detector is required, input a pulse with a width greater than 4/φs (φs = fosc/2 (Hz)). In such a
case, care is required to noise, because even a pulse with a width smaller than 4φ/s may cause
activation.
26.16 Servo Interrupt
26.16.1 Overview
The interrupt exception processing of the servo module is started by one of ten factors, i.e. the
drum speed error detector (×2), drum phase error detector, capstan speed error detector (×2),
capstan phase error detector, HSW timing generator (×2), sync detector, and CTL circuit. For
these interrupt factors, see each of their circuit sections of this manual.
For details of exception processing, see section 5, Exception Handling.
26.16.2 Register Configuration
Table 26.27 shows the list of the registers which control the interrupt of the servo section.
Table 26.27 Registers which Control the Interrupt of the Servo Section
Name Abbrev. R/W Size Initial Value Address
Servo interrupt enable register 1 SIENR1 R/W Byte H'00 H'D0B8
Servo interrupt enable register 2 SIENR2 R/W Byte H'FC H'D0B9
Servo interrupt request register 1 SIRQR1 R/W Byte H'00 H'D0BA
Servo interrupt request register 2 SIRQR2 R/W Byte H'FC H'D0BB
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 745 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
26.16.3 Register Description
Servo Interrupt Enable Register 1 (SIENR1)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
56
0
7
IECAP3 IECAP2 IECAP1 IEHSW2 IEHSW1
0
R/W
IEDRM3
R/W R/WR/W
IEDRM2 IEDRM1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
SIENR1 is an 8-bit read/write register that enables or disables interrupts in the servo section. It is
initialized to H'00 by a reset, or in stand-by or module stop mode.
Bit 7⎯Drum Phase Error Detection Interrupt Enable Bit (IEDRM3)
Bit 7
IEDRM3 Description
0 Disables the request of the interrupt by IRRDRM3 (Initial value)
1 Enables the request of the interrupt by IRRDRM3
Bit 6⎯Drum Speed Error Detection (Lock Detection) Interrupt Enable Bit (IEDRM2)
Bit 6
IEDRM2 Description
0 Disables the request of the interrupt by IRRDRM2
(Initial value)
1 Enables the request of the interrupt by IRRDRM2
Bit 5⎯Drum Speed Error Detection (OVF, Latch) Interrupt Enable Bit (IEDRM1)
Bit 5
IEDRM1 Description
0 Disables the request of the interrupt by IRRDRM1
(Initial value)
1 Enables the request of the interrupt by IRRDRM1
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 746 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 4⎯Capstan Phase Error Detection Interrupt Enable Bit (IECAP3)
Bit 4
IECAP3 Description
0 Disables the request of the interrupt by IRRCAP3
(Initial value)
1 Enables the request of the interrupt by IRRCAP3
Bit 3⎯Capstan Speed Error Detection (Lock Detection) Interrupt Enable Bit (IECAP2)
Bit 3
IECAP2 Description
0 Disables the request of the interrupt by IRRCAP2
(Initial value)
1 Enables the request of the interrupt by IRRCAP2
Bit 2⎯Capstan Speed Error Detection (OVF, Latch) Interrupt Enable Bit (IECAP1)
Bit 2
IECAP1 Description
0 Disables the request of the interrupt by IRRCAP1
(Initial value)
1 Enables the request of the interrupt by IRRCAP1
Bit 1⎯HSW Timing Generation (counter clear, capture) Interrupt Enable Bit (IEHSW2)
Bit 1
IEHSW2 Description
0 Disables the request of the interrupt by IRRHSW2
(Initial value)
1 Enables the request of the interrupt by IRRHSW2
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 747 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 0⎯HSW Timing Generation (OVW, Matching, STRIG) Interrupt Enable Bit (IEHSW1)
Bit 0
IEHSW1 Description
0 Disables the request of the interrupt by IRRHSW1
(Initial value)
1 Enables the request of the interrupt by IRRHSW1
Servo Interrupt Enable Register 2 (SIENR2)
0
0
1
0
R/W
23456
1
7
——————
—————— R/W
IESNC IECTL
11111
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
SIENR2 is an 8-bit read/write register that enables or disables interrupts in the servo section. It is
initialized to H'FC by a reset, stand-by or module stop.
Bits 7 to 2⎯Reserved: Cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
Bit 1⎯Vertical Sync Signal Interrupt Enable Bit (IESNC)
Bit 1
IESNC Description
0 Disables the request of the interrupt (interrupt to the vertical sync signal) by IRRSNC
(Initial value)
1 Enables the request of the interrupt by IRRSNC
Bit 0⎯CTL Interrupt Enable Bit (IECTL)
Bit 0
IECTL Description
0 Disables the request of the interrupt by IRRCTL
(Initial value)
1 Enables the request of the interrupt by IRRCTL
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 748 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Servo Interrupt Request Register 1 (SIRQR1)
0
0
1
0
R/(W)*
2
0
R/(W)*
3
0
4
0
R/(W)*
0
R/(W)*
56
0
7
IRRCAP3 IRRCAP2 IRRCAP1 IRRHSW2 IRRHSW1
0
R/(W)*
IRRDRM3
R/(W)*R/(W)*R/(W)*
IRRDRM2 IRRDRM1
Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
SIRQR1 is an 8-bit read/write register that indicates interrupt request in the servo section. If the
interrupt request has occurred, the corresponding bit is set to 1.
Only 0 can be written to clear the flag. It is initialized to H'00 by a reset, or in stand-by or module
stop mode.
Bit 7⎯Drum Phase Error Detector Interrupt Request Bit (IRRDRM3)
Bit 7
IRRDRM3 Description
0 No interrupt request from the drum phase error detector. (Initial value)
1 Interrupt requested from the drum phase error detector.
Bit 6⎯Drum Speed Error Detector (Lock Detection) Interrupt Request Bit (IRRDRM2)
Bit 6
IRRDRM2 Description
0 No interrupt request from the drum speed error detector (lock detection).
(Initial value)
1 Interrupt requested from the drum speed error detector (lock detection).
Bit 5⎯Drum Speed Error Detector (OVF, Latch) Interrupt Request Bit (IRRDRM1)
Bit 5
IRRDRM1 Description
0 No interrupt request from the drum speed error detector (OVF, latch).
(Initial value)
1 Interrupt requested from the drum speed error detector (OVF, latch).
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 749 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 4⎯Capstan Phase Error Detector Interrupt Request Bit (IRRCAP3)
Bit 4
IRRCAP3 Description
0 No interrupt request from the capstan phase error detector. (Initial value)
1 Interrupt requested from the capstan phase error detector.
Bit 3⎯Capstan Speed Error Detector (Lock Detection) Interrupt Request Bit (IRRCAP2)
Bit 3
IRRCAP2 Description
0 No interrupt request from the capstan speed error detector (lock detection).
(Initial value)
1 Interrupt requested from the drum speed error detector (lock detection).
Bit 2⎯Drum Speed Error Detector (OVF, Latch) Interrupt Request Bit (IRRCAP1)
Bit 2
IRRCAP1 Description
0 No interrupt request from the capstan speed error detector (OVF, latch).
(Initial value)
1 Interrupt requested from the capstan speed error detector (OVF, latch).
Bit 1⎯HSW Timing Generator (Counter Clear, Capture) Interrupt Permission Bit
(IRRHSW2)
Bit 1
IRRHSW2 Description
0 No interrupt request from the HSW timing generator (counter clear, capture).
(Initial value)
1 Interrupt requested from the HSW timing generator (counter clear, capture).
Section 26 Servo Circuits
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 750 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 0⎯HSW Timing Generator (OVW, Matching, STRIG) Interrupt Permission Bit
(IRRHSW1)
Bit 0
IRRHSW1 Description
0 No interrupt request from the HSW timing generator (OVW, matching, STRIG).
(Initial value)
1 Interrupt requested from the HSW timing generator (OVW, matching, STRIG).
Servo Interrupt Request Register 2 (SIRQR2)
0
0
1
0
R/(W)*
23456
1
7
——————
—————— R/(W)*
IRRSNC IRRCTL
11111
Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
SIRQR2 is an 8-bit read/write register that indicates interrupt request in the servo section. If the
interrupt request has occurred, the corresponding bit is set to 1.
Writing 0 after reading 1 is allowed; no other writing is allowed. It is initialized to H'FC by a reset,
or in stand-by or module stop mode.
Bits 7 to 2⎯Reserved: Cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
Bit 1⎯Vertical Sync Signal Interrupt Request Bit (IRRSNC)
Bit 1
IRRSNC Description
0 No interrupt request from the sync signal detector (VD, noise) (Initial value)
1 Interrupt requested from the sync signal detector (VD, noise)
Bit 0⎯CTL Signal Interrupt Request Bit (IRRCTL)
Bit 0
IRRCTL Description
0 No interrupt request from CTL (Initial value)
1 Interrupt requested from CTL
Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 751 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer
27.1 Overview
The sync separator separates the horizontal sync signal and vertical sync signal from the
composite video signal input from the CVin2 terminal and sends the sync signals to the on screen
display (OSD) module and data slicer.
The sync separator has an automatic frequency controller (AFC), which generates a reference
clock at 576 or 448 times the horizontal sync signal frequency. This reference clock is used to
separate the horizontal sync signal from the composite video signal. The AFC receives the Hsync
signal processed by the H complement and mask counter. The H complement and mask counter
removes noise and equalizing pulses from the Hsync signal and interpolates necessary pulses for
the Hsync signal.
The sync separator separates the vertical sync signal from the composite video signal through the
counting operation of the V complement and mask counter. The V complement and mask counter
increments the count at double the frequency of the horizontal sync signal to mask the Vsync noise
and to generate complementary pulses for the Vsync signal according to the register settings.
Through the above functions, the sync signals can be separated correctly against noise input to the
CVin2 terminal, motor skew due to VCR tape playback or special-function playback, and
abnormal noise in a weak field.
In addition, the sync separator provides the field detection function necessary for the data slicer,
and the noise detection function necessary for tuner detection (detecting the tuning status).
As the AFC reference clock is also used as the dot clock of the OSD, switching the reference clock
can change the dot width of the display. When the text display mode of the OSD is used, refer to
section 27.3.6, Automatic Frequency Controller (AFC).
In addition to the CVin2 video signal, the following signals can be selected as sources of sync
separation through the external circuit and register settings: the Csync composite sync signal input
from the Csync/Hsync terminal, and the separate Vsync and Hsync signals input from the
VLPF/Vsync and Csync/Hsync terminals, respectively.
Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 752 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
27.1.1 Features
• Horizontal sync signal separation: Stable separation is provided by the AFC, and complement
and mask functions are available.
• AFC reference clock frequency: 576 or 448 times the frequency of the horizontal sync signal
can be selected.
• Vertical sync signal separation: The masking and complement functions are available through
the V complement and mask counter.
• The source for sync separation can be selected from three signals (five methods).
1. Composite video signal input from the CVin2 terminal
2. Csync signal input from the Csync/Hsync terminal
3. Vsync and Hsync signals that are input from the VLPF/Vsync and Csync/Hsync terminals,
respectively
• Csync separation comparator: The slice level can be selected by register settings.
• Polarity of the Csync/Hsync terminal input: The signal detection polarity can be selected.
• Polarity of the VLPF/Vsync terminal input: The signal detection polarity can be selected.
• Noise detection: Noise during one frame is counted and a noise detection interrupt is
generated when the count reaches the specified value.
• Noise detection counter: The count is readable and is reset every other vertical sync signal
input.
• Field detection: The odd or even field for interlace scanning is distinguished.
• Reference Hsync signal for the AFC: The reference Hsync signal can be selected.
• V complement and mask counter: The source for the counter clock (twice the frequency of the
horizontal sync signal) can be selected.
• Internal Csync generator: The clock source for the internal Csync generator can be selected.
27.1.2 Block Diagram
Figure 27.1 shows the block diagram of the sync separator.
Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 753 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Slicing voltage
control
Separation
method
Digital H
separation
counter
Vvth register
Selecting 576 or 448
as the division ratio
Digital
LPF ON
Switching
Switching
Reference
Hsync
Internally generated
Hsync
External
Hsync
Switching
Switching
Frequency-dividing
counter
Complement and
mask setting register
Switching
Switching
Reset
for V
Reset
for H
TV format
in H
(Self-
running)
Internal Csync
generator
AFC error output
circuit
(comparator)
When the data slicer is used and the text
display mode is selected in the OSD,
the AFC clock is selected; the clock is
also used as the dot clock.
When the data slicer is not used
and the text display mode is
selected in the OSD, the
self-running signal is selected.
Switching
Switching
Switching
Switching
Switching
Reference clock
4/2fsc
Masking
Complement
and mask
Complement enable bit
(Self-running)
Field detection window Field detection
Field detection
window register
Hvth register
Noise
detection
Noise detection
window
Noise
counter
Noise detection
interrupt
: Register
V complement enabled:
Complemented and
masked V
V complement disabled:
Masked V
External Vsync (data
slicer)
External Vsync interrupt
Field signal (data slicer)
External Hsync
(data slicer)
Detection window
signals for data slicer
(data slicer)
Internally generated
sync signal (OSD)
Clock run-in period and start bit period
AFCH
Dot clock (OSD)
Noise detection level register
Csync
separation
comparator
I/O
switching
Polarity
switching
Polarity
switching
CVin2 Hsync
Vsync
Si/TEXT
HCKSEL
(TE)
(0)
(1)
(Si)
SEPH
1/2
U/D
inV
HHK
C
H complement and
mask counter
(complement and
mask functions)
ROSCH
AFCV
Si/TEXT
SEPV
OSC2H
C
R
C
C
R
Digital V
separation
counter
U/D
C
φ/2
φ/2
φ/2
Csync/Hsync
Vsync/VLPF
(1)
(0)
(TE)
OSDFLD
OSDV (OSD)
Si = AFCV
TEXT = inV
OSDH (OSD)
Field sig
nal (OSD)
Si = AFCFLD
TEXT = inFLD
(TE)
(0)
(1)
(0)
(1)
inFLD
AFCFLD
(Si)
(Si)
Si/TEXT
HCKSEL
Switching
DOTCKSL
VCKSL
AFC2H 2 × fh
4/2fsc
Si/TEXT
AFCosc
AFCpc
AFCLPF
AFC
(Si)
AFCH
AFC oscillator
HSEL
(TE)
V complement and
mask counter
(complement and
mask functions)
R
C
Figure 27.1 Sync Separator Block Diagram
Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 754 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
27.1.3 Pin Configuration
Table 27.1 shows the pin configuration of the sync separator.
Table 27.1 Sync Separator Pin Configuration
Name Abbrev. I/O Function
Csync/Hsync Input/output Composite sync signal input/output or
horizontal sync signal input
Sync signal input/output
VLPF/Vsync Input Pin for connecting external LPF for
vertical sync signal or input pin for
vertical sync signal
AFCosc Input/output AFC oscillation signal AFC oscillation signals
AFCpc Input/output AFC by-pass capacitor connecting pin
LPF for AFC AFCLPF Input/output External LPF connecting pin for AFC
Composite video signal CVin2 Input Composite video signal input (2 Vpp,
with a sync tip clamp circuit)
27.1.4 Register Configuration
Table 27.2 shows the sync separator registers.
Table 27.2 Sync Separator Registers
Name Abbrev. R/W Size
Initial
Value Address*1
Sync separation input mode register SEPIMR R/W Byte H'00 H'D240
Sync separation control register SEPCR R/(W)*2 Byte H'00 H'D241
Sync separation AFC control register SEPACR R/(W)*2 Byte H'10 H'D242
Horizontal sync signal threshold register HVTHR W Byte H'E0 H'D243
Vertical sync signal threshold register VVTHR W Byte H'00 H'D244
Field detection window register FWIDR W Byte H'F0 H'D245
H complement and mask register HCMMR W Word H'0000 H'D246
Noise detection counter NDETC R Byte H'00 H'D248
Noise detection level register NDETR W Byte H'00 H'D248
Data slicer detection window register DDETWR W Byte H'00 H'D249
Internal sync signal frequency register INFRQR W Byte H'10 H'D24A
Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address.
2. Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 755 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
27.2 Register Description
27.2.1 Sync Separation Input Mode Register (SEPIMR)
0
0000000
7
R/W
FRQSEL
0
R/W
CCMPV1
6
R/W
CCMPV0
5
R/W
COMPSL
4
R/W
SYNCT
3
R/W
VSEL
2
R/W
DLPFON
1
—
—
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The SEPIMR is an 8-bit read/write register for selecting the source signals for sync separation. In
addition to the internal switches controlled by this register setting, the external circuits are used to
select the sources of the Hsync and Vsync signals to be supplied to the digital H separation
counter and the digital V separation counter, respectively. Figure 27.2 and table 27.3 show the
source signal selection. The SEPIMR also specifies the slicing voltage of the Csync separation
comparator, switches the polarity of the signals input from the Csync/Hsync and VLPF/Vsync
terminals, turns on or off the digital LPF, and switches the reference clock frequency for the AFC.
For details on the source signals for sync separation, refer to section 27.3.1, Selecting Source
Signals for Sync Separation. When reset, the SEPIMR is initialized to H'00.
Bits other than bit 5 (CCMPSL) are cleared to 0 in module stop, sleep, standby, watch, subactive,
and subsleep modes.
Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 756 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
CVin
Csync
a
1
1
0
0
b
a
b
Hsync
Vsync
VLPF VLPF/Vsync
Csync/Hsync
Hsync
Vsync
DLPFON
External
SW3
Internal
SW5
Internal
SW6
External
SW2
External
SW1
Reference
voltage switch
Register
control
I/O
switch
I/O
switch Polarity
switch
Sync tip
clamp
Digital V
separation
counter
Csync polarity
Schmitt circuit
Vsync polarity
Schmitt circuit
External circuit Inside LSI
Csync
separation
comparator
External
SW4
CVin2 –
+
CCMPSL
CCMPV0, 1
SYNCT
VSEL
SEPV
SEPH
Digital H
separation
counter
Polarity
switch
Figure 27.2 Diagram of the Circuit for Selecting the Source Signals for Sync Separation
Table 27.3 Source Signals for Sync Separation
Input
Source
Vsync
Detector
External
SW1
External
SW2
External
SW3
External
SW4
CCMPSL
(Internal
SW5)
VSEL
(Internal
SW6)
Csync/
Hsync
Terminal
CVin2
input
Vsync
Schmitt
Off On a a 0 0 Output
Csync
Schmitt
Off Off Open Input fixed
to OVss
0 1 Output
Csync
input
Vsync
Schmitt
On On a a 1 0 Input
Csync
Schmitt
On Off a Input fixed
to OVss
1 1 Input
Hsync/
Vsync
input
Vsync
Schmitt
Off Off b b 1 0 Input
Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 757 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bits 7 and 6⎯Csync Separation Comparator Slicing Voltage Select
(CCMPV1 and CCMPV0): Select the slicing voltage for the Csync separation comparator. The
value set by these bits is the slicing level against the sync tip level (–40 IRE). Note that this slicing
level is used only for reference.
Bit 7 Bit 6
CCMPV1 CCMPV0 Description
0 0 The Csync slicing level is 10 IRE (Initial value)
1 The Csync slicing level is 5 IRE
1 0 The Csync slicing level is 15 IRE
1 The Csync slicing level is 20 IRE
Bit 5⎯Csync Separation Comparator Input Select (CCMPSL): Controls internal switch SW5
to select whether to use the Csync separation comparator input or Csync Schmitt input. Writing 0
to this bit selects the Csync separation comparator input, and writing 1 selects the Csync Schmitt
input. This bit also controls the input/output status of the Csync/Hsync terminal. Writing 0 to this
bit makes the Csync/Hsync an output terminal, and writing 1 makes it an input terminal. This bit is
cleared to 0 only at reset. Note that the Csync/Hsync terminal enters a high-impedance state at
reset and in sleep, subactive, subsleep, watch, standby, and module stop modes*.
Bit 5
CCMPSL Description
0 The Csync separation comparator input is selected
The Csync/Hsync terminal operates as an output terminal (Initial value)
1 The Csync Schmitt input is selected
The Csync/Hsync terminal operates as an input terminal
Note: * When this bit is set to 1, it must be set to 1 by the instruction following the module stop
release instruction in the interrupt-prohibited state.
ORC #B'10000000, CCR ← Interrupt prohibited
BCLR.B #1, @MSTPCRH ← Module stop release
BSET.B #5, @SEPIMR ← Sets CCMPSL bit to 1
ANDC #B'01111111, CCR ← Interrupt permitted
Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 758 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 4⎯Sync Signal Polarity Select (SYNCT): This bit selects the polarity of the Csync/Hsync
and VLPF/Vsync input signals. When using the CVin2 input signal, be sure to write 0 to this bit to
select the positive polarity.
Bit 4
SYNCT Description
0
(Initial value)
1
Bit 3⎯Vsync Input Signal Select (VSEL): Controls internal switch SW6 to select the Vsync
input signal. Writing 0 to this bit selects the Vsync Schmitt input, and writing 0 selects the Csync
Schmitt input.
Bit 3
VSEL Description
0 Vsync Schmitt input (Initial value)
1 Csync Schmitt input
Bit 2⎯Digital LPF Control (DLPFON): Specifies the digital LPF function, which masks noise
components of the Vsync signal in a weak field. The digital LPF logically ORs the Csync signal
(Vsync signal) and the SEPH signal that is separated by the digital H separation counter, then
inputs the ORed result to the digital V separation counter. This function prevents Vsync detection
delay and Vsync detection miss in a weak field. For the timing, refer to section 27.2.5, Vertical
Sync Signal Threshold Register (VVTHR).
Bit 2
DLPFON Description
0 The digital LPF does not operate (Initial value)
1 The digital LPF operates
Bit 1⎯Reserved: Cannot be modified and is always read as 0. When 1 is written to this bit,
correct operation is not guaranteed.
Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 759 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 0⎯Reference Clock Frequency Select (FRQSEL): Selects the frequency of the reference
clock for the AFC: 576 times or 448 times the horizontal sync signal frequency. To obtain a
desired reference clock frequency, connect an external circuit of a value suitable for the desired
frequency to the AFCosc and AFCpc terminals, and select the division ratio of the frequency
dividing counter with this bit. This AFC reference clock is also used as the dot clock for the OSD;
change this frequency to adjust the dot width of the display characters. Note that the data slicer
will operate when 448 times the horizontal sync frequency is selected. For details, refer to section
27.3.6, Automatic Frequency Controller (AFC).
Bit 0
FRQSEL Description
0 576 times the horizontal sync frequency (Initial value)
1 448 times the horizontal sync frequency
Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 760 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
27.2.2 Sync Separation Control Register (SEPCR)
0
0000000
7
R
FLD
0
R/W
AFCVIE
6
R/(W)*
AFCVIF
5
R/W
VCKSL
4
R/W
VCMPON
3
R/W
HCKSEL
2
R/W
HHKON
1
R/W
HHKON2
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
The SEPCR is an 8-bit read/write register for controlling the external Vsync interrupt, enabling or
disabling the V complement function, selecting the clock source for the V complement and mask
counter, selecting the clock source for the internal Csync generator, and indicating the field
detected by the AFC. The SEPCR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, in module stop mode, in sleep
mode, in standby mode, in watch mode, in subactive mode, or in subsleep mode.
Bit 7⎯External Vsync Interrupt Enable (AFCVIE): Enables or disables the external Vsync
interrupt to be requested when the AFCVIF is set to 1.
Bit 7
AFCVIE Description
0 The external Vsync interrupt is disabled (Initial value)
1 The external Vsync interrupt is enabled
Bit 6⎯External Vsync Interrupt Flag (AFCVIF): This flag is set to 1 when the V complement
and mask counter detects the external Vsync signal (the AFCV signal). For the Vsync interrupt
generated in the OSD, refer to section 29, On-Screen Display (OSD).
Bit 6
AFCVIF Description
0 [Clearing condition]
1 is read, then 0 is written (Initial value)
1 [Setting condition]
The V complement and mask counter detects the external Vsync signal (AFCV
signal)
Bit 5⎯V Complement and Mask Counter Clock Source Select (VCKSL): Selects the clock
source for the V complement and mask counter: double the frequency of the horizontal sync signal
for the AFC (AFCH signal) or that for the H complement and mask counter (OSCH signal). When
the text display mode is selected for the OSD and internally generated Hsync signal is selected as
the reference Hsync signal for the AFC by setting the HSEL bit (bit 5) of the SEPACR, setting this
Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 761 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
VCKSL bit to 1 enables the external Vsync signal to be detected irrespectively of the text display
mode operation.
Bit 5
VCKSL Description
0 Double the frequency of the horizontal sync signal (AFCH signal) for the AFC
(Initial value)
1 Double the frequency of the horizontal sync signal (OSCH signal) for the H
complement and mask counter
Bit 4⎯V Complement Function Control (VCMPON): Enables or disables the V complement
function of the V complement and mask counter. The V complement function prevents the Vsync
detection being delayed and missed in a weak field. For the timing, refer to section 27.2.5, Vertical
Sync Signal Threshold Register (VVTHR).
Bit 4
VCMPON Description
0 The V complement function is disabled (Initial value)
1 The V complement function is enabled
Bit 3⎯Internal Csync Generator Clock Source Select (HCKSEL): Selects the clock source for
the internal Csync generator: the 4/2 fsc clock or the AFC reference clock. When the text display
mode is selected for the OSD and the external Hsync signal is selected as the reference Hsync
signal for the AFC, set this HCKSEL bit to 1 to generate the internal Csync signal from the AFC
reference clock. In this case, however, the Hsync and Vsync signals must be dedicated separation
inputs, with both signals having equal cycles and pulse widths. This bit must be cleared to 0 when
bit 1 (DOTCKSL) of SEPACR is set to 1.
Bit 3
HCKSEL Description
0 4/2 fsc clock (Initial value)
1 AFC reference clock
Bit 2⎯HHK Forcibly Turned On (HHKON): Forcibly operates the half Hsync killer (HHK)*
function when the H complement and mask counter interpolates complementary pulses three
successive times. When the HVTHR is set within the range from 2.35 μs to 4.7 μs to remove
equalizing pulses by using the digital H separation counter, the HHK function prevents Hsync-
Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 762 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Vsync phase-difference errors during the V blanking period. For the timing, refer to section
27.2.4, Horizontal Sync Signal Threshold Register (HVTHR).
Note: * HHK: Half Hsync killer
Bit 2
HHKON Description
0 The HHK is not operated when complementary pulses are interpolated three
successive times (Initial value)
1 The HHK is forcibly operated when complementary pulses are interpolated three
successive times
Bit 1⎯HHK Forcibly Turned On 2 (HHKON2): Forcibly operates the half Hsync killer (HHK)
during the V blanking period. Thus the HHK function can be forcibly operated after an
interpolation operation even when the Hsync signal is not input. When the HVTHR is set within
the range from 2.35 µs to 4.7 µs to remove equalizing pulses by using the digital H separation
counter, this is an effective countermeasure against erroneous field or line detection that occurs
when there is no Hsync signal input in the case of a weak electric field, etc., or when noise is
superimposed. For the timing, refer to section 27.2.4, Horizontal Sync Signal Threshold Register
(HVTHR).
Bit 1
HHKON2 Description
0 The HHK is not forcibly operated during the V blanking period (Initial value)
1 The HHK is forcibly operated during the V blanking period
Bit 0⎯Field Detection Flag (FLD): Indicates the field status determined by the status of the field
detection window signal generated by the AFC when the external Vsync signal (AFCV signal)
rises. This flag is invalid when the internally generated Hsync signal is selected as the AFC
reference Hsync signal. For the timing, refer to section 27.2.6, Field Detection Window Register
(FWIDR).
Bit 0
FLD Description
0 Even field (Initial value)
1 Odd field
Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 763 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
27.2.3 Sync Separation AFC Control Register (SEPACR)
0
0000100
7
R/W
DSL32B
0
R/W
NDETIE
6
R/(W)*
NDETIF
5
R/W
HSEL
4
—
—
3
—
—
2
R/W
ARST
1
R/W
DOTCKSL
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
The SEPACR is an 8-bit read/write register for controlling the AFC. The AFC generates a
reference clock of 576 or 448 times the frequency of the horizontal sync signal. From this
reference clock, several signals such as the horizontal sync signal (AFCH signal), clock run-in
detection window signal, or start bit detection window signal are generated. The reference clock is
also used as the dot clock for the OSD. The AFC reference Hsync signal can be switched between
the external Hsync signal and the internally generated Hsync signal. In addition, the SEPACR has
a function for controlling the noise detection interrupt and enabling or disabling the AFC reset
function. The SEPACR is initialized to H'10 by a reset, in module stop mode, in sleep mode, in
standby mode, in watch mode, in subactive mode or in subsleep mode.
Bit 7⎯Noise Detection Interrupt Enable (NDETIE): Enables or disables the noise detection
interrupt to be requested when the NDETIF is set to 1.
Bit 7
NDETIF Description
0 The noise detection interrupt is disabled (Initial value)
1 The noise detection interrupt is enabled
Bit 6⎯Noise Detection Interrupt Flag (NDETIF): This flag is set to 1 when the noise detection
counter value matches the noise detection level register value.
Bit 6
NDETIF Description
0 [Clearing condition]
1 is read, then 0 is written (Initial value)
1 [Setting condition]
The noise detection counter value matches the noise detection level register value
Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 764 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 5⎯Reference Hsync Signal Select (HSEL): Selects the reference Hsync signal for the AFC:
the external Hsync signal or the internally generated Hsync signal. When using the data slicer,
select the external Hsync signal. When not using the data slicer but using the text display mode for
the OSD, select the internally generated Hsync signal. Before this bit setting is modified, the OSD
display should be turned off.
Bit 5
HSEL Description
0 The external Hsync signal is selected (Initial value)
1 The internally generated Hsync signal is selected
Bit 4⎯Blank Bit: Cannot be read or modified.
Bit 3⎯Reserved: Cannot be modified and is always read as 0. When 1 is written to this bit,
correct operation is not guaranteed.
Bit 2⎯AFC Reset Control (ARST): Enables or disables the AFC reset function. When a VCR
motor skew occurs or the channel is switched, and if the Hsync signal (AFCH signal) output from
the AFC differs in phase from the reference Hsync signal input to the AFC, the AFC is reset to
eliminate the phase difference and to lock the AFCH signal phase to that of the reference signal.
Bit 2
ARST Description
0 The reset function is disabled (Initial value)
1 The reset function is enabled
Bit 1⎯DOTCKSL Bit (DOTCKSL): Selects the dot-clock source of the OSD. When this bit is
reset to 0, the reference clock of the AFC circuit is selected. When this bit is set to 1, the 4/2fsc
clock that is input from 4/2fsc in pin is selected. When this bit is set to 1, use the OSD in text
display mode. When this bit is set to 1 in superimposed mode or when HCKSEL in SEPCR is set
to 1, characters will flicker. When a 4fsc clock is input while this bit is set to 1, the OSD display
becomes smaller in the horizontal derection; be sure to input a 2fsc clock. To operate the data
slicer in text display mode, set this bit to 1.
Bit 1
DOTCKSL Description
0 The reference clock of the AFC circuit is selected for the dot clock (Initial value)
1 The 4/2fsc clock is selected for the dot clock
Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 765 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 0⎯DSL32B Bit (DSL32B): Sets 16-bit or 32-bit mode slice operation of the data slicer. For
details, see section 28.4, 32-bit Slice Operation.
Bit 0
DSL32B Description
0 16-bit mode is set for the slice operation (Initial value)
1 32-bit mode is set for the slice operation
27.2.4 Horizontal Sync Signal Threshold Register (HVTHR)
0
0000011
7
W
HVTH0
1
—
—
6
—
—
5
—
—
4
W
HVTH4
3
W
HVTH3
2
W
HVTH2
1
W
HVTH1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The HVTHR is a 5-bit write-only register for specifying the threshold value for the digital H
separation counter; this value is used to generate the SEPH signal from the Csync signal. The
SEPH signal is set to 1 when the digital H separation counter value matches the HVTHR value
while the Csync is high, and is reset to 0 when the digital H separation counter value becomes 00
while the Csync is low. The HVTHR is initialized to H'E0 by a reset, in module stop mode, in
sleep mode, in standby mode, in watch mode, in subactive mode or in subsleep mode.
Figures 27.3 and 27.4 show the HVTH value and the SEPH signal generation timing.
Csync
HVTH
SEPH
Digital H separation
counter
About
1.6 μs to 2.0 μs
Figure 27.3 HVTH Value and SEPH Generation Timing
when Equalizing Pulses Are Detected
Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 766 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Csync
HVTH
SEPH
Digital H separation
counter
About
3.2 μs to 3.6 μs
Figure 27.4 HVTH Value and SEPH Generation Timing
when Equalizing Pulses Are Not Detected
The following shows examples of HVTHR settings.
Condition: (HVTHR – 1) × (2/OSC) > 1.6 μs or 3.2 μs
System clock OSC = 10 MHz
2/OSC (5 MHz = 0.2 μs)
Example 1: To detect equalizing pulses
Hsync detection threshold value: 1.6 μs
1.6 μs / 0.2 μs = 8
HVTHR value = H'8 (8)
Example 2: To not detect equalizing pulses
Hsync detection threshold value: 3.2 μs
3.2 μs / 0.2 μs = 16
HVTHR value = H'10 (16)
In general, to detect Hsync pulses continuously, set the HVTH value so that 2.35-μs equalizing
pulses can be detected. However, if an equalizing pulse at an Hsync pulse position is lost in a
weak field, a Hsync-Vsync phase-difference error will occur, and the field will not be detected
correctly. In such a weak field, this error can be prevented by eliminating 2.35-μs equalizing
pulses. Figure 27.5 shows the timing when a phase-difference error occurs.
Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 767 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Csync
HVTH
SEPH
HHK
OSCH
HC
Digital H separation
counter
Hsync-Vsync
phase-difference
error
Pulse
lost
H complement
and mask counter
Comple-
ment
Comple-
ment
Figure 27.5 Timing of Hsync-Vsync Phase-Difference Error
when Equalizing Pulse Lost at Hsync Pulse Position
Note: When 2.35-μs equalizing pulses are eliminated, the complement function operates for the
eliminated period. Accordingly, the rising edge of the Vsync signal for the even field is
detected as an Hsync pulse. Therefore, to not generate an Hsync pulse at this position, set
the HHKON bit (bit 2) of the SEPCR to 1 so that the HHK function is forcibly operated
when complementary pulses are inserted three successive times. Figures 27.6 and 27.7
show this timing.
Csync
HVTH
SEPH
HHK
OSCH
HC
Digital H separation
counter
Comple-
ment
Comple-
ment
Comple-
ment
Comple-
ment
Phase-difference
error
H complement and
mask counter
Comple-
ment
Comple-
ment
Comple-
ment
Figure 27.6 Timing of Hsync-Vsync Phase-Difference Error
when Equalizing Pulse Not Detected
Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 768 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Csync
HVTH
SEPH
HHK
OSCH
HC
Digital H separation
counter
H complement and
mask counter
Forcible HHK
operation
Forcible HHK
operation
Comple-
ment
Comple-
ment
Comple-
ment
Comple-
ment
Comple-
ment
Comple-
ment
Figure 27.7 Timing of HHK Operation
when Complementary Pulses Inserted Three Successive Times while HHKON = 1
Note: When 2.35-µs equalizing pulses are eliminated, the complement function operates for the
eliminated period. Accordingly, when there is no Hsync signal input in the case of a weak
electric field, etc., and noise is superimposed, the noise is detected as an Hsync pulse.
Therefore, in order not to generate an Hsync pulse in this case, set the HHKON2 bit (bit 1)
of the SEPCR register to 1. Figures 27.8 and 27.9 show this timing.
Csync
HVTH
SEPH
HHK
OSCH
Digital H separation
counter
H complement and
mask counter
Comple-
ment
Comple-
ment
Comple-
ment
Comple-
ment
Comple-
ment
Comple-
ment
Hsync-Vsync phase-difference error
Pulse lost, noise
Figure 27.8 Timing of Hsync-Vsync Phase-Difference Error Due to Noise Occurrence after
Equalizing Pulse Is Lost at Hsync Pulse Position
Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 769 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Csync
HVTH
SEPH
HHK
OSCH
Digital H separation
counter
H complement and
mask counter
Comple-
ment
Comple-
ment
Comple-
ment
Comple-
ment
Comple-
ment
Comple-
ment
Forcible HHK operation
Pulse lost, noise
Figure 27.9 Timing of Forcible HHK Operation in V Blanking Period when Equalizing
Pulse Is Not Detected
27.2.5 Vertical Sync Signal Threshold Register (VVTHR)
0
0000000
7
W
VVTH0
0
W
VVTH7
6
W
VVTH6
5
W
VVTH5
4
W
VVTH4
3
W
VVTH3
2
W
VVTH2
1
W
VVTH1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The VVTHR is an 8-bit write-only register for specifying the threshold value for the digital V
separation counter; this value is used to generate the SEPV signal from the Csync signal. The
SEPV signal is set to 1 when the digital V separation counter value matches the VVTHR value
while the Csync is high, and reset to 0 when the digital V separation counter value becomes 00
while the Csync is low. Set the VVTHR value so that the SEPV signal goes high 1/2H or more
after the Vsync start point. The VVTHR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, in module stop mode, in
sleep mode, in standby mode, in watch mode, in subactive mode or in subsleep mode.
Figure 27.10 shows the VVTHR value and the SEPV signal generation timing.
Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 770 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Csync
1/2 H or more
VVTH
H
SEPV
Digital V separation
counter
Figure 27.10 VVTH Value and SEPV Generation Timing
The following shows an example of VVTHR settings.
Condition: (VVTHR – 1) × (2/OSC) > (Hsync period / 2 – 4.7 μs) × 1.5 = 41 μs
System clock OSC = 10 MHz
2/OSC (5 MHz = 0.2 μs)
Example 1: To detect 41-μs pulses
Vsync detection threshold value: 41 μs
41 μs / 0.2 μs = 205
HVTHR value = H'CE (206)
The noise component of the Csync signal in a weak field is usually large, and will cause the Vsync
detection delay or miss. In such a case, set the DLPFON (bit 2) of the SEPIMR to 1; the SEPH
signal detected by the digital H separation counter is logically ORed with the Csync signal
(Vsync), then the result is input to the digital V separation counter. This will prevent the Vsync
detection delay or miss in a weak field. Figure 27.11 shows this timing.
Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 771 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Csync + SEPH
HVTH
SEPH
SEPV
VVTH
Digital H separation
counter
Digital V separation
counter
Figure 27.11 VVTH Value and SEPV Generation Timing
when Digital LPF Is Enabled
Alternatively, set the VCMPON (bit 4) of the SEPCR to 1 when the Vsync detection delay or miss
may occur in a weak field; the external Vsync detection signal (AFCV signal) will be generated by
the V complement and mask counter. Figure 27.12 shows this timing.
Csync
VVTH
SEPV
521 522 523 524 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
AFCV
1/2 AFCH
(V sampling clock)
Digital H separation
counter
V complement and
mask counter
Figure 27.12 AFCV Generation Timing when V Complement Function Is Enabled
(for NTSC)
Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 772 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
27.2.6 Field Detection Window Register (FWIDR)
0
0000111
7
W
FWID0
1
—
—
6
—
—
5
—
—
4
—
—
3
W
FWID3
2
W
FWID2
1
W
FWID1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The FWIDR is a 4-bit write-only register for specifying the field detection window timing in units
of 16 × fh (fh: horizontal sync signal frequency). The field detection window signal is reset to 0
when the AFC dividing counter value matches the FWIDR value, and the signal is again set to 1
when 1/2 the Hsync signal period has passed. At a rising edge of the AFCV signal while the field
detection window signal is 1, the field is determined as an odd one, and the field detection flag
(FLD) is set to 1. At a rising edge of the AFCV signal while the field detection window signal is 0,
the field is determined as an even one, and the FLD is cleared to 0. The value set to the FWIDR
depends on the setting of the V complement function control (VCMPON) bit (bit 4) of the
SEPCR. When the VCMPON is cleared to 0, that is, when the V complement function is not
operating, the FWIDR must be set so that the rising edge of the SEPV signal, which is generated
when the V separation counter value reaches the specified threshold value, comes to the center of
the field detection window period. When the VCMPON is set to 1, that is, when the V
complement function is operating, the FWIDR must be set so that the dividing counter overflow
timing comes to the center of the field detection window period. The FWIDR is initialized to H'F0
by a reset, in module stop mode, in sleep mode, in standby mode, in watch mode, in subactive
mode or in subsleep mode.
(1) Bit 0 of SEPCR Register
Bit 0⎯Field Detection Flag (FLD): Indicates the field determined by the status of the field
detection window signal generated by the AFC when the external Vsync signal (AFCV signal)
rises. This flag is invalid when the internally generated Hsync signal is selected as the AFC
reference Hsync signal. For the timing, refer to figure 27.13 Field Detection Timing.
Bit 0
FLD Description
0 Even field (Initial value)
1 Odd field
Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 773 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Csync
SEPV
AFCV
FLD
AFCV T
F
*
T
F
*
Note: * T
F
: Field detection window register value
FLD
Digital V separation
counter
V complement and
mask counter clock
When V complement
function is not operating:
AFC frequency-
dividing counter
H/2 μs
Field detection
window signal
Field detection
window signal
Odd field
Odd field timing Even field timing
When V complement
function is operating:
Even field
Figure 27.13 Field Detection Timing
Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 774 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
27.2.7 H Complement and Mask Timing Register (HCMMR)
15
0
HC8 HC7 HC6 HC5 HC4 HC3 HC2 HC1 HC0 HM6 HM5 HM4 HM3 HM2 HM1 HM0
W
14
0
W
13 12
0
W
0
W
11
0
W
10
0
W
9
0
W
8
0
W
7
0
W
6
0
W
5
0
W
4
0
W
3
0
W
2
0
W
1
0
W
0
0
W
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The HCMMR is a 16-bit write-only register for specifying the timing (Th: Hsync frequency) for
generating a complementary pulse when a pulse in the Hsync signal is lost, and the timing (Tm
and Tm2) for clearing the HHK (masking period).
The HC8 to HC0 bits specify the timing for generating a complementary pulse; if no Hsync pulse
is input within this specified time, a complementary pulse is generated from the H complement
and mask counter. When a supplementary pulse is generated, the HHK function, provided for
resetting the H supplement mask counter, remains cleared, and the H supplement mask counter is
synchronized with the Hsync signal at the next Hsync pulse input. The HHK2 operation for
generating the Hsync signal (OSCH) for the AFC circuit is performed when a supplementary pulse
is generated.
The HM6 to HM0 bits specify the timing for clearing the HHK function. Set the HHK clearing
timing to about 85% of the Hsync period starting from the SEPH rising edge to eliminate
equalizing pulses and copy-guard signals.
Figure 27.14 shows the complement and mask timing. The HHK signal is set to 1 about 5 μs after
the SEPH rising edge, and the HHK2 signal is set to 1 immediately after the H complement and
mask counter is reset. The HHK signal is also used for the noise detection window. For details on
the noise detection, refer to section 27.2.8, Noise Detection Counter (NDETC) and section 27.2.9,
Noise Detection Level Register (NDETR).
The HCMMR is initialized to H'0000 by a reset, in module stop mode, in sleep mode, in standby
mode, in watch mode, in subactive mode or in subsleep mode.
Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 775 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Csync
HVTH
SEPH
OSCH
Tm2
Tm
Th
5 μs
HC
HM
Digital H separation
counter
Noise
Killer Killer Killer Killer
Killer Killer Killer Killer
Pulse
lost
Comple-
mentary
pulse
H complement and
mask counter
HHK
(for counter reset)
HHK2
(for OSCH generation)
Figure 27.14 Complement and Mask Timing of the H Complement and Mask Counter
Bits 15 to 7⎯H Complementary Pulse Setting (HC8 to HC0): Specify the timing for
generating a complementary pulse when an Hsync pulse is lost. If no Hsync pulse is input within
the specified time, a complementary pulse is generated from the H complement and mask counter
and interpolated to the OSCH signal.
The following shows examples of HC8 to HC0 settings.
Condition: (HC + 1) × (2/OSC) > 63.5 μs (PAL: 64 μs)
System clock OSC = 10 MHz
2/OSC (5 MHz = 0.2 μs)
Example 1: To set the timing for NTSC
NTSC: 63.5 μs
63.5 μs / 0.2 μs = 317.5
HC8 to HC0 value = H'13E (318)
Example 2: To set the timing for PAL
PAL: 64 μs
64 μs / 0.2 μs = 320
HC8 to HC0 value = H'141 (321)
Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 776 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bits 6 to 0⎯HHK Period Setting (HM6 to HM0): Specify the timing for clearing the HHK
(masking period) for the Hsync signal. The H complement and mask counter starts counting at a
rising edge of the SEPH signal; the HHK period specified by these bits starts at this timing. This
value is also used as the timing for resetting the noise detection window signal. Note that the
setting precision is the upper six bits of the H complement and mask counter: the lower two bits of
the counter are ignored.
The following shows an example of HM6 to HM0 settings.
Condition: (HM + 1) × (8/OSC) > 54 μs (about 85% of the Hsync period)
System clock OSC = 10 MHz
8/OSC: 1.25 MHz (0.8 μs)
Example: To set the timing to 54 μs
54 μs / 0.8 μs = 67.5
HM6 to HM0 value = H'44 (67)
27.2.8 Noise Detection Counter (NDETC)
0
0000000
7
R
NC0
0
R
NC7
6
R
NC6
5
R
NC5
4
R
NC4
3
R
NC3
2
R
NC2
1
R
NC1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The NDETC is a 10-bit read-only counter of which the upper eight bits can be read. This counter
counts the number of Hsync cycles in which an Hsync pulse (noise H) is input while the noise
detection window signal is 1, and counts the number of Hsync cycles in which no Hsync pulse is
input while the noise detection window signal is 0. When this counter value matches the noise
detection level, the noise detection interrupt request flag is set. The counter is reset at every other
vertical sync signal (AFCV signal) input; that is, the noise status for one field can be monitored.
The NDETC value can be read by the CPU; the noise status can be monitored by the read value.
The NDETC is initialized to H'00 by a reset, in module stop mode, in sleep mode, in standby
mode, in watch mode, in subactive mode or in subsleep mode. The NDETC is assigned to the
same address as the NDETR. Figure 27.15 shows the timing for noise detection.
Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 777 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
27.2.9 Noise Detection Level Register (NDETR)
0
0000000
7
W
NR0
0
W
NR7
6
W
NR6
5
W
NR5
4
W
NR4
3
W
NR3
2
W
NR2
1
W
NR1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The NDETR is an 8-bit write-only register for specifying the noise detection level. The set value
must be 1/4 of the actual noise detection level. The noise detection window signal is set to 1 at a
falling edge of the OSCH signal, and reset to 0 after the time specified by the HHK period setting
bits has passed. The OSCH signal falls about 5 μs after a rising edge of the SEPH signal.
When the noise detection counter value matches the specified noise detection level, the noise
detection interrupt request flag is set to 1. The NDETR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, in module
stop mode, in sleep mode, in standby mode, in watch mode, in subactive mode or in subsleep
mode. The NDETR is assigned to the same address as the NDETC.
Figure 27.15 shows the timing for noise detection.
Csync
AFCV
NDETC
NDETR
SEPH
OSCH
NDETIF
HM
H complement and
mask counter
Cleared to 0 by CPU
Noise detection window
Noise
Noise
Noise Noise
Noise counter
cleared
Noise
Comple-
ment
Comple-
ment
Noise Pulse
lost
Pulse
lost
Figure 27.15 Noise Detection Window Setting and Noise Counting Timing
Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 778 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
27.2.10 Data Slicer Detection Window Register (DDETWR)
0
0000000
7
W
CRWDS0
0
W
SRWDE1
6
W
SRWDE0
5
W
SRWDS1
4
W
SRWDS0
3
W
CRWDE1
2
W
CRWDE0
1
W
CRWDS1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The DDETWR is an 8-bit write-only register for specifying the timing of the clock run-in
detection window signal and start bit detection window signal supplied to the data slicer. Figure
27.16 shows the timing of the signals. The DDETWR is initialized to H'00 by a reset, in module
stop mode, in sleep mode, in standby mode, in watch mode, in subactive mode or in subsleep
mode.
These detection window signals can be monitored through terminals. For details, refer to section
29.7.3, Digital Output Specification Register (DOUT).
C.video
32 × fh = 2 μs 32 × fh = 2 μs
10.5 μs±0.5 μs
±0.5 μs
±0.5 μs
±0.5 μs
23.5 μs
23.5 μs
29.5 μs
Clock run-in
detection
window signal
Start bit detection
window signal
Figure 27.16 Timing for Generating Clock Run-in Detection Window Signal and
Start Bit Detection Window Signal
Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 779 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bits 7 and 6⎯Start Bit Detection Window Signal Falling Timing Setting
(SRWDE1, SRWDE0): Specify the falling timing (end timing) of the start bit detection window
signal.
Bit 7 Bit 6
SRWDE1 SRWDE0 Description
0 0 The detection ends about 29.5 μs after the slicer start point
(Initial value)
1 The detection ends about 29.0 μs after the slicer start point
1 0 The detection ends about 30.0 μs after the slicer start point
1 This setting must not be used
Bits 5 and 4⎯Start Bit Detection Window Signal Rising Timing Setting
(SRWDS1, SRWDS0): Specify the rising timing (start timing) of the start bit detection window
signal.
Bit 5 Bit 4
SRWDS1 SRWDS0 Description
0 0 The detection starts about 23.5 μs after the slicer start point
(Initial value)
1 The detection starts about 23.0 μs after the slicer start point
1 0 The detection starts about 24.0 μs after the slicer start point
1 This setting must not be used
Bits 3 and 2⎯Clock Run-in Detection Window Signal Falling Timing Setting
(CRWDE1, CRWDE0): Specify the falling timing (end timing) of the clock run-in detection
window signal.
Bit 3 Bit 2
CRWDE1 CRWDE0 Description
0 0 The detection ends about 23.5 μs after the slicer start point
(Initial value)
1 The detection ends about 23.0 μs after the slicer start point
1 0 The detection ends about 24.0 μs after the slicer start point
1 This setting must not be used
Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 780 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bits 1 and 0⎯Clock Run-in Detection Window Signal Rising Timing Setting
(CRWDS1, CRWDS0): Specify the rising timing (start timing) of the clock run-in detection
window signal.
Bit 1 Bit 0
CRWDS1 CRWDS0 Description
0 0 The detection starts about 10.5 μs after the slicer start point
(Initial value)
1 The detection starts about 10.0 μs after the slicer start point
1 0 The detection starts about 11.0 μs after the slicer start point
1 This setting must not be used
27.2.11 Internal Sync Frequency Register (INFRQR)
0
0000100
7
—
—
0
W
VFS2
6
W
VFS1
5
W
HFS
4
—
—
3
—
—
2
—
—
1
—
—
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
The INFRQR is an 8-bit write-only register for modifying the internally generated Hsync and
Vsync frequency to reduce the color-bleeding or jitter of OSD in PAL, MPAL, or NPAL mode or
when the non-interlaced text display mode is selected in the OSD. The INFRQR is initialized to
H'10 by a reset, in module stop mode, in sleep mode, in standby mode, in watch mode, in
subactive mode or in subsleep mode.
Bits 7 and 6⎯Vsync Frequency Selection (VFS2, VFS1): Select the Vsync frequency. Here, fh
indicates the Hsync frequency in each TV format.
Bit 7 Bit 6 Description
VFS2 VFS1 PAL MPAL NPAL
0 0 fh/313 (Initial value) fh/263 (Initial value) fh/313 (Initial value)
1 fh/314 fh/266 fh/314
1 0 fh/310 fh/262 fh/310
1 fh/312 fh/264 fh/312
Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 781 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 5⎯Hsync Frequency Selection (HFS): Selects the Hsync frequency. Here, fsc indicates the
color subcarrier signal frequency in each TV format. Note that this setting is ignored when the
HCKSEL bit (bit 3) of the SEPCR is set to 1 to select the AFC clock as the internal Csync
generator clock source and when the FSCIN bit (bit 12) of the DFORM in the OSD is set to 1 to
select the 2fsc clock.
Bit 5 Description
HFS PAL MPAL NPAL
0 fsc/283.75 (Initial value) fsc/227.25 (Initial value) fsc/229.25 (Initial value)
1 fsc/283.5 fsc/227.5 fsc/229.5
Bit 4⎯Blank Bit: Cannot be read or modified.
Bits 3 to 0⎯Reserved: Cannot be modified and are always read as 0. When 1 is written to these
bits, correct operation is not guaranteed.
27.3 Operation
27.3.1 Selecting Source Signals for Sync Separation
The source for sync separation can be selected from three signals (five methods):
1. Composite video signal input from the CVin2 terminal (two methods)
2. Csync signal input from the Csync/Hsync terminal (two methods)
3. Vsync and Hsync signals that are input from the VLPF/Vsync and Csync/Hsync terminals,
respectively (one method)
For the composite video signal and the Csync signal, two methods are available for processing the
Vsync component.
(1) Inputting the Composite Video Signal as the Source
When the composite video signal is selected as the source, the Vsync component can be
processed in two methods: using the Vsync Schmitt circuit or using the Csync Schmitt circuit.
(a) Using the Vsync Schmitt Circuit
The composite video signal input to the CVin2 terminal is selected as the source, and the
Csync separation comparator separates the composite sync signal from the source signal.
Of the composite sync signal, the Hsync component is input to the digital H separation
counter, and the Vsync component is output from the Csync/Hsync terminal, goes through
the external LPF circuit, then is input again through the Vsync/VLPF terminal and the
Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 782 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Vsync Schmitt circuit to the digital V separation counter. The initial value of the SEPIMR
specifies this method. Figure 27.17 shows this method.
CVin2
Csync
a
1
1
0
0
b
a
b
Hsync
Vsync
VLPF Vsync/VLPF
Csync/Hsync
Hsync
Vsync
External
SW3
Internal
SW5
Internal
SW6
External
SW2
External
SW1
Reference
voltage switch
Register
control
I/O switch
I/O
switch
Polarity
switch
Polarity
switch
Digital H
separation
counter
DLPFON
Digital V
separation
counter
Csync polarity
Schmitt circuit
Vsync polarity
Schmitt circuit
External circuit Inside LSI
Csync
separation
comparator
External
SW4
CVin2
CCMPSL
CCMPV0, 1
SYNCT
VSEL
SEPV
SEPH
–
+
Sync tip
clamp
Figure 27.17 Sync Source Selection when Using the CVin2 Signal and
the Vsync Schmitt Circuit
Source
Signal
Vsync
Detection
External
SW1
External
SW2
External
SW3
External
SW4
CCMPSL
(Internal
SW5)
VSEL
(Internal
SW6)
Csync/
Hsync
Terminal
I/O
CVin2
input
Vsync
Schmitt
Off On a a 0 0 Output
Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 783 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
(b) Using the Csync Schmitt Circuit
The Hsync component is processed in the same way as described in (a), but the Vsync
component is processed differently; the Csync/Hsync terminal is left open and the
separated Vsync component is input through the Csync Schmitt circuit to the digital V
separation counter. Figure 27.18 shows this method.
CVin2
Csync
a
1
1
0
0
b
a
b
Hsync
Vsync
VLPF Vsync/VLPF
Csync/Hsync
Hsync
Vsync
External
SW3
Internal
SW5
Internal
SW6
External
SW2
External
SW1
Reference
voltage switch
Register
control
I/O switch
I/O
switch
Polarity
switch
Polarity
switch
Digital H
separation
counter
Digital V
separation
counter
DLPFON
Csync polarity
Schmitt circuit
Vsync polarity
Schmitt circuit
External circuit Inside LSI
Csync
separation
comparator
External
SW4
CVin2 –
+
CCMPSL
CCMPV0, 1
SYNCT
VSEL
SEPV
SEPH
Sync tip
clamp
Figure 27.18 Sync Source Selection when Using the CVin2 Signal and
the Csync Schmitt Circuit
Source
Signal
Vsync
Detection
External
SW1
External
SW2
External
SW3
External
SW4
CCMPSL
(Internal
SW5)
VSEL
(Internal
SW6)
Csync/
Hsync
Terminal
I/O
CVin2
input
Csync
Schmitt
Off Off Open Fixed to 0
or 1
0 1 Output
Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 784 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
(2) Inputting the Csync Signal as the Source
When the Csync signal is selected as the source, the Vsync component can be processed in two
methods: using the Vsync Schmitt circuit or using the Csync Schmitt circuit.
(a) Using the Vsync Schmitt Circuit
The Csync signal having the polarity selected by the SYNCT bit (bit 4) of the SEPIMR is
input to the Csync/Hsync terminal. The Hsync component is input through the Csync
Schmitt circuit to the digital H separation counter; the Vsync component goes through the
external LPF circuit, then is input through the Vsync/VLPF terminal and the Vsync Schmitt
circuit to the digital V separation counter. Figure 27.19 shows this method.
CVin2
Csync
a
1
1
0
0
b
a
b
Hsync
Vsync
VLPF Vsync/VLPF
Csync/Hsync
Hsync
Vsync
External
SW3
Internal
SW5
External
SW2
External
SW1
Reference
voltage switch
Register
control
I/O switch
I/O
switch Polarity
switch
Polarity
switch
Digital H
separation
counter
Digital V
separation
counter
DLPFON
Csync polarity
Schmitt circuit
Vsync polarity
Schmitt circuit
External circuit Inside LSI
Csync
separation
comparator
External
SW4
CVin2 –
+
CCMPSL
CCMPV0, 1
SYNCT
VSEL
SEPV
SEPH
Sync tip
clamp
Internal
SW6
Figure 27.19 Sync Source Selection when Using the Csync Signal and
the Vsync Schmitt Circuit
Source
Signal
Vsync
Detection
External
SW1
External
SW2
External
SW3
External
SW4
CCMPSL
(Internal
SW5)
VSEL
(Internal
SW6)
Csync/
Hsync
Terminal
I/O
Csync
input
Vsync
Schmitt
On On a a 1 0 Input
Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 785 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
(b) Using the Csync Schmitt Circuit
The Hsync component is processed in the same way as described in (a), but the Vsync
component is processed differently; the Vsync component is input through the Csync
Schmitt circuit to the digital V separation counter. Figure 27.20 shows this method.
CVin2
Csync
a
1
1
0
0
b
a
b
Hsync
Vsync
VLPF Vsync/VLPF
Csync/Hsync
Hsync
Vsync
External
SW3
Internal
SW5
Internal
SW6
External
SW2
External
SW1
Reference
voltage switch
Register
control
I/O switch
I/O
switch Polarity
switch
Polarity
switch
Digital H
separation
counter
Digital V
separation
counter
DLPFON
Csync polarity
Schmitt circuit
Vsync polarity
Schmitt circuit
External circuit Inside LSI
Csync
separation
comparator
External
SW4
CVin2 –
+
CCMPSL
CCMPV0, 1
SYNCT
VSEL
SEPV
SEPH
Sync tip
clamp
Figure 27.20 Sync Source Selection when Using the Csync Signal and
the Csync Schmitt Circuit
Source
Signal
Vsync
Detection
External
SW1
External
SW2
External
SW3
External
SW4
CCMPSL
(Internal
SW5)
VSEL
(Internal
SW6)
Csync/
Hsync
Terminal
I/O
Csync
input
Csync
Schmitt
On Off a Fixed to 0
or 1
1 1 Input
Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 786 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
(3) Inputting the Hsync and Vsync Signals Separately as Sources
The Hsync signal having the polarity selected by the SYNCT bit (bit 4) of the SEPIMR is
input to the Csync/Hsync terminal, and is input through the Csync Schmitt circuit to the digital
H separation counter; the Vsync signal having the polarity selected by the SYNCT bit is input
to the Vsync/VLPF terminal, and is sent through the Vsync Schmitt circuit to the digital V
separation counter. Figure 27.21 shows this method.
CVin2
Csync
a
1
1
0
0
b
a
b
Hsync
Vsync
VLPF Vsync/VLPF
Csync/Hsync
Hsync
Vsync
External
SW3
Internal
SW5
Internal
SW6
External
SW2
External
SW1
Reference
voltage switch
Register
control
I/O switch
I/O
switch Polarity
switch
Polarity
switch
Digital H
separation
counter
Digital V
separation
counter
DLPFON
Csync polarity
Schmitt circuit
Vsync polarity
Schmitt circuit
External circuit Inside LSI
Csync
separation
comparator
External
SW4
CVin2 –
+
CCMPSL
CCMPV0, 1
SYNCT
VSEL
SEPV
SEPH
Sync tip
clamp
Figure 27.21 Sync Source Selection when Using the Hsync and Vsync Signals Separately
Source
Signal
Vsync
Detection
External
SW1
External
SW2
External
SW3
External
SW4
CCMPSL
(Internal
SW5)
VSEL
(Internal
SW6)
Csync/
Hsync
Termina
l I/O
Hsync and
Vsync
input
Vsync
Schmitt
Off Off b b 1 0 Input
Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 787 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
27.3.2 Vsync Separation
The Hsync separator separates the Vsync signal from the Csync signal by using the digital V
separation counter, which is an 8-bit up-/down-counter, and the VVTHR register, which holds the
threshold value. The digital V separation counter increments the count when the Csync signal is
high, and decrements the count when the Csync is low. When the count reaches the VVTHR value
while the count is incremented, the SEPV signal is set to 1 and the counter stops until the Csync
signal goes low. When the Csync signal goes low, the counter starts to decrement the count. When
the count reaches H'00, the SEPV signal is reset to 0 and the counter stops until the Csync signal
goes high. Set the VVTHR value so that the SEPV signal goes high 1/2 or more after the Vsync
start position to correctly separate the Vsync signal against the signal disturbance in a weak field
or the motor skew during video tape playback. Refer to figure 27.10.
The obtained SEPV signal is sent to the V complement and mask counter. The V complement and
mask counter is reset to 0 when the SEPV signal is input, and increments the count at twice the
frequency (2 × fh) of the horizontal sync signal for the Vsync signal (SEPV signal) cycle period.
This counter masks the reset signal (SEPV) for about 85% (NTSC) or 72% (PAL) of the period
from a reset to the next reset; even if a SEPV signal generated by noise is input to the counter
during this period, the counter is not reset. If no SEPV signal is input after the mask period ends,
the mask is left cleared; the next SEPV signal input resets the counter, and the counter is
synchronized with the SEPV signal. When the counter is reset by the SEPV signal, the external
Vsync detection signal (AFCV) is generated and the external Vsync interrupt flag is set to 1.
The Vsync separation function includes the digital LPF function and the Vsync complement
function, which reduce the chance of the Vsync detection being delayed or missed due to the
Vsync disturbance in a weak field.
(1) Digital LPF Function
This function logically ORs the Csync (Vsync) signal and the SEPH signal separated by the
digital H counter to mask the noise component due to loss of a Vsync pulse. The digital V
separation counter increment the count when the resultant signal is input. Loss of a Vsync
pulse in a weak field causes SEPV signal detection to be delayed or missed, which will result
in incorrect detection of fields or lines. To enable this function, set the DLPFON bit (bit 2) of
the SEPIMR to 1. For the timing, refer to figure 27.11.
(2) Vsync Complement Function
This function makes the V complement and mask counter increment the count at a clock
having twice the frequency (2 × fh) of the horizontal sync signal (AFCH), and generates the
AFCV signal (Vsync signal) from the count if a Vsync pulse is lost.
The count value is decoded in different ways depending on the TV format. The source of the
clock for the V complement and mask counter can be switched between the AFC or the H
complement and mask counter. This function can reduce the chance of the SEPV signal
Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 788 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
detection being delayed and missed in a weak field. To enable this function, set the VCMPON
bit (bit 4) of the SEPCR to 1. For the timing, refer to figure 27.12.
27.3.3 Hsync Separation
The Hsync separator separates the Hsync signal from the Csync signal by using the digital H
separation counter, which is a 5-bit up-/down-counter, and the HVTHR register, which holds the
threshold value. The digital H separation counter increments the count when the Csync signal is
high, and decrements the count when the Csync is low. When the count reaches the HVTHR value
while the count is incremented, the SEPH signal is set to 1 and the counter stops until the Csync
signal goes low. When the Csync signal goes low, the counter starts to decrement the count. When
the count reaches H'00, the SEPH signal is reset to 0 and the counter stops until the Csync signal
goes high. Set the HVTHR value so that 2.35-μs equalizing pulses* can be detected; that is, that
the Hsync pulses can be continuously detected. Refer to figure 27.3.
The obtained SEPH signal is sent to the H complement and mask counter. The H complement and
mask counter is reset to 0 when the SEPH signal is input, and increments the count at a frequency
of φ/2 for the SEPH signal cycle period to generate the OSCH signal, HHK signal, and noise
detection window signal. The HHK period is specified by the HM6 to HM0 bits of the HCMMR.
Even if a SEPH signal is input to the counter during this HHK period, the SEPH signal is masked
and the counter is not reset; noise pulses and equalizing pulses during the V blanking period are
eliminated by this function.
The H complement and mask counter has the complement function. If no SEPH signal is input
during the period specified by the HC8 to HC0 bits of the HCMMR, the complement function
generates a complementary pulse and inserts the pulse into the OSCH signal. In this case, the
counter is reset by the complementary pulse, but no HHK signal is generated; the next SEPH
signal input resets the counter, and the counter is synchronized with the SEPH signal. For the
timing, refer to figure 27.14.
Note: * In a weak field, equalizing pulses are not detected in some cases because the pulses
have a short duration of 2.35 μs. If equalizing pulses, which are input at the same
timing as the Hsync pulses, are not detected, a phase-difference error between the
Hsync and Vsync occurs at a rising edge of the Vsync signal. Such an error will cause
incorrect field detection in the sync separator and incorrect line detection by the OSD
or data slicer. In such a weak field, adjust the HVTHR value so that equalizing pulses
are not detected. Note that while equalizing pulses are not detected, complementary
pulses are inserted repeatedly and an Hsync-Vsync phase-difference error occurs at a
rising edge of the Vsync signal, even in a field that is not weak. To avoid this, set the
HHKON bit (bit 2) or HHKON2 bit (bit 1) of the SEPCR to 1 to operate the HHK
Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 789 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
function when complementary pulses are generated three successive times. For the
timing, refer to figures 27.6, 27.7, 27.8, and 27.9.
27.3.4 Field Detection
The sync separator detects whether the current field is an even field or an odd field from the 1/2H
phase difference between the Hsync and Vsync by using the AFCV signal generated by the V
complement and mask counter and the field detection window signal generated by the AFC. The
timing of the field detection window signal can be adjusted by the FWIDR setting so that it is
suitable for comparison with the AFCV signal. When a rising edge of the AFCV signal is detected
while the field detection window signal is high, the current field is determined as an odd field;
when a rising edge of the AFCV signal is detected while the field detection window signal is low,
the current field is determined as an even field. The field detection status can be monitored from
the CPU by reading the FLD bit (bit 0) of the SEPACR. This function will not operate when the
internally generated Hsync signal is selected as the reference Hsync signal for the AFC, because
the AFC is not synchronized with the external Hsync signal in this case. For the timing, refer to
figure 27.13.
27.3.5 Noise Detection
The noise detection function is necessary for tuned status detection. The sync separator detects
noise by using the Csync signal and the noise detection window signal generated by the H
complement and mask counter. The noise detection window signal is set to 1 at a falling edge of
the OSCH signal generated by the H complement and mask counter, and reset to 0 at the HHK
clearing timing specified by bits HM6 to HM0 of the HCMMR. Noise is detected by comparing
the noise counter value with the noise detection level register value. The noise counter counts the
number of Hsync cycles in which an Hsync signal is input (noise H) while the noise detection
window signal is high and the number of Hsync cycles in which no Hsync signal is input while the
noise detection window signal is low. When the counted value reaches the noise detection level,
the noise detection interrupt request flag is set. The noise counter can be read from the CPU, and
the noise detection status can be monitored. The noise detection counter is reset every other Vsync
signal input. Accordingly, the noise input during one field can be detected. When the internally
generated Hsync signal is selected as the reference Hsync signal for the AFC and the text display
mode is used in the OSD, the noise counter reset operation can be enabled by setting the VCKSL
bit (bit 5) of the SEPCR to 1. For the timing, refer to figure 27.15.
Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 790 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
27.3.6 Automatic Frequency Controller (AFC)
The AFC averages the Hsync signal fluctuation of the video signal. Figure 27.22 shows the AFC
configuration. The AFC generates a reference clock having 576 or 448 times the frequency (576 ×
fh or 448 × fh) of the Hsync signal. From this clock, several clocks are generated, such as the
horizontal sync signal (AFCH signal), clock run-in detection window signal, start bit detection
window signal, V complement and mask counter clock when the V complement function is
selected, and the field detection window signal. The reference clock is also used as the dot clock
for the OSD; modifying the reference clock frequency can change the dot width of the character
display. To change the frequency, connect a circuit having a value suitable for the desired
frequency to the AFCosc and AFCpc terminals, and select the division ratio for the frequency-
dividing counter through the setting of the FRQSEL bit in SEPIMR. Note that the data slicer
operates even when 448 × fh is selected as the reference clock.
AFCLPF
R
C
VCO
AFCpc
AFCosc
HHK
HSEL
HCKSEL
Masking H
FSC
AFCH
AFC error output circuit
(comparator)
Internal Csync
generator
H complement
and mask
counter
External Hsync
Error signal
Switching
Switching
Reference clock
FRQSEL
Masking and
complementing H
Reference
Hsync signal
Internally generated
Hsync
External Hsync
Signals such
as dot clock
Low pass
filter
Frequency-
dividing counter
(Divided by
576 or 448)
R
Figure 27.22 AFC Configuration
Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 791 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
(1) AFC Oscillator
The AFCosc terminal, which is the oscillation signal terminal of the voltage controlled
oscillator (VCO), oscillates at 576 times the frequency (576 × fh) of the Hsync signal when the
Hsync signal is input at a certain phase and frequency. The difference in phase or frequency is
detected between the reference Hsync signal and the Hsync signal (AFCH signal) obtained by
dividing the 576 × fh signal, the error signal is converted to a voltage by a low pass filter
through the AFC error output circuit, and the voltage is used to control the VCO.
The VCO control voltage (the AFCLPF terminal voltage) is within a range from about 1.0 V to
4.0 V. The oscillating capacitance should be set so that the AFCosc oscillating frequency
becomes 576 × fh at the center (about 2.5 V) of the control voltage range. To set the oscillating
frequency to 448 × fh, change the values of the external circuits connected to the AFCpc and
AFCosc terminals and modify the FRQSEL bit in SEPIMR.
(2) AFCLPF
The AFC error output circuit detects the difference in phase or frequency between the
reference Hsync signal and the Hsync signal (AFCH signal) obtained by dividing the 576 × fh
or 448 × fh signal, and generates a pulse corresponding to the error. Connect a low pass filter
(LPF) to the AFCLPF terminal to average these error pulses. If the cut-off frequency is too
low, the oscillation stabilizing time (the pull-in time) needed to reach 576 × fh or 448 × fh
becomes long when a large error is detected or after the power is turned on; a high cut-off
frequency will cause jitter or an unstable display.
Connect a suitable LPF by referring to the external circuit examples shown in figures 27.23
and 27.24. When the Hsync signal includes a large disturbance, for example during special
playback operation, the AFC circuit may operate incorrectly.
(3) Reference Hsync Signal for AFC
The AFC reference clock is also used as the dot clock for the OSD. Accordingly, select the
reference Hsync signal depending on whether the OSD operates in the super-imposed mode or
text display mode. Refer to table 27.4, Reference Hsync Signal for AFC.
Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 792 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Table 27.4 Reference Hsync Signal for AFC
AFC
Reference
Hsync Signal
Data Slicer
Operation
OSD
Operation
Field
Detection
V Complement
and Mask
Counter HCKSEL HSEL
VCKSL DOTCKSL
External
Hsync signal
Operates/
Stops
Super-
imposed
mode
Operates Twice the
frequency of
the AFCH
0 0 0 0
Internally
generated
Hsync signal
Stops Text
display
mode
Stops Twice the
frequency of
the OSCH
0 1 1 0
External
Hsync signal
Operates Text
display
mode
Operates Twice the
frequency of
the AFCH
0 0 0 1
External
Hsync signal*
Operates Text
display
mode
Operates Twice the
frequency of
the AFCH
1 0 0 0
Note: * In this case, the Hsync and Vsync signals must be dedicated separation inputs, with
both signals having equal cycles and pulse widths. The FRQSEL bit in the SEPIMR
register must be cleared to 0.
Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 793 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
(4) External Circuit Examples
Figures 27.23 and 27.24 show external circuit examples of the AFC.
12 pF
AFCosc
AFCpc
AFCLPF
8.2 μH
0.01 μF
1/2 OVcc
VCO
1000 pF
4.7 μF
+
+
470 Ω
10 kΩ
Note: Reference values are shown.
Phase error signal
Reset, active,
or sleep
Figure 27.23 Circuit Example for a 576 × fh Reference Clock
Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 794 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
15 pF
AFCosc
AFCpc
AFCLPF
15 μH
0.01 μF
1/2 OVcc
VCO
1000 pF4.7 μF
+
+
470 Ω
10 kΩ
Note: Reference values are shown.
Phase error signal
Reset, active,
or sleep
Figure 27.24 Circuit Example for a 448 × fh Reference Clock
Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 795 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
27.3.7 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR)
7
1
R/W
6
1
R/W
54
1
R/W
1
R/W
3
1
R/W
2
1
R/W
1
1
R/W
0
1
R/W
7
1
R/W
6
1
R/W
5
1
R/W
4
1
R/W
3
1
R/W
2
1
R/W
1
1
R/W
0
1
R/W
Bit :
Initial value :
MSTP15 MSTP14 MSTP13 MSTP12 MSTP11 MSTP10 MSTP9 MSTP8 MSTP7 MSTP6 MSTP5 MSTP4 MSTP3 MSTP2 MSTP1 MSTP0
R/W :
MSTPCRH MSTPCRL
The MSTPCR is a 16-bit read/write register for controlling the module stop mode. Writing 0 to the
MSTP9 bit starts the sync separator; setting the MSTP9 bit to 1 stops the sync separator at the end
of a bus cycle and the module stop mode is entered.
The AFC oscillator operates in reset, active, and sleep modes. Accordingly, after the reset state is
cleared, the AFC oscillator operates but the AFC error output circuit (comparator) does not
operate. Clear the module stop mode of the sync separator and set the sync separator registers to
the desired values. The AFC error output circuit (comparator) will stop in standby, sleep, watch,
subactive, subsleep, and module stop modes. When these modes are cleared, wait for the
oscillation to stabilize, that is, for the AFC frequency to reach 576 × fh or 448 × fh.
The registers cannot be read or written to in module stop mode. For details, refer to section 4.5,
Module Stop Mode.
Bit 9⎯Module Stop (MSTP9): Specifies the module stop mode of the sync separator.
Bit 9
MSTP9 Description
0 Clears the module stop mode of the sync separator
1 Specifies the module stop mode of the sync separator (Initial value)
Section 27 Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 796 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Section 28 Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 797 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Section 28 Data Slicer
28.1 Overview
The data slicer extracts signals for closed caption signal in the U.S. This function can be used to
extract caption data superimposed on the vertical blanking interval of TV video signals.
A high-performance internal sync separator enables reliable caption data extraction.
The data slicer operates even when 448 times the horizontal sync frequency is selected for the
AFC reference clock frequency. For details, refer to section 27.3.6, Automatic Frequency
Controller (AFC).
28.1.1 Features
• Slice lines: 4 lines* (16-bit mode) / 1 line (32-bit mode)
• Slice levels: 7 levels
• Sampling clock: Generated by AFC
• Slice interrupt: A slice completion interrupt is generated at the end of all slices in a field
• Error detection: Clock run-in, start bit, and data end
Note: * The H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S: 2 lines.
Section 28 Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 798 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
28.1.2 Block Diagram
Figure 28.1 shows the block diagram of the data slicer.
Sync separator
Sync signal
generation
Field determination circuit
Slice voltage
generator
Clock run-in
detector
Start bit
detector
Data sampling
clock generator
Shift register
Slice data
register
Data end flag
Slice
completion
interrupt
Start bit
detection flag
Clock run-in
detection flag
Slice line specification circuit
Line counting
Field
Line
counter
Reference clock
CVin2 +
–
H complement
and mask AFC
V
H
H
OSD
V
Dot clock
Sync tip
clamp
Figure 28.1 Data Slicer Block Diagram
Section 28 Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 799 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
28.1.3 Pin Configuration
Table 28.1 shows the pin configuration for the data slicer.
Table 28.1 Data Slicer Pin Configuration
Block Name Abbrev. I/O Function
Csync/Hsync Input/output Composite sync signal input/output
or horizontal sync signal input
Sync signal
input/output
VLPF/Vsync Input Pin for connecting external LPF for
vertical sync signal or input pin for
vertical sync signal
AFCosc Input/output AFC oscillation signal AFC oscillation
AFCpc Input/output AFC by-pass capacitor connecting
pin
LPF for AFC AFCLPF Input/output External LPF connecting pin for AFC
4fsc/2fscin Input 4fsc or 2fsc input
Sync
separator
fsc oscillation
4fsc/2fscout Output 4fsc or 2fsc output
Data slicer Composite
video signal
Cvin2 Input Composite video signal input (2 Vpp,
with a sync tip clamp circuit)
Section 28 Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 800 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
28.1.4 Register Configuration
Table 28.2 shows the data slicer registers.
Table 28.2 Register Configuration
Name Abbrev. R/W Size Initial Value Address*3
Slice even-field mode register SEVFD R/(W)*1 Word/byte H'2000 H'D220
Slice odd-field mode register SODFD R/(W)*1 Word/byte H'2000 H'D222
Slice line setting register 1 SLINE1 R/W Word/byte H'20 H'D224
Slice line setting register 2 SLINE2 R/W Word/byte H'20 H'D225
Slice line setting register 3*4 SLINE3 R/W Word/byte H'20 H'D226
Slice line setting register 4*4 SLINE4 R/W Word/byte H'20 H'D227
Slice detection register 1 SDTCT1 R/(W)*2 Word/byte H'10 H'D228
Slice detection register 2 SDTCT2 R/(W)*2 Word/byte H'10 H'D229
Slice detection register 3*4 SDTCT3 R/(W)*2 Word/byte H'10 H'D22A
Slice detection register 4*4 SDTCT4 R/(W)*2 Word/byte H'10 H'D22B
Slice data register 1 SDATA1 R Word/byte Undefined H'D22C
Slice data register 2 SDATA2 R Word/byte Undefined H'D22E
Slice data register 3*4 SDATA3 R Word/byte Undefined H'D230
Slice data register 4*4 SDATA4 R Word/byte Undefined H'D232
Notes: 1. Only 0 can be written to clear the flag (bit 14).
2. Bits 7 to 0 are cleared when 1 is written to bit 7 of the corresponding slice line setting
register.
3. Lower 16 bits of the address.
4. Not available for the H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S.
28.1.5 Data Slicer Use Conditions
Table 28.3 indicates the conditions of use of the data slicer.
Table 28.3 Data Slicer Use Conditions
Sync Signal Input for Sync Separation Data Slicer
Sync separation signal input from CVin2 Usable
Sync separation signal input from Csync Usable
Hsync or Vsync separation signals Usable
Section 28 Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 801 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
28.2 Register Description
28.2.1 Slice Even- (Odd-) Field Mode Register (SEVFD, SODFD)
The SEVFD and SODFD control the start bit detection starting position, slice voltage level, data
sampling delay time, and interrupts. The SEVFD holds settings for even fields, and the SODFD
holds settings for odd fields. When reset, when the module is stopped, in sleep mode, in standby
mode, in watch mode, in subactive mode, or in subsleep mode, the SEVFD and SODFD are both
initialized to H'2000.
The SEVFD and SODFD are 16-bit read/write registers; however, rewriting of SEVFD or SODFD
should be performed after output of an even- (odd-) field slice completion interrupt. During data
slice operations, if SEVFD or SODFD is rewritten, a malfunction will result; do not perform
rewriting during data slice operation.
(1) Slice even-field mode register
8
0
9
STBE1
R/W
0
10
STBE2
R/W
0
11
STBE3
R/W
0
12
STBE4
R/W
01
13
—
—
0
15 14
EVNIF
R/(W)*R/W
STBE0
0
R/W
EVNIE
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
0
0
1
DLYE1
R/W
0
2
DLYE2
R/W
0
3
DLYE3
R/W
0
4
DLYE4
R/W
00
5
SLVLE0
R/W
0
76
SLVLE1
R/W R/W
DLYE0
0
R/W
SLVLE2
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
(2) Slice odd-field mode register
8
0
9
STBO1
R/W
0
10
STBO2
R/W
0
11
STBO3
R/W
0
12
STBO4
R/W
01
13
—
—
0
15 14
ODDIF
R/(W)*R/W
STBO0
0
R/W
ODDIE
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
0
0
1
DLYO1
R/W
0
2
DLYO2
R/W
0
3
DLYO3
R/W
0
4
DLYO4
R/W
00
5
SLVLO0
R/W
0
76
SLVLO1
R/W R/W
DLYO0
0
R/W
SLVLO2
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
Section 28 Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 802 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 15⎯Even- (Odd-) Field Slice Completion Interrupt Enable Flag (EVNIE, ODDIE):
Enables or disables the generation of even- (odd-) field slice completion interrupts.
Bit 15
EVNIE
ODDIE Description
0 Disables even- (odd-) field slice completion interrupt (Initial value)
1 Enables even- (odd-) field slice completion interrupt
Bit 14⎯Even- (Odd-) Field Slice Completion Interrupt Flag (EVNIF, ODDIF): Set when data
slicing for all specified lines of even (odd) field is completed.
Bit 14
EVNIF
ODDIF Description
0 [Clearing condition]
When 0 is written after reading 1 (Initial value)
1 [Setting condition]
When data slicing is completed for all specified lines of even (odd) field
Bit 13⎯Reserved: Cannot be modified and is always read as 1.
Bits 12 to 8⎯Start Bit Detection Starting Position Bits
(STBE4 to STBE0) (STBO4 to STBO0): Set the starting position for start bit detection in even
(odd) fields.
The base point for the data slicer is the falling edge of the horizontal sync signal (slicer base point
H) synchronized within the LSI; the starting position for start bit detection can be set using STBE4
to STBE 0 (STBO4 to STBO0) in 288* × fh (where fh is the horizontal sync signal frequency)
clock units from approximately 23.5 μs after the data slicer base point.
The start bit detection end position is at approximately 29.5 μs after the data slicer base point.
In start bit detection, the presence of the rising edge of start bits in the interval between these
starting and ending positions is detected. Further, the start bit detection window signal, which
becomes the base point for the start bit detection starting position, can be adjusted by means of the
data slicer detection window register of the sync separator. For details, refer to section 27.2.10,
Data Slicer Detection Window Register (DDETWR).
Figure 28.2 shows the data slicer base point and start bit detection starting position.
Section 28 Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 803 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Note: 288 when bit 0 (FRQSEL) of SEPIMR in the sync separator is 0, and 224 when FRQSEL
is 1.
Clock run-in
Data slicer base point
Clock run-in detection
window signal
Start bit detection
window signal
Note: * 288 when bit 0 (FRQSEL) of SEPIMR in the sync separator is 0, and
224 when FRQSEL is 1.
Data slicer
base point
Base point for start bit
detection starting position
Approx. 23.5 µs
Start bit detectable
period
TS
Te = Approx. 29.5 µs
1
288* × fh
TS = 23.5 µs + µs × (Set by STB4 to STB0)
C.video
S1 S2 S3
Start
bit
Set by STB
Figure 28.2 Data Slicer Base Point and Start Bit Detection Starting Position
Section 28 Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 804 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bits 7 to 5⎯Slice Level Setting Bits (SLVLE2 to SLVLE0) (SLVLO2 to SLVLO0): Specify
the even (odd) field data slice level.
The data slice level is common to clock line detection, start bit detection, and 16-bit data slicing.
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5
SLVLE2
SLVLO2
SLVLE1
SLVLO1
SLVLE0
SLVLO0 Description
0 Slice level is 0 IRE (Initial value) 0
1 Slice level is 5 IRE
0 Slice level is 15 IRE
0
1
1 Slice level is 20 IRE
0 Slice level is 25 IRE 0
1 Slice level is 35 IRE
0 Slice level is 40 IRE
1
1
1 Must not be specified
Note: All slice levels are with reference to the pedestal level (5 IRE). Slice level values are
provided for reference.
Bits 4 to 0⎯Data Sampling Delay Time Setting Bits
(DLYE4 to DLYE0) (DLYO4 to DLYO0): Set the even (odd) field data sampling clock delay
time.
Figure 28.3 explains the data sampling clock.
The data sampling clock is a clock with period 32 × fh*2, used for slicing 16-bit closed caption
data. The data sampling clock is generated after the rising edge of the start bit is detected and the
time set by the DLY bit is passed. The delay time setting can be adjusted in units of 576*1 × fh*2,
so that sampling is possible at a phase optimal for the slice data. The data sampling delay time
(TD) should be set based on the calculation indicated below. Eighteen pulses of data sampling
clock are output in total for start bit detection, slice data, and end data detection. In order to make
the sampling phase even more optimal, the slice data (analog comparator output) and sampling
clock can be output from the port. For details of monitor output, refer to section 28.2.6, Monitor
Output Setting Register (DOUT).
Notes: 1. 576 when bit 0 (FRQSEL) of SEPIMR in the sync separator is 0, and 448 when
FRQSEL is 1.
2. fh: Horizontal sync signal frequency
Section 28 Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 805 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Start
bit
Slice data
1st character
S1 S2
32 × fh
S3
b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
LSB
2nd character
Detected start
bit
Data sampling
clock
Note: * 576 when bit0 (FRQSEL) of SEPIMR in the sync separator is 0, and
448 when FRQSEL is 1.
32 × fh
TD: Data sampling delay time specified by DLYE4 to DLYE0 (DLYO4 to DLYO0)
TD = ns × [setting in bits DLY4 to DLY0 + 2]
MSB
1
576* × fh
Figure 28.3 Data Sampling Clock Description
28.2.2 Slice Line Setting Registers 1 to 4 (SLINE1 to SLINE4)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
1
—
56
0
7
SLINEn4*SLINEn3*SLINEn2*SLINEn1*SLINEn0*
0
R/W
SENBLn*
R/WR/WR/W
SFLDn*—
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
The slice line setting registers 1 to 4 (SLINE1 to SLINE4) specify slice fields and lines. Up to four
slice lines can be specified; these are specified in the slice line setting registers 1 to 4 respectively.
These are 8-bit read/write registers. Rewrites of SLINE should be performed after an even (odd)
field slice completion interrupt is output, or after module stop mode has been set, registers have
been initialized, and module stop mode has been cleared again. If SLINE is rewritten during a data
slice operation, a malfunction will result; do not perform rewriting during data slice operation.
When reset, when the module is stopped, in sleep mode, in standby mode, in watch mode, in
subactive mode, or in subsleep mode, the registers are initialized to H'20.
Note: * n = 1 and 2 in the H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S.
Section 28 Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 806 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 7⎯Slice Enable Bit (SENBLn n = 1 to 4): Enables or disables data slice operations for the
line specified by SFLDn and SLINEn4 to SLINEn1.
When data slicing for a given line is completed, this bit is reset to 0, and slicing is not again
performed until it is set to 1. This bit is set at the rising edge of the Vsync signal; hence data
slicing settings become valid from the rising edge of the next Vsync signal after this bit has been
set. When 1 is written to this bit, the corresponding slice detection register is cleared, and so
caution should be exercised.
Bit 7
SENBLn Description
0 When read: Disables data slice operation for the specified lines
[Clearing condition]
When the data slice operation for the line has been completed
1 Enables data slice operation for the specified lines
Bit 6⎯Field Setting Bit (SFLDn n = 1 to 4): Specifies the field of the slice line. For information
on field discrimination, refer to section 27.2.6, Field Detection Window Register (FWIDR).
Bit 6
SFLDn Description
0 Even field (Initial value)
1 Odd field
Bit 5⎯Reserved: Cannot be modified and is always read as 1.
Bits 4 to 0⎯Slice Line Setting Bits (SLINE4 to SLINE0): Specify the data slice line. Slice lines
up to H'1F (31) can be specified.
Figure 28.4 explains the line count.
Section 28 Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 807 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
9-line vertical sync pulse period
Pre-equalizing
period
Sync separation
base point
01
12345678910 192021
H'11
23 456 15161718
Line count
Clear
Post-equalizing
period
Vertical synchro-
nization period
Line count specified by
SLINEn4 to SLINEn0
(n = 1 to 4)
Figure 28.4 Line Count
28.2.3 Slice Detection Registers 1 to 4 (SDTCT1 to SDTCT4)
0
0
1
0
R
2
0
R
3
0
4
1
—
0
R
56
0
7
— CRICn3*CRICn2*CRICn1*CRICn0*
0
R
CRDFn*
RRR
SBDFn*ENDFn*
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
The slice detection registers 1 to 4 (SDTCT1 to SDTCT4) store information on data slice results.
Data slice result information includes the clock run-in detection flag, start bit detection flag, data
end detection flag, and run-in pulse count for the clock run-in period.
This information is useful for optimal positioning of the data slicer slice level, start bit detection
timing, and sampling clock generation timing.
There are four slice detection registers; data slice information results are stored in them on
completion of data slicing for each line specified by the slice line setting registers 1 to 4. Data is
stored not in slicing order, but in the corresponding registers. For information on the slice line
sequence, refer to section 28.3.2, Slice Sequence.
Section 28 Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 808 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Slice line setting register n
Line m
Slice detection register n
Data slice result information
for line m
Figure 28.5 Relationship between Slice Line Setting Register and Slice Detection Register
SDTCT is an 8-bit read-only register. SDTCT read operations should be performed after an even
(odd) field slice completion interrupt. If SDTCT is read during a data slice operation, an
indeterminate value may be read; the register should not be read during operation.
If 1 is written to bit 7 (SENBL) of slice line setting registers 1 to 4, the corresponding slice
detection register is automatically cleared, so caution should be exercised.
When reset, when the module is stopped, in sleep mode, in standby mode, in watch mode, in
subactive mode, or in subsleep mode, the registers are initialized to H'10.
Note: * n = 1 and 2 in the H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S.
Bit 7⎯Clock Run-In Detection Flag (CRDFn n = 1 to 4): Set when, during the clock run-in
period, the count is concluded in the range 3 to 7 pulses, and clock run-in is detected. When 16 or
more pulses are counted, further input pulses are not counted in order to prevent erroneous
detection, and an overflow state is maintained. Further, the clock run-in detection window signal
indicating the clock run-in period can be adjusted using the DDETWR register of the sync
separator. For details, refer to section 27.2.10, Data Slicer Detection Window Register
(DDETWR).
Bit 7
CRDFn Description
0 Clock run-in not detected for line for data slicing (Initial value)
1 Clock run-in detected for line for data slicing
Bit 6⎯Start Bit Detection Flag (SBDFn, n = 1 to 4): Set when the start bit for a line for data
slicing is detected.
Bit 6
SBDFn Description
0 Start bit not detected for line for data slicing (Initial value)
1 Start bit detected for line for data slicing
Section 28 Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 809 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
When the start bit is not detected, the data sampling clock is generated after the time set as the data
sampling delay time (DLY4 to DLY0) has elapsed from the phase of the start bit detection end
position.
Data slicer base
point
Data sampling
clock
Start bit detection starting position
Start bit detection end position
C.video
Delay
Start
bit
Figure 28.6 Data Sampling Clock when Start Bit Is Not Detected
Bit 5⎯Data End Detection Flag (ENDFn n = 1 to 4): Shows whether or not slice data is input at
the 18th sampling clock pulse. This flag is set when the slice data is 0, that is, when data slicing is
regarded as having been completed normally.
Bit 5
ENDFn Description
0 Data end not detected for line for data slicing (Initial value)
1 Data end detected for line for data slicing
Bit 4⎯Reserved: Cannot be modified and is always read as 1.
Bits 3 to 0⎯Clock Run-in Count Value (CRICn3 to CRICn0): Count result for run-in pulses
during the clock run-in period. When 16 or more pulses are input, further input pulses are not
counted in order to prevent erroneous detection, and an overflow state is maintained. Further, the
clock run-in detection window signal indicating the clock run-in period can be adjusted using the
DDETWR register of the sync separator. For details, refer to section 27.2.10, Data Slicer
Detection Window Register (DDETWR).
Section 28 Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 810 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
28.2.4 Slice Data Registers 1 to 4 (SDATA1 to SDATA4)
15
*
R
14
*
R
13
*
R
12
*
R
11
*
R
10
*
R
9
*
R
8
*
R
7
*
R
6
*
R
5
*
R
4
*
R
3
*
R
2
*
R
1
*
R
0
*
R
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
*: Unefined
The slice data registers 1 to 4 (SDATA1 to SDATA4) are registers in which the slice results are
stored. The data is stored in LSB-first fashion, in order from the LSB side near the start bit. Figure
28.7 shows how to store the slice data.
15
b20
14
b21
13
b22
12
b23
11
b24
10
b25
9
b26
8
b27
7
b10
6
b11
5
b12
4
b13
3
b14
2
b15
1
b16
0
b17
b17S3S2S1 b16 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b27 b26 b25 b24 b23 b22 b21 b20
LSB MSB
Bit
Slice data
register
Slice data
Figure 28.7 Relationship between Slice Data and Slice Data Register
There are four slice data registers, in which are stored slice results when data slicing is completed
for each line specified by the slice line setting registers. At this time data is stored in the
corresponding registers, rather than in the slicing order.
Slice line setting register n
Line m
Slice data register n
Data slice result for line m
Figure 28.8 Relationship between Slice Line Setting Register and Slice Data Register
Section 28 Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 811 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
These are 16-bit read-only registers. SDATA read operations should be performed after an even
(odd) field slice completion interrupt. If an SDATA register is read during a data slice operation,
an indeterminate value may be read; the register should not be read during operation.
When reset, when the module is stopped, in sleep mode, in standby mode, in watch mode, in
subactive mode, or in subsleep mode, the SDATA register values are indeterminate.
28.2.5 Module Stop Control Register (MSTPCR)
7
1
R/W
MSTP
15 MSTP
14 MSTP
13 MSTP
12 MSTP
11 MSTP
10 MSTP
9MSTP
8MSTP
7MSTP
6MSTP
5MSTP
4MSTP
3MSTP
2MSTP
1MSTP
0
6
1
R/W
54
1
R/W
MSTPCRH MSTPCRL
1
R/W
3
1
R/W
2
1
R/W
1
1
R/W
0
1
R/W
7
1
R/W
6
1
R/W
5
1
R/W
4
1
R/W
3
1
R/W
2
1
R/W
1
1
R/W
0
1
R/W
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
The MSTPCR consists of two 8-bit read/write registers for controlling the module stop mode.
Writing 0 to the MSTP3 bit starts the data slicer; setting the MSTP3 bit to 1 stops the data slicer at
the end of a bus cycle and the module stop mode is entered. Before writing 0 to this bit, set the
MSTP9 bit to 0, to operate the sync separator.
The registers cannot be read or written to in module stop mode. For details, refer to section 4.5,
Module Stop Mode.
Bit 3⎯Module Stop (MSTP3): Specifies the module stop mode for the data slicer.
Bit 3
MSTP3 Description
0 Clears the module stop mode for the data slicer
1 Specifies the module stop mode for the data slicer (Initial value)
Section 28 Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 812 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
28.2.6 Monitor Output Setting Register (DOUT)
0
1
1
1
—
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
1
R/W
0
R/W
56
0
7
DOBC DSEL CRSEL — —
0
—
—
—R/WR/W
RGBC YCOC
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
The internal signals used by the data slicer can be monitored through the R, G, B, YCO, and YBO
pins. For the bits other than bits 2 and 3, refer to section 29.7.3, Digital Output Specification
Register (DOUT).
Bit 3⎯Bit to Select Functions for R, G, B, YCO, YBO Pins (DSEL): Selects whether the
digital output pins output R, G, B, YCO, and YBO signals, or output data slicer internal monitor
signals.
Bit 3
DSEL Description
0 R, G, B, YCO, and YBO signals selected (Initial value)
1 Data slicer monitor signals selected
Pin R: Signal selected by bit 2 (CRSEL)
Pin G: Slice data signal analog-compared with Cvin2
Pin B: Sampling clock generated within data slicer
Pin YCO: External Hsync signal (AFCH) synchronized in the LSI
Pin YBO: External Vsync signal (AFCV) synchronized in the LSI
Bit 2⎯Monitor Signal Select Bit (CRSEL): Selects whether the clock run-in detection window
signal is output, or the start bit detection window signal is output. This bit is valid when DSEL is
set to 1 to select data slicer internal monitor signal output.
Bit 2
CRSEL Description
0 Clock run-in detection window signal output selected (Initial value)
1 Start bit detection window signal output selected
Section 28 Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 813 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
28.3 Operation
28.3.1 Slice Line Specification
Up to four slice lines can be specified using the slice line setting registers 1 to 4. For information
on field discrimination, refer to section 27.2.6, Field Detection Window Register (FWIDR).
After completion of data slicing for all lines specified by registers, a slice completion interrupt is
output; the slice results and slice information should then be read.
Slice information includes clock run-in detection, start bit detection, and data end detection to
determine whether data sampling was performed normally; this information is stored in slice
detection registers 1 to 4.
After completion of slicing for specified lines, the slice enable bit for the slice line setting register
is reset to 0. The next time the data slicer is operated, the slice enable bit of the slice line setting
register should be set to 1. At this time, the corresponding slice detection register is cleared. The
slice enable bit is sampled at the rising edge of the Vsync signal. Hence enabling of slice operation
is valid until the next Vsync signal after reset of the slice enable bit.
Figures 28.9 and 28.10 show examples of slice line specification and operation. For details, refer
to section 28.2.2, Slice Line Setting Registers 1 to 4 (SLINE1 to SLINE4).
Section 28 Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 814 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
The data slicer initialization and operation for one specification example are shown in figure 28.9.
Reset the slice enable bit
Reset the slice enable bit
Generate an even field slice completion
interrupt
Contents of slice line setting registers
Slice Line Setting Register
Register No.
1
2
3
4
1
1
1
0
Even
Odd
Even d > c
b > aOdd
Enable Field Line
Start
Initialize the data slicer
Reset the slice enable bit
Generate an odd field slice completion
interrupt
Even field
Odd field
Line c
Line b
Line d
Line a
Set the slice (even and odd)
field mode registers
Set the slice line setting
registers 1 to 4
(except the enable bits)
An external Vsync interrupt
occurs
Execute slicing for line b
An external Vsync interrupt
occurs
Execute slicing for line d
Execute slicing for line c
An external Vsync interrupt
occurs
Set the enable bits of
the slice line setting
registers 1 through 3 to 1
Note: Data slice operation is not performed for line a, because the enable bit = 0. Further, when the same line
is specified within the same field, erroneous operation results; do not specify the same line in the same
field. For details on the external Vsync interrupt, refer to section 27.2.2, Sync Separation Control
Register (SEPCR).
Figure 28.9 Example of Slice Line Specification and Operation (1)
Section 28 Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 815 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Operation for data slicer resetting for a second specification is shown in figure 28.10.
a < b < c < d
Start
Respecification
Even field
Contents of slice line setting registers
Slice Line Setting Register
Register No.
1
2
3
4
1
1
1
1
Even
Even
Even
Even
Enable Field Line
Line a
Line b
Line d
Line c
e < f < g < h
Contents of slice line setting registers
Slice Line Setting Register
Register No.
1
2
3
4
1
1
1
1
Odd
Odd
Odd
Odd
Enable Field Line
Line e
Line h
Line f
Line g
An external Vsync interrupt
occurs
Execute slicing for line a
Execute slicing for line b
Reset the slice enable bit
Reset the slice enable bit
Execute slicing for line c Reset the slice enable bit
Execute slicing for line d Reset the slice enable bit
Generate an even field slice completion
interrupt
Read each slice detection
register and slice data register.
Respecify slice lines and
set the slice enable bit.
Odd field
An external Vsync interrupt
occurs
Execute slicing for line e
Execute slicing for line f
Reset the slice enable bit
Reset the slice enable bit
Execute slicing for line gReset the slice enable bit
Execute slicing for line h Reset the slice enable bit
Generate an odd field slice completion
interrupt
Read each slice detection
register and slice data register.
Respecify slice lines and
set the slice enable bit.
An external Vsync interrupt
occurs
Figure 28.10 Example of Slice Line Specification and Operation (2)
Section 28 Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 816 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
28.3.2 Slice Sequence
Figure 28.11 shows the slice sequence.
Ye s
No
Is it the last
line in the field to be
sliced?
• Line detection
The specified slice line and field match the line
count and detected field
• Clock run-in detection
Count the number of clock run-in pulses in clock
run-in period
• Start bit detection
Initiate start bit detection according to the start
bit detection starting position specified by
the register
• Data sampling
Data is stored in the 16-bit shift register at a data
sampling clock of 32xfh generated after the time
specified by the register from the start bit
detection
Store data in the
16-bit shift register
to the slice data
register
• Data end detection
Detect whether or
not slice data is input
at the 17th data
sampling clock pulse
Set the clock run-in count
Set the start bit detection flag
(Enable the start bit detection)
Set clock run-in detection flag
(Enable the clock run-in detection)
Set the slice completion interrupt
flag
Read the slice detection register
and slice data register
Write the slice line setting
register
Set the slice line enable bit
Set the data end detection flag
(Data end: No data detected at
the 17th data sampling clock
pulse)
Reset the slice enable bit
Figure 28.11 Slice Sequence
Section 28 Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 817 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
28.4 32-Bit Slice Operation
The data slicer operates in 32-bit mode when the DSL32B bit (bit 0) in the synchronization
separation AFC control register (SEPACR) of the synchronization separator is set to 1.
Synchronization Separation AFC Control Register (SEPACR):
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
—
0
R/W
56
0
7
— — ARST DOTCKSL DSL32B
0
R/W
NDETIE
R/W—R/W*
NDETIF HSEL
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
Bit 0⎯DSL32B (DSL32B): Specifies whether the data slicer performs slice operation in 32-bit
mode or 16-bit mode.
Bit 0
DSL32B Description
0 Slice operation in 16-bit mode (Initial value)
1 Slice operation in 32-bit mode
The DSL32B bit can select 32-bit slice operation for the data slicer. When this bit is set to 1, the
data slicer starts operation at the line specified by slice line setting registers 1 and 2. Only one
slice line can be selected for a field, so the same values must be set in slice line setting registers 1
and 2. Operation is not guaranteed when different values are set in slice line setting registers 1 and
2.
The start bit detection starting position is specified similar to as in 16-bit mode. However, the
values set in bits STBE4 to STBE0 (STBO4 to STBO0) must be adjusted so that the detection
starting position is not before rising edge 1. This is to prevent the rising edge 1 that is input during
the start bit detection window signal from being accidentally detected. For details on the detection
start timing, see figure 28.12.
After the rising edge of the start bit is detected, a sampling clock is generated at every 64 × fh,
starting from time TD set in bits DLYE4 to DLYE0 (DLYO4 to DLYO0). A total of 34 sampling
clocks are output for start bit detection, slice data, and end data detection. For details on the
generation timing of the sampling clocks, see figure 28.13.
After slice operation has ended, the same values are stored in slice detection registers 1 and 2, and
the 32-bit slice data is written to slice data registers 1 and 2 which are connected by cascade
connection. 16 bits from the start bit are written to slice data register 1, and the remaining 16 bits
to slice data register 2. For details on writing slice data to slice data registers, see figure 28.14.
Section 28 Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 818 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
When this bit is set to 1, be sure to clear the slice enable bit (bit 7) in slice line setting registers 3
and 4 to 0. In 32-bit mode, slice line setting register 3 and 4, slice detection registers 3 and 4, and
slice data registers 3 and 4 are disabled.
Slicer starting position
Clock run-in detection window
Start bit detection window
Data slicer
starting position
Start bit detection
starting position
Approx. 23.5 µs
Start bit detection range
TS
Tmin = Approx. 25.5 µs
Te = Approx. 29.5 µs
C.Video
STB setting
288* × fh
1
Tmin = 25.5 µS < TS = 23.5 µS + µS × (Value set in STB4 to STB0)
Rising edge 1 Rising edge 2
Note: Be sure to set the TS starting position
after rising edge 1.
Note: * 288 when bit FRQSEL (bit 0) in SEPIMR (synchronization separator) is set to 0.
224 when bit FRQSEL (bit 0) in SEPIMR (synchronization separator) is set to 1.
Figure 28.12 Start Bit Detection Starting Position when Bit DSL32B Is 1
Section 28 Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 819 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Slice data
Detected start bit
Sampling clock
Start
bit 1st word 2nd word 3rd word 4th word
0110 b7 6 5 4 3 2 1
b0b
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
b0b
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
b0b
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 b0
LSB
TD: Data sampling delay time (DYLE4 to DYLE0 (DLYO4 to DLYO0))
MSB
64 × fh 64 × fh
576* × fh
1
TD = nS × [(Value set in DLY4 to DLY0) + 2]
Note: * 576 when bit FRQSEL (bit 0) in SEPIMR (synchronization separator) is set to 0.
448 when bit FRQSEL (bit 0) in SEPIMR (synchronization separator) is set to 1.
Figure 28.13 Sampling Clock when Bit DSL32B Is 1
Bit
15 14
SDATA 1
Data byte 1 Data byte 2 Data byte 3 Data byte 4
SDATA 2
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
b7 6 5 4 3 2 1 b0
b7 6 5 4 3 2 1 b0
b7 6 5 4 3 2 1 b0
b7 6 5 4 3 2 1 b0
Slice data
Figure 28.14 Slice Data and Slice Data Registers when Bit DSL32B Is 1
Section 28 Data Slicer
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 820 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Section 29 On-Screen Display (OSD)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 821 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Section 29 On-Screen Display (OSD)
29.1 Overview
OSD (on-screen display) is a function for superimposing arbitrary characters or display patterns on
a TV image signal.
The display screen consists of up to 32 characters × 12 rows; a single character consists of 12 dots
× 18 lines. Up to 384 different character types*1 can be registered, and each character display can
be connected to the top, bottom, right, and left of another character. Hence in addition to
alphanumerics and kanji characters, graphics can also be displayed.
Text display and superimposed display are supported, and there are composite video signal output
and digital outputs.
There are a wealth of ornamental features as well, including blinking display, borders, cursors,
halftone display, buttons, and enlarged display.
Analog functions (video amp, analog switch) peripheral to OSD are also incorporated. The sync
separator has an AFC circuit built-in, for stable display.
29.1.1 Features
• Screen configuration: 32 characters × 12 rows
• Character size: 12 dots × 18 lines
• Character types: 384 types*1
• Supports text display and superimposed display
• Display enlargement: 1 × 1, 2 × 2 (line units, vertical × horizontal)
• Blinking: Can be set in single character units
Blinking period can be set to either 32/fV or 64/fV (for the entire screen)
(fV: vertical sync signal frequency)
• Border function: Single-dot borders in each of eight directions
Border color: In text mode, white or black, and brightness fixed
In superimposed mode, black, and brightness fixed
• Supported TV formats: NTSC, PAL, SECAM
• Display position: Horizontal and vertical direction leading positions are set, and line intervals
can be set
Section 29 On-Screen Display (OSD)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 822 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
• Digital outputs: R, G, B; output of YCO (character data bit strings) and YBO (character
display positions)
• Background colors: Eight hues*2
Background brightness, chroma saturation: Four brightness levels, two chroma levels
• Character colors: Text display: Eight hues (character units)*2
Superimposed display: White
Character brightness, chroma saturation: Four brightness levels, two chroma levels
• Cursor: Character background colored during text display (character units)
• Cursor colors: Eight hues (line units)*2
Cursor brightness, chroma saturation: Two brightness levels, two chroma levels
• Halftone display: Feature for reducing the brightness/chroma saturation of the image signal in
the text background during superimposed display to render it semi-transparent, so that
characters appear to float above the background (character units)
• Halftone gray shades: Two levels (row units)
• Button display: Two types
Notes: 1. Includes blank character as character code H'000.
512 character types for the H8S/2199R flash memory version, 384 character types for
the H8S/2199R Group mask-ROM version, and 256 character types for the H8S/2197S
and H8S/2196S.
2. Background colors, character colors, cursor colors: the background, character, and
cursor colors in text display include black and white. In SECAM, only black and white
are supported. For details, refer to section 29.1.5, TV Formats and Display Modes.
Section 29 On-Screen Display (OSD)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 823 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
29.1.2 Block Diagram
A block diagram of the OSD appears in figure 29.1.
Sync separator
TV format
4/2fsc
Dot
clock
4/2fsc in
CVin1
4/2fsc out
HV
Horizontal
display
position
control
Display data RAM
Vertical
display
position
control
Button control
Shift register
Border control
4/2fsc
oscillator
CVout
Halftone
control
Sync tip
clamp
SECAM
character
control
Switch-
ing
Color burst
Character, back-
ground, and cursor
color generation
Display control
Character, border,
cursor, button, and
background
R
G
B
YCO
YBO
Character data ROM
Figure 29.1 OSD Block Diagram
Section 29 On-Screen Display (OSD)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 824 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
29.1.3 Pin Configuration
The OSD pin configuration is shown in table 29.1. Even when not using the data slicer, the
composite video signal should be input to CVin2 in order to perform sync separation from the
composite video signal.
Table 29.1 OSD Pin Configuration
Block Name Abbrev. I/O Function
Csync/Hsync Input/output Composite sync signal input/output or
horizontal sync signal input
Sync signal
input/output
VLPF/Vsync Input Pin for connecting external LPF for
vertical sync signal or input pin for
vertical sync signal
AFCosc Input/output AFC oscillation signal AFC oscillation
AFCpc Input/output AFC by-pass capacitor connecting pin
Sync
separator
LPF for AFC AFCLPF Input/output External LPF connecting pin for AFC
OSD analog
power
OVcc Input Analog power for OSD, data slicer, and
sync separator
OSD analog
ground
OVss Input Analog ground for OSD, data slicer,
and sync separator
Composite video
signal input
CVin1 Input Composite video signal input (2 Vpp,
with a sync tip clamp circuit)
Composite video
signal output
CVout Output Composite video signal output (2 Vpp)
4fsc/2fscin Input 4fsc or 2fsc input fsc oscillation
4fsc/2fscout Output 4fsc or 2fsc output
R Output Color signal output (R) for character,
border, cursor, background, and button,
or a port
G Output Color signal output (G) for character,
border, cursor, background, and button,
or a port
Color signal
output
B Output Color signal output (B) for character,
border, cursor, background, and button,
or a port
YCO Output Character data output (digital output),
or a port
OSD
Character data
output
YBO Output Character display position output
(digital output), or a port
Data slicer Composite video
signal
CVin2 Input Composite video signal input (2 Vpp,
with a sync tip clamp circuit)
Section 29 On-Screen Display (OSD)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 825 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
29.1.4 Register Configuration
Table 29.2 shows the OSD registers.
Table 29.2 Register Configuration
Name Abbrev. R/W Size Initial Value Address*1
Character data ROM OSDROM ⎯ 24576 bytes*3 ⎯ H'040000
Display data RAM (Master) OSDRAM R/W 768 bytes Undefined H'D800
Display data RAM (Slave) ⎯ ⎯ 768 bytes Undefined ⎯
Row register 1 CLINE1 R/W Byte H'00 H'D200
Row register 2 CLINE2 R/W Byte H'00 H'D201
Row register 3 CLINE3 R/W Byte H'00 H'D202
Row register 4 CLINE4 R/W Byte H'00 H'D203
Row register 5 CLINE5 R/W Byte H'00 H'D204
Row register 6 CLINE6 R/W Byte H'00 H'D205
Row register 7 CLINE7 R/W Byte H'00 H'D206
Row register 8 CLINE8 R/W Byte H'00 H'D207
Row register 9 CLINE9 R/W Byte H'00 H'D208
Row register 10 CLINE10 R/W Byte H'00 H'D209
Row register 11 CLINE11 R/W Byte H'00 H'D20A
Row register 12 CLINE12 R/W Byte H'00 H'D20B
Vertical display position
register
VPOS R/W Word H'F000 H'D20C
Horizontal display position
register
HPOS R/W Byte H'00 H'D20E
Digital output specification
register
DOUT R/W Byte H'02 H'D20F
Screen control register DCNTL R/W Word H'0000 H'D210
OSD format register DFORM R/(W)*2 Word H'00F8 H'D212
Notes: 1. Lower 16 bits of the address. (excluding character data ROM)
2. Only 0 can be written to bits 8 and 0 to clear the flags.
3. 32768 bytes for the H8S/2199R flash memory version, 24576 bytes for the H8S/2199R
Group mask-ROM version, and 16384 bytes for the H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S.
Section 29 On-Screen Display (OSD)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 826 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
29.1.5 TV Formats and Display Modes
Table 29.3 indicates support for different TV formats in each display mode. Operation is not
guaranteed if a frequency resulting from division by 4 or 2 from the 4fsc/2fsc input pin is not one
of those listed in table 29.3.
Table 29.3 TV Formats and Display Modes
TV Format fsc (MHz) Text Display Superimposed Mode
M/NTSC 3.579545 8 colors Supported
4.43-NTSC 4.43361875 8 colors Supported
M/PAL 3.57561149 8 colors Supported
N/PAL 3.58205625 8 colors Supported
B.G.H/PAL, I/PAL,
D.K/PAL
4.43361875 8 colors Supported
SECAM 4.43361875 White/black Supported
29.2 Description of Display Functions
29.2.1 Superimposed Mode and Text Display Mode
There are two types of OSD display: superimposed and text display.
(1) Superimposed Mode
In superimposed mode, the state of operation of a VCR, the current time, and other text and
graphics are displayed on an ordinary TV image. In doing so, there is no mixing of the background
image and the display character colors. There is an internal AFC circuit, enabling reliable text
display. In addition, a halftone function, in which the brightness and chroma saturation of the
background screen in the character display area is reduced to make characters appear to “float”
above the background, is also available. Other features include a character border function.
(2) Text Display Mode
In text display mode, characters and graphic data can be displayed in synchronous with the
internal sync signal generated by the internal Csync generator circuit in the sync separator. The
background color for display can be selected from among eight hues. There are plentiful
ornamental functions, including functions for displaying cursors and buttons; cursor and text
colors can be selected from among eight hues, making this function ideal for use in programming
VCR recording and setting modes.
Section 29 On-Screen Display (OSD)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 827 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
29.2.2 Character Configuration
Displayed characters and patterns consist of 12 dots × 18 lines per character. There are notes on
creation of OSD fonts. For details, refer to section 29.8, Notes on OSD Font Creation.
An example of a character configuration appears in figure 29.2. An example of an enlarged
character appears in figure 29.3.
12 dots
18 lines
Characters Borders
(1) Character configuration example (2) Character configuration example
(with borders outside character)
Figure 29.2 Character Configuration Examples
Section 29 On-Screen Display (OSD)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 828 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
12 dots
24 dots
18 lines
36 lines
(1) Standard character size (2) Enlarged character size
Figure 29.3 Enlarged Character Example
29.2.3 On-Screen Display Configuration
The on-screen display area consists of 12 horizontal rows each containing up to 32 characters.
The correspondence between display data RAM and the screen display is indicated in figure 29.4.
The starting position for display can be set freely by using the display position registers to set the
horizontal starting display position, vertical starting display position, and row interval. Even when
the frequency of the AFC reference clock (dot clock) is modified, the display configuration (12
horizontal rows each containing 32 characters) will not change; characters in the region protruding
outside the display area should be blank characters.
For information on the display position registers, refer to section 29.5.1, Display Positions, and
section 29.5.8, Display Position Registers (HPOS and VPOS).
Section 29 On-Screen Display (OSD)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 829 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Row 1
Row 2
Row 11
Row 12
1st
character
D800
D840
DA80
DAC0
DA82
DAC2
DA84
DAC4
DA86
DAC6
DABE
DAFE
D802
D842
D804
D844
D806
D846
D83E
D87E
Note: D800 to DAFE indicate the lower 16 bits of addresses in the on-screen display RAM.
32nd
character
2nd
character 3rd
character 4th
character
Figure 29.4 Correspondence between Display Data RAM and On-Screen Display
29.3 Settings in Character Units
The following items can be set in character units by using the display data RAM.
29.3.1 Character Configuration
Characters can be set freely by writing, to the display data RAM, the character data ROM address
(character code) at which the character to be displayed is stored.
For explanations of the character data ROM and display data RAM, refer to section 29.3.6,
Character Data ROM (OSDROM), and section 29.3.7, Display Data RAM (OSDRAM).
29.3.2 Character Colors
Character colors in text display mode can be set in character units through the character color
specification bit in display data RAM.
Table 29.4 shows the correspondence between character color code settings and color output
signals.
For details on display data RAM, refer to section 29.3.7, Display Data RAM (OSDRAM).
In the SECAM TV format, only black and white can be used in text display mode, and in
superimposed mode characters are white, with a faint background color.
Section 29 On-Screen Display (OSD)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 830 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Table 29.4 Correspondence between Character Color Code Settings and Color Output
Signals
R 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
G 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
B
Display
Data RAM
Settings* 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
R, G, or B port
output
White Yellow Magenta Red Cyan Green Blue Black
C.Video output
(NTSC)
White Same
phase
3π/4 π/2 3π/2 7π/4 π Black
C.Video output
(PAL)
White ±0 ±3π/4 ±π/2 ±3π/2 ±7π/4 ±π Black
Note: * Can be specified in character units.
29.3.3 Halftones/Cursors
(1) Halftones
The halftone function reduces the brightness and chroma saturation of the image signal in the
character background to make it semi-transparent, so that characters appear to float above the
background. By specifying halftone in the display data RAM, halftone can be toggled in character
units. Here the halftone levels are specified in the row register.
In the SECAM format, use of halftones or bordering is recommended.
(2) Cursors
The cursor function colors the background area of a character. By specifying the cursor in display
data RAM, cursor display can be toggled in character units. The cursor color and brightness are
specified in the row register; within a given row, the same color and brightness are used. The
chroma saturation can be set for the entire screen.
Note: Cursor display is a function for use in text display mode only; halftones are a function for
use in superimposed mode only. The display data RAM halftone/cursor specification bit is
dual-purpose, so that depending on the display mode, function may switch automatically
between halftone/cursor.
Figure 29.5 shows examples of halftone and cursor display. For details on display data RAM, refer
to section 29.3.7, Display Data RAM (OSDRAM). For an explanation of each register, refer to
section 29.4.5, Row Registers (CLINEn, n = rows 1 to 12).
Section 29 On-Screen Display (OSD)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 831 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
18 lines
12 dots
Cursor
(1) Halftone display
(Supported in superimposed mode)
(2) Cursor display
(Supported in text display mode)
Background Character
12 dots
Halftone Background Character
18 lines
Figure 29.5 Halftone and Cursor Display Examples
29.3.4 Blinking
Blinking is a function in which displayed characters are displayed intermittently. By specifying
blinking in display data RAM, text can be made to blink in character units. The blinking period
can be chosen from two values through the screen control register. Blinking is supported both in
superimposed mode and text display mode.
Digital outputs (YCO, R, G, and B) can be made to blink or not blink through the digital output
specification register. The YBO digital output cannot be made to blink.
For details on display data RAM, refer to section 29.3.7, Display Data RAM (OSDRAM).
For an explanation of each register, refer to section 29.5.9, Screen Control Register (DCNTL), and
section 29.7.3, Digital Output Specification Register (DOUT).
Buttons cannot be made to blink.
For notes on blinking, refer to section 29.8.3, Note 3 on Font Creation (Blinking).
Section 29 On-Screen Display (OSD)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 832 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
29.3.5 Button Display
Button display is a function in which a frame is drawn around a character string; buttons can be set
in character units in display data RAM. There are two types of button: one type of button appears
to be raised or floating, and the other type appears to be lowered or sunken. By switching from the
raised button type to the lowered button type, the button appears to have been depressed; such
displays are ideal for screens on which various settings are to be made.
Button displays can be used simultaneously with the blinking function, but blinking can only be
used for characters; buttons cannot be made to blink.
When used with enlarged characters, the button width is enlarged to two dots by two lines.
Buttons are horizontal rectangles; vertical-rectangle buttons cannot be created.
In order to create a button with three or more characters, a button display (start) character and a
button display (end) character should be specified.
Multiple buttons can be created in a single row, but the button pattern in a given row is the same
for all buttons in that row.
The button pattern can be set in row units; white brightness is 75IRE, and black brightness is 15
IRE. Both are values relative to the pedestal (5 IRE). These brightness values are for reference.
Figure 29.6 shows examples of button display.
For details on display data RAM, refer to section 29.3.7, Display Data RAM (OSDRAM). For an
explanation of each register, refer to section 29.4.5, Row Registers (CLINEn, n = rows 1 to 12).
In a button display, the button pattern replaces the outer periphery of the 12 dot × 18 line character
region; this should be born in mind when creating character fonts. Refer to section 29.8.4, Note 4
on Font Creation (Buttons).
Section 29 On-Screen Display (OSD)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 833 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
BPTn
BON1
BON0
BPTn
BON1
BON0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0/1*
0/1*
0
1
1
Note: * Do not set (start) or (end).
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
Figure 29.6 Button Display Examples
29.3.6 Character Data ROM (OSDROM)
The character data ROM (OSDROM) contains 384 character types*, each consisting of 12 dots by
18 lines. User programs can write individual character data sets. However, character code H'000 is
fixed as a blank character, and a new character pattern for this code cannot be set by the user.
The character data ROM (OSDROM) is referenced by character codes in the display data RAM,
and dots of display character data are read for each scanning line.
This character data ROM can be accessed by the CPU as part of user ROM. For details, refer to
section 29.11, Character Data ROM (OSDROM) Access by CPU.
The memory map appears in figure 29.7. An example of configuration for a single character
appears in figure 29.8.
Note: 512 character types for the H8S/2199R flash memory version, 384 character types for the
H8S/2199R Group mask-ROM version, and 256 character types for the H8S/2197S and
H8S/2196S.
Section 29 On-Screen Display (OSD)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 834 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Memory map
Bit data for character
code H'000
(blank character display)*
1
Notes: 1. Character code H'000 is reserved for blank character display and is not available for the user. All bit data
of this character code must be 0, as shown below.
Line 1,
bits 11 to 8
OSD ROM
Internal I/O registers
Internal I/O registers
OSD RAM
000000
040000
040040
040041
040042
040043
040044
040045
040062
040063
040064
04007F
04013F
045FC0
045FFF*
2
04003F
040040
04007F
040080
0400BF
0400C0
0400FF
040100
040000
045FFF*
2
CPU program
FFFFFF
H' F
H' F
H' F
H' F
H' FF
H' FF
040000 : H'F0
040001 : H'00
040002 : H'F0
040003 : H'00
040022 : H'F0
040023 : H'00
040024 : H'FF
04003F : H'FF
:
:
:
:
Bit data for character
code H'001
Bit data for character
code H'002
Bit data for character
code H'003
Bit data for character
code H'004
Bit data for character
code H'17F
Line 1,
bits 7 to 0
Line 2,
bits 7 to 0
Line 3,
bits 7 to 0
Line 2,
bits 11 to 8
Line 3,
bits 11 to 8
Line 18,
bits 7 to 0
Line 18,
bits 11 to 8
) Line 1
) Line 2
) Line 18
2. These addresses represent the H8S/2199R Group addresses.
Figure 29.7 OSD ROM Map
Section 29 On-Screen Display (OSD)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 835 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Line number Data
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
32
F000
F000
F3FC
F3FC
F300
F300
F300
F300
F3F0
F3F0
F300
F300
F300
F300
F300
F300
F000
F000
FFFF
FFFF
1110987654321
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
0
Line
12 dots
18 dots
32 words
16 bits
Bit
Unused area
Figure 29.8 OSDROM Data Configuration (for the letter “F”)
Note: OSDROM consists of 12 dots × 18 lines per character. When character data is written to
flash memory, addresses are written in a 16-bit × 32-word area as shown in figure 29.8.
Data in the unused area should be set to 1. In addition, character data for blank display
should always be set to 0.
29.3.7 Display Data RAM (OSDRAM)
8
*
9
*
R/W
10
*
R/W
11
*
12
*
R/W
*
R/W
1315
BON0 CR CG CB C8
*
R/W
BLNK
14
*
R/W
HT/CR
R/WR/W
BON1
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
0
*
1
*
R/W
2
*
R/W
3
*
4
*
R/W
*
R/W
57
C4 C3 C2 C1 C0
*
R/W
C7
6
*
R/W
C6
R/WR/W
C5
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
*: Undefined
Display data RAM for OSD (OSDRAM) contains 12 rows of 32 characters each, or 384 characters
(384 words), and consists of master RAM and slave RAM. Master RAM can be read and written
by the CPU; slave RAM is accessed by the OSD.
Section 29 On-Screen Display (OSD)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 836 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
The OSD display changes when the data written to master RAM is transferred to the slave RAM.
Data is transferred from the master RAM to the slave RAM by setting the LDREQ bit in the OSD
format register to 1. At this time, when the DTMV bit is 0, transfer is performed at the moment the
LDREQ bit is set to 1; when the DTMV bit is 1, transfer is performed in synchronous with the
Vsync signal after the LDREQ bit is set to 1. After transfer, the LDREQ bit is cleared to 0. During
transfer, the LDREQ bit remains set to 1; master RAM should be accessed only after confirming
that the LDREQ bit has been cleared to 0. If the CPU accesses master RAM during transfer, the
access is invalid and the VACS bit in the OSD format register is set to 1. The master RAM can be
accessed by the CPU even in the module stop mode.
After power-down mode is cancelled, the OSDRAM must be initialized. For details on the OSD
format register, refer to section 29.6.6, OSD Format Register (DFORM).
Bit 15⎯Blinking Specification Bit (BLNK): Turns blinking (intermittent display) on and off for
characters in character units. Blinking for digital outputs (YCO, R, G, and B) is set by the digital
output specification register. Digital output (YBO) cannot be set to blink.
OSDRAM
Bit 15 Description
BLNK C.Video Output
0 Blinking is off
1 Blinking is on
DOUT OSDRAM
Bit 4 Bit 15 Description
DOBC BLNK Digital Output (YCO, R, G, B)
0 Blinking is off 0
1 Blinking is off
1 0 Blinking is off
1 Blinking is on
Section 29 On-Screen Display (OSD)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 837 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 14⎯Halftone/Cursor Display Specification Bit (HT/CR): Turns halftone/cursor display on
and off in character units. The superimposed/text display mode switching bit of the screen control
register is used for switching between halftone and cursor display.
In digital outputs (R, G, and B), when the RGBC bit of the digital output specification register is
set to 1 in either superimposed or text display mode to select output of display data for all of
characters/borders/cursor/background/button display, the cursor color data specified by the cursor
color specification bit of the row register is output. In SECAM TV format, it is recommended that
halftone display be used.
DCNTL OSDRAM
Bit 14 Bit 14 Description
DISPM HT/CR C.Video Output
0 Halftone is off 0
1 Halftone is on
1 0 Cursor display is off
1 Cursor display is on
DOUT OSDRAM
Bit 6 Bit 14 Description
RGBC HT/CR Digital Output (R, G, B)
0 0/1 Character is output (halftone/cursor specification invalid)
1 0 Character is output (halftone/cursor display off)
1 Cursor color data specified by the cursor color specification bit of
row register is output
Section 29 On-Screen Display (OSD)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 838 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bits 13 and 12⎯Button Specification Bits (BON1, BON0): Set buttons in character units in
conjunction with the BPTNn bit of the row register. To create a button with three or more
characters, no-button display characters or button display (one character) must be specified
between a button display (start) character and a button display (end) character. For details, refer to
figure 29.6, Button Display Example.
CLINEn OSDRAM
Bit 7 Bit 13 Bit 12
BPTNn BON1 BON0 Description Display
0 No button is displayed
0
1 Button is displayed (start)
0 Button is displayed (end)
0
1
1 Button is displayed (one character)
1 0 No button is displayed
0
1 Button is displayed (start)
1 0 Button is displayed (end)
1 Button is displayed (one character)
Section 29 On-Screen Display (OSD)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 839 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bits 11 to 9⎯Character Color Specification Bits (CR, CG, CB): Specify character colors in
character units.
In superimposed mode, the only character color is white, and register settings are invalid.
For digital outputs (R, G, and B), character color data specified by the character color specification
bits for both superimposed and text display modes is output.
OSDRAM Character Color
Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 C.Video Output
CR CG CB NTSC PAL R,G,B Outputs
0 Black Black Black 0
1 π ±π Blue
0 7π/4 ±7π/4 Green
0
1
1 3π/2 ±3π/2 Cyan
1 0 π/2 ±π/2 Red
0
1 3π/4 ±3π/4 Magenta
1 0 Same phase ±0 Yellow
1 White White White
Bits 8 to 0⎯Character Codes (C8 to C0): Set character codes (H'000 to H'17F) to be displayed.
Note: Character code H'000 is defined as blank (nothing displayed).
For the H8S/2199R Group, character display is not guaranteed if character codes from
H'180 to H'1FF are specified.
For the H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S, character display is not guaranteed if character codes
from H'100 to H'1FF are specified.
Section 29 On-Screen Display (OSD)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 840 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
29.4 Settings in Row Units
The following items can be set in row units by using the row registers.
29.4.1 Button Patterns
Characters can be set freely by writing, to display data RAM, the character data ROM address
(character code) at which the character to be displayed is stored.
For information on character data ROM and display data RAM, refer to section 29.3.6, Character
Data ROM (OSDROM), and section 29.3.7, Display Data RAM (OSDRAM).
The button pattern specification bit of the row registers can be used to select the button pattern
(raised or lowered pattern) in row units.
29.4.2 Display Enlargement
The size of characters can be selected in row units by using the character size specification bit of
the row register. When selecting enlarged characters, the border width and button width also
change to accommodate the character size.
29.4.3 Character Brightness
Character brightness can be set in row units using the character brightness specification bit of the
row register. Four different character brightnesses can be selected.
29.4.4 Cursor Color, Brightness, Halftone Levels
(1) Cursor Color
Cursor colors can be set in row units using the cursor color specification bit of the row register.
Table 29.5 shows the correspondence between cursor color code settings and color output signals.
Cursor display functions in text display mode only.
For details on row registers, refer to section 29.4.5, Row Registers (CLINEn, n = rows 1 to 12).
Section 29 On-Screen Display (OSD)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 841 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Table 29.5 Correspondence between Cursor Color Code Settings and Color Output Signals
R 1 0
G 1 0 1 0
B
Row Register
Settings* 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
R, G, or B port
output
White Yellow Magenta Red Cyan Green Blue Black
C.Video output
(NTSC)
White Same
phase
3π/4 π/2 3π/2 7π/4 π Black
C.Video output
(PAL)
White ±0 ±3π/4 ±π/2 ±3π/2 ±7π/4 ±π Black
Note: * Can be set in display block units.
(2) Cursor Brightness
Cursor brightness can be set in row units using the cursor brightness specification bit of the row
register. Two different brightness levels can be selected.
For details on row registers, refer to section 29.4.5, Row Registers (CLINEn, n = rows 1 to 12).
(3) Halftone Levels
Halftone levels can be set in row units using the cursor brightness specification bit of the row
register. Two different halftone levels can be selected.
Figure 29.9 shows examples of a halftone level.
Halftone settings function only in superimposed mode.
For details on row registers, refer to section 29.4.5, Row Registers (CLINEn, n = rows 1 to 12).
Section 29 On-Screen Display (OSD)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 842 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
100IRE
0IRE
–40IRE
100IRE
0IRE
–40IRE
100IRE
0IRE
–40IRE
White character
50% halftone
Cursor region
Cursor region
Cursor region
(b) 50% halftone
(a) No halftone
(c) 30% halftone
30% halftone
White character
White character
Figure 29.9 Halftone Level Examples (C.Video)
29.4.5 Row Registers (CLINEn, n = rows 1 to 12)
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
57
CLUn0 KRn KGn KBn KLUn
0
R/W
BPTNn
6
0
R/W
SZn
R/WR/W
CLUn1
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
There are a total of 12 row registers (CLINEn), for use with rows 1 to 12.
Row register n is used in conjunction with display data RAM to set the character size, button
pattern, cursor color, etc., for the nth row. Each of these is an 8-bit read/write register.
Section 29 On-Screen Display (OSD)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 843 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
When reset, when the module is stopped, in sleep mode, in standby mode, in watch mode, in
subactive mode, or in subsleep mode, the registers are initialized to H'00.
All of the row registers 1 to 12 have the same specifiable format.
When the OSD display update timing control bit (DTMV) is 1, the OSD display is updated to the
row register settings in synchronous with the Vsync signal (OSDV).
Bit 7⎯Button Pattern Specification Bit (BPTNn n = 1 to 12): Sets the button pattern for the nth
row. For button specification, refer to section 29.3.7, Display Data RAM (OSDRAM).
Bit 7
BPTNn Description
0 Pattern causing buttons in the nth row to appear to be raised
AA
(Initial value)
1 Pattern causing buttons in the nth row to appear to be lowered
AA
Bit 6⎯Character Size Specification Bit (SZn, n = 1 to 12): Sets the size of characters. The
border width and button width also change according to the character size. These settings are
common to superimposed and text display modes and to C.Video output and digital outputs.
Bit 6
SZn Description
0 Character display size: single height × single width (Initial value)
1 Character display size: double height × double width
Section 29 On-Screen Display (OSD)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 844 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bits 5 and 4⎯Character Brightness Specification Bits (CLUn1, CLUn0, n = 1 to 12): Set the
character brightness. The character brightness differs with the character color.
In superimposed mode, white is the only character color.
This setting has no effect on digital outputs (YCO, YBO, R, G, and B).
Bit 5 Bit 4
CLUn1 CLUn0 Character Color Character Brightness Level
0 0 IRE (Initial value) 0
1 10 IRE
0 20 IRE 1
1
Black
30 IRE
0 25 IRE (Initial value) 0
1 45 IRE
0 55 IRE 1
1
Blue, green, cyan, red,
yellow, magenta
65 IRE
0 White 45 IRE (Initial value) 0
1 70 IRE
1 0 80 IRE
1 90 IRE
Note: All brightness levels are with reference to the pedestal level (5 IRE). Brightness levels are
reference values.
Section 29 On-Screen Display (OSD)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 845 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bits 3 to 1⎯Cursor Color Specification Bits (KRn, KGn, KBn, n = 1 to 12): Set the cursor
color in row units. C.Video output in superimposed mode uses halftone display, so that cursor
color specifications are invalid.
• Cursor Colors in Text Display Mode
Cursor Color
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 C.Video Output
KRn KGn KBn NTSC PAL R, G, B Outputs
0 Black Black Black (Initial value) 0
1 π ±π Blue
0 7π/4 ±7π/4 Green
0
1
1 3π/2 ±3π/2 Cyan
1 0 π/2 ±π/2 Red
0
1 3π/4 ±3π/4 Magenta
1 0 Same phase ±0 Yellow
1 White White White
• Cursor Colors in Superimposed Mode
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Cursor Color
KRn KGn KBn C.Video Output R, G, B Outputs
0 Black (Initial value) 0
1 Blue
0 Green
0
1
1 Cyan
0 Red 0
1 Magenta
0 Yellow
1
1
1
Specification invalid
(Halftone display in
superimposed mode)
White
Section 29 On-Screen Display (OSD)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 846 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 0⎯Cursor Brightness/Halftone Level Specification Bit (KLUn, n = 1 to 12): Sets the
cursor brightness/halftone level in row units. Cursor brightness differs for different cursor colors.
This setting has no effect on digital outputs (YCO, YBO, R, G, and B).
• Cursor Brightness in Text Display Mode
Bit 0
KLUn Cursor Color Cursor Brightness Level
0 0 IRE (Initial value)
1
Black
25 IRE
0 25 IRE (Initial value)
1
Blue, green, cyan, red,
yellow, magenta 45 IRE
0 White 45 IRE (Initial value)
1 55 IRE
Note: All brightness levels are with reference to the pedestal level (5IRE). Brightness levels are
reference values.
• Halftone Levels in Superimposed Mode
Bit 0
KLUn Description (Halftone Levels)
0 50% halftone (Initial value)
1 30% halftone
Section 29 On-Screen Display (OSD)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 847 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
29.5 Settings in Screen Units
The following items can be set in screen units by using vertical display position register,
horizontal display position register, and screen control register.
29.5.1 Display Positions
(1) Vertical Display Start Position
The vertical display start position can be set in single scanning line units using the vertical
position specification bits of the vertical display position register.
In setting display positions, the following should be noted.
• Settings should be chosen to ensure that the display does not overlap with the vertical retrace
line.
• When the display protrudes outside the screen, characters in the protruding region should be
blank characters (character code H'000).
The base point for display start positions is shown in figure 29.10.
Pre-equalizing
period
Post-equalizing
period
Vertical synchro-
nization period
Line counter
0123456
Figure 29.10 Base Point for Vertical Display Start Positions
(2) Vertical Display Interval
The vertical display interval can be set in single scanning line units using the line interval
specification bit of the vertical display position register.
• When the display protrudes outside the screen, characters in the protruding region should be
blank characters (character code H'000).
(3) Horizontal Display Start Position
The horizontal display start position can be set in units equal to double the dot clock cycle using
the horizontal position specification bit of the horizontal display position register.
Section 29 On-Screen Display (OSD)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 848 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
The base point for the horizontal display start position is the center of the horizontal sync signal.
Note the following when choosing display position settings.
• Settings should be chosen such that the display does not overlap with the color burst.
• When the display protrudes outside the screen, characters in the protruding region should be
blank characters (character code H'000).
The base point for the horizontal display start position is shown in figure 29.11.
Horizontal display
start position
Set by the display
position specification
register
OSD display
base point
Note: * Base point when the 4/2fsc clock is selected as the dot clock.
*
Figure 29.11 Base Point for Horizontal Display Start Position
29.5.2 Turning the OSD Display On and Off
The OSD display can be turned on and off using the display on/off bit of the screen control
register.
29.5.3 Display Method
Display can be switched between text display mode and superimposed mode, and while in text
display mode the display can be switched between interlaced and noninterlaced display, using the
display mode specification bit of the screen control register.
29.5.4 Blinking Period
A blinking period of either approximately 0.5 sec (32/fV) or approximately 1 sec (64/fV) can be
selected using the blinking period specification bit of the screen control register.
Section 29 On-Screen Display (OSD)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 849 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
29.5.5 Borders
Borders on the periphery of characters can be set using the border specification bit of the screen
control register. For an example of border display, see figure 29.2.
The border color can be set in screen units using the border color specification bit of the screen
control register. In text display mode, the border color can be selected from either white or black.
In superimposed mode, all borders are black only.
The horizontal size of borders is one dot (the same as one dot in a character), but for enlarged
characters is two dots.
The vertical size of borders is one line (the same as one line in a character), but for enlarged
characters is two lines.
For an explanation of the screen control register, refer to section 29.5.9, Screen Control Register
(DCNTL).
There are notes on borders; refer to section 29.8, Notes on OSD Font Creation.
In the SECAM format, use of halftones or bordering is recommended.
29.5.6 Background Color and Brightness
In text display mode, the background color can be selected from among eight hues, and the
brightness from among four levels, using the background color specification bits and background
brightness select bits of the screen control register.
29.5.7 Character, Cursor, and Background Chroma Saturation
In text display mode, the chroma saturation of the character, cursor, and background can each be
selected from among two levels using the character chroma specification bit, cursor chroma
specification bit, and background chroma specification bit of the screen control register,
respectively.
Section 29 On-Screen Display (OSD)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 850 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
29.5.8 Display Position Registers (HPOS and VPOS)
The HPOS and VPOS include the horizontal display position register and the vertical display
position register.
(1) Horizontal Display Position Register (HPOS)
01
R/W
2
R/W
34
R/WR/W
57
HP4
0
HP3
0
HP2
0
HP1
0
HP0
0
R/W
HP7
0
R/WR/WR/W
HP6
0
HP5
0
6
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
The horizontal display position register is used to set the horizontal display start position for
characters. It is an 8-bit read/write register. When reset, when the module is stopped, in sleep
mode, in standby mode, in watch mode, in subactive mode, or in subsleep mode, the horizontal
display position register is initialized to H'00. When the OSD display update timing control bit
(DTMV) is 1, the OSD display is updated to the horizontal display position register settings
synchronously with the Vsync signal (OSDV).
Bits 7 to 0⎯Horizontal Display Start Position Specification Bits (HP7 to HP0): Set the
display start position in the horizontal direction. Setting units are twice the dot clock cycle. Refer
to the base point for the horizontal display start position in figure 29.11.
If the horizontal display start position is Hs (μs), then Hs is given by 2 × tc × (value of HP7 to
HP0), where tc is the dot clock cycle.
(2) Vertical Display Position Register (VPOS)
89
R/W
10
R/W
1112
——
1315
—
1
VSPC2
0
VSPC1
0
VSPC0
0
VP8
0
—
—
1
R/WR/W—
—
1
—
1
14
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
01
R/W
2
R/W
34
R/WR/W
57
VP4
0
VP3
0
VP2
0
VP1
0
VP0
0
R/W
VP7
0
R/WR/WR/W
VP6
0
VP5
0
6
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
The vertical display position register is a 16-bit read/write register used to set the character size,
vertical display start position, and vertical-direction row interval. When reset, when the module is
stopped, in sleep mode, in standby mode, in watch mode, in subactive mode, or in subsleep mode,
the vertical display position register is initialized to H'F000. When the OSD display update timing
control bit (DTMV) is 1, the OSD display is updated to the vertical display position register
settings synchronously with the Vsync signal (OSDV).
Section 29 On-Screen Display (OSD)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 851 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bits 15 to 12⎯Reserved: Cannot be modified and are always read as 1.
Bits 11 to 9⎯Vertical Row Interval Specification Bits (VSPC2 to VSPC0): Set the row
interval in the vertical direction. They can be set in single scanning line units.
Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9
VSPC2 VSPC1 VSPC0 Description
0 No row interval (Initial value) 0
1 Row interval: One scanning line
0 Row interval: Two scanning lines
0
1
1 Row interval: Three scanning lines
1 0 Row interval: Four scanning lines
0
1 Row interval: Five scanning lines
1 0 Row interval: Six scanning lines
1 Row interval: Seven scanning lines
Bits 8 to 0⎯Vertical Display Start Position Specification Bits (VP8 to VP0): Set the display
start position in the vertical direction. The vertical display start position can be set in single
scanning line units. The base point of the display start position is the vertical sync signal. Refer to
the base point for the vertical display start position in figure 29.10.
If the vertical display start position is Vs (μs), then Vs is given by Vs = tH × (value of VP8 to
VP0), where tH is the horizontal sync signal period (μs), corresponding to a single horizontal
scanning line.
29.5.9 Screen Control Register (DCNTL)
89
R/W
10
—
1112
R/WR/W
1315
BLKS
0
OSDON
0
—
0
EDGE
0
EDGC
0
R/W
VDSPON
0
R/WR/WR/W
DISPM
0
LACEM
0
14
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W
01
R/W
2
R/W
34
R/WR/W
57
BLU1
0
BLU0
0
CAMP
0
KAMP
0
BAMP
0
R/W
BR
0
R/WR/WR/W
BG
0
BB
0
6
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W
The DCNTL is a 16-bit read/write register used to switch between superimposed and text display
modes, set the background and color for text display mode in screen units, and turn OSD display
on and off.
Section 29 On-Screen Display (OSD)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 852 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
When reset, when the module is stopped, in sleep mode, in standby mode, in watch mode, in
subactive mode, or in subsleep mode, the DCNTL is initialized to H'0000.
When the OSD display update timing control bit (DTMV) is 1, the OSD display is updated to the
screen control register settings except the setting in bit 13 (LACEM bit) synchronously with the
Vsync signal (OSDV).
Bit 15⎯OSD C. Video Display Enable Bit (VDSPON): Turns OSDC C.Video display output on
and off.
Bit 15
VDSPON Description
0 OSD C.Video display is off (Initial value)
1 OSD C.Video display is on
Bit 14⎯Superimposed/Text Display Mode Select Bit (DISPM): Selects superimposed mode or
text display mode.
When selecting a display mode, the dot clock also serves as the AFC circuit reference clock, and
so the AFC circuit reference Hsync signal must be switched. For details, refer to section 27.3.6,
Automatic Frequency Controller (AFC).
Bit 14
DISPM Description
0 Superimposed mode is selected (Initial value)
1 Text display mode is selected
Bit 13⎯Interlaced/Noninterlaced Display Select Bit (LACEM): Selects interlaced or
noninterlaced text display mode. When noninterlaced text display is selected, the internally
generated Hsync and Vsync frequency can be modified. For details, refer to section 27.2.11,
Internal Sync Frequency Register (INFRQR).
Bit 13
LACEM Description
0 Noninterlaced display is selected (Initial value)
1 Interlaced display is selected
Section 29 On-Screen Display (OSD)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 853 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 12⎯Blinking Period Select Bit (BLKS): Selects the character blinking period. The duty is
50%. The blinking period differs somewhat depending on the TV format selected by the TVM2 bit
of the OSD format register (either a 525-line system or a 625-line system).
DFORM DCNTL
Bit 15 Bit 12
TVM2 BLKS Description (Blinking Period)
0 Approx. 0.5 sec (32/fv = 0.53 sec) (Initial value) 0
1 Approx. 1.0 sec (64/fv = 1.07 sec)
1 0 Approx. 0.5 sec (32/fv = 0.64 sec) (Initial value)
1 Approx. 1.0 sec (64/fv = 1.28 sec)
Note: fv is the vertical sync signal frequency.
Bit 11⎯OSD Display Start Bit (OSDON): Starts OSD display. When the OSD display start bit
is 0, the OSD internal display circuit stops operation. In conjunction with the OSD C.Video
display enable bit (bit 15), changes operation as follows. When accessing character data ROM
(OSDROM) from the CPU, this bit should always be cleared to 0. If this bit is set to 1, access by
the CPU is not guaranteed.
Bit 15 Bit 11
VDSPON OSDON Description
0/1 0 OSD display is stopped (C.Video output and digital output both off)
(Initial value)
0 1 OSD display is started (digital output only)
1 1 OSD display is started (both C.Video output and digital output
enabled)
Bit 10⎯Reserved: Cannot be modified and is always read as 0. When 1 is written to this bit,
correct operation is not guaranteed.
Bit 9⎯Border Specification Bit (EDGE): Sets the border for characters for the entire screen.
Bit 9
EDGE Description
0 No character border (Initial value)
1 Character border
Section 29 On-Screen Display (OSD)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 854 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 8⎯Border Color Specification Bit (EDGC): Selects the border color. Border color
specifications for C.Video output are invalid in superimposed mode.
Border brightness levels are 0 IRE for black and 90 IRE for white.
Note: Brightness levels are with reference to the pedestal level (5IRE). Brightness levels are
reference values.
• Border Color in Text Display Mode
Bit 8 Border Color
EDGC C.Video Output R, G, B Outputs
0 Black Black (Initial value)
1 White White
• Border Color in Superimposed Mode
Bit 8 Border Color
EDGC C.Video Output R, G, B Outputs
0 Specification invalid (black) Black (Initial value)
1 White
Section 29 On-Screen Display (OSD)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 855 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bits 7 to 5⎯Background Color Specification Bits (BR, BG, BB): Used to select the
background color in text display mode. Background color specifications for C.Video output are
invalid in superimposed mode.
• Background Colors in Text Display Mode
Background Color
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 C.Video Output
BR BG BB NTSC PAL R, G, B Outputs
0 Black Black Black (Initial value) 0
1 π ±π Blue
0 7π/4 ±7π/4 Green
0
1
1 3π/2 ±3π/2 Cyan
0 π/2 ±π/2 Red 0
1 3π/4 ±3π/4 Magenta
0 Same phase ±0 Yellow
1
1
1 White White White
• Background Colors in Superimposed Mode
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Background Color
BR BG BB C.Video Output R, G, B Outputs
0 Black (Initial value) 0
1 Blue
0 Green
0
1
1 Cyan
0 Red 0
1 Magenta
0 Yellow
1
1
1
Specification invalid
White
Section 29 On-Screen Display (OSD)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 856 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bits 4 and 3⎯Background Brightness Select Bits (BLU1, BLU0): Select the background
brightness in text display mode. These settings have no effect on digital outputs (YCO, YBO, R,
G, and B).
Bit 4 Bit 3
BUL1 BUL0 Background Brightness
0 10 IRE (Initial value) 0
1 30 IRE
1 0 50 IRE
1 70 IRE
Note: Brightness levels are with reference to the pedestal level (5IRE). Brightness levels are
reference values.
Bit 2⎯Character Chroma Select Bit (CAMP): Selects the character chroma amplitude in text
display mode. This setting has no effect on digital outputs (YCO, YBO, R, G, and B).
Bit 2
CAMP Description
0 Character chroma amplitude: 60 IRE (Initial value)
1 Character chroma amplitude: 80 IRE
Note: Amplitudes are reference values.
Bit 1⎯Cursor Chroma Select Bit (KAMP): Selects the cursor chroma amplitude in text display
mode. This setting has no effect on digital outputs (YCO, YBO, R, G, and B).
Bit 1
KAMP Description
0 Cursor chroma amplitude: 60 IRE (Initial value)
1 Cursor chroma amplitude: 80 IRE
Note: Amplitudes are reference values.
Section 29 On-Screen Display (OSD)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 857 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 0⎯Background Chroma Select Bit (BAMP): Selects the background chroma amplitude in
text display mode. This setting has no effect on digital outputs (YCO, YBO, R, G, and B).
Bit 0
BAMP Description
0 Background chroma amplitude: 60 IRE (Initial value)
1 Background chroma amplitude: 80 IRE
Note: Amplitudes are reference values.
29.6 Other Settings
29.6.1 TV Format
The OSD supports M/NTSC, 4.43-NTSC, M/PAL, N/PAL, B, G, H/PAL, I/PAL, D, K/PAL, and
SECAM formats. See table 29.3.
29.6.2 Display Data RAM Control
The OSD display data RAM consists of master RAM and slave RAM. The master RAM can be
read and written by the CPU; the slave RAM is accessed by the OSD.
The data written to master RAM is transferred to slave RAM to switch the OSD display.
The DTMV bit can be used to switch between timing the transfer of data to occur when the
LDREQ bit is set to 1, or to occur synchronously with the Vsync signal after LDREQ is set to 1.
For details, refer to section 29.6.6, OSD Format Register (DFORM).
29.6.3 Timing of OSD Display Updates Using Register Rewriting
It is possible to switch the timing of OSD display updates to occur simultaneously with register
rewrites, or to occur synchronously with the Vsync signal (OSDV) after a register rewrite. For
details, refer to section 29.6.6, OSD Format Register (DFORM).
Section 29 On-Screen Display (OSD)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 858 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
29.6.4 4fsc/2fsc
For a 4fsc/2fsc signal, either an external clock signal is input, or a crystal oscillator can be
connected. If an external clock signal is input, the signal must be amplified using a dedicated
amplifier circuit; this is set using the register.
Either 4fsc or 2fsc input can be selected.
If a 2fsc signal is input, some colors cannot be displayed. For details, see table 29.7.
29.6.5 OSDV Interrupts
Interrupts triggered by the Vsync signal input to the OSD (OSDV interrupts) can be generated. In
superimposed mode, interrupts are triggered by the external Vsync signal, and in text display
mode, they are triggered by the internal Vsync signal generated in the sync separator.
29.6.6 OSD Format Register (DFORM)
89
R/W
10
—
1112
R/WR/W
1315
FSCIN
0
FSCEXT
0
—
0
OSDVE
0
OSDVF
0
R/W
TVM2
0
R/(W)*R/WR/W
TVM1
0
TMV0
0
14
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
01
R/W
2
R/W
34
——
57
—
1
—
1
DTMV
0
LDREQ
0
VACS
0
—
—
1
R/(W)*——
—
1
—
1
6
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
The DFORM is used to set the TV format and control display data RAM.
The DFORM is a 16-bit read/write register. When reset, it is initialized to H'00F8. Bits other than
bits 12, 11, and 7 to 3 are cleared to 0 in module stop, sleep, standby, watch, subactive, and
subsleep modes.
When the module stop bit of the sync separator is 0, bits 12 and 11 must not be rewritten.
Section 29 On-Screen Display (OSD)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 859 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bits 15 to 13⎯TV Format Select Bits (TVM2 to TVM0): Select the TV format. The specified
clock signal should always be input.
Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Description
TVM2 TVM1 TVM0 FSCIN TV Format 4fsc (MHz) 2fsc (MHz)
0 14.31818 ⎯ Initial value 0 0 0
1
M/NTSC
⎯ 7.15909
0 0 1 0 4.43-NTSC 17.734475
(17.734476)
⎯
1 ⎯ 8.8672375
(8.867238)
0 1 0 0 M/PAL 14.302446
(14.302444)
⎯
1 ⎯ 7.15122298
0 1 1 0/1 Must not be specified.
0 14.328225
(14.328224)
⎯ 1 0 0
1
N/PAL
⎯ 7.1641125
1 0 1 0/1 Must not be specified.
0 17.734475
(17.734476)
⎯ 1 1 0
1
B, G, H/PAL,
I/PAL, D, K/PAL
⎯ 8.8672375
(8.867238)
0 17.734475
(17.734476)
⎯ 1 1 1
1
B, G, H/SECAM,
L/SECAM, D, K,
K1/SECAM ⎯ 8.8672375
(8.867238)
Note: The 4fsc and 2fsc frequencies for SECAM do not conform to the SECAM TV format
specifications.
Bit 12⎯4/2fsc Input Select Bit (FSCIN): Selects 4fsc or 2fsc input.
Bit 12
FSCIN Description
0 4fsc input is selected (Initial value)
1 2fsc input is selected
Section 29 On-Screen Display (OSD)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 860 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 11⎯4/2fsc External Input Select Bit (FSCEXT): Selects 4fsc or 2fsc input.
Bit 11
FSCEXT Description
0 4/2fsc oscillator uses a crystal oscillator (Initial value)
1 4/2fsc uses a dedicated amplifier circuit for external clock signal input
Bit 10⎯Reserved: Always read as 0. When 1 is written to this bit, correct operation is not
guaranteed.
Bit 9⎯OSDV Interrupt Enable Bit (OSDVE): Enables or disables OSDV interrupts.
Bit 9
OSDVE Description
0 The OSDV interrupt is disabled (Initial value)
1 The OSDV interrupt is enabled
Bit 8⎯OSDV Interrupt Flag (OSDVF): Set when the OSD detects the Vsync signal. The timing
for setting this flag differs depending on the OSD display mode. In superimposed mode, it is set
on the external Vsync signal; in text display mode it is set on the internally generated Vsync
signal.
Bit 8
OSDVF Description
0 [Clearing condition]
When 0 is written after reading 1 (Initial value)
1 [Setting condition]
When OSD detects the Vsync signal
Bits 7 to 3⎯Reserved: Always read as 1. When 0 is written to these bits, correct operation is not
guaranteed.
Section 29 On-Screen Display (OSD)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 861 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 2⎯OSD Display Update Timing Control Bit (DTMV): Selects the timing for transfer of
data from master RAM to slave RAM and for OSD display update by register overwriting.
Bit 2
DTMV Description
0 After the LDREQ bit is written to 1, data is transferred from master RAM to slave
RAM regardless of the Vsync signal (OSDV). The OSD display is updated
simultaneously with register* rewriting.
Note: * When transferring data using this setting, do not have the OSD display
data (Initial value)
1 After the LDREQ bit is written to 1, data is transferred from master RAM to slave
RAM synchronously with the Vsync signal (OSDV). After rewriting the register, the
OSD display is updated synchronously with the Vsync signal (OSDV).
Note: The registers and register bits whose settings are reflected in the OSD display are the row
registers (CLINE), vertical display position register (VPOS), horizontal display position
register (HPOS), screen control register (DCNTL) except bit 13, and the RGBC, YCOC, and
DOBC bits of the digital output specification register (DOUT).
Bit 1⎯Master-Slave RAM Transfer Request and State Bit (LDREQ): Requests transfer of
data from master RAM to slave RAM. After this bit is written to 1, a transfer request is issued
with timing selected by the DTMV bit. When read, this bit indicates the state of data transfer from
master RAM to slave RAM.
Note: To abort data transfer after writing this bit to 1, write it to 0. However, once data transfer
begins it cannot be aborted.
• Writing
Bit 1
LDREQ Description
0 Requests abort of data transfer from master RAM to slave RAM
1 Requests transfer of data from master RAM to slave RAM. After transfer is
completed, this bit is cleared to 0
• Reading
Bit 1
LDREQ Description
0 Data is not being transferred from master RAM to slave RAM (Initial value)
1 Data is being transferred from master RAM to slave RAM, or is being prepared for
transfer. After transfer is completed, this bit is cleared to 0
Section 29 On-Screen Display (OSD)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 862 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 0⎯Master-Slave RAM Transfer State Bit (VACS): Is set to 1 if the CPU accesses
OSDRAM during transfer of data from master RAM to slave RAM; the access is invalid. This bit
is not cleared automatically, and so should be cleared by writing 0.
Bit 0
VACS Description
0 The CPU did not access OSDRAM during data transfer (Initial value)
1 The CPU accessed OSDRAM during data transfer; the access is invalid
29.7 Digital Output
29.7.1 R, G, and B Outputs
R, G, and B outputs consist of display data in dot units for characters, background, cursors and
other display elements.
Either of two output methods can be selected by the R, G, B digital output specification bit:
characters only, or output of display data for all elements, including characters, borders, cursors,
background, and buttons. Here data for borders and buttons is output as white-equivalent (R = 1, G
= 1, B = 1) or as black-equivalent (R = 0, G = 0, B = 0) data.
The digital output blink control bit is used to select blinking for R, G, and B. The R, G, and B
outputs are multiplexed with port 8 inputs/outputs. For details on pin function selection, refer to
section 10.9, Port 8.
Display data RAM and the screen control register settings are output as display data output for
characters, cursors and background in superimposed mode; this differs from the output data from
the CVout pin.
Examples of R, G, B output are shown in figures 29.12 and 29.13.
Section 29 On-Screen Display (OSD)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 863 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
0
RAM DOUT
BLNK DOBC RGBC
0
R
G
B
(Low)
(Low)
(Low)
(Low)
(Low)
R
G
B
R
G
B
R
G
B
R
(Blinking)
G
(Blinking)
B
(Blinking)
R
(Blinking)
G
(Blinking)
B
(Blinking)
1
0
0/1
1
0
1
0
11
1
11
Background
Output Example 1
Character color: Yellow (CR = 1, CG = 1, CB = 0)
Cursor color: Cyan (KR = 0, KG = 1, KB = 1)
Background color: Green (BR = 0, BG = 1, BB = 0)
Border: None (EDGE = 0)
Button: Displayed (pattern 1)
Button
Cursor
Border
Character
Border
Cursor
Button
Background
Figure 29.12 RGB Output Example (1)
Section 29 On-Screen Display (OSD)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 864 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
0
RAM DOUT
BLNK DOBC RGBC
0
R
G
B
(Low)
(Low)
(Low)
(Low)
(Low)
(Low)
(High)
(Low)
(Low)
(Low)
(Low)
(Low)
R
G
B
R
G
B
R
G
B
R
(Blinking)
G
(Blinking)
B
(Blinking)
R
(Blinking)
G
(Blinking)
B
(Blinking)
1
0
0/1
1
0
1
0
11
1
11
Output Example 2
Character color: Yellow (CR = 1, CG = 1, CB = 0)
Cursor color: None (HT/CR = 0)
Background color: Green (BR = 0, BG = 1, BB = 0)
Border: Black (EDGE = 1, EDGC = 0)
Button: None
Button
Cursor
Border
Character
Border
Cursor
Button
Background
Background
Figure 29.13 RGB Output Example (2)
Section 29 On-Screen Display (OSD)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 865 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
29.7.2 YCO and YBO Outputs
YCO output consists of character and border data in dot units. Either of two YCO output methods
can be selected by the YCO digital output specification bit: output of characters only, or combined
output of character and border data. The digital output blink control bit can be used to select
blinking for YCO output. The YCO data output specification bit must be reset to 0 when bordering
is not performed, and must be set to 1 when bordering is performed. YBO output is data for the
character display area. 32 characters’ worth of data is output starting from the start position set by
the horizontal-direction start position specification bit of the display position register. Here blank-
character intervals have no character display, and so there is no output. In addition, YBO output
cannot be made to blink.
The YCO and YBO outputs are multiplexed with port 8 inputs/outputs. For details on pin function
selection, refer to section 10.9, Port 8.
An example of YCO output and that of YBO output appear in figures 29.14 and 29.15,
respectively.
0
RAM DOUT
BLNK DOBC YCOBC
0
1
0
1
0
1
YCO
YCO
YCO
YCO
YCO
(Blinking)
YCO
(Blinking)
(Low)
(Low)
0/1
0
1
1
Output Example
Character color: Yellow (CR = 1, CG = 1, CB = 0)
Cursor color: None (HT/CR = 0)
Background color: Green (BR = 0, BG = 1, BB = 0)
Border: Black (EDGE = 1, EDGC = 0)
Button: None
Button
Cursor
Border
Character
Border
Cursor
Button
Background
Background
Figure 29.14 YCO Output Example
Section 29 On-Screen Display (OSD)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 866 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Horizontal display position
Display block
Character display
position
Blank character
Row 1
YBO
1234567 29 32....................................................................... .....
Figure 29.15 YBO Output Example
29.7.3 Digital Output Specification Register (DOUT)
01
—
2
R/W
34
R/WR/W
57
DOBC
0
DSEL
0
CRSEL
0
—
1
—
0
—
—
0
—R/WR/W
RGBC
0
YCOC
0
6
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
The DOUT is used to choose settings for digital output.
The DOUT is an 8-bit read/write register. When reset, when the module is stopped, in sleep mode,
in standby mode, in watch mode, in subactive mode, or in subsleep mode, it is initialized to H'02.
When the OSD display update timing control bit is 1, the OSD display is updated to the RGBC,
YCOC and DOBC bit settings synchronously with the Vsync signal (OSDV).
The R, G, B, YCO, and YBO outputs are multiplexed with port 8 inputs/outputs. For details on pin
function selection, refer to section 10.9, Port 8.
Bit 7⎯Reserved: Always read as 0. When 1 is written to this bit, correct operation is not
guaranteed.
Bit 6⎯R, G, B Digital Output Specification Bit (RGBC): Specifies the R, G, B digital output
format.
Bit 6
RGBC Description
0 Character output is specified (Initial value)
1 Combined character, border, cursor, background, and button output is specified
Section 29 On-Screen Display (OSD)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 867 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 5⎯YCO Digital Output Specification Bit (YCOC): Specifies the YCO digital output
format. This bit must be reset to 0 when bordering is not performed, and must be set to 1 when
bordering is performed.
Bit 5
YCOC Description
0 Character output is specified (Initial value)
1 Combined character and border output is specified
Bit 4⎯Digital Output Blink Control Bit (DOBC): Turns blinking on and off for digital outputs
(YCO, R, G, and B). Digital output YBO cannot be made to blink.
OSDRAM DOUT
Bit 15 Bit 4
BLNK DOBC
Description
0 Does not blink (Initial value) 0
1 Does not blink
1 0 Does not blink
1 Blinks
Bit 3⎯R, G, B, YCO, YBO Pin Function Select Bit (DSEL): Selects the R, G, B, YCO, and
YBO pins to function either as digital output pins, or as data slicer internal monitor signal pins.
Bit 3
DSEL Description
0 R, G, B, YCO, YBO output function is selected (Initial value)
1 Data slicer monitor output function is selected
R pin = Signal selected by bit 2 (CRSEL)
G pin = Slice data signal analog-compared with CVin2
B pin = Sampling clock generated within data slicer
YCO pin = External Hsync signal (AFCH) synchronized within the LSI
YBO pin = External Vsync signal (AFCV) synchronized within the LSI
Section 29 On-Screen Display (OSD)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 868 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 2⎯Monitor Signal Switching Bit (CRSEL): Selects whether a clock run-in detection
window signal or a start bit detection window signal is output. This bit setting is valid when DSEL
is 1, so that pins are used as data slicer internal monitor signal outputs.
Bit 2
CRSEL Description
0 Clock run-in detection window signal output is selected (Initial value)
1 Start bit detection window signal output is selected
For information on slice data and the sampling clock, refer to section 28.2.2, Slice Line Setting
Registers 1 to 4 (SLINE1 to SLINE4). For details on the clock run-in detection window signal,
start bit detection window signal, external Hsync signal (AFCH), and external Vsync signal
(AFCV), refer to section 27, Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer.
Bit 1⎯Reserved: Cannot be modified and is always read as 1.
Bit 0⎯Reserved: Always read as 0. When 1 is written to this bit, correct operation is not
guaranteed.
29.7.4 Module Stop Control Register (MTSTPCR)
7
1
R/W
MSTP
15 MSTP
14 MSTP
13 MSTP
12 MSTP
11 MSTP
10 MSTP
9MSTP
8MSTP
7MSTP
6MSTP
5MSTP
4MSTP
3MSTP
2MSTP
1MSTP
0
6
1
R/W
54
1
R/W
MSTPCRH MSTPCRL
1
R/W
3
1
R/W
2
1
R/W
1
1
R/W
0
1
R/W
7
1
R/W
6
1
R/W
5
1
R/W
4
1
R/W
3
1
R/W
2
1
R/W
1
1
R/W
0
1
R/W
Bit:
Initial value:
R/W:
The MSTPCR consists of two 8-bit read/write registers for controlling the module stop mode.
Writing 0 to the MSTP0 bit starts the OSD module; setting the MSTP0 bit to 1 stops the OSD
module at the end of a bus cycle and the module stop mode is entered. At this time, the CVout and
digital outputs also stop. Before writing 0 to this bit, set the MSTP9 bit to 0, to operate the sync
separator.
The registers cannot be read or written to in module stop mode. However, character data ROM
(OSDROM) and display data RAM (OSDRAM) can be read and written. For details, refer to
section 4.5, Module Stop Mode.
Section 29 On-Screen Display (OSD)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 869 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bit 0⎯Module Stop (MSTP0): Specifies the module stop mode for the OSD module.
Bit 0
MSTP0 Description
0 Clears the module stop mode for the OSD module
1 Specifies the module stop mode for the OSD module (Initial value)
Section 29 On-Screen Display (OSD)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 870 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
29.8 Notes on OSD Font Creation
29.8.1 Note 1 on Font Creation (Font Width)
In OSD display, vertical and diagonal lines in fonts that are one dot wide may appear to be narrow
due to a shift of 0.5H. Display fonts should be created with liberal thicknesses.
29.8.2 Note 2 on Font Creation (Borders)
Borders extend beyond the character display frame in the X-direction, but no borders extend
beyond the display frame in the Y-direction. Moreover, when borders are to the right or left of
blank characters (H'000), borders extend beyond the display frame, but for the first and the 32nd
characters in a displayed row (16th character when the character size is enlarged to double height
× double width), no borders extend beyond the display frame.
Examples of borders which extend beyond the display frame appear in figure 29.16 through figure
29.18.
X-direction
Y-direction
12 dots
Characters
Borders
18 dots
Figure 29.16 Border Extending beyond the Display Frame (Example)
Section 29 On-Screen Display (OSD)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 871 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
12 dots
Characters
Borders
18 dots
Blank display
Figure 29.17 Border Neighboring a Blank Character (Example)
12 dots
(a) 1st character (b) 32nd character
12 dots
Characters
Borders
Figure 29.18 Examples of Characters at the Starting and Ending Positions in a Row
Section 29 On-Screen Display (OSD)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 872 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
29.8.3 Note 3 on Font Creation (Blinking)
Blinking involves intermittent display within a specified display frame only. When blinking is
necessary, font data should not be set to the first or twelfth dots in the X-direction.
Figure 29.19 shows an example of blinking for characters with borders extending beyond the
display frame.
12 dots
X-direction
Y-direction
12 dots
18 dots
Characters
Borders
Figure 29.19 Example of Blinking with Borders Extending beyond the Display Frame
Section 29 On-Screen Display (OSD)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 873 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
29.8.4 Note 4 on Font Creation (Buttons)
Buttons replace the outermost perimeter of the character display area with a button pattern. It
should be remembered that the button pattern display takes priority over display of the font and
border, if any.
Figure 29.20 shows an example of button pattern display that takes priority over font and border.
12 dots
Button pattern: White
12 dots
18 dots
Characters
Borders
Button pattern: White
Button pattern: Black
Button pattern: Blac
k
Figure 29.20 Example of Button Pattern Display Taking Priority over Font and Border
Section 29 On-Screen Display (OSD)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 874 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
29.9 OSD Oscillator, AFC, and Dot Clock
In order to use the OSD, sync signals and a 4/2fsc clock signal are required.
29.9.1 Sync Signals
The sync signal for text display mode is a signal created from a 4/2fsc clock or an AFC reference
clock. In superimposed mode, sync signals may be selected from one of the following three types.
1. Horizontal/vertical sync signals separated by the sync separator from the composite video
signal (CVin2)
2. Horizontal/vertical sync signals separated by the sync separator from the composite sync signal
(Csync)
3. Hsync and Vsync signals input separately
For details, refer to section 27, Sync Separator for OSD and Data Slicer.
29.9.2 AFC Circuit
The AFC circuit averages the “fluctuation” in the horizontal sync signal (Hsync) during normal
VCR playback, reducing OSD display jitter. In addition, the AFC circuit generates the dot clock.
Be sure that an external circuit is connected. For details, refer to section 27.3.6, Automatic
Frequency Controller (AFC).
29.9.3 Dot Clock
The dot clock is a clock used for X-direction (horizontal direction) OSD display. The reference
clock from the AFC circuit or the 4/2fsc clock from the 4/2fscin pin can be selected with the
DOTCKSL bit in the sync separator.
• Reference clock from AFC circuit
The dot clock generated by the AFC circuit is a clock synchronized with the horizontal sync
signal. The dot clock frequency is 576 or 448 times the horizontal sync signal frequency (576
× fh or 448 × fh). The size of one dot in the horizontal direction of the OSD display appearing
on the screen is the equivalent of one dot clock cycle. Accordingly, modifying the FRQSEL bit
in the sync separator to change the horizontal sync signal frequency can adjust the dot size.
The dot clock cycle is the same in superimposed mode and text display mode; it is also the
same for both interlaced and noninterlaced displays. It changes somewhat depending on the
TV format. The relation between TV format and dot clock cycle is shown in table 29.6.
Section 29 On-Screen Display (OSD)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 875 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
• 4/2fsc clock
The dot clock generated by the 4/2fsc clock is the same clock that is input from the 4/2fscin
pin. As a result, when the 4fsc-clock frequency is input, the OSD display becomes smaller in
the horizontal direction. When the 4/2fsc clock is used, use the OSD in text display mode.
Using the OSD in superimposed mode causes characters to flicker.
Table 29.6 Dot Clock Cycle
Dot Clock Cycle
TV Format
Reference Clock:
576 × fh
Reference Clock:
448 × fh
M/NTSC, 4.43-NTSC, M/PAL, N/PAL 110 ns (9.06 MHz) 142 ns (7.06 MHz)
B, G, H/PAL, I/PAL, D, K/PAL, SECAM 111 ns (9.00 MHz) 143 ns (7.00 MHz)
29.9.4 4/2fsc
1. 4/2fsc Oscillator
The 4/2fsc oscillator generates color signals for text display mode, and also generates the
internal sync signal. A crystal oscillator can be connected, or an external clock can be input.
The 4/2fsc frequency should be appropriate for the TV format. If an inappropriate frequency is
used, or if no 4/2fsc signal is input, OSD operation is not guaranteed.
Circuit constants should be chosen such that frequency deviation, including temperature
effects, is within ±30 ppm.
An example of connection of a crystal oscillator appears in figure 29.21; an example of input
of an external clock is shown in figure 29.22.
Section 29 On-Screen Display (OSD)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 876 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Power-down
mode controller
4/2fsc in
Rf Crystal
C2
C1
Note: Rf = 1 MΩ typ.
Crystal should be at a frequency appropriate for the TV format.
C1, C2 should be specified such that frequency deviation, including temperature effects, is less than
±30 ppm.
Figure 29.21 Example of Connection of a 4/2fsc Crystal Oscillator
Power-down
mode controller External clock
Duty: 47 to 53%
4/2fsc in
CR
(OPEN)
Note: C = 1000 pF typ
When the external clock amplitude is 1 Vp-p or larger, connect a resistor in series with capacitor C.
External clock select
Figure 29.22 Example of Input of a 4/2fsc External Clock
Section 29 On-Screen Display (OSD)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 877 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
2. For information on OSD display colors for a 2fsc signal input, refer to table 29.7. In NTSC
format, some colors cannot be displayed. In PAL format, because alternating display is used,
color muddiness, flickering and other problems may arise.
Table 29.7 OSD Display Colors for 2fsc Signal Input
Character, Cursor, and
Background Color
Settings
NTSC
PAL*
RGB
Digital Output
Yellow (Same phase) Yellow (Same phase) Yellow (3π/2, –π/2) Yellow
Cyan (3π/2) Cyan (3π/2) Cyan (π, 0) Cyan
Green (7π/4) Cannot be specified Green (–π/2, 0) Green
Magenta (3π/4) Cannot be specified Magenta (+π/2, –π) Magenta
Red (π/2) Red (π/2) Red (+π/2, –π/2) Red
Blue (π) Blue (π) Blue (π/2, –3π/2) Blue
White White White White
Black Black Black Black
Note: * The PAL color burst phase angle is ±π/4 rad for 4fsc input, but is 0 rad or –π/2 rad for
2fsc, so that colors may differ from the color settings.
29.10 OSD Operation in CPU Operation Modes
Table 29.8 shows the OSD CVout pin status for different CPU operating modes.
During a transition to power-down mode, registers are initialized, and so register settings must be
restored on return to active mode.
Table 29.8 OSD Operation for Different CPU Operating Modes
Operating Mode Module Stop Bit DISPM Bit CVout Pin
Reset 1 0 No output
0 Chroma-through and
OSD display
Active 0
1 Text display
Module stop 1 0 No output
Sleep, standby, watch,
subactive, or subsleep
Retained 0 No output
Section 29 On-Screen Display (OSD)
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 878 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
29.11 Character Data ROM (OSDROM) Access by CPU
The character data ROM can be accessed by the CPU as part of user ROM. Before accessing the
character data ROM by the CPU, clear the OSDON bit in the screen control register to 0 to stop
OSD display, then set the OSROME bit in the serial timer register to 1. The character data ROM
can be accessed even in the module stop mode.
If the OSROME bit is set to 1 during OSD display, the character data ROM cannot be accessed
correctly by CPU.
For details on OSROME bit setting, refer to section 29.5.9, Screen Control Register (DCNTL).
29.11.1 Serial Timer Control Register (STCR)
0
0
1
0
2
0
3
0
4
0
5
0
6
0
7
—OSROMEFLSHE—IICX0IICX1—
—R/WR/W—R/WR/W— —
—
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Bit 2⎯OSD ROM Enable (OSROME): Controls the OSD character data ROM (OSDROM)
access. When this bit is set to 1, the OSDROM can be accessed by the CPU, and when this bit is
cleared to 0, the OSDROM cannot be accessed by the CPU but accessed by the OSD module.
Before writing to or erasing the OSDROM in the F-ZTAT version, be sure to set this bit to 1.
Note: During OSD display, the OSDROM cannot be accessed by the CPU. Before accessing the
OSDROM by the CPU, be sure to clear the OSDON bit in the screen control register to 0
then set the OSROME bit to 1. If the OSROME bit is set to 1 during OSD display, the
character data ROM cannot be accessed correctly by CPU.
Bit 2
OSROME Description
0 OSDROM is accessed by the OSD (Initial value)
1 OSDROM is accessed by the CPU
Section 30 Power Supply Circuit
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 879 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Section 30 Power Supply Circuit
30.1 Overview
The H8S/2199R Group incorporates an internal power supply step-down circuit. Use of this circuit
enables the internal power supply to be fixed at a constant level of approximately 3.0 V,
independently of the voltage of the power supply connected to the external VCC pin. As a result, the
current consumed when an external power supply is used at 3.0 V or above can be held down to
virtually the same low level as when used at approximately 3.0 V.
30.2 Power Supply Connection (Internal Power Supply Step-Down
Circuit On-Chip)
Connect the external power supply to the VCC pin, and connect a capacitance of approximately 0.1
µF between VCL and VSS, as shown in figure 30.1. The internal step-down circuit is made effective
simply by adding this external circuit.
Notes: 1. In the external circuit interface, the external power supply voltage connected to VCC and
the GND potential connected to VSS are the reference levels. For example, for port
input/output levels, the VCC level is the reference for the high level, and the VSS level is
that for the low level.
2. The A/D converter, servo, and OSD analog power supply are not affected by internal
step-down processing.
VCL
VSS
Internal
logic
Step-down circuit
Internal
power
supply
Stabilization
capacitance
(approx. 0.1 µF)
VCC
VCC = 4.0 V to 5.5 V
Figure 30.1 Power Supply Connection (Internal Power Supply Step-Down Circuit On-
Chip)
Section 30 Power Supply Circuit
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 880 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 881 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
31.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings
Table 31.1 lists the absolute maximum ratings.
Table 31.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings
Item Symbol Value Unit
Power supply voltage Vcc −0.3 to +7.0 V
Input voltage (ports other than port 0) Vin −0.3 to Vcc +0.3 V
Input voltage (port 0) Vin −0.3 to AVcc +0.3 V
A/D converter power supply voltage AVcc −0.3 to +7.0 V
A/D converter input voltage AVin −0.3 to AVcc +0.3 V
Servo power supply voltage SVcc −0.3 to +7.0 V
Servo amplifier input voltage Vin −0.3 to SVcc +0.3 V
OSD power supply voltage OVcc −0.3 to +7.0 V
Operating temperature Topr −20 to +75 °C
Operating temperature (At Flash memory
program/erase)
Topr 0 to +75 °C
Storage temperature Tstr −55 to +125 °C
Notes: 1. Permanent damage may occur to the chip if absolute maximum ratings are exceeded.
Normal operation should be under the conditions specified in Electrical Characteristics.
Exceeding these values can result in incorrect operation and reduced reliability.
2. All voltages are relative to Vss = SVss = OVss = AVss = 0.0 V.
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 882 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
31.2 Electrical Characteristics of HD6432199R, HD6432198R,
HD6432197R, and HD6432196R
31.2.1 DC Characteristics of HD6432199R, HD6432198R, HD6432197R, and
HD6432196R
Table 31.2 DC Characteristics of HD6432199R, HD6432198R, HD6432197R, and
HD6432196R
(Conditions: Vcc = AVcc = 4.0 V to 5.5 V*1, Vss = 0.0 V, Ta = –20 to +75°C unless otherwise
specified.)
Values
Item Symbol Applicable Pins
Test
Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Note
MD0 Vcc = 2.5 V to
5.5 V
0.9 Vcc ⎯ Vcc +0.3
0.8 Vcc ⎯ Vcc +0.3 RES, IC, IRQ0 to
IRQ5, SYNCI Vcc = 2.5 V to
5.5 V
0.9 Vcc ⎯ Vcc +0.3
SCK1, SI1, FTIA,
FTIB, FTIC, FTID,
RPTRG, TMBI,
ADTRG
0.8 Vcc ⎯ Vcc +0.3
OSC1 Vcc
–0.5
⎯ Vcc +0.3
0.7 Vcc ⎯ Vcc +0.3 P00 to P07,
P10 to P17,
P20 to P27,
P30 to P37,
P40 to P47,
P60 to P67,
P70 to P77,
P80 to P87
Vcc = 2.5 V to
5.5 V
0.8 Vcc ⎯ Vcc +0.3
Input high
voltage
VIH
Csync 0.7 Vcc ⎯ Vcc +0.3
V
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 883 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Values
Item Symbol Applicable Pins
Test
Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Note
MD0 Vcc = 2.5 V to
5.5 V
–0.3 ⎯ 0.1 Vcc
−0.3 ⎯ 0.2 Vcc RES, IC,
IRQ0 to IRQ5,
SYNCI Vcc = 2.5 V to
5.5 V
−0.3 ⎯ 0.1 Vcc
SCK1, SI1, FTIA,
FTIB, FTIC, FTID,
RPTRG, TMBI,
ADTRG
−0.3 ⎯ 0.2 Vcc
OSC1 −0.3 ⎯ 0.5
−0.3 ⎯ 0.3 Vcc P00 to P07,
P10 to P17,
P20 to P27,
P30 to P37,
P40 to P47,
P60 to P67,
P70 to P77,
P80 to P87
Vcc = 2.5 V to
5.5 V
−0.3 ⎯ 0.2 Vcc
Input low
voltage
VIL
Csync −0.3 ⎯ 0.2 Vcc
V
−IOH = 1.0 mA Vcc
–1.0
⎯ ⎯ V
−IOH = 0.5 mA ⎯ Vcc
–0.5
⎯ V Refer-
ence
value
Output
high
voltage
VOH SO1, SCK1,
PWM0, PWM1,
PWM2, PWM3,
PWM14, BUZZ,
TMO, TMOW,
FTOA, FTOB,
PPG0 to PPG7,
RP0 to RP7,
RP8 to RPB,
P10 to P17,
P20 to P27,
P30 to P37,
P40 to P47,
P60 to P67,
P70 to P77,
P80 to P87,
SV1, SV2, R, G, B,
YCO, YBO
−IOH = 0.1 mA
Vcc = 2.5 V to
5.5 V
Vcc
–0.5
⎯ ⎯ V
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 884 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Values
Item Symbol Applicable Pins
Test
Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Note
IOL = 1.6 mA ⎯ ⎯ 0.6 V SO1, SCK1,
PWM0, PWM1,
PWM2, PWM3,
PWM14, BUZZ,
TMO, TMOW,
FTOA, FTOB,
PPG0 to PPG7,
RP0 to RP7,
RP8 to RPB,
P10 to P17,
P20 to P27,
P30 to P37,
P40 to P47,
P70 to P77,
P80 to P87, SV1,
SV2, R, G, B,
YCO, YBO
IOL = 0.4 mA
Vcc = 2.5 V to
5.5 V
⎯ ⎯ 0.4 V
IOL = 20 mA ⎯ ⎯ 1.7 V
IOL = 1.6 mA ⎯ ⎯ 0.6 V
Output
low
voltage
VOL
P60 to P67,
IOL = 0.4 mA
Vcc = 2.5 V to
5.5 V
⎯ ⎯ 0.4 V
MD0 Vin = 0.5 to Vcc
–0.5 V
⎯ ⎯ 1.0
RES, IRQ0 to
IRQ5, IC
Vin = 0.5 to Vcc
–0.5 V
⎯ ⎯ 1.0
SCK1, SI1, SDA0,
SCL0, SDA1,
SCL1, FTIA, FTIB,
FTIC, FTID, TRIG,
TMBI, ADTRG
Vin = 0.5 to Vcc
–0.5 V
⎯ ⎯ 1.0
OSC1 Vin = 0.5 to
Vcc –0.5 V
⎯ ⎯ 1.0
Input/
output
leakage
current
⏐IIL⏐
P10 to P17,
P20 to P27,
P30 to P37,
P40 to P47,
P60 to P67,
P70 to P77,
P80 to P87,
Vin = 0.5 to Vcc
–0.5 V
⎯ ⎯ 1.0
μA
P00 to P07,
AN8 to ANB
Vin = 0.5 to
AVcc –0.5 V
⎯ ⎯ 1.0
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 885 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Values
Item Symbol
Applicable
Pins Test Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Note
Pull-up
MOS
current
−Ip P10 to P17,
P20 to P27,
P30 to P37
Vcc = 5.0 V,
Vin = 0 V
50 ⎯ 300 μA *2
Input
capacity
Cin All input pins
except power
supply pins
P23, P24, P25,
and P26, and
analog pins
fin = 1 MHz,
Vin = 0 V,
Ta = 25°C
⎯ ⎯ 15 pF
P23, P24, P25,
P26
fin = 1 MHz,
Vin = 0 V,
Ta = 25°C
⎯ ⎯ 20 pF
Vcc = 5 V,
fOSC =10 MHz,
High-speed
mode
⎯ 40 50 mA
*3*4 Active
mode
current
dissipation
(CPU
operating)
IOPE Vcc
Vcc = 5 V,
fOSC =10 MHz,
Medium-speed
mode (1/64)
⎯ 25 ⎯ mA Refer-
ence
value
*4
Active
mode
current
dissipation
(reset)
IRES Vcc Vcc = 5 V,
fOSC = 10 MHz
⎯ 12 15 mA
*3*4
Sleep
mode
current
dissipation
ISLEEP Vcc Vcc = 5 V,
fOSC = 10 MHz
High-speed
mode
⎯ 15 20 mA
*3*4
Vcc = 2.5 V,
32 kHz
With crystal
oscillator
(φ sub = φw/2)
⎯ 90 150 *3*4 Subactive
mode
current
dissipation
ISUB Vcc
Vcc = 2.5 V,
32 kHz
With crystal
oscillator
(φ sub = φw/8)
⎯ 40 ⎯
μA
Refer-
ence
value
*3*4
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 886 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Values
Item Symbol
Applicable
Pins Test Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Note
Vcc = 2.5 V,
32 kHz
With crystal
oscillator
(φ sub = φw/2)
⎯ 30 50 *3*4 Subsleep
mode
current
dissipation
ISUBSLP Vcc
Vcc = 2.5 V,
32 kHz
With crystal
oscillator
(φ sub = φw/8)
⎯ 20 ⎯
μA
Refer-
ence
value
*3*4
Vcc = 2.5 V,
32 kHz
With crystal
oscillator
⎯ 6 12 μA *3*4 Watch
mode
current
dissipation
IWATCH Vcc
Vcc = 5.0 V,
32 kHz
With crystal
oscillator
⎯ 12 ⎯ μA Refer-
ence
value
*3*4
Standby
mode
current
dissipation
ISTBY Vcc X1 = VCL, 32 kHz
Without crystal
oscillator
⎯ ⎯ 10 μA *3*4
RAM data
retaining
voltage in
standby
mode
VSTBY 2.0 V
Notes: 1. Do not open the AVcc and Avss pin even when the A/D converter is not in use.
2. Current value when the relevant bit of the pull-up MOS select register (PUR1 to PUR3)
is set to 1.
3. The current on the pull-up MOS or the output buffer excluded.
4. Excludes the current flowing in SVcc and OVcc.
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 887 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Table 31.3 Pin Status at Current Dissipation Measurement
Mode RES pin Internal State Pin Oscillator Pin
Active mode
High-speed, medium-
speed
Vcc Operating Vcc
Sleep mode
High-speed, medium-
speed
Vcc Only CPU, servo
circuits, and OSD
halted
Vcc
Reset Vss Reset Vcc
Standby mode Vcc All circuits halted Vcc
Main clock:
Crystal oscillator
Sub clock:
X1 pin = VCL
Subactive mode Vcc Only CPU and timer
A operating
Vcc
Subsleep mode Vcc Only timer A
operating
Vcc
Watch mode Vcc Only timer A
operating
Vcc
Main clock:
Crystal oscillator
Sub clock:
Crystal oscillator
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 888 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Table 31.4 Bus Drive Characteristics of HD6432199R, HD6432198R, HD6432197R, and
HD6432196R
(Conditions: Vcc = AVcc = 4.0 V to 5.5 V, Vss = 0.0 V, Ta = –20 to +75°C)
Applicable pin: SCL0, SCL1, SDA0, SDA1
Values
Item Symbol
Applicable
Pins
Test
Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Note
VT
− 0.2 Vcc ⎯ ⎯ V
VT
+ ⎯ ⎯ 0.7 Vcc V
Schmitt
trigger
input
VT
+
–VT
−
SCL0, SDA0,
SCL1, SDA1
0.05 Vcc ⎯ ⎯ V
Input high
level
voltage
VIH SCL0, SDA0,
SCL1, SDA1
0.7 Vcc ⎯ Vcc +0.5 V
Input low
level
voltage
VIL SCL0, SDA0,
SCL1, SDA1
−0.5 ⎯ 0.2 Vcc V
IOL = 8 mA ⎯ ⎯ 0.5 Output
low level
voltage
VOL SCL0, SDA0,
SCL1, SDA1 IOL = 3 mA ⎯ ⎯ 0.4
V
SCL and
SDA
output fall
time
tof SCL0, SDA0,
SCL1, SDA1
20 + 0.1Cb ⎯ 250 ns
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 889 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
31.2.2 Allowable Output Currents of HD6432199R, HD6432198R, HD6432197R, and
HD6432196R
The specifications for the digital pins are shown below.
Table 31.5 Allowable Output Currents of HD6432199R, HD6432198R, HD6432197R, and
HD6432196R
(Conditions: Vcc = 2.5 V to 5.5 V, Vss = 0.0 V, Ta = –20 to +75°C)
Item Symbol Value Unit Note
Allowable input current (to chip) IO 2 mA 1
Allowable input current (to chip) IO 22 mA 2
Allowable input current (to chip) IO 10 mA 3
Allowable output current (from chip) −IO 2 mA 4
Total allowable input current (to chip) ΣIO 80 mA 5
Total allowable output current (from chip) −ΣIO 50 mA 6
Notes: 1. The allowable input current is the maximum value of the current flowing from each I/O
pin to VSS (except for port 6, SCL0, SDA0, SCL1 and SDA1).
2. The allowable input current is the maximum value of the current flowing from each I/O
pin to VSS. This applies to port 6.
3. The allowable input current is the maximum value of the current flowing from each I/O
pin to VSS. This applies to SCL0, SDA0, SCL1 and SDA1.
4. The allowable output current is the maximum value of the current flowing from VCC to
each I/O pin.
5. The total allowable input current is the sum of the currents flowing from all I/O pins to
VSS simultaneously.
6. The total allowable output current is the sum of the currents flowing from VCC to all I/O
pins.
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 890 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
31.2.3 AC Characteristics of HD6432199R, HD6432198R, HD6432197R, and
HD6432196R
Table 31.6 AC Characteristics of HD6432199R, HD6432198R, HD6432197R, and
HD6432196R
(Conditions: Vcc = AVcc = 4.0 V to 5.5 V, Vss = 0.0 V, Ta = –20 to +75°C unless otherwise
specified, OVcc = SVcc = 4.75 V to 5.25 V.)
Values
Item Symbol
Applicable
Pins
Test
Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Note
Clock oscillation
frequency
fOSC OSC1, OSC2 8 ⎯ 10 MHz
Clock cycle time tcyc OSC1, OSC2 100 ⎯ 125 ns Figure
31.1
Subclock
oscillation
frequency
fX X1, X2 Vcc = 2.5 V to
5.5 V
⎯ 32.768 ⎯ kHz
Subclock cycle
time
tsubcyc X1, X2 Vcc = 2.5 V to
5.5 V
⎯ 30.518 ⎯ μs
OSC1, OSC2 Crystal
oscillator
⎯ ⎯ 10 ms Oscillation
stabilization time
trc
X1, X2 32-kHz crystal
oscillator
(Vcc = 2.5 V to
5.5 V)
⎯ ⎯ 2 s
External clock
high width
tCPH OSC1 40 ⎯ ⎯ ns
External clock
low width
tCPL OSC1 40 ⎯ ⎯ ns
External clock
rise time
tCPr OSC1 ⎯ ⎯ 10 ns
External clock fall
time
tCPf OSC1 ⎯ ⎯ 10 ns
Figure
31.1
External clock
stabilization delay
time
tDEXT OSC1 500 ⎯ ⎯ µs Figure
31.2
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 891 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Values
Item Symbol
Applicable
Pins
Test
Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Figure
RES pin low level
width
tREL RES Vcc = 2.5 V to
5.5 V
20 ⎯ ⎯ t
cyc Figure
31.3
Input pin high
level width
tIH IRQ0 to
IRQ5, IC,
ADTRG,
TMBI, FTIA,
FTIB, FTIC,
FTID,
RPTRIG
Vcc = 2.5 V to
5.5 V
2 ⎯ ⎯ t
cyc
tsubcyc
Figure
31.4
Input pin low level
width
tIL IRQ0 to
IRQ5, IC,
ADTRG,
TMBI, FTIA,
FTIB, FTIC,
FTID,
RPTRIG
Vcc = 2.5 V to
5.5 V
2 ⎯ ⎯ t
cyc
tsubcyc
t
cyc
t
CPH
V
IL
V
IH
OSC1
t
CPL
t
CPf
t
CPr
Figure 31.1 System Clock Timing
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 892 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Vcc
OSC1
t
DEXT
*
RES
φ (Internal)
4.0V
The t
DEXT
includes the RES pin Low level width 20 t
cyc
.
Note: *
Figure 31.2 External Clock Stabilization Delay Timing
RES
V
IL
t
REL
Figure 31.3 Reset Input Timing
t
IL
t
IH
V
IH
IRQ0 to IRQ5,
IC, ADTRG,
TMBI, FTIA,
FTIB, FTIC,
FTID, RPTRIG
V
IL
Figure 31.4 Input Timing
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 893 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
31.2.4 Serial Interface Timing of HD6432199R, HD6432198R, HD6432197R, and
HD6432196R
Table 31.7 Serial Interface Timing of HD6432199R, HD6432198R, HD6432197R, and
HD6432196R
(Conditions: Vcc = AVcc = 4.0 V to 5.5 V, Vss = 0.0 V, Ta = –20 to +75°C unless otherwise
specified.)
Values
Item Symbol
Applicable
Pins Test Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Figure
Asynchronization 4 ⎯ ⎯ Input clock cycle tscyc SCK1
Clock
synchronization
6 ⎯ ⎯
tcyc
Input clock pulse
width
tSCKW SCK1 0.4 ⎯ 0.6 tscyc
Input clock rise
time
tSCKr SCK1 ⎯ ⎯ 1.5 tcyc
Input clock fall
time
tSCKf SCK1 ⎯ ⎯ 1.5 tcyc
Figure
31.5
Transmit data
delay time (clock
sync)
tTXD SO1 ⎯ ⎯ 100 ns Figure
31.6
Receive data
setup time (clock
sync)
tRXS SI1 100 ⎯ ⎯ ns
Receive data
hold time (clock
sync)
tRXH SI1 100 ⎯ ⎯ ns
t
SCKf
t
SCKr
V
IL
or V
OL
V
IH
or V
OH
SCK1
t
SCKW
t
scyc
Figure 31.5 SCK1 Clock Timing
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 894 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
V
IL
V
IH
t
TXD
SCK1
SO1
SI1
t
RXS
t
RXH
V
OH
V
OL
Figure 31.6 SCI I/O Timing/Clock Synchronization Mode
LSI output pin
Timing reference level
VOH: 2.0 V
VOL: 0.8 V
30 pF 12 kΩ
2.4 kΩ
Vcc
Figure 31.7 Output Load Conditions
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 895 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Table 31.8 I2C Bus Interface Timing of HD6432199R, HD6432198R, HD6432197R, and
HD6432196R
(Conditions: Vcc = AVcc = 4.0 V to 5.5 V, Vss = 0.0 V, Ta = –20 to +75°C unless otherwise
specified.)
Values
Item Symbol
Test
Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Figure
SCL input cycle time tSCL 12 ⎯ ⎯ t
cyc
SCL input high pulse width tSCLH 3 ⎯ ⎯ t
cyc
SCL input low pulse width tSCLL 5 ⎯ ⎯ t
cyc
SCL, SDA input rise time tsr ⎯ ⎯ 7.5* t
cyc
SCL, SDA input fall time tsf ⎯ ⎯ 300 ns
SCL, SDA input spike pulse
removal time
tsp ⎯ ⎯ 1 tcyc
SDA input bus free time tBUF 5 ⎯ ⎯ t
cyc
Start condition input hold
time
tSTAH 3 ⎯ ⎯ t
cyc
Re-transmit start condition
input setup time
tSTAS 3 ⎯ ⎯ t
cyc
Stop condition input setup
time
tSTOS 3 ⎯ ⎯ t
cyc
Data input setup time tSDAS 0.5 ⎯ ⎯ t
cyc
Data input hold time tSDAH 0 ⎯ ⎯ ns
SCL, SDA capacity load Cb ⎯ ⎯ 400 pF
Figure
31.8
Note: * Can also be set to 17.5 tcyc depending on the selection of clock to be used by the I2C
module.
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 896 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
tSTAH
tSr
tSDAH
tSCL
tSCLL
tSCLH
tSf
tSTAS
tSP tSTOS
tSDAS
VIL
VIH
SDA
SCL
P*S*Sr*P*
S, P and Sr denote the following:
S : Start conditions
P : Stop conditions
Sr: Re-transmit start conditions
Note: *
tBUF
Figure 31.8 I2C Bus Interface I/O Timing
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 897 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
31.2.5 A/D Converter Characteristics of HD6432199R, HD6432198R, HD6432197R, and
HD6432196R
Table 31.9 A/D Converter Characteristics of HD6432199R, HD6432198R, HD6432197R,
and HD6432196R
(Conditions: Vcc = AVcc = 4.0 V to 5.5 V, Vss = AVss = 0.0 V, Ta = –20 to +75°C unless
otherwise specified.)
Values
Item Symbol
Applicable
Pins
Test
Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Note
Analog power
supply voltage
AVcc AVcc Vcc
−0.3
Vcc Vcc
+0.3
V
Analog input
voltage
AVIN AN0 to AN7,
AN8 to ANB
AVss ⎯ AVcc V
AICC AVcc AVcc = 5.0 V ⎯ ⎯ 2.0 mA Analog power
supply current AISTOP AVcc Vcc = 2.5 V to
5.5 V
At reset and in
power-down
mode
⎯ ⎯ 10 μA
Analog input
capacitance
CAIN AN0 to AN7,
AN8 to ANB
⎯ ⎯ 30 pF
Allowable signal
source
impedance
RAIN AN0 to AN7,
AN8 to ANB
⎯ ⎯ 10 kΩ
Resolution ⎯ ⎯ 10 Bit
Absolute
accuracy
Vcc = AVcc =
5.0 V
⎯ ⎯ ±4 LSB
Vcc = AVcc =
4.0 V to 5.0 V
⎯ ±4 ⎯ LSB Referen-
ce value
Conversion time 13.4 ⎯ 26.6 μs
Note: Do not open the AVcc and AVss pin even when the A/D converter is not in use. Set AVcc =
Vcc and AVss = Vss.
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 898 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
31.2.6 Servo Section Electrical Characteristics of HD6432199R, HD6432198R,
HD6432197R, and HD6432196R
Table 31.10 Servo Section Electrical Characteristics of HD6432199R, HD6432198R,
HD6432197R, and HD6432196R (Reference Values)
(Conditions: Vcc = SVcc = 5.0 V, Vss = SVss = 0.0 V, Ta = 25°C unless otherwise specified.)
Reference Values
Item Symbol
Applicable
Pins Test Conditions Min Typ Max
Unit Note
CTLGR3 = 0, CTLGR2 = 0, CTLGR1
= 0, CTLGR0 = 0, f = 10 kHz
32.0 34.0 36.0
CTLGR3 = 0, CTLGR2 = 0, CTLGR1
= 0, CTLGR0 = 1, f = 10 kHz
34.5 36.5 38.5
CTLGR3 = 0, CTLGR2 = 0, CTLGR1
= 1, CTLGR0 = 0, f = 10 kHz
37.0 39.0 41.0
CTLGR3 = 0, CTLGR2 = 0, CTLGR1
= 1, CTLGR0 = 1, f = 10 kHz
39.5 41.5 43.5
CTLGR3 = 0, CTLGR2 = 1, CTLGR1
= 0, CTLGR0 = 0, f = 10 kHz
42.0 44.0 46.0
CTLGR3 = 0, CTLGR2 = 1, CTLGR1
= 0, CTLGR0 = 1, f = 10 kHz
44.5 46.5 48.5
CTLGR3 = 0, CTLGR2 = 1, CTLGR1
= 1, CTLGR0 = 0, f = 10 kHz
47.0 49.0 51.0
CTLGR3 = 0, CTLGR2 = 1, CTLGR1
= 1, CTLGR0 = 1, f = 10 kHz
49.5 51.5 53.5
CTLGR3 = 1, CTLGR2 = 0, CTLGR1
= 0, CTLGR0 = 0, f = 10 kHz
52.0 54.0 56.0
CTLGR3 = 1, CTLGR2 = 0, CTLGR1
= 0, CTLGR0 = 1, f = 10 kHz
54.5 56.5 58.5
CTLGR3 = 1, CTLGR2 = 0, CTLGR1
= 1, CTLGR0 = 0, f = 10 kHz
57.0 59.0 61.0
CTLGR3 = 1, CTLGR2 = 0, CTLGR1
= 1, CTLGR0 = 1, f = 10 kHz
59.5 61.5 63.5
CTLGR3 = 1, CTLGR2 = 1, CTLGR1
= 0, CTLGR0 = 0, f = 10 kHz
62.0 64.0 66.0
CTLGR3 = 1, CTLGR2 = 1, CTLGR1
= 0, CTLGR0 = 1, f = 10 kHz
64.5 66.5 68.5
CTLGR3 = 1, CTLGR2 = 1, CTLGR1
= 1, CTLGR0 = 0, f = 10k Hz
67.0 69.0 71.0
PB-CTL
input
amplifier
voltage gain
CTL (+)
CTLGR3 = 1, CTLGR2 = 1, CTLGR1
= 1, CTLGR0 = 1, f = 10 kHz
69.5 71.5 73.5
dB
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 899 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Reference Values
Item Symbol
Applicable
Pins Test Conditions Min Typ Max
Unit Note
V+TH AC coupling,
C = 0.1 μF Typ (non pol)
⎯ 250 ⎯ PB-CTL Schmitt
input
V−TH
CTLSMT (i)
AC coupling,
C = 0.1 μF Typ (non pol)
⎯ −250 ⎯
mVp
Analog switch ON
resistance
REB CTLFB ⎯ 150 ⎯ Ω
CTL (+) ⎯ 12 ⎯ REC-CTL output
current
ICTL
CTL (−)
Series resistance = 0 Ω
⎯ 12 ⎯
mA
REC-CTL pin-to-
pin resistance
RCTL ⎯ 10 ⎯ kΩ
CTL reference
output voltage
CTLREF ⎯ 1/2
SVcc
⎯ V
CFG pin bias
voltage
CFG ⎯ 1/2
SVCC
⎯ V
CFG input level CFG AC coupling,
C = 1 μF Typ, f = 1 kHz
1.0 ⎯ ⎯ Vpp
CFG digital input
high level
VIH CFG When digital signal input
method is selected
(CFGCOMP = 1)
0.8
Vcc
⎯ Vcc
+0.3
V
CFG digital input VIL CFG When digital signal input
method is selected
(CFGCOMP = 1)
−0.3 ⎯ 0.2
Vcc
V
CFG input
impedance
CFG ⎯ 10 ⎯ kΩ
V+THCF Rise threshold level ⎯ 2.25 ⎯ CFG input
threshold value V−THCF
CFG
Fall threshold level ⎯ 2.75 ⎯
V
V+THDF Rising edge Schmitt level ⎯ 1.95 ⎯ DFG Schmitt input
V−THDF
DFG
Falling edge Schmitt level ⎯ 1.85 ⎯
V
V+THDP Rising edge Schmitt level ⎯ 3.55 ⎯ DPG Schmitt input
V−THDP
DPG
Falling edge Schmitt level ⎯ 3.45 ⎯
V
VOH −IOH = 0.1 mA 4.0 ⎯ ⎯
VOM No load, Hi-Z = 1 ⎯ 2.5 ⎯
3-level output
voltage
VOL
Vpulse
IOL = 0.1 mA ⎯ ⎯ 1.0
V
3-level output pin
divided voltage
resistance
Vpulse ⎯ 15 ⎯ kΩ
Digital input high
level
VIH 0.8
Vcc
⎯ Vcc
+0.3
Digital input low
level
VIL
COMP,
EXCTL,
EXCAP,
EXTTRG −0.3 ⎯ 0.2
Vcc
V
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 900 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Reference Values
Item Symbol
Applicable
Pins Test Conditions Min Typ Max
Unit Note
Digital output high
level
VOH −IOH = 1 mA Vcc
–1.0
⎯ ⎯
Digital output low
level
VOL
H.AmpSW,
C.Rotary,
VIDEOFF,
AUDIOFF,
DRMPWM,
CAPPWM,
SV1, SV2
IOL = 1.6 mA ⎯ ⎯ 0.6
V
Current dissipation ICCSV SVcc At no load ⎯ 5 10 mA
CFG duty CFG AC coupling,
C = 1 μF Typ, f = 1 kHz
48 ⎯ 52 %
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 901 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
31.2.7 OSD Electrical Characteristics of HD6432199R, HD6432198R, HD6432197R, and
HD6432196R
Table 31.11 OSD Electrical Characteristics of HD6432199R, HD6432198R, HD6432197R,
and HD6432196R (Reference Value)
(Conditions: Vcc = OVcc = 5.0 V, Vss = OVss = 0.0 V, Ta = 25°C unless otherwise specified)
Reference
Values
Item Symbol
Applicable
Pins
Test
Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Note
Composite video input
voltage
VCVIN CVin1
CVin2
⎯ 2 VPP
VCL1 CVin1 ⎯ 1.2 1.4 1.6 Clamp voltage
VCL2 CVin2 ⎯ 1.8 2 2.2
V
C.Video gain GCVC CVin1
CVout
At
chromathrough
f = 3.58 MHz
VIN = 500 mVpp
−3 −2 0 dB
Pedestal bias VPED CVout 45 IRE
*1
Color burst bias VBST 40 IRE
*1
VBL1 10
VBL2 30
VBL3 50
Background
bias
Black, blue,
green,
cyan, red,
magenta,
yellow, white VBL4 70
IRE *2
VKBL1 0 Black
VKBL2 25
VKOL1 25 Blue, green,
cyan, red,
magenta,
yellow
VKOL2 45
VKCL1 45
Cursor bias
White
VKCL2 55
IRE *2
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 902 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Reference
Values
Item Symbol
Applicable
Pins
Test
Conditions Min Typ Max
Unit Note
VCBL1 CVout 0
VCBL2 10
VCBL3 20
Black
VCBL4 30
VCOL1 25
VCOL2 45
VCOL3 55
Blue, green,
cyan, red,
magenta,
yellow
VCOL4 65
VCCL1 45
VCCL2 70
VCCL3 80
Character
bias
White
VCCL4 90
IRE *2
VEDG1 0 Edge brightness level
VEDG2 90
IRE *2
VBTN1 15 Button brightness level
VBTN2 75
IRE *2
Color burst amplitude VBSTA 40 IRE
VCRA1 60 Chroma
amplitude
(background,
cursor,
character)
Blue, green,
cyan, red,
magenta,
yellow
VCRA2 80
IRE
Colorburst φ BSTN 0
Blue φ BLUN π
Green φ GRNN 7 π/4
Cyan φ CYNN 3 π/2
Red φ REDN π/2
Magenta φ MZTN 3 π/4
Chroma hue
angle
(background,
cursor,
character)
(NTSC)
Yellow φ YETN 0
rad *3
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 903 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Reference Values
Item Symbol
Applicable
Pins
Test
Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Note
Colorburst φ BSTP CVout ±π/4
Blue φ BLUP ±π
Green φ GRNP ±7π/4
Cyan φ CYNP ±3π/2
Red φ REDP ±π/2
Magenta φ MZTP ±3π/4
Chroma hue
angle
(background,
cursor,
character)
(PAL)
Yellow φ YELP 0
rad *3
CCMP1 CVin2 ⎯ 5 ⎯
CCMP2 ⎯ 10 ⎯
CCMP3 ⎯ 15 ⎯
Csync separation
comparator
CCMP4 ⎯ 20 ⎯
IRE *1
ECMP1 CVin2 ⎯ 0 ⎯
ECMP2 ⎯ 5 ⎯
ECMP3 ⎯ 15 ⎯
ECMP4 ⎯ 20 ⎯
ECMP5 ⎯ 25 ⎯
ECMP6 ⎯ 35 ⎯
EDS separation
comparator
ECMP7 ⎯ 40 ⎯
IRE *2
ViH⊥ 0.85
OVcc
⎯ Ovcc
+0.3
V Input high level
ViHT
Csync/Hsync
VLPF/Vsync
0.7
OVcc
⎯ Ovcc
+0.3
V
ViL⊥ −0.3 ⎯ 0.3
OVcc
V Input low level
ViLT
Csync/Hsync
VLPF/Vsync
−0.3 ⎯ 0.15
OVcc
V
Output high level VOH Csync/Hsync −IOH = 0.4
mA
Ovcc
−1.4
⎯ ⎯ V
Output low level VOL Csync/Hsync IOL = 0.4 mA ⎯ ⎯ 1.4 V
Oscillation stabilizing time trc 4/2fscin
4/2fscout
Crystal
oscillator
⎯ ⎯ 40 ms
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 904 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Reference Values
Item Symbol
Applicable
Pins
Test
Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Note
M/NTSC ⎯ 14.31818 ⎯ MHz
4/2fscin
4/2fscout B, G, H/PAL
I/PAL
D, K/PAL
4.43-NTSC
B, G, H/SECAM
L/SECAM
D, K, K1/SECAM
⎯ 17.734475
(17.734476)
⎯ MHz
N/PAL ⎯ 14.328225 ⎯ MHz
4fsc
M/PAL ⎯ 14.30244596 ⎯ MHz
2fsc M/NTSC
⎯ 7.15909 ⎯ MHz
4/2fscin
4/2fscout B, G, H/PAL
I/PAL
D, K/PAL
4.43-NTSC
B, G, H/SECAM
L/SECAM
D, K, K2/SECAM
⎯ 8.8672375
(8.867238)
⎯ MHz
N/PAL ⎯ 7.1641125 ⎯ MHz
Oscillating
frequency
M/PAL ⎯ 7.15122298 ⎯ MHz
Vfsc 4/2fscin
4/2fscout
AC coupling
C = 1μF typ
0.3 ⎯ Vcc
+0.3
Vpp
VIH 4/2fscin 0.7
Vcc
⎯ Vcc
+0.3
External clock
input level
VIL −0.3 ⎯ 0.3 Vcc
V
External clock
duty
4/2fscin
4/2fscout
47 50 53 %
6.3 9 11.7 MHz
AFC reference
clock (dot clock)
AFCOSC AFCOSC LC oscillation
4.9 7 9.1 MHz
Current
dissipation
ICCOSD OVcc At no signal ⎯ 14 ⎯ mA
Notes: IRE: Units for video amplitude; 0.714 V video level is specified as 100 IRE
4fsc and 2fsc must be adjusted within ±30 ppm, including temperature dependency.
1. Bias from the sync tip clamp level (reference value after −6 dB).
2. Bias from the pedestal level (reference value after −6 dB).
3. At 4fsc input.
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 905 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
31.3 Electrical Characteristics of HD6432197S and HD6432196S
31.3.1 DC Characteristics of HD6432197S and HD6432196S ⎯ Preliminary ⎯
Table 31.12 DC Characteristics of HD6432197S and HD6432196S
(Conditions: Vcc = AVcc = 4.0 V to 5.5 V*1, Vss = 0.0 V, Ta = –20 to +75°C unless otherwise
specified.)
Values
Item Symbol Applicable Pins Test Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Note
MD0 Vcc = 2.5 V to
5.5 V
0.9 Vcc ⎯ Vcc
+0.3
0.8 Vcc ⎯ Vcc
+0.3
RES, IC, IRQ0 to
IRQ5
Vcc = 2.5 V to
5.5 V
0.9 Vcc ⎯ Vcc
+0.3
SCK1, SI1, RPTRG,
TMBI, ADTRG
0.8 Vcc ⎯ Vcc
+0.3
OSC1 Vcc
–0.5
⎯ Vcc
+0.3
0.7 Vcc ⎯ Vcc
+0.3
P00 to P07,
P10 to P17,
P20 to P27,
P30 to P37,
P40 to P47,
P60 to P67,
P70 to P77,
P80 to P87
Vcc = 2.5 V to
5.5 V
0.8 Vcc ⎯ Vcc
+0.3
Input high
voltage
VIH
Csync 0.7 Vcc ⎯ Vcc
+0.3
V
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 906 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Values
Item Symbol Applicable Pins
Test
Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Note
MD0 Vcc = 2.5 V to
5.5 V
–0.3 ⎯ 0.1 Vcc
−0.3 ⎯ 0.2 Vcc RES, IC, IRQ0 to
IRQ5 Vcc = 2.5 V to
5.5 V
−0.3 ⎯ 0.1 Vcc
SCK1, SI1, RPTRG,
TMBI, ADTRG
−0.3 ⎯ 0.2 Vcc
OSC1 −0.3 ⎯ 0.5
−0.3 ⎯ 0.3 Vcc P00 to P07,
P10 to P17,
P20 to P27,
P30 to P37,
P40 to P47,
P60 to P67,
P70 to P77,
P80 to P87
Vcc = 2.5 V to
5.5 V
−0.3 ⎯ 0.2 Vcc
Input low
voltage
VIL
Csync −0.3 ⎯ 0.2 Vcc
V
−IOH = 1.0 mA Vcc
–1.0
⎯ ⎯ V
−IOH = 0.5 mA ⎯ Vcc
–0.5
⎯ V Refer-
ence
value
Output
high
voltage
VOH SO1, SCK1, PWM0,
PWM1, BUZZ, TMO,
TMOW, PPG0 to
PPG7,
RP0 to RP7,
RP8 to RPB,
P10 to P17,
P20 to P27,
P30 to P37,
P40 to P47,
P60 to P67,
P70 to P77,
P80 to P87,
SV1, SV2, R, G, B,
YCO, YBO
−IOH = 0.1 mA
Vcc = 2.5 V to
5.5 V
Vcc
–0.5
⎯ ⎯ V
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 907 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Values
Item Symbol Applicable Pins
Test
Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Note
IOL=1.6 mA ⎯ ⎯ 0.6 V SO1, SCK1, PWM0,
PWM1, BUZZ, TMO,
TMOW, PPG0 to
PPG7,
RP0 to RP7,
RP8 to RPB,
P10 to P17,
P20 to P27,
P30 to P37,
P40 to P47,
P70 to P77,
P80 to P87, SV1,
SV2, R, G, B, YCO,
YBO
IOL = 0.4 mA
Vcc = 2.5 V to
5.5 V
⎯ ⎯ 0.4 V
IOL = 20 mA ⎯ ⎯ 1.7 V
IOL = 1.6 mA ⎯ ⎯ 0.6 V
Output
low
voltage
VOL
P60 to P67,
IOL = 0.4 mA
Vcc = 2.5 V to
5.5 V
⎯ ⎯ 0.4 V
MD0 Vin = 0.5 to Vcc
–0.5 V
⎯ ⎯ 1.0
RES, IRQ0 to IRQ5,
IC
Vin = 0.5 to Vcc
–0.5 V
⎯ ⎯ 1.0
SCK1, SI1, SDA1,
SCL1, TRIG, TMBI,
ADTRG
Vin = 0.5 to Vcc
–0.5 V
⎯ ⎯ 1.0
OSC1 Vin = 0.5 to
Vcc −0.5 V
⎯ ⎯ 1.0
Input/
output
leakage
current
⏐IIL⏐
P10 to P17,
P20 to P27,
P30 to P37,
P40 to P47,
P60 to P67,
P70 to P77,
P80 to P87,
Vin = 0.5 to Vcc
–0.5 V
⎯ ⎯ 1.0
μA
P00 to P07,
AN8 to ANB
Vin = 0.5 to
AVcc –0.5 V
⎯ ⎯ 1.0
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 908 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Values
Item Symbol
Applicable
Pins Test Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Note
Pull-up
MOS
current
−Ip P10 to P17,
P20 to P27,
P30 to P37
Vcc = 5.0 V,
Vin = 0 V
50 ⎯ 300 μA *2
Input
capacity
Cin All input pins
except
power supply
pins P23 and
P24, and
analog pins
fin = 1 MHz,
Vin = 0 V,
Ta = 25°C
⎯ ⎯ 15 pF
P23 and P24 fin = 1 MHz,
Vin = 0 V,
Ta = 25°C
⎯ ⎯ 20 pF
Vcc = 5 V,
fOSC = 10 MHz,
High-speed mode
⎯ 40 50 mA *3*4 Active
mode
current
dissipation
(CPU
operating)
IOPE Vcc
Vcc = 5 V,
fOSC = 10 MHz,
Medium-speed
mode (1/64)
⎯ 25 ⎯ mA Reference
value*4
Active
mode
current
dissipation
(reset)
IRES Vcc Vcc = 5 V,
fOSC = 10 MHz
⎯ 12 15 mA *3*4
Sleep
mode
current
dissipation
ISLEEP Vcc Vcc = 5 V,
fOSC = 10 MHz
High-speed mode
⎯ 15 20 mA *3*4
Vcc = 2.5 V,
32 kHz
With crystal
oscillator
(φ sub = φw/2)
⎯ 90 150 *3*4 Subactive
mode
current
dissipation
ISUB Vcc
Vcc = 2.5 V,
32 kHz
With crystal
oscillator
(φ sub = φw/8)
⎯ 40 ⎯
μA
Reference
value*3*4
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 909 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Values
Item Symbol
Applicable
Pins Test Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Note
Subsleep
mode
current
dissipation
ISUBSLP Vcc Vcc = 2.5 V, 32 kHz
With crystal
oscillator
(φ sub = φw/2)
⎯ 30 50 μA *3*4
Vcc = 2.5 V, 32 kHz
With crystal
oscillator
(φ sub = φw/8)
⎯ 20 ⎯ Reference
value*3*4
Vcc = 2.5 V, 32 kHz
With crystal
oscillator
⎯ 6 12 μA *3*4 Watch
mode
current
dissipation
IWATCH Vcc
Vcc = 5.0 V, 32 kHz
With crystal
oscillator
⎯ 12 ⎯ μA Reference
value*3*4
Standby
mode
current
dissipation
ISTBY Vcc X1 = VCL, 32 kHz
Without crystal
oscillator
⎯ ⎯ 10 μA *3*4
RAM data
retaining
voltage in
standby
mode
VSTBY 2.0 V
Notes: 1. Do not open the AVcc and Avss pin even when the A/D converter is not in use.
2. Current value when the relevant bit of the pull-up MOS select register (PUR1 to PUR3)
is set to 1.
3. The current on the pull-up MOS or the output buffer excluded.
4. Excludes the current flowing in SVcc and OVcc.
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 910 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Table 31.13 Pin Status at Current Dissipation Measurement
Mode RES pin Internal State Pin Oscillator Pin
Active mode
High-speed, medium-
speed
Vcc Operating Vcc
Sleep mode
High-speed, medium-
speed
Vcc Only CPU, servo
circuits, and OSD
halted
Vcc
Reset Vss Reset Vcc
Standby mode Vcc All circuits halted Vcc
Main clock:
Crystal oscillator
Sub clock:
X1 pin = VCL
Subactive mode Vcc Only CPU and timer
A operating
Vcc
Subsleep mode Vcc Only timer A
operating
Vcc
Watch mode Vcc Only timer A
operating
Vcc
Main clock:
Crystal oscillator
Sub clock:
Crystal oscillator
Table 31.14 Bus Drive Characteristics of HD6432197S and HD6432196S ⎯ Preliminary ⎯
(Conditions: Vcc = AVcc = 4.0 V to 5.5 V, Vss = 0.0 V, Ta = –20 to +75°C)
Applicable pin: SCL1, SDA1
Values
Item
Symbo
l
Applicable
Pins
Test
Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Note
VT
− 0.2 Vcc ⎯ ⎯ V
VT
+ ⎯ ⎯ 0.7 Vcc V
Schmitt
trigger input
VT
+
–VT
−
SCL1, SDA1
0.05 Vcc ⎯ ⎯ V
Input high
level voltage
VIH SCL1, SDA1 0.7 Vcc ⎯ Vcc
+0.5
V
Input low
level voltage
VIL SCL1, SDA1 −0.5 ⎯ 0.2 Vcc V
IOL = 8 mA ⎯ ⎯ 0.5 Output low
level voltage
VOL SCL1, SDA1
IOL = 3 mA ⎯ ⎯ 0.4
V
SCL and
SDA output
fall time
tof SCL1, SDA1 20 + 0.1Cb ⎯ 250 ns
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 911 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
31.3.2 Allowable Output Currents of HD6432197S and HD6432196S
The specifications for the digital pins are shown below.
Table 31.15 Allowable Output Currents of HD6432197S and HD6432196S
(Conditions: Vcc = 2.5 V to 5.5 V, Vss = 0.0 V, Ta = –20 to +75°C)
Item Symbol Value Unit Note
Allowable input current (to chip) IO 2 mA 1
Allowable input current (to chip) IO 22 mA 2
Allowable input current (to chip) IO 10 mA 3
Allowable output current (from chip) −IO 2 mA 4
Total allowable input current (to chip) ΣIO 80 mA 5
Total allowable output current (from chip) −ΣIO 50 mA 6
Notes: 1. The allowable input current is the maximum value of the current flowing from each I/O
pin to VSS (except for port 6, SCL1 and SDA1).
2. The allowable input current is the maximum value of the current flowing from each I/O
pin to VSS. This applies to port 6.
3. The allowable input current is the maximum value of the current flowing from each I/O
pin to VSS. This applies to SCL1 and SDA1.
4. The allowable output current is the maximum value of the current flowing from VCC to
each I/O pin.
5. The total allowable input current is the sum of the currents flowing from all I/O pins to
VSS simultaneously.
6. The total allowable output current is the sum of the currents flowing from VCC to all I/O
pins.
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 912 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
31.3.3 AC Characteristics of HD6432197S and HD6432196S
Table 31.16 AC Characteristics of HD6432197S and HD6432196S ⎯ Preliminary ⎯
(Conditions: Vcc = AVcc = 4.0 V to 5.5 V, Vss = 0.0 V, Ta = –20 to +75°C unless otherwise
specified, OVcc = SVcc = 4.75 V to 5.25 V.)
Values
Item Symbol
Applicable
Pins
Test
Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Note
Clock oscillation
frequency
fOSC OSC1, OSC2 8 ⎯ 10 MHz
Clock cycle time tcyc OSC1, OSC2 100 ⎯ 125 ns Figure
31.9
Subclock
oscillation
frequency
fX X1, X2 Vcc = 2.5 V to
5.5 V
⎯ 32.768 ⎯ kHz
Subclock cycle
time
tsubcyc X1, X2 Vcc = 2.5 V to
5.5 V
⎯ 30.518 ⎯ μs
OSC1, OSC2 Crystal oscillator ⎯ ⎯ 10 ms Oscillation
stabilization time
trc
X1, X2 32-kHz crystal
oscillator
(Vcc = 2.5 V to
5.5 V)
⎯ ⎯ 2 s
External clock
high width
tCPH OSC1 40 ⎯ ⎯ ns
External clock
low width
tCPL OSC1 40 ⎯ ⎯ ns
External clock
rise time
tCPr OSC1 ⎯ ⎯ 10 ns
External clock
fall time
tCPf OSC1 ⎯ ⎯ 10 ns
Figure
31.9
External clock
stabilization
delay time
tDEXT OSC1 500 ⎯ ⎯ µs Figure
31.10
RES pin low
level width
tREL RES Vcc = 2.5 V to
5.5 V
20 ⎯ ⎯ t
cyc Figure
31.11
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 913 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Values
Item Symbol
Applicable
Pins
Test
Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Note
Input pin high
level width
tIH IRQ0 to IRQ5,
IC, ADTRG,
TMBI,
RPTRIG
Vcc = 2.5 V to
5.5 V
2 ⎯ ⎯ t
cyc
tsubcyc
Figure
31.12
Input pin low
level width
tIL IRQ0 to IRQ5,
IC, ADTRG,
TMBI,
RPTRIG
Vcc = 2.5 V to
5.5 V
2 ⎯ ⎯ t
cyc
tsubcyc
t
cyc
t
CPH
V
IL
V
IH
OSC1
t
CPL
t
CPf
t
CPr
Figure 31.9 System Clock Timing
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 914 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Vcc
OSC1
t
DEXT
*
RES
φ (Internal)
4.0V
The t
DEXT
includes the RES pin Low level width 20 t
cyc
.
Note: *
Figure 31.10 External Clock Stabilization Delay Timing
RES
V
IL
t
REL
Figure 31.11 Reset Input Timing
t
IL
t
IH
V
IH
IRQ0 to IRQ5,
IC, ADTRG,
TMBI, RPTRIG V
IL
Figure 31.12 Input Timing
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 915 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
31.3.4 Serial Interface Timing of HD6432197S and HD6432196S
Table 31.17 Serial Interface Timing of HD6432197S and HD6432196S ⎯ Preliminary ⎯
(Conditions: Vcc = AVcc = 4.0 V to 5.5 V, Vss = 0.0 V, Ta = –20 to +75°C unless otherwise
specified.)
Values
Item Symbol
Applicable
Pins Test Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Figure
Asynchronization 4 ⎯ ⎯ Input clock cycle tscyc SCK1
Clock
synchronization
6 ⎯ ⎯
tcyc
Input clock pulse
width
tSCKW SCK1 0.4 ⎯ 0.6 tscyc
Input clock rise
time
tSCKr SCK1 ⎯ ⎯ 1.5 tcyc
Input clock fall
time
tSCKf SCK1 ⎯ ⎯ 1.5 tcyc
Figure
31.13
Transmit data
delay time (clock
sync)
tTXD SO1 ⎯ ⎯ 100 ns
Receive data
setup time (clock
sync)
tRXS SI1 100 ⎯ ⎯ ns
Receive data
hold time (clock
sync)
tRXH SI1 100 ⎯ ⎯ ns
Figure
31.14
t
SCKf
t
SCKr
V
IL
or V
OL
V
IH
or V
OH
SCK1
t
SCKW
t
scyc
Figure 31.13 SCK1 Clock Timing
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 916 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
V
IL
V
IH
t
TXD
SCK1
SO1
SI1
t
RXS
t
RXH
V
OH
V
OL
Figure 31.14 SCI I/O Timing/Clock Synchronization Mode
LSI output pin
Timing reference level
VOH: 2.0 V
VOL: 0.8 V
30 pF 12 kΩ
2.4 kΩ
Vcc
Figure 31.15 Output Load Conditions
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 917 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Table 31.18 I2C Bus Interface Timing of HD6432197S and HD6432196S ⎯ Preliminary ⎯
(Conditions: Vcc = AVcc = 4.0 V to 5.5 V, Vss = 0.0 V, Ta = –20 to +75°C unless otherwise
specified.)
Values
Item Symbol
Test
Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Figure
SCL input cycle time tSCL 12 ⎯ ⎯ t
cyc
SCL input high pulse width tSCLH 3 ⎯ ⎯ t
cyc
SCL input low pulse width tSCLL 5 ⎯ ⎯ t
cyc
SCL, SDA input rise time tsr ⎯ ⎯ 7.5* t
cyc
SCL, SDA input fall time tsf ⎯ ⎯ 300 ns
SCL, SDA input spike pulse
removal time
tsp ⎯ ⎯ 1 tcyc
SDA input bus free time tBUF 5 ⎯ ⎯ t
cyc
Start condition input hold
time
tSTAH 3 ⎯ ⎯ t
cyc
Re-transmit start condition
input setup time
tSTAS 3 ⎯ ⎯ t
cyc
Stop condition input setup
time
tSTOS 3 ⎯ ⎯ t
cyc
Data input setup time tSDAS 0.5 ⎯ ⎯ t
cyc
Data input hold time tSDAH 0 ⎯ ⎯ ns
SCL, SDA capacity load Cb ⎯ ⎯ 400 pF
Figure
31.16
Note: * Can also be set to 17.5 tcyc depending on the selection of clock to be used by the I2C
module.
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 918 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
tSTAH
tSr
tSDAH
tSCL
tSCLL
tSCLH
tSf
tSTAS
tSP tSTOS
tSDAS
VIL
VIH
SDA
SCL
P*S*Sr*P*
S, P and Sr denote the following:
S : Start conditions
P : Stop conditions
Sr: Re-transmit start conditions
Note: *
tBUF
Figure 31.16 I2C Bus Interface I/O Timing
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 919 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
31.3.5 A/D Converter Characteristics of HD6432197S and HD6432196S
Table 31.19 A/D Converter Characteristics of HD6432197S and HD6432196S
⎯ Preliminary ⎯
(Conditions: Vcc = AVcc = 4.0 V to 5.5 V, Vss = AVss = 0.0 V, Ta = –20 to +75°C unless
otherwise specified.)
Values
Item Symbol
Applicable
Pins
Test
Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Note
Analog power
supply voltage
AVcc AVcc Vcc
−0.3
Vcc Vcc
+0.3
V
Analog input
voltage
AVIN AN0 to
AN7,
AN8 to ANB
AVss ⎯ AVcc V
AICC AVcc AVcc = 5.0 V ⎯ ⎯ 2.0 mA Analog power
supply current AISTOP AVcc Vcc = 2.5 V to
5.5 V
At reset and in
power-down
mode
⎯ ⎯ 10 μA
Analog input
capacitance
CAIN AN0 to
AN7,
AN8 to ANB
⎯ ⎯ 30 pF
Allowable signal
source
impedance
RAIN AN0 to
AN7,
AN8 to ANB
⎯ ⎯ 10 kΩ
Resolution ⎯ ⎯ 10 Bit
Absolute
accuracy
Vcc = AVcc =
5.0 V
⎯ ⎯ ±4 LSB
Vcc = AVcc =
4.0 V to 5.0 V
⎯ ±4 ⎯ LSB Reference
value
Conversion time 13.4 ⎯ 26.6 μs
Note: Do not open the AVcc and AVss pin even when the A/D converter is not in use. Set AVcc =
Vcc and AVss = Vss.
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 920 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
31.3.6 Servo Section Electrical Characteristics of HD6432197S and HD6432196S
Table 31.20 Servo Section Electrical Characteristics of HD6432197S and HD6432196S
⎯ Preliminary ⎯
(Conditions: Vcc = SVcc = 5.0 V, Vss = SVss = 0.0 V, Ta = 25°C unless otherwise specified.)
Reference Values
Item Symbol
Applicable
Pins Test Conditions Min Typ Max
Unit Note
CTLGR3 = 0, CTLGR2 = 0, CTLGR1
= 0, CTLGR0 = 0, f = 10 kHz
32.0 34.0 36.0
CTLGR3 = 0, CTLGR2 = 0, CTLGR1
= 0, CTLGR0 = 1, f = 10 kHz
34.5 36.5 38.5
CTLGR3 = 0, CTLGR2 = 0, CTLGR1
= 1, CTLGR0 = 0, f = 10 kHz
37.0 39.0 41.0
CTLGR3 = 0, CTLGR2 = 0, CTLGR1
= 1, CTLGR0 = 1, f = 10 kHz
39.5 41.5 43.5
CTLGR3 = 0, CTLGR2 = 1, CTLGR1
= 0, CTLGR0 = 0, f = 10 kHz
42.0 44.0 46.0
CTLGR3 = 0, CTLGR2 = 1, CTLGR1
= 0, CTLGR0 = 1, f = 10 kHz
44.5 46.5 48.5
CTLGR3 = 0, CTLGR2 = 1, CTLGR1
= 1, CTLGR0 = 0, f = 10 kHz
47.0 49.0 51.0
CTLGR3 = 0, CTLGR2 = 1, CTLGR1
= 1, CTLGR0 = 1, f = 10 kHz
49.5 51.5 53.5
CTLGR3 = 1, CTLGR2 = 0, CTLGR1
= 0, CTLGR0 = 0, f = 10 kHz
52.0 54.0 56.0
CTLGR3 = 1, CTLGR2 = 0, CTLGR1
= 0, CTLGR0 = 1, f = 10 kHz
54.5 56.5 58.5
CTLGR3 = 1, CTLGR2 = 0, CTLGR1
= 1, CTLGR0 = 0, f = 10 kHz
57.0 59.0 61.0
CTLGR3 = 1, CTLGR2 = 0, CTLGR1
= 1, CTLGR0 = 1, f = 10 kHz
59.5 61.5 63.5
CTLGR3 = 1, CTLGR2 = 1, CTLGR1
= 0, CTLGR0 = 0, f = 10 kHz
62.0 64.0 66.0
CTLGR3 = 1, CTLGR2 = 1, CTLGR1
= 0, CTLGR0 = 1, f = 10 kHz
64.5 66.5 68.5
CTLGR3 = 1, CTLGR2 = 1, CTLGR1
= 1, CTLGR0 = 0, f = 10 kHz
67.0 69.0 71.0
PB-CTL
input
amplifier
voltage
gain
CTL (+)
CTLGR3 = 1, CTLGR2 = 1, CTLGR1
= 1, CTLGR0 = 1, f = 10 kHz
69.5 71.5 73.5
dB
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 921 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Reference Values
Item Symbol
Applicable
Pins Test Conditions Min Typ Max
Unit Note
V+TH AC coupling,
C = 0.1 μF Typ (non pol)
⎯ 250 ⎯ PB-CTL Schmitt
input
V−TH
CTLSMT (i)
AC coupling,
C = 0.1 μF Typ (non pol)
⎯ −250 ⎯
mVp
Analog switch ON
resistance
REB CTLFB ⎯ 150 ⎯ Ω
CTL (+) ⎯ 12 ⎯ REC-CTL output
current
ICTL
CTL (−)
Series resistance = 0 Ω
⎯ 12 ⎯
mA
REC-CTL pin-to-
pin resistance
RCTL ⎯ 10 ⎯ kΩ
CTL reference
output voltage
CTLREF ⎯ 1/2 SVcc ⎯ V
CFG pin bias
voltage
CFG ⎯ 1/2 SVCC ⎯ V
CFG input level CFG AC coupling,
C = 1 μF Typ, f = 1 kHz
1.0 ⎯ ⎯ Vpp
CFG digital input
high level
VIH CFG When digital signal input
method is selected
(CFGCOMP = 1)
0.8
Vcc
⎯ Vcc
+0.3
V
CFG digital input VIL CFG When digital signal input
method is selected
(CFGCOMP = 1)
−0.3 ⎯ 0.2
Vcc
V
CFG input
impedance
CFG ⎯ 10 ⎯ kΩ
V+THCF Rise threshold level ⎯ 2.25 ⎯ CFG input
threshold value V−THCF
CFG
Fall threshold level ⎯ 2.75 ⎯
V
V+THDF Rising edge Schmitt level ⎯ 1.95 ⎯ DFG Schmitt input
V−THDF
DFG
Falling edge Schmitt
level
⎯ 1.85 ⎯
V
V+THDP Rising edge Schmitt level ⎯ 3.55 ⎯ DPG Schmitt input
V−THDP
DPG
Falling edge Schmitt
level
⎯ 3.45 ⎯
V
VOH −IOH = 0.1 mA 4.0 ⎯ ⎯
VOM No load, Hi-Z = 1 ⎯ 2.5 ⎯
3-level output
voltage
VOL
Vpulse
IOL = 0.1 mA ⎯ ⎯ 1.0
V
3-level output pin
divided voltage
resistance
Vpulse ⎯ 15 ⎯ kΩ
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 922 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Reference Values
Item Symbol
Applicable
Pins Test Conditions Min Typ Max
Unit Note
Digital input high
level
VIH 0.8
Vcc
⎯ Vcc
+0.3
Digital input low
level
VIL
COMP,
EXCTL,
EXCAP,
EXTTRG −0.3 ⎯ 0.2
Vcc
V
Digital output high
level
VOH −IOH = 1 mA Vcc
–1.0
⎯ ⎯
Digital output low
level
VOL
H.AmpSW,
C.Rotary,
VIDEOFF,
AUDIOFF,
DRMPWM,
CAPPWM,
SV1, SV2
IOL = 1.6 mA ⎯ ⎯ 0.6
V
Current dissipation ICCSV SVcc At no load ⎯ 5 10 mA
CFG duty CFG AC coupling,
C = 1 μF Typ, f = 1 kHz
48 ⎯ 52 %
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 923 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
31.3.7 OSD Electrical Characteristics of HD6432197S and HD6432196S
Table 31.21 OSD Electrical Characteristics of HD6432197S and HD6432196S (Refernce
Values) ⎯ Preliminary ⎯
(Conditions: Vcc = OVcc = 5.0 V, Vss = OVss = 0.0 V, Ta = 25°C unless otherwise specified)
Reference
Values
Item Symbol
Applicable
Pins
Test
Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Note
Composite video input
voltage
VCVIN CVin1
CVin2
⎯ 2 VPP
VCL1 CVin1 ⎯ 1.2 1.4 1.6 Clamp voltage
VCL2 CVin2 ⎯ 1.8 2 2.2
V
C.Video gain GCVC CVin1
CVout
At
chromathrough
f = 3.58 MHz
VIN = 500 mVpp
−3 −2 0 dB
Pedestal bias VPED CVout 45 IRE *1
Color burst bias VBST 40 IRE
*1
VBL1 10
VBL2 30
VBL3 50
Background
bias
Black, blue,
green,
cyan, red,
magenta,
yellow, white VBL4 70
IRE *2
VKBL1 0 Black
VKBL2 25
VKOL1 25 Blue, green,
cyan, red,
magenta,
yellow
VKOL2 45
VKCL1 45
Cursor bias
White
VKCL2 55
IRE *2
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 924 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Reference
Values
Item Symbol
Applicable
Pins
Test
Conditions Min Typ Max
Unit Note
VCBL1 CVout 0
VCBL2 10
VCBL3 20
Black
VCBL4 30
VCOL1 25
VCOL2 45
VCOL3 55
Blue, green,
cyan, red,
magenta,
yellow
VCOL4 65
VCCL1 45
VCCL2 70
VCCL3 80
Character
bias
White
VCCL4 90
IRE *2
VEDG1 0 Edge brightness level
VEDG2 90
IRE *2
VBTN1 15 Button brightness level
VBTN2 75
IRE *2
Color burst amplitude VBSTA 40 IRE
VCRA1 60 Chroma
amplitude
(background,
cursor,
character)
Blue, green,
cyan, red,
magenta,
yellow
VCRA2 80
IRE
Colorburst φ BSTN 0
Blue φ BLUN π
Green φ GRNN 7 π/4
Cyan φ CYNN 3 π/2
Red φ REDN π/2
Magenta φ MZTN 3 π/4
Chroma hue
angle
(background,
cursor,
character)
(NTSC)
Yellow φ YETN 0
rad *3
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 925 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Reference Values
Item Symbol
Applicable
Pins
Test
Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Note
Colorburst φ BSTP CVout ±π/4
Blue φ BLUP ±π
Green φ GRNP ±7π/4
Cyan φ CYNP ±3π/2
Red φ REDP ±π/2
Magenta φ MZTP ±3π/4
Chroma hue
angle
(background,
cursor,
character)
(PAL)
Yellow φ YELP 0
rad *3
CCMP1 CVin2 ⎯ 5 ⎯
CCMP2 ⎯ 10 ⎯
CCMP3 ⎯ 15 ⎯
Csync separation
comparator
CCMP4 ⎯ 20 ⎯
IRE *1
ECMP1 CVin2 ⎯ 0 ⎯
ECMP2 ⎯ 5 ⎯
ECMP3 ⎯ 15 ⎯
ECMP4 ⎯ 20 ⎯
ECMP5 ⎯ 25 ⎯
ECMP6 ⎯ 35 ⎯
EDS separation
comparator
ECMP7 ⎯ 40 ⎯
IRE *2
ViH⊥ 0.85
OVcc
⎯ OVcc
+0.3
V Input high level
ViHT
Csync/Hsync
VLPF/Vsync
0.7
OVcc
⎯ OVcc
+0.3
V
ViL⊥ −0.3 ⎯ 0.3
OVcc
V Input low level
ViLT
Csync/Hsync
VLPF/Vsync
−0.3 ⎯ 0.15
OVcc
V
Output high level VOH Csync/Hsync −IOH =
0.4 mA
Ovcc
−1.4
⎯ ⎯ V
Output low level VOL Csync/Hsync IOL =
0.4 mA
⎯ ⎯ 1.4 V
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 926 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Reference Values
Item Symbol
Applicable
Pins
Test
Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Note
Oscillation
stabilizing time
trc 4/2fscin
4/2fscout
Crystal oscillator ⎯ ⎯ 40 ms
M/NTSC ⎯ 14.31818 ⎯ MHz
4/2fscin
4/2fscout B, G, H/PAL
I/PAL
D, K/PAL
4.43-NTSC
B, G, H/SECAM
L/SECAM
D, K, K1/SECAM
⎯ 17.734475
(17.734476)
⎯ MHz
N/PAL ⎯ 14.328225 ⎯ MHz
4fsc
M/PAL ⎯ 14.30244596 ⎯ MHz
2fsc M/NTSC ⎯ 7.15909 ⎯ MHz
4/2fscin
4/2fscout B, G, H/PAL
I/PAL
D, K/PAL
4.43-NTSC
B, G, H/SECAM
L/SECAM
D, K, K2/SECAM
⎯ 8.8672375
(8.867238)
⎯ MHz
N/PAL ⎯ 7.1641125 ⎯ MHz
Oscillating
frequency
M/PAL ⎯ 7.15122298 ⎯ MHz
Vfsc 4/2fscin
4/2fscout
AC coupling
C = 1μF typ
0.3 ⎯ Vcc
+0.3
Vpp
VIH 4/2fscin 0.7
Vcc
⎯ Vcc
+0.3
External clock
input level
VIL −0.3 ⎯ 0.3
Vcc
V
External clock
duty
4/2fscin
4/2fscout
47 50 53 %
6.3 9 11.7 MHz
AFC reference
clock (dot clock)
AFCOSC AFCOSC LC oscillation
4.9 7 9.1 MHz
Current
dissipation
ICCOSD OVcc At no signal ⎯ 14 ⎯ mA
Notes: IRE: Units for video amplitude; 0.714 V video level is specified as 100 IRE
4fsc and 2fsc must be adjusted within ±30 ppm, including temperature dependency.
1. Bias from the sync tip clamp level (reference value after −6 dB).
2. Bias from the pedestal level (reference value after −6 dB).
3. At 4fsc input.
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 927 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
31.4 Electrical Characteristics of HD64F2199R
31.4.1 DC Characteristics of HD64F2199R
Table 31.22 DC Characteristics of HD64F2199R
(Conditions: Vcc = AVcc = 4.0 V to 5.5 V*1, Vss = 0.0 V, Ta = –20 to +75°C unless otherwise
specified.)
Values
Item Symbol Applicable Pins
Test
Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Note
MD0 Vcc = 2.7 V to
5.5 V
0.9 Vcc ⎯ Vcc +0.3
0.8 Vcc ⎯ Vcc +0.3 RES, FWE, IC, IRQ0
to IRQ5, SYNCI Vcc = 2.7 V to
5.5 V
0.9 Vcc ⎯ Vcc +0.3
SCK1, SI1, FTIA,
FTIB, FTIC, FTID,
RPTRG, TMBI,
ADTRG
0.8 Vcc ⎯ Vcc +0.3
OSC1 Vcc –0.5 ⎯ Vcc +0.3
0.7 Vcc ⎯ Vcc +0.3 P00 to P07,
P10 to P17,
P20 to P27,
P30 to P37,
P40 to P47,
P60 to P67,
P70 to P77,
P80 to P87
Vcc = 2.7 V to
5.5 V
0.8 Vcc ⎯ Vcc +0.3
Input high
voltage
VIH
Csync 0.7 Vcc ⎯ Vcc +0.3
V
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 928 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Values
Item Symbol Applicable Pins
Test
Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Note
MD0 Vcc = 2.7 V to
5.5 V
–0.3 ⎯ 0.1 Vcc
−0.3 ⎯ 0.2 Vcc RES, FWE, IC,
IRQ0 to IRQ5, SYNCI Vcc = 2.7 V to
5.5 V
−0.3 ⎯ 0.1 Vcc
SCK1, SI1, FTIA,
FTIB, FTIC, FTID,
RPTRG, TMBI,
ADTRG
−0.3 ⎯ 0.2 Vcc
OSC1 −0.3 ⎯ 0.5
−0.3 ⎯ 0.3 Vcc P00 to P07,
P10 to P17,
P20 to P27,
P30 to P37,
P40 to P47,
P60 to P67,
P70 to P77,
P80 to P87
Vcc = 2.7 V to
5.5 V
−0.3 ⎯ 0.2 Vcc
Input low
voltage
VIL
Csync −0.3 ⎯ 0.2 Vcc
V
−IOH = 1.0 mA Vcc –1.0 ⎯ ⎯ V
−IOH = 0.5 mA ⎯ Vcc
–0.5
⎯ V Refer-
ence
value
Output
high
voltage
VOH SO1, SCK1, PWM0,
PWM1, PWM2,
PWM3, PWM14,
BUZZ, TMO, TMOW,
FTOA, FTOB, PPG0
to PPG7,
RP0 to RP7,
RP8 to RPB,
P10 to P17,
P20 to P27,
P30 to P37,
P40 to P47,
P60 to P67,
P70 to P77,
P80 to P87,
SV1, SV2, R, G, B,
YCO, YBO
−IOH = 0.1 mA
Vcc = 2.7 V to
5.5 V
Vcc –0.5 ⎯ ⎯ V
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 929 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Values
Item Symbol Applicable Pins
Test
Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Note
IOL = 1.6 mA ⎯ ⎯ 0.6 V SO1, SCK1, PWM0,
PWM1, PWM2,
PWM3, PWM14,
BUZZ, TMO, TMOW,
FTOA, FTOB, PPG0
to PPG7,
RP0 to RP7,
RP8 to RPB,
P10 to P17,
P20 to P27,
P30 to P37,
P40 to P47,
P70 to P77,
P80 to P87, SV1,
SV2, R, G, B, YCO,
YBO
IOL = 0.4 mA
Vcc = 2.7 V to
5.5 V
⎯ ⎯ 0.4 V
IOL = 20 mA ⎯ ⎯ 1.7 V
IOL = 1.6 mA ⎯ ⎯ 0.6 V
Output
low
voltage
VOL
P60 to P67,
IOL = 0.4 mA
Vcc = 2.7 V to
5.5 V
⎯ ⎯ 0.4 V
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 930 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Values
Item Symbol Applicable Pins
Test
Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Note
MD0, FWE Vin = 0.5 to Vcc
–0.5 V
⎯ ⎯ 1.0
RES, IRQ0 to IRQ5,
IC
Vin = 0.5 to Vcc
–0.5 V
⎯ ⎯ 1.0
SCK1, SI1, SDA0,
SCL0, SDA1, SCL1,
FTIA, FTIB, FTIC,
FTID, TRIG, TMBI,
ADTRG
Vin = 0.5 to Vcc
–0.5 V
⎯ ⎯ 1.0
OSC1 Vin = 0.5 to Vcc
–0.5 V
⎯ ⎯ 1.0
Input/
output
leakage
current
⏐IIL⏐
P10 to P17,
P20 to P27,
P30 to P37,
P40 to P47,
P60 to P67,
P70 to P77,
P80 to P87,
Vin = 0.5 to Vcc
–0.5 V
⎯ ⎯ 1.0
μA
P00 to P07,
AN8 to ANB
Vin = 0.5 to
AVcc –0.5 V
⎯ ⎯ 1.0
Pull-up
MOS
current
−Ip P10 to P17,
P20 to P27,
P30 to P37
Vcc = 5.0 V,
Vin = 0 V
50 ⎯ 300 μA *2
Input
capacity
Cin All input pins except
power supply pins
P23, P24, P25, and
P26, and analog
pins
fin = 1 MHz,
Vin = 0 V,
Ta = 25°C
⎯ ⎯ 15 pF
P23, P24, P25, P26 fin = 1 MHz,
Vin = 0 V,
Ta = 25°C
⎯ ⎯ 20 pF
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 931 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Values
Item Symbol
Applicable
Pins Test Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Note
Vcc = 5 V,
fOSC = 10 MHz,
High-speed mode
⎯ 40 50 mA
*3*4 Active mode
current
dissipation
(CPU
operating)
IOPE Vcc
Vcc = 5 V,
fOSC = 10 MHz,
Medium-speed
mode (1/64)
⎯ 25 ⎯ mA Reference
value*3*4
Active mode
current
dissipation
(reset)
IRES Vcc Vcc = 5 V,
fOSC = 10 MHz
⎯ 12 15 mA
*3*4
Sleep mode
current
dissipation
ISLEEP Vcc Vcc = 5 V,
fOSC = 10 MHz
High-speed mode
⎯ 15 20 mA
*3*4
Vcc = 2.7 V, 32 kHz
With crystal
oscillator
(φ sub = φw/2)
⎯ 90 150 *3*4 Subactive
mode current
dissipation
ISUB Vcc
Vcc = 2.7 V, 32 kHz
With crystal
oscillator
(φ sub = φw/8)
⎯ 40 ⎯
μA
Reference
value*3*4
Vcc = 2.7 V, 32 kHz
With crystal
oscillator
(φ sub = φw/2)
⎯ 30 50 *3*4 Subsleep
mode current
dissipation
ISUBSLP Vcc
Vcc = 2.7 V, 32 kHz
With crystal
oscillator
(φ sub = φw/8)
⎯ 20 ⎯
μA
Reference
value*3*4
Vcc = 2.7 V, 32 kHz
With crystal
oscillator
⎯ 6 12 μA *3*4 Watch mode
current
dissipation
IWATCH Vcc
Vcc = 5.0 V, 32 kHz
With crystal
oscillator
⎯ 12 ⎯ μA Reference
value*3*4
Standby
mode current
dissipation
ISTBY Vcc X1 = VCL, 32 kHz
Without crystal
oscillator
⎯ ⎯ 10 μA *3*4
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 932 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Values
Item Symbol
Applicable
Pins Test Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Note
RAM data
retaining
voltage in
standby mode
VSTBY 2.0 V
Notes: 1. Do not open the AVcc and AVss pin even when the A/D converter is not in use.
2. Current value when the relevant bit of the pull-up MOS select register (PUR1 to PUR3)
is set to 1.
3. The current on the pull-up MOS or the output buffer excluded.
4. Excludes the current flowing in SVcc and OVcc.
Table 31.23 Pin Status at Current Dissipation Measurement
Mode RES pin Internal State Pin Oscillator Pin
Active mode
High-speed, medium-
speed
Vcc Operating Vcc
Sleep mode
High-speed, medium-
speed
Vcc Only CPU, servo
circuits, and OSD
halted
Vcc
Reset Vss Reset Vcc
Standby mode Vcc All circuits halted Vcc
Main clock:
Crystal oscillator
Sub clock:
X1 pin = VCL
Subactive mode Vcc CPU and timer A
operating
Vcc
Subsleep mode Vcc Timer A operating Vcc
Watch mode Vcc Timer A operating Vcc
Main clock:
Crystal oscillator
Sub clock:
Crystal oscillator
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 933 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Table 31.24 Bus Drive Characteristics of HD64F2199R
(Conditions: Vcc = AVcc = 4.0 V to 5.5 V, Vss = 0.0 V, Ta = –20 to +75°C.)
Applicable pin: SCL0, SCL1, SDA0, SDA1
Values
Item Symbol
Applicable
Pins
Test
Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Note
VT
− 0.2 Vcc ⎯ ⎯ V
VT
+ ⎯ ⎯ 0.7 Vcc V
Schmitt
trigger input
VT
+
–VT
−
SCL0, SDA0,
SCL1, SDA1
0.05 Vcc ⎯ ⎯ V
Input high
level
voltage
VIH SCL0, SDA0,
SCL1, SDA1
0.7 Vcc ⎯ Vcc +0.5 V
Input low
level
voltage
VIL SCL0, SDA0,
SCL1, SDA1
−0.5 ⎯ 0.2 Vcc V
IOL = 8 mA ⎯ ⎯ 0.5 Output low
level
voltage
VOL SCL0, SDA0,
SCL1, SDA1 IOL = 3 mA ⎯ ⎯ 0.4
V
SCL and
SDA output
fall time
tof SCL0, SDA0,
SCL1, SDA1
20 + 0.1Cb ⎯ 250 ns
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 934 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
31.4.2 Allowable Output Currents of HD64F2199R
The specifications for the digital pins are shown below.
Table 31.25 Allowable Output Currents of HD64F2199R
(Conditions: Vcc = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, Vss = 0.0 V, Ta = –20 to +75°C)
Item Symbol Value Unit Note
Allowable input current (to chip) IO 2 mA
*1
Allowable input current (to chip) IO 22 mA
*2
Allowable input current (to chip) IO 10 mA
*3
Allowable output current (from chip) −IO 2 mA
*4
Total allowable input current (to chip) ΣIO 80 mA
*5
Total allowable output current (from chip) −ΣIO 50 mA *6
Notes: 1. The allowable input current is the maximum value of the current flowing from each I/O
pin to VSS (except for port 6, SCL0, SDA0, SCL1, and SDA1).
2. The allowable input current is the maximum value of the current flowing from each I/O
pin to VSS. This applies to port 6.
3. The allowable input current is the maximum value of the current flowing from each I/O
pin to VSS. This applies to SCL0, SDA0, SCL1, and SDA1.
4. The allowable output current is the maximum value of the current flowing from VCC to
each I/O pin.
5. The total allowable input current is the sum of the currents flowing from all I/O pins to
VSS simultaneously.
6. The total allowable output current is the sum of the currents flowing from VCC to all I/O
pins.
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 935 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
31.4.3 AC Characteristics of HD64F2199R
Table 31.26 AC Characteristics of HD64F2199R
(Conditions: Vcc = AVcc = 4.0 V to 5.5 V, Vss = 0.0 V, Ta = –20 to +75°C unless otherwise
specified, OVcc = SVcc = 4.75 V to 5.25 V.)
Values
Item Symbol
Applicable
Pins
Test
Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Note
Clock oscillation
frequency
fOSC OSC1, OSC2 8 ⎯ 10 MH
z
Clock cycle time tcyc OSC1, OSC2 100 ⎯ 125 ns Figure
31.17
Subclock oscillation
frequency
fX X1, X2 Vcc = 2.7 V
to 5.5 V
⎯ 32.768 ⎯ kHz
Subclock cycle time tsubcyc X1, X2 Vcc = 2.7 V
to 5.5 V
⎯ 30.518 ⎯ µs
OSC1, OSC2 Crystal
oscillator
⎯ ⎯ 10 ms Oscillation
stabilization time
trc
X1, X2 32 kHz
crystal
oscillator
(Vcc = 2.7 V
to 5.5 V)
⎯ ⎯ 2 s
External clock high
width
tCPH OSC1 40 ⎯ ⎯ ns
External clock low
width
tCPL OSC1 40 ⎯ ⎯ ns
External clock rise
time
tCPr OSC1 ⎯ ⎯ 10 ns
External clock fall
time
tCPf OSC1 ⎯ ⎯ 10 ns
Figure
31.17
External clock
stabilization delay
time
tDEXT OSC1 500 ⎯ ⎯ µs Figure
31.18
RES pin low level
width
tREL RES Vcc = 2.7 V
to 5.5 V
20 ⎯ ⎯ t
cyc Figure
31.19
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 936 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Values
Item Symbol
Applicable
Pins
Test
Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Note
Input pin high level
width
tIH IRQ0 to IRQ5,
IC, ADTRG,
TMBI, FTIA,
FTIB, FTIC,
FTID, RPTRIG
Vcc = 2.7 V
to 5.5 V
2 ⎯ ⎯ t
cyc
tsubcyc
Figure
31.20
Input pin low level
width
tIL IRQ0 to IRQ5,
IC, ADTRG,
TMBI, FTIA,
FTIB, FTIC,
FTID, RPTRIG
Vcc = 2.7 V
to 5.5 V
2 ⎯ ⎯ t
cyc
tsubcyc
t
cyc
t
CPH
V
IL
V
IH
OSC1
t
CPL
t
CPf
t
CPr
Figure 31.17 System Clock Timing
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 937 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Vcc
OSC1
t
DEXT
*
RES
φ (Internal)
4.0V
The t
DEXT
includes the RES pin Low level width 20 t
cyc
.
Note: *
Figure 31.18 External Clock Stabilization Delay Timing
RES
V
IL
t
REL
Figure 31.19 Reset Input Timing
t
IL
t
IH
V
IH
V
IL
IRQ0 to IRQ5,
IC, ADTRG,
TMBI, FTIA,
FTIB, FTIC,
FTID, RPTRIG
Figure 31.20 Input Timing
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 938 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
31.4.4 Serial Interface Timing of HD64F2199R
Table 31.27 Serial Interface Timing of HD64F2199R
(Conditions: Vcc = AVcc = 4.0 V to 5.5 V, Vss = 0.0 V, Ta = –20 to +75°C unless otherwise
specified.)
Values
Item Symbol
Applicable
Pins Test Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Figure
Asynchronization 4 ⎯ ⎯ Input clock cycle tscyc SCK1
Clock
synchronization
6 ⎯ ⎯
tcyc
Input clock pulse
width
tSCKW SCK1 0.4 ⎯ 0.6 tscyc
Input clock rise time tSCKr SCK1 ⎯ ⎯ 1.5 tcyc
Input clock fall time tSCKf SCK1 ⎯ ⎯ 1.5 tcyc
Figure
31.21
Transmit data delay
time (clock sync)
tTXD SO1 ⎯ ⎯ 100 ns Figure
31.22
Receive data setup
time (clock sync)
tRXS SI1 100 ⎯ ⎯ ns
Receive data hold
time (clock sync)
tRXH SI1 100 ⎯ ⎯ ns
t
SCKf
t
SCKr
V
IL
or V
OL
V
IH
or V
OH
SCK1
t
SCKW
t
scyc
Figure 31.21 SCK1 Clock Timing
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 939 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
V
IL
V
IH
t
TXD
SCK1
SO1
SI1
t
RXS
t
RXH
V
OH
V
OL
Figure 31.22 SCI I/O Timing/Clock Synchronization Mode
LSI output pin
Timing reference level
VOH: 2.0 V
VOL: 0.8 V
30 pF 12 kΩ
2.4 kΩ
Vcc
Figure 31.23 Output Load Conditions
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 940 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Table 31.28 I2C Bus Interface Timing of HD64F2199R
(Conditions: Vcc = AVcc = 4.0 V to 5.5 V, Vss = 0.0 V, Ta = –20 to +75°C unless otherwise
specified.)
Values
Item Symbol
Test
Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Figure
SCL input cycle time tSCL 12 ⎯ ⎯ t
cyc
SCL input high pulse width tSCLH 3 ⎯ ⎯ t
cyc
SCL input low pulse width tSCLL 5 ⎯ ⎯ t
cyc
SCL, SDA input rise time tsr ⎯ ⎯ 7.5* t
cyc
SCL, SDA input fall time tsf ⎯ ⎯ 300 ns
SCL, SDA input spike pulse
removal time
tsp ⎯ ⎯ 1 tcyc
SDA input bus free time tBUF 5 ⎯ ⎯ t
cyc
Start condition input hold
time
tSTAH 3 ⎯ ⎯ t
cyc
Re-transmit start condition
input setup time
tSTAS 3 ⎯ ⎯ t
cyc
Stop condition input setup
time
tSTOS 3 ⎯ ⎯ t
cyc
Data input setup time tSDAS 0.5 ⎯ ⎯ t
cyc
Data input hold time tSDAH 0 ⎯ ⎯ ns
SCL, SDA capacity load Cb ⎯ ⎯ 400 pF
Figure
31.24
Note: Can also be set to 17.5 tcyc depending on the selection of clock to be used by the I2C
module.
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 941 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
t
STAH
t
Sr
t
SDAH
t
SCL
t
SCLL
t
SCLH
t
Sf
t
STAS
t
SP
t
STOS
t
SDAS
V
IL
V
IH
SDA
SCL
P*S*Sr*P*
S, P and Sr denote the following:
S : Start conditions
P : Stop conditions
Sr: Re-transmit start conditions
Note: *
t
BUF
Figure 31.24 I2C Bus Interface I/O Timing
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 942 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
31.4.5 A/D Converter Characteristics of HD64F2199R
Table 31.29 A/D Converter Characteristics of HD64F2199R
(Conditions: Vcc = AVcc = 4.0 V to 5.5 V, Vss = AVss = 0.0 V, Ta = –20 to +75°C unless
otherwise specified.)
Values
Item Symbol
Applicable
Pins Test Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Note
Analog power
supply voltage
AVcc AVcc Vcc
−0.3
Vcc Vcc
+0.3
V
Analog input
voltage
AVIN AN0 to AN7,
AN8 to ANB
AVss ⎯ AVcc V
AICC AVcc AVcc = 5.0 V ⎯ ⎯ 2.0 mA Analog power
supply current AISTOP AVcc Vcc = 2.7 V to
5.5 V
At reset and in
power-down
mode
⎯ ⎯ 10 μA
Analog input
capacitance
CAIN AN0 to AN7,
AN8 to ANB
⎯ ⎯ 30 pF
Allowable signal
source
impedance
RAIN AN0 to AN7,
AN8 to ANB
⎯ ⎯ 10 kΩ
Resolution ⎯ ⎯ 10 Bit
Absolute
accuracy
Vcc = AVcc =
5.0 V
⎯ ⎯ ±4 LSB
Vcc = AVcc =
4.0 V to 5.0 V
⎯ ±4 ⎯ LSB Reference
value
Conversion time 13.4 ⎯ 26.6 μs
Note: Do not open the AVcc and AVss pin even when the A/D converter is not in use. Set AVcc =
Vcc and AVss = Vss.
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 943 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
31.4.6 Servo Section Electrical Characteristics of HD64F2199R
Table 31.30 Servo Section Electrical Characteristics of HD64F2199R (Reference Values)
(Conditions: Vcc = SVcc = 5.0 V, Vss = SVss = 0.0 V, Ta = 25°C unless otherwise specified.)
Reference Values
Item Symbol
Applicable
Pins Test Conditions Min Typ Max
Unit Note
CTLGR3 = 0, CTLGR2 = 0, CTLGR1
= 0, CTLGR0 = 0, f = 10 kHz
32.0 34.0 36.0
CTLGR3 = 0, CTLGR2 = 0, CTLGR1
= 0, CTLGR0 = 1, f = 10 kHz
34.5 36.5 38.5
CTLGR3 = 0, CTLGR2 = 0, CTLGR1
= 1, CTLGR0 = 0, f = 10 kHz
37.0 39.0 41.0
CTLGR3 = 0, CTLGR2 = 0, CTLGR1
= 1, CTLGR0 = 1, f = 10 kHz
39.5 41.5 43.5
CTLGR3 = 0, CTLGR2 = 1, CTLGR1
= 0, CTLGR0 = 0, f = 10 kHz
42.0 44.0 46.0
CTLGR3 = 0, CTLGR2 = 1, CTLGR1
= 0, CTLGR0 = 1, f = 10 kHz
44.5 46.5 48.5
CTLGR3 = 0, CTLGR2 = 1, CTLGR1
= 1, CTLGR0 = 0, f = 10 kHz
47.0 49.0 51.0
CTLGR3 = 0, CTLGR2 = 1, CTLGR1
= 1, CTLGR0 = 1, f = 10 kHz
49.5 51.5 53.5
CTLGR3 = 1, CTLGR2 = 0, CTLGR1
= 0, CTLGR0 = 0, f = 10 kHz
52.0 54.0 56.0
CTLGR3 = 1, CTLGR2 = 0, CTLGR1
= 0, CTLGR0 = 1, f = 10 kHz
54.5 56.5 58.5
CTLGR3 = 1, CTLGR2 = 0, CTLGR1
= 1, CTLGR0 = 0, f = 10 kHz
57.0 59.0 61.0
CTLGR3 = 1, CTLGR2 = 0, CTLGR1
= 1, CTLGR0 = 1, f = 10 kHz
59.5 61.5 63.5
CTLGR3 = 1, CTLGR2 = 1, CTLGR1
= 0, CTLGR0 = 0, f = 10 kHz
62.0 64.0 66.0
CTLGR3 = 1, CTLGR2 = 1, CTLGR1
= 0, CTLGR0 = 1, f = 10 kHz
64.5 66.5 68.5
CTLGR3 = 1, CTLGR2 = 1, CTLGR1
= 1, CTLGR0 = 0, f = 10 kHz
67.0 69.0 71.0
PB-CTL
input
amplifier
voltage
gain
CTL (+)
CTLGR3 = 1, CTLGR2 = 1, CTLGR1
= 1, CTLGR0 = 1, f = 10 kHz
69.5 71.5 73.5
dB
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 944 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Reference Values
Item Symbol
Applicable
Pins Test Conditions Min Typ Max
Unit Note
V+TH AC coupling,
C = 0.1 μF Typ (non pol)
⎯ 250 ⎯ PB-CTL Schmitt
input
V−TH
CTLSMT (i)
AC coupling,
C = 0.1 μF Typ (non pol)
⎯ −250 ⎯
mVp
Analog switch ON
resistance
REB CTLFB ⎯ 150 ⎯ Ω
CTL (+) ⎯ 12 ⎯ REC-CTL output
current
ICTL
CTL (−)
Series resistance = 0 Ω
⎯ 12 ⎯
mA
REC-CTL pin-to-
pin resistance
RCTL ⎯ 10 ⎯ kΩ
CTL reference
output voltage
CTLREF ⎯ 1/2
SVcc
⎯ V
CFG pin bias
voltage
CFG ⎯ 1/2
SVCC
⎯ V
CFG input level CFG AC coupling,
C = 1 μF Typ, f = 1 kHz
1.0 ⎯ ⎯ Vpp
CFG digital input
high level
VIH CFG When digital signal input
method is selected
(CFGCOMP = 1)
0.8
Vcc
⎯ Vcc
+0.3
V
CFG digital input VIL CFG When digital signal input
method is selected
(CFGCOMP = 1)
−0.3 ⎯ 0.2
Vcc
V
CFG input
impedance
CFG ⎯ 10 ⎯ kΩ
V+THCF Rise threshold level ⎯ 2.25 ⎯ CFG input
threshold value V−THCF
CFG
Fall threshold level ⎯ 2.75 ⎯
V
V+THDF Rising edge Schmitt level ⎯ 1.95 ⎯ DFG Schmitt input
V−THDF
DFG
Falling edge Schmitt level ⎯ 1.85 ⎯
V
V+THDP Rising edge Schmitt level ⎯ 3.55 ⎯ DPG Schmitt input
V−THDP
DPG
Falling edge Schmitt level ⎯ 3.45 ⎯
V
VOH −IOH = 0.1 mA 4.0 ⎯ ⎯
VOM No load, Hi-Z = 1 ⎯ 2.5 ⎯
3-level output
voltage
VOL
Vpulse
IOL = 0.1 mA ⎯ ⎯ 1.0
V
3-level output pin
divided voltage
resistance
Vpulse ⎯ 15 ⎯ kΩ
Digital input high
level
VIH 0.8
Vcc
⎯ Vcc
+0.3
Digital input low
level
VIL
COMP,
EXCTL,
EXCAP,
EXTTRG −0.3 ⎯ 0.2
Vcc
V
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 945 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Reference Values
Item Symbol
Applicable
Pins Test Conditions Min Typ Max
Unit Note
Digital output high
level
VOH −IOH = 1 mA Vcc
–1.0
⎯ ⎯
Digital output low
level
VOL
H.AmpSW,
C.Rotary,
VIDEOFF,
AUDIOFF,
DRMPWM,
CAPPWM,
SV1, SV2
IOL = 1.6 mA ⎯ ⎯ 0.6
V
Current dissipation ICCSV SVcc At no load ⎯ 5 10 mA
CFG duty CFG AC coupling,
C = 1 μF Typ,
f = 1 kHz
48 ⎯ 52 %
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 946 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
31.4.7 OSD Electrical Characteristics of HD64F2199R
Table 31.31 OSD Electrical Characteristics of HD64F2199R (Reference Value)
(Conditions: Vcc = OVcc = 5.0 V, Vss = OVss = 0.0 V, Ta = 25°C unless otherwise specified)
Reference
Values
Item Symbol
Applicable
Pins
Test
Conditions Min Typ Max
Unit Note
Composite video input
voltage
VCVIN CVin1
CVin2
⎯ 2 VPP
VCL1 CVin1 ⎯ 1.2 1.4 1.6 Clamp voltage
VCL2 CVin2 ⎯ 1.8 2 2.2
V
C.Video gain GCVC CVin1
CVout
At
chromathrough
f = 3.58 MHz
VIN = 500 mVpp
−3 −2 0 dB
Pedestal bias VPED CVout 45 IRE
*1
Color burst bias VBST 40 IRE
*1
VBL1 10
VBL2 30
VBL3 50
Background
bias
Black, blue,
green,
cyan, red,
magenta,
yellow, white VBL4 70
IRE *2
VKBL1 0 Black
VKBL2 25
VKOL1 25 Blue, green,
cyan, red,
magenta,
yellow
VKOL2 45
VKCL1 45
Cursor bias
White
VKCL2 55
IRE *2
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 947 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Reference
Values
Item Symbol
Applicable
Pins
Test
Conditions Min Typ Max
Unit Note
VCBL1 CVout 0
VCBL2 10
VCBL3 20
Black
VCBL4 30
VCOL1 25
VCOL2 45
VCOL3 55
Blue, green,
cyan, red,
magenta,
yellow
VCOL4 65
VCCL1 45
VCCL2 70
VCCL3 80
Character
bias
White
VCCL4 90
IRE *2
VEDG1 0 Edge brightness level
VEDG2 90
IRE *2
VBTN1 15 Button brightness level
VBTN2 75
IRE *2
Color burst amplitude VBSTA 40 IRE
VCRA1 60 Chroma
amplitude
(background,
cursor,
character)
Blue, green,
cyan, red,
magenta,
yellow
VCRA2 80
IRE
Colorburst φ BSTN 0
Blue φ BLUN π
Green φ GRNN 7 π/4
Cyan φ CYNN 3 π/2
Red φ REDN π/2
Magenta φ MZTN 3 π/4
Chroma hue
angle
(background,
cursor,
character)
(NTSC)
Yellow φ YETN 0
rad *3
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 948 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Reference Values
Item Symbol
Applicable
Pins
Test
Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Note
Colorburst φ BSTP CVout ±π/4
Blue φ BLUP ±π
Green φ GRNP ±7π/4
Cyan φ CYNP ±3π/2
Red φ REDP ±π/2
Magenta φ MZTP ±3π/4
Chroma hue
angle
(background,
cursor,
character)
(PAL)
Yellow φ YELP 0
rad *3
CCMP1 CVin2 ⎯ 5 ⎯
CCMP2 ⎯ 10 ⎯
CCMP3 ⎯ 15 ⎯
Csync separation
comparator
CCMP4 ⎯ 20 ⎯
IRE *1
ECMP1 CVin2 ⎯ 0 ⎯
ECMP2 ⎯ 5 ⎯
ECMP3 ⎯ 15 ⎯
ECMP4 ⎯ 20 ⎯
ECMP5 ⎯ 25 ⎯
ECMP6 ⎯ 35 ⎯
EDS separation
comparator
ECMP7 ⎯ 40 ⎯
IRE *2
ViH⊥ 0.85
OVcc
⎯ OVcc
+0.3
V Input high level
ViHT
Csync/Hsync
VLPF/Vsync
0.7
OVcc
⎯ OVcc
+0.3
V
ViL⊥ −0.3 ⎯ 0.3
OVcc
V Input low level
ViLT
Csync/Hsync
VLPF/Vsync
−0.3 ⎯ 0.15
OVcc
V
Output high level VOH Csync/Hsync −IOH =
0.4 mA
Ovcc
−1.4
⎯ ⎯ V
Output low level VOL Csync/Hsync IOL =
0.4 mA
⎯ ⎯ 1.4 V
Oscillation stabilizing time trc 4/2fscin
4/2fscout
Crystal
oscillator
⎯ ⎯ 40 ms
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 949 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Reference Values
Item Symbol
Applicable
Pins
Test
Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Note
M/NTSC ⎯ 14.31818 ⎯ MHz 4/2fscin
4/2fscout B, G, H/PAL
I/PAL
D, K/PAL
4.43-NTSC
B, G, H/SECAM
L/SECAM
D, K, K1/SECAM
⎯ 17.734475
(17.734476)
⎯ MHz
N/PAL ⎯ 14.328225 ⎯ MHz
4fsc
M/PAL ⎯ 14.30244596 ⎯ MHz
2fsc M/NTSC
⎯ 7.15909 ⎯ MHz
4/2fscin
4/2fscout B, G, H/PAL
I/PAL
D, K/PAL
4.43-NTSC
B, G, H/SECAM
L/SECAM
D, K, K2/SECAM
⎯ 8.8672375
(8.867238)
⎯ MHz
N/PAL ⎯ 7.1641125 ⎯ MHz
Oscillating
frequency
M/PAL ⎯ 7.15122298 ⎯ MHz
Vfsc 4/2fscin
4/2fscout
AC coupling
C = 1μF typ
0.3 ⎯ Vcc
+0.3
Vpp
VIH 4/2fscin 0.7
Vcc
⎯ Vcc
+0.3
External clock
input level
VIL −0.3 ⎯ 0.3
Vcc
V
External clock
duty
4/2fscin
4/2fscout
47 50 53 %
6.3 9 11.7 MHz AFC reference
clock (dot clock)
AFCOSC AFCOSC LC oscillation
4.9 7 9.1 MHz
Current
dissipation
ICCOSD OVcc At no signal ⎯ 14 ⎯ mA
Notes: IRE: Units for video amplitude; 0.714 V video level is specified as 100 IRE
4fsc and 2fsc must be adjusted within ±30 ppm, including temperature dependency.
1. Bias from the sync tip clamp level (reference value after −6 dB).
2. Bias from the pedestal level (reference value after −6 dB).
3. At 4fsc input.
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 950 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
31.4.8 Flash Memory Characteristics
Table 31.32 Flash Memory Characteristics
Conditions: VCC = AVCC = 4.5 V to 5.5 V, VSS = AVSS = 0 V,
Ta = 0°C to +75°C (program/erase operating temperature range)
Item Symbol Min Typ Max Unit Note
Programming time*1*2*4 t
P ⎯ 10 200 ms/128
bytes
Erase time*1*3*5 t
E ⎯ 100 1200 ms/block
Reprogramming count NWEC 100
*8
10000
*9
— Times
Data retention time*10 t
DRP 10 — — Years
Programming Wait time after SWE1 (2)
bit setting*1
tsswe 1 1 ⎯ µs
Wait time after PSU1 (2) bit
setting*1
tspsu 50 50 ⎯ µs
Wait time after P1 (2) bit
setting*1*4
tsp30 28 30 32 µs Programming
time wait
t
sp200 198 200 202 µs Programming
time wait
t
sp10 8 10 12 µs Additional-
programming
time wait
Wait time after P1 (2) bit
clearing*1
tcp 5 5 ⎯ µs
Wait time after PSU1 (2) bit
clearing*1
tcpsu 5 5 ⎯ µs
Wait time after PV1 (2) bit
setting*1
tspv 4 4 ⎯ µs
Wait time after H'FF
dummy write*1
tspvr 2 2 ⎯ µs
Wait time after PV1 (2) bit
clearing*1
tcpv 2 2 ⎯ µs
Wait time after SWE1 (2)
bit clearing*1
tcswe 100 100 ⎯ µs
Maximum number of
writes*1*4
N ⎯ ⎯ 1000 Times
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 951 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Item Symbol Min Typ Max Unit Note
Erasing Wait time after SWE1 (2)
bit setting*1
tsswe 1 1 ⎯ µs
Wait time after ESU1 (2) bit
setting*1
tsesu 100 100 ⎯ µs
Wait time after E1 (2) bit
setting*1*5
tse 10 10 100 ms Erase time
wait
Wait time after E1 (2) bit
clearing*1
tce 10 10 ⎯ µs
Wait time after ESU1 (2) bit
clearing*1
tcesu 10 10 ⎯ µs
Wait time after EV1 (2) bit
setting*1
tsev 20 20 ⎯ µs
Wait time after H'FF
dummy write*1
tsevr 2 2 ⎯ µs
Wait time after EV1 (2) bit
clearing*1
tcev 4 4 ⎯ µs
Wait time after SWE1 (2)
bit clearing*1
tcswe 100 100 ⎯ µs
Maximum number of
erases*1*5
N 12 ⎯ 120 Times
Notes: 1. Follow the program/erase algorithms when making the time settings.
2. Programming time per 128 bytes. (Indicates the total time during which the P1 (2) bit is
set in flash memory control register 1 (FLMCR1 (2)). Does not include the program-
verify time.)
3. Time to erase one block. (Indicates the time during which the E1 (2) bit is set in
FLMCR1 (2). Does not include the erase-verify time.)
4. To specify the maximum programming time value (tP(max)) in the 128-byte
programming algorithm, set the max. value (1000) for the maximum number of writes
(N).
The wait time after P1(2) bit setting should be changed as follows according to the
value of the programming counter (n).
Programming counter (n) = 1 to 6: t sp30 = 30 µs
Programming counter (n) = 7 to 1000: t sp200 = 200 µs
Programming counter (n) [in additional programming] = 1 to 6: t sp10 = 10 µs
5. For the maximum erase time (tE) max), the following relationship applies between the
wait time after E1 (2) bit setting (tse) and the maximum number of erase (N):
(tE(max) = Wait time after E1 (2) bit setting (tse) × maximum number of erases (N))
To specify the maximum erase time, the values of tse and N should be set so as to
satisfy the above formula.
Section 31 Electrical Characteristics
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 952 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Examples: When tse = 100 [ms], N = 12
When tse = 10 [ms], N = 120
6. Minimum number of times for which all characteristics are guaranteed after rewriting
(Guarantee range is 1 to minimum value).
7. Reference value for 25°C (as a guideline, rewriting should normally function up to this
value).
8. Data retention characteristic when rewriting is performed within the specification range,
including the minimum value.
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 953 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Appendix A Instruction Set
A.1 Instructions
Operation Notation
Rd General register (destination)*1
Rs General register (source)*1
Rn General register*1
ERn General register (32-bit register)
MAC Multiplication-Addition register (32-bit register)*2
(EAd) Destination operand
(EAs) Source operand
EXR Extend register
CCR Condition code register
N N (negative flag) in CCR
Z Z (zero) flag in CCR
V V (overflow) flag in CCR
C C (carry) flag in CCR
PC Program counter
SP Stack pointer
#IMM Immediate data
disp Displacement
+ Addition
− Subtraction
× Multiplication
÷ Division
∧ Logical AND
∨ Logical OR
⊕ Exclusive logical OR
→ Move from the left to the right
∼ Logical complement
( ) <> Contents of operand
:8/:16/:24/:32 8-, 16-, 24-, 32-bit length
Notes: 1. General register is 8-bit (R0H to R7H, R0L to R7L), 16-bit (R0 to R7) or 32-bit (ER0 to
ER7).
2. MAC register cannot be used in this LSI.
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 954 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Condition Code Notation
Symbol Description
Modified according to the instruction result
* Not fixed (value not guaranteed)
0 Always cleared to 0
1 Always set to 1
− Not affected by the instruction execution result
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 955 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Table A.1 Data Transfer Instruction
MOV.B #xx:8,Rd
MOV.B Rs,Rd
MOV.B @ERs,Rd
MOV.B @(d:16,ERs),Rd
MOV.B @(d:32,ERs),Rd
MOV.B @ERs+,Rd
MOV.B @aa:8,Rd
MOV.B @aa:16,Rd
MOV.B @aa:32,Rd
MOV.B Rs,@ERd
MOV.B Rs,@(d:16,ERd)
MOV.B Rs,@(d:32,ERd)
MOV.B Rs,@-ERd
MOV.B Rs,@aa:8
MOV.B Rs,@aa:16
MOV.B Rs,@aa:32
MOV.W #xx:16,Rd
MOV.W Rs,Rd
MOV.W @ERs,Rd
MOV.W @(d:16,ERs),Rd
MOV.W @(d:32,ERs),Rd
MOV.W @ERs+,Rd
MOV.W @aa:16,Rd
MOV.W @aa:32,Rd
MOV.W Rs,@ERd
MOV.W Rs,@(d:16,ERd)
MOV.W Rs,@(d:32,ERd)
MOV.W Rs,@-ERd
MOV.W Rs,@aa:16
MOV.W Rs,@aa:32
MOV.L #xx:32,ERd
MOV.L ERs,ERd
MOV.L @ERs,ERd
MOV.L @(d:16,ERs),ERd
MOV.L @(d:32,ERs),ERd
MOV.L @ERs+,ERd
MOV.L @aa:16,ERd
MOV.L @aa:32,ERd
MOV.L ERs,@ERd
MOV.L ERs,@(d:16,ERd)
MOV.L ERs,@(d:32,ERd)
MOV.L ERs,@-ERd
MOV.L ERs,@aa:16
MOV.L ERs,@aa:32
POP.W Rn
POP.L ERn
PUSH.W Rn
PUSH.L ERn
LDM @SP+,(ERm-ERn)
STM (ERm-ERn),@-SP
MOVFPE @aa:16,Rd
MOVTPE Rs,@aa:16
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
W
L
W
L
L
L
2
4
6
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
4
4
8
4
8
4
8
4
8
6
10
6
10
2
2
2
2
4
4
2
4
6
2
4
6
4
6
4
6
6
8
6
8
MOV
POP
PUSH
LDM
*
4
STM
*
4
MOVFPE
MOVTPE
Mnemonic
Size
Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (Bytes)
#xx
Rn
@ERn
@(d,ERn)
@-ERn/@ERn+
@aa
@(d,PC)
@@aa
#xx:8→Rd8
Rs8→Rd8
@ERs→Rd8
@(d:16,ERs)→Rd8
@(d:32,ERs)→Rd8
@ERs→Rd8,ERs32+1→ERs32
@aa:8→Rd8
@aa:16→Rd8
@aa:32→Rd8
Rs8→@ERd
Rs8→@(d:16,ERd)
Rs8→@(d:32,ERd)
ERd32-1→ERd32,Rs8→@ERd
Rs8→@aa:8
Rs8→@aa:16
Rs8→@aa:32
#xx:16→Rd16
Rs16→Rd16
@ERs→Rd16
@(d:16,ERs)→Rd16
@(d:32,ERs)→Rd16
@ERs→Rd16,ERs32+2→ERs32
@aa:16→Rd16
@aa:32→Rd16
Rs16→@ERd
Rs16→@(d:16,ERd)
Rs16→@(d:32,ERd)
ERd32-2→ERd32,Rs16→@ERd
Rs16→@aa:16
Rs16→@aa:32
#xx:32→ERd32
ERs32→ERd32
@ERs→ERd32
@(d:16,ERs)→ERd32
@(d:32,ERs)→ERd32
@ERs→ERd32,ERs32+4→ERs32
@aa:16→ERd32
@aa:32→ERd32
ERs32→@ERd
ERs32→@(d:16,ERd)
ERs32→@(d:32,ERd)
ERd32-4→ERd32,ERs32→@ERd
ERs32→@aa:16
ERs32→@aa:32
@SP→Rn16,SP+2→SP
@SP→ERn32,SP+4→SP
SP-2→SP,Rn16→@SP
SP-4→SP,ERn32→@SP
(@SP→ERn32,SP+4→SP)
Repeat for the number of returns
(SP-4→SP,ERn32→@SP)
Repeat for the number of returns
Operation Condition
Code
No of
Execution
States*1
IHNZVC
Advanced Mode
2
4
2
4
4
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
—
—
1
1
2
3
5
3
2
3
4
2
3
5
3
2
3
4
2
1
2
3
5
3
3
4
2
3
5
3
3
4
3
1
4
5
7
5
5
6
4
5
7
5
5
6
3
5
3
5
7/9/11 [1]
7/9/11 [1]
[2]
[2]
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Cannot be used in this LSI
—
—
—
—
—
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 956 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Table A.2 Arithmetic Instructions
ADD.B #xx:8,Rd
ADD.B Rs,Rd
ADD.W #xx:16,Rd
ADD.W Rs,Rd
ADD.L #xx:32,ERd
ADD.L ERs,ERd
ADDX #xx:8,Rd
ADDX Rs,Rd
ADDS #1,ERd
ADDS #2,ERd
ADDS #4,ERd
INC.B Rd
INC.W #1,Rd
INC.W #2,Rd
INC.L #1,ERd
INC.L #2,ERd
DAA Rd
SUB.B Rs,Rd
SUB.W #xx:16,Rd
SUB.W Rs,Rd
SUB.L #xx:32,ERd
SUB.L ERs,ERd
SUBX #xx:8,Rd
SUBX Rs,Rd
SUBS #1,ERd
SUBS #2,ERd
SUBS #4,ERd
DEC.B Rd
DEC.W #1,Rd
DEC.W #2,Rd
DEC.L #1,ERd
DEC.L #2,ERd
DAS Rd
MULXU.B Rs,Rd
MULXU.W Rs,ERd
MULXS.B Rs,Rd
MULXS.W Rs,ERd
DIVXU.B Rs,Rd
DIVXU.W Rs,ERd
DIVXS.B Rs,Rd
DIVXS.W Rs,ERd
CMP.B #xx:8,Rd
CMP.B Rs,Rd
CMP.W #xx:16,Rd
CMP.W Rs,Rd
CMP.L #xx:32,ERd
CMP.L ERs,ERd
NEG.B Rd
NEG.W Rd
NEG.L ERd
EXTU.W Rd
EXTU.L ERd
EXTS.W Rd
EXTS.L ERd
TAS @ERd*
2
MAC @ERn+,@ERm+
CLRMAC
LDMAC ERs,MACH
LDMAC ERs,MACL
STMAC MACH,ERd
STMAC MACL,ERd
B
B
W
W
L
L
B
B
L
L
L
B
W
W
L
L
B
B
W
W
L
L
B
B
L
L
L
B
W
W
L
L
B
B
W
B
W
B
W
B
W
B
B
W
W
L
L
B
W
L
W
L
W
L
B
2
4
6
2
4
6
2
2
4
6
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
4
2
2
4
4
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
ADD
ADDX
ADDS
INC
DAA
SUB
SUBX
SUBS
DEC
DAS
MULXU
MULXS
DIVXU
DIVXS
CMP
NEG
EXTU
EXTS
TAS
MAC
CLRMAC
LDMAC
STMAC
Mnemonic
Size
#xx
Rn
@ERn
@(d,ERn)
@-ERn/@ERn+
@aa
@(d,PC)
@@aa
—
Rd8+#xx:8→Rd8
Rd8+Rs8→Rd8
Rd16+#xx:16→Rd16
Rd16+Rs16→Rd16
ERd32+#xx:32→ERd32
ERd32+ERs32→ERd32
Rd8+#xx:8+C→Rd8
Rd8+Rs8+C→Rd8
ERd32+1→ERd32
ERd32+2→ERd32
ERd32+4→ERd32
Rd8+1→Rd8
Rd16+1→Rd16
Rd16+2→Rd16
ERd32+1→ERd32
ERd32+2→ERd32
Rd8 10 Decimal adjust →Rd8
Rd8-Rs8→Rd8
Rd16-#xx:16→Rd16
Rd16-Rs16→Rd16
ERd32-#xx:32→ERd32
ERd32-ERs32→ERd32
Rd8-#xx:8-C→Rd8
Rd8-Rs8-C→Rd8
ERd32-1→ERd32
ERd32-2→ERd32
ERd32-4→ERd32
Rd8-1→Rd8
Rd16-1→Rd16
Rd16-2→Rd16
ERd32-1→ERd32
ERd32-2→ERd32
Rd8 10 Decimal adjust →Rd8
Rd8×Rs8→Rd16(Multiplication w/o sign)
Rd16×Rs16→ERd32
(Multiplication w/o sign)
Rd8×Rs8→Rd16(Multiplication w/o sign)
Rd16×Rs16→ERd32
(Multiplication w/o sign)
Rd16÷Rs8→Rd16 (RdH: Remainder, RdL:
Quatient)(Division w/o sign)
ERd32÷Rs16→ERd32 (Ed:Remainder,
Rd: Quatient)(Division with sign)
Rd16÷Rs8→Rd16(RdH: Remainder, RdL:
Quatient)(Division w/o sign)
ERd32÷Rs16→ERd32 (Ed:Remainder,
Rd: Quatient)(Division with sign)
Rd8-#xx:8
Rd8-Rs8
Rd16-#xx:16
Rd16-Rs16
ERd32-#xx:32
ERd32-ERs32
0-Rd8→Rd8
0-Rd16→Rd16
0-ERd32→ERd32
0→(<Bits 15 to 8> of Rd16)
0→(<Bits 31 to 16> of ERd32)
(<Bit7> of Rd16)→
(<Bits 15 to 8> of Rd16)
(<Bit15> of ERd32) →
(<Bits31 to 16> of ERd32)
@ERd-0→CCR set, (1)→
(<Bit7> of @ERd)
Operation Condition
Code
IHNZVC
Advanced Mode
4
—
—
—
*
1
1
2
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
12
20
13
21
12
20
13
21
1
1
2
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
[3]
[3]
[4]
[4]
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
*
[3]
[3]
[4]
[4]
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
*
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
[3]
[3]
[4]
[4]
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
[6]
[6]
[8]
[8]
0
0
[5]
[5]
—
—
—
[5]
[5]
—
—
—
—
—
[7]
[7]
[7]
[7]
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
*
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
0
0
0
0
0
—
—
—
—
—
Cannot be used in this LSI [2]
Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (Bytes)
No of
Execution
States
*1
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 957 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Table A.3 Logic Operations Instructions
AND.B #xx:8,Rd
AND.B Rs,Rd
AND.W #xx:16,Rd
AND.W Rs,Rd
AND.L #xx:32,ERd
AND.L ERs,ERd
OR.B #xx:8,Rd
OR.B Rs,Rd
OR.W #xx:16,Rd
OR.W Rs,Rd
OR.L #xx:32,ERd
OR.L ERs,ERd
XOR.B #xx:8,Rd
XOR.B Rs,Rd
XOR.W #xx:16,Rd
XOR.W Rs,Rd
XOR.L #xx:32,ERd
XOR.L ERs,ERd
NOT.B Rd
NOT.W Rd
NOT.L ERd
B
B
W
W
L
L
B
B
W
W
L
L
B
B
W
W
L
L
B
W
L
2
4
6
2
4
6
2
4
6
2
2
4
2
2
4
2
2
4
2
2
2
AND
OR
XOR
NOT
Mnemonic
Size
#xx
Rn
@ERn
@(d,ERn)
@-ERn/@ERn+
@aa
@(d,PC)
@@aa
—
Rd8∧#xx:8→Rd8
Rd8∧Rs8→Rd8
Rd16∧#xx:16→Rd16
Rd16∧Rs16→Rd16
ERd32∧#xx:32→ERd32
ERd32∧ERs32→ERd32
Rd8∨#xx:8→Rd8
Rd8∨Rs8→Rd8
Rd16∨#xx:16→Rd16
Rd16∨Rs16→Rd16
ERd32∨#xx:32→ERd32
ERd32∨ERs32→ERd32
Rd8⊕#xx:8→Rd8
Rd8⊕Rs8→Rd8
Rd16⊕#xx:16→Rd16
Rd16⊕Rs16→Rd16
ERd32⊕#xx:32→ERd32
ERd32⊕ERs32→ERd32
~Rd8→Rd8
~Rd16→Rd16
~ERd32→ERd32
Operation Condition
Code
IHNZVC
Advanced Mode
1
1
2
1
3
2
1
1
2
1
3
2
1
1
2
1
3
2
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (Bytes)
No of
Execution
States*1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 958 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Table A.4 Shift Instructions
SHAL.B Rd
SHAL.B #2,Rd
SHAL.W Rd
SHAL.W #2,Rd
SHAL.L ERd
SHAL.L #2,ERd
SHAR.B Rd
SHAR.B #2,Rd
SHAR.W Rd
SHAR.W #2,Rd
SHAR.L ERd
SHAR.L #2,ERd
SHLL.B Rd
SHLL.B #2,Rd
SHLL.W Rd
SHLL.W #2,Rd
SHLL.L ERd
SHLL.L #2,ERd
SHLR.B Rd
SHLR.B #2,Rd
SHLR.W Rd
SHLR.W #2,Rd
SHLR.L ERd
SHLR.L #2,ERd
ROTXL.B Rd
ROTXL.B #2,Rd
ROTXL.W Rd
ROTXL.W #2,Rd
ROTXL.L ERd
ROTXL.L #2,ERd
ROTXR.B Rd
ROTXR.B #2,Rd
ROTXR.W Rd
ROTXR.W #2,Rd
ROTXR.L ERd
ROTXR.L #2,ERd
ROTL.B Rd
ROTL.B #2,Rd
ROTL.W Rd
ROTL.W #2,Rd
ROTL.L ERd
ROTL.L #2,ERd
ROTR.B Rd
ROTR.B #2,Rd
ROTR.W Rd
ROTR.W #2,Rd
ROTR.L ERd
ROTR.L #2,ERd
B
B
W
W
L
L
B
B
W
W
L
L
B
B
W
W
L
L
B
B
W
W
L
L
B
B
W
W
L
L
B
B
W
W
L
L
B
B
W
W
L
L
B
B
W
W
L
L
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
SHAL
SHAR
SHLL
SHLR
ROTXL
ROTXR
ROTL
ROTR
Mnemonic
Size
#xx
Rn
@ERn
@(d,ERn)
@-ERn/@ERn+
@aa
@(d,PC)
@@aa
—
Operation Condition
Code
IHNZVC
Advanced Mode
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
C
0
MSB LSB
CMSB LSB
CMSB LSB
C
MSB LSB
C
MSB LSB
C
0
MSB LSB
C
0
MSB LSB
C
MSB LSB
Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (Bytes)
No of
Execution
States
*1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 959 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Table A.5 Bit Manipulation Instructions
BSET #xx:3,Rd
BSET #xx:3,@ERd
BSET #xx:3,@aa:8
BSET #xx:3,@aa:16
BSET #xx:3,@aa:32
BSET Rn,Rd
BSET Rn,@ERd
BSET Rn,@aa:8
BSET Rn,@aa:16
BSET Rn,@aa:32
BCLR #xx:3,Rd
BCLR #xx:3,@ERd
BCLR #xx:3,@aa:8
BCLR #xx:3,@aa:16
BCLR #xx:3,@aa:32
BCLR Rn,Rd
BCLR Rn,@ERd
BCLR Rn,@aa:8
BCLR Rn,@aa:16
BCLR Rn,@aa:32
BNOT #xx:3,Rd
BNOT #xx:3,@ERd
BNOT #xx:3,@aa:8
BNOT #xx:3,@aa:16
BNOT #xx:3,@aa:32
BNOT Rn,Rd
BNOT Rn,@ERd
BNOT Rn,@aa:8
BNOT Rn,@aa:16
BNOT Rn,@aa:32
BTST #xx:3,Rd
BTST #xx:3,@ERd
BTST #xx:3,@aa:8
BTST #xx:3,@aa:16
BTST #xx:3,@aa:32
BTST Rn,Rd
BTST Rn,@ERd
BTST Rn,@aa:8
BTST Rn,@aa:16
BTST Rn,@aa:32
BLD #xx:3,Rd
BLD #xx:3,@ERd
BLD #xx:3,@aa:8
BLD #xx:3,@aa:16
BLD #xx:3,@aa:32
BILD #xx:3,Rd
BILD #xx:3,@ERd
BILD #xx:3,@aa:8
BILD #xx:3,@aa:16
BILD #xx:3,@aa:32
BST #xx:3,Rd
BST #xx:3,@ERd
BST #xx:3,@aa:8
BST #xx:3,@aa:16
BST #xx:3,@aa:32
BIST #xx:3,Rd
BIST #xx:3,@ERd
BIST #xx:3,@aa:8
BIST #xx:3,@aa:16
BIST #xx:3,@aa:32
BAND #xx:3,Rd
BAND #xx:3,@ERd
BAND #xx:3,@aa:8
BAND #xx:3,@aa:16
BAND #xx:3,@aa:32
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
6
8
4
6
8
4
6
8
4
6
8
4
6
8
4
6
8
4
6
8
4
6
8
4
6
8
4
6
8
4
6
8
4
6
8
4
6
8
BSET
BCLR
BNOT
BTST
BLD
BILD
BST
BIST
BAND
Mnemonic
Size
#xx
Rn
@ERn
@(d,ERn)
@-ERn/@ERn+
@aa
@(d,PC)
@@aa
—
(#xx:3 of Rd8)←1
(#xx:3 of @ERd)←1
(#xx:3 of @aa:8)←1
(#xx:3 of @aa:16)←1
(#xx:3 of @aa:32)←1
(Rn8 of Rd8)←1
(Rn8 of @ERd)←1
(Rn8 of @aa:8)←1
(Rn8 of @aa:16)←1
(Rn8 of @aa:32)←1
(#xx:3 of Rd8)←0
(#xx:3 of @ERd)←0
(#xx:3 of @aa:8)←0
(#xx:3 of @aa:16)←0
(#xx:3 of @aa:32)←0
(Rn8 of Rd8)←0
(Rn8 of @ERd)←0
(Rn8 of @aa:8)←0
(Rn8 of @aa:16)←0
(Rn8 of @aa:32)←0
(#xx:3 of Rd8)←[~(#xx:3 of Rd8)]
(#xx:3 of @ERd)←[~(#xx:3 of @ERd)]
(#xx:3 of @aa:8)←[~(#xx:3 of @aa:8)]
(#xx:3 of @aa:16)←[~(#xx:3 of @aa:16)]
(#xx:3 of @aa:32)←[~(#xx:3 of @aa:32)]
(Rn8 of Rd8)←[~(Rn8 of Rd8)]
(Rn8 of @ERd)←[~(Rn8 of @ERd)]
(Rn8 of @aa:8)←[~(Rn8 of @aa:8)]
(Rn8 of @aa:16)←[~(Rn8 of @aa:16)]
(Rn8 of @aa:32)←[~(Rn8 of @aa:32)]
~(#xx:3 of Rd8)→Z
~(#xx:3 of @ERd)→Z
~(#xx:3 of @aa:8)→Z
~(#xx:3 of @aa:16)→Z
~(#xx:3 of @aa:32)→Z
~(Rn8 of Rd8)→Z
~(Rn8 of @ERd)→Z
~(Rn8 of @aa:8)→Z
~(Rn8 of @aa:16)→Z
~(Rn8 of @aa:32)→Z
(#xx:3 of Rd8)→C
(#xx:3 of @ERd)→C
(#xx:3 of @aa:8)→C
(#xx:3 of @aa:16)→C
(#xx:3 of @aa:32)→C
~(#xx:3 of Rd8)→C
~(#xx:3 of @ERd)→C
~(#xx:3 of @aa:8)→C
~(#xx:3 of @aa:16)→C
~(#xx:3 of @aa:32)→C
C→(#xx:3 of Rd8)
C→(#xx:3 of @ERd)
C→(#xx:3 of @aa:8)
C→(#xx:3 of @aa:16)
C→(#xx:3 of @aa:32)
~C→(#xx:3 of Rd8)
~C→(#xx:3 of @ERd)
~C→(#xx:3 of @aa:8)
~C→(#xx:3 of @aa:16)
~C→(#xx:3 of @aa:32)
C
∧
(#xx:3 of Rd8)→C
C
∧
(#xx:3 of @ERd)→C
C
∧
(#xx:3 of @aa:8)→C
C
∧
(#xx:3 of @aa:16)→C
C
∧
(#xx:3 of @aa:32)→C
Operation Condition
Code
IHNZVC
Advanced Mode
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
1
4
4
5
6
1
4
4
5
6
1
4
4
5
6
1
4
4
5
6
1
4
4
5
6
1
4
4
5
6
1
3
3
4
5
1
3
3
4
5
1
3
3
4
5
1
3
3
4
5
1
4
4
5
6
1
4
4
5
6
1
3
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (Bytes)
No of
Execution
States
*1
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 960 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
BIAND #xx:3,Rd
BIAND #xx:3,@ERd
BIAND #xx:3,@aa:8
BIAND #xx:3,@aa:16
BIAND #xx:3,@aa:32
BOR #xx:3,Rd
BOR #xx:3,@ERd
BOR #xx:3,@aa:8
BOR #xx:3,@aa:16
BOR #xx:3,@aa:32
BIOR #xx:3,Rd
BIOR #xx:3,@ERd
BIOR #xx:3,@aa:8
BIOR #xx:3,@aa:16
BIOR #xx:3,@aa:32
BXOR #xx:3,Rd
BXOR #xx:3,@ERd
BXOR #xx:3,@aa:8
BXOR #xx:3,@aa:16
BXOR #xx:3,@aa:32
BIXOR #xx:3,Rd
BIXOR #xx:3,@ERd
BIXOR #xx:3,@aa:8
BIXOR #xx:3,@aa:16
BIXOR #xx:3,@aa:32
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
BIAND
BOR
BIOR
BXOR
BIXOR
Mnemonic Size
#xx
Rn
@ERn
@(d,ERn)
@-ERn/@ERn+
@aa
@(d,PC)
@@aa
—
C∧ [~(#xx:3 of Rd8)]→C
C∧ [~(#xx:3 of @ERd)]→C
C∧ [~(#xx:3 of @aa:8)]→C
C∧ [~(#xx:3 of @aa:16)]→C
C∧ [~(#xx:3 of @aa:32)]→C
C∨(#xx:3 of Rd8)→C
C∨(#xx:3 of @ERd)→C
C∨(#xx:3 of @aa:8)→C
C∨(#xx:3 of @aa:16)→C
C∨(#xx:3 of @aa:32)→C
C∨ [~(#xx:3 of Rd8)]→C
C∨ [~(#xx:3 of @ERd)]→C
C∨ [~(#xx:3 of @aa:8)]→C
C∨ [~(#xx:3 of @aa:16)]→C
C∨ [~(#xx:3 of @aa:32)]→C
C⊕ (#xx:3 of Rd8)→C
C⊕ (#xx:3 of @ERd)→C
C⊕ (#xx:3 of @aa:8)→C
C⊕ (#xx:3 of @aa:16)→C
C⊕ (#xx:3 of @aa:32)→C
C⊕ [~(#xx:3 of Rd8)]→C
C⊕ [~(#xx:3 of @ERd)]→C
C⊕ [~(#xx:3 of @aa:8)]→C
C⊕ [~(#xx:3 of @aa:16)]→C
C⊕ [~(#xx:3 of @aa:32)]→C
Operation
IHNZVC Advanced Mode
2
2
2
2
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
6
8
4
6
8
4
6
8
4
6
8
4
6
8
1
3
3
4
5
1
3
3
4
5
1
3
3
4
5
1
3
3
4
5
1
3
3
4
5
Condition
Code
Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (Bytes)
No of
Execution
States*1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 961 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Table A.6 Branch Instructions
BRA d:8(BT d:8)
BRA d:16(BT d:16)
BRN d:8(BF d:8)
BRN d:16(BF d:16)
BHI d:8
BHI d:16
BLS d:8
BLS d:16
BCC d:8(BHS d:8)
BCC d:16(BHS d:16)
BCS d:8(BLO d:8)
BCS d:16(BLO d:16)
BNE d:8
BNE d:16
BEQ d:8
BEQ d:16
BVC d:8
BVC d:16
BVS d:8
BVS d:16
BPL d:8
BPL d:16
BMI d:8
BMI d:16
BGE d:8
BGE d:16
BLT d:8
BLT d:16
Bcc
Mnemonic
Size
#xx
Rn
@ERn
@(d,ERn)
@-ERn/@ERn+
@aa
@(d,PC)
@@aa
—
Operation
I
Branch
Condition
HNZVC
Advanced Mode
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
Always
Never
C∨Z=0
C∨Z=1
C=0
C=1
Z=0
Z=1
V=0
V=1
N=0
N=1
N⊕V=0
N⊕V=1
if condition is true then
PC←PC+d
else next;
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
2
3
Operation
Code
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
BGT d:8
BGT d:16
BLE d:8
BLE d:16
JMP @ERn
JMP @aa:24
JMP @@aa:8
BSR d:8
BSR d:16
JSR @ERn
JSR @aa:24
JSR @@aa:8
RTS
JMP
BSR
JSR
RTS
PC←ERn
PC←aa:24
PC←@aa:8
PC→@-SP,PC←PC+d:8
PC→@-SP,PC←PC+d:16
PC→@-SP,PC←ERn
PC→@-SP,PC←aa:24
PC→@-SP,PC←@aa:8
PC←@SP+
2
2
4
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
2
2
2
3
2
3
2
3
Z∨(N⊕V)=0
Z∨(N⊕V)=1
5
4
5
4
5
6
5
Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (Bytes)
No of
Execution
States
*1
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 962 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Table A.7 System Control Instructions
TRAPA #x:2
RTE
SLEEP
LDC #xx:8,CCR
LDC #xx:8,EXR
LDC Rs,CCR
LDC Rs,EXR
LDC @ERs,CCR
LDC @ERs,EXR
LDC @(d:16,ERs),CCR
LDC @(d:16,ERs),EXR
LDC @(d:32,ERs),CCR
LDC @(d:32,ERs),EXR
LDC @ERs+,CCR
LDC @ERs+,EXR
LDC @aa:16,CCR
LDC @aa:16,EXR
LDC @aa:32,CCR
LDC @aa:32,EXR
STC.B CCR,Rd
STC.B EXR,Rd
STC.W CCR,@ERd
STC.W EXR,@ERd
STC.W CCR,@(d:16,ERd)
STC.W EXR,@(d:16,ERd)
STC.W CCR,@(d:32,ERd)
STC.W EXR,@(d:32,ERd)
STC.W CCR,@-ERd
STC.W EXR,@-ERd
STC.W CCR,@aa:16
STC.W EXR,@aa:16
STC.W CCR,@aa:32
STC.W EXR,@aa:32
ANDC #xx:8,CCR
ANDC #xx:8,EXR
ORC #xx:8,CCR
ORC #xx:8,EXR
XORC #xx:8,CCR
XORC #xx:8,EXR
NOP
—
—
—
B
B
B
B
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
B
B
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
B
B
B
B
B
B
—
TRAPA
RTE
SLEEP
LDC
STC
ANDC
ORC
XORC
NOP
Mnemonic
Size
#xx
Rn
@ERn
@(d,ERn)
@-ERn/@ERn+
@aa
@(d,PC)
@@aa
—
PC→@-SP,CCR→@-SP,
EXR→@-SP,<Vector>→PC
EXR←@SP+,CCR←@SP+,
PC←@SP+
Transition to power-down state
#xx:8→CCR
#xx:8→EXR
Rs8→CCR
Rs8→EXR
@ERs→CCR
@ERs→EXR
@(d:16,ERs)→CCR
@(d:16,ERs)→EXR
@(d:32,ERs)→CCR
@(d:32,ERs)→EXR
@ERs→CCR,ERs32+2→ERs32
@ERs→EXR,ERs32+2→ERs32
@aa:16→CCR
@aa:16→EXR
@aa:32→CCR
@aa:32→EXR
CCR→Rd8
EXR→Rd8
CCR→@ERd
EXR→@ERd
CCR→@(d:16,ERd)
EXR→@(d:16,ERd)
CCR→@(d:32,ERd)
EXR→@(d:32,ERd)
ERd32-2→ERd32,CCR→@ERd
ERd32-2→ERd32,EXR→@ERd
CCR→@aa:16
EXR→@aa:16
CCR→@aa:32
EXR→@aa:32
CCR∧#xx:8→CCR
EXR∧ #xx:8→EXR
CCR∨#xx:8→CCR
EXR∨#xx:8→EXR
CCR⊕#xx:8→CCR
EXR⊕#xx:8→EXR
PC←PC+2
Operation
IHNZVC
Advanced Mode
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
2
2
2
4
4
4
4
6
6
10
10
6
6
10
10
4
4
4
4
6
6
8
8
6
6
8
8
2
5 [9]
2
1
2
1
1
3
3
4
4
6
6
4
4
4
4
5
5
1
1
3
3
4
4
6
6
4
4
4
4
5
5
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
8 [9]
Condition
Code
Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (Bytes)
No of
Execution
States*1
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 963 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Table A.8 Block Transfer Instructions
EEPMOV.B
EEPMOV.W
—
—
EEPMOV
Mnemonic
Size
#xx
Rn
@ERn
@(d,ERn)
@-ERn/@ERn+
@aa
@(d,PC)
@@aa
—
Operation
IHNZVC
Advanced Mode
4
4
4+2n*
3
4+2n*
3
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Condition
Code
if R4L≠0
Repeat @ER5→@ER6
ER5+1→ER5
ER6+1→ER6
R4L-1→R4L
Until R4L=0
else next;
if R4≠0
Repeat @ER5→@ER6
ER5+1→ER5
ER6+1→ER6
R4-1→R4
Until R4=0
else next;
Addressing Mode and Instruction Length (Bytes)
No of
Execution
States
*1
Notes: 1. The values indicated in the column of number of execution states apply when
instruction code and operand exist in the on-chip memory.
2. Only register ER0, ER1, ER4, or ER5 should be used when using the TAS instruction.
3. n is the initial setting value of R4L or R4.
4. Only registers ER0 to ER6 should be used when using the STM/LDM instruction.
[1] 7 states when the number of return/retract registers is 2, 9 states when the number of
registers is 3, and 11 states when the number of registers is 4.
[2] Cannot be used in this LSI.
[3] Set to 1 when a carry or borrow occurs at bit 11, otherwise cleared to 0.
[4] Set to 1 when a carry or borrow occurs at bit 27, otherwise cleared to 0.
[5] Retains the value before computation when the computation result is 0, otherwise
cleared to 0.
[6] Set to 1 when the divisor is negative, otherwise cleared to 0.
[7] Set to 1 when the divisor is 0, otherwise cleared to 0.
[8] Set to 1 when the quotient is negative, otherwise cleared to 0.
[9] 1 is added to the number of execution states when EXR is valid.
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 964 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
A.2 Instruction Codes
Table A.9 Instruction Codes
ADD
ADDS
ADDX
AND
ANDC
BAND
Bcc
ADD.B #xx:8,Rd
ADD.B Rs,Rd
ADD.W #xx:16,Rd
ADD.W Rs,Rd
ADD.L #xx:32,ERd
ADD.L ERs,ERd
ADDS #1,ERd
ADDS #2,ERd
ADDS #4,ERd
ADDX #xx:8,Rd
ADDX Rs,Rd
AND.B #xx:8,Rd
AND.B Rs,Rd
AND.W #xx:16,Rd
AND.W Rs,Rd
AND.L #xx:32,ERd
AND.L ERs,ERd
ANDC #xx:8,CCR
ANDC #xx:8,EXR
BAND #xx:3,Rd
BAND #xx:3,@ERd
BAND #xx:3,@aa:8
BAND #xx:3,@aa:16
BAND #xx:3,@aa:32
BRA d:8 (BT d:8)
BRA d:16 (BT d:16)
BRN d:8 (BF d:8)
BRN d:16 (BF d:16)
BHI d:8
BHI d:16
BLS d:8
BLS d:16
BCC d:8 (BHS d:8)
BCC d:16 (BHS d:16)
BCS d:8 (BLO d:8)
BCS d:16 (BLO d:16)
BNE d:8
BNE d:16
BEQ d:8
BEQ d:16
BVC d:8
BVC d:16
BVS d:8
BVS d:16
Mnemonic Instruction Format
1st byte
B
B
W
W
L
L
L
L
L
B
B
B
B
W
W
L
L
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
8
0
7
0
7
0
0
0
0
9
0
E
1
7
6
7
0
0
0
7
7
7
6
6
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
rd
8
9
9
A
A
B
B
B
rd
E
rd
6
9
6
A
1
6
1
6
C
E
A
A
0
8
1
8
2
8
3
8
4
8
5
8
6
8
7
8
8
8
9
8
rs
1
rs
1
1 ers
0
8
9
rs
rs
6
rs
6
F
4
0 IMM
0 erd
1
3
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
IMM
IMM
IMM
IMM
abs
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
rd
rd
rd
0 erd
0 erd
0 erd
0 erd
0 erd
rd
rd
rd
rd
0 erd
0
1
rd
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 IMM
0 IMM
0
0
6
0
7
7
IMM
IMM
abs
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
IMM
IMM
abs
6
6
6
6
0 IMM 0
7
6
0 IMM 0
7
6
2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte 5th byte 6th byte 7the byte 8th byte 9th byte 10th byte
Size
Instruction
0 ers 0 erd
IMM
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 965 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Bcc
(Cont.)
BCLR
BIAND
BILD
BIOR
BIST
BPL d:8
BPL d:16
BMI d:8
BMI d:16
BGE d:8
BGE d:16
BLT d:8
BLT d:16
BGT d:8
BGT d:16
BLE d:8
BLE d:16
BCLR #xx:3,Rd
BCLR #xx:3,@ERd
BCLR #xx:3,@aa:8
BCLR #xx:3,@aa:16
BCLR #xx:3,@aa:32
BCLR Rn,Rd
BCLR Rn,@ERd
BCLR Rn,@aa:8
BCLR Rn,@aa:16
BCLR Rn,@aa:32
BIAND #xx:3,Rd
BIAND #xx:3,@ERd
BIAND #xx:3,@aa:8
BIAND #xx:3,@aa:16
BIAND #xx:3,@aa:32
BILD #xx:3,Rd
BILD #xx:3,@ERd
BILD #xx:3,@aa:8
BILD #xx:3,@aa:16
BILD #xx:3,@aa:32
BIOR #xx:3,Rd
BIOR #xx:3,@ERd
BIOR #xx:3,@aa:8
BIOR #xx:3,@aa:16
BIOR #xx:3,@aa:32
BIST #xx:3,Rd
BIST #xx:3,@ERd
BIST #xx:3,@aa:8
BIST #xx:3,@aa:16
BIST #xx:3,@aa:32
Mnemonic Instruction Format
1st byte
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
4
5
7
7
7
6
6
6
7
7
6
6
7
7
7
6
6
7
7
7
6
6
7
7
7
6
6
6
7
7
6
6
A
8
B
8
C
8
D
8
E
8
F
8
2
D
F
A
A
2
D
F
A
A
6
C
E
A
A
7
C
E
A
A
4
C
E
A
A
7
D
F
A
A
A
B
C
D
E
F
0 IMM
0 erd
1
3
rn
0 erd
1
3
1 IMM
0 erd
1
3
1 IMM
0 erd
1
3
1 IMM
0 erd
1
3
1 IMM
0 erd
1
3
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
abs
abs
abs
abs
abs
abs
0
0
0
0
0
0
rd
0
8
8
rd
0
8
8
rd
0
0
0
rd
0
0
0
rd
0
0
0
rd
0
8
8
7
7
6
6
7
7
7
7
7
7
6
6
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
disp
2
2
abs
2
2
abs
6
6
abs
7
7
abs
4
4
abs
7
7
abs
0 IMM
0 IMM
rn
rn
1 IMM
1 IMM
1 IMM
1 IMM
1 IMM
1 IMM
1 IMM
1 IMM
0
0
abs
0
0
abs
0
0
abs
0
0
abs
0
0
abs
0
0
abs
7
6
7
7
7
6
2
2
6
7
4
7
0 IMM
rn
1 IMM
1 IMM
1 IMM
1 IMM
0
0
0
0
0
0
7
6
7
7
7
6
2
2
6
7
4
7
0 IMM
rn
1 IMM
1 IMM
1 IMM
1 IMM
0
0
0
0
0
0
2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte 5th byte 6th byte 7th byte 8th byte 9th byte 10th byte
Size
Instruction
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 966 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
BIXOR
BLD
BNOT
BOR
BSET
BSR
BST
BIXOR #xx:3,Rd
BIXOR #xx:3,@ERd
BIXOR #xx:3,@aa:8
BIXOR #xx:3,@aa:16
BIXOR #xx:3,@aa:32
BLD #xx:3,Rd
BLD #xx:3,@ERd
BLD #xx:3,@aa:8
BLD #xx:3,@aa:16
BLD #xx:3,@aa:32
BNOT #xx:3,Rd
BNOT #xx:3,@ERd
BNOT #xx:3,@aa:8
BNOT #xx:3,@aa:16
BNOT #xx:3,@aa:32
BNOT Rn,Rd
BNOT Rn,@ERd
BNOT Rn,@aa:8
BNOT Rn,@aa:16
BNOT Rn,@aa:32
BOR #xx:3,Rd
BOR #xx:3,@ERd
BOR #xx:3,@aa:8
BOR #xx:3,@aa:16
BOR #xx:3,@aa:32
BSET #xx:3,Rd
BSET #xx:3,@ERd
BSET #xx:3,@aa:8
BSET #xx:3,@aa:16
BSET #xx:3,@aa:32
BSET Rn,Rd
BSET Rn,@ERd
BSET Rn,@aa:8
BSET Rn,@aa:16
BSET Rn,@aa:32
BSR d:8
BSR d:16
BST #xx:3,Rd
BST #xx:3,@ERd
BST #xx:3,@aa:8
BST #xx:3,@aa:16
BST #xx:3,@aa:32
Mnemonic Instruction Format
1st byte
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
—
—
B
B
B
B
B
7
7
7
6
6
7
7
7
6
6
7
7
7
6
6
6
7
7
6
6
7
7
7
6
6
7
7
7
6
6
6
7
7
6
6
5
5
6
7
7
6
6
5
C
E
A
A
7
C
E
A
A
1
D
F
A
A
1
D
F
A
A
4
C
E
A
A
0
D
F
A
A
0
D
F
A
A
5
C
7
D
F
A
A
1 IMM
0 erd
abs
1
3
0 IMM
0 erd
abs
1
3
0 IMM
0 erd
abs
1
3
rn
0 erd
abs
1
3
0 IMM
0 erd
abs
1
3
0 IMM
0 erd
abs
1
3
rn
0 erd
abs
1
3
disp
0
0 IMM
0 erd
abs
1
3
rd
0
0
0
rd
0
0
0
rd
0
8
8
rd
0
8
8
rd
0
0
0
rd
0
8
8
rd
0
8
8
0
rd
0
8
8
7
7
7
7
7
7
6
6
7
7
7
7
6
6
6
6
5
5
abs
7
7
abs
1
1
abs
1
1
abs
4
4
abs
0
0
abs
0
0
abs
disp
7
7
abs
1 IMM
1 IMM
0 IMM
0 IMM
0 IMM
0 IMM
rn
rn
0 IMM
0 IMM
0 IMM
0 IMM
rn
rn
0 IMM
0 IMM
0
0
abs
0
0
abs
0
0
abs
0
0
abs
0
0
abs
0
0
abs
0
0
abs
0
0
abs
7
7
7
6
7
7
6
6
5
7
1
1
4
0
0
7
1 IMM
0 IMM
0 IMM
rn
0 IMM
0 IMM
rn
0 IMM
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
7
7
7
6
7
7
6
6
5
7
1
1
4
0
0
7
1 IMM
0 IMM
0 IMM
rn
0 IMM
0 IMM
rn
0 IMM
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte 5th byte 6th byte 7th byte 8th byte 9th byte 10th byte
Size
Instruction
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 967 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
BTST
BXOR
CLRMAC
CMP
DAA
DAS
DEC
DIVXS
DIVXU
EEPMOV
EXTS
EXTU
BTST #xx:3,Rd
BTST #xx:3,@ERd
BTST #xx:3,@aa:8
BTST #xx:3,@aa:16
BTST #xx:3,@aa:32
BTST Rn,Rd
BTST Rn,@ERd
BTST Rn,@aa:8
BTST Rn,@aa:16
BTST Rn,@aa:32
BXOR #xx:3,Rd
BXOR #xx:3,@ERd
BXOR #xx:3,@aa:8
BXOR #xx:3,@aa:16
BXOR #xx:3,@aa:32
CLRMAC
CMP.B #xx:8,Rd
CMP.B Rs,Rd
CMP.W #xx:16,Rd
CMP.W Rs,Rd
CMP.L #xx:32,ERd
CMP.L ERs,ERd
DAA Rd
DAS Rd
DEC.B Rd
DEC.W #1,Rd
DEC.W #2,Rd
DEC.L #1,ERd
DEC.L #2,ERd
DIVXS.B Rs,Rd
DIVXS.W Rs,ERd
DIVXU.B Rs,Rd
DIVXU.W Rs,ERd
EEPMOV.B
EEPMOV.W
EXTS.W Rd
EXTS.L ERd
EXTU.W Rd
EXTU.L ERd
Mnemonic Instruction Format
1st byte
Cannot be used in this LSI
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
—
B
B
W
W
L
L
B
B
B
W
W
L
L
B
W
B
W
—
—
W
L
W
L
7
7
7
6
6
6
7
7
6
6
7
7
7
6
6
A
1
7
1
7
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
5
5
7
7
1
1
1
1
3
C
E
A
A
3
C
E
A
A
5
C
E
A
A
rd
C
9
D
A
F
F
F
A
B
B
B
B
1
1
1
3
B
B
7
7
7
7
0 IMM
0 erd
abs
1
3
rn
0 erd
abs
1
3
0 IMM
0 erd
abs
1
3
IMM
rs
2
rs
2
1 ers
0
0
0
5
D
7
F
D
D
rs
rs
5
D
D
F
5
7
rd
0
0
0
rd
0
0
0
rd
0
0
0
rd
rd
rd
0 erd
0 erd
rd
rd
rd
rd
rd
0 erd
0 erd
0
0
rd
0 erd
C
4
rd
0 erd
rd
0 erd
7
7
6
6
7
7
5
5
5
5
3
3
abs
3
3
abs
5
5
abs
IMM
1
3
9
9
0 IMM
0 IMM
rn
rn
0 IMM
0 IMM
rs
rs
8
8
0
0
abs
0
0
abs
0
0
abs
IMM
rd
0 erd
F
F
7
6
7
3
3
5
0 IMM
rn
0 IMM
0
0
0
7
6
7
3
3
5
0 IMM
rn
0 IMM
0
0
0
2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte 5th byte 6th byte 7th byte 8th byte 9th byte 10th byte
Size
Instruction
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 968 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
INC
JMP
JSR
LDC
LDM*
3
LDMAC
MAC
MOV
INC.B Rd
INC.W #1,Rd
INC.W #2,Rd
INC.L #1,ERd
INC.L #2,ERd
JMP @ERn
JMP @aa:24
JMP @@aa:8
JSR @ERn
JSR @aa:24
JSR @@aa:8
LDC #xx:8,CCR
LDC #xx:8,EXR
LDC Rs,CCR
LDC Rs,EXR
LDC @ERs,CCR
LDC @ERs,EXR
LDC @(d:16,ERs),CCR
LDC @(d:16,ERs),EXR
LDC @(d:32,ERs),CCR
LDC @(d:32,ERs),EXR
LDC @ERs+,CCR
LDC @ERs+,EXR
LDC @aa:16,CCR
LDC @aa:16,EXR
LDC @aa:32,CCR
LDC @aa:32,EXR
LDM.L @SP+, (ERn-ERn+1)
LDM.L @SP+, (ERn-ERn+2)
LDM.L @SP+, (ERn-ERn+3)
LDMAC ERs,MACH
LDMAC ERs,MACL
MAC @ERn+,@ERm+
MOV.B #xx:8,Rd
MOV.B Rs,Rd
MOV.B @ERs,Rd
MOV.B @(d:16,ERs),Rd
MOV.B @(d:32,ERs),Rd
MOV.B @ERs+,Rd
MOV.B @aa:8,Rd
MOV.B @aa:16,Rd
MOV.B @aa:32,Rd
MOV.B Rs,@ERd
MOV.B Rs,@(d:16,ERd)
MOV.B Rs,@(d:32,ERd)
Mnemonic Instruction Format
Cannot be used in this LSI
1st byte
B
W
W
L
L
—
—
—
—
—
—
B
B
B
B
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
L
L
L
L
L
—
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
0
0
0
0
0
5
5
5
5
5
5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
F
0
6
6
7
6
2
6
6
6
6
7
A
B
B
B
B
9
A
B
D
E
F
7
1
3
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
rd
C
8
E
8
C
rd
A
A
8
E
8
0
5
D
7
F
0 ern
abs
0 ern
abs
IMM
4
0
1
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
2
3
IMM
rs
0 ers
0 ers
0 ers
0 ers
abs
0
2
1 erd
1 erd
0 erd
rd
rd
rd
0 erd
0 erd
0
0
1
rs
rs
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
rd
rd
rd
0
rd
rd
rd
rs
rs
0
abs
abs
0
6
6
6
6
7
7
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
7
9
9
F
F
8
8
D
D
B
B
B
B
D
D
D
disp
A
abs
disp
A
IMM
0 ers
0 ers
0 ers
0 ers
0 ers
0 ers
0 ers
0 ers
0
0
2
2
7
7
7
2
A
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 ern+1
0 ern+2
0 ern+3
rd
abs
rs
6
6
disp
disp
B
B
abs
abs
2
2
0
0
abs
abs
disp
disp
disp
disp
2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte 5th byte 6th byte 7th byte 8th byte 9th byte 10 byte
Size
Instruction
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 969 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
MOV
(Cont.)
MOVFPE
MOVTPE
MULXS
MULXU
NEG
NOP
MOV.B Rs,@-ERd
MOV.B Rs,@aa:8
MOV.B Rs,@aa :16
MOV.B Rs,@aa:32
MOV.W #xx:16,Rd
MOV.W Rs,Rd
MOV.W @ERs,Rd
MOV.W @(d:16,ERs),Rd
MOV.W @(d:32,ERs),Rd
MOV.W @ERs+,Rd
MOV.W @aa:16,Rd
MOV.W @aa:32,Rd
MOV.W Rs,@ERd
MOV.W Rs,@(d:16,ERd)
MOV.W Rs,@(d:32,ERd)
MOV.W Rs,@-ERd
MOV.W Rs,@aa:16
MOV.W Rs,@aa:32
MOV.L #xx:32,Rd
MOV.L ERs,ERd
MOV.L @ERs,ERd
MOV.L @(d:16,ERs),ERd
MOV.L @(d:32,ERs),ERd
MOV.L @ERs+,ERd
MOV.L @aa:16 ,ERd
MOV.L @aa:32 ,ERd
MOV.L ERs,@ERd
MOV.L ERs,@(d:16,ERd)
MOV.L ERs,@(d:32,ERd)*
1
MOV.L ERs,@-ERd
MOV.L ERs,@aa:16
MOV.L ERs,@aa:32
MOVFPE @aa:16,Rd
MOVTPE Rs,@aa:16
MULXS.B Rs,Rd
MULXS.W Rs,ERd
MULXU.B Rs,Rd
MULXU.W Rs,ERd
NEG.B Rd
NEG.W Rd
NEG.L ERd
NOP
Mnemonic Instruction Format
1st byte
Cannot be used in this LSI
B
B
B
B
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
B
B
B
W
B
W
B
W
L
—
6
3
6
6
7
0
6
6
7
6
6
6
6
6
7
6
6
6
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
5
5
1
1
1
0
C
rs
A
A
9
D
9
F
8
D
B
B
9
F
8
D
B
B
A
F
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
2
7
7
7
0
1 erd
abs
8
A
0
rs
0 ers
0 ers
0 ers
0 ers
0
2
1 erd
1 erd
0 erd
1 erd
8
A
0
1 ers
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
C
C
rs
rs
8
9
B
0
rs
rs
rs
rd
rd
rd
rd
0
rd
rd
rd
rs
rs
0
rs
rs
rs
0 erd
0 erd
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
rd
0 erd
rd
rd
0 erd
0
6
6
6
6
7
6
6
6
6
6
7
6
6
6
5
5
abs
IMM
disp
B
abs
disp
B
abs
9
F
8
D
B
B
9
F
8
D
B
B
0
2
2
A
0 ers
0 ers
0 ers
0 ers
0
2
1 erd
1 erd
0 erd
1 erd
8
A
rs
rs
abs
rd
abs
rs
abs
IMM
0 erd
0 erd
0
0 erd
0 erd
0 erd
0 ers
0 ers
0
0 ers
0 ers
0 ers
rd
0 erd
6
6
disp
B
abs
disp
B
abs
2
A
disp
disp
0 erd
abs
0 ers
abs
disp
disp
2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte 5th byte 6th byte 7th byte 8th byte 9th byte 10th byte
Size
Instruction
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 970 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
NOT
OR
ORC
POP
PUSH
ROTL
ROTR
ROTXL
ROTXR
RTE
RTS
NOT.B Rd
NOT.W Rd
NOT.L ERd
OR.B #xx:8,Rd
OR.B Rs,Rd
OR.W #xx:16,Rd
OR.W Rs,Rd
OR.L #xx:32,ERd
OR.L ERs,ERd
ORC #xx:8,CCR
ORC #xx:8,EXR
POP.W Rn
POP.L ERn
PUSH.W Rn
PUSH.L ERn
ROTL.B Rd
ROTL.B #2, Rd
ROTL.W Rd
ROTL.W #2, Rd
ROTL.L ERd
ROTL.L #2, ERd
ROTR.B Rd
ROTR.B #2, Rd
ROTR.W Rd
ROTR.W #2, Rd
ROTR.L ERd
ROTR.L #2, ERd
ROTXL.B Rd
ROTXL.B #2, Rd
ROTXL.W Rd
ROTXL.W #2, Rd
ROTXL.L ERd
ROTXL.L #2, ERd
ROTXR.B Rd
ROTXR.B #2, Rd
ROTXR.W Rd
ROTXR.W #2, Rd
ROTXR.L ERd
ROTXR.L #2, ERd
RTE
RTS
Mnemonic Instruction Format
1st byte
B
W
L
B
B
W
W
L
L
B
B
W
L
W
L
B
B
W
W
L
L
B
B
W
W
L
L
B
B
W
W
L
L
B
B
W
W
L
L
—
—
1
1
1
C
1
7
6
7
0
0
0
6
0
6
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
5
5
7
7
7
rd
4
9
4
A
1
4
1
D
1
D
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
6
4
0
1
3
IMM
rs
4
rs
4
F
IMM
4
7
0
F
0
8
C
9
D
B
F
8
C
9
D
B
F
0
4
1
5
3
7
0
4
1
5
3
7
7
7
rd
rd
0 erd
rd
rd
rd
0 erd
0
1
rn
0
rn
0
rd
rd
rd
rd
0 erd
0 erd
rd
rd
rd
rd
0 erd
0 erd
rd
rd
rd
rd
0 erd
0 erd
rd
rd
rd
rd
0 erd
0 erd
0
0
6
0
6
6
IMM
4
4
D
D
0 ers
IMM
7
F
IMM
0 erd
0 ern
0 ern
2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte 5th byte 6th byte 7th byte 8th byte 9th byte 10th byte
Size
Instruction
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 971 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
SHAL
SHAR
SHLL
SHLR
SLEEP
STC
STM
*3
STMAC
SHAL.B Rd
SHAL.B #2, Rd
SHAL.W Rd
SHAL.W #2, Rd
SHAL.L ERd
SHAL.L #2, ERd
SHAR.B Rd
SHAR.B #2, Rd
SHAR.W Rd
SHAR.W #2, Rd
SHAR.L ERd
SHAR.L #2, ERd
SHLL.B Rd
SHLL.B #2, Rd
SHLL.W Rd
SHLL.W #2, Rd
SHLL.L ERd
SHLL.L #2, ERd
SHLR.B Rd
SHLR.B #2, Rd
SHLR.W Rd
SHLR.W #2, Rd
SHLR.L ERd
SHLR.L #2, ERd
SLEEP
STC.B CCR,Rd
STC.B EXR,Rd
STC.W CCR,@ERd
STC.W EXR,@ERd
STC.W CCR,@(d:16,ERd)
STC.W EXR,@(d:16,ERd)
STC.W CCR,@(d:32,ERd)
STC.W EXR,@(d:32,ERd)
STC.W CCR,@-ERd
STC.W EXR,@-ERd
STC.W CCR,@aa:16
STC.W EXR,@aa:16
STC.W CCR,@aa:32
STC.W EXR,@aa:32
STM.L(ERn-ERn+1) , @-SP
STM.L (ERn-ERn+2) , @-SP
STM.L (ERn-ERn+3) , @-SP
STMAC MACH,ERd
STMAC MACL,ERd
Mnemonic Instruction Format
1st byte
B
B
W
W
L
L
B
B
W
W
L
L
B
B
W
W
L
L
B
B
W
W
L
L
—
B
B
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
L
L
L
L
L
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
8
C
9
D
B
F
8
C
9
D
B
F
0
4
1
5
3
7
0
4
1
5
3
7
8
0
1
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
2
3
rd
rd
rd
rd
0 erd
0 erd
rd
rd
rd
rd
0 erd
0 erd
rd
rd
rd
rd
0 erd
0 erd
rd
rd
rd
rd
0 erd
0 erd
0
rd
rd
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
6
6
6
6
7
7
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
9
9
F
F
8
8
D
D
B
B
B
B
D
D
D
1 erd
1 erd
1 erd
1 erd
0 erd
0 erd
1 erd
1 erd
8
8
A
A
F
F
F
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 ern
0 ern
0 ern
6
6
disp
disp
B
B
abs
abs
A
A
0
0
abs
abs
disp
disp
2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte 5th byte 6th byte 7th byte 8th byte 9th byte 10th byte
Size
Instruction
Cannot be used in this LSI
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 972 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
SUB
SUBS
SUBX
TAS
TRAPA
XOR
XORC
SUB.B Rs,Rd
SUB.W #xx:16,Rd
SUB.W Rs,Rd
SUB.L #xx:32,ERd
SUB.L ERs,ERd
SUBS #1,ERd
SUBS #2,ERd
SUBS #4,ERd
SUBX #xx:8,Rd
SUBX Rs,Rd
TAS @ERd*
2
TRAPA #x:2
XOR.B #xx:8,Rd
XOR.B Rs,Rd
XOR.W #xx:16,Rd
XOR.W Rs,Rd
XOR.L #xx:32,ERd
XOR.L ERs,ERd
XORC #xx:8,CCR
XORC #xx:8,EXR
Mnemonic Instruction Format
1st byte
B
W
W
L
L
L
L
L
B
B
B
—
B
B
W
W
L
L
B
B
1
7
1
7
1
1
1
1
B
1
0
5
D
1
7
6
7
0
0
0
8
9
9
A
A
B
B
B
rd
E
1
7
rd
5
9
5
A
1
5
1
rs
3
rs
3
1 ers
0
8
9
IMM
rs
E
IMM
IMM
rs
5
rs
5
F
IMM
4
rd
rd
rd
0 erd
0 erd
0 erd
0 erd
0 erd
rd
0
0
rd
rd
rd
0 erd
0
1
7
6
0
IMM
B
IMM
5
5
0 erd
0 ers
IMM
IMM
C
IMM
0 erd
2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte 5th byte 6th byte 7th byte 8th byte 9th byte 10th byte
Size
Instruction
Notes: 1. Either 1 or 0 can be set to bit 7 in 4th byte of MOV.L ERs, @(d: 32, ERd) instruction.
2. Only register ER0, ER1, ER4, or ER5 should be used when using the TAS instruction.
3. Only registers ER0 to ER6 should be used when using the STM/LDM instruction.
Legend:
IMM : Immediate data (2, 3, 8, 16, 32 bits)
abs : Absolute address (8, 16, 24, 32 bits)
disp : Displacement (8, 16, 32 bits)
rs, rd, rn : Register fields (8-bit register or 16-bit register is selected in 4 bits. rs, rd and rn correspond to the operand type Rs, Rd, and Rn respectively.)
ers, erd, ern, erm : Register fields (address register or 32-bit register is selected in 3 bits. ers, erd ern and erm correspond to the operand type ERs,
ERd, ERn and Rm respectively.)
00
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 973 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
The following table shows the correspondence between the register field and the general register.
Address Register, 32-bit
Register
16-bit Register
8-bit Register
Register Field General
Register
Register Field General
Register
Register Field General
Register
000
001
:
:
:
:
111
ER0
ER1
:
:
:
:
ER7
0000
0001
:
:
:
:
0111
1000
1001
:
:
:
:
1111
R0
R1
:
:
:
:
R7
E0
E1
:
:
:
:
E7
0000
0001
:
:
:
:
0111
1000
1001
:
:
:
:
1111
R0H
R1H
:
:
:
:
R7H
R0L
R1L
:
:
:
:
R7L
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 974 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
A.3 Operation Code Map
Table A.10 shows an operation code map.
Table A.10 Operation Code Map
Instruction code: 1st byte 2nd byte
AH AL BH BL
BH highest bit is set to 0.
BH highest bit is set to 1
0
NOP
BRA
MULXU
BSET
AH
AL
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
1
BRN
DIVXU
BNOT
2
BHI
MULXU
BCLR
3
BLS
DIVXU
BTST
STC
STMAC
LDC
LDMAC
4
ORC
OR
BCC
RTS
OR
BOR
BIOR
6
ANDC
AND
BNE
RTE
AND
5
XORC
XOR
BCS
BSR
XOR
BXOR
BIXOR
BAND
BIAND
7
LDC
BEQ
TRAPA
BST
BIST
BLD
BILD
8
BVC
MOV
9
BVS
A
BPL
JMP
B
BMI
EEPMOV
C
BGE
BSR
D
BLT
MOV
E
ADDX
SUBX
BGT
JSR
F
BLE
MOV.B
ADD
ADDX
CMP
SUBX
OR
XOR
AND
MOV
ADD
SUB
MOV
MOV
CMP
Table
A.2
**
Note: * Cannot be used in this LSI
Table A.2
Table A.2
Table A.2 Table A.2
Table A.2
Table A.2
TableA.2
Table A.2
Table A.2
Table A.2
Table A.2
Table A.2
Table A.2Table A.2 Table A.2 Table A.2
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 975 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Instruction code: 1st byte 2nd byte
AH AL BH BL
01
0A
0B
0F
10
11
12
13
17
1A
1B
1F
58
6A
79
7A
0
MOV
INC
ADDS
DAA
DEC
SUBS
DAS
BRA
MOV
MOV
MOV
SHLL
SHLR
ROTXL
ROTXR
NOT
1
LDM
BRN
ADD
ADD
2
BHI
MOV
CMP
CMP
3
STM
NOT
BLS
SUB
SUB
4
SHLL
SHLR
ROTXL
ROTXR
BCC
MOVFPE
OR
OR
5
INC
EXTU
DEC
BCS
XOR
XOR
6
MAC
BNE
AND
AND
7
INC
SHLL
SHLR
ROTXL
ROTXR
EXTU
DEC
BEQ
LDC
STC
8
SLEEP
BVC
MOV
ADDS
SHAL
SHAR
ROTL
ROTR
NEG
SUBS
9
BVS
A
CLRMAC
BPL
MOV
B
NEG
BMI
ADD
MOV
SUB
CMP
C
SHAL
SHAR
ROTL
ROTR
BGE
MOVTPE
D
INC
EXTS
DEC
BLT
E
TAS
BGT
F
INC
SHAL
SHAR
ROTL
ROTR
EXTS
DEC
BLE
BH
AH AL
**
Note: * Cannot be used in this LSI
* *
Table A.2
Table A.2 Table A.2 Table A.2
Table A.2
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 976 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Instruction code: 1st byte 2nd byte
AH AL BH BL
3rd byte 4th byte
CH CL DH DL
r is the register specification section.
Absolute address is set at aa.
DH highest bit is set to 0.
DH highest bit is set to 1.
Notes:
AH AL BH BL CH
CL
01C05
01D05
01F06
7Cr06 *
1
7Cr07 *
1
7Dr06 *
1
7Dr07 *
1
7Eaa6 *
2
7Eaa7 *
2
7Faa6 *
2
7Faa7 *
2
0
MULXS
BSET
BSET
BSET
BSET
1
DIVXS
BNOT
BNOT
BNOT
BNOT
2
MULXS
BCLR
BCLR
BCLR
BCLR
3
DIVXS
BTST
BTST
BTST
BTST
4
OR
5
XOR
6
AND
789ABCDEF
1.
2.
BOR
BIOR
BXOR
BIXOR
BAND
BIAND
BLD
BILD
BST
BIST
BOR
BIOR
BXOR
BIXOR
BAND
BIAND
BLD
BILD
BST
BIST
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 977 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Instruction code: 1st byte 2nd byte
AH AL BH BL
3th byte 4th byte
CH CL DH DL
FH highest bit is set to 0.
FH highest bit is set to 1.
5th byte 6th byte
EH EL FH FL
Instruction code: 1st byte 2nd byte
AH AL BH BL
3rd byte 4th byte
CH CL DH DL
HH highest bit is set to 0.
HH highest bit is set to 1.
Note: * Absolute address is set at aa.
5th byte 6th byte
EH EL FH FL
7th byte 8th byte
GH GL HH HL
6A10aaaa6*
6A10aaaa7*
6A18aaaa6*
6A18aaaa7*
AHALBHBLCHCLDHDLEH
EL 0
BSET
1
BNOT
2
BCLR
3
BTST BOR
BIOR
BXOR
BIXOR
BAND
BIAND
BLD
BILD
BST
BIST
456789ABCDEF
6A30aaaaaaaa6
*
6A30aaaaaaaa7
*
6A38aaaaaaaa6
*
6A38aaaaaaaa7
*
AHALBHBL ... FHFLGH
GL 0
BSET
1
BNOT
2
BCLR
3
BTST BOR
BIOR
BXOR
BIXOR
BAND
BIAND
BLD
BILD
BST
BIST
456789ABCDEF
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 978 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
A.4 Number of Execution States
This section explains execution state and how to calculate the number of execution states for each
instruction of the H8S/2000 CPU.
Table A.12 indicates number of cycles of instruction fetch and data read/write during instruction
execution, and table A.11 indicates number of states required for each instruction size.
The number of execution states can be obtained from the equation below.
Number of execution states = I ⋅ SI + J ⋅ SJ + K ⋅ SK + L ⋅ SL + M ⋅ SM + N ⋅ SN
Examples of Execution State Number Calculation
The conditions are as follows: In advanced mode, program and stack areas are set in the on-chip
memory, a wait is inserted every 2 states in the on-chip supporting module access with 8-bit bus
width.
1. BSET #0, @FFFFC7:8
From table A.12,
I = L = 2, J = K = M = N = 0
From table A.11,
SI = 1, SL = 2
Number of execution states = 2 × 1 + 2 × 2 = 6
2. JSR @@30
From table A.12,
I = J = K = 2, L = M = N = 0
From table A.11,
SI = SJ = SK = 1
Number of execution states = 2 × 1 + 2 × 1 + 2 × 1 = 6
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 979 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Table A.11 Number of States Required for Each Execution Status (Cycle)
Target of Access
On-Chip Supporting Module
Execution Status (Cycle) On-Chip Memory 8-bit bus 16-bit bus
Instruction fetch SI
Branch address read SJ
Stack operation SK
⎯ ⎯
Byte data access SL 2 2
Word data access SM
1
4
Internal operation SN 1
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 980 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Table A.12 Instruction Execution Status (Number of Cycles)
Instruction
Fetch
Branch
Address
Read
Stack
Operation
Byte Data
Access
Word Data
Access
Internal
Operation
Instruction Mnemonic I J K L M N
ADD ADD.B #xx:8,Rd
ADD.B Rs, Rd
ADD.W #xx:16,Rd
ADD.W Rs,Rd
ADD L #xx:32,ERd
ADD.L ERs,ERd
1
1
2
1
3
1
ADDS ADDS #1/2/4,ERd 1
ADDX ADDX #xx:8,Rd
ADDX Rs,Rd
1
1
AND AND.B #xx:8,Rd
AND.B Rs,Rd
AND.W #xx.16,Rd
AND.W Rs,Rd
AND L #xx:32,ERd
AND.L ERs,ERd
1
1
2
1
3
2
ANDC ANDC #xx:8,CCR
ANDC #xx:8,EXR
1
2
BAND BAND #xx:3,Rd
BAND #xx:3,@ERd
BAND #xx:3@aa:8
BAND #xx:3@aa:16
BAND #xx:3@aa:32
1
2
2
3
4
1
1
1
1
Bcc BRA d:8 (BT d:8)
BRN d:8 (BF d:8)
BHI d:8
BLS d:8
BCC d:8 (BHS d:8)
BCS d:8 (BLO d:8)
BNE d:8
BEQ d:8
BVC d:8
BVS d:8
BPL d:8
BMI d:8
BGE d:8
BLT d:8
BGT d:8
BLE d:8
BRA d:16 (BT d:16)
BRN d:16 (BF d:16)
BHI d:16
BLS d:16
BCC d:16 (BHS d:16)
BCS d:16 (BLO d:16)
BNE d:16
BEQ d:16
BVC d:16
BVS d:16
BPL d:16
BMI d:16
BGE d:16
BLT d:16
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 981 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Instruction
Fetch
Branch
Address
Read
Stack
Operation
Byte Data
Access
Word Data
Access
Internal
Operation
Instruction
Mnemonic I J K L M N
Bcc BGT d:16
BLE d:16
2
2
1
1
BCLR BCLR #xx:3,Rd
BCLR #xx:3,@ERd
BCLR #xx:3,@aa:8
BCLR #xx:3,@aa:16
BCLR #xx:3,@aa:32
BCLR Rn,Rd
BCLR Rn,@ERd
BCLR Rn,@aa:8
BCLR Rn,@aa:16
BCLR Rn,@aa:32
1
2
2
3
4
1
2
2
3
4
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
BIAND BIAND #xx:3,Rd
BIAND #xx:3,@ERd
BIAND #xx:3,@aa:8
BIAND #xx:3,@aa:16
BIAND #xx:3,@aa:32
1
2
2
3
4
1
1
1
1
BILD BILD #xx:3,Rd
BILD #xx:3,@ERd
BILD #xx:3,@aa:8
BILD #xx:3,@aa:16
BILD #xx:3,@aa:32
1
2
2
3
4
1
1
1
1
BIOR BIOR #xx:8,Rd
BIOR #xx:8,@ERd
BIOR #xx:8,@aa:8
BIOR #xx:8,@aa:16
BIOR #xx:8,@aa:32
1
2
2
3
4
1
1
1
1
BIST BIST #xx:3,Rd
BIST #xx:3,@ERd
BIST #xx:3,@aa:8
BIST #xx:3,@aa:16
BIST #xx:3,@aa:32
1
2
2
3
4
2
2
2
2
BIXOR BIXOR #xx:3,Rd
BIXOR #xx:3,@ERd
BIXOR #xx:3,@aa:8
BIXOR #xx:3,@aa:16
BIXOR #xx:3,@aa:32
1
2
2
3
4
1
1
1
1
BLD BLD #xx:3,Rd
BLD #xx:3,@ERd
BLD #xx:3,@aa:8
BLD #xx:3,@aa:16
BLD #xx:3,@aa:32
1
2
2
3
4
1
1
1
1
BNOT BNOT #xx:3,Rd
BNOT #xx:3,@ERd
BNOT #xx:3,@aa:8
BNOT #xx:3,@aa:16
BNOT #xx:3,@aa:32
BNOT Rn,Rd
BNOT Rn,@ERd
BNOT Rn,@aa:8
BNOT Rn,@aa:16
1
2
2
3
4
1
2
2
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 982 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Instruction
Fetch
Branch
Address
Read
Stack
Operation
Byte Data
Access
Word Data
Access
Internal
Operation
Instruction
Mnemonic I J K L M N
BNOT BNOT Rn,@aa:32 4 2
BOR BOR #xx:3,Rd
BOR #xx:3,@ERd
BOR #xx:3,@aa:8
BOR #xx:3,@aa:16
BOR #xx:3,@aa:32
1
2
2
3
4
1
1
1
1
BSET BSET #xx:3,Rd
BSET #xx:3,@ERd
BSET #xx:3,@aa:8
BSET #xx:3,@aa:16
BSET #xx:3,@aa:32
BSET Rn,Rd
BSET Rn,@ERd
BSET Rn,@aa:8
BSET Rn,@aa:16
BSET Rn,@aa:32
1
2
2
3
4
1
2
2
3
4
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
BSR BSR d:8 2 2
BSR d:16 2 2 1
BST BST #xx:3,Rd
BST #xx:3,@ERd
BST #xx:3,@aa:8
BST #xx:3,@aa:16
BST #xx:3,@aa:32
1
2
2
3
4
2
2
2
2
BTST BTST #xx:3,Rd
BTST #xx:3,@ERd
BTST #xx:3,@aa:8
BTST #xx:3,@aa:16
BTST #xx:3,@aa:32
BTST Rn,Rd
BTST Rn,@ERd
BTST Rn,@aa:8
BTST Rn,@aa:16
BTST Rn,@aa:32
1
2
2
3
4
1
2
2
3
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BXOR BXOR #xx:3,Rd
BXOR #xx:3,@ERd
BXOR #xx:3,@aa:8
BXOR #xx:3,@aa:16
BXOR #xx:3,@aa:32
1
2
2
3
4
1
1
1
1
CLRMAC CLRMAC Cannot be used in this LSI.
CMP CMP.B #xx:8,Rd
CMP.B Rs,Rd
CMP.W #xx:16,Rd
CMP.W Rs,Rd
CMP.L #xx:32,ERd
CMP.L ERs,ERd
1
1
2
1
3
1
DAA DAA Rd 1
DAS DAS Rd 1
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 983 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Instruction
Fetch
Branch
Address
Read
Stack
Operation
Byte Data
Access
Word Data
Access
Internal
Operation
Instruction
Mnemonic I J K L M N
DEC DEC.B Rd
DEC.W #1/2,Rd
DEC.L #1/2 ERd
1
1
1
DIVXS DIVXS.B Rs,Rd
DIVXS.W Rs,ERd
2
2
11
19
DIVXU DIVXU.B Rs,Rd
DIVXU.W Rs,ERd
1
1
11
19
EEPMOV EEPMOV.B
EEPMOV.W
2
2
2n+2*2
2n+2*2
EXTS EXTS.W Rd
EXTS.L ERd
1
1
EXTU EXTU.W Rd
EXTU.L ERd
1
1
INC INC.B Rd
INC.W #1/2,Rd
INC.L #1/2,ERd
1
1
1
JMP JMP @ERN
JMP @aa:24
2
2
1
JMP @@aa:8 2 2 1
JSR JSR @ERn 2 2
JSR @aa:24 2 2 1
JSR @@aa:8 2 2 2
LDC LDC #xx:8,CCR
LDC #xx:8,EXR
LDC Rs,CCR
LDC Rs,EXR
LDC @ERs,CCR
LDC @ERs,EXR
LDC @(d:16,ERs),CCR
LDC @(d:16,ERs),EXR
LDC @(d:32,ERs),CCR
LDC @(d:32,ERs),EXR
LDC @ERs+,CCR
LDC @ERs+,EXR
LDC @aa:16,CCR
LDC @aa:16,EXR
LDC @aa:32,CCR
LDC @aa:32,EXR
1
2
1
1
2
2
3
3
5
5
2
2
3
3
4
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
LDM*4 LDM.L
@SP+,(ERn−ERn+1)
LDM.L
@SP+,(ERn−ERn+2)
LDM.L
@SP+,(ERn−ERn+3)
2
2
2
4
6
8
1
1
1
LDMAC LDMAC ERs,MACH
LDMAC ERs,MACL
Cannot be used in this LSI.
MAC MAC @ERn+,@ERm+
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 984 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Instruction
Fetch
Branch
Address
Read
Stack
Operation
Byte Data
Access
Word Data
Access
Internal
Operation
Instruction
Mnemonic I J K L M N
MOV MOV.B #xx:8,Rd
MOV.B Rs,Rd
MOV.B @ERs,Rd
MOV.B @(d:16,ERs),Rd
MOV.B @(d:32,ERs),Rd
MOV.B @ERs+,Rd
MOV.B @aa:8,Rd
MOV.B @aa:16,Rd
MOV.B @aa:32,Rd
MOV.B Rs,@ERd
MOV.B Rs,@(d:16,ERd)
MOV.B Rs,@(d:32,ERd)
MOV.B Rs,@-ERd
MOV.B Rs,@aa:8
MOV.B Rs,@aa:16
MOV.B Rs,@aa:32
MOV.W #xx:16,Rd
MOV.W Rs,Rd
MOV.W @ERs,Rd
MOV.W @(d:16,ERs),Rd
MOV.W @(d:32,ERs),Rd
MOV.W @ERs+,Rd
MOV.W @aa:16,Rd
MOV.W @aa:32,Rd
MOV.W Rs,@ERd
MOV.W Rs,@(d:16,ERd)
MOV.W Rs,@(d:32,ERd)
MOV.W Rs,@-ERd
MOV.W Rs,@aa:16
MOV.W Rs,@aa:32
MOV.L #xx:32,ERd
MOV.L ERs,ERd
MOV.L @ERs,ERd
MOV.L @(d:16,ERs),ERd
MOV.L @(d:32,ERs),ERd
MOV.L @ERs+,ERd
MOV.L @aa:16,ERd
MOV.L @aa:32,ERd
MOV.L ERs,@ERd
MOV.L ERs,@(d:16,ERd)
MOV.L ERs,@(d:32,ERd)
MOV.L ERs,@-ERd
MOV.L ERs,@aa:16
MOV.L ERs,@aa:32
1
1
1
2
4
1
1
2
3
1
2
4
1
1
2
3
2
1
1
2
4
1
2
3
1
2
4
1
2
3
3
1
2
3
5
2
3
4
2
3
5
2
3
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
MOVFPE MOVFPE @:aa:16,Rd
MOVTPE MOVTPE Rs,@:aa:16
Cannot be used in this LSI.
MULXS MULXS.B Rs,Rd 2 11
MULXS.W Rs,ERd 2 19
MULXU MULXU.B Rs,Rd 1 11
MULXU.W Rs,ERd 1 19
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 985 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Instruction
Fetch
Branch
Address
Read
Stack
Operation
Byte Data
Access
Word Data
Access
Internal
Operation
Instruction
Mnemonic I J K L M N
NEG NEG.B Rd
NEG.W Rd
NEG.L ERd
1
1
1
NOP NOP 1
NOT NOT.B Rd
NOT.W Rd
NOT.L ERd
1
1
1
OR OR.B #xx:8,Rd
OR.B Rs,Rd
OR.W #xx:16,Rd
OR.W Rs,Rd
OR.L #xx:32,ERd
OR.L ERs,ERd
1
1
2
1
3
2
ORC ORC #xx:8,CCR
ORC #xx:8,EXR
1
2
POP POP.W Rn
POP.L ERn
1
2
1
2
1
1
PUSH PUSH.W Rn
PUSH.L ERn
1
2
1
2
1
1
ROTL ROTL.B Rd
ROTL.B #2,Rd
ROTL.W Rd
ROTL.W #2,Rd
ROTL.L ERd
ROTL.L #2,ERd
1
1
1
1
1
1
ROTR ROTR.B Rd
ROTR.B #2,Rd
ROTR.W Rd
ROTR.W #2,Rd
ROTR.L ERd
ROTR.L #2,ERd
1
1
1
1
1
1
ROTXL ROTXL.B Rd
ROTXL.B #2,Rd
ROTXL.W Rd
ROTXL.W #2,Rd
ROTXL.L ERd
ROTXL.L #2,ERd
1
1
1
1
1
1
ROTXR ROTXR.B Rd
RPTXR.B #2,Rd
ROTXR.W Rd
ROTXR.W #2,Rd
ROTXR.L ERd
ROTXR.L #2,ERd
1
1
1
1
1
1
RTE RTE 2 2/3*1 1
RTS RTS 2 2 1
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 986 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Instruction
Fetch
Branch
Address
Read
Stack
Operation
Byte Data
Access
Word Data
Access
Internal
Operation
Instruction
Mnemonic I J K L M N
SHAL SHAL.B Rd
SHAL.B #2,Rd
SHAL.W Rd
SHAL.W #2,Rd
SHAL.L ERd
SHAL.L #2,ERd
1
1
1
1
1
1
SHAR SHAR.B Rd
SHAR.B #2,Rd
SHAR.W Rd
SHAR.W #2,Rd
SHAR.L ERd
SHAR.L #2,ERd
1
1
1
1
1
1
SHLL SHLL.B Rd
SHLL.B #2,Rd
SHLL.W Rd
SHLL.W #2,Rd
SHLL.L ERd
SHLL.L #2,ERd
1
1
1
1
1
1
SHLR SHLR.B Rd
SHLR.B #2,Rd
SHLR.W Rd
SHLR.W #2,Rd
SHLR.L ERd
SHLR.L #2,ERd
1
1
1
1
1
1
SLEEP SLEEP 1 1
STC STC.B CCR.Rd
STC.B EXR,Rd
STC.W CCR,@ERd
STC.W EXR,@ERd
STC.W
CCR,@(d:16,ERd)
STC.W EXR,@(d:16,ERd)
STC.W
CCR,@(d:32,ERd)
STC.W EXR,@(d:32,ERd)
STC.W CCR,@-ERd
STC.W EXR,@-ERd
STC.W CCR,@aa:16
STC.W EXR,@aa:16
STC.W CCR,@aa:32
STC.W EXR,@aa:32
1
1
2
2
3
3
5
5
2
2
3
3
4
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
STM*4 STM.L (ERn-ERn+1),
@-Sp
STM.L (ERn-ERn+2),
@-Sp
STM.L (ERn-ERn+3),
@-Sp
2
2
2
4
6
8
1
1
1
STMAC STMAC MACH,ERd
STMAC MACL,ERd
Cannot be used in this LSI.
SUB SUB.B Rs,Rd
SUB.W #xx:16,Rd
SUB.W Rs,Rd
SUB.L #xx:32,ERd
SUB.L ERs,ERd
1
2
1
3
1
SUBS SUBS #1/2/4,ERd 1
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 987 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Instruction
Fetch
Branch
Address
Read
Stack
Operation
Byte Data
Access
Word Data
Access
Internal
Operation
Instruction
Mnemonic I J K L M N
SUBX SUBX #xx:8,Rd
SUBX Rs,Rd
1
1
TAS TAS @ERd*3 2 2
TRAPA TRAPA #x:2 2 2 2/3*1 2
XOR XOR.B #xx:8,Rd
XOR.B Rs,Rd
XOR.W #xx:16,Rd
XOR.W Rs,Rd
XOR.L #xx:32,ERd
XOR.L ERs,ERd
1
1
2
1
3
2
XORC XORC #xx:8,CCR
XORC #xx:8,EXR
1
2
Notes: 1. 3 applies when EXR is valid, and 2 applies when invalid.
2. Applies when the transfer data is n bytes.
3. Only register ER0, ER1, ER4, or ER5 should be used when using the TAS instruction.
4. Only registers ER0 to ER6 should be used when using the STM/LDM instruction.
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 988 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
A.5 Bus Status during Instruction Execution
Table A.13 indicates execution status of each instruction available in this LSI. For the number of
states required for each execution status, see table A.11, Number of States Required for Each
Execution Status (Cycle).
Interpreting the Table
Instruction
JMP@aa:24 R:W 2nd
Internal operation
1 state
R:W EA
1 2345678
End of instruction
Order of execution
Effective address is read by word.
Read/write not executed
The 2nd word of the instruction currently being
executed is read by word.
R : B Read by byte
R : W Read by word
W : B Write by byte
W : W Write by word
: M Bus not transferred immediately after this cycle
2nd Address of the 2nd word (3rd and 4th bytes)
3rd Address of the 3rd word (5th and 6th bytes)
4th Address of the 4th word (7th and 8th bytes)
5th Address of the 5th word (9th and 10th bytes)
NEXT The head address of the instruction immediately after the instruction
currently being executed
EA Execution address
VEC Vector address
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 989 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Table A.13 Instruction Execution Status
Instruction 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
ADD.B #xx:8,Rd R:W NEXT
ADD.B Rs,Rd R:W NEXT
ADD.W #xx:16,Rd R:W 2nd R:W NEXT
ADD.W Rs,Rd R:W NEXT
ADD.L #xx:32,ERd R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W NEXT
ADD.L ERs,ERd R:W NEXT
ADDS #1/2/4,ERd R:W NEXT
ADDX #xx:8,Rd R:W NEXT
ADDX Rs,Rd R:W NEXT
AND.B #xx:8,Rd R:W NEXT
AND.B Rs,Rd R:W NEXT
AND.W #xx:16,Rd R:W 2nd R:W NEXT
AND.W Rs,Rd R:W NEXT
AND.L #xx:32,ERd R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W NEXT
AND.L ERs,ERd R:W 2nd R:W NEXT
ANDC #xx:8,CCR R:W NEXT
ANDC #xx:8,EXR R:W 2nd R:W NEXT
BAND #xx:3,Rd R:W NEXT
BAND #xx:3,@ERd R:W 2nd R:B EA R:W:M
NEXT
BAND #xx:3,@aa:8 R:W 2nd R:B EA R:W:M
NEXT
BAND
#xx:3,@aa:16
R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:B EA R:W:M
NEXT
BAND
#xx:3,@aa:32
R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:B EA R:W:M
NEXT
BRA d:8 (BT d:8) R:W NEXT R:W EA
BRN d:8 (BF d:8) R:W NEXT R:W EA
BHI d:8 R:W NEXT R:W EA
BLS d:8 R:W NEXT R:W EA
BCC d:8 (BHS d:8) R:W NEXT R:W EA
BCS d:8 (BLO d:8) R:W NEXT R:W EA
BNE d:8 R:W NEXT R:W EA
BEQ d:8 R:W NEXT R:W EA
BVC d:8 R:W NEXT R:W EA
BVS d:8 R:W NEXT R:W EA
BPL d:8 R:W NEXT R:W EA
BMI d:8 R:W NEXT R:W EA
BGE d:8 R:W NEXT R:W EA
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 990 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Instruction 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
BLT d:8 R:W NEXT R:W EA
BGT d:8 R:W NEXT R:W EA
BLE d:8 R:W NEXT R:W EA
BRA d:16 (BT d:16) R:W 2nd Internal
operation
1 state
R:W EA
BRN d:16 (BF d:16) R:W 2nd Internal
operation
1 state
R:W EA
BHI d:16 R:W 2nd Internal
operation
1 state
R:W EA
BLS d:16 R:W 2nd Internal
operation
1 state
R:W EA
BCC d:16
(BHS d:16)
R:W 2nd Internal
operation
1 state
R:W EA
BCS d:16
(BLO d:16)
R:W 2nd Internal
operation
1 state
R:W EA
BNE d:16 R:W 2nd Internal
operation
1 state
R:W EA
BEQ d:16 R:W 2nd Internal
operation
1 state
R:W EA
BVC d:16 R:W 2nd Internal
operation
1 state
R:W EA
BVS d:16 R:W 2nd Internal
operation
1 state
R:W EA
BPL d:16 R:W 2nd Internal
operation
1 state
R:W EA
BMI d:16 R:W 2nd Internal
operation
1 state
R:W EA
BGE d:16 R:W 2nd Internal
operation
1 state
R:W EA
BLT d:16 R:W 2nd Internal
operation
1 state
R:W EA
BGT d:16 R:W 2nd Internal
operation
1 state
R:W EA
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 991 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Instruction 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
BLE d:16 R:W 2nd Internal
operation
1 state
R:W EA
BCLR #xx:3,Rd R:W NEXT
BCLR #xx:3,@ERd R:W 2nd R:B:M EA R:W:M
NEXT
W:B EA
BCLR #xx:3,@aa:8 R:W 2nd R:B:M EA R:W:M
NEXT
W:B EA
BCLR
#xx:3,@aa:16
R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:B:M EA R:W:M
NEXT
W:B EA
BCLR
#xx:3,@aa:32
R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:B:M EA R:W:M
NEXT
W:B EA
BCLR Rn,Rd R:W NEXT
BCLR Rn,@ERd R:W 2nd R:B:M EA R:W:M
NEXT
W:B EA
BCLR Rn,@aa:8 R:W 2nd R:B:M EA R:W:M
NEXT
W:B EA
BCLR Rn,@aa:16 R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:B:M EA R:W:M
NEXT
W:B EA
BCLR Rn,@aa:32 R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:B:M EA R:W:M
NEXT
W:B EA
BIAND #xx:3,Rd R:W NEXT
BIAND #xx:3,ERd R:W 2nd R:B EA R:W:M
NEXT
BIAND #xx:3,@aa:8 R:W 2nd R:B EA R:W:M
NEXT
BIAND
#xx:3,@aa:16
R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:B EA R:W:M
NEXT
BIAND
#xx:3,@aa:32
R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:B EA R:W:M
NEXT
BILD #xx:3,Rd R:W NEXT
BILD #xx:3,@ERd R:W 2nd R:B EA R:W:M
NEXT
BILD #xx:3,@aa:8 R:W 2nd R:B EA R:W:M
NEXT
BILD #xx:3,@aa:16 R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:B EA R:W:M
NEXT
BILD #xx:3,@aa:32 R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:B EA R:W:M
NEXT
BIOR #xx:3,Rd R:W NEXT
BIOR #xx:3,@ERd R:W 2nd R:B EA R:W:M
NEXT
BOIR #xx:3,@aa:8 R:W 2nd R:B EA R:W:M
NEXT
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 992 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Instruction 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
BOIR #xx:3,@aa:16 R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:B EA R:W:M
NEXT
BOIR #xx:3,@aa:32 R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:B EA R:W:M
NEXT
BIST #xx:3,Rd R:W NEXT
BIST #xx:3,@ERd R:W 2nd R:B:M EA R:W:M
NEXT
W:B EA
BIST #xx:3,@aa:8 R:W 2nd R:B:M EA R:W:M
NEXT
W:B EA
BIST #xx:3,@aa:16 R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:B:M EA R:W:M
NEXT
W:B EA
BIST #xx:3,@aa:32 R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:B:M EA R:W:M
NEXT
W:B EA
BIXOR #xx:3,Rd R:W NEXT
BIXOR
#xx:3,@ERd
R:W 2nd R:B EA R:W:M
NEXT
BIXOR
#xx:3,@aa:8
R:W 2nd R:B EA R:W:M
NEXT
BIXOR
#xx:3,@aa:16
R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:B EA R:W:M
NEXT
BIXOR
#xx:3,@aa:32
R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:B EA R:W:M
NEXT
BLD #xx:3,Rd R:W NEXT
BLD #xx:3,@ERd R:W 2nd R:B EA R:W:M
NEXT
BLD #xx:3,@aa:8 R:W 2nd R:B EA R:W:M
NEXT
BLD #xx:3,@aa:16 R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:B EA R:W:M
NEXT
BLD #xx:3,@aa:32 R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:B EA R:W:M
NEXT
BNOT #xx:3,Rd R:W NEXT
BNOT #xx:3,ERd R:W 2nd R:B:M EA R:W:M
NEXT
W:B EA
BNOT #xx:3,@aa:8 R:W 2nd R:B:M EA R:W:M
NEXT
W:B EA
BNOT
#xx:3,@aa:16
R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:B:M EA R:W:M
NEXT
W:B EA
BNOT
#xx:3,@aa:32
R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:B:M EA R:W:M
NEXT
W:B EA
BNOT Rn,Rd R:W NEXT
BNOT Rn,@ERd R:W 2nd R:B:M EA R:W:M
NEXT
W:B EA
BNOT Rn @aa:8 R:W 2nd R:B:M EA R:W:M
NEXT
W:B EA
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 993 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Instruction 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
BNOT Rn @aa:16 R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:B:W EA R:W:M
NEXT
W:B EA
BNOT Rn @aa:32 R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:B:M EA R:W:M
NEXT
W:B EA
BOR #xx:3,Rd R:W NEXT
BOR #xx:3,ERd R:W 2nd R:B EA R:W:M
NEXT
BOR #xx:3,@aa:8 R:W 2nd R:B EA R:W:M
NEXT
BOR #xx:3,@aa:16 R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:B EA R:W:M
NEXT
BOR #xx:3,@aa:32 R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:B EA R:W NEXT
BSET #xx:3,Rd R:W NEXT
BSET #xx:3,@ERd R:W 2nd R:B:M EA R:W:M
NEXT
W:B EA
BSET #xx:3,@aa:8 R:W 2nd R:B:M EA R:W:M
NEXT
W:B EA
BSET #xx:3,@aa:16 R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:B:M EA R:W:M
NEXT
W:B EA
BSET #xx:3,@aa:32 R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:B:M EA R:W:M
NEXT
W:B EA
BSET Rn,Rd R:W NEXT
BSET Rn,@ERd R:W 2nd R:B:M EA R:W:M
NEXT
W:B EA
BSET Rn,@aa:8 R:W 2nd R:B:M EA R:W:M
NEXT
W:B EA
BSET Rn,@aa:16 R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:B:M EA R:W:M
NEXT
W:B EA
BSET Rn,@aa:32 R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:B:M EA R:W:M
NEXT
W:B EA
BSR d:8 R:W NEXT R:W EA W:W:M
stack(H)
W:W
stack(L)
BSR d:16 R:W 2nd Internal
operation
1 state
R:W EA W:W:M
stack(H)
W:W
stack(L)
BST #xx:3,Rd R:W NEXT
BST #xx:3,@ERd R:W 2nd R:B:M EA R:W:M
NEXT
W:B EA
BST #xx:3,@aa:8 R:W 2nd R:B:M EA R:W:M
NEXT
W:B EA
BST #xx:3,@aa:16 R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:B:M EA R:W:M
NEXT
W:B EA
BST #xx:3,@aa:32 R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:B:M EA R:W:M
NEXT
W:B EA
BTST #xx:3,Rd R:W NEXT
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 994 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Instruction 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
BTST #xx:3,@ERd R:W 2nd R:B EA R:W:M
NEXT
BTST #xx:3,@aa:8 R:W 2nd R:B EA R:W:M
NEXT
BTST #xx:3,@aa:16 R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:B EA R:W:M
NEXT
BTST #xx:3,@aa:32 R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:B EA R:W:M
NEXT
BTST Rn,Rd R:W NEXT
BTST Rn,@ERd R:W 2nd R:B EA R:W:M
NEXT
BTST Rn,@aa:8 R:W 2nd R:B EA R:W:M
NEXT
BTST Rn,@aa:16 R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:B EA R:W:M
NEXT
BTST Rn,@aa:32 R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:B EA R:W:M
NEXT
BOXR #xx:3,Rd R:W NEXT
BOXR #xx:3,@ERd R:W 2nd R:B EA R:W:M
NEXT
BOXR #xx:3,@aa:8 R:W 2nd R:B EA R:W:M
NEXT
BOXR
#xx:3,@aa:16
R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:B EA R:W:M
NEXT
BOXR
#xx:3,@aa:32
R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:B EA R:W:M
NEXT
CLRMAC Cannot be used in this LSI.
CMP.B #xx:8,Rd R:W NEXT
CMP.B Rs,Rd R:W NEXT
CMP.W #xx:16,Rd R:W 2nd R:W NEXT
CMP.W Rs,Rd R:W NEXT
CMP.L #xx:32,ERd R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W NEXT
CMP.L ERs,ERd R:W NEXT
DAA Rd R:W NEXT
DAS Rd R:W NEXT
DEC.B Rd R:W NEXT
DEC.W #1/2,Rd R:W NEXT
DEC.W #1/2,ERd R:W NEXT
DIVXS.B Rs,Rd R:W 2nd R:W NEXT Internal operation 11 state
DIVXS.W Rs,ERd R:W 2nd R:W NEXT Internal operation 19 state
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 995 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Instruction 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
DIVXU.B Rs,Rd R:W NEXT Internal operation 11 state
DIVXU.W Rs,ERd R:W NEXT Internal operation 19 state
EEPMOV.B R:W 2nd R:B EAs*1 R:B EAd*1R:B EAs*2 W:B EAd*2R:W NEXT
EEPMOV.W R:W 2nd R:B EAs*1 R:B EAd*1R:B EAs*2 W:B EAd*2R:W NEXT
EXTS.W Rd R:W NEXT ← Repeat n times*2 →
EXTS.L ERd R:W NEXT
EXTU.W Rd R:W NEXT
EXTU.L ERd R:W NEXT
INC.B Rd R:W NEXT
INC.W #1/2,Rd R:W NEXT
INC.L #1/2,ERd R:W NEXT
JMP @ERn R:W NEXT R:W EA
JMP @aa:24 R:W 2nd Internal
operation
1 state
R:W EA
JMP @@aa:8 R:W NEXT R:W:M
aa:8
R:W:M
aa:8
Internal
operation
1 state
R:W EA
JSR @ERn R:W NEXT R:W EA W:W:M
stack(H)
W:W
stack (L)
JSR @aa:24 R:W 2nd Internal
operation
1 state
R:W EA W:W:M
stack(H)
W:W
stack (L)
JSR @@aa:8 R:W NEXT R:W:M
aa:8
R:W aa:8 W:W:M
stack(H)
W:W
stack (L)
R:W EA
LDC #xx.8,CCR R:W NEXT
LDC #xx.8,EXR R:W 2nd R:W NEXT
LDC Rs,CCR R:W NEXT
LDC Rs,EXR R:W NEXT
LDC @ERs,CCR R:W 2nd R:W NEXT R:W EA
LDC @ERs,EXR R:W 2nd R:W NEXT R:W EA
LDC
@(d:16,ERs),CCR
R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W NEXT R:W EA
LDC
@(d:16,ERs),EXR
R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W NEXT R:W EA
LDC
@(d:32,ERs),CCR
R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:W 5th R:W NEXT R:W EA
LDC
@(d:32,ERs),EXR
R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:W 5th R:W NEXT R:W EA
LDC @ERs+,CCR R:W 2nd R:W NEXT Internal
operation
1 state
R:W EA
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 996 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Instruction 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
LDC @ERs+,EXR R:W 2nd R:W NEXT Internal
operation
1 state
R:W EA
LDC @aa:16,CCR R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W NEXT R:W EA
LDC @aa:16,EXR R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W NEXT R:W EA
LDC @aa:32,CCR R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:W NEXT R:W EA
LDC @aa:32,EXR R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:W NEXT R:W EA
LDM.L @SP+,
(ERn-ERn+1)*9
R:W 2nd R:W:M
NEXT
Internal
operation
1 state
R:W:M
stack(H)*3
R:W
stack(L)*3
LDM.L @SP+,
(ERn-ERn+2)*9
R:W 2nd R:W:M
NEXT
Internal
operation
1 state
R:W:M
stack(H)*3
R:W
stack(L)*3
LDM.L @SP+,
(ERn-ERn+3)*9
R:W 2nd R:W:M
NEXT
Internal
operation
1 state
R:W:M
stack(H)*3
R:W
stack(L)*3
LDMAC ERs,MACH Cannot be used in this LSI.
LDMAC ERs,MACL
MAC
@ERn+,@ERm+
MOV.B #xx:8,Rd R:W NEXT
MOV.B Rs,Rd R:W NEXT
MOV.B @ERs,Rd R:W NEXT R:B EA
MOV.B
@(d:16,ERs),Rd
R:W 2nd R:W NEXT R:B EA
MOV.B
@(d:32,ERs),Rd
R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:W NEXT R:B EA
MOV.B @ERs+,Rd R:W NEXT Internal
operation
1 state
R:B EA
MOV.B @aa:8,Rd R:W NEXT R:B EA
MOV.B @aa:16,Rd R:W 2nd R:W NEXT R:B EA
MOV.B @aa:32,Rd R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W NEXT R:B EA
MOV.B Rs,@ERd R:W NEXT W:B EA
MOV.B
Rs,@(d:16,ERd)
R:W 2nd R:W NEXT W:B EA
MOV.B
Rs,@(d:32,ERd)
R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:W NEXT W:B EA
MOV.B Rs,@-ERd R:W NEXT Internal
operation
1 state
W:B EA
MOV.B Rs,@aa:8 R:W NEXT W:B EA
MOV.B Rs,@aa:16 R:W 2nd R:W NEXT W:B EA
MOV.B Rs,@aa:32 R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W NEXT W:B EA
MOV.W #xx:16,Rd R:W 2nd R:W NEXT
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 997 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Instruction 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
MOV.W Rs,Rd R:W NEXT
MOV.W @ERs,Rd R:W NEXT R:W EA
MOV.W
@(d:16,ERs),Rd
R:W 2nd R:W NEXT R:W EA
MOV.W
@(d:32,ERs),Rd
R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:W NEXT R:W EA
MOV.W @ERs+,Rd R:W NEXT Internal
operation
1 state
R:W EA
MOV.W @aa:16,Rd R:W 2nd R:W NEXT R:W EA
MOV.W @aa:32,Rd R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W NEXT R:B EA
MOV.W Rs,@ERd R:W NEXT W:W EA
MOV.W
Rs,@(d:16,ERd)
R:W 2nd R:W NEXT W:W EA
MOV.W
Rs,@(d:32,ERd)
R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:W NEXT W:W EA
MOV.W Rs,@-ERd R:W NEXT Internal
operation
1 state
W:W EA
MOV.W Rs,@aa:16 R:W 2nd R:W NEXT W:W EA
MOV.W Rs,@aa:32 R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W NEXT W:W EA
MOV.L #xx:32,ERd R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W NEXT
MOV.L ERs,ERd R:W NEXT
MOV.L @ERs,ERd R:W 2nd R:W:M
NEXT
R:W:M EA R:W EA+2
MOV.L
@(d:16,ERs),ERd
R:W 2nd R:W:M 3rd R:W NEXT R:W:M EA R:W EA+2
MOV.L
@(d:32,ERs),ERd
R:W 2nd R:W:M 3rd R:W:M 4th R:W 5th R:W NEXT R:W:M EA R:W EA+2
MOV.L
@ERs+,ERd
R:W 2nd R:W:M
NEXT
Internal
operation
1 state
R:W:M EA R:W EA+2
MOV.L
@aa:16,ERd
R:W 2nd R:W:M 3rd R:W NEXT R:W:M EA R:W EA+2
MOV.L
@aa:32,ERd
R:W 2nd R:W:M 3rd R:W 4th R:W NEXT R:W:M EA R:W EA+2
MOV.L ERs,@ERd R:W 2nd R:W:M
NEXT
W:W:M EA W:W EA+2
MOV.L
ERs,@(d:16,ERd)
R:W 2nd R:W:M 3rd R:W NEXT W:W:M EA W:W EA+2
MOV.L
ERs,@(d:32,ERd)
R:W 2nd R:W:W 3rd R:W:M 4th R:W 5th R:W NEXT W:W:M EA W:W EA+2
MOV.L ERs,@-ERd R:W 2nd R:W:M
NEXT
Internal
operation
1 state
W:W:M EA W:W EA+2
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 998 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Instruction 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
MOV.L
ERs,@aa:16
R:W 2nd R:W:M 3rd R:W NEXT W:W:M EA W:W EA+2
MOV.L
ERs,@aa:32
R:W 2nd R:W:M 3rd R:W 4th R:W NEXT W:W:M EA W:W EA+2
MOVFPE
@aa:16,Rd
Cannot be used in this LSI.
MOVTPE
Rs,@aa:16
MULXS.B Rs,Rd R:W 2nd R:W NEXT Internal operation 11 state
MULXS.W Rs,Rd R:W 2nd R:W NEXT Internal operation 19 state
MULXU.B Rs,Rd R:W NEXT Internal operation 11 state
MULXU.W Rs,Rd R:W NEXT Internal operation 19 state
NEG.B Rd R:W NEXT
NEG.W Rd R:W NEXT
NEG.L ERd R:W NEXT
NOP R:W NEXT
NOT.B Rd R:W NEXT
NOT.W Rd R:W NEXT
NOT.L ERd R:W NEXT
OR.B #xx:8,Rd R:W NEXT
OR.B Rs,Rd R:W NEXT
OR.W #xx:16,Rd R:W 2nd R:W NEXT
OR.W Rs,Rd R:W NEXT
OR.L #xx:32,ERd R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W NEXT
OR.L ERs,ERd R:W 2nd R:W NEXT
ORC #xx:8,CCR R:W NEXT
ORC #xx:8,EXR R:W 2nd R:W NEXT
POP.W Rn R:W NEXT Internal
operation
1 state
R:W EA
POP.L ERn R:W 2nd R:W:M
NEXT
Internal
operation
1 state
R:W:M EA R:W EA+2
PUSH.W Rn R:W NEXT Internal
operation
1 state
W:W EA
PUSH.L ERn R:W 2nd R:W:M
NEXT
Internal
operation
1 state
W:W:M EA W:W EA+2
ROTL.B Rd R:W NEXT
ROTL.B #2,Rd R:W NEXT
ROTL.W Rd R:W NEXT
ROTL.W #2,Rd R:W NEXT
ROTL.L ERd R:W NEXT
ROTL.L #2, ERd R:W NEXT
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 999 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Instruction 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
ROTR.B Rd R:W NEXT
ROTR.B #2,Rd R:W NEXT
ROTR.W Rd R:W NEXT
ROTR.W #2,Rd R:W NEXT
ROTR.L ERd R:W NEXT
ROTR.L #2,ERd R:W NEXT
ROTXL.B Rd R:W NEXT
ROTXL.B #2.Rd R:W NEXT
ROTXL.W Rd R:W NEXT
ROTXL.W #2,Rd R:W NEXT
ROTXL.L ERd R:W NEXT
ROTXL.L #2,ERd R:W NEXT
ROTXR.B Rd R:W NEXT
ROTXR.B #2,Rd R:W NEXT
ROTXR.W Rd R:W NEXT
ROTXR.W #2,Rd R:W NEXT
ROTXR.L ERd R:W NEXT
ROTXR.L #2.ERd R:W NEXT
RTE R:W NEXT R:W stack
(EXR)
R:W
stack(H)
R:W
stack(L)
Internal
operation
1 state
R:W *4
RTS R:W NEXT R:W:M
stack(H)
R:W
stack(L)
Internal
operation
1 state
R:W *4
SHAL.B Rd R:W NEXT
SHAL B #2,Rd R:W NEXT
SHAL.W Rd R:W NEXT
SHAL.W #2,Rd R:W NEXT
SHAL.L ERd R:W NEXT
SHAL.L #2,ERd R:W NEXT
SHAR.B Rd R:W NEXT
SHAR.B #2,Rd R:W NEXT
SHAR.W Rd R:W NEXT
SHAR.W #2,Rd R:W NEXT
SHAR.L ERd R:W NEXT
SHAR.L #2,ERd R:W NEXT
SHLL.B Rd R:W NEXT
SHLL.B #2,Rd R:W NEXT
SHLL.W Rd R:W NEXT
SHLL.W #2,Rd R:W NEXT
SHLL.L ERd R:W NEXT
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1000 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Instruction 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
SHLL.L #2,ERd R:W NEXT
SHLR.B Rd R:W NEXT
SHLR.B #2,Rd R:W NEXT
SHLR.W Rd R:W NEXT
SHLR.W #2,Rd R:W NEXT
SHLR.L ERd R:W NEXT
SHLR.L #2,ERd R:W NEXT
SLEEP R:W NEXT Internal
operation:
M
STC.B CCR,Rd R:W NEXT
STC.B EXR,Rd R:W NEXT
STC.W CCR,@ERd R:W 2nd R:W NEXT W:W EA
STC.W EXR,@ERd R:W 2nd R:W NEXT W:W EA
STC.W
CCR,@(d:16,ERd)
R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W NEXT W:W EA
STC.W
EXR,@(d:16,ERd)
R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W NEXT W:W EA
STC.W
CCR,@(d:32,ERd)
R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:W 5th R:W NEXT W:W EA
STC.W
EXR,@(d:32,ERd)
R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:W 5th R:W NEXT W:W EA
STC.W CCR,@-
ERd
R:W 2nd R:W NEXT Internal
operation
1 state
W:W EA
STC.W EXR,@-
ERd
R:W 2nd R:W NEXT Internal
operation
1 state
W:W EA
STC.W
CCR,@aa:16
R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W NEXT W:W EA
STC.W
EXR,@aa:16
R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W NEXT W:W EA
STC.W
CCR,@aa:32
R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:W NEXT W:W EA
STC.W
EXR,@aa:32
R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W 4th R:W NEXT W:W EA
STM.L (ERn-
ERn+1),@-SP*9
R:W 2nd R:W:M
NEXT
Internal
operation
1 state
W:W:M
stack (H)*3
W:W
stack (L)*3
STM.L (ERn-
ERn+2),@-SP*9
R:W 2nd R:W:M
NEXT
Internal
operation
1 state
W:W:M
stack (H)*3
W:W
stack (L)*3
STM.L (ERn-
ERn+3),@-SP*9
R:W 2nd R:W:M
NEXT
Internal
operation
1 state
W:W:M
stack (H)*3
W:W
stack (L)*3
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1001 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Instruction 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
STMAC MACH,ERd Cannot be used in this LSI.
STMAC MACL,ERd
SUB.B Rs,Rd R:W NEXT
SUB.W #xx:16,Rd R:W 2nd R:W NEXT
SUB.W Rs,Rd R:W NEXT
SUB.L #xx:32,ERd R:W 2nd R:W 3nd R:W NEXT
SUB.L ERs,ERd R:W NEXT
SUB #1/2/4,ERd R:W NEXT
SUBX #xx:8,Rd R:W NEXT
SUBX Rs,Rd R:W NEXT
TAS @ERd*5 R:W 2nd R:W NEXT R:B:M EA W:B EA
TRAPA #x:2 R:W NEXT Internal
operation
1 state
W:W
stack(L)
W:W
stack(H)
W:W
stack(EXR)
R:W:M
VEC
R:W
VEC+2
Internal
operation
1 state
R:W *6
XOR.B #xx:8,Rd R:W NEXT
XOR.B Rs,Rd R:W NEXT
XOR.W #xx:16,Rd R:W 2nd R:W NEXT
XOR.W Rs,Rd R:W NEXT
XOR.L #xx:32,ERd R:W 2nd R:W 3rd R:W NEXT
XOR.L ERs,ERd R:W 2nd R:W NEXT
XORC #xx:8,CCR R:W NEXT
XORC #xx:8,EXR R:W 2nd R:W NEXT
Reset exception
handling
R:W:M
VEC
R:W
VEC+2
Internal
operation
1 state
R:W *6
Interrupt exception
handling
R:W *7 Internal
operation
1 state
W:W
stack(L)
W:W
stack(H)
W:W
stack(EXR)
R:W:M
VEC
R:W
VEC+2
Internal
operation
1 state
R:W *8
Notes: 1. EAs is the contents of ER5, and EAd is the contents of ER6.
2. 1 is added to EAs and EAd after execution. n is the initial value of R4L or R4. When 0
is set to n, R4L or R4 is not executed.
3. Repeated twice for 2-unit retract/return, three times for 3-unit retract/return, and four
times for 4-retract/return.
4. Head address after return.
5. Only register ER0, ER1, ER4, or ER5 should be used when using the TAS instruction.
6. Start address of the program.
7. Pre-fetch address obtained by adding 2 to the PC to be retracted.
When returning from sleep mode, standby mode or watch mode, internal operation is
executed instead of read operation.
8. Head address of the interrupt process routine.
9. Only registers ER0 to ER6 should be used when using the STM/LDM instruction.
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1002 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
A.6 Change of Condition Codes
This section explains change of condition codes after instruction execution of the CPU. Legend of
the following tables is as follows.
m = 31: Longword size
m = 15: Word size
m = 7: Byte size
Si: Bit i of source operand
Di: Bit i of destination operand
Ri: Bit i of result
Dn: Specified bit of destination operand
−: No affection
: Changes depending on execution result
0: Always cleared to 0
1: Always set to 1
*: Value undetermined
Z': Z flag before execution
C': C flag before execution
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1003 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Table A.14 Change of Condition Code
Instruction H N Z V C Definition
ADD H=Sm-4⋅Dm-4+Dm-4⋅Rm-4+Sm-4⋅Rm-4
N=Rm
Z=Rm⋅Rm-1⋅  ⋅R0
V=Sm⋅Dm⋅Rm+Sm⋅Dm⋅Rm
C=Sm⋅Dm+Dm⋅Rm+Sm⋅Rm
ADDS ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
ADDX H=Sm-4⋅Dm-4+Dm-4⋅Rm-4+Sm-4⋅Rm-4
N=Rm
Z=Z'⋅Rm⋅  ⋅R0
V=Sm⋅Dm⋅Rm+Sm⋅Dm⋅Rm
C=Sm⋅Dm+Dm⋅Rm+Sm⋅Rm
AND ⎯ 0 ⎯ N=Rm
Z= Rm⋅Rm-1⋅  ⋅R0
ANDC Value in the bit corresponding to execution result
is stored.
No flag change when EXR.
BAND ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ C=C'⋅Dn
Bcc ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
BCLR ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
BIAND ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ C=C'⋅Dn
BILD ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ C=Dn
BIOR ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ C=C'+Dn
BIST ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
BIXOR ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ C=C'⋅Dn+C'⋅Dn
BLD ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ C=Dn
BNOT ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
BOR ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ C=C'+Dn
BSET ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
BSR ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
BST ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
BTST ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Z=Dn
BXOR ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ C=C'⋅Dn+C'⋅Dn
CLRMAC Cannot be used in this LSI.
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1004 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Instruction H N Z V C Definition
CMP H=Sm-4⋅Dm-4+Dm-4⋅Rm-4+Sm-4⋅Rm-4
N=Rm
Z=Rm⋅Rm-1⋅  ⋅R0
V=Sm⋅Dm⋅Rm+Sm⋅Dm⋅Rm
C=Sm⋅Dm+Dm⋅Rm+Sm⋅Rm
DAA * * N=Rm
Z=Rm⋅Rm-1⋅  ⋅R0
C: Decimal addition carry
DAS * * N=Rm
Z=Rm⋅Rm-1⋅  ⋅R0
C: Decimal subtraction borrow
DEC ⎯ ⎯ N=Rm
Z=Rm⋅Rm-1⋅  ⋅R0
V=Dm⋅Rm
DIVXS ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ N=Sm⋅Dm+Sm⋅Dm
Z=Sm⋅Sm-1⋅  ⋅S0
DIVXU ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ N=Sm
Z=Sm⋅Sm-1⋅  ⋅S0
EEPMOV ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
EXTS ⎯ 0 ⎯ N=Rm
Z=Rm⋅Rm-1⋅  ⋅R0
EXTU ⎯ 0 0 ⎯ Z=Rm⋅Rm-1⋅  ⋅R0
INC ⎯ ⎯ N=Rm
Z=Rm⋅Rm-1⋅  ⋅R0
V=Dm⋅Rm
JMP ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
JSR ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
LDC Value in the bit corresponding to execution result
is stored.
No flag change when EXR.
LDM ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
LDMAC
MAC
Cannot be used in this LSI.
MOV ⎯ 0 ⎯ N=Rm
Z=Rm⋅Rm-1⋅  ⋅R0
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1005 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Instruction H N Z V C Definition
MOVFPE
MOVTPE
Cannot be used in this LSI.
MULXS ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ N=R2m
Z=R2m⋅R2m-1⋅  ⋅R0
MULXU ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
NEG H=Dm-4+Rm-4
N=Rm
Z=Rm⋅Rm-1⋅  ⋅R0
V=Dm⋅Rm
C=Dm+Rm
NOP ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
NOT ⎯ 0 ⎯ N=Rm
Z=Rm⋅Rm-1⋅  ⋅R0
OR ⎯ 0 ⎯ N=Rm
Z=Rm⋅Rm-1⋅  ⋅R0
ORC Value in the bit corresponding to execution result
is stored. No flag change when EXR.
POP ⎯ 0 ⎯ N=Rm
Z=Rm⋅Rm-1⋅  ⋅R0
PUSH ⎯ 0 ⎯ N=Rm
Z=Rm⋅Rm-1⋅  ⋅R0
ROTL ⎯ 0 N=Rm
Z=Rm⋅Rm-1⋅  ⋅R0
C=Dm(In case of 1 bit), C=Dm-1(In case of 2 bits)
ROTR ⎯ 0 N=Rm
Z=Rm⋅Rm-1⋅  ⋅R0
C=D0(In case of 1 bit), C=D-1(In case of 2 bits)
ROTXL ⎯ 0 N=Rm
Z=Rm⋅Rm-1⋅  ⋅R0
C=Dm(In case of 1 bit), C=Dm-1(In case of 2 bits)
ROTXR ⎯ 0 N=Rm
Z=Rm⋅Rm-1⋅  ⋅R0
C=D0(In case of 1 bit), C=D1(In case of 2 bits)
RTE Value in the bit corresponding to execution result
is stored.
RTS ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
Appendix A Instruction Set
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1006 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Instruction H N Z V C Definition
SHAL ⎯ N=Rm
Z=Rm⋅Rm-1⋅  ⋅R0
V=Dm⋅Dm-1+Dm⋅Dm-1(In case of 1 bit)
V=Dm⋅Dm-1⋅Dm-2⋅Dm⋅Dm-1⋅Dm-2
(In case of 2bits)
C=Dm(In case of 1 bit), C=Dm-1(In case of 2 bits)
SHAR ⎯ 0 N=Rm
Z=Rm⋅Rm-1⋅  ⋅R0
C=D0(In case of 1 bit), C=D1(In case of 2 bits)
SHLL ⎯ 0 N=Rm
Z=Rm⋅Rm-1⋅  ⋅R0
C=Dm(In case of 1 bit), C=Dm-1(In case of 2 bits)
SHLR ⎯ 0 0 N=Rm
Z=Rm⋅Rm-1⋅  ⋅R0
C=D0(In case of 1 bit), C=D1(In case of 2 bits)
SLEEP ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
STC ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
STM ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
STMAC Cannot be used in this LSI.
SUB H=Sm-4⋅Dm-4+Dm-4⋅Rm-4+Sm-4⋅Rm-4
N=Rm
Z=Rm⋅Rm-1⋅  ⋅R0
V=Sm⋅Dm⋅Rm+Sm⋅Dm⋅Rm
C=Sm⋅Dm+Dm⋅Rm+Sm⋅Rm
SUBS ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
SUBX H=Sm-4⋅Dm-4+Dm-4⋅Rm-4+Sm-4⋅Rm-4
N=Rm
Z=Z'⋅Rm⋅  ⋅R0
V=Sm⋅Dm⋅Rm+Sm⋅Dm⋅Rm
C=Sm⋅Dm+Dm⋅Rm+Sm⋅Rm
TAS* ⎯ 0 ⎯ N=Dm
Z=Dm⋅Dm-1⋅  ⋅D0
TRAPA ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
XOR ⎯ 0 ⎯ N=Rm
Z=Rm⋅Rm-1⋅  ⋅R0
XORC Value in the bit corresponding to execution result
is stored. No flag change when EXR.
Note: * This instruction should be used with the ER0, ER1, ER4, or ER5 general register only.
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1007 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
B.1 Addresses
Address*1
Register
Name
R/W
Access
Bus
Width
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Module
Name
H'0000
to
H'CFFF
H'D000 DGKp W 16 16 DGKp15 DGKp14 DGKp13 DGKp12 DGKp11 DGKp10 DGKp9 DGKp8
H'D001 DGKp7 DGKp6 DGKp5 DGKp4 DGKp3 DGKp2 DGKp1 DGKp0
H'D002 DGKs W 16 16 DGKs15 DGKs14 DGKs13 DGKs12 DGKs11 DGKs10 DGKs9 DGKs8
H'D003 DGKs7 DGKs6 DGKs5 DGKs4 DGKs3 DGKs2 DGKs1 DGKs0
H'D004 DAp W 16 16 DAp15 DAp14 DAp13 DAp12 DAp11 DAp10 DAp9 DAp8
H'D005 DAp7 DAp6 DAp5 DAp4 DAp3 DAp2 DAp1 DAp0
H'D006 DBp W 16 16 DBp15 DBp14 DBp13 DBp12 DBp11 DBp10 DBp9 DBp8
H'D007 DBp7 DBp6 DBp5 DBp4 DBp3 DBp2 DBp1 DBp0
H'D008 DAs W 16 16 DAs15 DAs14 DAs13 DAs12 DAs11 DAs10 DAs9 DAs8
H'D009 DAs7 DAs6 DAs5 DAs4 DAs3 DAs2 DAs1 DAs0
H'D00A DBs W 16 16 DBs15 DBs14 DBs13 DBs12 DBs11 DBs10 DBs9 DBs8
H'D00B DBs7 DBs6 DBs5 DBs4 DBs3 DBs2 DBs1 DBs0
H'D00C DOfp W 16 16 DOfp15 DOfp14 DOfp13 DOfp12 DOfp11 DOfp10 DOfp9 DOfp8
H'D00D DOfp7 DOfp6 DOfp5 DOfp4 DOfp3 DOfp2 DOfp1 DOfp0
H'D00E DOfs W 16 16 DOfs15 DOfs14 DOfs13 DOfs12 DOfs11 DOfs10 DOfs9 DOfs8
H'D00F DOfs7 DOfs6 DOfs5 DOfs4 DOfs3 DOfs2 DOfs1 DOfs0
Drum
digital filter
H'D010 CGKp W 16 16 CGKp15 CGKp14 CGKp13 CGKp12 CGKp11 CGKp10 CGKp9 CGKp8
H'D011 CGKp7 CGKp6 CGKp5 CGKp4 CGKp3 CGKp2 CGKp1 CGKp0
H'D012 CGKs W 16 16 CGKs15 CGKs14 CGKs13 CGKs12 CGKs11 CGKs10 CGKs9 CGKs8
H'D013 CGKs7 CGKs6 CGKs5 CGKs4 CGKs3 CGKs2 CGKs1 CGKs0
H'D014 CAp W 16 16 CAp15 CAp14 CAp13 CAp12 CAp11 CAp10 CAp9 CAp8
H'D015 CAp7 CAp6 CAp5 CAp4 CAp3 CAp2 CAp1 CAp0
H'D016 CBp W 16 16 CBp15 CBp14 CBp13 CBp12 CBp11 CBp10 CBp9 CBp8
H'D017 CBp7 CBp6 CBp5 CBp4 CBp3 CBp2 CBp1 CBp0
H'D018 CAs W 16 16 CAs15 CAs14 CAs13 CAs12 CAs11 CAs10 CAs9 CAs8
H'D019 CAs7 CAs6 CAs5 CAs4 CAs3 CAs2 CAs1 CAs0
H'D01A CBs W 16 16 CBs15 CBs14 CBs13 CBs12 CBs11 CBs10 CBs9 CBs8
H'D01B CBs7 CBs6 CBs5 CBs4 CBs3 CBs2 CBs1 CBs0
H'D01C COfp W 16 16 COfp15 COfp14 COfp13 COfp12 COfp11 COfp10 COfp9 COfp8
H'D01D COfp7 COfp6 COfp5 COfp4 COfp3 COfp2 COfp1 COfp0
H'D01E COfs W 16 16 COfs15 COfs14 COfs13 COfs12 COfs11 COfs10 COfs9 COfs8
H'D01F COfs7 COfs6 COfs5 COfs4 COfs3 COfs2 COfs1 COfs0
Capstan
digital filter
H'D020 DZs W 16 16 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ DZs11 DZs10 DZs9 DZs8 Digital filter
H'D021 DZs7 DZs6 DZs5 DZs4 DZs3 DZs2 DZs1 DZs0
H'D022 DZp W 16 16 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ DZp11 DZp10 DZp9 DZp8
H'D023 DZp7 DZp6 DZp5 DZp4 DZp3 DZp2 DZp1 DZp0
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1008 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Address*1
Register
Name
R/W
Access
Bus
Width
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Module
Name
H'D024 CZs W 16 16 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ CZs11 CZs10 CZs9 CZs8
H'D025 CZs7 CZs6 CZs5 CZs4 CZs3 CZs2 CZs1 CZs0
H'D026 CZp W 16 16 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ CZp11 CZp10 CZp9 CZp8
H'D027 CZp7 CZp6 CZp5 CZp4 CZp3 CZp2 CZp1 CZp0
H'D028 DFIC R/W 8 16 ⎯ DROV DPHA DZPON DZSON DSG2 DSG1 DSG0
H'D029 CFIC R/W 8 ⎯ CROV CPHA CZPON CZSON CSG2 CSG1 CSG0
H'D02A DFUCR R/W 8 16 ⎯ ⎯ PTON CP/DP CFEPS DFEPS CFESS DFESS
Digital filter
H'D030 DFPR W 16 16 DFPR15 DFPR14 DFPR13 DFPR12 DFPR11 DFPR10 DFPR9 DFPR8
H'D031 DFPR7 DFPR6 DFPR5 DFPR4 DFPR3 DFPR2 DFPR1 DFPR0
H'D032 DFER R/W 16 16 DFER15 DFER14 DFER13 DFER12 DFER11 DFER10 DFER9 DFER8
H'D033 DFER7 DFER6 DFER5 DFER4 DFER3 DFER2 DFER1 DFER0
H'D034 DFRUDR W 16 16 DFRUDR
15
DFRUDR
14
DFRUDR
13
DFRUDR
12
DFRUDR
11
DFRUDR
10
DFRUDR
9
DFRUDR
8
H'D035 DFRUDR
7
DFRUDR
6
DFRUDR
5
DFRUDR
4
DFRUDR
3
DFRUDR
2
DFRUDR
1
DFRUDR
0
H'D036 DFRLDR W 16 16 DFRLDR1
5
DFRLDR1
4
DFRLDR1
3
DFRLDR1
2
DFRLDR1
1
DFRLDR1
0
DFRLDR9 DFRLDR8
H'D037 DFRLDR7 DFRLDR6 DFRLDR5 DFRLDR4 DFRLDR3 DFRLDR2 DFRLDR1 DFRLDR0
H'D038 DFVCR R/W 8 16 DFCS1 DFCS0 DFOVF DFRFON DF-
R/UNR
DPCNT DFRCS1 DFRCS0
H'D039 DPGCR R/W 8 16 DPCS1 DPCS0 DPOVF N/V HSWES ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
H'D03A DPPR2 W 16 16 DPPR15 DPPR14 DPPR13 DPPR12 DPPR11 DPPR10 DPPR9 DPPR8
H'D03B DPPR7 DPPR6 DPPR5 DPPR4 DPPR3 DPPR2 DPPR1 DPPR0
H'D03C DPPR1 W 8 16 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ DPPR19 DPPR18 DPPR17 DPPR16
H'D03D DPER1 R/W 8 16 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ DPER19 DPER18 DPER17 DPER16
H'D03E DPER15 DPER14 DPER13 DPER12 DPER11 DPER10 DPER9 DPER8
H'D03F
DPER2 R/W 16 16
DPER7 DPER6 DPER5 DPER4 DPER3 DPER2 DPER1 DPER0
Drum error
detector
H'D040
to
H'D04F
H'D050 CFPR W 16 16 CFPR15 CFPR14 CFPR13 CFPR12 CFPR11 CFPR10 CFPR9 CFPR8
H'D051 CFPR7 CFPR6 CFPR5 CFPR4 CFPR3 CFPR2 CFPR1 CFPR0
H'D052 CFER R/W 16 16 CFER15 CFER14 CFER13 CFER12 CFER11 CFER10 CFER9 CFER8
H'D053 CFER7 CFER6 CFER5 CFER4 CFER3 CFER2 CFER1 CFER0
H'D054 CFRUDR W 16 16 CFRUDR
15
CFRUDR
14
CFRUDR
13
CFRUDR
12
CFRUDR
11
CFRUDR
10
CFRUDR
9
CFRUDR
8
H'D055 CFRUDR
7
CFRUDR
6
CFRUDR
5
CFRUDR
4
CFRUDR
3
CFRUDR
2
CFRUDR
1
CFRUDR
0
H'D056 CFRLDR W 16 16 CFRLDR1
5
CFRLDR1
4
CFRLDR1
3
CFRLDR1
2
CFRLDR1
1
CFRLDR1
0
CFRLDR9 CFRLDR8
H'D057 CFRLDR7 CFRLDR6 CFRLDR5 CFRLDR4 CFRLDR3 CFRLDR2 CFRLDR1 CFRLDR0
H'D058 CFVCR R/W 8 CFCS1 CFCS0 CFOVF CFRFON CF-
R/UNR
CPCNT CFRCS1 CFRCS0
H'D059 CPGCR R/W 8 16 CPCS1 CPCS0 CPOVF CR/RF SELCFG2 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
H'D05A CPPR2 W 16 16 CPH15 CPH14 CPH13 CPH12 CPH11 CPH10 CPH9 CPH8
H'D05B CPH7 CPH6 CPH5 CPH4 CPH3 CPH2 CPH1 CPH0
H'D05C CPPR1 W 8 16 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ CPH19 CPH18 CPH17 CPH16
Capstan
error
detector
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1009 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Address*1
Register
Name
R/W
Access
Bus
Width
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Module
Name
H'D05D CPER1 R/W 8 16 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ CPER19 CPER18 CPER17 CPER16
H'D05E CPER2 R/W 16 16 CPER15 CPER14 CPER13 CPER12 CPER11 CPER10 CPER9 CPER8
H'D05F CPER7 CPER6 CPER5 CPER4 CPER3 CPER2 CPER1 CPER0
Capstan
error
detector
H'D060 HSM1 R/W 8 16 FLB FLA EMPB EMPA OVWB OVWA CLRB CLRA
H'D061 HSM2 R/W 8 FRT FGR2OFF LOP EDG ISEL1 SOFG OFG VFF/NFF
H'D062 HSLP R/W 8 16 LOB3 LOB2 LOB1 LOB0 LOA3 LOA2 LOA1 LOA0
H'D063
H'D064 FPDRA W 16 16 ⎯ ADTRGA STRIGA NarrowFF
A
VFFA AFFA VpulseA MlevelA
H'D065 PPGA7 PPGA6 PPGA5 PPGA4 PPGA3 PPGA2 PPGA1 PPGA0
H'D066 FTPRA*2 W 16 16 FTPRA15 FTPRA14 FTPRA13 FTPRA12 FTPRA11 FTPRA10 FTPRA9 FTPRA8
H'D066 FTCTR*2 R 16 FTCTR15 FTCTR14 FTCTR13 FTCTR12 FTCTR11 FTCTR10 FTCTR9 FTCTR8
H'D067 FTPRA*2 W 16 16 FTPRA7 FTPRA6 FTPRA5 FTPRA4 FTPRA3 FTPRA2 FTPRA1 FTPRA0
H'D067 FTCTR*2 R 16 FTCTR7 FTCTR6 FTCTR5 FTCTR4 FTCTR3 FTCTR2 FTCTR1 FTCTR0
H'D068 FPDRB W 16 16 ⎯ ADTRGB STRIGB NarrowFF
B
VFFB AFFB VpulseB MlevelB
H'D069 PPGB7 PPGB6 PPGB5 PPGB4 PPGB3 PPGB2 PPGB1 PPGB0
H'D06A FTPRB15 FTPRB14 FTPRB13 FTPRB12 FTPRB11 FTPRB10 FTPRB9 FTPRB8
H'D06B
FTPRB W 16 16
FTPRB7 FTPRB6 FTPRB5 FTPRB4 FTPRB3 FTPRB2 FTPRB1 FTPRB0
H'D06C DFCRA*2 W 8 16 ISEL2 CCLR CKSL DFCRA4 DFCRA3 DFCRA2 DFCRA1 DFCRA0
H'D06C DFCTR*2 R 8 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ DFCTR4 DFCTR3 DFCTR2 DFCTR1 DFCTR0
H'D06D DFCRB W 8 16 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ DFCRB4 DFCRB3 DFCRB2 DFCRB1 DFCRB0
HSW
timing
generator
H'D06E CHCR W 8 16 V/N HSWPOL CRH HAH SIG3 SIG2 SIG1 SIG0 4 head
special-
effects
playback
H'D06F ADDVR R/W 8 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ HMSK Hi-Z CUT VPON POL Additional
V
H'D070 XDR W 16 16 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ XD11 XD10 XD9 XD8
H'D071 XD7 XD6 XD5 XD4 XD3 XD2 XD1 XD0
H'D072 TRDR W 16 16 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ TRD11 TRD10 TRD9 TRD8
H'D073 TRD7 TRD6 TRD5 TRD4 TRD3 TRD2 TRD1 TRD0
H'D074 XTCR R/W 8 16 ⎯ CAPRF AT/MU TRK/X EXC/REF XCS DVREF1 DVREF0
X-value,
TRK-value
H'D075
to
H'D077
H'D078 DPWDR R/W 16 16 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ DPWDR1
1
DPWDR1
0
DPWDR9 DPWDR8
H'D079 DPWDR7 DPWDR6 DPWDR5 DPWDR4 DPWDR3 DPWDR2 DPWDR1 DPWDR0
H'D07A DPWCR W 8 16 DPOL DDC DHIZ DH/L DSF/DF DCK2 DCK1 DCK0
Drum 12-
bit PWM
H'D07B CPWCR W 8 CPOL CDC CHIZ CH/L CSF/DF CCK2 CCK1 CCK0
H'D07C CPWDR R/W 16 16 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ CPWDR1
1
CPWDR1
0
CPWDR9 CPWDR8
H'D07D CPWDR7 CPWDR6 CPWDR5 CPWDR4 CPWDR3 CPWDR2 CPWDR1 CPWDR0
Capstan
12-bit
PWM
H'D07E
to
H'D07F
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1010 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Address*1
Register
Name
R/W
Access
Bus
Width
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Module
Name
H'D080 CTCR W 8 16 NT/PL FSLC FSLB FSLA CCS LCTL UNCTL SLWM
H'D081 CTLM R/W 8 ASM REC/PB FW/RV MD4 MD3 MD2 MD1 MD0
H'D082 RCDR1 W 16 16 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ CMT1B CMT1A CMT19 CMT18
H'D083 CMT17 CMT16 CMT15 CMT14 CMT13 CMT12 CMT11 CMT10
H'D084 RCDR2 W 16 16 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ CMT2B CMT2A CMT29 CMT28
H'D085 CMT27 CMT26 CMT25 CMT24 CMT23 CMT22 CMT21 CMT20
H'D086 RCDR3 W 16 16 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ CMT3B CMT3A CMT39 CMT38
H'D087 CMT37 CMT36 CMT35 CMT34 CMT33 CMT32 CMT31 CMT30
H'D088 RCDR4 W 16 16 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ CMT4B CMT4A CMT49 CMT48
H'D089 CMT47 CMT46 CMT45 CMT44 CMT43 CMT42 CMT41 CMT40
H'D08A RCDR5 W 16 16 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ CMT5B CMT5A CMT59 CMT58
H'D08B CMT57 CMT56 CMT55 CMT54 CMT53 CMT52 CMT51 CMT50
H'D08C DI/O R/W 8 16 VCTR2 VCTR1 VCTR0 ⎯ BPON BPS BPF DI/O
H'D08D BTPR R/W 8 LSP7 LSP6 LSP5 LSP4 LSP3 LSP2 LSP1 LSP0
CTL circuit
H'D08E
to
H'D08F
H'D090 RFD W 16 16 REF15 REF14 REF13 REF12 REF11 REF10 REF9 REF8
H'D091 REF7 REF6 REF5 REF4 REF3 REF2 REF1 REF0
H'D092 CRF W 16 16 CRF15 CRF14 CRF13 CRF12 CRF11 CRF10 CRF9 CRF8
H'D093 CRF7 CRF6 CRF5 CRF4 CRF3 CRF2 CRF1 CRF0
H'D094 RFC R/W 16 16 RFC15 RFC14 RFC13 RFC12 RFC11 RFC10 RFC9 RFC8
H'D095 RFC7 RFC6 RFC5 RFC4 RFC3 RFC2 RFC1 RFC0
H'D096 RFM R/W 8 16 RCS VNA CVS REX CRD OD/EV VST VEG
H'D097 RFM2 R/W 8 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ FDS
Reference
signal
generator
H'D098 CTVC R/W 8 16 CEX CEG ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ CFG HSW CTL
H'D099 CTLR W 8 CTL7 CTL6 CTL5 CTL4 CTL3 CTL2 CTL1 CTL0
H'D09A CDVC R/W 8 16 MCGin ⎯ CMK CMN DVTRG CRF CPS1 CPS0
H'D09B CDIVR1 W 8 ⎯ CDV16 CDV15 CDV14 CDV13 CDV12 CDV11 CDV10
H'D09C CDIVR2 W 8 16 ⎯ CDV26 CDV25 CDV24 CDV23 CDV22 CDV21 CDV20
H'D09D CTMR W 8 ⎯ ⎯ CPM5 CPM4 CPM3 CPM2 CPM1 CPM0
H'D09E FGCR W 8 16 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ DRF
Frequency
divider
H'D09F
H'D0A0 SPMR R/W 8 8 CTLSTOP ⎯ CFGCOM
P
⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
H'D0A1
to
H'D0A2
H'D0A3 SVMCR R/W 8 8 ⎯ ⎯ SVMCR5 SVMCR4 SVMCR3 SVMCR2 SVMCR1 SVMCR0
H'D0A4 CTLGR R/W 8 8 ⎯ ⎯ CTLE/A CTLFB CTLGR3 CTLGR2 CTLGR1 CTLGR0
Servo port
control
H'D0A5
to
H'D0AF
H'D0B0 VTR W 8 16 ⎯ ⎯ VTR5 VTR4 VTR3 VTR2 VTR1 VTR0
H'D0B1 HTR W 8 16 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ HTR3 HTR2 HTR1 HTR0
H'D0B2 HRTR W 8 16 HRTR7 HRTR6 HRTR5 HRTR4 HRTR3 HRTR2 HRTR1 HRTR0
H'D0B3 HPWR W 8 16 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ HPWR3 HPWR2 HPWR1 HPWR0
Sync
detector
(servo)
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1011 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Address*1
Register
Name
R/W
Access
Bus
Width
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Module
Name
H'D0B4 NWR W 8 16 ⎯ ⎯ NWR5 NWR4 NWR3 NWR2 NWR1 NWR0
H'D0B5 NDR W 8 16 NDR7 NDR6 NDR5 NDR4 NDR3 NDR2 NDR1 NDR0
H'D0B6 SYNCR R/W 8 16 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ NIS/VD NOIS FLD SYCT
Sync
detector
(servo)
H'D0B7
H'D0B8 SIENR1 R/W 8 16 IEDRM3 IEDRM2 IEDRM1 IECAP3 IECAP2 IECAP1 IEHSW2 IEHSW1
H'D0B9 SIENR2 R/W 8 16 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ IESNC IECTL
H'D0BA SIRQR1 R/W 8 16 IRRDRM3 IRRDRM2 IRRDRM1 IRRCAP3 IRRCAP2 IRRCAP1 IRRHSW2 IRRHSW1
H'D0BB SIRQR2 R/W 8 16 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ IRRSNC IRRCTL
H'D0BC
to
H'D0E4
Servo
interrupt
control
H'D0E5 DDCSWR R/W 8 8 SWE SW IE IF ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
H'D0E8 ICCR0 R/W 8 8 ICE IEIC MST TRS ACKE BBSY IRIC SCP
H'D0E9 ICSR0 R/W 8 8 ESTP STOP IRTR AASX AL AAS ADZ ACKB
H'D0EE ICDR0*3 R/W 8 8 ICDR7 ICDR6 ICDR5 ICDR4 ICDR3 ICDR2 ICDR1 ICDR0
H'D0EE SARX0*3 SVAX6 SVAX5 SVAX4 SVAX3 SVAX2 SVAX1 SVAX0 FSX
H'D0EF ICMR0*3 MLS WAIT CKS2 CKS1 CKS0 BC2 BC1 BC0
H'D0EF SAR0*3 SVA6 SVA5 SVA4 SVA3 SVA2 SVA1 SVA0 FS
H'D0F0
to
H'D0FF
I2C
interface
H'D100 TIER R/W 8 16 ICIAE ICIBE ICICE ICIDE OCIAE OCIBE OVIE ICSA
H'D101 TCSRX R/W 8 16 ICFA ICFB ICFC ICFD OCFA OCFB OVF CCLRA
H'D102 FRCH R/W 8/16 16
H'D103 FRCL
H'D104 OCRAH*4 R/W 8/16 16
H'D105 OCRAL*4
H'D104 OCRBH*4 R/W 8/16 16
H'D105 OCRBL*4
H'D106 TCRX R/W 8 16 IEDGA IEDGB IEDGC IEDGD BUFEA BUFEB CKS1 CKS0
H'D107 TOCR R/W 8 16 ICSB ICSC ICSD OCRS OEA OEB OLVLA OLVLB
H'D108 ICRAH R 8/16 16
Timer X1
H'D109 ICRAL
H'D10A ICRBH R 8/16 16
H'D10B ICRBL
H'D10C ICRCH R 8/16 16
H'D10D ICRCL
H'D10E ICRDH R 8/16 16
H'D10F ICRDL
H'D110 TMB R/W 8 8 TMB17 TMBIF TMBIE ⎯ ⎯ TMB12 TMB11 TMB10
H'D111 TCB R 8 8 TCB17 TCB16 TCB15 TCB14 TCB13 TCB12 TCB11 TCB10
H'D111 TLB W 8 8 TLB17 TLB16 TLB15 TLB14 TLB13 TLB12 TLB11 TLB10
Timer B
H'D112 LMR R/W 8 8 LMIF LMIE ⎯ ⎯ LMR3 LMR2 LMR1 LMR0 Timer L
H'D113 LTC R 8 8 LTC7 LTC6 LTC5 LTC4 LTC3 LTC2 LTC1 LTC0
H'D113 RCR W 8 8 RCR7 RCR6 RCR5 RCR4 RCR3 RCR2 RCR1 RCR0
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1012 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Address*1
Register
Name
R/W
Access
Bus
Width
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Module
Name
H'D114
to
H'D117
H'D118 TMRM1 R/W 8 8 CLR2 AC/BR RLD RLCK PS21 PS20 RLD/CAP CPS
H'D119 TMRM2 R/W 8 8 LAT PS11 PS10 PS31 PS30 CP/SLM CAPF SLW
H'D11A TMRCP1 R 8 8 TMRC17 TMRC16 TMRC15 TMRC14 TMRC13 TMRC12 TMRC11 TMRC10
H'D11B TMRCP2 R 8 8 TMRC27 TMRC26 TMRC25 TMRC24 TMRC23 TMRC22 TMRC21 TMRC20
H'D11C TMRL1 W 8 8 TMR17 TMR16 TMR15 TMR14 TMR13 TMR12 TMR11 TMR10
H'D11D TMRL2 W 8 8 TMR27 TMR26 TMR25 TMR24 TMR23 TMR22 TMR21 TMR20
H'D11E TMRL3 W 8 8 TMR37 TMR36 TMR35 TMR34 TMR33 TMR32 TMR31 TMR30
H'D11F TMRCS R/W 8 8 TMRI3E TMRI2E TMRI1E TMRI3 TMRI2 TMRI1 ⎯ ⎯
Timer R
H'D120 PWDRL W 8 8 PWDRL7 PWDRL6 PWDRL5 PWDRL4 PWDRL3 PWDRL2 PWDRL1 PWDRL0
H'D121 PWDRU W 8 8 ⎯ ⎯ PWDRU5 PWDRU4 PWDRU3 PWDRU2 PWDRU1 PWDRU0
H'D122 PWCR R/W 8 8 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ PWMCR0
14-bit
PWM
H'D123
to
H'D125
H'D126 PWR0 W 8 8 PW 07 PW06 PW05 PW04 PW03 PW02 PW01 PW00
H'D127 PWR1 W 8 8 PW17 PW16 PW15 PW14 PW13 PW12 PW11 PW10
H'D128 PWR2 W 8 8 PW 27 PW26 PW25 PW24 PW23 PW22 PW21 PW20
H'D129 PWR3 W 8 8 PW 37 PW36 PW35 PW34 PW33 PW32 PW31 PW30
H'D12A PW8CR R/W 8 8 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ PWC3 PWC2 PWC1 PWC0
8-bit PWM
H'D12B
H'D12C ICR1 R 8 8 ICR17 ICR16 ICR15 ICR14 ICR13 ICR12 ICR11 ICR10
H'D12D PCSR R/W 8 8 ICIF ICIE ICEG NCon/off ⎯ DCS2 DCS1 DCS0
PSU
H'D12E
to
H'D12F
H'D130 ADRH R 16 8 ADR9 ADR8 ADR7 ADR6 ADR5 ADR4 ADR3 ADR2
H'D131 ADRL ADR1 ADR0 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
H'D132 AHRH R 16 AHR9 AHR8 AHR7 AHR6 AHR5 AHR4 AHR3 AHR2
H'D133 AHRL AHR1 AHR0 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
H'D134 ADCR R/W 8 CK ⎯ HCH1 HCH0 SCH3 SCH2 SCH1 SCH0
H'D135 ADCSR R/W 8 SEND HEND ADIE SST HST BUSY SCNL ⎯
H'D136 ADTSR R/W 8 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ TRGS1 TRGS0
A/D
H'D137
H'D138 TLK W 8/16 16 TLR27 TLR26 TLR25 TLR24 TLR23 TLR22 TLR21 TLR20
H'D138 TCK R 8/16 TDR27 TDR26 TDR25 TDR24 TDR23 TDR22 TDR21 TDR20
H'D139 TLJ W 8/16 TLR17 TLR16 TLR15 TLR14 TLR13 TLR12 TLR11 TLR10
H'D139 TCJ R 8/16 TDR17 TDR16 TDR15 TDR14 TDR13 TDR12 TDR11 TDR10
H'D13A TMJ R/W 8/16 PS11 PS10 ST 8/16 PS21 PS20 TGL T/R
H'D13B TMJC R/W 8/16 16 BUZZ1 BUZZ0 MON1 MON0 EXN TMJ2IE TMJ1IE PS22
H'D13C TMJS R/W 8/16 TMJ2I TMJ1I ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
Timer J
H'D13D
to
H'D147
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1013 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Address*1
Register
Name
R/W
Access
Bus
Width
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Module
Name
H'D148 SMR1 R/W 8 8 C/A CHR PE O/E STOP MP CKS1 CKS0
H'D149 BRR1 R/W 8
H'D14A SCR1 R/W 8 TIE RIE TE RE MPIE TEIE CKE1 CKE0
H'D14B TDR1 R/W 8
H'D14C SSR1 R/W 8 TDRE RDRF ORER FER PER TEND MPB MPBT
H'D14D RDR1 R 8
H'D14E SCMR1 R/W 8 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ SDIR SINV ⎯ SMIF
Clock
synchrono
us/asynchr
onous SCI
H'D14F
to
H'D157
H'D158 ICCR1 R/W 8 8 ICE IEIC MST TRS ACKE BBSY IRIC SCP
H'D159 ICSR1 R/W 8 ESTP STOP IRTR AASX AL AAS ADZ ACKB
H'D15A
to
H'D15D
H'D15E ICDR1*3 R/W 8 8 ICDR7 ICDR6 ICDR5 ICDR4 ICDR3 ICDR2 ICDR1 ICDR0
H'D15E SARX1*3 R/W 8 SVAX6 SVAX5 SVAX4 SVAX3 SVAX2 SVAX1 SVAX0 FSX
H'D15F ICMR1*3 R/W 8 MLS WAIT CKS2 CKS1 CKS0 BC2 BC1 BC0
H'D15F SAR1*3 R/W 8 SVA6 SVA5 SVA4 SVA3 SVA2 SVA1 SVA0 FS
I2C
interface
H'D160
to
H'D1FF
H'D200 CLINE1 R/W 8/16 16 BPTN1 SZ1 CLU11 CLU12 KR1 KG1 KB1 KLU1 OSD
H'D201 CLINE2 R/W 8/16 16 BPTN2 SZ2 CLU21 CLU22 KR2 KG2 KB2 KLU2
H'D202 CLINE3 R/W 8/16 16 BPTN3 SZ3 CLU31 CLU32 KR3 KG3 KB3 KLU3
H'D203 CLINE4 R/W 8/16 16 BPTN4 SZ4 CLU41 CLU42 KR4 KG4 KB4 KLU4
H'D204 CLINE5 R/W 8/16 16 BPTN5 SZ5 CLU51 CLU52 KR5 KG5 KB5 KLU5
H'D205 CLINE6 R/W 8/16 16 BPTN6 SZ6 CLU61 CLU62 KR6 KG6 KB6 KLU6
H'D206 CLINE7 R/W 8/16 16 BPTN7 SZ7 CLU71 CLU72 KR7 KG7 KB7 KLU7
H'D207 CLINE8 R/W 8/16 16 BPTN8 SZ8 CLU81 CLU82 KR8 KG8 KB8 KLU8
H'D208 CLINE9 R/W 8/16 16 BPTN9 SZ9 CLU91 CLU92 KR9 KG9 KB9 KLU9
H'D209 CLINE10 R/W 8/16 16 BPTN10 SZ10 CLU101 CLU102 KR10 KG10 KB10 KLU10
H'D20A CLINE11 R/W 8/16 16 BPTN11 SZ11 CLU111 CLU112 KR11 KG11 KB11 KLU11
H'D20B CLINE12 R/W 8/16 16 BPTN12 SZ12 CLU121 CLU122 KR12 KG12 KB12 KLU12
H'D20C VPOSH R/W 8/16 16 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ VSPC2 VSPC1 VSPC0 VP8
H'D20D VPOSL R/W 8/16 16 VP7 VP6 VP5 VP4 VP3 VP2 VP1 VP0
H'D20E HPOS R/W 8/16 16 HP7 HP6 HP5 HP4 HP3 HP2 HP1 HP0
H'D20F DOUT R/W 8/16 16 ⎯ RGBC YCOC DOBC DSEL CRSEL ⎯ ⎯
H'D210 DCNTLH R/W 8/16 16 VDSPON DISPM LACEM BLKS OSDON ⎯ EDGE EDGC
H'D211 DCNTLL R/W 8/16 16 BR BG BB BLU1 BLU0 CAMP KAMP BAMP
H'D212 DFORMH R/W 8/16 16 TVM2 TVM1 TVM0 FSCIN FSCEXT ⎯ OSDVE OSDVF
H'D213 DFORML R/W 8/16 16 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ DTMV LDREQ VACS
H'D214
to
H'D21F
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1014 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Address*1
Register
Name
R/W
Access
Bus
Width
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Module
Name
H'D220 SEVFD R/W 8/16 16 EVNIE EVNIF ⎯ STBE4 STBE3 STBE2 STBE1 STBE0 Data slicer
H'D221 SLVLE2 SLVLE1 SLVLE0 DLYE4 DLYE3 DLYE2 DLYE1 DLYE0
H'D222 SODFD R/W 8/16 ODDIE ODDIF ⎯ STBO4 STBO3 STBO2 STBO1 STBO0
H'D223 SLVL02 SLVL01 SLVL00 DLYO4 DLYO3 DLYO2 DLYO1 DLYO0
H'D224 SLINE1 R/W 8/16 SENBL1 SFLD1 ⎯ SLINE14 SLINE13 SLINE12 SLINE11 SLINE10
H'D225 SLINE2 R/W 8/16 SENBL2 SFLD2 ⎯ SLINE24 SLINE23 SLINE22 SLINE21 SLINE20
H'D226 SLINE3 R/W 8/16 SENBL3 SFLD3 ⎯ SLINE34 SLINE33 SLINE32 SLINE31 SLINE30
H'D227 SLINE4 R/W 8/16 SENBL4 SFLD4 ⎯ SLINE44 SLINE43 SLINE42 SLINE41 SLINE40
H'D228 SDTCT1 R 8/16 CRDF1 SBDF1 ENDF1 ⎯ CRIC13 CRIC12 CRIC11 CRIC10
H'D229 SDTCT2 R 8/16 CRDF2 SBDF2 ENDF2 ⎯ CRIC23 CRIC22 CRIC21 CRIC20
H'D22A SDTCT3 R 8/16 CRDF3 SBDF3 ENDF3 ⎯ CRIC33 CRIC32 CRIC31 CRIC30
H'D22B SDTCT4 R 8/16 CRDF4 SBDF4 ENDF4 ⎯ CRIC43 CRIC42 CRIC41 CRIC40
H'D22C SDATA1 R 8/16
H'D22D
H'D22E SDATA2 R 8/16
H'D22F
H'D230 SDATA3 R 8/16
H'D231
H'D232 SDATA4 R 8/16
H'D233
H'D234
to
H'D23F
H'D240 SEPIMR R/W 8 16 CCMPV1 CCMPV0 CCMPSL SYNCT VSEL DLPFON ⎯ FRQSEL
H'D241 SEPCR R/W 8 AFCVIE AFCVIF VCKSL VCMPON HCKSEL HHKON HHKON2 FLD
H'D242 SEPACR R/W 8 NDETIE NDETIF HSEL ⎯ ⎯ ARST DOTCKS
L
DSL32B
H'D243 HVTHR W 8 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ HVTH4 HVTH3 HVTH2 HVTH1 HVTH0
H'D244 VVTHR W 8 VVTH7 VVTH6 VVTH5 VVTH4 VVTH3 VVTH2 VVTH1 VVTH0
H'D245 FWIDR W 8 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ FWID3 FWID2 FWID1 FWID0
H'D246 HCMMR W 16 HC8 HC7 HC6 HC5 HC4 HC3 HC2 HC1
H'D247 HC0 HM6 HM5 HM4 HM3 HM2 HM1 HM0
NDETC R 8 NC7 NC6 NC5 NC4 NC3 NC2 NC1 NC0 H'D248
NDETR W 8 NR7 NR6 NR5 NR4 NR3 NR2 NR1 NR0
H'D249 DDETWR W 8 SRWDE1 SRWDE0 SRWDS1 SRWDS0 CRWDE1 CRWDE0 CRWDS1 CRWDS0
H'D24A INFRQR W 8 VFS2 VFS1 HFS ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ — —
Sync
separator
H'D24B
to
H'FFAF
H'FFB0 TAR0 R/W 8 8 A23 A22 A21 A20 A19 A18 A17 A16 ATC
H'FFB1 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8
H'FFB2 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 ⎯
H'FFB3 TAR1 R/W 8 A23 A22 A21 A20 A19 A18 A17 A16
H'FFB4 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8
H'FFB5 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 ⎯
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1015 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Address*1
Register
Name
R/W
Access
Bus
Width
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Module
Name
H'FFB6 TAR2 R/W 8 A23 A22 A21 A20 A19 A18 A17 A16
H'FFB7 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8
H'FFB8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 ⎯
H'FFB9 ATCR R/W 8 ⎯ ⎯ − ⎯ ⎯ TRC2 TRC1 TRC0
ATC
H'FFBA TMA R/W 8 8 TMAOV TMAIE ⎯ ⎯ TMA3 TMA2 TMA1 TMA0
H'FFBB TCA R 8 TCA7 TCA6 TCA5 TCA4 TCA3 TCA2 TCA1 TCA0
Timer A
H'FFBC WTCSR R/W 8/16 16 OVF WT/IT TME ⎯ RST/NMI CKS2 CKS1 CKS0
H'FFBD WTCNT*5 R/W 8/16
WDT
H'FFBE
to
H'FFBF
H'FFC0 PDR0 R 8 8 PDR07 PDR06 PDR05 PDR04 PDR03 PDR02 PDR01 PDR00
H'FFC1 PDR1 R/W 8 PDR17 PDR16 PDR15 PDR14 PDR13 PDR12 PDR11 PDR10
H'FFC2 PDR2 R/W 8 PDR27 PDR26 PDR25 PDR24 PDR23 PDR22 PDR21 PDR20
H'FFC3 PDR3 R/W 8 PDR37 PDR36 PDR35 PDR34 PDR33 PDR32 PDR31 PDR30
H'FFC4 PDR4 R/W 8
8
PDR47 PDR46 PDR45 PDR44 PDR43 PDR42 PDR41 PDR40
Port data
register
H'FFC5
H'FFC6 PDR6 R/W 8 PDR67 PDR66 PDR65 PDR64 PDR63 PDR62 PDR61 PDR60
H'FFC7 PDR7 R/W 8 PDR77 PDR76 PDR75 PDR74 PDR73 PDR72 PDR71 PDR70
H'FFC8 PDR8 R/W 8
8
PDR87 PDR86 PDR85 PDR84 PDR83 PDR82 PDR81 PDR80
H'FFC9
to
H'FFCC
H'FFCD PMR0 R/W 8 8 PMR07 PMR06 PMR05 PMR04 PMR03 PMR02 PMR01 PMR00
H'FFCE PMR1 R/W 8 PMR17 PMR16 PMR15 PMR14 PMR13 PMR12 PMR11 PMR10
Port mode
register
H'FFCF
H'FFD0 PMR3 R/W 8 8 PMR37 PMR36 PMR35 PMR34 PMR33 PMR32 PMR31 PMR30
H'FFD1 PCR1 W 8 8 PCR17 PCR16 PCR15 PCR14 PCR13 PCR12 PCR11 PCR10
H'FFD2 PCR2 W 8 PCR27 PCR26 PCR25 PCR24 PCR23 PCR22 PCR21 PCR20
Port
control
register
H'FFD3 PCR3 W 8 PCR37 PCR36 PCR35 PCR34 PCR33 PCR32 PCR31 PCR30
H'FFD4 PCR4 W 8 PCR47 PCR46 PCR45 PCR44 PCR43 PCR42 PCR41 PCR40
H'FFD5
H'FFD6 PCR6 W 8 8 PCR67 PCR66 PCR65 PCR64 PCR63 PCR62 PCR61 PCR60
H'FFD7 PCR7 W 8 PCR77 PCR76 PCR75 PCR74 PCR73 PCR72 PCR71 PCR70
H'FFD8 PCR8 W 8 PCR87 PCR86 PCR85 PCR84 PCR83 PCR82 PCR81 PCR80
H'FFD9 PMRA R/W 8 8 PMRA7 PMRA6 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
H'FFDA PMRB R/W 8 PMRB7 PMRB6 PMRB5 PMRB4 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
H'FFDB PMR4 R/W 8 PMR47 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ PMR40
H'FFDC
H'FFDD PMR6 R/W 8 8 PMR67 PMR66 PMR65 PMR64 PMR63 PMR62 PMR61 PMR60
H'FFDE PMR7 R/W 8 PMR77 PMR76 PMR75 PMR74 PMR73 PMR72 PMR71 PMR70
H'FFDF PMR8 R/W 8 PMR87 PMR86 PMR85 PMR84 PMR83 PMR82 PMR81 PMR80
H'FFE0 PMRC R/W 8 ⎯ ⎯ PMRC5 PMRC4 PMRC3 ⎯ PMRC1 ⎯
Port mode
register
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1016 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Address*1
Register
Name
R/W
Access
Bus
Width
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Module
Name
H'FFE1 PUR1 R/W 8 8 PUR17 PUR16 PUR15 PUR14 PUR13 PUR12 PUR11 PUR10
H'FFE2 PUR2 R/W 8 PUR27 PUR26 PUR25 PUR24 PUR23 PUR22 PUR21 PUR20
H'FFE3 PUR3 R/W 8 PUR37 PUR36 PUR35 PUR34 PUR33 PUR32 PUR31 PUR30
Port pull-
up select
register
H'FFE4 RTPEGR R/W 8 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ RTPEGR
1
RTPEGR
0
H'FFE5 RTPSR1 R/W 8 RTPSR17 RTPSR16 RTPSR15 RTPSR14 RTPSR13 RTPSR12 RTPSR11 RTPSR10
H'FFE6 RTPSR2 R/W 8 RTPSR27 RTPSR26 RTPSR25 RTPSR24 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
Realtime
port
H'FFE7
H'FFE8 SYSCR R/W 8 8 ⎯ ⎯ INTM1 INTM0 XRST ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
H'FFE9 MDCR R 8 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ MDS0
H'FFEA SBYCR R/W 8 SSBY STS2 STS1 STS0 ⎯ ⎯ SCK1 SCK0
H'FFEB LPWRCR R/W 8 DTON LSON NESEL ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ SA1 SA0
H'FFEC MSTPCR
H
R/W 8 MSTP15 MSTP14 MSTP13 MSTP12 MSTP11 MSTP10 MSTP9 MSTP8
H'FFED MSTPCR
L
R/W 8 MSTP7 MSTP6 MSTP5 MSTP4 MSTP3 MSTP2 MSTP1 MSTP0
H'FFEE STCR R/W 8 ⎯ IICX1 IICX0 ⎯ FLSHE OSROME ⎯ ⎯
System
control
register
H'FFEF
H'FFF0 IEGR R/W 8 8 ⎯ IRQ5EG IRQ4EG IRQ3EG IRQ2EG IRQ1EG IRQ0EG1 IRQ0EG0 IRQ edge
H'FFF1 IENR R/W 8 ⎯ ⎯ IRQ5E IRQ4E IRQ3E IRQ2E IRQ1E IRQ0E IRQ
enable
H'FFF2 IRQR R/W 8 ⎯ ⎯ IRQ5F IRQ4F IRQ3F IRQ2F IRQ1F IRQ0F IRQ status
H'FFF3 ICRA R/W 8 ICRA7 ICRA6 ICRA5 ICRA4 ICRA3 ICRA2 ICRA1 ICRA0
H'FFF4 ICRB R/W 8 ICRB7 ICRB6 ICRB5 ICRB4 ICRB3 ICRB2 ICRB1 ICRB0
H'FFF5 ICRC R/W 8 ICRC7 ICRC6 ICRC5 ICRC4 ICRC3 ICRC2 ICRC1 ICRC0
IRQ
priority
control
H'FFF6 ICRD R/W 8
ICRD7 ICRD6 ICRD5 ICRD4 ICRD3 ICRD2 ICRD1 ICRD0
H'FFF7 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
H'FFF8 FLMCR1 R/W 8 8 FWE SWE1 ESU1 PSU1 EV1 PV1 E1 P1
H'FFF9 FLMCR2 R/W 8 8 FLER SWE2 ESU2 PSU2 EV2 PV2 E2 P2
H'FFFA EBR1 R/W 8 8 EB7 EB6 EB5 EB4 EB3 EB2 EB1 EB0
H'FFFB EBR2 R/W 8 8 EB15 EB14 EB13 EB12 EB11 EB10 EB9 EB8
Flash
memory
H'FFFC ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
H'FFFD ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
H'FFFE ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
H'FFFF ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯
Notes: 1. Lower 16bits of the address.
2. Assigned to the same address.
3. Access varies depending on the ICE bit.
4. OCRA and OCRB address are the same, which can be switched by the OCSR bit in
TOCR.
5. The address is H'FFBC when written to. WTCNT and WTCSR are assigned to the
same address. Refer to section 17.2.4, Notes on Register Access.
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1017 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
B.2 Function List
H'D000 and H'D001: Drum Phase Gain Constant DGKp: Drum Digital Filter
Bit
Initial value
R/W
*
W
13
*
W
14
*
W
15 1032547
*
W
6
*
W
9
*
W
8
*
W
11
*
W
10
*
W
*
WWWWWWW
12
*****
*
:
:
:
DGKp15 DGKp14 DGKp13 DGKp12 DGKp11 DGKp10 DGKp9 DGKp8 DGKp7 DGKp6 DGKp5 DGKp4 DGKp3 DGKp2 DGKp1 DGKp0
H'D002 and H'D003: Drum Speed Gain Constant DGKs: Drum Digital Filter
*
W
13
*
W
14
*
W
15 1032547
*
W
6
*
W
9
*
W
8
*
W
11
*
W
10
*
W
*
WWWWWWW
12
*****
*
DGKs15 DGKs14 DGKs13 DGKs12 DGKs11 DGKs10 DGKs9 DGKs8 DGKs7 DGKs6 DGKs5 DGKs4 DGKs3 DGKs2 DGKs1 DGKs0
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
H'D004 and H'D005: Drum Phase Coefficient A DAp: Drum Digital Filter
*
W
13
*
W
14
*
W
15 1032547
*
W
6
*
W
9
*
W
8
*
W
11
*
W
10
*
W
*
WWWWWWW
12
*****
*
DAp15 DAp14 DAp13 DAp12 DAp11 DAp10 DAp9 DAp8 DAp7 DAp6 DAp5 DAp4 DAp3 DAp2 DAp1 DAp0
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
H'D006 and H'D007: Drum Phase Coefficient B DBp: Drum Digital Filter
*
W
13
*
W
14
*
W
15 1032547
*
W
6
*
W
9
*
W
8
*
W
11
*
W
10
*
W
*
WWWWWWW
12
*****
*
DBp15 DBp14 DBp13 DBp12 DBp11 DBp10 DBp9 DBp8 DBp7 DBp6 DBp5 DBp4 DBp3 DBp2 DBp1 DBp0
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
H'D008 and H'D009: Drum Speed Coefficient A DAs: Drum Digital Filter
*
W
13
*
W
14
*
W
15 1032547
*
W
6
*
W
9
*
W
8
*
W
11
*
W
10
*
W
*
WWWWWWW
12
*****
*
DAs15 DAs14 DAs13 DAs12 DAs11 DAs10 DAs9 DAs8 DAs7 DAs6 DAs5 DAs4 DAs3 DAs2 DAs1 DAs0
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1018 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D00A and H'D00B: Drum Speed Coefficient B DBs: Drum Digital Filter
*
W
13
*
W
14
*
W
15 1032547
*
W
6
*
W
9
*
W
8
*
W
11
*
W
10
*
W
*
WWWWWWW
12
*****
*
DBs15 DBs14 DBs13 DBs12 DBs11 DBs10 DBs9 DBs8 DBs7 DBs6 DBs5 DBs4 DBs3 DBs2 DBs1 DBs0
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
H'D00C and H'D00D: Drum Phase Offset DOfp: Drum Digital Filter
*
W
13
*
W
14
*
W
15 1032547
*
W
6
*
W
9
*
W
8
*
W
11
*
W
10
*
W
*
WWWWWWW
12
*****
*
DOfp15 DOfp14 DOfp13 DOfp12 DOfp11 DOfp10 DOfp9 DOfp8 DOfp7 DOfp6 DOfp5 DOfp4 DOfp3 DOfp2 DOfp1 DOfp0
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
H'D00E and H'D00F: Capstan Speed Offset DOfs: Drum Digital Filter
*
W
13
*
W
14
*
W
15 1032547
*
W
6
*
W
9
*
W
8
*
W
11
*
W
10
*
W
*
WWWWWWW
12
*****
*
DOfs15 DOfs14 DOfs13 DOfs12 DOfs11 DOfs10 DOfs9 DOfs8 DOfs7 DOfs6 DOfs5 DOfs4 DOfs3 DOfs2 DOfs1 DOfs0
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
H'D010 and H'D011: Capstan Phase Gain Constant CGKp: Capstan Digital Filter
*
W
13
*
W
14
*
W
15 1032547
*
W
6
*
W
9
*
W
8
*
W
11
*
W
10
*
W
*
WWWWWWW
12
*****
*
CGKp15 CGKp14 CGKp13 CGKp12 CGKp11 CGKp10 CGKp9 CGKp8 CGKp7 CGKp6 CGKp5 CGKp4 CGKp3 CGKp2 CGKp1 CGKp0
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
H'D012 and H'D013: Capstan Speed Gain Constant CGKs: Capstan Digital Filter
*
W
13
*
W
14
*
W
15 1032547
*
W
6
*
W
9
*
W
8
*
W
11
*
W
10
*
W
*
WWWWWWW
12
*****
*
CGKs15 CGKs14 CGKs13 CGKs12 CGKs11 CGKs10 CGKs9 CGKs8 CGKs7 CGKs6 CGKs5 CGKs4 CGKs3 CGKs2 CGKs1 CGKs0
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1019 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D014 and H'D015: Capstan Phase Coefficient A CAp: Capstan Digital Filter
*
W
13
*
W
14
*
W
15 1032547
*
W
6
*
W
9
*
W
8
*
W
11
*
W
10
*
W
*
WWWWWWW
12
*****
*
CAp15 CAp14 CAp13 CAp12 CAp11 CAp10 CAp9 CAp8 CAp7 CAp6 CAp5 CAp4 CAp3 CAp2 CAp1 CAp0
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
H'D016 and H'D017: Capstan Phase Coefficient B CBp: Capstan Digital Filter
*
W
13
*
W
14
*
W
15 1032547
*
W
6
*
W
9
*
W
8
*
W
11
*
W
10
*
W
*
WWWWWWW
12
*****
*
CBp15 CBp14 CBp13 CBp12 CBp11 CBp10 CBp9 CBp8 CBp7 CBp6 CBp5 CBp4 CBp3 CBp2 CBp1 CBp0
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
H'D018 and H'D019: Capstan Speed Coefficient A CAs: Capstan Digital Filter
*
W
13
*
W
14
*
W
15 1032547
*
W
6
*
W
9
*
W
8
*
W
11
*
W
10
*
W
*
WWWWWWW
12
*****
*
CAs15 CAs14 CAs13 CAs12 CAs11 CAs10 CAs9 CAs8 CAs7 CAs6 CAs5 CAs4 CAs3 CAs2 CAs1 CAs0
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
H'D01A and H'D01B: Capstan Speed Coefficient B CBs: Capstan Digital Filter
*
W
13
*
W
14
*
W
15 1032547
*
W
6
*
W
9
*
W
8
*
W
11
*
W
10
*
W
*
WWWWWWW
12
*****
*
CBs15 CBs14 CBs13 CBs12 CBs11 CBs10 CBs9 CBs8 CBs7 CBs6 CBs5 CBs4 CBs3 CBs2 CBs1 CBs0
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
H'D01C and H'D01D: Capstan Phase Offset COfp: Capstan Digital Filter
*
W
13
*
W
14
*
W
15 1032547
*
W
6
*
W
9
*
W
8
*
W
11
*
W
10
*
W
*
WWWWWWW
12
*****
*
COfp15 COfp14 COfp13 COfp12 COfp11 COfp10 COfp9 COfp8 COfp7 COfp6 COfp5 COfp4 COfp3 COfp2 COfp1 COfp0
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1020 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D01E and H'D01F: Capstan Speed Offset COfs: Capstan Digital Filter
*
W
13
*
W
14
*
W
15 1032547
*
W
6
*
W
9
*
W
8
*
W
11
*
W
10
*
W
*
WWWWWWW
12
*****
*
COfs15 COfs14 COfs13 COfs12 COfs11 COfs10 COfs9 COfs8 COfs7 COfs6 COfs5 COfs4 COfs3 COfs2 COfs1 COfs0
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
H'D020 and H'D021: Drum System Speed Delay Initialization Register DZs: Digital filter
1
—
13
1
—
14
1
—
15 1032547
0
W
6
0
W
9
0
W
8
0
W
11
0
W
10
0
W
1
—
WWWWWW
12
00000
0
DZs15 DZs14 DZs13 DZs12 DZs11 DZs10 DZs9 DZs8 DZs7 DZs6 DZs5 DZs4 DZs3 DZs2 DZs1 DZs0
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
H'D022 and H'D023: Drum System Phase Delay Initialization Register DZp: Digital filter
1
—
13
1
—
14
1
—
15 1032547
0
W
6
0
W
9
0
W
8
0
W
11
0
W
10
0
W
1
—
WWWWWW
12
00000
0
DZp15 DZp14 DZp13 DZp12 DZp11 DZp10 DZp9 DZp8 DZp7 DZp6 DZp5 DZp4 DZp3 DZp2 DZp1 DZp0
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
H'D024 and H'D025: Capstan System Speed Delay Initialization Register CZs: Digital
filter
1
—
13
1
—
14
1
—
15 1032547
0
W
6
0
W
9
0
W
8
0
W
11
0
W
10
0
W
1
—
WWWWWW
12
00000
0
CZs15 CZs14 CZs13 CZs12 CZs11 CZs10 CZs9 CZs8 CZs7 CZs6 CZs5 CZs4 CZs3 CZs2 CZs1 CZs0
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
H'D026 and H'D027: Capstan System Phase Delay Initialization Register CZp: Digital
filter
1
—
13
1
—
14
1
—
15 1032547
0
W
6
0
W
9
0
W
8
0
W
11
0
W
10
0
W
1
—WWWWWW
12
00000
0
CZp15 CZp14 CZp13 CZp12 CZp11 CZp10 CZp9 CZp8 CZp7 CZp6 CZp5 CZp4 CZp3 CZp2 CZp1 CZp0
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1021 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D028: Drum System Digital Filter Control Register DFIC: Digital Filter
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
0
6
0
7
R/WR/WR/(W)
DPHA
R/(W)*
1
DROV DZPON DZSON DSG2 DSG1 DSG0
1
Notes: 1. Only 0 can be written.
2. Optional.
Drum system range over flag
0 Filter computation result does not exceed 12 bits. (Initial value)
1 Filter computation result exceeds 12 bits.
Drum phase system filter computation start bit
0 Phase system filter computation is OFF. (Initial value)
Phase system computation result Y is not added to Es.
1 Phase system filter computation is ON
Drum phase system Z
-1
initialization bit
0 Phase system Z
-1
does not reflect DZp value. (Initial value)
1 Phase system Z
-1
reflects DZp value
Drum speed system Z
-1
initialization bit
0 Speed system Z
-1
does not reflect DZs value. (Initial value)
1 Speed system Z
-1
reflects DZs value.
Drum system gain control bit
DSG2 DSG1 DSG0 Description
0 0 0 ×1 (Initial value)
1 ×2
1 0 ×4
1 ×8
1 0 0 ×16
1 (×32)*
2
1 0 (×64)*
2
1 Invalid (do not set)
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
—
—
´
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1022 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D029: Capstan System Digital Filter Control Register CFIC: Digital Filter
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
0
6
0
7
R/WR/WR/(W)
CPHA
R/(W)*
1
CROV CZPON CZSON CSG2 CSG1 CSG0
1
Notes: 1. Only 0 can be written.
2. Optional.
Capstan system range over flag
0 Filter computation result does not exceed 12 bits. (Initial value)
1 Filter computation result exceeds 12 bits.
Capstan phase system filter computation start bit
0 Phase system filter computation is OFF. (Initial value)
Phase system computation result Y is not added to Es.
1 Phase system filter computation is ON.
Capstan phase system Z
-1
initialization bit
0 Phase system Z
-1
does not reflect CZ
p
value. (Initial value)
1 Phase system Z
-1
reflects CZ
p
value.
Capstan speed system Z
-1
initialization bit
0 Speed system Z
-1
does not reflect CZs value. (Initial value)
1 Speed system Z
-1
reflects CZs value.
Capstan system gain control bit
CSG2 CSG1 CSG0 Description
0 0 0 ×1 (Initial value)
1 ×2
1 0 ×4
1 ×8
1 0 0 ×16
1 (×32)*
2
1 0 (×64)*
2
1 Invalid (do not set)
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W : —
—
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1023 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D02A: Digital Filter Control Register DFUCR: Digital Filter
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
0
67
R/WR/WR/W
PTON CP/DP CFEPS DFEPS CFESS DFESS
11
Phase system computation result PWM output bit
0 Output normal filter computation result to PWM pin. (Initial value)
1 Output only phase system computation result to PWM pin.
PWM output select bit
0 Output drum phase system computation result (CAPPWM) (Initial value)
1 Output capstan phase system computation result (DRMPWM)
Drum phase system error data transfer bit
0 Transfer data by HSW (NHSW) signal latch. (Initial value)
1 Transfer data at the time of error data write.
Capstan phase system error data transfer bit
0 Transfer data by DVCFG2 signal latch. (Initial value)
1 Transfer data at the time of error data write.
Capstan speed system error data transfer bit
0 Transfer data by DVCFG signal latch. (Initial value)
1 Transfer data at the time of error data write.
Drum speed system error data transfer bit
0 Transfer data by NCDFG signal latch. (Initial value)
1 Transfer data at the time of error data
write.
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
——
——
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1024 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D030 and H'D031: Specified DFG Speed Preset Data Register
DFPR: Drum Speed Error Detector
0
W
13
0
W
14
0
W
15 1032547
0
W
6
0
W
9
0
W
8
0
W
11
0
W
10
0
W
0
WWWWWWW
12
00000
0
DFPR15 DFPR14 DFPR13 DFPR12 DFPR11 DFPR10 DFPR9 DFPR8 DFPR7 DFPR6 DFPR5 DFPR4 DFPR3 DFPR2 DFPR1 DFPR0
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
H'D032 and H'D033: DFG Speed Error Data Register
DFER: Drum Speed Error Detector
0
*R/W
13
0
*R/W
14
0
*R/W
15 1032547
0
*R/W
6
0
*R/W
9
0
*R/W
8
0
*R/W
11
0
*R/W
10
0
*R/W
0
*R/W *R/W *R/W*R/W *R/W*R/W *R/W
12
00000
0
DFER15 DFER14 DFER13 DFER12 DFER11 DFER10 DFER9 DFER8 DFER7 DFER6 DFER5 DFER4 DFER3 DFER2 DFER1 DFER0
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
Note: * Only the detected error data can be read.
H'D034 and H'D035: DFG Lock Upper Data Register
DFRUDR: Drum Speed Error Detector
1
W
13
1
W
14
0
W
15 1032547
1
W
6
1
W
9
1
W
8
1
W
11
1
W
10
1
W
1
WWWWWWW
12
11111
1
DFRUDR15 DFRUDR14 DFRUDR13 DFRUDR12 DFRUDR11 DFRUDR10 DFRUDR9 DFRUDR8 DFRUDR7 DFRUDR6 DFRUDR5 DFRUDR4 DFRUDR3 DFRUDR2 DFRUDR1 DFRUDR0
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
H'D036 and H'D037: DFG Lock Lower Data Register
DFRLDR: Drum Speed Error Detector
0
W
13
0
W
14
1
W
15 1032547
0
W
6
0
W
9
0
W
8
0
W
11
0
W
10
0
W
0
WWWWWWW
12
00000
0
DFRLDR15 DFRLDR14 DFRLDR13 DFRLDR12 DFRLDR11 DFRLDR10 DFRLDR9 DFRLDR8 DFRLDR7 DFRLDR6 DFRLDR5 DFRLDR4 DFRLDR3 DFRLDR2 DFRLDR1 DFRLDR0
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1025 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D038: Drum Speed Error Detection Control Register
DFVCR: Drum Speed Error Detector
0
0
1
0
(R)/W
*2
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/(W)
*1
56
0
7
DFRFON
DF-R/UNR
DPCNT DFRCS1 DFRCS0
0
R/W
DFCS1
(R)/W
*2
RR/W
DFCS0 DFOVF
Notes:
Clock source select bit
DFCS1 DFCS0
0 0 φs (Initial value)
1 φs/2
1 0 φs/4
1 φs/8
Counter overflow flag
0 Normal status (Initial value)
1 Counter overflows.
Error data limit function select bit
0 Limit function OFF (Initial value)
1 Limit function ON
Drum lock flag
0 Drum speed system is not locked. (Initial value)
1 Drum speed system is locked.
Drum phase system filter computation auto start bit
0 Filter computation by drum lock detection is not excuted. (Initial value)
1 Filter computation of phase system is executed at the time of
drum lock detection.
Drum lock counter setting bit
DFRCS1 DFRCS0 Description
0 0 Underflow by 1 lock detection (Initial value)
1 Underflow by 2 lock detections
1 0 Underflow by 3 lock detections
1 Underflow by 4 lock detections
Description
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
1. Only 0 can be written.
2. When read, counter value is read.
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1026 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D039: Drum Phase Error Detection Control Register
DPGCR: Drum Phase Error Detector
0
1
12
1
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
0
6
0
7
R/WR/(W)*
DPOVF
R/W
DPCS0
0
R/W
DPCS1 N/V HSWES
1
Note: * Only 0 can be written.
Error data latch signal select bit
0 HSW (VideoFF) signal (Initial value)
1 NHSW (NarrowFF) signal
Edge select bit
0 Latch at rising edge (Initial value)
1 Latch at falling edge
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Clock source select bit
DPCS1 DPCS0
0 0 φs (Initial value)
1 φs/2
1 0 φs/4
1 φs/8
Counter overflow flag
0 Normal status (Initial value)
1 Counter overflows.
Description
— — —
———
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1027 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D03A and H'D03B: Specified Drum Phase Preset Data Register 2
DPPR2: Drum Phase Error Detector
0
W
13
0
W
14
0
W
15 1032547
0
W
6
0
W
9
0
W
8
0
W
11
0
W
10
0
W
0
WWWWWWW
12
00000
0
DPPR15 DPPR14 DPPR13 DPPR12 DPPR11 DPPR10 DPPR9 DPPR8 DPPR7 DPPR6 DPPR5 DPPR4 DPPR3 DPPR2 DPPR1 DPPR0
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
H'D03C: Specified Drum Phase Preset Data Register 1
DPPR1: Drum Phase Error Detector
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
WW
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
— — — — DPPR19 DPPR18 DPPR17 DPPR16
————
H'D03D: Drum Phase Error Data Register 1 DPER1: Drum Phase Error Detector
0
0
1
0
*R/W
2
0
*R/W
3
0
4
—
—
1
5
—
—
1
6
—
—
1
7
—
—*R/W*R/W
1
DPER19 DPER18 DPER17 DPER16
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
Note: * Only the detected error data can be read.
H'D03E and H'D03F: Drum Phase Error Data Register 2
DPER2: Drum Phase Error Detector
0
*R/W
13
0
*R/W
14
0
*R/W
15 1032547
0
*R/W
6
0
*R/W
9
0
*R/W
8
0
*R/W
11
0
*R/W
10
0
*R/W
0
*R/W *R/W *R/W*R/W *R/W*R/W *R/W
12
00000
0
DPER15 DPER14 DPER13 DPER12 DPER11 DPER10 DPER9 DPER8 DPER7 DPER6 DPER5 DPER4 DPER3 DPER2 DPER1 DPER0
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
Note: * Only the detected error data can be read.
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1028 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D050 and H'D051: Specified CFG Speed Preset Data Register
CFPR: Capstan Speed Error Detector
0
W
13
0
W
14
0
W
15 1032547
0
W
6
0
W
9
0
W
8
0
W
11
0
W
10
0
W
0
WWWWWWW
12
00000
0
CFPR15 CFPR14 CFPR13 CFPR12 CFPR11 CFPR10 CFPR9 CFPR8 CFPR7 CFPR6 CFPR5 CFPR4 CFPR3 CFPR2 CFPR1 CFPR0
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
H'D052 and H'D053: CFG Speed Error Data Register
CFER: Capstan Speed Error Detector
0
*R/W
13
0
*R/W
14
0
*R/W
15 1032547
0
*R/W
6
0
*R/W
9
0
*R/W
8
0
*R/W
11
0
*R/W
10
0
*R/W
0
*R/W *R/W *R/W*R/W *R/W*R/W *R/W
12
00000
0
CFER15 CFER14 CFER13 CFER12 CFER11 CFER10 CFER9 CFER8 CFER7 CFER6 CFER5 CFER4 CFER3 CFER2 CFER1 CFER0
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
Note: * Only the detected error data can be read.
H'D054 and H'D055: CFG Lock Upper Data Register
CFRUDR: Capstan Speed Error Detector
1
W
13
1
W
14
0
W
15 1032547
1
W
6
1
W
9
1
W
8
1
W
11
1
W
10
1
W
1
WWWWWWW
12
11111
1
CFRUDR15 CFRUDR14 CFRUDR13 CFRUDR12 CFRUDR11 CFRUDR10 CFRUDR9 CFRUDR8 CFRUDR7 CFRUDR6 CFRUDR5 CFRUDR4 CFRUDR3 CFRUDR2 CFRUDR1 CFRUDR0
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
H'D056 and H'D057: CFG Lock Lower Data Register
CFRLDR: Capstan Speed Error Detector
0
W
13
0
W
14
1
W
15 1032547
0
W
6
0
W
9
0
W
8
0
W
11
0
W
10
0
W
0
WWWWWWW
12
00000
0
CFRLDR15 CFRLDR14 CFRLDR13 CFRLDR12 CFRLDR11 CFRLDR10 CFRLDR9 CFRLDR8 CFRLDR7 CFRLDR6 CFRLDR5 CFRLDR4 CFRLDR3 CFRLDR2 CFRLDR1 CFRLDR0
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1029 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D058: Capstan Speed Error Detection Control Register
CFVCR: Capstan Speed Error Detector
0
0
1
0
(R)/W
*2
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/(W)
*1
56
0
7
CFRFON CF-R/UNR CPCNT CFRCS1 CFRCS0
0
R/W
CFCS1
(R)/W
*2
RR/W
CFCS0 CFOVF
Notes:
Capstan phase system filter computation auto start bit
0 Filter computation by capstan lock detection is not excuted. (Initial value)
1 Filter computation of phase system is executed at the time of
drum lock detection.
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Capstan lock counter setting bit
CFRCS1 CFRCS0 Description
0 0 Underflow by 1 lock detection (Initial value)
1 Underflow by 2 lock detections
1 0 Underflow by 3 lock detections
1 Underflow by 4 lock detections
Clock source select bit
CFCS1 CFCS0
0 0 φs (Initial value)
1 φs/2
1 0 φs/4
1 φs/8
Counter overflow flag
0 Normal status (Initial value)
1 Counter overflows.
Error data limit function select bit
0 Limit function OFF (Initial value)
1 Limit function ON
Capstan lock flag
0 Capstan speed system is not locked. (Initial value)
1 Capstan speed system is locked.
Description
1. Only 0 can be written.
2. When read, counter value is read.
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1030 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D059: Capstan Phase Error Detection Control Register
CPGCR: Capstan Phase Error Detector
0
1
12
1
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
0
6
0
7
R/WR/(W)*
CPOVF
R/W
CPCS0
0
R/W
CPCS1 CR/RF SELCFG2
1
Note: * Only 0 can be written.
Preset signal select bit
0 Preset by REF30P signal (Initial value)
1 Preset by CREF signal
Preset, latch signal select bit
0 Preset by CAPREF30 signal and latch by DVCTL signal (Initial value)
1 Preset by REF30P (CREF) signal and latch by DVCFG2 signal
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Clock source select bit
CPCS1 CPCS0
0 0 φs (Initial value)
1 φs/2
1 0 φs/4
1 φs/8
Counter overflow flag
0 Normal status (Initial value)
1 Counter overflows.
Description
———
———
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1031 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D05A and H'D05B: Specified Capstan Phase Preset Data Register 2
CPPR2: Capstan Phase Error Detector
0
W
13
0
W
14
0
W
15 1032547
0
W
6
0
W
9
0
W
8
0
W
11
0
W
10
0
W
0
WWWWWWW
12
00000
0
CPPR15 CPPR14 CPPR13 CPPR12 CPPR11 CPPR10 CPPR9 CPPR8 CPPR7 CPPR6 CPPR5 CPPR4 CPPR3 CPPR2 CPPR1 CPPR0
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
H'D05C: Specified Capstan Phase Preset Data Register 1
CPPR1: Capstan Phase Error Detector
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
—
—
1
5
—
—
1
6
—
—
1
7
—
—WW
1
CPPR19 CPPR18 CPPR17 CPPR16
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
H'D05D: Capstan Phase Error Data Register 1 CPER1: Capstan Phase Error Detector
0
0
1
0
R/W*
2
0
R/W*
3
0
4
—
—
1
5
—
—
1
6
—
—
1
7
—
—R/W*R/W*
1
Bit
Note: * Only the detected error data can be read.
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
CPER19 CPER18 CPER17 CPER16
H'D05E and H'D05F: Capstan Phase Error Data Register 2
CPER2: Capstan Phase Error Detector
0
R/W*
13
0
R/W*
14
0
R/W*
15 1032547
0
R/W*
6
0
R/W*
9
0
R/W*
8
0
R/W*
11
0
R/W*
10
0
R/W*
0
R/W*R/W*R/W*R/W*R/W*R/W*R/W*
12
00000
0
CPER15 CPER14 CPER13 CPER12 CPER11 CPER10 CPER9 CPER8 CPER7 CPER6 CPER5 CPER4 CPER3 CPER2 CPER1 CPER0
Bit
Note: * Only the detected error data can be read.
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1032 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D060: HSW Mode Register 1 HSM1: HSW Timing Generator
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/(W)*
3
0
4
1
R
1
R
56
0
7
EMPA OVWB OVWA CLRB CLRA
0
R
FLB
R/WR/(W)*R
FLA EMPB
Note: * Only 0 can be written.
FIFO2 full flag
0 FIFO2 is not full (Initial value)
1 FIFO2 is full
FIFO1 full flag
0 FIFO1 is not full (Initial value)
1 FIFO1 is full
FIFO2 empty flag
0 Data remains in FIFO2
1 FIFO2 is empty (Initial value)
FIFO1 empty flag
0 Data remains in FIFO1
1 FIFO1 is empty (Initial value)
FIFO2 overwrite flag
0 Normal operation (Initial value)
1 Data is written to FIFO2 while it is full. Write 0 to clear the flag.
FIFO1 overwrite flag
0 Normal operation (Initial value)
1 Data is written to FIFO1 while it is full. Write 0 to clear the flag.
FIFO2 pointer clear
0 Normal operation (Initial value)
1 Clear FIFO2 pointer
FIFO1 pointer clear
0 Normal operation (Initial value)
1 Clear FIFO1 pointer
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1033 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D061: HSW Mode Register 2 HSM2: HSW Timing Generator
0
0
1
0
R
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
56
0
7
EDG ISEL1 SOFG OFG VFF/NFF
0
R/W
FRT
R/WR/WR/W
FGR20FF LOP
Free-run bit
0 5-bit DFG counter and 16-bit timer counter (Initial value)
1 16-bit FRC
FRG2 clear stop bit
0 16-bit timer counter clearing by DFG reference register 2 is enabled (Initial value)
1 16-bit timer counter clearing by DFG reference register 2 is disabled
Mode select bit
0 Signal mode (Initial value)
1 Loop mode
DFG edge select bit
0 Calculated by DFG rising edge (Initial value)
1 Calculated by DFG falling edge
Interrupt select bit
0 Interrupt request is generated by rising of FIFO STRIG signal (Initial value)
1 Interrupt request is generated by FIFO match signal
FIFO output group select bit
0 20-stage output by FIFO1 and FIFO2 (Initial value)
1 10-stage output by FIFO1 only
Output FIFO group flag
0 Outputting pattern by FIFO1 (Initial value)
1 Outputting pattern by FIFO2
VideoFF/NallowFF output switchover bit
0 VideoFF output (Initial value)
1 NarrowFF output
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1034 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D062: HSW Loop Stage Setting Register HSLP: HSW Timing Generator
0
*
1
*
R/W
2
*
R/W
3
*
4
*
R/W
5
*
6
*
7
R/WR/WR/W
LOB1
R/W
LOB2
*
R/W
LOB3 LOB0 LOA3 LOA2 LOA1 LOA0
FIFO1 stage setting bit
HSM2 HSLP Description
Bit 5 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
LOP LOA3 LOA2 LOA1 LOA0
0 Single mode (Initial value)
1 0 0 0 0 Output stage 0 of FIFO1
1 Output stage 0 and 1 of FIFO1
1 0 Output stage 0 to 2 of FIFO1
1 Output stage 0 to 3 of FIFO1
1 0 0 Output stage 0 to 4 of FIFO1
1 Output stage 0 to 5 of FIFO1
1 0 Output stage 0 to 6 of FIFO1
1 Output stage 0 to 7 of FIFO1
1 0 0 0 Output stage 0 to 8 of FIFO1
1 Output stage 0 to 9 of FIFO1
1 0 Setting disabled
1
1 0 0
1
1 0
1
Legend: * Don't care.
FIFO2 stage setting bit
HSM2 HSLP Description
Bit 5 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4
LOP LOB3 LOB2 LOB1 LOB0
0 Single mode (Initial value)
1 0 0 0 0 Output stage 0 of FIFO2
1 Output stage 0 and 1 of FIFO2
1 0 Output stage 0 to 2 of FIFO2
1 Output stage 0 to 3 of FIFO2
1 0 0 Output stage 0 to 4 of FIFO2
1 Output stage 0 to 5 of FIFO2
1 0 Output stage 0 to 6 of FIFO2
1 Output stage 0 to 7 of FIFO2
1 0 0 0 Output stage 0 to 8 of FIFO2
1 Output stage 0 to 9 of FIFO2
1 0 Setting disabled
1
1 0 0
1
1 0
1
Legend: * Don't care.
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
** * *
** * *
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1035 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D064 and H'D065: FIFO Output Pattern Register 1 FPDRA: HSW Timing Generator
8
*
9
*
W
10
*
W
11
*
12
*
W
*
W
1314
*
15
NarrowFFA
VFFA AFFA VpulseA MlevelA
1
W
MlevelA bit
Used for generating an additional
V signal. For details, refer to section
26.12, Additional V Signal Generator.
VpulseA bit
Used for generating an additional
V signal. For details, refer to section
26.12, Additional V Signal Generator.
AudioFFA bit
Controls the audio head.
VideoFFA bit
Controls the video head.
NarrowFFA bit
Controls the narrow video head.
A/D Trigger A bit
Indicates a hardware trigger signal for the A/D converter.
Reserved
Cannot be read or modified
S-TRIGA bit
Indicates a signal that generates an interrupt.
When the STRIGA is selected by the ISEL,
modifying this bit from 0 to 1 generates an interrupt.
MlevelA bit
Used for generating an additional
V signal. For details, refer to section
26.12, Additional V Signal Generator.
VpulseA bit
Used for generating an additional
V signal. For details, refer to section
26.12, Additional V Signal Generator.
AudioFFA bit
Controls the audio head.
VideoFFA bit
Controls the video head.
NarrowFFA bit
Controls the narrow video head.
A/D Trigger A bi
Indicates a hardware trigger signal for the A/D converter.
Reserved
Cannot be read or modified
S-TRIGA bit
Indicates a signal that generates an interrupt.
When the STRIGA is selected by the ISEL,
modifying this bit from 0 to 1 generates an interrupt.
WW
ADTRGA STRIGA
Bit
Initial value
R/W
Bit
Initial value
R/W
0
*
1
*
W
2
*
W
3
*
4
*
W
*
W
56
*
7
PPGA4 PPGA3 PPGA2 PPGA1 PPGA0
*
W
PPGA7
WWW
PPGA6 PPGA5
:
:
:
:
:
:
PPG output signal A bits
Used for outputting a timing
control signal from port 7 (PPG).
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1036 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D066 and H'D067: FIFO Timing Pattern Register 1 FTPRA*: HSW Timing Generator
8
*
9
*
W
10
*
W
11
*
12
*
W
*
W
1314
*
15
FTPRA12 FTPRA11 FTPRA10 FTPRA9 FTPRA8
WWW
*
W
FTPRA14FTPRA15 FTPRA13
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
0
*
1
*
W
2
*
W
3
*
4
*
W
*
W
56
*
7
FTPRA4 FTPRA3 FTPRA2 FTPRA1 FTPRA0
WWW
*
W
FTPRA6FTPRA7 FTPRA5
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
Note: * FTPRA and FTCTR are assigned to the same address.
H'D066 and H'D067: FIFO Timer Capture Register 1 FTCTR*: HSW Timing Generator
89101112131415
FTCTR12 FTCTR11 FTCTR10 FTCTR9 FTCTR8FTCTR14FTCTR15 FTCTR13
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
01234567
FTCTR4 FTCTR3 FTCTR2 FTCTR1 FTCTR0FTCTR6FTCTR7 FTCTR5
Bit
Initial value
Note: * FTPRA and FTCTR are assigned to the same address.
R/W
:
:
:
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1037 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D068 to H'D069: FIFO Output Pattern Register 2 FPDRB: HSW Timing Generator
8
*
9
*
W
10
*
W
11
*
12
*
W
*
W
1314
*
15
—
1
—
NarrowFFB
VFFB AFFB VpulseB MlevelB
WWW
ADTRGB STRIGB
0
*
1
*
W
2
*
W
3
*
4
*
W
*
W
56
*
7
PPGB4 PPGB3 PPGB2 PPGB1 PPGB0
*
PPGB7
WWWW
PPGB6 PPGB5
:
:
:
:
:
:
Bit
Initial value
R/W
Bit
Initial value
R/W
PPG output signal B bits (PPGB7 to PPGB0)
Used for outputting a timing
control signal from port 7 (PPG).
Legend: * Don't care.
MlevelB bit
Used for generating an additional
V signal. For details, refer to section
26.12, Additional V Signal Generator.
VpulseB bit
Used for generating an additional
V signal. For details, refer to section
26.12, Additional V Signal Generator.
AudioFFB bit
Controls the audio head.
VideoFFB bit
Controls the video head.
NarrowFFB bit
Controls the narrow video head.
A/D Trigger B bit
Indicates a hardware trigger signal for the A/D converter.
Reserved
Cannot be read or modified
S-TRIGB bit
Indicates a signal that generates an interrupt.
When the STRIGA is selected by the ISEL,
modifying this bit from 0 to 1 generates an interrupt.
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1038 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D06A and H'D06B: FIFO Timing Pattern Register 2 FTPRB: HSW Timing Generator
8
*
9
*
W
10
*
W
11
*
12
*
W
*
W
1314
*
15
FTPRB12 FTPRB11 FTPRB10 FTPRB9 FTPRB8
WWW
*
W
FTPRB14FTPRB15 FTPRB13
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
0
*
1
*
W
2
*
W
3
*
4
*
W
*
W
56
*
7
FTPRB4 FTPRB3 FTPRB2 FTPRB1 FTPRB0
WWW
*
W
FTPRB6FTPRB7 FTPRB5
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
H'D06C: DFG Reference Register 1 DFCRA*: HSW Timing Generator
0
*
1
*
W
2
*
W
3
*
4
*
W
0
W
56
0
7
DFCRA4 DFCRA3 DFCRA2 DFCRA1 DFCRA0
0
W
ISEL2
WWW
CCLR CKSL
Interrupt select bit
0 Interrupt request is generated by clear signal of 16-bit timer counter (Initial value)
1 Interrupt request is generated by VD signal in PB mode
DFG counter clear bit
0 Normal operation (Initial value)
1 5-bit DFG counter is cleared
16-bit counter clock source select bit
0 φs/4 (Initial value)
1 φs/8
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
FIFO1 output timing setting
bits (DFCRA4 to DFCRA0)
These bits determine the
start point of FIFO1 timing.
Legend: * Don't care.
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1039 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D06C: DFG Reference Count Register DFCTR*: HSW Timing Generator
0
*
1
*
R
2
*
R
3
*
4
*
R
56
1
7
DFCTR4 DFCTR3 DFCTR2 DFCTR1 DFCTR0
RR
11
———
———
Note:
*
DFCRA and DFCTR are assigned to the same address.
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
DFG pulse count bits (DFCTR4 to DFCTR0)
These bits count DFG pulses.
H'D06D: DFG Reference Register 2 DFCRB: HSW Timing Generator
0
*
1
*
W
2
*
W
3
*
4
*
W
56
1
7
DFCRB4 DFCRB3 DFCRB2 DFCRB1 DFCRB0
WW
11
———
———
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
FIFO2 output timing setting bits (DFCRB4 to DFCRB0)
These bits determine the start point of FIFO2 timing.
Legend: * Don't care.
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1040 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D06E: Special Playback Control Register CHCR: 4-Head Special Playback Circuit
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
56
0
7
HAH SIG3 SIG2 SIG1 SIG0
0
W
V/N
WWW
HSWPOL CRH
HSW output signal select bit
0 VideoFF signal output (Initial value)
1 Nallow FF signal output
COMP polarity select bit
0 Positive (Initial value)
1 Negative
C.Rotary synchronization control bit
0 Synchronous (Initial value)
1 Asynchronous
H.AmpSW synchronization control bit
0 Synchronous (Initial value)
1 Asynchronous
Signal control bits
SIG3 SIG2 SIG1 SIG0 Output pin
C.Rotary H.Amp SW
0 0 L L
(Initial value)
1 0 0 HSW L
1 HSW H
1 0 L HSW
1 H HSW
1 0 0 HSW EX-OR COMP COMP
1 HSW EX-NOR COMP COMP
1 0 HSW EX-OR RTP0 RTP0
1 HSW EX-NOR RTP0 RTP0
Legend: * Don't care.
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
*
*
*
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1041 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D06F: Additional V Control Register ADDVR: Additional V Signal Generator
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
1
67
R/WR/W
HMSK Hi-Z CUT VPOM POL
11
Legend: * Don't care.
OSCH mask bit
0 OSCH added (Initial value)
1 OSCH not added
High impedance bit
0 3-level output from Vpulse pin (Initial value)
1 Vpulse pin is set as 3-state (H/L/Hi-Z) pin
Additional V output control bits
CUT VPON POL Description
0 0 Low level (Initial value)
1 0 Negative polarity
1 Positive polarity
1 0 Immediate level
(high-impedance when Hi-Z bit = 1)
1 High level
———
———
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
*
*
H'D070 and H'D071: X-Value Data Register
XDR: X-Value, TRK-Value Adjustment Circuit
1
13
1
14
1
15 1032547
0
W
6
0
W
9
0
W
8
0
W
11
0
W
10
0
W
1
WWWWWW
12
XD1 XD0XD3 XD2XD5 XD4XD7 XD6XD9 XD8
XD11 XD10
000000
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
————
————
H'D072 and H'D073: TRK-Value Data Register
TRDR: X-Value, TRK-Value Adjustment Circuit
1
13
1
14
1
15 1032547
0
W
6
0
W
9
0
W
8
0
W
11
0
W
10
0
W
1
WWWWWW
12
TRD1 TRD0TRD3 TRD2TRD5 TRD4TRD7 TRD6TRD9 TRD8
TRD11 TRD10
000000
:
:
:
Bit
Initial value
R/W
————
————
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1042 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D074: X-Value/TRK-Value Control Register
XTCR: X-Value, TRK-Value Adjustment Circuit
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
5
0
6
0
7
R/WWW
AT/MU
W
CAPRF TRK/X EXC/REF XCS DVREF1 DVREF0
1
Capstan phase adjustment auto/manual select bit
0 Manual mode (Initial value)
1 Auto mode
External sync signal edge select bit
0 Generated at EXCAP rising edge (Initial value)
1 Generated at EXCAP rising and falling edge
Capstan phase adjustment register select bit
0 CAPREF30 is generated only by XDR setting value (Initial value)
1 CAPREF30 is generated by XDR and TRDR setting values
Reference signal select bit
0 Generated by REF30P signal (Initial value)
1 Generated by external referece signal
Clock source select bit
0 φs (Initial value)
1 φs/2
REF30P frequency division rate select bit
DVREF1 DVREF0 Description
0 0 1-division (Initial value)
1 2-division
1 0 3-division
1 4-division
—
—
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
H'D078: Drum 12-Bit PWM Data Register DPWDR: Drum 12-Bit PWM
1
0
R/W
DPWDR1
0
0
R/W
DPWDR0
3
0
R/W
DPWDR3
2
0
R/W
DPWDR2
5
0
R/W
DPWDR5
4
0
R/W
DPWDR4
7
0
R/W
DPWDR7
6
0
R/W
DPWDR6
9
0
R/W
DPWDR9
8
0
R/W
DPWDR8
11
0
R/W
DPWDR11
10
0
R/W
DPWDR10
12
1
13
1
14
1
15
1
:
:
:
Bit
Initial value
R/W
————
————
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1043 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D07A: Drum 12-Bit PWM Control Registor DPWCR: Drum 12-Bit PWM
0
0
1
1
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
56
1
7
DH/L DSF/DF DCK2 DCK1 DCK0
0
W
DPOL
WWW
DDC DHiZ
Positive polarity output (Initial value)
Negative polarity output
0
1
Polarity switchover bit
Fixed output bit, PWM pin output bit
01 0 Low level output from PWM pin (Initial value)
DHiZ DH/LDDC Description
1 High level output form PWM pin
1
0
*High impedance from PWM pin
**PWM modulated signal output
Legend: * Don't care.
Modulate error data from digital filter circuit (Initial value)
Modulate data written in data register
0
1
Output data select bit
Note: When PWMs output data from the digital filter circuit, the data consisting of the speed and phase
filtering results are modulated by PWMs and output from the DRMPWM pin.
However, it is possible to output only capstan phase filter result from DRMPWM pin,
by DFUCR settings of the digital filter circuit.
See the section explaining the digital filter computation circuit.
Carrier frequency select bits
Description
00 0 Carrier frequency is φ/2
DCK1 DCK0 DCK2
1 Carrier frequency is φ/4
1 0 Carrier frequency is φ/8 (Initial value)
1 Carrier frequency is φ/16
01 0 Carrier frequency is φ/32
1 Carrier frequency is φ/64
1 0 Carrier frequency is φ/128
1 (Do not set)
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1044 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D07B: Capstan 12-Bit PWM Control Register CPWCR: Capstan 12-Bit PWM
0
0
1
1
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
56
1
7
CH/L CSF/DF CCK2 CCK1 CCK0
0
W
CPOL
WWW
CDC CHiZ
Positive polarity (Initial value)
Negative polarity output
0
1
Polarity switchover bit
Fixed output bit, PWM pin output bit
01 0 Low level output from PWM pin (Initial value)
CHiZ CH/LCDC Description
1 High level output form PWM pin
1
0
*High impedance from PWM pin
**PWM modulated signal output
Legend: * Don't care.
Modulate error data from digital filter circuit (Initial value)
Modulate data written in data register
0
1
Output data select bit
Note: When PWMs output data from the digital filter circuit, the data consisting of the speed and phase
filtering results are modulated by PWMs and output from the CAPPWM pin.
However, it is possible to output only drum phase filter results from CAPPWM pin,
by DFUCR settings of the digital filter circuit.
See the section 26.11, Digital Filters, explaining the digital filter computation circuit.
Carrier frequency select bits
Description
00 0 Carrier frequency is φ/2
CCK1 CCK0 CCK2
1 Carrier frequency is φ/4
1 0 Carrier frequency is φ/8 (Initial value)
1Carrier frequency is φ/16
01 0 Carrier frequency is φ/32
1 Carrier frequency is φ/64
1 0 Carrier frequency is φ/128
1(Do not set)
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1045 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D07C: Capstan 12-Bit PWM Data Register CPWDR: Capstan 12-Bit PWM
1
0
R/W
CPWDR1
0
0
R/W
CPWDR0
3
0
R/W
CPWDR3
2
0
R/W
CPWDR2
5
0
R/W
CPWDR5
4
0
R/W
CPWDR4
7
0
R/W
CPWDR7
6
0
R/W
CPWDR6
9
0
R/W
CPWDR9
8
0
R/W
CPWDR8
11
0
R/W
CPWDR11
10
0
R/W
CPWDR10
12
1
13
1
14
1
15
1
:
:
:
Bit
Initial value
R/W
————
————
H'D080: CTL Control Register CTCR: CTL Circuit
0
0
1
0
R
2
0
W
3
0
4
1
W
5
1
6
0
7
WW W
FSLB
W
FSLC
0
W
NT/PL FSLA CCS LCTL UNCTL SLWM
NTSC/PAL select bit
0 NTSC mode (frame rate: 30 Hz) (Initial value)
1 PAL mode (frame rate: 25 Hz)
Long CTL bit
0 Clock source (CCS) operates at the setting value (Initial value)
1 Clock source (CCS) operates for further 8-division after
operating at the setting value
CTL undetected bit
0 Detected (Initial value)
1 Undetected
Mode select bit
0 Normal mode (Initial value)
1 Slow mode
Clock source select bit
0 φs (Initial value)
1 φs/2
Operating frequency select bits
FSLC FSLB FSLA Description
0 0 0 Reserved (do not set)
1 Reserved (do not set)
1 0 fosc = 8 MHz
1 fosc = 10 MHz (Initial value)
1 Reserved (do not set)
Legend: * Don't care.
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
**
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1046 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D081: CTL Mode Register CTLM: CTL Circuit
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
0
6
0
7
R/WR/WR/W
FW/RV
R/W
REC/PB
0
R/W
ASM MD4 MD3 MD2 MD1 MD0
Note: * Refer to the description of the CTL mode register in section 26.13.5, Register Description.
ASM REC/PB Description
0 0 Playback mode (Initial value)
1 Record mode
1 0 Assemble mode
1 Invalid (do not set)
Direction bit
0 Forward (Initial value)
1 Reverse
CTL mode select bits*
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
Record /playback mode bits
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1047 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D082 and H'D083: REC-CTL Duty Data Register 1 RCDR1: CTL Circuit
1111
131415 103254769811 10
CMT11
W
12
0
CMT10
W
0
CMT13
W
0
CMT12
W
0
CMT15
W
0
CMT14
W
0
CMT17
W
0
CMT16
W
0
CMT19
W
0
CMT18
W
0
CMT1B
W
0
CMT1A
W
0
:
:
:
Bit
Initial value
R/W
————
————
H'D084 and H'D085: REC-CTL Duty Data Register 2 RCDR2: CTL Circuit
1111
131415 103254769811 10
CMT21
W
12
0
CMT20
W
0
CMT23
W
0
CMT22
W
0
CMT25
W
0
CMT24
W
0
CMT27
W
0
CMT26
W
0
CMT29
W
0
CMT28
W
0
CMT2B
W
0
CMT2A
W
0
:
:
:
Bit
Initial value
R/W
————
————
H'D086 and H'D087: REC-CTL Duty Data Register 3 RCDR3: CTL Circuit
1111
131415 103254769811 10
CMT31
W
12
0
CMT30
W
0
CMT33
W
0
CMT32
W
0
CMT35
W
0
CMT34
W
0
CMT37
W
0
CMT36
W
0
CMT39
W
0
CMT38
W
0
CMT3B
W
0
CMT3A
W
0
:
:
:
Bit
Initial value
R/W
————
————
H'D088 and H'D089: REC-CTL Duty Data Register 4 RCDR4: CTL Circuit
1111
131415 103254769811 10
CMT41
W
12
0
CMT40
W
0
CMT43
W
0
CMT42
W
0
CMT45
W
0
CMT44
W
0
CMT47
W
0
CMT46
W
0
CMT49
W
0
CMT48
W
0
CMT4B
W
0
CMT4A
W
0
:
:
:
Bit
Initial value
R/W
————
————
H'D08A and H'D08B: REC-CTL Duty Data Register 5 RCDR5: CTL Circuit
1111
131415 103254769811 10
CMT51
W
12
0
CMT50
W
0
CMT53
W
0
CMT52
W
0
CMT55
W
0
CMT54
W
0
CMT57
W
0
CMT56
W
0
CMT59
W
0
CMT58
W
0
CMT5B
W
0
CMT5A
W
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
————
————
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1048 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D08C: Duty I/O Register DI/O: CTL Circuit
0
1
1
0
R/(W)*
1
2
0
W
3
0
45
1
67
R/WWW
VCTR0
1
W
VCTR1
1
W
VCTR2 BPON BPS BPF DI/O
1
Notes: 1. Only 0 can be written.
2. Refer to the description of the duty I/O register in section 26.13.5, Register Description.
Bit pattern detection ON/OFF bit
0 Bit pattern detection OFF (initial value)
1 Bit pattern detection ON
Bit pattern detection start bit
0 Normal status (initial value)
1 Starts 8-bit bit pattern detection
Duty I/O register
*
2
Bit pattern detection flag
0 Bit pattern (8 bit) is not detected (initial value)
1 Bit pattern (8 bit) is detected
VCTR2 VCTR1 VCTR0 Description
0 0 0 Number of 1-pulse for detection = 2
1 Number of 1-pulse for detection = 4 (SYNC mark)
1 0 Number of 1-pulse for detection = 6
1 Number of 1-pulse for detection = 8 (mark A, short)
1 0 0 Number of 1-pulse for detection = 12 (mark A, long)
1 Number of 1-pulse for detection = 16
1 0 Number of 1-pulse for detection = 24 (mark B)
1 Number of 1-pulse for detection = 32 (initial value)
VISS interrupt setting bits
—
—
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1049 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D08D: Bit Pattern Register BTPR: CTL Circuit
0
1
1
1
R*/W
2
1
R*/W
3
1
45
1
67
R*/WR*/WR*/W
LSP5
1
R*/W
LSP4
1
R*/W
LSP6
1
R*/W
LSP7 LSP3 LSP2 LSP1 LSP0
Note: * Writes are disabled during bit pattern detection.
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
H'D090 and H'D091: Reference Frequency Register 1 RFD: Reference Signal Generator
15
1
REF15
W
14
1
REF14
W
13
1
REF13
W
12
1
REF12
W
11
1
REF11
W
10
1
REF10
W
9
1
REF9
W
8
1
REF8
W
7
1
REF7
W
6
1
REF6
W
5
1
REF5
W
4
1
REF4
W
3
1
REF3
W
2
1
REF2
W
1
1
REF1
W
0
1
REF0
W
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'D092 and H'D093: Reference Frequency Register 2 CRF: Reference Signal Generator
15
1
CRF15
W
14
1
CRF14
W
13
1
CRF13
W
12
1
CRF12
W
11
1
CRF11
W
10
1
CRF10
W
9
1
CRF9
W
8
1
CRF8
W
7
1
CRF7
W
6
1
CRF6
W
5
1
CRF5
W
4
1
CRF4
W
3
1
CRF3
W
2
1
CRF2
W
1
1
CRF1
W
0
1
CRF0
W
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'D094 and H'D095: REF30 Counter Register RFC: Reference Signal Generator
15
0
RFC15
14
0
RFC14
13
0
RFC13
12
0
RFC12
11
0
RFC11
10
0
RFC10
9
0
RFC9
8
0
RFC8
7
0
RFC7
6
0
RFC6
5
0
RFC5
4
0
RFC4
3
0
RFC3
2
0
RFC2
1
0
RFC1
0
0
RFC0
R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1050 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D096: Reference Frequency Mode Register RFM: Reference Signal Generator
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
56
0
7
REX CRD OD/EV VST VEG
0
W
RCS
WWW
VNA CVS
Clock source select bit
0 φs/2 (Initial value)
1 φs/4
Mode select bit
0 Manual mode (Initial value)
1 Auto mode
Manual select bit
0 VD sync (Initial value)
1 Free-run
External signal synchronization select bit
0 VD signal or free-run (Initial value)
1 External signal sync
DVCFG2 synchronization select bit
0 At mode switching (initial value)
1 DVCFG2 signal synchronized
ODD/EVEN edge switchoverselect bit
0 Generated at field signal rising (even) (Initial value)
1 Generated at field signal rising (odd)
VideoFF counter set
0 VideoFF signal turns counter set off (Initial value)
1 VideoFF signal turns counter set on
VideoFF edge select bit
0 Set at VideoFF signal rising (Initial value)
1 Set at VideoFF signal falling
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
H'D097: Reference Frequency Mode Register 2 RFM2: Reference Signal Generator
0
0
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
567
FDS
111
R/W
Field select bit
0 Generated by selected ODD or EVEN VD
signal (Initial value)
1 Generated by VD signal within mode transition
phase error of 90˚
TBC select bit
0 Reference signal is generated by VD
signal
1 Reference signal is generated by free-running
counter
TBC——————
R/W——————
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1051 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D098: DVCTL Control Register CTVC: Frequency Divider
0
*
1
*
R
2
*
R
34567
R
CFG HSW
0
W
0
W
CEX CEG CTL
11 1
DVCTL signal generation select bit
0 Generated by PB-CTL signal (Initial value)
1 Generated by external input signal
External sync signal edge select bit
0 Rising edge (Initial value)
1 Falling edge
CFG flag
0 CFG level is low (Initial value)
1 CFG level is high
HSW flag
0 HSW level is low (Initial value)
1 HSW level is high
CTL flag
0 REC or PB-CTL level is low (Initial value)
1 REC or PB-CTL level is high
———
———
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
H'D099: CTL Frequency Division Register CTLR: Frequency Divider
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
56
0
7
CTL4 CTL3 CTL2 CTL1 CTL0
0
W
CTL7
WWW
CTL6 CTL5
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1052 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D09A: DVCFG Control Register CDVC: Frequency Divider
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
34
0
W
5
1
6
1
7
WR
CMK CMN
W
DVTRG
0
R/W*
MCGin CRF CPS1 CPS0
0
Note: * Only 0 can be written
Mask CFG flag
0 CFG normal operation (Initial value)
1 DVCFG is detected while mask is set (race detection)
CFG mask status bit
0 Mask is released by capstan mask timer
1 Mask is set by capstan mask timer (Initial value)
CFG mask select bit
0 Capstan mask timing function ON (Initial value)
1 Capstan mask timing function OFF
PB (ASM)-to-REC transition timing sync ON/OFF select bit
0 PB (ASM)-to-REC transition timing sync ON (Initial value)
1 PB (ASM)-to-REC transition timing sync OFF
CFG frequency division edge select bit
0 Execute frequency division operation at CFG rising edge
(Initial value)
1 Execute frequency division operation at CFG rising
CFG mask timer clock select bit
CPS1 CPS0 Description
0 0 φs/1024 (Initial value)
1 φs/512
1 0 φs/256
1 φs/128
—
—
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
H'D09B: CFG Frequency Division Register 1 CDIVR1: Frequency Divider
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
34
0
W
5
0
67
WW
CDV15 CDV14
0
W
CDV16
0
W
CDV13 CDV12 CDV11 CDV10
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
—
—
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1053 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D09C: CFG Frequency Division Register 2 CDIVR2: Frequency Divider
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
34
0
W
5
0
67
WW
CDV25 CDV24
0
W
CDV26
0
W
CDV23 CDV22 CDV21 CDV20
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
—
—
H'D09D: DVCFG Mask Interval Register CTMR: Frequency Divider
0
1
1
1
W
2
1
W
34
1
W
5
1
67
WW
CPM5 CPM4
1
W
CPM3 CPM2 CPM1 CPM0
11
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
——
——
H'D09E: FG Control Register FGCR: Frequency Divider
0
0
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
W
DRF
1
DFG edge select bit
0 NCDFG signal rising edge is selected (Initial value)
1 NCDFG signal falling edge is selected
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
—————— —
—————— —
H'D0A0: Servo Port Mode Register SPMR: Servo Port
0
1
1
1
—
2
1
—
3
1
4
1
—
0
R/W
567
—————
0
R/W
CTLSTOP
——
CFGCOMP
1
CFG input method switch bit
0 Zero cross type comparator method for CFG signal input (Initial value)
1 Digital signal input method for CFG signal input
CTLSTOP bit
0 CTL circuit operates (Initial value)
1 CTL circuit does not operate
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
—
—
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1054 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D0A3: Servo Monitor Control Register SVMCR: Servo Port
0
0
1
0
2
0
3
0
4
0
567
SVMCR4 SVMCR3 SVMCR2 SVMCR1 SVMCR0
11
R/WR/WR/W
0
SVMCR5
R/W R/W
R/W
SVMCR5 SVMCR4 SVMCR3 Description
0 0 0 REF30 signal is output from SV2 output pin (Initial value)
1 CAPREF30 signal is output from SV2 output pin
1 0 CREF signal is output from SV2 output pin
1 CTLMONI signal is output from SV2 output pin
1 0 0 DVCFG signal is output from SV2 output pin
1 CFG signal is output from SV2 output pin
1 0 DFG signal is output from SV2 output pin
1 DPG signal is output from SV2 output pin
SVMCR2 SVMCR1 SVMCR0 Description
0 0 0 REF30 signal is output from SV1 output pin (Initial value)
1 CAPREF30 signal is output from SV1 output pin
1 0 CREF signal is output from SV1 output pin
1 CTLMONI signal is output from SV1 output pin
1 0 0 DVCFG signal is output from SV1 output pin
1 CFG signal is output from SV1 output pin
1 0 DFG signal is output from SV1 output pin
1 DPG signal is output from SV1 output pin
——
——
SV2 pin servo monitor output control
SV1 pin servo monitor output control
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1055 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D0A4: CTL Gain Control Register CTLGR: Servo Port
0
0
1
0
2
0
3
0
4
0
567
CTLFB CTLGR3 CTLGR2 CTLGR1 CTLGR0
11
R/WR/WR/W
0
CTLE/A
R/W R/W
R/W
CTL select bit
0 AMP output
1 EXCTL
CTL amp feedback SW bit
0 CTLFB SW is OFF
1 CTLFB SW is ON
CTL amp gain setting bit
CTLGR3 CTLGR2 CTLGR1 CTLGR0 CTL outpu gain
0 0 0 0 35.0 dB
(Initial value)
1 37.5 dB
1 0 40.0 dB
1 42.5 dB
1 0 0 45.0 dB
1 47.5 dB
1 0 50.0 dB
1 52.5 dB
1 0 0 0 55.0 dB
1 57.5 dB
1 0 60.0 dB
1 62.5 dB
1 0 0 65.0 dB
1 67.5 dB
1 0 70.0 dB
1 72.5 dB
——
——
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
H'D0B0: Vertical Sync Signal Threshold Value Register VTR: Sync Detector (Servo)
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
5
0
6
1
7
WWW
VTR5 VTR4 VTR3 VTR2 VTR1 VTR0
1
Initial value :
——
——
Bit
R/W
:
:
:
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1056 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D0B1: Horizontal Sync Signal Threshold Value Register HTR: Sync Detector (Servo)
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
456
1
7
WW
HTR3 HTR2 HTR1 HTR0
111
Initial value :
————
————
Bit
R/W
:
:
:
H'D0B2: H Pulse Adjustment Start Time Setting Register HRTR: Sync Detector (Servo)
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
56
0
7
HRTR4 HRTR3 HRTR2 HRTR1 HRTR0
0
W
HRTR7
WWW
HRTR6 HRTR5
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'D0B3: H Pulse Width Setting Register HPWR: Sync Detector (Servo)
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
456
1
7
WW
HPWR3 HPWR2 HPWR1 HPWR0
111
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
————
————
H'D0B4: Noise Detection Window Setting Register NWR: Sync Detector (Servo)
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
5
0
6
1
7
WWW
NWR5 NWR4 NWR3 NWR2 NWR1 NWR0
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
——
——
H'D0B5: Noise Detection Register NDR: Sync Detector (Servo)
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
56
0
7
NDR4 NDR3 NDR2 NDR1 NDR0
0
W
NDR7
WWW
NDR6 NDR5
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1057 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D0B6: Sync Signal Control Register SYNCR: Sync Detector (Servo)
0
0
1
0
R
2
0
R/(W)*
3
1
456
1
7
R/WR/W
NIS/VD NOIS FLD SYCT
111
Note: * Only 0 can be written.
Interrupt select bit
0 Noise level interrupt
1 VD interrupt (Initial value)
Noise detection flag
0 Noise count is less than four times of NDR setting value (Initial value)
1 Noise count is equal to or greater than four times of NDR setting value
Field detection flag
0 Odd field (Initial value)
1 Even field
Sync signal polarity select bit
SYCT Description Polarity
0 Positive
1 Negative
Initial value :
————
————
Bit
R/W
:
:
(Initial value)
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1058 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D0B8: Servo Interrupt Enable Register 1 SIENR1: Servo Interrupt
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
56
0
7
IECAP3 IECAP2 IECAP1 IEHSW2 IEHSW1
0
R/W
IEDRM3
R/WR/WR/W
IEDRM2 IEDRM1
Drum phase error detection interrupt enable bit
0 Interrupt request is disabled by IRRDRM3
(Initial value)
1 Interrupt request is enabled by IRRDRM3
Drum speed error detection (lock detection)
interrupt enable bit
0 Interrupt request is disabled by IRRDRM2 (Initial value)
1 Interrupt request is enabled by IRRDRM2
Drum speed error detection (OVF, latch)
interrupt enable bit
0 Interrupt request is disabled by IRRDRM1 (Initial value)
1 Interrupt request is enabled by IRRDRM1
Capstan phase error detection interrupt enable bit
0 Interrupt request is disabled by IRRCAP3 (Initial value)
1 Interrupt request is enabled by IRRCAP3
Capstan speed error detection (lock detection)
interrupt enable bit
0 Interrupt request is disabled by IRRCAP2 (Initial value)
1 Interrupt request is enabled by IRRCAP2
Capstan speed error detection (OVF, latch)
interrupt enable bit
0 Interrupt request is disabled by IRRCAP1 (Initial value)
1 Interrupt request is enabled by IRRCAP1
HSW timing generation (counter clear, capture)
interrupt enable bit
0 Interrupt request is disabled by IRRHSW2 (Initial value)
1 Interrupt request is enabled by IRRHSW2
HSW timing generator (OVW, match, STRIG)
interrupt enable bit
0 Interrupt request is disabled by IRRHSW1
(Initial value)
1 Interrupt request is enabled by IRRHSW1
Initial value :
Bit
R/W
:
:
:
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1059 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D0B9: Servo Interrupt Enable Register 2 SIENR2: Servo Interrupt
0
0
1
0
R/W
23456
1
7
R/W
IESNC IECTL
1111
1
Vertical sync signal interrupt enable bit
0 Interrupt (vertical sync signal interrupt) request is disabled
by IRRSNC (Initial value)
1 Interrupt (vertical sync signal interrupt) request is enabled
by IRRSNC
CTL interrupt enable bit
0 Interrupt request is disabled by IRRCTL
(Initial value)
1 Interrupt request is enabled by IRRCTL
Initial value :
——————
——————
Bit
R/W
:
:
:
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1060 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D0BA: Servo Interrupt Request Register 1 SIRQR1: Servo Interrupt
0
0
1
0
R/(W)*
2
0
R/(W)*
3
0
4
0
R/(W)*
0
R/(W)*
56
0
7
IRRCAP3 IRRCAP2 IRRCAP1 IRRHSW2 IRRHSW1
0
R/(W)*
IRRDRM3
R/(W)*R/(W)*R/(W)*
IRRDRM2 IRRDRM1
Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
Drum phase error detector interrupt request bit
0 Drum phase error detector interrupt request is not generated (Initial value)
1 Drum phase error detector interrupt request is generated
Drum speed error detector (lock detection) interrupt request bit
0 Drum speed error detector (lock detection) interrupt request is not generated (Initial value)
1 Drum speed error detector (lock detection) interrupt request is generated
Drum speed error detector (OVF, latch) interrupt request bit
0 Drum speed error detector (OVF, latch) interrupt request is not generated (Initial value)
1 Drum speed error detector (OVF, latch) interrupt request is generated
Capstan phase error detector interrupt request bit
0 Capstan phase error detector interrupt request is not generated (Initial value)
1 Capstan phase error detector interrupt request is generated
Capstan speed error detector (lock detection) intrerrupt request bit
0 Capstan speed error detector (lock detection) interrupt request is not generated
(Initial value)
1 Capstan speed error detector (lock detection) interrupt request is generated
Capstan speed error detector (OVF, latch) interrupt request bit
0 Capstan speed error detector (OVF, latch) interrupt request in not generated
(Initial value)
1 Capstan speed error detector (OVF, latch) interrupt request is generated
HSW timing generator (counter clear, capture)
interrupt request bit
0 HSW timing generator (counter clear, capture) interrupt
request is not generated (Initial value)
0 HSW timing generator (counter clear, capture) interrupt
request is generated
HSW timing generator (OVW, match, STRIG)
interrupt request bit
0 HSW timing generator (OVM, match, STRIG)
interrupt request is not generated (Initial value)
1 HSW timing generator (OVM, match, STRIG)
interrupt request is generated
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1061 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D0BB: Servo Interrupt Request Register 2 SIRQR2: Servo Interrupt
0
0
1
0
R/(W)*
23456
1
7
R/(W)*
IRRSNC IRRCTL
11111
Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
Vertical sync signal interrupt request bit
0 Sync signal detector (VD, noise) interrupt
request is not generated (Initial value)
1 Sync signal detector (VD, noise) interrupt
request is generated
CTL interrupt request bit
0 CTL interrupt request is not
generated (Initial value)
1 CTL interrupt request is
generated
——————
——————
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1062 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D0E5: DDC Switch Register DDCSWR: I2C Bus Interface
0
1
1
1
W*
2
2
1
W*
2
3
1
4
0
R/(W)*
1
0
R/W
57
IF*
3
CLR3 CLR2 CLR1 CLR0
0
R/W
SWE*
3
6
0
R/W
SW*
3
W*
2
W*
2
IE
*
3
DDC mode switch interrupt enable bit
0 Disables an interrupt at automatic format switching (Initial value)
1 Enables an interrupt at automatic format switching
DDC mode switch
0 I
2
C bus format is selected for IIC channel 0. (Initial value)
[Clearing conditions]
(1) When 0 is written by software
(2) When an SCL falling edge is detected when SWE = 1
1 Formatless transfer is selected for IIC channel 0.
[Setting condition]
When 1 is written after SW = 0 is read
DDC mode switch enable
0 Disables automatic switching from formatless transfer to I
2
C bus
format transfer for IIC channel 0. (Initial value)
1 Enables automatic switching from formatless transfer to I
2
C bus
format transfer for IIC channel 0.
DDC mode switch interrupt flag
0 Interrupt has not been requested (Initial value)
[Clearing condition]
When 0 is written after IF = 1 is read
1 Interrupt has been requested
[Setting condition]
When an SCL falling edge is detected when SWE = 1
:
:
:
Bit
Initial value
R/W
Notes: 1. Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
2. Always read as 1.
3. These bits are not provided for the H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S.
I
2
C clear control
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1063 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D0E8: I2C Bus Control Register ICCR0: I2C Bus Interface
7
ICE
0
R/W
6
IEIC
0
R/W
5
MST
0
R/W
4
TRS
0
R/W
3
ACKE
0
R/W
0
SCP
1
W
2
BBSY
0
R/W
1
IRIC
0
R/(W)*
Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
I
2
C bus interface enable
0 I
2
C bus interface module disabled, with SCL and SDA signal pins (Initial value)
set to port function. The internal status of the IIC is initialized SAR and SARX can be
accessed.
1 I
2
C bus interface module enabled for transfer operation (pins SCL
and SCA are driving the bus). ICMR and ICDR can be accessed.
I
2
C bus interface interrupt enable
0 Interrupt request is disabled (Initial value)
1 Interrupt request is enabled
Acknowledge bit judgment selection
0 The value of the acknowledge bit is ignored, and continuous transfer is performed (Initial value)
1 If the acknowledge bit is 1, continuous transfer is interrupted
Bus busy
0 Bus is free (Initial value)
[Clearing condition] When a stop condition is detected
1 Bus is busy
[Setting condition] When a start condition is detected
I
2
C bus interface interrupt request flag
0 Waiting for transfer, or transfer in progress (Initial value)
[Clearing condition]
When 0 is written in IRIC after reading IRIC = 1
(1) Interrupt requested
[Setting conditions]
•I
2
C bus format master mode
(1) When a start condition is detected in the bus line state after a start condition is
issued (when the TDRE flag is set to 1 because of first frame transmission)
(2) When a wait is inserted between the data and acknowledge bit when WAIT = 1
(3) At the end of data transfer
(at the rise of the 9th transmit clock pulse, or at the fall of the 8th transmit/receive
clock pulse when using wait insertion)
(4) When a slave address is received after bus arbitration is lost
(when the AL flag is set to 1)
(5) When 1 is received as the acknowledge bit when the ACKE bit is 1
(when the ACKB bit is set to 1)
•I
2
C bus format slave mode
(1) When the slave address (SVA, SVAX) matches
(when the AAS and AASX flags are set to 1) and at the end of data transfer up
to the subsequent retransmission start condition or stop condition detection
(when the TDRE or RDRF flag is set to 1)
(2) When the general call address is detected
(when FS=0 and the ADZ flag is set to 1) and at the end of data transfer up to the
subsequent retransmission start condition or stop condition detection
(when the TDRE or RDRF flag is set to 1)
(3) When 1 is received as the acknowledge bit when the ACKE bit is 1
(when the ACKB bit is set to 1)
(4) When a stop condition is detected
(when the STOP or ESTP flag is set to 1)
•Synchronous serial format and formatless
(1) At the end of data transfer (when the TDRE or RDRF flag is set to 1)
(2) When a start condition is detected with serial format selected
•When a condition, other than the above, that sets the TDRE or RDRF flag to 1 is
detected
Start condition/stop condition prohibit
0 Writing 0 issues a start or stop condition, in combination
with the BBSY flag
1 Reading always returns a value of 1 (Initial value)
Writing is ignored
Master/slave select
Transmit/receive select
MST TRS Description
0 0 Slave receive mode (Initial value)
1 Slave transmit mode
1 0 Master receive mode
1 Master transmit mode
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1064 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D0E9: I2C Bus Status Register ICSR0: I2C Bus Interface
7
ESTP
0
R/(W)*
6
STOP
0
R/(W)*
5
IRTR
0
R/(W)*
4
AASX
0
R/(W)*
3
AL
0
R/(W)*
0
ACKB
0
R/W
2
AAS
0
R/(W)*
1
ADZ
0
R/(W)*
Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
Error stop condition detection flag
0 No error stop condition (Initial value)
[Clearing conditions]
(1) When 0 is written in ESTP after reading ESTP = 1
(2) When the IRIC flag is cleared to 0
1 •In I
2
C bus format slave mode
Error stop condition detected
[Setting condition]
– When a stop condition is detected during frame transfer
•In other mode
No meaning
Normal stop condition detection flag
0 No normal stop condition (Initial value)
[Clearing conditions]
(1) When 0 is written in STOP after reading STOP = 1
(2) When the IRIC flag is cleared to 0
1 •In I
2
C bus format slave mode
Normal stop condition detected
[Setting condition]
– When a stop condition is detected after completion of frame transfer
•In other mode
No meaning
I
2
C bus interface continuous transmission/reception interrupt request flag
0 Waiting for transfer, or transfer in progress (Initial value)
[Clearing conditions]
(1) When 0 is written in IRTR after reading IRTR = 1
(2) When the IRIC flag is cleared to 0
1 Continuous transfer state
[Setting conditions]
•I
2
C bus interface slave mode
– When the TDRE or RDRF flag is set to 1 when AASX = 1
•In other mode
– When the TDRE or RDRF flag is set to 1
Second slave address recognition flag
0 Second slave address not recognized (Initial value)
[Clearing conditions]
(1) When 0 is written in AASX after reading AASX = 1
(2) When a start condition is detected
(3) In master mode
1 Second slave address recognized
[Setting condition]
– When the second slave address is detected in slave receive mode while FSX = 0
Arbitration lost flag
0 Bus arbitration won (Initial value)
[Clearing conditions]
(1) When ICDR data is written (transmit mode) or read (receive mode)
(2) When 0 is written in AL after reading AL = 1
1 Arbitration lost
[Setting conditions]
(1) If the internal SDA and SDA pin disagree at the rise of SCL in master transmit mode
(2) If the internal SCL line is high at the fall of SCL in master transmit mode
Slave address recognition flag
0 Slave address or general call address not recognized (Initial value)
[Clearing conditions]
(1) When ICDR data is written (transmit mode) or read (receive mode)
(2) When 0 is written in AAS after reading AAS = 1
(3) In master mode
1 Slave address or general call address recognized
[Setting condition]
– When the slave address or general call address is detected when FS = 0 in slave receive mode
General call address recognition flag
0 General call address not recognized (Initial value)
[Clearing conditions]
(1) When ICDR data is written (transmit mode) or read (receive mode)
(2) When 0 is written in ADZ after reading ADZ = 1
(3) In master mode
1 General call address recognized
[Setting condition]
– When the general call address is detected when FSX = 0 or FS = 0 in slave receive mode
Acknowledge bit
0 Receive mode: 0 is output at acknowledge output timing (Initial value)
Transmit mode: Indicates that the receiving device has acknowldeged the data (signal is 0)
1 Receive mode; 1 is output at acknowledge output timing
Transmit mode: Indicates that the receiving device has not acknowldeged the data (signal is 1)
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1065 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D0EE: I2C Bus Data Register ICDR0: I2C Bus Interface
7
ICDR7
—
R/W
6
ICDR6
—
R/W
5
ICDR5
—
R/W
4
ICDR4
—
R/W
3
ICDR3
—
R/W
0
ICDR0
—
R/W
2
ICDR2
—
R/W
1
ICDR1
—
R/W
Initial value :
Note: Refer to section 23.2.1, I2C Bus Data Register (ICDR).
Bit
R/W
:
:
H'D0EE: Second Slave Address Register SARX0: I2C Bus Interface
7
SVAX6
0
R/W
6
SVAX5
0
R/W
5
SVAX4
0
R/W
4
SVAX3
0
R/W
3
SVAX2
0
R/W
0
FSX
1
R/W
2
SVAX1
0
R/W
1
SVAX0
0
R/W
Format select
Used combined FS bit in SAR.
Initial value :
Note: Refer to section 23.2.3, Second Slave Address Register (SARX), and section 23.2.2, Slave Address Register (SAR).
Bit
R/W
:
:
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1066 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D0EF: I2C Bus Mode Register ICMR0: I2C Bus Interface
7
MLS
0
R/W
6
WAIT
0
R/W
5
CKS2
0
R/W
4
CKS1
0
R/W
3
CKS0
0
R/W
0
BC0
0
R/W
2
BC2
0
R/W
1
BC1
0
R/W
MSB-first/LSB-first select
Note: * See bit 6 in the serial timer control register (STCR)
0 MSB-first (Initial value)
1 LSB-first
Wait insertion bit
0 Data and acknowledge bits transferred consecutively (Initial value)
1 Wait inserted between data and acknowledge bits
Transfer clock select bits
Bit counter
Bit/frame
BC2 BC1 BC0 Clock sync I
2
C bus format
serial format
0 0 0 8 9 (Initial value)
1 1 2
1 0 2 3
1 3 4
0 0 0 4 5
1 5 6
1 0 6 7
1 7 8
IICX* CKS2 CKS1 CKS0 Clock Transfer rate
φ=8 MHz φ=10 MHz
0 0 0 0 φ/28 286 kHz 357 kHz
1 φ/40 200 kHz 250 kHz
1 0 φ/48 167 kHz 208 kHz
1 φ/64 125 kHz 156 kHz
1 0 0 φ/80 100 kHz 125 kHz
1 φ/100 80.0 kHz 100 kHz
1 0 φ/112 71.4 kHz 89.3 kHz
1 φ/128 62.5 kHz 78.1 kHz
1 0 0 0 φ/56 143 kHz 179 kHz
1 φ/80 100 kHz 125 kHz
1 0 φ/96 83.3 kHz 104 kHz
1 φ/128 62.5 kHz 78.1 kHz
1 0 0 φ/160 50.0 kHz 62.5 kHz
1 φ/200 40.0 kHz 50.0 kHz
1 0 φ/224 35.7 kHz 44.6 kHz
1 φ/256 31.3 kHz 39.1 kHz
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1067 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D0EF: Slave Address Register SAR0: I2C Bus Interface
7
SVA6
0
R/W
6
SVA5
0
R/W
5
SVA4
0
R/W
4
SVA3
0
R/W
3
SVA2
0
R/W
0
FS
0
R/W
2
SVA1
0
R/W
1
SVA0
0
R/W
Format select bit
DDCSWR SAR SARX Format select
Bit 6 Bit 0 Bit 0
SW FS FX
0 0 0 I2C bus format
• SAR and SARX slave addresses recognized
1 I2C bus format (Initial value)
• SAR slave address recognized
• SARX slave address ignored
1 0 I2C bus format
• SAR slave address ignored
• SARX slave address recognized
1 I2C bus format
• SAR and SARX slave addresses ignored
1 0 0 Formatless transfer (start and stop conditions
are not detected)
1 • With acknowledge bit
0 0 Formatless transfer* (start and stop conditions
are not detected)
1 • Without acknowledge bit
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
Note: * Do not use this setting when automatically switching the made from
formatless transfer to I2C bus format by setting DDCSWR.
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1068 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D100: Timer Interrupt Enable Register TIER: Timer X1
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
0
6
0
7
R/WR/WR/W
ICICE
R/W
ICIBE
0
R/W
ICIAE ICIDE OCIAE OCIBE OVIE ICSA
ICFA interrupt request (ICIA) is disabled (Initial value)
ICFA interrupt request (ICIA) is enabled
0
1
Input capture A interrupt enable bit
FTIA pin input is selected
for input capture A input
(Initial value)
HSW is selected for input
capture A input
0
1
Input capture input select A bit
ICFB interrupt request (ICIB) is disabled (Initial value)
ICFB interrupt request (ICIB) is enabled
0
1
Input capture B interrupt enable bit
ICFC interrupt request (ICIC) is disabled (Initial value)
ICFC interrupt request (ICIC) is enabled
0
1
Input capture C interrupt enable bit
ICFD interrupt request (ICID) is disabled (Initial value)
ICFD interrupt request (ICID) is enabled
0
1
Input capture D interrupt enable bit
Interrupt request (FOVI) is
disabled (Initial value)
Interrupt request (FOVI) is enabled
0
1
Timeout overflow interrupt enable bit
0 OCFB interrupt request (OCIB) is disabled
(Initial value)
OCFB interrupt request (OCIB) is enabled1
Output compare interrupt B enable bit
OCFA interrupt request (OCIA) is disabled (Initial value)
OCFA interrupt request (OCIA) is enabled
0
1
Output compare interrupt A enable bit
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1069 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D101: Timer Control/Status Register X TCSRX: Timer X1
0
0
1
0
2
0
3
0
4
0
5
0
6
0
7
R/ WR/(W)*
ICFB
0
R/(W)*
ICFA
R/(W)*
ICFD
R/(W)*
ICFC
R/(W)*
OCFB
R/(W)*
OCFA CCLRA
R/(W)*
OVF
Note: * Only 0 can be written to bits 7 to 1 to clear the flags.
Output compare flag A
[Clearing condition]
When 0 is written to OCFA after reading
OCFA = 1 (Initial value)
[Setting condition]
When FRC = OCRA
0
1
Output compare flag B
[Clearing condition]
When 0 is written to OCFB after reading
OCFB = 1 (Initial value)
[Setting condition]
When FRC = OCRB
0
1
Timer overflow
[Clearing condition]
When 0 is written to OVF after reading
OVF = 1 (Initial value)
[Setting condition]
When FRC changes from H'FFFF to
H'0000
0
1
Input capture flag D
[Clearing condition]
When 0 is written to ICFD after reading
ICFD = 1 (Initial value)
[Setting condition]
When input capture signal is generated
0
1
Input capture flag C
[Clearing condition]
When 0 is written to ICFC after reading
ICFC = 1 (Initial value)
[Setting condition]
When input capture signal is generated
0
1
Input capture flag B
[Clearing condition]
When 0 is written to ICFB after reading
ICFB = 1 (Initial value)
[Setting condition]
When FRC value is transferred to ICRB by
input capture signal
0
1
Input capture flag A
[Clearing condition]
When 0 is written to ICFA after reading
ICFA = 1 (Initial value)
[Setting condition]
When FRC value is transferred to ICRA by
input capture signal
0
1
Counter clear
FRC clearing is disabled
(Initial value)
FRC clearing is enabled
0
1
Initial value :
Bit
R/W
:
:
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1070 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D102: Free Running Counter H FRCH: Timer X1
H'D103: Free Running Counter L FRCL: Timer X1
0
3
0
R/W
5
0
R/W
7
0
9
0
R/W
11
0
13
0
15
R/WR/WR/W
0
R/W R/W
1
0
2
0
R/W
4
0
R/W
6
0
8
0
R/W
10
0
12
0
14
FRC
FRCH FRCL
R/WR/WR/WR/W
0
R/W
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'D104: Output Compare Register AH, BH OCRAH, OCRBH: Timer X1
H'D105: Output Compare Register AL, BL OCRAL, OCRBL: Timer X1
1
3
1
R/W
5
1
R/W
7
1
9
1
R/W
11
1
13
1
15
R/WR/WR/W
1
R/W R/W
1
1
2
1
R/W
4
1
R/W
6
1
8
1
R/W
10
1
12
1
14
OCRA, OCRB
OCRAH, OCRBH OCRAL, OCRBL
R/WR/WR/WR/W
1
R/W
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1071 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D106: Timer Control Register X TCRX: Timer X1
0
0
1
0
2
0
3
0
4
0
5
0
6
0
7
R/WR/W
IEDGB
0
R/W
IEDGA
R/W
IEDGD
R/W
IEDGC
R/W
BUFEB
R/W
BUFEA CKS0
R/W
CKS1
Capture at falling edge of input capture input A (Initial value)
Capture at rising edge of input capture input A
0
1
Input capture edge select A
Capture at falling edge of input capture input B (Initial value)
Capture at rising edge of input capture input B
0
1
Input capture edge select B
Capture at falling edge of input capture input C (Initial value)
Capture at rising edge of input capture input C
0
1
Input capture edge select C
Capture at falling edge of input capture input D (Initial value)
Capture at rising edge of input capture input D
0
1
Input capture edge select D
ICRD is not used as buffer register for ICRB
(Initial value)
ICRD is used as buffer register for ICRB
0
1
Buffer enable B
ICRC is not used as buffer register for ICRA (Initial value)
ICRC is used as buffer register for ICRA
0
1
Buffer enable A
Clock selct bit
Clock select
00
CKS0CKS1
10
0
1
Internal clock: count at φ/4
(Initial value)
Internal clock: count at φ/16
Internal clock: count at φ/64
11 DVCFG: Edge detection
pulse selected by CFG
frequency division timer
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1072 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D107: Timer Output Compare Control Register TOCR: Timer X1
0
0
1
0
2
0
3
0
4
0
5
0
6
0
7
R/WR/W
ICSC
0
R/W
ICSB
R/W
OSRS
R/W
ICSD
R/W
OEB
R/W
OEA OLVLB
R/W
OLVLA
FTIB pin is selected for input capture B input (Initial value)
VD is selected for input capture B input
0
1
Input capture input select B
Low level
(Initial value)
High level
0
1
Output level B
FTIC pin is selected for input capture C input (Initial value)
DVCTL is selected for input capture C input
0
1
Input capture input select C
FTID pin is selected for input capture D input (Initial value)
NHSW is selected for input capture D input
0
1
Input capture input select D
OCRA register is selected (Initial value)
OCRB register is selected
0
1
Output compare register select
Low level (Initial value)
High level
0
1
Output level A
Output compare A output is disabled (Initial value)
Output compare A output is enabled
0
1
Output enable A
Initial value :
0
1
Output enable B
Output compare B output is disabled
(Initial value)
Output compare B output is enabled
Bit
R/W
:
:
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1073 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D108: Input Capture Register AH ICRAH: Timer X1
H'D109: Input Capture Register AL ICRAL: Timer X1
H'D10A: Input Capture Register BH ICRBH: Timer X1
H'D10B: Input Capture Register BL ICRBL: Timer X1
H'D10C: Input Capture Register CH ICRCH: Timer X1
H'D10D: Input Capture Register CL ICRCL: Timer X1
H'D10E: Input Capture Register DH ICRDH: Timer X1
H'D10F: Input Capture Register DL ICRDL: Timer X1
0
3
0
R
5
0
R
7
0
9
0
R
11
0
13
0
15
RRR
0
RR
1
0
2
0
R
4
0
R
6
0
8
0
R
10
0
12
0
14
ICRA, ICRB, ICRC, ICRD
ICRAH, ICRBH, ICRCH, ICRDH ICRAL, ICRBL, ICRCL, ICRDL
RRRR
0
R
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1074 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D110: Timer Mode Register B TMB: Timer B
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
1
4
1
5
0
6
0
7
R/WR/W
TMBIE
R/(W)*
TMBIF
0
R/W
TMB17 TMB12 TMB11 TMB10
Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
Interval function is selected (Initial value)
Auto reload function is selected
0
1
Auto reload function select bit
[Setting condition]
When TCB overflows
[Clearing condition] (Initial value)
When 0 is written after reading 1
0
1
Timer B interrupt request flag
Timer B interrupt request is disabled (Initial value)
Timer B interrupt request is enabled
0
1
Timer B interrupt enable bit
00 0 Internal clock: Count at φ/16384 (Initial value)
TMB11 TMB10TMB12 Clock select
0 1 Internal clock: Count at φ/4096
1
0
0
0 0 Internal clock: Count at φ/1024
1 1 Internal clock: Count at φ/512
01 0 Internal clock: Count at φ/128
0 1 Internal clock: Count at φ/32
1
1
1
1 0 Internal clock: Count at φ/8
1 1 Count at rising/falling edge of external
event (TMBI)*
Note: * External event edge selection is set at PMRA6 in port mode register A
(PMRA).
See section 12.2.4, Port Mode Register A (PMRA).
Clock select bit
Initial value :
——
——
Bit
R/W
:
:
H'D111: Timer Counter B TCB: Timer B
0
0
1
0
R
2
0
R
345
0
6
0
7
RR
TCB15
0
R
TCB14
0
R
TCB13
R
TCB16
0
R
TCB17 TCB12 TCB11 TCB10
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1075 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D111: Timer Load RegisterB TLB: TimerB
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
345
0
6
0
7
WW
TLB15
0
W
TLB14
0
W
TLB13
W
TLB16
0
W
TLB17 TLB12 TLB11 TLB10
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'D112: Timer L Mode Register LMR: Timer L
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
1
5
1
6
0
7
R/WR/WR/W
LMIE
0
R/(W)*
LMIF LMR3 LMR2 LMR1 LMR0
Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
Timer L interrupt request flag
[Clearing condition] (Initial value)
When 0 is written after reading 1
[Setting condition]
When LTC overflow, underflow or compare
match clear occurs
0
1
Timer L interrupt enable bit
Timer L interrupt request is disabled (Initial value)
Timer L interrupt request is enabled
0
1
Up count control (Initial value)
Down count control
0
1
Up/down count control
Clock select bit
Clock select
00 0 Count at rising edge of PB and REC-CTL
(Initial value)
LMR1 LMR0LMR2
1 Count at falling edge of PB and REC-CTL
1*Count DVCFG2
01 *Internal clock: Count at φ/128
1*Internal clock: Count at φ/64
Note: * Don't care.
——
——
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1076 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D113: Linear Time Counter LTC: Timer L
0
0
1
0
R
2
0
3
0
456
0
7
RRRR
LTC6
0
R
LTC5
0
R
LTC4
0
R
LTC7 LTC3 LTC2 LTC1 LTC0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'D113: Reload/Compare Match Register RCR: Timer L
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
3
0
456
0
7
WWWW
RCR6
0
W
RCR5
0
W
RCR4
0
W
RCR7 RCR3 RCR2 RCR1 RCR0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1077 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D118: Timer R Mode Register 1 TMRM1: Timer R
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
0
6
0
7
R/WR/WR/W
RLD
R/W
AC/BR
0
R/W
CLR2 RLCK PS21 PS20 RLD/CAP CPS
TMRU-2 is not cleard at the time of capture (Initial value)
TMRU-2 is cleard at the time of capture
0
1
TMRU-2 clear select bit
Deceleration (Initial value)
Acceleration
0
1
Acceleration/deceleration select bit
TMRU-2 is not used as reload timer (Initial value)
TMRU-2 is used as reload timer
0
1
Execution/non-execution of reload by TMRU-2
Reload at CFG rising edge (Initial value)
Reload at TMRU-2 underflow
0
1
TMRU-2 reload timing select bit
00 Count at TMRU-1 underflow (Initial value)
PS20PS21
1 PSS, count at φ/256
01 PSS, count at φ/128
PSS, count at φ/64
1
TMRU-2 clock source select bits
Description
Capture signal at CFG rising edge
(Initial value)
Capture signal at IRQ3 edge
0
1
TMRU-1 capture signal select bit
TMRU-1 functions as reload timer (Initial value)
TMRU-1 functions as capture timer
0
1
TMRU-1 operation mode select bit
Initial value :
Bit
R/W
:
:
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1078 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D119: Timer R Mode Register 2 TMRM2: Timer R
0
0
1
0
R/(W)*
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
0
6
0
7
R/(W)*R/WR/W
PS10
R/W
PS11
0
R/W
LAT PS31 PS30 CP/SLM CAPF SLW
TMRU-1 clock source select bits
Description
00 Count at CFG rising edge (Initial value)
PS10PS11
1 PSS, count at φ/4
01 PSS, count at φ/256
1 PSS, count at φ/512
TMRU-3 clock source select bits
Description
00 Count at rising edge of DVCTL from frequency divider (Initial value)
PS30PS31
1 PSS, count at φ/4096
01 PSS, count at φ/2048
1 PSS, count at φ/1024
Interrupt select bit
Interrupt request by TMRU-2 capture signal is enabled (Initial value)
Interrupt request by slow tracking mono-multi end is enabled
0
1
Capture signal flag
[Clearing condition] (Initial value)
When 0 is written after reading 1
[Setting condition]
When TMRU-2 capture signal is generated while CP/SLM bit = 0
0
1
Slow tracking mono-multi flag
[Clearing condition] (Initial value)
When 0 is written after reading 1
[Setting condition]
When slow tracking mono-multi ends while
CP/SLM bit = 1
0
1
TMRU-2 captrue signal select bits
*0 Capture at TMRU-3 underflow (Initial value)
CPSLAT
01 Capture at CFG rising edge
1 Capture at IRQ3 edge
Description
Legend: * Don't care.
Initial value :
Bit
R/W
:
:
Note: * The CAPF bit and the SLW bit, respectively, works to latch the interrupt causes and writing 0 only is
valid. Consequently, when these bits are being set to 1, respective interrupt requests will not be
issued. Therefore, it is necessary to check these bits during the course of the interrupt processing
routine to have them cleared.
Also priority is given to the set and, when an interrupt cause occur while the a clearing command
(BCLR, MOV, etc.) is being executed, the CAPF bit and the SLW bit will not be cleared respectively
and it thus becomes necessary to pay attention to the clearing timing.
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1079 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D11A: Timer R Capture Register 1 TMRCP1: Time R
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
1
R
TMRC17
R
TMRC16
R
TMRC15
R
TMRC14
R
TMRC13
R
TMRC12
R
TMRC11
R
TMRC10
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'D11B: Timer R Capture Register 2 TMRCP2: Time R
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
1
R
TMRC27
R
TMRC26
R
TMRC25
R
TMRC24
R
TMRC23
R
TMRC22
R
TMRC21
R
TMRC20
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'D11C: Timer R Load Register 1 TMRL1: Timer R
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
1
W
TMR17
W
TMR16
W
TMR15
W
TMR14
W
TMR13
W
TMR12
W
TMR11
W
TMR10
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'D11D: Timer R Load Register 2 TMRL2: Timer R
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
1
W
TMR27
W
TMR26
W
TMR25
W
TMR24
W
TMR23
W
TMR22
W
TMR21
W
TMR20
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'D11E: Timer R Load Register 3 TMRL3: Timer R
0
1
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
1
W
TMR37
W
TMR36
W
TMR35
W
TMR34
W
TMR33
W
TMR32
W
TMR31
W
TMR30
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1080 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D11F: Timer R Control/Status Register TMRCS: Timer R
0
1
1
1
2
0
R/(W)*
3
0
4
0
R/(W)*
5
0
6
0
7
R/(W)*R/W
TMRI1E
R/W
TMRI2E
0
R/W
TMRI3E TMRI3 TMRI2 TMRI1
Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
TMRI3 interrupt request is disabled (Initial value)
TMRI3 interrupt request is enabled
0
1
TMRI3 interrupt enable bit
TMRI2 interrupt request is disabled (Initial value)
TMRI2 interrupt request is enabled
0
1
TMRI2 interrupt enable bit
TMRI1 interrupt request is disabled (Initial value)
TMRI1 interrupt request is enabled
0
1
TMRI1 interrupt enable bit
TMRI1 interrupt request flag
[Clearing condition] (Initial value)
When 0 is written after reading 1
[Setting condition]
When TMRU-1 underflows
0
1
TMRI2 interrupt request flag
[Clearing condition] (Initial value)
When 0 is written after reading 1
[Setting condition]
When TMRU-2 underflows or when capstan motor
acceleration/deceleration operation ends
0
1
TMRI3 interrupt request flag
[Clearing condition] (Initial value)
When 0 is written after reading 1
[Setting condition]
When interrupt source selected at CP/SLM bit in
TMRM2 is generated
0
1
Initial value :
——
——
Bit
R/W
:
:
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1081 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D120: PWM Data Register L PWDRL: 14-Bit PWM
0
0
1
0
2
0
3
0
4
0
5
0
67
W
PWDRL0
W
PWDRL1
W
PWDRL2
W
PWDRL3
W
PWDRL4
W
PWDRL5
0
W
PWDRL6
W
PWDRL7
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'D121: PWM Data Register U PWDRU: 14-Bit PWM
0
0
1
0
2
0
3
0
4
0
5
0
6
1
7
W
PWDRU0
W
PWDRU1
W
PWDRU2
W
PWDRU3
W
PWDRU4
W
PWDRU5
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
——
——
H'D122: PWM Control Register PWCR: 14-Bit PWM
0
0
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
R/W
PWCR0
1
Clock select bit
Note: tφ: PWM input clock frequency
Input clock is φ/2 (tφ = 2/φ) (Initial value)
Generate PWM waveform with conversion frequency of
16384/φ and minimum pulse width of 1/φ
Input clock is φ/4 (tφ = 4/φ)
Generate PWM waveform with conversion frequency of
32768/φ and minimum pulse width of 2/φ
0
1
Initial value :
———————
———————
Bit
R/W
:
:
H'D126: 8-Bit PWM Data Register 0 PWR0: 8-Bit PWM
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
56
0
7
PW04 PW03 PW02 PW01 PW00
0
W
PW07
WWW
PW06 PW05
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1082 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D127: 8-Bit PWM Data Register 1 PWR1: 8-Bit PWM
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
56
0
7
PW14 PW13 PW12 PW11 PW10
0
W
PW17
WWW
PW16 PW15
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'D128: 8-Bit PWM Data Register 2 PWR2: 8-Bit PWM
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
56
0
7
PW24 PW23 PW22 PW21 PW20
0
W
PW27
WWW
PW26 PW25
Bit :
Note: The H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S do not have PWR2 and PWR3.
Initial value :
R/W :
H'D129: 8-Bit PWM Data Register 3 PWR3: 8-Bit PWM
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
56
0
7
PW34 PW33 PW32 PW31 PW30
0
W
PW37
WWW
PW36 PW35
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Note: The H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S do not have PWR2 and PWR3.
H'D12A: 8-Bit PWM Control Register PW8CR: 8-Bit PWM
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4567
PWC3 PWC2 PWC1 PWC0
R/WR/W
1111
Output polarity select bits
Positive polarity (Initial value)
Negative polarity
0
1
Note: n = 3 to 0 (H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S: n = 1 and 0.)
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
————
————
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1083 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D12C: Input Capture Register 1 ICR1: PSU
0
0
1
0
R
2
0
R
3
0
4
0
R
0
R
56
0
7
ICR14 ICR13 ICR12 ICR11 ICR10
0
R
ICR17
RRR
ICR16 ICR15
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1084 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D12D: Prescaler Unit Control/Status Register PCSR: PSU
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
1
4
0
R/W
5
0
6
0
7
R/WR/W
ICEG
R/W
ICIE
0
R/(W)*
ICIF NCon/off DCS2 DCS1 DCS0
Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
Interrupt request by input capture is disabled (Initial value)
Interrupt request by input capture is enabled
0
1
Input capture interrupt enable bit
Frequency division clock output select bits
Description
00 0 PSS, output φ/32
(Initial value)
DCS1 DCS0DCS2
1 PSS, output φ/16
1 0 PSS, output φ/8
1 PSS, output φ/4
01 0 PSW, output φW/32
1 PSW, output φW/16
1 0 PSW, output φW/8
1 PSW, output φW/4
Input capture interrupt flag
[Clearing condition] (Initial value)
When 0 is written after reading 1
[Setting condition]
When input capture is executed at IC pin edge
0
1
Noise cancel function of IC pin is disabled (Initial value)
Noise cancel function of IC pin is enabled
0
1
Noise cancel ON/OFF bit
IC pin edge select bit
Falling edge of IC pin input is detected (Initial value)
Rising edge of IC pin input is detected
0
1
Initial value :
—
—
Bit
R/W
:
:
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1085 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D130: Software Trigger A/D Result Register H ADRH: A/D Converter
H'D131: Software Trigger A/D Result Register L ADRL: A/D Converter
ADRH ADRL
1032547
0
R
6
0
R
9
0
R
8
0
R
11
0
R
10
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
ADR9 ADR8 ADR7 ADR6 ADR5 ADR4 ADR3 ADR2 ADR1 ADR0
0
R
12131415
00000
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
——————
——————
H'D132: Hardware Trigger A/D Result Register H AHRH: A/D Converter
H'D133: Hardware Trigger A/D Result Register L AHRL: A/D Converter
AHRH AHRL
1032547
0
R
6
0
R
9
0
R
8
0
R
11
0
R
10
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
AHR9 AHR8 AHR7 AHR6 AHR5 AHR4 AHR3 AHR2 AHR1 AHR0
0
R
12131415
00000
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
— —————
— —————
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1086 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D134: A/D Control Register ADCR: A/D Converter
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
0
6
1
7
R/WR/WR/W
HCH1
0
R/W
CK HCH0 SCH3 SCH2 SCH1 SCH0
Clock select
0 Conversion frequency = 266 states (Initial value)
1 Conversion frequency = 134 states
Hardware channel select bits
HCH1 HCH2 Analog input channel
0 0 AN8 (Initial value)
1 AN9
1 0 ANA
1 ANB
Software channel select bits
SCH3 SCH2 SCH1 SCH0 Analog input channel
0 0 0 0 AN0 (Initial value)
1 AN1
1 0 AN2
1 AN3
1 0 0 AN4
1 AN5
1 0 AN6
1 AN7
1 0 0 0 AN8
1 AN9
1 0 ANA
1 ANB
1 Software-triggered conversion
channel is not selected
Legend: * Don't care.
Note: If conversion is started by software when SCH3 to
SCH0 are set to 11xx, the conversion result is
undetermined. Hardware- or external-triggered
conversion, however, will be performed on the channel
selected by HCH1 and HCH0.
Initial value :
—
—
Bit
R/W
:
:
**
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1087 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D135: A/D Control/Status Register ADCSR: A/D Converter
0
0
1
0
R
2
0
R
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
0
67
R/(W)*RR/W
ADIE
0
R/(W)*
SEND SST HST BUSY SCNLHEND
1
A/D interrupt enable bit
0 Interrupt (ADI) upon A/D conversion end is disabled (Initial value)
1 Interrupt (ADI) upon A/D conversion end is enabled
Software A/D start flag
0 Read: Indicates that software-triggered A/D conversion
has ended or been stopped (Initial value)
Write: Software-triggered A/D conversion is aborted
1 Read: Indicates that software-triggered A/D conversion
is in progress
Write: Starts software-triggered A/D conversion
Busy flag
0 No contention for A/D conversion (Initial value)
1 Indicates an attempt to execute software-triggered
A/D conversion while hardware- or external-triggered
A/D conversion was in progress.
Software-triggered A/D conversion cancel flag
0 No contention for A/D conversion
(Initial value)
1 Indicates that software-triggered A/D
conversion was canceled by the start of
hardware-triggered A/D conversion.
Hardware A/D status flag
0 Read: Hardware- or external-triggered A/D conversion is
not in progress (Initial value)
Write: Hardware- or external-triggered A/D conversion is
aborted
1 Hardware- or external-triggered A/D conversion is in
progress.
Software A/D end flag
0 [Clearing condition] (Initial value)
When 0 is written after reading 1
1 [Setting condition]
When software-triggered A/D conversion has ended
Hardware A/D end flag
0 [Clearing condition] (Initial value)
When 0 is written after reading 1
1 [Setting condition]
When hardware- or external-triggered A/D
conversion has ended
Initial value :
—
—
Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
Bit
R/W
:
:
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1088 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D136: A/D Trigger Select Register ADTSR: A/D Converter
0123
0
4
R/W
567
TRGS1
0
R/W
TRGS0
111111
Trigger select bits
TRGS1 TRGS0
0 0 Hardware- or external-triggered A/D
conversion is disabled (Initial value)
1 Hardware-triggered (ADTRG) A/D conversion
is selected
1 0 Hardware-triggered (DFG) A/D conversion
is selected
1 External-triggered (ADTRG) A/D conversion
is selected
Initial value :
——————
——————
Bit
R/W
:
:
H'D138: Timer Load Register K TLK: Timer J
0
1
1
1
W
2
1
W
3
1
4
1
W
5
1
6
1
7
WWW
TLR25
W
TLR26
1
W
TLR27 TLR24 TLR23 TLR22 TLR21 TLR20
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'D138: Timer Counter K TCK: Timer J
0
1
1
1
R
2
1
R
3
1
4
1
R
5
1
6
1
7
RRR
TDR25
R
TDR26
1
R
TDR27 TDR24 TDR23 TDR22 TDR21 TDR20
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'D139: Timer Load Register J TLJ: Timer J
0
1
1
1
W
2
1
W
3
1
4
1
W
5
1
6
1
7
WWW
TLR15
W
TLR16
1
W
TLR17 TLR14 TLR13 TLR12 TLR11 TLR10
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1089 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D139: Timer Counter J TCJ: Timer J
0
1
1
1
R
2
1
R
3
1
4
1
R
5
1
6
1
7
RRR
TDR15
R
TDR16
1
R
TDR17 TDR14 TDR13 TDR12 TDR11 TDR10
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'D13A: Timer Mode Register J TMJ: Timer J
0
0
1
0
R
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
0
6
0
7
R/WR/WR/W
ST
R/W
PS10
0
R/W
PS11 8/16 PS21 PS20 TGL T/R
TMJ-2 toggle flag
TMJ-2 toggle output is 0 (Initial value)
TMJ-2 toggle output is 1
0
1
Timer output/remote-controller output
select bit
TMJ-1 timer output
(Initial value)
TMJ-1 toggle output (data
transmitted from remote
controller)
0
1
TMJ-1 and TMJ-2 operate separately (Initial value)
TMJ-1 and TMJ-2 operate together as 16-bit
0
1
8-bit/16-bit operation select bit
Stop TMJ-1 clock supply in remote control mode (Initial value)
Start TMJ-1 clock supply in remote control mode
0
1
Remote-controlled operation start bit
Note: * External clock edge selection is set in the IRQ edge select register (IEGR).
See section 6.2.4, IRQ Edge Select Register (IEGR).
When using external clock in remote control mode, set opposite edges for IRQ1 and IRQ2 edges
(eg. When falling edge is set for IRQ1, set rising edge for IRQ2. When rising edge is set for IRQ1,
set falling edge for IRQ2).
00
PS10PS11
1
0
1
PSS, count at φ/512 (Initial value)
PSS, count at φ/256
PSS, count at φ/4
1Count at rising/falling edge of external clock (IRQ1)*
TMJ-1 input clock select bits
Description
Note: * External clock edge selection is set in the IRQ edge select register (IEGR).
See section 6.2.4, IRQ Edge Select Register (IEGR).
00
PS20PS21
1
0
1
PSS, count at φ/16384 (Initial value)
PSS, count at φ/2048
Count at TMJ-1 underflow
1Count at rising/falling edge of external clock (IRQ2)*
TMJ-2 input clock select bits
Description
Initial value :
Bit
R/W
:
:
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1090 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D13B: Timer J Control Register TMJC: Timer J
01
0
2
0
R/W
34
0
R/W
5
0
6
0
7
R/WR/W
MON1
R/W
BUZZ0
0
R/W
BUZZ1 MON0 TMJ2IE TMJ1IE
11
φ/4096 (Initial value)
BUZZ0 Output signalBUZZ1
Frequency when
φ = 10 MHz
φ/8192
2.44 kHz
1.22 kHz
Output monitor signal
00
1
10
1 Output timer J BUZZ signal
Buzzer output select bits
TMJ2I interrupt request is disabled (Initial value)
TMJ2I interrupt request is enabled
0
1
TMJ2I interrupt enable bit
PS22
Used in combination with bits PS21
and PS20 to select the TMJ-2
input clock.
TMJ1I interrupt request is disabled
(Initial value)
TMJ1I interrupt request is enabled
0
1
TMJ1I interrupt enable bit
PB or REC-CTL (Initial value)
MON0MON1
DVCTL
Output TCA7
00
1
1*
Monitor output select bits
Monitor output select
Note: * Don't care.
TMJ-2 expansion function is enabled
EXN
TMJ-2 expansion function is disabled (Initial value)
0
1
Expansion function control bit
Description
Initial value :
EXN PS22
R/W R/W
Bit
R/W
:
:
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1091 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D13C: Timer J Status Register TMJS: Timer J
0123456
0
7
R/(W)*
TMJ1I
0
R/(W)*
TMJ2I
111111
Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
TMJ1I interrupt request flag
[Clearing condition] (Initial value)
When 0 is written after reading 1
[Setting condition]
When TMJ-1 underflows
0
1
TMJ2I interrupt request flag
[Clearing condition] (Initial value)
When 0 is written after reading 1
[Setting condition]
When TMJ-2 underflows
0
1
Initial value :
——————
——————
Bit
R/W
:
:
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1092 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D148: Serial Mode Register SMR1: SCI1
7
C/A
0
R/W
6
CHR
0
R/W
5
PE
0
R/W
4
O/E
0
R/W
3
STOP
0
R/W
0
CKS0
0
R/W
2
MP
0
R/W
1
CKS1
0
R/W
Asynchronous mode (Initial value)
Clock synchronous mode
0
1
Communication mode
Multiprocessor function is disabled
(Initial value)
Multiprocessor format is selected
0
1
Multiprocessor mode
Clock select
Clock select
00
CKS0CKS1
1
0
1
φ clock (Initial value)
φ/4 clock
φ/16 clock
1φ/64 clock
8-bit data
7-bit data*
0
1
Character length
Note: * When 7-bit data is selected, the MSB (bit 7) of TDR is not transmitted,
and LSB-first/MSB-first selection is not available.
Even parity*1
Odd parity*2
0
1
Parity mode
Notes: 1. When even parity is set, parity bit addition is performed in transmission
so that the total number of 1 bits in the transmit character plus the parity
bit is even. In reception, a check is performed to see if the total number
of 1 bits in the receive character plus the parity bit is even.
2. When odd parity is set, parity bit addition is performed in transmission
so that the total number of 1 bits in the transmit character plus the parity
bit is odd. In reception, a check is performed to see if the total number
of 1 bits in the receive character plus the parity bit is odd.
1 stop bits*1
2 stop bits*2
0
1
Stop bit length
Notes: 1. In transmission, a single 1 bit (stop bit) is added to the end
of a transmit character before it is sent.
2. In transmission, two 1 bits (stop bits) are added to the end
of a transmit character before it is sent.
Parity bit addition and checking disabled
Parity bit addition and checking enabled*
0
1
Parity enable
Note: * When the PE bit is set to 1, the parity (even or odd) specified by the O/E bit
is added to transmit data before transmission. In reception, the parity bit is
checked for the parity (even or odd) specified by the O/E bit.
Initial value :
(Initial value)
(Initial value)
(Initial value)
(Initial value)
Bit
R/W
:
:
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1093 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D149: Bit Rate Register BRR1: SCI1
7
1
R/W
6
1
R/W
5
1
R/W
4
1
R/W
3
1
R/W
0
1
R/W
2
1
R/W
1
1
R/W
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1094 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D14A: Serial Control Register SCR1: SCI1
7
TIE
0
R/W
6
RIE
0
R/W
5
TE
0
R/W
4
RE
0
R/W
3
MPIE
0
R/W
0
CKE0
0
R/W
2
TEIE
0
R/W
1
CKE1
0
R/W
Transmit-data-empty interrupt (TXI) request is disabled*
(Initial value)
Transmit-data-empty interrupt (TXI) request is enabled
0
1
Transmit interrupt enable bit
Note: * TXI interrupt request cancellation can be performed by reading 1 from the TDRE flag, then clearing it to 0,
or clearing the TIE bit to 0.
Receive-data-full interrupt (RXI) request and receive-error interrupt (ERI) request is disabled
*
(Initial value)
Receive-data-full interrupt (RXI) request and receive-error interrupt (ERI) request is enabled
0
1
Receive interrupt enable bit
Note: * RXI and ERI interrupt request cancellation can be performed by reading 1 from the RDRF, FER, PER, or ORER flag,
then clearing the flag to 0, or clearing the RIE bit to 0.
Transmission is disabled
*
1
(Initial value)
Transmission is enabled
*
2
0
1
Transmit enable bit
Notes: 1. The TDRE flag in SSR is fixed at 1.
2. In this state, serial transmission is started when transmit data is written to TDR and TDRE flag in SSR
is cleared to 0.
SMR setting must be performed to decide the transmission format before setting the TE bit to 1.
Reception is disabled
*
1
(Initial value)
Reception is enabled
*
2
0
1
Receive enable bit
Notes: 1. Clearing the RE bit to 0 does not affect the RDRF, FER, PER, and ORER flags, which retain their states.
2. Serial reception is started in this state when a start bit is detected in asynchronous mode or serial
clock input is detected in synchronous mode.
SMR setting must be performed to decide the reception format before setting the RE bit to 1.
Multiprocessor interrupts are disabled (normal reception performed) (Initial value)
[Clearing conditions]
(1) When the MPIE bit is cleared to 0
(2) When data with MPB = 1 is received
Multiprocessor interrupt are enabled*
Receive interrupt (RXI) requests, receive-error interrupt (ERI) requests, and setting of the RDRF,
FER, and ORER flags in SSR1 are disabled until data with the multiprocessor bit set to 1 is received.
0
1
Multiprocessor interrupt enable bit
Note:
*
When receive data including MPB = 0 is received, receive data transfer from RSR to RDR, receive error detection, and
setting of the RDRF, FER, and ORER flags in SSR, is not performed. When receive data with MPB = 1 is received,
the MPB bit in SSR is set to 1, the MPIE bit is cleared to 0 automatically, and generation of RXI and ERI interrupts
(when the TIE and RIE bits in SCR are set to 1) and FER and ORER flag setting is enabled.
Clock enable bits
Notes: 1. Initial value
2. Outputs a clock of the same frequency as the bit rate.
3. Inputs a clock with a frequency 16 times the bit rate.
Clock select
00 Internal clock/SCK pin functions as I/O port
*
1
(Initial value)
CKE0CKE1
Internal clock/SCK pin functions as synchronous clock output
*
1
1 Internal clock/SCK pin functions as clock output
*
2
Internal clock/SCK pin functions as synchronous clock output
01 External clock/SCK pin functions as clock input
*
3
External clock/SCK pin functions as synchronous clock input
1 External clock/SCK pin functions as clock input
*
3
Asynchronous mode
Clock synchronous mode
Asynchronous mode
Clock synchronous mode
Asynchronous mode
Clock synchronous mode
Asynchronous mode
Clock synchronous mode External clock/SCK pin functions as synchronous clock input
Transmit-end interrupt (TEI) request is disabled
*
(Initial value)
Transmit-end interrupt (TEI) request is enabled
*
0
1
Transmit end interrupt enable bit
Note:
*
TEI cancellation can be performed by reading 1 from the TDRE flag in SSR, then clearing it
to 0 and clearing the TEND flag to 0, or clearing the TEIE bit to 0.
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1095 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D14B: Transmit Data Register TDR1: SCI1
7
1
R/W
6
1
R/W
5
1
R/W
4
1
R/W
3
1
R/W
0
1
R/W
2
1
R/W
1
1
R/W
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1096 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D14C: Serial Status Register SSR1: SCI1
Data with a 0 multiprocessor bit is transmitted (Initial value)
Data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is transmitted
0
1
Multiprocessor bit transfer
Transmit data register empty
[Clearing condition]
When 0 is written in TDRE after reading TDRE = 1
[Setting conditions]
(1) When the TE bit in SCR1 is 0
(2) When data is transferred from TDR1 to TSR1 and data can be written to TDR1
0
1
Transmit end
0 [Clearing condition]
When 0 is written in TDRE after reading TDRE = 1
[Setting conditions]
(1) When the TE bit in SCR1 is 0
(2) When TDRE = 1 at trasmission of the last bit of a 1-byte serial
transmit character
1
7
TDRE
1
R/(W)*
6
RDRF
0
R/(W)*
5
ORER
0
R/(W)*
4
FER
0
R/(W)*
3
PER
0
R/(W)*
0
MPBT
0
R/W
2
TEND
1
R
1
MPB
0
R
Multiprocessor bit
0 [Clearing condition]*
When data with a 0 multiprocessor bit is received
[Setting condition]
When data with a 1 multiprocessor bit is reveived
1
Note:
*
Retains its previous state when the RE bit in SCR1 is cleared to 0 with
multiprocessor format.
[Clearing condition]
When 0 is written in PER after reading PER = 1*
1
[Setting condition]
When, in reception, the number of 1 bits in the receive data plus the parity bit
does not match the parity setting (even or odd) specified by the O/E bit in SMR*
2
0
1
Parity error
Notes: 1. The PER flag is not affected and retains its previous state when the RE bit in SCR1 is cleared to 0.
2. If a parity error occurs, the receive data is transferred to RDR1 but the RDRF flag is not set. Also,
subsequent serial reception cannot be continued while the PER flag is set to 1. In synchronous
mode, serial transmission cannot be continued, either.
Receive data register full
[Clearing condition]
When 0 is written in RDRF after reading RDRF = 1
[Setting condition]
When serial reception ends normally and receive data is transferred from RSR to RDR
0
1
Note: RDR and the RDRF flag are not affected and retain their previous values when an error is detected during reception
or when the RE bit in SCR1 is cleared to 0. If reception of the next data is completed while the RDRF flag is still set
to 1, an overrun error will occur and the receive data will be lost.
Overrun error
[Clearing condition]
When 0 is written in ORER after reading ORER = 1*
1
[Setting condition]
When the next serial reception is completed while RDRF = 1*
2
0
1
Notes: 1. The ORER flag is not affected and retains its previous state when the RE bit in SCR1 is cleared to 0.
2. The receive data prior to the overrun error is retained in RDR1, and the data received subsequently is lost.
Also, subsequent serial reception cannot be continued while the ORER flag is set to 1. In synchronous
mode, serial transmission cannot be continued, either.
Framing error
[Clearing condition]
When 0 is written in FER after reading FER = 1*
1
[Setting condition]
When the SCI checks the stop bit at the end of the receive data when reception
ends, and the stop bit is 0.*
2
0
1
Notes: 1. The FER flag is not affected and retains its previous state when the RE bit in SCR1 is cleared to 0.
2. In 2-stop-bit mode, only the first stop bit is checked for a value of 1; the second stop bit is not checked.
If a framing error occurs, the receive data is transferred to RDR1 but the RDRF flag is not set.
Also, subsequent serial reception cannot be continued while the FER flag is set to 1. In synchronous
mode, serial transmission cannot be continued, either.
Initial value :
Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
(Initial value)
(Initial value)
(Initial value)
(Initial value)
(Initial value)
(Initial value)
(Initial value)
Bit
R/W
:
:
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1097 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D14D: Receive Data Register RDR1: SCI1
7
0
R
6
0
R
5
0
R
4
0
R
3
0
R
0
0
R
2
0
R
1
0
R
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'D14E: Serial Interface Mode Register SCMR1: SCI1
7
—
1
—
6
—
1
—
5
—
1
—
4
—
1
—
3
SDIR
0
R/W
0
—
0
—
2
SINV
0
R/W
1
—
1
—
Data inversion
TDR contents are transmitted (Initial value)
without modification.
Receive data is stored in RDR
without modification.
TDR contents are inverted before
being transmitted.
Receive data is stored in RDR1
in inverted form.
0
1
TDR contents are transmitted LSB-first. (Initial value)
Receive data is stored in RDR LSB-first.
TDR contents are transmitted MSB-first.
Receive data is stored in RDR MSB-first.
0
1
Data transfer direction
Initial value :
Bit
R/W
:
:
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1098 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D158: I2C Bus Control Register ICCR1: I2C Bus Interface
7
ICE
0
R/W
6
IEIC
0
R/W
5
MST
0
R/W
4
TRS
0
R/W
3
ACKE
0
R/W
0
SCP
1
W
2
BBSY
0
R/W
1
IRIC
0
R/(W)*
Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
I
2
C bus interface enable
0 I
2
C bus interface module disabled, with SCL and SDA signal pins (Initial value)
set to port function. SAR and SARX can be accessed.
1 I
2
C bus interface module enabled for transfer operation (pins SCL
and SCA are driving the bus). ICMR and ICDR can be accessed.
I
2
C bus interface interrupt enable
0 Interrupt request is disabled (Initial value)
1 Interrupt request is enabled
Acknowledge bit judgment selection
0 The value of the acknowledge bit is ignored, and continuous transfer is performed (Initial value)
1 If the acknowledge bit is 1, continuous transfer is interrupted
Bus busy
0 Bus is free (Initial value)
[Clearing condition] When a stop condition is detected
1 Bus is busy
[Setting condition] When a start condition is detected
I
2
C bus interface interrupt request flag
0 Waiting for transfer, or transfer in progress (Initial value)
[Clearing condition]
When 0 is written in IRIC after reading IRIC = 1
1 Interrupt requested
[Setting conditions]
•I
2
C bus format master mode
— When a start condition is detected in the bus line state after a start condition is
issued (when the TDRE flag is set to 1 because of first frame transmission)
— When a wait is inserted between the data and acknowledge bit when WAIT = 1
— At the end of data transfer
(when the TDRE or RDRF flag is set to 1)
— When a slave address is received after bus arbitration is lost
(when the AL flag is set to 1)
— When 1 is received as the acknowledge bit when the ACKE bit is 1
(when the ACKB bit is set to 1)
•I
2
C bus format slave mode
— When the slave address (SVA, SVAX) matches
(when the AAS and AASX flags are set to 1) and at the end of data transfer up
to the subsequent retransmission start condition or stop condition detection
(when the TDRE or RDRF flag is set to 1)
— When the general call address is detected
(when the ADZ flag is set to 1) and at the end of data transfer up to the
subsequent retransmission start condition or stop condition detection
(when the TDRE or RDRF flag is set to 1)
— When 1 is received as the acknowledge bit when the ACKE bit is 1
(when the ACKB bit is set to 1)
— When a stop condition is detected
(when the STOP or ESTP flag is set to 1)
•Synchronous serial format
— At the end of data transfer (when the TDRE or RDRF flag is set to 1)
— When a start condition is detected with serial format selected
— When a condition, other than the above, that sets the TDRE or RDRF flag to 1 is
detected
Start condition/stop condition prohibit
0 Writing 0 issues a start or stop condition, in combination with the BBSY flag
1 Reading always returns a value of 1 (Initial value)
Writing is ignored
Master/slave select
Transmit/receive select
MST TRS Description
0 0 Slave reveive mode (Initial value)
1 Slave transmit mode
1 0 Master receive mode
1 Master transmit mode
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1099 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D159: I2C Bus Status Register ICSR1: I2C Bus Interface
7
ESTP
0
R/(W)*
6
STOP
0
R/(W)*
5
IRTR
0
R/(W)*
4
AASX
0
R/(W)*
3
AL
0
R/(W)*
0
ACKB
0
R/W
2
AAS
0
R/(W)*
1
ADZ
0
R/(W)*
Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
Error stop condition detection flag
0 No error stop condition (Initial value)
[Clearing conditions]
(1) When 0 is written in ESTP after reading ESTP = 1
(2) When the IRIC flag is cleared to 0
1 • In I
2
C bus format slave mode
Error stop condition detected
[Setting condition]
–
When a stop condition is detected during frame transfer
• In other mode
No meaning
Normal stop condition detection flag
0 No normal stop condition (Initial value)
[Clearing conditions]
(1) When 0 is written in STOP after reading STOP = 1
(2) When the IRIC flag is cleared to 0
1 • In I
2
C bus format slave mode
Normal stop condition detected
[Setting condition]
–
When a stop condition is detected after completion of frame transfer
• In other mode
No meaning
I
2
C bus interface continuous transmission/reception interrupt request flag
0 Waiting for transfer, or transfer in progress (Initial value)
[Clearing conditions]
(1) When 0 is written in IRTR after reading IRTR = 1
(2) When the IRIC flag is cleared to 0
1 Continuous transfer state
[Setting conditions]
• In I
2
C bus interface slave mode
–
When the TDRE or RDRF flag is set to 1 when AASX = 1
• In other mode
–
When the TDRE or RDRF flag is set to 1
Second slave address recognition flag
0 Second slave address not recognized (Initial value)
[Clearing conditions]
(1) When 0 is written in AASX after reading AASX = 1
(2) When a start condition is detected
(3) In master mode
1 Second slave address recognized
[Setting condition]
When the second slave address is detected in slave receive mode
Arbitration lost flag
0 Bus arbitration won (Initial value)
[Clearing conditions]
(1) When ICDR data is written (transmit mode) or read (receive mode)
(2) When 0 is written in AL after reading AL = 1
1 Arbitration lost
[Setting conditions]
(1) If the internal SDA and SDA pin disagree at the rise of SCL in master transmit mode
(2) If the internal SCL line is high at the fall of SCL in master transmit mode
Slave address recognition flag
0 Slave address or general call address not recognized (Initial value)
[Clearing conditions]
(1) When ICDR data is written (transmit mode) or read (receive mode)
(2) When 0 is written in AAS after reading AAS = 1
(3) In master mode
1 Slave address or general call address recognized
[Setting condition]
When the slave address or general call address is detected when FS = 0 in slave receive mode
General call address recognition flag
0 General call address not recognized (Initial value)
[Clearing conditions]
(1) When ICDR data is written (transmit mode) or read (receive mode)
(2) When 0 is written in ADZ after reading ADZ = 1
(3) In master mode
1 General call address recognized
[Setting condition]
When the general call address is detected when FSX = 0 or FS = 0 in slave receive mode
Acknowledge bit
0 Receive mode: 0 is output at acknowledge output timing (Initial value)
Transmit mode: Indicates that the receiving device has acknowldeged the data (signal is 0)
1 Receive mode; 1 is output at acknowledge output timing
Transmit mode: Indicates that the receiving device has not acknowldeged the data (signal is 1)
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1100 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D15E: I2C Bus Data Register ICDR1: I2C Bus Interface
7
ICDR7
—
R/W
6
ICDR6
—
R/W
5
ICDR5
—
R/W
4
ICDR4
—
R/W
3
ICDR3
—
R/W
0
ICDR0
—
R/W
2
ICDR2
—
R/W
1
ICDR1
—
R/W
:
:
:
Bit
Note: Refer to section 23.2.1, I
2
C Bus Data Register (ICDR).
Initial value
R/W
H'D15E: Second Slave Address Register SARX1: I2C Bus Interface
7
SVAX6
0
R/W
6
SVAX5
0
R/W
5
SVAX4
0
R/W
4
SVAX3
0
R/W
3
SVAX2
0
R/W
0
FSX
1
R/W
2
SVAX1
0
R/W
1
SVAX0
0
R/W
:
:
:
Bit
Note: Refer to section 23.2.3, Second Slave Address Register (SARX),
and section 23.2.2, Slave Address Register (SAR).
Initial value
R/W
Format select
Used combined with FS bit in SAR.
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1101 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D15F: I2C Bus Mode Register ICMR1: I2C Bus Interface
7
MLS
0
R/W
6
WAIT
0
R/W
5
CKS2
0
R/W
4
CKS1
0
R/W
3
CKS0
0
R/W
0
BC0
0
R/W
2
BC2
0
R/W
1
BC1
0
R/W
MSB-first/LSB-first select
0 MSB-first (initial value)
1 LSB-first
Wait insertion bit
0 Data and acknowledge bits transferred consecutively (initial value)
1 Wait inserted between data and acknowledge bits
Transfer clock select bits
Bit counter
Bit/frame
BC2 BC1 BC0 Clock sync I
2
C bus format
serial format
0 0 0 8 9 (Initial value)
1 1 2
1 0 2 3
1 3 4
0 0 0 4 5
1 5 6
1 0 6 7
1 7 8
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Note: * See bit 6 in STCR.
IICX* CKS2 CKS1 CKS0 Clock Transfer rate
φ = 8 MHz φ = 10 MHz
0 0 0 0 φ/28 286 kHz 357 kHz
1 φ/40 200 kHz 250 kHz
1 0 φ/48 167 kHz 208 kHz
1 φ/64 125 kHz 156 kHz
1 0 0 φ/80 100 kHz 125 kHz
1 φ/100 80.0 kHz 100 kHz
1 0 φ/112 71.4 kHz 89.3 kHz
1 φ/128 62.5 kHz 78.1 kHz
1 0 0 0 φ/56 143 kHz 179 kHz
1 φ/80 100 kHz 125 kHz
1 0 φ/96 83.3 kHz 104 kHz
1 φ/128 62.5 kHz 78.1 kHz
1 0 0 φ/160 50.0 kHz 62.5 kHz
1 φ/200 40.0 kHz 50.0 kHz
1 0 φ/224 35.7 kHz 44.6 kHz
1 φ/256 31.3 kHz 39.1 kHz
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1102 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D15F: Slave Address Register SAR1: I2C Bus Interface
7
SVA6
0
R/W
6
SVA5
0
R/W
5
SVA4
0
R/W
4
SVA3
0
R/W
3
SVA2
0
R/W
0
FS
0
R/W
2
SVA1
0
R/W
1
SVA0
0
R/W
Format select bit
DDCSWR SAR SARX Format select
Bit 6 Bit 0 Bit 0
SW FS FX
0 0 0 I2C bus format
•
SAR and SARX slave addresses recognized
1 I2C bus format (Initial value)
•
SAR slave address recognized
•
SARX slave address ignored
1 0 I2C bus format
•
SAR slave address ignored
•
SARX slave address recognized
1 I2C bus format
•
SAR and SARX slave addresses ignored
1 0 0 Formatless transfer (start and stop conditions
are not detected)
1 •
With acknowledge bit
1 0 Formatless transfer* (start and stop conditions
are not detected)
1 •
Without acknowledge bit
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
Note: *Do not use this setting when automatically switching the made from
formatless transfer to I2C bus format by setting DDCSWR.
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1103 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D200 to H'D20B: Row Registers 1 to 12 CLINE1 to CLINE12: OSD
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
57
CLUn0 KRn KGn
KBn
KLUn
0
R/W
BPTNn
6
0
R/W
SZn
R/WR/W
CLUn1
Bit
Initial value
R/W
Character size specification bit
0 Character display size: single height × single width (Initial value)
1 Character display size: double height × double width
Button pattern specification bit
0 Pattern causing buttons in the nth row to appear to be raised (Initial value)
1 Pattern causing buttons in the nth row to appear to be lowered
Cursor brightness/halftone level specification bit
(Cursor Colors in Text Display Mode)
(Cursor Brightness in Text Display Mode)
(Cursor Colors in Superimposed Mode)
Character brightness specification bits
Bit 0 Cursor Color Cursor Brightness Level
KLUn
0 Black
1
0 Blue, green, cyan,
1 red, yellow, magenta
0 White
1
Bit 5 Bit 4 Character Color Character Brightness Level
CLUn1 CLUn0
0 0 Black
1
1 0
1
0 0 Blue, green,
1 cyan, red,
1 0 yellow,
1 magenta
0 0 White
1
1 0
1
Bit 0 Character Brightness Level
KLUn
0
1
:
:
:
Note: All brightness levels are with reference to the pedestal level (5 IRE).
Brightness levels are reference values.
n = 1 to 12
Note: All brightness levels are with reference to the pedestal level (5 IRE).
Brightness levels are reference values.
(Halftone Levels in Superimposed Mode)
Cursor color specification bits
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Character Brightness Level
KRn KGn KBn Cursor Color (C.Video Output) Cursor Color (R, G, B Output)
0 0 0
1
1 0 Specification invalid
1 (Halftone display in
1 0 0 superimposed mode)
1
1 0
1
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Character Brightness Level
KRn KGn KBn Cursor Color (C.Video Output) Cursor Color (R, G, B Output)
NTSC PAL
0 0 0 Black Black Black (Initial value)
1
π
±
π
Blue
1 0 7
π
/4 ±7
π
/4
1 3
π
/2 ±3
π
/2
1 0 0
π
/2 ±
π
/2
1 3
π
/4 ±3
π
/4
1 0 Same phase ±0
0 IRE (Initial value)
10 IRE
20 IRE
30 IRE
25 IRE (Initial value)
45 IRE
55 IRE
65 IRE
45 IRE (Initial value)
70 IRE
80 IRE
90 IRE
Green
Cyan
Red
Magenta
Yellow
White
Black (Initial value)
Blue
Green
Cyan
Red
Magenta
Yellow
White
0 IRE (Initial value)
25 IRE
25 IRE (Initial value)
45 IRE
45 IRE (Initial value)
55 IRE
50% halftone (Initial value)
30% halftone
1 White White
Note: n = 1 to 12
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1104 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D20C: Vertical Display Position Register VPOS: OSD
8
0
9
0
R/W
10
0
R/W
11
0
12
1
—
1
—
1315
— VSPC2 VSPC1
VSPC0
VP8
1
—
—
14
1
—
—
R/WR/W
—
Bit
Initial value
R/W
Vertical row interval specification bits
Vertical display start position specification bits
VSPC2 VSPC1 VSPC0 Description
0 0 0 No row interval
1 Row interval: One scanning line
1 0 Row interval: Two scanning lines
1 Row interval: Three scanning lines
1 0 0 Row interval: Four scanning lines
1 Row interval: Five scanning lines
1 0 Row interval: Six scanning lines
1 Row interval: Seven scanning lines
:
:
:
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
57
VP4 VP3 VP2 VP1 VP0
0
R/W
VP7
6
0
R/W
VP6
R/WR/W
VP5
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
H'D20E: Horizontal Display Position Register HPOS: OSD
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
57
HP4 HP3 HP2 HP1 HP0
0
R/W
HP7
6
0
R/W
HP6
R/WR/W
HP5
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
Horizontal display start position specification bits
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1105 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D20F: Digital Output Specification Register DOUT: OSD
0
0
1
1
—
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
57
DOBC DSEL CRSEL — —
0
—
—
6
0
R/W
RGBC
—R/W
YCOC
R, G, B digital output specification bit
0
1
YCO digital output specification bit
0
1
Monitor signal switching bit
0
1
Digital output blink control bit
RAM DOUT Description
Bit 15 Bit 4
BLNK DOBC
0 0 Does not blink (Initial value)
1 Does not blink
1 0 Does not blink
1 Blinks
:
:
:
R, G, B, YCO, YBO pin function select bit
0 R, G, B, YCO, YBO output function is selected (Initial value)
1 Data slicer monitor output function is selected
Bit
Initial value
R/W
Character output is specified (Initial value)
Combined character, border, cursor, background, and button output is specified
Character output is specified (Initial value)
Combined character and border output is specified
R pin = Signal selected by bit 2 (CRSEL)
G pin = Slice data signal analog-compared with Cvin2
B pin = Sampling clock generated within data slicer
YCO pin = External Hsync signal (AFCH) synchronized within the LSI
YBO pin = External Vsync signal (AFCV) synchronized within the LSI
Clock run-in detection window signal output is selected (Initial value)
Start bit detection window signal output is selected
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1106 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D210: Screen Control Register DCNTL: OSD
8
0
9
0
R/W
10
0
—
11
0
12
0
R/W
0
R/W
131415
BLKS OSDON —
EDGE
EDGC
0
R/W R/W
VDSPON DISPM
R/WR/W
LACEM
0
OSD display start bit
CDSPON OSDON Description
0/1 0
0 1
1 1
OSD C. video display enable bit
0 OSD C.Video display is off (Initial value)
1 OSD C.Video display is on
Border specification bit
0 No character border (Initial value)
1 Character border
Superimposed/text display mode select bit
0 Superimposed mode is selected (Initial value)
1 Text display mode is selected
Blinking period select bit
TVM2 BLKS Description
0 0
1
1 0
1
Interlaced/noninterlaced display select bit
0 0 Noninterlaced display is selected (Initial value)
1 Interlaced display is selected
Border color specification bit
Bit 8 Border Color (in text display mode)
EDGC Border Color (C.Video output) Border Color (R,G,B Output)
0 Black Black (Initial value)
1 White White
Bit 8 Border Color (in superimposed mode)
EDGC C.Video output R,G,B Output
0 Specification invalid (Black) Black (Initial value)
1 White
:
:
:
(TVM2 is bit15 in DFORM)
Approx. 0.5 sec (32/fv = 0.53 sec) (Initial value)
Approx. 1.0 sec (64/fv = 1.07 sec)
Approx. 0.5 sec (32/fv = 0.64 sec)
Approx. 1.0 sec (64/fv = 1.28 sec)
OSD display is stopped (C.Video output and digital output both off) (Initial value)
OSD display is started (digital output only)
OSD display is started (both C.Video output and digital output enabled)
Bit
Initial value
R/W
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1107 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D211: Screen Control Register DCNTL: OSD
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
57
BLU1 BLU0 CAMP KAMP BAMP
0
R/W
BR
6
0
R/W
BG
R/WR/W
BB
Background chroma select bit
0
1
Cursor chroma select bit
0
1
Character chroma select bit
0 Character chroma amplitude: 60 IRE (Initial value)
1 Character chroma amplitude: 80 IRE
Background brightness select bits
BUL1 BUL0 Description
0 0 Background Brightness, 10IRE (Initial value)
1 Background Brightness, 30IRE
1 0 Background Brightness, 50IRE
1 Background Brightness, 70IRE
:
:
:
Background color specification
(Background Colors in Text Display Mode)
(Background Colors in Superimposed Mode)
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Description
BR BG BB Background color (C.Video Output) Background color (R, G, B Outputs)
0 0 0
1
1 0
1 Specification
1 0 0 invalid
1
1 0
1
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit5 Description
BR BG BB Background color (C.Video Output) Background color (R, G, B Outputs)
NTSC PAL
0 0 0 Black Black
1 π ±π
1 0 7π/4 ±7π/4
1 3π/2 ±3π/2
1 0 0 π/2 ±π/2
1 3π/4 ±3π/4
1 0 Same phase ±0
1 White White
Black (Initial value)
Blue
Green
Cyan
Red
Magenta
Yellow
White
Black (Initial value)
Blue
Green
Cyan
Red
Magenta
Yellow
White
Cursor chroma amplitude: 60 IRE (Initial value)
Cursor chroma amplitude: 80 IRE
Background chroma amplitude: 60 IRE (Initial value)
Background chroma amplitude: 80 IRE
Bit
Initial value
R/W
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1108 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D212: OSD Format Register DFORM: OSD
8
0
9
0
R/W
10
0
—
11
0
12
0
R/W
0
R/W
1315
FSCIN FSCEXT —
OSDVE
OSDVF
0
R/W
TVM2
14
0
R/W
TVM1
R/(W)*
1
R/W
TVM0
Notes: 1. Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
2. The 4fsc and 2fsc frequencies for SECAM do not conform to the SECAM TV format
specifications.
Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Description
TVM2 TVM1 TVM0 FSCIN TV Format 4fsc (MHz) 2fsc (MHz)
0 0 0 0
M/NTSC 14.31818 —
1 — — 7.15909
0 17.734475
0 0 1
4.43-NTSC (17.734470)
1 — 8.867235
(8.867238)
0 1 0 0 M/PAL 14.302446 —
(14.302444)
1 — 7.15122298
0 1 1 0/1 Must not be specified
1 0 0 0 N/PAL 14.328225
(14.28244) —
1 — 7.1641125
1 0 1 0/1 Must not be specified
0 B,G,H/PAL 17.734475 —
1 1 0 I/PAL (17.734476)
1 D,K/PAL — 8.867235
(8.867238)
0 B,G,H/SECAM*
2
17.734475 —
1 1 1
L/SECAM (17.734470)
1 D,K,K1/SECAM — 8.867235
(8.867238)
OSDV interrupt enable bit
0
1
4/2fsc external input select bit
0
1
4/2fsc input select bit
TV format select bits
0
1
OSDV interrupt flag
:
:
:
0
1
Bit
Initial value
R/W
—
4fsc input is selected (Initial value)
2fsc input is selected
4/2fsc oscillator uses a crystal oscillator (Initial value)
4/2fsc uses a dedicated amplifier circuit for external clock signal input
The OSDV interrupt is disabled (Initial value)
The OSDV interrupt is enabled
[Clearing condition]
When 0 is written after reading 1 (Initial value)
[Setting condition]
When OSD detects the Vsync signal
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1109 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D213: OSD Format Register DFORM: OSD
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
1
4
1
—
1
—
57
— — DTMV LDREQ VACS
1
—
—
6
1
—
—
R/(W)*—
—
Writing:
0
1
Reading:
0
1
OSD display update timing control bit
0
1
:
:
:
Master slave RAM transfer state bit
Master slave RAM transfer state bit
0
1
After the LDREQ bit is written to 1, data is transferred from master RAM to slave RAM
regardless of the Vsync signal (OSDV). The OSD display is updated simultaneously
with register* rewriting.
Note: * When transferring data using this setting, do not have the OSD display data
(Initial value)
After the LDREQ bit is written to 1, data is transferred from master RAM to slave RAM
synchronously with the Vsync signal (OSDV). After rewriting the register, the OSD
display is updated synchronously with the Vsync signal (OSDV).
Note: * The registers and register bits whose settings are reflected in the OSD display are the
row registers (CLINE), vertical display position register (VPOS), horizontal display
position register (HPOS), screen control register (DCNTL) except bit 13, and the RGBC,
YCOC, and DOBC bits of the digital output specification register (DOUT).
Data is not being transferred from master RAM to slave RAM (Initial value)
Data is being transferred from master RAM to slave RAM, or is being
prepared for transfer. After transfer is completed, this bit is cleared to 0
Requests abort of data transfer from master RAM to slave RAM
Requests transfer of data from master RAM to slave RAM.
After transfer is completed, this bit is cleared to 0
The CPU did not access OSDRAM during data transfer (Initial value)
The CPU accessed OSDRAM during data transfer; the access is invalid
Bit
Initial value
R/W
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1110 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D800 to H'DAFF: Display Data RAM OSDRAM: OSD
8
*
9
*
R/W
10
*
R/W
11
*
12
*
R/W
*
R/W
1315
BON0 CR CG
CB
C8
*
R/W
BLNK
14
*
R/W
HT/CR
R/WR/W
BON1
Halftone/cursor display specification bit
DISPM HT/CR
0 0
1
1 0
1
Button specification bits
BPTNn BON1 BON0 Description
0 0 0
1
1 0
1
1 0 0
1
1 0
1
:
:
:
Character color specification bits
Character codes specification
CR CG CB Character Color (C.Video Output) Character Color (R, G, B Output)
NTSC PAL
0 0 0 Black Black Black
1 π ±π Blue
1 0 7π/4 ±7π/4 Green
1 3π/2 ±3π/2 Cyan
1 0 0 π/2 ±π/2 Red
1 3π/4 ±3π/4 Magenta
1 0 Same phase ±0 Yellow
1 White White White
RGBC HT/CR
0 0/1
1 0
1
Blinking specification bit
0
1
DOBC BLNK
0 0
1
1 0
1 (DOBC is bit 4 in DOUT)
(RGBC is bit 6 in DOUT)
(DISPM is bit 14 in DCNTL)
Bit
Initial value
R/W
0
*
1
*
R/W
2
*
R/W
3
*
4
*
R/W
*
R/W
57
C4 C3 C2
C1
C0
*
R/W
C7
6
*
R/W
C6
R/WR/W
C5
:
:
:
Character Codes
Bit
Initial value
R/W
Blinking is off
Blinking is on
Digital Output (YCO, R, G, B)
Blinking is off
Blinking is off
Blinking is off
Blinking is on
C.Video Output
Halftone is off
Halftone is on
Cursor display is off
Cursor display is on
Digital Output (R, G, B)
Character is output (halftone/cursor specification invalid)
Character is output (halftone/cursor display off)
Cursor color data specified by the cursor color specification bit of row register is output
No button is displayed
Button is displayed (start)
Button is displayed (end)
Button is displayed (one character)
No button is displayed
Button is displayed (start)
Button is displayed (end)
Button is displayed (one character)
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1111 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D220: Slice Even-Field Mode Register SEVFD: Data Slicer
8
0
9
0
R/W
10
0
R/W
11
0
12
0
R/W
1
—
1315
STBE4 STBE3 STBE2 STBE1 STBE0
0
R/W
EVNIE
14
0
R/(W)*
EVNIF
R/WR/W
—
Even field slice completion interrupt enable flag
0
1
Even field slice interrupt completion flag
0
1
:
:
:
Start bit detection starting position bits
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
57
DLYE4 DLYE3 DLYE2 DLYE1 DLYE0
0
R/W
SLVLE2
6
0
R/W
SLVLE1
R/WR/W
SLVLE0
Slice Level Setting Bits
SLVLE2 SLVLE1 SLVLE0 Description
0 0 0
1
1 0
1
1 0 0
1
1 0
1
:
:
:
Even field data sampling clock delay time
Slice level is 0 IRE (Initial value)
Slice level is 5 IRE
Slice level is 15 IRE
Slice level is 20 IRE
Slice level is 25 IRE
Slice level is 35 IRE
Slice level is 40 IRE
Must not be specified
Note: All slice levels are with reference to the pedestal level (5 IRE).
Slice level values are provided for reference.
Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
Bit
Initial value
R/W
Bit
Initial value
R/W
Disables even-field slice completion interrupt (Initial value)
Enables even-field slice completion interrupt
[Clearing condition]
When 0 is written after reading 1 (Initial value)
[Setting condition]
When data slicing is completed for all specified lines of even field
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1112 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D222: Slice Odd-Field Mode Register SODFD: Data Slicer
8
0
9
0
R/W
10
0
R/W
11
0
12
0
R/W
1
—
1315
STBO4 STBO3 STBO2 STBO1 STBO0
0
R/W
ODDIE
14
0
R/(W)*
ODDIF
R/WR/W
—
0
1
0
1
:
:
:
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
57
DLYO4 DLYO3 DLYO2 DLYO1 DLYO0
0
R/W
SLVLO2
6
0
R/W
SLVLO1
R/WR/W
SLVLO0
:
:
:
ODD field data sampling clock delay time
Start bit detection starting position bits
Slice level setting bits
SLVLO2 SLVLO1 SLVLO0 Description
0 0 0
1
1 0
1
1 0 0
1
1 0
1
Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
Note: All slice levels are with reference to the pedestal level (5 IRE).
Slice level values are provided for reference.
Bit
Initial value
R/W
Slice level is 0 IRE (Initial value)
Slice level is 5 IRE
Slice level is 15 IRE
Slice level is 20 IRE
Slice level is 25 IRE
Slice level is 35 IRE
Slice level is 40 IRE
Must not be specified
Odd field slice completion interrupt enable flag
Odd field slice interrupt completion flag
Disables odd-field slice completion interrupt (Initial value)
Enables odd-field slice completion interrupt
[Clearing condition]
When 0 is written after reading 1 (Initial value)
[Setting condition]
When data slicing is completed for all specified lines of odd field
Bit
Initial value
R/W
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1113 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D224 to H'D227: Slice Line Setting Registers 1 to 4 SLINE1 to SLINE4: Data Slicer
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
1
—
57
SLINEn4*SLINEn3*SLINEn2*SLINEn1*SLINEn0*
0
R/W
SENBLn*
6
0
R/W
SFLDn*
R/WR/W
—
Field setting bit
0
1
Slice enable bit
0
1
:
:
:
Slice line setting bit
Bit
Initial value
R/W
[When read] Disables data slice operation for the specified lines
[Clearing condition]
When the data slice operation for the line has been completed
Enables data slice operation for the specified lines
Even field (Initial value)
Odd field
Note: n = 1 to 4 (H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S: n=1 and 0.)
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1114 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D228 to H'D22B: Slice Detection Registers 1 to 4 SDTCT1 to SDTCT4: Data Slicer
0
0
1
0
R
2
0
R
3
0
4
1
—
0
R
57
—CRICn3*CRICn2*CRICn1*CRICn0*
0
R
CRDFn*
6
0
R
SBDFn*
RR
ENDFn*
Data end detection flag
0
1
Start bit detection flag
0
1
Clock run-in detection flag
0
1
:
:
:
Clock run-in count value
Bit
Initial value
R/W
Clock run-in not detected for line for data slicing (Initial value)
Clock run-in detected for line for data slicing
Start bit not detected for line for data slicing (Initial value)
Start bit detected for line for data slicing
Data end not detected for line for data slicing (Initial value)
Data end detected for line for data slicing
Note: n = 1 to 4 (H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S: n=1 and 0.)
H'D22C to H'D232: Slice Data Registers 1 to 4 SDATA1 to SDATA4: Data Slicer
15
*
Note: * Undetermined
R
14
*
R
13
*
R
12
*
R
11
*
R
10
*
R
9
*
R
8
*
R
7
*
R
6
*
R
5
*
R
4
*
R
3
*
R
2
*
R
1
*
R
0
*
R
:
:
:
Bit
Initial value
R/W
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1115 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D240: Sync Separation Input Mode Register SEPIMR: Sync Separator
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
456
0
7
R/WR/W
VSELCCMPV1
R/WR/W
CCMPV0
R/W
CCMPSL*
R/W
SYNCT DLPFON —FRQSEL
000
Digital LPF control
0
1
Reference clock frequency select
0
1
Vsync input signal select
0
1
Csync separation comparator input select
Note: * When this bit is set to 1, it must be set to 1 by the instruction following the module stop
release instruction in the interrupt-prohibited state.
ORC #B'10000000, CCR Interrupt prohibited
BCLR.B #1, @MSTPCRH Module stop release
BSET.B #5, @SEPIMR Sets CCMPSL bit to 1
ANDC #B'01111111, CCR Interrupt permitted
0
1
0 (Initial value)
1
Sync signal polarity select
:
:
:
Csync separation comparator slicing voltage select
Description
0
0
CCMPV1 CCMPV0
1
0
1
1
Bit
Initial value
R/W
The Csync slicing level is 10 IRE (Initial value)
The Csync slicing level is 5 IRE
The Csync slicing level is 15 IRE
The Csync slicing level is 20 IRE
The Csync separation comparator input is selected
The Csync/Hsync terminal operates as an output terminal (Initial value)
The Csync Schmitt input is selected
The Csync/Hsync terminal operates as an input terminal
Vsync Schmitt input (Initial value)
Csync Schmitt input
The digital LPF does not operate (Initial value)
The digital LPF operates
576 times the horizontal sync frequency (Initial value)
448 times the horizontal sync frequency
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1116 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D241: Sync Separation Control Register SEPCR: Sync Separator
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
456
0
7
RR/W
HCKSEL
R/W
AFCVIE
R/(W)*
AFCVIF
R/W
VCKSL
R/W
VCMPON HHKON HHKON2 FLD
00
0
HHK forcibly turned on
0
1
Field detection flag
0
1
Internal csync generator clock source select
0
1
V complement function control
0
1
V complement and mask counter clock source select
0
1
:
:
:
External Vsync interrupt flag
0
1
External Vsync interrupt enable
0
1
Bit
Initial value
R/W
Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag
The external Vsync interrupt is disabled (Initial value)
The external Vsync interrupt is enabled
[Clearing condition]
1 is read, then 0 is written (Initial value)
[Setting condition]
The V complement and mask counter detects the external Vsync signal (AFCV signal)
Double the frequency of the horizontal sync signal (AFCH signal) for the AFC (Initial value)
Double the frequency of the horizontal sync signal (OSCH signal) for the
H complement and mask counter
The V complement function is disabled (Initial value)
The V complement function is enabled
4/2 fsc clock (Initial value)
AFC reference clock
The HHK is not operated when complementary
pulses are interpolated three successive times
(Initial value)
The HHK is forcibly operated when complementary
pulses are interpolated three successive times
Even field (Initial value)
Odd field
HHK forcibly turned on 2
0
1
The HHK is not forcibly operated during the V
blanking period (Initial value)
The HHK is forcibly operated during the V blanking
period
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1117 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D242: Sync Separation AFC Control Register SEPACR: Sync Separator
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
456
0
7
R/W—
—
R/W
NDETIE
R/(W)*
NDETIF
R/W
HSEL
—
— ARST DOTCKSL DSL32B
01
0
AFC reset control
0
1
Reference Hsync signal select
0
1
:
:
:
Noise detection interrupt flag
0
1
Noise detection interrupt enable
0
1
Bit
Initial value
R/W
Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
The noise detection interrupt is disabled (Initial value)
The noise detection interrupt is enabled
[Clearing condition]
1 is read, then 0 is written (Initial value)
[Setting condition]
The noise detection counter value matches the noise detection level register value
The external Hsync signal is selected (Initial value)
The internally generated Hsync signal is selected
The reset function is disabled (Initial value)
The reset function is enabled
DSL32B bit
0
1
16-bit mode is set for the slice operation (Initial value)
32-bit mode is set for the slice operation
DOTCKSL Bit
0
1
The reference clock of the AFC circuit is selected for the dot clock.
(Initial value)
The 4/2 fsc clock is selected for the dot clock.
H'D243: Horizontal Sync Signal Threshold Register HVTHR: Sync Separator
012
HVTH2
3
HVTH3
0
4
HVTH4
WWWW
5
—
—
6
—
—
7
—
—
HVTH1
0
W
HVTH0
111000
Horizontal sync signal threshold
:
:
:
Bit
Initial value
R/W
Note: Refer to section 27.2.4, Horizontal Sync Signal Threshold Register (HVTHR)
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1118 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D244: Vertical Sync Signal Threshold Register VVTHR: Sync Separator
012
VVTH2
3
VVTH3
0
4
VVTH4
WWWWWWW
5
VVTH5
6
VVTH6
7
VVTH7 VVTH1
0
W
VVTH0
000000
:
:
:
Vertical sync signal threshold
Note: Refer to section 27.2.5, Vertical Sync Signal Threshold Register (VVTHR)
Bit
Initial value
R/W
H'D245: Field Detection Window Register FWIDR: Sync Separator
012
FWID2
3
FWID3
0
4
—
—WWW
5
—
—
6
—
—
7
—
—
FWID1
0
W
FWID0
111100
:
:
:
Field detection window timing
Note: Refer to section 27.2.6, Field Detection Window Register (FWIDR)
Bit
Initial value
R/W
H'D246: H Complement and Mask Timing Register HCMMR: Sync Separator
1 032547
0
W
6
0
W
9
0
W
8
0
W
11
0
W
10
0
W
0
W
0
W
0
W
HC8 HC7 HC6 HC5 HC4 HC3 HC2 HC1 HC0 HM6
W
HM5
W
HM4
W
HM3
W
HM2
W
HM1
W
HM0
0
W
12131415
00000
0
:
:
:
HHK clearing timing
Complementary pulse
generation timing
Note: Refer to section 27.2.7, H Complement and Mask Timing Register (HCMMR)
Bit
Initial value
R/W
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1119 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D248: Noise Detection Counter NDETC: Sync Separator
012
NC2
3
NC3
0
4
NC4
RRRRRRR
5
NC5
6
NC6
7
NC7 NC1
0
R
NC0
000000
:
:
:
Note: Refer to section 27.2.8, Noise Detection Counter (NDETC)
Bit
Initial value
R/W
H'D248: Noise Detection Level Register NDETR: Sync Separator
012
NR2
3
NR3
0
4
NR4
WWWWWWW
5
NR5
6
NR6
7
NR7 NR1
0
W
NR0
000000
Noise detection level
:
:
:
Note: Refer to section 27.2.9, Noise Detection Level Register (NDETR)
Bit
Initial value
R/W
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1120 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D249: Data Slicer Detection Window Register DDETWR: Sync Separator
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
456
0
7
WW
CRWDE1
W
SRWDE1
W
SRWDE0
W
SRWDS1
W
SRWDS0 CRWDE0 CRWDS1 CRWDS0
000
:
:
:
Start bit detection window signal falling timing setting
Start bit detection window signal rising timing setting
Clock run-in detection window signal falling timing setting
Clock run-in detection window signal rising timing setting
Description
0
0
SRWDE1 SRWDE0
1
0
1
1
Description
0
0
SRWDS1 SRWDS0
1
0
1
1
Description
0
0
CRWDE1 CRWDE0
1
0
1
1
Description
0
0
CRWDS1 CRWDS0
1
0
1
1
Bit
Initial value
R/W
The detection ends about 29.5 μs after the slicer start point (Initial value)
The detection ends about 29.0 μs after the slicer start point
The detection ends about 30.0 μs after the slicer start point
This setting must not be used
The detection ends about 23.5 μs after the slicer start point (Initial value)
The detection ends about 23.0 μs after the slicer start point
The detection ends about 24.0 μs after the slicer start point
This setting must not be used
The detection starts about 23.5 μs after the slicer start point (Initial value)
The detection starts about 23.0 μs after the slicer start point
The detection starts about 24.0 μs after the slicer start point
This setting must not be used
The detection starts about 10.5 μs after the slicer start point (Initial value)
The detection starts about 10.0 μs after the slicer start point
The detection starts about 11.0 μs after the slicer start point
This setting must not be used
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1121 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'D24A: Internal Sync Frequency Register INFRQR: Sync Separator
0
0
1
0
—
2
0
—
3
0
456
0
7
——
—
W
VFS2
W
VFS1
W
HFS
—
————
000
:
:
:
Hsync frequency selection bit
Description
PAL
HFS
Bit 5
fsc/283.75 (Initial value)
fsc/283.5
MPAL
fsc/227.25 (Initial value)
fsc/227.5
NPAL
fsc/229.25 (Initial value)
fsc/229.5
0
1
Vsync frequency selection bit
VFS2
Bit 7
0
Description
PAL
VFS1
Bit 6
fh/313 (Initial value)
fh/314
MPAL
fh/263 (Initial value)
fh/266
NPAL
fh/313 (Initial value)
fh/314
0
1
fh/310 fh/262 fh/310
10
fh/312 fh/264 fh/312
1
Bit
Initial value
R/W
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1122 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'FFB0 to H'FFB2: Trap Address Register 0 TAR0: ATC
H'FFB3 to H'FFB5: Trap Address Register 1 TAR1: ATC
H'FFB6 to H'FFB8: Trap Address Register 2 TAR2: ATC
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
34567
R/W
A18 A17 A16
00
R/W
0
R/W R/W
A23 A22 A21
00
R/W R/W
A20 A19
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
34567
R/W
A10 A9 A8
00
R/W
0
R/W R/W
A15 A14 A13
00
R/W R/W
A12 A11
01
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
34567
A2 A1
00
R/W
0
R/W R/W
A7 A6 A5
00
R/W R/W
A4 A3
0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
—
—
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1123 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'FFB9: Address Trap Control Register ATCR: ATC
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
1
4
1
5
1
6
1
7
R/W
TRC2 TRC1 TRC0
1
Trap control 0
0 Address trap function 0 is
disabled (Initial value)
1 Address trap function 0 is
enabled
Trap control 1
0 Address trap function 1 is
disabled (Initial value)
1 Address trap function 1 is
enabled
Trap control 2
0 Address trap function 2 is
disabled (Initial value)
1 Address trap function 2 is
enabled
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
———— —
———— —
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1124 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'FFBA: Timer Mode Register A TMA: Timer A
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
1
5
1
6
0
7
R/WR/WR/W
TMAIE
0
R/(W)*
TMAOV TMA3 TMA2 TMA1 TMA0
Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
[Clearing condition] (Initial value)
When 0 is written to TMAOV after reading
TMAOV = 1
[Setting condition]
When TCA overflows
0
1
Timer A overflow flag
Interrupt request by Timer A (TMAI) is disabled (Initial value)
Interrupt request by Timer A (TMAI) is enabled
0
1
Timer A interrupt enable bit
Timer A clock source is PSS (Initial value)
Timer A clock source is PSW
0
1
Clock source, prescaler select bit
PSS, φ/16384 (Initial value)
TMA1 TMA0
TMA2
Prescaler frequency division rate (interval timer)
or overflow frequency (time-base) Operation mode
PSS, φ/8192
PSS, φ/4096
PSS, φ/1024
0
TMA3
PSS, φ/512
PSS, φ/256
PSS, φ/64
PSS, φ/16
1 s
Interval timer
mode
Clock time
base mode
0.5 s
0.25 s
0.03125 s
0
1
0
1
1
Clear PSW and TCA to H'00
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Clock select bits
Note: φ = f osc
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
——
——
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1125 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'FFBB: Timer Counter A TCA: TimerA
0
0
1
0
R
2
0
R
3
0
4567
RR
TCA3
0
R
TCA4
0
R
TCA5
0
R
TCA6
0
R
TCA7 TCA2 TCA1 TCA0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'FFBC: Watchdog Timer Control/Status Register WTCSR: WDT
7
OVF
0
R/(W)*
6
WT/IT
0
R/W
5
TME
0
R/W
4
—
0
—
3
RST/NMI
0
R/W
0
CKS0
0
R/W
2
CKS2
0
R/W
1
CKS1
0
R/W
Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
Note: * When OVF is polled and the interval timer interrupt is disabled,
OVF=1 must be read at least twice.
Overflow flag
WTCNT is initialized to H'00 and halted (Initial value)
WTCNT counts
0
1
NMI interrupt request is generated (Initial value)
Internal reset request is generated
0
1
Timer mode select bit
Timer enable bit
Reset or NMI
Interval timer mode: Sends the CPU an interval timer interrupt
request (WOVI) when WTCNT overflows (Initial value)
Watchdog timer mode: Sends the CPU a reset or NMI interrupt
request when WTCNT overflows
0
1
[Clearing conditions]
(1) Write 0 in the TME bit (Initial value)
(2) Read WTCSR when OVF = 1*, then write 0 in OVF
[Setting condition]
When WTCNT overflows (changes from H'FF to H'00)
(When internal reset request generation is selected in watchdog timer mode,
OVF is cleared automatically by the internal reset.)
0
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1126 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'FFBD: Watchdog Timer Counter WTCNT: WDT
7
0
R/W
6
0
R/W
5
0
R/W
4
0
R/W
3
0
R/W
0
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
1
0
R/W
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'FFC0: Port Data Register 0 PDR0: I/O Port
01
R
2
R
34
RR
57
PDR04 PDR03 PDR02 PDR01 PDR00
R
PDR07
RRR
PDR06 PDR05
6
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
————————
H'FFC1: Port Data Register 1 PDR1: I/O Port
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
0
7
0
R/W R/WR/WR/W
6
PDR14 PDR13 PDR12 PDR11 PDR10PDR17 PDR16 PDR15
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'FFC2: Port Data Register 2 PDR2: I/O Port
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
0
7
0
R/W R/WR/WR/W
6
PDR24 PDR23 PDR22 PDR21 PDR20PDR27 PDR26 PDR25
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'FFC3: Port Data Register 3 PDR3: I/O Port
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
0
7
0
R/W R/WR/WR/W
6
PDR34 PDR33 PDR32 PDR31 PDR30PDR37 PDR36 PDR35
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1127 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'FFC4: Port Data Register 4 PDR4: I/O Port
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
0
7
0
R/W R/WR/WR/W
6
PDR44 PDR43 PDR42 PDR41 PDR40PDR47 PDR46 PDR45
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'FFC6: Port Data Register 6 PDR6: I/O Port
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
56
0
7
PDR64 PDR63 PDR62 PDR61 PDR60
0
R/W
PDR67
R/WR/WR/W
PDR66 PDR65
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'FFC7: Port Data Register 7 PDR7: I/O Port
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
56
0
7
PDR74 PDR73 PDR72 PDR71 PDR70
0
R/W
PDR77
R/WR/WR/W
PDR76 PDR75
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'FFC8: Port Data Register 8 PDR8: I/O Port
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
56
0
7
PDR84 PDR83 PDR82 PDR81 PDR80
0
R/W
PDR87
R/WR/WR/W
PDR86 PDR85
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1128 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'FFCD: Port Mode Register 0 PMR0: I/O Port
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
0
7
0
R/W R/WR/WR/W
6
PMR04 PMR03 PMR02 PMR01 PMR00PMR07 PMR06 PMR05
P07/AN7 to P00/AN0 pin switching
P0n/ANn pin functions as P0n input port (initial value)
P0n/ANn pin functions as ANn input port
0
1
Note: n = 7 to 0
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'FFCE: Port Mode Register 1 PMR1: I/O Port
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
0
7
0
R/W R/WR/WR/W
6
PMR14 PMR13 PMR12 PMR11 PMR10PMR17 PMR16 PMR15
P17/TMOW pin functions as P17 I/O port (initial value)
P17/TMOW pin functions as TMOW output port
0
1
P17/TMOW pin function select bit
P1n/IRQn pin functions as P1n I/O port (Initial value)
P1n/IRQn pin functions as IRQn input port
0
1
P15/IRQ5 to P10/IRQ0 pin function select bits
Note: n = 5 to 0
P16/IC pin functions as P16 I/O port (Initial value)
P16/IC pin functions as IC input port
0
1
P16/IC pin function select bit
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1129 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'FFD0: Port Mode Register 3 PMR3: I/O Port
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
0
7
0
R/W R/WR/WR/W
6
PMR34 PMR33 PMR32 PMR31 PMR30PMR37 PMR36 PMR35
P3n/PWMm pin functions as P3n I/O port (Initial value)
P3n/PWMm pin functions as PWMm output port
0
1
P36/BUZZ pin functions as P36 I/O port (Initial value)
P36/BUZZ pin functions as BUZZ output port
0
1
P37/TMO pin functions as P37 I/O port (Initial value)
P37/TMO pin functions as TMO output port
0
1
P37/TMO pin function select bit
Notes: If the TMO pin is used for remote control sending, a careless timer output
pulse may be output when the remote control mode is set after the output
has been switched to the TMO output. Perform the switching and setting in
the following order.
[1] Set the remote control mode.
[2] Set the TMJ-1 and 2 counter data of the timer J.
[3] Switch the P37/TMO pin to the TMO output pin.
[4] Set the ST bit to 1.
P36/BUZZ pin function select bit
P35/PWM3 to P32/PWM0 pin function select bit
P31/SV2 pin functions as P31 I/O port (Initial value)
P31/SV2 pin functions as SV2 output port
0
1
P31/SV2 pin function select bit
Notes: The H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S do not have PWM3 and PWM2 pin functions.
n = 5 to 2, m = 3 to 0
P30/SV1 pin functions as P30 I/O port (Initial value)
P30/SV1 pin functions as SV1 output port
0
1
P30/SV1 pin function select bit
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'FFD1: Port Control Register 1 PCR1: I/O Port
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
5
0
7
0
W WWW
6
PCR14 PCR13 PCR12 PCR11 PCR10PCR17 PCR16 PCR15
P1n pin functions as input port (Initial value)
P1n pin functions as output port
0
1
Note: n = 7 to 0
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1130 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'FFD2: Port Control Register 2 PCR2: I/O Port
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
5
0
7
0
W WWW
6
PCR24 PCR23 PCR22 PCR21 PCR20PCR27 PCR26 PCR25
P2n pin functions as input port (Initial value)
P2n pin functions as output port
0
1
Note: n = 7 to 0
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
H'FFD3: Port Control Register 3 PCR3: I/O Port
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
5
0
7
0
W WWW
6
PCR34 PCR33 PCR32 PCR31 PCR30PCR37 PCR36 PCR35
P3n pin functions as input port (Initial value)
P3n pin functions as output port
0
1
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
Note: n = 7 to 0
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1131 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'FFD4: Port Control Register 4 PCR4: I/O Port
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
5
0
7
0
W WWW
6
PCR44 PCR43 PCR42 PCR41 PCR40PCR47 PCR46 PCR45
P4n pin functions as input port (Initial value)
P4n pin functions as output port
0
1
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
Note: n = 7 to 0
H'FFD6: Port Control Register 6 PCR6: I/O Port
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
56
0
7
PCR64 PCR63 PCR62 PCR61 PCR60
0
W
PCR67
WWW
PCR66 PCR65
00 P6n/RPn pin functions as P6n general purpose input port (Initial value)
PCR6nPMR6n
1 P6n/RPn pin functions as P6n general purpose output port
*1 P6n/RPn pin functions as RPn realtime output port
Description
Legend: * Don't care.
Note: n = 7 to 0
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1132 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'FFD7: Port Control Register 7 PCR7: I/O Port
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
56
0
7
PCR74 PCR73 PCR72 PCR71 PCR70
0
W
PCR77
WWW
PCR76 PCR75
P7n pin functions as input port (Initial value)
P7n pin functions as output port
0
1
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
Note: n = 7 to 0
H'FFD8: Port Control Register 8 PCR8: I/O Port
0
0
1
0
W
2
0
W
3
0
4
0
W
0
W
56
0
7
PCR84 PCR83 PCR82 PCR81 PCR80
0
W
PCR87
WWW
PCR86 PCR85
P8n pin functions as input port (Initial value)
P8n pin functions as output port
0
1
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
Note: n = 7 to 0
H'FFD9: Port Mode Register A PMRA: I/O Port
0
1
1
1
—
2
1
—
3
1
4
1
—
1
—
57
—————
0
R/W
PMRA7
6
0
R/W
PMRA6
——
—
Timer B event input edge switching
0 Timer B event input falling edge is detected. (Initial value)
1 Timer B event input rising edge is detected.
P67/RP7/TMBI pin switching
0 P67/RP7/TMBI pin functions as a P67/RP7 I/O pin. (Initial value)
1 P67/RP7/TMBI pin functions as a TMBI output pin.
:
:
:
Bit
Initial value
R/W
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1133 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'FFDA: Port Mode Register B PMRB: I/O Port
0
1
1
1
—
2
1
—
3
1
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
57
PMRB4 — — — —
0
R/W
PMRB7
6
0
R/W
PMRB6
——
PMRB5
P77/RPB to P74/RPB pin switching
0 P7n/RPm pin functions as a P7n I/O pin. (Initial value)
1 P7n/RPm pin functions as a RPm output pin.
:
:
:
Bit
Initial value
R/W
Note: n = 7 to 4, m = B, A, 9, 8
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1134 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'FFDB: Port Mode Register 4: PMR4: I/O Port
0
0
1
1
2
1
3
1
4
11
5
1
7
1
R/W
6
PMR40
P40/PWM14 pin functions as P40 I/O port (Initial value)
P40/PWM14 pin functions as PWM14 output port
0
1
P40/PWM14 pin function select bit
Note: The H8S/2197S and H8S/2196S do not have PWM14 pin function.
P47/RPTRG pin functions as P47 I/O port (Initial value)
P47/RPTRG pin functions as RPTRG I/O pin
0
1
P47/RPTRG pin function select bit
PMR47 — — — — — —
R/W———— ——
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
H'FFDD: Port Mode Register 6 PMR6: I/O Port
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
56
0
7
PMR64 PMR63 PMR62 PMR61 PMR60
0
R/W
PMR67
R/WR/WR/W
PMR66 PMR65
P6n/RPn pin functions as P6n I/O port (Initial value)
P6n/RPn pin functions as RPn output port
0
1
P67/RP7 to P60/RP0 pin function select bit
Note: n = 7 to 0
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
H'FFDE: Port Mode Register 7 PMR7: I/O Port
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
56
0
7
PMR74 PMR73 PMR72 PMR71 PMR70
0
R/W
PMR77
R/WR/WR/W
PMR76 PMR75
P77/PPG7 to P70/PPG0 pin function select bit
P7n/PPGn pin functions as P7n I/O port (Initial value)
P7n/PPGn pin functions as PPGn output port
0
1
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
Note: n = 7 to 0
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1135 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'FFDF: Port Mode Register 8 PMR8: I/O Port
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
57
PMR84 PMR83 PMR82 PMR81 PMR80
0
R/W
PMR87
6
0
R/W
PMR86
R/WR/W
PMR85
P81/EXCAP pin function select bit
0 P81/EXCAP pin functions as P81 I/O pin (Initial value)
1 P81/EXCAP pin functions as EXCAP input pin
P80/YCO pin function select bit
0 P80/YCO pin functions as P80 I/O pin (Initial value)
1 P80/YCO pin functions as YCO input pin
P83/C.Rotary pin function select bit
0 P83/C.Rotary pin functions as P83 I/O pin (Initial value)
1 P83/C.Rotary pin functions as C.Rotary output pin
P82/EXCTL pin function select bit
0 P82/EXCTL pin functions as P82 I/O pin (Initial value)
1 P82/EXCTL pin functions as EXCTL input pin
P84/H.Amp.SW pin function select bit
0 P84/H.Amp SW pin functions as P84 I/O pin (Initial value)
1 P84/H.Amp SW pin functions as H.Amp SW output pin
P85/COMP pin function select bit
0 P85/COMP pin functions as P85 I/O pin (Initial value)
1 P85/COMP pin functions as COMP input pin
P86/EXTTRG pin function select bit
0 P86/EXTTRG pin functions as P86 I/O pin (Initial value)
1 P86/EXTTRG pin functions as EXTTRG input pin
P87/DPG pin function select bit
0 P87/DPG pin functions as P87 I/O pin (Initial value)
(Drum control signals are input as an overlapped signal)
1 P87/DPG pin functions as a DPG input pin
(Drum control signals are input as separate signal)
:
:
:
Bit
Initial value
R/W
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1136 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'FFE0: Port Mode Register C PMRC: I/O Port
0
1
1
0
R/W
2
1
—
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
567
PMRC4 PMRC3
—
PMRC1
—
1
—
1
—
——
—R/W
PMRC5
P81/YBO pin function select bit
0 P81/YBO pin functions as P81 I/O port (Initial value)
1 P81/YBO pin functions as YBO output pin
P83/R pin function select bit
0 P83/R pin functions as P83 I/O port (Initial value)
1 P83/R pin functions as R output pin
P84/B pin function select bit
0 P84/G pin functions as P84 I/O port (Initial value)
1 P84/G pin functions as G output pin
P85/B pin function select bit
0 P85/B pin functions as P85 I/O port (Initial value)
1 P85/B pin functions as B output pin
:
:
:
Bit
Initial value
R/W
H'FFE1: Pull-Up MOS Select Register 1 PUR1: I/O Port
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
0
7
0
R/W R/WR/WR/W
6
PUR14 PUR13 PUR12 PUR11 PUR10PUR17 PUR16 PUR15
P1n pin has no pull-up MOS transistor (Initial value)
P1n pin has pull-up MOS transistor
0
1
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
Note: n = 7 to 0
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1137 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'FFE2: Pull-Up MOS Select Register 2 PUR2: I/O Port
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
0
7
0
R/W R/WR/WR/W
6
PUR24 PUR23 PUR22 PUR21 PUR20PUR27 PUR26 PUR25
P2n pin has no pull-up MOS transistor (Initial value)
P2n pin has pull-up MOS transistor
0
1
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
Note: n = 7 to 0
H'FFE3: Pull-Up MOS Select Register 3 PUR3: I/O Port
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
0
7
0
R/W R/WR/WR/W
6
PUR34 PUR33 PUR32 PUR31 PUR30PUR37 PUR36 PUR35
P3n pin has no pull-up MOS transistor (Initial value)
P3n pin has pull-up MOS transistor
0
1
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
Note: n = 7 to 0
H'FFE4: Realtime Output Trigger Edge Select Register RTPEGR: I/O Port
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
1
3
1
4
11
56
1
7
RTPEGR1 RTPEGR0
1
R/W
00 Trigger input is disabled (Initial value)
RTPEGR0RTPEGR1
1 Rising edge of trigger input is selected
0
1 Rising and falling edges of trigger input is selected
1Falling edge of trigger input is selected
Realtime output trigger edge select bit
Description
——————
——————
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1138 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'FFE5: Realtime Output Trigger Select Register 1 RTPSR1: I/O Port
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
56
0
7
RTPSR14 RTPSR13 RTPSR12 RTPSR11 RTPSR10
0
R/W
RTPSR17
R/WR/WR/W
RTPSR16 RTPSR15
External trigger (RPTRG pin) input is selected (Initial value)
Internal triggfer (HSW) input is selected
0
1
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
Note: n = 7 to 0
H'FFE6: Realtime Output Trigger Select Register 2 RTPSR2: I/O Port
0
1
1
1
—
2
1
—
3
1
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
57
RTPSR24 — — — —
0
R/W
RTPSR27
6
0
R/W
RTPSR26
——
RTPSR25
:
:
:
External trigger RPTRG input is selected (Initial value)
Internal trigger HSW input is selected
0
1
Bit
Initial value
R/W
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1139 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'FFE8: System Control Register SYSCR: System Control
0
1
1
0
2
0
3
1
4
0
R/W
5
0
6
0
7
RR
INTM1 INTM0 XRST
——
0
00 0 Interrupt is controlled by I bit
INTM0INTM1
Interrupt
control mode
Interrupt control
1 1 Interrupt is controlled by I and UI bits and ICR
01 2 Cannot be used in the H8S/2199 Group
1 3 Cannot be used in the H8S/2199 Group
Reset is generated by watchdog timer overflow
Reset is generaed by external reset input
0
1
Interrupt control mode
External reset
—— —
—— ———
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
H'FFE9: Mode Control Register MDCR: System Control
0
—*
1
0
2
0
3
0
4
0
5
0
6
0
7
R
MDS0
0
Note: * Determined by MD0 pin.
Mode select 0
————— ——
————— ——
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1140 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'FFEA: Standby Control Register SBYCR: System Control
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
0
6
0
7
R/WR/W
STS1
R/W
STS2
0
R/W
SSBY STS0 SCK1 SCK0
Transition to sleep mode after execution of SLEEP instruction in
high-speed mode or medium-speed mode
Transition to subsleep mode after execution of SLEEP
instruction in subactive mode
Transition to stadby mode, subactive mode, or watch mode after
execution of SLEEP instruction in high-speed mode or medium-
speed mode
Transition to watch mode or high-speed mode after execution of
SLEEP instruction in subactive mode
0
1
Software standby
System clock select
System clock select
00
SCK0SCK1
1
01
Bus master is in high-speed mode
Medium-speed clock is φ/16
Medium-speed clock is φ/32
1 Medium-speed clock is φ/64
00
STS1STS2
1
Standby timer select bits
0
STS0
1
0
Standby time
8192 states
16384 states
32768 states
01
1
0
1
65536 states
1*Reserved
131072 states
262144 states
Legend: * Don't care.
——
——
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1141 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'FFEB: Low-Power Control Register LPWRCR: System Control
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
3
0
4
0
5
0
6
0
7
R/WR/W
NESEL
R/W
LSON
0
R/W
DTON SA1 SA0
Low-speed on flag
Noise elimination sampling frequency select
Subactive mode clock select
Subactive mode clock select
Sampling at φ divided by 16
Sampling at φ divided by 4
0
1
• When a SLEEP instruction is executed in high-speed mode or medium-speed mode,
a transition is made to sleep mode, standby mode, or watch mode
• When a SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive mode, a transition is made to watch
mode, or directly to high-speed mode
• When a SLEEP instruction is executed in high-speed mode or medium-speed mode,
a transition is made directly to subactive mode, or a transition is made to sleep mode
or standby mode
• When a SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive mode, a transition is made
directily to high-speed mode, or a transition is made to subsleep mode
0
1
Direct transfer on flag
• When a SLEEP instruction is executed in high-speed mode or medium-speed mode,
a transition is made to sleep mode, standby mode, or watch mode
• When a SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive mode, a transition is made to watch
mode, or directly to high-speed mode
• After watch mode is cleared, a transition is made to high-speed mode
• When a SLEEP instruction is executed in high-speed mode a transition is made to
watch mode, subactive mode, sleep mode or standby mode.
• When a SLEEP instruction is executed in subactive mode, a transition is made to
subsleep mode or watch mode.
• After watch mode is cleared, a transition is made to subactive mode
0
1
Legend: * Don't care.
00
SA0SA1
10
*
1
Operating clock of CPU is φw/8
Operating clock of CPU is φw/4
Operating clock of CPU is φw/2
———
———
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1142 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'FFEC: Module Stop Control Register MSTPCRH: System Control
H'FFED: Module Stop Control Register MSTPCRL: System Control
7
1
MSTP15
R/W
MSTPCRH
6
1
MSTP14
R/W
5
1
MSTP13
R/W
4
1
MSTP12
R/W
3
1
MSTP11
R/W
2
1
MSTP10
R/W
1
1
MSTP9
R/W
0
1
MSTP8
R/W
7
1
MSTP7
R/W
6
1
MSTP6
R/W
5
1
MSTP5
R/W
4
1
MSTP4
R/W
3
1
MSTP3
R/W
2
1
MSTP2
R/W
1
1
MSTP1
R/W
0
1
MSTP0
R/W
MSTPCRL
Module stop
Module stop mode is released
Module stop mode is set (Initial value)
0
1
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
H'FFEE: Serial Timer Control Register STCR: System Control
7
—
0
—
6
IICX1
0
R/W
5
IICX0
0
R/W
4
—
0
—
3
FLSHE
0
R/W
2
OSROME
0
R/W
1
—
0
—
0
—
0
—
Flash memory control register enable bit
OSD ROM enable
I2C control
Used combined with CKS2 to CKS0 in ICMR0*
Note: * Refer to section 23.2.4, I2C Bus Mode Register (ICMR)
OSD ROM is accessed by OSD (Initial value)
OSD ROM is accessed by CPU
0
1
Flash memory control register is not selected (Initial value)
Flash memory control register is selected
0
1
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1143 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'FFF0: IRQ Edge Select Register IEGR: Interrupt Controller
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
00
7
R/WR/WR/W
IRQ4EG
R/W
IRQ5EG IRQ3EG IRQ2EG IRQ1EG IRQ0EG1 IRQ0EG2
0
6
IRQ0 pin detected dege select bits
Description
00 Interrupt request generaed at falling edge of IRQ0 pin input (Initial value)
IRQ0EG0IRQ0EG1
10 Interrupt request generaed at rising edge of IRQ0 pin input
*1 Interrupt request generaed at bath falling and rising edge of IRQ0 pin input
Legend: * Don't care.
IRQ5 to IRQ1 pins detected edge select bits
Interrupt request generated at falling edge of IRQn pin input (Initial value)
Interrupt request generated at rising edge of IRQn pin input
0
1
Note: n = 5 to 1
:Bit
Initial value :
—
—
R/W :
H'FFF1: IRQ Enable Register IENR: Interrupt Controller
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
5
00
7
R/WR/WR/W
IRQ5E IRQ4E IRQ3E IRQ2E IRQ1E IRQ0E
0
6
IRQ5 to IRQ0 enable bits
IRQn interrupt is disabled (Initial value)
IRQn interrupt is enabled
0
1
Note: n = 5 to 0
——
——
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1144 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'FFF2: IRQ Status Register IRQR: Interrupt Controller
0
0
1
0
R/(W)*
2
0
R/(W)*
3
0
4
0
R/(W)*
5
00
7
R/(W)*R/(W)*R/(W)*
IRQ5F IRQ4F IRQ3F IRQ2F IRQ1F IRQ0F
0
6
Note: * Only 0 can be written to clear the flag.
IRQ5 to IRQ0 flag
[Clearing conditions]
(1) Cleared by reading IRQnF set to 1, then writing 0 in IRQnF
(2) When IRQn interrupt exception handling is executed
[Setting conditions]
(1) When a falling edge occurs in IRQn input while falling edge detection is set (IRQnEG = 0)
(2) When a rising edge occurs in IRQn input while rising edge detection is set (IRQnEG = 0)
(3) When a falling or rising edge occurs in IRQ0 input while both-edge detection is set (IRQ0EG1 = 1)
0
1
——
——
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
(Initial value)
Note: n = 5 to 0
H'FFF3: Interrupt Control Register A ICRA: Interrupt Controller
H'FFF4: Interrupt Control Register B ICRB: Interrupt Controller
H'FFF5: Interrupt Control Register C ICRC: Interrupt Controller
H'FFF6: Interrupt Control Register D ICRD: Interrupt Controller
0
0
1
0
R/W
2
0
R/W
3
0
4
0
R/W
0
R/W
5
0
7
ICR4 ICR3 ICR2 ICR1 ICR0
0
R/W
ICR7
R/WR/WR/W
ICR6 ICR5
6
Interrupt control level
Corresponding interrupt source is control level 0 (non-priority) (Initial value)
Corresponding interrupt source is control level 1 (priority)
0
1
Note: n = 7 to 0
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1145 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'FFF8: Flash Memory Control Register 1 FLMCR1: FLASH ROM
7
FWE
—*
R
6
SWE1
0
R/W
5
ESU1
0
R/W
4
PSU1
0
R/W
3
EV1
0
R/W
0
P1
0
R/W
2
PV1
0
R/W
1
E1
0
R/W
Note: * Determined by the state of the FWE pin.
Program 1
Software write enable 1
Writes are disabled (Initial value)
Writes are enabled
[Setting condition] When FWE = 1
0
1
Flash write enable
When a low level is input to the FWE pin (hardware-protected state)
When a high level is input to the FWE pin
0
1
Erase-verify 1
Erase-verify mode cleared (Initial value)
Transition to erase-verify mode
[Setting condition] When FWE = 1 and SWE1 = 1
0
1
Program-verify 1
Program-verify mode cleared (Initial value)
Transition to program-verufy mode
[Setting condition] When FWE = 1 and SWE1 = 1
0
1
Program set-up 1
Program set-up cleared (Initial value)
Transition to program set-up status
[Setting condition] When FWE = 1 and SWE1 = 1
0
1
Erase set-up 1
Erase set-up cleared (Initial value)
Transition to erase set-up status
[Setting condition] When FWE = 1 and SWE1 = 1
0
1
Erase 1
Erase mode cleared (Initial value)
Transition to erase mode
[Setting condition] When FWE = 1,
SWE1 = 1, and ESU1 = 1
0
1
Program mode cleared (Initial value)
Transition to program mode
[Setting condition] When FWE = 1,
SWE1 = 1, and PSU1 = 1
0
1
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1146 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'FFF9: Flash Memory Control Register 2 FLMCR2: FLASH ROM
Flash memory error
Flash memory is operating normally
Flash memory program/erase protection (error protection) is disabled
[Clearing condition] Reset (Initial value)
An error has occurred during flash memeory programming/erasing
Flash memory program/erase protection (error protection) is enabled
[Setting condition] See section 7.6.3, Error Protection
0
1
7
FLER
0
R
6
SWE2
0
R/W
5
ESU2
0
R/W
4
PSU2
0
R/W
3
EV2
0
R/W
0
P2
0
R/W
2
PV2
0
R/W
1
E2
0
R/W
Program 2
Software write enable 2
Writes are disabled (Initial value)
Writes are enabled
[Setting condition] When FWE = 1
0
1
Erase-verify 2
Erase-verify mode cleared (Initial value)
Transition to erase-verify mode
[Setting condition] When FWE = 1 and SWE2 = 1
0
1
Program-verify 2
Program-verify mode cleared (Initial value)
Transition to program-verufy mode
[Setting condition] When FWE = 1 and SWE2 = 1
0
1
Program set-up 2
Program set-up cleared (Initial value)
Transition to program set-up status
[Setting condition] When FWE = 1 and SWE2 = 1
0
1
Erase set-up 2
Erase set-up cleared (Initial value)
Transition to erase set-up status
[Setting condition] When FWE = 1 and SWE2 = 1
0
1
Erase 2
Erase mode cleared (Initial value)
Transition to erase mode
[Setting condition] When FWE = 1,
SWE2 = 1, and ESU2 = 1
0
1
Program mode cleared (Initial value)
Transition to program mode
[Setting condition] When FWE = 1,
SWE2 = 1, and PSU2 = 1
0
1
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
Appendix B Internal I/O Registers
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1147 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
H'FFFA: Erase Block Select Register 1 EBR1: FLASH ROM
7
EB7
0
R/W
6
EB6
0
R/W
5
EB5
0
R/W
4
EB4
0
R/W
3
EB3
0
R/W
0
EB0
0
R/W
2
EB2
0
R/W
1
EB1
0
R/W
Bit :
Initial value :
R/W :
H'FFFB: Erase Block Select Register 2 EBR2: FLASH ROM
7
EB15
0
R/W
6
EB14
0
R/W
5
EB13
0
R/W
4
EB12
0
R/W
3
EB11
0
R/W
0
EB8
0
R/W
2
EB10
0
R/W
1
EB9
0
R/W
Bit
Initial value
R/W
:
:
:
Appendix C Pin Circuit Diagrams
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1148 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Appendix C Pin Circuit Diagrams
C.1 Pin Circuit Diagrams
Circuit diagrams for all pins except power supply pins are shown in table C.1.
Legend
OUT
G
IN OUT
G
IN
PMOS NMOS
Clocked gate
Signal transmitted
when G = 1
Signal transmitted
when G = 0
Table C.1 Pin Circuit Diagrams
Pin States
Pin Names
Circuit Diagram
At Reset
Sleep
Mode
Power-Down
Modes Other
than Sleep
Mode
P00/AN0 to
P07/AN7
PMR0n · RD
SCH3 to SCH0
Hi-Z Retained Hi-Z
AN8 to ANB
HCH1, HCH0
Hi-Z Retained Hi-Z
Appendix C Pin Circuit Diagrams
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1149 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Pin States
Pin Names
Circuit Diagram
At Reset
Sleep
Mode
Power-Down
Modes Other
than Sleep
Mode
Retained Pull-up MOS:
OFF
Subactive mode:
Functions
Other modes:
Hi-Z
P10/IRQ0 to
P15/IRQ5
P16/IC
PUR1n · PCR1n
RD
PDR1n
PMR1n
PCR1n
INT
INT = IRQ0 to IRQ5, I
C
Note: n = 0 to 6
PMR1n
Hi-Z
When IRQ0 to IRQ5 and IC
are selected, pin input
should be fixed high or low.
P17/TMOW
PUR17·
PCR17
TMOW
PDR17
PMR17
PCR17
RD
Hi-Z Retained Pull-up MOS:
OFF
Subactive mode:
Functions
Other modes:
Hi-Z
Retained Pull-up MOS:
OFF
Subactive mode:
Functions
Other modes:
Hi-Z
P20/SI1
PUR20· PCR20
RD
PDR20
RXE
PCR20
SI1
RXE
Legend:
RXE: Input control signal determined
by SCR and SMR
Hi-Z
When SI1 is selected, pin
input should be fixed high
or low.
Appendix C Pin Circuit Diagrams
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1150 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Pin States
Pin Names
Circuit Diagram
At Reset
Sleep
Mode
Power-Down
Modes Other
than Sleep
Mode
P21/SO1
PUR21· PCR21
SO1
PDR21
TXE
PCR21
RD
Legend:
TXE: Output control signal determined
by SCR and SMR
Hi-Z Retained Pull-up MOS:
OFF
Subactive mode:
Functions
Other modes:
Hi-Z
Retained Pull-up MOS:
OFF
Subactive mode:
Functions
Other modes:
Hi-Z
P22/SCK1
PUR22· PCR22
SCKO
SCKI
PDR22
CKOE
PCR22
RD
CKIE
Legend:
SCKO: Transfer clock output
SCKI: Transfer clock input
CKOE: Transfer clock output control signal
determined by SMR and SCR
CKIE: Transfer clock input control signal
determined by SMR and SCR
Hi-Z
When SCK1 is selected,
pin input should be fixed
high or low.
Appendix C Pin Circuit Diagrams
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1151 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Pin States
Pin Names
Circuit Diagram
At Reset
Sleep
Mode
Power-Down
Modes Other
than Sleep
Mode
Hi-Z Retained Pull-up MOS:
OFF
Subactive mode:
Functions
Other modes:
Hi-Z
P23/SDA1
P24/SCL1
P25/SDA0
P26/SCL0
PUR2n · PCR2
n
SDA/SCL
PDR2n
IICE
PCR2n
RD
IICE
SDA/SCL
Legend:
IICE = I
2
C bus enable signal
Note: n = 3 to 6
As SDA and SCL always function, a
high level or a low level should always
be input to the pins.
Hi-Z Retained Pull-up MOS:
OFF
Subactive mode:
Functions
Other modes:
Hi-Z
P27/SYNCI
PUR27 · PCR27
PDR27
RD
PCR27
SYNCI
As SYNCI always functions, a high
level or a low level should always be
input to the pin.
Appendix C Pin Circuit Diagrams
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1152 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Pin States
Pin Names
Circuit Diagram
At Reset
Sleep
Mode
Power-Down
Modes Other
than Sleep
Mode
P30/SVI
P31/SV2
P32/PWM0
P33/PWM1
P34/PWM2
P35/PWM3
P36/BUZZ
P37/TMO
PUR3n · PCR3n
OUT
PDR3n
PMR3n
PCR3n
RD
Legend:
OUT:
P30/SV1: Servo monitor output
P31/SV2: Servo monitor output
P32/PWM0: 8-bit PWM0 output
P33/PWM1: 8-bit PWM1 output
P34/PWM2: 8-bit PWM2 output
P35/PWM3: 8-bit PWM3 output
P36/BUZZ: Timer J buzzer output
P37/TMO: Timer J timer output
Note: n = 1 to 7
Hi-Z Retained Pull-up MOS:
OFF
Subactive mode:
Functions
Other modes:
Hi-Z
P40/PWM14
OUT
PDR40
PMR40
PCR40
OUT PWM14
RD
Hi-Z Retained Subactive mode:
Functions
Other modes:
Hi-Z
Appendix C Pin Circuit Diagrams
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1153 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Pin States
Pin Names
Circuit Diagram
At Reset
Sleep
Mode
Power-Down
Modes Other
than Sleep
Mode
Hi-Z Retained Subactive mode:
Functions
Other modes:
Hi-Z
P41/FTIA
P42/PTIB
P43/FTIC
P44/FTID
RD
PDR4n
PCR4n
Legend:
IN = FTIA, FTIB, FTIC, FTID
Note: n = 1 to 4
IN
As FTIA to FTID always function, a
high level or a low level should always
be input to the pins.
P45/FTOA
P46/PTOB
OUT
PDR4n
TOE
PCR4n
RD
Legend:
OUT:
P45/FTOA: Timer X1 output compare
output FTOA
P46/FTOB: Timer X1 output compare
output FTOB
TOE: Output control signal determined
by TOCR
Note: n = 5, 6
Hi-Z Retained Subactive mode:
Functions
Other modes:
Hi-Z
Appendix C Pin Circuit Diagrams
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1154 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Pin States
Pin Names
Circuit Diagram
At Reset
Sleep
Mode
Power-Down
Modes Other
than Sleep
Mode
Hi-Z Retained Subactive mode:
Functions
Other modes:
Hi-Z
P47/RPTRG
RD
PDR47
PMR47
PCR47
RPTRG
PMR47
When RPTRG is selected,
pin input should be fixed
high or low.
P60/RP0 to
P65/RP5
RD
Note: n = 0 to 5
PDRS6n
PCRS6n
PMR6n
Hi-Z Retained Subactive mode:
Functions
Other modes:
Hi-Z
Hi-Z Retained Subactive mode:
Functions
Other modes:
Hi-Z
P66/RP6/
ADTRG
RD
TRGE
Legend:
TRGE: A/D trigger input control signal
PDRS66
PCRS66
PMR66
ADTRG
When ADTRG is selected,
pin input should be fixed
high or low.
Appendix C Pin Circuit Diagrams
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1155 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Pin States
Pin Names
Circuit Diagram
At Reset
Sleep
Mode
Power-Down
Modes Other
than Sleep
Mode
Hi-Z Retained Subactive mode:
Functions
Other modes:
Hi-Z
P67/RP7/
TMBI
RD
PMRA7
PDRS67
PMRA7
PCRS67
PMR67
TMBI
When TMBI is selected, pin
input should be fixed high
or low.
P70/PPG0 to
P73/PPG3
PPGn
PDR7n
PMR7n
PCR7n
RD Note: n = 0 to 3
Hi-Z Retained Subactive mode:
Functions
Other modes:
Hi-Z
P74/PPG4/
RP8 to P77/
PPG7/RP8
PPGn
PDRS7n
PMRBn
PMR7n
PCRS7n
RD
Note: n = 4 to 7
Hi-Z Retained Subactive mode:
Functions
Other modes:
Hi-Z
Appendix C Pin Circuit Diagrams
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1156 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Pin States
Pin Names
Circuit Diagram
At Reset
Sleep
Mode
Power-Down
Modes Other
than Sleep
Mode
P80/YCO
YCO
PDR80
PMR80
PCR80
RD
Hi-Z Retained Subactive mode:
Functions
Other modes:
Hi-Z
P83/
C.Rotary/R
P84/H.Amp
SW/G
OUT1
Legend:
OUT1:
OUT2:
Note: n = 3, 4
C.Rotary, H.Amp SW
R, G
OUT2
PDR8n
PMRCn
PMR8n
PCR8n
RD
Hi-Z Retained Subactive mode:
Functions
Other modes:
Hi-Z
Hi-Z Retained Subactive mode:
Functions
Other modes:
Hi-Z
P82/EXCTL
P86/
EXTTRG
PMR8n
Legend:
IN = EXCTL, EXTTRG
Note: n = 2, 6
RD
PDR8n
PMR8n
PCR8n
IN
When EXCTL and
EXTTRG are selected, pin
input should be fixed high
or low.
Appendix C Pin Circuit Diagrams
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1157 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Pin States
Pin Names
Circuit Diagram
At Reset
Sleep
Mode
Power-Down
Modes Other
than Sleep
Mode
Hi-Z Retained Subactive mode:
Functions
Other modes:
Hi-Z
P81/EXCAP/
YBO
P85/COMP/
B
OUT
PDR8n
PMRCn
PMR8n
PCR8n
IN
RD
PMR8n
Note: n = 1, 5
IN = EXCAP, COMP
OUT = YBO, B
When EXCAP COMP is
selected, pin input should
be fixed high or low.
P87/DPG
RD
PDR87
PCR87
DPG
Hi-Z Retained Subactive mode:
Functions
Other modes:
Hi-Z
Csync
Module STOP
Pin input should be fixed high or low.
AUDIOFF
VIDEOFF
OUT
LPM
Hi-Z Hi-Z Hi-Z
CAPPWM
DRMPWM
Low
output
Low
output
Low output
Vpulse
LPM
3-level
controller
15kΩ
Typ
Note: Resistance values are
reference values.
15kΩ
Typ
Low
output
Low
output
Low output
Appendix C Pin Circuit Diagrams
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1158 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Pin States
Pin Names
Circuit Diagram
At Reset
Sleep
Mode
Power-Down
Modes Other
than Sleep
Mode
RES
RST
Low input (High) (High)
MD0
FWE
⎯
CFG
+
-
+
-
+
-
CFGCOMP
CFGCOMP
P250
REF
M250 S
R
F/F
O
stp
VREF
VREF
CFG
BIAS
Res+ModuleSTOP
⎯ ⎯ ⎯
DFG
DPG
RD ·
PCRn
PDRn
DFG
DPG
PMRn
PCRn
DPG SW
DPG SW
Pes+LPM
DFG
DPG
Hi-Z ⎯ Hi-Z
CTL (+)
CTL (−)
CTLREF
CTLBias
CTLFB
CTLAmp (O)
CTLSMT (i)
+
-
-
+
+ -
CTLGR3 to 1 CTLFB CTLGR0
AMPSHORT
(REC-CTL)
AMPON
(PB-CTL)
PB-CTL (+)
PB-CTL (Ð)
CTLSMT (i)
CTLREF
CTL (+)CTL (-) CTLBias CTLFB CTLAmp(o)
*
Note: * Connect a capacitor between CTLAmp (o), CTLSMT (i)
⎯ ⎯ ⎯
Appendix C Pin Circuit Diagrams
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1159 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Pin States
Pin Names
Circuit Diagram
At Reset
Sleep
Mode
Power-Down
Modes Other
than Sleep
Mode
X2
X1
10MΩ
Typ
Note: The resistance value is a
reference value.
When the subclock is not
used, connect X1 to VCL
and leave X2 open.
Oscil-
lation
Oscil-
lation
Oscillation
OSC2
Low output
OSC1
LPM
Oscil-
lation
Oscil-
lation
⎯
CVin1
Sync tip
(1.4 V)
LPM
+
–
+
–
Hi-Z Hi-Z Hi-Z
CVout
+
–
LPM
Hi-Z Hi-Z Hi-Z
Appendix C Pin Circuit Diagrams
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1160 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Pin States
Pin Names
Circuit Diagram
At Reset
Sleep
Mode
Power-Down
Modes Other
than Sleep
Mode
4/2fsc in Oscilla-
tion
Oscilla-
tion
⎯
4/2fsc out
LPM
4/2fsc in
(External input)
4/2fsc in
External clock select
Low output
(Oscillation
stopped)
VLPF/Csync
Pin input should be fixed high or low
Csync/
Hsync
Hi-Z Hi-Z Hi-Z
CVin2
+
–
+
–
+
–
+
–
+
–
+
–
Polarity
switch
Signal
selection
Polarity
switch
I/O
switch
Sync tip
(2.0 V)
Signal
selection
Vsync
Hsync
VSEL
SYNCT
LPM
LPM
·
CCMPSL
CCMPSL
EDS
LPM
Hi-Z Hi-Z Hi-Z
Appendix C Pin Circuit Diagrams
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1161 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Pin States
Pin Names
Circuit Diagram
At Reset
Sleep
Mode
Power-Down
Modes Other
than Sleep
Mode
AFCOSC
Oscilla-
tion
Oscilla-
tion
Hi-Z
Oscillation
stopped
AFCPC
1/2 OVCC 1/2 OVCC ⎯
AFCLPF
1/2 OV
CC
LPM
UP
+
DOWN
LPM
LPM
–
Phase
gain
control
Retained Retained ⎯
Legend:
RD: Read signal
RST: Reset signal
LPM: Power-down mode signal (1 in standby, watch, subactive, and subsleep modes)
Hi-Z: High impedance
SLEEP: Sleep mode signal
Note: Numbers given for resistance values, etc., are reference values.
Appendix D Port States in Each Processing State
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1162 of 1174
REJ09B0329-200
Appendix D Port States in Each Processing State
D.1 Pin Circuit Diagrams
Table D.1 Port States Overview
Port Reset Active Sleep Standby Watch Subactive Subsleep
P07 to
P00
High
imped-
ance
High
imped-
ance
High
imped-
ance
High
imped-
ance
High
imped-
ance
High
impedance
High
impedance
P17 to
P10
High
imped-
ance
Functions Retained High
imped-
ance
High
imped-
ance
Functions Retained
P27 to
P20
High
imped-
ance
Functions Retained High
imped-
ance
High
imped-
ance
Functions Retained
P37 to
P30
High
imped-
ance
Functions Retained High
imped-
ance
High
imped-
ance
Functions Retained
P47 to
P40
High
imped-
ance
Functions Retained High
imped-
ance
High
imped-
ance
Functions Retained
P67 to
P60
High
imped-
ance
Functions Retained High
imped-
ance
High
imped-
ance
Functions Retained
P77 to
P70
High
imped-
ance
Functions Retained High
imped-
ance
High
imped-
ance
Functions Retained
P87 to
P80
High
imped-
ance
Functions Retained High
imped-
ance
High
imped-
ance
Functions Retained
Appendix E Usage Notes
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1163 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Appendix E Usage Notes
E.1 Power Supply Rise and Fall Order
Figure E.1 shows the order in which the power supply pins rise when the chip is powered on, and
the order in which they fall when the chip is powered down. If the power supply voltages cannot
rise and fall simultaneously, power supply operations should be carried out in this order.
• At power-on, wait until the microcomputer section power supply (VCC) has risen to the
prescribed voltage, then raise the other analog power supplies.
• At power-down, drop the analog power supplies first, followed by the microcomputer section
power supply (VCC).
When powering up and down, the voltage applied to the pins should not exceed the respective
power supply voltage.
V
CC
, AV
CC
Legend:
V
CC
AV
CC
SV
CC
OV
CC
Vin
: Microcomputer section power supply voltage
: A/D converter power supply voltage
: Servo section power supply voltage
: OSD section power supply
: Pin applied voltage
SV
CC
,OV
CC
V
CC
, AV
CC
SV
CC
, OV
CC
Vin Vin
Figure E.1 Power Supply Rise and Fall Order
In power-down modes (except sleep mode), the analog power supplies can be controlled at the VSS
level to reduce current dissipation. When the microcomputer section power supply (VCC) is
dropped to the backup voltage in a power-down mode, the order shown in figure E.2 should be
followed. Make sure that the voltage applied to the pins does not exceed the respective power
supply voltage.
The A/D converter power supply (AVCC) should be set to the same potential as the microcomputer
section power supply (VCC). In all power-down modes except sleep mode, AVCC is turned off
inside the device. At this time, the AVCC current dissipation is defined as AISTOP.
Appendix E Usage Notes
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1164 of 1174
REJ09B0329-200
Legend:
VCC
AVCC
SVCC
OVCC
Vin
5 V
2.7 V
: Microcomputer section power supply voltage
: A/D converter power supply voltage
: Servo section power supply voltage
: OSD section power supply
: Pin applied voltage
VCC, AVCC
SVCC, OVCC
Vin
Figure E.2 Power Supply Control in Power-Down Modes
When the OSD block power supply (OVCC) is raised or dropped, the following order must be
observed.
When dropping OVCC, set the OSD module stop bit, and sync separation module stop bit to 1 to
stop each module before dropping OVCC.
When raising OVCC, raise OVCC and wait until the fsc clock settles before clearing the OSD module
stop bit, and sync separation module stop bit to 0 to operate each module.
Appendix E Usage Notes
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1165 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Settling wait time
Sync separation module stop bit
and OSD module stop bit
5 V
fsc
OV
CC
Figure E.3 Module Stop Bit Setting Order when Raising and Dropping OVCC
END
OVcc = off
END
OVcc = on
Yes
No
When dropping OVcc When rising OVcc
fsc clock setting
OSD module stop bit = 1
Sync separation module stop bit = 1
OSD module stop bit = 0
Sync separation module stop bit = 0
Figure E.4 Timing Chart of Ovcc when Rising or Dropping
Appendix E Usage Notes
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1166 of 1174
REJ09B0329-200
E.2 Sample External Circuits
Examples of external circuits for the servo section, and sync signal detection circuit are shown in
figures E.5and E.6
1. Servo Section
An example of the external circuit for the DRMPWM output and CAPPWM output pins is
shown in figure E.5
R
1
DRMPWM
CAPPWN
C
1
Figure E.5 Sample External Circuit for Servo Section
2. Sync Signal Detection Circuit Section in Servo Circuit
Figure E.6shows an example of the external circuit for the sync signal detection circuit section
in the servo circuit.
33 kΩ
Csync
Note: Reference values are shown.
The board floating capacitance and wiring resistance must also
be taken into consideration in determining the values.
10 pF
Figure E.6 Example of External Circuit for Sync Signal Detection Circuit Section
Appendix E Usage Notes
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1167 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
3. OSD
An example of the external circuit for the OSD is shown in figure E.7
The circuit configuration and values for the filter section will vary according to the wiring
capacitance, impedance, etc.
When designing the board, an appropriate filter should be configured, taking account of the
wiring load. Noise prevention measures also need to be taken when designing the board.
Clamp
(=1.4 Vtyp)
Note: Reference values are shown.
The board floating capacitance and wiring resistance must also
be taken into consideration in determining the values.
C.Vin1
C.Vout
4.7 μF
470 μF
+68 Ω
75 Ω driver
1 kΩ
2.7 kΩ
470 kΩ
120 Ω
5 pF
Figure E.7 Example of External Circuit for OSD
4. Sync Separator and Data Slicer
Examples of the external circuits for the sync separator and data slicer are shown in figures E.8
to E.10.
The sync signal separation sources can be selected from the following three: (1) CVin2, (2)
Csync, and (3) separate Hsync and Vsync signals. The external circuit configuration will vary
depending on the separation source.
When the data slicer is used, CVin2 is recommended as the separation source. When Csync or
Hsync and Vsync are selected as the source, connect to CVin2 the same external circuit as
when CVin2 is selected as the separation source.
Appendix E Usage Notes
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1168 of 1174
REJ09B0329-200
4.7 μF
4.7 μF
8.2 μH/15 μH
1000 pF
0.01 μF
680 pF
680 pF
12 pF/15 pF
C.Vin2
VLPF/Vsync
Csync/Hsync
AFCOSC
AFCPC
AFCLPF
300 Ω
470 kΩ
10 kΩ
470 Ω
10 kΩ
Clamp 2
(=2.0 Vtyp)
Note: Reference values are shown.
The board floating capacitance and wiring resistance
must also be taken into consideration in determining the values.
Figure E.8 Example of External Circuit for Sync Separator and Data Slicer
((1) Separation from CVin2)
Appendix E Usage Notes
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1169 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
4.7 μF
0.01 μF
1000 pF
10 pF
C.Vin2
VLPF/Vsync
Csync/Hsync
AFCOSC
AFCPC
AFCLPF
10 kΩ
10 kΩ
33 kΩ
10 kΩ
Clamp 2
(=2.0 Vtyp)
8.2 μH/15 μH
12 pF/15 pF
470 Ω
OVCC
Figure E.9 Example of External Circuit for Sync Separator and Data Slicer
((2) Separation from Csync)
Appendix E Usage Notes
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1170 of 1174
REJ09B0329-200
4.7 μF
4.7 μF
1000 pF
C.Vin2
VLPF/Vsync
Csync/Hsync
AFCLPF
AFCOSC
10 kΩ
Clamp 2
(=2.0 Vtyp)
8.2 μH/15 μH
12 pF/15 pF
470 Ω
Note: Reference values are shown.
The board floating capacitance and wiring resistance
must also be taken into consideration in determining the values.
10 kΩ
OVCC
Figure E.10 Example of External Circuit for Sync Separator and Data Slicer
((3) Separation from Hsync and Vsync)
Appendix E Usage Notes
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1171 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
E.3 Handling of Pins When OSD Is Not Used
Table E.2 shows the handling of pins when the OSD, sync separator, or data slicer is not used.
When none of these modules is used, pin handling differs according to whether or not the ANB
pin is used.
Table E.2 Handling of Pins when OSD Is Not Used
Pin Handling
Conditions
When ANB
Pin Is Used
When ANB
Pin Is Not
Used
OSD Used Not used Not used Not used Not used
Data slicer Not used Used Not used Not used Not used
Module used
or not used
Sync
separator
Used Used Used Not used Not used
OSDVCC V
CC V
CC V
CC V
CC V
SS
OSDVSS V
SS V
SS V
SS V
SS V
SS
Csync/Hsync Csync/Hsync Csync/Hsync Csync/Hsync 10 kΩ to VSS V
SS
VLPF/Vsync VLPF/Vsync VLPF/Vsync VLPF/Vsync 10 kΩ to VSS V
SS
AFCOSC AFCOSC AFCOSC AFCOSC 10 kΩ to VSS V
SS
AFCPC AFCPC AFCPC AFCPC OPEN VSS
AFCLPF AFCLPF AFCLPF AFCLPF 10 kΩ to VSS V
SS
CVin1 CVin1 10 kΩ to VSS 10 kΩ to VSS 10 kΩ to VSS V
SS
CVout CVout OPEN OPEN OPEN VSS
4fsc in 4fsc in VSS V
SS V
SS V
SS
4fsc out 4fsc out OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN
Pins
CVin2 CVin2 or
10 kΩ to VSS
CVin2 or
10 kΩ to VSS
CVin2 or
10 kΩ to VSS
10 kΩ to VSS V
SS
Note ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ The registers
in the OSD,
sync
separator,
and data
slicer must
not be
accessed.
The registers
in the OSD,
sync
separator,
and data
slicer must
not be
accessed.
Appendix F Product Lineup
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1172 of 1174
REJ09B0329-200
Appendix F Product Lineup
Table F.1 Product Lineup of H8S/2199R Group
Product Type Part No. Mark Code
Package
(Package Code)
Mask ROM
version
HD6432199R HD6432199R (***)F 112-pin QFP
(PRQP0112JA-A)
H8S/2199R
F-ZTAT
version
HD64F2199R HD64F2199RF 112-pin QFP
(PRQP0112JA-A)
H8S/2198R Mask ROM
version
HD6432198R HD6432198R (***)F 112-pin QFP
(PRQP0112JA-A)
H8S/2197R Mask ROM
version
HD6432197R HD6432197R (***)F 112-pin QFP
(PRQP0112JA-A)
H8S/2197S Mask ROM
version
HD6432197S HD6432197S (***)F 112-pin QFP
(PRQP0112JA-A)
H8S/2196R Mask ROM
version
HD6432196R HD6432196R (***)F 112-pin QFP
(PRQP0112JA-A)
H8S/2199R
Group
H8S/2196S Mask ROM
version
HD6432196S HD6432196S (***)F 112-pin QFP
(PRQP0112JA-A)
Note: (***) is the ROM code.
Appendix G Package Dimensions
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1173 of 1174
REJ09B0329-0200
Appendix G Package Dimensions
The package dimention that is shown in the Renesas Semiconductor Package Data Book has
priority.
NOTE)
1. DIMENSIONS"*1"AND"*2"
DO NOT INCLUDE MOLD FLASH
2. DIMENSION"*3"DOES NOT
INCLUDE TRIM OFFSET.
1.23
1.23
0.10
0.13
0.65
8˚0˚
23.5
23.222.9
3.05
0.12 0.17 0.22
0.24 0.32 0.40
0.00
0.30
0.15
0.10 0.25
L
1
Z
E
Z
D
y
x
c
b
1
b
p
A
H
D
A
2
E
D
A
A
c
1
e
e
L
H
E
20
1.6
22.9 23.2 23.5
2.70
20
Reference
Symbol
Dimension in Millimeters
Min Nom Max
0.5 0.8 1.1
*1
*2
*3p
E
D
E
D
56
5784
85
29
281
112
F
yMx
Z
Z
b
H
E
H
D
21
1
Detail F
c
L
A A
A
L
Terminal cross section
p
1
1
b
c
b
c
θ
θ
P-QFP112-20x20-0.65 2.4g
MASS[Typ.]
FP-112/FP-112VPRQP0112JA-A
RENESAS CodeJEITA Package Code Previous Code
Figure G.1 Package Dimensions (PRQP0112JA-A)
Appendix G Package Dimensions
Rev.2.00 Jan. 15, 2007 page 1174 of 1174
REJ09B0329-200
Renesas 16-Bit Single-Chip Microcomputer
Hardware Manual
H8S/2199R Group, H8S/2199R F-ZTAT™
Publication Date: 1st Edition, February 2001
Rev.2.00, January 15, 2007
Published by: Sales Strategic Planning Div.
Renesas Technology Corp.
Edited by: Custom er Support Depar tm ent
Global Strategic Communication Div.
Renesas Solutions Corp.
©2007. Renesas Technology Corp., All rights reserved. Printed in Japan.
Sales Strategic Planning Div. Nippon Bldg., 2-6-2, Ohte-machi, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo 100-0004, Japan
http://www.renesas.com
Refer to "http://www.renesas.com/en/network" for the latest and detailed information.
Renesas Technology America, Inc.
450 Holger Way, San Jose, CA 95134-1368, U.S.A
Tel: <1> (408) 382-7500, Fax: <1> (408) 382-7501
Renesas Technology Europe Limited
Dukes Meadow, Millboard Road, Bourne End, Buckinghamshire, SL8 5FH, U.K.
Tel: <44> (1628) 585-100, Fax: <44> (1628) 585-900
Renesas Technology (Shanghai) Co., Ltd.
Unit 204, 205, AZIACenter, No.1233 Lujiazui Ring Rd, Pudong District, Shanghai, China 200120
Tel: <86> (21) 5877-1818, Fax: <86> (21) 6887-7898
Renesas Technology Hong Kong Ltd.
7th Floor, North Tower, World Finance Centre, Harbour City, 1 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong
Tel: <852> 2265-6688, Fax: <852> 2730-6071
Renesas Technology Taiwan Co., Ltd.
10th Floor, No.99, Fushing North Road, Taipei, Taiwan
Tel: <886> (2) 2715-2888, Fax: <886> (2) 2713-2999
Renesas Technology Singapore Pte. Ltd.
1 Harbour Front Avenue, #06-10, Keppel Bay Tower, Singapore 098632
Tel: <65> 6213-0200, Fax: <65> 6278-8001
Renesas Technology Korea Co., Ltd.
Kukje Center Bldg. 18th Fl., 191, 2-ka, Hangang-ro, Yongsan-ku, Seoul 140-702, Korea
Tel: <82> (2) 796-3115, Fax: <82> (2) 796-2145
Renesas Technology Malaysia Sdn. Bhd
Unit 906, Block B, Menara Amcorp, Amcorp Trade Centre, No.18, Jalan Persiaran Barat, 46050 Petaling Jaya, Selangor Darul Ehsan, Malaysia
Tel: <603> 7955-9390, Fax: <603> 7955-9510
RENESAS SALES OFFICES
Colophon 6.0
1753, Shimonumabe, Nakahara-ku, Kawasaki-shi, Kanagawa 211-8668 Japan
H8S/2199R Group, H8S/2199R F-ZTAT™
REJ09B0329-0200
Hardware Manual